2016 Industrial Controls Catalog Nov 2015 PDF

Index
Product Overview
Alphabetical Product and Catalog Number Index
IEC

Power Control MSPs – 3RV10 Motor Starter Protectors
3RV17, 3RV27, 3RV28 Circuit Breakers
3RA19/29 & 3RV19/29 Accessories
Contactors – 3RT, 3TF, 3TC Contactors
3RA13/23 Reversing Contactors
3RH Control Relays; 3RA19/29 & 3RT19/29 Accessories
Overload Relays – 3RU Thermal Overload Relays
3RB Solid State Overload Relays
3UF SIMOCODE pro Intelligent Motor Protection
Combination Starters – 3RA11/21 Combination Starters
3RA12/22 Reversing Combination Starters
3RA6 Compact Combination Starters
Power Distribution Systems –
8US Fast Bus Busbar Power Distribution System
Solid

State Control Hybrid Motor Starters –
3RM1 Motor Starters
Soft Starters – 3WR30, 3RW40 Soft Starters

3RW44 High Feature Soft Starters
Class 73 & 74 Enclosed Soft Starters
Solid-State Relays & Contactors –
3RF20 45mm Relays; 3RF21 22.5mm Relays; 3RF22 3-Phase Relays;
3RF23 Contactors; 3RF24 3-Phase Contactors; 3RF29 Modules
General

Purpose Control Manual Starters & Switches; NEMA Contactors, Starters, Combination
Starters; Overload Relays; Duplex Controllers; Pump Control Panels;
Reduced Voltage Starters; Lighting contactors; Transformers
Control

Circuit Components Pilot devices – 3SB2, 3SU1, 50, 51, 52 Pushbuttons, Selector Switches,
Pilot Lights & Stations; 8WD Signal Columns

Function relays – 3RN Thermistor Motor Protection; 3RP & 7PV Timers;
3RS Temperature Monitoring Relays & Interface Converters; 3UG
Monitoring Relays; 3TG Power Relays; 3TX71 Plug-In Relays
Terminal blocks –
8WA / 8WH Terminal Blocks
8WA Special Label Marking Instructions
Limit Switches – 3SE5 (IEC) & 3SE03 (NEMA)
Mechanical Safety – 3SE5 Hinge & Interlock, 3SE6 Magnet, and 3SE7
Cable-operated Switches; 3SK1 & 3TK28 Safety Relays; 3RK3 MSS
AS-Interface – 6GK7 Masters; 3RK Slaves, I/O Modules, & Safety
Modules; 3SF2 Cable Pull, 3SF1 Limit & Interlock Switches
IO-Link – 6ES7 Masters; 3RK Input Modules
Programmable Relays - LOGO! 6ED Modular Relays
Power Supplies – SITOP 6EP Power Supplies
Ethernet Switches – 6GK Unmanaged Ethernet Switches
Control

Circuit Protection 5SJ4 Miniature Circuit Breakers to UL 489
5SP & 5SY Supplementary Protectors to UL 1077
3NW7 & 3NC1038 Fuse Holders to UL 512
Circuit

Breakers 120/240 V Lug In/Lug Out and DIN Rail Breakers
15 to 3200A Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Switches

Safety Switches – VBII
Enclosed Switches – VBII & 3LD2
Disconnect Switches – LBR, 3LD2, CFS, MCS & VBII
Appendix

- General Information UL and CSA File & Guide Numbers; On-line References;
General Information; Spring-Loaded Terminal Overview;
ICE Quick Reference List
New

to the Catalog Pages
3RV21 SIRIUS Innovations MPS’s
3RV27 & 28 Circuit Breakers
1/4
1/6 IEC Control
3RV29 Infeed System with Enhanced Plug & Play 1/14 to 1/17
3
RT2 SIRIUS Innovations Contactors & Accessories 2/8, 2/11, 2/13
3RA27 Function Modules for Communication 2/24 to 2/36
3RH2 SIRIUS Innovations Control Relays 2/50 to 2/52
3RU2 SIRIUS Innovations Thermal Overloads 3/8 to 3/17
3RB3 SIRIUS Innovations Solid-State Overload Relays 3/18 to 3/31
3UF7 SIMOCODE pro with Safety and PROFINET 3/63 to 3/82
3RA6 Compact Starters with IO-Link 4/2 to 4/11
3RA21 SIRIUS Innovations Non-Reversing Starters 4/36 to 4/38
3RA22 SIRIUS Innovations Reversing Starters 4/40 to 4/42
FBCB Breaker Assemblies for NGG, HGG and LGG 5/7
8US12 Fast Bus Shoes for SIRIUS Innovations Starters 5/8
3RM1 SIRIUS Hybrid Motor Starters from 0.5 to 3 HP

3RM1 Hybrid Starters with Safety-Related Shutdown
6/2 to 6/4
6/3 to 6/4
Solid State Control
3ZY1 Device Connectors for Reduced Control Wiring 6/6 to 6/8
3RW44 Soft Starters with PROFINET Communication 7/25

3RF34 3-Phase Solid-State Non-Reversing Contactors 8/16
3RF34 3-Phase Solid-State Reversing Contactors 8/17

Class LE Open & Enclosed Lighting Contactors
Class LC Field Convertible Lighting Contactors
9/83 to 9/88
9/89 to 9/83
General Purpose Control

3SU1 SIRIUS ACT 22mm Pilot Devices
3SE2, 3SE3 Foot Switches
10/22 to 10/143
10/143 to 10/144
Control Circuit Components
New layout for faster selection of 30mm Pilot Devices 10/179 to 10/209
7PV15 Solid-State Timers with Wide Voltage Range 11/27
3UG45 Insulation Monitoring Relays 11/45 to 11/54
3RS17 Interface Converters with 3-Phase Isolation 11/77
New Terminal Block Supplemental Catalog 12/1 to 12/2
8WH6 iPo Plug-in & Installation Terminals 12/1
8WH1 Screw Terminals 12/2
3SE5 Compact Design Metal Limit Switches 13/45 to 13/46

3SE6 RFID Non-Contact Safety Switches 13/107 to 13/110
3SK1 Modular Safety Relays 13/117 to 13/128
AS-interface Function Modules for SIRIUS 3RA Starters 14/1
IO-Link Function Modules for SIRIUS 3RA Starters 14/3
SIRIUS Monitoring Relays with IO-Link Communication 14/3
LOGO! Logic Module 24C 15/3

LOGO!Soft Comfort V7.0 Programming Software 15/4
SITOP Compact, Lite & Direct Mount Power Supplies 15/13 to 15/15
5SY6 Supplementary Protectors 16/15 to 16/16 Control Circuit Protection
HQJ2 65KAIC at 240V and 100KAIC at 208/120V Breakers

125A HGG (35KAIC) and LGG (65KAIC) Circuit Breakers
17/11
17/13
Circuit Breakers
Type 3R Window Switches

1000VDC, 200Amp Photovoltaic Switches
18/6
18/10
Switches
400Amp Compact Fusible Switch (CFS) 18/28
Updated UL and CSA File & Guide Numbers by Product
References for On-line Tools & Information
19/2 to 19/3
19/3
Appendix - General Information
Standard Terms & Conditions of Sale 19/18
Index
Contents Pages
Section Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0/2 – 0/7
Alphabetical Product Index by Subject . . . . . . . . . 0/8 – 0/11
Catalog Number Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0/12 – 0/15
Things you should know about the 2014 Industrial Catalog

This Catalog contains all selection and More information can be found on the on-line version of this catalog
order-relevant data. at www.usa.siemens.com/iccatalog
Delivery time (DT) Preferred types are available from stock The delivery times specified here represent the state as of 1/2014.
For up-to-the-minute information, please visit our Industry Mall website
} Preferred type Normal quantities of the products are usually
delivered within the specified time following receipt at www.usa.siemens.com/industrymall
A 9 to 10 working days
of an order. Note: Delivery Time (DT) does not appear on all selection pages due
B 11 to 13 working days to space constraints or coil voltage variations.
In exceptional cases, the actual delivery time may
C 14 to 23 working days differ from that specified.
D 24 to 38 working days
X On request
Price units (PU) The price unit defines the number of units, sets or
lengths to which the price and weight apply.
Packaging sizes (PS) The packaging size defines the number of

units, sets or length, for outer packaging.
Only the quantity defined by the packaging size or
a multiple thereof can be ordered.
Symbols
On many selection pages in this catalog, Connections Combicon connection
you will find these symbols to aid in the quick
identification of critical product features. Insulation piercing method
Fast Connect
Spring-type terminals
Flat connectors
Solder pin connections
Ring terminal lug connections
Screw terminals
Types of coordination Type of coordination "1" ToC

1
Type of coordination "2" ToC

2
Distinguishing between units Complete units
Modular system
Support function Configurator available in the Industry Mall
Siemens Industry, Inc. 0/1

Industrial Controls Catalog
Section 1 IEC Motor Starter Protectors
SIRIUS 3RV Motor Starter Protectors (MSPs) are built for a wide range of applications and
meet the requirements of control users worldwide. Each MSP features a manual ON/OFF
switch, a Class 10 adjustable bimetallic overload relay (Class 20 available in the two largest
frame sizes), and magnetic trip elements for short circuit protection.
3RV10 / 20 MSPs can be used in a variety of applications:

* Manual Motor Starter
* Manual Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller, Type E
* Combination Motor Controller Type F when combined with a 3RT contactor
* IEC Circuit Breaker for export applications
RV17 / 27 are UL listed as a Circuit Breaker for branch circuit protection of both
3
motor and non-motor loads
3RV28 is UL listed as a Circuit Breaker for transformer protection
3RV29 is an infeed system for quick installation of MSP and contactor assemblies
Section 2 IEC Contactors

High contact reliability, a narrow design, long life time, and the ability to operate under
extreme conditions (up to 60° C), ensure that SIRIUS 3RT Contactors are suited for
almost any application. A large array of easily installed, standard accessories may be
used to customize the contactors for different applications.
3RT*0 – 3 Pole Standard

3RT12 – 3 Pole Vacuum
3RT*3 – 4 Pole with 4 normally open poles for switching Resistive loads (AC-1)
3RT*4 – 3 Pole for switching Resistive loads (AC-1)
3RT*5 – 4 Pole with 2 normally open & 2 normally closed poles
3RT*6 – 3 Pole for switching capacitors
3RA*9 – Contactor Accessories
3RA*3 – Reversing contactor assemblies
3TB5 – 3 Pole with true DC coils
3TC – 2 Pole for switching DC loads
3TF6 – 3 Pole Vacuum, 630 & 700A
Section 3 IEC Overload Relays

omplete motor protection can be achieved through the SIRIUS family of
C
overload relays (OLR’s).
RU11 / 21 – Thermal OLR’s, up to 100 A, are ambient compensated bimetallic

3
in Trip Class 10
3RB20 / 30 – Solid State OLR’s, up to 630 A, with an internal power supply and
4:1 FLA adjustment range in Trip Class 10 or 20
3RB21 / 31 – Features of the 3RB20 / 30 plus adjustable Trip Class 5 to 30,
ground fault detection, and remote reset
3RB22 / 23 – Features of the 3RB21 / 31 plus status LED’s and external power
supply
3RB24 – Features of the 3RB23 plus communication via IO-Link
3UF7 – SIMOCODE pro intelligent motor protection is more than just a programmable
overload relay. By linking the motor and automated control circuits, SIMOCODE
allows for predictive and conditional maintenance on critical systems.
0/2 Siemens Industry, Inc.

IEC Combination Starters Section 4
The SIRIUS 3RA1/2 Combination Starters consist of a pre-wired and
mechanically connected 3RV MSP and 3RT contactor, allowing for quick
installation of a complete branch circuit. The Non-Reversing or Reversing
assemblies come on a Fast Bus mounting shoe or as a Panel Mount version.
The SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starters provide the functionality of an MSP,

Contactor and Electronic Overload Relay in one easy to install housing,
saving wiring and installation time. Available in both non-reversing and
reversing starters that can be mounted on a Fast Bus shoe. The SIRIUS
3RA6 Infeed system further saves line side wiring in multiple motor panels.
3RA11 / 21 – Non-Reversing Combination Starters

3RA12 / 22 – Reversing Combination Starters
3RA6 – Compact Non-Reversing & Reversing Combination Starters
Fast Bus Power Distribution System Section 5

The UL508A Fast Bus Multi-Motor Control System is a 3 phase insulated busbar
system used to reduce wire connections and hole drilling when building control
panels. Quickly mount Sirius 3RA combination starters and/or Siemens circuit
breaker assemblies.
The Siemens Fast Bus system uses standard off-the-shelf components, with
both domestic and international approvals, to allow for economical installation,
compact panel designs, touch safe equipment, that allow for easy expansion and
maintenance.
FB – Installation kits for quick ordering & installation

FBCB – Circuit breakers pre-assembled on Fast Bus adapter shoes
3RA – Combination starters for Fast Bus mounting (see section 4)
8US – Fast Bus components for Field assembly
Hybrid Motor Starters Section 6

SIRIUS 3RM1 motor starters are compact devices with a width of 22.5 mm, combin-
ing a large number of functions in a single unit. They consist of combinations of relay
contacts, power semiconductors (hybrid technology), and a solid state overload relay for
operational switching of three phase motors up to 3 HP @ 480 V.
Hybrid technology provides reduced size, lower heat losses and longer service life in
motor starter applications. Even the reversing units are only 22.5mm wide.
3RM10 – Non-reversing starters

3RM11 – Non-reversing starters with safety related shutdown
3RM20 – Reversing starters
3RM21 – Reversing starters with safety related shutdown

Section 7 Solid State Soft Starters
SIRIUS Solid State Soft Starters are designed to ramp up your efficiency at every turn.
Easy to specify, integrate, operate, and maintain, our controls fulfill your need for more
thoughtful system-wide solutions. With innovations, such as 2 phase control up to
300HP@ 480V to a high end Profibus DP capable soft starter, Siemens is your trusted
source for soft start control.
3RW30 – Soft Starters in compact frame sizes up to 75HP for standard applications
3RW40 – A compact Soft Starter from 7.5 to 300HP, with built-in bypass contacts,
overload protection and device self protection
3RW44 – A high feature Soft Starter offering, from 15HP to 900HP, with built-in
bypass contacts, overload protection, torque control functionality, multiple
parameter settings, braking and slow speed capability, programmable inputs
and outputs, and kick start and multiple starting and stopping modes
Class 73 – Non-Combination Enclosed Soft Starters
Class 74 – Combination Enclosed Soft Starters with circuit breaker or fusible disconnect
Section 8 Solid State Switching Devices

Designed for high operating switching frequency the Sirius Solid State Relays and
Contactors feature a long lifespan of rugged reliability in adverse conditions, quiet
operation, compact size, and snap on function modules for convenient flexible use.
3RF20 – 1-Phase Relays in a 45mm wide “hockey-puck” design

3RF21 – 1-Phase Relays in a 22.5mm narrow width design
3RF22 – 3-Phase Relays in a 45mm wide design
3RF23 – 1-Phase Contactors, a 22.5mm wide relay mounted to a heat sink
3RF24 – 3-Phase Contactors, a 45mm wide relay mounted to a heat sink
3RF29 – Function Modules, such as, converters, load monitors and power controllers
3RF34 – 3-Phase non-reversing and reversing Contactors for switching
Section 9 General Purpose Control

Siemens NEMA controls are built rugged to withstand the most severe and demanding
industrial and continuous duty commercial applications. Siemens offers the most
complete and diverse product line in the world of NEMA. This includes standard full
NEMA sizes and motor matched half sizes exclusive to Siemens. All are available as
open or enclosed devices with a wide selection of accessories and spare parts.
Manual Starters & Switches

Non-Reversing & Reversing Starters & Contactors
Multi-Speed Starters
Reduced Voltage Starters – Autotransformer and Wye-Delta
Combination Starters
Pump Controllers
Overload Relays – Solid State & Bimetallic with Replaceable Heaters
Current Sensitive Relays
Lighting & Heating Contactors
Control Power Transformers

Pilot Devices Section 10
Siemens offers an extensive array of Pilot Devices and Signal Columns for a wide variety of
applications.
3SB2 – 16mm SIRIUS Pilot Devices for applications where panel space is a premium
3SU1 – 22mm SIRIUS ACT Pilot Devices offer maximum flexibility, industry best time install
savings and environmental ratings in round-metal and round-plastic versions
Class 50 – Standard Duty Control Stations
Class 52 – 30mm is the classic pushbutton design for the NEMA markets offering both standard
die cast metal and the ultra rugged BLACK MAX for corrosion resistant applications
Class 51 – 30mm in NEMA 7 & 9 for hazardous locations
8WD – Signal Columns offer twist and connect technology in both 50mm and 70mm diameter
styles. Single element signal beacons add additional options for OEMs and panel builders
Function Relays Section 11

The SIRIUS family of compact, DIN rail mountable function relays offers complete solutions for
monitoring, switching, interfacing and timing applications.
3RN – Thermistor Motor Protection

3RP – Solid State Timing with single or multiple timing functions
3RS10 / 20 – Temperature Monitoring in solid, liquid and gaseous media
3RS17 – Interface Converters
3RS18 – Relay Interfaces
3TG10 – Compact Power Relays/Contactors
3TX70 – Interface Relays & Semiconductor Interfaces
3TX71 – Plug-in Relays & Timers
3UG4 – Line Monitoring of voltage and insulation or load monitoring of Current & Cos Phi,
Level Monitoring of conductive liquids, and under speed monitoring
Terminal Blocks Section 12

For the wiring of machines and control systems, Siemens Terminal Blocks meet or exceed
the requirements of CSA, IEC, NEMA, UL, VDE and other international standards. Meeting
these requirements, combined with worldwide acceptability and availability, enables Siemens
Terminal Blocks to be used domestically, as well as, in equipment which will be exported.
8WA1 / 8WH1 – Terminals with Screw Connection

8WH2 – Terminals with Spring-Loaded Connection
8WH3 – Terminals with Insulation Displacement Connection
8WH5 – Terminals with Combination Plug-in Connection
8WH6 – Terminals with iPo Plug-in and Installation Connections
Section 12 contains the ‘Table of Contents’ of the Terminal Block Supplemental Catalog,
Order No. PDCA-TERMB-1013; Labeling Plates for Ink Plotter System; and, Special Label
Instructions for 8WA terminal block labeling plate inscriptions.

Section 13 Safety Systems
Siemens Switches and Machine Safety devices provide the means for protecting work-
ers and equipment where hazardous conditions exist. Compliance with NEMA, OSHA and
international standards (IEC) are a critical requirement for machine OEMs and end users.
Siemens has provided safety relay and contactor products to the international community
for almost 50 years.
3SB38 – Two-Hand Control Stations

3RK3 – Modular Safety System (MSS)
3SE03 – North American (NEMA) Limit Switches
3SE5 – International (IEC) Limit Switches
3SE5 / 3SE2 – Interlock Switches & Hinge Switches
3SE6 – RFID Non-Contact Safety Switches & Magnetic Monitoring Systems
3SE7 – Cable-Operated Switches
3SK1 – Modular Safety Relays
3TK28 – Safety Relays with special functions.
Section 14 AS-Interface & IO-Link Systems

Actuator-Sensor Interface is the simple and effective networking system for the field
level. It is extremely rugged even under the toughest of conditions. With compatible safety
components, AS-Interface offers safety applications according to Safety Category 4.
AS-Interface is easily linked to higher-level networks for a complete
automation solution — simple, safe and fast in the field.
IO-Link is an open communication standard based on point-to-point connection between

a Master and up to 4 devices. For an OEM wiring multiple motor starters, IO-Link
technology can greatly reduce control cabinet wiring for motor starters while increasing
diagnostics. For End Users, IO-Link provides a cost effective way in to monitor common
analog values such as motor current, power consumption, temperature and voltage
without adding an additional network.
Section 15 Programmable Relays & Power Supplies

The LOGO! Programmable Relay is a compact, easy to use and low cost solution for
simple control tasks. Functions can be changed at the touch of a button through the
integrated operator panel or remote display.
SITOP offers a broad offering of compact single- and 3-phase switched mode power
supplies and 24VDC power security components, which provide reliable solutions for the
most common power interruptions, helping to minimize downtimes and increase
the efficiency of production.
SCALENCE Managed and Unmanaged Industrial Ethernet Switches with up to eight

RJ45 ports.
6ED1 – LOGO! Programmable Relays

6EP1 – SITOP Power Supplies and Power Security Components
6EK5 – SCALENCE Industrial Ethernet Switches

Control Circuit Protection Section 16
Siemens UL 489 miniature circuit breakers and accessories are designed to provide branch
circuit and feeder protection.
Siemens UL 1077 Supplementary Protectors are designed to provide additional protection

where branch circuit protection is already provided or, not required at all. Since Siemens
Supplementary protectors are made to trip faster than other components, they are able to
provide additional protection for more sensitive devices inside a panel.
5SJ4 – Miniature Circuit Breakers up to 480Y / 277 VAC, 63A

5SY – High feature Supplementary Protectors from 0.3 to 63A
5SP – High amperage Supplementary Protectors from 80 to 125A
3NW7 – Cylindrical Fuse Holders meeting UL 512 and IEC 60269-1, -2, -3
3NC1 – Open type Cylindrical Fuse Holders meeting UL 512
Circuit Breakers Section 17

Siemens offers a full line of interchangeable and non-interchangeable thermal-magnetic trip
circuit breakers with a wide variety of interrupting ratings from 10KAIC to 200KAIC. These
circuit breakers are available with multi-functional internal accessories, which are field
installable on most breakers, and a full line of external accessories. Electronic trip
circuit breakers are available for 150A through 1600A breakers.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

BQ and QJ – 240VAC Breakers
CQD – 480VAC Breakers
GG, Sentron, and VL – 600VAC Breakers
Insulated Case and Power Circuit Breakers

WL frame – 600VAC
Switches Section 18
Siemens offers a complete line of both enclosed and open style switches to meet a wide
range of applications.
HF & HNF – Heavy Duty Safety Switches with Side Mounted Operating Handle
3LD2 – Rotary Switches in Non-metallic Enclosures
VBF & VBNF – Open Switches with Flange Mounted Operating Handle
MCS – Open Switches with Flange or Rotary Operating Handle
CFS – Open Compact Fusible Switches with Rotary Operating Handle

Index
Alphabetical Product Index
By subject
A Combinations, safety . . . . . see Safety combinations hazardous location - Ø 30 mm. . . . . . . . . 10/139

AC/DC Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . 15/11 to 15/25 Combination starters heavy duty - Ø 30 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/129
Acoustic elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/47 compact starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/2 to 4/8 oil tight - Ø 30 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . 10/173, 10/174
Actuator Sensor Interface . . . . . . . see AS-interface lighting and heating contactors. . . . . . . . . . . 9/84 standard duty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/123 to 10/131
Actuators. . . . . . . . . . see operators for Pushbuttons multi speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/35 to 9/42 Control transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/93 to 9/97
Adapter shoes for Fastbus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/8 NEMA non-reversing. . . . . . . . . . . . 9/17 to 9/25 Controls Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/89, 9/2
Addressing units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/2 NEMA reversing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/28, 9/29 Converters, interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/76 to 11/80
Ampere ratings for AC motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/8 reduced voltage, solid state Counter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/2, 19/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/32 to 7/35, 7/38 to 7/41 Coupling contactors (interfaces) for switching
Arc chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/86, 2/89, 2/90 reduced voltage, electro-mechanical auxiliary circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/52
AS-Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1, 14/2, 14/4 to 14/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/44 to 9/59 motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/20, 2/21
cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/2 two speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/35 to 9/42 Coupling devices (interfaces)
communication modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 type E, self-protected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/2 to 4/8 for contactor mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/54, 2/73
I/O modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 type E, self-protected manual. . . . 1/4, 1/5, 1/20 relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/64
master modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 type F, with MSP/contactor . . . . . . 4/36 to 4/43 plug-in relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/85 to 11/90
modules w/ special functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 Communication-capable devices Coupling relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/52, 11/64
motor starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/2 motor protection and control devices CPT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/93 to 9/97
network links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/52 to 3/55, 3/63 to 3/76 CQD circuit breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/12
power supply units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/2 motor starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 CSA file and guide numbers. . . . . . . . . . . 19/2, 19/3
safety at work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/4 pushbuttons and indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . 14/1 Current sensitive relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/66, 9/67
SIRIUS pilot devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 safety devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 Cylindrical fuse holders. . . . . . . . . . . 16/26 to 16/30
system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1, 14/2 soft starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/17 to 7/19
ASISafe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1, 14/2, 14/4 to 14/6 Communication module (IO-Link) D
Audible signal device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/3, 14/7 to 14/10 DC contactors
Auto transformer reduced Compact Hybrid Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/2 to 6/8 general purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/55
voltage starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/44 to 9/47 Compact modules (AS-interface). . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/55
Auxiliary contact blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact Starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/2 to 4/8 DC power supplies. . . . . . . . see Power supply units
for miniature circuit breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16/7 Conditions of sale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/18 DG circuit breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/17 to 17/19
for control relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/51, 2/66, 2/68 Conduit adaptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/48 DIN rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1
for IEC contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurators, Industry Mall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/3 DIN rail power supplies. . . . . 15/11 to 15/14, 15/16
- 3RT, SIRIUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/65 to 2/68 Contact blocks for pushbuttons Diode terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1, 12/2
- 3TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/55 Ø 16 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/11, 10/12 Disconnect switches
- 3TF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/53, 2/90 Ø 22 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/65 to 10/68 compact non-fusible . . . . . . . . . . 18/16 to 18/19
for lighting & heating contactors . . . . . . . . . 9/103 Ø 30 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/167 enclosed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18/14, 18/15
for manual starters & switches. . . . . . . . . . . . 9/99 for enclosed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/92, 10,93 fusible, VBII. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18/20 to 18/24
for motor starter protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/7 Contact block holders for pushbuttons fusible, MCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18/25, 18/26
for NEMA contactors & starters. . . . . . . . . . 9/103 Ø 16 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/11, 10/12 fusible, rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18/27 to 18/30
for supplementary protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . 16/19 Ø 22 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/68 Door-mounted operating handles
Contactor combinations for circuit-breakers . . . . . . 17/44, 17/45, 17/110
B IEC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . for motor starter protectors, MSPs. . . . . . . . 1/13
Base mounted contact blocks. . . . . . . 10/92, 10,93 - for reversing duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/37 to 2/44
Bimetal overload relays. . . . . . . see Overload Relays - for wye-delta starting . . . . . . . . . . 2/45 to 2/48 E
BlackMax, pilot devices. . . . . . . . . 10/143 to 10/159 NEMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical formulas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/10
Blanking plugs for pilot devices. . . . . . 10/83, 10/167 - for reversing duty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/62 Electrical symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/12
Blocks, terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1, 12/2 Contactors Electromagnetic interference
Boot, protective cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/82,10/167 arc chutes for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/86, 2/89, 2/90 suppression module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/72
BQ circuit breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/9, 17/10 for capacitor switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/19 Electronic overload relays. . . . . see Overload Relays
Branch terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/2 contacts for replacement. . . . . . 2/53, 2/55, 2/86 Electronic starters, hybrid. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/2 to 6/8
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Circuit Breakers DC coil versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/8 to 2/26, EMERGENCY-STOP
Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/18, 10/80, 10/81, 10/168 2/40 to 2/44, 2/53 to 2/55 Ø 16 mm pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/7, 10/9
Busbar adapter for Fastbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/8 DC power switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/55, 2/56 Ø 22 mm pushbuttons . . . . 10/29, 10/39, 10/44,
Busbar adapter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/1 to 5/22 IEC 10/53, 10/60, 10/64, 10/88, 10/89, 10/98,
Busbar for motor starter protectors (MSP). . . . . . 1/8 - 3-pole. . . 2/8 to 2/10, 2/12, 2/15 to 2/23, 2/53 safety switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18/2 to 18/15
Busbar holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/6 - 4-pole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/11, 2/13 Enclosed contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . see Contactors
Busbar, UL489 for 5SJ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16/7 - for capacitor switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/19 Enclosed rotary switches . . . . . . . . . . . 18/14, 18/15
Busbar, UL508 for 5SY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16/21 - for resistive loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/11 to 2/13 Enclosed starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Starters &
Busbars, busbar systems . . . . . . . . . . . 5/1 to 5/22 - reversing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/37 to 2/44 Combination Starters
Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Pushbuttons - vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/10, 2/53 Enclosed softstarters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/30 to 7/41
lighting and heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/79 to 9/92 Enclosed switches, limit . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/74, 13/75
C NEMA Enclosures
Cable glands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/95, 13/48 - non-reversing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/60, 9/61 descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/4, 19/5
Cable-operated switches . . . . . . . . . 13/76 to 13/80 - reversing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/62 for IEC contactors & starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/81
Cables (AS-Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/2 - vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/60 for motor starter protectors (MSP). . . . . . . . . 1/13
Cage Clamp connections miniature contactors . . . . . . . . . 2/8, 2/20, 11/81 for NEMA contactors & starters. . 9/109 to 9/114
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Spring loaded connections Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/22, 2/23 for pushbuttons and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacitor switching contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/19 vacuum contactors . . . . . . . . . . 2/10, 2/53, 9/60 - Ø 22 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/90
Catalog numbering system, NEMA control . . . . 9/10 with Spring loaded terminals . . . . . 2/8, 2/9, 2/17, - Ø 22 mm with AS-interface. . . . . . 10/97, 10/98
Catalog numbering system, circuit breakers . . . 17/6 2/18, 2/20 to 2/23 - Ø 30 mm, heavy duty. 10/129, 10/174, 10/175
Circuit-breakers with tab connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/81 - Ø 30 mm, standard duty. . . . 10/124 to 10/128
miniature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16/4 to 16/6 Control circuit classifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/7 - Ø 30 mm, hazardous location. . . . . . . . . 10/139
molded case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/1 to 17/89 Control circuit protection. . . . . . . . . . . 16/1 to 16/30 ESP100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see ESP200
MSP style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/6 Control circuit schematics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/13 ESP200
Clock-pulse relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/27 Control circuit transformers. . . . . . . . . . 9/93 to 9/97 general information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/64, 9/65
Closed transition auto transformer Control power transformers . . . . . . . . . 9/93 to 9/97 overload relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/66, 9/67
starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/44 to 9/47 Control relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/50 to 2/52 starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/13 to 9/15
Closed transition wye-delta starters. . . 9/56 to 9/59 Control stations Ethernet components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15/26
Coil surge suppressors. . . . . see Surge suppressors Ø 22 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/87 to 10/107 Export applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/16
Combination lighting contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/84 with AS-interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/98

Index
By subject
F Interlock switches Manual starters and switches. . . 1/4, 1/5, 9/4 to 9/9
Factory modifications . . . . . . . . . . . see Modifications with separate actuator . . . . . . . . 13/81 to 13/92 Master modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1
Fastbus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/1 to 5/22 with solenoid locking. . . . . . . . . 13/93 to 13/100 Max Flex flange mount
Fault signal contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16/7, 16/19 International control equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/16 operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/46, 17/47, 17/111
FG circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/20 to 17/22 IO-Link Mechanical limit switches . . . . . . . . . . 13/4 to 13/75
Field modification kits . . . . . . . . . . . see Modifications components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/3 Mechanically held contactors . . . . 2/70, 9/90 to 9/92
Flat module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 overload relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/54 Mechanically latched relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/51
Foot switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/109 overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/7 to 14/12 Metric to US conversions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/9
Four-tier terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1 I/O modules for installation in Miniature circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . 16/3 to 16/6
Fractional HP starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/4, 9/5 the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 Miniature contactors . . . . . . . . . . . .2/8, 2/20, 11/81
Front plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/13 I/O modules for use in the field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 Modifications
Full voltage starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Starters & iPO installation terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1 field modifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combination Starters iPO plug-in terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1 - NEMA starters & contactors. . . 9/100 to 9/106
Fuse holders, cylindrical . . . . . . . . . . 16/26 to 16/30 Isolating blade terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1 - IEC contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/65 to 2/81
Fuse terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1 Isolating terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1 - lighting and heating contactors. 9/100 to 9/106
- manual starters & switches. . . . . . . . 9/98, 9/99
G J - NEMA overload relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/107
GG circuit breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/13 Joystick Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/56 to 10/58 - reduced voltage solid state starters. . . 9/100 to
Ground fault detection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 9/106
Grounding requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/10 L factory modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group installation starters. . . . . . . . . . 1/4, 1/5, 1/19, Labelling accessories for terminal blocks. . . . . . 12/2 - NEMA starters & contactors. . . 9/115 to 9/119
4/36 to 4/52 Labels for pushbuttons and indicator lights - lighting and heating contactors. 9/115 to 9/119
Ø 16 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/13 to 10/19 - reduced voltage solid state. . . . 9/115 to 9/119
H Ø 22 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/71 to 10/78 Modular Safety System (MSS) . . . 13/143 to 13/154
Hazardous location pilot devices . 10/132 to 10/142 Ø 30 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/130, 10/176 Modular terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Terminals
Heater elements, heater tables. . . . . . 9/10 to 9/126 Lamp holders for pushbuttons and indicator lights Modules
Heating and lighting contactors . . . . . . 9/79 to 9/92 Ø 16 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/11, 10/12 I/O modules for use
Heavy duty safety switches. . . . . . . . . 18/2 to 18/15 Ø 22 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/65 to 10/68 - in the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1
High-current terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/2 Lamps, LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/18, 10/80, 10/81, - in the field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1
Hinge switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/101 to 13/106 10/92, 10/168 for motor starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1
Hybrid starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/2 to 6/8 Latching relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/51 for pilot devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1
Hybrid terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1, 12/2 LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Lamps, LED specific integration solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1
LED module for contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/73 with special functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1
I Legend plates. . . . . . . . . see Labels for pushbuttons Molded case circuit breakers. . . . . . . 17/2 to 17/89
ICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/16 Lens for indicator lights Molded case switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/40, 17/97
IEC devices Ø 16 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/18 Monitoring relays
combination starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/36 to 4/43 Ø 22 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/79 for current monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/37
compact starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/2 to 4/8 Ø 30 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/165 for level monitoring (fluids) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/55
contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light poles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/110 to 10/118 for line monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/31
- non-reversing. . 2/8 to 2/18, 2/23, 2/53 to 2/56 Lighting and heating contactors. . . . . . 9/79 to 9/92 for underspeed monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/60
- reversing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/37 to 2/44 Limit switches, International (IEC) for phase monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/31
- vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/10, 2/53 accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/48 for power factor monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/37
control relays . . . . . . . . . 2/14, 2/15, 2/50 to 2/52 compact with molded cable . . . . . . 13/45, 13/46 for voltage monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/31
disconnect switches. . . . . . . . . . . 18/16 to 18/19 metal enclosure, 31, Motor ampere ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/8
motor starter protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4, 1/5 40 & 56 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/27 to 13/44 Motor management . . . . . . . . . . . . see SIMOCODE
overload relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . open-type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/47 Motor protection
- bimetal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/10 plastic enclosure, 31, communication capable. . . . . . . . . . 3/69 to 3/76
- solid-state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/22, 3/34, 3/54 40 & 50 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/10 to 13/26 intelligent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/69 to 3/76
IEC enclosure descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/5 Limit switches, North American (NEMA). . . . 13/62 to motor starter protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4, 1/5
IEC terminal markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/11 13/75 overload relays. . . . . . . . . . . . see Overload relays
IEC utilization categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/6 Link modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/10, 1/11, 4/48 SIMOCODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/69 to 3/76
Indicator lights Logic module LOGO! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15/2 to 15/6 Motor starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Starters
Ø 16 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/8 LOGO! Contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15/8 Motor starter (AS-Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/2
Ø 22 mm LOGO! Programmable relays. . . . . . . . 15/2 to 15/8 Motor starter protector (MSP). . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4, 1/5
- metal round. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/40 Mounting accessories
- plastic round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/54 M for circuit-breakers . . . . . 17/43, 17/48 to 17/57,
- plastic square. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/64 Machine safety, the need for. . . . . . . . . 13/6 to 13/9 17/106 to 17/109
Ø 30 mm Machine safety components for motor starter protectors, MSP. . . 1/9 to 1/12,
- corrosion resistant, BlackMax. . 10/152, 10/153 cable-operated switches . . . . . . . 13/76 to 13/80 1/14 to 1/17
- hazardous location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/134 interlock switches . . . . . . . . . . . 13/81 to 13/100 for terminal blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/2
- oil tight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/152, 10/153 hinge switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/101 to 13/106 MSP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4, 1/5
signal beacons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/119 limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/4 to 13/75 MSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/143 to 13/154
signal columns. . . . . . . . . . . 10/113 to to 10/118 RFID non-contact safety Mushroom pushbuttons
Industrial plug-in relays . . . . . . . . . . . 11/85 to 11/90 switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/107, 13/108 Ø 16 mm pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/7, 10/9
Industry Mall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/3 magnet switches. . . . . . . . . . . 13/111 to 13/115 Ø 22 mm pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . 10/29, 10/32,
Infeed System safety relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/117 to 13/154 10/39, 10/42, 10/44, 10/49, 10/53,
3RV29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/14 to 1/17 signal beacons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/119 10/60, 10/64, 10/88, 10/89, 10/98,
3RA6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/16 to 4/19 signal columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/110 to 10/118 Ø 30 mm pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/133,
Innovations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see SIRIUS switches with integrated AS-interface. . . . . . 14/1 10/144 to 10/151, 10/156,
Input coupling devices . . . . . . . . . . . 11/65 to 11/74 two-hand press controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/116 Multi function time-delay relay. . . . . . . . 11/21,11/27
Insta terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/2 Magnet switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/111 to 13/115 Multi-speed starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/30 to 9/42
Installation terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1 Magnetic contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . see Contactors
Interface converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/76 to 11/80 Magnetic monitoring systems. . . . 13/111 to 13/115 N
Interface coupling devices. . . . . . . . . 11/76 to 11/80 Magnetic reversing contactors. . . . . see Contactors N-conductor isolating terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1
Interface relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/14 to 2/17, Magnetic starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Starters & NEMA enclosure descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/4
2/50 to 2/52, 11/66, 11/75 Combination Starters NEMA terminal markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/11
Main circuit damping module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/72 NGG circuit breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/13
Managed switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15/26

Index
By subject
Nomenclature, NEMA control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/10 Potentiometer operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/47 Safety interlock switches. . . . . . . . . 13/81 to 13/100
Nomenclature, circuit breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/6 Power relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/81 Safety magnet switches. . . . . . . . 13/111 to 13/115
Non-contact RFID Power supply units, DC Safety monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1
safety switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/107 to 13/110 for AS-Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 Safety relays, mechanical. . . . . . . 13/117 to 13/142
Non-reversing starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Starters SITOP power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15/11 to 15/25 Safety relays, MSS . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/143 to 13/154
Nordic Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Soft starters Press control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/116 Safety switches
North American approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/2, 19/3 PROFIBUS communication-capable enclosed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18/2 to 18/15
North American limit switches. . . . . . 13/62 to 13/75 overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/69 RFID non-contact. . . . . . . . . . . 13/107 to 13/110
PROFINET communication-capable Scalence switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15/26
O overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/69 Screwdrivers for spring loaded
OFF-delay Programmable relays LOGO!. . . . . . . . 15/2 to 15/8 terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/12, 2/76, 3/11
for contactor mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . 2/69, 2/70 Pushbuttons and indicator lights Screwed glands, Pg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/95
for NEMA starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/119 Ø 16 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/4 to 10/19 Selector switches
timing relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/21,11/27 Ø 22 mm Ø 16 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/8 to 10/10
Oil tight pilot devices. . . . . . . . . . . 10/144 to 10/162 - AS-Interface adapter for E-Stop. . . . . . . . 10/97 Ø 22 mm
ON-delay - AS-Interface assembled enclosures. . . . . 10/98 - metal round. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/28
for contactor mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . 2/69, 2/70 - enclosed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/88 to 10/90 - plastic round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/43
for NEMA starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/119 - metal round. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/26 to 10/38 - plastic square. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/62
timing relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/21,11/27 - plastic round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/41 to 10/55 Ø 30 mm
On-line References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/3 - plastic square. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/59 to 10/64 - corrosion resistant. . . . . . . . . 10/157 to 10/162
Open transition wye-delta starters Ø 30 mm, - hazardous location. . . . . . . . . . 10/136, 10/137
IEC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/45 to 2/48 - corrosion resistant. . . . . . . . . 10/144 to 10/162 - oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/157 to 10/162
NEMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/52 to 9/55 - enclosed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/174 to 10/179 Self-protected combination starter. . . . . . . . 4/7, 4/8
Operator panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/56, 3/70 - hazardous location. . . . . . . . .10/132 to 10/142 Self-protected compact starter. . . . . . . . . 4/2 to 4/8
Operators for pushbuttons - heavy duty stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/129 Self-protected manual
Ø 16 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/9, 10/10 - oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/144 to 10/162 combination starter . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4, 1/5, 1/10
Ø 22 mm, metal round . . . . . . . . 10/31 to 10/39 - standard duty stations. . . . . . 10/124 to 10/128 Semiconductor contactors. . . . . . . . . . 8/11 to 8/17
Ø 22 mm, plastic round. . . . . . . . 10/48 to 10/55 Push to test indicating lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/135, Semiconductor function modules. . . . . 8/18 to 8/27
Ø 22 mm, plastic square. . . . . . . 10/61 to 10/64 10/154, 10/155 Semiconductor interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/65
Ø 30 mm, Class 51. . . . 10/133, 10/136, 10/137 Semiconductor relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/8 to 8/10
Ø 30 mm, Class 52. . . . . . . . . 10/145 to 10/150, Q Sentron - circuit breakers. . . . . . . . . 17/63 to 17/89
10/156 to 10/159 QJ circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/11 Shield terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1
Output coupling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/66 Shunt release / trip
Overload relays R for manual starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/99
IEC, bimetal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/10 Reduced voltage starters for motor starter protectors, MSP. . . . . . . . . . 1/7
IEC, solid state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/22, 3/34, 3/54 electro-mechanical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/43 to 9/59 for circuit breakers. . . . . . . . 17/14, 17/23, 17/30,
with IO-Link connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/54 solid state. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/2 to 7/31, 7/36, 7/37 17/39, 17/65, 17/68, 17/76, 17/79
NEMA, bimetal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/66 Relays for supplementary protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . 16/19
NEMA, solid state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/66, 9/67 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/14, 2/15, 2/50 to 2/52 Sielect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see configurators
oil field, solid state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/67 coupling devices. . . . . . . . . . . . 2/14, 2/15, 2/52, Signal beacons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/119
with Profibus connectivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/69 11/63 to 11/66 Signal columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/112 to 10/118
with PROFINET connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/69 current sensitive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/66, 9/67 Signalling switch for MSP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/7
SIMOCODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/63 to 3/76 overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Overload relays SIGNUM . . . . . . . . . see pilot devices - 16 & 22 mm
Overvoltage limiters. . . . . . . . see Surge suppressors plug-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11/85 to 11/90 SIKOSTART soft starters. . . . . . . . . see soft starters
Overvoltage protection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/81 SIMATIC Net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15/26
programmable (LOGO!). . . . . . . . . . 15/2 to 15/8 SIMOCODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/63 to 3/76
P solid state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Solid state relays SIRIUS
Part winding reduced voltage starter . . 9/48 to 9/51 timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/21, 11/27 combination starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/36 to 4/43
Parts, replacement Remaining lifetime (RLT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/9, 2/94 compact starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/2 to 4/8
DC Contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/55 Remote motorized operating mechanism contactors
IEC Contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/82 to 2/86 for circuit breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/112 - 3-pole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/8 to 2/10, 2/12,
lighting and heating contactors. . . . . . . . . . 9/130 Repeaters/extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/2 2/16 to 2/23, 2/53 to 2/56
NEMA Contactors & Starters. . . . . . 9/127, 9/128 Replacement parts - 4-pole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/11, 2/13
Pg cable gland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/95 DC contactors, general purpose. . . . . . . . . . 2/55 - capacitor switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/19
Pilot Control wiring schematics. . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/15 IEC contactors, 3RT. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/82 to 2/86 - vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/10, 2/53
Pilot devices IEC contactors, 3TB, 3TF . . . . . . . . 2/88 to 2/90 contactor assemblies
Ø 16 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/4 to 10/20 lighting & heating contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . 9/130 - reversing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/37 to 2/44
Ø 22 mm NEMA contactors & starters . . . . . . 9/127, 9/128 - wye-delta. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/45 to 2/48
- metal round. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/26 to 10/38 Reversing combination starters. . . . see Combination control relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/50 to 2/52
- plastic round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/41 to 10/55 Starters coupling relays . . . . . . . . . 2/52, 11/63 to 11/66
- plastic square. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/59 to 10/64 Reversing contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . see Contactors function relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . see SIRIUS Relays
- parts & accessories. . . . . . . . . . 10/65 to 10/86 Reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Starters interface relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/64, 11/75
Ø 30 mm RFID non-contact safety switches. 13/107 to 13/110 motor starter protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4, 1/5
- corrosion resistant, BlackMax. 10/143 to 10/163 Rope pull switches . . See Cable-operated Switches overload relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/2 to 3/50
- hazardous location. . . . . . . . .10/132 to 10/142 Rotary operators pilot devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/22 to 10/99
- oil tight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/143 to 10/163 for circuit-breakers. . . . . . . 17/44, 17/45, 17/110 Safety. . . . . . . . see Machine safety components
- parts & accessories. . . . . . . . 10/166 to 10/169 for motor starter protectors, MSPs. . . . . . . . 1/13 soft starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/1 to 7/41
Wiring schematics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/15 solid state contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . 8/11 to 8/17
Pilot device stations S solid state relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/8 to 8/10
Ø 22 mm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/87 to 10/106 Safety at work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/4 to 14/6 SIRIUS Innovations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see SIRIUS
with AS-interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/97, 10/98 cable-operated switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 SIRIUS Relays
hazardous locations - 30 mm. . . . . . . . . . 10/139 compact modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 coupling relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/63 to 11/66
heavy duty - class 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/129 Emergency stop pushbuttons. . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 interface converters . . . . . . . . . . . 11/76 to 11/80
oil tight - class 52. . . . . . . . . . . 10/174 to 10/176 foot switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/109 interface relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/64, 11/75
standard duty - class 50. . . . . 10/124 to 10/128 position switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 monitoring relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/30 to 11/62
signal columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/110 to 10/118 safety monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 plug-in relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/85 to 11/90
Pilot lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Indicator lights Safety components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Machine power relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/81
Plug-in relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/85 to 11/90 safety components semiconductor interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/65
Position switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . See Limit Switches Safety foot switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/109 solid-state relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/8 to 8/10

Index
By subject
solid-state time relays . . . . . . . . . 11/20 to 11/29 Thermistor motor protection relays. . 11/12 to 11/19
temperature monitoring relays . . . 11/4 to 11/11 Three-tier terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1
thermistor motor protection relays. 11/12 to 11/19 Through-type terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1, 12/2
timing relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/20 to 11/29 Time-delay relay
SIRIUS SC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/1 to 8/27 clock-pulse generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/27
SITOP power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . 15/11 to 15/25 for contactor mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . 2/69, 2/70
SlimLine modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/1 multifunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/21
Soft starters, solid-state . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/1 to 7/41 OFF-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/21
Solder pin adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/75 ON-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/21
Solid-state compatible auxiliary solid-state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/21
contact blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/7, 2/68, 9/99 star-delta changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/69, 11/21
solid-state contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/11 to 8/17 with Spring loaded terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . 11/21
Solid-state overload relays wye-delta changeover. . . . . . . . . . . . 2/69, 11/21
IEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/22 to 3/55 Transformer protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/93 to 9/97
NEMA, ESP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/66, 9/67 Transformers, control circuit. . . . . . . . . 9/93 to 9/97
Solid-state relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/8 to 8/10 Transformer terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/2
Solid-state soft starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/1 to 7/41 Twin pushbutton. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/54, 10/55
Solid-state starters, hybrid . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/2 to 6/8 Two-hand control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/116
Solid-state time relays. . . . . . . . . . . . 11/20 to 11/29 Two-speed starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/30 to 9/42
Spare parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Replacement parts Two-tier terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1, 12/2
Spring loaded connections Type E combination starter. . . . . . . . . . . 4/2 to 4/11
accessories Type E compact starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/2 to 4/11
- for contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/65 to 2/69 Type E manual combination starter . . 1/4, 1/5, 1/10
- for control relays . . . . . . . . . . . 2/51, 2/66, 2/68 Type F combination starter. . . . . . 1/10, 4/36 to 4/43
- for motor starter protectors (MSP) . . . . . . . . 1/7
control relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/50, 2/51 U
coupling relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/52 UL file and guide numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . 19/2, 19/3
description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/17 Underspeed monitoring relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/60
function relays Undervoltage release / trip
- temperature monitoring. . . . . . . . 11/4 to 11/11 for manual starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/99
- thermistor motor protection. . . . 11/12 to 11/19 for motor starter protectors, MSP. . . . . 1/7, 9/99
- time-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/20 to 11/26 for circuit breakers. . . . . . . . 17/14, 17/23, 17/30,
IEC contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/8, 2/9, 2/17, 17/39, 17/65, 17/68, 17/76, 17/79
2/18, 2/20 to 2/23 for supplementary protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . 16/20
interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/64, 11/66 Unmanaged switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15/26
interface converters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/77 UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15/23, 15/24
motor starter protectors (MSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4 Utilization Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/6
overload relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/10, 3/22, 3/23
safety relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/117 to 13/142 V
terminal blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1 Vacuum contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/10, 2/53, 9/60
Stack lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/113 to 10/118 VL Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/17 to 17/38
Standard duty pilot devices. . . . . .10/144 to 10/163 Voltage monitoring relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/31
Standard mounting rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1
Standard rail adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/50 W
Standard terms & conditions of sale. . . . . . . . . 19/18 Web links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/3
Standards & approvals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/2, 19/3 Wide input interface relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/75
Star-delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see wye-delta Wire ampacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/8
Starters Wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/14
combination. . . . . . . . . . see combination starters Withdrawable coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/85
compact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/2 to 4/8 Wye delta reduce voltage starters
for group installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/36 to 4/43 IEC assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/37 to 2/48
manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/4, 9/5, 9/8, 9/9 NEMA
multi speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/30 to 9/42 - closed transition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/56 to 9/59
non-reversing, NEMA. . . . . . . . . . . . 9/13 to 9/15 - open transition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/52 to 9/55
reduced voltage, NEMA. . . . . . . . . . 9/43 to 9/59 Wye delta time delay relay . . . . . . . . . . . 2/69, 11/21
reversing, NEMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/26, 9/27
solid-state, reduced voltage. . . . . . . . 7/1 to 7/41
two speed, NEMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/30 to 9/42
Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see Pushbutton Stations
Submersible limit switches. . . . . . . . 13/65 to 13/69
Summation current transformer . . . 3/35, 3/55, 3/69
Supplementary load module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/72
Supplementary protectors. . . . . . . . .16/11 to 16/21
Support rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1
Surge suppressors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/71, 2/72
Switch disconnects . . . . . see Disconnect switches
Switched mode power supplies. . . . 15/11 to 15/25
Switches, magnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13/111 to 13/115
Switches, manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/6, 9/7
Switches, RFID non-contact. . . . . 13/107 to 13/110
T
Temperature monitoring relays . . . . . 11/4 to 11/11
Terminal blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12/1, 12/2
Terminal markings, NEMA & IEC . . . . . . . . . . . 19/11
Terms and conditions of sale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19/18
Thermal overload relays . . . . . . . see overload relays
Thermal unit selection. . . . . . . . . . . . 9/120 to 9/126

Index
Catalog Number Index
By catalog number
Class/Type Page Class/Type Page Class/Type Page Class/Type Page
0 3RA19 0 4/50 3RF20 8/9 3RT12 2/10

0FD 11/89 3RF21 8/8 3RT13 2/11
0ND 11/89 3RA19 11 see 3RA29 11 3RF22 8/10 3RT14 2/12
3RA19 12 see 3RA29 12 3RF23 8/12, 8/13 3RT15 2/13
1 3RA19 13 see 3RA29 13 3RF24 8/14 3RT16 2/19
11 9/9
12 17/53 3RA19 21 1/10, 4/48, 7/6, 7/13 3RF29 8/13, 8/23 to 8/27 3RT19 0 2/74, 3/57, 4/13,
3RA19 22 see 3RA29 22 4/52, 8/7, 8/17, 13/135
14 9/13 to 9/15 3RA19 23 2/77, 4/50 3RF34 8/16, 8/17 3RT19 1 2/70, 2/74 to 2/76,
3RA19 24 2/77, 4/50 2/80, 4/45, 11/84
17 9/17 to 9/22 3RF39 8/17 3RT19 2 2/69 to 2/71, 2/73,
18 9/23 to 9/25 3RA19 31 1/10, 4/48, 4/50, 2/74, 2/80, 2/83, 4/45
7/6, 7/13 3RG78 14/2 3RT19 3 1/12, 2/71, 2/75, 2/76,
2 3RA19 32 2/79, 2/80 2/80, 2/83, 2/84, 2/86,
22 9/26, 9/27 3RA19 33 2/78 to 2/80, 4/49, 4/50 3RH11 see 3RH21 3/11, 3/50, 4/47, 7/6,
3RH12 see 3RH22 7/12, 9/130
24177 2/90 3RA19 41 1/10, 4/48, 4/50, 3RH14 see 3RH24 3RT19 4 1/10, 1/12, 2/73, 2/75,
25 9/28 7/6, 7/13 2/76, 2/80, 2/84, 2/86,
26 9/29 3RA19 42 2/79, 2/80 3RH19 11 4/45 3/11, 3/50, 4/46, 7/6,
3RA19 43 2/78 to 2/80, 7/12, 9/130
2CC 19/16 4/49, 4/50 3RH19 21 2/65 to 2/68, 4/45, 9/103
3RT19 5 2/71, 2/75, 2/76,
2CF7 19/16 3RA19 5 2/77 to 2/80,9/105 3RH19 24 2/73 2/80, 2/85, 2/86, 3/50,
3RA19 6 2/77, 2/78, 2/80, 9/105 3RH19 26 2/73 3/57, 3/74, 7/12, 7/25,
2CQ 19/16 3RA19 7 2/77, 2/78, 2/80, 9/105 7/26, 9/130
3RH21 2/15, 2/50, 2/52 3RT19 6 2/72, 2/75, 2/76,
2CT 19/16 3RA21 4/36, 4/38 3RH22 2/23 2/80, 2/85, 2/86, 3/50,
3RA22 4/40, 4/42 3RH24 2/51 3/57, 3/74, 7/12, 7/25,
2TA 17/80, 17/102, 17/103 3RA23 2/40, 2/42 7/26, 9/105, 9/107,
3RA24 2/47, 2/48, 14/2 3RH29 11 2/51, 2/65 to 2/68, 9/127, 9/128, 9/130
3 2/178 to 2/182, 3RT19 7 2/85, 2/86,9/107,
30 9/31 to 9/34 3RA27 2/30, 2/31, 2/34, 14/2 4/45, 9/103 9/127, 9/128, 9/130
3RA28 2/27, 2/69, 2/70 3RH29 21 2/67, 2/68,
32 9/35 to 9/42 2/181, 2/182, 4/45 3RT20 1 2/8, 2/17, 2/20,
3RA29 08 1/12, 2/76, 3/11, 3/57, 3RH29 24 2/73 2/21, 2/23, 2/26
36 9/44 to 9/59 4/13, 4/21, 4/52, 3RT20 2 2/8, 2/18, 2/21,
37 9/44 to 9/59 13/125, 13/135 3RK10 4/11 2/23, 2/26
3RK11 14/2
3KA 19/16 3RA29 10 2/27, 2/31 3RK12 14/2 3RT23 2/11
3KE 19/16 3RA29 11 1/10, 1/11, 2/27, 3RK13 14/2 3RT25 2/13
3KL 19/16 4/48, 4/52 3RK14 14/2
3KM 19/16 3RA29 12 2/27, 2/79 3RT29 0 3/57
3KX 19/16 3RA29 13 2/27, 2/30, 2/34, 3RK19 4/15, 14/2 3RT29 1 2/71 to 2/74, 2/76, 4/47
3KY 19/16 2/78 to 2/80, 4/49, 4/51 3RT29 2 2/70 to 2/75, 2/82, 4/47
3RA29 16 2/75, 4/49 3RK22 14/2
3LD2 18/14 to 18/17 3RK24 14/2 3RU11 3/10
3LD9 18/15, 18/17 3RA29 21 1/10, 1/11, 4/48, 8/17 3RK27 14/2
3RA29 22 2/79, 4/50 3RU19 3/11, 3/49, 7/12,
3NA 19/16 3RA29 23 2/27, 2/30, 2/34, 3RK3 13/147 to 13/149, 14/2 9/107, 10/47
2/78 to 2/80, 3RK4 14/2
3NC 16/30, 19/16 4/49 to 4/51 3RU21 3/10
3ND 19/16 3RA29 24 3RM1 6/4, 6/8 3RU29 3/11
3NE 19/16 3RA29 26 2/75, 4/49
3RN10 11/13
3NG1 19/16 3RA61 4/7, 14/2 3RV10 1/5
3NH 19/16 3RA62 4/7 3RP15 11/21 3RV17 1/6
3RA64 4/8 3RV18 see 3RV28
3NJ 19/16 3RA65 4/8 3RP19 3/50, 3/57, 3/74, 7/6, 3RV19 1/7, 1/8, 1/10, 1/12,
3RA68 4/18 to 4/21 11/14, 13/135, 13/149 1/13, 1/16, 1/17, 2/80,
3NP 19/16 3RA69 2/31, 3/56, 4/10, 3RP20 9/105, 11/21 4/12, 4/44, 9/99, 14/2
4/11, 4/15
3NW1 19/16 3RS10 11/5, 11/6 3RV20 1/4
3NW6 19/16 3RB10 3/21 3RS11 11/5, 11/6 3RV27 1/6
3NW7 9/108, 16/27 3RV28 1/6
3NW8 19/16 3RB19 3/50, 3/57, 3/74, 9/99 3RS17 11/77 3RV29 1/7, 1/8, 1/10, 1/12,
3RS18 11/71 1/13, 1/16, 1/17, 2/80,
3NX 19/16 3RB20 3/21, 3/22, 9/66 4/11 to 4/13, 4/44,
3NY 19/16 3RB21 3/21, 3/23 3RS20 11/6 4/46, 4/52, 13/125
3RB22 3/34 3RS21 11/6
3RA11 4/37, 4/39 3RB23 3/35 3RW22 see 3RW40 / 44
3RA12 4/41, 4/43 3RB24 3/54 3RT10 1 see 3RT20 1
3RT10 2 see 3RT20 2 3RW30 7/5
3RA13 1 see 3RA23 3RB29 3/34, 3/35, 3/49, 3RT10 3 2/8, 2/23 3RW34 see 3RW40 / 44
3RA13 2 see 3RA23 3/50, 3/55, 3/57 3RT10 4 2/8, 2/23
3RA13 3 2/43 3RW40 7/9 to 7/11
3RA13 4 2/44 3RB30 3/22 3RT10 5 2/9, 2/23 3RW44 7/17 to 7/19, 7/75, 7/76
3RB31 3/23 3RT10 6 2/9, 2/23
3RT10 7 2/9 3RW49 7/12, 7/13, 7/25, 7/26


Index
By catalog number

3RX8 13/48, 13/86, 13/97 3SE30 see 3SE5 3SX32 13/79, 13/87, 3UG30 see 3UG4
3SE31 see 3SE5 13/104, 13/112
3RX90 14/2 3SE32 see 3SE5 3UG32 07 11/56
3RX95 14/2 3SE37 see 3SE5 3SX56 13/110
3SE38 see 3SE5 3UG35 see 3UG4
3SB10 10/47 3SE39 10/109 3SX9 13/86, 13/97
3SB12 10/56, 10/57 3UG45 11/31, 11/49, 11/54,
3SB14 10/58 3SE50 00 13/9, 13/14, 13/18, 3SY1 10/81 11/55
13/21, 13/22, 13/25, 3UG46 11/31, 11/37, 11/42,
3SB19 01 10/74 to 10/76, 10/94 13/26, 13/29, 13/30, 3SY3 13/48, 13/86, 13/97 11/60
3SB19 02 10/80 to 10/84, 13/34, 13/37, 13/38,
10/86, 10/95, 10/168 13/40 to 13/42, 13/44, 3TA 17/37, 17/52, 17/53, 3UL22 11/42, 19/16
3SB19 04 10/77 13/49, 13/86, 13/97, 17/80, 17/101 to 17/103
3SB19 06 10/58, 10/76 13/102, 13/103 3VU2 19/16
3SB19 10 10/81 3SE50 50 13/47 3TC 2/55, 17/13, 17/52, 3VX 19/16
3SE50 60 13/49 17/53, 17/101
3SB20 10/9, 10/10 3WX 19/16
3SB22 10/7, 10/8 3SE51 10 13/50 3TF6 2/53 3WY 19/16
3SB23 10/11 3SE51 12 13/31 to 13/33, 13/43,
3SB24 10/11, 10/12 13/49, 13/85, 13/103 3TG10 11/81 3ZS1 3/75, 7/23, 7/24, 13/150
3SE51 14 13/31 to 13/33, 13/85
3SB29 10/11 to 10/19, 10/81 3SE51 15 13/33, 13/85 3TK 19/16 3ZX10 7/6, 7/13, 7/26, 13/149
3TK28 13/125, 13/127,
3SB30 3/11, 3/49, 7/12, 3SE51 20 13/50 13/128, 13/134, 13/135 3ZY1 6/7, 13/124, 13/125
10/47 to 10/54 3SE51 22 13/35 to 13/37, 13/43,
3SB31 10/43, 10/54, 13/49, 13/85 3TX40 2/90 4
10/55, 10/61 to 10/64 3TX42 10/84 40 9/60, 9/61
3SB32 10/41 to 10/47 3SE51 30 13/50 43 9/62
3SE51 32 13/15 to 13/17, 13/26, 3TX65 2/56
3SB33 10/59, 10/60 13/83, 13/102 48 9/66, 9/129
3SB34 10/65 to 10/68, 3SE51 34 13/17 3TX70 02 11/64, 11/66
10/92, 10/93 3TX70 03 11/64 49A 9/66, 9/103, 9/104, 9/128
3SB35 10/31 to 10/40 3SE51 60 13/50 3TX70 04 11/64, 11/66
3SB36 10/26 to 10/30 3SE51 62 13/39, 13/40, 13/43, 3TX70 05 11/64, 11/66 49C 9/103, 9/105
13/49 49D 9/104, 9/105, 9/107
3SB38 0 10/88 to 10/91 3TX70 14 11/64 49E 2/81, 9/105, 9/109, 9/110,
3SB38 6 13/116 3SE52 10 13/50 3TX70 15 11/64 9/112 to 9/114
3SE52 12 13/27 to 13/29, 13/49, 49F 9/108
3SB39 01 10/68, 10/73, 10/75, 13/84, 13/103 3TX70 90 2/54 49G 9/105
10/80, 10/81, 3SE52 14 13/29 49H 9/105
10/84 to 10/86, 3TX71 0 11/85 49J 9/105, 9/108
10/92, 10/93, 10/95, 3SE52 30 13/50 3TX71 1 11/85 to 11/8 49L 9/102, 9/103, 9/105,
13/48, 13/116 3SE52 32 13/9, 13/10 to 13/13, 3TX71 2 11/87 9/130
3SB39 02 10/73, 10/76 13/23, 13/24, 13/49, 3TX71 3 11/86, 11/88 49M 2/81, 9/104, 9/106
3SB39 03 10/73, 10/76 13/82, 13/102 3TX71 4 11/85 to 11/87, 11/89
3SE52 34 13/10 to 13/13, 13/82 49P 9/102
3SB39 05 10/73, 10/76 3TX74 02 2/56 49S 2/81
3SB39 06 10/94 3SE52 40 13/50 3TX74 62 2/56 49V 9/105
3SE52 42 13/19 to 13/21, 13/23, 49Z 9/105, 9/128
3SB39 10 10/81 13/24, 13/49, 13/82 3TX75 22 2/56
3TX75 7 2/54 4A 19/16
3SB39 21 10/82 to 10/86, 10/95 3SE52 50 13/47 4B 19/16
3SB39 22 10/55, 10/78 3TX76 8 2/54 4C 19/16
3SB39 23 10/78 3SE53 13/95, 13/96 3TX76 9 2/54 4E 19/16
3SB39 25 10/78 3SE54 13/46 4F 19/16
3TY24 2/55
3SB39 30 10/79 3SE6 13/110, 13/112 3TY25 2/55 4NC 19/16
3SB39 31 10/85
3SE7 13/77 to 13/79 3TY48 2/88 to 2/90 4PK 19/16
3SB39 40 10/74
3SB39 41 10/82 to 10/84, 10/86 3SF1 14/2 3TY64 2/55, 2/89, 2/90 5
3SB39 43 10/78 3SF2 14/2 3TY65 2/55, 2/89, 2/90 50 10/124 to 10/130
3SF5 10/97 to 10/99, 14/2
3SB39 50 10/79 3TY74 2/55, 2/88 to 2/90 51A 9/106, 10/135, 10/140,
3SB39 51 10/85 3SK1 13/120 to 13/23 3TY75 2/53, 2/55, 2/88, 2/90 10/141
3TY76 2/53, 2/88
3SBES 3/11, 3/49, 10/47 3SR 10/168 51C 10/139
3UB8 9/66, 9/67, 9/104
3SE03 13/64 to 13/67, 13/74, 3SX03 13/68, 13/69 51E 10/139
13/75 3UF19 3/74
3SX13 3/11, 3/49, 7/12, 51PA 10/133
3SE21 see 3SE5 10/47, 10/86 3UF5 see 3UF7
3SE22 13/87, 13/104 51PC 10/134, 10/135
3SE23 see 3SE5 3SX17 0 10/80, 10/86 3UF7 3/56, 3/69 to 3/74, 3/76
3SE24 see 3SE5 3SX17 3 10/80 51PD 10/133
3SE28 see 3SE5 3UF79 7/25, 13/149,
3SE29 10/109 3SX19 13/48 17/56, 17/57 51PE 10/134, 10/135


Index
By catalog number

51R 10/140 5TG 19/16 8US12 1 4/13, 5/8 CJD 17/70, 17/91, 17/97
CJT 17/25, 17/26
51SA 10/136, 10/137 5TT 19/16 8US12 5 4/51, 5/8
51SB 10/136 8US12 6 5/8 CLD 17/74, 17/91, 17/97
6 CLK 17/48, 17/49
52A 9/104, 10/80, 10/141, 6AG10 15/4 8US19 2 5/6 CLM 9/91, 9/102, 9/103,
10/167, 10/168 9/105, 9/130
6ED10 15/3 to 15/8, 15/10 8US19 4 5/6 CLR 17/113
52BA 10/141, 10/167
52BJ 10/141, 10/167 6EP13 15/9, 15/12 to 15/17, 8US19 9 4/51, 4/52, 5/8, 5/9 CMB 9/92
52BL 10/153 15/21 CMD 17/81, 17/91, 17/97
52BM 10/145 6EP14 15/18 to 15/20 8WA 9/108, 12/1 to 12/5 CMF 9/92
52BP 10/147, 10/149 6EP15 15/21 CMN 9/92
52BR 10/150, 10/151 6EP16 15/21 8WH 12/1 to 12/3 CMT 17/32, 17/33
52BT 10/155
6EP19 15/22 to 15/24 8WC50 5/6 CND 17/84, 17/97
52C 10/167, 10/173, 10/174 CNT 17/35, 17/36
6EP41 15/24 8WD42 10/113, 10/114
52K 10/140, 10/167 8WD43 10/114, 10/117, 10/118 COM 17/56, 17/57
52M 10/140, 10/167 6GK12 14/2 8WD44 10/114 to 10/118
6GK14 14/2 CPD 17/87
52NA 10/176 6GK19 14/2, 15/26 8WD53 10/119 CPT 17/38
52ND 10/168
52NE 10/168 6GK5 15/26 8ZX 19/16 CQD 17/12, 17/14, 17/109,
52NL 10/168 17/110
6GK7 14/2 9
52PA see 52PL & PT 97 9/67, 9/104 CRH 17/110, 18/26
52PB see 52PM 6SL35 14/2
52PL 10/153 958 9/67 CSO 17/109
52PM 10/145 6XV18 15/26
52PP 10/147, 10/149 A D
7 A01 17/65, 17/68, 17/72, D11 17/110
52PR 10/150, 10/151 70 see 73 17/76, 17/79, 17/86,
52PT 10/155 71 see 74 17/90 DC 17/48, 17/49
52PX see 52BL, BM & BT A02 9/103, 17/65, 17/68,
73 7/31, 7/36, 7/37 17/72, 17/76, 17/79, DK 17/110, 18/22
52R 10/140, 10/165, 10/166 74 7/32, 7/33 to 7/35, 17/86, 17/90
52S 10/157, 10/159, 10/161, 7/38 to 7/41 E
10/162 AMB 17/23, 17/30, 17/39 E1 9/123, 9/124
75A 9/128 E2 9/123, 17/63, 17/108,
5SA 19/16 75B 9/128 ASK 17/23, 17/30, 17/39, 17/109, 17/110
5SB 19/16 75C 9/128 17/59 E3 9/123, 9/124
5SC 19/16 75D 9/105, 9/106, 9/127, E4 9/123, 9/124
5SD 19/16 9/128 ASWP 17/23, 17/30, 17/39
5SE 19/16 E5 9/123, 9/124
75E 9/128 B E6 9/123, 9/124
5SF 19/16 75F 9/128 B00 17/65, 17/68, 17/86, E7 9/123, 9/124
5SG 19/16 75G 9/128 17/90 E8 9/123, 9/124
5SH 5/6, 5/9, 19/16 75H 9/128 B01 17/72, 17/76 E9 9/123, 9/124
5SJ4 16/4 to 16/6
75I 9/128 BHP 10/130 EA 17/63
5SM 19/16 75J 9/128 EB 17/10, 17/11, 17/63
BQ 17/9, 17/10, 17/97,
5SP4 16/17 75Z 9/127 17/106, 17/108 ED 9/112, 17/63, 17/74,
5SQ 19/16 BR 17/106 17/91, 17/97, 17/108
7KM 19/16
5ST2 16/22 BZL 17/56, 17/57 EC2 17/66
5ST3 16/7, 16/19 to 16/22 7KT 19/16 EC4 17/70
C
5SU 19/16 7LF 19/16 C01 17/68 ECB 17/106
ECH 18/13
5SV8 19/16 7LQ 19/16 CB 17/54, 17/55 ECM 17/106
ECP 17/106
5SW 19/16 7PV15 11/27 CCE 17/63, 17/103 ECQ 17/106
CCF 17/66, 17/103
5SX2 see 5SY4 7ZX 19/16 CCL 17/69, 17/71, 17/73, EE 17/70
17/103
5SX9 See 5ST3 8 CCM 17/103 EP 17/56, 17/57, 17/100
83 9/69 CCN 17/103
5SY4 16/13, 16/14 84 9/70, 9/71 CCQ 17/103 EX 17/108
5SY5 16/18
5SY6 16/15, 16/16 87 9/74 to 9/76 CED 17/63, 17/64, 17/91, F
88 9/77, 9/78 17/97 F6N 17/66
5SZ 19/16 F6R 17/110
8JH 19/16 CFD 17/67, 17/91, 17/97
5TE 19/16 CFS 18/18, 18/28, 18/29 FBB 5/6
8UB 19/16 CFT 17/21, 17/22 FBC 5/7, 5/9, 17/50, 17/51


Index
By catalog number

FBS 5/8 HLC 17/42, 18/12, 18/23 JXD 17/69, 17/91, 17/97 MFM 17/46, 17/47, 17/111
FBT 5/6 HLD 17/74 MFS 17/46, 17/47
HLK 17/28, 17/29 K
FC 18/25 K2 9/125, 9/126 MI 17/109
FD 18/26, 17/66, 17/67, HLM 17/41 K3 9/125, 9/126
17/108, 17/111 HLMD 17/78 K4 9/125, 9/126 MMS 9/7
FE 18/26 HLMXD 17/78 K5 9/125, 9/126
MN6 17/108
FHO 17/111, 18/21, 18/26 HLR 17/40 K6 9/125, 9/126 MND 17/80, 17/82, 17/83
FHV 17/46 K7 9/125, 9/126
HLV 17/28 K8 9/125, 9/126 MO 17/112
FMH 17/110 K9 9/125, 9/126
FMP 17/109 HLXD 17/97 MRS 9/7
KCC 9/108
FP 17/106 HMC 17/42 MS 17/54, 17/55, 17/109
HMD 17/81 KT 9/103, 9/108
FXD 9/112, 17/66, 17/91, HMG 17/32, 17/33 MT 9/96
17/97 HMM 17/41 L MTA 17/100
HMS 17/40 LCE 9/87, 9/88 MTC 17/100
G MTG 9/97
GF01 17/65 HMXD 17/81 LEB 9/84 MTR 2/81
LED 9/84 MTZ 17/100
GSGK 18/12, 18/15 HN2 18/11, 18/22 LEF 9/84
HN6 18/11, 18/22 LEN0 9/81 MXD 17/80, 17/81,
GSR 18/11 17/91, 17/97
HNB 9/106, 9/112 LBR 18/15, 18/18
H HNC 17/42 LBT 18/18 N
HAS 17/111 HND 17/84 N0 17/71, 17/75,
LD1 17/63, 17/102 17/82, 17/85
HA1 18/12, 18/23 HNF2 18/5 LD6 17/70, 17/73, 17/74 N1 17/85, 17/88
HA2 9/103, 18/12, 18/23 HNF3 18/5, 18/6, 18/8 to N2 17/66
HA3 18/12, 18/23 18/10, 18/14 LDK 17/18, 17/19
HNF4 18/7 ND6 17/83, 17/84
HB 9/106, 9/112, 17/9, HNF6 18/7, 18/11 LFG 17/21, 17/22 NDK 17/18, 17/19
17/54, 17/55, 17/108 LFK 17/21
HNG 17/35, 17/36 LFS 17/40 NFG 17/21, 17/22
HCL 18/13 HNM 17/41 NFK 17/21
HNS 17/40 LGG 17/13
HDC 17/42 NGG 17/13
HDK 17/18, 17/19 HNXD 17/84 LJG 17/25, 17/26 NGS 17/56, 17/57
HDP 17/41 LJS 17/40
HDR 17/40 HP6 18/11, 18/23 NJG 17/25, 17/26
LLK 17/28, 17/29 NJJ 17/25
HED 17/64 HPC 17/42 LLR 17/40
HPD 17/87 NLK 17/28, 17/29
HF2 18/3 to 18/4 HPG 17/38 LMA 17/37, 17/51
HF3 18/3 to 18/4, 18/6, HPL 17/54, 17/55, 17/108 LMD 17/77, 17/78 NMG 17/32, 17/33
18/8 to 18/10 HPS 17/40 LMG 17/32, 17/33
HF6 18/7, 18/15, 18/18 LMS 17/40 NNG 17/35, 17/36
HPX 17/37, 17/87
HFB 9/106, 9/112 LMXD 17/77, 17/91, 17/97 NPG 17/38
HFC 17/42 HQJ 17/11 NPX 17/37
HFD 17/67 LN1 17/63, 17/102
HR2 9/106, 9/112, NXD 17/83, 17/97
HFK 17/21 18/11, 18/22 LNG 17/35, 17/36
HFG 17/21, 17/22 HR6 9/106, 9/112, LNS 17/40 O
HFM 17/41 18/11, 18/22 OFCK 18/25
HFS 17/40 LPG 17/38
HRD 17/89 LPS 17/40 OH 17/110
HFXD 17/97 LPX 17/37
HRXD 17/89 P
HG 7/13, 18/12, 18/23 LXD 17/73, 17/91, 17/97 P30EM 10/175
HSBE 17/109
HHED 17/64 HSK6 18/11, 18/23 LZX 19/16 PC 17/48, 17/49, 17/113
HHFD 17/67
HHJD 17/70 HT 18/11, 18/22 M PD 17/87
HHLD 17/74 MB 17/37, 17/51, 17/87 to
I 17/89, 17/85, 17/86, PL 17/113
HJC 17/42 I0 17/106 17/106
HJD 17/70 PRD 17/88
HJG 17/25, 17/26 IPB 17/50, 17/51 MCS 18/25, 18/26
HJM 17/41 PXD 17/87, 17/97
HJS 17/40 J MD 17/80, 17/81
J6N 17/70 Q
HJXD 17/97 MFC 17/46, 17/47, 17/111 QJ 17/11, 17/97, 17/108
JD 17/69, 17/70, 17/73, MFH 17/46, 17/47, 17/111
HL9 17/108 17/74, 17/108 MFK 17/46, 17/47, 17/111


Index
By catalog number
R TC1 17/10, 17/11, 17/13,

RD 17/89 17/52, 17/53, 17/63,
17/66, 17/69, 17/71,
RHF 17/44, 17/45, 17/110 17/73, 17/101, 17/103,
RHO 17/110, 18/26 17/106
RHS 17/44, 17/45 TC2 17/53, 17/69, 17/71,
RHV 17/44, 17/45, 17/110 17/73, 17/80, 17/82,
17/83, 17/103
RS 17/113 TC3 17/53, 17/80,
17/82, 17/83, 17/103
RTL 17/50, 17/51 TC5 17/37, 17/53,
17/87 to 17/89, 17/103
RXD 17/89, 17/97
TCE 17/113
S TCF 17/113
S01-S18 17/65, 17/68, 17/72, TCH 17/106
17/76, 17/79, 17/86, TCJ 17/113
17/90 TCL 17/113
TCM 17/113
SADU 17/72, 17/76, 17/79, TCN 17/113
17/86, 17/90, 17/100
TFAK 18/11
SA1 17/63, 17/102
THE 17/57
SCJD 17/71
SCLD 17/75 TNK 17/52, 17/53, 17/101
SCMD 17/82
SCND 17/85 TS3 17/100

SEAF 17/48 TSC 17/54, 17/55
SEAL 17/49 TSL 17/50, 17/51
SEAM 17/49 TSS 17/50, 17/51, 17/108

SHJD 17/71 TW1 17/52, 17/53

SHLD 17/75 U
SHMD 17/82 U01-U16 17/65, 17/68,
SHND 17/85 17/72, 17/76, 17/79,
17/86, 17/90
SJD 17/71
UVR 17/23, 17/30, 17/39,
SLD 17/75 17/59

SMB 17/106 V
SMD 17/82 VBF 18/21
SMF 9/5, 9/98, 9/122 VBH 18/21, 18/22
VBL 18/22
SND 17/85 VBN 18/21
VBW 18/22
SRT 17/50, 17/51
VH9 17/110
SSH 18/13
SSRK 18/26 W
W01-W16 17/68
STR 17/23, 17/30,
17/39, 17/59 W4 18/11

T W60 17/70, 17/74
TA1 17/10, 17/11, 17/52, W63 17/78, 17/80, 17/82,
17/53, 17/63, 17/66, 17/83
17/69, 17/71, 17/73,
17/101 to 17/103, WB 17/10, 17/11, 17/54,
17/106 17/55
TA2 17/53, 17/69, 17/71,
17/73, 17/77, 17/80,
17/102
TA3 17/52, 17/53, 17/77,
17/80, 17/82, 17/83,
17/102

TA4 17/37, 17/87, 17/103
TA5 17/37, 17/53, 17/87,
17/88, 17/102
TA6 17/52, 17/53, 17/87
to 17/89, 17/102, 17/103


• Revised • IEC Power Control
SIRIUS 04/20/15 Motor Starter Protectors
Contents Pages
Section Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 - 1/3
Motor Starter Protectors
3RV20 MSP, Class 10/20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4 - 1/5
3RV10 MSP, Class 10/20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/5
Circuit Breakers
3RV17 Circuit Breaker UL 489 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/6
3RV27, 3RV28 Circuit Breaker UL 489. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/6
Accessories
Auxiliary Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/7
Auxiliary Releases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/7
Busbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/8
Mounting Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/9 - 1/12
Rotary Operating Mechanisms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/13
Enclosures & Front Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/13
3RV29 Infeed System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/14 - 1/17
General Data for Motor Starter Protectors
Manual Motor Starter Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/18
Group Installation Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/19
Combination Motor Controller Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/20
3RV27 and 3RV28 Circuit Breaker Ratings. . . . . . . . . . 1/21
Export Application Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/22 - 1/23
Rules for Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/24
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/25 - 1/28
Overview of MSP Functions & Applications. . . . . . . . . 1/29
Application as a Combination Motor Controller . . . . . . 1/30
Application in DC Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/31
Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/31
Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/32
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/32
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/33 - 1/34
General Data for Accessories
Mountable Accessories
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/35 - 1/36
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/37 - 1/35
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/38
Busbar Accessories
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/39
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/40 - 1/41
Operating Mechanisms
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/42
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/43
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/43 - 1/44
Enclosures & Front Plates
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/45
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/46
Spring Terminal Infeed System
Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/47
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/47
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/48

IEC Power Control • Revised •
Motor Starter Protectors 04/20/15
SIRIUS 3RV motor starter protectors up to 100 A
Size S00, S0
For motor protection For motor protection General data for SIRIUS
CLASS 10 CLASS 20 motor starter protectors
Selection and ordering data Selection and ordering data Page
Size Rated Current Page Size Rated Current Page Technical data 1/18
S00 up to 16 A 1/4 S2 up to 65 A 1/5 Overview 1/28
S0 up to 40 A 1/4 S3 up to 100 A 1/5 Characteristics 1/32
S2 up to 65 A 1/5 Circuit diagrams 1/32
S3 up to 100 A 1/5 Dimension drawings 1/33
Ciruit Breakers 3RV17, SIRIUS 3RV29 3RV MSP auxiliaries

3RV27, 3RV28 infeed system and accessories
Page Page Page

Selection and ordering data 1/6 Selection and ordering data 1/16-1/17 Selection and ordering data 1/7-1/8
Dimension drawings 1/34 Technical data 1/47 Technical data 1/27
Overview 1/14-1/15 Overview 1/35
Dimension drawings 1/48 Circuit diagrams 1/37
Dimension drawings 1/38
1/2 Product Category: IEC Siemens Industry, Inc.

IEC Power Control
Accessories
Accessories for motor starter

3RV busbar and accessories protectors with Spring-Type Mounting Accessories
terminals
Page
Page Page Selection and 1/9 -1/12
Selection and ordering data 1/8 Selection and ordering data 1/7 ordering data
Overview 1/39 Technical data 1/28 Overview 1/36

Technical data 1/40 Technical data 1/38
Rotary operating mechanisms Enclosures and front plates
Page Page
Selection and ordering data 1/13 Selection and ordering data 1/13
Technical data 1/28 Overview 1/45
Overview 1/42 Dimension drawings 1/46
Circuit diagrams 1/43
Siemens Industry, Inc. Product Category: IEC 1/3

3RV Motor Starter Protectors
For Motor Protection SIRIUS
3RV20 Class 10
up to 40A
Description Ordering Information
The 3RV20x MSP’s are UL approved as Self Protected Combination Motor Controllers E ON/OFF rotary handle with lockout and visible trip
which are also called Type E. In this application, all the required functions for a motor indication.
branch are provided in one device: disconnect, short circuit protection, motor control E Adjustment dial for setting to motor FLA.
and overload protection. A type E terminal adaptor is required. The 3RV20x MSP’s are E Class 10 overload trip characteristics.
also approved for use as follows: E Short circuit trip at 13 times the maximum setting of
– Manual Motor Controller: Motor starter, motor disconnect, control and overload— the FLA adjustment dial.
protection. E Short circuit current rating:
– Group Installation: Motor starter only, motor disconnect, control and overload E Ambient compensated up to 140° F (applies to side
protection. by side mounting).
– Tap conductor Protection in Group Installation acc. NEC: Motor starter only; E Phase loss sensitivity.
motor disconnect, control and overload protection. E Test trip function.
When the 3RV20x is used with one of the 3 above mentioned approvals, the 3RV20x E Terminal versions: screw, spring, ring lug.
can be installed downstream of one circuit breaker or fuse set. E Auxiliaries and Accessories see pages 1/7–1/17.
E General Information see pages 1/29–1/32.
For more detailed application information and rules how to apply, size and rate the E Technical Data see pages 1/18–1/28.
3RV20x in control panels in general, in group installations or in accordance to interna- E Dimensions see page 1/33.
tional IEC standards visit our website: www.usa.siemens.com/controlpaneldesign
Note: Select MSP by motor Full Load Amperes. Horsepower ratings are for reference only.
Instant- UL short-
aneous circuit
Single-Phase Three-Phase
1) short breaking
HP Ratings HP Ratings
FLA circuit capacity Size S00 2) 4) Size S0 2) 4)
Adjustment release @ 480V
Illustration Range [A] 115V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V [A] [kA] Order Number Order Number
0.11-0.16 — — — — — — 2.1 65 3RV2011-0AA●● —
0.14-0.2 — — — — — — 2.6 65 3RV2011-0BA●● —
0.18-0.25 — — — — — — 3.3 65 3RV2011-0CA●● —
0.22-0.32 — — — — — — 4.2 65 3RV2011-0DA●● —
0.28-0.4 — — — — — — 5.2 65 3RV2011-0EA●● —
0.35-0.5 — — — — — — 6.5 65 3RV2011-0FA●● —
0.45-0.63 — — — — — — 8.2 65 3RV2011-0GA●● 3RV2021-0GA●●
0.55-0.8 — — — — — — 10 65 3RV2011-0HA●● 3RV2021-0HA●●
0.7-1 — — — — — ½ 13 65 3RV2011-0JA●● 3RV2021-0JA●●
0.9-1.25 — — — — ½ ½ 16 65 3RV2011-0KA●● 3RV2021-0KA●●
1.1-1.6 — 1⁄10 — — ¾ ¾ 21 65 3RV2011-1AA●● 3RV2021-1AA●●
1.4-2 — 1⁄8 — — ¾ 1 26 65 3RV2011-1BA●● 3RV2021-1BA●●
1.8-2.5 — 1⁄6 ½ ½ 1 1½ 33 65 3RV2011-1CA●● 3RV2021-1CA●●
2.2-3.2 1⁄10 ¼ ½ ¾ 1½ 2 42 65 3RV2011-1DA●● 3RV2021-1DA●●
2.8-4 1⁄8 1⁄3 ¾ ¾ 2 3 52 65 3RV2011-1EA●● 3RV2021-1EA●●
3.5-5 1⁄6 ½ 1 1 3 3 65 65 3RV2011-1FA●● 3RV2021-1FA●●
4.5-6.3 ¼ ½ 1 1½ 3 5 82 65 3RV2011-1GA●● 3RV2021-1GA●●
5.5-8 1⁄3 1 2 2 5 5 104 65 3RV2011-1HA●● 3RV2021-1HA●●
7-10 ½ 1½ 2 3 5 7½ 130 65 3RV2011-1JA●● 3RV2021-1JA●●
9-12.5 ½ 2 3 3 7½ 10 163 65 3RV2011-1KA●● 3RV2021-1KA●●
11-16 1 2 3 5 10 — 208 65 3RV2011-4AA●● 3RV2021-4AA●●
14-20 1½ 3 5 5 10 — 260 65 — 3RV2021-4BA●●
17-22 1½ 3 5 7½ 15 — 286 65 — 3RV2021-4CA●●
20-25 2 3 5 7½ 15 — 325 65 — 3RV2021-4DA●●
23-28 2 5 7½ 10 20 — 364 50 — 3RV2021-4NA●●
27-32 2 5 7½ 10 20 — 400 50 — 3RV2021-4EA●●
3)
30-36 3 5 10 10 25 — 432 12 — 3RV2021-4PA●●
3)
34-40 3 7½ 10 10 30 — 480 12 — 3RV2021-4FA●●
Screw terminals, no auxiliary: ●● = 10
Screw Terminals, with 1NO/1NC Aux:●● = 15
Spring terminals, no auxiliary: ●● = 20
Spring Terminals, with 1NO/1NC Aux: ●● = 25
Ring Lug Terminals, no Auxiliary: ●● = 40
1) Select motor starter protector by motor full load amps. 2) The motor starter protectors rated up to 32 A can be 3) These products are NOT certified as Type E combi-
Horse power ratings for reference only. used as manual motor controllers or as Type E combination motor controllers. They can only be used as
nation motor controllers. For use as a Type E combina- manual motor controllers.
tion motor controller, a Type E terminal is required. See
4) 3RV2 MSP’s can only be used with Innovations contac-
accessories page 1/10.
tors and accessories

• Revised • 3RV Motor Starter Protectors
SIRIUS 04/20/15 For Motor Protection
3RV10 Class 10 & 20
up to 100A
Description Ordering Information
The 3RV203 / 104 MSP’s are UL approved as Self Protected Combination Motor Controllers E ON/OFF rotary handle with lockout and visible
which are also called Type E. In this application, all the required functions for a motor trip indication.
branch are provided in one device: disconnect, short circuit protection, motor control and E Adjustment dial for setting to motor FLA.
overload protection. A type E terminal adaptor is required for all S2 frame 3RV2031 above E Class 10 overload trip characteristics.
45A and all S2 frame 3RV2032 as well as for all S3 frame motor starter protectors. E Short circuit trip at 13 times the maximum set-
ting of the FLA adjustment dial.

The 3RV203 / 104 MSP’s are also approved for use as follows: E Short circuit current rating:
– Manual Motor Controller: Motor starter, motor disconnect, control and overload E Ambient compensated up to 140° F (applies to
protection.
side by side mounting).
– Group Installation: Motor starter only, motor disconnect, control and overload protection. E Phase loss sensitivity.
– Tap conductor Protection in Group Installation acc. NEC: Motor starter only; motor E Test trip function.
disconnect, control and overload protection. E Auxiliaries and Accessories see pages 1/7–1/17.
E General Information see pages 1/29–1/32.
When the 3RV203 /104 is used with one of the 3 above mentioned approvals, they can be
E Technical Data see pages 1/18–1/28.
installed downstream of one circuit breaker or fuse set.
E Dimensions see page 1/33.
For more detailed application information and rules how to apply, size and rate these
MSP’s in control panels in general, in group installations or in accordance to international
IEC standards visit our website: www.usa.siemens.com/controlpaneldesign
Note: Select MSP by motor Full Load Amperes. Horsepower ratings are for reference only.
Single Phase 3 Phase Inst.
1) 1)
FLA HP rating HP Rating Short-
Adjustment Circuit UL AIC Trip Class 10 Trip Class 20
Range Release (480V)
Illustration [A] 115V 240V 200V 230V 460V 575V [A] [kA] 6) Order Number4) Order Number4)
3RV203 Frame Size S2

9.5 - 14 1.5 3 5 5 10 15 208 65 3RV2031-4SA10 3RV2031-4SB10
12 - 17 1.5 3 5 7.5 15 15 260 65 3RV2031-4TA10 3RV2031-4TB10
14 - 20 1.5 3 7.5 7.5 15 20 260 65 3RV2031-4BA10 3RV2031-4BB10
18 - 25 2 5 7.5 10 20 25 325 65 3RV2031-4DA10 3RV2031-4DB10
22 - 32 3 5 10 10 25 30 416 65 3RV2031-4EA10 3RV2031-4EB10
28 - 36 3 7.5 15 15 30 40 520 65 3RV2031-4PA10 3RV2031-4PB10
32 - 40 3 7.5 15 15 30 40 585 65 3RV2031-4UA10 3RV2031-4UB10
35 - 45 3 10 15 15 40 50 650 65 3RV2031-4VA10 3RV2031-4VB10
42 - 52 5 10 15 20 40 50 741 65 3RV2031-4WA10 3RV2031-4WB10
49 - 59 5 15 20 25 50 60 845 30 3RV2031-4XA10 3RV2031-4XB10
54 - 65 5 15 20 25 50 60 845 30 3RV2031-4JA10 3RV2031-4JB10
3RV104 Frame Size S3

28 - 40 3 7.5 15 15 30 40 520A 65 3RV1041-4FA10 3RV1042-4FB10
36 - 50 5 10 15 20 40 50 650A 65 3RV1041-4HA10 3RV1042-4HB10
45 - 63 5 15 20 25 50 60 819A 65 3RV1041-4JA10 3RV1042-4JB10
57 - 75 7.5 15 25 25 60 75 975A 65 3RV1041-4KA10 3RV1042-4KB10
3)
70 - 90 10 20 30 30 75 100 1170A 65 3RV1041-4LA10 3RV1042-4LB10
3)
80 - 100 10 25 40 40 75 100 1235A 65 3RV1041-4MA10 3RV1042-4MB10
1) Select motor starter protector by motor full load amps. 3) Shaded ratings apply for group installation only. These 5) 3RV1 MSP’s can only be used with 3RT1 contactors
Horse power ratings for reference only. ratings do not apply as UL listed manual combination and accessories. 3RV2 MSP’s can only be used with
starters. 3RT2 contactors and accessories.
2) Size S2 and S3 are listed as type E combination motor
controllers. For required Type E terminals see page 1/10. 4) Pre-assembled motor starter protector and transverse 6) For 100kA SCCR rated MSP’s, change the part number
3RV2031 MSP’s with a current setting limit of 45A or less auxiliary switch with 1NO + 1NC is available. Replace the from 3RV2031 to 3RV2032. (applies to S2 frame only
do not require a type E terminal and fulfill the spacing last digit of the order no. with a “5”. through 65A).
requirements of UL508.
Refer to pages 1/18 to 1/20 when using an MSP in a Manual Motor Starter or a Manual Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller.

3RV Circuit Breakers
UL 489 SIRIUS
3RV
up to 70 A
Selection and ordering data

For Motor For Transformer
Protection 2) Protection 3)
Thermal Short Circuit Instant- Instant-

overload breaking capacity aneous Order aneous Order
Rated release [kA] Over Number Over Number
Cur- (non-ad- Current Current
1)
rent justable) 480 480Y/ 600Y/ Release (Screw Weight Release (Screw Weight
[A] [A] VAC 277VAC 347VAC [A] Terminals) [kg] [A] Terminals) [kg]
Innovations Frame Size S00 4)
0.16 0.16 — 65 10 2.1 3RV2711-0AD10 0.390 3.3 3RV2811-0AD10 0.390
0.2 0.2 — 65 10 2.6 3RV2711-0BD10 0.390 4.2 3RV2811-0BD10 0.390
0.25 0.25 — 65 10 3.3 3RV2711-0CD10 0.390 5.2 3RV2811-0CD10 0.390
0.32 0.32 — 65 10 4.2 3RV2711-0DD10 0.390 6.5 3RV2811-0DD10 0.390
0.4 0.4 — 65 10 5.2 3RV2711-0ED10 0.390 8.2 3RV2811-0ED10 0.390
0.5 0.5 — 65 10 6.5 3RV2711-0FD10 0.390 10 3RV2811-0FD10 0.390
0.63 0.63 — 65 10 8.2 3RV2711-0GD10 0.390 13 3RV2811-0GD10 0.400
0.8 0.8 — 65 10 10 3RV2711-0HD10 0.390 16 3RV2811-0HD10 0.450
1 1 — 65 10 13 3RV2711-0JD10 0.450 21 3RV2811-0JD10 0.450
1.25 1.25 — 65 10 16 3RV2711-0KD10 0.450 26 3RV2811-0KD10 0.460
1.6 1.6 — 65 10 21 3RV2711-1AD10 0.460 33 3RV2811-1AD10 0.460
2 2 — 65 10 26 3RV2711-1BD10 0.460 42 3RV2811-1BD10 0.460
2.5 2.5 — 65 10 33 3RV2711-1CD10 0.460 52 3RV2811-1CD10 0.460
3.2 3.2 — 65 10 42 3RV2711-1DD10 0.460 65 3RV2811-1DD10 0.460
4 4 — 65 10 52 3RV2711-1ED10 0.450 82 3RV2811-1ED10 0.460
5 5 — 65 10 65 3RV2711-1FD10 0.460 104 3RV2811-1FD10 0.460
6.3 6.3 — 65 10 82 3RV2711-1GD10 0.460 130 3RV2811-1GD10 0.460
8 8 — 65 10 104 3RV2711-1HD10 0.460 163 3RV2811-1HD10 0.460
10 10 — 65 10 130 3RV2711-1JD10 0.460 208 3RV2811-1JD10 0.460
12.5 12.5 — 65 10 163 3RV2711-1KD10 0.460 260 3RV2811-1KD10 0.460
15 15 — 65 — 208 3RV2711-4AD10 0.470 286 3RV2811-4AD10 0.470
Innovations Frame Size S0 4)
20 20 — 50 — 260 3RV2721-4BD10 0.514 325 3RV2821-4BD10 0.516
22 22 — 50 — 286 3RV2721-4CD10 0.516 364 3RV2821-4CD10 0.528
Classic Frame Size S3 5)
10 10 65 — 20 150 3RV1742-5AD10 0.460 — — —
15 15 65 — 20 225 3RV1742-5BD10 0.460 — — —
20 20 65 — 20 260 3RV1742-5CD10 0.460 — — —
25 25 65 — 20 325 3RV1742-5DD10 0.460 — — —
30 30 65 — 20 390 3RV1742-5ED10 0.460 — — —
35 35 — 65 20 455 3RV1742-5FD10 0.460 — — —
40 40 — 65 20 520 3RV1742-5GD10 0.460 — — —
45 45 — 65 20 585 3RV1742-5HD10 0.460 — — —
50 50 — 65 20 650 3RV1742-5JD10 0.460 — — —
60 60 — 65 20 780 3RV1742-5LD10 0.460 — — —
70 70 — 65 10 910 3RV1742-5QD10 0.460 — — —
1) 100 % rated value acc. to UL 489 and IEC 60947-2 3) Circuit breakers for system and transformer protection 5) Transverse auxiliary switches must not be mounted.
(100 % rated breaker). according to UL/CSA. Specially designed for trans- Lateral auxiliary switches can be ordered separately
formers with high inrush current. (see “Mountable accessories”).
2) Circuit breakers for system protection of motor and
non-motor loads. Requires use of separate overload 4) Transverse and lateral auxiliary switches can be
protection for motor applications. ordered separately (see “Mountable accessories”).
Refer to page 1/21 when using as upstream protection of a Manual Motor Controller or a Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in
Group Installations.

SIRIUS 04/20/15 Accessories
Auxiliaries and Accessories

W Classic Innovations
i
d Fits 3RV1 Screw Fits 3RV2 Screw
t Frame Connection Frame Connection
Type Version h Size Order No. Size Order No.
Auxiliary switches 3)
mm Classic Innovations
3RV1901-1E 3RV2901-1E Transverse auxiliary 1 CO S3 3RV1901-1D S00, 3RV2901-1D
switches 1 NO + 1 NC 1) 3RV1901-1E S0, S2 1), 2) 3RV2901-1E
2 NO 1) 3RV1901-1F 1) 3RV2901-1F
3RV1901-1G 3RV2901-1G
Solid-state compatible, 1 CO S3 3RV1901-1G S00, 3RV2901-1G
transverse auxiliary S0, S2
switches for use in dusty atmosphere
and in electronic circuits with
3RV1901-1A 3RV2901-1A
low operating currents
Covering caps for transverse S3 3RV1901-0H S00, 3RV2901-0H

auxiliary switch slots (pack of 10) S0, S2
Lateral auxiliary 1 NO + 1 NC 9 S3 1) 3RV1901-1A S00, 1), 2) 3RV2901-1A

switches 2 NO 9 1) 3RV1901-1B S0, S2 1) 3RV2901-1B
(side mount) 2 NC 9 1) 3RV1901-1C 1) 3RV2901-1C
Width = 9 mm 2 NO + 2 NC 18 3RV1901-1J 3RV2901-1J
Signaling switch 4)
Classic Innovations
3RV1921-1M 3RV2921-1M Signaling switch 1 NO + 1 NC 18 S3 3RV1921-1M S00, 1), 2) 3RV2921-1M
(side mount) each S0, S2
Individual tripped and
short-circuit signaling
Width = 18 mm
Auxiliary releases 5) Classic Innovations

3RV1902-1AB4 3RV2902-1AB4
Undervoltage DC
releases 24 V S3 3RV1902-1AB4 S00, 3RV2902-1AB4
(side mount) S0, S2
Width = 18 mm AC 50 Hz AC 60 Hz
24 V — S3 3RV1902-1AB0 S00, 3RV2902-1AB0
110 V 120 V 3RV1902-1AF0 S0, S2 3RV2902-1AF0
— 208 V 3RV1902-1AM1 1), 2) 3RV2902-1AM1
230 V 240 V 3RV1902-1AP0 1), 2) 3RV2902-1AP0
400 V 440 V 3RV1902-1AV0 3RV2902-1AV0
415 V 480 V 3RV1902-1AV1 3RV2902-1AV1
500 V 600 V 3RV1902-1AS0 3RV2902-1AS0
Undervoltage 230 V 240 V S00, 1) 3RV2922-1CP0
releases with 400 V 440 V S0, S2 1) 3RV2922-1CV0
leading 415 V 480 V 1), 2) 3RV2922-1CV1
auxiliary 230 V 240 V S3 3RV1922-1CP0 S00, 1) 3RV2922-1CP0
contacts 2 NO 400 V 440 V 3RV1922-1CV0 S0, S2 1) 3RV2922-1CV0
(side mount) 415 V 480 V 3RV1922-1CV1 1), 2) 3RV2922-1CV1
Width = 18 mm
Shunt releases AC 50/60 Hz AC 50/60 Hz
6) 7)
(side mount) 100% ON 5 sec ON
Width = 18 mm 20-24 V 20-70 V S3 3RV1902-1DB0 S00, 1), 2) 3RV2902-1DB0
90-110 V 70-190 V 3RV1902-1DF0 S0, S2 1), 2) 3RV2902-1DF0
210-240 V 190-330 V 3RV1902-1DP0 1) 3RV2902-1DP0
350-415 V 330-500 V 3RV1902-1DV0 3RV2902-1DV0
500 V 500 V 3RV1902-1DS0 3RV2902-1DS0
1) This product is also available with spring terminals. The 3) Each motor starter protector can be fitted with one 5) One auxiliary release can be mounted at the right of
order no. must be changed in the 8th position to a transverse and one lateral auxiliary switch. The lateral each MSP. motor starter protector.
“2”:e.g. 3RV1901-2E or 3RV2901-2E auxiliary switch 2 NO + 2 NC is used without trans-
6) The response voltage at the lower limit of the voltage
verse auxiliary switch.
2) This product is also available with ring lug terminals. The range at 0.85 (Tu=60°C) is valid for 100% (infinite)
order no. must be changed in the 8th position to a “4”: 4) One signaling switch can be mounted at the left of the
7) The response voltage at the lower limit of the voltage
e.g. 3RV2901-4E motor starter protector. This accessory cannot be used
range at 0.9 (Tu=60°C) applies for a duty cycle of 5
on the 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers.
seconds at AC 50/60 Hz and DC.

3RV Motor Starter Protectors • Revised •
Accessories 04/20/15 SIRIUS
Accessories for Busbar

Modu- Number of motor starter Rated For motor Order No. Order Weight
lar protectors that can be current starter quantity approx.
spac- connected In at protectors
ing Without Incl. With 690 V Size
lateral lateral auxil-
acces- auxil- iary trip
sories iary unit
switch
mm A kg
Three-phase busbar systems for Classic and Innovations
For feeding several motor starter protectors with screw
terminals, mounted side-by-side on standard mounting
rails, insulated, with touch protection.
3RV19 15-1AB
45 2 -- -- 63 S00, S01)2) 3RV19 15-1AB 1 unit 0.044
3 S00, S01)2) 3RV19 15-1BB 1 unit 0.071
4 S00, S01)2) 3RV19 15-1CB 1 unit 0.099
5 S00, S01)2) 3RV19 15-1DB 1 unit 0.124
3RV19 15-1BB 55 -- 2 -- 63 S00, S01)2) 3RV19 15-2AB 1 unit 0.048
3 S00, S01)2) 3RV19 15-2BB 1 unit 0.079
4 S00, S01)2) 3RV19 15-2CB 1 unit 0.111
5 S00, S01)2) 3RV19 15-2DB 1 unit 0.140
63 -- -- 2 63 S00, S01)2) 3RV19 15-3AB 1 unit 0.052
3RV19 15-1CB
4 S00, S01)2) 3RV19 15-3CB 1 unit 0.120
55 2 -- -- 108 S23) 3RV19 35-1A 1 unit 0.150
3 S23) 3RV19 35-1B 1 unit 0.214
4 S23) 3RV19 35-1C 1 unit 0.295
3RV19 15-1DB 75 -- 2 2 108 S2 3RV19 35-3A 1 unit 0.161
3 3 S2 3RV19 35-3B 1 unit 0.262
4 4 S2 3RV19 35-3C 1 unit 0.369
1) 2)
Not suitable for 3RV11 motor starter protectors with overload relay Not suitable for 3RV UL 489 circuit breakers.
function. The 3RV1915-5DB connecting piece is available for connecting 3) Auxiliary trip units and lateral auxiliary switches cannot be used in combi-
motor starter protectors from size S0 to size S00. nation.
Version Modular For motor Order No. Order Weight

spacing starter quantity approx.
protectors
Size
mm kg
Connecting pieces for three-phase busbars For Classic and Innovations
For connecting three-phase 45 S00, S0 3RV19 15-5DB 1 unit 0.042
busbars for motor starter
protectors of size S0 (left) to
3RV19 15-5DB size S00 (right)
Conductor cross-section, For motor
AWG cables, solid or stranded Tighten- starter 3RV1 3RV2
For 3RV1 For 3RV2 ing protector Classic 1) Innovations 2)
MSP MSP torque size
AWG AWG Nm Order No. Order No.
Three-phase feeder terminals
3RV29 25-5AB Connection from top
— 10…4 3…4 S00 — 3RV2925-5AB
— 10…4 3…4 S0 — 3RV2925-5AB
3)
3RV2915-5B Connection from below
— 10…4 Input: 4, S00, S0 — 3RV2915-5B
Output:
2 ... 2.5
3RV2935-5A Connection from top
14...0 -- 4-6 S2 3RV1935-5A 3RV2935-5A
Three-phase feeder terminals for constructing “Type E Starters” Classic Innovations

3RV2935-5E Connection from top
— 10…4 3-4 S00 — 3RV2925-5EB
— 10…4 3-4 S0 — 3RV2925-5EB
8...0 10...2/0 4.5-6 S2 — 3RV2935-5E
1) Do not mix 3RV1 Classic Accessories with 3RV2 2) Do not mix 3RV2 Innovations Accessories with 3RV1 3) This terminal is connected in place of a switch, please
Innovations MSP’s Classic MSP’s take the space requirement into account.

Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit
• Revised • Breakers 3RV Motor Starter Protectors
SIRIUS
SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter
04/20/15 Protectors/Circuit Breakers up to 80 A Accessories
Accessories
Mounting accessories
Overview
Accessories for "Self-Protected Combination Motor Link modules
Controllers (Type E)" according to UL 508/UL 60947-4-1
Feeders can be easily assembled from single devices with the
The 3RV20 motor starter protectors with screw terminals are help of the link modules. The following table shows the different
approved according to UL 508/UL 60947-4-1 as "Self-Protected combination options for devices with screw or spring-type
Combination Motor Controllers (Type E)". terminals.
This requires increased clearance and creepage distances Combination 3RV2 3RT2 contactors; Link modules
(1 inch and 2 inches respectively) at the input side of the device, devices motor 3RW30, 3RW40 Screw Spring-type
which are achieved by mounting a terminal block or a phase starter soft starters; terminals terminals
barrier. protec- 3RF34 solid-state
tors/ contactors
circuit
breakers
Size Size
Link modules for connecting switching devices to 3RV2 motor starter
c protectors/circuit breakers1)
379
_01
NS
B0 3RT2 contac- S00 S00 3RA1921- 3RA2911-
tors with AC or 1DA00 2AA00
DC coil S0 S00 --
SIRIUS 3RV2928-1H terminal block S2 S2 3RA2931- --
1AA00
3RT2 contac- S0 S0 3RA2921- 3RA2921-
tors with 1AA00 2AA00
AC coil S00 S0 --
3RT2 contac- S0 S0 3RA2921- 3RA2921-
08
tors with 1BA00 2AA00
04
1_
0 DC coil S00 S0 --
IC0
7
3RW30 soft S00 S00 3RA2921- 3RA2911-

starters 1BA00 2GA00
S0 S00 --
SIRIUS 3RV2938-1K phase barrier
3RW30/ S0 S0 3RA2921- 3RA2921-
Motor starter Size Essential accessories 3RW40 1BA00 2GA00
protectors/ for "Self-Protected Combination soft starters S00 S0 --
circuit breakers Motor Controllers (Type E)" according
S22) S22) 3RA2931- --
to UL 508/UL 60947-4-1
1AA00
3RV201., 3RV202. S00/S0 3RV2928-1H terminal block or 3RF34 solid- S00/S0 S00 3RA2921- --
3RV2928-1K phase barrier state contac- 1BA00
3RV2031-4B1., S2 -- tors
3RV2031-4D.1.,
Hybrid link modules for connecting contactors with spring-type
3RV2031-4E1.,
terminals to 3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers with
3RV2031-4P.1.,
screw terminals3)
3RV2031-4S.1.,
3RV2031-4T.1., 3RT2 contac- S00 S00 3RA2911- --
3RV2031-4U.1., tors with AC or 2FA00
3RV2031-4V.1. DC coil S0 S0 3RA2921- --
3RV2031-4J.1., S2 3RV2938-1K phase barrier 2FA00
3RV2031-4K.1.,
3RV2031-4R.1., -- Version not possible
1)
3RV2031-4W.1., The link modules cannot be used for the 3RV2.21-4PA1., 3RV2.21-4FA1.,
3RV2031-4X.1., 3RV2.31-4K.1., 3RV2.31-4R.1., 3RV2.32-4K.1., 3RV2.32-4R.1., 3RV27 and
3RV2032 3RV28 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers.
2)
-- No accessories needed To assemble the feeder between a motor starter protector and a soft starter
in size S2, the 3RA2932-1AC00 standard mounting rail adapter must be
Special threephase infeed terminals are required for constructing used.
“Type E Starters” with an insulated threephase busbar system 3) The motor starter protector to contactor hybrid link modules cannot be
(see page 1/8). used for the 3RV2.21-4PA1., 3RV2.21-4FA1., 3RV27 and 3RV28 motor
starter protectors/circuit breakers. They are only suitable for constructing
The 3RV29 infeed system also enables the assembly of “Type E direct-on-line starters.
Starters”, see page 1/14 onwards. Note:
Note: • Link modules can be used in
According to CSA, these terminal blocks and the phase barriers - Sizes S00 and S0: up to max. 32 A
can be omitted when the device is used as a "Self-Protected - Size S2: up to max. 65 A
Combination Motor Controller (Type E)". • Hybrid link modules can be used in
- Sizes S00 and S0: up to max. 32 A

7/38 Siemens IC 10 · 2015
Classic Innovations
For motor starter 3RV1/3RT1 3RV2/3RT2 Order
Version protector size Order No. Order No. Quantity
Terminal blocks and phase barriers for “Self-Protected Combination
Motor Controllers (Type E)” according to UL 508 / UL 60947-4-1
Note:
UL 508 / UL 60947-4-1 demands 1-inch clearance and 2-inch creepage distance at line side for
“Combination Motor Controller Type E”.
The following terminal blocks or phase barriers must be used on 3RV motor starter protectors.
The terminal blocks or phase barriers cannot be used in combination with the 3RV19 .5 three-phase busbars.
For construction with three-phase busbars, see “Accessories for busbar”
3RV29 28-1H
Terminal blocks type E
For extended clearance and S00, S0 — 3RV29 28-1H 1 unit
creepage distances S0 — — 1 unit
(1 and 2 inch)
S2 — 3RV29 35-5E 1 unit
S3 3RT19 46-4GA07 — 1 unit
3RV29 28-1K
Phase barriers
For extended clearance and S00, S0 — 3RV29 28-1K 1 unit
creepage distances S2 — 3RV29 38-1K 1 unit
(1 and 2 inch)
3RT1946-4GA07 Actuating Size 3RV motor Classic Innovations

voltage of 3RT starter 3RV1/3RT1 3RV2/3RT2 Order
contactor contactor protector Order No. Order No. Quantity
Link modules for motor starter protector to contactor 1)

For mechanical and electrical connection between
motor starter protector and contactor with screw Screw Terminals
terminals.
Single-unit packaging
AC/DC S00 S00/S0 — 3RA19 21-1DA00 1 unit
AC S0 S00/S0 — 3RA29 21-1AA00 1 unit
AC S2 S2 3RA19 31-1AA00 3RA29 31-1AA00 1 unit
AC S3 S3 3RA19 41-1AA00 — 1 unit
DC S0 S00/S0 — 3RA29 21-1BA00 1 unit
DC S2 S2 3RA19 31-1BA00 3RA29 31-1AA00 1 unit
3RA29 21-1AA00 DC S3 S3 3RA19 41-1BA00 — 1 unit
Multi-unit packaging
AC/DC S00 S00/S0 — 3RA19 21-1D 10 units
AC S0 S00/S0 — 3RA29 21-1A 10 units
DC S0 S00/S0 — 3RA29 21-1B 10 units
AC/DC S2 S2 — 3RA29 31-1A 5 units
For mechanical and electrical connection between motor starter

protector and contactor with spring-type terminals. Spring-type Terminals
AC/DC S00 S00 — 3RA29 11-2AA00 1 unit
2)
AC S0 S0 — 3RA29 21-2AA00 1 unit
3RA29 11-2AA00 DC S0 S0 — 3RA29 21-2AA00 1 unit
AC/DC S00 S00 — 3RA29 11-2A 10 units
2)
AC S0 S0 — 3RA29 21-2A 10 units
DC S0 S0 — 3RA29 21-2A 10 units
Spacers
For compensating height on AC contactors
Single-unit packaging S0 S0 — 3RA29 11-1CA00 1 unit
Multi-unit packaging S0 S0 — 3RA29 11-1C 5 units
1) The link modules for motor starter protector to contactor cannot be used for the 3RV2. Note
21-4PA1., 3RV2. 21-4FA1., 3RV27 and 3RV28 motor starter protectors Size S0 link modules can be used up to max. 32 A.
2) A spacer for height compensation on AC contactors size S0 is optionally available Size S2 link modules can be used up to 65A max.

LV1N_05_04.fm Page 30 Friday, September 27, 2013 2:28 PM

SIRIUS
SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers up toAccessories
04/20/15 40 A
Accessories Mounting accessories
Size Order No. PU PS* Weight

3RW30, 3RW40 3RV2 (UNIT, approx.
soft starters; motor starter protectors SET, M)
3RF34
solid-state contactors
kg
Link modules for motor starter protector to soft starter1) 3) and
motor starter protector to solid-state contactor
Connection between motor starter protector and soft Screw terminals
starter / solid-state contactor with screw terminals
S00 S00/S0 3RA29 21-1BA00 1 1 unit 0.068
S0 S00/S0 3RA29 21-1BA00 1 1 unit 0.068
S2 3) S2 3RA29 31-1AA00 1 1 unit 0.104
S00 S00/S0 3RA29 21-1B 1 10 units 0.068
S0 S00/S0 3RA29 21-1B 1 10 units 0.068
3RA29 21-1BA00
S2 3) S2 3RA29 31-1A 1 5 units 0.104
Connection between motor starter protector and Spring-type
soft starter with spring-type terminals terminals
S00 S00 3RA29 11-2GA00 1 1 unit 0.038
S0 S0 3RA29 21-2GA00 1 1 unit 0.072
S00 S00 3RA29 11-2G 1 10 units 0.380
3RA29 21-2GA00 S0 S0 3RA29 21-2G 1 10 units 0.720
1) The link modules for motor starter protector to soft starter and for motor Note:
5
starter protector to solid-state contactor cannot be used for the S0 link modules can be used up to max. 32 A.
3RV2. 21-4PA1., 3RV2. 21-4FA1., 3RV27 and 3RV28 motor starter
protectors. S2 link modules can be used up to max. 65 A.
Actuating voltage of Size Order No. PU PS* Weight

contactor 3RT2 3RV2 (UNIT, approx.
contactors motor SET, M)
starter
protectors
kg
Hybrid link modules for motor starter protector to contactor1)
For mechanical and electrical connection
between motor starter protector with screw terminals
and contactor with spring-type terminals
AC/DC S00 S00 3RA29 11-2FA00 1 1 unit 0.029
AC2)/DC S0 S0 3RA29 21-2FA00 1 1 unit 0.056
3RA29 11-2FA00
AC/DC S00 S00 3RA29 11-2F 1 10 units 0.290
AC2)/DC S0 S0 3RA29 21-2F 1 10 units 0.560
Spacers2)
for compensating the height on AC contactors
Single-unit packaging S0 S0 3RA29 11-1CA00 1 1 unit 0.001
Multi-unit packaging S0 S0 3RA29 11-1C 1 5 units 0.001
3RA29 21-2FA00
1) The hybrid link modules for motor starter protector to contactor cannot be Note:
used for the 3RV2. 21-4PA1., 3RV2. 21-4FA1., 3RV27 and 3RV28 motor Hybrid link modules can be used up to max. 32 A.
starter protectors or reversing starters.
2) A spacer for height compensation on AC contactors size S0 is optionally
available. See 3RA2911-1CA00
3) To assemble the starter between a motor starter protector and a soft starter
in size S2, the 3RA2932-1AC00 standard mounting rail adapter must be used.

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

5/30 SIRIUS Innovations Supplement 2012 Illustrations are approximate
Weight
For SIRIUS Order approx.
Type Design MSP size Order No. Quantity (kg)
Isolator module 1)
3RV2938-1A 3RV29 28-1A Visible isolating distance for S00, S0 3RV29 28-1A 1 unit 0.132
without padlock without padlock
isolating individual motor starter
protectors from the network,
1)
lockable in isolating position. S2 3RV29 38-1A 1 unit 0.368
Auxiliary terminal, 3 pole

3RT19 46-4F For connection of auxiliary S3 3RT19 46-4F 1 unit 0.10
and control cables to the main
conductor connections
Covers
3RV1 (size S3) with
3RT19 46-4EA1 Terminal cover Additional touch guard
for box terminals to be fitted at the box terminals S2 3RT29 36-4EA2 1 unit 0.014
(2 units can be mounted per MSP)
S3 3RT19 46-4EA2 1 unit 0.019
3RV29 28-4AA00 Terminal cover For maintaining the required

for cable lug and voltage clearance and as protection S3 3RT19 46-4EA1 1 unit 0.03
bar connection against the equipment being touched
if distant box terminals are used
(2 units can be mounted per MSP)
3RV29 08-4AA10
Terminal cover
2)
for devices with ring lug • Main current level S00, S0 3RV29 28-4AA00 1 unit 0.01
terminal connection 2)
• For transverse auxiliary switches S00, S0 3RV29 08-4AA10 1 unit 0.01
3RV29 08-0P Scale cover For covering the current setting
3)
scale. Packing unit: Bag with 10 S00, S0, S2 3RV29 08-0P 10 units
scale covers. S3 3RV19 08-0P 10 units
Fixing Material
3RB1900-0B Push-in lugs Two units are required for
For screwing the each motor starter protector. S00 3RB19 00-0B 10 units 0.10
motor starter protector
onto mounting plates.
Tools for opening spring-type terminals by hand

3RA29 08-1A Screwdriver Length approx. 200 mm,
For all SIRIUS 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm, S00, S0, 3RA29 08-1A 1 unit 0.045
devices with spring titanium gray/black S2
terminals partially insulated
1) The isolator module for size S2 can be used only with 3RV2 motor 2) Compatible with 3RV20 motor starter protectors.
starter protectors/circuit breakers up to max. 65 A. Similarly, it cannot
3) Compatible with 3RV20, 3RV21, and 3RV24 motor
be used with the transverse auxiliary switch or three-phase busbars.
starter protectors.

SIRIUS 04/20/15 Accessories
Rotary operating mechanisms
For SIRIUS Approx.

Type Details MSP size Order No. Wt. (kg)
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for Classic and Innovations
3RV29 26-0B The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist of a knob, a coupling driver and a 130/330 mm long
extension shaft (6 mm x 6 mm). The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms are designed to degree of
protection IP65. The door locking device prevents accidental opening of the control cabinet door in the ON
postion of the motor starter protector. The OFF position can be locked with up to 3 padlocks.
Door-coupling rotary Extension shaft 130 mm S00, S0 3RV29 26-0B 0.111
operating mechanisms S2, S3 3RV29 26-0B 0.1
(black)
Extension shaft 330 mm S00, S0 3RV29 26-0K 0.324
S2, S3 3RV29 26-0K 0.3
EMERGENCY STOP Extension shaft 130 mm S00, S0 3RV29 26-0C 0.110
door-coupling rotary S2, S3 3RV29 26-0C 0.1
operating mechanisms
Extension shaft 330 mm S00, S0 3RV29 26-0L 0.316
(red/yellow)
S2, S3 3RV29 26-0L 0.3
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for arduous conditions
3RV29 26-2C The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist of a knob, a coupling driver, an extension shaft of 300 mm
length (8 mm x 8 mm), a spacer and two metal brackets, into which the MSP is is inserted. The door-coupling rotary
operating mechanisms are designed for degree of protection IP 65. The door locking device reliably prevents accidental
opening of the control cabinet door in the ON position of the MSP. The OFF postion can be locked with up to 3
padlocks. Laterally mountable auxiliary releases and two-pole auxiliary switches can be used. The door-coupling rotary
operating mechanisms thus meet the requirements for isolating functions according to IEC 60 947-2.
Door-coupling rotary S00, S0 3RV29 26-2B 1.2
operating mechanisms S2 3RV29 36-2B 1.6
(gray)
S3 3RV29 46-2B 1.7
EMERGNCY STOP door-coupling S00, S0 3RV29 26-2C 1.2
rotary operating mechanisms S2 3RV29 36-2C 1.5
(red/yellow)
S3 3RV29 46-2C 1.7
Enclosures and front plates
For SIRIUS Approx.

Type Details MSP size Order No. Wt. (kg)
Front Plates
3RV19 23-4B Molded-plastic front plate For actuation of 3RV MSP’s in any S00, S0 3RV19 23-4B 0.08
+ 3RV19 23-4G
with rotary operating mechanism, enclosure, degree of protection IP 55 S2, S3
lockable. For actuation of 3RV motor (front plate)
starter protectors in any enclosure
Molded-plastic front plate with EMERGENCY-STOP operation of S00, S0 3RV19 23-4E 0.08
EMERGENCY STOP 3RV MSP’s in any enclosure, degree of S2, S3
door-coupling rotary operating protection IP 55
mechanisms (red/yellow)
Holders for front plates Holder is mounted on front plate, MSP size S00 S00, S0 3RV19 23-4G 0.19
or S0 with or without accessories is snapped in
Enclosures for wall mounting 2)
3RV19 23-1CA00 Molded-plastic enclosure for Degree of protection IP 55, with N and PE
wall mounting terminals, lockable in 0 position
with rotary operating mechanism, overall width:
lockable, with metric cable gland 54 mm (for switch + lateral auxiliary switch) S00, S0 3RV19 23-1CA00 0.26
72 mm (for switch + lateral auxiliary switch S00, S0 3RV19 23-1DA00 0.30
+ auxiliary release)
1)
Cast aluminum surface-mount Degree of protection IP 65, with PE terminals,
enclosure lockable in 0 position
3RV19 23-1DA01 with rotary operating mechanism, overall width:
lockable, with metric cable gland 72 mm (for MSP + lateral auxiliary switch S00, S0 3RV19 23-1DA01 1.02
+ auxiliary release)
1)
Cast aluminum surface-mount Degree of protection IP 65, with PE terminals,
enclosure lockable in 0 position
with EMERGENCY-OFF rotary overall width:
operating mechanism, red/yellow, 72 mm (for MSP + lateral auxiliary switch S00, S0 3RV19 23-1GA01 1.01
lockable, with metric cable gland + auxiliary release)
1) If required, an additional N terminal can be mounted (e.g. 8WA10 11-1BG11). 2) For S2 versions, see 3RV1933-1DA00 (black) or 3RV1933-1GA00 (red/yellow)

3RV Motor
SIRIUS Starter
3RV2 Motor Protectors
Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers up• to 40 A
• Revised
Accessories
3RV29 infeed system
3RV29 infeed system
Overview
The 3RV29 infeed system is a convenient means of energy The electrical connection between the three-phase busbars and
supply and distribution for a group of several motor starter the motor starter protectors is implemented through plug-in
protectors or complete motor starters with a screw or spring- connectors. The complete system can be mounted on a TH 35
type connection in sizes S00 and S0 (exception: this system standard mounting rail to EN 60715 and can be expanded as
cannot be used for the 3RV21, 3RV27 and 3RV28 motor starter required up to a maximum current carrying capacity of 63 A.
protectors/circuit breakers).
The system is mounted extremely quickly and easily thanks to
The 3RV29 infeed system is approved in accordance with the simple plug-in technique. Thanks to the lateral infeed, the
IEC to 500V. It is also UL approved and authorized for “Self- system also saves space in the control cabinet. The additional
Protected Combination Motor Controller” (Type E starter) as overall height required for the infeed unit is only 30 mm. The
well as for Type F starter (Type E starter + contactor). The alternative infeed possibilities on each side offer a high degree
system is based on a basic module complete with a lateral of flexibility for configuring the control cabinet: Infeed on left-
incoming unit (three-phase busbar with infeed). This infeed with hand or right-hand side as well as infeed on one side and out-
spring-type terminals is mounted on the right or left depending feed on the other side to supply further loads are all possible.
on the version and can be supplied with a maximum conductor A terminal block with spring-type connections in combination
cross-section of 4 AWG (with end sleeve). A basic module has with a standard mounting rail enables the integration of not only
two sockets onto each of which a motor starter protector can SIRIUS motor starter protectors but also single-phase, 2-phase
be snapped. and 3-phase components such as 5SY miniature circuit breakers
Expansion modules are available for extending the system or SIRIUS relay components.
(three-phase busbars for system expansion). The individual
modules are connected through an expansion plug.
3b
5
5
3a
5
6
NSB0_02078
1 3-phase busbar with infeed 4 End cover

2 3-phase busbar for system expansion 5 Plug-in connector
3a Expansion plug 6 Contactor base
3b Extra-wide expansion plug 7 Terminal block
3RV29 infeed system

SIRIUS Innovations Supplement 2012 5/23
3RV Motor Breakers
SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Starter Protectors
up toAccessories
40 A
SIRIUS
Accessories
3RV29 infeed system
3RV29 infeed system
$ Three-phase busbars with infeed * Contactor base
A three-phase busbar with infeed unit is required for connecting Motor starters can be assembled in the system using the contac-
the energy supply. This module comprises one infeed module tor base. The contactor bases are suitable for contactors sizes
and 2 sockets which each accept one motor starter protector. A S00 and S0 with spring-type and screw terminals and are simply
choice of two versions with infeed on the left or right is available. snapped onto the three-phase busbars. Direct-on-line starters
The infeed is connected using spring-type terminals. The and reversing starters are possible. One contactor base is re-
spring-type terminals permit conductor cross-sections of up to quired for direct-on-line starters and two are required for revers-
25 mm2 with end sleeves. An end cover is supplied with each ing starters.
module.
To assemble motor starters for reversing starters, the contactor
% Three-phase busbars for system expansion bases can be arranged alongside each other (90 mm overall
width). In this case the mechanical interlocking of the contactors
The three-phase busbars for system expansion allow the system is possible. The contactor bases are also suitable for soft start-
to be expanded. There is a choice of modules with 2 or 3 sock- ers size S00 and S0 with screw connection.
ets. The system can be expanded as required up to a maximum
current carrying capacity of 63 A. An expansion plug is supplied The infeed system is designed for mounting on a 35 mm stan-
with each module. dard mounting rail with 7.5 mm overall depth. This standard
mounting rail gives the contactor base a stable mounting sur-
&a Expansion plug face to sit on. If standard mounting rails with a depth of 15 mm
are used, the spacer connected to the bottom of the contactor
The expansion plug is used for electrical connection of adjacent base must be knocked out and plugged into the mating piece
three-phase busbars. The current carrying capacity of this plug that is also on the underside. Then the contactor base also has
equals 63 A. One expansion plug is supplied with each three- a stable mounting surface. When standard mounting rails with a
phase busbar for system expansion. Additional expansion plugs depth of 7.5 mm are used, the spacer has no function and can
are therefore only required as spare parts. be removed.
&b Extra-wide expansion plug The link modules are used for direct start motor starters, in which
The wide expansion plug makes the electrical connection be- case the use of a contactor base is not absolutely necessary.
tween two three-phase busbars, thus performing the same func- Motor starter protector and contactor assemblies can then be di-
tion as the 3RV29 17-5BA00 expansion plug; the electrical char- rectly snapped onto the sockets of the three-phase busbars. For
acteristics (e.g. a current carrying capacity of 63 A) are starters of size S00 and S0, the corresponding 3RA19 21-1....,
5
identical. 3RA29 11-2...., 3RA29 21-1.... or 3RA29 21-2.... link modules

should generally be used.
The 3RV29 17-5E expansion plug is 10 mm wider than the
3RV29 17-5BA00 expansion plug, hence in the plugged state + Terminal block
there is a distance of 10 mm between the connected three- The 3RV29 17-5D terminal block enables the integration of not
phase busbars. This distance can be used to lay the auxiliary only SIRIUS motor starter protectors but also single-phase,
current and control current wiring ("wiring duct"). The motor 2-phase and 3-phase components. Using the terminal block the
starter protector and contactor can be wired from underneath, 3 phases can be fed out of the system; which means that single-
which means that the complete cable duct above the system phase loads can also be integrated in the system. The terminal
can be omitted. block is plugged into the slot of the expansion plug and thus en-
ables outfeeding from the middle or end of the infeed system.
( End cover The terminal block can be rotated through 180° and be locked
The end cover is used to cover the three-phase busbar at the to the support modules of the infeed system. The 3RV19 17-7B
open end of the system. This cover is therefore only required 45 mm standard mounting rail for screwing onto the support
once for each system. An end cover is supplied with each three- plate is available in addition in order to be able to plug the sin-
phase busbar system with infeed. Further end covers are there- gle-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase components onto the infeed
fore only required as spare parts. system.
) Plug-in connector
The plug-in connector is used for the electrical connection be-
tween the three-phase busbar and the 3RV2 motor starter pro-
tector. These plug-in connectors are available in versions for
screw or spring-type terminals.

5/24 SIRIUS Innovations Supplement 2012
3RV Motor
SIRIUS Starter
3RV2 Motor Protectors
Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers up• to 40 A
• Revised
Accessories
3RV29 infeed system
3RV29 infeed system

Type Version For 3RV20, Order No. Standard Weight
3RV23, Pack approx.
3RV24 Quantity
motor
starter
protectors
Size kg
Three-phase busbars with infeed
3-phase For 2 motor starter
busbars with protectors with
infeed screw connection or
incl. end cover spring-type
3RV29 17-6A terminals
• With infeed on the S00, S0 3RV29 17-1A 1 unit 0.369
left
• With infeed on the S00, S0 3RV29 17-1E 1 unit 0.369
right
3RV29 17-1A
Three-phase busbars for system expansion
Three-phase For motor starter
busbars protectors with
incl. 3RV29 17- screw connection or
5BA00 expansion spring-type
plug terminals
• For 2 motor starter S00, S0 3RV29 17-4A 1 unit 0.229
protectors
• For 3 motor starter S00, S0 3RV29 17-4B 1 unit 0.328
protectors
5
3RV29 17-4A
Plug-in connectors
Plug-in • For spring-type Spring-type
connectors terminals terminals
to make contact - Single-unit S001) 3RV29 17-5AA00 1 unit 0.046
with the motor packaging S02) 3RV29 27-5AA00 1 unit 0.059
starter protectors
- Multi-unit S001) 3RV29 17-5A 10 units 0.046
packaging S02) 3RV29 27-5A 10 units 0.059
3RV29 17-5AA00
• For screw Screw terminals
terminals
- Single-unit S001) 3RV29 17-5CA00 1 unit 0.029
packaging S02) 3RV19 27-5AA00 1 unit 0.040
- Multi-unit S001) 3RV29 17-5C 10 units 0.029
packaging 2) 3RV19 27-5A 10 units 0.036
S0
3RV29 17-5CA00
Type Version For Order No. Standard Weight

contactors Pack approx.
Quantity
Size kg
Contactor bases
Contactor bases Single-unit S00 3RV29 17-7AA00 1 unit 0.042
for mounting packaging
direct-on-line or S00, S0 3RV29 27-7AA00 1 unit 0.050
reversing starters
3RV29 27-7AA00
1) I > 14 A, note derating; see the system manual "SIRIUS Innovations",
Chapter "Motor Starter Protectors".
2) I > 16 A, note derating; see the system manual "SIRIUS Innovations",
Chapter "Motor Starter Protectors".

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Industrial Controls Catalog
Illustrations are approximate SIRIUS Innovations Supplement 2012 5/25
3RV Motor Breakers
SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Starter Protectors
up to 40 A
SIRIUS
Accessories Accessories
3RV29 infeed system
3RV29 infeed system
Type Version Order No. Standard Weight

Pack approx.
Quantity
kg
Terminal blocks
Terminal blocks Single-unit packaging 3RV29 17-5D 1 unit 0.049
For integration of
single-phase, two-phase
and three-phase
components
3RV29 17-5D
45 mm standard mounting rails
45 mm standard Single-unit packaging 3RV19 17-7B 1 unit 0.261
mounting rails
for mounting onto
bus bar adapters
3RV19 17-7B
Extra-wide expansion plugs
Extra-wide expansion Single-unit packaging 3RV29 17-5E 1 unit 0.037
plugs as accessory
3RV29 17-5E
Expansion plugs
5
Expansion plugs1) Single-unit packaging 3RV29 17-5BA00 1 unit 0.026

as spare part
3RV29 17-5BA00
End covers
End covers2) Multi-unit packaging 3RV29 17-6A 10 units 0.005
as spare part
3RV29 17-6A
1) The expansion plug is included in the scope of supply of the 3RV29 17-4
three-phase busbars for system expansion.
2) The end cover is included in the scope of supply of the 3RV29 17-1 three-
phase busbars with infeed system.

Industrial Controls Catalog * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
General Data 10/25/15 SIRIUS
3RV up to 100 A
(Domestic applications)
Permissible rated data of devices approved for North America (UL/CSA)
Permissible rated data of devices approved for North America (UL/CSA)
Motor starter protectors of the 3RV2 series are approved for These motor starter protectors can be used as "Manual Motor
Motor starter protectors of the 3RV2 series are approved for These motor starter protectors can be used as "Manual Motor
UL/CSA, and according to UL508/UL 60947-4-1 and CSA C22.2 Controllers" for "Group Installations", as "Manual Motor Control-
UL/CSA, and according to UL508/UL 60947-4-1 and CSA C22.2 Controllers" for "Group Installations", as "Manual Motor Control-
No. 14/CSA C22.2 No. 60947-4-1 they can be used on their own lers Suitable
Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations"
No. 14/CSA C22.2 No. 60947-4-1 they can be used on their own lers for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations"
and as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers" (Type E).
or as load feeders in combination with a contactor. and as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers" (Type E).
or as load feeders in combination with a contactor.
3RV motor starter protectors as "Manual Motor Controllers"

3RV motor starter protectors as "Manual Motor Controllers"
If used as a "Manual Motor Controller", the motor starter protector Approval of the 3RV as a Manual Motor Controller can be found
If used as a "Manual Motor Controller", the motor starter protector Approval of the 3RV as a Manual Motor Controller can be found
is always operated in combination with an upstream short-circuit under the following file numbers:
is always operated in combination with an upstream short-circuit under the following file numbers:
protection device. Approved fuses or a circuit breaker accord- • UL File No. 47705, CCN: NLRV,
protection device. Approved fuses or a circuit breaker accord- • UL File No. 47705, CCN: NLRV,
ing to UL 489/CSA C22.2 No. 5 can be used. These devices
ing to UL 489/CSA C22.2 No. 5 can be used. These devices • CSA Master Contract 165071, Product Class: 3211 05.
must be dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code • CSA Master Contract 165071, Product Class: 3211 05.
must be dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code
(UL) or Canadian Electrical Code (CSA).
(UL) or Canadian Electrical Code (CSA).
1)
Motor starter hp rating1) for FLA2) Rated current 240 V AC 480 V AC 600 V AC
Motor starter
protectors hp rating for FLA2)
max. Rated
I current 240 V AC 480 V AC 600 V AC
protectors max. Inn UL/CSA
UL/CSA
UL/CSA
UL/CSA
UL/CSA
UL/CSA
Ibc3)
3) Ibc3)
3) Ibc3)
3)
Ibc Ibc Ibc
Type V 1-phase 3-phase A kA kA kA
Size S00
Size S00
0.16 ... 2 65 65 30
3RV2011, 3RV2111, 3RV2311, 3RV2411 0.16 ... 2 65 65 30
3RV2011, 3RV2111, 3RV2311, 3RV2411 2.5 65 65 30
2.5 65
65 65
65 30
FLA2) max. 115 1 2 3.2 30
3.2 65 65 30
FLA2) max. 115
200 1
2 2
3 4 65 65 30
16 A,480 V 200 2 3 4 65 65 30
16 A,480 V 5 65 65 30
12.5 A, 600 V 230 2 5 5 65 65 30
12.5 A, 600 V 230 2 5 6.3 65 65 30
460 -- 10 6.3 65 65 30
460
575/600 --
-- 10
10 8 65 65 30
575/600 -- 10 8 65 65 30
30
10 65 65
10 65 65 30
30
12.5 65 65
12.5
16 65
65 65 30
—
65 —
16 65 65
Size S0
Size S0
3RV2021, 3RV2121, 3RV2321, 3RV2421 0.16 ... 12.5 65 65 30
3RV2021, 3RV2121, 3RV2321, 3RV2421 0.16
16 ......
2512.5 65
65 65
65 30 4)
--/(30)4)
2)
FLA2) max. 115 3 5 16
28,...3225 65
65 65
50 --/(30)
--
FLA max. 115
200 3
5 5
10 28,
36, 32
40 65
65 50
12 --
--
40 A, 480 V 200 5 10 36, 40 65 12 --
40 A, 480 V 230 7 1/2 10
230
460 7
-- 1/2 10
30
460
575/600 --
-- 30
--
575/600 -- --
Size S2 3RV2031 3RV2032 3RV2031 3RV2032 3RV2031 3RV2032
14 65 100 65 100 25 25
3RV2031, 3RV2131, 3RV2331, 3RV2032, 3RV2332 17 65 100 65 100 25 25
20 65 100 65 100 25 25
FLA 2) MAX. 65A 115/120 5 10 25 65 100 65 100 25 25
600V 200/208 10 20 32 65 100 65 100 25 25
NEMA size 2 230/240 15 25 36 65 100 65 100 25 25
460/480 — 50 40 65 100 65 100 22 22
575/600 — 60 45 65 100 65 100 22 22
52 65 100 65 100 22 22
a) with max 225A Class J fuse 59 65 a) 100 a) 65 a) 100 a) 20 a) 25 a)
b) with max 250A Class J fuse 65 65 b) 100 b) 65 b) 100 b) 20 b) 25 b)
Size S3
Size S3
3RV10 41/3RV10 42, 3RV11 42, 3RV13 41/3RV13 42 16 65 65 30
3RV10 41/3RV10 42, 3RV11 42, 3RV13 41/3RV13 42 16
20 65
65 65
65 30
30
2) max. 99 A,
FLA2) 115 7 1/2 -- 20
25 65
65 65
65 30
30
FLA
600 V max. 99 A, 115
200 7
201/2 --
30 25 65 65 30
600 V 200 20 30 32 65 65 30
NEMA size 3 230 20 40 32
40 65
65 65
65 30
30
NEMA size 3 230
460 20
-- 40
75 40
50 65
65 65
65 30
30
460
575/600 --
-- 75
100 50 65 65 30
575/600 -- 100 63 65 65 30
63
75 65
65 65
65 30
30
75
90 65
65 65
65 30
10
90
100 65
65 65
65 10
10
100 65 65 10
1)
1) hp rating = Power rating in horse power (maximum motor rating).
2)
hp rating = Power rating in horse power (maximum motor rating).
2) FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current.
3)
FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current.
3) Corresponds to "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL/CSA.
4)
Corresponds to "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL/CSA.
4) The values in brackets only apply to 3RV2.23 motor starter protectors.
The values in brackets only apply to 3RV2.23 motor starter protectors.

SIRIUS 10/25/15 General Data
3RV up to 100 A
3RV motor starter protectors as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations"
The application as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap protector according to UL 489 can be used.
Conductor Protection in Group Installations" is only available These devices must be dimensioned according to the National
from UL. Electrical Code.
CSA does not
3RV motor recognize
starter this as
protectors approval!
"ManualWhen Motorthe motor starter
Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations"
protector is used as a "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap The 3RV motor starter protectors are approved as "Manual
The application
Conductor as "Manual
Protection Motor
in Group Controllers itSuitable
Installations", for Tap
must always be Motor Controllers
protector accordingSuitable for Tap
to UL 489 canConductor
be used. Protection in
Conductor
combined withProtection in Group
upstream Installations"
short-circuit is only
protection. Asavailable
short-cir- Group Installations"
These devices mustunder the following
be dimensioned file number:
according to the National
from UL.
cuit-protection device, approved fuses or a motor starter •Electrical
UL File Code.
No. 47705, CCN: NLRV.
CSA does not recognize this approval! When the motor starter
protector is used as a "ManualhpMotor The 3RV motor starter protectors are approved as "Manual
Motor starter ratingController
1) for FLA2) Suitable for Tap
Rated 240 V AC
Motor Up tofor
Controllers Suitable 480Y/277V AC
Tap Conductor UpProtection
to 600Y/347V
in AC
Conductor
protectors Protection in Group Installations", it must always
max. In
current be
combined with upstream short-circuit protection. As short-cir- Group
UL Installations" under
UL the following file ULnumber:
cuit-protection device, approved fuses or a motor starter I•bcUL
3)
Ibc3) NLRV.
File No. 47705, CCN: Ibc3)
Type V 1-phase 1) 3-phase2) A kA kA kA

Motor starter hp rating for FLA Rated 240 V AC Up to 480Y/277V AC Up to 600Y/347V AC
Size S00
protectors max. current In
UL UL UL
3RV20 11 0.16 ... 0.8 65 3) 65 3) 30 3)
1 I65
bc Ibc
65 I30
bc
FLA2) max.16 A, 115/120 1 2 1.25 65 65 30
Type
480 Y / 277 V V
200/208 1-phase
2 3-phase
3 A kA kA kA
2 65 65 30
Size S00
NEMA size 0 230/240 2 5 2.5 65 65 30
3RV20 11 460/480 -- 10 3.2 ... 0.8
0.16 65 65 30
575/600 -- 10 1
4 65
65 65
65 30
30
FLA2) max.16 A, 115/120 1 2 1.25
5 65
65 65
65 30
30
480 Y / 277 V 200/208 2 3 6.3
2 65 65 30
NEMA size 0 230/240 2 5 8
2.5 65 65 30
460/480 -- 10 16
3.2 65 65 —
30
Size S0 575/600 -- 10 4 65 65 30
3RV20 21 5
0.63 ... 1.6 65
65 65
65 30
30
6.3
2 65
65 65
65 30
30
2)
FLA max. 115/120 2 5 8
2.5 65
65 65
65 30
30
200/208 3 7.5 16 65 65 —
25 A, 480 Y / 277 V 3.2 65 65 30
Size S0
12.5 A, 600 V 230/240 3 10 4 65 65 30
3RV20 21 460/480 3 20 5
0.63 ... 1.6 65 65 30
NEMA size 1 575/600 — — 2
6.3 65
65 65
65 30
30
FLA2) max. 115/120 2 5 2.5
8 65
65 65
65 30
30
25 A, 480 Y / 277 V 200/208 3 7.5 10
3.2 65 65 30
12.5 A, 600 V 230/240 3 10 12.5
4 65 65 30
460/480 3 20 25
5 65 65 —
30
NEMA size 1 575/600 — — 32
6.3 50
65 50
65 —
30
Size
Size S2S2 8 65
3RV2031 3RV2032 65
3RV2031 3RV2032 30
3RV2031 3RV2032
10 65 65 30
3RV10 31 1614 65 100 65 100 25 25
12.5 65 65 30
3RV2031, 3RV2032, 3RV2431 2017 65 100 65 100 25 25
FLA2) max. 115 3 -- 25
25 65
65 65
65 —
25
50 3220 65
50 100 65
50 100 25
— 25
FLAA,2)600
MAX.V 65A 200115/120 751/2 1510 3225 65 100 65 100 25 25
Size S2
NEMA
600V size 2 230200/208 10 10 2020 4032 65
65 100 65
65 100 25
25 25
3RV10 31 2
NEMA size 460230/240 --15 4025 4536
16 65
65 100 65
65 100 25
25 25
575/600 -- 50 50
20 65 65 25
2) max. 460/480 — 50 40 65 100 65 100 22 22
Size S3
FLA 115 3 -- 25 65 65 25
50 A, 600 V 200575/600 7— 1/2 1560 45 65 100 65 100 22 22
3RV10 4. 32
1652 65
65 65
65 25
30
65 100 65 100 22 22
NEMA size 2 230 10 20 40
20 65
65 65
65 25
30
460 -- 1/2 40 4559 65
65 100 30
65 42 --
25 --
FLA2) max. 115/120 7 -- 25 65 65 30
575/600
200/208 --
20 50
30 5065 65 100 65
30 42 25
-- --
100 A, 480 V 32 65 65 30
Size
75 S3 V
A, 600 230/240 20 40 40 65 65 30
3RV10 4. 460/480 -- 75 50
16 65 65 30
NEMA size 3 575/600 -- 75 20
63 65
65 65
65 30
30
FLA2) max. 115/120 7 1/2 -- 25
75 65
65 65
65 30
30
100 A, 480 V 200/208 20 30 90
32 65 65 --
30
75 A, 600 V 230/240 20 40 100
40 65 65 --
30
460/480 -- 75 50 65 65 30
NEMA
1) size 3 575/600 -- 75
63 65 65 30
2)
FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current. 75 65 65 30
3) 90 65 65 --
Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL.
100 65 65 --
1)
2) FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current.
3) Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL.

3RV up to 100 A
3RV motor starter protectors as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers (Type E)"
UL 508/UL 60947-4-1 approval demands 1-inch clearance and when the device is used as a “Self-Protected Combination Motor
2-inch creepage distance at line side for “Self-Protected Combination Controller”.
3RV motor
Motor starter
Controller protectors
Type E”. as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers (Type E)"
The 3RV20 motor starter protectors are approved as “Self-Protected
Therefore, 3RV20 motor starter protectors of sizes S00 to S2 are Combination Motor Controllers” under the following file numbers:
approved according to UL 508/UL 60947-4-1 in combination with the • UL File No. E156943, CCN: NKJH
terminal blocks listed below.
• CSA Master Contract 165071, Product Class: 3211 08
CSA does not require these extended clearances and creepage
distances. According to CSA, these terminal blocks can be omitted
Motor starter hp rating1) for FLA2) Rated current Up to 240 V AC Up to 480 Y/277 V AC Up to 600 Y/347 V AC
protectors max. In UL/CSA Ibc3) UL/CSA Ibc3) UL/CSA Ibc3)
Size S00
Motor starter hp rating1) for FLA2) Rated current Up to 240 V AC Up to 480 Y/277 V AC Up to 600 Y/347 V AC
protectors max. In UL/CSA Ibc3) UL/CSA Ibc3) Ibc3)
3RV2011 + 3RV29 28-1H4) 5) 0.16 ... 12.5 65 65 UL/CSA
30
Type2) V 1-phase 3-phase A
16 kA
65 kA
65 kA
—
FLA max. 16 A 115 1 2
Size S00
480 V 200 2 3
3RV2011 + 3RV29 28-1H4) 5) 0.16 ... 12.5 65 65 30
NEMA size 0 230 2 5
16 65 65 —
FLA2) max. 16 A 230
115 —
1 10
2
480 V 575/600
200 —
2 10
3
Size S0
NEMA size 0 230 2 5
3RV2021 + 3RV29 28-1H2304) 5) — 10 0.63 ... 1.6 65 65 30
575/600 — 10 2 65 65 30
2) 2.5 65 65 30
FLA
Size S0max. 115 2 5
25 A, 480 V 2004) 5) 3 7.5 3.2 65 65 30
3RV2021 + 3RV29
12.5 A, 600 V 28-1H
230 3 10 0.63
4 ... 1.6 65
65 65
65 30
30
2 65
65 65
65 30
2) 460 — 20 5 30
FLA max. 115 2 5 2.5 65 65 30
NEMA size 1 575/600 — — 6.3 65 65 30
25 A, 480 V 200 3 7.5 3.2 65 65 30
8 65 65 30
12.5 A, 600 V 230 3 10 4 65
65 65
65 30
10 30
460 — 20 5 65 65 30
NEMA size 1 575/600 — — 12.5 65 65 30
6.3 65
65 65
65 30
—
16
8 65
65 65
65 30
20 —
10 65
65 65
65 30
—
22
12.5
25 65 65 30
—
16
32 65
50 65
50 —
20 65 65 —
Size S2 22 65
3RV2031 3RV2032 65
3RV2031 3RV2032 —
3RV2031 3RV2032
25
14 65
65 100 6565 100 —
25 25
Size S2 32 50 50 —
3RV2031/3RV2032 + 3RV2938-1K 4) 17 65 100 65 100 25 25
3RV2031/3RV2032 + 3RV2938 16 65 65 25
20
20 6565 100 6565 100 25
25 25
FLA 2)
2) MAX. 65A 115/120 5 10 25
25 6565 100 6565 100 25
25 25
Size S2
FLA
600V
max. 115
200/208
3
10
--
20 32 65 100 65 100 25 25
50 A, 600 V 200 7 1/2 15 32 65 65 25
3RV2031/3RV2032
NEMA
NEMA size
size 22 + 3RV2938
230/240
230 15
10 25
20 16
36
40 65
6565 100 65
6565 100 25
25
25 25
460/480
460 —
-- 50
40 20
40
45 65
6565 100 65
6565 100 25
22
25 22
2)
FLA max. 115
575/600 3
-- --
50 25
50 65 65 25
575/600 — 60 45 6565 100 6565 100 25
22 22
50 A, 600 15
Size S3 V 200 7 1/2 32
52 6565 100 6565 100 25
22 22
NEMA size 2 230 10 20 40 65 65 25
3RV1041 + 3RT1946-4GA07 4) 59
16 6565 100 2065 30 —30 —
460 -- 40 45 25
575/600 -- 50 20
65
50 6565 100 2065 30 —30
25 —
2) 25 65 65 30
Size S3
FLA max. 115 10 --
100 A, 480 V 200 4) 20 30 32 65 65 30
3RV1041 + 3RT1946-4GA07
230 20 40 16
40 65
65 65
65 30
30
75 A, 600 V 20 65 65 30
460 -- 75 50 65 65 30
FLA2) max.
NEMA size 3 115
575/600 10
-- --
75 25 65 65 30
200 20 30 63 65 65 30
100 A, 480 V 32
75 65
65 65
65 30
30
75 A, 600 V 230 20 40 40
90 65
65 65
65 30
—
460 -- 75 50
100 65
65 65
65 30
—
NEMA size 3 575/600 -- 75 63 65 65 30
Ratings of the auxiliary switches Lateral auxiliary65
75 switch with Transverse
65 auxiliary Transverse
30
and alarm switches 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO,
90 65 2 NC, switch
65 with auxiliary
— switch with
2
100 NO + 2 NC and signalling
65 switch 1 changeover
65 contact 1—NO + 1 NC, 2 NO
Ratings
Max. ratedof the auxiliary
voltage switches
• to NEMA u AC V 600
Lateral auxiliary switch with Transverse auxiliary 250
Transverse
and alarm switches • to NEMA s AC V 1600
NO + 1 NC, 2 NO, 2 NC, switch with 250
auxiliary switch with
Uninterrupted current A 210NO + 2 NC and signalling switch 1
5 changeover contact 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO
2.5
Breaking
Max. rated capacity
voltage • to NEMA u AC V A600
600 B600 C300
250
Q300 R300 R300
• to NEMA s AC V 600 250
1) hp rating = Power rating in horse power (maximum motor rating). 3) Corresponds to "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL/CSA.
U n i n t e r r u p t e d c u rre n t
2) FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current. A 10 5
4) Not required for CSA. 2.5
Breaking capacity A600 B600 C300
5) Alternatively, the 3RV2928-1K phase barrier can also be used.
Q300 R300 R300
1) hp rating = Power rating in horse power (maximum motor rating). 3) Corresponds to "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL/CSA.
2) FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current. 4) Not required for CSA.
5) Alternatively, the 3RV2928-1K phase barrier can also be used.

3RV17/27 and 3RV18/28
circuit breakers
3RV17/27 and 3RV18/28 circuit breakers

These circuit breakers are approved according to UL 489 and The 3RV17/27 and 3RV18/28 circuit breakers are approved
CSA C22.2 No. 5-02 for 100 % rated current (100 % rated under the following file numbers:
breaker). They can be used therefore as upstream short-circuit • UL File No. E235044, CCN: DIVQ,
protective devices for "Manual Motor Controllers" and "Manual
Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in • CSA Master Contract 165071, Product Class: 1432 01.
Group Installations".
Circuit breakers Rated 240 V AC 480 Y/277 V AC 480 V AC 600 Y/347 V AC
current In UL/CSA UL/CSA UL/CSA UL/CSA
Type A Ibc1) kA Ibc1) kA Ibc1) kA Ibc1) kA
Size S00/S0
3RV27 11 / 3RV28 11 0.16 … 1.25 65 65 65 10
3RV27 21 / 3RV28 21 1.6 65 65 65 10
2 65 65 65 10
2.5 65 65 65 10
3.2 65 65 65 10
4 65 65 65 10
5 65 65 65 10
6.3 65 65 65 10
8 65 65 65 10
10 65 65 65 10
12.5 65 65 65 10
15 65 65 65 --
20 50 50 50 --
22 50 50 50 --
Size S3
3RV17 42 10 65 65 65 20
15 65 65 65 20
20 65 65 65 20
25 65 65 65 20
30 65 65 65 20
35 65 65 -- 20
40 65 65 -- 20
45 65 65 -- 20
50 65 65 -- 20
60 65 65 -- 20
70 65 65 -- 10
1) Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL.

3RV up to 100 A
(Export applications)
Technical specifications
Short-circuit breaking capacity Icu, Ics acc. to IEC 60947-2 table, a back-up fuse is required. It is also possible to install an
This table shows the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking upstream motor starter protector/circuit breaker with a limiter
capacity Icu and the rated service short-circuit breaking function.
capacity Ics of the 3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers
with different inception voltages dependent of the rated current The maximum rated current for the back-up fuse is specified in
In of the motor starter protectors/circuit breakers. the tables. The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity
then applies as specified on the fuse.
Power can be supplied to the motor starter protectors/circuit
Fuseless construction
breakers via the terminals at the top or at the bottom without
restricting the rated data. If the short-circuit current at the place Motor starter protector contactor combinations for short-circuit
of installation exceeds the rated short-circuit breaking capacity currents up to 150 kA can be ordered in the form of fuseless load
of the motor starter protector/circuit breaker as specified in the feeders according to Chapter 6.
Motor starter Rated current Up to 240 V AC1) Up to Up to Up to Up to 690 V AC1)

protectors/circuit In 400 V1)/415 V AC2) 440 V1)/460 V AC2) 500 V1)/525 V AC2)
breakers (these values do not apply to 3RV17 42 circuit breakers)
Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max.
(gL/gG) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3) fuse
(gL/gG)3)4)
Type A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A
Size S00
3RV2.11 0.16 ... 1 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 °
1.25; 1.6 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 °
2; 2.5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 10 10 25
3.2; 4 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 10 ° 100 100 ° 10; 6 10; 4 32
5; 6.3 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 10 ° 100 100 ° 6 4 32
8 100 100 ° 50 12.5 ° 50 50 63 42 42 63 6 4 50
10 100 100 ° 50 12.5 ° 50 50 80 42 42 63 6 4 50
12 100 100 ° 50 12.5 ° 50 50 80 42 42 80 4 4 63
16 100 100 ° 55 30 100 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 4 63
Size S0
3RV2.21 16 100 100 ° 55 25 100 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63
20 100 100 ° 55 25 125 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63
22 100 100 ° 55 25 125 50 10 100 10 5 80 4 2 63
25 100 100 ° 55 25 125 50 10 100 10 5 80 4 2 63
28 100 100 ° 55 25 125 30 10 125 10 5 100 4 2 100
32 100 100 ° 55 25 125 30 10 125 10 5 100 4 2 100
36 100 100 ° 20 10 125 12 8 125 6 3 100 3 2 100
40 100 100 ° 20 10 125 12 8 125 6 3 100 3 2 100
Size S2
3RV2.31 14; 17 100 100 ° 65 30 100 50 25 100 12 6 63 5 3 63
20 100 100 ° 65 30 100 50 25 100 12 6 80 5 3 80
25 100 100 ° 65 30 100 50 15 100 12 6 80 5 3 80
32; 36 100 100 ° 65 30 125 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 100
40; 45 100 100 ° 65 30 160 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 100
52 100 100 ° 65 30 160 50 15 125 10 5 125 4 2 125
59 ... 80 Values on request
Size S2, with increased
switching capacity
3RV2.32 14; 17 100 100 ° 100 50 ° 65 30 100 18 10 63 8 5 63
20; 25 100 100 ° 100 50 ° 65 30 100 18 10 80 8 5 80
32 ... 45 100 100 ° 100 50 ° 65 30 125 15 8 100 6 4 100
52 100 100 ° 100 50 ° 65 30 125 15 8 125 6 4 125
Size S3
3RV1. 41 40 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 20 125 12 6 100 6 3 63
50 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 20 125 12 6 100 6 3 80
63 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 12 6 100 6 3 80
75 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 100
90; 100 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 125
Short-circuit resistant up to at least 50 kA

° No back-up fuse required, since short-circuit resistant up to 100 kA
1)
10 % overvoltage. 4)
Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations for 690 V AC can also be used.
2)
5 % overvoltage.
3)
Back-up fuse only required if the short-circuit current at the place of
installation > Icu.

3RV up to 100 A
(Export applications)
Short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT in the IT system In the colored areas, IcuIT is 100 kA, or in some ranges it is
(IT network) according to IEC 60947-2 50 kA. Therefore the motor starter protectors are short-circuit re-
sistant in these ranges.
3RV motor starter protectors are suitable for operation in
IT systems. Values valid for triple-pole short-circuit are Icu up to If the short-circuit current at the place of installation exceeds the
Ics. In case of double ground fault on different phases at the in- rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the motor starter protec-
put and output side of a motor starter protector, the special tor as specified in the table, a back-up fuse is required. The max-
short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT applies. The specifications imum rated current for the back-up fuse is specified in the ta-
in the table below apply to 3RV motor starter protectors. bles. The rated short-circuit breaking capacity then applies as
specified on the fuse.
Motor starter Rated current Up to 240 V AC1) Up to 400 V1)/415 V AC2) Up to 500 V1)/525 V AC2) Up to 690 V AC1) 5)
protectors In IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse
(gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3)4) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3)
Type A kA A kA A kA A kA A
Size S00
3RV20, 0.16 ... 0.63 100 ° 100 ° On request On request On request On request
3RV26 11-0BD10 0.8; 1 100 ° 100 °
1.25; 1.6 100 ° 100 °
2; 2.5 100 ° 8 25
3.2; 4 100 ° 8;4 32
5; 6.3 100 ° 4 32:50
8; 10 100 ° 4 50
12.5 100 ° 4 63
16 55 80 4 63
Size S0
3RV2.21 16 55 80 4 63 2 50 1.5 40
20 55 80 4 63 2 50 1.5 50
22 55 80 4 63 2 50 1.5 50
25 55 80 4 63 2 50 1.5 50
28 55 80 2 63 2 63 1.5 63
32 55 80 2 63 2 63 1.5 63
36 20 80 2 63 2 63 1.5 63
40 20 80 2 63 2 63 1.5 63
Size S2
3RV2.31 14...25 100 ° 8 100 6 80 4 63
32...45 100 ° 6 125 4 100 3 80
52 100 ° 4 160 3 125 2 100
Size S2, with increased
switching capacity
3RV2.32 14 ... 25 100 ° 8 100 6 80 4 63
32 ... 45 100 ° 6 125 6 100 4 80
52 100 ° 6 160 6 125 4 100
Size S3
3RV1. 41 40 50 125 10 63 5 50 5 50
50 50 125 8 80 3 63 3 63
63 50 160 6 80 3 63 3 63
75 50 160 5 100 2 80 2 80
90; 100 50 160 5 125 2 100 2 100
Short-circuit resistant up to at least 50 kA

° No back-up fuse required, since short-circuit resistant up to 100 kA
1)
10 % overvoltage.
2)
5 % overvoltage.
3) Back-up fuse only required, if short-circuit current at the place of
installation > IcuIT.
4)
Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations for 690 V AC can also be used.
5)
Over-voltage category II applies for applications on IT systems > 600V

3RV
up to 100 A
Technical data
Rules for mounting motor starter protectors/circuit breakers
When mounting MSP’s, the following clearance must be maintained to grounded or live
parts.
SIRIUS MSP Clearance to grounded or live parts Minimum clearance between MSP’s and grounded
Y X at the side Z or live parts
Type size mm mm mm
3RV2.1 S00 up to 690 V 30 70 9
3RV2. 2 S0 2) up to 500 V 30 90 9
up to 690 V 50 1) 90 30
3RV2. 3 S2 up to 690 V 50 — 10
3RV1. 4 S3 up to 240 V 50 167 10
up to 440 V 70 167 10
up to 500 V 110 167 10
up to 690 V 150 167 30
3RV17 42 S3 up to 240 V 90 167 10
up to 400 V 90 167 10
1) Up to and including the setting range of 32 A. For the 36/40 A setting range the clearance is 70 mm.
2) In conjunction with the type E terminal block 3RV2928-1H the applicable lateral clearance is 30 mm for all voltages.
Standard mounting for S0, S2 and S3
Wiring module
Size S0: 3RV19 15-1AB
Size S2: 3RV19 35-1A
Size S3: 3RA19 43-3D

(Caution: The wiring module demands
10 mm spacing between the MSPs)
Line Load side

side

© Siemens AG 2015

SIRIUS
Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit
10/25/15 Breakers General Data
SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers up to 80 A
3RV up to 80 A
General data
General data
Type 3RV2.1. 3RV2.2. 3RV2.3. 3RV27, 3RV28
Size S00 S0 S2 S00, S0
H
Dimensions (W x H x D)
• Screw terminals mm 45 x 97 x 91 45 x 97 x 91 55 x 140 x 149 45 x 144 x 92
D
W
• Spring-type terminals mm 45 x 106 x 91 45 x 119 x 91 -- --
Standards
• IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100) Yes
• IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101) Yes
• IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Yes Yes Yes --
• UL 508/UL 60947-4-1, CSA C22.2 No. 14/CSA C22.2 No. 60947-4-1 Yes Yes Yes --
• UL 489, CSA C22.2 No. 5 -- -- -- Yes
Number of poles 3
Max. rated current In max A 16 40 80 22
(= max. rated operational current Ie)
Permissible ambient temperature
• Storage/transport °C –50 ... +80
• Operation In: 0.16 ... 32 A °C –20 ... +70 --
(current reduction above +60 °C)
In: 36 ... 40 A °C -- –20 ... +40 --
(the devices must
not be mounted
side-by-side and
they must not be
assembled with
link modules with
contactors.
A lateral clear-
ance of 9 mm is
required.)
In: 14 ... 80 A °C -- –20 ... +70 --
7
(current reduction
above +60 °C)
Permissible rated current at inside temperature of control cabinet
• +60 °C % 100
• +70 °C % 87
Permissible rated current at ambient temperature of enclosure
(applies for motor starter protector/circuit breaker inside enclosure ≤ 32 A)
• +35 °C % 100 On 100
• +60 °C % 87 request 87
Rated operational voltage Ue
• Acc. to IEC V AC 690 (when a molded-plastic enclosure is used only 500 V)
• Acc. to UL/CSA V AC 600
Rated frequency Hz 50/60
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6
Utilization category
• IEC 60947-2 (motor starter protector/circuit breaker) A
• IEC 60947-4-1 (motor starter) AC-3
Trip class CLASS Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 10 10/20 --
DC short-circuit breaking capacity (time constant t = 5 ms)
• 1 conducting path 150 V DC kA 10 On 10
• 2 conducting paths in series 300 V DC kA 10 request 10
• 3 conducting paths in series 450 V DC kA 10 10
Power loss Pv for each motor starter In: 0.16 ... 0.63 A W 5 -- 5
protector/circuit breaker In: 0.8 ... 6.3 A W 6 -- 6
Dependent on In: 8 ... 16 A W 7 -- 7
the rated current In In: 16 A W -- 7 10 7
(upper setting range)
In: 17 ... 25 A W -- 8 12 8
P In: 28 ... 32 A W -- 11 14 --
R per conducting path = --------------
Ι 2× 3 In: 36 ... 40 A W -- 14 15 --
In: 45 ... 52 A W -- -- 17 --
In: ... 80 A W -- -- On request --
Shock resistance Acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 25/11 (square and sine pulse)
Degree of protection Acc. to IEC 60529 IP20
Touch protection Acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe for vertical contact from the front
Temperature compensation Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 °C –20 ... +60
Phase failure sensitivity Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 Yes (only for 3RV23 motor starter protectors) No
Explosion protection – Safe operation of motors with Yes (only for 3RV20 motor starter protectors)
"increased safety" type of protection
EC type test certificate number according to DMT 02 ATEX F 001 II (2) GD On request No
directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)

7/16 Siemens IC 10 · 2015
© Siemens AG 2015
General Data Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit
10/25/15 SIRIUS
Breakers
3RV SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers up to 80 A
up to 80 A
General data
Conductor cross-sections of main circuit

Type 3RV2.11 3RV2.21 3RV2.31-4B1., 3RV2.31-4J.1., 3RV27, 3RV28
3RV2.31-4D.1., 3RV2.31-4K.1.,
3RV2.31-4E.1., 3RV2.31-4R.1.,
3RV2.31-4P.1., 3RV2.31-4W.1.,
3RV2.31-4S.1., 3RV2.31-4X.1.,
3RV2.31-4T.1., 3RV2431-4VA1.,
3RV2.31-4U.1., 3RV2.32
3RV2.31-4V.1.
Connection type Screw terminals
Terminal screw M3, M4, M6, M4,

Pozidriv size 2 Pozidriv size 2 Pozidriv size 2 Pozidriv size 2
Operating devices mm ∅ 5 ... 6 ∅ 5 ... 6 ∅ 5 ... 6 ∅ 5 ... 6
Prescribed tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 3.0 ... 4.5 2.5 ... 3
Conductor cross-sections (min./max.),
1 or 2 conductors can be connected
• Solid or stranded mm2 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1), 2 x (1 ... 2.5)1), 2 x (1 ... 25)1), 2 x (1 ... 35)1), 2 x (1 ... 10)1),
2x4 2 x (2.5 ... 10)1) 1 x (1 ... 35)1) 1 x (1 ... 50)1) max. 1 x 25
• Finely stranded with end sleeve (DIN 46228-1) mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1), 2 x (1 ... 2.5)1), 2 x (1 ... 16)1), 2 x (1 ... 25)1), 1 x (1 ... 16),
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1), 1 x (1 ... 25)1) 1 x (1 ... 35)1) max. 6 + 16
1 x 10
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)1), 2 x (16 ... 12)1), 2 x (18 ... 3)1), 2 x (18 ... 2)1), 2 x (14 ... 10)
2 x (18 ... 12)1) 2 x (14 ... 8)1) 1 x (18 ... 2)1) 1 x (18 ... 1)1)
Connection type Spring-type terminals
Operating devices mm 3.0 x 0.5 and 3.5 x 0.5

7
• Solid or stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 4) 2 x (1 ... 10) --
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) 2 x (1 ... 6) --
• Finely stranded with end sleeve (DIN 46228-11) mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) 2 x (1 ... 6) --
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 12) 2 x (18 ... 8) --
Max. external diameter of the conductor insulation mm 3.6 3.6 --
Connection type Ring terminal lug connections
Terminal screw M3, M4, --

Pozidriv size 2 Pozidriv size 2
Operating devices mm ∅ 5 ... 6 ∅ 5 ... 6 --
Prescribed tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 --
Usable ring terminal lugs d3 mm d2 = min. 3.2, d2 = min. 4.3, --
• DIN 46234 without d2 d3 = max. 7.5 d3 = max. 12.2
insulation sleeve
• DIN 46225 without
insulation sleeve
• DIN 46237 with insulation sleeve
I201_12740
• JIS C2805 Type R without

insulation sleeve
• JIS C2805 Type RAV with
insulation sleeve
• JIS C2805 Type RAP with
insulation sleeve
1)
If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping
point, both cross-sections must be in the range specified.

Siemens IC 10 · 2015 7/19
© Siemens AG 2015

SIRIUS 10/25/15 General
Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Data
Breakers
3RV up to 80 A
General data
3RV2.1. 3RV2.2. 3RV2.3. 3RV27, 3RV28

S00 S0 S2 S00, S0
Front transverse auxiliary switches
Switching capacity for different voltages
1 CO 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO
Rated operational current Ie
• At AC-15, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 4 2
- 230 V A 3 0.5
• At AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 10 2.5
- 230 V A 10 2.5
• At DC-13, direct voltage L/R 200 ms
- 24 V A 1 1
- 48 V A -- 0.3
- 60 V A -- 0.15
- 110 V A 0.22 --
- 220 V A 0.1 --
Minimum load capacity V 17
mA 1
Front transverse solid-state compatible auxiliary switches
Switching capacity for different voltages
1 CO
Rated operational voltage Ue Alternating voltage V 125
Rated operational current Ie/AC-14 at Ue = 125 V A 0.1
Rated operational voltage Ue Direct voltage L/R 200 ms V 60
7
Rated operational current Ie/DC-13 at Ue = 60 V A 0.3
mA 1
Lateral auxiliary switches with signaling switch
Switching capacity for different voltages:
Lateral auxiliary switch with 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO, 2 NC, 2 NO + 2 NC
Signaling switch
Rated operational current Ie
• At AC-15, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 6
- 230 V A 4
- 400 V A 3
- 690 V A 1
• At AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 10
- 230 V A 10
- 400 V A 10
- 690 V A 10
• At DC-13, direct voltage L/R 200 ms
- 24 V A 2
- 110 V A 0.5
- 220 V A 0.25
- 440 V A 0.1
mA 1
Auxiliary releases
Undervoltage releases Shunt releases
Power consumption
• During pick-up
- A C vo lt a g es VA/W 20.2/13 20.2/13
- DC voltages W 20 13 ... 80
• During uninterrupted duty
- A C vo lt a g es VA/W 7.2/2.4 --
- DC voltages W 2.1 --
Response voltage
• T ripping V 0.35 ... 0.7 x Us 0.7 ... 1.1 x Us
• Pick-up V 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us --
Opening time maximum ms 20
Short-circuit protection for auxiliary and control circuits

Melting fuses operational class gG A 10
Miniature circuit breakers C characteristic A 6 (prospective short-circuit current < 0.4 kA)

Siemens IC 10 · 2015 7/17
© Siemens AG 2015
General DataProtectors/Circuit Breakers
Motor Starter 10/25/15 SIRIUS
SIRIUS
3RV 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers up to 80 A
up to 80 A
General data
Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary and control circuits

Type 3RV2.11 3RV2.21 3RV2.31, 3RV2.32 3RV27, 3RV28
Terminal screw M3, Pozidriv size 2

Operating devices mm ∅ 5 ... 6
Prescribed tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors can be connected
• Solid or stranded mm 2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve (DIN 46228-1) mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)1), 2 x (20 ... 16)1)
Operating devices mm 3.0 x 0.5 and 3.5 x 0.5

• Solid or stranded mm 2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve (DIN 46228-1) mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 14)
Max. external diameter of the conductor insulation mm 3.6
Connection type Ring terminal lug connections

Operating devices mm ∅ 5 ... 6
7
Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2

Usable ring terminal lugs d3 mm d2 = min. 3.2, d3 = max. 7.5
• DIN 46234 without insulation sleeve d2
• DIN 46225 without insulation sleeve
• DIN 46237 with insulation sleeve
• JIS C2805 Type R without insulation sleeve
I201_12740
• JIS C2805 Type RAV with insulation sleeve

• JIS C2805 Type RAP with insulation sleeve
1)
Terminals for "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers (Type E)

according to UL 508/UL 60947-4-1"
Type 3RV2928-1H
Prescribed tightening torque Nm 2.5 ... 3
Conductor cross-sections
• Front clamping point connected
- Solid mm² 1 ... 10
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 1 ... 16
NSB0_00479
- Stranded m m² 2.5 ... 25

- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 14 ... 3
- Terminal screw M4
• Rear clamping point connected
- Solid mm² 1 ... 10
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 1 ... 16
NSB0_00480
- Stranded m m² 1.5 ... 25

- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 14 ... 6
- Terminal screw M4
• Both clamping points connected
- Front clamping point:
Solid mm² 1 ... 10
1 ... 101), 1 ... 61)
NSB0_00481
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm²

Stranded mm² 2.5 ... 10
AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 14 ... 6
Terminal screw M4
- Rear clamping point:
Solid mm² 1 ... 10
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 1 ... 101), 1 ... 161)
Stranded mm² 2.5 ... 10
AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 16 ... 3
Terminal screw M4
1)
The following can be connected when both clamping points are connected:
- Front 1 ... 10 mm² and rear 1 ... 10 mm²
- Front 1 ... 6 mm² and rear 1 ... 16 mm²

7/20 Siemens IC 10 · 2015
3RV
up to 100 A
Overview
S00 MSP with laterally mounted Construction
undervoltage release with leading 3RV Motor Starter Protectors The motor starter protectors are • Size S2 - 3RV203
auxiliary switch
(MSP’s) are built for a world of available in four sizes: Maximum rated current is 50
applications while meeting the Amps. Suitable for motors up
requirements of control users to 50 hp at 600V.
worldwide. Each MSP features • Size S00 - 3RV201
a manual ON/OFF switch, a Maximum rated current is 16 • Size S3 - 3RV104
Class 10 adjustable bimetallic Amps. Suitable for motors up Maximum rated current is
overload relay (Class 20 avail- to 10 hp at 600V. Available in 100 Amps. Suitable for
able in the two largest frame both screw terminal and spring- motors up to 100 hp at 600V.
sizes), and magnetic trip ele- type terminal versions.
ments for short circuit protec- • Size S0 - 3RV202
tion. Maximum rated current is 40
Amps. Suitable for motors up
to 20 hp at 600V. Available in
both screw terminal and spring-
type terminal verisons.
Functions
Releases Release classes Operating mechanisms
3RV motor starter protectors The release classes of thermally S00, S0, S2 and S3 MSP's are In the case of MSP’s with
are equipped with bimetallic- delayed releases are based on actuated via a rotary operating rotary operating mechanisms,
based, inverse-time delayed the tripping time (tA) at 7.2 times mechanism. If the MSP trips, an electrical signal can be out-
overload releases - electromag- the operational current in cold the rotary operating mechanism put via a signalling switch to
netic short-circuit releases. state (excerpt from IEC 60 947- switches to the tripped position indicate that the MSP has
4): to indicate this. Before the MSP tripped.
The overload releases can be
set in accordance with the load • CLASS 10 A 2 s < tA < 10 s is reclosed, the rotary operating All operating mechanisms can
current. The overcurrent re- • CLASS 10 4 s < tA < 10 s mechanism must be reset man- be locked in 0 position with a
leases are permanently set to a • CLASS 20 6 s < tA < 20 s ually to 0 position, in order to padlock (shackle diameter
value 13 times the rated current • CLASS 30 9 s < tA < 30 s prevent the former from closing 3.5 to 4.5 mm).
and thus enable trouble-free by mistake before the fault has
start-up of motors. The release must trip within this
been cleared.
time!
The scale cover can be sealed
to prevent unauthorized adjust-
ments to the set current.
Application
Operating conditions Motor Protection
3RV MSP’s are suitable for use 3RV MSP’s use bimetallic Each MSP has a fourth bimetal- A built-in differential trip bar
in any climate. They are heater elements to provide lic strip that reacts only to the causes the MSP to trip faster
designed for operation in class 10 or 20 overcurrent pro- ambient temperature inside the on a phase loss condition, to
closed rooms under normal tection for both AC and DC control panel. This ambient help reduce motor damage
conditions (e.g. no dust, corro- motors. The bimetallic heaters compensation prevents the from phase loss.
sive vapours or harmful gases). sense the motor current MSP from nuisance tripping
Suitable enclosures must be directly, so the overloads are when the panel temperature is Magnetic trip elements in each
higher than the ambient tem- MSP take the device off line
provided for installation in dusty insensitive to high frequencies,
or damp rooms. harmonic waves and sinusoi- perature of the motor. when it senses currents of 13
dal currents and voltages. times the maximum FLA dial
setting.
3RT1 0 1 1 - 0 A A 1 0
SIRIUS MSP or Application Frame Size Standard Amperage Range Class Terminal Type Auxiliary
Circuit Breaker 0 = Motor Protection 3 = S2 Possible choices listed below see A = 10 1 = Screw Switch
7 = UL 489 4 = S3 page 1/4-1/7 for an entire listing 2 = Spring Loaded
0, 1, 4 B through K 4 = Ring Lug
3RV2 0 1 1 - 0 A A 1 0
SIRIUS Application Frame Size Standard Amperage Range Class Terminal Type Auxiliary
Innovations 0 = Motor Protection 1 = S00 Possible choices listed below see A = 10 1 = Screw Switch
MSP or 7 = UL 489 2 = S0 page 1/4-1/7 for an entire listing 2 = Spring Loaded
Circuit Breaker
0, 1, 4 B through K 4 = Ring Lug
3RV1 0 1 1 - 0 A A 1 0
SIRIUS MSP or Application Frame Size Standard Amperage Range Class Terminal Type Auxiliary
Circuit Breaker 0 = Motor Protection 3 = S2 Possible choices listed below see A = 10 1 = Screw Switch
7 = UL 489 4 = S3 page 1/4-1/7 for an entire listing B = 20 2 = Spring Loaded
0, 1, 4 B through K
Note: MPS’s and Contactors of the same frame size are made to easily fit together with the use of a link module.

Applications:
The 3RV MSP’s can be used
in a variety of applications:
As a manual starter As a Self-protected manual As part of a Combination As a circuit breaker for export
combination starter, Type E. Motor Contoller, Type F When exporting to many coun-
All 3RV MSP’s are UL listed as
Manual Motor Controllers per Most 3RV MSP’s have also been When a 3RT contactor is con- tries outside of the U.S. and
UL508. This makes them ideal UL listed as UL508 Type E, Self- nected to the load side of a 3RV North America, the 3RV can be
for applications requiring sim- protected Manual Combination device that is rated as a "Man- applied as a thermal magnetic
ple manual starting and stop- Starters. This UL listing allows ual Self-protected Combination circuit breaker for use in motor
ping of motors. A separate the MSP to be mounted in a Motor Controller, Type E", the branch circuits.
short circuit protective device, manually operated machine assembly can be applied as a 3RV29 28-1K 3RV29 38-1K
such as a circuit breaker or without having to add separate "Combination Motor Controller,
fuses, is still required ahead of short circuit protection Type F". This versions allows
the MSP. This up-stream pro- upstream. for remote starting and stopping
tective device should be sized of the motor load.
per NEC code, not to exceed These devices have a short cir-
400% of the maximum FLA cuit current rating of 65 kA @ These assemblies have a short
adjustment dial setting. 240V, 480Y/277V and up to circuit current rating of 65 kA @
30kA @ 600Y/347V. 240V, 480Y/277V and up to 30
As a component in a group kA @ 600Y/347V.
installation Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" to UL 508
A group motor installation indi- The 3RV MSP for motor protec- The terminal block 3RT19 46- 3RV29 28-1H
cates multiple motor controllers tion is approved according to 4GA07 must be used for size
under one short circuit protec- UL 508 as "Combination Motor S3. The standard box terminal is
tive device, such as a circuit Controller Type E". to be replaced by this terminal
breaker. 3RV MSP’s have a block.
group installation short-circuit As of July, 2001, UL 508
current rating of 65 kA at 480V demands at line-side of the According to CSA, these termi-
and up to 30kA at 600V. By device used for this purpose an nal blocks can be omitted when
using a link module, a 3RT con- increased clearance and creep- the device is used as "Combina-
tactor can be directly mounted age distance (1" or 2"). tion Motor Controller Type E".
to the load side of the MSP. 3RT19 46-4GA07
Here, the terminal block 3RV29 By using a link module, a 3RT
3RV MSP’s have been UL 28-1H must be used for size S0. contactor can be directly mount-
tested with and without 3RT The block is simply screwed to ed to the load side of a 3RV MSP.
contactors for group installa- the basic unit. This assembly of a 3RV and a
tion. 3RT provides a complete, re-
Basic units of size S2 are motely operated, combination
already compliant with new starter, Type F.
clearance and creepage dis-
tance requirements.
Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" to UL 508

3RV29 28-1H 3RT19 46-4GA07
44.8 73.6
27.5
38.9

SIRIUS General Data
3RV
up to 100 A
Switching of direct current

3RV motor starter protectors fo r alternating currents are also The response values of the overload release remain unchanged;
suitable for DC switching. the response values of a short-circuit release increase by ap-
proximately 30 % for DC. The example circuits for DC switching
The maximum permissible DC voltage per conducting path can be seen in the table below.
must, however, be adhered to. Higher voltages require a series
connection with 2 or 3 conducting paths.
Example circuit for size S00 to S3 3RV motor starter protectors
Example circuit for size S00 Maximum permitted Notes
to S3 3RV motor starter protectors DC voltage Ue
L+ L 150 V DC Three-pole switching, non-grounded system1)

If there is no possibility of a ground fault, or if every ground fault is rectified immediately
(ground-fault monitoring), then the maximum permitted DC voltage can be tripled.
M
NSB0_00001a
L+ L 300 V DC Two-pole switching, grounded system

The grounded pole is always assigned to the individual conducting path, so that there
are always 2 conducting paths in series in the event of a ground fault.
M
NSB0_00002a
L+ L 450 V DC Single-pole switching, grounded system

3 conducting paths in series. The grounded pole is assigned to the unconnected con-
ducting path.
M
NSB0_00003a
1)
It is assumed that this circuit always provides safe disconnection even in
the event of a double ground fault that bridges two contacts.
Design
Mounting Screw connection The box terminals of the S3 MSP with Spring-type terminal
MSP’s can be removed in order connection
The motor starter protectors are 3RV MSP’s of sizes S00 and
to connect conductors with
secured in position by snap- S0 are fitted with terminals with
cable lugs or connecting bars.
ping them onto 35 mm standard captive screws and clamping
A terminal cover is available to
mounting rails according to DIN pieces, allowing the connection
help prevent contact with shock
EN 50 022. A mounting rail with of 2 conductors with different
protection and to ensure that
a height of 15 mm is required cross-sections.
the required clearances and
for S3 MSP’s. A 75-mm mount- creepage distances are main-
The box terminals of the S2 and
ing rail can be used as an alter- tained if the box terminals are
native here. S3 MSP’s also enable 2 con-
ductors with different cross- removed.
S2 and S3 MSP’s can also be sections to be connected. With
screwed directly onto a base- the exception of S3 MSP’s Spring-type connection 2)
plate. which are equipped with 4 mm
hexagon socket terminal As an alternative to screw ter-
The push-in lugs 3RV29 28-0B screws, all terminal screws are minals, S00 and S0 devices are
are available for screw mount- tightened with a Pozidriv screw- also available with Spring-type
ing of S00 and S0 MSP’s. driver size 2. terminal connection.
This screwless Spring-type
3RV2928-0B terminal technique, as known
for modular terminal blocks,
offers shock-proof and vibration
proof connection of conductors.
Devices with Spring-type con-
nection allow independent con-
nection of two conductors per
terminal.
1) It is assumed that this circuit always provides safe cut-out, even in the event of a
double earth fault that bridges two contacts.
2) For notes on Spring-type terminal connection, see section 19.

General Data SIRIUS
3RV
up to 100 A
Characteristics
The time/current characteristic, (short-circuit releases, ’n’ re- Typical time/current characteristic of 3RV
the current limiting characteris- leases) are based on the rated
tics and the I²t characteristics current In that represents the
were determined in accor- maximum value of the setting
dance with DIN VDE 0660 or range for MSP’s with adjustable
IEC 60 947. overload releases. If the current
is set to a lower value, the trip-
The tripping characteristic of ping current of the ’n’ release is
the inverse-time delayed increased by a corresponding
overload releases (thermal factor.
overload releases or ’a’
releases) for DC and AC with a The characteristics of the elec-
frequency of 0 to 400 Hz also tromagnetic overcurrent
apply to the time/current char- releases apply to frequencies
acteristic. of 50/60 Hz. Appropriate cor-
rection factors must be used for
The characteristics apply to the lower frequencies up to
cold state. At operating temper- 16 2/3 Hz, for higher frequen-
ature, the tripping times of the cies up to 400 Hz and for DC.
thermal releases are reduced to
approximately 25 %. The printed characteristic curve
determined for the MSP relates
Under normal operating condi- to a specific setting range. It is,
tions, all three poles of the however, also valid as a sche-
device must be loaded. The matic representation of MSP’s
three main conducting paths with other current ranges.
must be connected in series in
order to protect single-phase or
DC loads.
With 2-pole and 3-pole loading,
the maximum deviation in the
tripping time for 3 times the set-
ting current and upwards is
± 20 % and thus in accordance
with DIN VDE 0165.
The tripping characteristics for
the instantaneous, electromag-
netic overcurrent releases
Circuit diagrams
Internal connections
Motor starter protectors
3RV.

3RV
up to 100 A
Dimension drawings
3RV2 MSP, size S00 3RV2 MSP, size S0
3RV20 11 3RV20 21
45 49 96.9 45 96.9
49
97
97
5 5
3RV2 MSP, size S2

149.4
55 144.4 12.4 30
4.8
1/ L1 3/ L2 5/ L3
70
140
130
2/ T1 4/ T2 6/ T3
5
3RV2.31 motor starter protector (<= 45A)

1) 2-pole lateral auxiliary switch
2) Signalling switch (S0-S3) or lateral
auxiliary switch, 4-pole (S00-S3)
3) Auxiliary releases
4) Transverse auxiliary switch
5) Push-in lugs for screw mounting
6) Only for undervoltage release
with leading auxiliary switch
7) Drilling template
8) 35 mm standard mounting rail acc. to
EN 50 022
9) Mounting on 35 mm standard mount-
ing rail, 15 mm high, acc. to
EN 50 022 or on 75 mm standard
mounting rail acc. to EN 50 023
10) 4 mm hexagon socket screw
11) Lockable in 0 position
with shackle diameter 3.5 to 4.5 mm

3RV
up to 100 A
3RV2.32 MSP, size S2

149.3
55 144.3 12.4 30
4.8
1/ L1 3/ L2 5/ L3 70
140
130
2/ T1 4/ T2 6/ T3
5
3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers, size S00, S0 and S3
3RV27 21, 3RV28 21
1) Mounting according to EN 60715

25 1) Mountingto standard
according mounting
to EN 60715 rail TH 35.
27
25 2) Drilling
to standard pattern.
mounting rail TH 35.
27
2) Drilling pattern.
Ø5
Ø5
126
112
45
144
106
2)
126
112
45
144
106
2)
1)
1)
17
17
NSB0_01726b
NSB0_01726b
1414 14
14 55
5579
45
45 79
92
92
3RV17 circuit breakers, size S3

3RV17 42
22,5 22,5 1) Mounting according to

30 EN 60715 on TH 35 standard
mounting rail, 15 mm deep,
26
Ø5 or TH 75 standard mounting rail.

2) Drilling pattern.
168
129
155
155
2)
45
1)
NSB0_01531c
5
70 132
7 153
157
169

© Siemens AG 2015
• Revised • 3RVMotor
Motor Starter
Starter Protectors
Protectors/Circuit Breakers
SIRIUS 10/25/15 General
SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers up to Data
80 A
Accessories
Mountable accessories
Overview
Mounting location and function
The 3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers have three These components are easily fitted to the switches without the
main contact elements. In order to achieve maximum flexibility, use of any tools according to requirements.
auxiliary switches, signaling switches, auxiliary releases and
isolator modules can be supplied separately. Overview graphic, see page 7/7.
Front side Transverse auxiliary An auxiliary switch block can be inserted transversely on the front.
Note: switches, solid-state The overall width of the motor starter protectors/circuit breakers remains
compatible transverse unchanged.
• A maximum of four auxiliary contacts with auxiliary switches
auxiliary switches can be mounted on each
motor starter protector/circuit breaker. 1 NO + 1 NC
or
2 NO
or
1 CO
Left-hand side Lateral auxiliary switches One of the three lateral auxiliary switches can be mounted on the left side
Notes: (2 contacts) per motor starter protector/circuit breaker. The contacts of the auxiliary
1 NO + 1 NC switch close and open together with the main contacts of the motor starter
• A maximum of four auxiliary contacts with protector/circuit breaker.
auxiliary switches can be mounted on each or
motor starter protector/circuit breaker. 2 NO The width of the lateral auxiliary switch with two contacts is 9 mm.
• Lateral auxiliary switches (two contacts) or
and signaling switches can be mounted 2 NC
separately or together. Lateral auxiliary switches One lateral auxiliary switch with four contacts can be mounted on the left
• The signaling switch cannot be used for the (4 contacts) side per motor starter protector/circuit breaker. The contacts of the auxiliary
3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers. switch close and open together with the main contacts of the motor starter
2 NO + 2 NC
protector/circuit breaker.
The width of the lateral auxiliary switch with four contacts is 18 mm.
Signaling switches One signaling switch can be mounted on the left side of each motor starter
7
Tripping 1 NO + 1 NC protector.
Short circuit 1 NO + 1 NC The signaling switch has two contact systems.
One contact system always signals tripping irrespective of whether this was
caused by a short circuit, an overload or an auxiliary release. The other
contact system only switches in the event of a short circuit. There is no
signaling as a result of switching off with the actuator.
In order to be able to switch on the motor starter protector again after a short
circuit, the signaling switch must be reset manually after the error cause has
been eliminated.
The overall width of the signaling switch is 18 mm.
Right-hand side Auxiliary releases
Notes: Shunt releases For remote-controlled tripping of the motor starter protector/circuit breaker.
• One auxiliary release can be mounted per The release coil should only be energized for short periods (see circuit
motor starter protector/circuit breaker. diagrams).
• Accessories cannot be mounted at the or
right-hand side of the 3RV21 motor starter
protectors for motor protection with overload Undervoltage releases Trips the motor starter protector/circuit breaker when the voltage is inter-
relay function. rupted and prevents the motor from being restarted accidentally when the
voltage is restored. Used for remote-controlled tripping of the motor starter
protector/circuit breaker.
Particularly suitable for EMERGENCY-STOP disconnection by way of corre-
sponding EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons according to DIN EN 60204-1.
or
Undervoltage releases with Function and use as for the undervoltage release without leading auxiliary
leading auxiliary contacts contacts, but with the following additional function: the auxiliary contacts will
2 NO open in switch position OFF to deenergize the coil of the undervoltage
release, thus interrupting energy consumption. In the "tripped" position,
these auxiliary contacts are not guaranteed to open. The leading contacts
permit the motor starter protector/circuit breaker to reclose.
The overall width of the auxiliary release is 18 mm.
Top Isolator modules Isolator modules can be mounted to the upper connection side of the motor
Notes: starter protectors.
• The isolator module cannot be used for the The supply cable is connected to the motor starter protector through the
3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers. isolator module.
• The isolator module for size S2 The plug can only be unplugged when the motor starter protector is open
- can only be used with 3RV2 motor starter and isolates all 3 poles of the motor starter protector from the network.
protectors/circuit breakers up to max. 65 A The shock-protected isolation point is clearly visible and secured with a
- cannot be used with the transverse auxiliary padlock to prevent reinsertion of the plug.
switch
• The isolator module covers the terminal screws
of the transverse auxiliary switch. If the isolator
module is used, we therefore recommend that
either the lateral auxiliary switches be fitted or
that the isolator module not be mounted until For a complete overview of which accessories can be used for. the
the auxiliary switch has been wired. various motor starter protectors/circuit breakers, see page 7/2

Siemens IC 10 · 2015 7/31
General Data SIRIUS
Overview
8
S00 and S0 motor starter protectors with mountable accessories
NSB0_02076
4
6.1
Motor starter protectors, sizes S2 or S3, with mountable accessories
Mountable accessories for all sizes S00 ... S3 Mountable accessories for sizes Mountable accessories for sizes
1 Transverse auxiliary switch 6.1 Undervoltage release with S00, S0 7 Signaling switch (can not be S00 ... S3
leading auxiliary contacts used with 3RV27 and 3RV28
2 Lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts
(can not be used with 3RV21 S2, S3 circuit breakers)
3 Lateral auxiliary switch with 4 contacts circuit breakers) 8 Isolator module (can not be S0 and S2
4 Shunt release 6.2 Undervoltage release with used with 3RV27 and 3RV28
leading auxiliary contacts circuit breakers)
5 Undervoltage release
9 Terminal block E

SIRIUS General Data
Circuit diagrams
Internal connections
Shunt release Undervoltage Undervoltage release Lateral auxiliary switch
release with leading auxiliary contacts with 4 contacts
3RV19 02-1D / 3RV29 02-1D 3RV19 02-1A / 3RV29 02-1A 3RV19 01-1J / 3RV29 01-1J
3RV19 22-1C / 3RV29 22-1C
Transverse auxiliary switch Lateral auxiliary switch SignalIng switch

with 2 contacts
3RV19 01-1D 3RV19 01-1E 3RV19 01-1F 3RV19 01-1A 3RV19 01-1B 3RV19 01-1C 3RV19 21-1M / 3RV29 21-1M
3RV29 01-1D 3RV29 01-1E 3RV29 01-1F 3RV29 01-1A 3RV29 01-1B 3RV29 01-1C
3RV19 01-1G 3RV19 01-2E 3RV19 01-2A 3RV19 01-2B 3RV19 01-2C
3RV29 01-1G 3RV29 01-2E 3RV29 01-2A 3RV29 01-2B 3RV29 01-2C
External connections
Shunt release Undervoltage release
S0; S1; S2 OFF pushbuttons in system

Q1 Motor starter protectors
S Auxiliary switch of
MSP Q1
F1; F2 Fuses (gL/gG)
max. 10 A
F3 Shunt release
F4 Undervoltage release

Circuit diagrams
Typical circuits
3RV2 MSP’s with 3RV29 21-1M signalling switch
H1: "Short circuit" signal H1; H2 Indicator lights
F1 Fuses (gL/gG)
H2: "Overload" or "Tripped by max. 10 A
auxiliary release" signal
Q1 MSP
S1 Signalling switch
Separate "Tripped" and "Short circuit" signals
Motor starter protectors tripped by means of pushbutton or

EMERGENCY STOP button in the system
The leading auxiliary contacts open in F1; F2 Fuses (gL/gG)

"OFF" position of the MSP to max. 10 A
switch off the coil voltage of the under-
voltage release, thus avoiding power Q1 MSP
consumption in switched off state.
F4 Undervoltage release
In the "tripped" position of the MSP,
these contacts are not guaranteed to S1; S2, S3 OFF pushbuttons in system
open.
Dimension drawings
Isolator modules
3RV29 28-1A 3RV29 38-1A
for MSP’s size S00, S0 for MSP’s size S2
54.8 144.7
56.9
107.9
For dimension drawings of auxiliary switches, signalling switches

and auxiliary releases, see page 1/33 and 1/34.

SIRIUS 3RV Motor Starter Protectors up to 100 A
Accessories
Busbar accessories
Overview
Busbar adapters
The MSP’s are mounted directly The MSP’s are snapped onto SIRIUS MSP’s and combination starters with fastbus-busbar adapters
with the aid of busbar adapters the adapter and connected on snapped onto busbars
on fastbus-busbar systems with the line side. This prepared unit
40 mm and 60 mm centerline is then plugged directly onto the
spacing, in order to save space busbar system, and is thus con-
and to reduce wiring times and nected both mechanically and
costs. electrically at the same time.
Fastbus-busbar adapters for Refer to page 1/10 for busbar
busbar systems with 40 mm adapters for specific MSP’s and
centerline spacing are suitable accessories.
for copper busbars with a width
of 12 mm to 15 mm, while those Further busbar adapters for
with 60 mm centerline spacing snap-mounting direct-on-line
are suitable for widths of 12 mm starters and reversing starters,
to 30 mm. The busbars can be as well as additional accesso-
4 to 5 mm or 10 mm thick. ries such as line terminals and
outgoing terminals, busbar
copper, etc., can be found in
Section 5.
Insulated three-phase busbar system 8US busbar adapters for 60 mm systems

Three-phase busbar systems provide an easy, time-saving and The motor starter protectors are mounted directly with the aid of
clearly arranged means of feeding 3RV2 motor starter protectors busbar adapters on busbar systems with 60 mm center-to-cen-
with screw terminals. They can be used for the different types of ter clearance in order to save space and to reduce infeed times
motor starter protector up to 32 A. The 3RV19 15 three-phase and costs.
busbar systems are generally unsuitable for the 3RV21 motor
starter protectors for motor protection with overload relay func- The busbar adapters for busbar systems with 60 mm center-to-
tion and for the 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers according to center clearance are suitable for copper busbars with a width of
UL 489 / CSA C22.2 No. 5-02. 12 mm to 30 mm. The busbars can be 5 mm or 10 mm thick.
The busbars are suitable for between 2 and 5 circuit break- The motor starter protectors are snapped onto the adapter and
ers/motor starter protectors. However, any kind of extension is connected on the line side. This prepared unit is then plugged
possible by clamping the tags of an additional busbar (rotated directly onto the busbar system, and is thus connected both me-
by 180°) underneath the terminals of the respective last motor chanically and electrically at the same time.
starter protector. For further busbar adapters for snap-mounting direct-on-line
A combination of motor starter protectors of different sizes is starters and reversing starters as well as additional accessories
possible. The motor starter protectors are supplied by appropri- such as line terminals and outgoing terminals, flat copper profile,
ate feeder terminals. etc., can be found in Section 5.
3RV29 25-5AB
3RV19 15-1CB
3RV29 15-5B
NSB0_02079
NSB0_02080
3RV19 15-6AB
SIRIUS three-phase busbar system size S00/S0 SIRIUS load feeders with busbar adapters snapped onto busbars
The three-phase busbar systems are finger-safe. They are de- The three-phase busbar systems can also be used to construct
signed for any short-circuit stress which can occur at the output “Type E Starters” according to UL/CSA. Special feeder terminals
side of connected motor starter protectors. must be used for this purpose however (see “Selection and
Ordering Data” on page 1/8).

Busbar accessories
Dimension drawings
3RV19 15-1. . 3-phase busbar
for S00 and S0 MSP’s, modular spacing 45 mm
for 2 MSP’s 3RV19 15-1AB
for 3 MSP’s 3RV19 15-1BB
for 4 MSP’s 3RV19 15-1CB
for 5 MSP’s 3RV19 15-1DB

for S00 and S0 circuit-breakers, modular spacing 55 mm
for 2 MSP’s with accessories 3RV19 15-2AB
for 3 MSP’s with accessories 3RV19 15-2BB
for 4 MSP’s with accessories 3RV19 15-2CB
for 5 MSP’s with accessories 3RV19 15-2DB

for S00 and S0 MSP’s, modular spacing 63 mm
for 2 MSP’s with accessories 3RV19 15-3A
for 3 MSP's with accessories 3RV19 15-3B
for 4 MSP’s with accessories 3RV19 15-3C

for S2 MSP, modular spacing 55 mm
for 2 MSP’s 3RV19 35-1A
for 3 MSP’s 3RV19 35-1B
for 4 MSP’s 3RV19 35-1C
15
33
98
55
110
168

Busbar accessories
Dimension drawings
for S2 MSP, modular spacing 75 mm
for 2 MSP’s with accessories 3RV19 35-3A
for 3 MSP’s with accessories 3RV19 35-3B
for 4 MSP’s with accessories 3RV19 35-3C
15
33
98
75
130
168
3RV29 25-5AB. 3-phase line-side terminals 3RV29 25-5EB 3-phase line-side terminal
connection from above, 3RV29 35-5B a) 3RV1. 1 19 mm connection from above,
size S00 and S0 connection from above, 3RV1. 2 23 mm size S0
size S00 and S0

3RV19 35-5A 3-phase line-side terminal 3RV19 15-5DB Connector

for MSP size S2 For connecting a 3-phase busbar for
MSP’s of the size S0
(left) to size S00 (right)
112
55
NSB00061b
34
91
161
3RV19 25-5EB to construct “Type E Starters” 3RV29 35-5E

Connected from top, for motor starter protector size S0 Connected from top, for motor starter protector size S2
54.5 76.5
55,3
44 33,8
30,8
78,8
65.8
NSB0_02012
127,8

3RV Motor Starter Protectors Motor Starter Protectors
General Data SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors up SIRIUS
to 40 A
Accessories
Busbar accessories
Overview
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms
Motor starter protectors with a rotary operating mechanism can
be mounted in a control cabinet and operated externally by
means of a door-coupling rotary operating mechanism. When
the cabinet door with motor starter protector is closed, the oper-
ating mechanism is coupled. When the motor starter protector
closes, the coupling is locked which prevents the door from be-
ing opened unintentionally. This interlock can be defeated by the
NSB0_01079a
maintenance personnel. In the OPEN position, the rotary operat-
ing mechanism can be secured against reclosing with up to
3 padlocks. Inadvertent opening of the door is not possible in
this case either.
SIRIUS 3RV29 26-2B door-coupling rotary operating mechanism for ar-

NSB0_01078
duous conditions
7
SIRIUS 3RV29 26-0K door-coupling rotary operating mechanism

Version Color of Version of exten- For motor DT Order No. Price PU PS* PG
handle sion shaft starter proper PU (UNIT,
tectors SET, M)
mm Size
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist of a knob, a coupling driver and a 130/330 mm long extension shaft
(6 mm x 6 mm).
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms are designed to degree of protection IP64. The door locking device prevents
accidental opening of the control cabinet door in the ON position of the motor starter protector. The OFF position can be locked
with up to 3 padlocks.
Door-coupling Black 130 S00, S0 } 3RV29 26-0B 1 1 unit 41E
rotary 330 S00, S0 } 3RV29 26-0K 1 1 unit 41E
3RV29 26-0B
operating
mechanisms
EMERGENCY- Red/yellow 130 S00, S0 } 3RV29 26-0C 1 1 unit 41E
STOP 330 S00, S0 } 3RV29 26-0L 1 1 unit 41E
door-coupling
rotary
operating
mechanisms
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for arduous conditions
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist of a knob, a coupling driver, an extension shaft of 300 mm in length
(8 mm x 8 mm), a spacer and two metal brackets, into which the motor starter protector is inserted.
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms are designed to degree of protection IP65. The door interlocking reliably pre-
vents opening of the control cabinet door in the ON position of the motor starter protector. The OFF position can be locked with up
to 3 padlocks.
Laterally mountable auxiliary releases and two-pole auxiliary switches can be used.
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms thus meet the requirements for isolating functions according to IEC 60947-2.
Door-coupling Gray 300 S00, S0 } 3RV29 26-2B 1 1 unit 41E
rotary
operating
3RV29 26-2B mechanisms
EMERGENCY- Red/yellow 300 S00, S0 } 3RV29 26-2C 1 1 unit 41E
STOP door-
coupling
rotary
operating
mechanisms
Illustrations are approximate Siemens IC 10 · 2012 7/27
SIRIUS General Data
Circuit diagrams
Typical circuits
3RV1 MSP with 3RV19 36/3RV19 46 remote-controlled motorized
operating mechanism
US
~ ~
- +
1
O 2
M
3
4
5
L I T
v
NSB00024a
Dimensional drawings
Door coupling rotary mechanism
3RV29 26-0B/3RV29 26-0C short shaft 4), for MSP sizes S00, S0, S2 and S3
66
45 19 25
15
1...4 1) Lockable in 0 position, with shack-
le diameter max. 8 mm
2) Mounting with screw cap
1) 3) Supplied with a shaft length of
330 mm; adaptable by shortening
of the shaft.
4) Supplied with a shaft length of
5 2) 130 mm; adaptable by shortening
of the shaft.
max 127 33 17 5) Grounding terminal 35 mm2 and
min 55 bracket for 330 mm shaft.
3
4)
24.3
Ø2
2.5
NSB01108
max 130
min 56
3RV29 26-0K/3RV29 26-0L long shaft (with bracket) 3), for MSP sizes S00, S0, S2 and S3
66
16 45 19 25
15
1...4
I ON
1)
0 OFF
NSB01090a
5 2)
5) max 327 33 17
min 55
3
3)
24.3
Ø2
2.5
NSB01108
max 330
min 56

General Data SIRIUS
Dimension drawings
3RV29 . 6-2. Door coupling rotary mechanism for heavy duty
3RV29 26-2., 3RV29 36-2., 3R29 46-2.
for sizes S00, S0, S2 and S3
Drilling template, door Drilling template, base
G J
NSB01091a
65
75
B
A
40
6
max. 341
D E F 62 14 H C
min. 42
Type Size Dimensions

A B C D E F G H I
3RV29 26-2. S00, S0 125 111 50 77 112 50 27 9 42
3RV29 36-2. S2 170 144 60 87 162 50 27 10 47
3RV29 46-2. S3 194 180 60 100 187 48 25 10 53
max. 330
min. 11 mm without shaft
min. 31

• Revised • 3RV Motor
MotorStarter
StarterProtectors
Protectors
SIRIUS 10/25/15 SIRIUS 3RV1 Motor Starter ProtectorsGeneral Data
up to 100 A
Accessories
Accessories
Enclosures and frontplates
Enclosures and front plates
Overview
Enclosure Front plates
For stand-alone installation of motor starter protector size S2 Motor starter protectors are frequently required to be actuated in
(In max = 65 A), molded-plastic enclosures for surface mounting any enclosure. Front plates equipped with a rotary operating
are available. mechanism for motor starter protector sizes S2 and S3 are avail-
able for this purpose.
When installed in a molded-plastic enclosures the motor starter
protectors have a rated operational voltage Ue of 500 V.
The molded-plastic enclosures are designed to degree of pro-
tection IP55.
NSB0_02194
NSB0_02193
Front plate for size S2
7
Enclosures for surface mounting
All enclosures are equipped with N and PE terminals. There are
two knock-out cable entries for cable glands at the top and two
at the bottom; also on the rear corresponding cable entries are
scored. There is a knockout on the top of the enclosure for indi-
cator lights that are available as accessories.
In the enclosure for motor starter protector size S2 there is also
room for the laterally mounted auxiliary release. There is no pro-
vision for installing a motor starter protector with a signaling
switch.
The molded-plastic enclosures of the size S2 motor starter pro-
tectors are fitted with a rotary operating mechanism.
The enclosures can be supplied with either a black rotary oper-
ating mechanism or with an EMERGENCY-STOP rotary operat-
ing mechanism with a red/yellow knob.
The rotary operating mechanisms can be locked in the Open po-
sition with up to 3 padlocks.

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 7/61
Dimension drawings
3RV19 . 3-1. . . . Cast aluminum enclosure for wall mounting
for MSP’s of size S2

3RV19 33-1. . . .
1) Knock-outs for M32 (left) and M40 (right).

2) M32 knock-outs for rear-side cable entry.
3) Opening for padlock with shackle diameter max. 8 mm.
4) Indicator light 3RV19 03-5.
Molded-plastic front plate 3RV19 23-4.

for MSP sizes S0, S2, S3
3RV29 23-4B
3RV29 23-4E
3RV19 23-4G (only for size S0)

SIRIUS General Data
3RV Spring-type terminal
infeed system
Design
Installation guidelines
Distance in Y direction from live, earthed or insulated parts ac-
cording to IEC 60947-4: 10 mm.
In addition, the installation guidelines for motor starter protectors
or fuseless load feeders including the clearances must be com-
plied with.
Type 3RV29 .7
• IEC
- 10 % overvoltage V 500
- 5 % overvoltage V 525
• UL/CSA V 600
Rated current In A 63
• During storage/transport °C -50 ... +80
• During operation °C -20 ... +60
Permissible rated current of the 3RV10 11 motor starter protectors
(size S00) at control cabinet internal temperature
• +60 °C % 100
Permissible rated current of the 3RV10 21 motor starter protectors
(size S0) up to 16 A at control cabinet internal temperature
• +60 °C % 100
Permissible rated current for 3RV1. 21 motor starter protectors (size S0)
from 16 A at control cabinet internal temperature
• +40 °C % 100
• +60 °C % 87
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP201)
Touch protection acc. to IEC 61140 Finger-safe
Conductor cross-sections for main circuit infeed
• Solid, stranded: mm2 4 ... 25
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 4 ... 25
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 6 ... 25
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 10 ... 3
Conductor cross-sections of terminal block
• Solid mm2 1.5 ... 6
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1.5 ... 4
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 1.5 ... 6
1)
In infeed terminal compartment without a conductor connected: IP00.

General Data SIRIUS
3RV Cage clamp
infeed system
Cage Clamp infeed system

3-phase busbars with line-side terminals
for 2 circuit-breakers of sizes S00 and S0
3RV29 17-1.
108
75 108 a
70
80
128
128
45
4,5
NSB0_01248
278
15
7,5
75
S00 S0
a 104 125
3-phase busbars for system expansion

for 2 and 3 circuit-breakers of sizes S00 and S0
3RV29 17-4.
90 135 a
75 120
80
70
128
128
128
45
4,5
278
NSB0_01249
15
7,5
75
S00 S0
a 104 125

IEC Power Control
SIRIUS • Revised • Contactors and Contactor Assemblies
04/20/15
Contents Pages Contents Pages

Section Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/2 - 2/5 Design / Function Overview
3RT10 / 3RT20 Contactors, S00 to S3 . . . . . . 2/104 - 2/105
Product Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/6 - 2/7
3RT10 Contactors, S6 to S12. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/106 - 2/107
SIRIUS Contactors WYE-Delta Starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/110 - 2/115
3RT10 / 3RT20, 3-pole to 95A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/8 3RH2 Control Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/116
3RT10, 3-pole to 500A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/9 3TF6 Vacuum Contactors up to 820A. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/117
3RT12, 3-pole Vacuum to 500A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/10 3RT / 3RH Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/118 - 2/120
3RT13 / 3RT23, 4-pole with 4 NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/11 Technical Data
3RT14, 3-pole for Resistive Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/12 3RT10 / 3RT20 Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/121 - 2/151
3RT15 / 3RT25, 4-pole with 2 NO + 2 NC . . . . . . . . . . 2/13 3RT12 Vacuum Contactors. . . . . . . . . . 2/127, 2/152 - 2/157
3RT26, for Capacitor Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/19 3RT14 Resistive Load Contactors. . . . . . . . . . 2/158 - 2/165
3RT20, Interface Coupling Contactors . . . . . . . . 2/20 - 2/21 3RT13 / 23 4-pole Contactors 4 NO . . . . . . . . 2/166 - 2/167
3RT20 Motor Contactors for DC Operation . . . . 2/16 - 2/18 3RT15 / 25 4-pole Contactors 2 NO & 2 NC. . 2/168 - 2/169
3RH21 Contactor Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/14 - 2/15 3RT26 Capacitor Switching Contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . 2/170
3RA13 / 3RA23 Reversing Contactors . . . . . . . . 2/37 - 2/44 3RT20 Interface Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/171
3RT, 3TF Safety Contactors and . 3TF6 Vacuum Contactors up to 820A. . . . . . . 2/172 - 2/177
3RH2, 3TH2 Safety Control Relays. . . . . . . . . . . 2/22 - 2/23
3TC DC Switching Contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/178 - 2/181
Function Modules for Communications . . . . . . . 2/24 - 2/36
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/182 - 2/184
3RA24, Wye-Delta Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/45 - 2/48
3RH2 Control and Latching Relays. . . . . . . . . 2/185 - 2/188
Contactor Coil Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/49
3RH21 Coupling Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/189
SIRIUS Control Relays & Coupling Relays
Circuit Diagrams
3RH2 Control Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/50
3RT Contactors & Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . 2/190 - 2/198
3RH24 Latched Control Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/51
3RA13 / 23 Reversing Contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/199
Auxiliary Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/51
WYE-Delta Starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/200
3RH21 Coupling Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/52
3TF6 Vacuum Contactors up to 820A. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/201
Special Application Contactors (3TF6 / 3TB5 / 3TC) 3RH2 Control & Latching Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/203
3TF6 Vacuum Contactors up to 820A. . . . . . . . . 2/53 - 2/54 3RH21 Coupling Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/202
3TC DC Switching Contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/55 - 2/56 Position of Terminals
3TB5 Contactor Coils. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/100 - 2/101
3RT Contactors and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . 2/203 - 2/207
SIRIUS Contactor & Relay Accessories 3RT Capacitor Contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/206
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/57 - 2/65 3TF6 Vacuum Contactors up to 820A. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/208
Auxiliary Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/66 - 2/69 3RH2 Control Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/203
AuxiliaryTime Delay and Latching Blocks. . . . . . 2/70 - 2/71 Dimensions
Surge and EMC Suppressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/73 - 2/74
3RT, 3-pole Contactors S00 to S3. . . . . . . . . . 2/209 - 2/212
Contactor Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/76 - 2/79
3RT10, 3-pole Contactors S6 to S12. . . . . . . . 2/213 - 2/214
Reversing Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/80 - 2/82
3RT14, 3-pole Contactors for Resistive Loads. . 2/213 - 2/214
Wye-delta Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/83
3RT12, 3-pole Vacuum Contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/215
NEMA 1 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/93
3RT13 / 23, 3RT15 / 25 4-pole Contactors. . . . . . . . . 2/216
Special Application Contactor Accessories 3RT26, Contactors for Capacitor Switching . . . . . . . . 2/217
Auxiliary Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/53 3RA13 / 23 Reversing Contactors. . . . . . . . . . 2/218 - 2/220
Box Terminals and Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/54 3TF6 Vacuum Contactors up to 820A. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/221
Surge Suppressors for 3TB, 3TC, 3TF . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/54 Contactor Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/222 - 2/223
3RH2 Control and Coupling Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/224
SIRIUS Contactor Spare Parts
Coils. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/94 - 2/98
Arc Chutes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/99
Contact Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/99
Obsolete Contactor / Relay Spare Parts. . . 2/102 - 2/103

IEC Power Control
Contactors and Contactor Assemblies SIRIUS
Contactors for switching three-phase motors
Contactors for switching three-phase motors
3RT10 / 3RT20 Contactors, 3-pole

3 to 75 HP 3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 3RT10 / 3RT20 NEMA Labeled
Sizes S00 to S3 100 to 400 HP, Contactors,
with screw, spring or ring lug sizes S6, S10 and S12 NEMA size 0 to 6
connections Page Page Page
Selection and ordering data Selection and ordering data Selection and ordering data
AC/DC operation 2/8 AC/DC operation 2/9 AC/DC operation 2/8, 2/9
Accessories 2/66 Accessories 2/66 Accessories 2/66
Spare parts 2/94 Spare parts 2/98 Spare parts........................... . 2/94
Description 2/104 Description 2/106 Description 2/104
Technical data 2/121 Technical data 2/123 Technical data 2/121
Internal circuit diagrams 2/190 Internal circuit diagrams 2/196 Internal circuit diagrams 2/190
Position of terminals 2/203 Position of terminals 2/204 Position of terminals 2/203
Dimension drawings 2/209 Dimension drawings 2/213 Dimension drawings 2/209
Contactor assemblies for switching three-phase motors
3RA13 / 23 contactor assemblies

for reversing,
3RT12 vacuum contactors, 3-pole, 3 to 75 HP, Wye Delta for
150 to 400 HP, sizes S00 to S3 customer assembly of
sizes S10 and S12 with screw or spring loaded sizes S00 to S12
Page connections Page Page
AC/DC operation 2/10 AC and DC operation 2/40 for wye-delta starting 2/47
Accessories 2/66 Accessories 2/80 Accessories 2/83
Spare parts 2/98 Spare parts 2/94 Spare parts 2/94
Description 2/106 Overview 2/38 O verview 2/108
Technical data 2/152 Description 2/37 D escription 2/110
Internal circuit diagrams 2/196 Circuit diagram 2/199 Circuit diagrams 2/200
Position of terminals 2/204 Position of terminals 2/204
Dimension drawings 2/215 Dimension drawings 2/218

IEC Power Control
SIRIUS • Revised • Contactors and Contactor Assemblies
04/20/15 Contactors for special applications
Contactors for special applications
3RT14 contactors, 3RT13 / 23 contactors, AC-1: 18 3RT15 / 25 contactors,

Ie /AC-1: 140 to 690 A, to 140 A with 4 NO main contacts, AC-3: 7.5-25 HP
3-pole, sizes S3 to S12, sizes S00 to S3 with 2 NO + 2 NC main contacts,
with screw connections with screw or spring connections sizes S00 to S2
Page Page with screw or spring connections
Page
• AC and DC operation 2/12 • AC and DC operation 2/11 • AC and DC operation 2/13
• Accessories 2/66 • Accessories 2/66 • Accessories 2/66
• Spare parts 2/97 • Spare parts 2/94 • Spare parts 2/94
Descriptions 2/12 Description 2/11 Description 2/13

Technical Data 2/158 Technical Data 2/166 Technical Data 2/168
Internal circuit diagrams 2/196 Internal circuit diagrams 2/191 Internal circuit diagrams 2/190
Position of terminals 2/204 Position of terminals 2/207 Position of terminals 2/203
Dimension drawings 2/211 Dimension drawings 2/216 Dimension drawings 2/216
3RT16 / 3RT26 capacitor 3RT20 coupling relays up to 20 HP

contactors (interface,) 3-pole, 3RT Safety Contactors and
up to 75 kvar for switching motors, 3RH Safety Control Relays
sizes S00 to S2 with screw connections
sizes S00 and S0
with screw or spring connections
Page Page Page
Selection and ordering data Selection and ordering data • Safety with standard devices 2/22
• AC and DC operation 2/19 • DC operation 2/20 • Safety with permanently 2/23
• Accessories 2/66 • Accessories 2/66 mounted auxiliaries
• Spare parts 2/96 • Spare parts 2/94 • Accessories 2/73
Descriptions 2/12 Description 2/20 Description 2/22

Technical Data 2/170 Technical Data 2/171 Technical Data 2/121
Internal circuit diagrams 2/190 Internal circuit diagrams 2/190

IEC Power Control
Contactors and Contactor Assemblies • Revised • SIRIUS
Dimension for
Contactors drawings (mm)
special application 04/20/15
Operator and indicator elements
3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors, 3TB50 to 3TB56 contactors 3TC Contactors
500 to 700 HP; with DC solenoid system,
contactor assemblies 100 to 300 Hp
Page Page Page
• AC and DC operation 2/53 • Spare parts 2/101 • DC operation 2/55
• Accessories 2/53 • Spare parts 2/55
• Spare parts 2/53
Descriptions 2/117 Technical Data 2/178

Technical Data 2/172
Internal circuit diagrams 2/201
Position of terminals 2/208
3RT1 SIRIUS Nomenclature

3RT1 0 3 5 1 A B0 1
SIRIUS Application Frame Current Terminal Coil Type Coil Voltage Aux Contacts A)
Contactor 0 = 3 pole Standard Designation 1 = Screw A = AC (S3) See Coil 0 = None
______________
2 = 3 pole Vacuum 4 = S3 2 = Spring Loaded A = AC/DC (S6-S12) Selection Chart 1 = 1 NO (S3)
page 2/49
3 = 4 pole NO 5 = S6 Choices = 3 = Spring Loaded B = DC (S3) 2 = 1 NC (S3)
4 = 3 pole resistive load 6 = S10 3,4,5,6 Coil only N = UC Solid state 4 = 2NO + 2NC (S3-S12)
5 = 4 pole 2 NO + 2 NC 7 = S12 6 = Busbar Terminal (S6-S12) 5 = 1NO + 1 NC (S3-S12)
6 = 3 pole Capacitive P = UC Solid state 6 = 2 NO + 2 NC (S3-S12)
with RLT (S6-S12) A) per EN50012
3RT2 SIRIUS Innovations Nomenclature

3RT2 0 1 5 1 A B0 1
SIRIUS Application Frame Current Terminal Coil Type Coil Voltage Aux Contacts A)
Innovations 0 = 3 pole Standard 1 = S00 3,4,5,6,7,8 1 = Screw A = AC (S00-S0) See Coil 0 = 1NO + 1NC (S0-S2)
Selection Chart 1 = 1 NO (S00)
Contactor 3 = 4 pole NO 2 = S0 2 = Spring Loaded B = DC
page 2/49
5 = 4 pole 2 NO + 2 NC 3 = S2 4 = Ring Lug N = UC Electronic 2 = 1 NC (S00)
6 = 3-pole Capacitive 4 = 2NO + 2NC (S00-S2)
A) per EN50012
Note: MSPs and Contactors of the same frame size are made to easily fit together with the use of a link module or can be purchased pre-assembled as 3RA starter
assemblies. See section 4.
Note: Contactors and Overloads of the frame size S00 - S3 are made to easily fit together without the use of accessories.
Note: This is only a guide to decode the model number. All possible combinations of these are not available.

IEC Power Control
Contactors and Contactor Assemblies
Dimension
SIRIUSdrawings (mm)
control relays
Contact blocks and lampholders
SIRIUS contactor relays
3RH21, 3RH22 control relays 3RH24 latched control relays,

4- and 8-pole, size S00, 4-pole, size S00,
AC and DC operation Page AC and DC operation Page
Selection and ordering data Selection and ordering data

• With screw connections 2/50 • With screw connections 2/51
• With spring connections 2/50 • Accessories for 3RH2 2/51
.
• Accessories for 3RH2
. 2/51
Overview 2/14 Application 2/116

Technical data 2/185 Technical data 2/185
Terminal diagrams 2/202 Terminal diagrams 2/202
SIRIUS coupling relays (interface)
3RH21 coupling relays

for switching auxiliary circuits,
4-pole, size S00,
DC operation Page

• With screw connections 2/52
• with Cage Clamp connections 2/52
Application 2/52
Technical data 2/189
Terminal diagrams 2/202
Position of terminals 2/203

IEC Power Control
Contactors and Contactor Assemblies • Revised •
Overview 10/22/15
Type S00 3RT20 1 S0 3RT20 2 S2 3RT20 3
3RT10 / 3RT20 contactors

AC/DC operation 3RT2015 3RT2016 3RT2017 3RT2018 3RT2023 3RT2024 3RT2025 3RT2026 3RT2027 3RT2028 3RT2035 3RT2036 3RT2037 3RT2038
Type page 2/8 page 2/8 page 2/8
Maximum 3-phase horsepower ratings at 460V (UL and CSA listed values)
200 V HP 1.5 2 3 3 2 3 5 7.5 10 10 10 15 20 20
230 V HP 2 3 3 5 3 3 5 7.5 10 10 15 15 20 25
460 V HP 3 5 7.5 10 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 50
575 V HP 5 7.5 10 10 7.5 10 15 20 25 25 40 50 50 60
AC-3
Ie/AC-3/400V A 7 9 12 16 9 12 17 25 32 38 40 50 65 80
230 V kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 11 15 18.5 22
400 V kW 3 4 5.5 7.5 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37
500 V kW 3.5 4.5 5.5 7.5 4.5 7.5 10 11 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 37
690 V kW 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 5.5 7.5 11 11 18.5 18.5 22 22 37 45
1000 V kW - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
AC-4 (at Ia = 6 x Ie)
400 V kW 3 4 4 5.5 4 5.5 7.5 7.5 11 11 18.5 22 30 37
400 V kW 1.15 2 2 2.5 2 2.6 3.5 4.4 6 6 11.6 12.6 14.7 15.8
(200,000 operating cycles)
AC-1 (40°C, ≤ 690V)
Ie A 18 22 22 22 40 40 40 40 50 50 60 70 80 90
Accessories for contactors

Auxiliary switch blocks front 3RH29 11 (p. 2/66) 3RH29 21 (p. 2/66)
lateral 3RH29 11 (p. 2/68) 3RH29 21 (p. 2/68)
Terminal covers — — 3RT29 36 (p. 2/77)
Box terminals — — —
Surge suppressor 3RT29 16 (p. 2/73) 3RT29 26 (p. 2/73) 3RT29 36 (p. 2/73)
3RU21 and 3RB3 overload relays (Section 3)

3RU21, thermal, CLASS 10 3RU21 16 0.1-16A (p. 3/10) 3RU21 26 0.18- (p. 3/10) 3RU21 36 11-80A (p. 3/10)
40A
3RB30/31, solid-state, 3RB30 16 0.1-16A (p. 3/22) 3RB30 26 0.1-40A (p. 3/22) 3RB30 36 12-80A (p. 3/22)
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30 3RB31 16 (p. 3/23) 3RB31 26 (p. 3/23) 3RB31 33 (p. 3/23)
3RB22/23, solid-state, 3RB2.83+ 0.3-25A (p. 3/34) 3RB22, 10-100A (p. 3/34)
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30 3RB29 06 3RB22, 3RB23 and 3RB24 with
current measuring module
3RV20 circuit-breakers (Section 1)
Type 3RV20 11 0.18-16A (p. 1/4) 3RV20 21 11-40A (p. 1/4) 3RV20 31 9.5-80A (p. 1/5)
Link modules 3RA29 11 (p. 1/10) 3RA29 21 (p. 1/10) 3RA29 31 (p. 1/10)
3RA23 Reversing contractor assemblies

Complete units Type 3RA2315 3RA2316 3RA2317 3RA2318 3RA2324 3RA2325 3RA2326 3RA2327 3RA2328 3RA2335 3RA2336 3RA2337 3RA2338
(page 2/40) (page 2/42) (page 2/43)
460 V HP 3 5 7.5 10 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 50
Installation kits / 3RA29 13-2AA1 (p. 2/81) 3RA29 23-2AA1 (p. 2/81) 3RA2933-2AA1 (p. 2/81)
wiring connectors
Mechanical interlocks 3RA29 12-2H (p. 2/82) 3RA29 22-2H (p. 2/82) 3RA2934-2B (p. 2/80)

IEC Power Control
Overview
S3 S6 S10 S12 14
3RT1. 4 3RT1. 5 3RT1. 6 3RT1. 7 3TF6
3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46 3RT10 54 3RT10 55 3RT10 56 3RT10 64 3RT10 65 3RT10 66 3RT10 75 3RT10 76 –
(p. 2/8) (p. 2/9) (p. 2/9) (p. 2/9)
– – 3RT12 64 3RT12 65 3RT12 66 3RT12 75 3RT12 76 3TF68 3TF69
(p. 2/10) (p. 2/10) (p. 2/53)
20 25 30 40 50 60 60 75 100 125 150 200 290

25 30 30 50 60 75 75 100 125 150 200 250 350
50 60 75 100 125 150 150 200 250 300 400 500 700
60 75 100 125 150 200 200 250 300 400 500 650 860
65 80 95 115 150 185 225 265 300 400 500 630 820
30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 335 450
18.5 22 22 37 45 55 55 75 90 132 160 200 260
37 45 55 75 90 110 160 160 200 250 355 434 600
45 55 55 110 132 160 200 250 250 400 400/500 600 800
30 37 37 75 90 90 90/315 132/355 132/400 250/560 250/710 600 800
30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 355 400

15.1 17.9 22 29 38 45 54/78 66/93 71/112 84/140 98/161 168 191
100 120 120 160 185 215 275/330 330 330 430/610 610 700 910
–
3TY7 561 (p. 2/53)
3RT19 46-4EA1/2 (p. 2/79) 3RT19 56-4EA1/2/3 (p. 2/79) 3RT19 66-4EA1/2/3 (p. 2/79) 3TX7 686/696 (p. 2/54)
– 3RT19 55/56-4G (p. 2/79) 3RT19 66-4G (p. 2/79) –
3RT19 56-1C (RC element) (p. 2/73) 3TX7 572 (p. 2/54)
3RU11 46 18 – 100 A (p. 3/10) – – – –

3RB20 46 12.5 – 100 A (p. 3/22) 3RB20 56 50 – 200 A (p. 3/22) 3RB20 66 55 – 630 A (p. 3/22) 3RB20 66 160 – 630 A 3RB20 66 160 – 630 A
3RB21 46 (p. 3/23) 3RB21 56 (p. 3/23) 3RB21 66 (p. 3/23) 3RB21 66 (p. 3/22) 3RB21 66 (p. 3/22)
3RB2.83 + 20 – 200 A (p. 3/34) 3RB2.83 + 63 – 630 A (p. 3/34)
3RB29 56 3RB29 66
3RV10 41 45 – 100 A (p. 1/5) – – – –

3RA19 41 (p. 1/10) – – – –
3RA13 44 3RA13 45 3RA13 46 – – – –

(p. 2/44)
50 60 75 100 125 150 150 200 250 300 400 500 700
3RA19 43-2A (p. 2/81) 3RA19 53-2A (p. 2/81) 3RA19 63-2A (p. 2/81) 3RA19 73-2A (p. 2/81) 3TX7 680-1A
3RA19 54-2A (p. 2/80) 3TX7 686-1A

IEC Power Control
Contactors for Switching Motors • Revised • SIRIUS
3RT contactors, 3-pole
Size S00 to S3 09/22/15
3RT201.-1A 3RT201. -2A. . . 3RT2028-1N... 3RT2025-2B... 3RT2035-1A... 3RT1044-1A...

Amp Single-phase Three-phase Auxiliary Spring-Loaded Weight
Ratings HP ratings HP ratings contacts Screw Terminals Terminals1) approx.
Frame
Size AC3 AC1 115V 208V 230V 208V 230V 460V 575V NO NC Order No. Order No. kg
3RT 3-pole contactors

7 18 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.5 2 3 3RT2015-1■ ●●1
5 1 0 3RT2015-2 ■ ●●1
3RT2015-1■ ●●2
0 1 3RT2015-2 ■ ●●2
9 22 0.33 1 1 2 3 5 7.5 3RT2016-1■ ●●1
1 0 3RT2016-2 ■ ●●1
3RT2016-1■ ●●2
0 1 3RT2016-2 ■ ●●2
S00 0.24/0.29
12 22 0.5 1.5 2 3 3 7.5 10 3RT2017-1■ ●●1
1 0 3RT2017-2 ■ ●●1
3RT2017-1■ ●●2
0 1 3RT2017-2 ■ ●●2
16 22 1 2 2 3 5 10 10 3RT2018-1■ ●●1
1 0 3RT2018-2 ■ ●●1
3RT2018-1■ ●●2
0 1 3RT2018-2 ■ ●●2
9 40 1 1 1 2 3 5 7.5 3RT2023-1■ ●●0
1 1 3RT2023-2 ■ ●●0
12 40 1 2 2 3 3 7.5 10 3RT2024-1■ ●●0
1 1 3RT2024-2 ■ ●●0
16 40 1 2 3 5 5 10 15 3RT2025-1■ ●●0
1 1 3RT2025-2 ■ ●●0
S0 0.42/0.60
25 40 2 3 3 7.5 7.5 15 20 3RT2026-1■ ●●0
1 1 3RT2026-2 ■ ●●0
32 50 2 5 5 10 10 20 25 3RT2027-1■ ●●0
1 1 3RT2027-2 ■ ●●0
38 50 3 5 5 10 10 25 25 3RT2028-1■ ●●0
1 1 3RT2028-2 ■ ●●0
40 60 3 5 7.5 10 15 30 40 3RT2035-1■ ●●0
1 1 3RT2035-3 ■ ●●0
50 70 3 7.5 10 15 15 40 50 3RT2036-1■ ●●0
1 1 3RT2036-3 ■ ●●0
S2 0.99/1.121
65 80 5 10 10 20 20 50 50 3RT2037-1■ ●●0
1 1 3RT2037-3 ■ ●●0
802) 90 5 10 15 20 25 50 60 3RT2038-1■ ●●0
1 1 3RT2038-3 ■ ●●0
65 100 5 10 15 20 25 50 60 3RT1044-1■ ●●0
0 0 3RT1044-3 ■ ●●0
S3 80 120 7.5 15 15 25 30 60 75 3RT1045-1■ ●●0
0 0 3RT1045-3 ■ ●●0 1.8/2.8
95 120 10 15 20 30 30 75 100 3RT1046-1■ ●●0
0 0 3RT1046-3 ■ ●●0
■ ■
AC Coil = A A
DC Coil = B B
Size S0 and S2 only: UC Electronic with integrated varistor UC Coil = N N
Single-phase Three-phase Auxiliary Screw Terminals Screw Terminals Weight

HP ratings HP ratings contacts with AC coil with 24 VDC coil approx.
NEMA Amp
SIze Ratings 115V 230V 208V 230V 460V 575V NO NC Order No. Order No. kg
NEMA Labeled Contactors

0 18 1 2 3 3 5 5 1 0 3RT2018-1A ●●1-0UA0 3RT2018-1BB41-0UA0 0.28
1 27 2 3 7.5 7.5 10 10 1 1 3RT2027-1A ●●0-0UA0 3RT2027-1BB40-0UA0 0.42
2 45 3 7.5 10 15 25 25 0 0 3RT2036-1A ●●0-0UA0 3RT2036-1NB30-0UA0 0.986/1.121
3 90 7.5 15 25 30 50 50 0 0 3RT1046-1A ●●0-0UA0 3RT1046-1BB40-0UA0 1.8 / 2.8
1) All terminals are spring loaded on frame sizes S00 & S0.
Only the coil terminals are spring loaded on frame sizes S2 & S3.
AC Coil Selection for 3RT201 through 3RT104
●●Coil Code C22) H23) K6 P6 U6 V6 T6
2) Max UL FLA = 65A at 460V
60 Hz 24 V 48 V 120 V 240 V 277 V 480 V 600 V
50 Hz 24 V 48 V 110 V 220 V — — —
Note: Ring lug terminals are also available in size S00 & S0
2) Use Code B0 for 3RT201, S00
contactors, except contactors with communication interface
3) Use Code H0 for 3RT201, S00
or UC coil. Change the 8th digit of the order number to a “4”,
e. g. 3RT2015-4AK61. DC Coil Selection for 3RT201, 3RT202, 3RT104 (for 3RT203 see UC)
For further coil voltages, see page 2/49. ●●Coil Code A44) B4 W4 E4 F4 G4 M4
For auxiliaries and accessories, see page 2/66-2/83. DC 12 V 24 V 48 V 60 V 110 V 125 V 220 V
For spare parts, see page 2/94-2/99. 4) 3RT201 and 3RT202 only
For technical data, see page 2/121-2/142.
For description, see page 2/104-2/105. UC Coil Selection for 3RT202 UC Coil Selection for 3RT203
For int. circuit diagrams, see page 2/190-2/197. ●●Coil Code B3 F3 P34) ●● B3 F3 P34)
For dimension drawings, see page 2/209-2/212.
UC 21-28V 95-130V 200-280V 20-33V 83-155V 175-280V
4) at upper limit = 1.1 x Us

IEC Power Control
SIRIUS • Revised • Contactors for Switching Motors
3RT contactors, 3-pole
09/30/14 Size S6-S12 and NEMA size 4-6
* AC/DC Coils with built in surge suppressor

* Coil Types (40Hz to 60Hz, DC):
* Conventional Coil
* Solid-state operated coil with wider range and 24 V DC PLC input
* Solid-state operated coil with Remaining Lifetime Indication (RLT)
* Box terminals ordered separately
3RT1054-6A. . 6 3RT1065-6P. . 5
Spring-type
Amp Single-phase Three-phase Auxiliary Screw Terminals terminals on coil Weight
Ratings HP ratings HP ratings contacts on coil and aux. and aux. contacts approx.
Frame
Size AC3 AC1 115V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V NO NC Order No. Order No. kg
3RT 3-pole Contactors

115 160 — 25 40 50 100 125 2 2 3RT1054-6 ■ ●●6 3RT1054-2 ■ ●●6
S6 150 185 — 30 50 60 125 150 2 2 3RT1055-6 ■ ●●6 3RT1055-2 ■ ●●6 3.5
185 215 — 30 60 75 150 200 2 2 3RT1056-6 ■ ●●6 3RT1056-2 ■ ●●6
225 275 — — 60 75 150 200 2 2 3RT1064-6 ■ ●●6 3RT1064-2 ■ ●●6
S10 265 330 — — 75 100 200 250 2 2 3RT1065-6 ■ ●●6 3RT1065-2 ■ ●●6 6.7
300 330 — — 100 125 250 300 2 2 3RT1066-6 ■ ●●6 3RT1066-2 ■ ●●6
400 430 — — 125 150 300 400 2 2 3RT1075-6 ■ ●●6 3RT1075-2 ■ ●●6
S12 10.5
500 610 — — 150 200 400 500 2 2 3RT1076-6 ■ ●●6 3RT1076-2 ■ ●●6
■ ■
UC Conventional Coil A A
Solid State Operated Coil = N N
Solid State Operated Coil with RLT = P●●5 —
Spring-type
Single-phase Three-phase Auxiliary Screw Terminals terminals on coil Weight
HP ratings HP ratings contacts on coil and aux. and aux. contacts approx.
NEMA Amp
SIze Ratings 115V 230V 208V 230V 460V 575V NO NC Order No. Order No. kg
NEMA Labeled Contactors

4 135 — 30 40 50 100 100 2 2 3RT1056-6A●●6-0UA0 — 3.5
5 300 — — 100 125 250 300 2 2 3RT1066-6A●●6-0UA0 — 6.7
6 300 — — 150 200 400 500 2 2 3RT1076-6A●●6-0UA0 — 10.5
All coil voltages are in the adjacent table.

Sizes S6 to S12 Coil Codes - UC operation (AC 50 to 60 Hz and DC)
For auxiliaries and accessories,
see page 2/66-2/83. UC Conventional Coil Solid-State Coil
For spare parts, see page 2/94-2/99.
For technical data, see page 2/143-2/151. Rated control 3RT1. 5.-.A Rated control 3RT1. 5.-.N 3RT1. 5.-.P
For description, see page 2/106-2/107. supply voltage Us supply voltage Us
3RT1. 6.-.A 3RT1. 6.-.N 3RT1. 6.-.P
For int. circuit diagrams, see page 2/196-2/198. Us min ... Us max1) Us min ... Us max1)
For dimension drawings, see page 2/213-2/214. 3RT1. 7.-.A 3RT1. 7.-.N 3RT1. 7.-.P
Coil Codes ●● Coil Codes ●● ●●
23 ... 26 V AC/DC B3 21 ... 27.3 V AC/DC B3 —
42 ... 48 V AC/DC D3 96 ... 127 V AC/DC F3 F3
110 ... 127 V AC/DC F3 200 ... 277 V AC/DC P3 P3
200 ... 220 V AC/DC M3
220 ... 240 V AC/DC P3
240 ... 277 V AC/DC U3
1) Operating range:
380 ... 420 V AC/DC V3
0.8 x Us min to 1.1 × Us max.
440 ... 480 V AC/DC R3
500 ... 550 V AC/DC S3
575 ... 600 V AC/DC T3

Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS
3RT12 vacuum contactors, 3-pole

AC/DC operation (40 Hz ... 60 Hz, DC)
Withdrawable coils
Integrated coil circuit (varistor)
Auxiliary and control conductors: screw connections
Main conductor: bar connections
Size Horsepower ratings Auxiliary Rated control Order No. Weight
and utilization categories contacts, supply volt- approx.
lateral age Us
AC-3 Ratings of three-phase AC-1
Maximum motors Maximum
inductive resistive
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
current current
Amps HP HP HP HP Amps NO NC AC/DC V kg

Conventional operating mechanism
3RT12 6 . S10 225 60 75 150 200 330 2 2 110 ... 127 3RT12 64-6AF3 6 6.4
220 ... 240 3RT12 64-6AP36
265 75 100 200 250 330 2 2 110 ... 127 3RT12 65-6AF3 6
220 ... 240 3RT12 65-6AP36
300 100 125 250 300 330 2 2 110 ... 127 3RT12 66-6AF3 6
220 ... 240 3RT12 66-6AP36
S12 400 125 150 300 400 610 2 2 110 ... 127 3RT12 75-6AF3 6 9.6
220 ... 240 3RT12 75-6AP36
500 150 200 400 500 610 2 2 110 ... 127 3RT12 76-6AF3 6
220 ... 240 3RT12 76-6AP36
Solid-state operating mechanism · for DC 24 V PLC output

3RT12 7 . S10 225 60 75 150 200 330 2 2 96 ... 127 3RT12 64-6NF3 6 6.4
200 ... 277 3RT12 64-6NP36
265 75 100 200 250 330 2 2 96 ... 127 3RT12 65-6NF3 6
200 ... 277 3RT12 65-6NP36
300 100 125 250 300 330 2 2 96 ... 127 3RT12 66-6NF3 6
200 ... 277 3RT12 66-6NP36
S12 400 125 150 300 400 610 2 2 96 ... 127 3RT12 75-6NF3 6 9.6
200 ... 277 3RT12 75-6NP36
500 150 200 400 500 610 2 2 96 ... 127 3RT12 76-6NF3 6
200 ... 277 3RT12 76-6NP36
Universal Coil Selection for 3RT126 through 3RT127: Conventional Operation

Coil Code B3 D3 F3 M3 P3 U3 V3 R3 S3 T3
Volts AC/DC 23 .. 26 V 42 .. 48 V 110 .. 127 V 200 .. 220 V 220 .. 240 V 240 .. 277 V 380 .. 420 V 440 .. 480 V 500 .. 550 V 575 .. 600 V
40 - 60 Hz, DC
Solid State Selection for 3RT126 through 3RT127: Solid-State

Coil Code B3 F3 P3
Volts AC/DC 21 .. 27.3 V 96 .. 127 V 200 .. 277 V
40 - 60 Hz, DC
For further vacuum contactors, 500Hp and

700Hp (3TF68/69), see page 2/53.
For auxiliaries and accessories, see page 2/68 .
For technical
For further vacuum
data, see contactors, 500Hp and
page 2/152-2/157.
700Hp
For (3TF68/69),
int. circuit see
diagrams, seepage
page 2/28.
2/196
For auxiliariesdrawings,
For dimension and accessories,
see pagesee page 2/37-50.
2/215.
For spare parts, see page 2/56-58.
For technical data, see page 2/96, 2/91-122.
For int. circuit diagrams, see page 2/156.
For dimension drawings, see page 2/178.
SIRIUS • Revised • Contactors for Special Applications
3RT13 & 3RT23 contactors, 4-pole (4 NO
04/20/15 contacts) for switching resistive loads (AC-1)
Standards
Size S0: In order to make 4-pole contactor assemblies using two
3RT232. contactors, the fourth pole of the left-hand contactor must
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 always be moved to the left-hand side. The contactor assembly
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 can then be made easily with the aid of the 3RA2922-2H mechani-
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 (auxiliary switches) cal interlock and connecting clip set fitted between the
two contactors.
Design Sizes S2 and S3: Contactor assemblies can be made using two
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are safe 3RT23 3 or 3RT13 4. contactors in conjunction with the laterally
from touch to DIN VDE 0106, Part 100. The accessories for the mountable mechanical interlock and the mechanical connectors.
3-pole SIRIUS contactors can also be used for the 4-pole de- The mechanical interlock for fitting onto the front cannot be used
signs. for size S2 and S3 contactors.
Mountable auxiliary contacts
Size S00: 4 auxiliary contacts of which up to 3 can be NC. Application
Size S0 & S2: 4 additional auxiliary contacts up to 3 can be NC. • Switching resistive loads
Sizes S2 and S3: Up to 4 auxiliary contacts (either laterally • Isolating systems with unearthed or poorly earthed neutral
mounted or snappped onto the top). conductors
Contactor assemblies with mechanical interlock • System transfers when alternative AC power supplies are used
The 4-pole 3RT13 / 3RT23 contactors with 4 NO contacts as the • As contactors which only carry current and do not have to switch
main contacts are suitable for making contactor assemblies with a in case of inductive loads – e.g. variable-speed operating
mechanical interlock, e.g. for system transfers. mechanisms
Size S00: Contactor assemblies can be made using two 3RT231. • Switching mixed loads in distribution systems (e.g. for supply-
contactors in conjunction with the mechanical interlock and two ing heaters, lamps, motors, PC power supply units) with p.f. >
connecting clips (Order No. 3RA2912-2H, pack comprising 10 0.8 according to IEC 60947-4-1, test conditions for utilization
interlocking elements and 20 clips for 10 contactor assemblies, category AC-1
see accessories on page 2/72).

Rating data Auxiliary contacts
Rated AC Operation Rated DC Operation
AC-1 UL ratings control control
Max resist.
AC loads Ident- supply
Screw supply
Screw
current Ieat 600 V, ification voltage Us Terminals 1) voltage Terminals 1)
40°C 60°C 60 Hz No. Version 50/60 Hz Order No. Us Order No.
Amps Amps NO NC V AC V DC
For screwing and stapping onto 35 mm mounting rail

3RT23 17-1AP60 Size S00 – Auxiliary switches can be retrofitted
18 16 18 — — — 24 3RT23 16-1AB00 24 3RT23 16-1BB40
110/120 3RT23 16-1AK60 125 3RT23 16-1BG40
220/240 3RT23 16-1AP60 220 3RT23 16-1BM40
22 20 20 — — — 24 3RT23 17-1AB00 24 3RT23 17-1BB40
110/120 3RT23 17-1AK60 125 3RT23 17-1BG40
220/240 3RT23 17-1AP60 220 3RT23 17-1BM40
Size S0 – Terminal designations according to EN 50012 —1 NO + 1 NC, identification number 11E
3RT23 27-1AP60 35 2) 30 2) 30 11E 1 1 24 3RT23 25-1AC20 24 3RT23 25-1BB40
110/120 3RT23 25-1AK60 125 3RT23 25-1BG40
220/240 3RT23 25-1AP60 220 3RT23 25-1BM40
40 2) 35 2) 35 11E 1 1 24 3RT23 26-1AC20 24 3RT23 26-1BB40
110/120 3RT23 26-1AK60 125 3RT23 26-1BG40
220/240 3RT23 26-1AP60 220 3RT23 26-1BM40
50 2) 42 2) 38 11E 1 1 24 3RT23 27-1AC20 24 3RT23 27-1BB40
110/120 3RT23 27-1AK60 125 3RT23 27-1BG40
220/240 3RT23 27-1AP60 220 3RT23 27-1BM40
3RT23 36-1AP60 Size S2 V UC
60 55 60 11E 1 1 24 3RT23 36-1AC20 20-33 3RT23 36-1NB30
110/120 3RT23 36-1AK60 83-155 3RT23 36-1NF30
220/240 3RT23 36-1AP60 175-280 3RT23 36-1NP30
110 95 105 11E 1 1 24 3RT23 37-1AC20 20-33 3RT23 37-1NB30
110/120 3RT23 37-1AK60 83-155 3RT23 37-1NF30
220/240 3RT23 37-1AP60 175-280 3RT23 37-1NP30
Size S3 V DC
140 120 110 — — — 24 3RT13 46-1AC20 24 3RT13 46-1BB40
110/120 3RT13 46-1AK60 125 3RT13 46-1BG40
220/240 3RT13 46-1AP60 220 3RT13 46-1BM40
1) Size S00 and S0 contactors are also available with For further voltages, see page 2/49. For technical data, see page 2/166-2/167.
spring-type terminals. Replace the 8th digit of the order For coil voltage tolerance, p. 2/49 For in. circuit diagrams, see page 2/191-2/196.
no. with a “2” e.g. “3RT23 16-2AK60” For auxiliaries and accessories, For dimension drawings, see page 2/216.
2) Minimum conductor cross-section 8 AWG.
see page 2/66-2/83.

Contactors for Special Applications SIRIUS
3RT14, 3-pole
for switching resistive loads (AC-1)
Application
AC and DC operation The contactors are suitable for (AC-1) or as contactors, for The accessories for the SIRIUS
(size S3) use in any climate. They are example in variable-speed 3RT10 contactors can also be
UC operation (AC/DC) safe from touch to DIN VDE drives which normally only have used here.
(sizes S6 to S12) 0106 Part 100. to carry the current.
IEC 60 947, EN 60 947 3RT14 contactors are used for
(VDE 0660) switching resistive loads.
Ratings UL Ratings Rated control Order No. Weight

AC-1 utilization category, supply voltage Us approx.
IEC Ratings
3RT14 46-1A . .0 Maximum Rated power of three phase Max 230/ 460/ 575/
current loads cos Ø = 0.95 (@ 60°C) Current 240V 480V 600V
230V 400V 500V 690V Hp Hp Hp kg
Amps kW kW kW kW Amps
With screw connections · for screwing and snapping onto
35 mm and 75 mm standard mounting rails
Size S3 · (without auxiliary contacts)
AC operation
140 50 86 107 148 140 15 30 40 24 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT14 46-1AC2 0 1.8
120 V, 60 Hz 3RT14 46-1AK6 0
240 V, 60 Hz 3RT14 46-1AP6 0
DC operation · DC solenoid system
140 50 86 107 148 131 15 30 40 DC 24 V 3RT14 46-1BB4 0 2.7
DC 48 V 3RT14 46-1BW40
AC/DC operation (40 Hz ... 60 Hz, DC) Integrated coil circuit (varistor) Main conductor: bar connections
Withdrawable coils Auxiliary and control conductors: screw connections
Size Ratings UL Auxiliary Rated control Order No. Weight
AC-1 utilization category, Rating contacts, supply voltage Us approx.
lateral
IEC Ratings
3RT14 6 . AC-1 Rated power of three phase Max
Maximum loads cos Ø = 0.95 (@ 60°C) Current
resistive
current 230V 400V 500V 690V
Amps kW kW kW kW Amps NO NC AC/DC V kg
S6 275 95 165 205 285 210 2 2 110 ... 127 3RT14 56-6AF36 3.1
220 ... 240 3RT14 56-6AP36
S10 400 145 250 315 430 360 2 2 110 ... 127 3RT14 66-6AF36 5.7
220 ... 240 3RT14 66-6AP36
S12 690 245 430 535 740 580 2 2 110 ... 127 3RT14 76-6AF36 9.1
220 ... 240 3RT14 76-6AP36
3RT14 7 . S6 275 95 165 205 285 210 2 2 96 ... 127 3RT14 56-6NF36 3.1
200 ... 277 3RT14 56-6NP36
S10 400 145 250 315 430 360 2 2 96 ... 127 3RT14 66-6NF36 5.7
200 ... 277 3RT14 66-6NP36
S12 690 245 430 535 740 580 2 2 96 ... 127 3RT14 76-6NF36 9.1
200 ... 277 3RT14 76-6NP36
Solid-state operating mechanism · for DC 24 V PLC
with remaining lifetime indication
S6 275 95 165 205 285 210 1 1 96 ... 127 3RT14 56-6PF35 3.1
200 ... 277 3RT14 56-6PP35
S10 400 145 250 315 430 360 1 1 200 ... 277 3RT14 66-6PP35 5.7
S12 690 245 430 535 740 580 1 1 200 ... 277 3RT14 76-6PP35 9.1
Universal Coil Selection for 3RT145 through 3RT147: Conventional Operation For further coil voltages, see page 2/49.
Coil Code B3 D3 F3 M3 P3 U3 V3 R3 S3 T3
Volts AC/DC 23 .. 26 V 42 .. 48 V 110 .. 127 V 200 .. 220 V 220 .. 240 V 240 .. 277 V 380 .. 420 V 440 .. 480 V 500 .. 550 V 575 .. 600 V see page 2/66-2/83.
40 - 60 Hz, DC For spare parts, see page 2/94-2/99.
For technical data, see page 2/158-2/165.
For int. circuit diagrams, see page 2/196.
Universal Coil Selection for 3RT145 through 3RT147: Solid-State Note: B3 code not available for
Coil Code B3 F3 P3 For dimension drawings,
Remaining Lifetime Contactors.
Volts AC/DC 21 .. 27.3 V 96 .. 127 V 200 .. 277 V see page 2/211, 2/213-2/214.
40 - 60 Hz, DC

3RT15 / 3RT25 contactors, 4-pole (2 NO + 2 NC
04/20/15 contacts for switching motors
AC and DC operation Application

Mountable auxiliary contacts
IEC 60 947-4-1/EN 60 947-4-1 Size S00 and S0: • Changing the polarity of hoisting
(VDE 0660, Part 102) 4 auxiliary contacts, of which up to 4 can gear motors
be NC contacts. • Switching two separate loads from
the same source
Design Size S2
The contactors are suitable for use in any Up to 4 auxiliary contacts (either laterally
climate. They are safe to touch accord- mounted or snapped onto the top; auxiliary
ing to EN 50274. The accessories for the switch blocks to EN 50 012 and EN 50
3-pole SIRIUS contactors can also be 005)
used for the 4-pole designs.

Rating data
AC-1 Max Rated Rated
AC-2/AC-3 Tu: up to 60°C AC Operation 2) DC Operation 2)
resistive control control
Max Max motor current Auxiliary supply Screw terminals supply Screw terminals
Current Ie HP at contacts voltage voltage
at 400 V 460 V, 60 Hz 40°C 60°C Version Us Order No. Us Order No.
Amps NO NC Amps NO NC V AC, 50/60 Hz V DC
For screwing and stapping onto 35 mm standard mounting rail

3RT25 16-1AB00 Size S00 3) - Auxiliary switches can be retrofitted
9 5 18 16 — — 24 3RT25 16-1AB00 24 3RT25 16-1BB40

110/120 3RT25 16-1AK60 125 3RT25 16-1BG40
220/240 3RT25 16-1AP60 220 3RT25 16-1BM40
12 7.5 4) 22 20 — — 24 3RT25 17-1AB00 24 3RT25 17-1BB40
110/120 3RT25 17-1AK60 125 3RT25 17-1BG40
220/240 3RT25 17-1AP60 220 3RT25 17-1BM40
3RT25 26-1AC20 16 10 4) 22 20 — — 24 3RT25 18-1AB00 24 3RT25 18-1BB40
110/120 3RT25 18-1AK60 125 3RT25 18-1BG40
220/240 3RT25 18-1AP60 220 3RT25 18-1BM40
Size S0 - Terminal designations according to EN 50012, 1 NO + 1 NC, identification number 11E
25 15 15 40 35 1 1 24 3RT25 26-1AC20 24 3RT25 26-1BB40

110/120 3RT25 26-1AK60 125 3RT25 26-1BG40
220/240 3RT25 26-1AP60 220 3RT25 26-1BM40
3RT25 35-1AC20 Size S2
1 R1 R3 3 13 21
A1 NO NC
NO NC
A2 V UC
2 R2 R4 4 14 22
35 30 20 60 55 1 1 24 3RT25 35-1AC20 20-33 3RT25 35-1NB30
110/120 3RT25 35-1AK60 83-155 3RT25 35-1NF30
220/240 3RT25 35-1AP60 175-280 3RT25 35-1NP30
41 30 25 70 60 1 1 24 3RT25 36-1AC20 20-33 3RT25 36-1NB30
110/120 3RT25 36-1AK60 83-155 3RT25 36-1NF30
220/240 3RT25 36-1AP60 175-280 3RT25 36-1NP30
For further voltages, see page 2/49. 1) For changing polarity; not suitable for reversing. 3) Size S00:
For auxiliaries and accessories, see page 2/66-2/83. 2) Size S00 and S0 contactors are also available
Coil voltage tolerance
For spare parts, see page 2/94-2/99. at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
with spring-type terminals. Replace the 8th
For technical data, see page 2/168-2/169. at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
digit of the order no. with a “2” e.g. “3RT25
For int. circuit diagrams, see page 2/191-2/196. 16-2AK60” 4) The NC contact can switch up to 5 HP.

Contactors and Contactor
3RT, 3RHAssemblies
Contactors for Special Applications
3RT, 3RH Contactors
Contactors for Special
with Extended Applications
Operating SIRIUS
Range 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us, for Railway Applications
3RH21 contactor relays 3RH21 contactor relays
Overview Application
DC operation For operation in installations which are subject both to consider-
able variations in the control voltage and to high ambient tem-
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1, for requirements according to peratures, e. g. railway applications under extreme climatic
IEC 60077-1 and IEC 60077-2. conditions, rolling mills, etc.
The contactor relays are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The Also for control supply voltages with battery buffer for longer
size S00 contactor relays have spring-type connections for all operating times should the battery charging fail.
terminals.
Contactor relays without series resistor
Ambient temperature
Control and auxiliary circuits
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the con-
3
tactor relays (across the full coil operating range) is -40 to These contactor relays have an extended operating range from
+70 °C. 0.7 to 1.25 x Us; the solenoid coils are fitted with a suppressor
diode. An additional series resistor is not required.
Uninterrupted duty at temperatures > +60 °C reduces the
mechanical endurance, the current carrying capacity of the con- Note:
ducting paths and the switching frequency. An additional auxiliary switch block cannot be mounted.
Control and auxiliary circuits Side-by-side mounting
The solenoid coils of the contactor relays have an extended coil A clearance of 10 mm is required for side-by-side mounting at
operating range from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard ambient temperatures > 60 °C ≤ 70 °C.
with suppressor diodes to provide protection against overvolt- Contactor relays with series resistor
age. The opening delay is consequently 2 to 5 ms longer than for
standard contactors. Control and auxiliary circuits
The DC solenoid systems of the contactor relays are modified (to
hold-in coil) by means of a series resistor.
The size S00 contactor relays are supplied prewired with a plug-
on module containing the series resistor. The suppressor diode
is integrated.
L+
L-
S1
E1+
RV K1
K1 13 23 31
NSB0_02177
A2-
14 24 32
A 4-pole auxiliary switch block (according to EN 50005) can be

fitted additionally.
Side-by-side mounting
Side-by-side mounting is permitted at ambient temperatures up
to 70 °C.

3RT, 3RH Contactors forContactors and Contactor Assemblies
Special Applications
SIRIUS 3RT,
Contactors with Extended Operating Range 0.73RH Contactors
... 1.25 x Us, forforRailway
SpecialApplications
Applications
3RH21 contactor relays 3RH21 contactor relays

For screw and snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rail
Solenoid coil fitted with suppressor diode
3
3RH21 22-2K . 40 3RH21 22-2K . 40-0LA0

Rated operational current Contacts Rated control supply Spring-type terminals Weight
Ie/AC-15/AC-14 voltage Us approx.
Tu: 70 °C at
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V Version
Order No.
A A A A NO NC V DC kg
3RH21 contactor relays
Size S00
Without series resistor
Terminal designations according to EN 50011
2 NO + 2 NC, identification number 22E
13 21 31 43
A1(+)
A2(–)
14 22 32 44
10 3 2 1 2 21) 24 3RH21 22-2KB40 0.300
110 3RH21 22-2KF40 0.300
With series resistor
13 23 31
A1(+)
A2(–)
14 24 32
10 3 2 1 2 12) 24 3RH21 22-2KB40-0LA0 0.300
110 3RH21 22-2KF40-0LA0 0.300
1) It is not possible to mount an auxiliary switch block.
2) 4-pole auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005 can be mounted.
More information
Contactors Type 3RH21 ..
Upright mounting position
• Contactors with series resistor Special version (on request)
• Contactors without series resistor Special version (on request)
Ambient temperature
• During storage °C -55 ... +80
Solenoid coil operating range DC 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us
Power consumption of the solenoid coils For cold coil and 1.0 x Us
• Contactors with series resistor - Closing W 13
- Closed W 4
• Contactors without series resistor - Closing W 2.8
- Closed W 2.8
All specifications and technical specifications not mentioned

here are identical to those of the standard contactor relays.

3RT, 3RHAssemblies
3RT, 3RH Contactors
Operating SIRIUS
3RT20 motor contactors, 7.5 ... 25 HP
3RT20 1. contactors with series resistor
Overview
DC operation
The solenoid coils of the contactors have an extended coil oper-
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1, ating range from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard with
for requirements according to IEC 60077-1 and IEC 60077-2. suppressor diodes to provide protection against overvoltage.
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The The DC solenoid systems of the contactors are modified (to
contactors have spring-type connections as well as screw holding excitation) by means of a series resistor.
connections. The size S00 and S0 contactors have spring-type
connections for all terminals. L+
L-
Ambient temperature
3
S1
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the con-
tactors (across the full coil operating range) is -40 to +70 °C.
Uninterrupted duty at temperatures > +60 °C reduces the E1+
mechanical endurance, the current carrying capacity of the Rv
conducting paths and the switching frequency. Q1

Q1 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
The solenoid coils of the contactor relays have an extended coil
operating range from 0.7 to 1.25 or 1.3 x Us and are fitted as
NSB0_02178
A2-
standard with suppressor diodes. The opening delay is 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
consequently 2 to 5 ms longer than for standard contactors.
Application The size S00 contactors are supplied prewired with a plug-on
module containing the series resistor. The suppressor diode is
For operation in installations which are subject both to integrated. A 4-pole auxiliary switch block (according to
considerable variations in the control voltage and to high EN 50005) can be fitted additionally.
ambient temperatures, e. g. railway applications under extreme
A circuit diagram showing the terminals is labeled on each con-
climatic conditions, rolling mills, etc.
tactor. One NC of the auxiliary contacts is required for the series
Also for control supply voltages with battery buffer for longer resistor function. The selection and ordering data shows the
operating times should the battery charging fail. number of additional, unassigned auxiliary contacts. With size
S00 it is possible to extend the number of auxiliary contacts.
Contactors without series resistor
At ambient temperatures up to 70 °C, the size S00 contactors
These contactors have an extended operating range from and contactor relays are allowed to be mounted side by side.
0.7 to 1.25 x Us; on size S00 the coils are fitted with suppressor
diodes, on size S0 with varistors. An additional series resistor is 3RT20 2. contactors with solid-state operating mechanism,
not required. extended operating range
Note: Control and auxiliary circuits
An additional auxiliary switch block cannot be mounted.
The solenoid coils of the contactors have an extended coil oper-
Side-by-side mounting ating range from 0.7 to 1.3 x Us and are fitted as standard with
varistors to provide protection against overvoltage.
A clearance of 10 mm is required for side-by-side mounting at
ambient temperatures > 60 °C ≤ 70 °C. The contactors are energized via upstream control electronics
which ensure the coil operating range of 0.7 to 1.3 x Us at an
ambient temperature of 70 °C. They are supplied as complete
units with integrated coil electronics. A varistor is integrated for
damping opening surges in the coil.
The mounting possibilities for auxiliary switches correspond to
those of the standard contactors for switching motors in the
matching size (see page
page 2/58).
3/6).
Side-by-side mounting is permitted at ambient temperatures up
to 70 °C for these contactor versions in size S0.

3RT, 3RH Contactors forContactors and Contactor Assemblies
SIRIUS 3RT,
Contactors with Extended Operating Range 0.73RH Contactors
... 1.25 x Us, forforRailway
SpecialApplications
Applications
3RT20 motor contactors, 7.5 ... 25 HP 3RT20 motor contactors, 7.5 ... 25 HP

Solenoid coil fitted with suppressor diode (S00)
3
3RT20 1 . -2K . 4 . 3RT20 1 . -2K . 42-0LA0

Rated data Auxiliary contacts Rated control Spring-type terminals Weight
AC-3 supply voltage approx.
Operational Ratings of Ident. Version Us
current Ie induction motors No.
at at Order No.
400 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A HP HP HP HP NO NC V DC kg
3RT20 contactors for switching motors
Size S00
Without series resistor4)
Terminal designations according to EN 50012 or EN 50005
• 1 NO, identification number 10E
A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
A2(–)
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
• 1 NC, identification number 01
A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21
A2(–)
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22
12 -- 3 7.5 10 10E1) 1 -- 24 3RT20 17-2KB41 0.300
125 3RT20 17-2KG41 0.300
12 -- 3 7.5 10 011) -- 1 24 3RT20 17-2KB42 0.300
125 3RT20 17-2KG42 0.300
With series resistor
A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A2(–)
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
12 -- 3 7.5 10 --2) -- 13) 24 3RT20 17-2KB42-0LA0 0.300
125 3RT20 17-2KG42-0LA0 0.300
16 -- 5 10 10 --2) -- 13) 24 3RT20 18-2KB42-0LA0 0.300
125 3RT20 18-2KG42-0LA0 0.300
For
Foraccessories
accessoriesand
andspare
spareparts,
parts,see page
see 2/66-2/69.
page 3/93.
1) It is not possible to mount an auxiliary switch block. A clearance of 10 mm
is required for side-by-side mounting at ambient temperatures > 60 °C.
2) One 4-pole auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005 can be mounted;
no distance required up to 70 °C.
3) NC contact cannot be used because it is required for switching the series
resistor.
4) Versions available with screw terminals.

3RT, 3RHAssemblies
3RT, 3RH Contactors
Operating SIRIUS
Solenoid coil fitted with varistor (S0)
3
3RT20 2. -2K . 4 0 3RT20 2 . -2X . 40-0LA2
Rated data Auxiliary contacts Rated control Spring-type terminals Weight

AC-3 supply voltage approx.
Operational Ratings of Ident. Version Us
current Ie induction motors No.
at at Order No.
400 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A HP HP HP HP NO NC V DC kg
3RT20 contactors for switching motors
Size S0
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
A1(+)
A2(–)
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22
Without series resistor1)

16 -- 5 10 15 11E 1 1 24 3RT20 25-2KB40 0.600
125 3RT20 25-2KG40 0.600
25 -- 7.5 15 20 11E 1 1 24 3RT20 26-2KB40 0.600
125 3RT20 26-2KG40 0.600
32 -- 10 20 25 11E 1 1 24 3RT20 27-2KB40 0.600
125 3RT20 27-2KG40 0.600
With solid-state operating mechanism
16 -- 5 10 15 11E 1 1 24 3RT20 25-2XB40-0LA2 0.580
125 3RT20 25-2XG40-0LA2 0.580
25 -- 7.5 15 20 11E 1 1 24 3RT20 26-2XB40-0LA2 0.580
125 3RT20 26-2XG40-0LA2 0.580
32 -- 10 20 25 11E 1 1 24 3RT20 27-2XB40-0LA2 0.580
125 3RT20 27-2XG40-0LA2 0.580
38 -- 10 25 25 11E 1 1 24 3RT20 28-2XB40-0LA2 0.580
125 3RT20 28-2XG40-0LA2 0.580
For
Foraccessories
accessoriesand
andspare
spareparts,
parts,see
seepage
page2/66-2/69.
3/93.
1) It is not possible to mount an auxiliary switch block. A clearance of 10 mm
is required for side-by-side mounting at ambient temperatures > 60 °C.
More information
Contactors Type 3RT20 17 3RT20 2. 3RT20 2.-2XB40- 3RT20 2.-2XF40-
0LA2 0LA2
Ambient temperature
Solenoid coil operating range DC 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us 0.7 ... 1.3 x Us
Power consumption of the solenoid coils For cold coil and 1.0 x Us
• Contactors with series resistor - Closing W 13 -- -- --
- Closed W 4 -- -- --
• Contactors without series resistor - Closing W 2.8 4.5 -- --
- Closed W 2.8 4.5 -- --
• Contactors with solid-state operating - Closing W -- -- 6.7 13.2
mechanism
- Closed W -- -- 0.8 1.56
All specs and technical specs not mentioned here are identical
to those of the standard contactors for switching motors.

10/22/15 3RT26 capacitor contactors
This prevents disturbances in The capacitor contactors of The capacitor contactors of
AC operation
the power system and welding size S00 contain either 1NO size S2 can be fitted addition-
IEC 60947-5, DIN EN 60947-5-1, of the contactors. or 1NC in the basic unit and ally with a 2-pole auxiliary
(VDE 0660 Part 200) another unassigned NC switch on the right side (2 NO,
Only discharged capacitors are
contact in the auxiliary switch 2 NC or 1 NO + 1 NC), type
The contactors are suitable for permitted to be switched on
block fitted to the basic unit. 3RH19 21-1EA.. for lateral
use in any climate and are with capacitor contactors. mounting.
finger safe per DIN EN 50274. Recommendation: use dis- The auxiliary switch block
charge chokes for parallel con- which is snapped onto the For the capacitor making and
The 3RT26 capacitor contactors nection with the capacitors. capacitor contactor of sizes breaking capacity of the basic
are application specific variants S0 contains the three leading 3RT20 contactor variant, see
of the size S00 to S2 SIRIUS NO contacts and one stan- the technical data.
Innovations contactors. The dard NO contact, which is
capacitors are precharged by unassigned.
means of the mounted leading
NO contacts and resistors; only
then do the main contacts close.

AC operation
AC-6b utilization category Current Auxiliary Rated control Screw connection Weight
For switching three-phase capacitors at an contacts, supply voltage approx.
ambient temperature of 60 °C 2) unassigned Us1) 3)
UL capacitor rating at operational voltage Order No.
200/208 230/240 460/480 575/600
Phase kvar kvar kvar kvar AC kg
For screwing and snapping onto 35 mm standard mounting rail
3RT26 17-1AK63 Size S00
1Ø 3.6 4 8.3 10 18 1NO / 1NC 24 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT26 17-1AB03 0.24
3Ø 6.2 6.9 14 17 120 V, 60 Hz 3RT26 17-1AK63
240 V, 60 Hz 3RT26 17-1AP63
Size S0
1Ø 4.8 5.3 11 13 24 1NO / 2NC 24 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT26 25-1AC25 0.49
3Ø 8.3 9.1 18 23 120 V, 60 Hz 3RT26 25-1AK65
240 V, 60 Hz 3RT26 25-1AP65
1Ø 5.8 6.4 13 16 29 1NO / 2NC 24 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT26 26-1AC25 0.49

3Ø 10 11 22 28 120 V, 60 Hz 3RT26 26-1AK65
240 V, 60 Hz 3RT26 26-1AP65
3RT2637-1NF35 1Ø 6.6 7.3 15 18 33 1NO / 2NC 24 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT26 27-1AC25 0.49

3Ø 11 13 25 31 120 V, 60 Hz 3RT26 27-1AK65
240 V, 60 Hz 3RT26 27-1AP65
1Ø 8.6 9.5 20 24 43 1NO / 2NC 24 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT26 28-1AC25 0.59

3Ø 15 16 33 41 120 V, 60 Hz 3RT26 28-1AK65
240 V, 60 Hz 3RT26 28-1AP65
Size S2
1Ø 14 16 33 40 72A 2 NC 23-33 VUC 3RT26 36-1NB35 1.11
3Ø 25 27 55 69 83-155 VUC 3RT26 36-1NF35
175-280 VUC 3RT26 36-1NP35
1Ø 20 22 45 54 98A 2 NC 20-33 VUC 3RT26 37-1NB35 1.11

3Ø 34 38 75 94 83-155 VUC 3RT26 37-1NF35
175-280 VUC 3RT26 37-1NP35
1) Coil voltage tolerance: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
2) A clearance of 10 mm is required for side-by-side mounting at ambient temperatures > 60 °C
For further voltages, see page 2/49.

DC Coil Selection for 3RT261 only
see page 2/66-2/83. ●● Coil Code B4 W4 E4 F4 G4 M4
For technical data, see page 2/170. DC 24 V 48 V 60 V 110 V 125 V 220 V
For wiring diagram, see page 2/198.
For dimension drawings, see page 2/217. UC Coil Selection for 3RT262 UC Coil Selection for 3RT263
●● Coil Code NB3 NF3 NP3 ●● Coil Code B3 F3 P3
UC 21-28V 95-130V 200-280V 20-33V 83-155V 175-280V
3) at upper limit = 1.1 x Us

3RT20 coupling contactors (interface)
for switching motors, 3-pole
AC and DC operation
IEC 60947, EN 60947. The 3RT20 1 coupling contactors Depending on the version, the
The 3RT20 coupling contactors for cannot be expanded with auxiliary solenoid coils are supplied either
switching motors are tailored to the switch blocks. without overvoltage damping or with
special requirements of working with Coupling contactors have a low a diode, suppressor diode or varistor
electronic controls. power consumption and an extended connected as standard.
solenoid coil operating range.

DC operation
3RT2015-1HB41 3RT2015-2HB41
Surge Ratings Auxiliary contacts Screw connection Spring-type connection Weight

suppressor Utilization category approx.
AC-3 Ident. Design Order No. Order No. (screw/
no. spring)
Maximum Maximum1)
inductive horsepower
current ratings
at 460 V
Amps HP NO NC kg
For screwing and snapping onto 35 mm standard mounting

rail
Size S00
Terminal designations according to EN 50 012
Rated control supply voltage Us = DC 24 V, coil voltage tolerance 0.7 to 1.25 × Us
Power consumption of the coils 2.8 W at 24 V (no auxiliary switch blocks can be mounted)
Diode, varistor 7 3 10E 1 – 3RT20 15-1HB41 3RT20 15-2HB41 0.28/0.30

or RC element 01 – 1 3RT20 15-1HB42 3RT20 15-2HB42
can be mounted
Diode 7 3 10E 1 – 3RT20 15-1J B41 3RT20 15-2J B41 0.28/0.30

integrated 01 – 1 3RT20 15-1J B42 3RT20 15-2J B42
Suppressor diode 7 3 10E 1 – 3RT20 15-1KB41 3RT20 15-2KB41 0.28/0.30
integrated 01 – 1 3RT20 15-1KB42 3RT20 15-2KB42
Diode, varistor 9 5 10E 1 – 3RT20 16-1HB41 3RT20 16-2HB41 0.28/0.30
can be mounted
Diode 9 5 10E 1 – 3RT20 16-1J B41 3RT20 16-2J B41 0.28/0.30

Suppressor diode 9 5 10E 1 – 3RT20 16-1KB41 3RT20 16-2KB41 0.28/0.30

Diode, varistor 12 7.5 10E 1 – 3RT20 17-1HB41 3RT20 17-2HB41 0.28/0.30
can be mounted
Diode 12 7.5 10E 1 – 3RT20 17-1J B41 3RT20 17-2J B41 0.28/0.30
Suppressor diode 12 7.5 10E 1 – 3RT20 17-1KB41 3RT20 17-2KB41 0.28/0.30
For technical data, see page 2/171.

For int. circuit diagrams, see page 2/190-2/195.
1)
1) Complete
Complete HP
HP ratings on page
ratings on 2/89.
page 2/124

SIRIUS Contactors for Special Applications
3RT20 coupling contactors (interface)
for switching motors

DC operation
3RT2015-1VB41 3RT2015-2VB41 3RT2024-1KB40
Surge Ratings Auxiliary contacts Screw connection Spring-type connection Weight

suppressor Utilization category approx.
AC-3 Ident. Design Order No. Order No. (screw/
no. spring)
Maximum Maximum
inductive horsepower
current ratings
at 460 V
Amps HP NO NC kg
For screwing and snapping onto
35 mm standard mounting rail
Size S00
Rated control supply voltage Us =DC 24 V, coil voltage tolerance 0.85 to 1.85 × Us
Power consumption of the coils 1.6 W at 24 V (no auxiliary switch blocks can be mounted)
Diode, varistor 7 3 10E 1 – 3RT20 15-1MB41-0KT0 3RT20 15-2M B41-0KT0 0.28/0.30

or RC element 01 – 1 3RT20 15-1M B42-0KT0 3RT20 15-2M B42-0KT0
can be mounted
Diode 7 3 10E 1 – 3RT20 15-1VB41 3RT20 15-2VB41 0.28/0.30
integrated 01 – 1 3RT20 15-1VB42 3RT20 15-2VB42
Suppressor diode 7 3 10E 1 – 3RT20 15-1SB41 3RT20 15-2SB41 0.28/0.30

integrated 01 – 1 3RT20 15-1SB42 3RT20 15-2SB42
Diode, varistor 9 5 10E 1 – 3RT20 16-1M B41-0KT0 3RT20 16-2M B41-0KT0 0.28/0.30
can be mounted
Diode 9 5 10E 1 – 3RT20 16-1VB41 3RT20 16-2VB41 0.28/0.30
Suppressor diode 9 5 10E 1 – 3RT20 16-1SB41 3RT20 16-2SB41 0.28/0.30

Diode, varistor 12 7.5 10E 1 – 3RT20 17-1M B41-0KT0 3RT20 17-2M B41-0KT0 0.28/0.30
can be mounted
Diode 12 7.5 10E 1 – 3RT20 17-1VB41 3RT20 17-2VB41 0.28/0.30
Suppressor diode 12 7.5 10E 1 – 3RT20 17-1SB41 3RT20 17-2SB41 0.28/0.30
Size S0
Rated control supply voltage Us = DC 24 V, coil voltage tolerance 0.7 to 1.25 × Us
Power consumption of the coils 4.5 W at 24 V no auxiliary switch blocks can be mounted.
Varistor 12 7.5 11E 1 1 3RT20 24-1KB40 3RT20 24-2KB40 0.58/0.60

integrated
16 10 11E 1 1 3RT20 25-1KB40 3RT20 25-2KB40 0.58/0.60
25 15 11E 1 1 3RT20 26-1KB40 3RT20 26-2KB40 0.58/0.60
32 20 11E 1 1 3RT20 27-1KB40 3RT20 27-2KB40 0.58/0.60
For technical data, see page 2/171.

For int. circuit diagrams, see page 2/190-2/195.

Contactors & Relays for Safety Applications • Revised • SIRIUS
3RT, 3TF safety contactors and
3RH2, 3TH2 safety control relays 10/22/15
Applications
“Safety” Contactors Siemens Contactors for “Safety” Control Relays Siemens Control Relays for
Safety rated contactors are “Safety” applications: Safety rated control relays “Safety” applications:
required to have mirrored All Siemens standard 3RT, 3TF6, are required to have positively All SIRIUS 3RH control relays
contact construction accord- 40HN & 40PH Contactors are driven contact elements (with at least 1 NC contact)
ing to IEC 60947-4-1 Annex F. provided with positively driven according to IEC 60947-5-1 meet or exceed the criteria for
A mirror contact is a Normally (mirror) contacts which meet or Annex L. Positively driven con- “Safety Control Relays” accord-
Closed (NC) auxiliary contact exceed the criteria for “Safety tact elements are a combination ing to IEC 60947-5-1 Annex L.
which can not be closed simul- Contactors” according to IEC of NO auxiliary contacts and NC This is true for the basic 3RH
taneously with a Normally Open 60947-4 Annex F which auxiliary contacts whose con- relay with or without an addi-
(NO) main contact. describes the requirements for struction prevents them from tional auxiliary contact block.
mirror contact performance. being closed simultaneously.
In some industries, such as When applying Safety Contac-
automotive, requirements have tors in safety circuits, the NC In some industries, such as
been established that a safety auxiliary contacts must be wired automotive, requirements have
rated contactor must also have in series or parallel and must been established that a safety
permanently mounted auxiliary be used as monitoring contacts rated control relays must also
contact blocks. See page 2/23 with feedback to the safety have permanently mounted
for Contactors with permanently evaluation device (i.e. safety auxiliary contact blocks. See
mounted auxiliary contacts. relay or failsafe logic controller). page 2/18 for Control Relays
with permanently mounted
auxiliary contacts.
3RT20 2. -1A .00 3RT10 7. -6A ..6 3RH29 21. -1F 3RH19 21. -1DA 11 3RH21 3RH24 3RH2911-2HA..
Frame Frame
size Contactors Auxiliary contact block size Control Relays Auxiliary contact block
3RT201 3RH21
3RH2911
3RT231 3RH2911 S00 3RH24
S00
3RT251 3TH20 3TX44
3RT261 3RH1911
3RT202
3RT232 3RH2921
S0
3RT252
3RT262 3RH2921
3RT203
3RT233
S2 3RH2921
3RT253
3RT263
3RT104
3RT134
S3 3RH1921
3RT144
3RT164
3RT105
S6 3RH1921
3RT145
3RT106
S10 3RT126 3RH1921
3RT146
3RT107 For contactors, see pages 2/8-2/9.
S12 3RT127 3RH1921 For auxiliaries contact blocks, see pages 2/66-2/68.
3RT147 For control relays, see pages 2/50-2/52.
3TF6 3TY7561-1UA00 For auxiliaries contact blocks, see page 2/66-2/68..

SIRIUS • Revised • Contactors & Relays for Safety Applications
3RT safety contactors, 3RH2 safety control relays with
09/22/15 permanently mounted auxiliary contact blocks
Application
"Safety" Control Relays
IEC 60947-4-1 IEC 60947-5-1
“Safety” Contactors for contactors
Safety rated control relays are required for control
Safety rated contactors are required to to have positively driven contact relays
have mirrored contact construction elements according to IEC 60947-5-1
according to IEC 60947-4 Annex F. A Annex L. Positively driven contact
mirror contact is a Normally Closed (NC) elements are a combination of NO
auxiliary contact which can not be closed auxiliary contacts and NC auxiliary
simultaneously with a Normally Open contacts whose construction prevents
(NO) main contact. In some industries, them from being closed simultaneously.
such as Automotive, the auxiliary contact In some industries, such as automotive,
blocks are required to be permanently the auxiliary contact blocks are required
attached to meet the requirements of to be permanently attached to meet the
“unitentional misuse” as specified in IEC requirements of "unitentional misuse" as
60292, paragraph 3.12. Tested by SUVA. specified in IEC 60292, paragraph 3.12.
3RT202* -1AK64-3MA0 Tested by SUVA. 3RH22**-2BB40
Application
Max. Single-phase Three-phase
Frame current HP ratings HP ratings Auxiliary contacts Screw Spring-Type
Size AC3 AC1 115V 220/240V 200V 230V 460V 575V Terminals Terminals 1)
A A HP HP HP HP HP HP Ident. No. NO NC Order No. Order No.
Contactors with permanently mounted auxiliary contact blocks
S00 7 18 ¼ ¾ 1½ 2 3 5 22E 2 2 3RT2015-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT2015-2●●●4-3MA0
9 22 1⁄3 1 2 3 5 7½ 22E 2 2 3RT2016-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT2016-2●●●4-3MA0
12 22 ½ 2 3 3 7½ 10 22E 2 2 3RT2017-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT2017-2●●●4-3MA0
16 22 1 2 3 5 10 10 22E 2 2 3RT2018-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT2018-2●●●4-3MA0
S0 9 40 1 1 2 3 5 7½ 22E 2 2 3RT2023-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT2023-2●●●4-3MA0
12 40 1 2 3 3 7½ 10 22E 2 2 3RT2024-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT2024-2●●●4-3MA0
16 40 1 3 5 5 10 15 22E 2 2 3RT2025-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT2025-2●●●4-3MA0
25 40 2 3 7½ 7½ 15 20 22E 2 2 3RT2026-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT2026-2●●●4-3MA0
32 50 2 5 10 10 20 25 22E 2 2 3RT2027-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT2027-2●●●4-3MA0
38 50 3 5 10 10 25 25 22E 2 2 3RT2028-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT2028-2●●●4-3MA0
S2 40 60 3 7½ 10 15 30 40 22E 2 2 3RT2035-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT2035-3●●●4-3MA0
50 70 3 10 15 15 40 50 22E 2 2 3RT2036-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT2036-3●●●4-3MA0
65 80 5 10 20 20 50 50 22E 2 2 3RT2037-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT2037-3●●●4-3MA0
804) 90 5 15 20 25 50 60 22E 2 2 3RT2038-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT2038-3●●●4-3MA0
S3 80 120 7½ 15 25 30 60 75 22E 2 2 3RT1045-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT1045-3●●●4-3MA0
95 120 10 20 30 30 75 100 22E 2 2 3RT1046-1●●●4-3MA0 3RT1046-3●●●4-3MA0
S6 150 185 -- 30 50 60 125 150 22E 2 2 3RT1055-6●●●6-3PA0 —
185 215 -- 30 60 75 150 200 22E 2 2 3RT1056-6●●●6-3PA0 —
S10 225 275 -- -- 60 75 150 200 22E 2 2 3RT1064-6●●●6-3PA0 —
265 330 -- -- 75 100 200 250 22E 2 2 3RT1065-6●●●6-3PA0 —
300 330 -- -- 100 125 250 300 22E 2 2 3RT1066-6●●●6-3PA0 —
Control circuit coil options: Replace ●●● with the desired code
Frame Size S00 - S0 ●●● Frame Size S2 ●●● Frame Size S3 ●●● Frame Size S6 - S10 ●●●
120 V AC AK6 120 V AC AK6 120 V AC ** AK6 23 … 26 V UC*, conventional coil AB3
120 V AC, integrated varistor CK6 120 V AC w/ Varistor CK6 24 V DC BB4 21-27 V UC*, solid state coil NB3
230 V AC AP0 24 V DC w/Varistor KB4 24 V DC w/diode assy QB4 w/ PLC interface
24 V DC BB4 110 … 127 V UC*, conventional coil AF3
24 V DC, integrated varistor DB4 **Available in 3RT1046 only
*UC coil: accepts DC voltage or
24 V DC, integrated diode assy. FB4 AC voltage, 40 to 60 Hz.
Frame Max. current Rated control supply Screw Spring

Size at 240 V 2) voltage Us Auxiliary contacts Terminals 3) Terminals 3)
A Indent. No. NO NC Order No. Order No.
Control relays with permanently mounted auxiliary contact blocks
S00-S00 10 110 V AC, 50 Hz / 120 V AC, 60 Hz 44E 4 4 3RH2244-1AK60 3RH2244-2AK60
10 24 V DC 44E 4 4 3RH2244-1BB40 3RH2244-2BB40
10 110 V AC, 50 Hz / 120 V AC, 60 Hz 62E 6 2 3RH2262-1AK60 3RH2262-2AK60
10 24 V DC 62E 6 2 3RH2262-1BB40 3RH2262-2BB40
For other voltages see page 2/49. For int. circuit diagrams, see page 2/190-2/196.
For accessories, see pages 2/73-2/78. For dimension drawings, see pages 2/209-2/215. 2) For AC-15/AC-14, max current for front mounted auxiliary contacts = 6 A.
For spare parts, see pages 2/94-2/97. 3) The 3RH22 control relays are also available with ring lug terminals. Replace
1) All terminals are spring loaded on frame size S00 and S0.
For technical data, see pages 2/121-2/142. Only the coil and auxiliary contact terminals are spring the 8th digit of the order number with a “4”, e. g. 3RH2244-4AK60
For description, see pages 2/104-2/105. loaded on frame sizes S2 & S3. 4) Max UL FLA = 65A at 460V

Contactors
Function and Contactor
Modules Assemblies
for Mounting onto SIRIUS 3RT2 Contactors
Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS 3RT2 Contactors • Revised • SIRIUS
Introduction 04/20/15
Introduction
Overview
The function modules for mounting onto contactors enable the
assembly of starters and contactor assemblies for direct-on-line,
reversing and wye-delta starting without any additional, compli-
cated wiring of the individual components. They include the key
control functions required for the particular starter, e. g. timing
and interlocking, and can be connected to the control system by
either parallel wiring or through IO-Link or AS-Interface.
Version SIRIUS function modules SIRIUS function modules SIRIUS function modules
for IO-Link1) for AS-Interface1)
3
for parallel wiring

For direct-on-line starting Timing relays: ON or OFF-delay with With screw or spring-type terminals With screw or spring-type terminals
semiconductor output
With screw or spring-type terminals
For reversing starting Wiring modules 1 function module for size S00, S0 & S2, 1 function module for size S00, S0 & S2,
for sizes S00, S0 & S2 screw and spring-type connection, plus screw and spring-type connection, plus
With screw or spring-type terminals · the respective wiring modules1) the respective wiring modules1)
(with screw terminals for main and control
circuit)
For wye-delta starting 1 function module for size S00, S0 & S2, For wye-delta starting: 1 function module For wye-delta starting: 1 function module
screw and spring-type connection of the for size S00, S0 & S2, plus screw and for size S00, S0 & S2, plus screw and
contactors, plus the respective wiring spring-type connection, plus the respec- spring-type connection, plus the respec-
modules2) tive wiring modules2) tive wiring modules2)
Accessories Sealable covers Operator panel for autonomous controlling AS-Interface addressing units
of up to 4 starters Sealable covers
Module connector for the grouping of
starters
Connection cable between the operator
panel and the starter group
Sealable covers
1) Use of the communication-capable function modules for IO-Link or Note:

AS-Interface requires contactors with communication interface When the function modules are used, no other auxiliary switches
(see pages 2/26). are allowed to be mounted on the basic units.
2) The modules for the control current wiring, which are included in the wiring
kit, are not required.

Contactors
Function Modules for and Contactor
Mounting onto Assemblies
SIRIUS 3RT2 Contactors
SIRIUS • Revised • Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS 3RT2 Contactors
09/22/15 SIRIUS function modules
modules
SIRIUS function
Simply by being plugged in place, the SIRIUS function modules The snap-on function modules for direct-on-line starting are
enable different functionalities required for the assembly of start- used above all for realizing timing functions independently of the
ers to be realized in the starter. The function modules and wiring control system.
kits help to reduce the wiring work within the starter practically to
zero. With the OFF-delay variant of the timing relay it is possible for
example for the fan motor for cooling a main drive to be switched
SIRIUS function modules for direct-on-line starting off with a delay so that sufficient cooling after operation is guar-
anteed even if the plant and its control system have already
The electronic timing relays which can be mounted onto the been switched off.
contactor are available in these versions:
• Sizes S00 and S0 for applications in the range from The ON-delay timing relays enable for example the time-delayed
starting of several drives so that the summation starting current
3
24 to 240 V AC/DC (wide voltage range)
does not rise too high, which could result in voltage failure.
• Size S2 for applications in either the range from 24 to
90 V AC/DC or 90 to 240 V AC/DC The function modules for wye-delta starting are mostly used
where current-limiting measures for starting a drive are required,
Both the electrical and mechanical connection are made by e.g. for large fans and ventilators, and a high level of availability
simple snapping on and locking. is essential at the same time. This technology has been used
A protection circuit (varistor) is integrated in each module. with success for several decades and has the additional advan-
tage of requiring relatively little know-how. Through the use of
The electronic timing relay with semiconductor output uses function modules, the assembly work with simple standard com-
two contact legs to actuate the contactor underneath by means ponents is even easier and error-free.
of a semiconductor after the set time t has elapsed.
The switching state feedback is performed by a mechanical Benefits
switching state indicator (plunger). In addition, the auxiliary
switches in the contactors are freely accessible and can be used The use of snap-on function modules for direct-on-line starting
for feedbacks to the control system or for signal lamps. (timing relays) results in the following advantages:
• Reduction of control current wiring
A sealable cover is available to protect against careless
adjustment of the set times. • Prevention of wiring errors
• Reduction of testing costs
SIRIUS function modules for reversing starting
• Implementation of timing functions independently of the
The wiring kits for reversing starters enable the cost-effective control system
assembly of contactor assemblies. They can be used for all
• Less space required in the control cabinet compared to a
applications with reversing duty up to 50 HP.
separate timing relay
For a detailed description see page 2/37.
• No additive protection circuit required (varistor integrated)
SIRIUS function modules for wye-delta starting
The use of function modules for wye-delta starting results in the
Both interlocking and timing functions are required for the following advantages:
assembly of wye-delta starters. With the function modules for
• Operation solely through the line contactor A1/A2 – no further
wye-delta starting and the matching link modules for the main
wiring needed
circuit, these starters can be assembled easily and with abso-
lutely no errors. • Reduction of the control current wiring inside the contactor
assembly and to the higher-level control system where
The entire sequence in the control circuit is integrated in the applicable
snap-on modules. This covers:
• Prevention of wiring errors
• An adjustable wye time t from 0.5 to 60 s
• Reduction of testing costs
• A non-adjustable dead interval of 50 ms
• Integrated electrical interlocking saves costs and prevents
• Electrical contacting to the contactors by means of coil errors
pick-off (contact legs)
• Less space needed in the control cabinet compared to using
• Feedback of the switching state at the contactor using a a separate timing relay
mechanical switch position indicator (plunger)
• Adjustable starting in star mode from 0.5 to 60 s
• Electrical interlocking between the contactors
• Independent of the contactor's control supply voltage
These modules do not require their own terminals and can there- (24 to 240 V AC/DC)
fore be used for contactors with both screw and spring-type • Varistor integrated – no additive protection circuit required
terminals in the S00, S0 and S2. To start the wye-delta starter,
only the first of the three contactors (line contactor) is actuated. • No control current wiring thanks to plug-in technology and
All other functions then take place inside the individual connecting cables
modules. • Mechanically coded assembly enables easy configuration
and reliable wiring
This also offers advantages if the timing function was previously
implemented in a controller, as it again results in a significant • Fewer versions – one module kit for screw and spring-type
reduction in the number of PLC outputs, the programming work connection and for the two sizes S00 to S2
and the wiring outlay. • Mechanical interlocking (with wiring kit for the main circuit)
The kits for the main circuit include the mechanical interlock, the
star jumper, the wiring modules at the top and at the bottom, and
the required connecting clips.
A protection circuit (varistor) is integrated in the basic module.

3RT2 contactors, 3-pole
Communication Contactors 04/20/15
• Ideal for diagnostics to the automation controller • Reduces control wiring in the panel
• Quickly locate and rectify faults • Available for 24VDC control systems
• Configuration available in Step 7 and TIA Portal • Easily snap on IO-Link or AS-Interface
• Easy engineering of parameters modules onto contactors
• For DOL, reversing and wye delta starters up to 50 HP
• Manual starter operation with optional operator panel
Spring-type
Amp Single-phase Three-phase Auxiliary Screw Terminals Terminals 1) Weight
Ratings HP ratings HP ratings contacts 24 V DC coil 24 V DC coil approx.
Frame
Size AC3 AC1 115V 230V 208V 230V 460V 575V NO NC Order No. Order No. kg
3RT 3-pole Contactors
1 0 3RT2015-1BB41-0CC0 3RT2015-2BB41-0CC0
7 18 0.25 0.75 1.5 2 3 5
0 1 3RT2015-1BB42-0CC0 3RT2015-2BB42-0CC0
1 0 3RT2016-1BB41-0CC0 3RT2016-2BB41-0CC0
9 22 0.33 1 2 3 5 7.5
0 1 3RT2016-1BB42-0CC0 3RT2016-2BB42-0CC0
S00 0.28
1 0 3RT2017-1BB41-0CC0 3RT2017-2BB41-0CC0
3RT2018-1BB41-0CC0 12 22 0.5 2 3 3 7.5 10
0 1 3RT2017-1BB42-0CC0 3RT2017-2BB42-0CC0
1 0 3RT2018-1BB41-0CC0 3RT2018-2BB41-0CC0
16 22 1 2 3 5 10 10
0 1 3RT2018-1BB42-0CC0 3RT2018-2BB42-0CC0
9 40 1 1 2 3 5 7.5 1 1 3RT2023-1BB40-0CC0 3RT2024-2BB40-0CC0
12 40 1 2 3 3 7.5 10 1 1 3RT2024-1BB40-0CC0 3RT2024-2BB40-0CC0
16 40 1 3 5 5 10 15 1 1 3RT2025-1BB40-0CC0 3RT2025-2BB40-0CC0
S0 0.58
25 40 2 3 7.5 7.5 15 20 1 1 3RT2026-1BB40-0CC0 3RT2026-2BB40-0CC0
3RT2028-1BB40-0CC0
32 50 2 5 10 10 20 25 1 1 3RT2027-1BB40-0CC0 3RT2027-2BB40-0CC0
38 50 3 5 10 10 25 25 1 1 3RT2028-1BB40-0CC0 3RT2028-2BB40-0CC0
40 60 3 7.5 10 15 30 40 1 1 3RT2035-1NB30-0CC0 3RT2035-3NB30-0CC0
50 70 3 10 15 15 40 50 1 1 3RT2036-1NB30-0CC0 3RT2036-3NB30-0CC0
S2 1.122
65 80 5 10 20 20 50 50 1 1 3RT2037-1NB30-0CC0 3RT2037-3NB30-0CC0
3RT2038-1NB30-0CC0
80 90 5 15 20 25 50 60 1 1 3RT2038-1NB30-0CC0 3RT2038-3NB30-0CC0
1) All terminals are spring loaded in sizes S00 and S0.

For size S2, only the coil and aux contacts are spring loaded.
Communication capable contactors are ideal for starter feedback to the automation level.
IO-Link starters in the cabinet save considerable wiring effort. AS-Interface is best suited
for distributed systems.
For reversing contactors with communication capability, see pages 2/39-2/43

For accessories, see page 2/27, 2/30, 2/34.
For technical data, see page 2/31, 2/35, 2/36
For description, see page 2/24.
For further information on IO-Link and AS-Interface, see page 2/28-2/29 and 2/32-2/33.

Contactors
Function Modules for and Contactor
Mounting onto Assemblies
SIRIUS function modules
SIRIUS function modules
04/20/15 for reversing starting / wye-delta starting
for reversing starting / wye-delta starting
3RA28 16-0EW20 3RA29 13-2AA1 3RA29 13-2BB2

For Rated control supply Time setting range t Screw terminals Weight Spring-type 2) Weight
3
contactors voltage Us1) approx. terminals approx.
Order No. Order No.
Type V s kg kg
Assembly kits for reversing starting
Assembly kits for making 3-pole contactor
assemblies
The assembly kit contains:
Mechanical interlock;
2 connecting clips for 2 contactors,
wiring modules on the top and bottom
3RT20 1 . • For size S00 3RA29 13-2AA1 0.046 3RA29 13-2AA2 0.070
Assembly kits for wye-delta starting
assemblies
Mechanical interlock,
4 connecting clips for 3 contactors;
star jumper,
3RT20 1 . • For size S00 3RA29 13-2BB1 0.051 3RA29 13-2BB2 0.080
3RT20 2 . • For size S0 (only main circuit for version with 3RA29 23-2BB1 0.099 3RA29 23-2BB2 0.133
spring-type terminals)
3RT20 3 . • For size S2 (only main circuit for version with 3RA29 33-2BB1 0.242 3RA29 33-2BB2 0.182
spring-type terminals)
Function modules for wye-delta starting

The electrical connection between the function
module and the contactor assembly is estab-
lished automatically by snapping on and plug-
ging in the connecting cables.
Wye-delta function (varistor integrated)
3RT20 1 . 24 ... 240 AC/DC 0.5 ... 60 3RA28 16-0EW20 0.170 3RA28 16-0EW20 0.170
3RT20 2 . (10, 30, 60
3RT20 3. selectable)
Accessories
Sealable covers 3RA29 10-0 0.002 3RA29 10-0 0.002
for 3RA27, 3RA28, 3RA29
1)
AC voltage values apply for 50 Hz and 60 Hz. Note:
2)
Assembly kits in sizes S0 and S2 are supplied with When the function modules are used, no other auxiliary switches
wiring modules for the main circuit only. are allowed to be mounted on the basic units.
Function Function charts
Timing relay energized
Contact closed
Contact open
2 NO contacts (internally connected)
Wye-delta function 3RA28 16-0EW20
(varistor integrated) A1/A2
NSB0_02072
• 1 NO contact, delayed
Y
• 1 NO contact, instantaneous
t 50 ms

Contactors
Functionand Contactor
Modules Assemblies
Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS 3RT2 Contactors SIRIUS
SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link
Overview
The SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link enable the assembly of control system through IO-Link, with the possibility of connecting
starters and contactor assemblies for direct-on-line, reversing up to four starters as a group to one port of the IO-Link master.
and wye-delta starting without any additional, complicated
wiring of the individual components. They include the key control Through this type of connection to the control system, a
functions required for the particular starter, e. g. timing and maximum of wiring is saved. The following essential signals are
interlocking. The electrical and mechanical connection to the transmitted:
contactor is established by snapping on and locking. An • Availability of the starter in response to an indirect inquiry from
additive protection circuit for the individual contactors can be the motor starter protector
dispensed with completely, and feedback from the contactor • Starter operation
contacts is performed with Hall sensors which provide reliable
feedback concerning the switching state even under extremely • Feedback concerning the switching state of the starter
3
dusty conditions. The starters are connected to the higher-level
Availability
Control
PLC Feedback through PLC IO-Link

switching state
NSB0_02084a
Signal transmission through IO-Link

The inquiry from the motor starter protector does not take place This requires the use of communication versions of the contactors
through additional wiring between the auxiliary switch and the with communication interface (see page 2/26).
module but by means of a voltage inquiry at the contactor input.
Motor starter
protector
Contactor
NSB0_02086
Availability signal through voltage pick-off

Contactors
Function ModulesFunction
for Mounting onto and Contactor
SIRIUS 3RT2 Assemblies
Contactors
SIRIUS Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS 3RT2 Contactors
SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link
SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link
By grouping up to four starters it is possible to connect up to potential at the master of the ET200S is the same as that of the
16 starters to one master of the ET200S. All the signals of the controls, a further reduction in wiring is possible by providing the
individual controls are made available through only 3 individual control supply voltage to the contactors by jumpering the corre-
wires per starter group directly in the process image. If the sponding communication wires.
Group formation for 4 starters max. per IO-Link port

1 2 3 4
Direct-on- Direct-on- Reversing Reversing
line starter line starter starter starter
3
Port 1
...
NSB0_02087b
Port 2
Group formation with IO-Link

In case of a malfunction, the corresponding error signals are This easy integration of the starters in the TIA world does not limit
also sent directly to the PLC in acyclic mode. This is in addition the flexibility in the field in the least. For example, all function
to transmission of the switching signals and status signals. modules have special terminals in order to enable direct local
disconnection. These terminals can be connected for example
Possible error signals: to a position switch. The input interrupts the voltage supply to the
• Device defect contactor coil directly, i. e. without going through the PLC. These
• No main voltage (motor starter protector tripped) terminals are jumpered in the as-delivered state.
• No control supply voltage Local manual operation of the complete starter group is also
• Limit position on the right / on the left straight-forward using a operator panel. The latter is easily con-
nected to the last starter and can be built into the front panel of
• Manual mode the control cabinet if required. This offers significant advantages
• Process image fault particularly for commissioning.
Application Benefits
The use of SIRIUS function modules with IO-Link is recom- • Reduction of the control current wiring to no more than one
mended above all in machines and plants in which there are cable having three conductors for four starters
several motor starters in one control cabinet. Using IO-Link, the • Elimination of testing costs and wiring errors
connection of these starters to the automation level is easy, • Reduction of configuration work
quick and error-free. And with IO modules no longer needed, the
width of the ET200S becomes far smaller. • Integration in TIA for clear diagnostics if a fault occurs
• Fewer IO modules saves space in the control cabinet
• All essential timing and interlocking functions for reversing
duty and wye-delta starting are integrated
• No additional control circuit required
Furtherinformation
Further informationononthetheapplication
application and
and benefits
benefits of the
of the SIRIUS
SIRIUS
functionmodules
function modulesforforconnection
connection to to
thethe control
control system
system through
through
IO-Linkcan
IOLink canbebe found
found in Chapter
in Chapter 4 "Industrial
14 “Industrial Communication".
Communication”.

Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS 3RT2 Contactors • RevisedFunction
• SIRIUS
Modules
SIRIUS 3RA27 Function Modules for IO-Link for Mounting on 3RT2 Contactors
SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link 04/20/15
For direct-on-line starting / for reversing starting / for wye-delta starting
Version Screw terminals Spring-type Weight

terminals
Order No. Order No. kg
Function modules for direct-on-line starting
3
IO-Link connection 3RA2711-1AA00 3RA2711-2AA00
Includes one module connector for assembling
an IO-Link group
3RA2711-1AA00
3RA2711-2AA00
Function modules for reversing starting1)
IO-Link connection, 3RA2711-1BA00 3RA2711-2BA00
comprising one basic and one coupling module
and an additional module connector for assembling
an IO-Link group
3RA2711-1BA00
3RA2711-2BA00
assemblies
mechanical interlock,
2 connecting clips for two contactors,
3RA2923-2AA1 • For size S00 3RA2913-2AA1 3RA2913-2AA2
• For size S0
- For main, auxiliary and control circuits 3RA2923-2AA1 --
- Only for main circuit2) -- 3RA2923-2AA2
• For size S2
- For main, auxiliary and control circuits 3RA2933-2AA1 --
3RA2923-2AA2
- Only for main circuit2) -- 3RA2933-2AA2
1) For prewired contactor assemblies for reversing starting with voltage Matching contactors with communications interface required;
tap-off, see pages 2/40 and 2/43. When these contactor assemblies are see pages 2/26.
used, the assembly kit for the wiring is already integrated.
2) Version in sizes S0 and S2 with spring-type terminals:
Only the wiring modules for the main circuit are included.
No connectors are included for the auxiliary and control circuit.

Function Modules
SIRIUS Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS 3RT2 Contactors
• Revised •
SIRIUS 3RA27 Function Modules for IO-Link for Mounting on 3RT2 Contactors
04/20/15 SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link

terminals
Function modules for wye-delta starting1)
IO-Link connection, 3RA2711-1CA00 3RA2711-2CA00
comprising one basic module and two coupling
modules, plus an additional module connector for
assembling an IO-Link group
3
3RA2711-1CA00
assemblies2)
star jumper,
3RA2923-2BB1 • For size S00 3RA2913-2BB1 3RA2913-2BB2
• For size S0
- For main, auxiliary and control circuits 3RA2923-2BB1 --
- Only for main circuit3) -- 3RA2923-2BB2
• For size S2
3RA2923-2BB2 - Only for main circuit3) -- 3RA2933-2BB2
1) For complete contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting including Matching contactors with communications interface required;
function modules, see pages 2/47 and 2/48. see pages 2/26.
2) When using the function modules for wye-delta starting, the wiring
modules for the auxiliary current are not required.
3) Version in sizes S0 and S2 with spring-type terminals:
Only the wiring modules for the main circuit are included.
No connectors are included for the auxiliary and control circuit.
Version Order No. Weight

kg
Accessories
Module connector set, comprising: 3RA2711-0EE10
• 2 module connectors, 14-pole, short
• 2 interface covers
Module connectors
3RA2711-0EE10 • 14-pole, 9 cm 3RA2711-0EE06
For size jump + 1 space
• 14-pole, 26 cm 3RA2711-0EE07
For various space combinations
3RA2711-0EE06 • 14-pole, 33.5 cm 3RA2711-0EE08
For various space combinations
• 10-pole, 9 cm 3RA2711-0EE16
For separate control signal infeed
within an IO-Link group
3RA2711-0EE15 Interface covers 3RA2711-0EE15
(Set of 5)
Sealable covers 3RA2910-0
For 3RA27, 3RA28, 3RA29
3RA2910-0
Operator panels1)
Operator panel (set), comprising: 3RA6935-0A
• 1 x operator panel
• 1 x enabling module
• 1 x interface cover
• 1 x fixing terminal
3RA6935-0A
Connection cable, 3RA2711-0EE11
length 2 m, 10- to 14-pole
3RA2711-0EE11 For connecting the operator panel to the communication module
Enabling modules (replacement) 3RA6936-0A
Interface covers (replacement) 3RA6936-0B
1) Suitable only for communication through IO-Link.
For manuals, see
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39319600.

3/202 Siemens IC 10 · 2015 Illustrations are approximate
Contactors
Functionand Contactor
Modules Assemblies
Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS 3RT2 Contactors SIRIUS
SIRIUS function modules for AS-Interface SIRIUS function modules for AS-Interface
Overview
The SIRIUS function modules for AS-Interface enable the nected to one master and the address is entered in normal man-
assembly of starters and contactor assemblies for direct-on-line, ner with an addressing unit.
reversing and wye-delta starting without any additional, compli-
cated wiring of the individual components. They include the key Through the AS-Interface connection to the control system, a
control functions required for the particular starter, e. g. timing maximum of wiring is saved. The wiring outlay is reduced to the
and interlocking. The electrical and mechanical connection to control supply voltage and the two individual wires for
the contactor is established by snapping on and locking. An AS-Interface.
additional control circuit for the individual contactors can be The following essential signals are transmitted:
eliminated with completely because a varistor is integrated in the • Availability of the starter in response to an indirect inquiry from
modules. Feedback from the contactor contacts is performed the motor starter protector
with Hall sensors which provide reliable feedback concerning
3
the switching state even under extremely dusty conditions. • Starter operation
Connection of the starters to the higher-level control system • Feedback concerning the switching state of the starter
takes place through AS-Interface with the Specification V2.1 in
A/B technology. As the result, up to 62 starters can be con-
Availability
Control
PLC Feedback through PLC AS-Interface

switching state
NSB0_02085a
Signal transmission through AS-Interface

The inquiry from the motor starter protector does not take place This requires use of communication versions of the contactors
through additional wiring between the auxiliary switch and the with communication interface (see page 2/26).
module but by means of a voltage inquiry at the contactor input.
Motor starter
protector
Contactor
NSB0_02086
Availability signal through voltage pick-off

Contactors
Function Modules for Mounting ontoand Contactor
SIRIUS Assemblies
3RT2 Contactors
09/22/15 SIRIUS function modules for AS-Interface
SIRIUS function modules for AS-Interface
Direct-on-line starter Reversing starter star-delta starter
NSB0_02088a
3
Addr. 1a Addr. 1b Addr. 2a
AS-Interface
Topology with AS-Interface

This easy integration of the starters in the TIA world does not limit to a position switch. The input interrupts the voltage supply to the
the flexibility in the field in the least. For example, all function contactor coil directly, i. e. without going through the PLC. These
modules have special terminals in order to enable direct local terminals are jumpered in the as-delivered state.
disconnection. These terminals can be connected for example,
Application Benefits
The use of SIRIUS function modules with AS-Interface is recom- • Reduction of control current wiring
mended above all in machines and plants requiring easy • Elimination of testing costs and wiring errors
connection of several different sensors and actuators both • Reduction of configuration work
inside and outside the control cabinet to the higher-level control
system. And with IO modules no longer needed, the width of the • Elimination of IO modules saves space in the control cabinet
PLC is far smaller. • All essential timing and interlocking functions for reversing
duty and wye-delta starting are integrated
• No additional control circuit required

Function
Function Modules
Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS 3RT2 Contactors • Revised • SIRIUS
SIRIUS 3RA27 Function Modules for AS-Interface for Mounting on 3RT2 Contactors
SIRIUS function modules for AS-Interface 04/20/15

terminals
Function modules for direct-on-line starting
3
AS-Interface connection 3RA2712-1AA00 3RA2712-2AA00
3RA2712-1AA00
3RA2712-2AA00
Function modules for reversing starting1)
AS-Interface connection, 3RA2712-1BA00 3RA2712-2BA00
comprising one basic and one coupling module
3RA2712-1BA00
3RA2712-2BA00
assemblies
2 connecting clips for two contactors,
3RA2923-2AA1 • For size S00 3RA2913-2AA1 3RA2913-2AA2
• For size S0
- For main, auxiliary and control current 3RA2923-2AA1 --
- Only for main current -- 3RA2923-2AA2
• For size S2
- For main, auxiliary and control current 3RA2933-2AA1 --
3RA2923-2AA2
- Only for main current -- 3RA2933-2AA2
Matching contactors with communications interface required; 1) For prewired contactor assemblies for reversing starting with communication
see page 2/26. interface, see pages 2/40 and 2/43. When these contactor assemblies are
used, the assembly kit for the wiring is already integrated.
For matching AS-Interface masters, routers and power supply
units, see Chapter 14 “Industrial Communication”.

Industrial
* You can order this quantity or a multiple Controls
thereof. Catalog
SIRIUS • Revised • Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS Function
3RT2 Contactors
Modules
SIRIUS 3RA27 Function Modules for AS-Interface for Mounting on 3RT2 Contactors
04/20/15 SIRIUS function modules for AS-Interface

terminals
Function modules for wye-delta starting1)
AS-Interface connection, 3RA2712-1CA00 3RA2712-2CA00
comprising one basic module and two coupling
modules
3
3RA2712-1CA00
3RA2712-2CA00
assemblies
star jumper,
3RA2923-2BB1 • For size S00 3RA2913-2BB1 3RA2913-2BB2
• For size S0
- Only for main circuit -- 3RA2923-2BB2
• For size S2
3RA2923-2BB2 - Only for main circuit -- 3RA2933-2BB2
1) For complete contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting including Matching contactors with communications interface required;
function modules, see pages 2/47 and 2/48. see page 2/26.
For matching AS-Interface masters, routers and power supply
units, see Chapter 14 “Industrial Communication”.

kg
Accessories
Module connector set, comprising: 3RA2711-0EE10
• 2 module connectors, 14-pole, short
• 2 interface covers
3RA2711-0EE10
Module connectors
• 14-pole, 9 cm 3RA2711-0EE06
For size jump + 1 space
3RA2711-0EE06
Interface covers 3RA2711-0EE15
(Set of 5)
3RA2711-0EE15
Sealable covers 3RA2910-0
For 3RA27, 3RA28, 3RA29
3RA2910-0
For manuals, see


© Siemens AG 2015
Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS 3RT2 Contactors Function
• Revised • SIRIUS
Modules
SIRIUS 3RA28 Function Modules for Mounting on 3RT2 and 3RH21 Contactors
SIRIUS function modules 09/22/15
Introduction
Type 3RA2811 3RA2831 3RA2812 3RA2832 3RA2816
Can be used for size S00, S0 S2 S00, S0 S2 S00, S0, S2
Function ON-delay OFF-delay Wye-delta function
with control signal
General data
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 300
3
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV AC 4
Operating range of excitation 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us,
0.95 ... 1.05 times the rated frequency
Overvoltage protection Varistor integrated
Rated power W 1 1
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz VA 1 2
DIAZED protection Operational class gG A -- 4
Switching frequency for load
• With Ie at 230 V AC h-1 2 500 --
• With 3RT2 contactor at 230 V AC h-1 2 500 --
Recovery time ms 50 150
Minimum ON period ms -- 35 --
Residual current Max. mA 5 -- --
Voltage drop Max. VA 3.5 -- --
With conducting output
Setting accuracy Typ. ±15 %
With reference to upper limit of
scale
Repeat accuracy Max. ±1 %
Electrical endurance
• With 3RT2028 contactor Operating cycles 100 000 --
• At AC-15, 250 V, 3 A Operating cycles -- 100 000
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 100 x 106 10 x 106
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix C IP20
Shock resistance g/ms 15/11
Half-sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance
According to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 10 ... 55/0.35
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) IEC 61000-6-2, IEC 61000-6-4, IEC 61812-1, IEC 60947-4-1
Overvoltage protection Varistor integrated
Permissible mounting position Any (see contactor)
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected)
• Solid mm 2 1 x (0.5 ... 4), 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) --
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) --
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 14) --
• Terminal screws M3 (for standard screw driver size 2 or Pozidriv 2) --
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 --
• Operating devices mm 3.0 x 0.5 --
• Solid mm 2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5) --
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5) --
• Finely stranded m m2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5) --
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 16) --

Siemens IC 10 · 2015 3/195
SIRIUS • Revised • Contactor Assemblies for Switching Motors
3RA reversing
04/20/15 contactor assemblies
Design The following points should be If the front-mounted mechani- Principle of operation
noted: cal interlock is used for size S2
Complete equipment The operating times of the
Size S00 to S3 contactors, two location
assemblies individual 3RT10/20 contactors
holes for single-pole auxiliary
The fully wired reversing contac- • For maintained-contact are rated in such a way that no
switch blocks are provided on
tor assemblies are suitable for operation: overlapping of the contact mak-
the front of each S2 contac-
use in any climate. They are safe use contactors with an NC ing and the arcing time between
tor while three additional,
from touch to EN 50274. contact in the basic unit for two contactors can occur on
single-pole auxiliary switch
The contactor assemblies each the electrical interlock. reversing, providing they are
blocks can be snapped onto
consist of two contactors with interlocked via their auxiliary
• For momentary-contact S3 contactors. The maximum
identical ratings. The contactors switches (NC contact interlock)
operation: auxiliary switch complements
are mechanically and electri- and the operating mechanisms.
use contactors with an NC per contactor stated on page 2/12
cally interlocked (NC contact An additional dead interval of
contact in the basic unit for must not be exceeded.
interlock). The main and control 50 ms is necessary on reversing
the electrical interlock; in When size S3 contactors are if the individual contactors are
circuits are wired according to addition, an auxiliary switch combined with a frontmo- used at voltages > 500 V. The
the circuit diagrams on block with at least one unted mechanical interlock, operating times of the individual
page 2/199. NO contact for latching is the 3RA19 33-2B and 3RA19 contactors are not affected by
For motor protection, either required per contactor. 43-2B installation kits cannot the mechanical interlock.
3RU2 or 3RB3 overload relays Size S0 and S2 be used.
for direct mounting or individual
Contactors come equipped Sizes S6 to S12 Surge suppression
mounting or thermistor motor
protection tripping units must be with integrated 1 NO and 1NC To insert the mechanical inter-
aux contacts in each contactor. Sizes S00 to S3
ordered separately. lock, the prestamped location
Both electrical interlocking and holes positioned opposite on All contactor assemblies can be
latching are satisfied with the the contactor must be knocked fitted with RC elements or varis-
Components for customer integrated auxiliaries. Mechani- tors for damping opening surges
assembly out. The internal auxiliary con-
cal interlocking is required in tacts (up to 1 NO + 1 NC per in the coil.
Installation kits for all sizes are either size and comes in the
available for customer assembly contactor) can be used for the As with the individual contac-
assembly kits except for size electrical interlock and latching. tors, the surge suppressors can
of reversing contactor assem- S2 where you need to order
blies. The mechanical interlock itself either be plugged onto the front
3RA2934-2B interlock sepa- does not contain any auxiliary of the contactors (S00) or fitted
Contactors, overload relays, the rately. contacts. Additional auxiliary onto the coil terminals on the
mechanical interlock and — for Sizes S3 contacts can be used on the top or bottom (S3). For sizes S0
momentary-contact operation — outside and front (on the front and S2, the surge protection
auxiliary switch blocks for latch- • For maintained-contact
in the case of 3RT10) of the fits behind the hinged door on
ing must be ordered separately operation:
reversing contactor assembly. the front of the contactor and
the contactors have no auxil-
iary contact in the basic unit; does not take up any additional
NC contacts for the electrical space.
interlock are therefore inte- Sizes S6 to S12
grated in the mechanical in- The contactors are fitted with
terlock that can be mounted varistors as standard.
on the side of each contactor
(one contact each for the left
and right-hand contactors).
• For momentary-contact
operation:
the electrical interlock is the
same as for maintained-con-
tact operation; in addition,
an auxiliary switch with one
NO contact for latching is
required per contactor. This
contact can be snapped
onto the top of the contac-
tors. Alternatively, auxiliary
switch blocks mounted on
the side can be used; they
must be fitted onto the out-
side of each contactor.

Contactor Assemblies for Switching Motors • Revised • SIRIUS
3RA13 and 3RA23 reversing
contactor assemblies 04/20/15
Overview
The 3RA13 and 3RA23 Sizes S00 to S12 For overload relays for motor The and approvals only
reversing contactor assemblies As components for customer protection, see section 3. apply to the complete contactor
can be ordered as follows: assembly. assemblies and not to the com-
Sizes S00 to S3 The 3RA23 and 3RA13 contactor ponents for customer assembly.
There is also a range of acces- assemblies have screw connections
Fully wired and tested, open sories (auxiliary switch blocks, and are available for screwing AC and DC operation
type, with mechanical and surge suppressors, etc.) that or snapping onto 35 mm standard See pages 2/40 through 2/44
electrical interlock. 1) must be ordered separately. mounting rails. The 3RA23 contactor for complete part numbers.
assemblies are also available
with spring-type terminals.
Maximum AC-3 Size Order No.

horsepower rating maximum
at 460 V AC inductive current
Contactor Mechanical Mechanical Mechanical Installation kit Fully wired and
interlock 2) interlock 3) interlock 4) tested contactor
HP A assembly
3 7 S00 3RT20 15 3RA29 13-2AA1 6) – – 3RA29 13-2AA1 6) 3RA23 15-8XB30- ...

5 9 3RT20 16 3RA23 16-8XB30- ...
7.5 12 3RT20 17 3RA23 17-8XB30- ...
10 16 3RT20 18 3RA23 18-8XB30- ...
7.5 12 S0 3RT20 24 3RA29 23-2AA1 6 ) – 3RA29 23-2AA1 6) 3RA23 24-8XB30- ...
10 16 3RT20 25 3RA23 25-8XB30- ...
15 25 3RT20 26 3RA23 26-8XB30- ...
20 32 3RT20 27 3RA23 27-8XB30- ...
25 38 3RT20 28 3RA23 28-8XB30- ...
30 40 S2 3RT20 35 3RA29 34-2B – 3RA29 33-2AA1 7) 3RA23 35-8XB30-1 . .
40 50 3RT20 36 3RA23 36-8XB30-1 . .
50 65 3RT20 37 3RA23 37-8XB30-1 . .
50 80 3RT20 38 3RA23 38-8XB30-1 . .
50 65 S3 3RT10 44 3RA19 24-2B 3RA19 24-1A – 3RA19 43-2A 8) 3RA13 44-8XB30-1 . .
60 80 3RT10 45 3RA13 45-8XB30-1 . .
75 95 3RT10 46 3RA13 46-8XB30-1 . .
100 115 S6 3RT10 54 – – 3RA19 54-2A 3RA19 53-2A 9 ) –
125 150 3RT10 55
150 185 3RT10 56
150 225 S10 3RT10 64 – – 3RA19 54-2A 3RA19 63-2A 9 ) –
200 265 3RT10 65
250 300 3RT10 66
300 400 S12 3RT10 75 – – 3RA19 54-2A 3RA19 73-2A 9 ) –
400 500 3RT10 76
For accessories, see page 2/80-2/83. 1) An additional dead interval of 50 ms is neces- 7) Installation kit contains: 2 connecting clips for
For circuit diagrams, see page 2/199. sary on reversing at voltages > 500 V. 2 contactors; wiring connectors on the top and
For dimension drawings, see page 2) Laterally mountable with one auxiliary contact bottom and the mechanical interlock.
2/218-2/220. (except no auxiliary contact in S2) 8) Installation kit contains: 2 connecting clips for
3) For front mounting with one auxiliary contact. 2 contactors; wiring connectors on the top and
bottom.
4) Laterally mountable without auxiliary contact.
9) Installation kit contains: wiring connector on the
5) Interlock must be ordered with installation kit.
top and bottom.
6) Installation kit contains: mechanical interlock;
2 connecting clips for 2 contactors; wiring
connectors on the top and bottom.

3RA23, 3RA24 ContactorContactors
Assembliesand Contactor Assemblies
SIRIUS
3RA23 Reversing Contactor Assemblies Contactor Assemblies for Switching Motors
3RA23 reversing
3RA23 complete units, 3 ... 25 HP contactor assemblies

Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies · Size S00 · Up to 10 HP
The figure shows the version with screw terminals
6
14
3
12
5
11
NSB0_02064a
15 2
13
14 6
Mountable accessories Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies

Accessories Order No. Page Individual parts Order No. Page
Q11 Q12
11 Auxiliary switch block, front1) 3RH29 11-1 . . . . 2/66
3/93 1 2 Contactor, 3 HP 3RT20 15 3RT20 15 2/8
3/8
12 Auxiliary switch block, lateral 3RH29 21-1DA . . 2/68
3/8
13 Surge suppressor 3RT29 16-1 . . . . 2/73
3/100 1 2 Contactor, 7.5 HP 3RT20 17 3RT20 17 2/8
3/8
14 Solder pin adapter 3RT19 16-4KA1 2/78
3/8
15 Function module for connection to 3RT27 1 .-1BA00 2/30
3/35 4 5 6 Assembly kit 3RA29 13-2AA1 2/81
3/34
the control system comprising:
4 Mechanical interlocks
5 2 connecting clips for 2 contactors
6 Wiring modules on the top and bottom for connect-
ing the main current paths, electrical interlock
included2), interruptible (NC contact interlock)
1) Auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005 must be used.
2) 3RT20 1. contactors with one NC contact in the basic unit are required for
the electrical interlock.

Contactors and Contactor 3RA23,
Assemblies
3RA24 Contactor Assemblies
Contactor Assemblies for Switching Motors 3RA23 Reversing• Contactor SIRIUS
Revised • Assemblies
3RA23 reversing
3RA23 complete units, 3 ... 25 HP
Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies2) · Size S00 · Up to 10 HP
3RA23 18 -8XE30-1 BB4 3RA23 1 . -8XB30-1A . . 3RA23 1 . -8XB30-2A . .
3
AC data UL data Screw terminals Weight
approx.
Amp Single-phase Three-phase Rated control Auxiliary Spring-type terminals
ratings HP ratings HP ratings supply voltage Us contacts
AC2/AC3 115 V 230 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V at 50/60 Hz NO NC Order No.
V kg
AC operation, 50/60 Hz
Size S00 1)
7 1/4 3/4 1 1/2 2 3 5 24 AC 0 2 3RA23 15-8XB30-@AB0 0.46/0.50
7 1/4 3/4 1 1/2 2 3 5 110/120 AC 0 2 3RA23 15-8XB30-@AK6 0.46/0.50
7 1/4 3/4 1 1/2 2 3 5 220/240 AC 0 2 3RA23 15-8XB30-@AP6 0.46/0.50
9 1/3 1 2 3 5 7 1/2 24 AC 0 2 3RA23 16-8XB30-@AB0 0.46/0.50
9 1/3 1 2 3 5 7 1/2 110/120 AC 0 2 3RA23 16-8XB30-@AK6 0.46/0.50
9 1/3 1 2 3 5 7 1/2 220/240 AC 0 2 3RA23 16-8XB30-@AP6 0.46/0.50
12 1/2 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 24 AC 0 2 3RA23 17-8XB30-@AB0 0.46/0.50
12 1/2 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 110/120 AC 0 2 3RA23 17-8XB30-@AK6 0.46/0.50
12 1/2 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 220/240 AC 0 2 3RA23 17-8XB30-@AP6 0.46/0.50
16 1 2 3 5 10 10 24 AC 0 2 3RA23 18-8XB30-@AB0 0.46/0.50
16 1 2 3 5 10 10 110/120 AC 0 2 3RA23 18-8XB30-@AK6 0.46/0.50
16 1 2 3 5 10 10 220/240 AC 0 2 3RA23 18-8XB30-@AP6 0.46/0.50
DC operation
7 1/4 3/4 1 1/2 2 3 5 24 DC 0 2 3RA23 15-8XB30-@BB4 0.58/0.62
9 1/3 1 2 3 5 7 1/2 24 DC 0 2 3RA23 16-8XB30-@BB4 0.58/0.62
12 1/2 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 24 DC 0 2 3RA23 17-8XB30-@BB4 0.58/0.62
16 1 2 3 5 10 10 24 DC 0 2 3RA23 18-8XB30-@BB4 0.58/0.62
With communication interface3)
7 1/4 3/4 1 1/2 2 3 5 24 DC 0 2 3RA23 15-8XE30-@BB4 0.58/0.62
9 1/3 1 2 3 5 7 1/2 24 DC 0 2 3RA23 16-8XE30-@BB4 0.58/0.62
12 1/2 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 24 DC 0 2 3RA23 17-8XE30-@BB4 0.58/0.62
16 1 2 3 5 10 10 24 DC 0 2 3RA23 18-8XE30-@BB4 0.58/0.62
Screw terminals 1
Spring-loaded terminals 2
1)
For other voltages see page
page 2/49
3/17. 1) For coil
coil operating
operating range,
range,see
seepage
page2/49.
3/17.
2)
2) The contactors integrated
integrated in
in the
the contactor
contactor assemblies
assemblies have
haveno
no unas-
unassigned
For accessories and
and spare
spare parts,
parts, see
see page
page2/66-2/83.
3/93. auxiliary
signed contacts.
auxiliary contacts.
3) communication modules.
modules. See Section 2
3) For use with 3RA27 and 3RA28 communication
andpages
See also page
2/243/76.
to 2/31.

Contactor Assemblies for Switching Motors
SIRIUS
3RA23 Reversing Contactor Assemblies 3RA23 reversing
Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies · Size S0 · Up to 25 HP
6
3
12
15 1
11
4
13
NSB0_02065
2

Individual parts Order No. Page Individual parts Order No. Page
Q11 Q12
11 Auxiliary switch block, front 3RH29 21-1 . . . . 2/66
3/93 1 2 Contactor, 7.5 HP 3RT20 24 3RT20 24 2/8
3/10
12 Auxiliary switch block, lateral 3RH29 21-1DA . . 3/96
2/8
13 Surge suppressor 3RT29 26-1 . . . . 3/100
3/10
15 Function module for connection to 3RT27 1 .-1BA00 2/30
2/8
the control system 1 2 Contactor, 25 HP 3RT20 28 3RT20 28 2/8
3/10
4 5 6 Assembly kit 3RA29 23-2AA1 3/34
2/81
comprising:
4 Mechanical interlocks
5 2 connecting clips for 2 contactors
6 Wiring modules on the top and bottom for connect-
ing the main current paths, electrical interlock
included (NC contact interlock)

Assemblies
Contactor Assemblies for Switching Motors 3RA23 Reversing• Contactor SIRIUS
Revised • Assemblies
3RA23 reversing
Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies · Size S0 · up to 25 HP
3
3RA23 2 4 -8XE30-1 BB4 3RA23 2 . -8XB30-1 A . . 3RA23 2 . -8XB30-2 A . .
AC data UL data Screw terminals Weight
approx.
Amp Single-phase Three-phase Rated control Auxiliary Spring-type terminals
ratings HP ratings HP ratings supply voltage Us contacts
AC2/AC3 115 V 230 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V at 50/60 Hz NO NC Order No.
V kg
Size S01)
12 1 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 24 AC 2 2 3RA23 24-8XB30-@AC2 0.84/0.94
12 1 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 110/120 AC 2 2 3RA23 24-8XB30-@AK6 0.84/0.94
12 1 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 220/240 AC 2 2 3RA23 24-8XB30-@AP6 0.84/0.94
16 1 3 5 5 10 15 24 AC 2 2 3RA23 25-8XB30-@AC2 0.84/0.94
16 1 3 5 5 10 15 110/120 AC 2 2 3RA23 25-8XB30-@AK6 0.84/0.94
16 1 3 5 5 10 15 220/240 AC 2 2 3RA23 25-8XB30-@AP6 0.84/0.94
25 2 3 7 1/2 7 1/2 15 20 24 AC 2 2 3RA23 26-8XB30-@AC2 0.84/0.94
25 2 3 7 1/2 7 1/2 15 20 110/120 AC 2 2 3RA23 26-8XB30-@AK6 0.84/0.94
25 2 3 7 1/2 7 1/2 15 20 220/240 AC 2 2 3RA23 26-8XB30-@AP6 0.84/0.94
32 2 5 10 10 20 25 24 AC 2 2 3RA23 27-8XB30-@AC2 0.84/0.94
32 2 5 10 10 20 25 110/120 AC 2 2 3RA23 27-8XB30-@AK6 0.84/0.94
32 2 5 10 10 20 25 220/240 AC 2 2 3RA23 27-8XB30-@AP6 0.84/0.94
38 3 5 10 10 25 25 24 AC 2 2 3RA23 28-8XB30-@AC2 0.84/0.94
38 3 5 10 10 25 25 110/120 AC 2 2 3RA23 28-8XB30-@AK6 0.84/0.94
38 3 5 10 10 25 25 220/240 AC 2 2 3RA23 28-8XB30-@AP6 0.84/0.94
DC operation
12 1 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 24 DC 2 2 3RA23 24-8XB30-@BB4 1.22/1.32
16 1 3 5 5 10 15 24 DC 2 2 3RA23 25-8XB30-@BB4 1.22/1.32
25 2 3 7 1/2 7 1/2 15 20 24 DC 2 2 3RA23 26-8XB30-@BB4 1.22/1.32
32 2 5 10 10 20 25 24 DC 2 2 3RA23 27-8XB30-@BB4 1.22/1.32
38 3 5 10 10 25 25 24 DC 2 2 3RA23 28-8XB30-@BB4 1.22/1.32
With communication interface 2)
12 1 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 24 DC 2 2 3RA23 24-8XE30-@BB4 1.22/1.32
16 1 3 5 5 10 15 24 DC 2 2 3RA23 25-8XE30-@BB4 1.22/1.32
25 2 3 7 1/2 7 1/2 15 20 24 DC 2 2 3RA23 26-8XE30-@BB4 1.22/1.32
32 2 5 10 10 20 25 24 DC 2 2 3RA23 27-8XE30-@BB4 1.22/1.32
38 3 5 10 10 25 25 24 DC 2 2 3RA23 28-8XE30-@BB4 1.22/1.32
Screw terminals 1
Spring-loaded terminals 2
1)
For othervoltages
For other voltages
see see
pagepage
2/49. 3/17. 1) For coil
coil operating
operating range,
range,see page2/49.
seepage 3/17.
2) communication modules.
modules. See Section 2
For accessories andand
sparespare
parts, parts,
see page 2/66-2/83. 2) For use with 3RA27 and 3RA28 communication
For accessories see page 3/93. andpages
See also page
2/243/76.
to 2/31.

3RA23 reversing

Size S2 · up to 50 HP
UL data
AC data Single-phase Three-phase
Amp
ratings
HP ratings HP ratings
Rated control Auxiliary
Screw Weight
AC2/AC3 115 V 230 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V supply voltage 1) contacts Terminals approx.
A HP HP HP HP HP HP NO NC Order No. kg
AC operation
40 3 7.5 10 15 30 40 24 V, 50/60 Hz 2 2 3RA2335-8XB30-1AC2 1.72
120 V, 60 Hz 2 2 3RA2335-8XB30-1AK6
240 V, 60 Hz 2 2 3RA2335-8XB30-1AP6
50 3 10 15 15 40 50 24 V, 50/60 Hz 2 2 3RA2336-8XB30-1AC2 1.72
120 V, 60 Hz 2 2 3RA2336-8XB30-1AK6
240 V, 60 Hz 2 2 3RA2336-8XB30-1AP6
65 5 10 20 20 50 50 24 V, 50/60 Hz 2 2 3RA2337-8XB30-1AC2 2.548
120 V, 60 Hz 2 2 3RA2337-8XB30-1AK6
240 V, 60 Hz 2 2 3RA2337-8XB30-1AP6
80 1) 5 15 20 25 50 60 24 V, 50/60 Hz 2 2 3RA2338-8XB30-1AC2 2.548
Contactor Assemblies 120 V, 60 Hz
240 V, 60 Hz
2
2
2
2
3RA2338-8XB30-1AK6
3RA2338-8XB30-1AP6
For Reversing
3RA23,
Contactors3RA13,
with 3RA24, 3RA14
AC/DC Contactor Assemblies
operation
communication 40 3 7.5 10 15 30 40 20-33 AC/DC 2 2 3RA2335-8XB30-1NB3 2.5
SIRIUS
interface:3RA23
replace reversing contactor assemblies
50 3 10 15 15 40 50 20-33 AC/DC 2 2 3RA2336-8XB30-1NB3
the 8XB30-1NB3
65 5 10 20 20 50 50 20-33 AC/DC 2 2 3RA2337-8XB30-1NB3
with 8XE30-1NB3.
80 1) 5 15 20 25 50 60 20-33 AC/DC 2 2 3RA2338-8XB30-1NB3
1) Max UL FLA = 65A at 460V
Mountable accessories (to be ordered separately): The fully wired and tested contactor assembly includes the following
Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies · Size S2 · up to 50 HP
components:
The figure shows the version with screw terminals 5
3
12
15 1
IC01_00383
11
4
13
The connecting leads
5 2 are not shown.
Accessory Order No. Page Components Order No. Page

K1 K2
Mountable
12 Mechanical accessories
interlock,(optional) Complete contactor20assemblies
1 2 Contactors, HP 3RT10 33 3RT10 33
mountable on the front 3RA19 24-1A 1 2 Contactors, 25 HP 3RT10 34 3RT10 34
To be ordered separately Article No. Page Individual parts Article No. K1 K2 Page
14 Auxiliary switch block,
11 Auxiliary switch block, 2/66 1 2 Contactors, 30 HP 3RT10 35 3RT10 35 2/8
mountable on the frontfront 3RH2921-1. . . .
3RH19 21-1CA.. 1 2 Contactor, 30 HP 3RT2035 3RT2035
12
15 Auxiliary
Auxiliaryswitch
switchblock,
block,lateral 3RH2921-1DA. . 2/68 1 12 2 Contactors, 40
Contactor, 40 HP HP 3RT10
3RT203636 3RT10
3RT203636 2/8
laterally
13 Surge mountable
suppressor 3RH19 21-1EA..
3RT2936-1. . . . 2/72 1 42 Mechanical
Contactor, 50 interlock,
HP 3RT2037 3RT2037 2/8
laterally mountable 3RA19 24-2B
15 Surge module for connection to 3RA271.-1BA00
16 Function 2/30 1 2 Contactor, 50 HP 3RT2038 3RT2038 2/79
the control system
suppressor 3RT19 26-1.... 5 6 Installation kit 3RA19 33-2A
4 5 Assembly kit contains: 3RA2933-2AA1
3RT19 36-1.... The installation kit contains:
comprising:
4 22connecting
connectingclips
pins for 2 contactors
contactors with a clearance of
For further voltages, see page 2/49. 5
For overview, see page 2/37-2/38.
Coil voltage tolerance: 5 10 mm modules on the top and bottom for connecting the
Wiring
For accessories, see page 2/66-2/83. at 50Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us main and
Wiring auxiliaryon
connectors current paths,
the top andelectrical
bottom interlock included
at 60Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us 6 (NC contact interlock)
For circuit diagrams, see page 2/200. for connecting the main conducting paths
For dimension drawings, see page 2/218. at AC/DC: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us 6 Mechanical interlock 3RA2934-2B 2/80

Contactor Assemblies for Switching Motors SIRIUS
3RA13 reversing

Size S3 · up to 75 HP
UL data
AC data Single-phase Three-phase
Amp
Fully wired
HP ratings HP ratings and tested
ratings Rated control Auxiliary Weight
AC2/AC3 115 V 230 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V supply voltage 1) contacts contactor assembly approx.
A HP HP HP HP HP HP NO NC Order No. kg
AC operation
65 5 15 20 25 50 60 24 V, 50/60 Hz 0 2 3RA1344-8XB30-1AC2 3.9
120 V, 60 Hz 0 2 3RA1344-8XB30-1AK6
240 V, 60 Hz 0 2 3RA1344-8XB30-1AP6
80 7.5 15 25 30 60 75 24 V, 50/60 Hz 0 2 3RA1345-8XB30-1AC2 3.9
120 V, 60 Hz 0 2 3RA1345-8XB30-1AK6
240 V, 60 Hz 0 2 3RA1345-8XB30-1AP6
95 10 20 30 30 75 100 24 V, 50/60 Hz 0 2 3RA1346-8XB30-1AC2 3.9
120 V, 60 Hz 0 2 3RA1346-8XB30-1AK6
240 V, 60 Hz 0 2 3RA1346-8XB30-1AP6
DC operation
65 5 15 20 25 50 60 24 V DC 0 2 3RA1344-8XB30-1BB4 5.7
80 7.5 15 25 30 60 75 24 V DC 0 2 3RA1345-8XB30-1BB4
95 10 20 30 30 75 100 24 V DC 0 2 3RA1346-8XB30-1BB4
Mountable accessories (to be ordered separately): The fully wired and tested contactor assembly includes the following
components:

are not shown.
Accessor y Order No. Page Components Order No. Page

K1 K2
12 Mechanical interlock, 1 2 Contactors, 50 HP 3RT10 44 3RT10 44 2/8
mountable on the front 3RA19 24-1A 2/80 1 2 Contactors, 60 HP 3RT10 45 3RT10 45 2/8
14 Auxiliary switch block, 1 2 2/8
Contactors, 75 HP 3RT10 46 3RT10 46
mountable on the front 3RH19 21-1CA.. 2/66
4 Mechanical interlock,
laterally mountable 3RA19 24-2B 2/80
laterally mountable 3RH19 21-1EA.. 2/68
5 6 Installation kit 3RA19 43-2A 2/81
16 Surge suppressor 3RT19 26-1.... 2/73
3RT19 36-1.... The installation kit contains:
5 2 connecting clips for 2 contactors with a clearance of
For further voltages, see page 2/49. 10 mm
For overview, see page 2/37-2/38. 6 Wiring connectors on the top and bottom
For accessories, see page 2/66-2/83. 1) Coil voltage tolerance
For circuit diagrams, see page 2/200. at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
For dimension drawings, see page 2/218. at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

SIRIUS 3RA24 Contactor
3RA24 Contactor Assemblies for Wye-Delta StartingAssemblies for Wye-Delta Starting
3RA24 complete units, 5.5 ... 22 kW 3RA24 complete units, 5.5 ... 22 kW
Overview
These 3RA24 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting are Motor protection
designed for standard applications.
Overload relays or thermistor motor protection releases can be
Note: used for overload protection.
Contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting in special applica-
tions such as very heavy starting or wye-delta starting of The overload relay can be either mounted onto the line contactor
special motors must be customized. Help with designing such or separately fitted. It must be set to 0.58 times the rated motor
special applications is available from Technical Assistance. current.
The 3RA24 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be Surge suppression
ordered as follows: Sizes S00 and S0
3
Sizes S00 and S0 Surge suppression (varistor) is included in the function modules
• Fully wired and tested, with electrical and mechanical for wye-delta starting.
interlock.
Function modules for wye-delta starting
• As individual parts for customer assembly.
The 3RA28 16-0EW20 wye-delta function module (see
A dead interval of 50 ms on reversing is already integrated in the page 2/27 replaces the complete wiring in the control circuit
function module for wye-delta starting. and can be used in the voltage range from 24 to 240 V AC/DC.
There is also a range of accessories (lateral auxiliary switch It is snapped onto the front of the contactor assembly size S00
blocks, etc.) that must be ordered separately. or S0.
For overload relays for motor protection see Chapter 3 One function module comprises a complete module kit:
"Overload Relays" --> "3RB3 Solid-State Overload Relays". • One 3RA29 12-0 basic module with integrated control logic
and time setting,
The 3RA24 contactor assemblies have screw or spring-type
terminals and are suitable for screwing or snapping onto TH 35 • And two 3RA29 11-0 coupling modules with related connect-
standard mounting rails. ing cables.
With the fully wired and tested 3RA24 contactor assemblies, the The scope of supply comprises a complete module kit for one
auxiliary contacts included in the basic devices are unassigned. contactor assembly for wye-delta starting size S00 or S0,
regardless of the connection method.
Screw terminals
Rated data Size
at AC 50 Hz 400 V
Power Operational current Motor current Line/delta contactor Star contactor Order No.
Ie complete
kW A A
5.5 12 9.5 ... 13.8 S00-S00-S00 3RT20 15-1 3RT20 15-1 3RA24 15-8XF31-1. . .
7.5 16 12.1 ... 17 3RT20 17-1 3RT20 15-1 3RA24 16-8XF31-1. . .
11 25 19 ... 25 3RT20 18-1 3RT20 16-1 3RA24 17-8XF31-1. . .
11 25 19 ... 25 S0-S0-S0 3RT20 24-1 3RT20 24-1 3RA24 23-8XF32-1. . .
15 32 24.1 ... 34 3RT20 26-1 3RT20 24-1 3RA24 25-8XF32-1. . .
18.5 40 34.5 ... 40 3RT20 26-1 3RT20 24-1 3RA24 25-8XF32-1. . .
22 50 31 ... 43 3RT20 27-1 3RT20 26-1 3RA24 26-8XF32-1. . .
Rated data Size
at AC 50 Hz 400 V
Power Operational current Motor current Line/delta contactor Star contactor Order No.
Ie complete
kW A A
5.5 12 9.5 ... 13.8 S00-S00-S00 3RT20 15-2 3RT20 15-2 3RA24 15-8XF31-2. . .
7.5 16 12.1 ... 17 3RT20 17-2 3RT20 15-2 3RA24 16-8XF31-2. . .
11 25 19 ... 25 3RT20 18-2 3RT20 16-2 3RA24 17-8XF31-2. . .
11 25 19 ... 25 S0-S0-S0 3RT20 24-2 3RT20 24-2 3RA24 23-8XF32-2. . .
15 32 24.1 ... 34 3RT20 26-2 3RT20 24-2 3RA24 25-8XF32-2. . .
18.5 40 34.5 ... 40 3RT20 26-2 3RT20 24-2 3RA24 25-8XF32-2. . .
25 50 31 ... 43 3RT20 27-2 3RT20 26-2 3RA24 26-8XF32-2. . .
Note:
The selection of contactor types refers to fused configurations.

Assemblies
3RA24 Contactor Assemblies for Wye-Delta Starting Assemblies for Wye-Delta Starting
3RA24 Contactor SIRIUS
3RA24 complete units, 5.5 ... 22 kW
Components for customer assembly contactors (top) and between the delta and star contactors
(bottom).
Assembly kits with wiring modules and mechanical connectors
are available for contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting. Control circuit
Contactors, overload relays, function modules for wye-delta
starting or wye-delta timing relays, auxiliary switches for Features:
electrical interlock – if required also feeder terminals and base • Time setting range 0.5 to 60 s (3 selectable settings)
plates – must be ordered separately. • Wide voltage range 24 to 240 V AC/DC
• Dead interval of 50 ms, non-adjustable.
The wiring kits for sizes S00 and S0 contain the top and bottom
main conducting path connections between the line and delta
Screw terminals
3
Accessories for Overload relay, thermal Overload relay, solid-state
customer assembly (trip class CLASS 10) (trip class CLASS 10)
Power Function modules Assembly kit B, Star jumper Setting range Order No. Setting range Order No.
for wye-delta for single infeed
starting
kW A A
5.5 3RA28 16-0EW20 3RA29 13-2BB11) 3RT29 16-4BA31 5.5 ... 8 3RU21 16-1HB0 4 ... 16 3RB30 16-1TB0
7.5 7 ... 10 3RU21 16-1JB0
11 11 ... 16 3RU21 16-4AB0
11 3RA28 16-0EW20 3RA29 23-2BB12) 3RT29 26-4BA31 11 ... 16 3RU21 26-4AB0 6 ... 25 3RB30 26-1QB0
15 14 ... 20 3RU21 26-4BB0
18.5 20 ... 25 3RU21 26-4DB0
22 20 ... 25 3RU21 26-4DB0
Accessories for Overload relay, thermal Overload relay, solid-state
customer assembly (trip class CLASS 10) (trip class CLASS 10)
Power Function modules Assembly kit B, Star jumper Setting range Order No. Setting range Order No.
for wye-delta for single infeed
starting
kW A A
5.5 3RA28 16-0EW20 3RA29 13-2BB21) 3RT29 16-4BA32 5.5 ... 8 3RU21 16-1HC0 4 ... 16 3RB30 16-1TE0
7.5 7 ... 10 3RU21 16-1JC0
11 11 ... 16 3RU21 16-4AC0
11 3RA28 16-0EW20 3RA29 23-2BB22) 3RT29 26-4BA32 11 ... 16 3RU21 26-4AC0 6 ... 25 3RB30 26-1QE0
15 14 ... 20 3RU21 26-4BC0
18.5 20 ... 25 3RU21 26-4DC0
22 20 ... 25 3RU21 26-4DC0
1) The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock, 4 connecting clips; wiring 2) The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock, 4 connecting clips; wiring
modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on
the bottom (connection between delta and star contactor); star jumper and the bottom (connection between delta and star contactor); star jumper.
auxiliary circuit wiring.
Order No. scheme

Digit of the Order No. 1. - 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
@@@ @ @ @ @ – @ @ @ @ @ – @ @ @ @
SIRIUS contactor assemblies 3RA
2nd generation 2
Device type (e. g. 4 = contactor assembly for wye-delta starting) 4
Contactor size (1 = S00, 2 = S0) @
Power dependent on size (e. g. 25 = 15 kW) @
Type of overload relay (8X = without) @ @
Assembly @
(F = ready-assembled, E, H = ready-assembled with communication)
Interlock (3 = mechanical and electrical) @
Free auxiliary switches @
(e. g. S00: 1 = 3 NO total, S0: 2 = 3 NO + 3 NC total)
Connection type (1 = screw, 2 = spring) @
Operating range / solenoid coil circuit (e. g. A = AC standard / without) @
Rated control supply voltage (e. g. K6 = 110/120 V, 50/60 Hz) @ @
Example 3RA 2 4 2 5 – 8 X F 3 2 – 1 A K 6
Note: For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the
catalog in the Selection and ordering data.
The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information
purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the
order numbers.

SIRIUS 3RA23,
3RA24 3RA24
Contactor Contactor
Assemblies for Assemblies
Wye-Delta Starting
• Revised • 3RA24 Contactor Assemblies for Wye-Delta Starting
10/22/15 3RA24 complete units, 5.5 ... 22 kW
Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies · Size S00-S00-S00 · Up to 11 kW
3RA24 1 . -8XE31-2BB4 3RA24 1 . -8XF31-1A . 0 3RA24 1 . -8XF31-2A.0
3
Rated data AC-3 Rated control Screw terminals Weight Spring-type terminals Weight
Opera- Ratings of supply voltage approx. approx.
tional induction motors Us1) at Order No. Order No.
current Ie at 50 Hz and 50/60 Hz
up to
400 V 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
A kW kW kW kW V kg kg
12 3.3 5.5 7.2 9.2 24 AC 3RA24 15-8XF31-1AB0 0.910 3RA24 15-8XF31-2AB0 0.910
110/120 AC 3RA24 15-8XF31-1AF0 0.850 3RA24 15-8XF31-2AF0 0.910
220/240 AC 3RA24 15-8XF31-1AP0 0.850 3RA24 15-8XF31-2AP0 0.910
16 4.7 7.5 10.3 9.2 24 AC 3RA24 16-8XF31-1AB0 0.910 3RA24 16-8XF31-2AB0 0.910
110/120 AC 3RA24 16-8XF31-1AF0 0.850 3RA24 16-8XF31-2AF0 0.910
220/240 AC 3RA24 16-8XF31-1AP0 0.850 3RA24 16-8XF31-2AP0 0.910
25 5.5 11 11 11 24 AC 3RA24 17-8XF31-1AB0 0.850 3RA24 17-8XF31-2AB0 0.910
110/120 AC 3RA24 17-8XF31-1AF0 0.850 3RA24 17-8XF31-2AF0 0.910
220/240 AC 3RA24 17-8XF31-1AP0 0.850 3RA24 17-8XF31-2AP0 0.910
DC operation
12 3.3 5.5 7.2 9.2 24 DC 3RA24 15-8XF31-1BB4 0.910 3RA24 15-8XF31-2BB4 0.910
16 4.7 7.5 10.3 9.2 24 DC 3RA24 16-8XF31-1BB4 0.910 3RA24 16-8XF31-2BB4 0.910
25 5.5 11 11 11 24 DC 3RA24 17-8XF31-1BB4 1.030 3RA24 17-8XF31-2BB4 1.090
For IO-Link connection
12 3.3 5.5 7.2 9.2 24 DC 3RA24 15-8XE31-1BB4 1.030 3RA24 15-8XE31-2BB4 1.090
16 4.7 7.5 10.3 9.2 24 DC 3RA24 16-8XE31-1BB4 1.030 3RA24 16-8XE31-2BB4 1.090
25 5.5 11 11 11 24 DC 3RA24 17-8XE31-1BB4 1.030 3RA24 17-8XE31-2BB4 1.090
For AS-Interface connection
12 3.3 5.5 7.2 9.2 24 DC 3RA24 15-8XH31-1BB4 1.050 3RA24 15-8XH31-2BB4 1.110
16 4.7 7.5 10.3 9.2 24 DC 3RA24 16-8XH31-1BB4 1.050 3RA24 16-8XH31-2BB4 1.110
25 5.5 11 11 11 24 DC 3RA24 17-8XH31-1BB4 1.050 3RA24 17-8XH31-2BB4 1.110
1)
The wye-delta starters listed here are assembled from individual Coil operating range
contactors which are UL Listed. The overall assembly Catalog at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us; at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
Number is not UL Listed.
For other voltages see page 2/49.

Assemblies
3RA24 Contactor Assemblies for Wye-Delta Starting Assemblies• for
3RA24 Contactor Wye-Delta
Revised • SIRIUS
Starting
3RA24 complete units, 5.5 ... 22 kW 09/30/14
3
3RA24 2 . -8XE32-1BB4 3RA24 2 . -8XF32-1A . 2 3RA24 2 . -8XF32-2A . 2
Rated data AC-3 Rated control Screw terminals Weight Spring-type terminals Weight
Opera- Ratings of supply voltage approx. approx.
tional induction motors Us1) at Order No. Order No.
current Ie at 50 Hz and 50/60 Hz
up to
400 V 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
A kW kW kW kW V kg kg
25 7.1 11 15.6 19 24 AC 3RA24 23-8XF32-1AC2 1.370 3RA24 23-8XF32-2AC2 1.530
110/220 AC 3RA24 23-8XF32-1AK6 1.370 3RA24 23-8XF32-2AK6 1.530
220/240 AC 3RA24 23-8XF32-1AP6 1.370 3RA24 23-8XF32-2AP6 1.530
32 / 40 11.4 15 / 19 19 24 AC 3RA24 25-8XF32-1AC2 1.370 3RA24 25-8XF32-2AC2 1.530
18.5 110/220 AC 3RA24 25-8XF32-1AK6 1.370 3RA24 25-8XF32-2AK6 1.530
220/240 AC 3RA24 25-8XF32-1AP6 1.370 3RA24 25-8XF32-2AP6 1.530
50 -- 22 19 19 24 AC 3RA24 26-8XF32-1AC2 1.390 3RA24 26-8XF32-2AC2 1.550
110/220 AC 3RA24 26-8XF32-1AK6 1.390 3RA24 26-8XF32-2AK6 1.550
220/240 AC 3RA24 26-8XF32-1AP6 1.390 3RA24 26-8XF32-2AP6 1.550
DC operation
25 7.1 11 15.6 19 24 DC 3RA24 23-8XF32-1BB4 1.940 3RA24 23-8XF32-2BB4 2.100
32 / 40 11.4 15 / 19 19 24 DC 3RA24 25-8XF32-1BB4 1.940 3RA24 25-8XF32-2BB4 2.100
18.5
50 -- 22 19 19 24 DC 3RA24 26-8XF32-1BB4 1.960 3RA24 26-8XF32-2BB4 2.120
For IO-Link connection
25 7.1 11 15.6 19 24 DC 3RA24 23-8XE32-1BB4 1.940 3RA24 23-8XE32-2BB4 2.100
32 / 40 11.4 15 / 19 19 24 DC 3RA24 25-8XE32-1BB4 1.940 3RA24 25-8XE32-2BB4 2.100
18.5
50 -- 22 19 19 24 DC 3RA24 26-8XE32-1BB4 1.960 3RA24 26-8XE32-2BB4 2.120
For AS-Interface connection
25 7.1 11 15.6 19 24 DC 3RA24 23-8XH32-1BB4 1.960 3RA24 23-8XH32-2BB4 2.120
32 / 40 11.4 15 / 19 19 24 DC 3RA24 25-8XH32-1BB4 1.960 3RA24 25-8XH32-2BB4 2.120
18.5
50 -- 22 19 19 24 DC 3RA24 26-8XH32-1BB4 1.980 3RA24 26-8XH32-2BB4 2.140
1)
The wye-delta starters listed here are assembled from individual Coil operating range at 50 Hz:
contactors which are UL Listed. The overall assembly Catalog 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ; at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
Number is not UL Listed.
For other voltages see page 2/49 .

IC10_03_04.fm Page 50 Friday, April 17, 2015 3:43 PM

SIRIUS • Revised • 3RT / 3RA Contactors
04/20/15
Power Contactors for Switching Motors Rated control supply voltages

SIRIUS 3RT20 contactors, 3-pole, up to 37 kW
Contactor type 3RT201 3RT231 3RT202 3RT232 3RT2617 3RT203 3RT233 3RT104
Options
Rated control supply voltage Us 3RA211 3RT251 3RA212 3RT252 3RT2627 3RA213 3RT253 3RT134
3RT2637 3RT144
Rated control supply voltages, possible on request 3RA114
(change of the 10th and 11th digits of the Article
S00 No.) S00 S0 S0 S00-S2 S2 S2 S3
Rated control
Rated supplyContactor
supply
control voltagestype 3RT201to 10th and
(changes 3RT202 3RT203
11th positions 3RT231,
of the Order No.) 3RT232, 3RT233,
voltage Us 3RT251 3RT252 3RT253
AC Operation1) Size S00 S0 S2 S00 S0 S2
Coils 24 V AC B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0
Sizes for
S0050
toHz
S2
(exception: 42 V AC D0 D0 D0 -- -- D0 -- D0
AC operation1)
3
size S00: 50 48 V AC H0 H0 H0 -- -- H0 -- H0
Solenoid
and 60 Hzcoils
2) for 50 Hz (exception: Size S00: 50 and 60 Hz2))
110 V AC F0 F0 F0 F0 F0 F0 F0 F0
24 V AC B0 P0 B0 P0 B0
P0 P0 B0 P0 B0P0 P0 B0 P0
230 V AC
42 V AC D0 D0 D0 D0 -- --
48 V AC 400 V AC H0 V0 H0 V0 V0
H0 V0 H0 V0 --V0 V0 -- V0
110 V AC
Coils for 24 V AC F0 B0 F0 B0 F0
C2 C2 F0 C2 F0C2 C2 F0 C2
230 V AC P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0
50
240and
V AC60 Hz
2) 42 V AC U0 D0 U0 D0 D2
U0 D2 -- -- --D2 D2 -- D2
400 V AC 48 V AC V0 H0 V0 H0 H2
V0 H2 V0 -- V0H2 H2 V0 H2
Solenoid coils for 50110 andV60 Hz2)
AC F0 F0 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2
24 V AC 208 V AC B0 M2 C2 M2 M2
C2 M2 B0 M2 C2M2 M2 C2 M2
42 V AC 220 V AC D0 N2 D2 N2 D2
N2 N2 D0 N2 D2N2 N2 D2 N2
48 V AC 230 V AC H0 P0 H2 P0 H2
L2 L2 H0 L2 H2L2 L2 H2 L2
110 V AC F0 G2 G2 F0 G2 G2
220 V AC 240 V AC N2 P2 N2 P2 P2
N2 P2 N2 P2 N2P2 P2 N2 P2
230 VUSA
For AC 50 Hz: 60 Hz:P0 L2 L2 P0 L2 L2
Solenoid coils 3)(for USA 3)
and Canada 110and
V AC 120) V AC
Canada K6 K6 K6 K6 K6 K6 K6 K6
50 Hz 60 Hz
220 V AC 240 V AC P6 P6 P6 P6 P6 P6 P6 P6
110 V AC 120 V AC 277 VK6
AC — K6 — —
K6 U6 K6 — U6
K6 U6 K6 U6
220 V AC 240 V AC 480 VP6
AC V6 P6 — P6
V6 — P6 — P6
V6 V6 P6 V6
Solenoid coils (for Japan) 600 V AC — — — T6 — T6 T6 T6
Hz4)
50/60Japan 5) 4)
60 HzHz
For 50/60 : 60 Hz5):
100 V AC 100
110VVAC
AC 110 VG6
AC G6 G6 G6 G6 G6 G6 G6 G6
G6 G6 G6 G6
200 V AC 220VVAC
200 AC 220 VN6
AC N6 N6 N6 N6
N6 N6 N6 N6 N6
N6 N6 N6 N6
400 V AC 440 V AC R6 R6 R6 R6 R6 R6
400 V AC 440 V AC R6 R6 R6 R6 R6 R6 R6 R6
DC operation1)
DC Operation1)
12 V DC A4 A4 -- A4 A4 --
24 V DC 12 V DC B4 A4 B4 A4 —
-- — B4 — B4— — -- —
42 V DC 24 V DC D4 B4 D4 B4 --
B4 B4 D4 — D4— — -- B4
48 V DC W4 W4 -- W4 W4 --
60 V DC 42 V DC E4 D4 E4 D4 D4
-- D4 -- — --— — -- D4
110 V DC 48 V DC F4 W4 F4 W4 W4
-- W4 F4 — F4— — -- W4
125 V DC 60 V DC G4 E4 G4 E4 --
E4 E4 G4 — G4— — -- E4
220 V DC M4 M4 -- M4 M4 --
230 V DC 72 V DC P4 J8 P4 J8 J8
-- J8 P4 — --— — -- J8
80 V DC — — — — — — — E8
Examples 110 V DC F4 F4 F4 F4 — — — F4
AC operation 3RT2023-1AP00
125 V DC Contactor with
G4screw terminals;
G4 with solenoid
G4 coil forG4
50 Hz for rated
— control supply
— voltage 230 — V AC G4
3RT2023-1AG20
M4screw terminals;
M4 with solenoid
M4 coil forM4
50/60 Hz for —
rated control —supply voltage
—110 V AC M4
DC operation 3RT2025-2BB40
P4 spring-typeP4terminals; for
P4rated control—supply voltage
— 24 V DC — — P4
3RT2025-2BG40 Contactor with spring-type terminals; for rated control supply voltage 125 V DC
Coil codes for frame sizes S6-S12 can be found on page 2/9. Further voltages on request
Rated control supply Contactor type -- 3RT2. 2.-.N Rated control supply Contactor 3RT2. 3.-.N
voltage voltage type
6) 6)
Us min ... Us max Size S00 S0 Us min ... Us max Size S2
Sizes S00 to S2
AC/DC operation (50/60 Hz AC, DC)
21 ... 28 V AC/DC -- B3 20 ... 33 V AC/DC B3
95 ... 130 V AC/DC -- F3 83 ... 155 V AC/DC F3
200 ... 280 V AC/DC7) -- P3 175 ... 280 V AC/DC P3
1) For deviating coil voltages and coil operating ranges of sizes S00 and S0, 4) Coil operating range
the SITOP power 24 V DC power supply unit with wide range input Size S00: at 50/60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
(93 to 264 V AC; 30 to 264 V DC) can be used for coil excitation Size S0: at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
(For more SITOP information see section 15). at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
2) 5)
Coil operating range Coil operating range
at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us at 60 Hz: 0.8 ...1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us 6)
Coil operating range for S0: 0.7 x Us min ... 1.3 x Us max
3)
Coil operating range Coil operating range for S2: 0.8 x Us min ...1.1 x Us max
Size S00: at 50 Hz: 0.85.... 1.1 x Us 7) The following applies to S0 and U
s max = 280 V: Upper limit =1.1 x Us max
at 60 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Size S0: at 50 Hz and 60 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

Control Relays, Coupling Relays SIRIUS
3RH21 control relays, 4-pole

AC and DC operation
3RH11 . . -1 . . . . 3RH11 . . -2 . . . .
Rated current Auxiliary contacts

at 240 V Ident- Version Rated control AC Operation Rated control DC Operation
NEMA ification supply Screw supply Screw
Size S00 – Terminal designations A600/Q600 No. voltage Us Terminals1) 2) voltage Us Terminals1) 2
according to EN 50011
Amps NO NC V AC 50/60 Hz 3) Order No. V DC Order No.
For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail

10 40E 4 — 24 3RH2140-1AB00 24 3RH2140-1BB40
110/120 3RH2140-1AK60 110 3RH2140-1BF40
220/240 3RH2140-1AP60 220 3RH2140-1BM40
10 31E 3 1 24 3RH2131-1AB00 24 3RH2131-1BB40

110/120 3RH2131-1AK60 110 3RH2131-1BF40
220/240 3RH2131-1AP60 220 3RH2131-1BM40
10 22E 2 2 24 3RH2122-1AB00 24 3RH2122-1BB40

110/120 3RH2122-1AK60 110 3RH2122-1BF40
220/240 3RH2122-1AP60 220 3RH2122-1BM40
Notes: 1) The 3RH21 contactor relays are also available with spring-type terminals. Replace the 8th digit of the
For further voltages, see page 2/49. order number with a “2” e.g. “3RH2140-2AB00”
For accessories, see pages 2/66-2/77.
For technical data, see pages 2/185-2/188. 2) The 3RH21 contactor relays are also available with ring lug terminals. Replace the 8th digit of the
order number with a “4” e.g. “3RH2140-4AB00”
For overview, see page 2/116.
For position terminals, see page 2/202-2/203. 3) AC coil operating range at 50 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us at 60 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
For dimension drawings, see page 2/124. 4) For AC-15/AC-14 the following applies: Ie = 6A for mounted auxiliary contacts.

SIRIUS • Revised • Control Relays, Coupling Relays
09/30/14 3RH24 latched control relays, 4-pole
Overview
The contactor coil and the coil of the release solenoid are both RC elements, varistors diodes or diode assemblies can
designed for uninterrupted duty. be fitted to both coils from the front for damping opening
surges in the coil.
The number of auxiliary contacts can be extended by means of
front auxiliary switch blocks (up to 4 poles).

Size S00 – Terminal designations according to EN 5001
Rated current Aux. contacts Rated Rated
at 240 V Ident. Version control control
AC-14, AC-15 No. supply AC Operation supply DC Operation
NEMA voltage Us voltage Us
A600/Q600 Screw Terminals1) Screw Terminals
Amps NO NC V AC Order No. V DC Order No.

10 40E 4 — 24, 50/60 Hz 3RH2440-1AB00 24 3RH2440-1BB40
( ) 13 23 33 43
E1(+) A1+
110, 50 Hz/120, 60 Hz 3RH2440-1AK60 110 3RH2440-1BF40
220, 50 Hz / 240, 60 Hz 3RH2440-1AP60 125 3RH2440-1BG40
E2(-) A2(-) 14 24 34 44
230, 50/60 Hz 3RH2440-1AP00 220 3RH2440-1BM40
10 31E 3 1 24, 50/60 Hz 3RH2431-1AB00 24 3RH2431-1BB40

E1(+) A1(+) 13 21 33 43
110, 50 Hz / 120, 60 Hz 3RH2431-1AK60 110 3RH2431-1BF40
3RH2422-1BB40 220, 50 Hz / 240, 60 Hz 3RH2431-1AP60 125 3RH2431-1BG40
E2(–) A2(–) 14 22 34 44
230, 50/60 Hz 3RH2431-1AP00 220 3RH2431-1BM40
10 22E 2 2 24, 50/60 Hz 3RH2422-1AB00 24 3RH2422-1BB40
E1(+) A1(+) 13 21 31 43
110, 50 Hz / 120, 60 Hz 3RH2422-1AK60 110 3RH2422-1BF40
220, 50 Hz / 240, 60 Hz 3RH2422-1AP60 125 3RH2422-1BG40
E2(–) A2(–) 14 22 32 44
230, 50/60 Hz 3RH2422-1AP00 220 3RH2422-1BM40
For accessories for 3RH24, see below and page 2/66-2/77 For position of terminals, see page 2/202-2/203.
For technical data, see page 2/185-2/188. For dimension drawings, see page 2/224.
For overview, see page 2/116.
Auxiliary switch blocks for 3RH21, 3RH24 control relays

Size S00 – For assembling to control relays For contactor Contacts Weight
to have 8 contacts type HS Version approx.
Block
Ident.
Screw Terminals Spring Terminals
No.
NO NC kg. Order No. Order No.
Auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front according to EN 50011
3RH2140, 80E 4 — 0.050 3RH2911-1GA40 3RH2911-2GA40
3RH2440,
Ident. No.
40 E
3RH2140, 71E 3 1 0.050 3RH2911-1GA31 3RH2911-2GA31

3RH2440,
Ident. No.
40 E
3RH2911-1GA40
3RH2140, 62E 2 2 0.050 3RH2911-1GA22 3RH2911-2GA22
3RH2440,
Ident. No.
40 E
3RH2140, 53E 1 3 0.050 3RH2911-1GA13 3RH2911-2GA13

3RH2440,
Ident. No.
40 E
3RH2140, 44E — 4 0.050 3RH2911-1GA04 3RH2911-2GA04

3RH2911-2GA40 3RH2440,
Ident. No.
40 E
1) Coil voltage tolerance For further accessories see pages 2/66-2/77

at 50 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us

Coupling Relays SIRIUS
3RH21 coupling relays for
switching auxiliary circuits, 4 pole
DC operation The 3RH21 coupling relays for The 3RH21 coupling relays Coupling relays have a low power
IEC 60 947 and EN 60 947 switching auxiliary circuits are cannot be extended with consumption, an extended coil
tailored to the special requirements auxiliary switch blocks. voltage tolerance and an integrated
of working with electronic controls. surge suppressor for damping
opening surges on select versions

DC operation Rated current Auxiliary contacts
at 240 V Ident- Version
Size S00 – Terminal designations Surge NEMA ification Weight
according to EN 50 011 suppressor A600/Q600 No. Screw Terminals1) Spring Terminals1) approx.
Amps NO NC Order No. Order No. kg.

Rated control supply voltage Us = Diode, varistor, 10 40E 4 — 3RH2140-1HB40 3RH2140-2HB40 0.300
24 V DC, coil voltage tolerance or RC element 10 31E 3 1 3RH2131-1HB40 3RH2131-2HB40 0.300
0.7 to 1.25 x Us can be mounted 10 22E 2 2 3RH2122-1HB40 3RH2122-2HB40 0.300
Power consumption of the coils
2.8 W at 24 V (no auxiliary switch Diode integrated 10 40E 4 — 3RH2140-1JB40 3RH2140-2JB40 0.300
blocks can be mounted) 10 31E 3 1 3RH2131-1JB40 3RH2131-2JB40 0.300
10 22E 2 2 3RH2122-1JB40 3RH2122-2JB40 0.300
Suppressor 10 40E 4 — 3RH2140-1KB40 3RH2140-2KB40 0.300

diode integrated 10 31E 3 1 3RH2131-1KB40 3RH2131-2KB40 0.300
10 22E 2 2 3RH2122-1KB40 3RH2122-2KB40 0.300
3RH2140-1HB40
Rated control supply voltage Us Diode, varistor, 10 40E 4 — 3RH2140-1MB40-0KT0 3RH2140-2MB40-0KT0 0.300
= 24 V DC, coil voltage tolerance or RC element 10 31E 3 1 3RH2131-1MB40-0KT0 3RH2131-2MB40-0KT0 0.300
0.85 to 1.85 x Us can be mounted 10 22E 2 2 3RH2122-1MB40-0KT0 3RH2122-2MB40-0KT0 0.300
Power consumption of the coils
1.6 W at 24 V (no auxiliary switch Diode 10 40E 4 — 3RH2140-1VB40 3RH2140-2VB40 0.300
blocks can be mounted) integrated 10 31E 3 1 3RH2131-1VB40 3RH2131-2VB40 0.300
10 22E 2 2 3RH2122-1VB40 3RH2122-2VB40 0.300
Suppressor 10 40E 4 — 3RH2140-1SB40 3RH2140-2SB40 0.300

diode integrated 10 31E 3 1 3RH2131-1SB40 3RH2131-2SB40 0.300
10 22E 2 2 3RH2122-1SB40 3RH2122-2SB40 0.300
3RH2140-2SB40
For technical data, see 2/189.

Suppressor element Diode integrated Suppressor diode
For position of terminals, see 2/202-2/203.
mountable integrated
For dimension drawings, see 2/224.
40E
1) Ring lug terminals are also available.
Replace the 8th digit of the order number
with a “4”, e.g. 3RH2140-4HB40
31E
22E

SIRIUS Contactors for Switching Motors
3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors,
3-pole
Maximum Maximum power ratings Max.

inductive UL Ratings IEC resistive
current ratings current Auxiliary Rated control Weight
AC-3 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V 1000 V AC-1 contacts supply voltage 1) approx.
A HP HP HP HP kW A NO NC V Order No. kg
AC operation 2) 3)
Size 14
3TF68 Auxiliary and control conductors: screw terminals
Main conductor: bar connections
• AC Operation
630 200 250 500 600 600 700 4 4 110-132, 50/60 Hz 3TF6844-nCF7 15
630 200 250 500 600 600 700 4 4 200-240, 50/60 Hz 3TF6844-nCM7 15
820 290 350 700 860 800 910 4 4 110-132, 50/60 Hz 3TF6944-nCF7 19
820 290 350 700 860 800 910 4 4 200-240, 50/60 Hz 3TF6944-nCM7 19
UL ratings shown in above table: n=0
For IEC use only up to 1000 V: n=8
• DC Operation
630 200 250 500 600 600 700 3 3 24 V DC 3TF6833-nDB4 16.9
820 290 350 700 860 800 910 3 3 24 V DC 3TF6933-nDB4 20.9
UL ratings shown in above table: n=1
For IEC use only up to 1000 V: n=8
Accessories and Spare parts for
3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors
For contactor Weight

Details type approx.
Order No. kg
Coils
AC Operation
The coils are fitted with varistors for damping surges as standard; 3TF68 3TY7683-0C●● 0.65
the coil is supplied with the closing electronics included. 3TF69 3TY7693-0C●●
DC Operation
Reversing contactors are required for size 14 contactors:
Contactor type Reversing contactor type 3TF68 3TY7683-0D●● 0.56
3TF68 and 3TF69: 3TC44 (70 mm wide, 85 mm high) 3TF69 3TY7693-0D●●
The coils are supplied without a reversing contactor.
●● For rated control supply voltages, see page 2/102.
3TY7
Vacuum interrupters
In order to ensure reliable operation of the contactors, only 3TF68 3TY7680-0B 3.2
Siemens original replacement interrupters should be used. 3TF69 3TY7690-0B
3 vacuum interrupters with mouning parts per set. 3.5
Auxiliary switch blocks with screw terminals
1 NO and 1 NC First auxiliary switch block, left or right. 3TF68 / 3TF69 3TY7561-1AA00 0.042
Replacement type for: 3TY7561-1A, -1B
1 NO and 1 NC First auxiliary switch block, left or right late break 3TF68 / 3TF69 3TY7561-1EA00 0.042
1 NO and 1 NC Second auxiliary switch block, left or right. 3TF68 / 3TF69 3TY7561-1KA00 0.042
Replacement type for: 3TY7 561-1K, -1L
Auxiliary switches for coil reconnection, for DC economy circuit with screw connections
1 NC Auxiliary switch block late break 3TF68 / 3TF69 3TY7681-1G 0.042
Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block with screw terminals
For mounting onto the side of contactors. For use in dusty atmosphere 3TF68 / 3TF69 3TY7561-1UA00 0.042
and electronic circuits with rated operational currents
3TY7561-1. Ie AC-14 and DC-13 from 1 mA to 300 mA at 3 V to 60 V.
For accessories, see page 2/53-2/54. 1) For further voltages, see page 2/102.
For technical data, see page 2/172-2/177. 2) Surge suppression integrated: fitted with varistor.
For description, see page 2/117. 3) For EMC, see description on page 2/117.
3TF68/69 vacuum contactors are supplied with integrated surge suppression for the main conducting paths (for
For internal circuit diagrams, see page 2/211.
description, see page 2/117). In operation in circuits with DC choppers, frequency converters, variable-speed drives,
For position of terminals, see page 2/208 for example, this protective circuitry is not required. It might be damaged by voltage peaks and harmonics generated,
For dimension drawings, see page 2/221. possibly followed by phase-to-phase shortcircuits. For this reason. the contactors can be supplied without overvoltage
damping. To order these versions add a “-Z” and the order code “A02”.

Accessories and Spare parts for
For contactor Design Order No. Weight Std.

approx. Pack
Size Type kg Qty
Interface for control by PLC
3TX7 090-0D Coil voltage tolerance: DC 17 V to 30 V
Power consumption: 0.5 W at DC 24 V
Fitted with varistor
For technical data, see Part 7.
14 3TF68 and For snapping onto the side of auxiliary switch 3TX7 090-0D 0.1 1
3TF69 blocks, with surge suppression
Terminal covers
3TX7 686-0A (Order No. and price per set)
14 3TF68 for protection against inadvertent contact 3TX7 686-0A 0.17 1 set =
with the exposed busbar connections 2 units
3TF69 (DIN VDE 0106 Part 100)" 3TX7 696-0A
Link for paralleling (star jumper) · 3-pole, without terminal 1)

3TX7 680-0D 14 3TF68 3TX7 680-0D 0.26 1
Cover plate for paralleling link
14 3TF68 A cover plate must be used in order to protect 3TX7 680-0E 0.18 1
against inadvertent contact (DIN VDE 0106
Part 100).
Box terminals for laminated copper bars

3TX7570-1E Without auxiliary conductor terminal
14 3TF68 With single covers for protection against inad- 3TX7 570-1E 0.6 1
vertent contact (EN 50274)
With auxiliary conductor terminal
14 3TF69 Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary conduc- 3TX7 690-1F 2.0 1

tors:
Solid: 2 × (0.75 ... 2.5) mm 2
Finely stranded
with end sleeve: 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5) mm2
Solid or stranded: 2 × (18 ... 12) AWG
Tightening torque: 0.8 Nm ... 1.4 Nm
(7 ... 12 lb.in)
Surge suppressors — Varistors

3TX7 572-3G 3TF68 and For DC economy circuit; Rated control
14 for lateral snapping onto supply voltage,
3TF69
auxiliary switches V DC
24 … 48 3TX7 572-3G 0.09 1
The varistor is included 48 … 127 3TX7 572-3H 0.09 1
in the scope of supply of 127 … 240 3TX7 572-3J 0.09 1
the 3TF68 and 3TF69
contactors with AC operation.
Includes the peak value

of the alternating voltage
on the DC side.
1) The link for paralleling can be reduced by one pole.

DC Power Controls
SIRIUS Contactors and Replacement Parts
General Purpose - Type 3TC
Ordering information
• Select Contactor from table below.
• Complete catalog number replace the two daggers (††) with appropriate
coil voltage suffix. See corresponding coil voltage suffix table below.
• Technical Data see page 2/178-2/181.
• Dimensions see page 2/221.
3TC44 3TC5 2
2 Pole DC HP Ratings Auxiliary

Frame Ampere Rating (DC-3, DC-5) contacts AC-Operated DC-Operated
Size Open Enclosed 115 V 230 V 500 V 575 V NO NC Order No. Order No.
3TC DC Contactors
2 40 40 5 10 15 15 2 2 3TC4417–0B†† 3TC4417–0A††
4 75 68 8 18 40 45 2 2 3TC4817–0B†† 3TC4817–0A††
8 220 200 25 50 100 100 2 2 3TC5217–0B†† 3TC5217–0A††
12 330 300 40 75 150 150 2 2 3TC5617–0B†† 3TC5617–0A††
Device Frame Size Catalog Number

Coils, AC 24V AC 120V AC 220/240V AC 277V AC 480V AC 600V AC
3TC4417-0B†† 3TY7403-0AC2 3TY7403-0AK6 3TY7403-0AP6 3TY7403-0AU1 3TY7403-0AV0 3TY7403-0AS0
3TC4817-0B†† 3TY6483-0AC1 3TY6483-0AK6 3TY6483-0AP6 3TY6483-0AP0 3TY6483-0AV0 3TY6483-0AS0
3TC 3TC5217-0B†† 3TY6523-0AK6 3TY6523-0AP6 3TY6523-0AP0 3TY6523-0AV0
3TC5617-0B†† 3TY6566-0AK6 3TY6566-0AP0 3TY6566-0AV0 3TY6566-0AS0
3TY6483-0AK6
Coils, DC 24V DC 48V DC 110V DC 125V DC 230V DC

3TC4417-0A†† 3TY6443-0BB4 3TY6443-0BF4 3TY6443-0BG4
3TC4817-0A†† 3TY6483-0BB4 3TY6483-0BW4 3TY6483-0BF4 3TY6483-0BG4
3TC
3TC5217-0A†† 3TY6523-0BB4 3TY6523-0BF4 3TY6523-0BG4 3TY6523-0BP4
3TC5217-0A†† 3TY6563-0BB4 3TY6563-0BF4 3TY6563-0BG4 3TY6563-0BP4
3TY6483-0BB4
Frame Contactor Mounting Solid Order No. Coil Suffix Table ††

size type position state
Replace †† in the contactor Order No.
Auxiliary Contact Blocks with 1 NO + 1 NC contacts 2) with a coil code from the table below.
2, 4 3TC44 or 1st block, left or right — 3TY6501-1AA00 V AC 50/60 Hz Code V DC Code
3TC48 2nd block, left or right Yes3) 3TY7561-1UA00 24 C1 24 B4
4 3TC48 2nd block, left 5) — 3TY6501-1K 120 K1* 36 V4
2nd block, right5) — 3TY6501-1L 240 P1 48 W4
3TY6501-1A 8, 12 3TC52 or 1st block, left — 3TY6561-1A 460 V0 60 E4
3TC56 1st block, right — 3TY6561-1B 600 S0 72 J8
*Use suffix K2 for 3TC44. 110 F4
2nd block, left5) — 3TY6561-1K
125 G4
2nd block, right5) — 3TY6561-1L
220 M4
230 P4
Device Type Frame Size Catalog Number
Main Contacts 1)
3TC44 3TY2440-0A
3TC48 3TY2480-0A
3TC 3TC52 3TY2520-0A
3TC56 3TY2560-0A
3TY2480-0A 1)
Main contact kits for size 3TC48 and larger include springs.
Smaller sizes do not.
Arc Chutes
2) On DC operated contactors the maximum number of auxiliary
3TC44 3TY2442-0A contacts is 2 NO, 2 NC.
3TC 3TC48 3TY2482-0A 3)
For use in dusty atmosphere and electronic circuits with rated
operational currents Ie AC-14 and DC-13 from 1 mA to 300 mA
3TC52 3TY2522-0A
at 3V to 60V. With 1 changeover contact.
3TC56 3TY2562-0A
4) Discount Code: DC Contactors
3TY2482-0A 5) Can only be mounted on AC-operated contactors.

DC Power Controls Contactors for Special Applications
DC Contactor Replacement Parts SIRIUS
Contactors for Switching DC Voltage
3TC contactors,
General Purpose - Type 3TC
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
For contactors Version Rated control supply Order No. Std.

voltage Us Pack
Size Type V AC V DC Qty
Surge suppressors · Varistors
2 3TC441) Varistors2) 24 ... 48 24 ... 70 3TX7 402-3G 1
with line spacer, for mounting onto 48 ... 127 70 ... 150 3TX7 402-3H 1
the coil terminal 127 ... 240 150 ... 250 3TX7 402-3J 1
240 ... 400 3TX7 402-3K 1
400 ... 600 3TX7 402-3L 1
4 3TC48 Varistors2) 24 ... 48 24 ... 70 3TX7 462-3G 1
for sticking onto the contactor base 48 ... 127 70 ... 150 3TX7 462-3H 1
3TX7 402-3 . or for mounting separately 127 ... 240 150 ... 250 3TX7 462-3J 1
240 ... 400 3TX7 462-3K 1
400 ... 600 3TX7 462-3L 1
8 and 12 3TC52, Varistor 24 ... 48 3TX7 462-3G 1
4
3TC56 for sticking onto the contactor base 48 ... 127 3TX7 462-3H 1
or for mounting separately 127 ... 240 3TX7 462-3J 1
240 ... 400 3TX7 462-3K 1
400 ... 600 3TX7 462-3L 1
8 and 12 3TC52, Varistors2) 24 ... 70 3TX7 522-3G 1
3TX7 462-3 . 3TC56 for separate screw connection or 70 ... 150 3TX7 522-3H 1
snapping onto TH 35 standard 150 ... 250 3TX7 522-3J 1
mounting rail
3TX7 522-3 .
Surge suppressors · RC elements
4 3TC48 RC elements 24 ... 48 3TX7 462-3R
For lateral snapping onto auxiliary 24 ... 70 3TX7 522-3R
switch or TH 35 standard mounting 48 ... 127 3TX7 462-3S
rail 70 ... 150 3TX7 522-3S
127 ... 240 3TX7 462-3T
150 ... 250 3TX7 522-3T
240 ... 400 3TX7 462-3U
400 ... 600 3TX7 462-3V
3TX7 462-3 . , 8 and 12 3TC52, RC elements 24 ... 48 3TX7 522-3R
3TX7 522-3 . 3TC56 For lateral snapping onto auxiliary 48 ... 127 3TX7 522-3S
switch or TH 35 standard mounting 127 ... 240 3TX7 522-3T
rail 240 ... 400 3TX7 522-3U
400 ... 600 3TX7 522-3V
Surge suppressors · Diodes
4 to 12 3TC48, Diode assemblies3) 24 ... 250 3TX7 462-3D
3TC52, . (diode and Zener diode) for DC
3TC56 solenoid system, for sticking onto
the contactor base or for mounting
separately
3TX7 462-3 .
Terminal covers
6 3TC48 For protection against inadvertent contact with 3TX6 506-3B 1 set=
exposed busbar connections. Can be screwed 6 units
on free screw end. Covers one busbar connection
10 and 14 3TC52, 3TX6 546-3B 1 set=
3TC56 6 units
3TX6 506-3B
1) The connection piece for mounting the surge suppressor must be bent
slightly.
2) Includes the peak value of the alternating voltage on the DC side.
3) Not for DC economy circuit.

Contactor Relays
SIRIUS
SIRIUS 3RH2 contactor relays,
4- and 8-pole Contactor relays and coupling relays
Size S00 with accessories
Overview
10
3
1
5
11
4
11
10
5
6
12
11
8
NSB0_02058
13
9
14
1 Contactor relay
2 Coupling relay for auxiliary circuits
3 Solid-state timing relay block
4 1-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from the top
5 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from the top
6 1-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from the bottom
7 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from the bottom
8 4-pole auxiliary switch block
(terminal designations according to EN 50011 or EN 50005)
9 2-pole auxiliary switch block, solid-state compatible version
(terminal designations according to EN 50005)
10 Solder pin adapter for contactor relays with 4-pole auxiliary switch block
11 Solder pin adapter for contactor and coupling relays
12 Additional load module for increasing the permissible residual current
13 Surge suppressor with LED
14 Surge suppressor without LED
5/4
Siemens Industry, Inc. Siemens IC 10 · 2012 2/57
Contactors
Power and Contactor
Contactors Assemblies
for Switching Motors
SIRIUS
3RT2 contactors and coupling relays
Size S00data
General with mountable accessories
Overview
The SIRIUS family of controls
The SIRIUS modular system with its components for the switch-
ing, starting, protection and monitoring of motors and industrial
systems stands for the fast, flexible and space-saving construc-
tion of control cabinets.
3
10
6
11
12
3
13
7
14
16
8
1
5
NSB0_02056a
9 2
15
13
14
1 Contactor size S00
2 1-pole auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable 11 Star jumper, 3-pole, without connecting terminal
3 1-pole auxiliary switch block, for snapping onto the front 12 Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with connecting terminal
Cable entry from the top 13 Wiring modules, on the top and bottom (reversing duty)
4 2-pole auxiliary switch block, for snapping onto the front 14 Solder pin adapter
Cable entry from the bottom
15 Connection module (adapter and connector) for contactors
5 4-pole auxiliary switch block, for snapping onto the front with screw-type connection
6 3RA28 function module 16 Safety main current connector for two contactors
7 3RA27 function module for AS-Interface, direct starting
8 3RA27 function module for IO-Link, direct starting
9 Surge suppressor with/without LED For contactors
10 Three-phase feeder terminal For contactors and coupling contactors (interface)
For accessories see pages 2/66 to 2/83. For mountable overload relays see Chapter 3,
Overload Relays
For contactor assemblies see pages 2/40 to 2/47.
For Motor Starters see Chapter 4, Combination Starters
For assembly kit for reversing contactor assemblies
(mech. interlocking, wiring modules) see page 2/81.

3/6 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
Power Contactors Assemblies
SIRIUS
3RT2 contactors and coupling relays
Size S0 with mountable accessories
General data
16
17
14
3
15
18
11 1
10
3
6 15
5
7 14
NSB0_02057a
13
8
12
1 Contactor size S0
2 1-pole auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable 11 Mechanical latching block

3 1-pole auxiliary switch block, for snapping onto the front 12 Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with connecting terminal
Cable entry from the top
13 Connection module (adapter and plug) for contactors
4 4-pole auxiliary switch block, for snapping onto the front with screw-type connection
5 2-pole auxiliary switch block, for snapping onto the front 14 Coil terminal module, on the top and bottom
Cable entry from the bottom
15 Wiring modules, on the top and bottom (reversing duty)
6 Surge suppressor with/without LED
16 Three-phase feeder terminal
7 3RA27 function module for AS-Interface, direct starting
17 Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole,
8 3RA28 function module without connecting terminal
9 3RA27 function module for IO-Link, direct starting 18 Safety main current connector for two contactors
10 Pneumatic delay block
For accessories see pages 2/66 to 2/83.

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 3/7
Power Contactors for Switching Motors
3RT2 contactors
General
Size data mountable accessories
S2 with 04/20/15
3RT2 contactors
14
15
12
13
2 1
16
5
6
13
7
12
IC01_00340
8 11
1 Contactor, size S2
9 3RA27 function modules for IO-Link, direct start
2 2-pole auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable 11 Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with connection terminal
3 1-pole auxiliary switch block, for snapping onto the front, 12 Coil terminal module, top and bottom
cable entry from above
13 Wiring modules, top and bottom (reversing duty)
4 4-pole auxiliary switch block, for snapping onto the front
14 3-phase feeder terminal
5 2-pole auxiliary switch block, for snapping onto the front,
cable entry from below 15 Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole,
without connection terminal
6 Surge suppressor with/without LED
16 Safety main current connector for two contactors
7 3RA27 function modules for AS-Interface, direct start
8 3RA28 function modules
Accessories see pages 2/66 to 2/81.

3/8 Siemens IC 10 · 2015 Industrial Controls Catalog
SIRIUS • Revised •
3RT1 contactors
04/20/15 General data
3RT1 contactors
4
16
5
17
10
2
15
11
13
IC01_00352b
9
14
18
8 15
19
12 20
21 2
22
2 3RT1 Contactor, size S2

3 3RT1 Contactor, size S3
For sizes S2 and S3:

4 Electronic timing relay block, ON-delay 17 Surge suppressor (varistor, RC element, diode assembly),
5 Electronic timing relay block, OFF-delay can be mounted on the top or bottom
6 Auxiliary switch block, solid-state time-delay 18 Mechanical latching interface for mounting directly onto contactor coil
(ON or OFF-delay or wye-delta function) 19 LED module for indicating contactor operation
7 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from above
Only for size S2:
8 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from below
20 Mechanical latching
9 4-pole auxiliary switch block
(terminal designations according to EN 50012 or EN 50005) Only for sizes S2 and S3:
10 Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, 21 Coil repeat terminal for making contactor assemblies
without connecting terminal
22 Terminal cover for box terminal
11 Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with connecting terminal
12 2-pole auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable left or right Only for size S3:
(terminal designations according to EN 50012 or EN 50005) 23 Terminal cover for cable lug and bar connection
13 Single-pole auxiliary switch block (up to 4 can be snapped on) 24 Auxiliary conductor terminal, 3-pole
14 Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable
15 Mechanical interlock, mountable to the front Accessories identical for sizes S2 and S3
16 Wiring connectors on the top and bottom (reversing duty) Accessories differ according to size
Accessories see pages 2/66 to 2/81. Motor Starters see Chapter 4 Combination
Starters & Starters for group installation

Industrial Controls Catalog Siemens IC 10 · 2015 3/9
SIRIUS
3RT1 contactors
Sizes S6 to S12 with mountable accessories
General data
(illustration for basic unit)
3
9
7
2 10
3
4
11
5
6
NSB0_01157d
1 3RT10 and 3RT14 air-break contactors, sizes S6, S10 and S12
2 Auxiliary switch block, solid-state time-delay 9 Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection,
(ON or OFF-delay or wye-delta function) different for sizes S6 and S10/S12
3 4-pole auxiliary switch block 10 Terminal cover for box terminal, different for
(terminal designations according to EN 50012 or EN 50005) sizes S6 and S10/S12
4 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from above 11 Box terminal block, different for sizes S6 and S10/S12
5 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from below
6 Single-pole auxiliary switch block (up to 4 can be snapped on)
7 2-pole auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable left or right
Accessories identical for sizes S0 to S12
(terminal designations according to EN 50012 or EN 50005)
(identical for S0 to S12) Accessories identical for sizes S6 to S12
8 Surge suppressor (RC element) for plugging into top of withdrawable coil Accessories differ according to size
For accessories see pages 2/66 to 2/83.

For mountable overload relays see Chapter 3,
“Overload Relays”.

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 3/9
Contactors
Power Contactors for Switching and Contactor Assemblies
Motors
SIRIUS
3RT1 contactors
Size S6 with accessories
General data
3
NSB0_01668b
1 3RT10 and 3RT14 air-break contactor, size S6

Wiring modules on the top and bottom 3RA1953-2A
Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole,
with through-hole, 3RT1956-4BA31
Terminal cover for cable lug and bar connection
different for sizes S6 and S10/S12
Terminal cover for box terminal different for
sizes S6 and S10/S12 Accessories identical for sizes S6 to S12
Box terminal block, different for sizes S6 and S10/S12 Accessories differ according to size
For accessories see pages 2/66-2/83.

Mountable overload relays see Chapter 3, “Overload Relays”.

3/10 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
SIRIUS
3RT1 contactors
Sizes S6, S10 and S12 with accessories
General data
3
1
2
NSB0_01669b
1 3RT10 and 3RT14 air-break contactor, sizes S6, S10 and S12 or
3RT12 vacuum contactor, sizes S10 and S12

3 Wiring modules on the top and bottom, 3RA19
Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole,
with through-hole, 3RT19 56-4BA31
5 Terminal cover for box terminal,
different for sizes S6 and S10/S12 Accessories identical for sizes S6 to S12
6 Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection, Accessories different according to size
different for sizes S6 and S10/S12
For accessories see pages 2/66-2/83.

For mountable overload relays see Chapter 3,
“Overload Relays”.

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 3/11
SIRIUS
3RT1 contactors
General data Sizes S6 to S12 with accessories
3
1 Air-break contactor, sizes S6, S10 and S12 NSB0_01410a

2 Vacuum contactor, sizes S10 and S12
Withdrawable coils for 3RT1 . . . - . A .. contactors with conventional operating mechanism

(size S10: differentiation between 3RT10/3RT14 air-break contactors and
3RT12 vacuum contactors)
(size S12: the same for air-break and vacuum contactors)
Withdrawable coils for 3RT1 . . . - . N.. contactors with solid-state operating mechanism.
(size S10: differentiation between 3RT10/3RT14 air-break contactors and
3RT12 vacuum contactors)
(size S12: the same for air-break and vacuum contactors)
Withdrawable coils and laterally mountable module (plug-on) for 3RT1. . . - . P . . air-break
contactors with solid-state operating mechanism and remaining lifetime indicator
Surge suppressor (RC element), plug-mountable on withdrawable coils
• 3RT1. ..-.A.. with conventional operating mechanism
• 3RT1. ..-.N.. with solid-state operating mechanism
Identical for sizes S6 to S12

Different according to size
For surge suppressors see page 2/73,

withdrawable coils see page 2/98.
For mountable overload relays see Chapter 3, “Overload Relays”.

3/12
Industrial Controls Catalog Siemens IC 10 · 2012
Accessories for 3RT contactors / 3RH control relays • Revised • SIRIUS
Auxiliary switch blocks 04/20/15
3RH2911-1HA01 3RH2911-2HA01 3RH19 21-1HA. . 3RH19 21-2HA . .
For contactors/ Rated Contactor Connections Auxiliary contacts Screw Spring

control relays operational with position Terminals1) Terminals1)
Current 3) HS block Version
6A Ident. No.
NEMA Order No. Order No.
A600/Q600
Type NO NC NO NC
(also compliant with the requirements according to EN 50005)
Size S00 2)
For assembling contactors with 2, 3, 4, or 5 auxiliary contacts
3RT201., 11E — 1 — — 3RH2911-1HA01 3RH2911-2HA01
Ident. No. 10E 12E — 2 — — 3RH2911-1HA02 3RH2911-2HA02
3RT231. 13E — 3 — — 3RH2911-1HA03 3RH2911-2HA03
3RT251. 21E 1 — — — 3RH2911-1HA10 3RH2911-2HA10
21E 1 1 — — 3RH2911-1HA11 3RH2911-2HA11
22E 1 2 — — 3RH2911-1HA12 3RH2911-2HA12
23E 1 3 — — 3RH2911-1HA13 3RH2911-2HA13
31E 2 — — — 3RH2911-1HA20 3RH2911-2HA20
31E 2 1 — — 3RH2911-1HA21 3RH2911-2HA21
32E 2 2 — — 3RH2911-1HA22 3RH2911-2HA22
41E 3 — — — 3RH2911-1HA30 3RH2911-2HA30
41E 3 1 — — 3RH2911-1HA31 3RH2911-2HA31
Size S0 to S2
For assembling contactors with 3, 4, or 5 auxiliary contacts
3RT202. , 12E — 1 — — 3RH2911-1HA01 3RH2911-2HA01
Ident. No. 11E 13E — 2 — — 3RH2911-1HA02 3RH2911-2HA02
3RT232. 14E — 3 — — 3RH2911-1HA03 3RH2911-2HA03
3RT252. 21E 1 — — — 3RH2911-1HA10 3RH2911-2HA10
3RT203. 22E 1 1 — — 3RH2911-1HA11 3RH2911-2HA11
3RT233. 23E 1 2 — — 3RH2911-1HA12 3RH2911-2HA12
3RT235. 24E 1 3 — — 3RH2911-1HA13 3RH2911-2HA13
31E 2 — — — 3RH2911-1HA20 3RH2911-2HA20
32E 2 1 — — 3RH2911-1HA21 3RH2911-2HA21
33E 2 2 — — 3RH2911-1HA22 3RH2911-2HA22
41E 3 — — — 3RH2911-1HA30 3RH2911-2HA30
42E 3 1 — — 3RH2911-1HA31 3RH2911-2HA31
Sizes S3 to S12
4-pole
3RT1. 4 to 31 3 1 — — 3RH1921-1HA31 3RH1921-2HA31

3RT1. 7, 22 2 2 — — 3RH1921-1HA22 3RH1921-2HA22
3RT11. 13 1 3 — — 3RH1921-1HA13 3RH1921-2HA13
22 (with location 2 2 — — 3RH1921-1XA22-0MA0 3RH1921-2XA22-0MA0
digits 5, 6, 7, 8)
EN50005 and EN50012 designate the markings 1) The 3RH2911-.HA.. aux. switches are available with 3) UL ratings: See appendix page 19/7
of the auxiliary terminal numbers. ring-lug terminals. Replace the 8th digit of the Order
For position of the terminals see pages 2/202-2/206. No. with a “4”.
For int. circuit diagrams see page 2/190. 2) Size S00 can be mounted according to EN 50012
3RH29 aux blocks are not intended for use with 3RT1 or only on basic units which have no integrated NC
3RH1 contactors and relays. contact.
3RH19 aux blocks are not intended for use with 3RT2 or
3RH2 contactors and relays.
For auxiliary switch blocks for 3RH2140 and 3RH2440 see
page 2/51.

SIRIUS • Revised • Accessories for 3RT contactors / 3RH control relays
04/20/15 Auxiliary switch blocks
3RH2911-1FA40 3RH2911-2FA40 3RH19 21-1C. . . 3RH19 21-2C . . . 3RH19 21-1LA . . 3RH19 21-1MA..
For contactors/ Rated Contactor Connections Auxiliary contacts Screw Spring

control relays operational with position Terminals1) Terminals1)
Current 3) HS block Version
6A Ident. No.
A600/Q600
Type NO NC NO NC
Sizes S00 to S2
2- or 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks for assembling contactors
with 3 and 5 or 4 and 6 auxiliary contacts
3RT2. 1., 40 4 — — — 3RH2911-1FA40 3RH2911-2FA40
3RT2. 2., 22 2 2 — — 3RH2911-1FA22 3RH2911-2FA22
3RT2. 3., 04 1) — 4 — — 3RH2911-1FA04 3RH2911-2FA04
3RH21 .., 11 2) — — 1 1 3RH2911-1FB11 3RH2911-2FB11
3RH24 .. 22 2) 1 1 1 1 3RH2911-1FB22 3RH2911-2FB22
22 2) — — 2 2 3RH2911-1FC22 3RH2911-2FC22
1- and 2- pole auxiliary switch blocks, cable entry from above or below
3RT2. 1., 10 Top 1 — — — 3RH2911-1AA10 —
3RT2. 2., Bottom 1 — — — 3RH2911-1BA10 —
3RT2. 3., 01 Top — 1 — — 3RH2911-1AA01 —
3RH21 .., Bottom — 1 — — 3RH2911-1BA01 —
3RH24 .. 11 Top 1 1 — — 3RH2911-1LA11 —
Bottom 1 1 — — 3RH2911-1MA11 —
20 Top 2 — — — 3RH2911-1LA20 —
Bottom 2 — — — 3RH2911-1MA20 —
Sizes S3 to S12
4-pole auxiliary switch blocks
3RT1. 4 to 40 4 — — — 3RH1921-1FA40 3RH1921-2FA40

3RT1. 7, 31 3 1 — — 3RH1921-1FA31 3RH1921-2FA31
3RT11 22 2 2 — — 3RH1921-1FA22 3RH1921-2FA22
04 — 4 — — 3RH1921-1FA04 3RH1921-2FA04
22 U — — 2 2 3RH1921-1FC22 3RH1921-2FC22
Single-pole auxiliary switch blocks (also compliant with EN 50012)
3RT1. 4 to — 1 — — — 3RH1921-1CA10 3RH1921-2CA10

3RT1. 7, — — 1 — — 3RH1921-1CA01 3RH1921-2CA01
3RT11 — — — 1 — 3RH1921-1CD10 —
— — — — 1 3RH1921-1CD01 —
2-pole auxiliary switch blocks with cable entry from one side
3RT1. 4 to — Top 1 1 — — 3RH19 21-1LA11 —

3RT1. 7, — Bottom 1 1 — — 3RH19 21-1MA11 —
3RT11 — Top 2 — — — 3RH19 21-1LA20 —
— Bottom 2 — — — 3RH19 21-1MA20 —
— Top — 2 — — 3RH19 21-1LA02 —
— Bottom — 2 — — 3RH19 21-1MA02 —
EN50005 and EN50012 designate the markings 1) Mounting is permitted only on basic units which 3) UL ratings: See appendix page 19/7
of the auxiliary terminal numbers. have no integrated NC contact.
For position of the terminals see pages 2/202-2/206. 2) Version with early make and delayed break contacts
For int. circuit diagrams see page 2/190.

Laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks 04/20/15
3RH2911-1DA02 3RH2911-2DA02 3RH19 21-1EA. . 3RH2921-1DA02

-1KA. .
For contactors/ Rated Contactor Mountable Auxiliary contacts Screw Spring

control relays operational with to contactor/ Terminals1) Terminals1)
Current 4) HS block contactor Version
6A Ident. No. relay side
A600/Q600
Type NO NC
Laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50012

Laterally mountable auxiliary switch block, 2-pole
Size S00 1) 2)
3RT201. A600/Q600 12E right or left — 2 3RH2911-1DA02 3RH2911-2DA02
Ident. No. 10E A600/Q600 21E right or left 1 1 3RH2911-1DA11 3RH2911-2DA11
Size S0 to S2
3RT2.2. 3) A600/Q600 13E right or left — 2 3RH2921-1DA02 3RH2921-2DA02
Ident.No. 11E A600/Q600 22E right or left 1 1 3RH2921-1DA11 3RH2921-2DA11
3RT2.3. A600/Q600 31E right or left 2 — 3RH2921-1DA20 3RH2921-2DA20
First laterally mountable auxiliary switch block, 2-pole

Sizes S3 to S12
3RT1. 3 to 3RT1. 7 A600/Q600 right or left 1 1 3RH1921-1DA11 3RH1921-2DA11
Second laterally mountable auxiliary switch block, 2-pole
Sizes S3 to S12
3RT1. 4 to 3RT1. 7 A300/Q300 right or left 1 1 3RH1921-1JA11 3RH1921-2JA11
Laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50005
Sizes S00 1) 2)
3RT2.1. A600/Q600 02 right or left — 2 3RH2911-1DA02 3RH2911-2DA02
Ident.No. 10E A600/Q600 11 right or left 1 1 3RH2911-1DA11 3RH2911-2DA11
A600/Q600 20 right or left 2 — 3RH2911-1DA20 3RH2911-2DA20
Sizes S0 to S2
3RT2.2., A600/Q600 02 right or left — 2 3RH2921-1DA02 3RH2921-2DA02
3RT2.3.3) A600/Q600 11 right or left 1 1 3RH2921-1DA11 3RH2921-2DA11
A600/Q600 20 right or left 2 — 3RH2921-1DA20 3RH2921-2DA20
Sizes S3 to S12
3RT1. 4 to A300/Q300 right or left — 2 3RH1921-1EA02 3RH1921-2EA02
3RT1. 7 A300/Q300 right or left 1 1 3RH1921-1EA11 —
A300/Q300 right or left 2 — 3RH1921-1EA20 3RH1921-2EA20
Sizes S3 to S12
3RT1. 4 to A300/Q300 right or left — 2 3RH1921-1KA02 3RH1921-2KA02
3RT1. 7 A300/Q300 right or left 1 1 3RH1921-1KA11 —
A300/Q300 right or left 2 — 3RH1921-1KA20 3RH1921-2KA20
EN50005 and EN50012 designate the markings 1) With size S00, mounting according to EN 50012 is per- 3) With 3RT23 2., 3RT25. 2. mountable only on the right.
of the auxiliary terminal numbers. mitted only on basic units which have no NC contact
4) UL ratings: See appendix page 19/7
For position of the terminals see pages 2/202-2/206. integrated.
For int. circuit diagrams see pages 2/190-2/195. 2) Ident. No. 41, 32 and 23 according to EN 50012 is
also possible. Please note the corresponding circuit
diagrams for mounting 3RH29 11-1DA.. on the left.

04/20/15 Solid-state auxiliary switch blocks
n Operation in dusty atmospheres

n Solid-state circuits with rated operational currents Ie/AC-14 and DC-13 from 1 … 300 mA at 3 … 60 V
n Hard gold-plated contacts
n Mirror contacts according to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F, for laterally mountable auxiliary switches
3RH2911-1NF02 3RH2911-2NF02 3RH2911-2DE11 3RH1921-2DE11 3RH29 21-2DE11
For contactors/ Contactor Mountable Auxiliary contacts Screw Spring

control relays with to contactor/ Terminals1) Terminals1)
Version
HS block contactor
Ident. No. relay side
Order No. Order No.
Type NO NC NO NC
Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the

front according to EN 50005 1)
Sizes S00 to S2
3RT2. 1., 02 — — — 2 3RH2911-1NF02 3RH2911-2NF02
3RT2.2., 3RT2.3. 11 1 — — 1 3RH2911-1NF11 3RH2911-2NF11
3RH21 .., 20 2 — — — 3RH2911-1NF20 3RH2911-2NF20
3RH24 ..
Sizes S3 to S12
3RT1. 4 to — 1 1 1 1 3RH1921-1FE22 3RH19 21-2FE22
3RT1. 7 — — 2 2 — 3RH1921-2FJ22
Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks, laterally mountable,

Size S00 2)
3RT2. 1., 21E right 1 — — 1 — 3RH2911-2DE11
Ident. No. 10E
Size S0 to S2
3RT2. 2, 3RT2. 3 22E right 1 — — 1 — 3RH2921-2DE11
Ident. No. 10E
Sizes S3 to S12
3RT1. 4 to right or left 1 — — 1 — 3RH1921-2DE11
3RT1 . 7
Sizes S3 to S12
3RT1. 4 to right or left 1 — — 1 — 3RH1921-2JE11
3RT1. 7
Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks, laterally mountable,
Size S00
3RT2. 1., 11 right or left 1 — — 1 — 3RH2911-2DE11
Ident. No. 10E
Size S0 to S2
3RT2. 2., 11 right or left 1 — — 1 —
3RH2921-2DE11
3RT2. 3
EN50005 and EN50012 designate the markings 1) The 3RH29 11-.NF.. auxiliary switches are also 2) Size S00 can be mounted according to EN 50012
of the auxiliary terminal numbers. available with ring lug terminal connection. The 8th only on basic units which have no integrated NC
digit of the order number must be replaced with “4”, contact.
For position of the terminals see pages 2/202 -2/206.
e. g.: 3RH2911-1NF11 -> 3RH2911-4NF11
For int. circuit diagrams see pages 2/190-2/195.

Auxiliary switch blocks, delayed 04/20/15
For Rated control Time setting Output / auxiliary Screw Spring

contactors supply voltage Us 1) range t contacts Terminals Terminals
Type V Sec Order No. Order No.
Time-delay, solid-state auxiliary switch blocks for snapping

onto the front according to DIN 46199-5
The electrical connection between the solid-state time-delay
auxiliary switch and the contactor underneath is established
automatically when it is snapped on and locked into place.
Sizes S00 to S2
3RA2813-1AW10 ON-delay (varistor integrated)
3RT2., 24 … 240 AC/DC 0.05 … 100 1 CO 3RA2813-1AW10 3RA2813-2AW10
3RH21 2) (1, 10, 100, 1 NO + 1 NC 3RA2813-1FW10 3RA2813-2FW10
3RH24 selectable)
OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage (varistor integrated)
24 … 240 AC/DC 0.05 … 100 1 CO 3RA28 14-1AW10 3RA28 14-2AW10
(1, 10, 100, 1 NO + 1 NC 3RA28 14-1FW10 3RA28 14-2FW10
selectable)
OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage3) (varistor integrated)
24 … 240 AC/DC 0.05 … 100 1 CO 3RA2815-1AW10 3RA2815-2AW10
(1, 10, 100, 1 NO + 1 NC 3RA2815-1FW10 3RA2815-2FW10
selectable)
Sizes S3 to S12
3RT1926-2FJ11 ON-delay (varistor integrated)
3RT10, 24 AC/DC 4) 0.05 … 1 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2EJ11 —
3RT13, 0.5 … 10 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2EJ21 —
3RT14, 5 … 100 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2EJ31 —
3RT15 100 … 127 AC 4) 0.05 … 1 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2EC11 —
0.5 … 10 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2EC21 —
5 … 100 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2EC31 —
4)
200 … 240 AC 0.05 … 1 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2ED11 —
0.5 … 10 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2ED21 —
5 … 100 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2ED31 —
OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage 5)
24 AC/DC 4) 0.05 … 100 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2FJ11 —
(1, 10, 100, 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2FJ21 —
selectable) 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2FJ31 —
100 … 127 AC 4) 0.05 … 100 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2FK11 —
(1, 10, 100, 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2FK21 —
selectable) 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2FK31 —
200 … 240 AC 4) 0.05 … 100 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2FL11 —
(1, 10, 100, 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2FL21 —
selectable) 1 NO + 1 NC 3RT19 26-2FL31 —
WYE-delta function
24 AC/DC 4) 1.5 … 30 each have: 3RT19 26-2GJ51 —
100 … 127 AC 4) 1.5 … 30 1 NO delayed 3RT19 26-2GC51 —
200 … 240 AC 4)
1.5 … 30 1 NO instant 3RT19 26-2GD51 —
interval 50ms
For technical data, see pages 2/182-2/183. 1) AC voltage values apply for 50 Hz and 60 Hz. 4) Terminals A1 and A2 for the rated control supply
For int. circuit diagrams, see page 2/198. voltage of the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch
2) Cannot be fitted onto coupling relays.
must be connected to the associated contactor by
For position of terminals, see page 2/206. 3) Setting of output contacts in as-supplied state not means of connecting leads.
defined (bistable relay). Application of the control
When the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches are 5) Position of the output contacts not defined in the
supply voltage once results in contact change-over
used, no other auxiliary switches are allowed to be as-delivered state (bistable relay). Applying the con-
to the correct setting.
trol voltage once results in the contacts switching to
mounted on the basic units.
the correct position.

SIRIUS
Power Contactors for Switching
• Revised • MotorsAccessories for 3RT contactors / 3RH control relays
Accessories for 3RT2 Contactors
04/20/15 Function modules, delay blocks
Delay and latching blocks

3
3RA2812-1DW10 3RA2811-2CW10
For contactors Rated control supply voltage Us1) Time setting range t Screw terminals Spring-type Weight
terminals
Order No. Order No.
Type V AC/D C s kg
Timing relays for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
Sizes S00 to S2
The electrical connection between the timing relay and the
contactor underneath is established automatically when it is
snapped on and locked.
ON-delay
Two-wire design, varistor integrated
3RT20.., 24 ... 240 0.05 ...100 3RA2811-1CW10 3RA2811-2CW10
3RT23.., (1, 10, 100; selectable)
3RT25..,
3RH212),
3RH24
3RT203 . 24 ... 90 0.05 ...100 3RA2831-1DG10 3RA2831-2DG10
90 ... 240 (1, 10, 100; selectable) 3RA2831-1DH10 3RA2831-2DH10
OFF-delay with control signal
Varistor integrated
3RT20.., 24 ... 240 0.05 ...100 3RA2812-1DW10 3RA2812-2DW10
3RT23.., (1, 10, 100; selectable)
3RT25..,
3RH212),
3RH24
3RT203 . 24 ... 90 0.05 ...100 3RA2832-1DG10 3RA2832-2DG10
90 ... 240 (1, 10, 100; selectable) 3RA2832-1DH10 3RA2832-2DH10
1)
AC voltage values apply for 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
2)
Cannot be fitted onto coupling relays.
For contactors Rated control supply Time setting range t Screw terminals Weight
voltage Us
Order No.
Type V s kg
OFF-delay devices
Sizes S00 to S2
For contactors with DC operation
Non-adjustable delay time
3RT201. -1BF4., 110 AC/DC S00: > 0,1 3RT2916-2BK01
3RT202. -1BF4., S0: > 0,08
3RT203. -1NF3., 110 DC S2: > 0,25
3RH2. . . -1BF40
3RT201. -1BM4./1BP4. , 220/230 AC/DC S00: > 0,5 3RT2916-2BL01
3RT202. -1BM4./1BP4. , S0: > 0,3
3RT203. -1NP3., 220/230 DC S2: > 0,8
3RH2. . . -1BM40/1BP40
3RT201.-1BB4., 24 DC S00: > 0,2 3RT2916-2BE01
3RT2916-2B.01 3RT202.-1BB4., S0: > 0,1
3RT203.-1NB3., S2: > 0,1
3RH2.. .-1BB40
Mechanical latching blocks
Size S0
For snapping onto the front of contactors
The contactor remains in the energized state
after a voltage failure
3RT202 . 24 AC/DC -- 3RT2926-3AB31
110 AC/DC -- 3RT2926-3AF31
For description, see page 2/119. 1) AC voltage ratings apply for 50 and 60 Hz.
230 AC/DC -- 3RT2926-3AP31
For technical data, see page 2/182. 2) The 3RA28 time-delay blocks are available
For circuit diagrams, see page 2/198. with spring-type terminals. Replace the 8th
digit of the order number with a “2”.
3RT2926-3A.31
3) Cannot be fitted onto coupling relays
For technical specifications, see page 3/54.

Function modules, delay blocks,
and mechanical latching blocks 04/20/15
For Rated control Time setting Screw Weight

contactors supply voltage Us 1) range t Terminals 2) approx.
Type V sec Order No. kg
Solid-state time-delay blocks with semiconductor output
3RT1926-2CG11 Size S3 For mounting on the terminals on top of the contactors
ON-delay (varistor integrated)
3RT104, 3RT13 5), 24 … 66 AC/DC 0.05 … 1 3RT1926-2CG11 0.035
3RT15 0.5 … 10 3RT1926-2CG21 0.035
5 … 100 3RT1926-2CG31 0.035
90 … 240 AC/DC 0.05 … 1 3RT1926-2CH11 0.035
0.5 … 10 3RT1926-2CH21 0.035
5 … 100 3RT1926-2CH31 0.035
Off-delay with auxiliary voltage (varistor integrated)
3RT104, 3RT13 5), 24 … 66 AC/DC 0.05 … 1 3RT1926-2DG11 0.037
3RT15 0.5 … 10 3RT1926-2DG21 0.037
5 … 100 3RT1926-2DG31 0.037
90 … 240 AC/DC 0.05 … 1 3RT1926-2DH11 0.037
0.5 … 10 3RT1926-2DH21 0.037
5 … 100 3RT1926-2DH31 0.037
Off-delay device
3RT2916-2B.01 Sizes S00 to S2
For contactors with DC operation. Non-adjustable delay time
3RT2., 110 AC/DC S00: > 0.1 3RT2916-2BK01 0.150
3RH2. . .-1BF40 S0: > 0.08; S2: > 0.25
3RT2., 220 ... 230 AC/DC S00: > 0.5 3RT2916-2BL01 0.150
3RH2. . .-1BM40 S0: > 0.3; S2: > 0.8
3RT2., 24 DC S00: > 0.2 3RT2916-2BE01 0.150
3RT1916-2BE01 3RH2. . .-1BB40 S0: > 0.1; S2: > 0.1
Sizes S3
3RT1. 4 24 DC S3: 70 fixed 3RT1916-2BE01 0.093
Pneumatic delay blocks, terminal designation according to EN 50005 4)

3RT2926-2PA01 Size S0
For snapping onto the front of contactors 5) Auxiliary contacts 1 NO and 1 NC
With ON-delay — 0.1 ... 30 3RT2926-2PA01 0.080
3RT2. 2 1 ... 60 3RT2926-2PA11 0.080
With OFF-delay — 0.1 ... 30 3RT2926-2PR01 0.080
3RT2. 2 1 ... 60 3RT2926-2PR11 0.080
Mechanical latching blocks

For mounting onto the front of contactors
3RT2926-3AB31 The contactor remains in the energized state even after voltage failure
Size S0
24 AC/DC — 3RT2926-3AB31 0.100
3RT2. 2 110 AC/DC — 3RT2926-3AF31 0.100
230 AC/DC — 3RT2926-3AP31 0.100
For description, see page 2/119. 1) AC voltage ratings apply for 50 and 60 Hz. 4) Versions according to DIN VDE 0116
For technical data, see page 2/182. on request.
2) The 3RA28 time-delay blocks are available
For circuit diagrams, see page 2/198. with spring-type terminals. Replace the 8th 5) In addition to these, no other auxiliary
digit of the order number with a “2”. contacts are permitted.
3) Cannot be fitted onto coupling relays

SIRIUS • Revised • Accessories forPower
3RT contactors
Contactors /for
3RH controlMotors
Switching relays
04/20/15 Surge suppressors
Surge suppressors

For Version Rated control supply voltage Us1) Order No. Weight
contactors
AC operation DC operation
Type V AC V DC kg
Surge suppressors without LED (also for spring-type terminals)
Size S00
3
For plugging onto the front side of the contactors
(with and without auxiliary switch block)
3RT2.1, Varistors 24 ... 48 24 ... 70 3RT2916-1BB00
3RH2. 48 ... 127 70 ... 150 3RT2916-1BC00
127 ... 240 150 ... 250 3RT2916-1BD00
240 ... 400 -- 3RT2916-1BE00
400 ... 600 -- 3RT2916-1BF00
3RT2.1, RC elements 24 ... 48 24 ... 70 3RT2916-1CB00
3RH2. 48 ... 127 70 ... 150 3RT2916-1CC00
3RT2916-1B.00 127 ... 240 150 ... 250 3RT2916-1CD00
240 ... 400 -- 3RT2916-1CE00
400 ... 600 -- 3RT2916-1CF00
3RT2.1, Noise suppression diodes -- 12 ... 250 3RT2916-1DG00
3RH2.
3RT2.1, Diode assemblies -- 12 ... 250 3RT2916-1EH00
3RH2. (diode and Zener diode) for
DC operation
Size S0
(prior to mounting of the auxiliary switch block)
3RT2.2 Varistors 24 ... 48 24 ... 70 3RT2926-1BB00
48 ... 127 70 ... 150 3RT2926-1BC00
127 ... 240 150 ... 250 3RT2926-1BD00
240 ... 400 -- 3RT2926-1BE00
400 ... 600 -- 3RT2926-1BF00
3RT2.2 RC elements 24 ... 48 24 ... 70 3RT2926-1CB00
48 ... 127 70 ... 150 3RT2926-1CC00
3RT2926-1E.00 127 ... 240 150 ... 250 3RT2926-1CD00
240 ... 400 -- 3RT2926-1CE00
400 ... 600 -- 3RT2926-1CF00
3RT2.2 Diode assembly -- 24 3RT2926-1ER00
for DC operation -- 30 ... 250 3RT2926-1ES00
Size S2
3RT2.3. Varistors 24 ... 48 24 ... 70 3RT2936-1BB00
48 ... 127 70 ... 150 3RT2936-1BC00
127 ... 240 150 ... 250 3RT2936-1BD00
240 ... 400 -- 3RT2936-1BE00
400 ... 600 -- 3RT2936-1BF00
3RT2.3. RC elements 24 ... 48 24 ... 70 3RT2936-1CB00
48 ... 127 70 ... 150 3RT2936-1CC00
3RT2936-1B.00 127 ... 240 150 ... 250 3RT2936-1CD00
240 ... 400 -- 3RT2936-1CE00
400 ... 600 -- 3RT2936-1CF00
3RT2.3. Diode assembly -- 24 3RT2936-1ER00
for DC operation -- 30 ... 250 3RT2936-1ES00
3RT2936-1E.00
1)
Can be used for AC operation for 50/60 Hz.
Please inquire about further voltages.

Surge suppressors 04/20/15
Rated control supply

For voltage Us 1) Weight
contactors Version AC operation DC operation Order No. approx.
Type V AC V DC mW kg
Surge suppressors without LED (also for spring-type terminals)
3RT1926-1B. 00 Sizes S3 For plugging onto coil terminals on the top or bottom
3RT1. 4 Varistor 24 … 48 24 … 70 3RT1926-1BB00 0.01
48 …127 70 … 150 3RT1926-1BC00 0.01
127 … 240 150 … 250 3RT1926-1BD00 0.01
240 … 400 — 3RT1926-1BE00 0.01
400 … 600 — 3RT1926-1BF00 0.01
3RT1. 4 RC element 24 … 48 24 … 70 3RT1936-1CB00 0.01
48 …127 70 … 150 3RT1936-1CC00 0.01
127 … 240 150 … 250 3RT1936-1CD00 0.01
240 … 400 — 3RT1936-1CE00 0.01
400 … 600 — 3RT1936-1CF00 0.01
3RT1. 4 Diode assembly —
for DC operation —
• For plugging onto top (e. g. for 24 3RT1936-1ER00 0.01
contactors with overload relay) 30 … 250 3RT1936-1ES00 0.01
• For plugging onto bottom 24 3RT1936-1TR00 0.01
(e. g. for fuseless motor starters) 30 … 250 3RT1936-1TS00 0.01
3RT1936-1C. 00 Sizes S6,
S10, S12 For plugging onto the conventional or solid-state coil
3RT1. 5, RC element 24 … 48 24 … 70 3RT1956-1CB00 0.03
3RT1. 6 48 …127 70 … 150 3RT1956-1CC00 0.03
3RT1. 7 127 … 240 150 … 250 3RT1956-1CD00 0.03
240 … 400 — 3RT1956-1CE00 0.03
400 … 600 — 3RT1956-1CF00 0.03
Surge suppressors with LED (also for spring-type terminals)

3RT2916-1J.00 Size S00 For plugging onto the front side of the contactors
(with and without auxiliary switch block)
3RT2.1, Varistor 24 … 48 12 … 24 10 … 120 3RT2916-1JJ00 0.010
3RH2. 48 …127 24 … 70 20 … 470 3RT2916-1JK00 0.010
127 … 240 70 … 150 50 … 700 3RT2916-1JL00 0.010
— 150 ... 250 160 … 950 3RT2916-1JP00 0.010
3RT2.1, Noise — 24 … 70 20 … 470 3RT2916-1LM00 0.010

3RH2. suppression — 50 … 150 50 … 700 3RT2916-1LN00 0.010
diode — 150 … 250 160 … 950 3RT2916-1LP00 0.010
3RT2926-1MR00 Size S0 For plugging onto the front side of the contactors
3RT2. 2 Varistor 24 … 48 12 … 24 10 … 120 3RT2926-1JJ00 0.010
48 …127 24 … 70 20 … 470 3RT2926-1JK00 0.010
127 … 240 70 … 150 50 … 700 3RT2926-1JL00 0.010
3RT2. 2 Diode — 24 20 … 470 3RT2926-1MR00 0.010
assembly
3RT2936-1J.00 Size S2 For plugging onto the front side of the contactors
3RT2.3. Varistor 24 … 48 12 … 24 10 … 120 3RT2936-1JJ00 0.010
48 …127 24 … 70 20 … 470 3RT2936-1JK00 0.010
127 … 240 70 … 150 50 … 700 3RT2936-1JL00 0.010
1) Can be used for AC operation for 50/60 Hz.


04/20/15 Surge suppressors, terminals, labels
For Weight
contactors Version Order No. approx.
Units kg
Main conducting path surge suppression module for 3RT12 vacuum contactors
Sizes S10 For damping overvoltages and protecting the motor windings against
and S12 multiple reignition when switching off three-phase motors.
3RT12 For connection on the contactor feeder side (2-T1/4-T2/6-T3).
For separate installation.
Rated operational voltage Ue ≥ 500 V AC ... ≤ 690 V AC 3RT1966-1PV3 0.18
Rated operational voltage Ue ≤ 1000 V AC 3RT1966-1PV4 0.36
Auxiliary conductor terminal, 3-pole

3RT1946-4F
Size S3
3RT104. For connecting auxiliary and control leads to the main 3RT1946-4F
conductor terminals (for one side).
Blank Labels
3RT19 00- 1SB20
Unit labeling plates
20 mm x 7 mm, pastel 340 units 3RT19 00- 1SB20 0.200
PC labeling system for individual inscription
of unitlabeling plates available from:
murrplastik Systems, Inc.
NSB0_01429b
10 mm x 7 mm 816 units 3RT1900-1SB10 0.294
Links for paralleling
3RT1916-4BB31 3RT1916-4BB41 3RT1936-4BB31 3RT1956-4BA31
Standard
For Maximum resistive current Ie/AC-1 Max. conductor Screw package Weight
Size contactors (at 60 °C) of contactors cross sections Terminals quantity approx.
Type A kg
Order No.
S00 3RT201. 3-pole, with terminal 1), 2) 4 AWG, stranded 3RT1916-4BB31 0.015
S0 3RT202. 0 AWG, stranded 3RT2926-4BB31 0.042
S2 3RT203. 95 mm2 3RT1936-4BB31 0.139
S3 3RT104. 3-pole, with through hole 185 mm2 3RT1946-4BB31 0.205

S6 3RT1. 5 (WYE jumpers) 1), 2) — 3RT1956-4BA31 0.159
S10/S12 3RT1. 6 — 3RT1966-4BA31 0.541
3RT1. 7
S00 3RT231. 4-pole, with terminal 1), 2) 4 AWG, stranded 3RT1916-4BB41 0.016
3RT251.
1) Can be used for AC operation for 50/60 Hz.


Accessories for 3RT contactors / 3RH control relaysPower Contactors
Other function blocks, PLC control, Accessories for 3RT2 Contactors
load modules, control kit 04/20/15
Other function blocks

For contactors Version Order No. Weight
Type
EMC suppression modules; 3-phase, up to 10 HP
Size S00 (for contactors with AC or DC operation)
Screw terminals
3RT201 RC elements (3 x 220 Ω /0.22 µF)
3
Up to 400 V 3RT2916-1PA1
Up to 575 V 3RT2916-1PA2
Up to 690 V 3RT2916-1PA3
3RT201 Varistors
Up to 400 V 3RT2916-1PB1
Up to 575 V 3RT2916-1PB2
3RT2916-1PA. Up to 690 V 3RT2916-1PB3
Coupling links for control by PLC
Size S0
3RT2. 2 For mounting onto the coil terminals of the contactors 3RH2924-1GP11
(only for contactors with screw terminals)
With LED for indicating switching state.
With integrated varistor for damping opening surges.
24 V DC control,
17 ... 30 V DC operating range
3RH2924-1GP11
Sizes S00 to S2
3RT2.1, For mounting on the front side of contactors
3RT2.2, with AC, DC or AC/DC operation
3RT2.3 24 V DC control, 3RH2914-1GP11
17 ... 30 V DC operating range
24 V DC control, 3RH2914-2GP11
3RH2914-1GP11 17 ... 30 V DC operating range
Additional load modules
Size S00
3RT2.1, For plugging onto the front side of the contactors with or 3RT2916-1GA00
3RH2. without auxiliary switch blocks
For increasing the permissible residual current and for limiting
the residual voltage. It ensures the safe opening of contactors
with direct control via 230 V AC semiconductor outputs of
SIMATIC controllers. It acts simultaneously as a surge
suppressor.
Rated voltage:
50/60 Hz, 180 to 255 V AC
3RT2916-1GA00
LED module for indicating contactor operation
Sizes S00 to S2
3RT2.. For snapping into the location hole of an inscription label 3RT2926-1QT00
on the front of a contactor
either directly on the contactor or on the front auxiliary switch.
The LED module is connected to coil terminals A1 and A2 of
the contactor and indicates its energized state.
Yellow LED.
Rated voltage:
24 ... 240 V AC/DC, with reverse polarity protection.
3RT2926-1QT00
Control kit
Sizes S00 to S2
For manual operation of the contactor contacts
for start-up and service
3RT2.1, 3RT2916-4MC00
3RH2.
3RT2.2 3RT2926-4MC00
3RT2916-4MC00 3RT2. 3 3RT2936-4MC00

SIRIUS
• Revised • MotorsAccessories for 3RT contactors / 3RH control relays
04/20/15 Terminals, covers, adapters, connectors
Terminals, covers, adapters, connectors

Type
Sealable covers
Sizes S00 to S2
3RT2.1, Sealable covers 3RT2916-4MA10
3RT2.2, for preventing manual operation
3RT2.3,
3
(Not suitable for coupling relays)

3RH2.1)
3RT2916-4MA10
Connection modules for contactors with screw terminals
Sizes S00 and S0
Adapters for contactors Screw terminals
Ambient temperature Tu max = 60 °C
3RT2 .1, Size S00, 3RT1916-4RD01
3RH2. rated operational current Ie at
AC-3/400 V: 20 A
3RT2. 2 Size S0, 3RT1926-4RD01
3RT1926-4RD01
rated operational current Ie at
AC-3/400 V: 25 A
3RT2 .1, Plugs for contactors 3RT1900-4RE01
3RT2.2, Size S00, S0
3RH2.
3RT1900-4RE01
Terminal covers for contactors with box terminals
Size S2
Covers for box terminals
3RT203 For 3-pole contactors 3RT2936-4EA2
3RT233, For 4-pole contactors (see Chapter 4) 3RT2936-4EA4
3RT253
3RT2936-4EA2
Coil connection modules
Sizes S0 and S2
3RT2.2, Connection from top 3RT2926-4RA11
3RT2.3 Connection from below 3RT2926-4RB11
Connection diagonally 3RT2926-4RC11
3RT2926-4RA11
3RT2.2 Connection from top 3RT2926-4RA12

Connection from below 3RT2926-4RB12
3RT2926-4RA12
Covers for contactors with ring cable lug connections
Size S00
Ring terminal lug connec-
tions
3RT2.1, Covers for ring terminal lug connections 3RT2916-4EA13
3RH2 Single covers
3RT2916-4EA13
Size S0
3RT2. 2 Covers for ring terminal lug connections 3RT2926-4EB13
Set for one device,
comprising 4 single covers:
- 2 x 3RT2926-4EB13
3RT2926-4EB13 - 2 x 3RV2928-4AA00
Technical specifications for connection modules, see page 3/56.

1)
Exception:
1) Exception: contactors
contactors and contactor
and contactor relays
relays with with
auxiliary auxiliary
switch block switch block
mounted
mounted ontoonto the front.
the front.

Accessories for 3RT contactors / 3RH control relaysPower Contactors
Terminals, covers, adapters, connectors 04/20/15
Terminals, covers, adapters, connectors

Type
Screw adapters for fixing the contactors
Sizes S0 and S2
3RT2.2, Screw adapters for easier screw fixing 3RT1926-4P
3RT2.3 2 units required per contactor
(1 pack contains 10 sets for 10 contactors)
NSB0_01470
3RT1926-4P
3
Solder pin adapters for contactors up to 7.5 HP / 12 A
Size S00, up to 7.5 HP
Screw terminals
3RT2.1, Assembly kit for soldering contactors onto a printed cir- 3RT1916-4KA1
3RH21 cuit board.
For 1 contactor, 1 set is required.
3RT1916-4KA1
Solder pin adapters for contactors up to 7.5 HP / 12 A
with mounted 4-pole auxiliary switch block
Size S00, up to 7.5 HP
3RT2.1, Assembly kit for soldering contactors with an auxiliary 3RT1916-4KA2
3RH21 switch block onto a printed circuit board.
For 1 contactor, 1 set is required.
3RT1916-4KA2
Safety main current connectors for 2 contactors
Sizes S00 to S2
For series connection of 2 contactors
3RT2 .1 3RA2916-1A
3RT2. 2 3RA2926-1A
3RT2.3 3RA2936-1A
3RA2926-1A
1) Exception: contactors and contactor relays with auxiliary switch block

mounted onto the front.

04/20/15 Terminals, covers, accessories
For Design Order No. Weight

contactors approx.
Size Type kg.
Box terminal block for contactors with screw connections
3RT19 5. -4G For circular conductors and ribbon cables For connect-
able cross-sections, see technical data of contactors,
page 2/99
S3 3RT1. 4 16 mm2 / 10 AWG (solid), 70 mm2 / 0 AWG (stranded) 3RT19 46-4G
S6 3RT1. 5 up to 70 mm2 / 2/0 AWG 3RT19 55-4G 0.23
(3RB205) up to 120 mm2 / 4/0 AWG 3RT19 56-4G 0.26
S10, 3RT1. 6, 240 mm2 - 500 mm2 / 500 MCM - 750 MCM 3RT19 66-4G 0.64
S12 3RT1. 7 with auxiliary conductor connection
(3RB206)
Covers for contactors with screw connections

3RT29 36-4EA2 Terminal cover for box terminals
S2 3RT20 3 Additional shock-hazard protection for mounting on the 3RT29 36-4EA2 0.012
box terminals
(2 units required per contactor)
S3 3RT10 4, 3RT19 46-4EA2
3RT14 4
S6 3RT1 . 5 Length: 25 mm 3RT19 56-4EA2 0.016
S10, 3RT1 . 6, Length: 30 mm 3RT19 66-4EA2
S12 3RT1 . 7
Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection
3RT19 46-4EA1 S3 3RT10 4, For complying with the phase clearances and as 3RT19 46-4EA1 0.028
3RT14 4 shock-hazard protection in the case of a distant box
terminal 1)
S12 3RT1 . 7
For covering bars between the contactor and
3RB20 overload relay
or wiring connector for contactor assemblies
S12 3RT1 . 7
Weight
Design Order No. Package approx.
quantity kg
Insulation stop for securely holding back the conductor insulation
on conductors up to 1 mm2 (17 AWG)
3RT1916-4JA02
Insulation stop strips can be inserted in cable entry of the spring terminal
(2 strips per contactor required)
• For basic devices S00 (3RT201. or 3RH2. ), removable individually 3RT2916-4JA02 20 strips 0.005
• For auxiliary and control circuit on basic devices size S0 and S2 (3RT2.2., 3RT1916-4JA02 20 strips 0.010
3RT2.3.) and for mountable 3RH29 auxiliary switches, removable in pairs
Tool for opening spring-type terminals

3RA2908-1A Screwdriver
for all SIRIUS devices with spring-type terminals 3RA2908-1A 1 unit 0.045
Length: approx. 200 mm,
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
titanium gray//black, partially insulated
1) Refer to the note on page 2/142, conductor cross-sections.

3RA13, 3RA23 reversing
Accessories
For Size Design Order No. Weight

contactors approx.
Type kg
Mechanical interlocks
3RA19 24-2B 3RT2.3 S2 laterally mountable for 3RT2 S2 contactors only. 3RA2934-2B 0.04
There are no NC auxiliary contacts. Use the integrated NC
auxiliary on the contactor.
3RT104, S3 1) laterally mountable each with one auxiliary contact 3RA19 24-2B 0.05
3RT134, (1 NC) per contactor (can only couple contactors of max.
3RT144 1 level different size. The mounting depth of the smaller
contactor has to be adapted.)
Interlock width: 10 mm
3RT10 4; S3; front mountable on S3 contactors 3RA19 24-1A 0.04

(for contactors of the same size respectively)
Note
:
Size S3: Use 3RA19 32-2C mechanical connectors.
3RA19 54-2C
3RT104 S3 adapter to mechanically interlock a 3RT104 with a 3RT105 3RA19 54-2C
to to
3RT105 S6 includes the adapter and QTY 2 - 3RA1942-2G mechanical
connectors
requires the 3RA1954 - 2A to be ordered separately
Note:
Fits 3RT104 AC coil versions only.
Does not fit 3RT104 DC coil versions.
3RA19 54-2A
3RT1. 5 S6, laterally mountable without auxiliary contacts; 3RA19 54-2A 0.02
to S10, size S6, S10 and S12 contactors
3RT1. 7 S12 can be interlocked with each other as required;
no adaptation of mounting depth is necessary.
Contactor clearance 10 mm.
Repeat coil terminal 1 set

3RA19 23-3B 3RT10 4 S3 for coil terminals A1 and A2 for reversing 3RA19 23-3B 0.02
starters of size S3 contactors.
2 x A1 and 1 x A2 are required per assembly.
(1 set contains 2 x A1 and 1 x A2)
Baseplates 1 unit
3RA1972-2A 3RT10 5 S6 for customer mounting of contactor assemblies 3RA19 52-2A 1.3
for reversing
3RT1. 6 S10 3RA19 62-2A 2.4
3RT1. 7 S12 3RA19 72-2A 2.6
1) Can also be used for size S3 4-pole contactors.

Accessories
For Screw Spring Pkg.

contactors Size Details Terminals Terminals qty.
Type Order No. Order No.
Assembly kits for making 3-pole contactor assemblies

3RA2913-2AA1 3RT201 S00 The assembly kit contains:
Wiring modules on the top and
bottom
• For main, auxiliary and control 3RA2913-2AA1 3RA2913-2AA2 1 kit
circuits
3RA2923-2AA2 3RT202 S0 The assembly kit contains:

bottom
• For main, auxiliary and control 3RA2923-2AA1 — 1 kit
circuits 1)
• Only for main circuit 2) — 3RA2923-2AA2 1 kit
3RA2933-2AA1 3RT203 S2 The installation kit contains:

bottom 3RA2933-2AA1 — 1 kit
• Only for main circuit 3) — 3RA2933-2AA2 1 kit
3RA1943-2A 3RT104 S3 The installation kit contains:

bottom and the mechanical interlock 3RA1943-2A —
3RA19 53-2A 3RT105 S6 The installation kit contains:

Wiring modules on the top and bottom
(for connection with box terminal)
3RA19 53-2A — 1 kit
3RT105 S6 The installation kit contains: 3RA1953-2M 1 kit

3RT1. 6 S10 Wiring modules on the top and bottom 3RA1963-2A
3RT1. 7 S12 (for connection without box terminals) 3RA1973-2A
1) Use of the 3RA2923-2AA1 assembly kit in conjunction with the 2) Version in size S0 with spring-type terminals: Only the 3) Version in size S2 with spring-type terminals in the
3RT202.-.....-3MA0 contactors is limited because the auxiliary wiring modules for the main circuit are included. No con- auxiliary and control circuits: Only the wiring mod-
switches in the basic unit are not allowed to be used on account nectors are included for the auxiliary and control circuit. ules for the main circuit are included. A cable set is
of the permanently mounted auxiliary switch block. included for the auxiliary circuit.

Accessories
Contactor
For gap for Screw Spring Pkg.
contactors Size interlock Version Terminals Terminals qty.
Type Order No. Order No.
Wiring modules
3RA2913-3DA1 3RT201 S00- 0 mm Top (in-phase) 3RA2913-3DA1 3RA2913-3DA2 1
S00 Bottom (phase reversal) 3RA2913-3EA1 3RA2913-3EA2 1
3RT202 S0- 0 mm Top (in-phase) 3RA2923-3DA1 3RA2923-3DA2 1

S0 Bottom (phase reversal) 3RA2923-3EA1 3RA2923-3EA2 1
3RA2913-3EA1 3RT203 S2- 10 mm Top (in-phase) 3RA1933-3D 3RA1933-3D 1

S2 Bottom (phase reversal) 3RA1933-3E 3RA1933-3E 1
3RT104 S3- 10 mm Top (in-phase) 3RA1943-3D — 1

S3 Bottom (phase reversal) 3RA1943-3E — 1
3RA1953-3D 3RT105 S6- 10 mm Top (in-phase, for connection 3RA1953-3D — 1
S6 with box terminal)
3RA1953-3P Top (with phase reversal, 3RA1953-3P — 1

for connection without box
terminal)
Contactor
For gap for Pkg.
contactors Size interlock Interlock Type Version Order No. qty.
Type
Mechanical connectors1)
3RA29. 2-2H 3RT201 S00- 0 mm Laterally For 3-pole contactors and 3RA2912-2H 1 set
S00 mountable 4-pole contactors
3RT202 S0- 0 mm Laterally For 3-pole contactors and 3RA2922-2H 1 set

S0 mountable 4-pole contactors
3RA2932-2C 3RT203 S2- 0 mm Laterally For 3-pole contactors 3RA2932-2C 5 sets

S2 mountable
10 mm Laterally For 3-pole contactors 3RA2932-2D 5 sets
mountable
3RA2932-2D 3RT233 Laterally For 4-pole contactors 3RA2932-2G 5 sets
mountable
3RT1. 4 S3- 0 mm Mountable For 3-pole contactors 3RA1932-2C 10 sets
S3 on front
3RA2932-2G 10 mm Laterally For 3-pole contactors 3RA1932-2D 10 sets

mountable
For 4-pole contactors 3RA1942-2G 10 sets
3RA1942-2G 3RT1. 5 S6- 10 mm Laterally Top (with phase reversal, 3RA1932-2D 10 sets
S6 mountable for connection without box
terminal)
Note: Standard package quantities may change. 1) 1 set for 1 contactor. Size S00 & S0: 1 set includes 2 connectors
Check Industry Mall for current package quantities. and 1 interlock. Size S2: The mechanical interlock must be
ordered separately. S3-S6: 1 set includes 2 connectors; one
connector for top and one connector for bottom.

04/20/15 WYE-delta accessories
Accessories
Design Sizes Order No. Weight
approx.
kg
Installation kits 1) 2)
The installation kit contains:
Mechanical interlock, 4 connecting clips, S00-S00-S00 3RA29 13-2BB1 1 set 0.05
WYE jumper, Wiring connectors on the top and
bottom,- For main, auxiliary, and control circuits 3)
The installation kit contains:

mechanical interlock, 4 connecting clips, S0-S0-S0 3RA29 23-2BB1 1 set 0.10
WYE jumper, wiring connectors on the top
3RA19 53-2B 1 set
and bottom - For main, auxiliary, and S2-S2-S0 3RA29 33-2C 0.16
control circuits 3) S2-S2-S2 3RA29 33-2BB1 0.16
The installation kit contains: S3-S3-S2 3RA19 43-2C 0.33

WYE jumper on the top
S3-S3-S3 3RA19 43-2B 0.16
Wiring jumper on the bottom
S6-S6-S6 3RA19 53-2B 0.85
(The wiring connector on the top is not
included in the scope of supply. A S6-S6-S6 3RA19 53-2N 0.60
3RA19 53-2N, 3RA19 63- double infeed between the line contactor S10-S10-S10 3RA19 63-2B 1.80
2B, 3RA19 73-2B and the delta contactor is recommended.) S12-S12-S12 3RA19 73-2B 2.20
3-phase feeder terminal
Feeder terminal block for the line contactor for large 1 unit
conductor cross-sections
Conductor cross-section: 6 mm2, 10 AWG S00 3RA29 13-3K 0.02
Conductor cross-section: 16 mm2, 6 AWG S0 3RV29 25-5AB 0.04
Conductor cross-section: 70 mm , 2/0 AWG
2 S2 3RV29 35-5A 0.10
1-phase feeder terminals
Conductor cross-section: 95 mm2 S3 3RA19 43-3L 0.280
3-phase busbar
For in-phase bridging of all input terminals of the 1 unit
line contactor (K1) S0 3RV19 15-1AB 0.03
and the delta contactor (K3) S2 3RV29 35-5E 0.15
Link for paralleling, 3-pole (WYE jumpers)
3RT19 26-4BA31 Without terminal (the links for paralleling can be S001) 3RT19 16-4BA31 1 unit 0.010
reduced by one pole) S01) 3RT19 26-4BA31 0.020
S2 3RT19 36-4BA31 0.02
S3 3RT19 46-4BA31 0.02
S6 4) 3RT19 56-4BA31 0.15
S10, S12 4) 3RT19 66-4BA31
Baseplates
For customer assembly of WYE-delta contactor 1 unit
assemblies with a laterally mounted time-delay
Side-by-side mounting S2 S2 S0 3RA29 32-2F 0.45
10 mm clearance between K3 and K2 S2 S2 S2 3RA29 32-2F 0.48
Side-by-side mounting S3 S3 S2 3RA19 42-2E 0.72
10 mm clearance between K1, K3 and K2 S. S. S. 1 unit

S6 S6 S3 3RA19 52-2E 2.0
S6 S6 S6 3RA19 52-2F 2.1
S10 S10 S6 3RA19 62-2E
S10 S10 S10 3RA19 62-2F
S12 S12 S10 3RA19 72-2E
S12 S12 S12 3RA19 72-2F
1) Size S00, S0 and S2 installation kits for paralleling are available in spring-type terminals. 3) Also requires quantity (1) 3RA2816-0EW20 function module set for all control functions.
Change the last digit of the order number to a “2”. See page 2/45.
2) When using the function modules for wye-delta starting, the wiring modules for the 4) The 3RT19 56-4EA1 (S6) or 3RT19 66-4EA1 (S10, S12) cover can be used for
auxiliary current are not required. See page 2/45 for more information. shock-hazard protection.

Relays
SIRIUS 3RR21, 3RR22 Monitoring Relays for Mounting onto 3RT2 Contactors
Current Monitoring Relays 04/20/15
Current and active current monitoring
Overview Benefits
• Can be mounted directly on 3RT2 contactors and
3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies, in other words,
there is no need for additional wiring in the main circuit
• Optimally coordinated with the technical characteristics of the
3RT2 contactors
• No separate current transformer required
• Versions with wide voltage supply range
• Variably adjustable to overshoot, undershoot or range
monitoring
• Freely configurable delay times and RESET response
• Display of ACTUAL value and status messages
• All versions with removable control current terminals
• All versions with screw terminals or spring-type terminals
• Simple determination of the threshold values through direct
reference to actually measured values for setpoint loading
• Range monitoring and selectable active current measurement
SIRIUS 3RR2242, 3RR2142 and 3RR2243 current monitoring relays mean that only one device for monitoring a motor is required
along the entire torque curve
The SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays are suitable for the • In addition to current monitoring it is also possible to monitor
load monitoring of motors or other loads. In two or three phases for broken cables, phase failure, phase sequence, residual
they monitor the rms value of AC currents for overshooting or current and motor blocking
undershooting of set threshold values.
Whereas apparent current monitoring is used above all in con- Application
nection with the rated torque or in case of overload, the active
current monitoring option can be used to observe and evaluate • Monitoring of current overshoot and undershoot
the load factor over a motor's entire torque range. • Monitoring of broken conductors
The 3RR2 current monitoring relays can be integrated directly in • Monitoring of no-load operation and load shedding, e.g. in the
the feeder by mounting onto the 3RT2 contactor; separate wiring event of a torn V-belt or no-load operation of a pump
of the main circuit is therefore superfluous. No separate trans- • Monitoring of overload, e.g. on conveyor belts or cranes due
formers are required. to an excessive load
For a line-oriented configuration or simultaneous use of an • Monitoring the functionality of electrical loads such as heaters
overload relay, terminal supports for stand-alone installation are • Monitoring of wrong phase sequence on mobile equipment
available for separate standard rail mounting. such as compressors or cranes
Versions • Monitoring of high-impedance faults to ground, e.g. caused
by damaged insulation or moisture
Basic versions
10
The basic versions with two-phase apparent current monitoring,
a CO contact output and analog adjustability provide a high
level of monitoring reliability especially in the rated and overload
range.
Standard versions
The standard versions monitor the current in three phases with
selectable active current monitoring. They have additional diag-
nostics options such as residual current monitoring and phase
sequence monitoring, and they are also suitable for monitoring
motors below the rated torque. These devices have an addi-
tional independent semiconductor output, an actual value indi-
cator, and are digitally adjustable.
Both versions are available optionally with screw or spring-type
terminals, in each case for sizes S00 and S0. With variants of
size S2 the main current paths always have screw terminals;
the control current side can have screw or spring-type terminals.
Note:
In addition to the features of the standard versions, 3RR24
monitoring relays for mounting onto 3RT2 contactors for IO-Link
also offer the possibility of transmitting the measured values and
diagnostics data to a controller via an IO-Link. Furthermore,
the devices can be parameterized on the devices themselves or
via IO-Link.

Siemens IC 10 · 2015 10/79
SIRIUS
Relays • Revised • Contactor Assemblies for Switching Motors
04/20/15 Current Monitoring Relays
Function charts of 3RR214.-.A.30 basic variants, analog dial adjustable
Closed-circuit principle upon application of the control supply voltage
Current overshoot Range monitoring
B1-B2
B1-B2
> 1~ = 0
> < 1~ = 0
Hysteresis 6,25 % ▲
Hysteresis 6,25 %
Hyst. 6,25 %
▼
2~ = 0
2~ = 0
NSB0_02050
NSB0_02048
31/34 31/34
31/32 31/32
FAULT FAULT
LED LED
OFF FLASH OFF FLASH OFF FLASH ON OFF FLASH OFF O F F FLASH O N FLASH O F F FLASH ON OFF FLASH ON O F F FLASH O F F
slow slow slow fast slow slow slow slow fast
onDel onDel Del onDel onDel Del Del
Current undershoot
B1-B2
< 1~ = 0
Hysteresis 6,25 %
▼
10
2~ = 0
NSB0_02049
31/34
31/32
FAULT
LED O F F FLASH O N FLASH O F F FLASH ON OFF FLASH O F F
slow slow slow fast
onDel onDel Del
Circuit diagrams
B1 / AC/DC 31 B1 / AC/DC 31
2T1 4T2 6T3 B2 32 34 14/22 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 B2 32 34

IC01_00199 IC01_00201
3RR2141-1A.30 3RR2141-2A.30, 3RR2142-.A.30, 3RR2143-.A.30
Note:
It is not necessary to protect the measuring circuit for device
protection. The protective device for line protection depends
on the cross-section used.

10/80 Siemens IC 10 · 2015
Relays
SIRIUS 3RR21, 3RR22 Monitoring Relays for Mounting onto
04/20/15 3RT2 Contactors
Current Monitoring Relays
Function charts of 3RR224.-.F.30 standard versions, digitally adjustable
With the closed-circuit principle selected upon application of the control supply voltage
B1-B2
> >n x B1-B2
> < 1,2 ~ = 0
nx ▲
▲, !▲
Hysteresis
▲, !▲ Hyst.
Hysteresis ▼, !▼
3~ = 0
3~ = 0
31/34
31/34 31/32
NSB0_02053
31/32 Q on
NSB0_02051
Q on Q off
Q off
onDel onDel Del RsDel Del RsDel
onDel onDel Del RsDel RsDel
Current undershoot with residual current monitoring Phase sequence monitoring
B1-B2
B1-B2
> 1+ 2+ 3 ≥
Hysteresis
▼, !▼ L3- L 2- L1
3~ = 0 3~ = 0
31/34 31/34
10
31/32 31/32
NSB0_02052
NSB0_02054
Q on
Q on
Q off
Q off
onDel onDel Del RsDel
Circuit diagrams
B1 / AC/DC 31 B1 / AC/DC 31
2T1 4T2 6T3 Q B2 32 34 14/22 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 Q B2 32 34

IC01_00200 IC01_00202
3RR2241-1F.30 3RR2241-2F.30, 3RR2242-.F.30, 3RR2243-.F.30
Note:

Siemens IC 10 · 2015 10/81
SIRIUS • Revised • Contactor Assemblies for Switching MotorsRelays

SIRIUS 3RR21/3RR22 current monitoring relays
• For load monitoring of motors or other loads
• Multi-phase monitoring of undercurrent and overcurrent
• Starting and tripping delay can be adjusted separately
• Tripping delay 0 to 30 s
• Auto or Manual RESET
3RR2141-1AW30 3RR2142-1AW30 3RR2241-1FW30 3RR2242-1FW30 3RR2141-2AA30 3RR2243-3FW30
Size Measuring range Hysteresis Control supply voltage Us Screw terminals Spring-type
terminals
Order No. Order No.

A A V
Basic versions
• Analogically adjustable
• Closed-circuit principle
• 1 CO contact
• 2-phase current monitoring
• Apparent current monitoring
• Start-up delay 0 ... 60 s
S00 1.6 ... 16 6.25 % of 24 AC/DC 3RR2141-1AA30 3RR2141-2AA30
threshold value 24 ... 240 AC/DC 3RR2141-1AW30 3RR2141-2AW30
S0 4 ... 40 6.25 % of 24 AC/DC 3RR2142-1AA30 3RR2142-2AA30

S2 8 ... 80 6.25 % of 24 AC/DC 3RR2143-1AA30 3RR2143-3AA30

Standard versions
• Digitally adjustable
• LC display
10
• Open or closed-circuit principle
• 1 CO contact
• 1 semiconductor output
• Active current or apparent current monitoring
• Phase sequence monitoring
• Residual current monitoring
• Blocking current monitoring
• Reclosing delay time 0 ... 300 min
• Start-up delay 0 ... 99 s
• Separate settings for warning and alarm thresholds
S00 1.6 ... 16 0.1 ... 3 24 AC/DC 3RR2241-1FA30 3RR2241-2FA30
24 ... 240 AC/DC 3RR2241-1FW30 3RR2241-2FW30
S0 4 ... 40 0.1 ... 8 24 AC/DC 3RR2242-1FA30 3RR2242-2FA30

24 ... 240 AC/DC 3RR2242-1FW30 3RR2242-2FW30
S2 8 ... 80 0.2 ... 16 24 AC/DC 3RR2243-1FA30 3RR2243-3FA30

24 ... 240 AC/DC 3RR2243-1FW30 3RR2243-3FW30

Relays
SIRIUS 3RR24 Monitoring Relays for Mounting onto 3RT2 Contactors for IO-Link
Current Monitoring Relays with IO-Link 04/20/15
Overview
• Rapid parameterization of the same devices by duplication of
the parameterization in the controller
• Parameter transmission by upload to a controller by IO-Link
call or by parameter server (if IO-Link master from IO-Link
Specification V 1.1 and higher is used)
• Consistent central data storage in the event of parameter
change locally or via a controller
• Automatic reparameterizing when devices are exchanged
• Blocking of local parameterization via IO-Link possible
• Faults are saved in parameterizable and non-volatile fashion
to prevent an automatic start up after voltage failure and to
make sure diagnostics data is not lost
• By integration into the automation level the option exists of
parameterizing the monitoring relay at any time via a display
unit or displaying the measured values in a control room or
locally at the machine/control cabinet
Even without communication via IO-Link the devices continue to
SIRIUS 3RR2441, 3RR2442 and 3RR2443 current monitoring relays function fully autonomously:
The SIRIUS 3RR24 current monitoring relays for IO-Link are • Parameterization can take place locally at the device,
suitable for the load monitoring of motors or other loads. In three independently of a controller
phases they monitor the rms value of AC currents for • In the event of failure or before the controller becomes
overshooting or undershooting of set threshold values. available the monitoring relays work as long as the control
Whereas apparent current monitoring is used above all in supply voltage (24 V DC) is present
connection with the rated torque or in case of overload, the • If the monitoring relays are operated without the controller,
active current monitoring option, which is also selectable, can the 3RR24 monitoring relays for IO-Link have, thanks to the
be used to observe and evaluate the load factor over a motor's integrated SIO mode, an additional semiconductor output,
entire torque range. which switches when the adjustable warning threshold is
exceeded
The 3RR24 current monitoring relays for IO-Link can be inte-
grated directly in the feeder by mounting onto the 3RT2 contac- Thanks to the combination of autonomous monitoring relay func-
tor; separate wiring of the main circuit is therefore superfluous. tion and integrated IO-Link communication, redundant sensors
No separate transformers are required. and/or analog signal converters – which previously took over the
transmission of measured values to a controller, leading to con-
For a line-oriented configuration or simultaneous use of an
siderable extra cost and wiring outlay – are no longer needed.
overload relay, terminal supports for stand-alone installation are
available for separate standard rail mounting. Because the output relays are still present, the monitoring relays
increase the functional reliability of the system, since only the
The SIRIUS 3RR24 current monitoring relays for IO-Link also
controller can fulfill the control tasks if the current measured
offer many other options based upon the monitoring functions of
10
values are available, whereas the output relays can also be used
the conventional SIRIUS 3RR2 monitoring relays:
for the disconnection of the system if limit values that cannot be
• Measured value transmission to a controller, including resolu- reached during operation are exceeded.
tion and unit, may be parameterizable as to which value is
cyclically transmitted For further information on the IO-Link communication system,
see Chapter 14.
• Transmission of alarm flags to a controller
• Full diagnosis capability by inquiry as to the cause of the fault
in the diagnosis data record
• Remote parameterization is also possible, in addition to or
instead of local parameterization

Siemens IC 10 · 2015 10/89
SIRIUS
04/20/15 Current Monitoring Relays with IO-Link
Benefits Application
• Can be mounted directly on 3RT2 contactors and • Monitoring of current overshoot and undershoot
3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies, in other words, • Monitoring of broken conductors
there is no need for additional wiring in the main circuit
• Monitoring of no-load operation and load shedding, e.g. in the
• Optimally coordinated with the technical characteristics of the event of a torn V-belt or no-load operation of a pump
3RT2 contactors
• Monitoring of overload, e.g. on pumps due to a dirty filter
• No separate current transformer required system
• Variably adjustable to overshoot, undershoot or range • Monitoring the functionality of electrical loads such as heaters
monitoring
• Monitoring of wrong phase sequence on mobile equipment
• Freely configurable delay times and RESET response such as compressors or cranes
• Display of ACTUAL value and status messages • Monitoring of high-impedance faults to ground, e.g. caused
• All versions with removable control current terminals by damaged insulation or moisture
• All versions with screw or spring-type terminals The use of SIRIUS monitoring relays for IO-Link is particularly
• Simple determination of the threshold values through direct recommended for machines and plant in which these relays,
reference to actually measured values for setpoint loading in addition to their monitoring function, are to be connected
• Range monitoring and selectable active current measurement to the automation level for the rapid, simple and fault-free
mean that only one device for monitoring a motor is required provision of the current measured values and/or for remote
along the entire torque curve parameterization.
• In addition to current monitoring it is also possible to monitor The monitoring relays can either relieve the controller of monitor-
for current unbalance, broken cables, phase failure, ing tasks or, as a second monitoring entity in parallel to and
phase sequence, residual current and motor blocking independent of the controller, increase the reliability in the
process or in the system. In addition, the elimination of AI and
• Integrated counter for operating cycles and operating hours to IO modules allows the width of the controller to be reduced
support requirements-based maintenance of the monitored despite significantly expanded functionality.
machine or application
• Simple cyclical transmission of the current measured values,
relay switching states and events to a controller
• Remote parameterization
• Automatic reparameterizing when devices are exchanged
• Simple duplication of identical or similar parameterizations
• Reduction of control current wiring
• Elimination of testing costs and wiring errors
• Reduction of configuration work
• Integration in TIA means clear diagnostics if a fault occurs
• Cost saving and space saving in control cabinet due to the
elimination of AI and IO modules as well as analog signal
converters and duplicated sensors
10

10/90 Siemens IC 10 · 2015
Relays
Current Monitoring Relays with IO-Link 04/20/15
Function charts of 3RR24 for IO-Link, digitally adjustable
With the closed-circuit principle selected upon application of the control supply voltage
L+/L-
> >n x L+/L-
> < 1,2 ~ = 0
nx ▲
▲, !▲
Hysteresis
▲, !▲ Hyst.
Hysteresis ▼, !▼
3~ = 0
3~ = 0
31/34
31/34 31/32
IC01_00186
31/32 Q on
IC01_00185
Q on Q off
Q off
onDel onDel ▲Del RsDel ▼Del RsDel
onDel onDel ▲Del RsDel RsDel
Current undershoot with residual current monitoring Phase sequence monitoring
L+/L-
>
L+/L-
1+ 2+ 3 ≥
Hysteresis
▼, !▼
L3-L2-L1
3~ = 0
10
3~ = 0
31/34 31/34
31/32 31/32
IC01_00187
IC01_00188
Q on
Q on
Q off
Q off
onDel onDel ▼Del RsDel
Circuit diagrams
L+ C/Q L- 31 L+ C/Q L- 31
IO-Link IO-Link
2T1 4T2 6T3 32 34 14/22 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 32 34

IC01_00189 IC01_00190
3RR2441-1AA40 3RR2441-2AA40, 3RR2442-.AA40, 3RR2443-.AA40

Note:

Siemens IC 10 · 2015 10/91
SIRIUS

SIRIUS 3RR24 current monitoring relays for IO-Link
• For load monitoring of motors or other loads
• Multi-phase monitoring of undercurrent and overcurrent
• Starting and tripping delay can be adjusted separately
• Tripping delay 0 to 999.9 s
• Auto or Manual RESET
3RR2441-1AA40 3RR2442-1AA40 3RR2441-2AA40 3RR2442-2AA40 3RR2443-1AA40 3RR2443-3AA40
Size Measuring range Hysteresis Control supply voltage Us Screw terminals Spring-type
terminals
Order No. Order No.
A A V
• Digitally adjustable
• LC display
• Open or closed-circuit principle
• 1 CO contact
• 1 semiconductor output (in SIO mode)
• Active current or apparent current monitoring
• Current unbalance monitoring
• Phase sequence monitoring
• Residual current monitoring
• Blocking current monitoring
• Operating hours counter
• Operating cycles counter
• Reclosing delay time 0 ... 300 min
• Start-up delay 0 ... 999.9 s
• Separate settings for warning and alarm thresholds
S00 1.6 ... 16 0.1 ... 3 24 DC 3RR2441-1AA40 3RR2441-2AA40
S0 4 ... 40 0.1 ... 8 24 DC 3RR2442-1AA40 3RR2442-2AA40

10
S2 8 ... 80 0.2 ... 16 24 DC 3RR2443-1AA40 3RR2443-3AA40

Contactor
Relays Assemblies for Switching Motors • Revised • SIRIUS
Current Monitoring Relay Accessories 04/20/15
Accessories
Use Version Size Order No. Standard

Pack
Quantity
Terminal supports for stand-alone installation1)

For 3RR21, For separate mounting of the overload relays Screw terminals
3RR22, or monitoring relays; screw and snap-on mounting
3RR24 onto TH 35 standard mounting rail according to
IEC 60715
• Screw connection S00 3RU2916-3AA01 1 unit
S0 3RU2926-3AA01 1 unit
S2 3RU2936-3AA01 1 unit
3RU2916-3AA01
Spring-type
terminals
• Spring-type connection S00 3RU2916-3AC01 1 unit
S0 3RU2926-3AC01 1 unit
3RU2926-3AC01
Blank labels
For 3RR21, Unit labeling plates2)
3RR22, For SIRIUS devices
3RR24
20 mm x 7 mm, titanium gray 3RT2900-1SB20 340 units
IC01_00181
3RT2900-1SB20
Sealable covers
For 3RR21, Sealable covers 3RR2940 5 units
3RR22, For securing against unintentional or unauthorized
3RR24 adjustment of settings
For 3RR21 Sealing foil 3TK2820-0AA00 1 unit

10
For securing against unauthorized adjustment of

setting knobs
3RR2940
Tools for opening spring-type terminals
For auxiliary Screwdrivers Spring-type
circuit For all SIRIUS devices with spring-type terminals; terminals
connections 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm; length approx. 200 mm,
titanium gray/black, partially insulated 3RA2908-1A 1 unit
3RA2908-1A
1)
The accessories are identical to those of the 3RU21 thermal overload
relays and the 3RB3 electronic overload relays, see Chapter 3
"Overload Relays".
2)
of unit labeling plates available from:
Systems, Inc.
www.murrplastic.com

Industrial
thereof. Catalog
04/20/15 NEMA 1 Enclosure
* NEMA Type 1 Enclosures

* Lift off cover
* Accepts SIRIUS power control components
* Non-reversing contactors
* Reversing contactors
* Starters with thermal overload relays
* Starters with solid-state overload relays
Application
The 49EC14*B separate enclosures are designed for field assembly of a wide range of Siemens
SIRIUS open style control components and field modification kits as listed in the charts below. 49EC14EB110705R
Note that certain components require the addition of a DIN Rail kit for proper mounting in the enclosure.
NEMA 1 Enclosures
Max. current Contactor Max. current Overload relay Required DIN rail kit NEMA 1 Enclosure
A Non-reversing Reversing A Thermal Solid-state Order No. Order No.
16 3RT201 3RA231 16 3RU2116 3RB3016 MTR5 49EC14EB110705R
38 3RT202 3RA232 40 3RU2126 3RB3026 MTR5
50 3RT103 50 3RU1136 3RB2036 — 49EC14GB140807R
12 3RA131 12 3RU1116 3RB2016 MTR5
25 3RA132 25 3RU1126 3RB2026 MTR5
50 3RA133 50 3RU1136 3RB2036 —
95 3RT104 100 3RU1146 3RB2046 — 49EC14IB201208R
95 3RA134 100 3RU1146 3RB2046 —
Accessories for NEMA 1 Enclosures

Accessory type Description Marking Voltage Order No.
Start-stop 49SBPB5
Push button
Reset (blue) 49MBRS
2 position Off-on 49SBSB4
49SBPB5
Hand-off-auto 49SBSB1
Selector switch
3 position For-off-rev 49SBSB2
High-off-low 49SBSB3
Legends: ON, RUN, 24 V AC 49SBLBJ

Pilot light Lens colors: OFF, OL TRIPPED, 120 V AC 49SBLBF
red, green, FORWARD, 208, 240, 277 V AC 49SBLBG
49SBSB1 REVERSE, LOW 480 V AC
amber 49SBLBH
HIGH 600 V AC 49SBLBE
49SBLBF
For 3RT contactors, see page 2/8.

For 3RA reversing, see pages 2/37.
For thermal overloads, see page 3/10.
For solidstate overloads, see pages 3/22.
For enclosure dimensions, see figures 1, 2, and 3 on page 9/150.
Siemens Industry, Inc. Product Category: NEMA 2/93

Contactors and
Accessories Contactor
and Spare PartsAssemblies
3RT Contactors
For 3RT2, 3RH2 Contactors and Contactor Relays • Revised • SIRIUS
Spare parts for 3RT2 contactors 04/20/15
Spare parts for 3RT2 contactors

For screw, spring-type and ring lug terminal connection
3
3RT29 24-5A . 01
For contactors Rated control supply voltage Us Order No. Weight
approx.
Size Type 50 Hz 50/60 Hz 60 Hz
V V V kg
Solenoid coils • AC operation
S0 3RT20 23, 24 -- -- 3RT29 24-5AB01 0.100
3RT20 24, 42 -- -- 3RT29 24-5AD01 0.100
3RT20 25 48 -- -- 3RT29 24-5AH01 0.100
110 -- -- 3RT29 24-5AF01 0.100
230 -- -- 3RT29 24-5AP01 0.100
400 -- -- 3RT29 24-5AV01 0.100
-- 24 -- 3RT29 24-5AC21 0.100
-- 42 -- 3RT29 24-5AD21 0.100
-- 48 -- 3RT29 24-5AH21 0.100
-- 110 -- 3RT29 24-5AG21 0.100
-- 220 -- 3RT29 24-5AN21 0.100
-- 230 -- 3RT29 24-5AL21 0.100
110 -- 120 3RT29 24-5AK61 0.100
220 -- 240 3RT29 24-5AP61 0.100
-- 100 110 3RT29 24-5AG61 0.100
-- 200 220 3RT29 24-5AN61 0.100
-- 400 440 3RT29 24-5AR61 0.100
S0 3RT20 26 , 24 -- -- 3RT29 26-5AB01 0.100
3RT20 27, 42 -- -- 3RT29 26-5AD01 0.100
3RT20 28 48 -- -- 3RT29 26-5AH01 0.100
3RT23 2 5, 110 -- -- 3RT29 26-5AF01 0.100
3RT23 26, 230 -- -- 3RT29 26-5AP01 0.100
3RT23 27
400 -- -- 3RT29 26-5AV01 0.100
3RT25 2 6
-- 24 -- 3RT29 26-5AC21 0.100
-- 42 -- 3RT29 26-5AD21 0.100
-- 48 -- 3RT29 26-5AH21 0.100
-- 110 -- 3RT29 26-5AG21 0.100
-- 208 -- 3RT29 26-5AM21 0.100
-- 220 -- 3RT29 26-5AN21 0.100
-- 230 -- 3RT29 26-5AL21 0.100
110 -- 120 3RT29 26-5AK61 0.100
220 -- 240 3RT29 26-5AP61 0.100
-- 100 110 3RT29 26-5AG61 0.100
-- 200 220 3RT29 26-5AN61 0.100
-- 400 440 3RT29 26-5AR61 0.100
500 -- 3RT29 26-5AQ21 0.100
277 3RT29 26-5AU61 0.100
480 3RT29 26-5AV61 0.100
600 3RT29 26-5AT61 0.100
Note:
Contactors with AC and AC/DC coils have different depths.
It is only possible to replace the coils on AC contactors with
AC coils, and on AC/DC contactors with AC/DC coils. It is not
possible to replace the coils on DC contactors in the S0 frame.
2/94 Product Category: ICE Siemens Industry, Inc.

SIRIUS
• Revised • Motors Contactor Assemblies for Switching Motors
Spare Parts for 3RT2 Contactors
04/20/15 Spare parts for 3RT2 contactors
Solenoid coils, contacts and arc chutes
For screw, spring-type and ring terminal lug connection
3
3RT2934-5N.31 3RT2934-5A.01
For contactors Rated control supply voltage Us Order No. Weight
approx.
Size Type 50 Hz 50/60 Hz 60 Hz DC
V V V
Solenoid coils • AC operation
S2 3RT203.-.A 24 -- -- -- 3RT2934-5AB01
3RT233.-.A 42 -- -- -- 3RT2934-5AD01
3RT253.-.A 48 -- -- -- 3RT2934-5AH01
110 -- -- -- 3RT2934-5AF01
230 -- -- -- 3RT2934-5AP01
400 -- -- -- 3RT2934-5AV01
-- 24 -- -- 3RT2934-5AC21
-- 42 -- -- 3RT2934-5AD21
-- 48 -- -- 3RT2934-5AH21
-- 110 -- -- 3RT2934-5AG21
-- 220 -- -- 3RT2934-5AN21
-- 230 -- -- 3RT2934-5AL21
110 -- 120 -- 3RT2934-5AK61
220 -- 240 -- 3RT2934-5AP61
-- -- 480 -- 3RT2934-5AV61
-- -- 600 -- 3RT2934-5AT61
-- 100 110 -- 3RT2934-5AG61
-- 200 220 -- 3RT2934-5AN61
-- 400 440 -- 3RT2934-5AR61
Solenoid coils • AC/DC operation, with varistor
S2 3RT203.-.N -- 20 ... 33 -- 20 ... 33 3RT2934-5NB31
3RT233.-.N -- 30 ... 42 -- 30 ... 42 3RT2934-5ND31
3RT253.-.N -- 48 ... 80 -- 48 ... 80 3RT2934-5NE31
-- 83 ... 155 -- 83 ... 155 3RT2934-5NF31
-- 175 ... 280 -- 175 ... 280 3RT2934-5NP31
Note:
It is only possible to replace the coils on AC contactors with
AC coils, and on AC/DC contactors with AC/DC coils.
For contactors Version DT Article No. Price PU PS* PG

per PU (UNIT,
SET, M)
Size Type
Contacts with fixing parts
For contactors with 3 main contacts
S2 3RT2035 Main contacts (3 NO contacts) B 3RT2935-6A 1 1 unit 41B
3RT2036 for utilization category AC-3 B 3RT2936-6A 1 1 unit 41B
3RT2037 (1 set = 3 movable and 6 fixed switching elements B 3RT2937-6A 1 1 unit 41B
3RT2038 with fixing parts) B 3RT2938-6A 1 1 unit 41B
S2 3RT2336 Main contacts (4 NO contacts) B 3RT2936-6E 1 1 unit 41B
3RT2337 for utilization category AC-1 B 3RT2937-6E 1 1 unit 41B
(1 set = 3 movable and 6 fixed switching elements
and spare pole with fixing parts)
Arc chutes
S2 Arc chutes, 3-pole
3RT203 . Only for contactors with AC coil B 3RT2936-7A 1 1 unit 41B
3RT203 . Only for contactors with AC/DC coil B 3RT2936-7B 1 1 unit 41B

3RT Contactors SIRIUS
For contactor Rated control supply Screw connection Spring-type connection Weight
voltage Us approx.
Order No. Order No.
Size
Type kg
Coils · AC operation
3RT19 24-5A . 01 S0 3RT10 2 ., 24 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 24-5AB01 3RT19 24-5AB02 0.069
3RT13 2 ., 42 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 24-5AD01 3RT19 24-5AD02
3RT15 2 . 48 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 24-5AH01 3RT19 24-5AH02
110 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 24-5AF01 3RT19 24-5AF02
230 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 24-5AP01 3RT19 24-5AP02
400 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 24-5AV01 3RT19 24-5AV02
24 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AC21 3RT19 24-5AC22
42 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AD21 3RT19 24-5AD22
48 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AH21 3RT19 24-5AH22
110 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AG21 3RT19 24-5AG22
208 v, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AM21 3RT19 24-5AM22
220 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AN21 3RT19 24-5AN22
230 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AL21 3RT19 24-5AL22
110 V, 50 Hz/120 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AK61 3RT19 24-5AK62
220 V, 50 Hz/240 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AP61 3RT19 24-5AP62
277 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AU61 3RT19 24-5AU62
480 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AV61 3RT19 24-5AV62
600 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AT61 3RT19 24-5AT62
100 V, 50/60 Hz/110 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AG61 3RT19 24-5AG62
200 V, 50/60 Hz/220 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AN61 3RT19 24-5AN62
400 V, 50/60 Hz/440 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 24-5AR61 3RT19 24-5AR62
3RT19 24-5A . 02 S2 3RT10 33 24 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 34-5AB01 3RT19 34-5AB02 0.088

3RT10 34 42 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 34-5AD01 3RT19 34-5AD02
48 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 34-5AH01 3RT19 34-5AH02
110 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 34-5AF01 3RT19 34-5AF02
230 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 34-5AP01 3RT19 34-5AP02
400 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 34-5AV01 3RT19 34-5AV02
42 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AD21 3RT19 34-5AD22
48 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AH21 3RT19 34-5AH22
24 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AC21 3RT19 34-5AC22
110 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AG21 3RT19 34-5AG22
208 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AM21 3RT19 34-5AM22
220 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AN21 3RT19 34-5AN22
230 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AL21 3RT19 34-5AL22
110 V, 50 Hz/120 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AK61 3RT19 34-5AK62
220 V, 50 Hz/240 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AP61 3RT19 34-5AP62
277 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AU61 3RT19 34-5AU62
480 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AV61 3RT19 34-5AV62
600 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AT61 3RT19 34-5AT62
100 V, 50/60 Hz/110 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AG61 3RT19 34-5AG62
200 V, 50/60 Hz/220 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AN61 3RT19 34-5AN62
400 V, 50/60 Hz/440 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 34-5AR61 3RT19 34-5AR62
3RT19 34-5A . 01 3RT10 35, 24 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 35-5AB01 3RT19 35-5AB02 0.088

3RT10 36, 42 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 35-5AD01 3RT19 35-5AD02
3RT13 3 ., 48 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 35-5AH01 3RT19 35-5AH02
3RT15 3 . 110 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 35-5AF01 3RT19 35-5AF02
230 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 35-5AP01 3RT19 35-5AP02
400 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 35-5AV01 3RT19 35-5AV02
24 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AC21 3RT19 35-5AC22
42 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AD21 3RT19 35-5AD22
48 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AH21 3RT19 35-5AH22
110 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AG21 3RT19 35-5AG22
208 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AM21 3RT19 35-5AM22
220 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AN21 3RT19 35-5AN22
230 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AL21 3RT19 35-5AL22
110 V, 50 Hz/120 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AK61 3RT19 35-5AK62
220 V, 50 Hz/240 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AP61 3RT19 35-5AP62
277 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AU61 3RT19 35-5AU62
480 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AV61 3RT19 35-5AV62
600 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AT61 3RT19 35-5AT62
100 V, 50/60 Hz/110 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AG61 3RT19 35-5AG62
200 V, 50/60 Hz/220 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AN61 3RT19 35-5AN62
400 V, 50/60 Hz/440 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 35-5AR61 3RT19 35-5AR62

SIRIUS 3RT Contactors
For contactor Rated control supply Screw connection Spring-type connection Weight
voltage Us approx.
Order No. Order No.
Size
Type kg
Coils · AC operation
3RT19 44-5A . 01 S3 3RT10 44 24 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 44-5AB01 3RT19 44-5AB02 0.130
42 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 44-5AD01 3RT19 44-5AD02
48 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 44-5AH01 3RT19 44-5AH02
110 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 44-5AF01 3RT19 44-5AF02
230 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 44-5AP01 3RT19 44-5AP02
400 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 44-5AV01 3RT19 44-5AV02
24 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AC21 3RT19 44-5AC22
42 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AD21 3RT19 44-5AD22
48 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AH21 3RT19 44-5AH22
110 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AG21 3RT19 44-5AG22
208 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AM21 3RT19 44-5AM22
220 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AN21 3RT19 44-5AN22
230 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AL21 3RT19 44-5AL22
110 V, 50 Hz/120 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AK61 3RT19 44-5AK62
220 V, 50 Hz/240 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AP61 3RT19 44-5AP62
277 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AU61 3RT19 44-5AU62
480 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AV61 3RT19 44-5AV62
600 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AT61 3RT19 44-5AT62
100 V, 50/60 Hz/110 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AG61 3RT19 44-5AG62
3RT19 45-5A . 01 200 V, 50/60 Hz/220 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AN61 3RT19 44-5AN62
400 V, 50/60 Hz/440 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 44-5AR61 3RT19 44-5AR62
3RT10 45, 24 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 45-5AB01 3RT19 45-5AB02 0.130
3RT10 46, 42 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 45-5AD01 3RT19 45-5AD02
3RT13 4 ., 48 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 45-5AH01 3RT19 45-5AH02
3RT14 46 110 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 45-5AF01 3RT19 45-5AF02
230 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 45-5AP01 3RT19 45-5AP02
400 V, 50 Hz 3RT19 45-5AV01 3RT19 45-5AV02
24 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AC21 3RT19 45-5AC22
42 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AD21 3RT19 45-5AD22
48 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AH21 3RT19 45-5AH22
110 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AG21 3RT19 45-5AG22
208 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AM21 3RT19 45-5AM22
220 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AN21 3RT19 45-5AN22
230 V, 50/60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AL21 3RT19 45-5AL22
3RT19 45-5AP02
110 V, 50 Hz/120 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AK61 3RT19 45-5AK62
220 V, 50 Hz/240 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AP61 3RT19 45-5AP62
277 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AU61 3RT19 45-5AU62
480 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AV61 3RT19 45-5AV62
600 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AT61 3RT19 45-5AT62
100 V, 50/60 Hz/110 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AG61 3RT19 45-5AG62
200 V, 50/60 Hz/220 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AN61 3RT19 45-5AN62
400 V, 50/60 Hz/440 V, 60 Hz 3RT19 45-5AR61 3RT19 45-5AR62
Coils · DC operation
3RT19 44-5BM42 S2 3RT10 3 ., 24 V 3RT19 34-5BB41 3RT19 34-5BB42 0.558
3RT13 3 ., 42 V 3RT19 34-5BD41 3RT19 34-5BD42
3RT15 3 . 48 V 3RT19 34-5BW41 3RT19 34-5BW42
60 V 3RT19 34-5BE41 3RT19 34-5BE42
110 V 3RT19 34-5BF41 3RT19 34-5BF42
125 V 3RT19 34-5BG41 3RT19 34-5BG42
220 V 3RT19 34-5BM41 3RT19 34-5BM42
230 V 3RT19 34-5BP41 3RT19 34-5BP42
S3 3RT10 4 ., 24 V 3RT19 44-5BB41 3RT19 44-5BB42 0.916
3RT13 4 ., 42 V 3RT19 44-5BD41 3RT19 44-5BD42
3RT14 4 . 48 V 3RT19 44-5BW41 3RT19 44-5BW42
60 V 3RT19 44-5BE41 3RT19 44-5BE42
110 V 3RT19 44-5BF41 3RT19 44-5BF42
125 V 3RT19 44-5BG41 3RT19 44-5BG42
220 V 3RT19 44-5BM41 3RT19 44-5BM42
230 V 3RT19 44-5BP41 3RT19 44-5BP42

3RT Contactors SIRIUS
For contactor Rated control supply voltage Order No. Weight

Us min to Us max approx.
Size Type AC/DC V kg
Withdrawable coils
3RT19 55-5A . . . S6 3RT10 5, 23 ... 26 3RT19 55-5AB31 0.49
3RT14 5 42 ... 48 3RT19 55-5AD31
110 ... 127 3RT19 55-5AF31
200 ... 220 3RT19 55-5AM31
220 ... 240 3RT19 55-5AP31
240 ... 277 3RT19 55-5AU31
380 ... 420 3RT19 55-5AV31
440 ... 480 3RT19 55-5AR31
500 ... 550 3RT19 55-5AS31
575 ... 600 3RT19 55-5AT31
S10 3RT10 6, 23 ... 26 3RT19 65-5AB31 0.65
3RT14 6 42 ... 48 3RT19 65-5AD31
110 ... 127 3RT19 65-5AF31
200 ... 220 3RT19 65-5AM31
220 ... 240 3RT19 65-5AP31
240 ... 277 3RT19 65-5AU31
380 ... 420 3RT19 65-5AV31
440 ... 480 3RT19 65-5AR31
500 ... 550 3RT19 65-5AS31
575 ... 600 3RT19 65-5AT31
3RT12 6 23 ... 26 3RT19 66-5AB31
Vacuum 42 ... 48 3RT19 66-5AD31
contactor 110 ... 127 3RT19 66-5AF31
200 ... 220 3RT19 66-5AM31
220 ... 240 3RT19 66-5AP31
240 ... 277 3RT19 66-5AU31
380 ... 420 3RT19 66-5AV31
440 ... 480 3RT19 66-5AR31
500 ... 550 3RT19 66-5AS31
575 ... 600 3RT19 66-5AT31
S12 3RT10 7, 23 ... 26 3RT19 75-5AB31 1.1
3RT14 7, 42 ... 48 3RT19 75-5AD31
3RT12 7 110 ... 127 3RT19 75-5AF31
Vacuum 200 ... 220 3RT19 75-5AM31
contactor 220 ... 240 3RT19 75-5AP31
240 ... 277 3RT19 75-5AU31
380 ... 420 3RT19 75-5AV31
440 ... 480 3RT19 75-5AR31
500 ... 550 3RT19 75-5AS31
575 ... 600 3RT19 75-5AT31
Withdrawable coils
3RT19 55-5N . . . S6 3RT10 5, 21 ... 27.3 3RT19 55-5NB31 0.49
3RT14 5 96 ... 127 3RT19 55-5NF31
200 ... 277 3RT19 55-5NP31
S10 3RT10 6, 21 ... 27.3 3RT19 65-5NB31 0.65
3RT14 6 96 ... 127 3RT19 65-5NF31
200 ... 277 3RT19 65-5NP31
3RT12 6 21 ... 27.3 3RT19 66-5NB31

Vacuum 96 ... 127 3RT19 66-5NF31
contactor 200 ... 277 3RT19 66-5NP31
S12 3RT10 7, 21 ... 27.3 3RT19 75-5NB31 1.1
3RT14 7, 96 ... 127 3RT19 75-5NF31
3RT12 7 200 ... 277 3RT19 75-5NP31
Vacuum
contactor
Solid-state operating mechanism · for DC 24 V PLC output/PLC relay output, with remaining lifetime indication
(withdrawable coil with lateral electronics module)
S6 3RT10 5, 96 ... 127 3RT19 55-5PF31 1.1
3RT14 5 200 ... 277 3RT19 55-5PP31
S10 3RT10 6, 96 ... 127 3RT19 65-5PF31 1.1
3RT14 6 200 ... 277 3RT19 65-5PP31
S12 3RT10 7, 96 ... 127 3RT19 75-5PF31 1.1

3RT14 7 200 ... 277 3RT19 75-5PP31

SIRIUS • Revised • 3RT Contactors
04/20/15 Spare parts for 3RT1 contactors
For contactor Design Order No. Weight Pack.

approx.
Size Type kg
Arc chutes
S2 3RT20 3 . For AC coil contactors only 3RT29 36-7A 1 unit

3RT20 3 . For UC (AC/DC) coil contactors only 3RT29 36-7B
S3 3RT10 4 ., 3RT19 46-7A

3RT14 46
S6 3RT10 54 3RT19 54-7A 0.72

3RT10 55 3RT19 55-7A
3RT10 56 3RT19 56-7A
S10 3RT10 64 3RT19 64-7A 1.24
3RT10 65 3RT19 65-7A
3RT10 66 3RT19 66-7A
S12 3RT10 75 3RT19 75-7A 1.4
3RT10 76 3RT19 76-7A
S6 3RT14 56 3RT19 56-7B 0.72

S10 3RT14 66 3RT19 66-7B 1.24
S12 3RT14 76 3RT19 76-7B 1.4
Contacts with fixing parts
for contactors with 3 main contacts
S2 3RT20 35 Main contacts (3 NO) 3RT29 35-6A 1 set
3RT20 36 for AC-3 utilization category 3RT29 36-6A
3RT20 37 (1 set = 3 moving and 6 fixed contacts 3RT29 37-6A
3RT20 38 with fixing parts) 3RT29 38-6A
S3 3RT10 44 3RT19 44-6A

3RT10 45 3RT19 45-6A
3RT10 46 3RT19 46-6A
S6 3RT10 54 3RT19 54-6A 0.28

3RT10 55 3RT19 55-6A
3RT10 56 3RT19 56-6A
S10 3RT10 64 3RT19 64-6A 0.48

3RT10 65 3RT19 65-6A
3RT10 66 3RT19 66-6A
S12 3RT10 75 3RT19 75-6A 0.9

3RT10 76 3RT19 76-6A
S3 3RT14 46 Main contacts (3 NO) 3RT19 46-6D

for AC-1 utilization category
(1 set = 3 moving and 6 fixed contacts
S6 3RT14 56 with fixing parts) 3RT19 56-6D 0.28
S10 3RT14 66 3RT19 66-6D 0.48
S12 3RT14 76 3RT19 76-6D 0.9
for 3RT12 vacuum contactors
S10 3RT12 64 3 vacuum interrupters 3RT19 64-6V 1.4 1 set
3RT12 65 with fixing parts 3RT19 65-6V
3RT12 66 3RT19 66-6V
S12 3RT12 75 3RT19 75-6V 1.5
3RT12 76 3RT19 76-6V
for contactors with 4 main contacts
S2 3RT23 36 Main contacts (4 NO contacts) 3RT29 36-6E 1 set
3RT23 37 for utilization category AC-1 3RT29 37-6E
S3 3RT13 44 (1 set = 4 moving and 8 fixed contacts 3RT19 44-6E
3RT13 46 with fixing parts) 3RT19 46-6E

Discount Code: Replacement Parts
Contactorsand
Contactors andContactor
Contactor Assemblies
Assemblies
3TB World Series Contactors
3T Contactors SIRIUS
Rated control supply voltages
Rated control supply voltages
for coils
for coils
Coil type 3TY6 503-0A.. 3TB50 3TY7 683-0C.. 3TF68

Rated control Control supply 3TY6 523-0A.. 3TB52 3TY7 693-0C.. 3TF69
supply voltage Us voltage at 3TY6 543-0A.. 3TB54
3TY6 566-0A.. 3TB56
Rated control supply voltages (changes to 10th and 11th positions of the Order No.)
AC operation
Coils for 50 Hz
50 Hz 60 Hz
AC 24 V AC 39 V B0 –
AC 32 V AC 28 V – –
AC 36 V AC 42 V G0 –
AC 42 V AC 50 V D0 –
AC 48 V AC 58 V H0 –
AC 60 V AC 72 V E0 –
AC 110 V AC 132 V F0 –
AC 125/127 V AC 150/152 V L0 –
AC 230/220 V AC 277 V P0 1) –
AC 240 V AC 288 V U0 –
AC 400/380 V AC 480/460 V V0 1) –
AC 415 V AC 500 V R0 –
AC 500 V AC 600 V S0 –
Coils for 50/60 Hz
AC 110 V ... 132 V – F7
AC 200 V ... 240 V – M7
AC 230 V ... 277 V – P7 2)
AC 380 V ... 460 V – Q7
AC 500 V ... 600 V – S7
Coil type 3TY6 503-0B.. 3TB50 3TY7 683-0D.. 3TF68

Rated control supply 3TY6 523-0B.. 3TB52 3TY7 693-0D.. 3TF69
voltage Us 3TY6 543-0B.. 3TB54
3TY6 563-0B.. 3TB56
Rated control supply voltages (changes to 10th and 11th positions of the Order No.)
DC operation
DC 24 V B4 B4
DC 30 V C4 –
DC 36 V V4 –
DC 42 V D4 –
DC 48 V W4 –
DC 60 V E4 –
DC 110 V F4 F4
DC 125 V G4 G4
DC 180 V K4 –
DC 220 V M4 M4
DC 230 V P4 P4
Due to the mature nature of some product series, supply cannot be guaranteed on all versions listed on this page.
1) Coil voltage tolerance at 220 V or 380 V: 2) Lower tolerance range limit at 220 V:
0.85 to 1.15 x Us; 0.85 x Us acc. to IEC 60 947.
lower tolerance range limit acc. to
IEC 60 947.

SIRIUS 3TB World Series Contactors
Spare parts
Coils, AC1)
Catalog No
Frame
Size 24V AC 120V AC 208V AC 220/240V AC 277V AC 480V AC 600V AC
3TB40–44 3TY7403-0AC2 3TY7403-0AK6 3TY7403-0AM1 3TY7403-0AP6 3TY7403-0AU1 3TY7403-0AV0 3TY7403-
0AS0
3TB47–48 3TY6483-0AC1 3TY6483-0AK6 3TY6483-0AM1 3TY6483-0AP6 3TY6483-0AP0 3TY6483-0AV0 3TY6483-
0AS0
3TB52 — 3TY6523-0AK6 3TY6523-0AM1 3TY6523-0AP6 3TY6523-0AP0 3TY6523-0AV0
—
3TY6463-0AK6 3TB56 — — — — 3TY6566-0AP0 3TY6566-0AV0 3TY6566-0AS0
Coils, DC
Catalog No
Frame
Size 12V DC 24V DC 42V DC 48V DC 110V DC 125V DC 240V DC
3TB40–43 3TY4803-0BA4 3TY4803-0BB4 3TY4803-0BD4 3TY4803-0BW4 3TY4803-0BF4 3TY4803-0BG4 3TY4803-0BQ4
3TB44 3TY6443-0BA4 3TY6443-0BB4 3TY6443-0BD4 3TY6443-0BW4 3TY6443-0BF4 3TY6443-0BG4 3TY6443-0BQ4
3TB46 — — 3TY6463-0BD4 3TY6463-0BW4 3TY6463-0BF4 — 3TY6463-0BQ4
3TB47–48 — 3TY6483-0BB4 3TY6483-0BD4 3TY6483-0BW4 3TY6483-0BF4 3TY6483-0BG4 —
3TB50 — 3TY6503-0BB4 3TY6503-0BD4 3TY6503-0BW4 3TY6503-0BF4 3TY6503-0BG4 3TY6503-0BQ4
3TB52 — 3TY6523-0BB4 3TY6523-0BD4 — 3TY6523-0BF4 3TY6523-0BG4 —
3T Y 6 4 8 3 - 0 B B 4 3TB54 — 3TY6543-0BB4 3TY6543-0BD4 3TY6543-0BW4 3TY6543-0BF4 — 3TY6543-0BQ4
3TB56 — 3TY6563-0BB4 3TY6563-0BD4 — 3TY6563-0BF4 3TY6563-0BG4 3TY6563-0BQ4
3TB58 — — — — — — — obsolete
Main Contacts (Includes 3 Moving and 6 Fixed Contacts)2)

Frame
Size Catalog No
3TB40–43 Not Replaceable
3TB44 3TY6440-0A
3TB46 3TY6460-0A
3TB47 3TY6470-0A
3TB48 3TY6480-0A
3TB50 3TY6500-0A
3TB52 3TY6520-0A
3TB54 3TY6540-0A
3TB56 3TY6560-0A
3TY6500-0A 3TB58 3TY6580-0A
Select Complete Catalog Number From Above 1) Coil Voltages

Old Number New Number Old Number New Number
3TY6465-0A †† 3TY6463-0A†† A8 K6
3TY6485-0A †† 3TY6483-0A†† B8 M1
3TY6505-0A †† 3TY6503-0A†† C8 P6
3TY6525-0A †† 3TY6523-0A†† D8 Q0
3TY6545-0A †† 3TY6543-0A†† E8 S0
3TY6565-0A †† 3TY6566-0A†† F8 C1
G8 P0
1)Some
old 3TB coil catalog numbers have been superceded. Cross to current catalog number from these tables.
2)Main contact kits for size 3TB47 and larger include springs. Smaller sizes do not.

3TF World Series Contactors SIRIUS
Spare parts
Coils, AC Type 3TF and CRL†F

Catalog No
Frame 24V AC, 60Hz 120V AC, 60Hz 208V AC, 60Hz 240V AC, 60Hz 277V AC, 60Hz 460V AC, 60Hz 600V AC, 60Hz
Size 24V AC, 50Hz 110V AC, 50Hz 173V AC, 50Hz 220V AC, 50Hz 220V AC, 50Hz 380V AC, 50Hz 500V AC, 50Hz
3TF30–33
3TY7403-0AC2 3TY7403-0AK6 3TY7403-0AM1 3TY7403-0AP6 3TY7403-0AU1 3TY7403-0AV0 3TY7403-0AS0
3TF40–43
3TF34–35,
3TY7403-0AK6 3TY7443-0AC2 3TY7443-0AK6 3TY7443-0AM1 3TY7443-0AP6 3TY7443-0AU1 3TY7443-0AV0 3TY7443-0AS0
3TF44–45
3TF46–47 3TY7463-0AC2 3TY7463-0AK6 3TY7463-0AM1 3TY7463-0AP6 3TY7463-0AU1 3TY7463-0AV0 3TY7463-0AS0
3TF56 3TY7563-0AC2 3TY7563-0AK6 3TY7563-0AM1 3TY7563-0AP6 3TY7563-0AU1 3TY7563-0AV0 3TY7563-0AS0
3TF57 — 3TY7573-0CF7 — 3TY7573-0CM7 — 3TY7573-0CQ7 —
3TF68 — 3TY7683-0CF7 — 3TY7683-0CM7 — 3TY7683-0CQ7 3TY7683-0CS7
3TY7483-0AK6 3TF69 — 3TY7693-0CF7 — 3TY7693-0CM7 — 3TY7693-0CQ7 3TY7693-0CS7
Coils, DC Type 3TF and CRL†F

Catalog No
Frame
Size 12V DC 24V DC 42V DC 48V DC 110V DC 125V DC 240V DC
DC Solenoid
3TF30–33
3TY4803-0BA4 3TY4803-0BB4 3TY4803-0BD4 3TY4803-0BW4 3TY4803-0BF4 3TY4803-0BG4 3TY4803-0BQ4
3TF40–43
3TF34–35,
3TY7443-0BA4 3TY7443-0BB4 3TY7443-0BD4 3TY7443-0BW4 3TY7443-0BF4 3TY7443-0BG4 —
3TF44–45
3TF46–47 — 3TY7463-0BB4 3TY7463-0BD4 3TY7463-0BW4 — 3TY7463-0BG4 3TY7463-0BQ4
DC Economy Circuit (Replacement coils only. Does not include interlock or interposing relay.)
3TF46–47 — 3TY7463-0DB4 3TY7463-0DD4 3TY7463-0DW4 3TY7463-0DF4 3TY7463-0DG4 3TY7463-0DQ4
3TF48–49 — — 3TY7483-0DD4 3TY7483-0DW4 3TY7483-0DF4 3TY7483-0DG4 3TY7483-0DQ4
3TY4803-0BB4 3TF50–51 — 3TY7503-0DB4 3TY7503-0DD4 3TY7503-0DW4 3TY7503-0DF4 3TY7503-0DG4 3TY7503-0DQ4
3TF52–53 — 3TY7523-0DB4 3TY7523-0DD4 3TY7523-0DW4 3TY7523-0DF4 3TY7523-0DG4 3TY7523-0DQ4
3TF54–55 — — 3TY7543-0DD4 3TY7543-0DW4 3TY7543-0DF4 3TY7543-0DG4 3TY7543-0DQ4
3TF56 — 3TY7563-0DB4 3TY7563-0DD4 3TY7563-0DW4 — 3TY7563-0DG4 3TY7563-0DQ4
3TF57 — 3TY7573-0DB4 3TY7573-0DD4 3TY7573-0DW4 3TY7573-0DF4 3TY7573-0DG4 3TY7573-0DQ4
3TF68 — 3TY7683-0DB4 — — 3TY7683-0DF4 — —
Main Contacts (Includes 3 Moving and 6 Fixed Contacts) Arc Chutes

Frame Frame
Size Catalog No List Price $ Size Catalog No
3TF30–35 Not Replaceable 3TF30–35 Not Replaceable
3TF40–43 Not Replaceable 3TF40–43 Not Replaceable
3TF44 3TY7440-0A 3TF44 3TY7442-0A
3TF45 3TY7450-0A 3TF45 3TY7452-0A
3TF46 3TY7460-0A 3TF46 3TY7462-0A
3TF47 3TY7470-0A 3TF47 3TY7472-0A
3TF48 3TY7480-0A 3TF48 3TY7482-0A
3TF49 3TY7490-0A 3TF50 3TY7502-0A
3TF50 3TY7500-0A 3TF51 3TY7512-0A
3TF51 3TY7510-0A 3TF52 3TY7522-0A
3TF52 3TY7520-0A 3TF53 3TY7532-0A
3TY7460-0A 3TF53 3TY7530-0A 3T Y7482-0A 3TF54 3TY7542-0A
3TF54 3TY7540-0A 3TF55 3TY7552-0A
3TF55 3TY7550-0A 3TF56 3TY7562-0A
3TF56 3TY7560-0A 3TF57 3TY7572-0A
3TF57 3TY7570-0A 3TF68 Not Available
3TF68 3TY7680-0B1) 3TF69 Not Available
3TF69 3TY7690-0B1)
1) Vacuum bottles with mounting hardware.

SIRIUS 3TF Contactors and 3TH Control Relays
Spare parts
Auxiliary Contact Blocks

Auxiliary Contacts NO/Early NC/Early Auxiliary Contact Block Obsolete Current
Illustration Frame Size NO NC Make Break Mounting Position Position Location Catalog No Catalog
1 — — — — Top — 3TX4010-2A
— 1 — — — Top — 3TX4001-2A
3TF30 to 3TF35,
— — 1 — — Top — 3TX4010-4A
3TH3
— — — 1 — Top — 3TX4001-4A
3TF40 to 3TF43 Not Replaceable
3TF44 to 3TF68 1 1 — — 3 1 2 4 1 Left 3TY7561-1A 3TY7561-1AA00
1 1 — — 2 Right 3TY7561-1B 3TY7561-1AA00
1 — — 1 4 Right 3TY7561-1K 3TY7561-1EA00
3TF46 to 3TF68 1 1 — — 3 Left 3TY7561-1K 3TY7561-1KA00
3TY7561-1A 2nd Aux Contact Block 1 1 — — 4 Right 3TY7561-1L 3TY75611KA00
3TF46 to 3TF68 1 1 — — 3 Left 3TY7561-1U 3TY7561-1UA00
For Electronic Circuits 1 1 — — 4 Right 3TY7561-1V 3TY7561-1UA00
Mechanical Interlocks
Frame Frame
Size Catalog No List Price $ Size Catalog No
3TF42-43, 3TB42-43 24177000906 3TF44-54 3TX7466-1A
3TX7466-1A
Arc Chutes
Frame Frame
Type Size Catalog No List Price $ Size Catalog No
3TB40–43 Not Replaceable 3TB50 3TY6502-0A
3TB44 — 3TB52 3TY6522-0A
3TB 3TB46 — 3TB54 3TY6542-0A
3TB47 — 3TB56 3TY6562-0A

3TY6462-0A 3TB48 3TY6482-0A 3TB58 —
Control Relays, Type 3TH3, 3TH4 Coils, AC

Catalog No
Frame
Type Size 24V AC 120V AC 208V AC 220/240V AC 277V AC 480V AC 600V AC
3TH30–33
3TH 3TY7403-0AC2 3TY7403-0AK6 3TY7403-0AM1 3TY7403-0AP6 3TY7403-0AU1 3TY7403-0AV0 3TY7403-0AS0
3TH40–43
3TY7403-0AK6
Coils, DC
Catalog No
Frame
Type Size 12V DC 24V DC 42V DC 48V DC 110V DC 125V DC 240V DC
3TH30–33
3TH 3TY4803-0BA4 3TY4803-0BB4 3TY4803-0BD4 3TY4803-0BW4 3TY4803-0BF4 3TY4803-0BG4 3TY4803-0BQ4
3TH40–43
Auxiliary Contact Blocks1)

Auxiliary Contacts
Frame Normally Open/ Normally Closed/
Type Size NO NC Early Make Late Break Block Location Catalog No
1 — — — Top 3TX4010-2A
— 1 — — Top 3TX4001-2A
3TH 3TH3
— — 1 — Top 3TX4010-4A
— — — 1 Top 3TX4001-4A
Control Relays, Type 3TH8 Coils, AC

Catalog No List
Frame
Type Size 24V AC 120V AC 208V AC 220/240V AC 277V AC 480V AC 600V AC Price $
3TH 3TH80–83 3TY7403-0AC2 3TY7403-0AK6 3TY7403-0AM1 3TY7403-0AP6 3TY7403-0AU1 3TY7403-0AV0 3TY7403-0AS0
Coils, DC
Catalog No List
Frame
Type Size 12V AC 24V AC 42V AC 48V AC 110V AC 125V AC 240V AC Price $
3TH 3TH80–83 3TY4803-0BA4 3TY4803-0BB4 3TY4803-0BD4 3TY4803-0BW4 3TY4803-0BF4 3TY4803-0BG4 3TY4803-0BQ4
1) Maximum 4 blocks per relay.
Siemens Industry, Inc. Product Category: ICE 2/103

3RT contactors, 3-pole, sizes S00 to S3
3RT20 1. contactors (size S00),

AC and DC operation Motor protection Terminal designations acc. to EN 50 012 or DIN 50 005.
IEC 60 947, EN 60 947 3RU overload relays can be Contactors, EN 50012,
(VDE 0660), UL 508 mounted onto the 3RT contac- 1 aux. contact
tors for protection against over-
loads. The overload relays must
Design be ordered separately (see
section 3).
The 3RT contactors are suit-
able for use in any climate.
They are safe from touch to Surge suppression
DIN VDE 0106 Part 100. Ident. No. 10E Ident. No. 01
The 3RT contactors are avail- The 3RT contactors can be
able screw, spring-type, or retrofitted with RC elements,
varistors, diodes or diode Aux. switch blocks, Aux. switch blocks,
ring lug connections. assemblies (combination of an EN 50012, EN 50005,
An auxiliary contact is inte- interference suppression diode 4, 3 or 1 contacts 4 or 2 contacts
grated in the basic unit of size and a Zener diode for short trip-
S00 contactors. The basic units ping times) for suppressing
of sizes S0 to S3 only contain opening surges in the coil.
the main conducting paths.
The surge suppressors are
All the basic units can be plugged onto the front of size
extended with auxiliary switch S00 contactors. Space is pro-
blocks. Cabinet units with 2 NO Ident. No. 32E, Ident. No. 40, 31,
vided for them next to a snap-
+ 2 NC (terminal designations on auxiliary switch block. 23E, 22E, 11E 22, 20, 11, 02, 03, 04
acc. to EN 50 012) are avail-
able as of size S0; the auxiliary With all size S0 to S3 contac-
switch block is removable. tors, varistors and RC elements
Contactors, Contactors,
can be plugged on directly at EN 50012 EN 50005,
The size S3 contactors have the coil terminals, either on the 5, 4 or 2 5 or 3
removable box terminals for the top or underneath. Diode aux. contacts aux. contacts
main conductor connections. assemblies are available in two
Ring cable lugs or bars can different designs with different
thus also be connected. polarities. Depending on the
application, they can be
attached either only on the bot- NSB0_02062a
Contact reliability tom (assembly with circuit-
breaker) or only on the top
If voltages ≤ 110 V and currents Ident. No. 32E, Ident. No. 40, 31,
(assembly with overload relay).
≤ 100 mA are to be switched, 23E, 22E, 11E 22, 20, 11, 02, 03, 04
the auxiliary contacts of 3RT The plug-in direction of the
contactors and 3RH contac- diodes and diode assemblies is
tor relays should be used to determined by a coding with identification numbers
Auxiliary switch blocks
ensure good contact stability. device. Exceptions: 40 to 02. The identification
3RT29 26-1E.00 and The 3RT basic units can be numbers on the auxiliary switch
These auxiliary contacts are blocks apply only to the
3RT19 36-1T.00; in these cases extended with various auxiliary
suitable for electronic circuits attached auxiliary contacts.
the plug-in direction is identi- switch blocks, depending on
with currents ≥ 1 mA at a volt-
fied by "+" and "–". the application: Single or 2-pole auxiliary switch
age of 17 V.
Coupling relays are supplied Size S00 (3RT201) blocks that can be connected
either without surge suppres- on either the top or the bottom
Short-circuit protection of sion or with a varistor or diode Contactors with one NO contact facilitate quick, straightforward
contactors connected as standard, as the auxiliary contact and wiring, especially when assem-
according to the design. with either screw or bling feeders. These auxiliary
For the short-circuit protection spring-type connections, iden- switch blocks are only available
of contactors without an over- tification number 10E, can be with screw-type terminals.
load relay, see the technical Note extended to obtain contactors
data. The opening times of the NO with 2, 4 or 5 auxiliary contacts The solid-state compatible
contacts and the closing times in accordance with EN 50 012 3RH29 11-1NF.. auxiliary switch
For the short-circuit protection using auxiliary switch blocks. blocks for size S00 contactors
of the NC contacts increase if
of contactors with an overload The identification numbers 11E, contain two enclosed contact
the contactor coils are pro-
relay, see section 3. 22E, 23E and 32E on the auxil- elements. They are ideal for
tected against voltage peaks
(interference suppression iary switch blocks apply to the switching low voltages and cur-
diode 6 to 10 times; diode complete contactors. These rents (hard gold-plated con-
assemblies 2 to 6 times; varis- auxiliary switch blocks cannot tacts) or for use in dusty atmo-
tor +2 ms to 5 ms). be combined with contactors sphere. The contacts do not
that have an NC contact in their have positively-driven opera-
basic unit, identification num- tion.
ber 01, as these are coded. All the above-mentioned auxil-
All size S00 contactors with one iary switch variants can be
auxiliary contact, identification snapped into the location holes
number 10E or 01, and the con- on the front of the contactors.
tactors with 4 main contacts The auxiliary switch block has a
can be extended to obtain con- centrally positioned release
tactors with 3 or 5 auxiliary con- lever for disassembly.
tacts (contactors with 4 main
contacts: 2 or 4 auxiliary con-
tacts) according to EN 50 005
using auxiliary switch blocks

09/22/15 3RT1/2 contactors, 3-pole, sizes S00 to S3
3RT20 2. to 3RT10 4. contactors (sizes S0 to S3), 3RT20 2. to 3RT10 4. contactors (sizes S0 to S3),
single-pole auxiliary switch blocks, single-pole auxiliary switch blocks,
terminal designations acc. to EN 50 005 or EN 50 012. terminal designations acc. to EN 50 005 or EN 50 012.
1 NC
Sizes S0 to S3 (3RT202 to In addition, 2-pole auxiliary The laterally mountable auxil- Sizes S0 and S2 (3RT202
3RT104) switch blocks (screw-type ter- iary switch blocks to EN 50 012 and 3RT203)
minals) are provided for cable can only be used if no 4-pole
An extensive range of auxiliary Up to four auxiliary contacts can
entries from above or below in auxiliary switch blocks are
switch blocks is available for be mounted, whereby any
the style of a four-connector snapped onto the front. If sin-
various applications. The con- design of the auxiliary switch
block (feeder auxiliary switch). gle-pole auxiliary switch blocks
tactors themselves do not have blocks is permitted. If two 2-
are used in addition, the loca-
an integrated auxiliary conduct- If the available installation pole, laterally mounted, auxil-
tion digits on the contactor
ing path. depth is restricted, 2-pole auxiliary switch blocks are used, one
must be noted.
iary switch blocks (screw or must be mounted on the left and
The auxiliary switch variants
spring-type connections) can Two enclosed contact ele- one on the right for the sake of
are identical for all size S0 to
be mounted laterally on the left ments and two standard con- symmetry.
S3 contactors.
or right. tact elements are available for
Under certain circumstances,
One 4-pole or up to four single- the 3RH29 21-.FE22 solid-state
The auxiliary switch blocks more auxiliary contacts are
pole auxiliary switch blocks (with compatible auxiliary switch
designed for mounting onto the allowed for size S2 (please ask
screw or spring-type connec- block mountable on the front.
front can be disassembled with for details).
tions) can be snapped onto the The laterally mountable
the aid of a centrally positioned
front of the contactors. When the 3RH29 21-2DE11 solid-state With regard to 3RT13/23 and
release lever; the laterally
contactors are energized, the compatible auxiliary switch 3RT15/25 4-pole contactors,
mountable auxiliary switch
NC contacts open before the block contains 2 enclosed con- please refer to pages 2/12 to 2/14.
blocks can be removed easily
NO contacts close. tact elements (1 NO + 1 NC).
by pressing on the fluted grips.
The enclosed contact elements Sizes S3 to S12 (3RT104 to
The terminal designations of the
The terminal designations of are ideal for switching low volt- 3RT107)
single-pole auxiliary switch
the individual auxiliary switch ages and currents (hard gold-
blocks consist of location digits Up to eight auxiliary contacts
blocks comply with EN 50 005 plated contacts) or for use in a
on the basic unit and function can be mounted, whereby the
or EN 50 012, while those of the dusty atmosphere. The con-
digits on the auxiliary switch following points must be noted:
complete contactors with an tacts are positively driven.
blocks. • Of these eight auxiliary con-
auxiliary switch block with 2 NO
+ 2 NC comply with EN 50 012. tacts, no more than four must
be NC contacts.
• If laterally mounted auxiliary
switch blocks are used, they
must be symmetrical.
With regard to 3RT13 and 3RT15
4-pole contactors, please refer
to pages 2/11 to 2/13.

3RT1 contactors, 3-pole, sizes S6 to S12
Overview
Design
• 3RT10 contactors for switch- Operating mechanism Withdrawable coils Auxiliary contact complement
ing motors
Two types of solenoid-oper- To allow easy coil changing, for The contactors can be
• 3RT12 vacuum contactors for ated mechanism are available: example if the application is equipped with a maximum of
switching motors changed, the magnetic coil can 8 auxiliary contacts, with iden-
• Conventional operating mech-
• 3RT14 contactors for AC-1 anism be pulled out upwards without tical auxiliary switch blocks
applications tools after the release mecha- from S0 to S12. Of these, no
• Solid-state operating mechanism has been actuated, and more than 4 are permitted to be
nism can be replaced by any other NC contacts.
(with 3 performance levels) required coil of the same size. • 3RT10 and 3RT14 contac-
UC operation tors: auxiliary contacts
mounted laterally and on front
The contactors can be AC
(40 to 60 Hz) and DC driven. • 3RT12 vacuum contactors:
auxiliary contact mounted lat-
erally
Contactors with conventional operating mechanism
3RT1...-.A:
The magnetic coil is switched Multi-voltage range for the con- In addition, allowance is also contactor switches reliably and
on and off directly with the control supply voltage Us: made for a coil voltage toler- no thermal overloading occurs.
trol supply voltage Us via termi- Several closely adjacent control ance of 0.8 times the lower
nals A1/A2. supply voltages, available rated control supply voltage
around the world, are covered (Us min) and 1.1 times the upper
by just one coil, for example rated control supply voltage
UC 110-115-120-127 V or (Us max), within which the
UC 220-230-240 V.
Contactors with solid-state operating mechanism

The power required for reliable • Extended coil voltage toler- • Defined ON and OFF thresh- Electromagnetic compatibility
switching and holding is sup- ance 0.7 to 1.25 × Us: olds: (EMC)
plied selectively to the magnetic On account of the broad As of voltages ≥ 0.8 × Us min, The contactors with solid-state
coil by series-connected control range for the rated control the electronics reliably switch operating mechanism conform
electronics. supply voltage and the addi- the contactor on and as of to the requirements for opera-
tionally allowed coil voltage ≤ 0.5 × Us min it is reliably tion in industrial plants.
Features: tolerance of 0.8 × Us min to 1.1 switched off. The differential
× Us max, an extended coil volt- travel in the switching thresh- • Noise immunity
• Extended voltage range for – Burst (IEC 61 000-4-4): 4 kV
the control supply voltage Us: age tolerance of at least 0.7 to olds prevents chattering of
1.25 × Us, within which the the main contacts and hence – Surge (IEC 61 000-4-5): 4 kV
Compared with the conven- contactors will operate reli- increased wear or welding – Electrostatic discharge,
tional operating mechanism, ably, is available for the most when operated in weak, ESD (IEC 61 000-4-2): 8/15 kV
the solid-state operating common control supply volt- unstable networks. Similarly, – Electromagnetic field
mechanism covers an even ages of 24, 110 and 230 V. thermal overloading of the (IEC 61 000-4-3): 10 V/m
broader range of globally contactor coil is prevented if • Emitted interference
available control supply volt- • Bridging short-time voltage
dips: the voltage applied is too low Limiting value class A to
ages within one coil variant. – the contactor is not EN 55 011
For example, the globally Control voltage failures dip- switched on and is operated
available voltages 200-208- ping to 0 V (at A1/A2) are with overexcitation. Note:
220-230-240-254-277 V are bridged for up to approx. In connection with converters,
covered with the coil for UC 25 ms, therefore preventing • Low control power consump- the control cables should be
200 to 277 V (Us min to Us max). unintentional disconnection. tion when closing and in installed separately from the
closed state. load cables to the converter.
3RT1...-.N: for DC 24 V PLC output

2 control options:
• Control without an interface • Conventional control by
directly via a DC 24 V /≥ 30 applying the control supply
mA PLC output (EN 61 131- voltage at A1/A2 via a switch-
2). Connection via a 2-pole ing contact.
plug-in connection; the con-
nector, using screwless Note:
spring-force technology, is The sliding-dolly switch must
included in the scope of sup- be in the "PLC OFF" position
ply. The control supply volt- (= setting ex works).
age for supplying power to
the solenoid operating mech-
anism must be connected to
A1/A2. Sliding-dolly switch, must $ Sliding-dolly switch, must
Note: be in PLC "ON" position be in PLC "OFF" position
Before start-up, the sliding- Plug-in connection, 2-pole
dolly switch for PLC operation
must be moved to the "PLC ON"
position (setting ex works:
"PLC OFF").

Technical data
I/O configuration (hex) 7
ID code (hex)
Power supply
V
F
26.5 to 31.6 (in accordance with AS-Interface specification)
SIRIUS
AS-Interface current input
Contact loading at SF1/2
mA
mA
max. 20
3 to 6
Contactors for Switching Motors
Watchdog function (disconnection of outputs in event of AS-Interface fault) Built-in
3RT1 contactors, 3-pole, sizes S6 to S12
Indication LED Statuses Status description
During operation, the LEDs
Overview AS-Interface ON ON Flashing Flashing
on the contactor indicate the
states shown
Contactors opposite.
with green
solid-state operating mechanism Station address 0
red
3RT1...-.P: for DC 24 V PLC output or PLC relay output, with indication of remaining lifetime No AS-Interface communication
yellow
(Indication of remaining lifetime RLT: see 2/69.) AS-Interface communication OK
Diagnosing the contactors using•the application program
The remaining lifetime RLT 2 control options:
• Inputs status signal is available at • Outputs
• Contactor control without an • Contactor control via relay
Input signals terminals R1/R2
Device status via a floating interface directly via a
Output signals outputs,
Device e.g. by
status
relay contact (hard gold- DC 24 V "running"
/≥ 30 mA – PLC
DI0 "ready" 0 plated,
Device not ready/manual
enclosed) and can beoperation DO0 0 Contactor off
PLC output (EN 61 131-2) via – SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5
1 processed
Device ready/automatic
for exampleoperation
via 1 Contactor on
terminals IN+/IN-. via terminals H1/H2.
DI1 "running" 0 SIMOCODE-DP
Contactor off or PLC inputs DO1 0 Contact
– loading:
1 or elsewhere.
Contactor on 1 Us–/approx. 5 mA.
DI2 "remaining lifetime" 0 Permissible current
Remaining lifetime RLTcarrying
> 20 % DO2 0 –
When operated via SIMO-
1 capacity
Remainingoflifetime
relay output
RLT ≤ 20R1/
% 1CODE-DP,
– a communication
DI3 "free input" R2:
0 No input signal at SF1/2 DO3 0link –to PROFIBUS-DP is also
– Ie/AC-15/24 to 230 V: 3 A
1 Input signal at SF1/2 1provided.
–
– Ie/DC-13/24 V: 1 A
Indication of remaining lifetime (RLT)

• LED indicators
Main contactor contacts are operations
The following– these offerare
statuses no Advantages:
wearing parts and must be information
indicated byabout
LEDscontact wear
on the lat- • Signalling via a relay contact • Advice to change contacts at
replaced in good time when –erally
but instead
mounted entails determin-
electronics or AS-i when a remaining life- the appropriate time.
they reach the end of their ser- ing and evaluating the actual
module: time of 20module
Electronics % is reached,
of 3RT1 i. e. • Optimum utilization of the
vice life. The degree of erosion progress
– Contactorof erosion of each of
ON (energized when
...-.P the contact material is
contactor contact material.
of the contact material and thestate):
three main contacts by 80 % worn.
Plug-in connection, 7-pole • Visual inspection of the condi-
hence the electrical endurance electronic
Green LED means; the results
("ON") S1•Changeover
Additional switch
visual from
indication
auto- of tion of contacts no longer
(= number of make-break oper- are stored, and
– Indication a warninglife-
of remaining is various
matic levels
control of erosion
via PLC semi- via necessary.
ations)
To supplyvaries,
powerdepending
to the solenoidon time (see
issued when2/69)
specified limits are conductor output to local
LEDs on the laterally mounted • Reduction of ongoing operat-
the loading,
operating utilizationand
mechanism category,
the reached. Even if the control control
electronics modules when a ing costs.
duty type lifetime
remaining etc. Routine inspec-
indication, supply voltage at A1/A2 fails, S2 Local controllifetime
remaining option of 60 % Electronics module of 3RT1
•...-.P
Optimum planning of mainte-
the control supply
tions/visual checks voltage Us
by mainte- the stored data is not lost. After contactor
(green), 40 % (orange) and nance measures.
Plug-in connection, 7-pole
must
nance bestaff
run are
to terminals
needed in A1/A2
order the main contacts are replaced, 20 % (red) is reached. • Avoidance of unforeseen
Possibility of switching from auto-
of
tothe laterally the
determine mounted
state of elec-
the measurement of the remaining S1 Changeover switch from auto-
plantcontrol,
stoppages.
matic control to local control via matic e.g. via
tronics module. The
main contacts. The control
"remaining lifetime must be reset with the terminals H1/H2, i.e. automatic SIMOCODE-DP or PLC relay
inputs
lifetimeofindication"
the contactor are takes
facility "RESET" button (hold down the control via a PLC or SIMOCODE- output to local control
brought out to a 7-pole
over this task. This does plug-in
not RESET button for approx. 2 DP/PROFIBUS-DP can be deac- S2 Local control option
connection; the connector,
comprise counting the make- sec. with a ball-point pen or tivated, for example during
using
break screwless spring-force similar tool). start-up or in the event of a
technology, is included in the
fault, and the contactor can be
scope of supply.
controlled manually.
3RT1...-.Q: communication-capable with integrated AS-Interface and indication of remaining lifetime

3RT12 vacuum contactors Inputs and outputs are brought Control circuit:
out to a 10-pole plug-in connec-
In contrast with the 3RT10 con- They are therefore particularly Notes on operation:
• Contactor control through This additional equipment is
tion; the connectors (6-pole for
tactors – the main contacts oper- well suited to frequent switching
external connection and 4-pole
– Switching motors
AS-Interface with rated
via terminals not required for operation in
in an
jogging/mixed operation, AS-i+/AS-i–. Terminals
voltagesAS-i+
ate in air under atmospheric for AS-Interface) using for operational Ue circuits with converters. It
conditions – the contact gaps example in crane control sys- and> AS-i–
500 V:are each brought might be damaged by the
screwless spring-force technol-
of the 3RT12 vacuum contac- tems. outIntwice
ordertotoa damp
4-poleovervolt-
connec- voltage peaks and harmonics
ogy, are included in the scope
tors are contained in hermeti- torages
separate
and from thethe
protect other
motor generated.
ofAdvantages:
supply.
cally enclosed vacuum contact control
windinginputs and areagainst
insulation jum-
• Very long electrical endurance – Switching DC voltage:
tubes. Neither arcs nor arcing pered.
multiple reignition when
gases are produced. The partic- • •LED
High short-time current-carry-
indicators: switching off three-phase
Vacuum contactors are basi-
ing capacity for heavy starting Advantages: cally unsuitable for switching
ular benefit of 3RT12 vacuum •The
Nofollowing
open arcs,statuses are
no arcing motors,
– The it is recommended
AS-Interface cable is to DC voltage.
contactors, however, is that indicated
gases, i.e.by no
LEDs on the clear-
minimum lat- fit the
not contactors
interrupted on the
when the out-
their electrical endurance is at erally
ances mounted electronics
from earthed parts going sideis(T1/T2/T3)
connector removed with the $ Electronics module of 3RT1
least twice as long as that of module:
required either 3RT19
– The 66-1PV.remains
contactor surge sup- ...-.Q contactor
3RT10 contactors. •– Longer
Contactor ON (energized
maintenance intervals pressionofmodule
capable – RC
operation viavaris-
the % Plug-in connection, 6-pole
state):
• Increased plant availability tor – control
local (accessory).
inputs via its & Plug-in connection, 4-pole
Green LED ("ON") own 6-pole connector. S1 Changeover switch from auto-
– Automatic/local control: matic control, e.g. via AS-
Green LED ("AUTO") • Control signals via AS-i:
Interface, to local control
– Bus status: – Contactor ON/OFF · S1 open: automatic mode
Green/red dual LED ("AS-i") • Status signals via AS-i: S2 Local control option
– Remaining lifetime RLT (see – Contactor ON/OFF
separate description 2/16) – Automatic/local control Possibility of switching from
To supply power to the solenoid – Remaining lifetime RLT automatic control to to local
operating mechanism and the – Signal via free input, e.g. control via terminals H1/H2/H3,
• AS-Interface address jack
remaining lifetime indication, overload relay tripped. i.e. automatic control via AS-
"ADDR":
the control supply voltage Us Interface can be deactivated, for
must be run to terminals A1/A2 The contactor address can be example during start-up up or in
of the laterally mounted elec- assigned in the built-in state. the event of a fault, and the
tronics module. The contactor contactor can be controlled
itself is controlled via the inte- manually.
grated AS-Interface.

Contactor assemblies
for WYE-delta starting 10/22/15
Overview
The contactor assemblies for
star-delta starting can be
ordered as follows:
• Sizes S00-S0 as assemblies. (see pages 2/47-2/48)
• Sizes S2-S12 as components for customer assembly
Calculated Size Accessories for

horsepower customer assembly
ratings
at 460 V AC
Operat. Motor current Line/delta WYE contactor Time-delay relay Installation kit A
current Ie contactor double
HP A A infeed
30 50 9.5 ... 13.8 S2-S2-S0 3RT20 28 3RT20 26 3RP15 74-1N.30 3RA19 33-2C 3)
12.1 ... 17.2
15.5 ... 21.5
19 ... 27.6
24.1 ... 34
31 ... 43
37.9 ... 55.2
48.3 ... 65 3RT29 35
50 80 62.1 ... 77.8 S2-S2-S2 3RT10 34 3RA19 33-2B 3)
60 86 69 ... 86 3RT20 36
75 115 31 ... 43.1 S3-S3-S2 3RT10 44 3RT10 35 3RP15 74-1N.30 3RA19 43-2C 3)
37.9 ... 55.2
48.3 ... 69
62.1 ... 77.6
77.6 ... 108.6
100 150 98.3 ... 129.3 3RT10 45 3RT10 36
120.7 ... 150
125 160 86 ... 160 S6-S6-S3 3RT10 54 3RT10 44 3RP15 74-1N.30

150 195 86 ... 195
190 230 86 ... 230 3RT10 55 3RT10 45
200 280 86 ... 280 3RT10 56 3RT10 46
250 350 95 ... 350 S10-S10-S6 3RT10 64 3RT10 54 3RP15 74-1N.30
300 430 95 ... 430 3RT10 65 3RT10 56
400 540 347 ... 540 S12-S12-S10 3RT10 75 3RT10 64 3RP15 74-1N.30
450 610 347 ... 610
500 690 347 ... 690 3RT10 65
650 850 347 ... 850 3RT10 76 3RT10 66
For
For accessories,
accessories,see
seepage 2/83.
page 2/50. 1) The installation kit contains mechanical inter- 2) The installation kit contains 5 connecting clips;
For circuit
For circuitdiagrams,
diagrams,see
see page
page 2/162.
2/200. lock; 3 connecting clips; wiring connectors on wiring connectors on the top (connection
the top (connection between line contactor and between line contactor and delta contactor) and
delta contactor) and the bottom (connection the bottom (connection between delta contactor
between delta contactor and star contactor); and WYE contactor); star jumper.
WYE jumper.

SIRIUS Contactor Assemblies for Switching Motors
for WYE-delta starting
Overload relay, thermal Overload relay, solid-state
Installation kit B WYE jumper Baseplates Range of Order No. Range of Order No.
for single infeed overload relay, overload relay, overload relay, overload relay,
thermal [A] thermal solid-state [A] solid-state
3RA19 33-3D 4) 3RT19 26-4BA31 3RA19 32-2E 5.5 ... 8 3RU11 36-1HB0 – –
7 ... 10 3RU11 36-1JB0 6 ... 25 3RB20 36-1QB0
9 ... 12.5 3RU11 36-1KB0
11 ... 16 3RU11 36-4AB0
14 ... 20 3RU11 36-4BB0
18 ... 25 3RU11 36-4DB0
22 ... 32 3RU11 36-4EB0 13 ... 50 3RB20 36-1UB0
28 ... 40 3RU11 36-4FB0
3RT19 36-4BA31 3RA19 32-2F 36 ... 45 3RU11 36-4GB0
40 ... 50 3RU11 36-4HB0
3RA19 43-3D 4) 3RT19 36-4BA31 3RA19 42-2E 18 ... 25 3RU11 46-4DB0 13 ... 50 3RB20 46-1UB0
22 ... 32 3RU11 46-4EB0
28 ... 40 3RU11 46-4FB0
36 ... 45 3RU11 46-4HB0
45 ... 63 3RU11 46-4JB0 25 ... 100 3RB20 46-1EB0
57 ... 75 3RU11 46-4KB0
70 ... 90 3RU11 46-4LB0
3RA19 53-3D 5) 3RT19 46-4BA31 3RA19 52-2E – – 50 ... 200 3RB20 56-1FG0
3) Installation kit contains wiring connector on the 5) A mechanical interlock adapter, 3RA1954-2C, is tured, to allow the mechanical interlock to
bottom (connection between delta contactor required to use the standard 3RA1954-2A operate.
and WYE contactor) and WYE jumper. mechanical interlock for the AC version of the 6) Only use wiring connector on the top from
4) Wiring connector on top from reversing contac- S6-S6-S3 WYE-Delta starter. The S6-S6-S3 reversing contactor assembly (note conductor
tor assembly (note conductor cross-sections). WYE-Delta DC version would require a special cross-sections); order WYE jumper in addition.
custom build spacer, which is not manufac-

The ratings given in the above Motor protection
Application Design
table are only applicable to mo-
WYE-delta starting can only be tors with a starting current ratio Components for customer as- Overload relays or thermistor
used either if the motor normally of IA ≤8.4 × IN and using either sembly motor protection tripping units
operates in a d (delta) connec- a 3RT19 16-2G or 3RT19 26-2G can be used for overload pro-
tion or starts softly or if the load Installation kits with wiring con- tection.
solid-state time-delay auxiliary nectors and, if necessary,
torque during * starting is low switch block with a WYE-delta The overload relay can be ei-
and does not increase sharply. mechanical connectors are
function or a 3RP1574 WYE- available for contactor assem- ther mounted onto the line con-
On the *step the motors can delta time-delay relay with a tactor or separately fitted. It
carry approximately 50 % (class blies for WYE-delta starting.
dead interval of approximately Contactors, overload relays, must be set to 0.58 times the
KL 16) or 30 % (class KL 10) of 50 ms on reversing. rated motor current.
their rated torque; the starting star-delta time-delay relays and
torque is approximately 1/3 of For the circuit diagrams for the auxiliary switches for the elec-
that during direct on-line start- main and control circuits, see trical interlock – if required also
page 2/161. The size selected feeder terminals, mechanical Surge suppression
ing. The starting current is
approximately 2 to 2.7 times the for the installation kits for WYE- interlocks 1) and baseplates –
Sizes S00 to S3
rated motor current. delta starting is determined by must be ordered separately.
the line contactor. The wiring installation kits for All contactor assemblies can
The changeover from * to d be fitted with RC elements,
sizes S00 and S0 contain the
must not be effected until the varistors or diode assemblies
top and bottom main conduct-
motor has run up to rated for damping opening surges in
ing path connections between
speed. Drives which require this the coil.
the line and delta contactors
changeover to be performed
(top) and between the delta As with the individual contac-
earlier are unsuitable for WYE-
and WYE contactors (bottom). tors, the surge suppressors can
delta starting.
In the case of sizes S2 to S12 either be plugged onto the top
only the bottom main conduct- of the contactors (S00) or fitted
ing path connection between onto the coil terminals on the
the delta and WYE contactors is top or bottom (S0 to S3).
included in the wiring connec-
Sizes S6 to S12
tor, owing to the larger conduc-
tor cross-section at the infeed. The contactors are fitted with
varistors as standard.
1) Exception:
The mechanical interlock between the delta and
WYE contactors is included in the installation kit
for size S00 contactor assemblies.

3RA24 Contactor Assemblies for Wye-DeltaContactor
SIRIUS Starting Assemblies for Switching Motors

16
6
3
7 2
NSB0_02066a
3

Q111) Q132) Q122)
16 Three-phase feeder terminal3) 3RA29 13-3K 4
2/83 1 2 3 Contactor, 5.5 kW 3RT20 15 3RT20 15 3RT20 15 2/8
1 2 3 Contactor, 7.5 kW 3RT20 17 3RT20 17 3RT20 15 2/8
1 2 3 Contactor, 11 kW 3RT20 18 3RT20 18 3RT20 16 2/8
4 5 6 Assembly kit 3RA29 13-2BB1 2/83
comprising
4 Mechanical interlock
5 4 connecting clips
6 Wiring modules on the top and bottom
for connecting the main current paths
7 Function modules 3RA28 16-0EW20 2/27
for wye-delta starting
1) Use version with 1 NO. Note:
2) Use version with 1 NC.
3) Part
When the function modules for contactor assemblies for wye-
16 can only be mounted with contactors with screw terminal. delta starting are used, no other auxiliary switches are allowed
to be mounted on the basic units.

Contactors
3RA23, 3RA24 and Contactor
Assemblies
Contactor Assemblies for Switching Motors
3RA24 Contactor Assemblies for Wye-Delta Starting SIRIUS
16
6
17
3
1
7
2
NSB0_02067b
3

Q11 Q13 Q12
16 Three-phase feeder terminal1) 3RV29 25-5AB 3/43
2/83 1 2 3 Contactor, 11 kW 3RT20 24 3RT20 24 3RT20 24 3/10
2/8
17 Three-phase busbar1) 3RV19 15-1AB 3/43
1/8 1 2 3 Contactors, 15/18.5 kW 3RT20 26 3RT20 26 3RT20 24 3/10
2/8
1 2 3 Contactor, 22 kW 3RT20 27 3RT20 27 3RT20 26 2/8
3/10
4 5 6 Assembly kit 3RA29 23-2BB1 2/83
3/43
5 Connecting clips
6 Wiring modules on the top and bottom
for connecting the main current paths
7 Function modules 3RA28 16-0EW20 3/44
2/27
for wye-delta starting
1) The parts 16 and 17 can only be mounted with contactors with screw Note:
terminal.
When the function modules for contactor assemblies for wye-
delta starting are used, no other auxiliary switches are allowed
to be mounted on the basic units.


Size S2-S2-S0 · up to 65 A, 30 HP
Components to be ordered separately:

are not shown.

K1 K3 K2
4 Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable, 1 2 3 Contactors,
depth must be adapted 50/60 A, 30 HP 3RT10 34 3RT10 34 3RT20 26 2/8
K3: 1.5 mm; K2: 0 mm 3RA19 24-2B 2/80 8 Time-delay relay,
7 Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable 3RP15 74-1N.30 Sec. 11
mountable on the front 3RT19 26-2G... 2/70 9 Auxiliary switch block with one unassigned
15 Auxiliary switch block, NO contact 3RH19 21-1CA10 2/67
laterally mountable 3RH19 21-1EA.. 2/68 10 Auxiliary switch block for local control
16 Surge suppressor 3RT19 26-1.... 2/73 2 units 3RH19 21-1CA01
3RT19 36-1.... 2/73 3 units 3RH19 21-1CA10 2/67
17 3-phase feeder terminal 3RV19 35-5A 2/83 11 Baseplate 3RA19 32-2E 2/83
18 3-phase busbar 3RV19 35-1A 1/8 6 Installation kit 3RA19 33-2C 2/83
19 Push-in lug 2) for time-delay The installation kit contains the WYE jumper on the top
relay for screw mounting 3RP19 03 Sec.11 and the wiring jumper on the bottom for connecting the
main conducting paths.
For overview, see page 2/110. 1) Not included in scope of supply of complete 2) Possible in principle.
For circuit diagrams, see page 2/200. contactor assemblies; available as accessory. If a solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block
is mounted onto the front of K3, an ordinary
auxiliary switch block can only be mounted onto
the side.


are not shown.

K1 K3 K2
4 Mechanical interlock, lateral3RA19 24-2B 2/80 1 2 3 Contactors,
7 Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block, 80 A, 50 HP 3RT10 35 3RT10 35 3RT10 34 2/8
mountable on the front 3RT19 26-2G... 2/70 1 2 3 Contactors,
12 Mechanical interlock,
mountable on the front 3RA19 24-1A 86 A, 60 HP 3RT10 36 3RT10 36 3RT10 34 2/8
2/68
8 Time-delay relay,
lateral 3RP15 74-1N.30 Sec. 11
lateral 3RH19 21-1EA.. 2/68
9 Auxiliary switch block with one unassigned
16 Surge suppressor 3RT19 26-1.... 2/73
3RT19 36-1.... NO contact 3RH19 21-1CA10 2/67
2/73
17 3-phase feeder terminal
10 Auxiliary switch block for local control
3RV19 35-5A 2/83 2 units 3RH19 21-1CA01
18 3-phase busbar 3RV19 35-1A 1/8 3 units 3RH19 21-1CA10 2/67
19 Push-in lug 2) for time-delay relay 11 Baseplate 3RA19 32-2F 2/83
for screw mounting 3RP19 03 Sec. 11
6 Installation kit 3RA19 33-2B 2/83
The installation kit contains the WYE jumper on top and
the wiring jumper on bottom for connecting the main
conducting paths.
For overview, see page 2/110. 1) Not included in scope of supply of complete 2) Possible in principle. If a solid-state time-delay
For circuit diagrams, see page 2/200. contactor assemblies; available as accessory. auxiliary switch block is mounted onto the front
of K3, a standard auxiliary switch block can only
be mounted onto the side.



are not shown.

K1 K3 K2
4 Mechanical interlock, lateral, 1 2 3 Contactors,
depth must be adapted 115 A, 75 HP 3RT10 44 3RT10 44 3RT10 35 2/8
K3: 0 mm; K2: 27.5 mm 3RA19 24-2B 2/80
1 2 3 Contactors,
7 Solid-state time-delay auxilary switch block,
mountable on the front 3RT19 26-2G... 2/70 150 A, 100 HP 3RT10 45 3RT10 45 3RT10 36 2/8
15 Auxiliary switch block, lateral3RH19 21-1EA.. 2/68 8 Time-delay relay, lateral 3RP15 74-1N.30 Sec. 11
16 Surge suppressor 3RT19 . 6-1.... 2/73 9 Auxiliary switch block with one unassigned
19 Push-in lug 2) for time-delay relay NO contact 3RH19 21-1CA10 2/67
for screw mounting 3RP19 03 Sec. 11 10 Auxiliary switch block for local control
2 units 3RH19 21-1CA01
3 units 3RH19 21-1CA10 2/67
11 Baseplate 3RA19 42-2E 2/83
6 Installation kit 3RA19 43-2C 2/83
The installation kit contains the WYE jumper on the top and the wir-
ing jumper on the bottom for connecting the main conducting
For overview, see page 2/110. 1) Not included in scope of supply of the complete
For circuit diagrams, see page 2/200. contactor assemblies; available as an accessory.
2) Possible in principle.If a solid-state time-delay aux-
iliary switch block is mounted onto the front of K3,
a standard auxiliary switch block can only be
mounted onto the side.
Contactors and Contactor Assemblies 3RH Contactor Relays
Control Relays, Coupling Relays SIRIUS
3RH21 control relays,
size S00 with 4 or 8 contacts
3RH2 contactor relays, 4- and 8-pole
AC and DC operation In addition, fully mounted 3RH22 8-pole contactor relays are
available; the mounted 4-pole auxiliary switch block in the 2nd
IEC 60947, EN 60947. tier is not removable. The terminal designations are according to
The 3RH2 contactor relays have screw,
These ring lug terminal
auxiliary or
switch blocks EN 50011.
Application terminals. Four contacts are available in the basic
spring-type Overview
(3RH29 11-1GA ..) cannot be These versions are built according to special Swiss regulations
unit.
AC and DC operation combined with control relays SUVA and are distinguished
3RH2. contactor relays acc. to ENexternally
50 011 andby a red labeling plate.
with identification numbers 31E EN 50 005
The 3RH2
IEC 60 947,contactor
EN 60 947relays are suitable for use in any climate. Of the auxiliary contacts (integrated plus mountable) possible
and 22E; they are coded.
They
(VDE are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The devices with
0660) on the device,
ring lug terminal connection comply All with
control relaysofwith
degree 4 con-
protection Control relay, EN no more than four NC contacts are permitted.
50 011,
tacts in accordance with 4 contacts
IP20
Designwhen fitted with the related terminal cover.
EN 50 011, identification num-
Contact
The 3RH21 reliability
control relays are bers 40E to 22E, can be Contactor relay, EN 50 011,
suitable for use in any climate. extended with auxiliary switch
3
4 contacts
High contact
They are stability
safe from at to
touch low voltages and40currents,
blocks suitable
to 02 to obtain for
control
solid-state circuits
DIN VDE 0106 Part 100. with currents ≥ 1 mA at
relays a voltage
with of 17 V.in
6 or 8 contacts
accordance with EN 50 005.
Surge suppression
The 3RH21 control relays have
The identification numbers on Ident. No. 40E Ident. No. 31E, 22E
screw, spring style or ring lug
RC elements,Four
connections. varistors,
contacts are or the
diodes auxiliary
diode switch blocks
assemblies (combina-
tion of a diode
available in the and Zener diode)apply
basica unit. only
can be to the attached
plugged onto all auxil-
con-
iary switch
tactor relays from the front for damping blocks.
opening surges in the Aux. switch blocks,
Ident. No. 40E Aux. switch blocks,
Ident. No. 31E, 22E
coil. Thereliability
plug-in direction is determined by a coding device. 4 contacts 4 or 2 contacts
Contact
Surge suppression
Note:
High contact stability at low Aux. switch blocks, Aux. switch blocks,
The OFF-delay
voltages of the NO
and currents, contact RC
suitable andelements, varistors,
the ON-delay diodes
of the EN 50 011, EN 50 005,
NC contact are
for electronic increased
circuits or diode coils
with if the contactor assemblies (combina-
are attenuated 4 contacts 4 or 2 contacts
≥ 1 mA at
currents voltage
against a voltage
peaks tion of a diode
of suppression
(noise diodeand
6 toa10
Zener
times;
diode) can be plugged onto all
17 V. assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor Ident. No. 80E, Ident. No. 40, 31,
diode +2 to 5 ms).
control relays from the front for 71E, 62E, 53E, 44E 22, 20, 11, 02
Auxiliary switch blocks damping opening surges in the
Auxiliary switch blocks coil. The plug-in direction is
The 3RH2 contactor
The 3RH21 relays
control relays cancan bedetermined
expanded by byaup to four
coding Control relay, Ident. No. 80E,
y , Control relay, Ident. No. 40, 31,
contacts
be expanded by the
by addition
up to fourofcon-
snap-on auxiliary switch blocks.
device. EN 50 011 71E, 62E, 53E, 44E
Hilfsschütze
EN 50EN50
005, 005,
tacts by the addition of mount- DIN 22, 20, 11, 02
The auxiliary switch block can easily be snapped onto the front 8 contacts 88oroder
6 contacts
6 Kontakte
able auxiliary switch blocks. Note block has a centrally po-
of the contactors. The auxiliary switch
The auxiliary
sitioned switch
release block
lever for can
disassembly.
The opening times of the NO Contactor relay, Contactor relay,
Hilfsschütze
easily be snapped onto the contacts and the closing times EN 50 011 EN
The
front contactor relays
of the relays. Thewith 4 contacts
auxiliary according to ENincrease
50011,if DIN50EN50
005,005,
of the NC contacts 8 contacts 88oroder
6 contacts
6 Kontakte
with the identification
switch block has a centrally number 40E, can
the be extended
relay with 80E to
coils are protected
44E auxiliary
positioned switch
release blocks
lever to obtain
for dis- contactor
against voltagerelays
peakswith
(sup-
NSB00067
assembly.
8 contacts according to EN 50011.pression The identification
diode 6 to 10 numbers
times, Ident. No. 80E, Ident. No.40, 31,
80E to 44E relays
The control on thewithauxiliary
4 con-switch diode
blocksassemblies
apply to the2 tocomplete
6 times, 71E, 62E, 53E, 44E 22, 20, 11, 02
contactors. These auxiliary
tacts in accordance with switchvaristor
blocks +2
(3RH29
ms to 11–1GA..)
5 ms).
NSB0_02105
cannot
EN 50 011, be combined with contactor relays with identification
with the identifica-
numbers
tion number 31E andcan
40E, 22E;
be they are coded. Ident. No. 80E,
extended with 80E to 44E auxi- 71E, 62E, 53E, 44E
All contactor relays with
liary switch blocks to obtain 4 contacts according to EN 50011, iden-
tification
control relays numbers
with 840E to 22E,
contacts in can be extended with auxiliary
switch
accordance blocks 40EN
with to 02
50 to
011.obtain contactor relays with 6 or 8 con-
tacts in accordance
The identification with EN
numbers 80E50005. The identification numbers
on the auxiliary
to 44E switchswitch
on the auxiliary blocks apply only to the attached auxiliary
switch blocks.
blocks apply to the complete
relays (see illustration along-
Order
side). No. scheme
Digit of the Order No. 1st - 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12t 13th 14th 15th 16th
3rd h
3RH24 latched control relays, size S00 @@@ @ @ @ @ – @ @ @ @ @ – @ @ @ @
SIRIUS contactor relays 3RH
2nd generation
Application 2
Device
AC andtype
DC (e. g. 1 = 4-pole contactorThe
operation relay, 3 = 8-pole
terminal contactor relay)
designations com- @ of auxiliary con-
The number from the front for damping
Number
IEC of NO
60 947, 60 947 (e. g. 2 = 2 NO)ply with EN 50 011.
ENcontacts tacts can be@extended by opening surges.
(VDE 0660)
Number of NC contacts (e. g. 2 = 2 NC)The relay coil and the coil of the means of auxiliary
@ switch The control relay can also
release blocks (up to 4 poles).
Connection type (1 = screw, 2 = spring, 4 = ringsolenoid
lug) are both @ be switched on and released
designed for continuous duty. RC elements, varistors, diodes manually.
Operating range / solenoid coil circuit (e. g. A = AC standard / without)
or diode assemblies can be @
Rated control supply voltage (e. g. K6 = 110/120 V, 50/60 Hz ) plugged onto both coils @ @
No significance @
Special version @ @ @ @
Example 3RH 2 1 2 2 – 1 A K 6 0
Note:
The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the
purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the catalog in the Selection and ordering data.
order numbers.

3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors, 3-pole
Design Surge suppression

EN 60 947-4-1 Main contacts Auxiliary contacts Control circuit
(VDE 0660 Part 102). Contact erosion indication The terminal designations com- Protection of the coil circuits
The 3TF contactors are suitable with 3TF68/69 vacuum con- ply with EN 50 012. against surges:
for use in any climate. They are tactors When the contactors are ener- AC operation
safe from touch according to The contact erosion of the vac- gized, the NC contacts open • fitted with varistors as stand-
DIN VDE 0106 Part 100. Termi- uum interrupters can be moni- before the NO contacts close. ard.
nal covers (see accessories) tored in the closed position by
may have to be fitted onto the Contact reliability DC operation
means of three white double
connecting bars, depending on slides on the contactor base. The auxiliary contacts are Retrofitting options:
the configuration with other extremely reliable and as such • varistors.
devices. The vacuum interrupter must be are suitable for electronic cir-
replaced if the distance indi- cuits
cated by one of the double
• with currents 1 mA,
slides is less than 0.5 mm while
the contactor is in the closed • at voltages greater than 17 V.
position.
It is advisable to replace all
three interrupters in order to
ensure maximum reliability.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

3TF68/69..-.C contactors for AC
Contactor Rated control supply Overvoltage type Severity to Surge strength
operation are equipped with an Type voltage Us (IEC 60 801) IEC 60 801
electronically controlled sole-
noid mechanism with a high 3TF68 44-.C.., 110 V ... 132 V Burst 3 2 kV
level of immunity to interference 3TF69 44-.C.. Surge 4 6 kV
(see table opposite).
200 V ... 276 V Burst 4 4 kV
Note: Surge 4 5 kV
In operation in installations
380 V ... 600 V Burst 4 4 kV
where it is not possible to Surge 4 6 kV
observe the emitted interfer-
ence limits, e.g. as an output
contactor in static frequency
changers, use of 3TF68/69..-.Q
contactors (NS E catalogue,
available in German) is recom-
mended, without a main con-
ductor path circuit (for further
information refer also to the
description below).
Circuit of the main conducting paths Short-circuit protection

of contactors
An integrated RC varistor circuit The contactors can therefore It might be damaged by the For assembling fuseless load
in the main conducting paths of be used without reservation for voltage peaks and harmonics feeders, please select a circuit-
the contactors damps the rate all AC switching applications, generated. This may also cause breaker/contactor combination
of rise of switching overvoltages including three-phase motors phase-to-phase short-circuits in according to the brochure enti-
to uncritical values. Multiple with the demanding AC-4 utili- the contactors. tled "Verbraucherabzweige in
restriking of the switching arcs zation category. Remedy: Order the special sicherungsloser Bauweise",
is thereby prevented. Important note contactor design without surge Order No. E20001-P285-A726
The operator of an installation suppression. In this case the (available in German only).
The surge suppression circuit is
can thus assume that the dan- not necessary when 3TF68/69 Order No. must be supple-
ger to the motor winding arising contactors are used in circuits mented with "-Z" and the order
from switching overvoltages with e.g. d.c. choppers, fre- code "A02". No additional
with a high rate of rise is ruled quency converters or variable- charge is made.
out. speed drives.

Accessories for 3RT / 3RH Contactors SIRIUS
Solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch box
The timer module, which is The contactor on which the A varistor is integrated in the The OFF-delay variant operates
available in "ON-delay" and solid-state, time-delay auxiliary timer module for damping without an auxiliary power sup-
"OFF-delay" designs, allows switch block is mounted oper- opening surges in the contactor ply. Minimum ON period:
time-delayed functions up to ates without a delay. coil. 200 ms.
100 s (3 distinct delay ranges). The solid-state, time-delay aux- A single-pole auxiliary switch
It contains a relay with one NO Size S00 (3RT201) iliary switch block cannot be block can be snapped onto the
contact and one NC contact; The solid-state, time-delay aux- mounted on size S00 coupling front of the contactor in addition
the relay is switched either after iliary switch block is fitted onto relays. to the timer module.
an ON-delay or after an OFF- the front of the contactor. The The timer module has no inte-
delay. timer module is supplied with Sizes S0 to S12 (3RT202 to grated components for damp-
The timer module with a WYE- power directly by plug-in con- 3RT107) ing opening surges.
DELTA function is equipped tacts via the coil terminals of The solid-state, time-delay aux-
with one delayed and one the contactor, in parallel with iliary switch block is fitted onto
instantaneous NO contact, with A1/A2. The time function is acti- the front of the contactor.
an interval time of 50 ms vated by closing the contactor
between the two (see diagram). on which the auxiliary switch The timer module is supplied
The delay time of the NO con- block is mounted. The OFF- with power via two terminals
tact can be set between 1.5 s delay variant operates without (A1/A2); the time delay of the
and 30 s. an auxiliary power supply. Mini- auxiliary switch block can be
mum ON period: 200 ms. activated either by a parallel
link to any contactor coil or by
WYE-delta function any power source.
Solid-state time-delay block

with semiconductor output
The timer module, which is Size S00 (3RT201) Sizes S0 to S3 (3RT202 to #
available in "ON-delay" and The variant for size S00 contac- 3RT107)
"OFF-delay" with auxiliary tors is fitted onto the front of the The time-delay block for size S0
power supply designs, allows contactor (with the supply volt- to S3 contactors is plugged into
time-delayed functions up to age switched off) and then slid coil terminals A1 and A2 on top
100 s (3 distinct delay ranges). into its latched position; at the of each contactor; the time-
Contactors fitted with a time- same time, the time-delay relay delay relay is connected both
delay block close or open after is connected by means of plug- electrically and mechanically
a delay according to the set in contacts to coil terminals A1 by means of pins.
time. and A2 of the contactor. Any $
A varistor is integrated in the
The ON-delay variant of the contactor coil terminals which timer module for damping
time-delay relay is connected in are not required are sealed off opening surges in the contactor
series with the contactor coil; by means of covers on the coil.
terminal A1 of this coil must not enclosure of the time-delay
be connected. block, to prevent them from
With the OFF-delay variant of being connected inadvertently Configuration note
the time-delay relay, the con- (for circuit diagrams, see page Activation of loads parallel to
tactor coil is contacted directly 2/149). the start input is not permitted
via the relay; terminals A1 and A varistor is integrated in the with AC operation (see #). Time-delay block
A2 of the coil must not be con- timer module for damping Contactor
The 3RT19 16-2D .../3RT19 26-
nected. opening surges in the contactor 2D ... time-delay blocks with an
The time-delay relays are suit- coil. OFF delay have a voltage-car-
able for both AC and DC opera- The solid-state, time-delay rying start input B1. This means
tion. block cannot be mounted on that if there is a parallel load on
size S00 coupling relays. terminal B1, activation can be
simulated with AC voltage. In
this case, the additional load (e.
g. contactor K3) must be wired
as shown in $.

SIRIUS Accessories for 3RT / 3RH Contactors
3-phase EMC interference suppression module
for size S00 contactor
A so-called backr-e.m.f. (elec- The connection between the

tromotive force) is produced main conducting path and the
when motors or various induc- EMC interference suppression
tive loads are turned off. Volt- module enables contact arcing,
age peaks of up to 4 000 V may which is responsible for contact
occur as a result, with a fre- erosion and the majority of
quency spectrum from 1 kHz to clicking noises, to be reduced;
10 MHz and a rate of voltage this in turn is conducive to an
variation from 0.1 to 20 V/ns. electromagnetically compati-
ble design.
Capacitive input to various ana- Since the EMC interference
log and digital signals makes it suppression module achieves a
necessary to suppress interfer- significant reduction in radio-
ence in the load circuit. frequency components and the
voltage level in three phases,
the contact endurance is also
improved considerably. This
makes an important contribu-
tion towards enhancing the reli-
ability and availability of the
system as a whole.
There is no need for fine gradu-
ations within each perfor-
mance class, as smaller motors
inherently have a higher induc-
tance, so that one solution for
all fixed-speed drives up to
7.5 HP is adequate.
Two electrical variants are The advantages of the RC cir- The varistor circuit is able to
available: cuit lie mainly in the reduction in absorb high energy levels and
the rate of rise and in its RF is also suitable for frequencies
damping ability. The selected from 10 to 400 Hz (variable-
values ensure effective interfer- speed drives). There is no limit-
ence suppression over a wide ing below the knee-point volt-
range. age, however.
OFF-delay device
for size S00 to S3 contactors
AC and DC operation contactor does not open. The A contactor opens after a delay Operation
IEC 60 947, EN 60 947 3RT19 16/3RT29 16 OFF-delay when the capacitors of the con- In the case of the versions for
devices are specifically designed tactor coil, built into the OFF- rated control supply voltages of
For screwing and snapping for operation with the 3RT contac- delay device, are switched in
onto 35 mm standard mounting 110 V and 230 V, either AC volt-
tors and 3RH contactor relays parallel. In the event of voltage age or DC voltage can be
rail. The OFF-delay devices of the SIRIUS series. failures, the capacitors are dis-
have screw connections. applied on the line side, where
charged via the coil and as the variant for 24 V is
thereby delay the opening of designed for DC operation only.
Principle of operation the contactor.
Application The OFF-delay device operates A DC-operated contactor is con-
The OFF-delay device pre- If the command devices are nected to the output in accor-
without external voltage on a upstream of the OFF-delay
vents a contactor from drop- capacitive basis, and can be dance with the input voltage that
ping out unintentionally when device in the circuit, the OFF is applied.
energized with either AC or DC delay takes effect with every
there is a short-time voltage dip (24 V version for DC operation The mean value of the OFF
or voltage failure. It supplies the opening operation. If the open-
only). Voltage matching, which ing operation is downstream of delay is approximately 1.5 times
necessary power for a series- is only necessary with AC oper- the specified minimum time.
connected, DC-operated con- the OFF-delay device, an OFF
ation, is performed using a rec- delay only applies in the event
tactor during a voltage dip to tifier bridge.
ensure that the of failure of the mains voltage.

Accessories for 3RT Contactors SIRIUS
Interface for mounting
on size S0 to S3 contactors
Application Functions
DC operation Design Surge suppression Mounting
IEC 60 947 and EN 60 947 System-compatible operation The 3RH29 24-1GP11 interface The 3RH29 24-1GP11 interface
The interface is suitable for use with DC 24 V, coil voltage toler- has an integrated surge sup- is mounted directly on the con-
in any climate. It is safe from ance 17 V to 30 V. pressor (varistor) for the contactor coil.
touch to DIN VDE 0106 Part Low power consumption in contactor coil being switched.
100. The terminal designations formity with the technical data
conform to EN 50 005. of the electronic systems.
A light-emitting diode indicates
the circuit state.
Terminal diagram Connection example

3RH19/29 24-1GP11 3RH19/29 24-1GP11
with surge suppression with surge suppression
Interface Interface
Contactor Contactor

Contactors
3RT Power Contactors for Switchingand Contactor Assemblies
Motors
3RT2 contactors
3RT20 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 25 HP
More information
Contactors Type 3RT2

Size S00 and S0
Width mm 45
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts
According to IEC 60947-5-1/EN 60947-5-1
The data apply to integrated auxiliary contacts and contacts in the
auxiliary switch blocks for contactor sizes S00 to S01)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690
Conventional thermal current Ith = A 10
Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
3
AC load
Rated operational current Ie/AC-15/AC-14
• For rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 101)
110 V A 101)
125 V A 101)
220 V A 101)
230 V A 101)
380 V A 3
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
660 V A 1
690 V A 1
DC load
Rated operational current Ie/DC-12
• For rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 6
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
125 V A 2
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.3
600 V A 0.15
• For rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 6
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
125 V A 0.9
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.14
600 V A 0.1
Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA Frequency of contact faults <10-8 i. e. <1 fault per 100 million operating
acc. to EN 60947-5-4 cycles
Endurance of the auxiliary contacts
It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly,
i. e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system. NSB0_02061a
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current.

The characteristic curves apply to:
• Integrated auxiliary contacts on 3RT20
• Auxiliary switch blocks 3RH 29 11, 3RH29 21 for contactors size S00
and S0.
I
I I I I
Diagram legend:
Ia = Breaking current
Ie = Rated operational current
1) Integrated auxiliary contacts in size S0, auxiliary switches for snapping

onto the front and for mounting onto the side in size S00 and S0: Ie = 6 A at
AC-14/AC-15.

3RT Power Contactors for Switching Motors
3RT2 contactors 3RT20 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 25 HP
Endurance of the main contacts

Size S00
The characteristic curves show the contact endurance of
the contactors when switching resistive and inductive AC Operating cycles at
loads (AC-1/AC-3) depending on the breaking current and
rated operational voltage. It is assumed that the operating
230 V
500 V
690 V
400 V
Contactor 3RT20 15, 3RT20 16 3RT20 17, 3RT20 18
mechanisms are switched randomly, i. e. not synchronized type (3 HP, 5 HP) (7.5 HP, 10 HP)
with the phase angle of the supply system. 8
10 7
10 7 6 8
NSB0_02059
The rated operational current Ie complies with utilization cat- 8 6

4 6
6 4
egory AC-4 (breaking six times the rated operational cur- 4
4
rent) and is intended for a contact endurance of at least 2
2
200,000 operating cycles. 10 6
2
3
2
10 6 8 10 6
If a shorter endurance is sufficient, the rated operational 10 6 8 6
current Ie/AC-4 can be increased. Ie 8 6
4
8
6
6 4
If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i. e. normal 4
4
2
switching (breaking the rated operational current according 2 2
to utilization category AC-3) in combination with intermittent 2 10 5
inching (breaking several times the rated operational cur- 10 5 8 10 5
rent according to utilization category AC-4), the contact en- 10 5 8 6 8
durance can be calculated approximately from the following 8 6
4 6
equation: 6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 4
4
10 8 10 4
2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 a (A) 40 50 60 80
Characters in the equation: 7 9 12 16 e (A)
X Contact endurance for mixed operation in operating 3 5 7.5 10 PN (HP)

cycles
A Contact endurance for normal operation (Ia = Ie) in Size S0
operating cycles
B Contact endurance for inching (Ia = multiple of Ie) in
operating cycles
230 V
500 V
690 V
400 V
3RT20 23 3RT20 24 3RT20 25 3RT20 26

C Inching operations as a percentage of total switching (5 HP) (7.5 HP) (10 HP) (15 HP)
operations 10 7 NSB0_02060
10 7 8 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2 3RT20 27, 3RT20 28
2 10 6 (20 HP, 25 HP)
10 6 8 10 6
10 6 8 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 5
10 5 8 10 5
10 5 8 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 4
10 4 8 104
3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 a(A)
9 12 17 25 32 38 e(A)
5 7.5 10 15 20 25 PN (HP)
Diagram legend:
PN= Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 460 V
Ie = Rated operational current

09/22/15 3RT1 contactors
3RT1 contactors
Technical data
Endurance of the main contacts

Size S2 Size S3
Operating cycles at
230 V
500 V
690 V
400 V
Contactor 3RT2035 3RT2036 3RT2037 3RT2038

7 type (18,5 kW) (22 kW) (30 kW) (37 kW)
7 10
10 8 6 8 IC01_00456
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 6 2
2 6 10 6
6 10 8 10
10 8 6 8
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 5 2
2 5 10 5
5 10 8 10
10 8 6 8
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 4
4 10 4
10 8 10
10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200 300 400500
Breaking current a (A)
Sizes S6 to S12
3RT12 vacuum contactors

Sizes S10 and S12
I
I

3RT Power Contactors for Switching Motors
3RT2 contactors 09/22/15
Contactors Type 3RT20 15 3RT20 16 3RT20 17 3RT20 18

Size S00 S00 S00 S00
Width mm 45 45 45 45
s and u rated data
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600
Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C • Open and enclosed A 20
Maximum horsepower ratings
(s and u approved values)
• Rated power for induction motors At 200 V hp 1.5 2 3 3
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 2 3 3 5
460 V hp 3 5 7.5 10
3
575 V hp 5 7.5 10 10
Short-circuit protection1) At 600 V kA 5 5 5 5
(contactor or overload relay) • Fuse CLASS J2) A 40 40 40 40
• Circuit breakers with overload A 50 50 50 50
protection according to UL 489
• Combination motor controllers --3) --3) --3) --3)
type E according to UL 508
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size -- 0
• Uninterrupted current - Open A -- 18
- Enclosed A -- 18
• Rated power for induction motors At 200 V hp -- 3
at 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 3
460 V hp -- 5
575 V hp -- 5
Overload relays • Type 3RU21 1 / 3RB30 1
• Setting range A 0.11 ... 16 / 0.1 ... 16
Contactors Type 3RT20 23 3RT20 24 3RT20 25 3RT20 26 3RT20 27 3RT20 28

Size S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0
Width mm 45 45 45 45 45 45
s and u rated data
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600 600
Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C • Open and enclosed A 35 42
• Rated power for induction motors At 200 V hp 2 3 5 7.5 10 10
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 3 3 5 7.5 10 10
460 V hp 5 7.5 10 15 20 25
575 V hp 7.5 10 15 20 25 25
Short-circuit protection1) At 600 V kA 5 5 5 5 5 5
(contactor or overload relay) • Fuse CLASS J2) A 45 45 45 70 110 110
• Circuit breakers with overload A 70 70 70 100 100 100
protection according to UL 489
• Combination motor controllers
type E according to UL 508
- At 480 V Type 3RV20 2
A --
kA --3)
- At 600 V Type 3RV20 2
A --
kA --3)
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size -- 1
• Uninterrupted current - Open A -- 27
- Enclosed A -- 27
• Rated power for induction motors At 200 V hp -- 7.5
at 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 7.5
460 V hp -- 10
575 V hp -- 10
Overload relays • Type 3RU21 2 / 3RB30 2
• Setting range A 1.8 ... 40 / 0.1 ... 40
1) For more information about short-circuit values,
e. g. for protection against short-circuit currents, see UL reports
(http://support.automation.siemens.com) for the individual devices.
2) Values for RK5 fuses on request.
3) Values on request.

09/22/15 3RT10 contactors
and ratings of the contactors

Contactor Size S2 S2 S2 S2 S3 S3 S3
Type 3RT20 35 3RT20 36 3RT20 37 3RT20 38 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46
Rated Insulation Voltage AC V 600 600
Continuous current, at 40 °C
Free air and enclosed A 55 60 80 90 90 105
Maximum horsepower Ratings at 115 V hp 3 3 5 5 5 7.5 10
ratings single at 230 V hp 7.5 10 10 15 15 15 -
phase motors
at 50/60 Hz
and approved values

Ratings at 200 V hp 10 15 20 20 20 25 30
of three-phase motors 230 V hp 15 15 20 25 25 30 30
at 50/60 Hz 460 V hp 30 40 50 50 50 60 75
575 V hp 40 50 50 60 60 75 100
Short-circuit protection Fuse or circuit- kA 5 10 10 10 5 10 10
breaker A 150 200 250 250 250 300 350
acc. to UL 489 A 150 200 200 200 250 300 400
NEMA/EEMAC ratings NEMA/EEMAC Size 2 - 3

Conventional thermal current Free air A - 45 - - 90
Enclosed A - 45 - - 90
Ratings at 200 V hp - 10 - - 25
of three-phase motors 230 V hp - 15 - - 30
at 60 Hz 460 V hp - 25 - - 50
575 V hp - 25 - - 50
Overload Relay Type A 3RU213 / 3RB303 3RU11 4

Setting Range 11 … 80 / 12 … 80 18 … 100
Contactor Size S00 - S0 S2 - S12 Screw and
Screw and Screw and Screw and Spring con-
Spring connection Spring connection Spring connection nection
Integrated or Laterally mountable Single pole and Laterally
snap-on aux. aux. switch block 4-pole Snap-on mountable
switch block aux. switch block aux. switch
block
and ratings of the auxilary contactors

Rated Voltage AC 600 600 600 600
Switching Capacity At 240 VAC A A 600, P 600 A 600, Q 600 A 600, P 300 A 300, Q 300
Uninterrupted current 10 10 10 10

3RT10 contactors
Technical data
Contactor Size S6 S6 S6 S10 S10 S10

Type 3RT10 54 3RT10 55 3RT10 56 3RT10 64 3RT10 65 3RT10 66
s and u ratings of the contactors
Rated insulation voltage AC V 600 600
Continuous current, at 40 °C Free air and enclosed A 140 195 195 250 330 330
Maximum horsepower ratings Ratings at 115 V
single 230 V HP 25 30 30
phase motors
at 50/60 Hz
(s and u-approved values)
Ratings 200 V HP 40 50 60 60 75 100
of three-phase motors 230 V HP 50 60 75 75 100 125
at 50/60 Hz 460 V HP 100 125 150 150 200 250
575 V HP 125 150 200 200 250 300
Short-circuit protection kA 10 10 10 10 18 18
CLASS RK5 fuse A 450 500 500 700 800 800
Circuit-breaker
acc. to UL 489 A 350 450 500 500 700 800
NEMA/EEMAC ratings NEMA/EEMAC SIZE – 4 – – – 5
Conventional thermal current Free air A – 150 – – – 300
Enclosed A – 135 – – – 270
Ratings a t 200 V HP – 40 – – – 75
of three-phase motors 230 V HP – 50 – – – 100
at 60 Hz 460 V HP – 100 – – – 200
575 V HP – 100 – – – 200
Overload relay Type 3RB20 56 3RB20 66
Contactor Size S12 S12

Type 3RT10 75 3RT10 76
Rated insulation voltage AC V 600

Continuous current, at 40 °C Free air and enclosed A 400 540
Ratings a t 200 V HP 125 150
of three-phase motors 230 V HP 150 200
at 50/60 Hz 460 V HP 300 400
575 V HP 400 500
Short-circuit protection kA 18 30
CLASS RK5 fuse A 1000 1200
Circuit-breaker
acc. to UL 489 A 900 900
NEMA/EEMAC ratings NEMA/EEMAC SIZE – 6
Conventional thermal current Free air A – 600
Enclosed A – 540
Ratings a t 200 V HP – 150
of three-phase motors 230 V HP – 200
at 60 Hz 460 V HP – 400
575 V HP – 400
Overload relay Type 3RB20 66

3RT12 vacuum contactors
09/22/15 3RT contactors for resistive loads
Technical data
Contactor Size S10 S10 S10 S12 S12

Type 3RT12 64 3RT12 65 3RT12 66 3RT12 75 3RT12 76
s and u ratings of the contactors
Rated insulation voltage AC V 600 600
Continuous current, at 40 °C Free air and enclosed A 330 540
Ratings a t 200 V HP 60 75 100 125 150
of three-phase motors 230 V HP 75 100 125 150 200
at 50/60 Hz 460 V HP 150 200 250 300 400
575 V HP 200 250 300 400 500
Short-circuit protection kA 10 18 18 18 30
CLASS RK5 fuse A 700 800 800 1200 1200
Circuit-breaker
acc. to UL 489 A 500 700 900 1000 1200
NEMA/EEMAC ratings NEMA/EEMAC SIZE – 5 – 6
Conventional thermal current Free air A – –
Enclosed A – –
Ratings a t 200 V HP – –
of three-phase motors 230 V HP – –
at 60 Hz 460 V HP – –
575 V HP – –
Overload relay Type 3RB20 66 3RB20 66
Contactor Size S3 S6 S10 S12

Type 3RT14 46 3RT14 56 3RT14 66 3RT14 76
Maximum UL resistive load ratings A 110 210 360 580
Contactor Size S00 S00 S00 S0 S0 S0 S0 S2 S3 S3

Type 3RT23 15 3RT23 16 3RT23 17 3RT23 24 3RT23 25 3RT23 26 3RT23 27 3RT23 36 3RT13 44 3RT13 46
Maximum UL resistive A 16 18 20 30 30 35 42 60 100 110
load ratings

Contactors
3RT and Contactor
3RT2. contactors,
3RT20 1. contactors
3-pole, 3 ... 25 HP
Type 3RT20 15, 3RT20 16 3RT20 17, 3RT20 18

Size S00 S00
Dimensions (W x H x D)1) mm 45 x 57.5 x 73 / 45 x 70 x 73
H
• With mounted auxiliary switch block mm 45 x 57.5 x 116 / 45 x 70 x 121
D
W
• With mounted function block mm 45 x 57.5 x 142 / 45 x 70 x 142
General data
Permissible mounting positions AC and DC
The contactors are designed for operation on a operation
360° 22,5° 22,5°
NSB0_00478c
vertical mounting surface.
3
Upright mounting position AC and DC Special design required.

operation Positions 13 to 16 of the Order No. must be
changed to -1AA0. Additional charge.
NSB0_00477a
Mechanical endurance
• Basic unit Oper- 30 million
ating
cycles
• Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary switch block Oper- 10 million
ating
cycles
• Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block Operat. 5 million
cycles
2)
Protective separation between the coil and the main V 400
contacts acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
Mirror contacts
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed
simultaneously with a NO main contact.
• 3RT20 1 ., 3RT23 1 . (removable auxiliary switch block) Yes, this applies to both the basic unit as well as to between the basic unit
and the mounted auxiliary switch block acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
• 3RT20 1 ., 3RT23 1 . (permanently mounted auxiliary switch block) Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
• 3RH29 19- . NF . . solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks have no
mirror contacts.
Ambient temperature
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20, coil assembly IP40
Touch protection acc.to EN 50274 Finger-safe
Shock resistance rectangular pulse
• AC operation g/ms 6.7/5 and 4.2/10 7.3/5 and 4.7/10
• DC operation g/ms 6.7/5 and 4.2/10 7.3/5 and 4.7/10
Shock resistance sine pulse
• DC operation g/ms 10.5/5 and 6.6/10 11.4/5 and 7.3/10
Conductor cross-sections 3)
Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relays

For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays
see Section 3: Overload Relays
For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders
see Section 4: Combination Starters
Main circuit
• Fuse links, operational class gG :
NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ EN 60947-4-1
- Type of coordination "1" A 35 50
- Type of coordination "2" A 20 25
- Weld-free4) A 10 10
• Miniature circuit breakers (up to 230 V) with C characteristic A 10 10
Short-circuit current 1 kA, type of coordination "1"
Auxiliary circuit
• Fuse links, operational class gG : DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE A 10
(weld-free protection for Ik ≥ 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit breakers up to 230 V with C characteristic A 6
Short-circuit current Ik < 400 A
1) Dimensions for devices with screw terminals / spring-type terminals. 3)
For conductor cross-sections see page 2/130 .
2) For endurance of the main contacts see page 2/122. 4) Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.

Contactors
3RT and Contactor
3RT2. 1. contactors
Contactors Type 3RT20 15, 3RT20 16 3RT20 17, 3RT20 18

Size S00 S00
Width mm 45 45
Control
Solenoid coil operating range
• AC operation 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
• DC operation Up to 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Up to 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption of the solenoid coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz, - Closing VA 27/24.3 37/33
standard version - P.f. 0.8/0.75 0.8/0.75
3
- Closed VA 4.2/3.3 5.7/4.4
- P.f. 0.25/0.25 0.25/0.25
• AC operation, 50 Hz, - Closing VA 26.4 36

USA/Canada - P.f. for closing 0.81 0.8
- Closed VA 4.4 5.9
- P.f. for closed 0.24 0.24
• AC operation, 60 Hz, - Closing VA 31.7 43

USA/Canada - P.f. for closing 0.81 0.8
- Closed VA 4.8 6.5
- P.f. for closed 0.25 0.25
• DC operation Closing = Closed W 4 4
Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal)
• AC operation <3 mA x (230 V/Us)1) <4 mA x (230 V/Us)1)
1)
• DC operation <10 mA x (24 V/Us)
Operating times2)
Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 9 ... 35 8 ... 33
at 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us - Opening delay ms 3.5 ... 14 4 ... 15
• DC operation - Closing delay ms 30 ... 100 30 ... 100
at 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us - Opening delay ms 7 ... 13 7 ... 13
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
Operating times for 1.0 x Us2)
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 9.5 ... 24 9 ... 22
- Opening delay ms 4 ... 14 4.5 ... 15
- Opening delay ms 7 ... 12 7 ... 12
1) The 3RT29 16-1GA00 additional load module is recommended 2) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are
for higher residual currents. increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks
(noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times,
varistor +2 to 5 ms).

Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-1
Switching resistive loads
• Rated operational current Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 18 22 22 22
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 16 20 20 20
• Rated power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 6.3 7.5 7.5 7.5
P.f.= 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 11 13 13 13
500 V kW 13.8 17 17 17
690 V kW 19 22 22 22
• Minimum conductor cross-section At 40 °C mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
for loads with Ie At 60 °C mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 7 9 12 16
440 V A 7 9 11 15
500 V A 6 7.7 9.2 12.4
690 V A 4.9 6.7 6.7 8.8
• Rated power for slipring or squirrel- At 200 V HP 1.5 2 3 3
cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 230 V HP 2 3 3 5
460 V HP 3 5 7.5 10
575 V HP 5 7.5 10 10
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 56 72 96 128
1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. 2) According to IEC 60947-4-1.
(increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into For rated values for various start-up conditions
account). see Section 3 --> "Overload Relays".

Contactors
3RT and Contactor
3RT2. 1. contactors

Width mm 45 45 45 45
Main circuit
AC capacity
Power loss per conducting path At Ie/AC-3 W 0.42 0.7 1.24 2.2
Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)1)
• Rated operational current Ie Up to 400 V A 6.5 8.5 8.5 11.5
• Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with 50 Up to 400 V kW 3 4 4 5.5
Hz and 60 Hz
• The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200 000 operating
3
cycles:
- Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 2.6 4.1 4.1 5.5
690 V A 1.8 3.3 3.3 4.4
- Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with At 230 V kW 0.67 1.1 1.1 1.5
50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 1.15 2 2 2.5
500 V kW 1.45 2 2 3
690 V kW 1.15 2.5 2.5 3.5
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching h-1 10 000
frequency AC
Dependence of the switching frequency z' on No-load switching h-1 10 000
the operational current I' and operational frequency DC
voltage U': Rated operation
z' = z ⋅ (Ie/I') ⋅ (400 V/U')1.5 ⋅ 1/h AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1 000
AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 750
AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 750
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 250
1) h-1 15
The data only apply to 3RT25 16 and 3RT25 17 (2 NO + 2 NC) up to a
rated operational voltage of 400 V.

mm 45 45 45 45
Main conductors and auxiliary conductors Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1) according to IEC 60947;
max. 2 x (0.5 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1); 2 x 12
• Terminal screw M3 (for standard screwdriver size 2 and Pozidriv 2)
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)
Main conductors, auxiliary conductors and coil terminals Spring-type terminals
• Operating devices mm 3.0 x 0.5; 3.5 x 0.5
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
Auxiliary conductors for front and laterally mounted auxiliary switches
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
Main conductors and auxiliary conductors Ring lug terminal connection
• Terminal screw d3 M3, Pozidriv 2

• Operating devices d2 mm Ø 5 ... 6
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
• Usable ring terminal lugs mm d2 = min. 3.2
- DIN 46234 without insulation sleeve
- DIN 46225 without insulation sleeve mm d3 = max. 7.5
- DIN 46237 with insulation sleeve
- JIS C2805 Type R without insulation sleeve
I2_12740
- JIS C2805 Type RAV with insulation sleeve

- JIS C2805 Type RAP with insulation sleeve
An "insulation stop" must be used for conductor cross-sections ≤ 1 mm²
For tool for opening the spring-type terminals (see Accessories on page 2/79).
(see Accessories on page 2/79). 1)
Maximum external diameter of the conductor insulation: 3.6 mm. point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified.

3RT2. 2. contactors
Type 3RT20 23 3RT20 24 3RT20 25 3RT20 26 3RT20 27 3RT20 28

Dimensions (W x H x D) for AC operation1) mm 45 x 85 x 97 / 45 x 101.5 x 97
• With mounted auxiliary switch block mm 45 x 85 x 141 / 45 x 101.5 x 144
H
• With mounted function block 45 x 85 x 166 / 45 x 101.5 x 166
D
W
Dimensions (W x H x D) for DC operation1) mm 45 x 85 x 107 / 45 x 101.5 x 107
• With mounted auxiliary switch block mm 45 x 85 x 151 / 45 x 101.5 x 154
• With mounted function block 45 x 85 x 176 / 45 x 101.5 x 176
General data
Permissible mounting positions
360° 22,5° 22,5°
NSB0_00478c
The contactors are designed for operation on a
AC and D operation NSB0_00477a
Special version required, also applies to

3RT20 2 . - . K . 40 . coupling relays.
• Basic unit Oper- 10 million
ating
cycles
• Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary switch block Oper- 10 million
ating
cycles
• Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block Operat. 5 million
cycles
Electrical endurance 2)

Protective separation between the coil and the main contacts V 400
(acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N)
Mirror contacts
simultaneously with a NO main contact.
• 3RT20 2 . , 3RT23 2 . (removable auxiliary switch block) Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
• 3RT20 2 . , 3RT23 2 . (permanently mounted auxiliary switch block) Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20, coil assembly IP20
• AC operation g/ms 7.5/5 and 4.7/10 8.3/5 and 5.310
• DC operation g/ms >10/5 and 7.5/10 >10/5 and 7.5/10
• DC operation g/ms >15/5 and >10/10 >15/5 and >10/10
Conductor cross-sections 3)
Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relays

Main circuit For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays
• Fuse links, operational class gG : see "Protection Equipment --> Overload Relays".
Type NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ EN 60947-4-1 see "Motor Starters".
- Type of coordination "1" A 63 100 125
- Type of coordination "2" A 25 35 50
- Weld-free4) A 10 16 16
• Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic A 25 32 40
(short-circuit current 3 kA, type of coordination "1")
Auxiliary circuit
• Fuse links, operational class gG : DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE A 10
(weld-free protection for Ik ≥ 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic A 10
(short-circuit current Ik < 400 A)
1) 3)
Dimensions for devices with screw terminals / spring-type terminals. For conductor cross-sections page 2/134.
2) 4)
For endurance of the main contacts see page 2/122. Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.

Contactors
3RT and Contactor
3RT20.2. contactors
Contactors Type 3RT20 23 ... 3RT20 26 ... 3RT20 2. 3RT20 2. 3RT20 2.

3RT20 25 3RT20 28 -.NB3 -.NF3.. -.NP3
Size S0 S0 S0 S0 S0
Width mm 45 45 45 45 45
Control
Solenoid coil operating range AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us 0.7 ... 1.3 x Us
• AC operation, 50 Hz, - Closing VA 65 77 6.5 13.6 16.1
standard version - P.f. 0.82 0.82 0.98 0.98 0.98
- Closed VA 7.6 9.8 1.26 1.91 3.41
- P.f. 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
3
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz, - Closing VA 68/67 81/79 6.5/5.7 13.6/13.2 16.1/15.9

standard version - P.f. 0.72/0.74 0.72/0.74 0.98/0.96 0.98/0.99 0.99/0.99
- Closed VA 7.9/6.5 10.5/8.5 1.26/1.30 1.91/1.90 3.41/3.58
- P.f. 0.25/0.28 0.25/0.28 0.78/0.8 0.61/0.61 0.36/0.45
• AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada - Closing VA 65 77 -- -- --
- P.f. 0.82 0.82 -- -- --
- Closed VA 7.6 9.8 -- -- --
- P.f. 0.25 0.28 -- -- --
• AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada - Closing VA 73 87 -- -- --
- P.f. 0.76 0.76 -- -- --
- Closed VA 7.2 9.4 -- -- --
- P.f. 0.28 0.28 -- -- --
• DC operation Closing/closed W 5.9/5.9 5.9/5.9 6.7/0.8 13.2/1.56 15/1.83
• AC operation mA < 6 mA x < 7 mA x (230 V/Us)
(230 V/Us)
• DC operation mA < 16 mA x (24 V/Us)
Operating times for 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us1)
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 9 ... 38 8 ... 40 60 ... 80 50 ... 70 60 ... 80
- Opening delay ms 4 ... 16 4 ... 16 30 ... 45 35 ... 45 35 ... 45
• DC operation - Closing delay ms 50 ... 170 50 ... 170 60 ... 75 50 ... 70 50 ... 75
- Opening delay ms 15 ... 17.5 15 ... 17.5 30 ... 45 35 ... 45 40 ... 50
• Arcing time ms 10 10 10 10 10
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 10 ... 18 10 ... 17 65 ... 80 50 ... 70 60 ... 80
- Opening delay ms 4 ... 16 4 ... 16 30 ... 45 35 ... 45 30 ... 50
• DC operation - Closing delay ms 55 ... 80 55 ... 80 60 ... 80 56 ... 70 60 ... 80
- Opening delay ms 16 ... 17 16 ... 17 30 ... 45 35 ... 45 30 ... 50
1) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are
increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks
(varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly: 2 to 6 times).

Contactors
3RT and Contactor
10/22/15 3RT20 2. contactors

Width mm 45 45 45 45 45 45
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-1,
switching resistive loads
• Rated operational current Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 40 50
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 35 42
• Rated power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 13.3 15.5
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 23 27.5
3
500 V kW 29 35
690 V kW 40 47.5
• Minimum conductor cross- At 40 °C mm2 10 10
section for loads with Ie At 60 °C mm2 10 10
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 9 12 17 25 32 38
440 V A 9 12 17 22 32 35
500 V A 9 12 17 18 32 32
690 V A 9 9 13 13 21 21
• Rated power for slipring or At 230 V HP 3 3 5 7.5 10 10
squirrel-cage motors at 460 V HP 5 7.5 10 15 20 25
50 and 60 Hz 575 V HP 7.5 10 15 20 25 25
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 80 110 150 200 260 300
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 0.4 0.5 0.9 1.6 2.7 3.8
Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)
• Rated operational current Ie Up to 400 V A 8.5 12.5 15.5 15.5 22
• Rated power for squirrel-cage At 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 7.5 11
motors with 50 and 60 Hz
• The following applies to a contact endurance of
about 200 000 operating cycles:
- Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 4.1 5.5 7.7 9 12
690 V A 3.3 5.5 7.7 9 12
- Rated power At 110 V kW 0.5 0.73 1 1.2 1.6
for squirrel-cage motors At 230 V kW 1.1 1.5 2 2.5 3.4
with 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 2 2.6 3.5 4.4 6
500 V kW 2 3.3 4.6 5.6 7.5
690 V kW 2.5 4.6 6 7.7 10.3
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload No-load switching frequency h-1 5 000
relays AC
-1
No-load switching frequency h 1 500
Dependence of the switching fre- DC
quency z' on the operational cur- AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1 000
rent I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 1 000 750
z’ = z ⋅ (Ie/I’) ⋅(400 V/U’)1.5 ⋅1/h AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1 000 750
AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 300 250
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 15
1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc.
(increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into
account).
2) According to IEC 60947-4-1.
For rated values for various start-up conditions
see Section 3 --> "Overload Relays" .

Contactors
3RT and Contactor
3RT20 2. contactors

Width mm 45 45 45 45 45 45
Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors connectable)
Main conductors Screw terminals
Conductor cross-section
• Solid mm² 2 x (1 ... 2.5)1); 2 x (2.5 ... 10)1) according to IEC 60947
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (1 ... 2.5)1); 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1); 1 x 10
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (16 ... 12); 2 x (14 ... 8)
• Terminal screws M4 (Pozidriv size 2)
3
- Tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5 (18 ... 22 lb.in)

Auxiliary conductors
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1) according to IEC 60947
• Solid or stranded AWG (2 x) AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1); 1 x 12
• Terminal screws M3
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)
Main conductors Spring-type terminals

• Solid mm2 2 x (1 ... 10)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1 ... 6)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (1 ... 6)
• Operating devices 3.0 x 0.5; 3.5 x 0.5
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
Main conductors Ring lug terminal connection
• Terminal screw mm M4, Pozidriv size 2

• Operating devices mm Ø 5 ... 6
• Tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5
• Usable ring lug terminals d3
mm d2 = min. 4.3
- DIN 46234 without insulation sleeve d2 mm d3 = max. 12.2
I2_12740
• Terminal screw M3, Pozidriv size 2
• Operating devices mm Ø 5 ... 6
mm d3 = max. 7.5
1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping
point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified.
Contactors Size S00 S0

Screw or spring-type Screw or spring-type Screw or spring-type
terminals terminals terminals
Integrated or 1- and 4-pole Laterally
snap-on snap-on mountable
auxiliary switch block auxiliary switch block auxiliary switch block
s and u rated data of the auxiliary contacts
Rated voltage V AC 600 600 600
Switching capacity A 600, Q 600 A 600, Q 600 A 300, Q 300
Uninterrupted current • At 240 V AC A 10 10 10

© Siemens AG 2015

SIRIUS PowerContactors
Contactors for
for Switching
Switching Motors
Motors
• Revised •
09/22/15 3RT20.3.
SIRIUS 3RT20 contactors, contactors
3-pole, up to 37 kW
Type 3RT2035 3RT2036 3RT2037 3RT2038

Size S2 S2 S2 S2
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 55 x 114 x 130
H
• With mounted auxiliary switch block1) mm 55 x 114 x 174 / 55 x 114 x 178
D
W
• With mounted function module1) mm 55 x 114 x 199 / 55 x 114 x 202
General data
Permissible mounting position
3
360° 22,5° 22,5°
NSB0_00478c
NSB0_00477a
Special version required

• Basic units Operating cycles 10 million
• Basic units with snap-on auxiliary switch block Operating cycles 10 million
• Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block Operating cycles 5 million
2)
(acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix N)
Mirror contacts
simultaneously with an NO main contact.
• Integrated auxiliary switches Yes, acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, Appendix F
• 3RT202., 3RT232. (removable auxiliary switch block) Yes, acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, Appendix F
• 3RT202., 3RT232. (permanently mounted auxiliary switch block) Yes, acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, Appendix F
Connection range IP00/open (where applicable, use additional terminal covers)
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe
• AC operation g/ms 11.8/5 and 7.4/10
• AC/DC operation g/ms 7.7/5 and 4.5/10
• AC operation g/ms 18.5/5 and 11.6/10
• AC/DC operation g/ms 12/5 and 7/10
3)
Short-circuit protection
Main circuit Short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays
• Fuse links, operational class gG: See Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations" 4)
LV HRC, type 3NA; DIAZED, type 5SB; NEOZED, type 5SE Short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders
according to IEC 60947-4-1/EN 60947-4-1 See Chapter 8, "Load Feeders and Motor Starters for Use in the
Control Cabinet" ➞ "SIRIUS 3RA2 Load Feeders"
- Type of coordination "1" A 160 160 250 250
- Type of coordination "2" A 80 80 125 160
- Weld-free5) A On request
Auxiliary circuit
• Fuse links, operational class gG: A 10
DIAZED, type 5SB; NEOZED, type 5SE
(weld-free protection Ik ≤ 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit breakers 230 V, C characteristic A 10
(short-circuit current Ik < 400 A)
1)
Dimensions for devices with screw terminals / spring-type terminals.
2) For contact endurance of the main contacts, see page 3/17.
3)
For conductor cross-sections, see page 3/28.
4)
See http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39714188
5) Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.

© Siemens AG 2015

Contactors for Switching
Power Contactors Motors
3RT20.3. contactors 10/22/15
Type 3RT2035 3RT2036 3RT2037 3RT2038

Size S2 S2 S2 S2
Control
Type of operating mechanism AC AC/DC
• AC operation, 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
• AC operation, 60 Hz -- 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
• DC operation -- 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
3
Power consumption of the solenoid coils (for cold coil and 1.0 x Us)
• AC operation, 50 Hz, standard version - Closing VA 190 --
- P.f. 0.72 --
- Closed VA 16 --
- P.f. 0.37 --
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz, standard version - Closing VA -- 210/188 --
- P.f. -- 0.69/0.65 --
- Closed VA -- 17.2/16.5 --
- P.f. -- 0.36/0.39 --
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz, for USA/Canada - Closing VA -- 212/188 --
- P.f. -- 0.67/0.65 --
- Closed VA -- 18.516.5 --
- P.f. -- 0.37/0.39 --
• AC/DC operation - Closing for AC operation VA -- 40
- P.f. -- 0.64/0.5
- Closed for AC operation VA -- 2
- P.f. -- 0.36/0.39
- Closing for DC operation W -- 23
- Closed for DC operation W -- 1

• AC operation mA <20
• DC operation mA <20
- Opening delay ms 10 ... 18 35 ... 55
• DC operation - Closing delay ms -- 45 ... 60
- Opening delay ms -- 35 ... 55
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 20 10 ... 20
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 12 ...22 50 ... 60
- Opening delay ms 10 ...18 40 ... 50
• DC operation - Closing delay ms -- 45 ... 55
- Opening delay ms -- 40 ... 50
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
Utilization category AC-1,
switching resistive loads
• Rated operational current Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 60 70 80 90
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 55 60 70 80
• Rated power for AC loads2) 230 V kW 23 26 30 34
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 39 46 53 59
690 V kW 68 79 91 102
• Minimum conductor At 40 °C mm2 16 25 25 35
cross-section for loads with Ie At 60 °C mm2 16 16 25 25
Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3
440 V A 40 50 65 80
500 V A 40 50 65 80
690 V A 24 24 47 58
• Rated power for slipring At 230 V kW 11 15 18.5 22
or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 18.5 22 30 37
at 50 and 60 Hz 690 V kW 22 22 37 45
Thermal load capacity 10 s current3) A 400 420 520 640
Power loss per conducting path At Ie/AC-3 W 2.2 4 3.8 5.7
1) 2)
The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc.
increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into account).
(varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly: 2 to 6 times). 3) According to IEC 60947-4-1.
Rated values for various start-up conditions,
see Chapter 7, "Protection Equipment" "Overload Relays".

3/30 Siemens IC 10 · 2015
© Siemens AG 2015

SIRIUS PowerContactors
Contactorsfor
forSwitching Motors
Switching Motors
• Revised •
09/22/15 3RT20.3. contactors
Type 3RT2035 3RT2036 3RT2037 3RT2038

Size S2 S2 S2 S2
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
• Maximum values:
- Rated operational current Ie Up to 400 V A 35 41 55 55
- Rated power for squirrel-cage motors At 400 V kW 18.5 22 30 30
3
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz
• The following applies to a contact endurance
of about 200 000 operating cycles:
- Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 22 24 28 30
690 V A 18.5 20 22 24
- Rated power At 110 V kW 3.2 3.5 4.1 4.3
for squirrel-cage motors 230 V kW 6.7 7.3 8.5 9.1
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 11.6 12.6 14.7 15.8
690 V kW 16.8 18.2 20 21.8
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
• Rated operational currents Ie (at 60 °C)
- 1 conducting path Up to 24 V A 55
60 V A 23
110 V A 4.5
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.4
600 V A 0.25
- 2 conducting paths in series Up to 24 V A 55
60 V A 45
110 V A 25
220 V A 5
440 V A 1
600 V A 0.8
60 V A 55
110 V A 55
220 V A 45
440 V A 2.9
600 V A 1.4
Utilization category DC-3/DC-5,
shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
- 1 conducting path Up to 24 V A 35
60 V A 6
110 V A 2.5
220 V A 2
440 V A 0.1
600 V A 0.06
60 V A 45
110 V A 25
220 V A 5
440 V A 0.27
600 V A 0.16
60 V A 55
110 V A 55
220 V A 25
440 V A 0.6
600 V A 0.35
Switching frequency
Contactors without overload relays
• No-load switching frequency AC h-1 5 000
AC/DC h-1 1 500
• Switching frequency z during rated operation1)
- Ie/AC-1 At 400 V h-1 1 200 1 000 800 700
- Ie/AC-2 At 400 V h-1 750 600 400 350
- Ie/AC-3 At 400 V h-1 1 000 800 700 500
- Ie/AC-4 At 400 V h-1 300 250 200 150
Contactors with overload relays
• Mean val ue h-1 15
1)
Dependence of the switching frequency z’ on the operational current I’ and operational voltage U’:
z’ = z x (Ie/I’) x (400 V/U’)1.5 x 1/h
Siemens IC 10 · 2015 3/31
© Siemens AG 2015

Contactors for Switching Motors Power Contactors for SwitchingSIRIUS
Motors
• Revised •
3RT20.3. contactors 09/22/15
Type 3RT2035 3RT2036 3RT2037 3RT2038

Size S2 S2 S2 S2
• Solid or stranded mm² 2 x (1 ... 35)1); 1 x (1 ... 50)1)

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (1 ... 25)1); 1 x (1 ... 35)1)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 2)1); 1 x (18 ... 1)1)
3
• Terminal screws Pozidriv size 2; ∅ 5 ... 6
- Tightening torque Nm 3 ... 4.5 (27 ... 40 lb.in)
Auxiliary and control conductors
• Solid or stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
• Solid or stranded AWG (2 x) AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1)
• Terminal screws M3 (for Pozidriv size 2, ∅ 5 ... 6)
Auxiliary and control conductors2) Spring-type terminals
• Operating devices3) mm 3.0 x 0.5

• Solid or stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1)
point, both cross-sections must lie in one of the ranges specified.
2)
Max. external diameter of the cable insulation: 3.6 mm.
On spring-type terminals with conductor cross-sections ≤ 1 mm²,
an insulation stop must be used, see Accessories, page 3/76.
3) Tool for opening the spring-type terminals;
see "Accessories", page 3/76.
Data for North America

Type 3RT2015 3RT2016 3RT2017 3RT2018
s and u rated data
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600
Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C, open and enclosed A 20
(from s and u approved values)
• Rated power for three-phase motors At 200 V hp 1.5 2 3 3
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 2 3 3 5
460 V hp 3 5 7.5 10
575 V hp 5 7.5 10 10
Short-circuit protection1) At 600 V kA 5
(contactor or overload relay)
2)
• Fuse CLASS J A 40
• Circuit breakers with overload protection A 50
acc. to UL 489
• Combination motor controllers type E Values on request.
according to UL 508 and UL 60947-4-1
Overload relays
• Type 3RU211 / 3RB301
• Setting range A 0.11 ... 16 / 0.1 ... 16
1)
For more information about short-circuit values, e.g. for protection against
short-circuit currents, see the UL reports on the individual devices,
www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals.
For the dimensioning of load feeders, see also the
Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations for UL",
2) Values for RK5 fuses on request.

Siemens IC 10 · 2015 3/33
Contactors
Contactorsand
andContactor
ContactorAssemblies
Assemblies
SIRIUS
SIRIUS Contactors for
Contactors for Switching
Switching Motors
Motors
3RT10.4.
3RT10 4.contactors
contactors
Technical data
Contactor Size S3 S3 S3
Type 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46
General data
Permissible mounting position AC and DC operation For DC operation and forward
The contactors are designed for operation inclination up to 22.5°: coil voltage
on a vertical mounting surface. tolerance 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Upright mounting position:
AC and DC operation Special design required.

Positions 13 to 16 of the Order No. must be changed to -1AA0.
Additional charge.
Mechanical Basic units Oper. 10 million

endurance Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary switch block cycles 10 million
Solid-state compatible aux. switch block 5 million
Electrical endurance See page 2/123.
Safe isolation between coil and main contacts V 690
(acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 and A1 [draft 2/89])
Positively driven operation 3RT10 4 ., 3RT13 4 ., 3RT14 4 . Yes, between main contacts and auxiliary NC contacts and within
There is positively driven operation if the NC and (removable aux. switch block) the auxiliary switch blocks acc. to ZH 1/457, IEC 60 947-4-1,
NO contacts cannot be closed at the same time Annex H (draft 17B/996/DC)
3RT10 4 ., 3RT13 4 ., 3RT14 4 . in accordance with Swiss regulations (SUVA) on request.
(permanent aux. switch block)
Permissible ambient temperature in operation °C –25 ... +60
when stored °C –55 ... +80
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 IP 20 (terminal compartment IP 00), coil system IP 40
Shock resistance Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10
Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10.6/5 and 6.2/10
Conductor cross-sections See page 2/142.
Short-circuit protection of contactors without overload relays For short-circuit protection of contactors with overload relays, see
Section 3.
For short-circuit protection of fuseless load feeders, see Section 4.
Main circuit
Fuse links, utilization category gL/gG
NH Type 3NA, DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE
– acc. to IEC 60 947-4/ Type of coord. "1" 1) A 250 250
EN 60 947-4-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Type of coord. "2" 1) A 125 160
Weld-free 2) A 63 100
Auxiliary circuit
Fuse links, utilization category gL/gG A 10
DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE (weld-free protection at Ik 1 kA)
or miniature circuit-breaker with C-characteristic (short-circuit current Ik < 400 A) A 10
1) According to excerpt from Type of coordination "2": 2) Test conditions acc. to IEC 60 947-4-1.
IEC 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102): No damage can be tolerated to the overload relay,
Type of coordination "1": but contact welding on the contactor is permitted if
Destruction of the contactor and the overload the contacts can be easily separated.
relay is permissible. The contactor and/or over-
Siemens Industry,
loadInc.
relay must be replaced if necessary. 2/139
3RT10.4. contactors
Technical data
Type 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46
Control circuit
Coil voltage tolerance AC/DC 0.8 to 1.1 × Us
Power consumption of the coils (with coil in cold state and 1.0 × Us) Standard design
AC operation Hz 50 50/60 50 50/60
Closing VA 218 247 /211 270 298 /274
p.f. 0.61 0.62/ 0.57 0.68 0.7/ 0.62
Closed VA 21 25 / 18 22 27 / 20
p.f. 0.26 0.27/ 0.3 0.27 0.29/ 0.31
For USA and Canada
Hz 50 60 50 60
Closing VA 218 232 270 300
p.f. 0.61 0.55 0.68 0.52
Closed VA 21 20 22 21
p.f. 0.26 0.28 0.27 0.29
DC operation closing = closed W 15 15
Permissible residual current of the electronics
(with 0 signal)
< 25 mA × ----------- 
230 V
AC operation mA
 Us 
DC operation mA < 43 mA × --------
24 V 
-
 Us 
Operating times at 0.8 to 1.1 × Us 1)
Break-time = opening time + arcing time
AC operation closing time ms 16 ... 57 17 ... 90
opening time ms 10 ... 19 10 ... 25
DC operation closing time ms 90 ... 230 90 ... 230
opening time ms 14 ... 20 14 ... 20
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
Operating times at 1.0 × Us 1)
AC operation closing time ms 18 ... 34 18 ... 30
opening time ms 11 ... 18 11 ... 23
DC operation closing time ms 100 ... 120 100 ... 120
opening time ms 16 ... 20 16 ... 20
Main circuit
Load ratings with AC
AC-1 utilization category, switching resistive load
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 100 120 120
1000 V A 50 60 70
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 90 100 100
1000 V A 40 50 60
Ratings at 230 V kW 34 38 38
of three-phase loads 2) 400 V kW 59 66 66
p.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 500 V kW 74 82 82
690 V kW 102 114 114
1000 V kW 66 82 98
Minimum conductor cross-section with Ie load at 40 °C mm2 35 50 50
60 °C mm2 35 35 35
AC-2 and AC-3 utilization categories
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 65 80 95
500 V A 65 80 95
690 V A 47 58 58
1000 V A 25 30 30
Ratings of slipring or squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 18.5 22 22
motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 30 37 45
500 V kW 37 45 55
690 V kW 55 55 55
1000 V kW 30 37 37
Thermal loading capacity 10 s current 3) A 600 760 760
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 4.6 7.7 10.8
1) The opening times of the NO contacts and the 2) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with 3) Acc. to VDE 0660 Part 102.
closing times of the NC contacts increase if the resistance heating, for example (higher current For rated values for various starting conditions,
contactor coils are protected against voltage input allowed for during heating up). see Section 3.
peaks (varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assem-
blies 2 to 6 times).
Contactors
Contactorsand
andContactor
ContactorAssemblies
Assemblies
SIRIUS
SIRIUS Contactorsfor
Contactors forSwitching
SwitchingMotors
Motors
3RT10.4. contactors
3RT10 4. contactors
Technical data
Type 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46
Main circuit
AC-4 utilization category (at Ia = 6 × Ie)
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 55 66 80
Ratings of squirrel-cage motors at 400 V kW 30 37 45
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz
For a contact endurance of approx. 200 000 operating cycles:
690 V A 28 34 42
1000 V A 20 23 23
Ratings of squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 8.7 10.4 12
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 15.1 17.9 22
500 V kW 18.4 22.4 27
690 V kW 25.4 30.9 38
1000 V kW 22 30 30
AC-5a utilization category, switching gas discharge lamps
per main conducting path at 230 V
Rating Rated operational
per lamp current per lamp (A)
uncorrected
L 18 W 0.37 Units 243 270
L 36 W 0.43 Units 209 232
L 58 W 0.67 Units 134 149
lead-lag
L 18 W 0.11 Units 818 909
L 36 W 0.21 Units 428 476
L 58 W 0.32 Units 281 312
Switching gas discharge lamps with correction, electronic ballast
per main conducting path at 230 V
Rating Capacitor Rated operational
per lamp (µF) current per lamp (A)
Parallel correction
L 18 W 4.5 0.11 Units 160 197 234
L 36 W 4.5 0.21 Units 160 197 234
L 58 W 7 0.32 Units 103 127 150
With electronic ballast,
single lamp
L 18 W 6.8 0.10 Units 455 560 665
L 36 W 6.8 0.18 Units 253 311 369
L 58 W 10 0.27 Units 168 207 246
With electronic ballast,
twin lamp
L 18 W 10 0.18 Units 253 311 369
L 36 W 10 0.35 Units 130 160 190
L 58 W 22 0.52 Units 88 108 128
AC-5b utilization category, switching incandescent lamps

per main conducting path at 230/220 V kW 9 14.6 17.3
AC-6a utilization category, switching three-phase transformers

with inrush n 30 20 30 20 30 20
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 42.3 63.5 56.3 80 56.3 84.4
690 V A 42.3 47 56.3 58 56.3 58
Ratings of three-phase transformers at 230 V kVA 16.8 25.3 22.4 31.9 22.4 33.6
with an inrush of n = 30 or 20. 400 V kVA 29.3 43.9 39 55.4 39 58
The ratings must be re-calculated 500 V kVA 36.6 54.9 48.7 69.3 48.7 73.1
for other inrush factors x: 690 V kVA 50.3 56.2 67.3 69.3 67.3 69.3
Px = Pn 30
AC-6b utilization category, switching low-inductance

(low-loss, metallized-dielectric) three-phase capacitors
Ambient temperature 40 °C
Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 57 72
Ratings of single capacitors at 230 V kvar 24 29
or of capacitor banks (minimum inductance between 400 V kvar 40 50
parallel capacitors 6 µH) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 525 V kvar 50 65
690 V kvar 40 50

3RT10.4. contactors
Technical data
Type 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46
Main circuit
Load ratings with DC
DC-1 utilization category,
switching resistive load (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
Number of conducting paths connected in series 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
up to 24 V A 90 90 90 100 100 100 100 100 100
60 V A 23 90 90 60 100 100 60 100 100
110 V A 4.5 90 90 9 100 100 9 100 100
220 V A 1 5 70 2 10 80 2 10 80
440 V A 0.4 1 2.9 0.6 1.8 1.8 0.6 1.8 4.5
600 V A 0.26 0.8 1.4 0.4 1 1 0.4 1 2.6
DC-3 and DC-5 utilization categories,
shunt and series motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
Number of conducting paths connected in series 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
up to 24 V A 40 90 90 40 100 100 40 100 100
60 V A 6 90 90 6.5 100 100 6.5 100 100
110 V A 2.5 90 90 2.5 100 100 2.5 100 100
220 V A 1 7 35 1 7 35 1 7 35
440 V A 0.15 0.42 0.8 0.15 0.42 0.8 0.15 0.42 0.8
600 V A 0.06 0.16 0.35 0.06 0.16 0.35 0.06 0.16 0.35
Operating frequency
Operating frequency z in operating cycles per hour AC DC AC DC AC DC
Contactors without overload relays No-load operating 1/h 5000 1000 5000 1000 5000 1000
frequency
Dependence of the operating frequency z’ on the
operational current I’ and the operational voltage U’: AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC
for AC-1 1/h 1000 900 900
for AC-2 1/h 400 400 350
z’ = z ⋅ ---- ⋅ ---------- 
I e 400 V 1.5
1/h for AC-3 1/h 1000 1000 850
I′  U′  for AC-4 1/h 300 300 250
Contactors with overload relays (mean value) 1/h 15 15 15
Contactor Size S3
Type 3RT10 4.
Screw connections Main conductor: Front terminal Back terminal Both terminals
(1 or 2 conductor With box terminal connected connected connected
connections possible) Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2.5 ... 35 2.5 ... 50 max. 2 × 35
Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 4 ... 50 10 ... 50 max. 2 × 35
Solid mm2 2.5 ... 16 2.5 ... 16 max. 2 × 16
Stranded mm2 4 ... 70 10 ... 70 max. 2 × 50
Ribbon cable (qty. × width × thickness) mm 6 × 9 × 0.8 6 × 9 × 0.8 2 × (6 × 9 × 0.8)
AWG conductor connections, solid and stranded AWG 10 ... 2/0 10 ... 2/0 2 × (10 ... 1/0)
– Terminal screws M 6 (hexagon socket)
– Tightening torque Nm 4 ... 6 (36 ... 53 lb.in)
Connection for drilled max. width mm 10 If bars larger than 12 × 10 mm are con-
copper bars nected, a 3RT19 46-4EA1 terminal cover is to
comply with the phase clearance.
Without box terminal Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 10 ... 501) If conductors larger than 25 mm2 are con-
With cable lugs Stranded with cable lug mm2 10 ... 701) nected, a 3RT19 46-4EA1 terminal cover is
(1 or 2 conductor AWG conductor connections, solid or stranded 7 ... 1/0 needed to comply with the phase clearance.
connections possible)
Auxiliary conductor:
Solid mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 × (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60 947;
max. 2 × (0.75 ... 4)
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 × (0.75 ... 2.5)
AWG conductor connections, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (20 ... 16); 2 × (18 ... 14); 1 × 12
– Terminal screws M3
– Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)
Cage Clamp connections Auxiliary conductor:
(1 or 2 conductor Solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 2.5)
connections possible) Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 2.5)
AWG conductor connections, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (24 ... 14)
• For tool for opening
opening the Cage Clamp connection,
connection, see
see on accessories
accessories on page
page2/79
2/46.
• An "insulation
“insulation stop"
stop” must
must be
be used
used for
for conductor cross-sections ≤≤11 mm2,
conductor cross-sections see accessories
mm2, see accessories on page
page 2/46.
2/79.
• Max. outer diameter of conductor insulation:
insulation: 3.6 mm.
• For information about Cage Clamp
Clamp connections,
connections, see
see Appendix
Appendixpage
page19/17.
19/17.
1) Only
Only crimping
crimping cable
cablelugs
lugsacc.
acc.totoDIN
DIN46 46234
234

3RT10.5. contactors
Technical data
Type 3RT10 54 3RT10 55 3RT10 56
General data
The contactors are designed for operation
on a vertical mounting surface.
Mechanical endurance Oper. 10 million

cycles
Electrical endurance See page 2/123
Safe isolation between coil, auxiliary contacts and main contacts V 690
Positively driven operation Yes, between main contacts and auxiliary NC contacts and within
There is positively driven operation if the NC and the auxiliary switch blocks acc. to ZH 1/457, IEC 60 947-4-1,
Permissible ambient temperature in operation °C –25 ... +60/+55 with AS-Interface
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 IP 00/open type, coil system IP 20
Shock resistance Rectangular pulse g/ms 8.5/5 and 4.2/10
Sine pulse g/ms 13.4/5 and 6.5/10
Conductor cross-sections See page 2/145

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) See page 2/106
Short-circuit protection of contactors without overload relays See Part 4.
Main circuit
– acc. to IEC 60 947-4-1/EN 60 947-4-1 Type of coord. "1" 1) A 355 355
Type of coord. "2" 1) A 315 315
Auxiliary circuit
(weld-free protection at Ik 1 kA)
DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE
or miniature circuit-breaker with C-characteristic (Ik < 400 A)
Contactor Size S6
Type 3RT10 5 .
Control circuit
Coil voltage tolerance AC/DC (UC) 0.8 × Us min ... 1.1 × Us max
Power consumption of solenoid mechanism Conventional op. mechanism Solid-state op. mechanism
(with coil in cold state and rated range Us min ... Us max) Us min Us max Us min Us max
AC operation Closing VA 250 300 190 280
p.f. 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8
Closed VA 4.8 5.8 3.5 4.4
p.f. 0.8 0.8 0.5 0.4
DC operation Closing W 300 360 250 320
Closed W 4.3 5.2 2.3 2.8
PLC control input (EN 61 131-2/Type 2) DC 24 V/ 30 mA
Operating times Conventional op. mechanism Solid-state op. mechanism
(Break-time = opening time + arcing time) Operation via
A1/A2 PLC input
– at 0.8 × Us min ... 1.1 × Us max closing time ms 20 ... 95 95 ... 135 35 ... 75
opening time ms 40 ... 60 80 ... 90 80 ... 90
– at Us min ... Us max closing time ms 25 ... 50 100 ... 120 40 ... 60
opening time ms 40 ... 60 80 ... 90 80 ... 90
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
load relay must be replaced if necessary.

3RT10.5. contactors
Technical data
Type 3RT10 54 3RT10 55 3RT10 56
Main circuit
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 160 185 215
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 140 160 185
at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 80 90 100
Ratings of three-phase loads 1) at 230 V kW 53 60 70
p.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 92 105 121
500 V kW 115 131 152
690 V kW 159 181 210
1000 V kW 131 148 165
Minimum conductor cross-section with Ie load at 40 °C mm2 70 95 95
60 °C mm2 50 70 95
690 V A 115 150 170
1000 V A 53 65 65
Ratings of slipring or squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 37 50 61
500 V kW 81 105 132
690 V kW 113 146 167
1000 V kW 75 90 90
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3/500 V W 7 9 13
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz
690 V A 48 57 65
1000 V A 34 38 42
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 29 38 45
500 V kW 37 47 57
690 V kW 48 55 65
1000 V kW 49 55 60
with inrush n 30 20 30 20 30 20
Rated operational current Ie up to 690 V A 90 115 99 148 99 148
Ratings of three-phase transformers at 230 V kVA 35 45 39 58 39 58
with an inrush of n = 30 or 20. 400 V kVA 62 79 68 102 68 102
The ratings must be re-calculated 500 V kVA 77 99 85 128 85 128
for other inrush factors x: 690 V kVA 107 137 118 176 118 176
30 1000 V kVA 80 80 98 98 117 117
Px = Pn 30 ⋅ ------
x

Ratings of single capacitors at 230 V kvar 42 50 58
or of capacitor banks (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 72 86 100
between parallel capacitors 6 µH) 500 V kvar 90 108 125
at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 72 86 100
1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with 2) Acc. to VDE 0660 Part 102.
resistance heating, for example (higher current For rated values for various starting conditions,
input allowed for during heating up). see Section 3.

Contactors
Contactors and
and Contactor Assemblies
SIRIUS
SIRIUS Contactors
Contactors forfor SwitchingMotors
Switching Motors
3RT10 5. contactors
Technical data
Type 3RT10 54 3RT10 55 3RT10 56
Main circuit
switching resistive load (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
Number of conducting paths connected in series 1 2 3
up to 24 V A 160 160 160
60 V A 160 160 160
110 V A 18 160 160
220 V A 3.4 20 160
440 V A 0.8 3.2 1.4
600 V A 0.5 1.6 0.75
shunt and series motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
up to 24 V A 160 160 160
60 V A 7.5 160 160
110 V A 2.5 160 160
220 V A 0.6 2.5 160
440 V A 0.17 0.65 11.5
600 V A 0.12 0.37 4
Operating frequency
Operating frequency z in operating cycles per hour
Contactors without overload relays No-load operating 1/h 2000 2000
frequency
Dependence of the operating frequency z’ on the for AC-1 1/h 800 800
operational current I’ and the operational voltage U’: for AC-2 1/h 400 300
for AC-3 1/h 1000 750
I 400 V 1.5 for AC-4 1/h 130 130
- ⋅ ----------
z’ = z ⋅ ---
I′  U ′  1/h
Contactors with overload relays (mean value) 1/h 60 60
Contactor Size S6
Type 3RT10 5.
with 3RT19 55-4G box terminal (75 HP) connected connected connected
finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 16 ... 70 max. 1 × 50, 1 × 70
Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 16 ... 70 max. 1 × 50, 1 × 70
Stranded mm2 16 ... 70 16 ... 70 max. 2 × 70
AWG conductor connections, solid/stranded 6 ... 2/0 6 ... 2/0 max. 2 × 1/0
Ribbon cable (qty. x width × thickness) mm min. 3 × 9 × 0.8 min. 3 × 9 × 0.8
mm max. 6 × 15.5 × 0.8 max. 6 × 15.5 × 0.8 max. 2 × (6 × 15,5 × 0.8)
with 3RT19 56-4G box terminal
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120 16 ... 120 max. 1 × 95, 1 × 120
Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120 16 ... 120 max. 1 × 95, 1 × 120
Stranded mm2 16 ... 120 16 ... 120 max. 2 × 120
AWG conductor connections, solid/stranded 6 ... 250 kcmil 6 ... 250 kcmil max. 2 × 3/0
Ribbon cable (qty. × width × thickness) mm min. 3 × 9 × 0.8 min. 3 × 9 × 0.8
mm max. 10 × 15.5 × 0.8 max. 10 × 15.5 × 0.8 max. 2 × (10 × 15.5 × 0.8)
– Terminal screws M 10 (hexagon socket, A/F4)
Without box terminal/busbar connection
Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 16 ... 95 If cable lugs acc. to DIN 46 235 are connected,
Stranded with cable lug mm2 25 ... 120 as of a conductor cross-section of 95 mm2 a
3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is necessary to
comply with the phase clearance.
AWG conductor connections, solid or stranded AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil
Connecting bar (max. width) mm 17
– Terminal screws M 8 × 25 (A/F 13)
Solid mm2 2 × (0.5 ...1.5); 2 × (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60 947;
max. 2 × (0.75 ... 4)
– Terminal screws M 3 (PZ 2)

3RT10.6. contactors
Technical data

Type 3RT10 64 3RT10 65 3RT10 66
General data

cycles
There is positively driven operation if the NC and the auxiliary switch blocks acc. to ZH 1/457, IEC 60 947-4-1, Annex
NO contacts cannot be closed at the same time H (draft 17B/996/DC)

Main circuit
– acc. to IEC 60 947-4-1/EN 60 947-4-1 Type of coord. "1" 1) A 500
Type of coord. "2" 1) A 400
Weld-free 2) A 250
Auxiliary circuit
Contactor Size S10

Type 3RT10 6 .
Control circuit
AC operation closing VA 490 590 400 530
p.f. 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8
closed VA 5.6 6.7 4 5
p.f. 0.9 0.9 0.5 0.4
DC operation closing W 540 650 440 580
closed W 6.1 7.4 3.2 3.8
PLC control input (EN 61 131-2/Type 2) DC 24 V / 30 mA
A1/A2 PLC input
opening time ms 40 ... 80 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
opening time ms 50 ... 80 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15

3RT10.6. contactors
Technical data

Type 3RT10 64 3RT10 65 3RT10 66
Main circuit
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 275 330
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 250 300
at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 100 150
Ratings of three-phase loads 1) at 230 V kW 94 113
p.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 164 197
500 V kW 205 246
690 V kW 283 340
1000 V kW 164 246
Minimum conductor cross-section with Ie load at 40 °C mm2 150 185
60 °C mm2 120 185
690 V A 225 265 280
1000 V A 68 95 95
500 V kW 160 189 215
690 V kW 223 265 280
1000 V kW 90 132 132
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3/500 V W 17 18 22
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz
690 V A 85 105 115
1000 V A 42 57 57
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 54 66 71
500 V kW 67 82 87
690 V kW 82 102 112
1000 V kW 59 80 80
with inrush n 30 20 30 20 30 20
Rated operational current Ie up to 690 V A 151 227 182 265 182 273
Ratings of three-phase transformers at 230 V kVA 60 90 72 105 72 109
with an inrush of n = 30 or 20. 400 V kVA 105 157 126 183 126 189
The ratings must be re-calculated 500 V kVA 130 196 158 229 158 236
for other inrush factors x: 690 V kVA 180 271 217 317 217 326
1000 V kVA 117 117 164 164 164 164
30
Px = Pn 30 ------
x

or of capacitor banks (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 127 152
between parallel capacitors 6 µH) 500 V kvar 159 191
at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 127 152
1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters 2) Acc. to VDE 0660 Part 102.
with resistance heating, for example (higher For rated values for various
current input allowed for during heating up). starting conditions, see Section 3.

3RT10.6. contactors
Technical data

Type 3RT10 64 3RT10 65 3RT10 66
Main circuit
switching resistive load (L/R 1 ms)
Number of conducting paths connected in series 1 2 3 1 2 3
up to 24 V A 200 200 200 300 300 300
60 V A 200 200 200 300 300 300
110 V A 18 200 200 33 300 300
220 V A 3.4 20 200 3.8 300 300
440 V A 0.8 3.2 11.5 0.9 4 11
600 V A 0.5 1.6 4 0.6 2 5.2
shunt and series motors (L/R 15 ms)
Number of conducting paths connected in series 1 2 3 1 2 3
up to 24 V A 200 200 200 300 300 300
60 V A 7.5 200 200 11 300 300
110 V A 2.5 200 200 3 300 300
220 V A 0.6 2.5 200 0.6 2.5 300
440 V A 0.17 0.65 1.4 0.18 0.65 1.4
600 V A 0.12 0.37 0.75 0.125 0.37 0.75
Operating frequency
Contactors without overload relays No-load operating 1/h 2000 2000 2000
frequency
Dependence of the operating frequency z’ on the for AC-1 1/h 750 800 750
operational current I’ and the operational voltage U’: for AC-2 1/h 250 300 250
for AC-3 1/h 500 700 500
Ie 1.5
400 V for AC-4 1/h 130 130 130
z’ = z ----
I
---------- 1/h
U
Contactors with overload relays (mean value) 1/h 60 60 60
Contactor Size S10

Type 3RT10 6.
with 3RT19 66-4G box terminal connected connected connected
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 70 ... 240 120 ... 185 min. 2 × 50,
max. 2 × 185
Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 70 ... 240 120 ... 185 min. 2 × 50,
max. 2 × 185
Stranded mm2 95 ... 300 120 ... 240 min. 2 × 70,
max. 2 × 240
AWG conductor connections, solid or AWG 3/0 ... 600 kcmil 250 ... 500 kcmil min. 2 × 2/0,
stranded max. 2 × 500 kcmil
mm max. 20 × 24 × 0.5 max. 20 × 24 × 0.5 max. 2 × (20 × 24 × 0.5)
– Terminal screws M 12 (hexagon
sokket, A/F 5)
Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 50 ... 240 If cable lugs acc. to DIN 46 234 are con-
Stranded with cable lug mm2 70 ... 240 nected, as of a conductor cross-section of
240 mm2 and acc. to DIN 46 235 as of a con-
ductor cross-section of 185 mm2 a 3RT19 66-
4EA1 terminal cover is necessary to comply
with the phase clearance.
AWG conductor connections, solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
max. 2 × (0.75 ... 4)

3RT10.7. contactors
Technical data

Type 3RT10 75 3RT10 76
General data

cycles
Main circuit
– to IEC 60 947-4/EN 60 947-4-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Type of coord. "1" 1) A 630 630
Type of coord. "2" 1) A 500 500
Auxiliary circuit
Control circuit
p.f. 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8
closed VA 7.6 9.2 5.4 7
p.f. 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8
closed W 8.5 10 4 5

A1/A2 PLC input
opening time ms 60 ... 100 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
opening time ms 70 ... 100 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15

3RT10.7. contactors
Technical data

Type 3RT10 75 3RT10 76
Main circuit
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 430 610
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 400 550 3)
at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 200 200
Ratings of three-phase loads 1) at 230 V kW 151 208
p.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 263 362
500 V kW 329 452
690 V kW 454 624
1000 V kW 329 329
Minimum conductor cross-section with Ie load at 40 °C mm2 2 × 150 2 × 185
60 °C mm2 240 2 × 185
Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 400 500 4)
690 V A 400 450
1 000 V A 180 180
Ratings of slipring or squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 132 164
motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 231 291
500 V kW 291 363
690 V kW 400 453
1 000 V kW 250 250
Thermal loading capacity 10 s current 2) A 3200 4000
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3/500 V W 35 55
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 350 430
Ratings of squirrel-cage motors at 400 V kW 200 250
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz
690 V A 135 150
1 000 V A 80 80
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 85 98
500 V kW 105 123
690 V kW 133 148
1 000 V kW 113 113
with inrush n 30 20 30 20
Rated operational current Ie up to 690 V A 251 377 270 404
Ratings of three-phase transformers at 230 V kVA 100 150 107 161
with an inrush of n = 30 or 20. 400 V kVA 173 261 187 280
The ratings must be re-calculated 500 V kVA 217 326 234 350
for other inrush factors x: 690 V kVA 300 450 323 483
1000 V kVA 311 311 311 311

or of capacitor banks (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 199 282
between parallel capacitors 6 µH) 500 V kvar 248 352
at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 199 282
1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters 2) Acc. to VDE 0660 Part 102. 3) Ambient temperature 50 °C
with resistance heating, for example (higher For rated values for various for 3RT10 76-.N contactor
current input allowed for during heating up). starting conditions, see Section 3. 4) Ambient temperature 55 °C
for 3RT10 76-.N contactor

Contactors and ContactorAssemblies
Assemblies
SIRIUS
3RT10.7. contactors
3RT10 7. contactors
Technical data

Type 3RT10 75 3RT10 76
Main circuit
switching resistive load (L/R 1 ms)
up to 24 V A 400 400 400
60 V A 330 400 400
110 V A 33 400 400
220 V A 3.8 400 400
440 V A 0.9 4 11
600 V A 0.6 2 5.2
shunt and series motors (L/R 15 ms)
up to 24 V A 400 400 400
60 V A 11 400 400
110 V A 3 400 400
220 V A 0.6 2.5 400
440 V A 0.18 0.65 1.4
600 V A 0.125 0.37 0.75
Operating frequency
frequency
for AC-3 1/h 500 420
Ie 400 V 1.5 for AC-4 1/h 130 130
z’ = z ----
I
---------- 1/h
U
Contactor Size S12

Type 3RT10 7.
max. 2 × 185
max. 2 × 185
Stranded mm2 95 ... 300 120 ... 240 min. 2 × 70,
max. 2 × 240
mm max. 20 × 24 × 0.5 max. 20 × 24 × 0.5 max. 2 × (20 × 24 × 0.5)
socket, A/F 5)
max. 2 × (0.75 ... 4)

3RT12.6. vacuum contactors
Technical data

Type 3RT12 64 3RT12 65 3RT12 66
General data

cycles
Main circuit
– to IEC 60 947-4/EN 60 947-4-4 (VDE 0660Part 102) Type of coord. "1" 1) A 500
Weld-free 2) A 400
Auxiliary circuit
Control circuit
p.f. 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8
closed VA 6.1 7.4 4.3 5.6
p.f. 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8
closed W 6.8 8.2 3.4 4.2

A1/A2 PLC input
opening time ms 40 ... 80 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
opening time ms 50 ... 80 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
2/152
Siemens Industry, Inc. Siemens Industry, Inc.
Industrial Controls Catalog Industrial Controls Catalog
Technical data

Type 3RT12 64 3RT12 65 3RT12 66
Main circuit
Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 1000 V A 330
at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 300
Ratings of three-phase loads 1) at 230 V kW 113
p.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 197
500 V kW 246
690 V kW 340
1000 V kW 492
Minimum conductor cross-section with Ie load at 40 °C mm2 185
60 °C mm2 185
500 V kW 160 189 215
690 V kW 223 265 288
1000 V kW 320 378 428
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 9 12 14
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz
1000 V A 68 81 98
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 55 65 79
500 V kW 68 81 98
690 V kW 94 112 138
1000 V kW 95 114 140
with inrush n 30 20
Ratings of three-phase transformers at 230 V kVA 74 111
with an inrush of n = 30 or 20. 400 V kVA 128 193
The ratings must be re-calculated 500 V kVA 160 241
for other inrush factors x: 690 V kVA 221 332
1000 V kVA 320 482

Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 220
Ratings of single capacitors at 230 V kvar 88
or of capacitor banks (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 152
between parallel capacitors 6 µH) 500 V kvar 191
at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 152
Operating frequency
frequency
for AC-3 1/h 750 750
for AC-4 1/h 250 250

Contactors and Motors
Contactors for Switching Contactor Assemblies SIRIUS
3RT12 6. vacuum contactors
Technical data
Contactor Size S10

Type 3RT12 6.
max. 2 × 185
max. 2 × 185
Stranded mm2 95 ... 300 120 ... 240 min. 2 × 70,
max. 2 × 240
mm max. 20 × 24 × 0.5 max. 20 × 24 × 0.5 max. 2 × (20 × 24 ×
0.5)
socket, A/F 5)
max. 2 × (0.75 ... 4)

3RT12.7. contactors
Technical data

Type 3RT12 75 3RT12 76
General data

cycles
Main circuit
– to IEC 60 947-4/EN 60 947-4-4 (VDE 0660Part 102) Type of coord. "1" 1) A 800
Weld-free 2) A 500
Auxiliary circuit
Control circuit
p.f. 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8
closed VA 7.6 9.2 5.4 7
p.f. 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8
closed W 8.5 10 4 5
A1/A2 PLC input
opening time ms 60 ... 100 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
opening time ms 70 ... 100 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15

Technical data

Type 3RT12 75 3RT12 76
Main circuit
at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 550
Ratings of three-phase loads 1) at 230 V kW 208
p.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 362
500 V kW 452
690 V kW 624
1000 V kW 905
Minimum conductor cross-section with Ie load at 40 °C mm2 2 × 185
60 °C mm2 2 × 185
Ratings of slipring or squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 132 164
motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 231 291
500 V kW 291 363
690 V kW 400 507
1000 V kW 578 728
Thermal loading capacity 10 s current 2) A 3200 4000
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 21 32

Ratings of squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz at 400 V kW 200 250

1000 V A 123 151
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 98 122
500 V kW 124 153
690 V kW 172 212
1000 V kW 183 217
with inrush n 30 20
Ratings of three-phase transformers at 230 V kVA 111 167
with an inrush of n = 30 or 20. 400 V kVA 193 290
The ratings must be re-calculated 500 V kVA 241 363
for other inrush factors x: 690 V kVA 332 501
1000 V kVA 482 726

Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 407
Ratings of single capacitors at 230 V kvar 162
or of capacitor banks (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 282
between parallel capacitors 6 µH) 500 V kvar 352
at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 282
Operating frequency
Contactors without overload relays No-load operating 1/h 2000
frequency
Dependence of the operating frequency z’ on the for AC-1 1/h 700
operational current I’ and the operational voltage U’: for AC-2 1/h 250
for AC-3 1/h 750
for AC-4 1/h 250
Contactors with overload relays (mean value) 1/h 60

Contactors
Contactorsand
andContactor
ContactorAssemblies
Assemblies
SIRIUS
3RT12 7. vacuum contactors
Technical data
Contactor Size S12

Type 3RT12 7.
max. 2 × 185
max. 2 × 185
Stranded mm2 95 ... 300 120 ... 240 min. 2 × 70,
max. 2 × 240
mm max. 20 × 24 × 0.5 max. 20 × 24 × 0.5 max. 2 × (20 × 24 × 0.5)
socket, A/F 5)
max. 2 × (0.75 ... 4)

3RT14 contactors, 3-pole,
Technical data
Contactor Size S3
Type 3RT14 46
General data
Permissible mounting position AC and DC operation For DC operation and forward
The contactors are designed for operation inclination up to 22.5°:
on a vertical mounting surface. coil voltage tolerance 0.85 ... 1.1 ×
Us
Upright mounting position:
AC operation Special design required.

Positions 13 ... 16 of the Order No. must be changed to -1AA0.
Additional charge.
DC operation –
cycles
Electrical endurance Oper. 0.5 million
AC-1 utilization category at Ie cycles
Safe isolation between coil and main contacts V 690
Permissible ambient temperature in operation °C –25 ... +60
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 IP 20 (terminal compartment IP 00), coil system IP 40
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10
Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10.6/5 and 6.2/10
Short-circuit protection of contactors without overload relays
Main circuit
NH, Type 3NA Type of coord. "1" 2) A 250
Fuse links, utilization category gR
SITOR, Type 3NE Type of coord. "2" 2) A 250
Auxiliary circuit
Fuse links, utilization category gL/gG (weld-free protection at Ik 1 kA) A 10
or miniature circuit-breaker with C-characteristic (Ik < 400 A) A 10
Control circuit
Coil voltage tolerance AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 × Us
Power consumption of the coils (with coil in cold state and 1.0 × Us) Standard design For USA and Canada
AC operation Hz 50 50/60 50 60
closing VA 270 298 /274 270 300
p.f. 0.68 0.7 / 0.62 0.68 0.52
closed VA 22 27 / 20 22 21
p.f. 0.27 0.29/ 0.31 0.27 0.29
DC operation closing = closed W 15
Operating times at 0.8 ... 1.1 × Us 1)
Break-time = opening time + arcing time
AC operation closing time ms 17 ... 90
opening time ms 10 ... 25
DC operation closing time ms 90 ... 230
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15
Operating times at 1.0 × Us 1)
AC operation closing time ms 18 ... 30
DC operation closing time ms 100 ... 120
1) The opening times of the NO contacts and the 2) According to excerpt from Type of coordination "2":
closing times of the NC contacts increase if the IEC 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102): No damage can be tolerated to the overload
contactor coils are protected against voltage Type of coordination "1": relay, but contact welding on the contactor is
peaks: varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assem- Destruction of the contactor and the overload permitted if the contacts can be easily sepa-
blies 2 to 6 times. relay is permissible. The contactor and/or over- rated.

Contactors
Contactorsand
andContactor
ContactorAssemblies
Assemblies
Contactors forSpecial
SpecialApplications
Applications
Technical data
Contactor Size S3
Type 3RT14 46
Main circuit
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 130
at 1 000 V A 60
Ratings at 230 V kW 50
of three-phase loads 400 V kW 86
p.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 500 V kW 107
690 V kW 148
1000 V kW 98
Minimum conductor cross-section with Ie load at 40 °C mm2 50
at 60 °C mm2 50
With an electrical endurance of 1.3 million operating cycles
Rated operational current Ie up to 690 V A 44
Ratings of slipring or squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 12.7
motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 22
500 V kW 29.9
690 V kW 38.2
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-1 W 12.5
DC-1 utilization category, switching resistive load L/R 1 ms)
Number of conducting paths when connected in series 1 2 3
Rated operational currents Ie (at 60 °C) up to 24 V A 130 130 130
60 V A 80 130 130
110 V A 12 130 130
220 V A 2.5 13 130
440 V A 0.8 2.4 6
600 V A 0.48 1.3 3.4
DC-3 and DC-5 utilization categories, shunt and series motors

Number of conducting paths when connected in series 1 2 3
Rated operational currents Ie (at 60 °C) up to 24 V A 6 130 130
60 V A 3 130 130
110 V A 1.25 130 130
220 V A 0.35 1.75 4
440 V A 0.15 0.42 0.8
600 V A 0.1 0.27 0.45
Operating frequency
Operating frequency z in operating cycles per hour AC operation DC operation
Contactors without overload relays No-load operating fre- 1/h 5000 1000
quency
Rated operation for AC-1 1/h 650 650
for AC-3 1/h 1000 1000
Dependence of the operating frequency z’ on the
operational current I’ and the operational voltage U’:
1.5
Ie 400 V
z’ = z ---- ----------
- 1/h
I U

for switcing resistive loads (AC-1)

Technical data
Contactor Size S6
Type 3RT14 56
General data

cycles
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse g/ms 8.5/5 and 4.2/10
Main circuit
Fuse links, utilization category gL/gG,
NH, Type 3NA Type of coordination "1" A 355
Fuse links, utilization category gR,
SITOR, Type 3NE Type of coordination "2" A 350
Auxiliary circuit
Control circuit
p.f. 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8
closed VA 4.8 5.8 3.5 4.4
p.f. 0.8 0.8 0.5 0.4
closed W 4.3 5.2 2.3 2.8

A1/A2 PLC input
opening time ms 40 ... 60 80 ... 90 80 ... 90
opening time ms 40 ... 60 80 ... 90 80 ... 90
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
Main circuit
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 250
at 1000 V A 100
Ratings at 230 V kW 95
of three-phase loads 400 V kW 165
p.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 500 V kW 205
690 V kW 285
1000 V kW 165
Minimum conductor cross-section with Ie load at 40 °C mm2 2 × 70
at 60 °C mm2 120
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-1 W 20

Special Applications SIRIUS

Contactors
Contactorsand
andContactor
ContactorAssemblies
Assemblies
Contactors forSpecial
SpecialApplications
Applications
Technical data

Type 3RT14 66 3RT14 76
General data

cycles
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse g/ms 8.5/5 and 4.2/10
Main circuit
Fuse links, utilization category gL/gG,
NH, Type 3NA Type of coordination "1" A 500 800
Fuse links, utilization category gR,
SITOR, Type 3NE Type of coordination "2" A 500 710
Auxiliary circuit
Contactor Size S10

Type 3RT14 66
Control circuit
p.f. 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8
closed VA 5.6 6.7 4 5
p.f. 0.9 0.9 0.5 0.4
closed W 6.1 7.4 3.2 3.8
A1/A2 PLC input
opening time ms 40 ... 80 80 ... 200 80 ... 100
opening time ms 50 ... 80 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15



Contactors
3RT, and Contactor
3RH Contactors Assemblies
for Special Applications
3RT23 Contactors for Applications
Switching Resistive Loads (AC-1) • Revised • SIRIUS
3RT23 contactors, 4-pole (4 NO),
switching resistive loads 09/30/14
4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 42 A
More information
Contactors Type 3RT23 16 3RT23 17 3RT23 25 3RT23 26 3RT23 27
Size S00 S0
Dimensions (W x H x D)3) Width mm 45 x 57.5 x 73 60 x 85 x 97
General data
Permissible mounting position1)
Mechanical endurance Oper- 30 million 10 million
ating
cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie/AC-1 Oper- Approx. 0.5 million
ating
3
cycles
(pollution degree 3)
Permissible ambient temperature • During operation °C -25 ... +60
Degree of protection Device IP20 IP20
Acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C Connection range IP00
Main circuit
Fuse links, gG operational class: • Type of coordination "1"1) A 35 63
LV HRC 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE • Type of coordination "2"1) A 20 20
according to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Weld-free A 10 16
EN 60947-4-1
Control
• AC operation - At 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us --
- At 60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us --
• DC operation - At 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us --
- At 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us --
• AC/DC operation -- 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
• AC operation, 50 Hz, - Closing VA -- 77
standard version - P.f. -- 0.82
- Closed VA -- 9.8
- P.f. -- 0.25
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz, - Closing VA 27/24.3 37/33 81/79
standard version - P.f. 0.8/0.75 0.8/0.75 0.72/0.74
- Closed VA 4.2/3.3 5.7/4.4 10.5/8.5
- P.f. 0.25/0.25 0.25/0.25 0.25/0.28
• AC operation, 60 Hz, - Closing VA 31.7 43 87
USA, Canada - P.f. 0.77 0.77 0.76
- Closed VA 4.8 6.5 9.4
- P.f. 0.25 0.25 0.28
• DC operation - Closing W 4 5.9
= Closed
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 8 ... 35 8 ... 33 9 ... 38 8 ... 40
- Opening delay ms 3.5 ... 14 4 ... 15 4 ... 16 4 ... 16
- Opening delay ms 7 ... 13 15 ... 17.5
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-1, switching resistive loads
• Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C, up to 690 V A 18 22 35 40 50
At 60 °C, up to 690 V A 16 20 30 35 42
• Rated power for AC loads At 460 V HP 5 5 10 10 10
P.f. = 0.95 (at 40 °C)
• Minimum conductor cross-section At 40 °C mm2 2.5 2.5 10 10 10
for loads with Ie At 60 °C mm2 2.5 2.5 10 10 10
• Rated operational currents Ie At 60 °C, up to 400 V A 9 12 15.5 17 17
• Rated power for slipring At 460 V HP 5 5 10 10 10
or squirrel-cage motors at 60 Hz s
1) 3) Dimensions for devices with screw terminals. Size S0 for AC operation. DC

In accordance with the corresponding 3-pole 3RT2. contactors.
2) operation: Depth + 10mm.
With size S00, DC operation: Operating times at 0.85 ... 1.1 x U .

Overview
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,
Contactors
usedand Contactor Assemblies
The accessories for the 3-pole 3RT10 contactors can also be
for the 4-pole versions.
SIRIUS
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1, Contactors for Special Applications
The contactors are suitable for switching mixed loads in distribu-
IEC 60947-5-1, EN • Revised
60947-5-1 • switches)
(auxiliary tion systems (e.g. for supplying heaters, lamps, motors, PC
power supply units) with3RT13
p.f. > contactors,
0.8 according to4-pole (4 NO),
IEC 60947-4-1,
10/22/15
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are fin- test conditions for utilizationfor switching
category AC-1. resistive loads
ger-safe according to EN 50274.
Type 3RT23 36 3RT13 44 3RT13 46
Size S2 S3 S3
4
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 74.5 x 113.5 x 130 / 73 x 112 x 110 93 x 146 x 134
H
74.5 x 113.5 x 130
D
W
• With mounted auxiliary switch block mm 74.5 x 113.5 x 173.5 / 73 x 112 x 160 93 x 146 x 183
74.5 x 113.5 x 177.5
General technical specifications
Permissible mounting position1)
Mechanical endurance Operating 10 million
cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie/AC-1 Operating Approx. 0.5 million
cycles
Degree of protection Device IP20
acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix C Connection range
Main circuit
Fuse links, operational class gG: • Type of coordination "1"1) A on request 250 250
LV HRC, 3NA; DIAZED, 5SB; NEOZED, 5SE • Type of coordination "2"1) A on request 125 160
according to IEC 60947-4-1/EN 60947-4-1 • Weld-free A on request 63 100
Control circuit
Coil operating range (AC/DC) 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
• AC operation, 50 Hz - Closing VA 190 270
- P.f. VA 0.72 0.68
- Closed VA 16 22
- P.f. VA 0.37 0.27
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz - Closing VA 210/188 298/274
- P.f. 0.69/0.65 0.72/0.62
- Closed VA 17.2/16.5 27/20
- P.f. 0.36/0.3 0.29/0.31
• DC operation - Closing W 15
= Closed
• DC operation - Closing delay ms 110 ... 200
- Opening delay ms 14 ... 20
- Opening delay ms 10 ... 18 10 ... 25
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 20 10 ... 15
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-1, switching resistive loads
• Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C, up to 690 V A 60 110 140
At 60 °C, up to 690 V A 55 100 120
• Rated power for AC loads At 230 V kW 21 42 53
P.f. = 0.95 (at 40 °C) 400 V kW 36 72 92
• Minimum conductor cross-section At 40 °C mm² 16 50 50
for loads with Ie At 60 °C mm² 25 50 50
• Rated operational currents Ie At 60 °C, up to 400 V A -- --
• Rated power for slipring At 230 V kW -- --
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW -- --
1)
In accordance with the corresponding 3-pole 3RT1 contactors.
2)
With size S00, DC operation: Operating times for 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

The accessories for the 3-pole 3RT20 contactors can also be two current sources.
used for the 4-pole versions.
For a general description of sizes S00 to S2, see Chapter 3,
"Power contactors for switching motors" ➞
With sizes S0 and S2, two auxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC are
included in the basic version. "SIRIUS 3RT20 contactors, 3-pole, up to 37 kW".
4
Mountable auxiliary contacts • Revised •
3RT25 contactors, 4-pole (2 NO + 2 NC),
Size S00 to S2
for switching motors 09/22/15
Four additional auxiliary contacts, including no more than 2 NC.
■ Technical specifications
Type 3RT2516 3RT2517 3RT2518 3RT2526 3RT2535 3RT2536
Size S00 S0 S2
The contactors are designed for operation on a 360° 22,5° 22,5°
NSB0_00478c
NSB0_00477a

Mechanical endurance Operating 30 million 10 million
cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie/AC-1 Operating Approx. 0.5 million
cycles
(Pollution degree 3)
• During operation °C -25 ... +60 -25 ... +60
• During storage °C -55 ... +80 -55 ... +80
Main circuit
Fuse links, operational class gG:
LV HRC, type 3NA; DIAZED, type 5SB; NEOZED, type 5SE
according to IEC 60947-4-1/EN 60947-4-1
• Type of coordination "1" A 35 63 125 160
• Weld-free A 10 16 -- --
Type 3RT2516 3RT2517 3RT2518 3RT2536 3RT2537

Size S00 S2
Dimensions (W x H x D)1) 45 x 57.5 x 73 / 45 x 70 x 73 74.5 x 113.5 x 130 / 74.5 x 113.5 x 130
H
• with mounted auxiliary switch block 45 x 57.5 x 116 / 45 x 70 x 121 74.5 x 113.5 x 173.5 / 74.5 x 113.5 x 177.5
D
Type 3RT2526
Size S0
Dimensions (W x H x D) for AC operation1)2) mm 60 x 85 x 97 / 60 x 101.5 x 97
H
• with mounted auxiliary switch block mm 60 x 85 x 141 / 60 x 101.5 x 144

D
W
Dimensions (W x H x D) for DC operation1)2) mm 60 x 85 x 107 / 60 x 101.5 x 107
• with mounted auxiliary switch block mm 60 x 85 x 151 / 60 x 101.5 x 154
1) Dimensions for devices with screw terminals/spring-type terminals.
2)
For size S0, devices for AC and DC operation differ in depth. The following
applies: Depth (DC) = Depth (AC) + 10 mm.
4/34 Siemens IC 10 · 2015

© Siemens AG 2015

SIRIUS • Revised • Contactors
Contactorsfor
forSpecial Applications
3RT25 contactors, 4-pole (2 NO + 2 NC),
09/22/15 for switching motors
SIRIUS 3RT25 contactors, 4-pole, 2 NO + 2 NC, 4 ... 22 kW
Type 3RT2516 3RT2517 3RT2518 3RT2526 3RT2535 3RT2536

Size S00 S0 S2
Control circuit
• AC operation at 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
• DC operation up to 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us --
up to 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us --
• AC/DC operation -- 0.8 x Usmin... 1.1 x Usmax
Power consumption of the solenoid coils see see 3RT2317 see 3RT2326 see 3RT233
(for cold coil and 1.0 x Us) 3RT2316
Operating times for 0.8 to 1.1 x Us see see 3RT2317 see 3RT2326 see 3RT233
(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time) 3RT2316
4
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
• Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 18 22 40 60 70
at 60 °C up to 690 V A 16 20 35 55 60
• Rated power for at 230 V kW 6 7.5 13.3 21 23
AC loads 400 V kW 10.5 13 23 36 39
p.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C)
• Minimum conductor cross-section at 40 °C mm2 2.5 2.5 10 16 25
for loads with Ie
Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3 AC1) DC1)
• Rated operational currents Ie NO up to 400 V A 9 12 16 25 25 35 41
(at 60 °C) NC up to 400 V A 9 9 9 25 20 35 41
• Rated power for slipring or squirrel-cage NO at 230 V kW 2.2 3 4 5.5 5.5 11
motors at 50 and 60 Hz NC at 230 V kW 2.2 2.2 2.2 5.5 5.5 11
NO at 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 11 18.5 22
NC at 400 V kW 4 4 4 11 7.5 18.5 22
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-1
Switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
- 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 16 20 35 55 60
60 V A 16 20 20 23
110 V A 2.1 2.1 4.5 4.5
220 V A 0.8 0.8 1 1
440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4
- 2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 16 20 35 55
60 V A 16 20 35 45
110 V A 12 12 35 45
220 V A 1.6 1.6 5 5
440 V A 0.8 0.8 1 1
Utilization category DC-3/DC-52)
Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
- 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 16 20 20 35
60 V A 0.5 0.5 5 6
110 V A 0.15 0.15 2.5 2.5
220 V A 0.75 0.75 1 1
440 V A -- -- 0.09 0.1
- 2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 16 20 35 55
60 V A 5 5 35 45
110 V A 0.35 0.35 15 25
220 V A -- -- 3 5
440 V A -- -- 0.27 0.27
1)
Values for devices with AC and DC operation: for 3RT25 26 with
DC operation, different values apply to AC-2 and AC-3 for the NC.
2)
For Us >24 V, the rated operational currents Ie for the NC contact
conducting paths are 50 % of the values for the NO contact
conducting paths.

Siemens IC 10 · 2015 4/35
The auxiliary switch block which is snapped onto the capacitor
Function contactor contains the three leading NO contacts and in the
case of S00 one standard NC contact and in the case of S0 and
The 3RT16 capacitor contactors are special versions of the
3RT10 contactors size S00 to S3. The capacitors are precharged S3 one standard NO contact, which is unassigned. Size S00 also
contains another unassigned NO contact in the basic unit.
by means of the mounted leading NO contacts and resistors;
4
only then do the main contacts close. In addition, a 2-pole auxiliary switch block can be mounted lat-
This prevents disturbances in the network and welding of the erally on the 3RT16 47 capacitor contactors (2 NO, 2 NC or
1 NO + 1 NC versions); type 3RH19 21-1EA . . . The fitting of aux-
3RT16 capacitor contactors
contactors.
iliary switches for 3RT16 17 and 3RT16 27 is not expandable.
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are those of the 3RT10 26 contactors for size S0 and to those of the
identical to those of the 3RT10 17 contactors for size S00, to 3RT10 45 contactors for size S3. .
Type 3RT16 17-.A. .3 3RT16 27-.A. .1 3RT16 47-.A. .1
Size S00 S0 S3
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 45 x 101 x 105 45 x 100 x 130 70 x 167 x 183
H
including auxiliary switches and connecting cables
D
W

Capacitor rating 230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 3 … 7.5 3.5 … 15 3.5 … 30
at rated power 400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 5 … 12.5 6 … 25 5 … 50
(utilization category AC-6b) 525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 7.5 … 15 7.8 … 30 7.5 … 60
690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 10 … 21 10 … 42 10 … 84
Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO
Auxiliary contacts mountable (lateral), not for sizes S00 and S0 -- 2 NC + 2 NO or
1 NO + 1 NC
Max. switching frequency h-1 180 100
Electrical endurance Operating > 250 000 > 150 000 > 100 000
cycles
Ambient temperature °C 60
Short-circuit protection 1.6 ... 2.2 x Ie
Coil operating range 0.8 … 1.1 x Us
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2); 2 x (1 ... 2.5)2); --

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2)
according to according to
IEC 60947; IEC 60947;
max. 2 x (1 ... 4)2) max. 1 x 10 1)2)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2); 2 x (1 ... 2.5)2); --
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 1)2)
• AWG cables
- Solid AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (16 ... 12) --
- Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10) --
- Stranded AWG 1 x 12 1x8 --
• Terminal screws M3 M4 (Pozidriv size 2) --
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 --
lb.in 7 ... 10.3 18 ... 22 --
1) 3RV19 25-5AB feeder terminal for 16 mm².
Siemens IC 10 · 2012 4/35

Contactors and3RT
Coupling Contactors
3RT20 coupling relays (interface)
3RT20 coupling contactors (interface),
for switchiing
for switching motors, 3-pole, 3 ...motors
20 HP
More information
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are
identical to those of the 3RT20 contactors for switching motors
(see 2/128-2/130)
Contactors Type 3RT20 1.-.HB4. 3RT20 1.-.JB4. 3RT20 1.-.KB4. 3RT20 2.-.KB4.
Size S00 S00 S00 S0
Width mm 45 45 45 45
General data
Mechanical endurance Oper- 30 million 10 million
ating
3
cycles
acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
Control
Solenoid coil operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us
Power consumption of the solenoid At Us 17 V W 1.6 2.3
coil 24 V W 2.8 4.5
(for cold coil)
Closing = Closed 30 V W 4.4 7
Permissible residual current < 10 mA x (24 V/Us) < 6 mA x (24 V/Us)
of the electronics (for 0 signal)
Overvoltage configuration of the solenoid coil Without overvolt- With diode With suppressor With varistor
age damping diode
Operating times of the coupling contactors

• Closing
- At 17 V ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 130 70 ... 270
OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 80 60 ... 250
- At 24 V ON-delay NO ms 35 ... 60 65 ... 90
OFF-delay NC ms 25 ... 40 55 ... 80
- At 30 V ON-delay NO ms 25 ... 50 52 ... 65
OFF-delay NC ms 15 ... 30 43 ... 57
• Closing at 17 ... 30 V OFF-delay NO ms 7 ... 20 38 ... 65 7 ... 20 19 ... 21
ON-delay NC ms 20 ... 30 55 ... 75 20 ... 30 25 ... 31
Contactors Type 3RT20 1.-1MB4.-0KT0 3RT20 1.-1VB4. 3RT20 1.-1WB4.

Size S00 S00 S00
Width mm 45 45 45
General data
Mechanical endurance Oper- 30 million
ating
cycles
acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
Control
Solenoid coil operating range 0.85 ... 1.85 x Us
Power consumption of the solenoid At Us 24 V W 1.6
coil
(for cold coil)
Closing = Closed
Permissible residual current, On request
upright mounting position
Overvoltage configuration of the solenoid coil Without overvoltage With diode With suppressor diode
damping
Operating times of the coupling contactors

• Closing
- At 20.5 V ON-delay NO ms 30 ... 120
OFF-delay NC ms 20 ... 110
- At 24 V ON-delay NO ms 25 ... 90
- At 44 V ON-delay NO ms 15 ... 60
• Opening OFF-delay NO ms 5 ... 20 20 ... 80 5 ... 20
ON-delay NC ms 10 ... 30 30 ... 90 10 ... 30

Contactors
Power and Contactor
3TF6 vacuum contactors, 09/22/15
3TF68
3-pole,and
335 3TF69 Vacuum contactors
... 450 kW
Overview
Standards Electromagnetic compatibility
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1, The 3TF68/69 . . - . C contactors for AC operation are fitted with an
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1, electronically controlled solenoid operating mechanism with a
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 (auxiliary switches) high interference immunity (for EMC values see page 3/115).
The 3TF68/69 contactors are climate-proof. The solenoid coil is connected to varistors for protection against
overvoltages.
They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal covers
may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars, depending on The 3TF68/69 . . - . Q .. contactors for AC operation are designed
3
the configuration with other devices (see Accessories and Spare for operation in systems with AC control supply voltage which is
Parts on page 2/54). subject to strong interference. The solenoid systems of these
contactors are configured in the DC economy circuit with rectifi-
Main contacts cation. The rectifier bridge is connected to varistors for protec-
Contact erosion indication with 3TF68/69 vacuum contactors tion against overvoltages.
The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked Protection of the main current paths
during operation with the help of 3 white double slides on the
contactor base. If the distance indicated by one of the double An integrated RC varistor connection for the main current paths
slides is < 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed position, dampens the switching overvoltage rises to safe values. This
then the vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maxi- prevents multiple restricting. It can therefore be assumed that
mum reliability, it is recommended to replace all 3 vacuum inter- the motor winding cannot be damaged by switching overvolt-
rupters simultaneously. ages with steep voltage rises.
Note:
Auxiliary contacts
During operation in installations in which the emitted interference
Contact reliability limits cannot be observed, e.g. when used for output contactors
These auxiliary contacts are particularly suitable for solid-state in converters, 3TF68/69 . . - . Q contactors without a main current
circuits with currents ≥ 1 mA at a voltage ≥ 17 V. path circuit are recommended.
Contactor Type 3TF68 and 3TF69
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
Conventional thermal current A 10
Ith = Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
AC load
• For rated operational voltage Ue
- At 24 V A 10
- At 110 V A 10
- At 125 V A 10
- At 220 V A 6
- At 230 V A 5.6
- At 380 V A 4
- At 400 V A 3.6
- At 500 V A 2.5
- At 660 V A 2.5
- At 690 V A 2.3
DC load
- At 24 V A 10
- At 60 V A 10
- At 110 V A 3.2
- At 125 V A 2.5
- At 220 V A 0.9
- At 440 V A 0.33
- At 600 V A 0.22
Rated operational current Ie/DC-13 Auxiliary contacts with
• For rated operational voltage Ue delayed NC contact: NS = No specification
- At 24 V A 10 6
- At 60 V A 5 NS
- At 110 V A 1.14 0.98
- At 125 V A 0.98 NS
- At 220 V A 0.48 NS
- At 440 V A 0.13 NS
- At 600 V A 0.07 0.07
Rated voltage, max. V AC 600
Switching capacity A 600, P 600

3/112 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
SIRIUS
3TF6 vacuum contactors,
3TF68 and 3TF69 Vacuum contactors
3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
Contactor 3TF68 and 3TF69

Contact endurance of the auxiliary contacts
The contact endurance for utilization category AC-12 or 4
AC-15/AC-14 depends mainly on the breaking current. It is 3
NSB0_00651b
assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched ran- 2

domly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the
Operating cycles
supply system. 10
7
8
The characteristic curves apply to 230 V AC. 6
3
4
3
2
6
10
8
6
4
3
2
5
10
-2 -1 0 1
10 2 3 4 6 8 10 2 3 4 6 8 10 2 3 4 6 8 10 2
Breaking current a ( A )
3TF68 and 3TF69

Contact erosion indication with vacuum contactors
The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be
checked during operation with the help of 3 white double
slides on the contactor base.
If the distance indicated by one of the double slides is
< 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed position, the
vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum
reliability, it is recommended to replace all 3 vacuum inter-
rupters.
Contact endurance of the main contacts
Contactor type 3TF68 3TF69
7 8 107
10 6 8 NSB0_00654a
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4
Operating cycles at 400 V
2
2 2
6
2 6 10
10 8 10
6
6 8
10 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 5
5 10
10 8 10
5
10
5 8 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 4
4 10
10 8 10
4
10
4 8 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 3
3 10
10 10
3
100 200 400 600 1000 2000 4000 a (A) 6000
635
820 e (A)
335 Prated (kW)
450
Diagram legend:
Prated = Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
a
= Breaking current
e
= Rated operational current

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 3/113
Contactors
Power and Contactor
3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
Type 3TF68 3TF69

Size 14 14
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 230 x 276 x 237 230 x 295 x 237
General data
Permissible mounting position, installation 22,5° 22,5°
NSB0_00649a
instructions1) 2)
3
90° 90°
The contactors are designed for operation on a verti-
cal mounting surface.
Mechanical endurance Operating 5 million

cycles
3)
Electrical endurance Operating
cycles
Rated insulation voltage Ui kV 1
Protective separation between the coil and the main contacts kV 1
acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix N
Mirror contacts Yes, acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, Appendix F
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed simul-
taneously with a NO main contact.
One NC contact each must be connected in series for the right and left
auxiliary switch block respectively.
• During operation 5) °C -25 ... +55
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix C IP00/open (where applicable, use additional terminal covers)
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe with cover
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse
- AC operation g/ms 8.1/5 and 4.7/10 9.5/5 and 5.7/10
- DC operation g/ms 9/5 and 5.7/10 8.6/5 and 5.1/10
• Sine pulse
- AC operation g/ms 12.8/5 and 7.4/10 13.5/5 and 7.8/10
- DC operation g/ms 14.4/5 and 9.1/10 13.5/5 and 7.8/10
Conductor cross-sections See page 2/177.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) See page 2/106.
Main circuit
Fuse links, gG operational class:
according to IEC 60947-4-1/EN 60947-4-1
• Type of coordination "2" A 500 630
• Weld-free4) A 400 500
Auxiliary circuit
• Short-circuit test with fuse links of gG operational class: A 10
with Ik = 1 kA acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
• Test with miniature circuit breaker up to 230 V with C characteristic: A 10
Short-circuit current Ik = 400 A acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
1)
To easily replace the laterally mounted auxiliary switches it is recom-
mended to maintain a minimum distance of 30 mm between the contac-
tors.
2)
If mounted at a 90° angle (conducting paths are horizontally above each
other), the switching frequency is reduced by 80% compared with the nor-
mal values.
3) See “Endurance of the auxillary contacts”, page 2/173.
4)
Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.
5) For ambient temperatures > 55°C, only 3TF6.33-.Q..-Z A02 contactors
(= without connection of the main current path circuits) can be used.
Then derating is also possible with these contactors:
- AC-1: Ie = 782 A, 644 operating cycles/h;
- AC-3: operating range 0.85-1.05 x Us, 460 operating cycles/hour,
mechanical endurance 5 million operating cycles, lateral clearance
10 mm

3/114 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
SIRIUS
3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
Contactor Type 3TF68 3TF69

Size 14 14
Control
Coil operating range 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max
Power consumption of the solenoid coils
(when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
• AC operation, Us max - Closing VA/p.f. 1850/1 950/0.98
- Closed VA/p.f. 49/0.15 30.6/0.31
• AC operation, Us min - Closing VA/p.f. 1200/1 600/0.98
3
- Closed VA/p.f. 13.5/0.47 12.9/0.43
• DC economy circuit1) - Closing at 24 V W 1010 960
- Closed W 28 20.6
For contactors of type 3TF68/69 . . - . Q:
• AC operation, Us min2) - Closing VA/p.f. 1000/0.99 1150/0.99
- Closed VA/p.f. 11/1 11/1
Operating times for 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us (Values apply to cold and warm coil)
(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 70 ... 120 (22 ... 65)3) 80 ... 120
- Opening delay ms 70 ... 100 70 ... 80
• DC economy circuit - Closing delay ms 76 ... 110 86 ... 280
- Opening delay ms 50 19 ... 25
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10
For contactors of type 3TF68/69 . . - . Q:
- Opening delay ms 65 ... 90 30 ... 80
Operating times for 1.0 x U s
(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 80 ... 100 (30 ... 45)3) 85 ... 100
- Opening delay ms 70 ... 100 70
• DC economy circuit - Closing delay ms 80 ... 90 90 ... 125
- Opening delay ms 50 19 ... 25
Minimum command duration Standard ms 120 120
for closing Reduced make-time ms 90 --
Minimum interval time between two ON commands ms 100 300
1) At 24 V DC; for further voltages, deviations of up to ±10 % are possible.
2) Including reversing contactor.
3) Values in brackets apply to contactors with reduced operating times.
Contactor Type 3TF6. 44- 3TF6. 44- 3TF6. 44- 3TF6. 44- 3TF6. 44-
.CF7 .CM7 .CP7 .CQ7 .CS7
Electromagnetic compatibility
Rated control supply voltage Us V AC 110 ... 132 200 ... 240 230 ... 277 380 ... 460 500 ... 600
Overvoltage type acc. to IEC 60801 Burst/Surge
Degree of severity acc. to IEC 60801
• Burst 3 4 4 4 4
• Surge 4 4 4 4 4
Overvoltage resistance
• Burst kV 2 4 4 4 4
• Surge kV 6 5 5 6 6

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 3/115
Contactors
Power and Contactor
3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW

Size 14 14
Main circuit
AC capacity
• Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 700 910
At 55 °C up to 690 V A 630 850
At 55 °C up to 1000 V A 450 800
3
• Rated power for AC loads with p.f. = 0.95 230 V kW 240 323
at 55°C 400 V kW 415 558
500 V kW 545 735
690 V kW 720 970
1000 V kW 780 1 385
• Minimum conductor cross-sections for loads At 40°C mm2 2 x 240 Ie ≥ 800 A: 2 x 60 x 5
with Ie (copper busbars)
At 55°C mm2 2 x 185 Ie < 800 A: 2 x 240
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 690 V A 630 820
1000 V A 435 580
• Rated power for slipring or squirrel-cage mo- At 230 V kW 200 260
tors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 347 450
500 V kW 434 600
690 V kW 600 800
1000 V kW 600 800
Thermal load capacity 10 s current A 5 040 7 000
Power loss per conducting path At Ie/AC-3 W 45 70
• Rated operational current Ie Up to 690 V A 610 690
• Rated power for squirrel-cage motors At 400 V kW 355 400
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz
The following applies to a contact endurance
of about 200 000 operating cycles:
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 690 V A 300 360
1000 V A 210 250
• Rated power for squirrel-cage motors At 230 V kW 97 110
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 168 191
500 V1) kW 210 250
690 V1) kW 278 335
1000 V1) A 290 350
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching 1/h 2 000 1 000
frequency AC
No-load switching 1/h 1 000 1 000
frequency DC
AC-1 1/h 700 700
AC-2 1/h 200 200
AC-3 1/h 500 500
AC-4 1/h 150 150
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) 1/h 15 15
1) Max. permissible rated operational current Ie/AC-4 = Ie/AC-3 up to 500 V,
for reduced contact endurance and reduced switching frequency.

3/116 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
SIRIUS
3TF68 and 3TF693-pole,
Vacuum 335contactors
... 450 kW

Size 14 14
Main conductors: Screw terminals
• Busbar connections
- Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 50 ... 240 50 ... 240
- Stranded with cable lug mm2 70 ... 240 50 ... 240
- Solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 MCM 2/0 ... 500 MCM
3
- Connecting bar (max. width) mm 50 60 (Ue ≤ 690 V)
50 (Ue > 690 V)
• Terminal screw M10 x 30 M12 x 40
- Tightening torque Nm 14 ... 24 (124 ... 210 lb.in) 20 ... 35 (177 ... 310 lb.in)
• With box terminal1)
- Connectable copper bars
- Width mm 15 ... 25 15 ... 38
- Max. thickness mm 1 x 26 or 2 x 11 1 x 46 or 2 x 18
- Terminal screw A/F 6 (hexagon socket) A/F 8 (hexagon socket)
- Tightening torque Nm 25 ... 40 35 ... 50
lb.in 221 ... 354 266 ... 443
Auxiliary conductors:
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1)2)/2 x (1 ... 2.5)2)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1)2)/2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)
• Pin-end connector acc. to DIN 46231 mm2 2 x (1 ... 1.5)
• Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 12)
lb.in 7 ... 12
1) See “Accessories and Spare Parts”, page 2/54.

Size 14 14
s and u rated data
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600 600
Uninterrupted current
• Open and enclosed A 630 820
• Rated power for induction motors
at 60 Hz
- At 200 V hp 231 290
- At 230 V hp 266 350
- At 460 V hp 530 700
- At 575 V hp 664 860
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
SIZE hp 6 7
• Uninterrupted current
- Open A 600 820
- Enclosed A 540 810
• Rated power for induction motors
at 60 Hz
- At 200 V hp 150 --
- At 230 V hp 200 300
- At 460 V hp 400 600
- At 575 V hp 400 600
Overload relays Type 3RB12 .
• Setting range A 200 ... 820

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 3/117
Contactorsfor
Special Assemblies
Applications
Contactors for Switching DC Voltage SIRIUS
3TC contactors,
3TC contactors
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
3TC4 and 3TC5 The contactors are suitable for switching and controlling DC mo-
tors as well as all other DC circuits.
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 A version with an especially large coil operating range is avail-
able for operation in electrically driven vehicles and in switch-
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal gears with significant fluctuations in the actuating voltage
covers may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars, depend- .
ing on the configuration with other devices.
The DC motor ratings given in the tables are applicable to the
DC-3 and DC-5 utilization categories with two-pole switching
of the load or with the two conducting paths of the contactor con-
nected in series.
4
One contactor conducting path can switch full power up to

220 V. The ratings for higher voltages are available on request.
3TC7
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1.
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are suit-
able for switching and controlling DC motors as well as all other
DC circuits.
The solenoid excitation is configured for a particularly large
operating range. It is between 0.7 or 0.8 to 1.2 x Us.
3TC74 contactors can be used at up to 750 V/400 A and 50 Hz
in AC-1 operation.
Contactors Type 3TC4 and 3TC7 3TC5
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts
Conventional thermal current Ith = A 10 10
Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
AC load
24 V A 10 10
110 V A 10 10
125 V A 10 10
220 V A 6 6
230 V A 5.6 5.6
380 V A 4 4
400 V A 3.6 3.6
500 V A 2.5 2.5
660 V A 2.5 2.5
690 V A -- --
DC load
24 V A 10 10
60 V A 10 10
110 V A 3.2 8
125 V A 2.5 6
220 V A 0.9 2
440 V A 0.33 0.6
600 V A 0.22 0.4
24 V A 10 10
60 V A 5 5
110 V A 1.14 2.4
125 V A 0.98 2.1
220 V A 0.48 1.1
440 V A 0.13 0.32
600 V A 0.07 0.21

4/50 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
Contactors for SpecialAssemblies
Applications
SIRIUS Contactors for Switching DC Voltage
3TC contactors,
3TC contactors
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
Contactors Type 3TC44 ... 3TC56

Rated voltage, max. V AC 600
Switching capacity A 600, P 600
Contactors Type 3TC44 ... 3TC78

Contact endurance of the main contacts
10 7 20 NSB0_00656
8 NSB0_00655
6 Mill.

4 18
3TC44 3TC48 3TC52 3TC56

2
16
4
10 6
8
6 14
4
12
2
5
10 10
8
6
4 8
2
6
10 4
8
6 4
4
2
2
0,5
10 3
200 400 50 100 150 200 250 300 a (A) 400
10 20 40 100 600 1000 a (A)
3TC44 to 3TC56 contactors 3TC74 and 3TC78 contactors

Legend for the diagrams:
Contactors Type 3TC44 3TC48 3TC52 3TC56

Size 2 4 8 12
Permissible mounting positions 22,5° 22,5° 22,5° 22,5°
NSB0_00650c

Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 10 million

Electrical endurance Operating cycles 1)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 800 1 000

Protective separation between the coil and the main contacts V Up to 300 Up to 660
Mirror contacts2) Yes, acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, Appendix F
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed simultane-
ously with a NO main contact.
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix C IP00/open, for AC operation, coil assembly IP40
Shock resistance Rectangular pulse g/ms 7.5/5 and 3.4/10 10/5 and 5/10 12/5 and 5.5/10 12/5 and 5.6/10
Main circuit
Auxiliary circuit
with short-circuit current Ik = 1 kA acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
1) See the endurance diagram above. .
2) For 3TC44, one NC contact each must be connected in series for the right
and left auxiliary switch block respectively.

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 4/51
Contactorsfor
Special Assemblies
Applications
Contactors for Switching DC Voltage SIRIUS
3TC contactors,
3TC contactors
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
Type 3TC44 3TC48 3TC52 3TC56

Size 2 4 8 12
H
• DC operation mm 70 x 85 x 141 100 x 183 x 180 135 x 238 x 232 160 x 279 x 310
D
• AC operation W mm 70 x 85 x 100 100 x 183 x 154 135 x 238 x 200 160 x 279 x 251
Control circuits
Coil operating range 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
(for cold coil and 1.0 x Us)
• DC operation - Closing = Closed W 10 19 30 86
• AC operation, 50 Hz coil - Closing VA/p.f. 68/0.86 300/0.5 640/0.48 1780/0.3
- Closed VA/p.f. 10/0.29 26/0.24 46/0.23 121/0.22
• AC operation, 60 Hz coil - Closing VA/p.f. 95/0.79 365/0.45 730/0.38 2140/0.3
4
- Closed VA/p.f. 12/0.3 35/0.26 56/0.24 140/0.29

• AC operation, 50/60 Hz coil - Closing VA/p.f. 79/73/0.83/0.78 -- -- --
at 50 Hz/60 Hz
- Closed VA/p.f. 11/9/0.28/0.27 -- -- --
at 50 Hz/60 Hz
Operating times (for 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us) (The values apply up to and including 20 % undervoltage,
Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time 10 % overvoltage, as well as when the coil is cold and warm)
• DC operation - Closing delay ms 35 ... 190 90 ... 380 120 ... 400 110 ... 400
- Opening delay1) ms 10 ... 25 17 ... 28 22 ... 35 40 ... 110
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 10 ... 40 20 ... 50 20 ... 50 20 ... 50
- Opening delay1) ms 5 ... 25 5 ... 30 10 ... 30 10 ... 30
• Arcing time - DC-1 ms 20
- DC-3/DC-5 ms 30
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to Ue 750 V A 32 75 220 400
(at 55 °C)
2
• Minimum conductor cross-section mm 6 25 95 240
• Rated power at Ue At 220 V kW 7 16.5 48 88
440 V kW 14 33 97 176
600 V kW 19.2 45 132 240
750 V kW 24 56 165 300
Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5
Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
(at 55 °C) 440 V A 29 75 220 400
600 V A 21 75 220 400
750 V A 7.5 75 170 400
• Rated power at Ue At 110 V kW 2.5 6.5 20 35
220 V kW 5 13 41 70
440 V kW 9 27 82 140
600 V kW 9 38 110 200
750 V kW 4 45 110 250
Switching frequency
AC/DC operation
• With resistive load DC-1 h-1 1 500 1 000
• For inductive load DC-3/DC-5 h-1 750 600
Main conductors: Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x (2.5 ... 10) 2 x (6 ... 16) -- --

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 4) -- -- --
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 2 x 16 2 x 35 2 x 120 2 x 150
2
• Pin-end connector acc. to DIN 46231 mm 2 x (1 ... 6) -- -- --
• Busbars mm -- 15 x 2.5 25 x 4 2 x (25 x 3)
• Terminal screw M5 M6 M10 M10
Auxiliary conductors:
• Solid mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5)
1) The opening delay times can increase if the contactor coils are damped
against voltage peaks. Only 3TC44 contactors are allowed to be fitted with
diodes.

4/52 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
Contactors forDC Power
Special Controls
Applications
SIRIUS DCDC
Contactors for Switching Contactors
Voltage
3TC contactors,
3TC 32
1- and 2-pole, contactors
... 400 A
Type 3TC74 3TC78

Design 1-pole contactors 2-pole contactors
H
Dimensions mm 78 x 352 x 276 160 x 366 x 290
D
W

Permissible mounting positions 22,5° 22,5° 22,5° 22,5°
NSB0_00650c
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 30 million

Electrical endurance Operating cycles 1)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 1 500
4
Permissible ambient temperature °C -25 ... +55
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix C IP00/open
Main circuit
LV HRC, type 3NA
• Type of coordination "1" A 630
• Type of coordination "2" A 500
Auxiliary circuits
Control circuits
Coil operating range
• DC operation At Uc = 24 V 0.8 ... 1.2 x Us
At Uc > 24 V 0.7 ... 1.2 x Us
• AC operation At Uc = 24 V 0.7 ... 1.15 x Us
At Uc > 24 V 0.7 ... 1.14 x Us
• DC operation Closing = Closed W 46 92
• AC operation, 50 Hz Closing, VA 80 160
Closed 0.95 0.95
Operating times (The values apply up to and including 15 % undervoltage,
(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time) 10 % overvoltage, as well as when the coil is cold and warm)
• AC and DC operation - Closing delay ms 60 ... 100
- Opening delay ms 20 ... 35
• Arcing time at 0.06 ... 4 x Ie ms 40 ... 70
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
• Rated operational current Ie/DC-1 (at 55 °C) A 500 500
• Minimum conductor cross-section mm2 2 x 150 2 x 150
• Rated power At 220 V kW 110 110
440 V kW 220 220
600 V kW 300 300
750 V kW 375 375
1200 V kW — 600
1500 V kW — 750
• Critical currents, without arc extinction At 440 V A ≤7 —
600 V A ≤ 13 —
750 V A ≤ 15 —
≤ 800 V A — ≤7
1200 V A — ≤ 13
1500 V A — ≤ 15
2)
Utilization categories DC-3 and DC-5, switching DC motors
Permissible rated current for regenerative braking At 110 ... 600 V A 400
Switching frequency
AC/DC operation
• With resistive load DC-1 h-1 750 1 000
• For inductive load DC-3/DC-5 h-1 500 500
1)
Endurance see page 2/179..
2) .
See Selection and ordering data.

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 4/53
Contactors
Power and Contactor
Accessories for 3RT1 Contactors • Revised • SIRIUS
Accessories
3RT1 contactors 10/22/15
General data
Contactor Type 3RT19 2 6-2C 3RT19 26-2D 3RT19 26-2E 3RT19 26-2F 3RT19 26-2G
Solid-state timing relay blocks Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks
with semiconductor output
General data
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 250
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III acc. to EN 60664-1
3

Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C
• Cover IP40
• Terminals IP20
Half-sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance
according to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 10 ... 55/0.35
EMC tests Basic specification IEC 61000-6-4
Conductor connections
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• Terminal screws M3
lb.in 7 ... 10.3
Permissible mounting positions Any
Control
Operating range of excitation 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us, 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us,
0.95 ... 1.05 times the rated 0.95 ... 1.05 times the rated frequency
frequency
Rated power W 1 2
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz VA 1 4
Overvoltage protection Varistor integrated in timing relay --
Recovery time ms 50 150
Minimum ON period ms 35 200 (with OFF-delay)
Setting accuracy Typ. % ±15
With reference to upper limit of scale
Repeat accuracy Max. % ±1
Load side
Rated operational currents Ie
• Load current A 0.3 --
• AC-15, 230 V, 50 Hz A -- 3
• DC-13, 24 V A -- 1
• DC-13, 110 V A -- 0.2
• DC-13, 230 V A -- 0.1
Short-time loading capacity Up to 10 ms A 10 --
DIAZED protection gG operational class A -- 4
Residual current Max. mA 5 --
Voltage drop Max. VA 3.5 --
With conducting output
Mechanical endurance Operating 100 x 106 10 x 106
cycles
Switching frequency for load
• With Ie at 230 V AC h-1 2 00 2 500
• With 3RT20 16 contactor at 230 V AC h-1 2 500 5 000

3/94 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
SIRIUS Accessories for 3RT1 Contactors
Accessories
3RT1 contactors
General data
Function Function chart

Timing relay energized
Contact closed
Contact open
Solid-state timing relay blocks 1 NO contact (semiconductor output)
ON-delay, 3RT19 26-2C L1/L+ A2 can be connected
two-wire design A1/A2 to N(L-) using either
(varistor integrated) Timing relay
NSB0_0939a
A2 the contactor or the
A1
timing relay.
1
3
t
A1/A2 A2 – – – – To be connected
A1
Contactor optionally
NSB0_00556
2
A1 A2 1 Timing relay block
N/L- 2 Contactor
OFF-delay 3RT19 26-2D L1/L+

with auxiliary voltage A2 must only be
A1/A2
(varistor integrated) Timing relay S1 connected to N(L--)
NSB0_0940a
B1/A2 A1 B1 A2 from the timing relay.
> 35 ms
1
A1/A2 Do not connect
Contactor t A1 A2
NSB0_00557
2 1 Timing relay block
A1 A2
N/L 2 Contactor
Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks 1 NO + 1 NC

ON-delay 3RT19 26-2E
A1/A2
NSB0_00936
-7/-8
-5/-6 27 35
A1
t
A2
28 36
NSB0_01873
OFF-delay 3RT19 26-2F

without auxiliary voltage >200 ms
A1/A2
NSB0_00937
-7/-8 27 35
A1
-5/-6
t A2
28 36
NSB0_01874a
Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks 2 NO

Wye-delta function: 3RT19 26-2G
1 NO delayed, A1/A2
1 NO instantaneous,
NSB0_00938
dead time 50 ms Y -7/-8

(varistor integrated) -7/-8 27 37
A1
t 50 ms
A2
28 38
NSB0_01875

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 3/95
Contactors
Power and Contactor
Accessories for 3RT1 Contactors SIRIUS
Accessories
3RT1 contactors
General data
Contactor Type 3RH19 24, 3TX7 090

Coupling links for mounting on contactors
acc. to IEC 60947/EN 60947
General data
Protective separation between coil and contacts V AC Up to 300
3

Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix C
• Connections IP20
• Enclosure IP40
Circuit diagram L1 B1+ B2- N
1
2
A1 1 Coupling link
A2 2 Contactor
NSB0_00182a
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
Terminal screws M3
Control side
Rated control supply voltage Us V DC 24
Operating range V DC 17 ... 30
Power consumption at Us W 0.5
Nominal current input mA 20
Release voltage V ≥4
Function display Yellow LED
Protection circuit Varistor
Load side
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 20 x 106
Electrical endurance at Ie Operating cycles 1 x 105
Switching frequency Operating cycles h-1 5 000
Make-time ms Approx. 7
Break-time ms Approx. 4
Bounce time ms Approx. 2
Contact material AgSnO
Switching voltage AC/DC V 24 ... 250
Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal) mA 2.5

3/96 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
Contactor Relays Contactors and Contactor Assemblies
SIRIUS Control Relays
SIRIUS 3RH2 contactor relays, 3RH2 control relays
4- and 8-pole size S00
Contactor relays Type 3RH2
Size S00
Permissible mounting positions
The contactor relays are designed for operation on a 360° 22,5° 22,5°
NSB0_00478c
NSB0_00477a

(3RH21 22-2K . 40 coupling relays and contactor relays with extended
operating range on request)
Positively-driven operation of contacts in contactor relays
3RH2: Explanations:
5
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between There is positively-driven operation if it is ensured that the NC and NO con-
the basic unit and the front-mounted auxiliary switch block (removable) tacts cannot be closed at the same time.
acc. to:
• ZH 1/457 ZH1/457
• IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix L Safety Rules for Controls on Power-Operated Metalworking Presses.
3RH22:
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix L
the basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary switch block (permanently Low-Voltage Controlgear, Controls and Contact Blocks. Special requirements
mounted) acc. to: for positively-driven contacts
• ZH 1/457
• IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix L
Note:
3RH29 11- . NF. solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks have no
positively-driven contacts.
Contact reliability
Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA acc. to IEC 60947-5-4 Frequency of contact faults <10-8 i.e. < 1 fault per 100 million operating
cycles
Contact endurance for AC-15/AC-14 and
DC-13 utilization categories
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current. It is 30 NSB0_02061a
assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i.e. not Basic unit
synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.
Million operating cycles (106)
10
If magnetic circuits other than the contactor coil systems or solenoid
valves are present, e.g. magnetic brakes, protective measures for the 5 Basic unit with
4 attachable
load circuits are necessary, e.g. in the form of RC elements and free- 3
wheel diodes. contact block AC-15/AC-14
2
DC-13 DC-13 Basic unit with
The characteristic curves apply to: 1 220 V 110 V attachable
• 3RH21/3RH22 contactor relays
• 3RH24 latched contactor relays 0,5 contact block
• 3RH29 11 auxiliary switch blocks1)
• Auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front, DC-13
max. 4-pole and for mounting onto the side in size S00 24V
0,1
0,05
0,01
0,01 0,03 0,05 0,1 0,3 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 a (A)
e -DC-13 e -DC-13 e -DC-13 e-AC-15
220 V 110 V 24 V < 230 V
Diagram legend:
a = Breaking current
e = Rated operational current
1) Ie = 6 A for AC-15/AC-14.

5/6 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
Contactors and Contactor Assemblies Contactor Relays
Control Relays SIRIUS
3RH2 control relays SIRIUS 3RH2 contactor relays,
size S00 4- and 8-pole
Type 3RH21 3RH22 3RH24

Size S00 S00 S00
H
Dimensions (W x H x D) with screw terminals mm 45 x 57.5 x 73 -- 90 x 57.5 x 73
• With mounted auxiliary switch block mm 45 x 57.5 x 116 45 x 57.5 x 116 --
D
W

• Basic units Operating 30 million 5 million
cycles
• Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary switch block Operating 10 million
cycles
• Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block Operating 5 million
cycles
Protective separation between the coil and the contacts in the basic unit V 400
5
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix C IP20, coil assembly IP40
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse - AC operation g/ms 7.3/5 and 4.7/10
- DC operation g/ms >10/5 and >5/10
• Sine pulse - AC operation g/ms 11.4/5 and 7.3/10
- DC operation g/ms >15/5 and >8/10
Auxiliary conductors and coil terminals Screw terminals
2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1) according to IEC 60947;
• Solid mm
max. 2 x (0.5 ... 4)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1)
• Terminal screw M3 (for standard screwdriver size 2 or Pozidriv 2)
Auxiliary conductors and coil terminals Spring-type terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 4)
Auxiliary conductors for front and laterally mounted auxiliary switches
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
Auxiliary conductor and coil terminals Ring terminal lug connection
• Terminal screw d3
mm M3, Pozidriv size 2
• Operating devices d2 Nm Ø 5 ... 6
• Tightening torque mm 0.8 ... 1.2
- DIN 46234 without insulation sleeve mm d3 = max. 7.5
I2_12740

1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping Tool for opening the spring-type terminals
point, both cross-sections must lie in one of the ranges specified. see Accessories, page 2/79.
Note: An insulation stop must be used for conductor cross-sections
Max. external diameter of the cable insulation: 3.6 mm. ≤1 mm 2, see Accessories, page 2/79.

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 5/7
SIRIUS Control Relays
SIRIUS 3RH2 contactor relays, 3RH2 control relays
4- and 8-pole size S00
Contactor relays Type 3RH2.

Size S00
Control circuits
Coil operating range
• AC operation At 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
At 60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
• DC operation At +50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
At +60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
(when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
• AC operation, 50 Hz
- Closing VA/p.f. 37/0.8
- Closed VA/p.f. 5.7/0.25
• AC operation, 60 Hz
- Closing VA/p.f. 33/0.75
- Closed VA/p.f. 4.4/0.25
• DC operation W 4.0
(closing = closed)
5
Permissible residual current of the electronics

(with 0 signal)
• For AC operation1) < 4 mA x (230 V/Us)
• For DC operation < 10 mA x (24 V/Us)
Operating times2)
Total break time = OFF-delay + Arcing time
Values apply with coil in cold state and at operating temperature for
operating range
AC operation
• Closing
- ON-delay of NO contact With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 8 ... 33
With 1.0 x Us ms 9 ... 22
3RH24 minimum operating time ms ≥ 35
- OFF-delay of NC contact With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 6 ... 25
With 1.0 x Us ms 6.5 ... 19
• Opening
- OFF-delay of NO contact With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 4 ... 15
With 1.0 x Us ms 4.5 ... 15
- ON-delay of NC contact With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 5 ... 15
With 1.0 x Us ms 5 ... 15
DC operation
• Closing
- ON-delay of NO contact With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 30 ... 100
With 1.0 x Us ms 35 ... 50
- OFF-delay of NC contact With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 25 ... 90
With 1.0 x Us ms 30 ... 45
• Opening
- OFF-delay of NO contact With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 7 ... 13
With 1.0 x Us ms 7 ... 12
- ON-delay of NC contact With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 13 ... 19
With 1.0 x Us ms 13 ... 18
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15
Dependence of the switching frequency z'
on the operational current I' and operational voltage U':
z' = z ⋅ Ie/I' ⋅ (Ue/U')1.5 ⋅ 1/h
1) The 3RT29 16-1GA00 additional load module is recommended
for higher residual currents (see page 2/74).
2) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are
increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks
(noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times;
diode assembly 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).

5/8 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
Contactors and Contactor Assemblies Contactor Relays
3RH2 control relays SIRIUS 3RH2 contactor relays,
size S00 4- and 8-pole
Contactor relays Type 3RH2.

Size S00
Load side
AC capacity
AC-12 A 10
AC-15/AC-14 for rated operational voltage Us
Up to 230 V A 6
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
690 V A 1
Load rating with DC
DC-12 for rated operational voltage Us
• 1 conducting path 24 V A 6
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
220 V A 1
5
440 V A 0.3
600 V A 0.15
• 2 conducting paths in series 24 V A 10
60 V A 10
110 V A 4
220 V A 2
440 V A 1.3
600 V A 0.65
60 V A 10
110 V A 10
220 V A 3.6
440 V A 2.5
600 V A 1.8
DC-13 for rated operational voltage Us
• 1 conducting path 24 V A 6
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.14
600 V A 0.1
60 V A 3.5
110 V A 1.3
220 V A 0.9
440 V A 0.2
600 V A 0.1
60 V A 4.7
110 V A 3
220 V A 1.2
440 V A 0.5
600 V A 0.26
Switching frequency
• For rated operation AC-12/DC-12 h-1 1 000
For utilization category AC-15/AC-14 h-1 1 000
DC-13 h-1 1 000
• No-load switching frequency h-1 10 000
Dependence of the switching frequency z' on
the operational current I' and operational voltage U':
z' = z ⋅ Ie/I' ⋅ (Ue/U')1.5 ⋅ 1/h
s and u rated data
Basic units and auxiliary switch blocks
• Rated control supply voltage V AC max. 600
• Rated voltage V AC 600
• Switching capacity A 600, Q 600
• Uninterrupted current at 240 V AC A 10

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 5/9
SIRIUS
Coupling Relays Control Relays
SIRIUS 3RH21 coupling relays SIRIUS 3RH21 coupling relays
for switching auxiliary circuits, 4-pole for switching auxiliary circuits, 4-pole
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are
identical to those of the 3RH21 contactor relays (see page 5/6).
Contactor type 3RH21 . . - . HB40 3RH21 . . - . JB40 3RH21 . . - . KB40
Size S00 S00 S00
Control circuits
Power consumption of the solenoid coil
(for cold coil)
Closing = Closed
• At Us = 17 V W 1.4
• At Us = 24 V W 2.8
• At Us = 30 V W 4.4
Permissible residual current < 10 mA x (24 V/Us)
of the electronics for 0 signal
Overvoltage configuration of the solenoid coil No overvoltage damping With diode With suppressor diode
5
Operating times
• Closing at 17 V
- ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 130
- OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 80
• At 24 V
• At 30 V
• Opening at 17 ... 30 V
- OFF-delay NO ms 7 ... 20 38 ... 65 7 ... 20
- ON-delay NC ms 20 ... 30 55 ... 75 20 ... 30
Upright mounting position Request required
Contactor type 3RH21 . . - . MB40-0KT0 3RH21 . . - . VB40 3RH21 . . - . WB40

Size S00 S00 S00
Control circuits
Power consumption of the solenoid coil W 1.6
(for cold coil)
Closing = Closed at Us = 24 V
Permissible residual current < 8 mA x (24 V/Us)
of the electronics for 0 signal
Overvoltage configuration of the solenoid coil Diode, varistor or RC element, Built-in diode Built-in suppressor diode
attachable
Control circuits
Operating times
• Closing at 20.5 V
• At 24 V
• At 44 V
• Closing at 17 ... 30 V
- OFF-delay NO ms 5 ... 20 20 ... 80 5 ... 20
- ON-delay NC ms 10 ... 30 30 ... 90 10 ... 30
Upright mounting position Request required

5/32 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
3RT Contactors • Revised • SIRIUS
3RT2 and 3RH2 contactors and relays 09/22/15
Terminal designations and identification numbers for auxiliary contacts

Terminal designations Identification numbers
The terminal designations are 2-digit, e.g. 13, 14, 21, 22: The identification number indicates the number and type of the
• Tens digit: Sequence digit auxiliary contacts, e.g. 40, 31, 22, 13:
- Related terminals have the same sequence digit • 1st digit: number of normally open contacts (NO)
• 2nd digit: number of normally closed contacts (NC)
• Units digit: Function digit
- 1-2 for normally closed contacts (NC) Examples:
- 3-4 for normally open contacts (NO) • 31 = 3 NO + 1 NC
• 40 = 4 NO
Selection guide for mountable auxiliary switch blocks for power contactors and contactor relays
The auxiliary switch blocks of the 3RH29 series for mounting on Where the columns and lines intersect (blue and green in the
the front and side can be used for power contactors as well as example) you will find the identification number for the combina-
for contactor relays. tion of basic unit (column) and auxiliary switch block (line).
The possible combinations of basic unit and mounted auxiliary
switch block can be found in the tables below.
3-pole contactors Example 1 Example 2

Auxiliary Version 3RT20 1 3RT20 1 3RT20 2 Type 3RT20 motor contactor, 3RT20 motor contactor,
contacts S00 S00 S0 S00 with 1 NO S0 with 1 NO + 1 NC
NO NC 10 01 11
1 3 5
13 21 13 21
NSB0_00534a
IC01_00123
IC01_00122
SIRIUS
3. 4. 5. 6.
13 21 A1
14 22 14 22 SIRIUS
1 3 5 13 A1
2. 3. 4. 5.
2. 3. 4. 5. 5. 6. 7. 8. 3. 4. 5. 6.
According to EN 500121) Order No.
Auxiliary switches without NO contact 3. 4. 5. 6.
-- 1 .1 11 02 12 3RH29 11-.HA01 14 22 A2
NSB0_02124
NSB0_02112
NSB0_02114
2. 3. 4. 5.
2 4 6
2 4 6 14 A2
.2
Sequence 2. 3. 4. 5. 3. 4. 5. 6.
-- 2 .1 .1 12 03 13 3RH29 11-.HA02 digit
NSB0_02125
Type Auxiliary switch with 4 NC, Auxiliary switch with 3 NC,

3RH29 11-.FA04 3RH29 11-.HA03
.2 .2
.1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1
-- 3 .1 .1 .1 13 04 14 3RH29 11-.HA03
NSB0_02126
NSB0_02116
IC01_00131
.2 .2 .2
.2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2
-- 4 .1 .1 .1 .1 14 -- 3RH29 11-.FA04 Function .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1

NSB0_02142
digit .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2
Type 3RT20 motor contactor, S00 3RT20 motor contactor, S0
.2 .2 .2 .2 with auxiliary switch block with auxiliary switch block
Auxiliary switch with 1 NO contact

1 -- .3 20 11 21 3RH29 11-.HA10 3. 4. 5. 6.
SIRIUS
NSB0_02127
13 21 A1
SIRIUS
13 A1
4. 5. .1 .1 .1
2. 3.
.4
.1 .1 .1 .1
1 1 .1 .3 21 12 22 3RH29 11-.HA11
NSB0_02128
.2 .2 .2
14 22 A2
NSB0_02120
.2 .2 .2 .2
IC01_00132
.2 .4 14 A2
Terminal 13 21 31 41 51 13 21 31 41 51
design. 14 22 32 42 52 14 22 32 42 52
1) Combinations according to EN 50012, EN 50011 and IEC 60947-5-1
are in bold print. All combinations comply with EN 50005. Type Ident. No. 14 Ident. No. 14

09/22/15 3RT2 and 3RH2 contactors and relays
Additional auxiliary switch blocks
3-pole contactors 4-pole contactors Contactor relays
Auxiliary contacts S00 S0 S00 S0/S2 S00

Version 3RT20 1 3RT20 1 3RT20 2 3RT23 1 3RT25 1 3RT23 3RT25 3RH21, 3RH24 3RH21, 3RH24 3RH21, 3RH24
NO NC 10 01 11 -- -- 11 11 40E 31E 22E
13 21 13 21 13 21 13 21 13 23 33 43 13 21 33 43 13 21 31 43
NSB0_00534a
NSB0_00534a
NSB0_00534a
IC01_00124
IC01_00125
IC01_00126
IC01_00123
IC01_00122
14 22 14 22 14 22 14 22 14 24 34 44 14 22 34 44 14 22 32 44
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 3. 4. 5. 3. 4. 5. 5. 6. 7. 8 5. 6. 7. 8 5. 6. 7. 8
5. 8. 6. 4. 4. 6. 6.
Front auxiliary switches According to EN 500121) According to EN 500121) According to EN 500111) Order No.
Without NO contact
-- 1 .1 11 02 12 01 01 12 12 41X 32X 23X 3RH29 11-.HA01
NSB0_02124
.2
-- 2 .1 .1 12 03 13 02 02 13 -- 42E 33X 24 3RH29 11-.HA02

NSB0_02125
.2 .2
-- 3 .1 .1 .1 13 04 14 03 -- -- -- 43 34 -- 3RH29 11-.HA03
NSB0_02126
.2 .2 .2
-- 4 .1 .1 .1 .1 14 -- -- -- -- -- -- 44E -- -- 3RH29 11-.FA04

NSB0_02142
.2 .2 .2 .2
With 1 NO contact
1 -- .3 20 11 21 10 10 21 21 50E 41E 32E 3RH29 11-.HA10
NSB0_02127
.4
1 1 .1 .3 21 12 22 11 11 22 22 51X 42X 33X 3RH29 11-.HA11

NSB0_02128
.2 .4
1 2 .1 .1 .3 22 13 23 12 12 23 -- 52 43 34 3RH29 11-.HA12
NSB0_02129
.2 .2 .4
1 3 .1 .1 .1 .3 23 14 24 13 -- -- -- 53X 44X -- 3RH29 11-.HA13

NSB0_02130
.2 .2 .2 .4
With 2 NO contacts
2 -- .3 .3 30 21 31 20 20 31 31 60E 51X 42X 3RH29 11-.HA20
NSB0_02131
.4 .4
2 1 .1 .3 .3 31 22 32 21 21 32 32 61 52 43 3RH29 11-.HA21
NSB0_02132
.2 .4 .4
2 2 .1 .1 .3 .3 32 23 33 22 22 33 -- 62X 53 44X 3RH29 11-.HA22

NSB0_02133
.2 .2 .4 .4
2 2 .3 .1 .1 .3 32 23 33 22 22 33 -- 62X 53 44X 3RH29 11-.FA22

NSB0_02221
.4 .2 .2 .4

are in bold print. All combinations comply with EN 50005.

Additional auxillary switch blocks

Version 3RT20 1 3RT20 1 3RT20 2 3RT23 1 3RT25 1 3RT23 3RT25 3RH21, 3RH24
NO NC 10 01 11 -- -- 11 11 40E 31E 22E
13 21 13 21 13 21 13 21 13 23 33 43 13 21 33 43 13 21 31 43
NSB0_00534a
NSB0_00534a
NSB0_00534a
IC01_00124
IC01_00125
IC01_00126
IC01_00123
IC01_00122
14 22 14 22 14 22 14 22 14 24 34 44 14 22 34 44 14 22 32 44
2. 3. 4. 5. 5. 6. 7. 8. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3. 4. 5. 6. 5. 6. 7. 8 5. 6. 7. 8 5. 6. 7. 8
According to EN 500121) According to EN 500121) According to EN 500111) Order No.
Front auxiliary switches with 3 NO contacts
3 -- .3 .3 .3 40 31 41 30 30 41 41 70 61 52 3RH29 11-.HA30
NSB0_02134
.4 .4 .4
3 1 .1 .3 .3 .3 41 32 42 31 31 42 42 71X 62X 53X 3RH29 11-.HA31

NSB0_02135
.2 .4 .4 .4
Front auxiliary switches with 4 NO contacts

4 -- .3 .3 .3 .3 50 41 51 40 40 51 51 80E 71X 62X 3RH29 11-.FA40
NSB0_02143
.4 .4 .4 .4
Acc. to EN 50005 Acc. to EN 50005 Acc. to EN 50005

Front auxiliary switches with make-before-break
-- 1 .7 .5 21 12 22 11 11 22 22 51 42 33 3RH29 11-.FB11
NSB0_02144
.8 .6
-- 2 .3 .1 .5 .7 32 23 33 22 22 33 -- 62 53 44 3RH29 11-.FB22
NSB0_02145
.4 .2 .6 .8
-- 3 .7 .7 .5 .5 32 23 33 22 22 33 -- 62 53 44 3RH29 11-.FC22
NSB0_02146
.8 .8 .6 .6
Front auxiliary switches with complete inscription2)

1 -- 73 20 11 21 10 10 21 21 50 41 32 3RH29 11-1AA10
IC01_00127
74
1 -- 73 20 11 21 10 10 21 21 50 41 32 3RH29 11-1BA10
IC01_00127
74
-- 1 71 11 02 12 01 01 12 12 41 32 23 3RH29 11-1AA01
IC01_00128
72
-- 1 71 11 02 12 01 01 12 12 41 32 23 3RH29 11-1BA01
IC01_00128
72
1 1 73 81 21 12 22 11 11 22 22 51 42 33 3RH29 11-1LA11
NSB0_02150
74 82
1 1 73 81 21 12 22 11 11 22 22 51 42 33 3RH29 11-1MA11
NSB0_02150
74 82
2 -- 73 83 30 21 31 20 20 31 31 60 51 42 3RH29 11-1LA20
NSB0_02151
74 84
2 -- 73 83 30 21 31 20 20 31 31 60 51 42 3RH29 11-1MA20
NSB0_02151
74 84
1) Combinations according to EN 50012, EN 50011 and IEC 60947- 2) Terminals from the top or bottom.
5-1 are in bold print. All combinations comply with EN 50005.


NO NC 10 01 11 -- -- 11 11 40E 31E 22E
13 21 13 21 13 21 13 21 13 23 33 43 13 21 33 43 13 21 31 43
NSB0_00534a
NSB0_00534a
NSB0_00534a
IC01_00124
IC01_00125
IC01_00126
IC01_00123
IC01_00122
14 22 14 22 14 22 14 22 14 24 34 44 14 22 34 44 14 22 32 44
2. 3. 4. 5. 5. 6. 7. 8. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3. 4. 5. 6. 5. 6. 7. 8 5. 6. 7. 8 5. 6. 7. 8
Acc. to EN 50005 Acc. to EN 50005 According to EN 500111) Order No.
Front auxiliary switches with complete inscription (for contactor relays)
4 -- 53 63 73 83 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 80E -- -- 3RH29 11-.GA40
NSB0_02156
54 64 74 84
3 1 53 61 73 83 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 71E -- -- 3RH29 11-.GA31

NSB0_02155a
54 62 74 84
2 2 53 61 71 83 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 62E -- -- 3RH29 11-.GA22

NSB0_02154a
54 62 72 84
1 3 53 61 71 81 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 53E -- -- 3RH29 11-.GA13

NSB0_02153a
54 62 72 82
-- 4 51 61 71 81 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 44E -- -- 3RH29 11-.GA04

NSB0_02152a
52 62 72 82
Front auxiliary switches with complete inscription, special version

4 -- 53 63 73 83 50 41 51 40 40 51 51 80E 71X 62X 3RH29 11-.XA40
ic01_00147
-0MA0
54 64 74 84
3 1 53 61 73 83 41 32 42 31 31 42 42 71E 62X 53 3RH29 11-.XA31

ic01_00146
-0MA0
54 62 74 84
2 2 53 61 71 83 32 23 33 22 22 33 -- 62E 53 44X 3RH29 11-.XA22

ic01_00145
-0MA0
54 62 72 84
-- 4 51 61 71 81 14 -- -- -- -- -- -- 44E -- -- 3RH29 11-.XA04

ic01_00143
-0MA0
52 62 72 82
Front auxiliary switches, Solid-state compatible

-- 2 .1 .1 12 03 13 02 02 13 -- 42 33 24 3RH29 11-.NF02
IC01_00133
.2 .2
1 1 .3 .1 21 12 22 11 11 22 22 51 42 33 3RH29 11-.NF11
NSB0_02147
.4 .2
2 -- .3 .3 30 21 31 20 20 31 31 60 51 42 3RH29 11-.NF20
IC01_00134
.4 .4

are in bold print. All combinations comply with EN 50005.


NO NC 10 01 11 -- -- 11 11 40E 31E 22E
13 21 13 21 13 21 13 21 13 23 33 43 13 21 33 43 13 21 31 43
NSB0_00534a
NSB0_00534a
NSB0_00534a
IC01_00124
IC01_00125
IC01_00126
IC01_00123
IC01_00122
14 22 14 22 14 22 14 22 14 24 34 44 14 22 34 44 14 22 32 44
2. 3. 4. 5. 5. 6. 7. 8. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3. 4. 5. 6. 5. 6. 7. 8 5. 6. 7. 8 5. 6. 7. 8
Left Right According to EN 500121) According to EN 500121) According to EN 500111) Order No.
Lateral auxiliary switches for size S00
-- 2 41 51 21 31 12 -- -- 02 02 -- -- -- -- -- 3RH29 11-.DA02
NSB0_02136
42 52 22 32
Anbau Anbau
-- 2 41 51
links 21 31
rechts 14 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3RH29 11-.DA02
NSB0_02136
42 52 22 32
Anbau Anbau
1 1 41 53
links 21 33
rechts 21 -- -- 11 11 -- -- -- -- -- 3RH29 11-.DA11
NSB0_02137
42 54 22 34
1 1 Anbau
41 53 Anbau
21 33 32 -- -- 22 22 -- -- -- -- -- 3RH29 11-.DA11
NSB0_02137
links rechts
42 54 22 34
2 -- Anbau
43 53 Anbau
23 33 30 -- -- 20 20 -- -- -- -- -- 3RH29 11-.DA20
NSB0_02138
links rechts
44 54 24 34
2 -- Anbau
43
4353
53 Anbau
23
233333 50 -- -- 40 40 -- -- -- -- -- 3RH29 11-.DA20
NSB0_02138
NSB0_02138
links rechts
44
44 54
54 24
24 34
34
2 -- Anbau
Anbau
41435353 Anbau
Anbau
21
233333 41 -- -- 31 31 -- -- -- -- -- 3RH29 11-.DA20 +
NSB0_02137
NSB0_02138
links
links rechts
rechts
3RH29 11-.DA11
1 1 4244 5454 2224 3434
Anbau Anbau
Anbau
2 -- 4143 51
53 2123 31
33 32 -- -- 22 22 -- -- -- -- -- 3RH29 11-.DA20 +
NSB0_02136
NSB0_02138
links rechts
rechts
3RH29 11-.DA02
-- 2 4244 5254 2224 3234
Anbau Anbau
Anbau
1 1 41 53
51 21 31
33 23 -- -- 13 -- -- -- -- -- -- 3RH29 11-.DA11 +
NSB0_02136
NSB0_02137
links rechts
rechts
3RH29 11-.DA02
-- 2 42 52
54 22 32
34
Anbau Anbau
Lateral auxiliary
links
switches for size S0
rechts
-- 2 51 61 31 41 12 03 13 02 02 13 -- -- -- -- 3RH29 21-.DA02
NSB0_02139
52 62 32 42
Anbau Anbau
-- 2 51
51 61
61 31
31 41
41 14 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3RH29 21-.DA02
NSB0_02139
NSB0_02139
links rechts
52
52 62
62 32
32 42
42
Anbau
Anbau Anbau
Anbau
1 1 51 63 31 43 21 12 22 11 11 22 22 -- -- -- 3RH29 21-.DA11
NSB0_02140
links
links rechts
rechts
52 64 32 44
1 1 Anbau
51 63 Anbau
31 43 32 23 33 22 22 33 -- -- -- -- 3RH29 21-.DA11
NSB0_02140
links rechts
52 64 32 44
Anbau Anbau 3RH29 21-.DA20
2 -- 53 63 33 43 30 21 31 20 20 31 31 -- -- --
NSB0_02141
links rechts
54 64 34 44
Anbau Anbau 3RH29 21-.DA20
2 -- 53
53 63
63 33
33 43
43 50 41 51 40 40 51 51 -- -- --
NSB0_02141
NSB0_02141
links rechts
54
54 64
64 34
34 44
44
Anbau
Anbau Anbau
Anbau
1) Combinations
links according
links rechtsto EN 50012, EN 50011 and IEC 60947-
rechts


NO NC 10 01 11 -- -- 11 11 40E 31E 22E
13 21 13 21 13 21 13 21 13 23 33 43 13 21 33 43 13 21 31 43
NSB0_00534a
NSB0_00534a
NSB0_00534a
IC01_00126
IC01_00125
IC01_00124
IC01_00122
IC01_00123
14 22 14 22 14 22 14 22 14 24 34 44 14 22 34 44 14 22 32 44
2. 3. 4. 5. 5. 6. 7. 8. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3. 4. 5. 6. 5. 6. 7. 8 5. 6. 7. 8 5. 6. 7. 8
Left Right According to EN 500121) According to EN 500121) According to EN 500111) Order No.
Lateral auxiliary switches for size S0, S00
2 -- 51 53
63 63 43 4341
31 33 32 42 31 31 42 42 -- -- -- 3RH29 21-.DA20 +
NSB0_02140
NSB0_02141
3RH29 21-.DA11
1 1
52 54
64 64 32 34
44 44
2 -- Anbau
Anbau
51 5361 63
Anbau
Anbau
31 3341 4332 23 33 22 22 33 -- -- -- -- 3RH29 21-.DA20 +
NSB0_02139
NSB0_02141
links
links rechts
rechts
3RH29 21-.DA02
-- 2
52 5462 64 32 3442 44
1 1 Anbau
Anbau Anbau
Anbau23 14 24 13 -- -- -- -- -- -- 3RH29 21-.DA11 +
5151 6163 313341
41
NSB0_02139
NSB0_02140
links
links rechts
rechts
3RH29 21-.DA02
-- 2
5252 6264 323442
42
LateralAnbau
Anbau
auxiliary
links
links
Anbau
Anbau
switches
rechts
rechts
for contactor relays
-- 2 51 61 31 41 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 42Z 33X 24 3RH29 21-.DA02
NSB0_02139
52 62 32 42
1 1 Anbau Anbau -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 51X 42X 33X 3RH29 21-.DA11

51 63 31 43
NSB0_02140
links rechts
52 64 32 44
2 -- Anbau Anbau -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 60Z 51X 42X 3RH29 21-.DA20

53 63 33 43
NSB0_02141
links rechts
54 64 34 44
Anbau
Lateral auxiliary Anbau
switches, Solid-state compatible for size S00
links rechts
1 1 41 53 23 31 21 -- -- 11 11 -- -- -- -- -- 3RH29 11-2DE11
NSB0_02137
42 54 24 32
1 1 Anbau Anbau 32 -- -- 22 22 -- -- -- -- -- 3RH29 11-2DE11

41415353 2323 3131
NSB0_02137
NSB0_02137
links rechts
4242 5454 24243232

Anbau
Anbau Anbau
Anbau
Laterallinks
auxiliary
links switches, Solid-state compatible for size S0, S00
rechts
rechts
1 1 51 63 33 41 21 12 22 11 11 22 22 -- -- -- 3RH29 21-2DE11
NSB0_02140
52 64 34 42
1 1 Anbau Anbau 32 23 33 22 22 33 -- -- -- -- 3RH29 21-2DE11

5151 6363 33334141
NSB0_02140
NSB0_02140
links rechts
5252 6464 34344242
LateralAnbau
Anbau
auxiliary
links
links
Anbau
Anbau
switches,
rechts
rechts
Solid-state compatible for contactor relays
1 1 51 63 33 41 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 51X 42X 33X 3RH29 21-.DE11
NSB0_02140
52 64 34 42
Anbau
1) Combinations Anbau
links according
rechts to EN 50012, EN 50011 and IEC 60947-

3RT1 contactors and accessories 10/22/15
Internal circuit diagrams (applicable to screw, spring and ring lug connection)
Sizes S3 to S12 Contactors with 4 main contacts, sizes S3
Terminal designations according to EN 50 012 Terminal designations acc. to EN 50 005
3RT10 4 to 3RT10 7, 3RT12, 3RT14 contactors 3RT13/23 and 3RT15/25 contactors
4 NO 2 NO + 2 NC
-Q A1 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
NO NC
NO NC
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 (3RH19 21 auxiliary switch blocks acc. to EN 50 005 can be snapped on)
3RT10 4 to 3RT10 7, 3RT14 contactors

With 3RH19 21- . HA22 4-pole auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front
2 NO + 2 NC 3RT26 capacitor contactors
Ident. no. 22E Size S00 Sizes S0 and S2
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
F0 F0
3RT1. 5, 3RT1. 6, 3RT1. 7 contactors (sizes S6, S10, S12)

With 3RH19 21-1DA11 2-pole auxiliary switch blocks, laterally mountable
2 NO + 2 NC 51 61 51 63
1/L1
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
5/L3
3/L2
A1 A1
A2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
52 62 52 64
3RH19 21- . HA../-.XA..4-pole auxiliary switch blocks,

for snapping onto the front 2)
3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 3 NC
IC01_00374
IC01_00375
Ident. no. 31 22 22 13
C1 C1
3RH19 21- . DA11, 3RH19 21-2DE11 first laterally mountable auxiliary

switch block (solid-state compatible)
1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
left right
3RH19 21- . JA11, 3RH19 21-2JE11 second laterally mountable auxiliary

switch block (solid-state compatible)
(only for sizes S3 to S12)
1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
left right
Surge suppressor (plug-in direction coded; exception: marked +/– for 3RT19 16-1T... diode assembly) for sizes S2 to S3
Diode Diode assembly Varistor RC element Diode with LED Varistor with LED
1) 3RH29 auxiliaries are intended to be used only with 3RT2 or 3RH2 base devices.
3RH19 auxiliaries are intended to be used only with 3RT1 or 3RH1 base devices.
2) Not for 3RT12. vacuum contactors

SIRIUS • Revised • 3RT1 Contactors
09/22/15 3RT1 contactors and accessories
Internal circuit diagrams (applicable to screw connection and Spring-type terminal connection)
Accessories for size S31) to S12 contactors
Terminal designations acc. to EN 50 005
3RH19 21-.F..., 4-pole,
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 4 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. no. 40 31 22 04 22 U
make-before-break
3RH19 21- . CA.. auxiliary switch blocks, single-pole, 3RH19 21-1CD.. auxiliary switch blocks, single-pole,
for snapping onto the front 2) with make-before-break contacts, for snapping onto the front 1)
1 NO 1 NC 1 NO 1 NC
(terminal designations according to EN 50 005 or

EN 50 012)
Accessories for size S0 to S12 contactors

3RH19 21-1LA.. and 3RH19 21-1MA.. auxiliary switch block, 2-pole, Internal wiring
cable entry from above or below
2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
Example: 1 NO + 1 NC,
cable entry from below
3RH19 21- . FE22 solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block, 4-pole,

2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. no. 22
3RH19 21- . EA.. first laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (left) 3RH19 21- . EA.. first laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (right)
2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
3RH19 21- . KA.. second laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (left) 3RH19 21- . KA.. second laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (right)
(only for sizes S3 to S12) (only for sizes S3 to S12)
1) RH29 auxiliaries are intended to be used only with 3RT2 or 3RH2 base devices.
3RH19 auxiliaries are intended to be used only with 3RT1 or 3RH1 base devices.
2) Not for 3RT12. vacuum contactors

3RT Contactors and 3RH2 Control Relays • Revised • SIRIUS
Accessories
for size S00 to S3 09/22/15
Circuit diagrams
Accessories for size S3 contactors and control relays
Solid-state time-delay blocks
(see configuring aid on page 2/38)
3RT19 16-2C... 3RT19 16-2D... Sizes S2 to S12
ON-delay OFF-delay (with auxiliary voltage) 3RT19 16-2E.../2F.../2G... solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch blocks
Size S00 Size S00
1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
ON-delay OFF-delay WYE-delta function
(Integrated varistors not shown)
3RT19 26-2C... 3RT19 26-2D...

ON-delay OFF-delay (with auxiliary voltage)
Sizes S0 to S3 Sizes S0 to S3
A2 can only be connected

to N(L–) via the time-delay
relay.
x don’t connect
Time-delay block
Contactor
A2 can be connected to
N(L–) via either the contac-
tor or the time-delay relay.
- - - optional connection
Designation Circuit diagram Designation Circuit diagram

3RA2811-.CW10 3RA2814-.AW10 L1(+)
ON-delay OFF-delay, S1
1 CO contact A1 = B1 A3
15
Q
16 18
A2
N(-)
3RA2812-.DW10 3RA2814-.FW10 L1(+)
OFF-delay with OFF-delay with S1
auxillary voltage auxillary voltage, A1 = B1 A3
1 NC contact/ 27 35
1 CO contact Q
28 36
A2
N(-)
3RA2813-.AW10 L1(+) 3RA2815-.AW10 L1(+)

ON-delay, S1 OFF-delay without S1
1 CO contact A1 auxillary voltage, A1
15 1 CO contact 15
Q Q
16 18 16 18
A2 A2
N(-) N(-)
3RA2813-.FW10 L1(+) 3RA2815-.FW10 L1(+)
ON-delay, S1 OFF-delay without S1
1 NC contact/ A1 auxillary voltage, A1
1 NO contact 27 35 1 NC contact/ 27 35
1 NO contact
Q Q
28 36 28 36
A2 A2
N(-) N(-)
3RT29 accessories are intended to be used only with 3RT2 or 3RH2 base devices.
3RT19 auxiliaries are intended to be used only with 3RT1 or 3RH1 base devices.

SIRIUS 3RA Contactor Assemblies
3RA13 / 3RA23 contactor assemblies
for reversing
Circuit diagrams
Size S00 to S0 Control circuit (sizes S00 and S0)

Main circuit (terminal designations of contactors according to EN 50 012)
for momentary-contact operation for maintained-contact operation
The 3RA2913-2AA. (S00) and 3RA2913-2AA (S0)

installation kit contains wiring connectors for
connecting the main conducting paths, the
mechanical interlock and two connecting clips
for the contactors.
Sizes S2 to S3 Control circuit

Main circuit (terminal designations of contactors according to EN 50 005)
The 3RA19 .3-2A installation kits contain, among The 3RA19 24-2B mechanical interlock contains one NC
other things, the wiring connectors on the top and contact for the NC contact interlock for each contactor
bottom for connecting the main conducting paths.
Position of terminals
Sizes S2 to S3
3RA19 24-2B mechanical interlock (laterally mountable),
integrated in reversing contactor assemblies (reversing starters),
contains one NC contact for the electrical interlock for each contactor
2 NC
S0 "OFF" button
S1 "Clockwise ON" button
S2 "Counterclockwise ON" button
S "CW-OFF-CCW" button
K1 Clockwise contactor
K2 Counterclockwise contactor
F1 Fuses for main circuit
F3 Fuses for control circuit
F2 Overload relay

3RA Contactor Assemblies SIRIUS
Circuit Diagrams
for WYE-delta switching
Circuit diagrams
Size S00 / S0 Control circuits
Main circuit with 3RA2816-0EW20 function module (set of three)
snapped onto the front
Sizes S2 to S3 3RA2816-0EW20
Main circuit
Sizes S2 and S3
s
Control circuits
with 3RP15 7. time-delay relay,
laterally mounted (typical circuits)
S0 "OFF" button
S1 "ON" button
S Maintained-contact switch
K1 Line contactor
K2 Star contactor
K3 Delta contactor
K4 Solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch
block or time-delay relay
F0 Fuses
F1 Overload relay
Contact element 17/18 is only closed on the star step; the contact element is open
on the delta step and when de-energized.

SIRIUS 3T Contactors
Internal circuit diagrams

3TF68 44 and 3TF69 44 contactors 3TF68 33 and 3TF69 33 contactors
4 NO + 4 NC 3 NO + 3 NC
AC operation DC operation
max. complement of auxiliary max. complement of auxiliary
switches switches
Auxiliary switch blocks Auxiliary switch blocks Auxiliary switch blocks Auxiliary switch blocks
3TY7 681-1G 3TY7 561-1AA00 3TY7 561-1KA00 3TY7 561-1EA00
for coil reconnection, first auxiliary switch block second auxiliary switch block with make-before-break contacts
3TF68 and 3TF69, left or right left or right
DC economy circuit mounted on left mounted on right mounted on left mounted on right mounted on left mounted on right
Auxiliary switch blocks

3TY7 561-1.
solid-state compatible aux. switch block
mounted on left mounted on right
Interface for control by PLC

3TX7 090-0D
with surge suppression
Circuit diagrams for DC economy circuit · maintained-contact operation

3TF68 33 and 3TF69 33 contactors
Terminal designations according to EN 50 012.

3RH21 coupling
for switcing auxillary circuits
Terminal diagrams
DC operation
L+ is to be connected to coil terminal A1.
3RH21 coupling relays for auxiliary circuits,
size S00
(it is not possible to snap on an auxiliary switch block)
Surge suppressor can be mounted
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident no.: 40E 31E 22E
Suppressor Diode integrate

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident no.:40E 31E 22E
13 23 33 43 13 21 33 43 13 21 31 43
A1(+) A1(+) A1(+)
A2(–) A2(–) A2(–)

14 24 34 44 14 22 34 44 14 22 32 44
Diode integrated
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Size S00
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident no.: 40E 31E 22E
3RH19 21- . DA11 first laterally 3RH19 21- . JA11 second laterally
mountable auxiliary switch mountable auxiliary switch
block 1) block 1)
mountable on left or right mountable on left or right
(only for sizes S3 to S12)
1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
left right left right
1) Note the location digit.

Can only be used if no 4-pole auxiliary
switch block is snapped onto the front.

SIRIUS 3RH2 Control & Latching Relays
3RH2 Terminal Designations

3RH21 control relays
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
3RH21 40 control relays

with 3RH19 11-1GA.. auxiliary switch blocks snapped onto the front
8 NO 7 NO + 1 NC 6 NO + 2 NC 5 NO + 3 NC
Ident no.:80E 71E 62E 53E
4 NO + 4 NC
Ident no.:44E
3RH24 latched control relays

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC
Ident no.: 40E 31E
2 NO + 2 NC
Ident no.: 22E

3RT Contactors and 3RH Control Relays • Revised • SIRIUS
3RT1/2 contactors and accessories 10/22/15
Position of terminals (applicable to screw connection and Cage Clamp connection)

Size S00 Sizes S3 to S12
Terminal designations according to EN 50 012 Terminal designations according to EN 50 012
3RT20 1 contactors, 3RT20 1 coupling relays, 3RT 20 3, 3RT 20 3, 3RT 10 4
3RT10 4, 3RT14 46 contactors, contactors
1 NO 1 NC 3RH19 21- . HA22
Ident. no. 10E 01 4-pole auxiliary switch block
snapped onto the front
2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. no. 22 E
3RT20 1 contactors (with 1 NO)

with auxiliary switch blocks snapped onto the front
3RH19 11-. H . . .
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. no.: 11 22
3RT20 3, 3RT10 4 3RT20 3, 3RT10 4
contactors contactors
with 4-pole auxiliary switch block with 4-pole auxiliary switch block
for snapping onto the front for snapping onto the front
3RH19 21- . HA31 3RH19 21- . HA13
3 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 3 NC
Ident. no. 31 E 13 E
2 NO + 3 NC 3 NO + 2 NC
Ident. no.: 23 32
Size S0 Size S2
Terminal designations according to EN 50 012 Terminal designations according to EN 50 012
3RT20 2 Contactors with 1NO + 1NC 3RT20 2 Contactors 3RT20 3 Contactors with 1NO + 1NC 3RT20 3 Contactors
3RT20 2 Coupling Relays with 3NO + 3NC 3RT20 3 Coupling Relays with 3NO + 3NC
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
13 21 A1 13 21 A1 13 21 A1 13 21 A1
1 1 3 3 1 1 3 3
2 2 4 4 2 2 4 4
14 22 A2 14 22 A2 14 22 A2 14 22 A2
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

09/22/15 3RT1/2 contactors and accessories
Position of terminals (applicable to screw connection and Spring-type connection)

3RH19 21- . F... auxiliary switch blocks, 4-pole,
for snapping onto the front
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 4 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. no. 40 31 22 04 22 U
make-before-break
3RH19 21-1LA.. auxiliary switch blocks, 2-pole, 3RH19 21-1MA.. auxiliary switch blocks, 2-pole,
for snapping onto the front, cable entry from above for snapping onto the front, cable entry from below
3RH19 21- . FE22 solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block, 4-pole,

2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. no. 22
Terminal designations according to EN 50 005 or EN 50 012

3RH19 21- . CA.. auxiliary switch blocks, single-pole,
1 NO 1 NC 1 NO 1 NC
with extended with extended

contact-making contact-making

3RT1/2 10/22/15
3RH19 21- . EA.. first laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (left) 3RH19 21- . EA.. first laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (right)
3RH19 21- . KA.. second laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (left) 3RH19 21- . KA.. second laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (right)
(only for sizes S3 to S12; can only be used if no auxiliary (only for sizes S3 to S12; can only be used if no auxiliary
switches are snapped onto the front) switches are snapped onto the front)

Terminal designations acc. to DIN 46 199 Part 5
3RT19 26-2E.../2F.../2G... solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch blocks
1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
ON-delay OFF-delay Star-delta function

Size S00 Sizes S2 and S3
with 4-pole auxiliary switch block mounted on the front with 4-pole auxiliary switch block mounted on the front
The auxiliary switch block comprises 3 leading contacts The auxiliary switch block comprises 3 leading contacts
(not shown) and one unassigned NO contact. (not shown) and one unassigned NO contact.

3RT1 contactors and accessories
Position of terminals (applicable to screw connection and Spring-type terminal connection)

Sizes S6 to S12
3RT1.5, 3RT1.6, 3RT1.7 contactors
with conventional op. mechanism with solid-state op. mechanism with solid-state op. mechanism
(3RT1. ..-.A...) (3RT1. ..-.N...) (3RT1. ..-.P...)
with laterally mountable auxiliary with laterally mountable auxiliary with laterally mountable auxiliary
switch blocks 3RH19 21-1DA11 switch blocks 3RH19 21-1DA11 switch blocks 3RH19 21-1DA11
(for 2 NO + 2 NC, incl. in contactor) (for 2 NO + 2 NC, incl. in contactor) (for 1 NO + 1 NC, incl. in contactor)
3RH19 21-1JA11 3RH19 21-1JA11 3RH19 21-1JA11
(expandable to 4 NO + 4 NC) (expandable to 4 NO + 4 NC) (expandable to 2 NO + 2 NC)
2 NO + 2 NC or 4 NO + 4 NC 2 NO + 2 NC or 4 NO + 4 NC 1 NO + 1 NC or 2 NO + 2 NC
Contactors with 4 main contacts, size S00 Contactors with 4 main contacts, sizes S2 to S3
Terminal designations acc. to EN 50 005 Terminal designations acc. to EN 50 005
3RT23 and 3RT25 contactor s 3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors
4 NO 2 NO + 2 NC 4 NO 2 NO + 2 NC
Size S0 with
integrated
1NO + 1NC aux
(13/14 + 21/22)
and only one set
of A1+A2 on front

3T Contactors SIRIUS
3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors, 3-pole
AC operation DC operation Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks
3TY7 561-1 . for lateral mounting onto
3TF68 and 3TF69 contactors 3TF68 and 3TF69 contactors
size 6 to 14 contactors
4 NO + 4 NC 3 NO + 3 NC
max. complement of auxiliary
switches
mounted mounted
on left on right

SIRIUS
3RT20 contactors,
3-pole
Dimension drawings
3RT2.1.-1 contactor and 3RH21..-1 contactor relays
Size S00 and NEMA Size 0, screw connection Lateral clearance from
with surge suppressor and auxiliary switch block earthed parts = 6 mm
5 35
1) Laterally mountable
auxiliary switch block
3RH2911-1DA.. / -1DE.. /
50
-1EE..
2) Auxiliary switch block for
mounting on the front
3RH2911-1FA.. / -1GA.. /
-1HA.. / -1NF..
3RT2.1.-2 contactor and 3RH21..-2 contactor relay

Size S00, Spring-type terminal connection
with auxiliary switch block
5 35
3RH2911-2DA.. / -2DE.. /
50
-2EE..
3RH2911-2FA.. / -2GA.. /
-2HA.. / -2NF..
3RT2.2.-1 contactors Size S0 and NEMA Size 1,

(screw-type connection system) with auxiliary switch blocks
mounted and other accessories
3RH2921-1DA.. / -1DE..
3RH2911-1FA.. / -1GA.. /
-1HA.. / -1NF..
3) 3-phase infeed terminal
3RV2925-5AB
For specific dimensions, 2D / 3D CAD files and technical data, please visit www.siemens.com/cax

3RT10/20 contactors,
3-pole 09/22/15
Dimension drawings
3RT2.2.-2 and 3RT202.-.....-0LA2 contactors
Size S0 (spring-loaded connection) with auxiliary switch blocks mounted
For size S0:

3RH2921-2DA.. / -2DE..
3RH2911-2FA.. / -2GA.. /
-2HA.. / -2NF..
3RT20 3 contactors
Size S2 and NEMA Size 2, screw connection
with surge suppressor, auxiliary switch blocks and mounted overload relay
130
55 125 45
5
1/ L1 3/ L2 5/ L3
56.7
A1
21NC
13NO
11
113.4
97.5
14NO
22NC
3. 4. 5. 6. A2
3RT20
2.5
2/ T1 4/ T2 6/ T3
8
4.9
For size S2:
a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V, diode assembly
a = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 V
a = 17 mm with RC element
b = DC 15 mm deeper than AC
1) Auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable
2) Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the front
(1, 2 and 4-pole)
3) Surge suppressor
4) Drilling pattern

3RT10 and 3RT14 contactors,
10/22/15 3-pole
Dimension drawings
3RT20 3 contactors
with surge suppressor, auxiliary switch blocks and mounted overload relay
130
55 125 45
5
1/ L1 3/ L2 5/ L3 56.7
A1
21NC
13NO
11
113.4
97.5
14NO
22NC
3. 4. 5. 6.
A2
3RT20
2.5
2/ T1 4/ T2 6/ T3
8
4.9
For specific dimensions, 2D / 3D CAD files and technical data, please visit www.siemens.com/cax For size S2:
a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V, diode assembly
(1, 2 and 4-pole)
3RT10 4, 3RT14 46 contactors Lateral clearance from
3) Surge suppressor
Size S3 and NEMA Size 3, screw connection earthed parts = 6 mm
4) Drilling pattern
with surge suppressor, auxiliary switch blocks
and mounted overload relay
For size S3:

a = 0 mm with varistor, diode assembly
and < 240 V
a = 3.5 mm with varistor and > 240 V
2) Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the
front (1, 2 and 4-pole), same dimensions for
designs with screw or Spring-type
connection
3) Surge suppressor
4) Drilling pattern
5) For mounting on 35 mm standard mounting
rail (15 mm deep) acc. to EN 50 022
or 75 mm standard mounting rail acc. to
EN 50 023
For specific dimensions, 2D / 3D CAD files and technical data, please visit www.siemens.com/cax 6) Hexagon socket screw 4 mm

SIRIUS
3RT10 contactors,
3-pole
Dimension drawings
3RT10 4 contactors,
with surge suppressor, auxiliary switch blocks
and mounted overload relay
For size S3:

a = 0 mm with varistor, diode assembly
and < 240 V
a = 3.5 mm with varistor and > 240 V
2) Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the
front (1, 2 and 4-pole), same dimensions for
designs with screw or Spring-type terminal
connection
3) Surge suppressor
4) Drilling pattern
5) For mounting on 35 mm standard mounting
rail (15 mm deep) acc. to EN 50 022
or 75 mm standard mounting rail acc. to
EN 50 023
For specific dimensions, 2D / 3D CAD files and technical data, please visit www.siemens.com/cax 6) Hexagon socket screw 4 mm

SIRIUS
3-pole
Dimension drawings
3RT10 5, 3RT14 5 contactors
Size S6 and NEMA Size 4
with auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable and mountable on the front,
mounted overload relay and box terminals,
laterally mounted electronics module with remaining lifetime indication
Clearance from earthed parts with

directly mounted overload relay:
lateral: 10 mm
front: 20 mm
Drilling pattern
For size S6:

k = 120 mm (minimum clearance for removing the
withdrawable coil)
1) Second auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable
3) RC element
4) 3RB10 overload relay, mounted
5) 3RT19 55-4G box terminal block
(hexagon socket 4 mm)
6) 3RT19 56-4G box terminal block
(hexagon socket 4 mm)
7) PLC connection DC 24 V and changeover switch
(with 3RT1...-.N)
8) Electronics module with remaining lifetime indica-
tion (auxiliary switch block not mountable on right-
For specific dimensions, 2D / 3D CAD files and technical data, please visit www.siemens.com/cax hand side)

SIRIUS
3-pole
Dimension drawings
3RT10 6, 3RT14 6 contactors
Size S10
with auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable and mountable on the front,
Drilling pattern
3RT10 7, 3RT14 7 contactors For sizes S10 and S12:

Size S12 Clearance from earthed parts with directly mounted
with auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable and mountable on the front, overload relay:
mounted overload relay and box terminals, lateral: 10 mm
laterally mounted electronics module with remaining lifetime indication front: 20 mm
Drilling pattern

withdrawable coil)
3) RC element
5) Box terminal block (hexagon socket 6 mm)
(with 3RT1...-.N)

SIRIUS
3RT12 vacuum contactors,
3-pole
Dimension drawings
3RT12 6 vacuum contactors
Size S10
with auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable,
Drilling pattern
Detail
Contact erosion indicator for vacuum interrupters
3RT12 7 vacuum contactors

Size S12
with auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable,
Drilling pattern

withdrawable coil)
2) Position and contact erosion indicator
3) RC element
5) Box terminal block (hexagon socket 6 mm)
(with 3RT1...-.N)

3RT13/23 and 3RT15/25 contactors,
4-pole 09/22/15
Dimension drawings
3RT23 1 and 3RT25 1 contactors Lateral clearance from
Size S00, screw connection earthed parts = 6 mm
with surge suppressor and auxiliary switch block
For size S00:

5 35
3RH2911-1DA.. / -1DE.. /
-1EE..
50
3RH2911-1FA.. / -1GA.. /
-1HA.. / -1NF..

3RT23 2 and 3RT25 2 contactors

Size S0 with coil terminal module
and auxiliary switch block
For size S0:

4) 4-pole contactor for switching 4
resistive loads 3RT232. 4-pole
pole-changing contactor for
changing the polarity of hoisting
gear motors (2 NO contacts and
2 NC contacts) 3RT252.
5) Coil terminal module 3RT2926-
4RA11/-4RB11

3RH2911-1AA.. / -1BA
3RT23 3 and 3RT25 3 contactorss

Size S2 with surge suppressor For sizes S2 and S3:
and auxiliary switch block 130
a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V
74.6 125 45
5
a = 17 mm with RC element and
1/L1 3/ L2 5/ L3 7/ L4 diode assembly
b = S2: DC 15 mm deeper than AC
S3: DC 13 mm deeper than AC
1) Auxiliary switch block, laterally
56.7
21NC
A1
mountable (right or left)
13NO
2) Auxiliary switch block, mountable
11 on the front, (1, 2 and 4-pole,
113.4
also 3RH19 21-1FE22 solid-state

97.5
compatible design)
3) Surge suppressor
14NO
22NC 4) Drilling pattern
3. 4. 5. 6. A2
5) For mounting on 35 mm standard
3RT23 mounting rail (15 mm deep) acc.
2.5
to EN 50 022 or, in the case of

size S3, 75mm standard mounting
2/T1 4/ T2 6/ T3 8/ T4
rail acc. to EN 50 023
8
6) Hexagon socket screw 4 mm

4.9
3RT13 4 contactors
Size S3 with surge suppressor
and auxiliary switch block

SIRIUS
Dimension drawings
3RT16 17 capacitor contactors
Size S00

Size S0

Size S3

3RA13/23 contactor assemblies
for reversing 10/22/15
Dimension drawings
Size S00 / 3RA231
90 73
37
67.5
Size S0 / 3RA232
90 97
53
101
Size S2 / 3RA233 129.8

120 124.8
1/ L1 3/ L2 5/ L3 1/ L1 3/ L2 5/ L3
72.9
A1 A1
21NC 21NC
13NO 13NO
140.6
11 11
14NO 14NO
22NC 22NC
3. 4. 5. 6. A2 3. 4. 5. 6. A2
3RT20 3RT20
2/ T1 4/ T2 6/ T3 2/ T1 4/ T2 6/ T3
Size S3 / 3RA134

SIRIUS
3RA13 contactor assemblies
for reversing
Dimension drawings
Size S6
Size S10
The assemblies shown on this page are for customer assembly with individual components.

SIRIUS
3RA13 contactor assemblies
for reversing
Dimension drawings
Size S12
M10x30
(3x)
2.1
2.2
2.3
6
2
7 M10x35
944
RA -00 (3x)
3RA1953-2A
R A - 0 1 0 27
3RA1963-2A 1)
RA-01027a
3RA1973-2A 2)
1
) 3RT1.6
M10x30 2
) 3RT1.7
6 (3x)
M10x35
(3x) 1.1
1.2
The assemblies shown on this page are for customer assembly with individual components. 1.3

SIRIUS
3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors,
3TC4 and 3TC5 DC contactors
Dimension drawings
3TF68 vacuum contactors 3TF69 vacuum contactors
Detail Detail
A = Contact erosion indicator for vacuum interrupter contacts A = Contact erosion indicator for vacuum interrupter contacts
3TC4 and 3TC5 contactors

3TC44 contactors 3TC48 contactors
Size 2, AC and DC operation Size 4, AC and DC operation
t = minimum clearance from insulated components: 15 mm (600 V and 750 V) t = minimum clearance from insulated components: 15 mm (600 V),
20 mm (750 V)
from grounded components: 30 mm (600 V and 750 V) from grounded components: 35 mm (600 V),
55 mm (750 V)
a b a b c
DC operation 109 141 DC operation 112 180 21.5
AC operation 68 100 AC operation 86 154 23.5
3TC52 contactors 3TC56 contactors

Size 8, AC and DC operation Size 12, AC and DC operation
2
2
t = minimum clearance from insulated components: 20 mm (600 V and 750 V) t = minimum clearance from insulated components: 25 mm (600 V and 750 V)
from grounded components: 70 mm (600 V and 750 V) from grounded components: 80 mm (600 V),
100 mm (750 V)
a b a b
DC operation 147 232 DC operation 200 310
AC operation 115 200 AC operation 141 251
1) With box terminals for laminated copper bars 2) DC operation only

(accessories).

Accessories for 3RT1 contactors 09/22/15
Dimension drawings
Terminal cover for box terminals Terminal cover for box terminals
for size S2, for size S3,
3RT29 36-4EA2 3RT19 46-4EA2
Terminal cover for cable lug and bar connection Auxiliary conductor terminal, 3-pole
for size S3, 3RT19 46-4F
3RT19 46-4EA1 Size S3
mounted on contactor

SIRIUS
Accessories for 3RA1 contactor assemblies
Dimension drawings
3RA19.2-2A baseplates for reversing contactor assemblies
A B C D E
S6 190 205 250 229 9
S10 240 249 300 275 11
S12 280 249 330 275 11
3RA19.2-2E, 3RA19.2-2F
baseplates for star-delta assemblies
A B C D E
S6-S6-S3 316 205 376 229 9
S6-S6-S6 343 205 403 229 9
S10-S10-S6 393 250 453 275 11
S10-S10-S10 423 250 483 275 11
S12-S12-S10 450 250 510 275 11
S12-S12-S12 465 250 525 275 11

SIRIUS
3RH21 and 3RH24 control relays
Dimension drawings
3RH21 control relays
Size S00, with screw connections 73
Lateral clearance from
5 35 earthed parts = 6 mm
50

3RH24 latched control relays

Size S00 73
90 68
29.8
57.5
7.5

Dimension drawings
Size S00, with screw connections,
with surge suppressor
104.5
45 73 35 1) Surge suppressor
5 2) Drilling pattern
Deviating dimensions for
coupling relays with Spring-type
29.8
terminal connections
57.5
Height: 69.5 mm
50
5 1.2
3.8

IEC Power Control
Overload Relays
Contents
Contents
Thermal overload relays Solid state overload relays
3RU11 / 3RU21 overload relays up to 100 A 3RB24 overload relays up to 630A

with screw connection, CLASS 10 Page with IO-Link current monitoring Page

• Basic unit 3/10 • Basic unit 3/51
• Accessories 3/11 • Accessories 3/55
Description 3/8-3/9 Description 3/52-3/53
Technical data 3/12-3/14 Technical data 3/58-3/62
Dimension drawings 3/16-3/17
TSolid state overload relays

h
3RB20/21, 3RB30/31 3RB22/23 overload relays 3UF7 SIMOCODE Pro

overload relays up to 630 A, up to 820 A for full motor Motor management and
3RB20/30 CLASS 10 or 20 protection, CLASS 5 to control devices Page
3RB21/31 CLASS 5, 10, 20, 30 Page CLASS 30 adjustable Page

• Basic Unit 3/22-3/23 • Basic Unit 3/34-3/35 • Basic Unit 3/69-3/72
• Accessories 3/11 • Accessories 3/49-3/50 • Accessories 3/73-3/76
Description 3/18-3/19 Description 3/47 Description 3/63-3/68
Cross Reference Aid 3/21 Technical data 3/40-3/43 Technical data 3/77-3/78
Technical data 3/24-3/28 Dimension drawings 3/45-3/46 Dimension drawing 3/79-3/82
Dimension drawings 3/30 Circuit diagrams 3/47

OverloadRelays
Overload Relays
• Revised •
General 04/20/15
General data
data
Overview
Features 3RU21 3RU11 3RB30/3RB31 3RB20/3RB21 3RB22/3RB23 3RB24 Benefits

General data
Sizes S00, S0, S2 S3 S00, S0, S2 S3 ... S12 S00 ... S12 S00 ... S12 • Are coordinated with the dimensions, con-
nections and technical characteristics of
the other devices in the SIRIUS modular
system (contactors, etc., ...)
• Permit the mounting of slim and compact
load feeders in widths of 45 mm (S00),
45 mm (S0), 55 mm (S2), 70 mm (S3),
120 mm (S6) and 145 mm (S10/S12); this
does not include the current measuring
modules for the 3RB22 to 3RB24 evalua-
tion modules sizes S00 to S3
• Simplify configuration
Seamless 0.11 ... 80 A 18 ... 100 A 0.1 ... 80 A 12.5 ... 630 A 0.3 ... 630 A 0.3 ... 630 A • Allows easy and consistent configuration
current range (up to 820 A)1) (up to 820 A)1) with one series of overload relays (for
small to large loads)
Protection functions
7
Tripping • Provides optimum inverse-time delayed

due to protection of loads against excessive tem-
overload perature rises due to overload
Tripping • Provides optimum inverse-time delayed
due to phase protection of loads against excessive tem-
unbalance perature rises due to phase unbalance
Tripping • Minimizes heating of induction motors
due to phase during phase failure
failure
Protection of — — • Enables the protection of single-phase
single-phase loads
loads
Tripping in the — 2) — 2) — 2) — 2) • Provides optimum temperature-depen-
event of dent protection of loads against excessive
overheating temperature rises e.g. for stator-critical
motors or in the event of insufficient cool-
by ant flow, contamination of the motor sur-
face or for long starting or braking
integrated operations
thermistor • Eliminates the need for additional special
motor protec- equipment
tion function
• Saves space in the control cabinet
• Reduces wiring outlay and costs
Tripping — — • Provides optimum protection of loads
in the event of (only 3RB31) (only 3RB21) against high-resistance short circuits or
a ground fault ground faults due to moisture, condensed
water, damage to the insulation material,
by etc.
• Eliminates the need for additional special
internal ground- equipment
fault detection
(activatable) • Saves space in the control cabinet
• Reduces wiring outlay and costs
Available 1) Motor currents up to 820 A can be recorded and evaluated by a current
— Not available measuring module, e.g. 3RB29 06-2BG1 (0.3 to 3 A), in combination with a
3UF18 68-3GA00 (820 A/1 A) series transformer.
2) The SIRIUS 3RN thermistor motor protection devices can be used to pro-
vide additional temperature-dependent protection.

7/72 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
IC10_07_08.fm Page 73 Monday, October 7, 2013 7:09 PM
Overload Relays
Overload Relays
General data
General data

Features
RESET function • Allows manual or automatic resetting of
the device
Remote RESET • Allows the remote resetting of the device
function (by means of (by means of (only with (only with (electrically via (electrically
separate mod- separate mod- 3RB31 3RB21 external but- with button or
ule) ule) and external and external ton) via IO-Link)
auxiliary volt- auxiliary volt-
age 24 V DC) age 24 V DC)
TEST function • Allows easy checking of the function and
for auxiliary wiring
contacts
TEST function — — • Allows checking of the electronics
for electronics
Status display • Displays the current operating state
Large current • Makes it easier to set the relay exactly to
adjustment the correct current value
button
Integrated auxil- -- • Allows the load to be switched off if neces-
7
iary contacts (2 ×) sary
(1 NO + 1 NC) • Can be used to output signals
Integrated auxil- — — — — — • Enables the controlling of contactors
iary contacts directly from the higher-level control sys-
(1 CO and 1 NO tem through IO-Link
in series)
IO-Link — — — — — • Reduction of wiring in the control cabinet
connection • Enables communication
Connection of — — — — — • Enables local operation
optional hand-
held device
Communication capability through IO-Link
Full starter — — — — — • Enables in combination with the
functionality SIRIUS 3RT contactors the assembly of
through IO-Link communication-capable motor starters
(direct-on-line, reversing and wye-delta
starting)
Reading out of — — — — — • Enables the reading out of diagnostics in-
diagnostics formation such as overload, open circuit,
functions ground fault, etc.
Reading out of — — — — — • Enables the reading out of current values
current values and their direct processing in the higher-
level control system
Reading out all — — — — — • Enables the reading out of all set parame-
set parameters ters, e.g. for plant documentation
Available
— Not available

Siemens IC 10 · 2012
Overload Relays
Overload Relays • Revised • SIRIUS
General data 04/20/15
General data

Design of load feeders
Short-circuit • Provides optimum protection of the loads
strength up to and operating personnel in the event of
100 kA short circuits due to insulation faults or
at 690 V faulty switching operations
(in conjunction
with the corre-
sponding fuses
or the corre-
sponding motor
starter protector)
Electrical and 1) 1)
• Simplifies configuration
mechanical • Reduces wiring outlay and costs
matching to
3RT contactors • Enables stand-alone installation as well as
space-saving direct mounting
Straight- — — • Reduces the contact resistance
through trans- (S2) (S3 ... S6) (S00 ... S6) (S00 ... S6) (only one point of contact)
formers for • Saves wiring costs
main circuit2) (easy, no need for tools, and fast)
(in this case the
7
cables are • Saves material costs

routed through • Reduces installation costs
the feed-through
openings of the
overload relay
and connected
directly to the
box terminals of
the contactor)
Spring-type — — — — • Enables fast connections
connection sys- (S00, S0) (S00, S0) • Permits vibration-resistant connections
tem for main cir-
cuit2) • Enables maintenance-free connections
Spring-type • Enables fast connections
connection sys- • Permits vibration-resistant connections
tem for auxiliary
circuits2) • Enables maintenance-free connections
Ring terminal — — — — — • Enables fast connections
lug connection (S00, S0) • Permits vibration-resistant connections
method for main
and auxiliary • Enables maintenance-free connections
circuits2)
Full starter — — — — — • Enables in combination with the
functionality SIRIUS 3RT contactors the assembly of
through IO-Link communication-capable motor starters
(direct-on-line, reversing and wye-delta
starting)
Starter function — — — — — • Integration of feeders via IO-Link in the
control system up to 630 A or 820 A
Available 1) Exception: up to size S3, only stand-alone installation is possible.
— Not available 2) Alternatively available for screw terminals.

Overload Relays
SIRIUS • Revised • Overload Relays
General data

Other features
Temperature • Allows the use of the relays at high tem-
compensation peratures without derating
• Prevents premature tripping
• Allows compact installation of the control
cabinet without distance between the de-
vices/load feeders
Very high long- • Provides safe protection for the loads
term stability even after years of use
in severe operating conditions
Wide setting — — • Minimize the configuration outlay and
ranges (1:4) (1:4) (1:10) (1:10) costs
• Minimize storage overheads, storage
costs, tied-up capital
Fixed trip class CLASS 10 CLASS 10 3RB30: 3RB20: • Optimum motor protection for standard
CLASS 10A CLASS 10E or CLASS 10 or starts
CLASS 20E CLASS 20
Trip classes — — 3RB31: 3RB21: • Enables solutions for very fast starting mo-
adjustable on
7
tors requiring special protection
the device (e.g. Ex motors)
CLASS 5, 10, 20, • Enables heavy starting solutions
30
• Reduces the number of versions
Low power loss — — • Reduces energy consumption and energy
costs (up 98 % less energy is used than
for thermal overload relays).
• Minimizes temperature rises of the con-
tactor and control cabinet – in some cases
this may eliminate the need for control-
gear cabinet cooling.
• Direct mounting to contactor saves space,
even for high motor currents (i.e. no heat
decoupling is required).
Internal power —1) —1) — — • Eliminates the need for configuration and
supply connecting an additional control circuit
Supplied from — — — — • Eliminates the need for configuration and
an external volt- connecting an additional control circuit
age through
IO-Link
Overload — — — — • Indicates imminent tripping of the relay di-
warning rectly on the device due to overload,
phase unbalance or phase failure through
flickering of the LEDs or in the case of the
3RB24 as a signal through IO-Link
• Allows the imminent tripping of the relay to
be signaled
• Allows measures to be taken in time in the
event of inverse-time delayed overloading
of the load for an extended period over the
current limit
Analog output — — — — • Allows the output of an analog output sig-
nal for actuating moving-coil instruments,
feeding programmable logic controllers or
transfer to bus systems
• Eliminates the need for an additional mea-
suring transducer and signal converter
Available 1) SIRIUS 3RU11 and 3RU21 thermal overload relays use a bimetal contactor
— Not available and therefore do not require a control supply voltage.

Siemens IC 10 · 2012
Overload Relays Overload Relays
General data
Overview of overload relays – matching contactors
Overload Current Current Contactors (type, size, rating in HP)
relays measure- range 3RT20 1. 3RT20 2. 3RT20 3. 3RT10 4. 3RT10 5. 3RT10 6. 3RT10 7 3TF68/
ment 3TF69
S00 S0 S2 S3 S6 S10 S12 Size 14
Type Type A 3/5/7.5/10 5/7.5/10/15/20/25 30/40/50 50/60/70 100/125/150 150/200/250 300/400 500/700
SIRIUS 3RU21 thermal overload relays
3RU21 1 Integrated 0.11 … 16 — — — — — — —
3RU21 2 Integrated 1.8 … 40 — — — — — — —
3RU21 3 Integrated 22 … 80 — — — — — — —
3RU21
SIRIUS 3RU11 thermal overload relays
3RU11 4 Integrated 18 … 10 — — — — — — —
3RU11
SIRIUS 3RB30 solid-state overload relays1)
3RB30 1 Integrated 0.1 … 16 — — — — — — —
3RB30 2 Integrated 0.1 … 40 — — — — — — —
3RB30 3 Integrated 12 … 80 — — — — — — —
7
3RB30
3RB31 1 Integrated 0.1 … 16 — — — — — — —
3RB31 2 Integrated 0.1 … 40 — — — — — — —
3RB31 3 Integrated 12 … 80 — — — — — — —
3RB31
3RB20 4 Integrated 12.5 … 100
3RB20 5 Integrated 50 … 200 — — — — — — —
3RB20 6 Integrated 55 … 630
3RB20 1 + Integrated 630 … 820 — — — — — — —
3UF18
3RB20
3RB21 4 Integrate 12.5 … 10
3RB21 5 d 50 … 200 0
Integrated — — — — — — —
3RB21 6 Integrated 55 … 630
3RB21 1 + Integrated 630 … 820 — — — — — — —
3UF18
3RB21
Can be used 1) "Technical Specifications" for use of the overload relays with trip class
— Cannot be used ≥ CLASS 20 can be found in "Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor
feeders",

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 7/77
General data
Overview of overload relays – matching contactors (continued)
Overload Current Current Contactors (type, size, rating in HP)
relays measure- range 3RT20 1 3RT20 2 3RT20 3 3RT10 4 3RT10 5 3RT10 6 3RT10 7 3TF68/
ment 3TF69
S00 S0 S2 S3 S6 S10 S12 Size 14
Type Type A 3/5/7.5/1. 5/7.5/10/15/ 30/40/50 50/60/75 100/125/150 150/200/250 300/400 500/700
20/25
SIRIUS 3RB22 to 3RB24 solid-state overload relays1)
3RB29 0 0.3 … 25 — — — — — —
3RB29 0 10 … 100 — — — —
3RB22 83/
3RB23 83/ 3RB29 5 20 … 200 — — — —
3RB24 83+ 3RB29 6 63 … 630 — — — — —
3RB29 0 + 630 … 820 — — — — — — —
3UF18
3RB22, 3RB23
3RB24
7
Can be used 1) "Technical Specifications" for use of the overload relays with trip class
— Cannot be used ≥ CLASS 20 can be found in "Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor
feeders",
Connection methods
Depending on the device version of the 3RU2 and 3RB3 over-
load relays, the terminals for screw terminals, spring-type termi-
nals or ring terminal lug connection are configured for both the
main and auxiliary circuit in frame sizes S00 and S0.
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays come with screw terminals.
The electronic overload relays 3RB20 and 3RB21 are available
with screw terminals (box terminals) or spring-type terminals on
the auxiliary current side; the same applies for the evaluation
modules of the 3RB22 to 3RB24 electronic overload relays for
High-Feature applications.

7/78 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
Overload Relays
Thermal Overload Relays SIRIUS
3RU11, 3RU21 up to 100 A,
CLASS 10
Description
The 3RU thermal overload re- (see "Environmental consider-
lays up to 100 A are designed for ations") and comply with all the
current-dependent protection of main international standards
applications with normal start-up and approvals (see "Specifica-
conditions (see "Trip classes") tions" and "Increased safety type
against impermissibly high rises of protection EEx").
in temperature as a result of
The accessories for the 3RU
overload or phase failure (see
thermal overload relays have
"Phase failure protection"). An
overload or phase failure causes
been designed on the principle
that all requirements are cov-
the motor current to rise above
ered by a small number of vari-
the set rated motor current (see
ants.
"Setting"). This current rise heats
NSB0_02075a
up the bimetal strips within the Application
relay via heating elements
which, in turn, operate the auxil- The 3RU thermal overload re-
iary contacts via a tripping lays are designed for the protec-
mechanism due to their deflec- tion of three-phase and single-
tion (see "Auxiliary contacts"). phase AC and DC motors.
These switch the load off via a If single-phase AC or DC loads
contactor. The switch-off time is are to be protected using 3RU
dependent on the ratio of trip- thermal overload relays, all three Connection for mounting onto contactors:
ping current to operational cur- bimetal strips should be heated. Optimally adapted in electrical, mechanical and design terms to the
rent Ie and is stored in the form of contactors. The overload relay can be connected directly to these
Therefore all main circuits of the contactor using these pins. Stand-alone installation is possible as
a tripping characteristic with relay must be connected in se- an alternative (in conjunction with a terminal bracket for stand-alone
long-term stability (see "Tripping ries. installation).
characteristics"). The "Tripped"
state is signalled by means of a Overload relays in WYE-delta Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET and RESET button:
With this switch you can choose between manual and automatic
switching position indicator (see combinations RESET. A device set to manual RESET can be reset locally by
"Indication of status"). When overload relays are used pressing the RESET button. A remote RESET is possible using the
RESET modules (accessories), which are independent of size.
Resetting takes place manually in WYE-delta combinations, it is
or automatically (see "Manual important to note that only 1/√3
and automatic resetting") after a of the motor current flows Switch position indicator and TEST function of the wiring:
Indicates a trip and enables the wiring test.
recovery time has elapsed (see through the mains contactor. An
"Recovery time"). overload relay mounted on the Motor current setting:
main contactor must be set to Setting the device to the rated motor current is easy with the large
The 3RU thermal overload re- rotary knob.
lays are electrically and me- 0.58 times the motor current.
chanically optimised to the 3RT A second overload relay must be STOP button:
If the STOP button is pressed, the NC contact is opened. This
contactors such that, in addition mounted on the star contactor if switches off the contactor downstream. The NC contact is closed
to individual mounting, they can your load is also to be optimally again when the button is released.
also be directly mounted onto protected in WYE operation. The
the contactors to save space WYE current is 1/3 of the rated Supply terminals:
Depending on the device version, the terminals for screw,
(see "Design and mounting"). motor current. The relevant relay spring-type or ring lug terminal connection are configured for the
The main and auxiliary circuits must be set to this current. main and auxiliary circuit.
can be connected in various
ways (see "Connection"), includ- Control circuit A sealable transparent cover can be optionally mounted
(accessory). It secures the motor current setting against
ing the use of Cage Clamp termi- An additional power supply is adjustment.
nals. When the overload relay not required for operation of the
has been connected, it can be 3RU thermal overload relays. 3RU21 26-4FB00 thermal overload relays
tested for correct functioning us-
ing a TEST slide (see "TEST Ambient conditions
function"). In addition to the Trip classes
The 3RU thermal overload re-
TEST function, the 3RU ther- lays are temperature compen- The 3RU thermal overload relay for symmetrical three-pole
mal overload relay is equipped sating according to IEC 60 947- lay is available for normal start- loading between 105 % and
with a STOP function (see "STOP 4-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 102 in up conditions in CLASS 10. For 120 % of the operational current.
function"). the temperature range –20 °C to further details about trip classes, Starting from the limiting tripping
For a wide variety of application +60 °C. For temperatures from see "Tripping characteristics". current, the tripping characteris-
possibilities for the 3RU thermal +60 °C to +80 °C, the upper set- tic moves on to larger tripping
Tripping characteristics currents based on the charac-
overload relay, please refer to ting value of the setting range
the sections "Application", must be reduced by a specific The tripping characteristics teristics of the so-called trip
"Ambient conditions", “Overload factor as given in the table be- show the relationship between classes (CLASS 10, CLASS 20
relays in WYE-delta combina- low. the tripping time and the tripping etc.). The trip classes describe
tions" and "Operation with fre- current as a multiple of the oper- time-intervals within which the
quency converters". Ambient Reduction factor ational current Ie and are speci- overload relay must trip with 7.2
temperature for the upper set- fied for symmetrical three-pole times the operational current Ie
The 3RU thermal overload re- in °C ting value and two-pole loading from cold. for symmetrical three-pole load-
lays can protect your loads from ing from cold.
overload and phase failure. You +60 1.0 The smallest current at which
must implement short-circuit +65 0.94 tripping occurs is called the lim- The tripping times are:
protection (see "Short-circuit +70 0.87
iting tripping current. In accor-
protection") by means of a fuse dance with IEC 60 947-4-1/ CLASS Tripping times
+75 0.81 DIN VDE 0660 Part 102, this
or circuit-breaker. 10A 2 s to 10 s
+80 0.73 must lie within certain specified
The 3RU thermal overload re- 10 4 s to 10 s
limits. The limits of the limiting
lays are environmentally friendly tripping current lie, in the case of 20 6 s to 20 s
the 3RU11 thermal overload re- 30 9 s to 30 s

Overload Relays
SIRIUS Thermal Overload Relays
3RU11, 3RU21 up to 100 A,
CLASS 10
Description
This is the schematic representation of a characteristic. The characteristics TEST function Operation with frequency
of the individual 3RU thermal overload relays can be requested from
Correct functioning of the ready converters
Technical Assistance at the e-mail address:
[email protected] 3RU thermal overload relay can The 3RU thermal overload re-
Tripping time
be tested with the TEST slide. The lays are suitable for operation with
10 000 slide is operated to simulate trip- frequency converters. Depending
ANSB00288 ping of the relay. During this simu- on the frequency of the converter,
100
min 5000 lation, the NC contact (95-96) is a current higher than the motor
60
40
s opened and the NO contact (97- current may have to be set due to
2000 98) is closed whereby the over- the occurrence of eddy currents
load relay checks that the auxiliary and skin effects.
1000
circuit is wired correctly. When the
10
500
3RU thermal overload relay is Environmental considerations
set to Automatic RESET, an auto-
5
matic reset takes place when the The devices are manufactured
200
TEST slide is released. The relay taking environmental consider-
2
100 must be reset using the RESET ations into account and comprise
1
3-pole
button when it is set to Manual environmentally-friendly and recy-
loading clable materials.
50 RESET.
20 2-pole STOP function Specifications

loading The 3RU thermal overload re-
10 When the STOP button is pressed,
the NC contact is opened and the lays comply with the requirements
5
series-connected contactor and of:
therefore the load is switched Off. • IEC 60 947-1/
2
The load is reconnected via the DIN VDE 0660 Part 100
1 contactor when the STOP button • IEC 60 947-4-1/
0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 30 40 A 60 80 x n is released. DIN VDE 0660 Part 102
Current
• IEC 60 947-5-1/
The tripping characteristic of a Setting Status indication DIN VDE 0660 Part 200
three-pole 3RU thermal over- The 3RU thermal overload relay The current status of the 3RU
load relay (see characteristic for • IEC 60801-2, -3, -4, -5 and
is adjusted to the rated motor cur- thermal overload relay is indicated
symmetrical three-pole loading rent using a rotary knob. The scale by the position of the marking on • UL 508/CSA C 22.2.
from cold) is valid when all three of the rotary knob is calibrated in the "TEST function/switching posi-
bimetal strips are loaded with the The 3RU11 thermal overload re-
Amperes. tion indicator" slide. The marking lays are also safe from touch ac-
same current simultaneously. If, on the slide is on the left at the "O"
however, only two bimetal strips cording to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100
Manual and automatic mark following a trip due to over- and climate-proof to IEC 721.
are heated as a result of phase load or phase failure and at the "I"
failure, these two strips would resetting
mark otherwise.
have to provide the force neces- It is possible to switch between Degree of protection
sary for operating the release manual resetting and automatic "Increased safety" EEx
mechanism and, if no additional resetting by depressing and rotat- Auxiliary contacts
The 3RU thermal overload relay
measures were implemented, ing the blue button (RESET but- The 3RU thermal overload relay meets the requirements for over-
they would require a longer trip- ton). When manual resetting is se- is equipped with an NO contact load protection of motors of the
ping time or a higher current. lected, a reset can be performed for the tripped signal and an NC "Increased safety" type of protec-
These increased current levels directly on the device by pressing contact for switching off the con- tion EEx e IEC 50 019/
over long periods usually result in the RESET button. Remote reset- tactor. DIN VDE 0165, DIN VDE 0170,
damage to the consumer. To pre- ting can be implemented by using DIN VDE 171.
vent damage, the 3RU thermal the mechanical and electrical RE- Connection KEMA test certificate number
overload relay features phase fail- SET modules from the range of ac- Ex-97.Y.3235,
ure sensitivity which, thanks to an cessories (see "Accessories"). All the 3RU thermal overload DMT 98 ATEX G001,
appropriate mechanical mecha- When the blue button is set to Au- relays have screw terminals for EN 50 019: 1977 + A1 ... A5,
nism, results in accelerated trip- tomatic RESET, the relay will be re- the main and auxiliary circuits. Increased Safety "e": Appendix A,
ping according to the characteris- set automatically. Once the box terminals have Guideline for temperature moni-
tic for two-pole loading from cold. been removed from the main toring of squirrel cage motors dur-
A reset is not possible until the re- conductor connections of the
In contrast to a load in the cold covery time has elapsed (see "Re- ing operation.
state, a load at operating tempera- overload relays of size S3, it is
covery time"). possible to connect busbars.
ture has a lower heat reserve. This Accessories
fact affects the 3RU thermal Alternatively the devices are
Recovery time available with either spring loaded For the 3RU thermal overload
overload relay in that following an
extended period of loading at op- After tripping due to an overload, it or with ring lug terminals on both relay, there are:
erational current Ie, the tripping takes a certain length of time for the control and the main terminals. • one adapter for each of the
time reduces by about a quarter. the bimetal strips of the 3RU For details of various connection four overload relay sizes S00 to
thermal overload relays to cool possibilities, see the "Technical S3 for individual mounting
Phase failure protection down. The relay can only be reset data" and "Selection and ordering • one electrical remote RESET
once it has cooled down. This time data". module for all sizes in three
The 3RU thermal overload re- (recovery time) is dependent on different voltage variants
lays feature phase failure protec- the tripping characteristic and the • one mechanical remote RESET
Design and mounting
tion (see "Tripping characteris- level of the tripping current. module for all sizes
tics") for the purpose of minimizing The 3RU thermal overload re- • one cable release for all sizes
After tripping due to overload, the lays are suitable for direct mount-
the heating of the load during sin- for resetting inaccessible
gle-phase operation as a result of recovery time allows the load to ing on the 3RT contactors. They
cool down. devices
phase failure. can also be mounted as single • terminal covers
units if the appropriate adapters
are used. For details of the The accessories can also be used
mounting possibilities, see the for the 3RB solid state overload relay.
"Selection and ordering data" and
the "Technical data".

Overload Relays
Thermal Overload Relays • Revised • SIRIUS
3RU11, 3RU21 up to 100 A,
CLASS 10 04/20/15

Features and technical characteristics • TEST function
• Auxiliary contacts: 1 NO + 1 NC • STOP button
• Manual/automatic RESET • Phase failure sensitivity
• Switching position indication • Sealable cover: optional in S00, S0 & S2. Integrated in S3
• CLASS 10
•• Terminal Types I †† Terminal Types II

Type Mounting Type Ltr Type Mounting Type Ltr
Ordering information
• Replace the (••) with the letter • For description, see page 3/8 Screw Direct to Contactor B0 Screw Direct to Contactor B0
Number combination from the • For technical data, see pages Screw1) Stand Alone B1 Screw 4) Stand Alone B1
Terminal types I table 3/12-3/15
Spring2) Direct to Contactor C0 Spring 3) Direct to Contactor D0
• Replace the (††) with the letter • For circuit diagrams, see page 3/15
Number combination from the Spring1) 2) Stand Alone C1 Spring 3) 4) Stand Alone D1
• For dimension drawings, see page
Terminal types II table
3/16-3/17. Ring Lug Direct to Contactor J0
3RU2116-1GB0 3RU2116-1GC0 3RU2126-4NB0 3RU2136-4RB1 3RU1146-4DB0
Thermal Overload Relays up to 40A Thermal Overload Relays up to 100A

Frame Size S00 and S0 •• Frame Size S2 and S3 ††
Setting Order No. Setting Order No. Weight Setting Order No. Setting Order No. Weight
Range Range approx. Range Range approx.
(screw/ (screw/
spring) spring)
A A kg A A kg
Frame Size S00: For mounting directly to 3RT201 contactors Frame Size S2: For mounting directly to 3RT203 contactors 4)
or for stand-alone installation
0.11 - 0.16 3RU2116-0A•• 1.4 - 2 3RU2116-1B•• 22 - 32 3RU2136-4E†† 47 - 57 3RU2136-4Q††
0.14 - 0.2 3RU2116-0B•• 1.8 - 2.5 3RU2116-1C•• 28 - 40 3RU2136-4F†† 54 - 65 3RU2136-4J††
0.13/0.15 0.34
0.18 - 0.25 3RU2116-0C•• 2.2 - 3.2 3RU2116-1D•• 36 - 45 3RU2136-4G†† 62 - 73 3RU2136-4K††
0.22 - 0.32 3RU2116-0D•• 2.8 - 4 3RU2116-1E•• 40 - 50 3RU2136-4H†† 70 - 80 3RU2136-4R††
0.28 - 0.4 3RU2116-0E•• 3.5 - 5 3RU2116-1F•• Frame Size S3: For mounting directly to 3RT104 contactors 4)
0.35 - 0.5 3RU2116-0F•• 4.5 - 6.3 3RU2116-1G••
0.13/0.15 18 - 25 3RU1146-4D†† 45 - 63 3RU1146-4J††
0.45 - 0.63 3RU2116-0G•• 5.5 - 8 3RU2116-1H••
0.55 - 0.8 3RU2116-0H•• 7 - 10 3RU2116-1J•• 22 - 32 3RU1146-4E†† 57 - 75 3RU1146-4K††
0.55
0.7 - 1 3RU2116-0J•• 9 - 12.5 3RU2116-1K•• 28 - 40 3RU1146-4F†† 70 - 90 3RU1146-4L††
0.9 - 1.25 3RU2116-0K•• 11 - 16 3RU2116-4A•• 0.13/0.15 36 - 50 3RU1146-4H†† 80 - 100 3RU1146-4M††
1.1 - 1.6 3RU2116-1A••
Frame Size S0: For mounting directly to 3RT202 contactors 1) Not available for size S0 3RU212 with current setting range below 14 A.
or for stand-alone installation 2) Size S00 and S0: main and auxiliary conductor terminals are spring-type.
1.8 - 2.5 3RU2126-1C•• 11 - 16 3RU2126-4A•• 3) Size S2 and S3 auxiliary terminals are spring-type only. Main conductor
2.2 - 3.2 3RU2126-1D•• 14 - 20 3RU2126-4B•• terminals are screw.
0.16/0.22
2.8 - 4 3RU2126-1E•• 17 - 22 3RU2126-4C•• 4) 3RU Overloads in S2 and S3 frame are available preassembled with a
3.5 - 5 3RU2126-1F•• 20 - 25 3RU2126-4D•• terminal bracket for standalone mounting. S2 and S3 overloads can also
4.5 - 6.3 3RU2126-1G•• 23 - 28 3RU2126-4N•• be customer assembled to the terminal bracket (see Accessories).
5.5 - 8 3RU2126-1H•• 27 - 32 3RU2126-4E••
0.16/0.22
7 - 10 3RU2126-1J•• 30 - 36 3RU2126-4P••
9 - 12.5 3RU2126-1K•• 34 - 40 3RU2126-4F••

Overload Relays
SIRIUS • Revised • Accessories
3RU and 3RB
04/20/15 up to 100 A
Accessories
Design for type Order No. Weight

approx
Size kg
Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation 1)
For separate mounti ng of the overload relay; Screw S00 3RU29 16-3AA01 0.04
panel mount or snapped onto terminals S0 3RU29 26-3AA01 0.05
35 mm standard mounting rail, S2 3RU29 36-3AA01 0.18
size S3 also for 75 mm standard mounting rail S3 3RU19 46-3AA01 0.28
Spring S00 3RU29 16-3AC01 0.04
Loaded S0 3RU29 26-3AC01 0.06
terminals
3RU29 36-3AA01
Mechanical RESET
Resetting plunger, holder, and former overload reset adapter S00 to S2 3RU29 00-1A 0.038
S3 3RU19 00-1A 0.038
Pushbuttons with extended stroke S00 to S3 3SB3000-0EA11 0.020
IP 65 ∅ 22 mm, 12 mm hub
Extension plungers S00 to S3 3SX1 335 0.004
For compensation of the distance bewteen the pushbutton and
with the unlatching button of the relay
pushbutton,
and reset Complete mechanical reset assembly S00 to S3 3SBES-RESET
3RU19 00-1A extension
Cable release with holder for RESET
For drilled hole ∅ 6.5 mm Length 400 mm S00 to S2 3RU29 00-1B 0.063
in the control panel Length 600 mm S00 to S2 3RU29 00-1C 0.073
max. control panel thickness 8 mm Length 400 mm S3 3RU1900-1B 0.063
Length 600 mm S3 3RU1900-1C 0.073
3RU19 00-1
Module for remote RESET, electrical

Operating range 0.85 to 1.1 × Us S00 to S3
Power consumption AC 80 VA, DC 70 W
ON period 0.2 s to 4 s
AC/DC 24 V to 30 V 3RU19 00-2AB71 0.066
AC/DC 110 V to 127 V 3RU19 00-2AF71 0.066
AC/DC 220 V to 250 V 3RU19 00-2AM71 0.066
3RU19 00-2A.71
Terminal cover
Cover for cable lug S3 3RT19 46-4EA1 0.040
and bar connection
Cover for box terminals S2 3RT29 36-4EA2 0.020

S3 3RT19 46-4EA2 0.025
3RT1946-4EA1
Sealable covers
For covering the rotary setting dials. S00 to S2 3RV29 08-0P 0.100
Order in multiples of 10.
3RV29 08-0P
Tool for opening Spring Loaded terminal connections
Suitable up to a
For all SIRIUS devices with spring-type terminals
• Length: approx. 200 mm; 3RA2908-1A 0.045
3.0 × 0.5 mm (green)
3RA2908-1A
1)
The accessories are identical to those of the 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays.

Overload Relays
3RU21 up to 100 A,
CLASS 10 10/18/15
Technical data
Type 3RU21 16 3RU21 26 3RU21 36 3RU11 46

Size S00 S0 S2 S3
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm
General data
Release on overload or phase failure
Trip class acc. to IEC 60 947-4-1 CLASS 10 10, 10A 10
Phase failure sensitivity Yes
Overload warning No
Resetting and recovery
Reset possibilities after tripping Manual, remote and automatic RESET 1)
Recovery time on automatic RESET min depending on the level of tripping current and the tripping characteristic
on manual RESET min depending on the level of tripping current and the tripping characteristic
on remote RESET min depending on the level of tripping current and the tripping characteristic
Features
Indication of status on the device Yes, using the slide "TEST function/ON-OFF indicator"
TEST function Yes
RESET button Yes
STOP button Yes
Safe operation of motors with “increased safety” type of protection
EC type test certificate number according to directive 94/9/EC (ATEX) DMT 98 ATEX G 001 II (2) GD On request
Ambient temperatures
Storage/transport °C –55 to +80 –55 to +80
Operation °C –40 to +70 –40 to +70
Temperature compensation °C up to +60 up to +60
Permissible rated current at Internal cabinet temperature of 60 °C % 100 (over +60°C, 100 (over +60°C,
the current must be reduced) current reduction
is not required)
Internal cabinet temperature of 70 °C % 87 87
Repeat terminals
Repeat coil terminal Yes Not required
Auxiliary switch repeat terminal Yes Not required
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP 20 IP 20 2)
Touch protection acc. to IEC 61140 Finger-safe for vertical contact from the front
Finger-safe only with optional terminal covers
Shock resistance (sine) acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 15/11 (auxiliary contacts 95/96 and 97/98: 8g/11ms) 8/10
EMC
• Interference immunity Not relevant
• Emitted interference Not relevant
Resistance to extreme climates (humidity) % 90 100
Dimensions see dimensional drawings
Site altitude m Up to 2000; above this on request
Installation angle The permissible installation angles for mounting onto contactors and indi-
vidual mounting are shown in the diagrams. For mounting in the shaded
area, adjustment compensation of 10 % is necessary.
Individual mounting
Contactor + overload relay
Type of installation/mounting Mounting onto contactor/stand-alone installation Direct mounting/

with terminal support (For screw and snap-on stand-alone
mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail) installation with
terminal support
(For screw and
snap-on mounting
1) Remote RESET in combination with the appropriate accessories.
onto TH34 standard
2) Terminal compartment: IP 00 degree of protection. mounting rail size;
size S3 also for
TH 75 standard
mounting rail."

Overload Relays
SIRIUS • Revised • Thermal Overload Relays
3RU21 up to 100 A,
10/25/15 CLASS 10
Technical data
Type 3RU21 16 3RU21 26 3RU21 36 3RU11 46

Size S00 S0 S2 S3
Main circuit
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 8
Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 1000
Type of current DC Yes
AC Yes, frequency range up to 400 Hz
Current setting A 0.11– 0.16 1.8 – 2.5 11-16 18 – 25
to 11 – 16 to 34 – 40 up to 70-80 to 80 – 100
Power loss per device (max.) W 4.1...6.3 6.2...7.5 8...14 10 to 16.5
Short-circuit protection With fuse without contactor See selection and ordering data
With fuse and contactor See technical data (short-circuit protection with fuses /
circuit-breaker for motor feeders)
Protective separation between main and auxiliary current paths V
Acc. to IEC 60947-1,
• Screw terminals or ring terminal lug connections 440 690: Setting 690 690
ranges <
_ 25 A
• Spring - type terminals 440 440: Setting 690
ranges > 25 A
Connection of the main circuit

Type of connection Screw terminals Screw connec-
tion with box ter-
minal 2)/ bar
connection
Screw terminals
• Terminal screw M3, Pozidriv M4, Pozidriv M6, Pozidriv Hexagon socket
size 2 size 2 size 2 screw 4 mm
• Operating devices mm Ø5 ... 6 Ø5 ... 6 Ø5 ... 6 Ø5 ... 6
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 2 to 2.5 3 to 4.5 4 to 6
• Conductor cross-section Solid or stranded mm2 2 × (0.5 to 1.5), 2 × (1 to 2.5), 2x(2.5 to 35) 2 × (2.5 to 16)
(min./max.), 1 or 2 wires 2 × (0.75 to 2.5), 2 × (2.5 to 6), 1x(2.5 to 50)
max. 2 x 4 max. 2 ×
(2.5 to 10)
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.5 to 1.5), 2 × (1 to 2.5), 2 x (1 to 25) 2 × (2.5 to 35),
2 × (0.75 to 2.5) 2 × (2.5 to 6) 1 x (1 to 35) 1 × (2.5 to 50)
max. 1 x 10
AWG conductor con., solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (16 ... 12) 2 x (18 to 2) 2 × (10 to 1/0),
2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 8) 1 × (18 to 1) 1 × (10 to 2/0)
2 x 12
Ribbon cable (No. × width × thickness) mm – – – 2 × (6 × 9 × 0.8)
Bar connection
• Terminal screw – M 6 × 20
• Tightening torque Nm – 4 to 6
• Conductor cross-section Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 – 2 × 70
(min./max.) Stranded with cable lug mm2 – 2 × 70
AWG conductor connections, solid or AWG – 2/0
stranded with cable lug
With connecting bars (max. width) mm – 12
Auxiliary circuit
Main contacts: Number of NO contacts 1
Number of NC contacts 1
Assignment of auxiliary contacts 1 NO for the signal "tripped";
1 NC for disconnecting the contactor
Switching capacity of auxiliary contacts
NC for AC Rated operational current Ie at Ue:
AC-14/AC-15 • 24 V A 4
• 120 V A 4
• 125 V A 4
• 230 V A 3
• 400 V A 2
• 600 V A 0.75
• 690 V A 0.75
1) For conductor cross-sections for Cage Clamp 2) The box terminal can be removed. After the
terminals, see "Connection of the auxiliary box terminal has been removed, bar connec-
circuit.” tion and lug connection is possible.

Overload Relays
3RU21 up to 100 A,
CLASS 10 10/18/15
Technical data
Type 3RU21 16 3RU21 26 3RU21 36 3RU11 46

Size S00 S0 S2 S3
NO for AC Rated operational current Ie at Ue:
AC-14/AC-15 • 24 V A 3 3
• 120 V A 3 3
• 125 V A 3 3
• 230 V A 2 2
• 400 V A 1 1
• 600 V A 0.75 0.6
• 690 V A 0.75 0.5
NC, NO for DC Rated operational current Ie at Ue:
DC-13 • 24 V A 1 1
• 60 V A On request On request
• 110 V A 0.22 0.22
• 125 V A 0.22 0.22
• 220 V A 0.11 0.11
Conventional thermal current Ith A 6 6
Contact reliability (suitable for PLC; 17 V, 5 mA) Yes Yes
With fuse Utilization cat. gL/gG A 6
fast A 10
With miniature circuit-breaker (C characteristic) A 61)
Reliable operational voltage for protective separation V 440
between auxiliary current paths acc. to IEC 60947-1
Connection of the auxiliary circuit
Type of connection Screw terminal or Cage Clamp terminal
Connection characteristics Screw terminals Cage Clamp
terminals
• Terminal screw Pozidrive Size 2 –
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 – × (0.25 to 2.5)
2
• Conductor cross-sections Solid or stranded mm2 2 × (0.5 to 1.5),
(min./max.), 1 or 2 wires 2 × (0.75 to 2.5)
Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 – 2 × (0.25 to 2.5)
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.5 to 1.5), 2 × (0.25 to 1.5)
2 × (0.75 to 2.5)
AWG conductor connections, AWG 2 x (20 to 16) 2 × (20 to 14)
solid or stranded 2 x (18 to 14)
1) Up to Ik ≤ 0.5 kA; ≤ 260 V.

Overload Relays
3RU21 up to 100 A,
10/18/15 CLASS 10
Circuit diagrams
Protection of DC motors
1-pole 2-pole
3RU21 16 overload relay
3RU21 26 to 3RU11 46 overload relays

RESET
STOP
TEST
-F 95 97
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 96 98

Overload Relays
3RU21 up to 100 A,
CLASS 10 10/18/15
Dimension drawings
Screw connection
Lateral clearance to grounded components: at least 6 mm.
3RU21 16-..B0 3RU21 16-..B1
Size S00 Size S00
75.3 with adapter for installation as a single unit with accessories
73
68 45 79.5
34.9
4.5
30
37.8
45
89.15
87.9
77
76
61.7
60.4
70 5
5
4.5
3RU21 26-..B. 3RU21 26-..B1
Size S0 Size S0
3RT2...-.B.. (DC-Spule) 107 with adapter for installation as a single unit
3RT2...-.N.. (UC-Spule) 102
3RT2...-.A.. 97 45 94.7
(AC-Spule) 92
35.2
4.5
44.9
43
DCAC
97.1
45
85
108.8
66.7
66.8
84.8
4.5
3RT2...-.A.. 84.4
3RT2...-.B.. (DC-Spule) (AC-Spule) 84.6
3RT2...-.N.. (UC-Spule) 94.6
3RU21 36-..B. 3RU11 46-..B.

Size S2 Size S3
with adapter for installation as a single unit with adapter for installation as a single unit
130
125.1
55.2
55
130.5
91.2
76.5
75.6
95 NC 96 97 NO 98
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
104.2
114.5
1) For mounting on 35 mm standard mounting rail

(15 mm deep) acc. to EN 50 022 Dimension drawings “Contactor with built-on overload relay” see
or 75 mm standard mounting rail acc. to EN 50023
contactors and contactor combinations.

Overload Relays
3RU21 up to 100 A,
10/18/15 CLASS 10
Dimension drawings
Spring Loaded terminals
Lateral clearance to grounded components: at least 6 mm.
3RU21 16 -..C0 89.4 3RU21 16 -..C1
Size S00 84.4 Size S00 with with adapter for installation as a single unit
36
45 79.2 35
45
4.5
51.45
101.9
70.5
80
86.5
104
70 5 5
4.5
3RU21 26-..C0 3RU21 26-..C1
Size S0 Size S0 with adapter for installation as a single unit
3RT2...-.B.. (DC-Spule)
3RT2...-.N.. (UC-Spule) 107
102 45 94.7
3RT2...-.A.. 97
(AC-Spule)
92
55.8
132.9
114
DCAC
45 79.5
5
101.6
130
82.6
132.9
125.1
55.2
3RT2...-.A.. 84.4
3RT2...-.B.. (DC-Spule) (AC-Spule) 98.2
3RT2...-.N.. (UC-Spule) 108.2
3RU11 46-..D. 3RU2136-..D.

Size S3 Size S2
55
130.5
91.2
76.5
75.6
95 NC 96 97 NO 98
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
104.2
114.5
1) For mounting on 35 mm standard mounting rail

(15 mm deep) acc. to EN 50 022
or 75 mm standard mounting rail acc. to EN 50 023
Dimension drawings “Contactor with built-on overload relay” see contactors

and contactor combinations.

Overload Relays
3RB2 / 3RB3 Solid-State Overload Relays • Revised • SIRIUS
3RB20, 3RB21, 3RB30, 3RB31 up to 630A
for standard applications 04/20/15
Overview
The devices are manufactured in accordance with environmen-

tal guidelines and contain environmentally friendly and reusable
materials. They comply with important worldwide standards and
approvals.
Application
Industries
The 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state over load relays are suitable for
customers from all industries who want to provide optimum
inverse-time delayed protection of their electrical loads
(e.g. motors) under normal and heavy starting conditions
(CLASS 5 to CLASS 30), minimize project completion times,
inventories and power consumption, and optimize plant
availability and maintenance management.
Application
Connection for mounting onto contactors: The 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays have been
Optimally adapted in electrical, mechanical and design terms to the designed for the protection of three-phase motors in sinusoidal
contactors. The overload relay can be connected directly to these 50/60 Hz voltage networks. The relays are not suitable for the
contactor using these pins. Stand-alone installation is possible as
an alternative (in conjunction with a terminal bracket for stand-alone protection of single-phase AC or DC loads.
installation).
The 3RU thermal overload relay or the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-
Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET and RESET button: state overload relay can be used for single-phase AC loads.
With this switch you can choose between manual and automatic
RESET. A device set to manual RESET can be reset locally by For DC loads the 3RU thermal overload relays are available.
pressing the RESET button. On the 3RB21 a solid-state remote
is integrated into the unit. Ambient conditions
Switch position indicator and TEST function of the wiring: The devices are insensitive to external influences such as
Indicates a trip and enables the wiring test. shocks, corrosive environments, ageing and temperature
Solid state test: changes.
Enables a test of all important device components and functions.
Motor current setting: For the temperature range from –25 C to +60 °C, the
Setting the device to the rated motor current is easy with the large 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays compensate the
rotary knob. temperature according to IEC 60947-4-1.
Trip class setting/internal ground-fault detection (3RB21 only):
Using the rotary switch you can set the required trip class and activate The 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays are suitable for the
the internal ground-fault detection dependent on the starting conditions. overload protection of explosion-proof motors with "increased
safety" type of protection EEx e according to ATEX guideline
Connecting terminals (removable terminal block for auxiliary circuits): 94/9/EC. The relays meet the requirements of EN 60079-7 (Elec-
The generously sized terminals permit connection of two conductors trical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres –
auxiliary circuit can be connected with screw-type terminals or with Increased safety "e").
spring-loaded terminals.
The basic safety and health requirements of ATEX guideline
94/9/EG are fulfilled by compliance with
The 3RB and 3RB solid-state overload relays up to 630 A • EN 60947-1
with internal power supply have been designed for inverse-time
delayed protection of loads with normal and heavy starting • EN 60947-4-1
(see Function) against excessive temperature rise due to over- • EN 60947-5-1
load, phase unbalance or phase failure. An overload, phase un- • EN 60079-14
balance or phase failure result in an increase of the motor current
beyond the set motor rated current. This current rise is detected EU type test certificate for Group II, Category (2) G/D under
by the current transformers integrated into the devices and eval- application. It has the number PTB 09 ATEX 3001.
uated by corresponding solid-state circuits which then output a
pulse to the auxiliary contacts. The auxiliary contacts then switch Accessories
off the load by means of the contactors control circuit. The break
time depends on the ratio between the tripping current and set The following accessories are available for the 3RB2/3RB3
current Ie and is stored in the form of a long-term stable tripping solid-state overload relays:
characteristic (see Characteristic Curves). • One terminal bracket each for the overload relays size S00
In addition to inverse-time delayed protection of loads against and S0 (sizes S2 to S12 can be installed as single units without
excessive temperature rise due to overload, phase unbalance a terminal bracket)
and phase failure, the 3RB21/31 solid-state overload relays also • One mechanical remote RESET module for all sizes
allow internal ground-fault detection (not possible in conjunction
• One cable release for resetting devices which are difficult to
with wye-delta assemblies). This provides protection of loads
access (for all sizes)
against high-resistance short-circuits due to damage to the
insulation material, moisture, condensed water etc. • One sealable cover for all sizes
The "tripped" status is signaled by means of a switch position • Box terminals for sizes S6 and S10/S12
indicator (see Function). Resetting takes place either manually • Terminal covers for sizes S2 to S10/S12
or automatically after the recovery time has elapsed
(see Function).

Overload Relays
SIRIUS • Revised • 3RB2 / 3RB3 Solid-State Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21, 3RB30, 3RB31 up to 630A
04/20/15 for standard applications
Design
Device concept Overload relays in contactor assemblies for
Wye-Delta starting
The 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays are compact
devices, i.e. current measurement (transformer) and the evalua- When overload relays are used in combination with contactor
tion unit are integrated in a single enclosure. assemblies for Wye-Delta starting it must be noted that only
0.58 times the motor current flows through the line contactor.
Mounting options An overload relay mounted onto the line contactor must be set
The 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays are suitable for to 0.58 times the motor current.
direct and space-saving mounting onto 3RT1 / 3RT2 contactors When 3RB21 / 31 solid-state overload relays are used in combi-
and 3RW30/3RW31 soft starters as well as for stand-alone nation with contactor assemblies for Wye-Delta starting, the
installation. For more information on the mounting options, internal ground-fault detection must not be activated.
please see Technical Specifications and Selection and .
Ordering Data Operation with frequency converter
Connection technique The 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays are suitable for
frequencies of 50/60 Hz and the associated harmonics. This
Main circuit permits the 3RB2 / 3RB3 overload relays to be used on the
All sizes of the 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays can be incoming side of the frequency converter.
connected with screw-type terminals. As an alternative for sizes If motor protection is required on the outgoing side of the
S3 to S10/S12, the main circuits can be connected via the Bus- frequency converter, the 3RN thermistor motor protection
bar. Sizes S2 to S6 of the 3RB20/3RB21 relays are also available devices or the 3RU thermal overload relays are available for
with a straight-through transformer. In this case, the cables of the this purpose.
main circuit are routed directly through the feed-through open-
ings of the relay to the contactor terminals.
Auxiliary circuit
Connection of the auxiliary circuit (removable terminal block) is
possible with either screw terminals or spring-loaded terminals.
For more information on the connection options,
see Technical Specifications and Selection and Ordering Data.

Overload Relays
3RB2 / 3RB3 Solid-State Overload Relays SIRIUS
3RB20, 3RB21, 3RB30, 3RB31 up to 630A
for standard applications
Function
Basic functions Recovery time
The 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays are designed for: With the 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays the recovery
• Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from overloading time after inverse-time delayed tripping is between 0.5 and 3
minutes depending on the preloading when automatic RESET
• Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from phase is set. These recovery times allow the load (e.g. motor) to
unbalance cool down.
• Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from phase failure
If the button is set to manual RESET, the 3RB2 / 3RB3 devices
• Protection of loads from high-resistance short-circuits can be reset immediately after inverse-time delayed tripping.
(internal ground-fault detection only with 3RB21 / 31).
After a ground fault trip the 3RB21 / 31 solid-state overload relays
Control circuit (with ground-fault detection activated) can be reset immediately
without a recovery time regardless of the reset mode set.
The 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays have an internal
power supply, i.e. no additional supply voltage is required. TEST function
Short-circuit protection With motor current flowing, the TEST button can be used to
check whether the relay is working correctly (device/solid-state
Fuses or motor starter protectors must be used for short-circuit
TEST). Current measurement, motor model and trip unit are
protection. For assignments of the corresponding short-circuit
tested. If these components are OK, the device is tripped in
protection devices to the 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload re-
accordance with the table below. If there is an error, no tripping
lays with/without contactor see Technical Specifications and
takes place.
Selection and Ordering Data.
Trip class Required loading with the Tripping within
Trip classes rated current prior to press-
The 3RB20 / 30 solid-state overload relays are available for ing the test button
normal starting conditions with trip CLASS 10 or for heavy start- CLASS 5 2 min 8s
ing conditions with trip CLASS 20 (fixed setting in each case). CLASS 10 4 min 15 s
The 3RB21 / 31 solid-state overload relays are suitable for normal CLASS 20 8 min 30 s
and heavy starting. The required trip class (CLASS 5, 10, 20 or CLASS 30 12 min 45 s
30) can be adjusted by means of a rotary knob depending on the
current starting condition. Note: The test button must be kept pressed throughout the test.
For details of the trip classes see Characteristic Curves. Testing of the auxiliary contacts and the control current wiring is
possible with the switch position indicator slide. Actuating the
Phase failure protection slide simulates tripping of the relay. During this simulation the NC
The 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays are fitted with contact (95-96) is opened and the NO contact (97-98) is closed.
phase failure protection (see Characteristic Curves) in order to This tests whether the auxiliary circuit has been correctly wired.
minimize temperature rise of the load during single-phase After a test trip the relay is reset by pressing the RESET button.
operation.
Self-monitoring
Phase failure protection is not effective for loads with star-
connection and a grounded neutral point or a neutral point which The 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays have a self-moni-
is connected to a neutral conductor. toring feature, i.e. the devices constantly monitor their own basic
functions and trip if an internal fault is detected.
Setting
Display of operating status
The 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays are set to the
motor rated current by means of a rotary knob. The scale of the The respective operating status of the 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state
rotary knob is shown in amps. overload relays is displayed by means of the position of the
marking on the switch position indicator slide. After tripping due
With the 3RB21 / 31 solid-state overload relay it is also possible to overload, phase failure, phase unbalance or ground fault
to select the trip class (CLASS 5, 10, 20 or 30) using a second (ground fault detection possible only with 3RB21 / 31) the marking
rotary knob and to switch the internal ground-fault detection on on the slide is to the left on the "O" mark, otherwise it is on the "I"
and off. mark.
Manual and automatic reset Auxiliary contacts
In the case of the 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays, a The 3RB2 / 3RB3 solid-state overload relays are fitted with an
slide switch can be used to choose between automatic and NO contact for the "tripped" signal, and an NC contact for
manual resetting. switching off the contactor.
If manual reset is set, a reset can be carried out directly on the
device after a trip by pressing the blue RESET button. Resetting
is possible in combination with the mechanical reset options
from the accessories range (see Accessories). As an alternative
to the mechanical RESET options, the 3RB21 / 31 solid-state over-
load relays are equipped with an electrical remote RESET which
may be utilized by applying a voltage of 24 V DC to the terminals
A3 and A4.
If the slide switch is set to automatic RESET, the relay is reset
automatically.
The time between tripping and resetting is determined by the
recovery time.

Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21, 3RB30, 3RB31 up to 630A

Conversion aid 3RB10 or 3RB20 ––> 3RB20 or 30
Size Old Order No. Setting range New Order No. Setting range
A A
3RB20 16-@RB0 0.1 ... 0.4 3RB30 16-@RB0 0.1 ... 0.4
3RB30 16-@NB0 0.32 ... 1.25
3RB20 16-@NB0 0.32 ... 1.25
S00 3RB30 16-@PB0 1 ... 4
3RB20 16-@PB0 1 ... 4
3RB30 16-@SB0 3 ... 12
3RB20 16-@SB0 3 ... 12
3RB20 26-@RB0 0.1 ... 0.4 3RB30 26-@RB0 0.1 ... 0.4
3RB20 26-@NB0 0.32 ... 1.25 3RB30 26-@NB0 0.32 ... 1.25
S0 3RB20 26-@PB0 1 ... 4 3RB30 36-@PB0 1 ... 4
3RB20 26-@SB0 3 ... 12 3RB30 26-@SB0 3 ... 12
3RB20 26-@QB0 6 ... 25 3RB30 26-@QB0 6 ... 25
3RB20 36-@QB0 6 ... 25 3RB30 36-@UB0 12 ... 80
S2
3RB20 36-@UB0 13 ... 50 3RB30 36-@UB0 12 ... 80
3RB10 46-@UB0 13 ... 50 3RB20 46-@UB0 12.5 ... 50
S3
3RB10 46-@EB0 25 ... 100 3RB20 46-@EB0 25 ... 100
3RB10 56-@FW0 3RB20 56-@FW2
S6 50 ... 200 50 ... 200
3RB10 56-@FG0 3RB20 56-@FC2
3RB10 66-@GG0 55 ... 250 3RB20 66-@GC2 55 ... 250
S10/S12 3RB10 66-@KG0 200 ... 540
3RB20 66-@MC2 160 ... 630
3RB10 66-@LG0 300 ... 630
CLASS 10 1 1
CLASS 20 2 2
Conversion aid 3RB10 / 21 ––> 3RB21 / 31
Size Old Order No. Setting range New Order No. Setting range
A A
3RB21 13-@RB0 0.1 ... 0.4 3RB31 13-4RB0 0.1 ... 0.4
3RB31 13-4NB0 0.32 ... 1.25
3RB21 13-@NB0 0.4 ... 1.6
S00 3RB31 13-4PB0 1 ... 4
3RB21 13-@PB0 1.5 ... 6
3RB31 13-4SB0 3 ... 12
3RB21 13-@SB0 3 ... 12
3RB21 23-@RB0 0.1 ... 0.4 3RB31 23-RB0 0.1 ... 0.4
3RB21 23-@NB0 0.32 ... 1.25 3RB31 23-NB0 0.32 ... 1.25
S0 3RB21 23-@PB0 1 ... 4 3RB31 23-PB0 1 ... 4
3RB21 23-@SB0 3 ... 12 3RB31 23-4SB0 3 ... 12
3RB21 23-@QB0 6 ... 25 3RB31 23-4QB0 6 ... 25
3RB21 33-@QB0 6 ... 25 3RB31 33-4UB0 12 ... 80
S2
3RB21 33-@UB0 13 ... 50 3RB31 33-4UB0 12 ... 80
3RB10 46-@UB0 12.5 ... 50 3RB21 43-4UB0 12.5 ... 50
S3
3RB10 46-@EB0 25 ... 100 3RB21 43-4EB0 25 ... 100
3RB10 56-@FW0 3RB21 53-4FW2
S6 50 ... 200 50 ... 200
3RB10 56-@FG0 3RB21 53-4FC2
3RB10 66-@GG0 55 ... 250 3RB21 63-4GC2 55 ... 250
S10/S12 3RB10 66-@KG0 200 ... 540
3RB21 63-4MC2 160 ... 630
3RB10 66-@LG0 300 ... 630
Note:
CLASS 10 1 CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30

CLASS 20 2 can be set on the unit

Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21, 3RB30, 3RB31 up to 630A
3RB20 solid-state overload relays

and stand-alone installation2)3), CLASS 10 or CLASS 20 for direct mounting1)2)
Features and technical specifications:
• Overload protection, phase failure protection and unbalance • Manual and automatic RESET
protection • Switch position indicator
• Internal power supply • TEST function and self-monitoring
• Auxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC
Size Set current value Screw Terminal Spring Loaded Terminal Weight per
Contactor4) of the inverse-time delayed Order Number Order Number PU approx.
overload trip
A kg
Size S001)
S00 0.1 … 0.4 3RB30 16- @ RB0 3RB30 16-@RE0 0.172
0.32 … 1.25 3RB30 16- @ NB0 3RB30 16-@NE0 0.172
1…4 3RB30 16- @ PB0 3RB30 16-@PE0 0.172
3 … 12 3RB30 16- @ SB0 3RB30 16-@SE0 0.172
4 … 16 3RB30 16- @ TB0 3RB30 16-@TE0 0.172
3RB30 16-1RB0
Size S01)
S0 0.1 … 0.4 3RB30 26- @ RB0 3RB30 26-@RE0 0.250
0.32 … 1.25 3RB30 26- @ NB0 3RB30 26-@NE0 0.250
1…4 3RB30 26- @ PB0 3RB30 26-@PE0 0.250
3 … 12 3RB30 26- @ SB0 3RB30 26-@SE0 0.250
6 … 25 3RB30 26- @ QB0 3RB30 26-@QE0 0.250
10 … 40 3RB30 26- @ VB0 3RB30 26-@VE0 0.250
3RB30 26-1QB0
Size S2 1)3)5)
S2 12 … 50 with busbar 3RB30 36- @ UB0 3RB30 36-@UD0 0.360
with pass 3RB30 36- @ UW1 3RB30 36-@UX1 0.230
through CT’s
20 … 80 with busbar 3RB30 36- @ WB0 3RB30 36-@WD0 0.360
with pass 3RB30 36- @ WW1 3RB30 36-@WX1 0.230
through CT’s
3RB30 36-1UB0
Size S3 1)3)5)
S3 12.5 … 50 with busbar 3RB20 46- @ UB0 3RB20 46-@UD0 0.560
25 … 100 with busbar 3RB20 46- @ EB0 3RB20 46-@ED0 0.560
with pass 3RB20 46- @ EW1 3RB20 46-@EX1 0.450
through CT’s
3RB20 46-1EB0
Size S6 2)5)
S6 50 … 200 with busbar 3RB20 56- @FC2 3RB20 56-@FF2 1.030
with pass 3RB20 56- @ FW2 3RB20 56-@FX2 0.690
through CT’s
3RB20 56-1FW2
Size S10/S122)
S10/S12 55 … 250 with busbar 3RB20 66- @ GC2 3RB20 66-@GF2 1.820
and size 14 160 … 630 3RB20 66- @ MC2 3RB20 66-@MF2 1.820
with busbar
(3TF68/
3TF69)
2 Class 20 2 Class 20
3RB20 66-1MC2
1 Class 10 1 Class 10
1) The relays with an Order No. ending with "0" are designed for direct mounting For accessories, see pages 3/49-3/50.
to the contactor. With the matching terminal brackets (see Accessories) the For description, see pages 3/18-3/20.
sizes S00 to S3 can also be installed as stand-alone units.
For technical data, see pages 3/24-3/29.
2) The relays with an Order No. ending with "2" are designed for direct
mounting and stand-alone installation. For 3TF68/3TF69 contactors, direct
mounting is not possible. For schematic diagrams, see page 3/31.
3) The relays with an Order No. ending with "1" are designed for stand-alone
installation.
4) Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices.
5) The relays with an Order No. with "X" in 10th position are equipped with a
straight-through transformer.

Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21, 3RB30, 3RB31 up to 630A
3RB21 / 3RB31 solid-state overload relays for direct mounting1)2)

and stand-alone installation2)3), CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30 adjustable
• Overload protection, phase failure protection and unbalance • Manual and automatic RESET
protection • Electrical remote RESET integrated
• Internal ground fault detection (activatable) • Switch position indicator
• Internal power supply • TEST function and self-monitoring
• Auxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC
Size Set current value Screw Terminal Spring Loaded Terminal Weight per PU
Contactor4) of the inverse-time delayed Order Number Order Number approx.
overload trip
A kg
Size S001)
S00 0.1 … 0.4 3RB31 13-4RB0 3RB31 13-4RE0 0.175
0.32 … 1.25 3RB31 13-4NB0 3RB31 13-4NE0 0.175
1…4 3RB31 13-4PB0 3RB31 13-4PE0 0.175
3 … 12 3RB31 13-4SB0 3RB31 13-4SE0 0.175
4 … 16 3RB31 13-4TB0 3RB31 13-4TE0 0.175
3RB31 13-4RB0
Size S01)
S0 0.1 … 0.4 3RB31 23-4RB0 3RB31 23-4RE0 0.215
0.32 … 1.25 3RB31 23-4NB0 3RB31 23-4NE0 0.215
1…4 3RB31 23-4PB0 3RB31 23-4PE0 0.215
3 … 12 3RB31 23-4SB0 3RB31 23-4SE0 0.215
6 … 25 3RB31 23-4QB0 3RB31 23-4QE0 0.215
3RB31 23-4QB0 10 … 40 3RB31 23-4VB0 3RB31 23-4VE0 0.215
Size S21)3)5)
S2 12 … 50 with busbar 3RB31 33-4UB0 3RB31 33-4UD0 0.360
with pass 3RB31 33-4WB0 3RB31 33-4WD0 0.230
through CT’s
20 … 80 with busbar 3RB31 33-4UW1 3RB31 33-4UX1 0.360
with pass 3RB31 33-4WW1 3RB31 33-4WX1 0.230
3RB31 33-4WB0 through CT’s
Size S31)3)5)
S3 12.5 … 50 with busbar 3RB21 43-4UB0 3RB21 43-4QD0 0.560
25 … 100 with busbar 3RB21 43-4EB0 3RB21 43-4ED0 0.560
with pass 3RB21 43-4EW1 3RB21 43-4EX1 0.450
through CT’s
3RB21 43-4EB0
Size S62)5)
S6 50 … 200 with busbar 3RB21 53-4FC2 3RB21 53-4FF2 1.030
with pass 3RB21 53-4FW2 3RB21 53-4FX2 0.690
through CT’s
3RB21 53-4FC2
Size S10/S122)
S10/S12 55 … 250 3RB21 63-4GC2 3RB21 63-4GF2 1.820
and size 14 160 … 630 3RB21 63-4MC2 3RB21 63-4MF2 1.820
(3TF68/
3TF69)
3RB21 63-4MC2
1) The relays with an Order No. ending with "0" are designed for direct mounting For accessories, see pages 3/49-3/50.
to the contactor. With the matching terminal brackets (see Accessories) the For description, see pages 3/18-3/21.
sizes S00 to S3 can also be installed as stand-alone units.
2) The relays with an Order No. ending with "2" are designed for direct
mounting and stand-alone installation. For 3TF68/3TF69 contactors, direct For dimension drawings, see page 3/30.
mounting is not possible. For schematic diagrams, see page 3/31.
3) The relays with an Order No. ending with "1" are designed for stand-alone
installation.
4) Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices.
5) The relays with an Order No. with "X" in 10th position are equipped with a
straight-through transformer.

Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21, 3RB30, 3RB31 up to 630A
Type 3RB30 16, 3RB30 26, 3RB30 36 3RB20 46, 3RB20 56, 3RB20 66,
3RB31 13 3RB31 23 3RB31 33 3RB21 43 3RB21 53 3RB21 63
Size S00 S0 S2 S3 S6 S10/S12
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm 120 mm 145 mm
General data
Trips in the event of Overload, phase failure, and phase unbalance
+ ground fault (for 3RB31 only)
Trip class according to IEC 60947-4-1 CLASS 3RB30: 10E, 20E;
3RB31: 5E, 10E, 20E or 30E adjustable
Overload warning No
Reset and recovery
Manual and automatic RESET, 3RB31 has 3RB20: Manual and automatic RESET;
• Reset options after tripping an integrated connection for electrical 3RB21: Manual, automatic and remote RESET
• Recovery time remote RESET (24 V DC)
- For automatic RESET min. Appox. 3 min Appox. 3 min
- For manual RESET min. Immediately Immediately
- For remote RESET min. Immediately Immediately
Features
• Display of operating status on device Yes, by means of switch position indicator slide
• TEST function Yes, test of electronics by pressing the button Test
Test of auxiliary contacts and wiring of control current circuit by actuating
the switch position indicator slide/self-monitoring
• RESET button Yes
• STOP button No
PTB 09 ATEX 3001 On PTB 09 ATEX 3001
Explosion protection – Safe operation of motors
II (2) G [Ex e] [Ex d] [Ex px] request II (2) G [Ex e] [Ex d] [Ex px]
with"Increased safety" type of protection
II (2) G [Ex t] [Ex p] II (2) G [Ex t] [Ex p]
EC type test certificate number according to directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
• Storage/transport °C -40 ... +80
• Operation °C -25 ... +60
• Temperature compensation °C +60
• Permissible rated current at
- Temperature inside control cabinet 60 °C, stand-alone installation % — 100 100 100 or 902)
- Temperature inside control cabinet 60 °C, mounted on contactor % 100 100 70 70
- Temperature inside control cabinet 70 °C % On request On request
Repeat terminals
• Coil repeat terminal Yes Not required
• Auxiliary contact repeat terminal Yes Not required
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529 IP20 IP203)
Touch protection according to IEC 61140 Finger-safe for vertical contact from the front Finger-safe, Finger-safe
for busbar with cover
connection
with cover
Shock resistance with sine according to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 15/11 (signaling contact 15/11 (signaling 15/11 (signaling contact
97/98 in position contact 97/98 in 97/98 in position
"tripped": 9g/ms) "Tripped" position: "tripped": 4 g/11ms)
8 g/11ms)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Interference immunity
• Conductor-related interference
- Burst according to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2 (power ports), 1 (signal ports)
(corresponds to degree of severity 3)
- Surge according to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 2 (line to earth), 1 (line to line)
• Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2 kV 8 (air discharge), 6 (contact discharge)
• Field-related interference according to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Degree of severity B according to EN 55011 (CISPR 11) and EN 55022 (CISPR 22)
Emitted interference
Resistance to extreme climates – air humidity % 95 100
Dimensions See dimensional drawings
Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 2000
Mounting position Any
Type of mounting Direct mounting/stand-alone installation Direct mounting /
with terminal support Stand-alone installation
1) Permissible rated current in case of heavy starting 2) 90 % for relay with current setting range 160A to 630A
Size S0 at 10 A up to 40 A 3) Terminal compartment: degree of protection IP00.
- CLASS 20, Ie max = 32 A
- CLASS 30, Ie max = 25 A

Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21, 3RB30, 3RB31 up to 630A
Type 3RB30 16, 3RB30 26, 3RB30 36, 3RB20 46,

3RB31 13 3RB31 23 3RB31 33 3RB21 43
Size S00 S0 S2 S3
Main circuit
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690 690 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 6 6/8 8
Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 690 690 1000
Type of current
• Direct current No
• Alternating current Yes, 50/60 Hz ± 5%
Set current A 0.1 ... 0.4 to 0.1 ... 0.4 to 12.5 ... 50 12.5 ... 50 to
4 ... 16 10... 40 and 20 to 80 25 ... 100
Power loss per unit (max.) W 0.05 ... 0.2 0.05
- With fuse without contactor See Selection and Ordering Data
- With fuse and contactor See Technical Specifications (short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders)
Protective separation between main and auxiliary V 690 for grounded networks, otherwise 600 V
conducting path according to IEC 60947-1 (pollution degree 2)
Connection for main circuit
Electrical connection version Screw terminal Screw terminal Screw terminal Screw terminal
with box terminal /
Screw terminal
• Terminal screw M3, Pozidriv size 2 M3, Pozidriv size 2 M4, Pozidriv size 2 M8, 4 mm Allen screw
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 2 ... 2.5 4 ... 6
• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.)
- Solid or stranded mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)3) 2 × (1 ... 2.5) 3) 1 × (1 ... 50) 2 × (2.5 ... 16)
2 × (0.75 ... 2.5)3) 2 × (2.5 ... 10) 2 × (1 ... 35)
2 × (0.05 ... 4)3) (Solid or Stranded)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve (DIN 46228 T1) mm 2 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)3) 2 × (1 ... 2.5) 3) 2 × (1 ... 25), 2 × (2.5 ... 35),
2 × (0.75 ... 2.5)3) 2 × (2.5 ... 6)3) 1 × (1 ... 35) 1 × (2.5 ... 50)
max. 1 x 10
- Stranded m m2 -- 2 × (10 ... 50),
1 × (10 ... 70)
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (20 ... 16)3) 2 × (16 ... 12)3) 2 × (18 ... 2) 2 × (10 ... 1/0),
2 × (18 ... 14)3) 2 × (14 ... 8)3) 1 × (18 ... 1) 2 × (10 ... 2/0)
2 × 12
- Ribbon cable conductors mm -- 2 × (6 × 9 × 0.8)

(number x width x circumference)
Busbar connections
• Terminal screw -- M 6 × 20
• Tightening torque Nm -- 4 ... 6
• Conductor cross-section (min./max.)
- Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 2 × 70
- Stranded with cable lug m m2 -- 3 × 70
- AWG connections, solid or stranded, with cable lug AWG -- 2/0
- With connecting bar (max. width) mm -- 12
Straight-through transformers
• Diameter of opening mm – 15 18
1) For version with straight-through transformer up to 1000 VAC. 3) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected
2) For version with straight-through transformer up to 8 kV. to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in
the range specified.

Overload Relays
3RB2 /3RB3 Solid-State Overload Relays SIRIUS
3RB20, 3RB21, 3RB30, 3RB31 up to 630A
Type 3RB20 56, 3RB20 66,

3RB21 53 3RB21 63
Size S6 S10/S12
Width 120 mm 145 mm
Main circuit
Rated operational voltage Ue V 1000
Type of current
• Alternating current Yes, 50/60 Hz ± 5 (other frequencies on request)
Set current A 50 ... 200 55 ... 250 to
160 ... 630
Power loss per unit (max.) W 0.05
- With fuse without contactor See Selection and Ordering Data
- With fuse and contactor See Technical Specifications (short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders)
Safe isolation between main V 6901)
and auxiliary conducting path according to IEC 60947-1
Electrical connection version Screw terminal with box terminal/ Screw terminal
Bus connection / with box terminal/
Straight-through transformer Bus connection
Screw terminal
• Terminal screw 4 mm Allen screw 5 mm Allen screw
• Tightening torque Nm 10 ... 12 20 ... 22
• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors
- Solid mm2 --
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (50 ... 185),
2 × (1 × max. 50, 1 × max. 70), front clamping point only:
1 × (10 ... 70) 1 × (70 ... 240)
With 3RT19 56-4G box terminal: rear clamping point only:
2 × (1 × max. 95, 1 × max. 120), 1 × (120 ... 185)
1 × (10 ... 120)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (50 ... 185),
1 × (10 ... 70) 1 × (70 ... 240)
2 × (1 × max. 95, 1 × max. 120), 1 × (120 ... 185)
1 × (10 ... 120)
2
- Stranded mm With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (70 ... 240),
2 × (max. 70), front clamping point only:
1 × (16 ... 70) 1 × (95 ... 300)
2 × (max. 120), 1 × (120 ... 240)
1 × (16 ... 120)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (2/0 ... 500 kcmil),
2 × (max. 1/0), front clamping point only:
1 × (6 ... 2/0) 1 × (3/0 ... 600 kcmil)
2 × (max. 3/0), 1 × (250 kcmil ... 500 kcmil)
1 × (6 ... 250 kcmil)
- Ribbon cable conductors mm With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (20 × 24 × 0.5),
(number x width x circumference) 2 × (6 × 15.5 × 0.8), 1 × (6 × 9 × 0.8 ... 20 × 24 × 0.5)
1 × (3 × 9 × 0.8 ... 6 × 15.5 × 0.8)
With 3RT19 56-4G box terminal:
2 × (10 × 15.5 × 0.8),
1 × (3 × 9 × 0.8 ... 10 × 15.5 × 0.8)
Busbar connections
• Terminal screw M 8 × 25 M 10 × 30
• Tightening torque Nm 10 ... 14 14 ... 24
• Conductor cross-section (min./max.)
- Finely stranded with cable lug m m2 16 ... 952) 50 ... 2403)
- Stranded with cable lug m m2 25 ... 1202) 70 ... 2403)
- AWG connections, solid or stranded, with cable lug AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
- With connecting bar (max. width) mm 15 25
• Diameter of opening mm 24.5 --
• Conductor cross-section (max.)
2
- N YY mm 120 --
- H07RN-F mm2 70 --
1) For grounded networks, otherwise 600 V. 3) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46234 for conductor cross-
2) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46235, use the sections from 240 mm2 as well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections
3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 185 mm2, use the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover to ensure phase
from 95 mm2 to ensure phase spacing. spacing.

Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21, 3RB30, 3RB31 up to 630A
Type 3RB30 16, 3RB30 26, 3RB30 36, 3RB20 46, 3RB20 56, 3RB20 66,
3RB31 13 3RB31 23 3RB31 33 3RB21 43 3RB21 53 3RB21 63
Size S00 S0 S2 S3 S6 S10/S12
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm 120 mm 145 mm
Auxiliary circuit
Number of NO contacts 1
Auxiliary contacts – assignment 1 NO for the signal "tripped",
1 NC for switching off the contactor
Auxiliary contacts – Contact rating
• NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15
Rated operational current Ie at Ue:
- 24 V A 4
- 120 V A 4
- 125 V A 4
- 250 V A 3
• NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15:

- 24 V A 4
- 120 V A 4
- 125 V A 4
- 250 V A 3
1)
• NC, NO contact with direct current DC-13:
- 24 V A 2
- 60 V A 0.55
- 110 V A 0.3
- 125 V A 0.3
- 250 V A 0.11
• Continuous thermal current Ith A 5
• Contact reliability Yes
(suitability for PLC control; 17 V, 5 mA)
• With fuse
- gL/gG operational class A 6
Ground-fault protection (only 3RB31) The information refers to sinusoidal residual currents at 50/60 Hz.
• Tripping value I∆ > 0.75 × Imotor
• Operating range I Lower current setting value < Imotor < 3.5 × upper current setting value
• Response time ttrip (in steady-state condition) s <1
Integrated electrical remote RESET (only 3RB31)
Connecting terminals A3, A4 24 V DC, max. 200 mA for approx. 20 ms, then < 10 mA
Protective separation between main V 300
and auxiliary conducting path according to IEC 60947-1
CSA, UL, and UR rated data
Auxiliary circuit – switching capacity 3RB30: B600, R300 B300, R300
3RB31: B300, R300
Connection of the auxiliary circuit
Connection type Screw terminal or spring-loaded terminals
Screw terminal
• Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2
- Solid or stranded mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4), 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
- F inely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (20 ... 14)
Spring-loaded terminals
- So l i d mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 --
- F inely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Stranded m m2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (24 ... 16)

Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21, 3RB30, 3RB31 up to 630A
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor starters

For short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 400 to 690 V
Overload relays Contactor CLASS 690 V
5 and 10 20 30 Fuse links1)
LV HRC Type 3NA
DIAZED Type 5SB
NEOZED Type 5SE
gL/gG operational class
Rated operational current Ie AC-3 in A at Type of coordination2)
Setting range Type 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1 2
Size S00
0.1 ... 0.4 A 3RT20 15 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 35 4
0.32 ... 1.25 A 3RT20 15 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 35 6
1 ... 4 A 3RT20 15 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 35 20
3RT20 16 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 35 20
3RT20 17 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 35 20
4 ... 16 A 3RT20 16 9 6.5 5.2 9 6.5 5.2 9 6.5 5.2 35 20
3RT20 17 12 9 6.3 10 9 6.3 9 9 6.3 35 20
3RT20 18 16 12.4 8.9 12.9 11.6 8.1 11.6 11.6 8.1 50 25
Size S0
3 ... 12 A 3RT20 23 9 6.5 5.2 9 6.5 5.2 -- -- -- 63 25
3RT20 24 12 12 9 12 12 9 12 12 9 63 25
3RT20 25 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 63 25
10 ... 40 3RT20 24 12 12 9 12 12 9 12 12 9 63 25
3RT20 25 17 17 13 16 16 13 14 14 13 63 25
3RT20 26 25 18 13 16 16 13 14 14 13 100 35
3RT20 27 32 32 21 18.6 18.6 15.1 16.2 16.2 15.1 125 50
3RT20 28 38 32 21 22.4 22.4 18.2 19.6 19.6 18.2 125 50
Size S2
12.5 ... 50 A 3RT20 35 40 40 24 40 40 24 36 36 36 160 80
3RT20 36 50 50 24 45 45 24 38 38 24 160 80
3RT20 37 50 50 47 48 48 47 42 42 42 250 125
3RT20 38 50 50 50 49 49 49 43 43 43 250 160
20 ... 80 A 3RT20 35 40 40 24 40 40 24 36 36 36 160 80
3RT20 36 50 50 24 45 45 24 38 38 24 160 80
3RT20 37 65 65 47 48 48 47 42 42 42 250 125
3RT20 38 80 80 58 49 49 49 43 43 43 250 160
Size S3
12.5 ... 50 A 3RT10 44 50 50 47 49 49 47 41.7 41.7 41.7 200 125
3RT10 45 50 50 50 50 50 50 45 45 45 200 160
25 ... 100 A 3RT10 44 65 65 47 49 49 47 41.7 41.7 41.7 200 125
3RT10 45 80 80 58 53 53 53 45 45 45 200 160
3RT10 46 95 95 58 59 59 58 50 50 50 200 160
3RT10 54 100 100 100 81.7 81.7 81.7 69 69 69 355 315
3RT10 55 -- -- -- 100 100 100 90 90 90 355 315
Size S6
50 ... 200 A 3RT10 54 115 115 115 81.7 81.7 81.7 69 69 69 355 315
3RT10 55 150 150 150 107 107 107 90 90 90 355 315
3RT10 56 185 185 170 131 131 131 111 111 111 355 315
Size S10/S12
55 ... 250 A 3RT10 64 225 225 225 160 160 160 135 135 135 500 400
3RT10 65 250 250 250 188 188 188 159 159 159 500 400
3RT10 66 250 250 250 213 213 213 180 180 180 500 400
160 ... 630 A 3RT10 64 225 225 225 160 160 160 -- -- -- 500 400
3RT10 65 265 265 265 188 188 188 -- -- -- 500 400
3RT10 66 300 300 280 213 213 213 180 180 180 500 400
3RT10 75 400 400 400 284 284 284 240 240 240 630 400
3RT10 76 500 500 450 355 355 355 300 300 300 630 500
3RT12 64 225 225 225 225 225 225 173 173 173 500 500
3RT12 65 265 265 265 265 265 265 204 204 204 500 500
3RT12 66 300 300 300 300 300 300 231 231 231 500 500
3RT12 75 400 400 400 400 400 400 316 316 316 800 800
3RT12 76 500 500 500 500 500 500 385 385 385 800 800
3TF683) 630 630 630 440 440 440 376 376 376 800 5004)
3TF693) 630 630 630 572 572 572 500 500 500 800 6304)
1) Please observe operational voltage. Type of coordination 2: the contactor or starter must not endanger
2) Coordination and short-circuit equipment according to EN 60947-4-1: persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit.
Type of coordination 1: the contactor or starter must not endanger They must be suitable for further operation. There is a risk of contact welding.
persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit. 3) Contactor cannot be mounted.
They do not need to be suitable for further operation without repair and the 4) Please ensure that the maximum AC-3 operational current has sufficient
renewal of parts. safety clearance from the rated current of the fuses.

Overload Relays
SIRIUS 3RB2 / 3RB3 Solid-State Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21, 3RB30, 3RB31 up to 630A
Characteristic curves
The tripping characteristics show the relationship between the Tripping characteristics for 3-pole loads
tripping time and tripping current as multiples of the set current
Ie and are given for symmetrical three-pole and two-pole loads 1000
NSB0_01525
from the cold state. 800
600
The smallest current used for tripping is called the minimum trip- 400
ping current. According to IEC 60947-4-1, this current must be
Tripping time
s
within specified limits. The limits of the total tripping current for 200
the 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays for symmetrical
three-pole loads are between 105 % and 120 % of the set cur-
rent. 100
80
The tripping characteristic starts with the minimum tripping 60
current and continues with higher tripping currents based on the 40
characteristics of the so-called trip classes (CLASS 10,
CLASS 20 etc.). The trip classes describe time intervals within 20
which the overload relays have to trip with 7.2 times the set CLASS 30
current Ie from the cold state for symmetrical three-pole loads. CLASS 20
10
The tripping times according to IEC 60947-4-1, tolerance band 8
E, are as follows for: 6 CLASS 10
4
Trip class Tripping time CLASS 5
CLASS 5 3…5s 2
CLASS 10 5 … 10 s
CLASS 20 10 … 20 s 1
0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10× e
CLASS 30 20 … 30 s Tripping current
The tripping characteristic for a three-pole overload relay from Illustration 1

the cold state (see illustration 1) only apply if all three phases are
simultaneously loaded with the same current. In the event of a Tripping characteristics for 2-pole loads
phase failure the 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays 1000
switch off the contactor more quickly in order to minimize heating 800 NSB0_01526
of the load in accordance with the tripping characteristic for two- 600
pole loads from the cold state (see illustration 2). With phase 400
Tripping time
unbalance the devices switch off depending on the reason for s

the unbalance between the two characteristic curves. 200
Compared with a cold load, a load at operating temperature
obviously has a lower temperature reserve. The tripping time of 100
the 3RB2/3RB3 solid-state overload relays is reduced there- 80
fore to about 30 % when loaded with the set current Ie for an 60
extended period. 40
20
CLASS 30
10
8 CLASS 20
6
4 CLASS 10
2 CLASS 5
1
0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10× e
Tripping current
Illustration 2
The above illustrations are schematic representations of
characteristic curves.

Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21, 3RB30, 3RB31 up to 630A
51
48 Ø11 25
65
NSB0_01510
57
147
122
85
45 73
Ø9
125
3RB30 16, 3RB31 13, size S00
NSB0_01518
6
145 61
156
3RB20 66, 3RB21 63, size S10/S12
71
108.7
103.7
NSB0_01511
55
45 84
3RB30 26, 3RB31 23, size S0
48.8
130
125.1
80.7
95 96 97 98
57
69.9
5.4 26.5 43.4
5
55
22.5
22.5
5
45
55
137.2
98.9
83.3
82.3
95 96 97 98 3RB30 36, 3RB31 33, size S2 with straight-through transformer
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
103.3
113.1
3RB30 36, 3RB31 33, size S2
51
64
67
86
11
23 Ø6 63
35
NSB0_01515
2
60
Ø5
5
70 119
106
64
89
18
NSB0_01514
30
5 31
70
119
3RB20 46, 3RB21 43, size S3 16 34
3RB20 46, 3RB21 43, size S3 with straight-through transformer
37 17 79
Ø5
62
119
79
95
99
95
79
60
60
NSB0_01516 NSB0_01517
3 5
95 Ø7 95 Ø7 73
5 120 150
120 47
150
3RB20 56, 3RB21 53, size S6 3RB20 56, 3RB21 53, size S6 with straight-through transformer

Overload Relays
3RB2 / 3RB3 Solid-State Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21, 3RB30, 3RB31 up to 630A
Schematics
3RB30 16 overload relays
3RB30 26 to 3RB20 66 overload relays
3RB31 13 overload relays
3RB31 23 to 3RB21 63 overload relays

Overload Relays
3RB2 Solid-State Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for
high-feature applications
Overview
The modular, solid-state overload relays with external power
supply type 3RB22 (with monostable auxiliary contacts) and
type 3RB23 (with bistable auxiliary contacts) up to 630 A (up to
820 A possible with a series transformer) have been designed
for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with normal and
heavy starting (see Function) against excessive temperature
rises due to overload, phase unbalance or phase failure. An
overload, phase unbalance or phase failure result in an increase
of the motor current beyond the set motor rated current. This
current rise is detected by means of a current measuring module
and electronically evaluated by a special evaluation module
which is connected to it. The evaluation electronics sends a
signal to the auxiliary contacts. The auxiliary contacts then
switch off the load by means of the contactors control circuit. The
break time depends on the ratio between the tripping current
and set current Ie and is stored in the form of a long-term stable
tripping characteristic (see Characteristic Curves). The "tripped"
status is signaled by means of a continuous red "Overload" LED.
The LED indicates imminent tripping of the relay due to overload,
3RB22/3RB23 evaluation module phase unbalance or phase failure by flickering when the limit
(1)Green "Ready" LED: current has been violated. This warning can also be used as a
A continuous green light signals that the device is working correctly. signal through auxiliary contacts.
(2)Red "Ground Fault" LED: In addition to the described inverse-time delayed protection of
A continuous red light signals a ground fault.
loads against excessive temperature rise, the 3RB22/3RB23
(3)Red "Thermistor" LED: solid-state overload relays also allow direct temperature moni-
A continuous red light signals an active thermistor trip. toring of the motor windings (full motor protection) by failsafe
(4)Red "Overload" LED: connection of a PTC sensor circuit. With this temperature-depen-
A continuous red light signals an active overload trip; a flickering red dent protection, the loads can be protected against overheating
light signals an imminent trip (overload warning). caused indirectly by reduced coolant flow, for example, which
(5)Motor current and trip class adjustment: cannot be detected by means of the current alone. In the event
Setting the device to the motor current and to the required trip class of overheating, the devices signal the contactor to switch off,
dependent on the starting conditions is easy with the two rotary knobs. and thus the load, by means of the auxiliary contacts. The
(6)Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET: "tripped" status is signaled by means of a continuous red "Ther-
With this switch you can choose between manual and automatic mistor" LED.
RESET.
(7)Test/RESET button: To also protect the loads against high-resistance short-circuits
Enables testing of all important device components and functions, due to damage to the insulation, humidity, condensed water,
plus resetting of the device after a trip when manual RESET is etc., the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays offer the pos-
selected. sibility of internal ground fault monitoring in conjunction with a
(8)Connecting terminals (removable terminal block): function expansion module; not possible in conjunction with a
The generously sized terminals permit connection of two conductors contactor assembly for Wye-Delta starting). In the event of a
with different cross-sections for the auxiliary, control and sensor ground fault the 3RB22/3RB23 relays trip instantaneously. The
circuits. Connection is possible with screw-type terminals and alterna- "tripped" status is signaled by means of a red "Ground Fault"
tively with spring-loaded terminals. LED. Signaling through auxiliary contacts is also possible.
(9)3RB29 85 function expansion module:
Enables more functions to be added, e.g. internal ground fault After tripping due to overload, phase unbalance, phase failure,
detection and/or an analog output with corresponding signals. thermistor tripping or ground fault, the relay may be reset
manually or automatically after the recovery time has elapsed
(see Function).
In conjunction with a function expansion module the motor cur-
rent measured by the microprocessor can be output in the form
of an analog signal 4 ... 20 mA DC for operating rotary coil
instruments or for feeding into analog inputs of programmable
logic controllers. With an additional AS-Interface analog module
the current values can also be transferred over the AS-i bus
system.
The devices are manufactured in accordance with environmen-
tal guidelines and contain environmentally friendly and reusable
materials.
They comply with important worldwide standards and
approvals.
3RB29 06 current measuring module

Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for
"Increased safety" type of protection EEx e according to

Benefits ATEX guideline 94/9/EC
The most important features and benefits of the 3RB22/3RB23 The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are suitable for the
solid-state overload relays are listed in the overview table overload protection of explosion-proof motors with "increased
(see Overload Relays, General Data). safety" type of protection EEx e. The relays meet the
requirements of EN 60079-7 (Electrical apparatus for potentially
Application explosive atmospheres – Increased safety "e").
Industries When using 3RB23 solid-state overload relays for the protection
of EEx e motors, separate monitoring of the control supply
The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are suitable for voltage is recommended.
customers from all industries who want to provide optimum
inverse-time delayed and temperature-dependent protection of The basic safety and health requirements of ATEX guideline
their electrical loads (e.g. motors) under normal and heavy 94/9/EG are fulfilled by compliance with
starting conditions (CLASS 5 to CLASS 30), minimize project • EN 60947-1
completion times, inventories and power consumption, and • EN 60947-4-1
optimize plant availability and maintenance management.
• EN 60947-5-1
Application • EN 60079-14
The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays have been EU type test certificate for Group II, Category (2) G/D under
designed for the protection of three-phase asynchronous and application. Number on request.
single-phase AC motors.
If single-phase AC motors are to be protected by the Accessories
3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays, the main circuits of
the current measuring modules must be series-connected. The following accessories are available for the 3RB22/3RB23
solid-state overload relays:
Ambient conditions
• A sealable cover for the evaluation module
The devices are insensitive to external influences such as • Box terminal blocks for the current measuring modules size S6
shocks, corrosive environments, ageing and temperature and S10/S12
changes.
• Terminal covers for the current measuring modules size S6
For the temperature range from –25 C to +60 °C, the and S10/S12
3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays compensate the • Push-in lugs for screw (panel) mounting the size S00 to S3
temperature according to IEC 60947-4-1. current measuring modules
Configuration notes for use of the devices below –25 °C or above
+60 °C on request.

Overload Relays
3RB2 Solid-State Overload Relays • Revised •
3RB22, 3RB23 for
high-feature applications 09/30/14
3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays for full motor protection with screw connection or spring-loaded terminals
for stand-alone installation, CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30 adjustable
• Overload protection, phase failure protection and unbalance • TEST function and self-monitoring
protection • Internal ground fault detection with function expansion
• External power supply 24 ... 240 V AC/DC module
• Auxiliary contacts 2 NO +2 NC • Screw connection or spring-loaded terminals for auxiliary,
• Manual and automatic RESET control and sensor circuits
• Electrical remote RESET integrated • Input for PTC sensor circuit
• 4 LEDs for operating and status displays • Analog output with function expansion module
Size Version Connection type Order No. Weight per
Contactor PU approx.
kg
Evaluation modules
S00 ... S12 Monostable Screw connection 3RB22 83-4AA1 0.300
Spring-loaded 3RB22 83-4AC1 0.300
terminals
Bistable Screw connection 3RB23 83-4AA1 0.300
Spring-loaded 3RB23 83-4AC1 0.300
terminals
3RB2. 83-4AA1
3RB2. 83-4AC1
Function expansion modules
– Analog Basic 1 module1) 3RB29 85-2AA0 0.030
Analog output DC 4 ... 20 mA, with
overload warning
Analog Basic 1 GF module1)2) 3RB29 85-2AA1 0.030
internal ground fault detection and
overload warning
Analog Basic 2 GF module1)2) 3RB29 85-2AB1 0.030
internal ground fault detection and
ground fault signaling
Basic 1 GF module2) 3RB29 85-2CA1 0.030
with internal ground fault detection
and overload warning
Basic 2 GF module2) 3RB29 85-2CB1 0.030
with internal ground fault detection
and ground fault signaling
1) The analog signal 4 ... 20 mA DC can be used for operating rotary coil Note: Analog input modules, e. g. SM 331, must be configured
instruments or for feeding into analog inputs of programmable logic for 4-wire measuring transducers. In this case the analog input
controllers.
module must not supply current to the analog output of the
2) The following information on ground fault protection refers to sinusoidal 3RB22/ 3RB23 relay.
residual currents at 50/60 Hz:
- With a motor current of between 0.3 and 2 times the set current Ie the unit
will trip at a ground fault current equal to 30% of the set current.
- With a motor current of between 2 and 8 times the set current Ie the unit
will trip at a ground fault current equal to 15% of the set current.
- The trip delay amounts to between 0.5 and 1 second.
For accessories, see page 3/35

For description, see pages 3/32-3/33
For dimension drawings, see pages 3/45-3/46.
For schematic diagrams, see page 3/47.

Overload Relays
• Revised • 3RB2 Solid-State Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for
09/30/14 high-feature applications
Current measuring modules for direct mounting1) and stand-alone installation1)2)

Size Set current value of the Order No. Weight per
Con-tactor3) inverse-time delayed overload trip PU approx.
A kg
Size S00/S02)4)
S00/S0 0.3 … 3 3RB29 06-2BG1 0.100
2.4 … 25 3RB29 06-2DG1 0.150
3RB29 06-2.G1
Size S2/S32)4)
S2/S3 10 … 100 3RB29 06-2JG1 0.350
3RB29 06-2JG1
Size S61)4)
S6 20 … 200 with pass through CT’s 3RB29 56-2TG2 0.600
with busbar 3RB29 56-2TH2 1.000
3RB29 56-2TG2
Size S10/S121)
S10/S12 and 63 … 630 3RB29 66-2WH2 1.750
size 14 (3TF68/
3TF69)
3RB29 66-2WH2
1) The current measuring modules with an Order No. ending with "2" are 3) Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices.
designed for direct mounting and stand-alone installation. For 4) The modules with an Order No. with "G" in 11th position are equipped with
3TF68/3TF69 contactors, direct mounting is not possible. a straight-through transformer.
2) The current measuring modules with an Order No. ending with "1" are
designed for stand-alone installation.
Size Version Order No. Weight per

Contactor PU approx.
kg
Connecting cables (essential accessory)
S00 ... S12 For connection between evaluation module and current
measuring module
• Length 0.1 m 3RB29 87-2B 0.010
• Length 0.5 m 3RB29 87-2D 0.020
3RB29 87-2.
For description, see pages 3/36-3/37

For schematic diagrams, see page 3/47,
For description, see pages 3/35-3/36, 3/40-3/42.

For schematic
Siemens Industry, Inc. diagrams, see page 3/51. 3/35
Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for
Design Function
Device concept Basic functions
The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are based on a The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are designed for:
modular device concept. Each device always comprises an • Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from overloading
evaluation module, which is independent of the motor current,
and a current measuring module, which is dependent on the mo- • Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from phase
tor current. The two modules are electrically interconnected by a unbalance
connection cable through the system interface. • Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from phase failure
The basic functionality of the evaluation module can be option- • Temperature-dependent protection of loads by connecting a
ally expanded with corresponding function expansion modules. PTC sensor circuit
The function expansion modules are integrated in the evaluation • Protection of loads from high-resistance short-circuits (internal
module for this purpose through a simple plug connection. ground-fault detection; detection of fault currents > 30 % of
the set current Ie)
Mounting options
• Output of an overload warning
Current measuring modules
• Output of an analog signal 4 to 20 mA DC as image of the
The current measuring modules size S00/S0 and S2/S3 are flowing motor current
designed for stand-alone installation. By contrast, the current
measuring modules size S6 and S10/S12 are suitable for The basic functions of the evaluation modules in conjunction
stand-alone installation or direct mounting. with function expansion modules are listed in the following table:
Evaluation modules Evaluation Function expan- Basic functions

module sion module
The evaluation modules can be mounted either on the current 3RB22 83-4AA1 None Inverse-time delayed protection,
measuring module (only sizes S00/S0 and S2/S3) or separately. temperature-dependent protection,
3RB22 83-4AC1
electrical remote RESET,
Connection technique 3RB23 83-4AA1 overload warning
3RB23 83-4AC1
Main circuit (current measuring module) 3RB29 85-2CA1 Inverse-time delayed protection,
temperature-dependent protection,
For sizes S00/S0, S2/S3 and S6, the main circuit can also be internal ground-fault detection,
connected by the straight-through transformer method. In this electrical remote RESET,
case, the cables of the main circuit are routed directly through overload warning
the feed-through openings of the relay to the contactor 3RB29 85-2CB1 Inverse-time delayed protection,
terminals. temperature-dependent protection,
internal ground-fault detection,
For sizes S6 and S10/S12, the main circuit can be connected electrical remote RESET,
with the help of the Busbar. In conjunction with the correspond- ground fault signal
ing box terminals, screw terminals are also available. 3RB29 85-2AA0 Inverse-time delayed protection,
Auxiliary circuit (evaluation module) electrical remote RESET,
overload warning,
Connection of the auxiliary circuit (removable terminal block) is analog output
possible with either screw terminals or spring-loaded terminals.
3RB29 85-2AA1 Inverse-time delayed protection,
Overload relays in contactor assemblies for temperature-dependent protection,
Wye-Delta starting electrical remote RESET,
When overload relays are used in combination with contactor overload warning,
analog output
assemblies for Wye-Delta starting it must be noted that only
0.58 times the motor current flows through the line contactor. An 3RB29 85-2AB1 Inverse-time delayed protection,
overload relay mounted onto the line contactor must be set to internal ground-fault detection,
0.58 times the motor current. electrical remote RESET,
ground fault signal,
When 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are used in analog output
combination with contactor assemblies for Wye-Delta starting,
the function expansion modules for internal ground-fault detec- Control circuit
tion must not be used.
The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays require an exter-
Operation with frequency converter nal power supply (24–240 V AC/DC), i.e. an additional supply
voltage is necessary.
The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are suitable for
frequencies of 50/60 Hz and the associated harmonics. This Short-circuit protection
permits the 3RB22/3RB23 overload relays to be used on the
incoming side of the frequency converter. Fuses or motor starter protectors must be used for short-circuit
protection. For assignments of the corresponding short-circuit
If motor protection is required on the outgoing side of the fre- protection devices to the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload re-
quency converter, the 3RN thermistor motor protection devices lays with/without contactor see Technical Specifications and
or the 3RU11 thermal overload relays are available for this pur- Selection and Ordering Data.
pose.
Trip classes
The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are suitable for
normal and heavy starting. The required trip class (CLASS 5, 10,
20 or 30) can be adjusted by means of a rotary knob depending
on the current starting condition.
For details of the trip classes see Characteristic Curves.

Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for
Phase failure protection TEST function

The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are fitted with The combined TEST/RESET button can be used to check
phase failure protection (see Characteristic Curves) in order to whether the relay is working correctly. The test can be aborted at
minimize temperature rises of the load during single-phase any time by letting go of the TEST/RESET button.
operation.
LEDs, the device configuration (this depends on which expan-
Setting sion module is plugged in) and the device hardware are tested
while the button is kept pressed for 6 seconds. Simultaneously
The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are set to the and for another 18 seconds a direct current proportional in size
motor rated current by means of two rotary knobs. to the maximum phase of the main current is fed in at the termi-
• The upper rotary knob (CLASS/Iemax) is divided into 4 ranges: nals I(+) and I(-). By comparing the analog signal, which is to be
1 A, 10 A, 100 A and 1000 A. The zone must be selected measured, with the main current, the accuracy of the current
which corresponds to the rated motor current and the current measurement can be determined. In this case 4 mA corre-
measuring module to be used with it. With the range selected sponds to 0 % and 20 mA to 125 % of the set current. After
the required trip class (CLASS 5, 10, 20 or 30) can be deter- 24 seconds the auxiliary contacts are switched and the feeder
mined. switch off as the result, bringing the test to an end.
• The lower rotary knob with percent scale (10 % ... 100 %) is After a test trip a faultless relay is reset by pressing the
then used to set the rated motor current in percent of the range TEST/RESET button. If a hardware fault is detected, the device
selected with the upper rotary button. trips and cannot be reset.
Example Self-monitoring
• Rating of induction motor = 45 kW (50 Hz, 400 V AC)
The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays have a self-moni-
• Rated motor current = 80 A toring feature, i.e. the devices constantly monitor their own basic
• Required trip class = CLASS 20 functions and trip if an internal fault is detected.
• Selected transformer: 10 to 100 A Display of the operating status
Solution The particular operating status of the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state
• Step 1: Use the upper rotary knob (CLASS) to select the 100 A overload relays is displayed by means of four LEDs:
range • Green "Ready" LED: A continuous green light signals that the
• Step 2: Within the 100 A range set the trip class CLASS 20 overload relay is ready for operation. The 3RB22/3RB23 over-
• Step 3: Set the lower rotary knob to 80 % (= 0.8) of load relays are not ready (LED "OFF") if there is no control
100 A × 0.8 = 80 A. supply voltage or if the function test was negative.
• Red "Ground fault" LED: A continuous red light signals a
If the current which is set on the evaluation module does not ground fault.
correspond to the current range of the connected current trans-
former, an error will result. • Red "Thermistor" LED: A continuous red light signals a
temperature-dependent trip.
Manual and automatic reset • Red "Overload" LED: A continuous red light signals an inverse-
In the case of the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays, a time delayed trip; a flickering red light signals an imminent
slide switch can be used to choose between automatic and inverse-time delayed trip (overload warning).
manual resetting. Auxiliary contacts
If manual reset is set, a reset can be carried out directly on the The 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays have two outputs,
device after a trip by pressing the blue TEST/RESET button. each with one NO contact and one NC contact. Their basic as-
A remote RESET can be carried out electrically by jumpering the signment/function may be influenced by function expansion
terminals Y1 and Y2. modules.
If the slide switch is set to automatic RESET, the relay is reset The 3RB22 and 3RB23 differ with respect to the tripping charac-
automatically. teristics of their auxiliary contacts – monostable or bistable:
The time between tripping and resetting is determined by the The monostable 3RB22 solid-state overload relays will enter the
recovery time. "tripped" state if the control supply voltage fails (> 200 ms), and
Recovery time return to the original state they were in before the control supply
voltage failed when the voltage returns. These devices are there-
With the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays the recovery fore especially suited for plants in which the control voltage is not
time after inverse-time delayed tripping is approx. 3 minutes strictly monitored.
regardless of the selected reset mode. The recovery time allows
the load to cool down. The bistable 3RB23 overload relays do not change their "tripped"
or "not tripped" status if the control voltage fails. The auxiliary
However, in the event of temperature-dependent tripping by contacts only switch over in the event of an overload and if the
means of a connected PTC thermistor sensor circuit, the device supply voltage is present. These devices are therefore espe-
can only be manually or automatically reset once the winding cially suited for plants in which the control voltage is monitored
temperature at the installation location of the PTC thermistor has separately.
fallen 5 Kelvin below its response temperature.
Response if the control supply voltage fails
After a ground fault trip the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload
relay trips can be reset immediately without a recovery time. If the control supply voltage fails for more than 0.2 s, the output
relays respond differently depending on the version: Monostable
or bistable.

Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for
Response of the Monostable Bistable

output relays 3RB22 3RB23
in the event of
Failure of the control The device trips No change of the switch-
supply voltage ing status of the auxiliary
contacts
Return of the control The device resets No change of the switch-
supply voltage with- ing status of the auxiliary
out previous tripping contacts
Return of the control The device remains The device remains
supply voltage after tripped tripped
previous tripping Reset: Reset:
• For overload tripping, • For overload tripping,
after 3 minutes after 3 minutes
• For thermistor tripping, • For thermistor tripping,
after the temperature after the temperature
has fallen 5 K below the has fallen 5 K below the
response temperature response temperature
• For ground-fault trip- • For ground-fault trip-
ping, immediately ping, immediately
Monostable and bistable responses of the output relays

© Siemens AG 2015
Overload Relays
Overload Relays
SIRIUS 3RB2 Electronic Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for
10/18/15 standard applications
3RB22, 3RB23 up to 630 A for High-Feature applications
The following technical information is intended to provide an
initial overview of the various types of device and functions.
Detailed information, see
• Reference Manual "Protection Equipment – 3RU1, 3RB2 • or specific information on a particular article number via the
Overload Relays", product data sheet,
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35681297 http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20357046/133200
Type – Overload relay: evaluation modules 3RB2283-4A.1 3RB2383-4A.1

Size contactor S00 ... S10/S12
H
Dimensions of evaluation modules mm 45 x 111 x 95
(W x H x D)
D
W
General data
Trips in the event of Overload, phase failure and phase unbalance (> 40 % according to NEMA),
+ ground fault (with corresponding function expansion module) and activation of the
thermistor motor protection (with closed PTC sensor circuit)
Trip class acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30 adjustable
Overload warning Yes, from 1.125 x Ie for symmetrical loads
and from 0.85 x Ie for unsymmetrical loads
Reset and recovery
• Reset options after tripping Manual, automatic and remote RESET
• Recovery time
- For automatic RESET min. - for tripping due to overcurrent: 3 (stored permanently)
- for tripping by thermistor: time until the motor temperature has fallen 5 K
below the response temperature
7
- for tripping due to a ground fault: no automatic RESET
- For manual RESET min. - for tripping due to overcurrent: 3 (stored permanently)
- for tripping due to a ground fault: Immediately
- For remote RESET min. - for tripping due to overcurrent: 3 (stored permanently)
Features
• Display of operating state on device Yes, with four LEDs:
- green LED "Ready"
- red LED "Ground Fault"
- red LED "Thermistor"
- red LED "Overload"
• TEST function Yes, test of LEDs, electronics, auxiliary contacts and wiring of control circuit by
pressing the button TEST/RESET / self-monitoring
• RESET button Yes, with the TEST/RESET button
• STOP button No
Protection and operation of explosion-proof motors
EC type test certificate number according to PTB 05 ATEX 3022 II (2) GD, --
directive 94/9/EC (ATEX) see
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/23115758
• Operation °C -25 ... +60
• Permissible rated current
- Temperature inside control cabinet 60 °C % 100
- Temperature inside control cabinet 70 °C % On request
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP20: Current measuring modules in sizes S6 and S10/S12 with busbar connection
in conjunction with cover.
Touch protection acc. to IEC 61140 Finger-safe: Current measuring modules in sizes S6 and S10/S12 with busbar
connection in conjunction with cover.
Shock resistance with sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 15/11
- Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2 (power ports), 1 (signal port)
- Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 2 (line to earth), 1 (line to line)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – emitted interference Degree of severity A according to EN 55011 (CISPR 11) and EN 55022 (CISPR 22)

Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for
standard applications 10/18/15
Type – Overload relay of current measuring module 3RB29 3RB29 3RB29 3RB29
Size S00/S0 S2/S3 S6 S10/S12
Main circuit
Type of current
• Alternating current Yes, 50/60 Hz ± 5 % (other frequencies on request)
Set current A 0.3 ... 3; 10 ... 100 20 ... 200 63 ... 630
2.4 ... 25
• With fuse without contactor See Selection and Ordering Data
• With fuse and contactor See Technical Specifications (short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders)
Safe isolation between main and auxiliary V 6901)
conducting path according to IEC 60947-1

Electrical connection version Screw terminals with box terminal
Screw terminal
• Terminal screw -- 4 mm Allen screw 5 mm Allen screw
• Tightening torque -- 10 ... 12 20 ... 22
• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.),
1 or 2 conductors
- Solid m m2 -- -- --
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 -- With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (50 ... 185),
1 × (10 ... 70) 1 × (70 ... 240)
2 × (1 × max. 95, 1 × max. 120), 1 × (120 ... 185)
1 × (10 ... 120)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 -- With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (50 ... 185),
1 × (10 ... 70) 1 × (70 ... 240)
2 × (1 × max. 95, 1 × max. 120), 1 × (120 ... 185)
1 × (10 ... 120)
- Stranded mm2 -- With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (70 ... 240),
2 × (max. 70), front clamping point only:
1 × (16 ... 70) 1 × (95 ... 300)
2 × (max. 120), 1 × (120 ... 240)
1 × (16 ... 120)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG -- With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (2/0 ... 500 kcmil),
2 × (max. 1/0), front clamping point only:
1 × (6 ... 2/0) 1 × (3/0 ... 600 kcmil)
2 × (max. 3/0), 1 × (250 kcmil ... 500 kcmil)
1 × (6 ... 250 kcmil)
- Ribbon cable conductors mm -- With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal: 2 × (20 × 24 × 0.5),
(number x width x circumference) 2 × (6 × 15.5 × 0.8), 1 × (6 × 9 × 0.8 ...
1 × (3 × 9 × 0.8 ... 6 × 15.5 × 0.8) 20 × 24 × 0.5)
With 3RT19 56-4G box terminal:
2 × (10 × 15.5 × 0.8),
1 × (3 × 9 × 0.8 ...
10 × 15.5 × 0.8)
Busbar connections
• Terminal screw -- M8 × 25 M10 × 30
• Tightening torque Nm -- 10 ... 14 14 ... 24
• Conductor cross-section (min./max.) --
- Solid with cable lug m m2 -- 16 ... 952) 50 ... 2403)
- Stranded with cable lug m m2 -- 25 ... 1202) 70 ... 2403)
- AWG connections, solid or stranded, with cable lug AWG -- 4 ... 250 kcmil 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
- With connecting bar (max. width) mm -- 15 25
• Diameter of opening mm 7.5 14 25 --
• Conductor cross-section (max.)
- N YY mm2 4) 4) 120 --
- H07RN-F mm2 4) 4)
70 --
1) For grounded networks, otherwise 600 V. 3) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46234 for conductor cross-
2) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46235, use the sections from 240 mm2 as well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections
3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm2 from 185 mm2, use the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover to ensure phase
to ensure phase spacing. spacing.
4) On request.

© Siemens AG 2015
Overload Relays
Overload Relays
SIRIUS 3RB2 Electronic Overload Relays 3RB22, 3RB23 for
Type – Overload relay: evaluation modules 3RB2283-4A.1 3RB2383-4A.1

H
Dimensions of evaluation modules mm 45 x 111 x 95
(W x H x D)
D
W
General data (continued)

Resistance to extreme climates – air humidity % 100
Dimensions "Dimensional drawings", see
• Reference Manual "Protection Equipment – 3RU1, 3RB2 Overload Relays",
• Product data sheet,
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20357046/133200
Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 2 000
Type of mounting
• Evaluation modules Stand-alone installation
• Current measuring module Size S00 to S3: Stand-alone installation,
S6 and S10/S12: stand-alone installation or mounting onto contactors
Type – Overload relay: evaluation modules 3RB2283-4A.1, 3RB2383-4A.1

Auxiliary circuit
Number of NO contacts 2
Number of CO contacts --
Auxiliary contacts – assignment • Alternative 1
7
- 1 NO for the signal "tripped by overload and/or thermistor"

- 1 NC for disconnecting the contactor
- 1 NO for the signal "tripped by ground fault"
or1)
• Alternative 2
- 1 NO for the signal "tripped by overload and/or thermistor and/or ground fault"
- 1 NO for overload warning
Auxiliary contacts – contact rating
• NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,
rated operational current Ie at Ue
- 24 V A 6
- 120 V A 6
- 125 V A 6
- 250 V A 3
• NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,
- 24 V A 6
- 120 V A 6
- 125 V A 6
- 250 V A 3
• NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13,
- 24 V A 2
- 60 V A 0.55
- 110 V A 0.3
- 125 V A 0.3
- 250 V A 0.2
• Conventional thermal current Ith A 5
• Contact reliability Yes
(suitability for PLC control; 17 V, 5 mA)
• With fuse, operational class gG A 6
• With miniature circuit breaker, C characteristic A 1.6
Protective separation between auxiliary current paths V 300
acc. to IEC 60947-1
CSA, UL, UR rated data
Auxiliary circuit – switching capacity B300, R300
1)
The assignment of auxiliary contacts may be influenced by function
expansion modules.

7/138 Siemens IC 10 · 2015
© Siemens AG 2015
Overload Relays
3RB2 Solid-State Overload Relays Overload Relays
• Revised •
3RB22, 3RB23 for SIRIUS 3RB2 Electronic Overload Relays
standard applications 10/18/15
Type – Overload relay: evaluation modules 3RB2283-4A.1, 3RB2383-4A.1

Control circuit
Rated control supply voltage Us
• 50/60 Hz AC V 24 ... 240
• DC V 24 ... 240
Operating range
• 50/60 Hz AC 0.85 × Us min ≤ Us ≤ 1.1 × Us max
• DC 0.85 × Us min ≤ Us ≤ 1.1 × Us max
Rated power
• 50/60 Hz AC W 0.5
• DC W 0.5
Mains buffering time ms 200
Sensor circuit
Thermistor motor protection (PTC thermistor sensor)
• Summation cold resistance kΩ ≤ 1.5
• Response value kΩ 3.4 ... 3.8
• Return value kΩ 1.5 ... 1.65
Ground-fault detection The information refers to sinusoidal residual currents at 50/60 Hz.
• Tripping value IΔ1)
- For 0.3 × Ie < Imotor < 2.0 × Ie > 0.3 × Ie
- For 2.0 × Ie < Imotor < 8.0 × Ie > 0.15 × Imotor
7
• Response time ttrip ms 500 ... 1 000
Analog output1)2)
Rated values
• Output signal mA 4 ... 20
• Measuring range 0 ... 1.25 × Ie
4 mA corresponds to 0 × Ie
16.8 mA corresponds to 1.0 × Ie
20 mA corresponds to 1.25 × Ie
• Load, max. Ω 100
Conductor cross-sections for the auxiliary, control and
sensor circuit as well as the analog output

Operating devices mm 3.0 x 0.5
• Solid or stranded mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4)3), 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)3)
2
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm --
• Finely stranded with end sleeve (DIN 46228-1) mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)3), 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)3)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (20 ... 14)

• Solid or stranded mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 --
• Finely stranded with end sleeve (DIN 46228-1) mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
1) 3)
For the 3RB22 and 3RB23 overload relays in combination with a If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping
corresponding function expansion module. point, both cross-sections must be in the range specified.
2)
Analog input modules, e.g. SM 331, must be configured for 4-wire
measuring transducers. In this case the analog input module must not
supply current to the analog output of the 3RB22 and 3RB23 relay.

Siemens IC 10 · 2015 7/139
Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders

For short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 400 to 690 V
Overload relays Contactor CLASS 690 V
5 and 10 20 30 Fuse links1)
LV HRC Type 3NA
DIAZED Type 5SB
NEOZED Type 5SE
gL/gG operational class
Rated operational current Ie AC-3 in A at Type of coordination2)
Setting range Type 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1 2
Size S00/S0
0.3 ... 3 A 3RT20 15 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 35 20
3RT20 16 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 35 20
2.4 ... 25 A 3RT20 15 7 5 4 7 5 4 7 5 4 35 20
3RT20 16 9 6.5 5.2 9 6.5 5.2 9 6.5 5.2 35 20
3RT20 17 12 9 6.3 10 9 6.3 9 9 6.3 35 20
3RT20 23 9 6.5 5.2 9 6.5 5.2 -- -- -- 63 25
3RT20 24 12 12 9 12 12 9 12 12 9 63 25
3RT20 25 17 17 13 16 16 13 14 14 13 63 25
3RT20 26 25 18 13 16 16 13 14 14 13 100 35
Size S2/S3
On request 3RT20 35 On request
3RT20 36 On request
3RT10 44 On request
3RT10 45 On request
3RT10 46 On request
3RT10 54 On request
3RT10 55 On request
Size S6
20 ... 200 A 3RT10 54 115 115 115 81.7 81.7 81.7 69 69 69 355 315
3RT10 55 150 150 150 107 107 107 90 90 90 355 315
3RT10 56 185 185 170 131 131 131 111 111 111 355 315
Size S10/S12
160 ... 630 A 3RT10 64 225 225 225 160 160 160 135 135 135 500 400
3RT10 65 265 265 265 188 188 188 159 159 159 500 400
3RT10 66 300 300 280 213 213 213 180 180 180 500 400
3RT10 75 400 400 400 284 284 284 240 240 240 630 400
3RT10 76 500 500 450 355 355 355 300 300 300 630 500
3RT12 64 225 225 225 225 225 225 173 173 173 500 500
3RT12 65 265 265 265 265 265 265 204 204 204 500 500
3RT12 66 300 300 300 300 300 300 231 231 231 500 500
3RT12 75 400 400 400 400 400 400 316 316 316 800 800
3RT12 76 500 500 500 500 500 500 385 385 385 800 800
3TF683) 630 630 630 440 440 440 376 376 376 800 5004)
3TF693) 630 630 630 572 572 572 500 500 500 800 6304)
1) Please observe operational voltage.
2) Coordination and short-circuit equipment according to EN 60947-4-1:
Type of coordination 1: the contactor or starter must not endanger
persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit.
They do not need to be suitable for further operation
without repair and the renewal of parts.
Type of coordination 2: the contactor or starter must not endanger
persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit.
They must be suitable for further operation.
There is a risk of contact welding.
3) Contactor cannot be mounted.
4) Please ensure that the maximum AC-3 operational current has sufficient
safety clearance from the rated current of the fuses.

Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for
standard applications
The tripping characteristics show the relationship between the Tripping characteristics for 3-pole loads
tripping time and tripping current as multiples of the set current
Ie and are given for symmetrical three-pole and two-pole loads 1000
NSB0_01525
from the cold state. 800
600
The smallest current used for tripping is called the minimum 400
tripping current. According to IEC 60947-4-1, this current must
Tripping time
s
be within specified limits. The limits of the minimum tripping 200
current for the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays for
symmetrical three-pole loads are between 105 % and 120 % of
the set current. 100
80
The tripping characteristic starts with the minimum tripping 60
current and continues with higher tripping currents based on the 40
characteristics of the so-called trip classes (CLASS 10,
CLASS 20 etc.). The trip classes describe time intervals within 20
which the overload relays have to trip with 7.2 times the set CLASS 30
current Ie from the cold state for symmetrical three-pole loads. CLASS 20
10
The tripping times according to IEC 60947-4-1, tolerance band 8
E, are as follows for: 6 CLASS 10
4
Trip class Tripping time CLASS 5
CLASS 5 3…5s 2
CLASS 10 5 … 10 s
CLASS 20 10 … 20 s 1
0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10× e
CLASS 30 20 … 30 s Tripping current
The tripping characteristic for a three-pole overload relay from Illustration 1

the cold state (see illustration 1) only apply if all three phases are
simultaneously loaded with the same current. In the event of a Tripping characteristics for 2-pole loads
phase failure or a current unbalance of more than 40 %, the 1000
3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays switch off the contac- 800 NSB0_01526
tor more quickly in order to minimize heating of the load in 600

accordance with the tripping characteristic for two-pole loads 400
Tripping time
from the cold state (see illustration 2). s

Compared with a cold load, a load at operating temperature ob- 200
viously has a lower temperature reserve. The tripping time of the
3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays are reduced therefore 100
to about 30 % when loaded with the set current Ie for an 80
extended period. 60
40
20
CLASS 30
10
8 CLASS 20
6
4 CLASS 10
2 CLASS 5
1
0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10× e
Tripping current
Illustration 2
The above illustrations are schematic representations of
characteristic curves. The characteristic curves of the individual
3RB22/3RB23 solid-state overload relays can be requested from
Technical Assistance at the following e-mail address:
[email protected]

Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for
86 4
5 59
30
12
106
80
NSB0_01519
45 36
5
3RB22 83-4, 3RB23 83-4 evaluation module
3RB29 06-2BG1, 3RB29 06-2DG1 current measuring module 3RB29 06-2JG1 current measuring module
3RB29 56-2TG2 current measuring module

Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for
3RB29 56-2TH2 current measuring module
3RB29 66-2WH2 current measuring module

Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for
Schematics
Protection of single-phase motors
(not in conjunction with internal ground-fault detection)
3RB29 06-2.G1, 3RB29 56-2TG2 3RB29 56-2TH2, 3RB29 66-2WH2

Schematic representation of a possible application (3-phase)

Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 for
Connections
Evaluation module Function expan- Basic function s I nputs
sion module
A1/A2 T1/T2 Y1/Y2
3RB22 83-4AA1 None Inverse-time delayed protection, Power supply Connection for Electrical
3RB22 83-4AC1 temperature-dependent protection, 24 ... 240 V AC/DC PTC sensor remote RESET
3RB23 83-4AA1 overload warning
3RB23 83-4AC1 3RB29 85-2CA1 Inverse-time delayed protection, Power supply Connection for Electrical
temperature-dependent protection, 24 ... 240 V AC/DC PTC sensor remote RESET
overload warning
3RB29 85-2CB1 Inverse-time delayed protection, Power supply Connection for Electrical
ground fault signal
3RB29 85-2AA0 Inverse-time delayed protection, Power supply Connection for Electrical
overload warning, analog output
3RB29 85-2AA1 Inverse-time delayed protection, Power supply Connection for Electrical
overload warning, analog output
3RB29 85-2AB1 Inverse-time delayed protection, Power supply Connection for Electrical
ground fault signal, analog output
Evaluation module Function expan- Outputs

sion module
I (–) / I (+) 95/96 NC 97/98 NO 05/06 NC 07/08 NO
3RB22 83-4AA1 None No Switching off the Signal Overload warning Overload warning
3RB22 83-4AC1 contactor (inverse- "tripped"
time delayed/temper-
3RB23 83-4AA1 ature-dependent pro-
3RB23 83-4AC1 tection)
3RB29 85-2CA1 No Switching off the Signal Overload warning Overload warning
contactor (inverse- "tripped"
ature-dependent pro-
tection + ground
fault)
3RB29 85-2CB1 No Switching off the Signal Switching off the Signal
contactor (inverse- "tripped" contactor (ground "ground fault trip"
time delayed/temper- fault)
tection)
3RB29 85-2AA0 Analog signal Switching off the Signal Overload warning Overload warning
tection)
3RB29 85-2AA1 Analog signal Switching off the Signal Overload warning Overload warning
tection + ground
fault)
3RB29 85-2AB1 Analog signal Switching off the Signal Switching off the Signal
contactor (inverse- "tripped" contactor (ground "ground fault trip"
time delayed/temper- fault)
tection)

Overload Relays
• Revised • 3RB2/3RB3 Solid-State Overload Relays
04/20/15 Accessories
Overview
Overload relays for standard applications Overload relays for high-feature applications
The following accessories are available for the 3RB2/3RB3 The following accessories are available for the 3RB22/3RB23
solid-state overload relays: solid-state overload relays:
• One terminal bracket each for the overload relays size S00 • A sealable cover for the evaluation module
and S0 (sizes S2 to S12 can be installed as single units without • Box terminal blocks for the current measuring modules size S6
a terminal bracket) and S10/S12
• One mechanical RESET module for all sizes • Terminal covers for the current measuring modules size S6
• One cable release for resetting devices which are difficult to and S10/S12
access (for all sizes) • Push-in lugs for screw mounting the size S00 to S3 current
• One sealable cover for all sizes measuring modules
• Box terminal blocks for sizes S6 and S10/S12
• Terminal covers for sizes S2 to S10/S12

Version Size Order No. Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation 1) 2)
For separate mounti ng of the overload relay Screw S00 3RU29 16-3AA01 0.04
panel mount or snapped onto terminals S0 3RU29 26-3AA01 0.05
35 mm standard mounting rail, S2 3RU29 36-3AA01 0.18
size S3 also for 75 mm standard mounting rail S3 3RU19 46-3AA01 0.28
Spring S00 3RU29 16-3AC01 0.04

Loaded S0 3RU29 26-3AC01 0.06
terminals
3RU29.6-3AA01
Mechanical RESET 1) 2)
Resetting plungers, holders and formers S00 to S2 3RB39 80-0A 0.030

S3 to S12 3RU19 00-1A 0.038
Pushbuttons with extended stroke S3 to S12 3SB30 00-0EA11 0.021

(12 mm), IP65, Ø 22 mm
Extension plungers S3 to S12 3SX1 335 0.004
For compensation of the distance between a pushbutton
and the unlatching button of the relay
3RU19 00-1A Complete mechanical reset assembly S3 to S12 3SBES-RESET
with pushbutton and
extension plunger
Cable releases with holder for RESET 1) 2)
For holes with Ø 6.5 mm
in the mounting plate;
max. control panel thickness 8 mm
• Length 400 mm S00 to S2 3RB39 80-0B 0.060
• Length 600 mm S00 to S2 3RB39 80-0C 0.073
• Length 400 mm S3 to S12 3RU19 00-1B 0.063
• Length 600 mm S3 to S12 3RU19 00-1C 0.073
3RU19 00-1.
1) Accessories with a prefix of 3RB39 are intended for 3RB20/3RB30 overload relays only.
2) Only for 3RB20/3RB21. The accessories are identical to those of the
3RU1/3RU2 thermal overload relays.

Overload Relays
Accessories 04/20/15
Version Size Order No. List Pack Weight per

Price $ Units PU approx.
kg
Sealable covers
For covering the setting knobs
• For 3RB30/3RB31 S00 to S2 3RB39 84-0 10 units 0.003
• For 3RB20/3RB21 S3 to S12 3RB29 84-0 10 units 0.020
• For 3RB22 to 3RB24 – 3RB29 84-2 10 units 0.050
3RB3984-0
Terminal covers
Covers for cable lugs and rail connection
• Length 100 mm S6 3RT19 56-4EA1 0.067
• Length 120 mm S10/S12 3RT19 66-4EA1 0.124

3RT19 46-4EA1 • Length 20.6 mm1) S2 3RT29 36-4EA2 0.016
• Length 20.8 mm1) S3 3RT19 46-4EA2 0.023
• Length 25 mm S6 3RT19 56-4EA2 0.028
• Length 30 mm S10/S12 3RT19 66-4EA2 0.038
Covers for screw connections S6 3RT19 56-4EA3 0.021

3RT19 36-4EA2 between contactor and overload relay, S10/S12 3RT19 66-4EA3 0.062
The figures show without box terminals
mounting on the contactor (1 unit required per combination)
Box terminal blocks
For round and ribbon cables
up to 70 mm2 2/0 AWG S62) 3RT19 55-4G 0.237
up to 120mm2 4/0 AWG S6 3RT19 56-4G 0.270
up to 240mm2 500 mcm S10/S12 3RT19 66-4G 0.676
For conductor cross-sections,
see LV 1 T "Technical Specifications"
3RT19 5.-4G
Push-in lugs
For screw fixing of 3RB22/3RB23 -- 3RP19 03 10 units 0.002
overload relays
3RP19 03
For screw mounting of 3RB29 06 current S00 ... S3 3RB19 00-0B 10 units 0.100
measuring modules
(2 units are required per module)
3RB19 00-0B
For more accessories (tools for spring-loaded terminals and labeling
plates), see page 3/57.
1) Only for 3RB20/3RB21. The accessories are identical to those of the
3RU11 thermal overload relays.
2) In the scope of supply for 3RT10 54-1 contactors (55 kW).

Overload Relays
Accessories
Overview
Overload relays for standard applications Overload relays for High-Feature applications
The following accessories are available for the 3RB20/3RB21 The following accessories are available for the 3RB22/3RB23
solid-state overload relays: solid-state overload relays:
• One terminal bracket each for the overload relays size S00 • A sealable cover for the evaluation module
and S0 (sizes S2 to S12 can be installed as stand-alone • Box terminal blocks for the current measuring modules size S6
installation without a terminal bracket) and S10/S12
• One mechanical remote RESET module for all sizes • Terminal covers for the current measuring modules size S6
• One cable release for resetting devices which are difficult to and S10/S12
access (for all sizes)
• One sealable cover for all sizes
• Box terminal blocks for sizes S6 and S10/S12
• Terminal covers for sizes S2 to S10/S12
Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation
Type 3RB29 13-0AA1 3RB29 23-0AA1
For overload relay 3RB20 16, 3RB21 13 3RB20 26, 3RB21 23
Size S00 S0
Type of mounting For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH35 standard mounting rail
Connection type Screw terminal
Screw terminal
• Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5
• Conductor cross-section (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors
- So l i d mm 2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 × (1 ... 6),
Max. 1 × (... 4) Max. 1 × (... 10)
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 -- --
- F inely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5) 1 × (1 ... 6)
- Stranded m m2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 × (1 ... 6),
Max. 1 × (... 4) Max. 1 × (... 10)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 1 × (18 ... 14) 1 × (14 ... 10)

OverloadRelays
Overload Relays
3RB24
SIRIUSSolid-State OverloadOverload
3RB2 Solid-State Relays Relays
3RB24 for IO-Link, up to 630 A
for
for High-Feature applications
High-Feature applications
Overview
break time depends on the ratio between the tripping current
and current setting Ie and is stored in the form of a long-term sta-
NSB0_02180
ble tripping characteristic see www.siemens.com/sirius/support
"Characteristic Curves"). The "tripped" status is signaled by
means of a continuously illuminated red "OVERLOAD" LED and
also reported as a group fault via IO-Link.
The LED indicates imminent tripping of the relay due to overload,
phase unbalance or phase failure by flickering when the limit
current has been violated. This warning can also be reported to
the higher-level PLC via IO-Link at the 3RB24 overload relay.
In addition to the described inverse-time delayed protection of
loads against excessive temperature rises, the 3RB24 solid-
state overload relays also allow direct temperature monitoring of
the motor windings (full motor protection) by connection with
broken-wire interlock of a PTC sensor circuit. With this tempera-
Green LED "DEVICE/IO-Link: ture-dependent protection, the loads can be protected against
A continuous green light signals that the device is working
correctly, a green flickering light signals the communication overheating caused indirectly by reduced coolant flow, for ex-
through IO-Link. ample, which cannot be detected by means of the current alone.
In the event of overheating, the devices switch off the contactor,
Red LED "GND FAULT": and thus the load, by means of the auxiliary contacts. The
A continuous red light signals an active ground-fault trip.
"tripped" status is signaled by means of a continuously illumi-
Red LED "THERMISTOR": nated "THERMISTOR" LED and also reported as a group fault via
A continuous red light signals an active thermistor trip. IO-Link.
Red LED "OVERLOAD": To the loads against incomplete ground faults due to damage to
A continuous red light signals an active overload trip; a flickering
red light signals an imminent trip (overload warning). the insulation, humidity, condensation, etc., to protect the elec-
tronic overload relay 3RB24 offer the possibility of internal
7
Motor current and trip class setting: ground-fault detection (for details see "Manual for SIRIUS 3RB24
Setting the device to the motor current and to the required trip Solid-State Overload Relay for IO-Link",, not possible in conjunc-
class dependent on the start-up conditions is easy with the two
rotary switches. tion with contactor assembly for wye-delta starting). In the event
of a ground fault, the 3RB24 relays trip instantaneously.
Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET:
With this switch you can choose between manual and automatic The "tripped" status is signaled by means of a flashing red LED
RESET. "Ground Fault" and reported at the overload relay 3RB24 as a
Test/RESET button: group fault via IO-Link.
Enables testing of all important device components and functions,
plus resetting of the device after a trip when manual RESET is The reset after overload, phase unbalance, phase failure, therm-
selected. istor or ground-fault tripping is performed manually by key on
site, via IO-Link or by electrical remote RESET or automatically
Connecting terminals (removable terminal block): after the cooling time (motor model) or for thermistor protection
The generously sized terminals permit connection of two
conductors with different cross-sections for the auxiliary, control after sufficient cooling. Power cuts in devices due to function
and sensor circuits. Connection is possible with screw connection monitoring (broken wire or short circuit on the thermistor) can
and alternatively with spring-type connection. only be reset on-site ("Function" see "Manual for SIRIUS 3RB24
Plug-in point for operator panel: Solid-State Overload Relay for IO-Link",). In conjunction with a
enables connection of the 3RA69 35-0A operator panel. function expansion module, the motor current measured by the
microprocessor can be output in the form of an analog signal DC
4 to 20 mA for operating rotary coil instruments or for feeding
into analog inputs of programmable logic controllers.
SIRIUS 3RB24 evaluation module
The current values can be transmitted to the higher-level control-
The modular electronic overload relay 3RB24, which is powered ler via IO-Link.
via IO-Link (with monostable auxiliary contacts) up to 630 A (up
to 820 A possible with a series transformer) have been designed The devices are manufactured in accordance with environmen-
for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with normal and tal guidelines and contain environmentally friendly and reusable
heavy starting ("Function" see "Manual for SIRIUS 3RB24 Solid- materials.
State Overload Relay for IO-Link",) against excessive tempera- They comply with all important worldwide standards and ap-
ture rises due to overload, phase unbalance or phase failure. It provals.
comprises an evaluation unit, a current measuring module and
a connecting cable. The evaluation module 3RB24 also offers an Type of protection "increased safety EEx e and explosion-
motor starter function: The contactors, which are connected via proof enclosure EEx d" in accordance with ATEX Directive
the auxiliary contacts, can also be actuated for operation via 94/9/EC
IO-Link. In this way, direct, reversing and star-delta starters up to The electronic overload relay 3RB24 (monostable) are suitable
630 A (or 830 A) can be connected to the controller wirelessly for the overload protection of explosion-proof motors of types of
via the IO-Link controller. protection EEx e and EEx d.
An overload, phase unbalance or phase failure result in an in- They comply with the requirements of EN 60079-7 (Electrical ap-
crease of the motor current beyond the set rated motor current. paratus for areas subject to explosion hazards - Increased
This current rise is detected by means of the current measuring safety "e" as well as for flameproof enclosure "d");
module (see page 7/134) and electronically evaluated by the see www.siemens.com/sirius/atex.
evaluation module which is connected to it. The evaluation elec- EC type test certificate for Group II, Category (2) G/D has been
tronics sends a signal to the auxiliary contacts. The auxiliary submitted. On request.
contacts then switch off the load by means of a contactor. The

7/128 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
Overload Relays
Overload Relays
• Revised • SIRIUS 3RB2 Solid-State Overload Relays
10/18/15 3RB24 for IO-Link, applications
for High-Feature up to 630 A
Order No. scheme
Digit of the Order No. 1st - 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th
@@@ @ @ @ @ – @ @ @ @
Solid-state overload relays 3RB
SIRIUS 2nd generation 2
Device series @
Size, rated operational current and power @
Version of the automatic RESET, electrical remote RESET @
Trip class (CLASS) @
Setting range of the overload release @
Connection methods @
Installation type @
Example 3RB 2 4 8 3 – 4 A A 1
Note: For your orders, please use the order numbers quoted in the
catalog in the Selection and ordering data.
The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information
purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the
order numbers.
Benefits
The most important features and benefits of the 3RB24 solid-
state overload relays for IO-Link are listed in the overview table
(see "General Data", page 3/2 onwards).
Advantages through energy efficiency We offer you a unique portfolio for industrial energy manage-
ment, using an energy management system that helps to opti-
7
mally define your energy needs. We split up our industrial en-
ergy management into three phases – Identification, Evaluation
and Realization – and we support you with the appropriate hard-
ware and software solutions in every process phase.
The innovative products of the SIRIUS industrial controls portfo-
lio can also make a substantial contribution to a plant's energy
efficiency (see www.siemens.com/sirius/energysaving).
3RB24 solid-state overload relays for IO-Link contribute to en-
ergy efficiency throughout the plant as follows:
• Transmission of current values
4
0 24
• Reduced inherent power loss

1_ 0
• Less heating of the control cabinet

IC0
• Smaller control cabinet air conditioners can be used

Overview of the energy management process
Application
Industries If single-phase AC motors are to be protected by the 3RB24
solid-state overload relays, the main current paths of the current
The 3RB24 solid-state overload relays are suitable for customers measuring modules must be series-connected ("Schematics"
from all industries who want to guarantee optimum inverse-time see "Manual for SIRIUS 3RB24 Solid-State Overload Relay for
delayed and temperature-dependent protection of their electri- IO-Link",).
cal loads (e.g. motors) under normal and heavy starting condi-
tions (CLASS 5 to 30), minimize project completion times, inven- Ambient conditions
tories and energy consumption, and optimize plant availability
and maintenance management. The devices are insensitive to external influences such as
shocks, corrosive ambient conditions, ageing and temperature
Application fluctuations.
The 3RB24 solid-state overload relays have been designed for For the temperature range from –25 C to +60 °C, the 3RB24
the protection of three-phase asynchronous and single-phase solid-state overload relays compensate the temperature in ac-
AC motors. cordance with IEC 60947-4-1.
In addition to protection function, these devices can be used to- Configuration notes for use of the devices below –25 °C or
gether with contactors as direct or reversing starters (star-delta above +60 °C on request.
(wye-delta) start also possible), which are controlled via IO-Link.
This makes it possible to directly control drives via IO-Link from
a higher-level controller or on site via the optional hand-held de-
vice lamps and also, for example, to return current values di-
rectly via IO-Link.

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 7/129
3RB24 Solid-State Overload Relays SIRIUS 3RB2 Solid-State Overload Relays
3RB24 for IO-Link, up to 630 A 3RB24 for IO-Link, up to 630 A
for High-Feature applications for High-Feature applications

3RB24 solid-state overload relays (evaluation module) for full motor protection, stand-alone installation,
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30, adjustable
Type 3RB24 83-4A.1
Features and technical specifications
Overload protection, phase failure protection and unbalance protection
Supplied from an external voltage
24 V DC through IO-Link
Direct-on-line or reversing starters (wye-delta starting also possible) controllable through IO-Link
Auxiliary contacts
1 CO and 1 NO in series
Manual and automatic RESET
Remote-RESET
(electrically or via IO-Link)
4 LEDs for operating and status displays
TEST function and self-monitoring
Internal ground-fault detection
Screw or spring-type terminals for auxiliary, control and sensor circuits
Input for PTC sensor circuit
Analog output
IO-Link-specific functions
• Connection of direct-on-line, reversing and star-delta starters to the controller via IO-Link
• On-site controlling of the starter using the hand-held device
• Accessing process data (e.g. current values in all three phases) via IO-Link
• Accessing parameterization and diagnostics data (e.g. tripped signals) via IO-Link
7
Available
PU (UNIT, SET, M) = 1
PS* = 1 unit
PG = 41G
3RB24 83-4AA1 3RB24 83-4AC1
Size of Version Screw terminals Spring-type terminals

contactor
Order No. Price Order No. Price
per PU per PU
Evaluation modules
S00 ... S12 Monostable 3RB24 83-4AA1 3RB24 83-4AC1
Notes:
• Analog input modules, e.g. SM 331, must be configured for Current
Current measuring
measuring modules
modules and
and related
related connecting
connectingcables
cablessee
see
. transducers. The analog input module may
4-wire measuring page
page 3/55,
3/55, accessories
accessories see
see pages
pages3/56
3/56 and
and 3/57.
3/57.
not supply current to the analog output of the 3RB24 relay.

Illustrations are approximate Siemens IC 10 · 2012 Industrial
7/133
Controls Catalog
SIRIUS 3RB2 Solid-State Overload Relays 3RB24 Solid-State Overload Relays
Current measuring modules for Current measuring modules for
3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24 3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24

Current measuring modules for mounting onto contactor1) and stand-alone installation1)2) (essential accessories)
Size con- Rating for Current set- Short-circuit pro- For over- DT Order No. Price PU Pack PG
tactor3) induction ting of the tection with fuse, load per PU (UNIT, Units
motor,4) inverse-time type of coordina- relays SET, M)
delayed tion "2", opera-
overload tional class gG5)
release
kW A A
Sizes S00/S02)6)
S00/S0 0.09 … 1.1 0.3 … 3 20 3RB22 to } 3RB29 06-2BG1 1 1 unit 41G
1.1 … 11 2.4 … 25 63 3RB24 } 3RB29 06-2DG1 1 1 unit 41G
3RB29 06-2.G1
Sizes S2/S32)6)
S2/S3 5.5 … 45 10 … 100 315 3RB22 to } 3RB29 06-2JG1 1 1 unit 41G
3RB24
3RB29 06-2JG1
Size S61)6)
7
S6 with 11 … 90 20 … 200 315 3RB22 to } 3RB29 56-2TH2 1 1 unit 41G

busbar 3RB24
connection
For mount- 3RB22 to } 3RB29 56-2TG2 1 1 unit 41G
ing to S6 3RB24
3RB29 56-2TG2 contactors
with box
terminals
Sizes S10/S121)
S10/S12 37 … 450 63 … 630 800 3RB22 to } 3RB29 66-2WH2 1 1 unit 41G
and 3RB24
size 14
(3TF68/
3TF69)
3RB29 66-2WH2
3)
Note: Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices.
4)
Guide value for 4-pole standard motors at 50 Hz 400 V AC. The actual
The connecting cable between the current measuring module starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered
and the evaluation module is not included in the scope of sup- when selecting the units.
ply; please order separately. 5)
Maximum protection by fuse for overload relay, type of coordination "2".
"Fuse Values in Connection with Contactors" see
1)
The current measuring modules with an Order No. ending with "2" are - "Configuration Manual for Configuring SIRIUS – Selection Data for Load
designed for mounting onto contactor and stand-alone installation. For Feeders in Fuseless and Fused Designs"
3TF68/3TF69 contactors, direct mounting is not possible. - "Configuration Manual for Configuring SIRIUS Innovations – Selection
2) Data for Load Feeders in Fuseless and Fused Designs".
The current measuring modules with an Order No. ending with "1" are 6)
designed for stand-alone installation. The modules with an Order No. with "G" in penultimate position are
equipped with a straight-through transformer.
Accessories
Size of con- Version For over- DT Order No. Price PU Pack PG
tactor load relays per PU (UNIT, Units
SET, M)
Connecting cables (necessary accessories)

For connection between evaluation module
and current measuring module
S00 ... S3 • Length 0.1 m 3RB24, } 3RB29 87-2B 1 1 unit 41F
(only for mounting of the evaluation mod- 3RB29
ule directly onto the current measuring
module)
3RB29 87-2. S00 ... S12 • Length 0.5 m 3RB24, } 3RB29 87-2D 1 1 unit 41F
3RB29
Additional general
Additional generalaccessories
accessoriessee
seepage
page3/57.
3/57.

Accessories for 3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24 Accessories for 3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24
Overview
Overload relays for High-Feature applications • Terminal covers for the 3RB29 current measuring modules
sizes S6 and S10/S12
The following optional accessories are available for the 3RB22 to
3RB24 solid-state overload relays: • Box terminal blocks for the 3RB29 current measuring modules
sizes S6 and S10/S12
• Operator panel for the evaluation modules 3RB24
• Push-in lugs for screw fixing for 3RB22 to 3RB24 evaluation
• Manual 3RB24 modules and 3RB29 06 current measuring modules
• Sealable cover for the evaluation modules 3RB22 to 3RB24

Accessories for overload relay 3RB24
Version For over- DT Order No. Price PU Pack PG
load relays per PU (UNIT, Units
SET, M)
Operator panels for evaluation modules

Operator panels (set) 3RB24 A 3RA69 35-0A 1 1 unit 42F
1 set comprises:
• 1 x operator panel
• 1 x 3RA69 36-0A enabling module
• 1 x 3RA69 33-0B interface cover
3RA69 35-0A • 1 x fixing terminal
Note:
The connecting cable between the evaluation
module and the operator panel is not included
in the scope of supply; please order sepa-
7
rately.
Connecting cable 3RB24 } 3UF79 33-0BA00-0 1 1 unit 42J
Length 2 m (round),
for connecting the evaluation module to the
operator panel
Enabling modules (replacement) 3RB24 A 3RA69 36-0A 1 1 unit 42F
Interface covers 3RB24 A 3RA69 33-0B 1 5 units 42F
1) The manual is also available as a free PDF download on the Internet at Additional general accessories see next page.
www.siemens.com/sirius/support "Manuals/Operating Instructions".

Illustrations are approximate Siemens IC 10 · 2012 Industrial
7/137
Controls Catalog
SIRIUS 3RB2• Solid-State Overload Relays
• Revised 3RB24 Solid-State Overload Relays
10/18/15 Accessories for 3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24
Accessories for 3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24
General accessories
Version Size For over- Order No. PU Pack
load relays (UNIT, Units
SET, M)
Sealable covers for evaluation modules

For covering the setting knobs -- 3RB22 to 3RB29 84-2 1 10 units
3RB24
3RB29 84-2
Terminal covers for current measuring modules
Covers for cable lugs and busbar con-
nections
• Length 100 mm S6 3RB29 56 3RT19 56-4EA1 1 1 unit
• Length 120 mm S10/S12 3RB29 66 3RT19 66-4EA1 1 1 unit
• Length 25 mm S6 3RB29 56 3RT19 56-4EA2 1 1 unit
• Length 30 mm S10/S12 3RB29 66 3RT19 66-4EA2 1 1 unit
Covers for screw terminals S6 3RB29 56 3RT19 56-4EA3 1 1 unit
between contactor and overload relay, S10/S12 3RB29 66 3RT19 66-4EA3 1 1 unit
without box terminals
(1 unit required per combination)
Box terminal blocks for current measuring modules
• Up to 70 mm2 S61) 3RT19 55-4G
7
3RB29 56 1 1 unit
• Up to 120 mm2 S6 3RB29 56 3RT19 56-4G 1 1 unit
• Up to 240 mm2 S10/S12 3RB29 66 3RT19 66-4G 1 1 unit
Technical specifications for conductor cross-sections see "Reference
Manual for Protection Equipment–
3RT19 5.-4G 3RU1, 3RB2 Overload Relays".
Push-in lugs for evaluation modules and current measuring modules
For screw fixing the evaluation modules -- 3RB22 to 3RP19 03 1 10 units
3RB24
3RP19 03
For screw fixing the current measuring S00 ... S3 3RB29 06 3RB19 00-0B 100 10 units
modules
(2 units per module)
3RB19 00-0B
1) In the scope of supply for 3RT10 54-1 contactors (55 kW).
Version Size Color For over- Order No. PU Pack

load relays (UNIT, Units
SET, M)

Spring-type
terminals
Screwdrivers Length approx. 200 Titanium Main and 3RA29 08-1A 1 1 unit
For all SIRIUS mm, gray/ auxiliary cir-
devices with spring- 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm black, cuit connec-
3RA29 08-1A
type terminals partially tion: 3RB2
insulated
Blank labels
Unit labeling 20 mm x 7 mm Titanium 3RB24 3RT29 00-1SB20 100 340 units
plates1) gray
for SIRIUS devices 20 mm x 7 mm Pastel 3RB22, 3RT29 00-1SB20 100 340 units
turquoise 3RB23
NSB0_01429b
3RT19 00-1SB20
1)
murrplastik Systemtechnik GmbH
(see "Appendix" "External Partners").

OverloadRelays
Overload Relays
SIRIUSSolid-State
3RB24 3RB2 Solid-State
OverloadOverload
Relays Relays
3RB24 for
3RB24 for IO-Link,
IO-Link, up
upto
to630
630AA
for High-Feature
applications
Type – Overload relay of evaluation modules 3RB24 83-4A.1
Size of contactor S00 ... S10/S12
General data
Trips in the event of Overload, phase failure and phase unbalance (> 40 % according to NEMA),
+ ground fault (connectable and disconnectable) and activation of the thermis-
tor motor protection (with closed PTC sensor circuit)
Trip class acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30 adjustable
Overload warning Yes, from 1.125 x Ie for symmetrical loads
and from 0.85 x Ie for unsymmetrical loads
Reset and recovery
• Reset options after tripping Manual and automatic RESET, electrical remote RESET or through IO-Link
• Recovery time
- For automatic RESET min - for tripping due to overcurrent: 3 (stored permanently)
- for tripping due to a ground fault: no automatic RESET
- For manual RESET min - for tripping due to overcurrent: 3 (stored permanently)
- For remote RESET min - for tripping due to overcurrent: 3 (stored permanently)
Features
• Display of operating state on device Yes, with 4 LEDs
- Green LED "DEVICE/IO-Link"
7
- Red "Ground Fault" LED

- Red "Thermistor" LED
- Red "Overload" LED
• TEST function Yes, test of LEDs, electronics, auxiliary contacts and wiring of control circuit by
pressing the button TEST/RESET / self-monitoring
• RESET button Yes, with the TEST/RESET button
• STOP button No
Explosion protection – Safe operation of motors with "increased
safety EEX e and explosion-proof
enclosure EEx d" type of protection
EC type test certificate number according to On request
directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
• Operation °C -25 ... +60
• Permissible rated current
- Temperature inside control cabinet 60 °C % 100
- Temperature inside control cabinet 70 °C % On request
Repeat terminals
• Coil repeat terminals Not required
• Auxiliary contact repeat terminal Not required
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP20: Current measuring modules in sizes S6 and S10/S12 with busbar
connection in conjunction with the cover
Touch protection acc. to IEC 61140 Finger-safe: Current measuring modules in sizes S6 and S10/S12 with busbar
connection in conjunction with the cover
Shock resistance with sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 15/11
- Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 (corresponds to degree of severity 3) kV 2 (power ports), 1 (signal ports)
- Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 (corresponds to degree of severity 3) kV 2 (line to earth), 1 (line to line)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – emitted interference Degree of severity A according to EN 55011 (CISPR 11) and
EN 55022 (CISPR 22)
Resistance to extreme climates – air humidity % 100
Dimensions "Dimensional drawings" see "Manual for SIRIUS 3RB24 Solid-State Overload
Relay for IO-Link".
Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 2 000
Type of mounting
• Evaluation modules Stand-alone installation
• Current measuring module Size S00 to S3: Stand-alone installation,
S6 and S10/S12: stand-alone installation or mounting onto contactors

7/130 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
Overload
OverloadRelays
Relays
• Revised • 3RB24Solid-State
SIRIUS 3RB2 Solid-StateOverload
OverloadRelays
Relays
3RB24 for IO-Link,
3RB24 for IO-Link,upupto
to630
630AA
10/18/15 for High-Feature applications

H
Dimensions of evaluation modules (W x H x D) mm 45 x 111 x 95
D
W
Auxiliary circuit
Number of auxiliary switches 1 CO contact, 1 NO contact connected in series internally
Auxiliary contacts – assignment • 1 CO contact for selecting the contactor (for reversing starter func-
tion), actuated by the control system
• 1 NO contact for normal switching duty, actuated by the control sys-
tem (opens automatically when tripping occurs)
Auxiliary contacts – contact rating
• NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15, rated operational current Ie at Ue
- 24 V A 6
- 120 V A 6
- 125 V A 6
- 250 V A 3
• NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15, rated operational current Ie at Ue
- 24 V A 6
- 120 V A 6
- 125 V A 6
- 250 V A 3
• NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13, rated operational current Ie at Ue
- 24 V A 2
- 60 V A 0.55
- 110 V A 0.3
- 125 V A 0.3
7
- 250 V A 0.2
• Conventional thermal current Ith A 5
• Contact reliability (suitability for PLC control; 17 V, 5 mA) Yes
• With fuse, operational class gG A 6
• With miniature circuit breaker, C characteristic A 1.6
Protective separation between auxiliary conducting paths V 300
acc. to IEC 60947-1
CSA, UL, UR rated data
Auxiliary circuit – switching capacity B300, R300
Conductor cross-sections of the auxiliary circuit

• Solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4)1), 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)1)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 --
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)1), 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)1)
• Stranded mm2 --

• Solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 –
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
1) If two different conductor cross-sections are

connected to one clamping point, both
cross-sections must be in the range specified

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 7/131
OverloadRelays
Overload Relays
SIRIUSSolid-State
3RB24 3RB2 Solid-State
OverloadOverload
Relays Relays • Revised •
3RB24 for
3RB24 for IO-Link,
IO-Link, up
upto
to630
630AA
for High-Feature
applications 10/18/15

Control and sensor circuit as well as the analog output
Rated control supply voltage Us
• DC V 24 through IO-Link
Operating range
• DC 0.85 × Us min ≤ Us ≤ 1.1 × Us max
Rated power
• DC W 0.5
Mains buffering time ms 200
Thermistor motor protection (PTC thermistor detector)
• Summation cold resistance kΩ ≤ 1.5
• Response value kΩ 3.4 ... 3.8
• Return value kΩ 1.5 ... 1.65
Ground-fault detection The information refers to sinusoidal residual currents at 50/60 Hz.
• Tripping value I∆
- For 0.3 × Ie < Imotor < 2.0 × Ie > 0.3 × Ie
- For 2.0 × Ie < Imotor < 8.0 × Ie > 0.15 × Imotor
• Response time ttrip ms 500 ... 1 000
Analog output1)
• Output signal mA 4 ... 20
• Measuring range 0 ... 1.25 × Ie
4 mA corresponds to 0 × Ie
7
16.8 mA corresponds to 1.0 × Ie

20 mA corresponds to 1.25 × Ie
• Load, max. Ω 100
Conductor cross-sections for the control and sensor circuit
as well as the analog output

• Solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4)2), 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)2)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 —
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)2), 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)2)
• Stranded mm2 —

• Solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 —
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Stranded mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
1) Analog input modules, e.g. SM 331, must be configured for 4-wire measuring
transducers. The analog input module may not supply current to the
analog output of the 3RB24 overload relay.

7/132 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
SIRIUS 3RB2 Solid-State Overload Relays 3RB24 Solid-State Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24 3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24
Overview
The current measuring modules are designed as system com-
ponents for connecting to evaluation units 3RB22 to 3RB24. Us-
ing these evaluation units the motor current is measured and the
measured value sent to the evaluation unit for evaluation. The
current measuring modules in sizes S00 to S3 up to 55 mm wide
are equipped with straight-through transformers and can be
snap-fitted under the evaluation units. The larger evaluation units
are installed directly on the contactor or as stand-alond units.
SIRIUS 3RB29 06 current measuring module
Type – Overload relays: Current measuring 3RB29 06 3RB29 56 3RB29 66
modules
Size of contactor S00/S0 S2/S3 S6 S10/S12
H
Dimensions of current measuring modules mm 45 x 84 x 45 55 x 94 x 72 120 x 119 x 145 145 x 147 x 148
D
W
(W x H x D)
Main circuit
7
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 1 000

Type of current
• Alternating current Yes, 50/60 Hz ± 5 %
Current setting A 0.3 ... 3; 10 ... 100 20 ... 200 63 ... 630
2.4 ... 25
• With fuse without contactor See "Selection and ordering data" on page 3/55.
• With fuse and contactor See
- "Configuration Manual for Configuring SIRIUS – Selection Data for
Load Feeders in Fuseless and Fused Designs"
- "Configuration Manual for Configuring SIRIUS Innovations – Selection
Data for Load Feeders in Fuseless and Fused Designs"
Protective separation between main and auxiliary conducting paths V 690 for grounded networks, otherwise 600
acc. to IEC 60947-1 (pollution degree 2)

7/134 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24 3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24
Type – Overload relays: Current measuring 3RB29 06 3RB29 56 3RB29 66

modules
Size of contactor S00/S0 S2/S3 S6 S10/S12
H
Dimensions of current measuring modules mm 45 x 84 x 45 55 x 94 x 72 120 x 119 x 145 145 x 147 x 148
D
W
(W x H x D)
Conductor cross-sections of the main circuit
Connection type Screw terminals with box terminal
Terminal screw mm — 4 mm Allen screw 5 mm Allen screw

Operating devices mm — 4 mm Allen screw 5 mm Allen screw
Prescribed tightening torque Nm — 10 ... 12 20 ... 22
• Solid mm2 — — —
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 — With 3RT19 55-4G 2 × (50 ... 185),
box terminal: rear clamping point
2 × (1 × max. 50, only:
1 × max. 70), 1 × (70 ... 240)
1 × (10 ... 70)
With 3RT19 56-4G Rear clamping point
box terminal: only:
2 × (1 × max. 95, 1 × (120 ... 185)
1 × max. 120),
1 × (10 ... 120)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 — With 3RT19 55-4G 2 × (50 ... 185),
2 × (1 × max. 50, only:
1 × max. 70), 1 × (70 ... 240)
1 × (10 ... 70)
With 3RT19 56-4G Rear clamping point
7
box terminal: only:
2 × (1 × max. 95, 1 × (120 ... 185)
1 × max. 120),
1 × (10 ... 120)
• Stranded mm2 — With 3RT19 55-4G 2 × (70 ... 240),
2 × (max. 70), only:
1 × (16 ... 70) 1 × (95 ... 300)
With 3RT19 56-4G
box terminal: Rear clamping point
2 × (max. 120), only:
1 × (16 ... 120) 1 × (120 ... 240)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG — With 3RT19 55-4G 2 × (2/0 ... 500 kcmil),
2 × (max. 1/0), only:
1 × (6 ... 2/0) 1 × (3/0 ... 600 kcmil)
With 3RT19 56-4G
box terminal: Rear clamping point
2 × (max. 3/0), only:
1 × (6 ... 250 kcmil) 1×
(250 kcmil ... 500 kcmil)
• Ribbon cables (number x width x thickness) mm — With 3RT19 55-4G 2 × (20 × 24 × 0.5),
box terminal: 1 × (6 × 9 × 0.8 ...
2 × (6 × 15.5 × 0.8), 20 × 24 × 0.5)
1 × (3 × 9 × 0.8 ...
6 × 15.5 × 0.8)
With 3RT19 56-4G
box terminal:
2 × (10 × 15.5 × 0.8),
1 × (3 × 9 × 0.8 ...
10 × 15.5 × 0.8)
Connection type Busbar connections
Terminal screw — M8 × 25 M10 x 30
Prescribed tightening torque Nm — 10 ... 14 14 ... 24
• Solid with cable lug mm2 — 16 ... 951) 50 ... 2402)
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 — 25 ... 1201) 70 ... 2402)
• AWG cable, solid or stranded, with cable lug AWG — 4 ... 250 kcmil 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
• with connecting bar (max. width) mm — 17 25
Connection type Straight-through transformers
Diameter of opening mm 7.5 14 25 —
1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46235 with conductor 2) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46234 with conductor
cross-sections of 95 mm2 and more, the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover cross-sections of 240 mm2 and more as well as to DIN 46235 with conduc-
must be used to ensure phase spacing. tor cross-sections of 185 mm2 and more, the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal
cover must be used for to keep the phase clearance.

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 7/135
© Siemens AG 2015
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
• Revised • SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODE
SIMOCODEpropro3UF7
3UF7
10/18/15 motor management and control devices
General data
■ Overview
Expansion SIMOCODE
possibilities pro C pro S pro V1)
PROFIBUS PROFIBUS PROFIBUS2) PROFINET
Operator panels ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Operator panels -- -- ✓ ✓
with display
Current measuring ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
modules
Current/voltage -- -- ✓ ✓
measuring
modules
Decoupling -- -- ✓ ✓
modules
Expansion
modules:
• Digital modules -- -- 2 2
• Fail-safe digital -- -- 1 1
SIMOCODE pro S for efficient entry into motor management and modules3)
SIMOCODE pro V for maximum functionality • Analog modules -- -- 1 2
• Ground-fault -- -- 1 1
SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management modules
system for motors with constant speeds in the low-voltage • Temperature -- -- 1 2
performance range. It optimizes the connection between I&C modules
and motor feeder, increases plant availability and allows signifi- • Multifunction -- 1 -- --
cant savings to be made for installation, commissioning, opera- modules
tion and maintenance of a system. ✓ Available
When SIMOCODE pro is installed in the low-voltage switch- -- Not available
board, it is the intelligent interface between the higher-level 1)
Maximum of 5 expansion modules.
automation system and the motor feeder and includes the 2)
When an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module are
following: used, more restrictions on the number of expansion modules connectable
• Multifunctional, electronic full motor protection that is per basic unit must be observed, see page 10/13.
3)
independent of the automation system The fail-safe digital module can be used instead of one of the two digital
modules.
• Integrated control functions instead of hardware for the motor
control
• Detailed operating, service and diagnostics data Per feeder each system always comprises one basic unit and
one separate current measuring module. The two modules are
• Open communication through PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET and connected together electrically through the system interface
10
OPC UA with a connection cable and can be mounted mechanically
• Safety relay function for the fail-safe disconnection of motors connected as a unit (one behind the other) or separately (side
up to SIL 3 (IEC 61508, IEC 62061) or PL e with Category 4 by side). The motor current to be monitored is decisive only for
(EN ISO 13849-1) the choice of the current measuring module.
• SIMOCODE ES is the software package for SIMOCODE pro An operator panel for mounting in the control cabinet door is
parameterization, start up and diagnostics. optionally connectable through a second system interface on
the basic unit. Both the current measuring module and the
Device series operator panel are electrically supplied by the basic unit through
SIMOCODE pro is structured into several functionally tiered the connection cable. More inputs, outputs and functions can be
series: added to the SIMOCODE pro V and SIMOCODE pro S by
• SIMOCODE pro C, as a compact system for direct-on-line means of optional expansion modules, thus supplementing the
starters and reversing starters or for controlling a motor starter inputs and outputs already existing on the basic unit. With the
protector DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital modules it is
• SIMOCODE pro S - the smart system for direct-on-line, also possible to integrate the fail-safe disconnection of motors in
reversing, and wye-delta starters or for controlling a motor the SIMOCODE pro V motor management system.
starter protector or soft starter. Its expandability with a multi- All modules are connected by connection cables. The connec-
function module provides comprehensive input/output project tion cables are available in various lengths. The maximum
data volume, precise ground-fault detection via the 3UL23 distance between the modules (e.g. between the basic unit and
residual-current transformers and temperature measurement. the current measuring module) must not exceed 2.5 m. The total
• SIMOCODE pro V, as a variable system with all control func- length of all the connection cables per system interface of the
tions and with the possibility of expanding the inputs, outputs basic unit may be up to 3 m.
and functions of the system at will using expansion modules

Siemens IC 10 · 2015 10/5
© Siemens AG 2015
• Revised
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control •
Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices 10/18/15
General data
Article No. scheme
Digit of the Article No. 1st - 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th
@@@@ @ @ @ – 1 @ @ 0 @ – 0
SIMOCODE pro motor management system 3UF7
Type of unit/module @
Functional version of the unit/module @ @
Connection type of the current transformer @
Voltage version @
Color @
Example 3UF7 0 1 0 – 1 A B 0 0 – 0
Note:
The Article No. scheme is presented here merely for information For your orders, please use the article numbers quoted in the
purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the catalog in the Selection and ordering data.
article numbers.
■ Benefits
General customer benefits Recording of measuring curves
• Integrating the whole motor feeder into the process control by SIMOCODE pro can record measuring curves and therefore is
means of PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET or OPC UA significantly able, for example, to present the progression of motor current
reduces the wiring outlay between the motor feeder and PLC during motor start up.
• Decentralization of the automated processes by means of
configurable control and monitoring functions in the feeder Flexible motor control implemented with integrated control
saves resources in the automation system and ensures full functions (instead of comprehensive hardware interlocks)
functionality and protection of the feeder even if the I&C or bus Many predefined motor control functions have already been
system fails integrated into SIMOCODE pro, including all necessary logic
• The acquisition and monitoring of operating, service and operations and interlocks:
diagnostics data in the feeder and process control system • Overload relays
increases plant availability as well as maintenance and • Direct-on-line and reversing starters
service-friendliness
• Wye/delta starters (also with direction reversal)
• The high degree of modularity allows users to perfectly imple-
ment their plant-specific requirements for each motor feeder • Two speeds, motors with separate windings
(pole-changing starter); also with direction reversal
• The SIMOCODE pro system offers functionally graded and
space-saving solutions for each customer application • Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings
(also with direction reversal)
• The replacement of the control circuit hardware with inte-
grated control functions decreases the number of hardware • Positioner actuation
components and wiring required and in this way limits stock • Solenoid valve actuation
keeping costs and potential wiring errors
10
• Actuation of a motor starter protector
• The use of electronic full motor protection permits better • Soft starter actuation (also with direction reversal)
utilization of the motors and ensures long-term stability of the
tripping characteristic and reliable tripping even after years of These control functions are predefined in SIMOCODE pro and
service can be freely assigned to the inputs and outputs of the device
(including PROFIBUS/PROFINET).
Multifunctional, electronic full motor protection
for rated motor currents up to 820 A These predefined control functions can also be flexibly adapted
to each customized configuration of a motor feeder by means of
SIMOCODE pro offers comprehensive protection of the motor freely configurable logic modules (truth tables, counters, timers,
feeder by means of a combination of different, multi-step and edge evaluation, etc.) and with the help of standard functions
delayable protection and monitoring functions: (power failure monitoring, emergency start, external faults, etc.),
• Inverse-time delayed electronic overload protection without additional auxiliary relays being necessary in the control
(CLASS 5 to 40) circuit.
• Thermistor motor protection SIMOCODE pro makes a lot of additional hardware and wiring in
• Phase failure/unbalance protection the control circuit unnecessary which results in a high level of
• Stall protection standardization of the motor feeder in terms of its design and
circuit diagrams.
• Monitoring of adjustable limit values for the motor current
• Voltage and power monitoring
• Monitoring of the power factor (motor idling/load shedding)
• Ground-fault monitoring
• Temperature monitoring, e.g. over PT100/PT1000
• Monitoring of operating hours, downtime and number
of starts etc.

Siemens IC 10 · 2015 10/7
© Siemens AG 2015
SIMOCODE 3UF
• Revised • Motor Management and Control Devices
General data
Detailed operational, service and diagnostics data Communications
SIMOCODE pro makes different operating, service and diagnos- SIMOCODE pro has either an integrated PROFIBUS DP inter-
tics data available and helps to detect potential faults in time and face (SUB-D or terminal connection) or a PROFINET interface
to prevent them by means of preventative measures. In the event (2 x RJ45).
of a malfunction, a fault can be diagnosed, localized and recti-
fied very quickly – there are no or very short downtimes. Fail-safe disconnection through PROFIBUS or PROFINET with
the PROFIsafe profile is also possible in conjunction with a fail-
Operating data safe controller (F-CPU) and the DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital
• Motor switching state derived from the current flow in the module.
main circuit SIMOCODE pro for PROFIBUS
• All phase currents SIMOCODE pro for PROFIBUS supports for example:
• All phase voltages and phase-to-phase voltages • Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1)
• Active power, apparent power and power factor • Extensive diagnostics and hardware interrupts
• Phase unbalance and phase sequence • Time stamp with high timing precision (SIMATIC S7) for
• Ground-fault current SIMOCODE pro V
• Time to trip • DPV1 communication after the Y-Link
• Motor temperature SIMOCODE pro for PROFINET
• Remaining cooling time etc.
SIMOCODE pro for PROFINET supports for example:
Service data • Line and ring bus topology thanks to an integrated switch
• Motor operating hours • Media redundancy via MRP protocol
• Motor stop times • Operating, service and diagnostics data via standard
• Number of motor starts web browser
• Number of overload trips • OPC UA server for open communication with visualization and
• Interval for compulsory testing of the enabling circuits control system
• Energy consumed • NTP-synchronized time
• Internal comments stored in the device etc. • Interval function and measured values for power management
via PROFIenergy
Diagnostics data • Module exchange without PC memory module through
• Numerous detailed early warning and fault messages proximity detection
• Internal device fault logging with time stamp • Extensive diagnostics and maintenance alarms
• Time stamping of freely selectable status, alarm or fault System redundancy with SIMOCODE pro for PROFINET
messages etc.
The device supports the system redundancy mechanisms of
Easy operation and diagnostics PROFINET IO and therefore can be operated directly on fault-
Operator panel tolerant systems such as SIMATIC S7-400 H. As such,
SIMOCODE pro can provide decisive added value also for the
The operator panel is used to control the motor feeder and can field level of plants in which plant availability and control system
10
replace all conventional pushbuttons and indicator lights to save redundancy are priorities.
space. It makes SIMOCODE pro or the feeder directly operable
in the control cabinet. It features all the status LEDs available on Notes on safety
the basic unit and externalizes the system interface for simple For connection of an internal system to an external system,
parameterization or diagnosis on a PC/PG. suitable protective measures must be taken to ensure safe
Operator panel with display operation of the plant (including IT security, e.g. network
segmentation).
As an alternative to the 3UF720 standard operator panel for
SIMOCODE pro V, there is also an operator panel with display: More information, see www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
the 3UF721 is thus able in addition to indicate current measured For SIMOCODE pro motor management and control devices
values, operational and diagnostics data or status information of with communication function, see page 10/14 onwards.
the motor feeder at the control cabinet. The pushbuttons of the
operator panel can be used to control the motor. Also, when Accessories, see page 10/19 onwards.
SIMOCODE pro V PROFINET is used it is possible to set More information, see Chapter 14 "Parameterization,
parameters such as rated motor current, limit values, etc. Configuration and Visualization with SIRIUS" or Industry Mall.
directly via the operator panel with display.
Autonomous operation
An essential feature of SIMOCODE pro is the autonomous exe-
cution of all protection and control functions, even when commu-
nication to the I&C system is interrupted. This means that even
in the event of bus system or automation system failure, full func-
tionality of the feeder is ensured or a specific behavior can be
parametrized in case of such a fault, e.g. targeted shutdown of
the feeder or execution of particular parametrized control mech-
anisms (such as reversal of the direction of rotation).

10/8 Siemens IC 10 · 2015
© Siemens AG 2015
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices • Revised •
SIMOCODEpro
SIMOCODE pro3UF7
3UF7
General data
Basic Optional expansions

Current Basic unit Operator Multifunction module
measuring module panel
SIMOCODE pro S
PROFIBUS
Functions
Current/voltage Basic unit Operator Earth-fault Temperature Digital modules Analog
measuring module panel module module Standard Fail-safe module
SIMOCODE pro V
PROFINET
PROFIsafe
PROFIBUS
Functions
PROFIsafe
IC01_00273
10
SIMOCODE pro V and SIMOCODE pro S: System structure

10/6 Siemens IC 10 · 2015
© Siemens AG 2015
• Revised • SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices
SIMOCODEpro
SIMOCODE pro3UF7
3UF7
General data
Advantages through energy efficiency The innovative SIRIUS industrial controls products can also
make a major contribution to the energy efficiency of a plant
(www.siemens.com/sirius/energysaving).
The SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 motor management system makes
the following contribution to the energy efficiency of the plant as
a whole:
• Energy consumption:
Clear display of the energy consumption of a motor feeder or
process element by means of the acquisition and transmission
of all operating and consumption date, such as current,
voltage, active and reactive power, energy consumption,
motor temperature etc.
• Energy management:
4
0 24
Evaluation of energy measured values (e.g. limit value moni-

1_ 0
IC0
toring) with exporting of local or central actions (= forwarding

to higher-level)
• PROFIenergy:
We offer you a unique portfolio for industrial energy manage- SIMOCODE pro V PROFINET supports the PROFIenergy
ment, using an energy management system that helps to functions. Reduced energy consumption thanks to automatic
optimally define your energy needs. We split up our industrial disconnection in the intervals and forwarding of the measured
energy management into three phases – identify, evaluate, values for higher-level energy management systems.
and realize – and we support you with the appropriate hardware
and software solutions in every process phase.
■ Application
SIMOCODE pro is often used for automated processes where Safety technology for SIMOCODE pro
plant downtimes are very expensive (e.g. steel or cement indus-
try) and where it is important to prevent plant downtimes through The safe disconnection of motors in the process industry
detailed operating, service and diagnostics data or to localize is becoming increasingly important as the result of new and
the fault very quickly in the event of a fault. revised standards and requirements in the safety technology
field.
SIMOCODE pro is modular and space-saving and suited espe-
cially for operation in motor control centers (MCCs) in the With the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe expansion
process industry and for power plant technology. modules it is easy to integrate functions for fail-safe disconnec-
tion into the SIMOCODE pro V motor management system while
Applications retaining service-proven concepts. The strict separation of
safety functions and operational functions proves particularly
Protection and control of motors in hazardous areas for types of advantageous for planning, configuring and construction.
protection EEx e/d according to ATEX guideline 94/9/EC Seamless integration in the motor management system leads
• With heavy starting (paper, cement, metal and water to greater transparency for diagnostics and during operation of
10
industries) the system.
• In high-availability plants (chemical, oil, raw material process- Suitable components for this purpose are the DM-F Local and
ing industries, power plants) DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe expansion modules, depending on
the requirements:
• The DM-F Local fail-safe digital module for when direct
assignment between a fail-safe hardware shutdown signal
and a motor feeder is required, or
• The DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module for when
a fail-safe controller (F-CPU) creates the signal for the
disconnection and transmits it in a fail-safe manner through
PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe or PROFINET/PROFIsafe to the motor
management system

Siemens IC 10 · 2015 10/9
© Siemens AG 2015

• Revised •
General data
■ More information
Configuration instructions when using an operator panel Protective separation
with display and/or a decoupling module with
SIMOCODE pro V with PROFIBUS All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are safely isolated from each other
in accordance with IEC 60947-1. That is, they are designed with
If you want to use an operator panel with display and/or a decou- double creepages and clearances. In the event of a fault, there-
pling module in the SIMOCODE pro V system with PROFIBUS, fore, no parasitic voltages can be formed in neighboring circuits.
then the following configuration instructions concerning the type The instructions of Test log No. 2668 must be complied with.
and number of connectable expansion modules must be
observed. Types of protection EEx e and EEx d
The following tables show the maximum possible configuration The overload protection and the thermistor motor protection of
of the expansion modules for the various combinations. the SIMOCODE pro system comply with the requirements for
overload protection of explosion-proof motors to the type of
The DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe expansion protection:
modules behave in this connection like digital modules for • EEx d "flameproof enclosure" e.g. according to IEC 60079-1
standard applications.
• EEx e "increased safety" e.g. according to IEC 60079-7
Use of an operator panel with display
When using SIMOCODE pro devices with a 24 V DC control volt-
Digital Digital Analog Temperature Ground-fault age, electrical separation must be ensured using a battery or
module 1 module 2 module module module a safety transformer according to IEC 61558-2-6.
Only operator panel with display for SIMOCODE pro V EC type test certificate: BVS 06 ATEX F 001
(24 V DC or 110 ... 240 V AC/DC) Test log: BVS PP 05.2029 EG.
Max. 4 expansion modules can be used
Selection data for type-tested assemblies/load feeders
Operator panel with display and current/voltage measurement
with SIMOCODE pro V (110 ... 240 V AC/DC) For configuration tables according to type of coordina-
Max. 3 expansion modules can be used or: tion "1" or "2", see
-- -- ✓ ✓ -- • Manual "Configuring SIRIUS",
Article No.: 3ZX1012-0RA21-0AC0,
✓ Available
-- Not available
• Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations",
Article No.: 3ZX1012-0RA21-1AC0,
Use of a decoupling module http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39714188
(voltage measurement in insulated networks)
• SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS System Manual,
Digital Digital Analog Temperature Ground-fault
Article No.: 3UF7970-0AA00-0,
module 1 module 2 module module module http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20017780
SIMOCODE pro V (24 V DC) • SIMOCODE pro PROFINET System Manual,
✓1) ✓1) ✓ ✓ ✓ Article No.: 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AC1,
SIMOCODE pro V (110 ... 240 V AC/DC) http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/61896631
✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ System manual
✓1) ✓1) --
10
✓ ✓
The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes the motor man-
✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- agement system and its functions in detail. It provides informa-
✓ -- ✓ -- ✓ tion on configuration, start up, servicing and maintenance.
✓ Available A typical example of a reversing starter application is used to
-- Not available
teach the user quickly and practically how to use the system.
1)
In addition to help on how to identify and rectify faults in the
No bistable relay outputs and no more than 5 of 7 relay outputs active event of a malfunction, the manual also contains special infor-
simultaneously (> 3 s).
mation for servicing and maintenance. For selection of equip-
ment and for configuration, it is recommended to consult the
Use of a decoupling module system manual.
(voltage measurement in insulated networks)
in combination with an operator panel with display A detailed description of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
fail-safe expansion modules is provided in the system manual
Digital Digital Analog Temperature Ground-fault "SIMOCODE pro Safety Fail-Safe Digital Modules", which can be
module 1 module 2 module module module downloaded from the Internet.
SIMOCODE pro V (24 V DC)
Internet
✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓
✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ More information, see www.siemens.com/simocode.
SIMOCODE pro V (110 ... 240 V AC/DC)
✓1) -- ✓ ✓ ✓
✓ ✓ -- -- --
✓2) ✓2) ✓3) -- --
✓ -- -- ✓ ✓
✓ Available
-- Not available
1) No bistable relay outputs and no more than 3 of 5 relay outputs active
2) No bistable relay outputs and no more than 5 of 7 relay outputs active
3) Analog module output is not used.

10/13
Siemens IC 10 · 2015 Industrial Controls Catalog
SIMOCODE
SIMOCODE 3UF 3UF
MotorMotor Management
Management and Control
and Control DevicesDevices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Basic units motor management and control devices

Version Current setting Width DT Screw terminals PU PS* Weight
(UNIT, per PU
Order No. Price SET, M) approx.
A mm per PU
SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro C, basic unit 1
PROFIBUS DP interface, 12 Mbit/s, RS 485
4 I/3 O freely assignable,
input for thermistor connection,
monostable relay outputs,
rated control supply voltage Us:
• 24 V DC } 3UF7 000-1AB00-0 1 1 unit 0.350
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC } 3UF7 000-1AU00-0 1 1 unit 0.350
3UF7 000-1A.00-0
SIMOCODE pro V, basic unit 2

PROFIBUS DP interface, 12 Mbit/s, RS 485
can be expanded by expansion modules,
• 24 V DC } 3UF7 010-1AB00-0 1 1 unit 0.350
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC } 3UF7 010-1AU00-0 1 1 unit 0.350
3UF7 010-1A.00-0
SIMOCODE pro V PROFINET, basic unit 31)

ETHERNET/PROFINET IO,
OPC UA- server and web server, 100 Mbit/s,
2 x connection to bus through RJ45,
can be expanded by expansion modules,
• 24 V DC } 3UF7 011-1AB00-0 1 1 unit 0.350
3UF7 011-1A.00-0 • 110 ... 240 V AC/DC } 3UF7 011-1AU00-0 1 1 unit 0.350
Current measuring modules

• Straight-through 0.3 ... 3 45 } 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.100
3UF7 101-1AA00-0
10
transformers 2.4 ... 25 45 } 1 1 unit 0.150

10 ... 100 55 } 3UF7 102-1AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.350
20 ... 200 120 } 3UF7 103-1AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.600
• Busbar connections 20 ... 200 120 3UF7 103-1BA00-0 1 1 unit 1.000
63 ... 630 145 } 3UF7 104-1BA00-0 1 1 unit 1.750
3UF7 100-1AA00-0
Current/voltage measuring modules

For SIMOCODE pro V
Voltage measuring up to 6902)
if required in connection with a decoupling module
• Straight-through 0.3 ... 3 45 } 3UF7 110-1AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
transformers 2.4 ... 25 45 } 3UF7 111-1AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.200
10 ... 100 55 } 3UF7 112-1AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.400
20 ... 200 120 } 3UF7 113-1AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.700
3UF7 110-1AA00-0
• Busbar connections 20 ... 200 120 3UF7 113-1BA00-0 1 1 unit 1.000
63 ... 630 145 } 3UF7 114-1BA00-0 1 1 unit 1.750
Decoupling modules
For connecting upstream from a current/voltage measuring A 3UF7 150-1AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
module on the system interface when using voltage
detection in insulated, high-resistance or asymmetrically
grounded systems and in single-phase systems
3UF7 150-1AA00-0
1) When using an operator panel with display, the product version must be 2) Voltage measurement on ungrounded or high resistance grounded sys-
E07 or higher (from 08/2012). tems (HRG) require a decoupling module (3UF7 150-1AA00-0).

10/14
Industrial Controls Catalog Siemens IC 10 N · 12/2012 Illustrations similar
IC10N_10_03_Ccorp.fm Page 15 Friday, September 20, 2013 12:56 PM

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Basic units
Version DT Screw terminals PU PS* Weight

(UNIT, per PU
per PU
SIMOCODE pro (continued)
Operator panels
Installation in control cabinet door or front plate, } 3UF7 200-1AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.100
for plugging into basic unit,
10 LEDs for status indication and
user-assignable buttons for controlling the motor
3UF7 200-1AA00-0
Operator panel with display

for SIMOCODE pro V
Installation in control cabinet door or front plate, } 3UF7 210-1AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
for plugging into basic unit 2 and basic unit 3,
7 LEDs for status indication and
user-assignable buttons for controlling the motor,
multilingual display, e.g. for indication of measured
values, status information or fault messages
3UF7 210-1AA00-0
10

SIMOCODE
SIMOCODE 3UF 3UF
MotorMotor Management
Management and Control
and Control DevicesDevices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Expansion modules motor management and control devices

(UNIT, per PU
per PU
Expansion modules for SIMOCODE pro V
With SIMOCODE pro V, it is possible to expand the type
and number of inputs and outputs in steps. Each expansion
module has two system interfaces on the front. Through the
one system interface the expansion module is connected to
the system interface of the SIMOCODE pro V using a con-
nection cable; through the second system interface, further
expansion modules or the operator panel can be con-
nected.
The power supply for the expansion modules is provided
by the connection cable through basic unit 2 or basic unit
3.
Note:
Please order connection cable separately, see page 3/73.
.
Digital modules
Up to two digital modules can be used to add additional
binary inputs and relay outputs to the basic unit. The input
circuits of the digital modules are supplied from an external
power supply.
4 binary inputs and 2 relay outputs,
Up to 2 digital modules can be connected
Relay outputs Input voltage
Monostable 24 V DC } 3UF7 300-1AB00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
3UF7 300-1AU00-0 110 ... 240 V AC/DC } 3UF7 300-1AU00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
Bistable 24 V DC } 3UF7 310-1AB00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
110 ... 240 V AC/DC } 3UF7 310-1AU00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
Analog modules
Basic unit can be optionally expanded with analog inputs } 3UF7 400-1AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
and outputs (0/4 ... 20 mA) by means of the analog
module.
2 inputs (passive) for input and 1 output for output of
0/4 ... 20 mA signals, max. 1 analog module can be
connected per basic unit 2 and max. 2 analog modules
per basic unit 3
10
3UF7 400-1AA00-0
Ground-fault modules
Instead of ground-fault monitoring using the current mea- } 3UF7 500-1AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
suring modules or current/voltage measuring modules, it
may be necessary, especially in high-impedance grounded
networks, to implement ground-fault monitoring for smaller
ground fault currents using a summation current trans-
former.
1 input for connecting a 3UL22 summation current trans-
former, up to 1 ground-fault module can be connected
3UF7 500-1AA00-0
Temperature modules
Independently of the thermistor motor protection of the 3UF7 700-1AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
basic units, up to 3 analog temperature sensors can be
evaluated using a temperature module.
Sensor types: PT100/PT1000, KTY83/KTY84 or NTC
3 inputs for connecting up to 3 analog temperature sen-
sors, up to 1 temperature module can be connected per
basic unit 2 and max. 2 temperature modules per basic
unit 3
3UF7 700-1AA00-0

10/16 Siemens IC 10 N · 12/2012 Illustrations similar
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor
SIMOCODE 3UF Management and Control
Motor Management Devices
and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
motor management and control devices Fail-safe expansion modules

(UNIT, per PU
per PU
Fail-safe expansion modules for SIMOCODE pro V
Thanks to the fail-safe expansion modules, SIMOCODE pro
V can be expanded with the function of a safety relay for
the fail-safe disconnection of motors. A maximum of 1 fail-
safe digital module can be connected; it can be used
instead of a digital module.
The fail-safe expansion modules are equipped likewise with
two system interfaces at the front for making the connection
to other system components. Unlike other expansion mod-
ules, power is supplied to the modules through a separate
terminal connection.
Note:
Please order connection cable separately, see page 3/73.
DM-F Local fail-safe digital modules 1)

For fail-safe disconnection using a hardware signal
2 relay enabling circuits, joint switching;
2 relay outputs, common potential disconnected fail-safe;
inputs for sensor circuit, start signal, cascading and feed-
back circuit, safety function adjustable using DIP switches
Rated control supply voltage Us:
• 24 V DC 3UF7 320-1AB00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC 3UF7 320-1AU00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
3UF7 320-1AB00-0
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital modules1)
For fail-safe disconnection using PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe or
PROFINET/PROFIsafe
2 relay enabling circuits, joint switching;
2 relay outputs, common potential disconnected fail-safe;
1 input for feedback circuit; 3 binary standard inputs
Rated control supply voltage Us:
• 24 V DC 3UF7 330-1AB00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC 3UF7 330-1AU00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
3UF7 330-1AB00-0
1) Only possible with basic unit 2, product version E07 and higher
(from 05/2011) or basic unit 3
10

Illustrations similar Siemens IC 10 N · 12/2012 10/17
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Accessories
Version DT Order No. List PU PS* Weight
Price $ (UNIT, per PU
per PU SET, approx.
M)
kg
Connection cables (essential accessory)
Connection cables
In different lengths for connecting basic unit, cur-
rent measuring module, current/voltage measuring
module, operator panel or expansion modules or
decoupling module:
• Length 0.025 m (flat) } 3UF7 930-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.010
3UF7 932-0AA00-0 • Length 0.3 m (flat) } 3UF7 935-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.020
• Length 0.5 m (round) 3UF7 932-0BA00-0 1 1 unit 0.050
• Length 1.0 m (round) } 3UF7 937-0BA00-0 1 1 unit 0.100
• Length 2.5 m (round) } 3UF7 933-0BA00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
PC cables and adapters
For PC/PG communication with SIMOCODE pro } 3UF7 940-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
through the system interface, for connecting to the
serial interface of the PC/PG
USB PC cables } 3UF7 941-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
For connecting to the USB interface of a PC/PG,
for communication with SIMOCODE pro through the
system interface
3UF7 940-0AA00-0 USB/serial adapters 3UF7 946-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.150

To connect an RS 232 PC cable
to the USB port of a PC
Memory modules
Memory modules for SIMOCODE pro C and } 3UF7 900-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.010
SIMOCODE pro V
For saving the complete parameter assignment of a
SIMOCODE pro C or SIMOCODE pro V system
Memory modules for SIMOCODE pro V PROFINET } 3UF7 901-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.010
For saving the complete parameter assignment of a
3UF7 900-0AA00-0 SIMOCODE pro V PROFINET system
Interface covers
For system interface } 3UF7 950-0AA00-0 1 5 units 0.100
3UF7 950-0AA00-0
Addressing plugs
For assigning the PROFIBUS addresses without } 3UF7 910-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.030
using a PC/PG
On SIMOCODE pro through the system interface
3UF7 910-0AA00-0
Door adapters
For external connection of the system interface 3UF7 920-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.030
Outside, for example, a control cabinet
3UF7 920-0AA00-0
Adapters for operator panel

The adapter enables the smaller 3UF7 20 operator 3UF7 922-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.150
panel from SIMOCODE pro to be used in a front
panel cutout in which previously, e. g. after a
change of system, a larger 3UF5 2 operator panel
from SIMOCODE-DP had been used; degree of
protection IP54
3UF7 922-0AA00-0

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Version DT Order No. List PU PS* Weight

Price $ (UNIT, per PU
per PU SET, approx.
M)
kg
Labeling strips
• For pushbuttons of the 3UF7 20 operator panel 3UF7 925-0AA00-0 100 400 units 15.000
• For pushbuttons of the 3UF7 21 operator panel with 3UF7 925-0AA01-0 100 600 units 15.000
display
• For LEDs of the 3UF7 20 operator panel 3UF7 925-0AA02-0 100 1200 units 15.000
Note: Pre-punched labeling strips for user-specific
printing using the free inscription software "SIRIUS
Label Designer" on a laser printer.
Note the software version!
Download from
3UF7 925-0AA02-0 http://www.siemens.com/simocode.
Push-in lugs
For screw fixing
e. g. on mounting plate, 2 units required per
device
• Can be used with 3UF7 1.0, 3UF7 1.1 and } 3RB19 00-0B 100 10 units 0.100
3RB19 00-0B 3UF7 1.2
• Can be used with 3UF7 0, 3UF7 3, 3UF7 4, 3UF7 5 } 3RP19 03 1 10 units 0.002
and 3UF7 7
Terminal covers
Covers for cable lugs and busbar connections
• Length 100 mm, can be used for } 3RT19 56-4EA1 1 1 unit 0.070
3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0
• Length 120 mm, can be used for } 3RT19 66-4EA1 1 1 unit 0.130
3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0
3RT19 56-4EA1 Covers for box terminals
• Length 25 mm, can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0 } 3RT19 56-4EA2 1 1 unit 0.030
• Length 30 mm, can be used for 3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0 3RT19 66-4EA2 1 1 unit 0.040
Covers for screw terminals
between contactor and current measuring module
or current/voltage measuring module for direct
3RT19 56-4EA2 mounting
• Can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0 } 3RT19 56-4EA3 1 1 unit 0.020
• Can be used for 3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0 } 3RT19 66-4EA3 1 1 unit 0.060
Box terminal blocks
• Up to 70 mm2, can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0 } 3RT19 55-4G 1 1 unit 0.230
3RT19 5.-4G
Bus terminations
Bus termination module with separate supply voltage for
terminating the bus following the last unit on the bus
line. Supply voltage:
• 115/230 V AC 3UF1 900-1KA00 1 1 unit 0.286
• 24 V DC 3UF1 900-1KB00 1 1 unit 0.192
System manuals
SIMOCODE pro
languages:
• English 3UF7 970-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 0.850
3UF7 970-0AA01-0

SIMOCODE 3UF3UF
SIMOCODE Motor Management
Motor and
Management andControl
ControlDevices
Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Accessories
Version DT Order No. Price PU PS* Weight

per PU (UNIT, per PU
SET, M) approx.
kg.
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic

Floating license for one user
Engineering software, type of delivery: on CD incl. electronic
documentation, 3 languages (German/English/French),
communication through system interface
• License key on USB stick, Class A } 3ZS1 312-4CC10-0YA5 1 1 unit 0.230
• License key download, Class A } 3ZS1 312-4CE10-0YB5 1 1 unit 0.230
3ZS1 312-4CC10-0YA5
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard
communication through system interface,
integrated graphics editor
• License key on USB stick, Class A 3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YA5 1 1 unit 0.230
Upgrade for SIMOCODE ES 2004 and later A 3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YE5 1 1 unit 0.230
Floating license for one user, engineering software,
type of delivery: on CD incl. electronic documentation,
3 languages (German/English/French), license key on USB
stick, Class A, communication through system interface,
integrated graphics editor
Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic } 3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YD5 1 1 unit 0.230
license key on USB stick, Class A, 3 languages
(German/English/French), communication through the
system interface, integrated graphics editor
Software Update Service } 3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YL5 1 1 unit 0.230
For 1 year with automatic extension, assuming the current
software version is in use, engineering software,
communication through system interface, integrated
graphics editor
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium
10
communication through PROFIBUS/PROFINET or system
interface, integrated graphics editor, STEP7 Object Manager
• License key on USB stick, Class A } 3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YA5 1 1 unit 0.230
Upgrade for SIMOCODE ES 2004 and later A 3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YE5 1 1 unit 0.230
3 languages (German/English/French),
license key on USB stick, Class A,
communication through PROFIBUS/PROFINET or system
interface, integrated graphics editor, STEP7 Object Manager
Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard A 3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YD5 1 1 unit 0.230
license key on USB stick, Class A, 3 languages
(German/English/French), communication through
PROFIBUS/PROFINET or the system interface, integrated
graphics editor, STEP7 Object Manager
Software Update Service } 3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YL5 1 1 unit 0.230
For 1 year with automatic extension, assuming the current
software version is in use, engineering software,
communication through PROFIBUS/PROFINET or
system interface, integrated graphics editor,
STEP7 Object Manager
Notes:
Please order PC cable separately, see page 3/73.

Illustrations similar Siemens IC 10 N · 12/2012 10/21
SIMOCODE3UF
SIMOCODE 3UFMotor
Motor Management
Management andand Control
Control Devices
Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Accessories
Version DT Order No. Price PU PS* Weight

per PU (UNIT, per PU
SET, M) approx.
kg.
SIMOCODE pro Function Block Library for SIMATIC PCS 7

Engineering software V7 3UF7 982-0AA10-0 1 1 unit 0.240
For one engineering station (single license)
including runtime software for execution of the
AS modules in an automation system
(single license), German/English/French
Scope of supply:
AS modules and faceplates for integrating
SIMOCODE pro into the PCS 7 process control system,
for PCS 7 version V 7.0/V 7.1
3UF7 982-0AA00-0
Type of delivery:
Software and documentation on CD,
one license for one engineering station,
one license for one automation system
Runtime license V7 3UF7 982-0AA11-0 1 1 unit 0.001
For execution of the AS modules in an
automation system (single license)
Required for using the AS modules of the engineering
software V7 or the engineering software migration V7-V8 on
an additional automation system within a plant
Type of delivery:
one license for one automation system,
without software and documentation
Upgrade for PCS 7 function block library } 3UF7 982-0AA13-0 1 1 unit 0.240
SIMOCODE pro, V 6.0 or V 6.1
to version SIMOCODE pro V 7.0/V 7.1
Scope of supply:
AS modules and faceplates for integrating
SIMOCODE pro into the PCS 7 process control system,
for PCS 7 version V 7.0 or V 7.1
Type of delivery:
Software and documentation on CD,
one license for one engineering station,
one license for one automation system
Engineering software migration V7-V8 } 3UF7 982-0AA20-0 1 1 unit 0.212
10
For upgrading (migrating) an existing engineering software

V7 of the SIMOCODE pro Function Block Library for PCS 7
Conditions of use:
Availability of the engineering software V7 (license) of the
SIMOCODE pro Function Block Library for PCS 7 for the PCS
7 version V 7.0 or V 7.1
The engineering software migration V7-V8 can be installed
directly onto a system with PCS 7 version V 8.0;
installation of the previous version is unnecessary.
Scope of delivery:
AS modules and faceplates for integrating SIMOCODE pro
into the PCS 7 process control system,
for PCS 7 version V 8.0
Type of delivery:
software and documentation on CD,
license for upgrading an existing license
for one engineering station and a plant's assigned
runtime licenses
Note:
Programming and Operating Manual SIMOCODE pro Library for
PCS 7 see

Industrial
thereof. Catalog
10/22 Siemens IC 10 N · 12/2012 Illustrations similar
SIMOCODE 3UF3UF
SIMOCODE Motor Management
Motor and
Management andControl
ControlDevices
Devices
• Revised • SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
General data
Current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules

Type 3UF7 1.0 3UF7 1.1 3UF7 1.2 3UF7 1.3 3UF7 1.4
Main circuit
Current setting Ie A 0.3 ... 3 2.4 ... 25 10 ... 100 20 ... 200 63 ... 630
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690; 3UF7 103 and 3UF7 104: 1 000 (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6; 3UF7 103 and 3UF7 104: 8
Type of current Three-phase current
Short-circuit Additional short-circuit protection is required in the main circuit
Accuracy of current measurement (in the range of % ±3
1 x minimum current setting Iu to 8 x maximum current setting Io)
Typical voltage measuring range
• Phase-to-phase voltage/line-to-line voltage (e.g. UL1 L2) V 110 ... 690
• Phase voltage (e.g. UL1 N) V 65 ... 400
Accuracy
• Voltage measurement % ±3 (typical)
(phase voltage UL in the range 230 ... 400 V)
• Power factor measurement % ±5 (typical)
(in the rated load range power factor = 0.4 ... 0.8)
• Apparent power measurement (in the rated load range) % ±5 (typical)
Notes on voltage measurement
• In insulated, high-resistance or asymmetrically grounded forms In these networks the current/voltage measuring module can be used only
of power supply system and for single-phase systems with an upstream decoupling module on the system interface.
• Supply lines for voltage measurement In the supply lines from the main circuit for voltage measurement of
SIMOCODE pro it may be necessary to provide additional line protection!
Digital modules
Type 3UF7300, 3UF7310, 3UF7600
Control circuits
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 300 (at pollution degree 3)
Relay outputs
• Number 2 monostable or bistable relay outputs (depending on the version)
• Specified short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts
(relay outputs)
- Fuse links 6 A gG operational class; 10 A quick-response (IEC 60947-5-1)
- Miniature circuit breakers 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1); 6 A, C characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
• Rated uninterrupted current A 6
• Rated switching capacity
- AC-15 6 A/24 V AC 6 A/120 V AC 3 A/230 V AC
- DC-13 2 A/24 V DC 0.55 A/60 V DC 0.25 A/125 V DC
Inputs (binary) 4 inputs, electrically isolated, supplied externally with 24 V DC or
10
110 ... 240 V AC/DC depending on the version, connected to a common
potential
Ground-fault modules or multifunction modules
Type 3UF7510, 3UF7600
Control circuit
Connectable residual-current transformers 3UL23
Type of current for monitoring Type A (AC and pulsating DC residual currents)
Adjustable response value 30 mA ... 40 A
Relative measurement error 7.5 %
Temperature modules
Type 3UF7600, 3UF7700
Sensor circuit
Typical sensor circuit
• PT100 mA 1 (typical)
• PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC mA 0.2 (typical)
Open-circuit/short-circuit detection
• Sensor type PT100/PT1000 KTY83-110 KTY84 NTC
- Open circuit --
- Short-circuit
- Measuring range °C -50 ... +500 -50 ... +175 -40 ... +300 80 ... 160
Measuring accuracy at 20 °C ambient temperature (T20) K <± 2
Deviation due to ambient temperature (in % of measuring range) % 0.05 per K deviation from T20
Conversion time ms 500
Connection type Two- or three-wire connection
Detection possible
-- Detection not possible

Siemens IC 10 N · 12/2012 10/11
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor
SIMOCODE 3UF Management and Control
Motor Management Devices
and Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
General data
Current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules

Type 3UF7 1.0 3UF7 1.1 3UF7 1.2 3UF7 1.3 3UF7 1.4
Main circuit
Current setting Ie A 0.3 ... 3 2.4 ... 25 10 ... 100 20 ... 200 63 ... 630
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690; 3UF7 103 and 3UF7 104: 1 000 (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6; 3UF7 103 and 3UF7 104: 8
Type of current Three-phase current
Short-circuit Additional short-circuit protection is required in the main circuit
Accuracy of current measurement (in the range of % ±3
1 x minimum current setting Iu to 8 x maximum current setting Io)
Typical voltage measuring range
• Phase-to-phase voltage/line-to-line voltage (e.g. UL1 L2) V 110 ... 690
• Phase voltage (e.g. UL1 N) V 65 ... 400
Accuracy
• Voltage measurement % ±3 (typical)
(phase voltage UL in the range 230 ... 400 V)
• Power factor measurement % ±5 (typical)
(in the rated load range power factor = 0.4 ... 0.8)
• Apparent power measurement (in the rated load range) % ±5 (typical)
Notes on voltage measurement
• In insulated, high-resistance or asymmetrically grounded forms In these networks the current/voltage measuring module can be used only
of power supply system and for single-phase systems with an upstream decoupling module on the system interface.
• Supply lines for voltage measurement In the supply lines from the main circuit for voltage measurement of
SIMOCODE pro it may be necessary to provide additional line protection!
Digital modules
Type 3UF7 3
Control circuits
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 300 (at pollution degree 3)
Relay outputs
• Number 2 monostable or bistable relay outputs (depending on the version)
• Specified short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts
(relay outputs)
- Fuse links 6 A gG operational class; 10 A quick-response (IEC 60947-5-1)
- Miniature circuit breakers 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1); 6 A, C characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
• Rated uninterrupted current A 6
• Rated switching capacity
- AC-15 6 A/24 V AC 6 A/120 V AC 3 A/230 V AC
- DC-13 2 A/24 V DC 0.55 A/60 V DC 0.25 A/125 V DC
Inputs (binary) 4 inputs, electrically isolated, supplied externally with 24 V DC or
10
110 ... 240 V AC/DC depending on the version, connected to a common
potential
Ground-fault modules
Type 3UF7 5
Control circuits
Connectable 3UL22 summation current transformer A 0.3/0.5/1
with rated fault currents IN
• IGround fault ≤ 50 % IN No tripping
• IGround fault ≥ 100 % IN Tripping
Response delay (conversion time) ms 300 ... 500, additionally delayable
Temperature modules
Type 3UF7 7
Sensor circuit
Typical sensor circuit
• PT100 mA 1 (typical)
• PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC mA 0.2 (typical)
Open-circuit/short-circuit detection
• Sensor type PT100/PT1000 KTY83-110 KTY84 NTC
- Open circuit —
- Short-circuit
- Measuring range °C -50 ... +500 -50 ... +175 -40 ... +300 80 ... 160
Measuring accuracy at 20 °C ambient temperature (T20) K <± 2
Deviation due to ambient temperature (in % of measuring range) % 0.05 per K deviation from T20
Conversion time ms 500
Connection type Two- or three-wire connection
Detection possible
— Detection not possible

Siemens IC 10 N · 12/2012 10/11
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Basic unit 1, SIMOCODE pro C, 3UF7 000 Basic unit 2, SIMOCODE pro V, 3UF7 010
3UF7 100, 3UF7 101 current measuring module 3UF7 102 current measuring module
(straight-through transformer) (straight-through transformer)
3UF7 103 current measuring module (straight-through transformer)

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
3UF7 103 current measuring module (busbar connection) 3UF7 113 current/voltage measuring module (busbar connection)
3UF7 104 current measuring module (busbar connection) 3UF7 114 current/voltage measuring module (busbar connection)
145
48 25
11
88
122
147
9
125
32
67
149
6
NSA0_00404

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
3UF7 110, 3UF7 111 current/voltage measuring module 3UF7 112 current/voltage measuring module
(straight-through transformer) (straight-through transformer)
3UF7 113 current/voltage measuring module (straight-through transformer)

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
3UF7 200 operator panel 3UF7 920 door adapter
36
29
96 NSA0_00385a 8 29 7
89
3UF7 3 digital module

3UF7 210 operator panel with display 3UF7 4 analog module
3UF7 5 ground-fault module
3UF7 7 temperature module
3UF7 15 decoupling module
60
55
NSA0_00463b
96 29
33
91,5
3UF7 922 adapter for operator panel

63
51
100 37
62
38
NSA0_00464

IEC Power Control
Combination Starters & Starters for Group Installation
Contents
Self Protected Motor Starters per UL 508 Type E 3RA6
3RA61 / 3RA62 up to 32 A 3RA64 / 3RA65 up to 32 A 3RA68 up to 100 A

for mounting rail, surface, for mounting rail, surface, for 3RA6 direct and
comb busbar, infeed system Page comb busbar, infeed system Page reversing starters Page
• Direct start, Reversing duty 4/7 • Direct start, Reversing duty 4/8 • Infeed Components 4/16-4/19
• Accessories 4/9-4/13 • Accessories 4/9-4/13 • Accessories 4/20-4/21
Combination starters & starters for group installation 3RA1/3RA2
3RA1/3RA2 up to 100 A 3RA11/3RA22 up to 100 A

for mounting rail and Fast Bus for mounting rail and Fast Bus
busbar systems Page busbar systems Page
• Direct start 4/36-4/39 • Reversing duty 4/40-4/43
• Accessories 4/44-4/52 • Accessories 4/44-4/52
Technical data 4/53-4/58 Technical data 4/53-4/58

Installation guidelines 4/59-4/68 Installation guidelines 4/59-4/68
Circuit diagrams 4/68 Circuit diagrams 4/68
Dimension drawings 4/69-4/72 Dimension drawings 4/69-4/72

Compact Combination Starters
SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starters
Load Feeders and Motor Starters for •
Use in the Control
Revised • SIRIUS
Cabinet
General data
Overview
3RA6 fuseless compact starters and infeed system for 3RA6 Very high operational reliability
The high short-circuit breaking capacity and defined shut-down
when the end of service life is reached means that the
SIRIUS compact starter achieves a very high level of operational
reliability that would otherwise have only been possible with
considerable additional outlay. This sets it apart from devices
with similar functionality.
Safe disconnection
The auxiliary switches (NC contacts) of the 3RA6 compact
starters are designed as mirror contacts. This enables their use
for safe disconnection - e.g. EMERGENCY STOP up to SIL 1
(IEC 62061) or PL c (ISO 13849-1) or, if used in conjunction with
an additional infeed contactor, up to SIL 3 (IEC 62061) or PL e
(ISO 13849-1).
Communications integration through AS-Interface
To enable communications integration through AS-Interface
there is an AS-i add-on module available in several versions for
mounting instead of the control circuit terminals on the
SIRIUS compact starter.
3RA62 reversing starter The design of the AS-i add-on module permits a group of up to
Integrated functionality 62 feeders with a total of four cables to be connected to the
control system. This reduces wiring work considerably com-
The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters are a generation of innova- pared to the parallel wiring method.
tive load feeders with the integrated functionality of a motor
starter protector, contactor and electronic overload relay. Communications integration using IO-Link
In addition, various functions of optional mountable accessories Up to 4 compact starters in IO-Link version (reversing and
(e.g. auxiliary switches, surge suppressors) are already direct-on-line starters) can be connected together and conve-
integrated in the SIRIUS compact starter. niently linked to the IO-Link master through a standardized
8
IO-Link connection. The SIRIUS 4SI electronic modules are used
e.g. as IO-Link masters for connection to the SIMATIC ET 200S
distributed I/O system.
The IO-Link connection enables a high density of information in
the local range.
Details of the communications integration using IO-Link, see
Chapter 14 Communications.
The diagnostics data of the process collected by the 3RA6
compact starter, e.g. short circuit, end of service life, limit
position etc., are not only indicated on the compact starter itself
but also transmitted to the higher-level control system through
IO-Link.
Thanks to the optionally available operator panel, which can be
installed in the control cabinet door, it is easy to control the 3RA6
compact starters with IO-Link from the control cabinet door.
Permanent wiring / easy replacement
Using the SIRIUS infeed system for 3RA6 (see page 4/16) it is
possible to carry out the wiring in advance without a compact
starter needing to be connected.
3RA6 compact starters with the integrated functionality of a motor starter

A compact starter is very easily replaced simply by pulling it out
protector, contactor and electronic overload relay. of the device without disconnecting the wiring.
Applications Even with screw connections or mounting on a standard mount-
ing rail there is no need to disconnect any wiring (on account of
The SIRIUS compact starters can be used wherever standard the removable main and control circuit terminals) in order to
three-phase motors up to 32 A (20 HP/460 V) are directly replace a compact starter.
started.
Consistent solution from the infeed to the motor feeder
The compact starters are not suitable for the protection of
DC loads. The SIRIUS infeed system for 3RA6 with integrated PE bar is
offered as a user-friendly possibility of feeding in summation
Approvals according to IEC, UL, CSA and CCC standards have currents up to 100 A with a maximum conductor cross-section of
been issued for the compact starters. 2/0 AWG and connecting the motor cable directly without
Low variance of devices additional intermediate terminals.
Thanks to wide setting ranges for the rated current and wide Screw and spring-type terminals
voltage ranges, the equipment variance is greatly reduced The SIRIUS compact starters and the infeed system for 3RA6 are
compared to conventional load feeders. available with screw and spring-type terminals.

8/51Controls Catalog
Siemens IC 10 · 2015 Industrial
ForCompact
OperationCombination
in the ControlStarters
Cabinet
SIRIUS • Revised • SIRIUS3RA6
SIRIUS 3RA6Compact
CompactStarters
Starters
General data
To comply with the clearance and creepage distances Note:
demanded according to UL 508 there are the following infeed
possibilities: More technical specifications can be found in the system
manual at
Type of infeed Feeder terminal Type www.siemens.com/compactstarter
(according to UL 508,
type E) Overload tripping times
Conventional wiring Terminal block for "Self- 3RV29 28-1H The overload tripping time can be set on the device to less than
Protected Combination
Motor Controller 10 s (CLASS 10) and less than 20 s (CLASS 20 for heavy start-
(Type E)" ing). As the breaker mechanism still remains closed after an
overload, resetting is possible by either local manual reset or au-
Three-phase busbars Three-phase infeed ter- 3RV29 25-5EB
minal for constructing toreset after 3 minutes cooling time.
"Type E Starters", With autoreset there is no need to open the control cabinet.
UL 508
Infeed systems for 3RA6 Infeed on left, 3RA68 13-8AB (screw Diagnostics options
50/70 mm2, screw terminals), The compact starter provides the following diagnostics options
terminal with 3 sockets, 3RA68 13-8AC
outgoing terminal on site:
(spring-type terminals)
with screw/spring-type • With LEDs
connections, - Connection to the control voltage
including PE bar
- Position of the main contacts
SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters • With mechanical indication
- Tripping due to overload
The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters are universal motor starters - Tripping due to short-circuit
according to IEC/EN 60947-6-2. As control and protective - Tripping due to malfunction (end of service life reached
switching devices (CPS) they can connect, convey and discon- because of worn switching contacts or a worn switching
nect the thermal, dynamic and electrical loads from short-circuit mechanism or faults in the control electronics)
currents up to Iq = 53 kA, i.e. they are essentially weld-free. They
combine the functions of a motor starter protectors, a contactor These states can also be evaluated in the higher-level control
and a solid-state overload relay in a single enclosure and can be system:
used wherever standard induction motors up to 32 A (up to ap- • With conventional wiring using the integrated auxiliary and
prox. 20 HP at 480 V AC) are started directly. Available versions signaling switches of the compact starter
are the direct-on-line starters with 45 mm width and the revers-
ing starters with 90 mm width. • With AS-Interface or IO-Link in even greater detail using the
respective communication interface
The reversing starter version comes with not only an internal
electrical interlock but also with a mechanical interlock to prevent Four complement variants for 3RA6 compact starters
simultaneous actuation of both directions of rotation. • For standard mounting rail or screw mounting:
basic version including 1 pair of main circuit terminals and
3RA6 compact starters are supplied in 5 current setting ranges. 1 pair of control circuit terminals
6
The 3RA61 and 3RA62 have 2 control voltage ranges (AC/DC),
the 3RA64 and 3RA65 have one control voltage range (DC): • For standard mounting rail or screw mounting when using the
AS-i add-on module:
Current At 460 V AC for Rated control supply voltage for comes without control circuit terminals because the AS-i add-
setting induction on module is attached in lieu of them
range motors 3RA61, 3RA62 3RA64, 3RA65
compact starters compact starters • For use with the infeed system for 3RA6:
Standard for IO-Link
output P without main circuit terminals because they are supplied with
the infeed system and the expansion modules
A HP V AC/DC V DC
• For use with the infeed system for 3RA6 and AS-i add-on
0.1 ... 0.4 0.12 24 24 module:
0.32 ... 1.25 0.43 ... 1.68 110 ... 240 without main or control circuit terminals as they are not needed
1 ... 4 1.34 ... 5.36 • The control circuit terminals are always required by the com-
pact starters for IO-Link; the main circuit terminals depend on
3 ... 12 4.02 ... 16.1 the use of the infeed system.
8 ... 32 10.7 ... 42.9
Additional components of the 3RA6
Note: The two control circuit terminals on the 3RA61/3RA62 allow
The 3RA1 motor starters can be used as motor starters access to signalling contacts for overload (1 CO) and short-
> 32 A up to 100 A. circuit / malfunction (1 NO). Furthermore, the 3RA61 has two
auxiliary contacts (1 NO + 1 NC) for indicating the position of the
The SENTRON 3VL circuit breakers and the SIRIUS 3RT main contacts, while the 3RA62 has one auxiliary contact (1 NO)
contactors can be used for motor starters >100 A. per direction of rotation per main contact.
Operating conditions
The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters are suitable for use in nearly
all climates. They are intended for use in enclosed rooms in
which no severe operating conditions (such as dust, caustic va-
pors, hazardous gases) prevail. Suitable covers must be pro-
vided for installation in dusty and damp locations.
The SIRIUS compact starters are generally designed to degree
of protection IP20. The permissible ambient temperature during
operation is -20 to +60 °C.
The maximum short-circuit current based on UL testing is 30 kA
up to 12 A and 15 kA for the 8 ... 32 A versions at 480 V.
Industrial Controls Catalog SIRIUS Innovations Supplement 2012 6/33
3RA6 Compact Starters SIRIUS
Overview
Function
Trip units Control through AS-Interface
The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters are equipped with the follow- For control through AS-Interface, the AS-i add-on module is
ing trip units: mounted instead of the two control circuit terminals on the
• Inverse-time delayed solid-state overload release SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters (direct-on-line starters and re-
• Instantaneous electronic trip unit (electromagnetic short- versing starters).
circuit release)
The AS-i auxiliary voltage and the AS-i data line are installed on
The overload releases can be adjusted in accordance with the the AS-i add-on module easily and quickly without tools by
load current. means of two plug-in connector blocks with insulation displace-
ment connection.
The electronic trip units are permanently set to a value 13 times
the maximum rated current of the 4 A, 12 A and 32 A starter and The AS-i add-on module is equipped with the latest A/B technol-
thus enable trouble-free starting of motors. ogy and has an addressing socket onboard.
Trip classes An addressing unit is required and can be ordered for address-
ing the AS-i add-on module.
The trip classes of electronically delayed trip units are based on
the tripping time (tA) at 7.2 times the set current in the cold state Bit assignment (see below) is similar to that for the SIRIUS motor
(excerpt from IEC 60947-4): starters, which means that the same programming can be used
here.
CLASS 10: 4s < tA < 10 s
DI 0.0 ready
CLASS 20: 6s < tA < 20 s (for heavy starting)
DI 0.1 motor on
The compact starter must trip within this time.
DI 0.2 group fault
Disconnection due to malfunction DI 0.3 group warning
The following malfunctions can be detected:
DO 0.0 motor on or motor clockwise
• End of service life
- Worn switching contacts (for electrical endurance see DO 0.1 motor counterclockwise
"Technical data")
- Worn switching mechanisms (for mechanical endurance see A 24 V DC PELV power supply unit according to EN 61140 safety
"Technical data") class III is required for the auxiliary voltage.
• Faults in the control electronics The AS-i data line is supplied with voltage by means of a
30 V DC AS-i power supply unit and is controlled by means of
Short-circuit protection the AS-i master.
If a short-circuit occurs, the short-circuit releases of the The AS-i add-on modules are available in the following five
SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters isolate the faulty motor starter versions:
from the network and thus prevent further damage. The short-
circuit releases are factory-set to 14 times the value of the max- • AS-i add-on module for compact starters
imum rated current In of the device. • AS-i add-on module for compact starters with two local inputs
for safe disconnection of the "clockwise rotation" or "counter-
The SIRIUS compact starters have a short-circuit breaking ca- clockwise rotation" outputs
pacity up to 30 kA at a voltage of 480 V AC.
• AS-i add-on module with two free external inputs
Overload relay function • AS-i add-on module with two free external outputs
In the event of an overload, the compact starter switches off • AS-i add-on module with one free external input and output
without the breaker mechanism being opened.
The AS-i add-on module can only be used with compact starters
The overload trip can be signaled to the higher-level control sys- with a control voltage of 24 V AC/DC.
tem through an integrated signal switch.
Integrated auxiliary switches
The overload signal can be reset automatically or by means of a
manual reset. The control circuit terminals of the SIRIUS 3RA6 compact start-
ers have the following connections:
• A1/A2 for the control voltage for 3RA61,
A1/A2 and B1/B2 for the control voltage for 3RA62
• "Overload" signal switch
• "Fault" signal switch, e. g. "short-circuit"
• Internal auxiliary switch for position of the main contacts (in
case of direct-on-line starters: 1 NO + 1 NC with mirror contact
to the main contact; in case of reversing starters: 2 NO)

Overview
Design
Mounting 3) By integrating in the infeed system for 3RA6
The 3RA6 compact starters can be mounted in 4 ways: The SIRIUS compact starters can be assembled with the infeed
system for 3RA6 (see "Infeed system for 3RA6").
1) By snapping onto a TH 35 standard mounting rail
The SIRIUS compact starters can be snapped onto a standard
mounting rail according to EN 60715 with a width of 35 mm.
ck
cli
NSB0_01880
NSB0_01882
2) By screw fixing to a flat surface 4) By using the 8US busbar adapter for Fast Bus systems with
60 mm busbar center-to-center clearance
The SIRIUS compact starters are suitable for screw fixing to a flat
surface. One set of 3RA69 40-0A adapters for screw connection
(including push-in lugs) is required per direct-on-line starter, two
sets are required per reversing starter.
2
4
1
5
1
5
3 6
5
1
2
NSB0_01881
3
NSB0_01921
1 ... 5: order of mounting steps 4

4
1 ... 6: order of mounting steps

3RA6 Compact Starters SIRIUS
Overview
4a) By using an additional device holder in the case of

reversing starters
When the 8US busbar adapter is used on Fast Bus systems with
60 mm busbar center-to-center clearance, a device holder is
needed in addition for a reversing starter on account of its dou-
ble width.
The reversing starter is mounted in the same way as the direct-
on-line starter on the busbar adapter. Then the device holder is
snapped on alongside the busbar adapter.
NSB0_01922
Mounting regulations
The module can be installed horizontally or vertically. For the dif-
ferent installations attention must be paid however to limit values
for protective separation according to IEC/EN 60947-2 of the
compact starters (for details see the "Technical specifications").
> 30
NSB0_01883
> 10 > 10
> 30
The following distances must be observed when mounting the

compact starters:
• Lateral clearance to grounded components: 10 mm
• Arcing space at top and bottom: 30 mm

For Operation in the Control Cabinet
SIRIUS 3RA6•Compact
SIRIUS Revised •Starters SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starters
3RA61, 3RA62 compact starters 3RA61, 3RA62 compact starters
10/15/15 3RA61 direct-on-line starters
3RA61 direct-on-line starters

Width 90 mm
Width 45 mm One set of
One set of 3RA69 3RA69
40-0A adapters 40-0A adapters
is required for is required for
screw fixing. screw fixing.
3RA61 20-1CB32 3RA61 20-2EB32 3RA62 50-1CP32 3RA62 50-1CP32
Standard induction motor Setting range Order No. Order No.

4-pole at 400 V AC1) for solid-state overload release
Standard output P
HP A
For use with the infeed system for 3RA6 and with
the AS-i add-on module or as a replacement device,
without main and control circuit terminals
-- 0.1 ... 0.4 3RA6@@0-0A @32 —
1/2 0.32 ... 1.25 3RA6@@0-0B @32 —
2 1 ... 4 3RA6@@0-0C @32 —
7 1/2 3 ... 12 3RA6@@0-0D @32 —
20 8 ... 32 3RA6@@0-0E @32 —
Screw terminals2) Spring-type terminals
For standard mounting rail or screw mounting,

including 1 pair of main circuit terminals and
1 pair of control circuit terminals
-- 0.1 ... 0.4 3RA6@@0-1A @32 3RA6@@0-2A @32
6
1/2 0.32 ... 1.25 3RA6@@0-1B @32 3RA6@@0-2B @32

2 1 ... 4 3RA6@@0-1C @32 3RA6@@0-2C @32
7 1/2 3 ... 12 3RA6@@0-1D @32 3RA6@@0-2D @32
20 8 ... 32 3RA6@@0-1E @32 3RA6@@0-2E @32
For use in the infeed system for 3RA6,
without main circuit terminals, with 1 pair of control circuit terminals
-- 0.1 ... 0.4 3RA6@@0-1A @33 3RA6@@0-2A @33
1/2 0.32 ... 1.25 3RA6@@0-1B @33 3RA6@@0-2B @33
2 1 ... 4 3RA6@@0-1C @33 3RA6@@0-2C @33
7 1/2 3 ... 12 3RA6@@0-1D @33 3RA6@@0-2D @33
20 8 ... 32 3RA6@@0-1E @33 3RA6@@0-2E @33
For standard mounting rail or screw mounting
when using the AS-i add-on module
with 1 pair of main circuit terminals, without control circuit terminals
-- 0.1 ... 0.4 3RA6@@0-1A @34 3RA6@@0-2A @34
1/2 0.32 ... 1.25 3RA6@@0-1B @34 3RA6@@0-2B @34
2 1 ... 4 3RA6@@0-1C @34 3RA6@@0-2C @34
7 1/2 3 ... 12 3RA6@@0-1D @34 3RA6@@0-2D @34
20 8 ... 32 3RA6@@0-1E @34 3RA6@@0-2E @34
Order No. supplements for rated control supply voltage

• Direct-on-line starter 12 12
• Reversing duty starter 25 25
• 24 V AC/DC (for combining with AS-I add-on module) B B
• 110 … 240 V AC/DC P P
1)
Selection depends on the motor full load amps. Horse Power ratings pro-
vided for reference only.
2)
A set of 3RA69 40-0A adapters is required for screw mounting.


SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starters SIRIUS
3RA64, 3RA65 compact starters
for IO-Link
• Direct-on-line starters
• Rated control supply voltage 24 V DC
• Width 45 mm
3RA64 with 3RA69 11-1A • One set of 3RA69 40-0A adapters is required for screw fixing
auxilliary switch block
Standard induction motor 3-pole Setting range Screw Spring-type
at 460 V AC Standard output P for solid-state overload release terminals terminals
HP 1) A Order No. Order No.
For standard mounting rail or screw moutning, including 1 pair of
main circuit terminals and 1 pair of control circuit terminals
-- 0.1 … 0.4 3RA64 00-1AB42 3RA64 00-2AB42
½ 0.32 … 1.25 3RA64 00-1BB42 3RA64 00-2BB42
2 1…4 3RA64 00-1CB42 3RA64 00-2CB42
7½ 3 … 12 3RA64 00-1DB42 3RA64 00-2DB42
20 8 … 32 3RA64 00-1EB42 3RA64 00-2EB42
For use in the infeed system for 3RA6, without main circuit terminals,
with 1 pair of control circuit terminals
— 0.1 … 0.4 3RA64 00-1AB43 3RA64 00-2AB43
½ 0.32 … 1.25 3RA64 00-1BB43 3RA64 00-2BB43
2 1…4 3RA64 00-1CB43 3RA64 00-2CB43
7½ 3 … 12 3RA64 00-1DB43 3RA64 00-2DB43
20 8 … 32 3RA64 00-1EB43 3RA64 00-2EB43
• Reversing starters
• Rated control supply voltage 24 V DC
• Width 90 mm
• One set of 3RA69 40-0A adapters is required for screw fixing
3RA65 with 3RA69 11-1A
auxilliary switch block
For standard mounting rail or screw moutning, including 1 pair of
main circuit terminals and 1 pair of control circuit terminals
— 0.1 … 0.4 3RA65 00-1AB42 3RA65 00-2AB42
½ 0.32 … 1.25 3RA65 00-1BB42 3RA65 00-2BB42
2 1…4 3RA65 00-1CB42 3RA65 00-2CB42
7½ 3 … 12 3RA65 00-1DB42 3RA65 00-2DB42
20 8 … 32 3RA65 00-1EB42 3RA65 00-2EB42
For use in the infeed system for 3RA6, without main circuit terminals,
with 1 pair of control circuit terminals
— 0.1 … 0.4 3RA65 00-1AB43 3RA65 00-2AB43
½ 0.32 … 1.25 3RA65 00-1BB43 3RA65 00-2BB43
2 1…4 3RA65 00-1CB43 3RA65 00-2CB43
7½ 3 … 12 3RA65 00-1DB43 3RA65 00-2DB43
20 8 … 32 3RA65 00-1EB43 3RA65 00-2EB43
1) Selection depends on the motor full load amps. Horse power ratings provided for reference only.

Revised •Starters SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starters
Accessories
Overview
Accessories for SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters 8US Fast Bus busbar adapters for 60 mm systems
The following accessories are available for the 3RA6 compact The compact starters are mounted directly with the aid of busbar
starters: adapters on the Fast Bus busbar systems with 60 mm center-to-
• AS-i add-on module: see AS-Interface Add-On Modules for center clearance in order to save space and to reduce infeed
3RA6, page 4/14 times and costs. These starters are suitable for copper busbars
with a width from 12 to 30 mm. The busbars can be 4 to 5 mm
• External auxiliary switch blocks: Snap-on auxiliary switch as or 10 mm thick.
versions 2 NO, 2 NC and 1 NO +1 NC with screw or spring-
type connections; the contacts of the auxiliary switch block The 8US Fast Bus busbar system can be loaded with a maxi-
open and close jointly with the main contacts of the compact mum summation current of 630A.
starter. The NC contacts are designed as mirror contacts. The "reversing starter" version requires a device holder along
• Control kit: aid for manually closing the main contacts in order side the busbar adapter for lateral mounting.
to evaluate the wiring and motor direction under conditions of
short-circuit protection The compact starters are snapped onto the adapter and con-
nected on the line side. This prepared unit is then plugged di-
• Adapter for screw mounting the compact starter, including rectly onto the busbar system, and is thus connected both me-
push-in lugs chanically and electrically at the same time.
• Main circuit terminals: Available in screw and spring-type ter-
minals For more accessories such as incoming and outgoing
terminals, flat copper profiles etc., see Section 5 “Fastbus
• Main circuit terminals for mixed connection method: Busbar Systems”.
With the main circuit terminal for the mixed connection method
it is also possible in the main circuit to change over from the Accessories for operation with closed control cabinet doors
screw connection method on the incoming side to the spring- Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for standard and
type connection method on the outgoing side. emergency-stop applications are available for operating the
This enables for example the side-by-side mounting of several compact starter with closed control cabinet doors.
compact starters and their cost-effective connection using the
three-phase busbars on the infeed side. The motors are then Accessories for SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters in IO-Link
directly connected by the quick and reliably contacting version
spring-type connection method.
The following accessories are available specifically for the
Accessories for UL applications 3RA64, 3RA65 compact starters:
The terminal block for "Self-Protected Combination Motor • The 4SI SIRIUS solid-state module as IO-Link master allows
Controller", type E is available for complying with the clearance for the simple and economical connection of SIRIUS controls
and creepage distances according to UL 508. with IO-Link (e.g up to four groups of 4 compact starters) to
the multifunctional SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O system.
Accessories for infeed using three-phase busbar systems • Additional connection cables for side-by-side mounting of up
6
The three-phase busbars can be used as an easy, time-saving to 4 compact starters

and clearly arranged means of feeding SIRIUS 3RA6 compact • Operator panel for local control and diagnostics of up to
starters with screw connection. Motor starter protectors size S00 4 compact starters coupled to each other
and S0 can also be integrated.
The busbars are suitable for between 2 and 5 devices. However,
any kind of extension up to a maximum summation current of
63 A is possible by clamping the terminals of an additional bus-
bar (rotated by 180°) underneath the terminals of the respective
last motor circuit protector.
A connecting piece is required for the combination with motor
starter protector size S00. S00 and S0 motor starter protectors of
the 3RV2 series do not require the additional connecting piece.
The motor starter protectors are supplied by appropriate feeder
terminals. Special feeder terminals are required for constructing
"Type E Starters" according to UL/CSA.
The three-phase busbar systems are finger-safe but empty
connection terminals must be fitted with covers. They are de-
signed for any short-circuit stress which can occur at the output
side of connected SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters or motor
starter protectors.

SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starters SIRIUS •3RA6 Compact
Revised • SIRIUS
Starters
Accessories

Version Order No. Std. Weight
pack approx.
qty.
kg
Accessories for 3RA6 compact starters
Control kits 3RA69 50-0A 1 unit 0.004
For mechanical actuation of the
compact starter
3RA69 50-0A
Adapters for screw mounting the 3RA69 40-0A 1 unit 0.152
compact starter
(set including push-in lugs)
Direct-on-line starters require 1 set,
reversing starters 2 sets.
3RA69 40-0A
Screw terminals
Auxiliary switch blocks for compact starters

• 2 NO 3RA69 11-1A 1 unit 0.018
• 2 NC 3RA69 12-1A 1 unit 0.018
• 1 NO +1 NC 3RA69 13-1A 1 unit 0.018
3RA69 11-1A (these auxiliary contacts are positively driven.)
Main circuit terminals 3RA69 20-1A 1 unit 0.038
(line and load side)
3RA69 20-1A
6
Control circuit terminals
• For 3RA61 3RA69 20-1B 1 unit 0.042
• For 3RA62 3RA69 20-1C 1 unit 0.042
3RA69 20-1B
Auxiliary switch blocks for compact starters

• 2 NO 3RA69 11-2A 1 unit 0.018
• 2 NC 3RA69 12-2A 1 unit 0.018
• 1 NO +1 NC 3RA69 13-2A 1 unit 0.018
3RA69 11-2A (these auxiliary contacts are positively driven.)
Main circuit terminals 3RA69 20-2A 1 unit 0.049
(line and load side)
3RA69 20-2A
Control circuit terminals
• For 3RA61 3RA69 20-2B 1 unit 0.036
• For 3RA62 3RA69 20-2C 1 unit 0.036
3RA69 20-2B

SIRIUS
Accessories

pack approx.
qty.
kg
Accessories for 3RA6 compact starters (continued)
Main circuit terminals for mixed connection 3RA69 20-3A 1 unit 0.044
method
One set comprises:
• 1 joint block on the line side for the screw connec-
tion method
• 1 joint block on the motor side for the spring-type
connection method
3RA69 20-3A

pack approx.
qty.
kg
Accessories specifically for 3RA64, 3RA65 compact starters
with IO-Link
Additional connection cables (flat) for side-by-
side mounting of up to 4 compact starters
• 10-pole
- 8 mm1) 3RA69 32-0A 5 units 0.007
- 200 mm1) 3RA69 33-0B 5 units 0.012
• 14-pole
- 8 mm2) 3RA69 31-0A 5 units 0.007
3RA69 31-0A - 200 mm 3RA69 33-0C 5 units 0.014
Operator panels 3RA69 35-0A 1 unit 0.052
- 1 operator panel
- 1 enabling module
- 1 interface cover
- 1 fixing terminal
3RA69 35-0A
Enabling block 3RA69 36-0A 1 unit 0.002
Blanking covers 3RA69 36-0B 5 units 0.001
6
Connection cable (round) for connecting the 3RA69 33-0A 1 unit 0.114
operator panel
10-pole, 2 000 mm
SIRIUS 4SI solid-state modules 3RK1 005-0LB00-0AA0 1 unit 0.057
IO-Link master for connection of up to
4 SIRIUS controls (max. 16 in groups of 4) with IO-
Link (3-wire connection) to
SIMATIC ET 200S,
width 15 mm,
supports firmware update
(STEP 7 V5.4 SP5 and higher)
Can be used with the following terminal
3RK1 005-0LB00-0AA0 modules:
• TM-E15S26-A1 (screw terminals)
• TM-E15C26-A1 (spring-type terminals)
• TM-E15N26-A1 (Fast Connect)
1) 10-pole connection cables are required for EMERGENCY-STOP group 2) Is included in the scope of supply of the SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starter in
concepts. IO-Link version.

pack approx.
qty.
kg
Terminal blocks and phase barriers for
"Self-Protected Combination
Motor Controllers (Type E)" according to UL 508
Note:
UL 508 demands 1-inch clearance and 2-inch creepage distance on the line side for "Combination Motor Controller Type E".
The following terminal blocks or phase barriers must be used in 3RV20 motor starter protectors.
The terminal blocks or phase barriers cannot be used in combination with the 3RV19 .5 three-phase busbars.
For construction with three-phase busbars, see "Busbar accessories".
3RV29 28-1H Terminal blocks type E S00, S0 3RV29 28-1H 1 unit 0.065
For extended clearance and
creepage distances
(1 and 2 inch)

Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers
SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starters SIRIUS Accessories
• Revised •
Busbar accessories
Modular Number of motor starter protec- Rated For motor Order No. Std. Weight
spacing tors that can be connected current In starter pack approx.
Without With lateral With at 690 V protectors qty.
lateral auxiliary auxiliary
accesso- switch release
ries
mm A Size
Three-phase busbars1)
For feeding several motor starter protectors with screw terminals,
mounted side by side on standard mounting rails, insulated,
with touch protection
3RV1915-1AB
453) 2 -- -- 63 S00, S02) 3RV1915-1AB 1 unit 0.044
3 -- -- 63 S00, S02) 3RV1915-1BB 1 unit 0.071
4 -- -- 63 S00, S02) 3RV1915-1CB 1 unit 0.099
5 -- -- 63 S00, S02) 3RV1915-1DB 1 unit 0.124
3RV1915-1BB 554) -- 2 -- 63 S00, S02) 3RV1915-2AB
-- 3 -- 63 S00, S02) 3RV1915-2BB
-- 4 -- 63 S00, S02) 3RV1915-2CB
-- 5 -- 63 S00, S02) 3RV1915-2DB
2 -- -- 108 S2 3RV1935-1A
3RV1915-1CB
3 -- -- 108 S2 3RV1935-1B
4 -- -- 108 S2 3RV1935-1C
635) -- -- 2 63 S00, S02) 3RV1915-3AB
-- -- 4 63 S00, S02) 3RV1915-3CB
3RV1915-1DB 755) -- 2 2 108 S2 3RV1935-3A
-- 3 3 108 S2 3RV1935-3B
-- 4 4 108 S2 3RV1935-3C
7
1) 4)
Not suitable for 3RV21 motor starter protectors for motor protection For 3RV2 motor starter protectors with auxiliary switches with 1 NO + 1 NC,
with overload relay function and for 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers 2 NO and 2 NC mounted on the left (9 mm wide).
according to UL 489/CSA C22.2 No. 5. 5)
For 3RV2 motor starter protectors with mounted accessories (18 mm wide).
2)
Approved for motor starter protectors size S0 with In ≤ 32 A. Auxiliary switches with 2 NO + 2 NC or signaling switch (mounted on the
3)
For 3RV2 motor starter protectors without accessories mounted left) or with auxiliary release (mounted on the right).
on the side.
Conductor cross-section Tightening For motor Order No. Weight

Solid or Finely AWG cables, torque starter approx.
stranded stranded solid or protectors/
with end stranded circuit
sleeve breakers
mm² mm² AWG Nm Size
Three-phase infeed terminals
Connection from top
2.5 ... 25 2.5 ... 16 10 ... 4 3 ... 4 S00, S0 3RV2925-5AB 0.043
2x 2x 2x 4 ... 6 S2 3RV2935-5A
(2.5 ... 50)1), (2.5 ... 35)1), (10 ... 1/0)1),
3RV2925-5AB 1x 1x 1x
(2.5 ... 70)1) (2.5 ... 50)1) (10 ... 2/0)1)
3RV2935-5A
Connection from below
This terminal is connected in place of a switch, please take the
space requirement into account.
2.5 ... 25 2.5 ... 16 10 ... 4 Input: 4, S00, S0 3RV2915-5B 0.093
Output:
2 ... 2.5
3RV2915-5B
Three-phase infeed terminals for constructing "Type E Starters"
Connection from top
2.5 ... 25 2.5 ... 16 10 ... 4 3 ... 4 S00, S0 3RV2925-5EB 0.044
2x 2x 2x 4 ... 6 S2 3RV2935-5E
(2.5 ... 50)1), (2.5 ... 35)1), (10 ... 1/0)1),
3RV2925-5EB 1x 1x 1x
(2.5 ... 70)1) (2.5 ... 50)1) (10 ... 2/0)1)

3RV2935-5E point, both cross-sections must be in the range specified.

4/12 are approximate
Illustrations Siemens IC 10 · 2015 7/35 Industry, Inc.
Siemens
ForCompact
Cabinet
SIRIUS 3RA6Compact
CompactStarters
Starters
Accessories

pack approx.
qty.
kg
8US Fast Bus busbar adapters for 60 mm systems
For flat copper profiles according to DIN 46433 8US12 11-1NS10 1 unit 0.337
Width: 12 ... 30 mm
Thickness: 4 ... 5 mm or 10 mm
8US12 11-1NS10
Device holders for lateral mounting along side the Fast Bus busbar
adapter for 60 mm systems
Required in addition to the busbar adapter for 8US12 50-1AA10 1 unit 0.239
mounting a reversing starter
8US12 50-1AA10
Version Color of Version of Order No. Std. Weight

handle extension shaft pack approx.
qty.
mm kg
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for operating the com-
pact starter with closed control cabinet doors
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist of a knob, a coupling driver and an extension shaft of 130/330 mm in
length (6 mm x 6 mm). The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms are designed to degree of protection IP65. The door
6
interlocking prevents accidental opening of the control cabinet door in the ON position of the motor starter protector. The OFF
position can be locked with up to 3 padlocks.
Door-coupling rotary Black 130 3RV29 26-0B 1 unit 0.111
operating mecha-
nisms
3RV29 26-0B
EMERGENCY-STOP Red/ 130 3RV29 26-0C 1 unit 0.110
door-coupling Yellow
rotary operating
mechanisms

pack approx.
qty.
kg
Screwdrivers Spring-type terminals
for all SIRIUS devices with spring-type terminals
Length approx. 200 mm, 3RA29 08-1A 1 unit 0.045
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
titanium gray/black,
3RA29 08-1A partially insulated
Blank labels
Unit labeling plates1) 3RT29 00-1SB20 340 units 0.200
for SIRIUS devices
20 mm x 7 mm,
titanium gray
r
NSB0_01429b
3RT19 00-1SB20
1) PC labeling system for individual inscription of unit labeling plates
available from: Murrplastik Systems, Inc. www.murrplastik.com.

* YouCatalog
Industrial Controls can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Compact
For Combination
Operation Starters
in the Control Cabinet
SIRIUS
SIRIUS3RA6
3RA6Compact
CompactStarters
Starters SIRIUS
Add-on
Add-on modules
modules for AS-Interface
for AS-Interface
Overview
Various AS-i add-on modules are available for communication of
the 3RA6 compact starter with the control system using
AS-Interface:
• Standard version
• With two local inputs
• With two free external inputs
• With one free external input and one free external output
• With two free external outputs
• For local control
The AS-i add-on modules can be combined only in connection
with compact starters with a rated control supply voltage of
24 V AC/DC.
AS-i add-on module for communications controlling
With this new module it is also possible for the connected com-
pact starter to be operated directly using simple switches, i.e.
without recourse to AS-i Communication, if required.
"Automatic" mode
NC contacts can be connected to the inputs Y2 and Y4 through
the local terminals on the AS-i add-on module. If the "+" connec-
tions are connected simultaneously to both local inputs, the
AS-i add-on module will be in "Automatic" mode, i.e. it will
communicate with the control system through AS-Interface.
Local control
Circuit diagram example for operating a 3RA61 20 direct-on-line starter
Opening the two inputs Y2 and Y4 will result in the direct using an AS-i add-on module for on-site controller
disconnection of the compact starter. Operation through AS-i
Communication is ended and the compact starter can now be
switched on and off directly using NO contacts (one NO contact
per direction of rotation on the reversing starter).
"LED AUX Power" must light up green, the 24 V DC supply must
be connected and the AS-i control supply voltage must no lon-
ger be applied.
6
Resetting to "Automatic" mode

Simultaneous application of a "1" signal at the local inputs. The
availability bit DI 0 is switched to a "1" signal.
If AS-i Communication is reset, the motor is first switched off and
then on again when requested by the control system.
Circuit diagram example for operating a 3RA62 50 reversing starter using

an AS-i add-on module for on-site controller

ForCompact
Cabinet
SIRIUS 3RA6Compact
Compact Starters
Starters
10/15/15 Add-on
Add-on modules
modules for AS-Interface
for AS-Interface

pack approx.
qty.
kg
AS-i add-on modules
Standard version 3RA69 70-3A 1 unit 0.045
For communication of the compact starter with
the control system using AS-Interface
With two local inputs 3RA69 70-3B 1 unit 0.045
For safe disconnection through local safety
3RA69 70-3A relays, e.g. cable-operated switches
With two free external inputs 3RA69 70-3C 1 unit 0.045
Replaces the digital standard inputs
"Motor On" and "Group warning"
With one free external input and one free 3RA69 70-3D 1 unit 0.045
external output
Replaces the digital standard input
3RA69 70-3B to -3F "Group warning"
With two free external outputs 3RA69 70-3E 1 unit 0.045
Only for direct-on-line starters,
replaces the digital standard output
"Motor left"
For local control 3RA69 70-3F 1 unit 0.045
Control of the compact starter optionally using
AS-Interface or local switches
Spare parts for AS-i add-on modules

Connectors for data and auxiliary supply cable
with 2 insulation displacement terminations for
standard litz wires 2 x 0.5 ... 0.75 mm2
• Flat, yellow, extender 3RK1901-0NA00 5 units
• Flat, black, extender 3RK1901-0PA00 5 units
Accessories for AS-i add-on modules

AS-Interface addressing unit V 3.0 3RK1904-2AB02 1 unit 0.540
6
• For AS-Interface modules and sensors and actuators
with integrated AS-Interface in accordance with
AS-i Specification V3.0
• For setting the AS-i address of standard slaves,
and slaves with extended addressing mode
(A/B slaves)
• With input/output test function and many other
commissioning functions
• Battery operation with 4 batteries type AA
(IEC LR6, NEDA 15)
• Scope of supply:
- Addressing unit with 4 batteries
- Addressing cable, with M12 plug to addressing plug
3RK1904-2AB02 (hollow plug), length 1.5m

* YouCatalog
Compact
For Combination
Operation Starters
3RA6 Compact
SIRIUS StartersStarters
3RA6 Compact SIRIUS
Infeed systems for 3RA6
up to 100
Infeed A
systems for 3RA6
Overview
The infeed system for 3RA6 compact starters enables far less In addition, the integrated PE bar means it is optionally possible
wiring in the main circuit and, thanks to the easy exchangeability to connect the motor cable directly to the infeed system without
of the compact starters, reduces the usual downtimes for additional intermediate terminals. The infeed system for 3RA6
maintenance work during the plant's operating phase. compact starters is designed for summation currents up to
100 A with a conductor cross-section of max. 2/0 AWG on the
The infeed system provides the possibility of completely feeder terminal block.
prewiring the main circuit without a compact starter needing to
be connected at the same time. As the result of the removable The infeed system can be mounted on a standard mounting rail
terminals in the main circuit, compact starters can be integrated or flat surfaces.
in an infeed system in an easy manner (without the use of tools).
5 9
11
6
6
NSB0_01878
12 7
10
1 Feeder terminal 7 PE tap-off

2 Three-socket expansion module 8 Connecting plates
3 Two-socket expansion module 9 End cover
4 Expansion plug 10 45 mm adapter for SIRIUS motor starter protector size S0
5 PE infeed 11 3RA61 direct-on-line starter
6 PE expansion plug 12 3RA62 reversing starter
Infeed system for 3RA6 compact starters

ForCompact
Cabinet
SIRIUS 3RA6Compact
CompactStarters
Starters
10/15/15 Infeed systemsupfor
to3RA6
100 A
1 Infeed 10 45 mm adapters for SIRIUS 3RV motor starter protectors
The 3-phase infeed is available as an infeed with screw connec- SIRIUS 3RV1 and 3RV2motor starter protectors size S0 with screw
tion (4-2 AWG up to 63 A or 0-2/0 AWG up to 100 A) and a an connection can be fitted to the adapter, enabling them to be
infeed with spring-type connection (4-2 AWG up to 63 A). plugged into the infeed system.
The infeed with spring-type terminal can be attached to the left Terminal blocks
side, as well as the right side, of an expansion module.
Using the terminal block, three phase power can be fed out of
The screw terminal infeeds are permanently fitted to the left side the infeed system; this means that single-phase, two-phase and
of a 3-socket expansion module. three-phase components can also be integrated in the system.
The infeeds with screw connection enable connection of the If the end cover is removed, the terminal block can be inserted
main conductors (L1, L2, L3) either from above or from below. into an expansion module.
The infeeds with screw connection come packaged with 1 end Expansion plug for SIRIUS 3RV29 infeed systems
cover, while the infeed with spring-type connection comes pack-
aged with 2 end covers. If the end cover is removed, the expansion plug for the SIRIUS
3RV29 infeed system can be inserted into an expansion module.
2 Three-socket expansion modules It connects the infeed system for 3RA6 compact starters with the
The expansion module with 3 sockets for compact starters is SIRIUS 3RV29 infeed system.
available with screw connection and with spring-type Maximum rated operational current
connection.
The following maximum rated operational currents apply for the
Expansion modules enable the infeed system to be expanded components of the infeed system for 3RA6:
and can be connected to each other in any number up to a max-
imum length of 1.2 meters. Component Maximum rated
operational current
Two expansion modules are held together with the help of
2 connecting plates and 1 expansion plug. These assembly A
parts are included in the scope of supply of the respective Infeed with screw connection 0-2/0 AWG 100
expansion module.
Infeed with screw connection 4-2 AWG 63
When the infeed system for 3RA6 compact starters is used, the Infeed with spring-type connection 4-2 AWG 63
compact starters (plug-in modules) are easily mounted and re-
moved even when live. Expansion plugs 63
Optional possibilities: When several expansion modules are mounted side by side, the
• PE connection on motor starter side maximum rated operational current from the 2nd expansion
• Outfeed for external auxiliary devices module to the end of the row is 63 A.
• Connection to 3RV29 infeed system
• Integration of SIRIUS 3RV1 and 3RV2 motor starter protectors Proposal for upstream short-circuit protection devices
size S0 up to 25 A (using 3RA68 90-0BA adapter) The following short-circuit data apply for the components of the
6
Two-socket expansion modules infeed system for 3RA6 compact starters:
3
If only 2 instead of 3 additional sockets are required, then the Conductor Inscriptions Proposal for
2-socket expansion module is the right choice. It has the same cross- upstream short-circuit
section protection device
functionality as the 3-socket expansion module.
AWG
4 Expansion plug
Short-circuit protection for
Two expansion modules can be connected together using the infeed block (4-2 AWG)
expansion plug. Flexible expansion of the infeed system is thus with screw connection
possible. 14-2 Id, max = 19 kA, I²t = 440 kA²s 3RV10 41-4JA10
PE infeeds Short-circuit protection for

5
infeed block (0-2/0 AWG)
This module enables a PE cable to be connected. with screw connection
The PE infeed can be ordered with screw connection and 14-2/0 Id, max = approx. 22 kA 3RV10 41-4MA10
spring-type connection (2 AWG) and can be fitted on the right or Short-circuit protection for infeed block
left to the expansion block. with spring-type connection
6 PE expansion plug 12 Id, max = 9.5 kA, I²t = 85 kA²s 3RV10 21-4DA10
10 Id, max = 12.5 kA, I²t = 140 kA²s 3RV10 31-4EA10
The PE expansion plug is inserted from below and enables two
PE bars to be connected. 8 Id, max = 15 kA, I²t = 180 kA²s 3RV10 31-4HA10
PE tap-off 6-4 Id, max = 19 kA, I²t = 440 kA²s 3RV10 41-4JA10
7
Short-circuit protection for terminal block
The PE tap-off is available with screw connection and spring-
type connection (10-8 AWG). It is snapped into the infeed sys- 16 Id, max = 7.5 kA 5SY...
tem from below. 14 Id, max = 9.5 kA 1)
8 Connecting plates 12 Id, max = 9.5 kA

10 Id, max = 12.5 kA
Two connecting plates are used to hold together 2 adjacent
expansion modules. 1) To prevent the possibility of short-circuits, the cables on the terminal block
must be installed so that they are short-circuit proof according to
9 End covers EN 60439-1 Section 7.5.5.1.2.
On the last expansion module of a row, the slot provided for the
expansion plug can be covered by inserting the end cover.

Industrial Controls Catalog SIRIUS Innovations Supplement 2012 6/53
Compact
For Combination
Operation Starters
SIRIUS
SIRIUS3RA6
3RA6Compact
CompactStarters
Starters SIRIUS
up to 100
Infeed A
systems for 3RA6

approx.
kg
Three-phase infeeds and expansion modules
Infeeds with screw connection
4-2 AWG left
Infeed with screw connection with Screw terminals
permanently fitted 3-socket expansion
module with screw or spring-type
terminals on the outgoing side and
integrated PE bar
Expansion module with 3 sockets for
3 direct-on-line starters or 1 direct-on-line
3RA68 12-8AB starter and 1 reversing starter
• Screw terminals on outgoing side 3RA68 12-8AB 0.957
• Spring-type terminals on outgoing side 3RA68 12-8AC 0.990
3RA68 12-8AC
Infeeds with screw connection
0-2/0 AWG left
Infeed with screw connection with Screw terminals
permanently fitted 3-socket expansion
module with screw or spring-type
terminals on the outgoing side and
integrated PE bar
Expansion module with 3 sockets for
3RA68 13-8AB 3 direct-on-line starters or 1 direct-on-line
starter and 1 reversing starter,
suitable for UL duty according to UL 508
Type E
• Screw terminals on outgoing side 3RA68 13-8AB 1.146
6
• Spring-type terminals on outgoing side 3RA68 13-8AC 1.179
3RA68 13-8AC
Infeeds with spring-type
connection 4-2 AWG left or right
Up to 63 A 3RA68 30-5AC 0.283
3RA68 30-5AC

ForCompact
Cabinet
SIRIUS SIRIUS3RA6
SIRIUS 3RA6Compact
CompactStarters
Starters
Infeed systems for
Infeed systems for3RA6
3RA6

approx.
kg
Expansion modules
Two-socket expansion modules
and integrated PE bar
with 2 sockets for 2 direct-on-line starters or
1 reversing starter
Expansion plug and 2 connecting plates
are included in the scope of supply.
Screw terminals
3RA68 22-0AB • Screw terminals 3RA68 22-0AB 0.505

• Spring-type terminals 3RA68 22-0AC 0.527
3RA68 22-0AC
Three-socket expansion modules
and integrated PE bar
with 3 sockets for 3 direct-on-line starters or
1 direct-on-line starter and 1 reversing starter
Expansion plug and 2 connecting plates
are included in the scope of supply.
Screw terminals
3RA68 23-0AB • Screw terminals 3RA68 23-0AB 0.717

6
3RA68 23-0AC

Compact
For Combination
Operation Starters
SIRIUS
SIRIUS3RA6
3RA6Compact
CompactStarters
Starters • Revised • SIRIUS
Infeed 10/15/15
Infeed systems
systems for 3RA6
for 3RA6
Accessories
approx.
kg
Accessories for 3RA6 infeed systems
PE infeeds 4-2 AWG
Screw terminals
• Screw terminals 3RA68 60-6AB 0.060
3RA68 60-6AB
3RA68 60-5AC
PE tap-offs 10-8 AWG
Screw terminals
• Screw terminals 3RA68 70-4AB 0.019
3RA68 70-4AB

6
3RA68 70-3AC
Expansion plugs
PE expansion plugs 3RA68 90-0EA 0.008
3RA68 90-0EA
Expansion plugs 3RA68 90-1AB 0.029
between 2 expansion modules
Is included in the scope of supply of the
expansion modules.
3RA68 90-1AB
Expansion plugs for SIRIUS 3RV19/29 infeed 3RA68 90-1AA 0.079
system
Connects infeed system for 3RA6 to
3RV29 infeed systems
3RA68 90-1AA

SIRIUS
Load Feeders and Motor Starters
• Revised • SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starters
for Use in the Control Cabinet
10/15/15 Infeed systems for 3RA6

approx.
Accessories for infeed systems for 3RA6 (continued)

45 mm adapters
For SIRIUS 3RV1.2 and 3RV2.2 motor starter protectors. Size Screw terminals
S0 up to 25 A
• Screw terminals 3RA6890-0BA 0.152
(conductor cross-section AWG 10)
3RA6890-0BA
Terminal covers for infeeds with screw connection
IP20 terminal covers for infeeds with screw connection 3RA6880-2AB
25/35 mm² (3RA6812-8AB/AC)
(2 units per pack)
3RA6880-2AB
IP20 terminal covers for infeeds with screw connection 3RA6880-3AB
50/70 mm² (3RA6813-8AB/AC)
(2 units per pack)
3RA6880-3AB
Terminal blocks
8
For integration of single-phase, 2-phase and Spring-type terminals

3-phase external components
• Spring-type terminals 3RV2917-5D .0.050
3RV2917-5D
Screwdrivers
For all SIRIUS devices with spring-type terminals Spring-type terminals
Length approx. 200 mm, 3RA2908-1A .0.045

3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
partially insulated
3RA2908-1A
System Manual "SIRIUS Compact Starters and Accessories"
The system manual can be downloaded free of charge in
PDF format from the Internet, see
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
27136554/133300

8/78 Siemens IC 10 · 2015 Illustrations are approximate.
SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starters SIRIUS•3RA6 Compact
Revised • SIRIUS
Starters
General data
More information
Type 3RA61 3RA62 3RA64 3RA65
Size S0
Number of poles 3
Device standard IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Mounting dimensions (WxHxD)
• Screw terminals mm 45 x 170 x 165 90 x 170 x 165 45 x 170 x 165 90 x 170 x 165
• Spring-type terminals mm 45 x 191 x 165 90 x 191 x 165 45 x 191 x 165 90 x 191 x 165
D
W
Weight kg 1.4 2.3 -2.4 1.3 2.3

Permissible mounting positions No restrictions, preferably vertical or horizontal installation
Max. rated current Ie 0.1 ... 0.4 A A 0.4
in the respective setting range 0.32 ... 1.25 A A 1.25
1 ... 4 A A 4
3 ... 12 A A 12
8 ... 32 A A 32
• During operation Acc. to IEC/EN 60721-3-3 °C -20 ... +60, with derating up to +70
• For installation in SIRIUS infeed system for 3RA6 °C -20 ... +40
• During storage IEC/EN 60732-3-1 °C -55 ... +80
• During transport IEC/EN 60721-3-2 °C -55 ... +80
Permissible rated current of the compact starter,
when several compact starters are mounted side-
by-side on a vertical standard mounting rail
or in the 3RA6 infeed system
• For a control cabinet inside temperature of +40 °C % 100
Relative air humidity % 10 ... 90
Installation altitude m Up to 2 000 above sea level without restriction
Trip class (CLASS) Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, 10/20
EN 60947-4-1
6
Rated short-circuit current Iq Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, kA 30 (up to 12 A units)
at AC 50/60 Hz 480 V EN 60947-4-1 15 (8 ... 32 A unit)
Types of coordination Acc. to IEC 60947-6-2, Continuous
EN 60947-6-2
Power loss Pv max of all main current paths 0.4 A mW 10
Dependent on the rated current Ie 1.25 A mW 100
(upper setting range) 4A W 1
12 A W 1.8
32 A W 5.4
Max. switching frequency AC-41 1/h 750
AC-43 1/h 250
AC-44 1/h 15
Drive losses
Active power At 24 V
• 0.1 ... 12 A W 2.7
• 8 ... 32 A W 2.95
At 110 ... 240 V
• 0.1 ... 12 A W 3.4
• 8 ... 32 A W 3.8
Overload function
Ratio of lower to upper current mark 1:4
Shock resistance (sine-wave pulse) a = 60 m/s² = 6 g with 10 ms; for every 3 shocks in all axes
Vibratory load f = 4 ... 5.8 Hz; d =15 mm; f = 5.8 ... 500 Hz; a = 20 m/s2;10 cycles
Degree of protection Acc. to IEC 60947-1 IP20
Touch protection Acc. to IEC/EN 61140 Finger-safe
Isolating features of the compact starter Acc. to IEC/EN 60947-3 Yes: Isolation is assured only by moving the actuator into
the *OFF* position
Main and EMERGENCY-STOP switch Acc. to IEC 60204 Yes
characteristics of the compact starter and
accessories

SIRIUS
General data

Size S0
Number of poles 3
General technical specifications (continued)
Protective separation Acc. to IEC 60947-2
Control circuit to auxiliary circuit
• Horizontal standard mounting rail V Up to 400
• Other mounting position V Up to 250
Auxiliary circuit to auxiliary circuit
• Horizontal standard mounting rail V Up to 400
• Other mounting position V Up to 250
Main circuit to auxiliary circuit
• Any mounting position V Up to 400
EMC interference immunity Acc. to IEC/EN 60947-1 Corresponds to degree of severity 3
Conductor-related interference BURST acc. to
IEC/EN 61000-4-4
• In the main circuit kV 4 4
• In the auxiliary circuit kV 3 2
Conductor-related interference SURGE acc. to
IEC/EN 61000-4-5
• In the main circuit
- Conductor - Ground kV 4 2
- Conductor - Conductor kV 2 1
• In the auxiliary circuit
- Conductor - Ground kV 2 0.51)
- Conductor - Conductor kV 1 0.51)
Auxiliary switches
• Integrated
- Position of the main contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
- Overload/short-circuit signal 1 CO/1 NO
• Expandable
- Position of the main contacts 2 NO, 2 NC, 1 NO + 1 NC
Surge suppressors Integrated (Varistor)
Pollution degree 3
Depth from standard mounting rail mm 160
Electromagnetic operating mechanism
Control voltage V 24 AC/DC 24 DC
V 110 ... 240 AC/DC --
Frequency At AC Hz 50/60 ( ±5 %)
6
Primary operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 Us 0.85 ... 1.2 Us

No-load switching frequency 1/h 3 600
Make-time ms max. 70 Max. 70 + IO-Link communication
Break-time ms max. 120 Max. 120 + IO-Link communication
1) To maintain maximum interference immunity in a harsh electromagnetic
environment, additional overvoltage protection should be provided in the
control supply current circuit. A suitable choice is for example the Dehn
Blitzductor BVT AD 24 V, Art. No. 918 402 or an equivalent protective
element.
Manufacturer: DEHN+SÖHNE GmbH+Co. KG, Hans-Dehn-Straße. 1,
Postfach 1640, D-92306 Neumarkt

Revised • SIRIUS
Starters
General data
Type 3RA61 20-.@B3., 3RA62 50-.@B3. 3RA61 20-.EB3., 3RA62 50-.EB3.

@ = A, B, C or D
Rated operational current 12 A Rated operational current 32 A
Rated control supply voltage V 24 AC 24 DC 24 AC 24 DC
Inrush peak current A 0.59 0.47 0.59 0.47
Hold current A 0.13 0.12 0.17 0.14
Closed W 2.8 2.9 3.5 3.1
Operating times, typical
• On ms <160 <140 <160 <140
• Off ms <35 <35 <30 <30
Type 3RA61 20-.@E3., 3RA62 50-.@P3. 3RA61 20-.EE3., 3RA62 50-.EE3.
@ = A, B, C or D
Rated operational current 12 A Rated operational current 32 A
Rated control supply voltage V 110 AC 240 AC 110 DC 240 DC 110 AC 240 AC 110 DC 240 DC
Inrush peak current A 0.24 0.40 0.17 0.29 0.24 0.40 0.17 0.29
Hold current A 0.06 0.08 0.03 0.02 0.06 0.07 0.04 0.03
Closed W 3.8 6 3.1 5.1 3.7 5.2 3.4 5.8
Operating times, typical
• On ms <160 <140 <150 <140 <160 <140 <150 <140
• Off ms <50 <80 <50 <70 <40 <60 <40 <60
Type 3RA64 00-.@B4., 3RA65 00-.@B4. 3RA64 00-.EB4., 3RA65 00-.EB4.
@ = A, B, C or D
Rated operational current 12A Rated operational current 32 A
Rated control supply voltage V 24 DC 24 DC
Inrush peak current A 0.39 0.53
Hold current A 0.13 0.15
Closed W 2.9 3.4
Operating times, typical1)
• On ms <140 <140
• Off ms <35 <30

SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starters SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starters
General data General data

Size S0
Number of poles 3
Electromagnetic operating mechanism (continued)
Switching capacity at 480 V kA 30 (up to 12 A)
15 (8 ... 32 A)
Switching capacity at 600 V kA 10 (up to 12 A)
5 (8 ... 32 A)
Line protection At 10 kA AWG 14
At 50 kA AWG 12
Shock resistance
• Breaker mechanism OFF g 25
• Breaker mechanism ON g 15
Normal switching duty
Making capacity 12 x In
Breaking capacity 10 x In
Switching capacity dependent on Up to 12 A HP 7 1/2
rated current Up to 32 A HP 20
Endurance in operating cycles
• Electrical endurance At Ie = 0.9 x In and 400 V 3 ... 10 000 000 2 x 3 000 000 2 x 1 500 000
3 ... 10 000 000
Control circuit
Rated operational voltage
• External auxiliary switch block V 400/690
• Internal auxiliary switch V 400/690
• Short-circuit signaling switch V 400
• Overload signaling switch V 400
Switching capacity
• External auxiliary switch block AC-15
• At Ue = 230 V A 6
• At Ue = 400 V A 3
• At Ue = 289/500 V A 2
• At Ue = 400/690 V A 1
DC-13
• At Ue = 24 V A 6
• At Ue = 60 V A 0.9
• At Ue = 125 V A 0.55
• At Ue = 250 V A 0.27
• Internal auxiliary switch AC-15
• At Ue = 230 V A 6
6
• At Ue = 400 V A 3
• At Ue = 289/500 V A 2
• At Ue = 400/690 V A 1
DC-13
• At Ue = 24 V A 10
• At Ue = 60 V A 2
• At Ue = 125 V A 1
• At Ue = 250 V A 0.27
• At Ue = 480 V A 0.1
• Signaling switch AC-15
• At Ue = 230 V A 3
• At Ue = 400 V A 1
DC-13
• At Ue = 24 V A 2
• At Ue = 250 V A 0.11

Revised • SIRIUS
Starters
General data

Size S0
Number of poles 3
External auxiliary switch block, internal auxiliary switch
• Mechanical endurance 10 000 000 3 000 000
• Electrical endurance AC-15, 230 V
• At 6 A 200 000
• At 3 A 500 000
• At 1 A 2 000 000
• At 0.3 A 10 000 000
DC-13, 24 V
• At 6 A 30 0 00
• At 3 A 100 000
• At 0.5 A 2 000 000
• At 0.2 A 10 000 000
DC-13, 110 V
• At 1 A 40 000
• At 0.55 A 100 000
• At 0.3 A 300 000
• At 0.1 A 2 000 000
• At 0.04 A 10 000 000
DC-13, 220 V
• At 0.3 A 110 000
• At 0.1 A 650 000
• At 0.05 A 2 000 000
• At 0.018 A 10 000 000
Contact stability At 17 V and 5 mA Oper- 1 incorrect switching operation per 100 000 000
ating
cycles
• Short-circuit current IK 1.1 kA Fuse links A 10
operational class gG
- NEOZED Type 5SE
- DIAZED Type 5SB
- LV HRC Type 3NA
• Short-circuit current IK < 400 A Miniature circuit breaker up to A 10
230 V with C characteristic
Signaling switches
• Mechanical endurance 20 000
• Electrical endurance AC-15 At 230 V and 3 A 6 050
Contact stability At 17 V and 5 mA Oper- 1 incorrect switching operation per 100 000 000
6
ating
cycles
• Short-circuit current IK 1.1 kA Fuse links A 6
- NEOZED Type 5SE
- DIAZED Type 5SB
- LV HRC Type 3NA
• Short-circuit current IK < 400 A Miniature circuit breaker up to A 6
230 V with C characteristic
Overload (short-circuit current IK 1.1 kA) Fuse links A 4
- NEOZED Type 5SE
- DIAZED Type 5SB
- LV HRC Type 3NA

SIRIUS SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starters
3RA6
up to 32 A
Technical data
Connection type Screw connection Spring-type connection
Max. rated current Imax 12 A 32 A 12 A 32 A

Conductor cross-sections of
main circuit terminals
Tools Posidrive size 2 (3.5 x 0.5) mm, 8WA2 803
Prescribed tightening torque NM 2 ... 2.5 --
Minimum/maximum conductor cross-sections
• Solid mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2 x (1.5 ... 6) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
mm2 2 x (2.5 ... 6) Max. 1 x 10 Max. 1 x 10 Max. 1 x 10
2
mm Max. 1 x 10
• Finely stranded without ferrule mm2 -- -- 2 x (1.5 ... 6) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
• Finely stranded with ferrule mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2 x (1.5 ... 6) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
2
mm 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
• AWG cables AWG 2 x (16 ...14) 2 x (14 ...10) 2 x (16 ...10) 2 x (14 ...10)
AWG 2 x (14 ...10) 1x8 1x8 1x8
AWG 1x8
control circuit terminals
Tools Posidrive size 2 (3.0 x 0.5) mm, DIN ISO 2380-1A
Prescribed tightening torque NM 0.8 ... 1.2 --
• Solid mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 4) 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded without ferrule mm² -- 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded with ferrule mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5) 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
• AWG cables AWG 2 x (20 ... 14) 2 x (24 ... 16)

the auxiliary switch for compact starters
Order No. 3RA69 1.-1A 3RA69 1.-2A
Prescribed tightening torque NM 0.8 ... 1.2 --
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ...1.5) 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
mm² 2 x (1 ... 4)
• Finely stranded without ferrule mm² -- 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with ferrule mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (24 ... 14)

AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)
AWG 1 x 12

3RA6
up to 32A
Technical data
Order No. 3RA6970-3A, 3RA6970-3B, 3RA6970-3C, 3RA6970-3D,
3RA6970-3E
General data of the AS-i add-on module
• Storage Acc. to IEC/EN 60721-3-1 °C -25 ... +70
• Transport Acc. to IEC/EN 60721-3-2 °C -25 ... +70
Degree of protection Acc. to IEC/EN 60947-1 IP20
EMC interference immunity Acc. to EN 50295
Conductor-related interference BURST acc. to kV 1/2
IEC/EN 61000-4-4
Electrostatic discharge Acc. to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 kV 6/8
Field-related interference Acc. to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 V/m 10 (80 MHz ... 2.7 GHz)
Maximum pick-up current mA 400
Maximum hold current mA 200
Power consumption, max. mA 30
IO code 7
ID code A
ID2 code E
Order No. 3RA6970-3B, 3RA6970-3C, 3RA6970-3D, 3RA6970-3E

Connection type Screw connection
Conductor cross-sections of the AS-i add-on module

Tools Posidrive size 1
Prescribed tightening torque NM 0.5 ... 0.6
• Solid mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)
• Finely stranded with ferrule mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)
• AWG cables AWG 1 x (20 ... 12)

up to 100 A
Technical data
Type 3RA6.
General data
Max. rated operational current
• Infeed with screw connection 0-2/0 AWG A 100
• Infeed with screw connection 4-2 AWG A 63
• Infeed with spring-type connection 10-3 AWG A 63
• Expansion plug A 63
• During operation °C -20 ... +60 (over +40 current reduction is required)
- Permissible rated current at control cabinet inside temperature: +40 °C % 100
+60 °C % 80
• During storage/transport °C -55 ... +80
Relative air humidity % 10 ... 90
Installation altitude m Up to 2000 above sea level without restriction
Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 AC
Shock resistance a = 60 m/s² = 6g with 10 ms; for every 3 shocks in all axes
Vibratory load f =1 ... 6 Hz; d =15 mm 10 cycles
f =150 Hz; a = 2 g
Degree of protection Acc. to IEC 60947-1 IP20 (IP 00 terminal compart-
ment)
Touch protection Acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe
Degree of pollution 3
Short-circuit protection for Recommendation for upstream
short-circuit protection device
infeed with screw connection 4-2 AWG 3RV1041-4JA10
and infeed with screw connection 0-2/0 AWG 3RV1041-4MA10
Id,max kA < 21
I²t kA²s 530 LV HRC gL/gG 3NA3, 315 A
Short-circuit protection for infeed with spring- Recommendation for upstream
type connection short-circuit protection device
• Conductor cross-section 12 AWG Id,max kA < 9.5 3RV2021-4DA10
I²t kA²s 85
• Conductor cross-section 10 AWG Id,max kA < 12.5 3RV1031-4EA10
I²t kA²s 140
• Conductor cross-section 8 AWG Id,max kA < 15 3RV1031-4HA10
I²t kA²s 180
• Conductor cross-section 6-4 AWG Id,max kA < 19 3RV1041-4JA10
I²t kA²s 440
Short-circuit protection for terminal block Recommendation for upstream
short-circuit protection device
• Conductor cross-section 16 AWG Id,max kA 7.5 5SY...
1)
• Conductor cross-section 14 AWG Id,max kA 9.5
1)
To prevent the possibility of short-circuits, the cables on the terminal block
must be installed so that they are short-circuit resistant according to
EN 60439-1 Section 7.5.5.1.2.
Type 3RV29.
Connection type Spring-type connection
Conductor cross-sections of terminal block

Order No. 3RV29 17-5D
• Solid mm2 1.5 ... 6
• Finely stranded with ferrule mm2 1.5 ... 4
• Finely stranded without ferrule mm2 1.5 ... 6

up to 100 A
Technical data
Type 3RA6.
Conductor cross-sections of infeed with screw connection
16-2 AWG (L1, L2, L3)1) and PE infeed 2 AWG2)
Order No. 3RA68 12-8AB, 3RA68 12-8AC, 3RA68 60-6AB
Tools Posidrive size 2
Specified tightening torque NM 3 ... 4.5
• Solid mm2 2.6 ... 16 2.6 ... 16 max. 2 x 16
• Stranded mm2 2.5 ... 35 2.5 ... 35 max. 2 x 25
• Finely stranded with ferrule mm2 2.5 ... 25 2.5 ... 25 max. 2 x 16
• Finely stranded without ferrule mm2 2.5 ... 25 2.5 ... 25 max. 2 x 16
• AWG cables AWG 12 ... 2 12 ... 2 max. 2 x (16 ... 2)
Conductor cross-sections of infeed with screw connection

10-2/0 AWG (L1, L2, L3)1)
Order No. 3RA68 13-8AB, 3RA68 13-8AC
Tools SW 4
Specified tightening torque NM 6 ... 8
• Solid mm2 2.5 ... 16 2.5 ... 16 max. 2 x 16
• Stranded mm2 4 ... 70 10 ... 70 max. 2 x 50
• Finely stranded with ferrule mm2 2.5 ... 35 2.5 ... 50 max. 2 x 35
• Finely stranded without ferrule mm2 4 ... 50 10 ... 50 max. 2 x 35
• AWG cables AWG 10 ... 2/0 10 ... 2/0 max. 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
Connection type Spring-type connection

Conductor cross-sections of infeed with spring-type
connection 10-3 AWG (L1, L2, L3)1) and PE infeed 3 AWG
Order No. 3RA68 30-5AC, 3RA68 60-5AC
Tools 8WA2 806 mm 5.5 x 0.8
• Solid mm2 4 ... 16
• Stranded mm2 4 ... 35
• Finely stranded with ferrule mm2 4 ... 25
• Finely stranded without ferrule mm2 6 ... 25
• AWG cables AWG 10 ... 3
Conductor cross-sections of infeed with screw connection 4-2 AWG (T1, T2, T3)2),
infeed with screw connection 0-2/0 AWG (T1, T2, T3)2)
2-socket and 3-socket expansion modules (T1, T2, T3)2) and PE tap-off 10-8 AWG
Order No. 3RA68 12-8AB, 3RA68 13-8AB, 3RA68 12-8AC, 3RA68 13-8AC,
3RA68 22-0AB, 3RA68 23-0AB, 3RA68 22-0AC, 3RA68 23-0AC,
3RA68 70-4AB 3RA68 70-3AC
Specified tightening torque NM 2 ... 2.5 --
Maximum rated current A 12 32 12 32
• Solid mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2 x (1.5 ... 6) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
mm2 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
mm2 max. 1 x 10 max. 1 x 10 max. 1 x 10 max. 1 x 10
2
• Finely stranded with ferrule mm -- -- 2 x (1.5 ... 6) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
• Finely stranded without ferrule mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2 x (1.5 ... 6) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
mm2 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
• AWG cables AWG 2 x (16 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (16 ... 10) 2 x (14 ... 10)
AWG 2 x (14 ... 10)
AWG 1x8 1x8 1x8 1x8
1) L1, L2, L3 main conductors on input side. 2) T1, T2, T3 main conductors on output side.

3RA6 up to 32 A
Direct-on-line starters and reversing starters
45 90
25 10 25 165
1701)
1912)
24
185
30
NSB0_01884
1) Screw connection
2) Spring-loaded connection
Schematics
3RA61 direct-on-line starters
3RA6911-.A
33 43
1L1 3L2 5L3
9896
34 44
95 3RA6912-.A
RLT 13 21 31 41
Q1
14 22 32 42
>> >> >>
77
3RA6913-.A
31 43
78 A1 A2
32 44
NSB0_01924
2T1 4T2 6T3
Schematic for 3RA61 direct-on-line starters (main circuit)

3RA6
up to 32 A
3RA62 reversing starters
1L1 3L2 5L3
9896
95
3RA6911-.A 3RA6911-.A
23 33 53 63
24 34 54 64
RLT RLT
3RA6912-.A 3RA6912-.A
21 31 13 43 51 61
Q1 Q2
22 32 14 44 52 62
3RA6913-.A 3RA6913-.A
21 33 51 63
77
>> >> >>

22 34 52 64
78
A2 A1 B1 B2
NSB0_01925
2T1 4T2 6T3
Schematic for 3RA62 reversing starters (main circuit)

up to 100 A
■ Dimensional drawings
70 135 155
58
79
NSB0_01926
111
Ø4
,5
148
140
197
225
28
57 45
61
102
5
31
65
Infeed with screw connection 0-2/0 AWG on left with fixed 3-socket expansion module with outgoing screw terminals
176
NSB0_01927
45 135 144
58
79
111
140
148
38
197
225
5
28
57 45
61
76
31
65
Infeed with screw connection 4-2 AWG on left with fixed 3-socket expansion module with outgoing screw terminals

up to 100 A
70 135 155
58
NSB0_01928
79
111
Ø4
,5
140
148
208
227
19
57 45
60
102 5 67
Infeed with screw connection 0-2/0 AWG on left with fixed 3-socket expansion module with outgoing spring-type terminals
45 135 176
NSB0_01929
144
58
79
111
Ø4
,5
140
148
208
38
227
19
57 45
60
76 5 67
Infeed with screw connection 4-2 AWG on left with fixed 3-socket expansion module with outgoing spring-type terminals
97
79
154
NSB0_01930
27 5
86
Infeed with spring-type terminals

up to 100 A
135 90 97
NSB0_01931
58
58
79
Ø4 Ø4
,5 ,5
148
148
197
197
197
45 5 65
3-socket expansion module and 2-socket expansion module with outgoing screw te rminals
135 90 97
NSB0_01932
58
58
79
Ø4 Ø4
,5 ,5
148
148
208
208
197
5
45 67
10
3-socket expansion module and 2-socket expansion module with outgoing spring-type te rminals
> 30
NSB0_01933
> 30
> 10 > 10
Minimum clearances to adjacent components when using infeed system for 3RA6

Combination Starters &Starters
Combination Starters&for Group
Starters forInstallation
Group Installation
3RA1 / 3RA2 Starters SIRIUS SIRIUS
3RA2 •Motor Starters
• Revised
Non-Reversing, AC Coil 3RA21 direct-on-line starters
up to 22 A
10/15/15
50/60 Hz 110/120 V AC

Direct-on-line
Rated control supply voltage 50/60 Hz 110/120 V AC
starting With screw connections
• The motor starter protector and contactor are mechanically
and electrically connected by means of the link module.
• Auxiliary switches1) on the motor starter protector and the con-
tactor can be easily fitted due to the modular system.
• Integrated auxiliary switches:
- Contactor size S00: 1 NO;
- Contactor size S0: 1 NO + 1 NC
Combination Starter, UL508 Type F
All size S00 and S0 devices can be applied as Combination
3RA21 20 3RA21 10 3RA21 20
Starters with the addition of either of these line side connectors:
3RA21 10
3RV29 28-1H, 3RV29 25-5EB or 3RV29 28-1K.
Size UL Data FLA setting Consisting of the following single Assembled starter Weight
range inverse- devices approx.
Single-phase Three-phase 2)
SCCR time delayed Motor + Contactor + Link Screw terminals
HP ratings HP ratings at overload starter module
480 V release protector + Busbar
115 V 230 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V adapter3) Order No.
kA A kg
Selection depends on motor full load amps
3RV20 3RT20 3RA
S00 -- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.11…0.16 11-0AA10 15-1AK61 1921-1DA00 3RA21 1@-0A@15-1AK6 0.575
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.14…0.2 11-0BA10 + 8US1251- 3RA21 1@-0B@15-1AK6 0.575
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.18…0.25 11-0CA10 5DS10 3RA21 1@-0C@15-1AK6 0.575
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.22…0.32 11-0DA10 3RA21 1@-0D@15-1AK6 0.575
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.28…0.4 11-0EA10 3RA21 1@-0E@15-1AK6 0.575
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.35…0.5 11-0FA10 3RA21 1@-0F@15-1AK6 0.575
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.45…0.63 11-0GA10 3RA21 1@-0G@15-1AK6 0.575
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.55…0.8 11-0HA10 3RA21 1@-0H@15-1AK6 0.575
-- -- -- -- -- 1/2 65 0.7… 1 11-0JA10 3RA21 1@-0J@15-1AK6 0.575
-- -- -- -- 1/2 1/2 65 0.9… 1.25 11-0KA10 3RA21 1@-0K@15-1AK6 0.575
-- 1/10 -- -- 3/4 3/4 65 1.1… 1.6 11-1AA10 3RA21 1@-1A@15-1AK6 0.575
-- 1/8 -- -- 3/4 1 65 1.4… 2 11-1BA10 3RA21 1@-1B@15-1AK6 0.575
-- 1/6 1/2 1/2 1 1 1/2 65 1.8… 2.5 11-1CA10 3RA21 1@-1C@15-1AK6 0.575
1/10 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1/2 2 65 2.2… 3.2 11-1DA10 3RA21 1@-1D@15-1AK6 0.575
1/8 1/3 3/4 3/4 2 3 65 2.8… 4 11-1EA10 3RA21 1@-1E@15-1AK6 0.575
6
1/6 1/2 1 1 3 3 65 3.5… 5 11-1FA10 3RA21 1@-1F@15-1AK6 0.575
1/4 1/2 1 1 1/2 3 5 65 4.5… 6.3 11-1GA10 3RA21 1@-1G@15-1AK6 0.575
1/3 1 2 2 5 5 65 5.5… 8 11-1HA10 16-1AK61 3RA21 1@-1H@16-1AK6 0.575
1/2 1 1/2 2 3 5 7 1/2 65 7… 10 11-1JA10 3RA21 1@-1J@16-1AK6 0.575
1/2 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 65 9… 12 11-1KA10 17-1AK61 3RA21 1@-1K@17-1AK6 0.575
1 2 3 5 10 -- 65 11… 16 11-4AA10 18-1AK61 0.575
S0 1/6 1/2 1 1 3 3 65 3.5… 5 11-1FA10 24-1AK60 2921-1AA00 3RA21 2@-1F@24-0AK6 0.761
1/4 1/2 1 1 1/2 3 5 65 4.5… 6.3 11-1GA10 + 8US1251- 3RA21 2@-1G@24-0AK6 0.761
1/3 1 2 2 5 5 65 5.5… 8 11-1HA10 5NT10 3RA21 2@-1H@24-0AK6 0.761
1/2 1 1/2 2 3 5 7 1/2 65 7… 10 11-1JA10 3RA21 2@-1J@24-0AK6 0.761
1/2 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 65 9… 12.5 11-1KA10 3RA21 2@-1K@24-0AK6 0.761
1 2 3 5 10 -- 65 11… 16 21-4AA10 26-1AK60 3RA21 2@-4A@26-0AK6 0.761
1 1/2 3 5 5 10 -- 65 14… 20 21-4BA10 3RA21 2@-4B@26-0AK6 0.761
1 1/2 3 5 7 1/2 15 -- 50 17… 22 21-4CA10 27-1AK60 3RA21 2@-4C@27-0AK6 0.761
2 3 5 7 1/2 15 -- 50 20… 25 21-4DA10 3RA21 2@-4D@27-0AK6 0.761
2 5 7 1/2 10 20 -- 50 27… 32 21-4EA10 3RA21 2@-4E@27-0AK6 0.761
Order No. supplement for:

• Standard DIN rail or screw mounting with no additional auxiliaries 0 A
• Standard DIN rail or screw mounting with 1 SPDT NO/NC MSP auxiliary 5 A
(S00 frame contactor has 1NO auxiliary and S0 frame contactor has 1NO/1NC auxiliary)
• With Fast Bus adaptor and no additional auxiliaries 0 D
• With Fast Bus adaptor and 1 SPDT NO/NC MSP auxiliary 5 D
1) For auxiliary switches see Accessories page 4/44.

2) Selection depends on the motor full load amps.
HP ratings for reference only.
3) Used only for mounting starter on 8US Fast Bus busbar systems.
4/36 Product Category: IEC

Siemens Industry, Inc.
SIRIUS • Revised • 3RA1 / 3RA2
Non-Reversing, AC and DC Coil
10/15/15 up to 100 A

3RA21 30 Direct-on-line starting For 35 mm standard mounting rail or screw mounting
The motor starter protector and contactor are mechanically
Auxiliary switches1) on the motor starter protector and the
contactor can be easily fitted due to the modular system.
Integrated auxiliary switches:
- Contactor size S2: 1NO & 1NC
- Contactor size S3: no integrated auxiliaries
Size S2 devices can be applied as Combination Starters.
For versions of 50A or higher, the addition of a 3RV2938-1K
line side phase barrier is required.
Size S3 devices can be applied as Combination Starters with the
addition of a 3RT1946-4GA07 line side terminal kit
SCCR FLA setting Starter Size Consisting of the following individual devices
at range
480Y/ Inverse-time Order No.
277V delayed Motor starter + Contactor + Link module
overload protector +
kA release
Single-Phase HP Three-Phase2)
Adapter for standard
Ratings HP ratings
mounting rail3)
115V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V A
110VAC 50Hz / 120VAC 60 Hz
3 5 10 10 25 30 65 22... 32 3RA21 3@-4EA35-@AK6 S2 3RV20 31-4EA10
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 65 28... 36 3RA21 3@-4PA35-@AK6 3RV20 31-4PA10 3RT2035-1AK60
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 65 32... 40 3RA21 3@-4UA35-@AK6 3RV20 31-4UA10 3RA2931-1AA00
3 10 15 15 40 50 65 35... 45 3RA21 3@-4VA36-@AK6 3RV20 31-4VA10 3RT2036-1AK60 +
5 10 15 20 40 50 65 42... 52 3RA21 3@-4WA36-@AK6 3RV20 31-4WA10 3RT2036-1AK60 3RA2932-1AA00
(must be ordered
5 15 20 25 50 50 20 49... 59 3RA21 3@-4XA37- @AK6 3RV20 31-4XA10 3RT2037-1AK60
separately)
5 15 20 25 50 50 20 54... 65 3RA21 3@-4JA37- @AK6 3RV20 31-4JA10 3RT2037-1AK60
3 7 1/2 15 15 30 40 65 28... 40 3RA11 4@-4FB44-@AK6 S3 3RV10 41-4FA10
5 10 15 20 40 50 65 36... 50 3RA11 4@-4HB44-@AK6 3RV10 41-4HA10 3RT1044-1AK60 3RA1941-1AA00
5 15 20 25 50 60 65 45... 63 3RA11 4@-4JB44-@AK6 3RV10 41-4JA10
+
7 1/2 15 25 25 60 75 65 57... 75 3RA11 4@-4KB45-@AK6 3RV10 41-4KA10 3RT1045-1AK60
10 20 30 30 75 – 65 70... 90 3RA11 4@-4LB46-@AK6 3RV10 41-4LA10 3RT1046-1AK60 3RA1942-1AA00
10 20 30 30 75 – 65 80...100 3RA11 4@-4MB46-@AK6 3RV10 41-4MA10 3RT1046-1AK60
24 VUC (S2) 24 VDC (S3)

3 5 10 10 25 30 65 22... 32 3RA21 3 -4EA35-@NB3 S2 3RV20 31-4EA10
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 65 28... 36 3RA21 3@-4PA35-@NB3 3RV20 31-4PA10 3RT2035-1NB30
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 65 32... 40 3RA21 3@-4UA35-@NB3 3RV20 31-4UA10
3 10 15 15 40 50 65 35... 45 3RA21 3@-4VA36-@NB3 3RV20 31-4VA10 3RT2036-1NB30 3RA2931-1AA00
+
5 10 15 20 40 50 65 42... 52 3RA21 3@-4WA36-@NB3 3RV20 31-4WA10 3RT2036-1NB30
3RA2932-1AA00
5 15 20 25 50 60 20 49... 59 3RA21 3@-4XA37- @NB3 3RV20 31-4XA10 3RT2037-1NB30 (must be ordered
5 15 20 25 50 60 20 54... 65 3RA21 3@-4JA37- @NB3 3RV20 31-4JA10 3RT2037-1NB30 separately)
3 7 1/2 15 15 30 40 65 28... 40 3RA11 4@-4FB44-@BB4 S3 3RV10 41-4FA10
5 10 15 20 40 50 65 36... 50 3RA11 4@-4HB44-@BB4 3RV10 41-4HA10 3RT1044-1BB40
5 15 20 25 50 60 65 45... 63 3RA11 4@-4JB44-@BB4 3RV10 41-4JA10 3RA1941-1BA00
7 1/2 15 25 25 60 75 65 57... 75 3RA11 4@-4KB45-@BB4 3RV10 41-4KA10 3RT1045-1BB40 +
10 20 30 30 75 65 70... 90 3RA11 4@-4LB46-@BB4 3RV10 41-4LA10 3RT1046-1BB40 3RA1942-1AA00
10 20 30 30 75 – 65 80...100 3RA11 4@-4MB46-@BB4 3RV10 41-4MA10 3RT1046-1BB40

• Standard DIN rail or screw mounting with no additional auxiliaries 0 0
• Standard DIN rail or screw mounting with 1 SPDT NO/NC MSP auxiliary
(S2 frame contactor has 1NO/1NC integrated auxiliary) 5 0 (S2)
(S3 frame contactor has 1NO top mounted auxiliary) 5 1 (S3)
1) For auxilary switches, see accessories page 4/44. Note:

2) Selection depends on motor full load amps. In the S2 frame, for 100kA SCCR versions, replace the prefix 3RA213x with
Horsepower ratings for reference only. 3RA215x. Rating exceptions would be the 59A and 65A versions having a
3) Adapters for standard mounting rail are included for all S3 starters and 30kA SCCR at 480Y/277V. For UL 508 type E/F, order 3RV2938-1K Phase
optional to be ordered as accessories for S2 non-reversing starters. Barrier for field installation on all versions.
1) For auxilary switches, see accessories page 2) Selection depends on motor full load amps. Horse-
4/50. power ratings for reference only.
3) Adapters for standard mounting rail are also suitable
for screw mounting.
Siemens Industry, Inc.

Product Category: IEC
4/37
Combination Starters& for Group
Starters Installation
for Group Installation
3RA1 / 3RA2 SIRIUS SIRIUS
• Revised
Non-Reversing, DC Coil
up to 22 A 3RA21 direct-on-line starters
10/15/15
24 V DC
Direct-on-line
Rated control supply voltage 24 V DC
starting With screw connections
• The motor starter protector and contactor are mechanically
• Auxiliary switches1) on the motor starter protector and the con-
tactor can be easily fitted due to the modular system.
• Integrated auxiliary switches:
- Contactor size S00: 1 NO;
- Contactor size S0: 1 NO + 1 NC
All size S00 and S0 devices can be applied as Combination
3RA21 20 3RA21 10 3RA21 20
Starters with the addition of either of these line side connectors:
3RA21 10
3RV29 28-1H, 3RV29 25-5EB or 3RV29 28-1K.
Size UL Data FLA setting Consisting of the following Assembled starter Weight
range inverse- single devices approx.
Single-phase Three-phase2) SCCR time delayed Motor + Contactor + Link Screw terminals
HP ratings HP ratings at overload starter module
480 V release protector + Busbar
115 V 230 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V adapter3) Order No.
kA A kg
3RV20 3RT20 3RA
S00 -- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.11…0.16 11-0AA10 15-1BB41 1921-1DA00 3RA21 1@-0A@15-1BB4 0.630
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.14…0.2 11-0BA10 + 8US1251- 3RA21 1@-0B@15-1BB4 0.630
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.18…0.25 11-0CA10 5DS10 3RA21 1@-0C@15-1BB4 0.630
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.22…0.32 11-0DA10 3RA21 1@-0D@15-1BB4 0.630
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.28…0.4 11-0EA10 3RA21 1@-0E@15-1BB4 0.630
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.35…0.5 11-0FA10 3RA21 1@-0F@15-1BB4 0.630
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.45…0.63 11-0GA10 3RA21 1@-0G@15-1BB4 0.630
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.55…0.8 11-0HA10 3RA21 1@-0H@15-1BB4 0.630
-- -- -- -- -- 1/2 65 0.7… 1 11-0JA10 3RA21 1@-0J@15-1BB4 0.630
-- -- -- -- 1/2 1/2 65 0.9… 1.25 11-0KA10 3RA21 1@-0K@15-1BB4 0.630
-- 1/10 -- -- 3/4 3/4 65 1.1… 1.6 11-1AA10 3RA21 1@-1A@15-1BB4 0.630
-- 1/8 -- -- 3/4 1 65 1.4… 2 11-1BA10 3RA21 1@-1B@15-1BB4 0.630
-- 1/6 1/2 1/2 1 1 1/2 65 1.8… 2.5 11-1CA10 3RA21 1@-1C@15-1BB4 0.630
1/10 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1/2 2 65 2.2… 3.2 11-1DA10 3RA21 1@-1D@15-1BB4 0.630
1/8 1/3 3/4 3/4 2 3 65 2.8… 4 11-1EA10 3RA21 1@-1E@15-1BB4 0.630
1/6 1/2 1 1 3 3 65 3.5… 5 11-1FA10 3RA21 1@-1F@15-1BB4 0.630
1/4 1/2 1 1 1/2 3 5 65 4.5… 6.3 11-1GA10 3RA21 1@-1G@15-1BB4 0.630
1/3 1 2 2 5 5 65 5.5… 8 11-1HA10 16-1BB41 3RA21 1@-1H@16-1BB4 0.630
6
1/2 1 1/2 2 3 5 7 1/2 65 7… 10 11-1JA10 3RA21 1@-1J@16-1BB4 0.630
1/2 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 65 9… 12 11-1KA10 17-1BB41 3RA21 1@-1K@17-1BB4 0.630
1 2 3 5 10 -- 65 11…16 11-4AA10 18-1BB41 3RA21 1@-4A@18-1BB4 0.630
S0 1/6 1/2 1 1 3 3 65 3.5… 5 11-1FA10 24-1BB40 2921-1BA00 3RA21 2@-1F@24-0BB4 0.948
1/4 1/2 1 1 1/2 3 5 65 4.5… 6.3 11-1GA10 + 8US1251- 3RA21 2@-1G@24-0BB4 0.948
1/3 1 2 2 5 5 65 5.5… 8 11-1HA10 5NT10 3RA21 2@-1H@24-0BB4 0.948
1/2 1 1/2 2 3 5 7 1/2 65 7… 10 11-1JA10 3RA21 2@-1J@24-0BB4 0.948
1/2 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 65 9… 12.5 11-1KA10 3RA21 2@-1K@24-0BB4 0.948
1 2 3 5 10 -- 65 11… 16 21-4AA10 26-1BB40 3RA21 2@-4A@26-0BB4 0.948
1 1/2 3 5 5 10 -- 65 14… 20 21-4BA10 3RA21 2@-4B@26-0BB4 0.948
1 1/2 3 5 7 1/2 15 -- 50 17… 22 21-4CA10 27-1BB40 3RA21 2@-4C@27-0BB4 0.948
2 3 5 7 1/2 15 -- 50 20… 25 21-4DA10 3RA21 2@-4D@27-0BB4 0.948
2 5 7 1/2 10 20 -- 50 27… 32 21-4EA10 3RA21 2@-4E@27-0BB4 0.948

• Standard DIN rail or screw mounting with no additional auxiliaries 0 A
• Standard DIN rail or screw mounting with 1 SPDT NO/NC MSP auxiliary 5 A
• With Fast Bus adaptor and no additional auxiliaries 0 D
• With Fast Bus adaptor and 1 SPDT NO/NC MSP auxiliary 5 D
1) For auxiliary switches, see Accessories page 4/44.

2) Selection depends on the concrete motor full load amps.
HP ratings for reference only.
3) Use only for mounting starter on 8US Fast Bus busbar systems.

SIRIUS • Revised • 3RA1 / 3RA2 Starters
Non-Reversing Fast Bus®
10/15/15 AC and DC Coil

Direct-on-line starting For 60mm Fast Bus busbar systems
The motor starter protector and contactor are mechanically
Auxiliary switches1) on the motor starter protector and the
contactor can be easily fitted due to the modular system.
Integrated auxiliary switches:
- Contactor size S2: 1NO & 1NC
- Contactor size S3: no integrated auxiliaries
SCCR FLA setting Starter Size Consisting of the following individual devices
at range
480Y/ Inverse-time Order No.
277V delayed Motor starter + Contactor + Link module
overload protector +
kA release
Single-Phase Three-Phase2)
HP Ratings HP ratings Adapter for standard
mounting rail3)
115V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V A
110VAC 50Hz / 120 VAC 60Hz
3 5 10 10 25 30 65 22... 32 3RA21 3@-4ED35-@AK6 S2 3RV20 31-4EA10
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 65 28... 36 3RA21 3@-4PD35-@AK6 3RV20 31-4PA10 3RT2035-1AK60
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 65 32... 40 3RA21 3@-4UD35-@AK6 3RV20 31-4UA10 3RA2931-1AA00
3 10 15 15 40 50 65 35... 45 3RA21 3@-4VD36-@AK6 3RV20 31-4VA10 3RT2036-1AK60 +
5 10 15 20 40 50 65 3RA21 3@-4WD36-@AK6 3RV20 31-4WA10 3RT2036-1AK60 8US1261-6MT10
42... 52
5 15 20 25 50 50 20 49... 59 3RA21 3@-4XD37- @AK6 3RV20 31-4XA10 3RT2037-1AK60
5 15 20 25 50 50 20 54... 65 3RA21 3@-4JA10- @AK6 3RV20 31-4JA10 3RT2037-1AK60
3 7 1/2 15 15 30 40 65 28... 40 3RA11 4@-4FD44-@ AK6 S3 3RV10 41-4FA10
5 10 15 20 40 50 65 36... 50 3RA11 4@-4HD44-@AK6 3RV10 41-4HA10 3RT1044-1AK60
3RA1941-1AA00
5 15 20 25 50 60 65 45... 63 3RA11 4@-4JD44-@AK6 3RV10 41-4JA10 +
7 1/2 15 25 25 60 75 65 57... 75 3RA11 4@-4KD45-@AK6 3RV10 41-4KA10 3RT1045-1AK60 8US1211-4TR00
10 20 30 30 75 – 65 70... 90 3RA11 4@-4LD46-@AK6 3RV10 41-4LA10 3RT1046-1AK60
10 20 30 30 75 – 65 80...100 3RA11 4@-4MD46-@AK6 3RV10 41-4MA10 3RT1046-1AK60
24VDC
3 5 10 10 25 30 65 22... 32 3RA21 3@-4ED35-@NB3 S2 3RV20 31-4EA10
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 65 28... 36 3RA21 3@-4PD35-@NB3 3RV20 31-4PA10 3RT2035-1NB30
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 65 32... 40 3RA21 3@-4UD35-@NB3 3RV20 31-4UA10 3RA2931-1AA00
3 10 15 15 40 50 65 35... 45 3RA21 3@-4VD36-@NB3 3RV20 31-4VA10 3RT2036-1NB30 +
65 42... 52 3RA21 3@-4WD36-@NB3 3RV20 31-4WA10 3RT2036-1NB30 8US1261-6MT10
5 10 15 20 40 50
5 15 20 25 50 50 20 49... 59 3RA21 3@-4XD37- @NB3 3RV20 31-4XA10 3RT2037-1NB30
5 15 20 25 50 60 20 54... 65 3RA21 3@-4JD37-@NB3 3RV20 31-4JA10 3RT2037-1NB30
3 7 1/2 15 15 30 40 65 28... 40 3RA11 4@-4FD44-@BB4 S3 3RV10 41-4FA10
5 10 15 20 40 50 65 36... 50 3RA11 4@-4HD44-@BB4 3RV10 41-4HA10 3RT1044-1BB40
5 15 20 25 50 60 65 45... 63 3RA11 4@-4JD44-@BB4 3RV10 41-4JA10 3RA1941-1BA00
7 1/2 15 25 25 60 75 65 57... 75 3RA11 4@-4KD45-@BB4 3RV10 41-4KA10 3RT1045-1BB40 +
10 20 30 30 75 – 65 70... 90 3RA11 4@-4LD46-@BB4 3RV10 41-4LA10 3RT1046-1BB40 8US1211-4TR00
10 20 30 30 75 – 65 80...100 3RA11 4@-4MD46-@BB4 3RV10 41-4MA10 3RT1046-1BB40

• Standard DIN rail or screw mounting with no additional auxiliaries 0 0
• Standard DIN rail or screw mounting with 1 SPDT NO/NC MSP auxiliary
(S2 frame contactor has 1NO/1NC integrated auxiliary) 5 0 (S2)
(S3 frame contactor has 1NO top mounted auxiliary) 5 1 (S3)
1) For auxiliary switches, see Accessories page 4/44. Note:

2) Selection depends on motor full load amps. In the S2 frame, for 100kA SCCR versions, replace the prefix 3RA213x with
Horsepower ratings for reference only. 3RA215x. Rating exceptions would be the 59A and 65A versions having a
1) For auxiliary switches, see accessories page 4/50.
30kA SCCR at 480Y/277V. For UL 508 type E/F, order 3RV2938-1K Phase
2) Selection depends on motor full load amps. Horse- Barrier for field installation on all versions.
power ratings for reference only.

Combination Starters for Group
& Starters for Installation
Group Installation
3RA1 / 3RA2 Starters SIRIUS SIRIUS
• Revised
Reversing, AC Coil 3RA22 reversing starters
up to 22 A 10/15/15
50/60 Hz 110/120 V AC

Reversing duty Rated control supply voltage 50/60 Hz 110/120 V AC
With screw connections
• The motor starter protector and contactor are mechan-
ically and electrically connected by means of the link
module.
• Auxiliary switches1) on the motor starter protector and
the contactor can be easily fitted due to the modular
system.
• With the contactor S0, an integrated NO contact is
available for free use.
3RA22 10 3RA22 20 3RA22 10 3RA22 20 All size S00 and S0 devices can be applied as Combina-
tion Starters with the addition of either of these line side
connectors: 3RV29 28-1H, 3RV29 25-5EB or
3RV29 28-1K.
Size UL Data FLA setting Consisting of the following single devices Assembled starter Weight
range inverse- approx.
Single-phase Three-phase2) SCCR time delayed Motor starter + 2 contac- + Link module Screw terminals
HP ratings HP ratings at overload protector tors + Assembly kit
480 V release RH/RS3)
115 V 230 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V Order No.
kA A kg
3RV20 3RT20 3RA
S00 -- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.11…0.16 11-0AA10 15-1AK62 1921-1DA00 3RA22 10-0A @15-2AK6 0.824
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.14…0.2 11-0BA10 + 2913-2AA14) 3RA22 10-0B @15-2AK6 0.824
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.18…0.25 11-0CA10 + 2913-1DB1 (RS) 3RA22 10-0C @15-2AK6 0.824
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.22…0.32 11-0DA10 3RA22 10-0D @15-2AK6 0.824
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.28…0.4 11-0EA10 3RA22 10-0E @15-2AK6 0.824
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.35…0.5 11-0FA10 3RA22 10-0F @15-2AK6 0.824
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.45…0.63 11-0GA10 3RA22 10-0G @15-2AK6 0.824
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.55…0.8 11-0HA10 3RA22 10-0H @15-2AK6 0.824
-- -- -- -- -- 1/2 65 0.7… 1 11-0JA10 3RA22 10-0J @15-2AK6 0.824
-- -- -- -- 1/2 1/2 65 0.9… 1.25 11-0KA10 3RA22 10-0K @15-2AK6 0.824
-- 1/10 -- -- 3/4 3/4 65 1.1… 1.6 11-1AA10 3RA22 10-1A @15-2AK6 0.824
-- 1/8 -- -- 3/4 1 65 1.4… 2 11-1BA10 3RA22 10-1B @15-2AK6 0.824
-- 1/6 1/2 1/2 1 1 1/2 65 1.8… 2.5 11-1CA10 3RA22 10-1C @15-2AK6 0.824
1/10 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1/2 2 65 2.2… 3.2 11-1DA10 3RA22 10-1D @15-2AK6 0.824
6
1/8 1/3 3/4 3/4 2 3 65 2.8… 4 11-1EA10 3RA22 10-1E @15-2AK6 0.824
1/6 1/2 1 1 3 3 65 3.5… 5 11-1FA10 3RA22 10-1F @15-2AK6 0.824
1/4 1/2 1 1 1/2 3 5 65 4.5… 6.3 11-1GA10 3RA22 10-1G @15-2AK6 0.824
1/3 1 2 2 5 5 65 5.5… 8 11-1HA10 16-1AK62 3RA22 10-1H @16-2AK6 0.824
1/2 1 1/2 2 3 5 7 1/2 65 7… 10 11-1JA10 3RA22 10-1J @16-2AK6 0.824
1/2 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 65 9… 12 11-1KA10 17-1AK62 3RA22 10-1K @17-2AK6 0.824
1 2 3 5 10 -- 65 11…16 11-4AA10 18-1AK62 3RA22 10-4A @18-2AK6 0.824
S0 1/6 1/2 1 1 3 3 65 3.5… 5 11-1FA10 24-1AK60 2921-1AA00 3RA22 20-1F @24-0AK6 1.434
1/4 1/2 1 1 1/2 3 5 65 4.5… 6.3 11-1GA10 + 2923-1BB1 (RH) 3RA22 20-1G @24-0AK6 1.434
1/3 1 2 2 5 5 65 5.5… 8 11-1HA10 + 2923-1DB1 (RS) 3RA22 20-1H @24-0AK6 1.434
1/2 1 1/2 2 3 5 7 1/2 65 7… 10 11-1JA10 3RA22 20-1J @24-0AK6 1.434
1/2 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 65 9… 12.5 11-1KA10 3RA22 20-1K @24-0AK6 1.434
1 2 3 5 10 -- 65 11… 16 21-4AA10 26-1AK60 3RA22 20-4A @26-0AK6 1.434
1 1/2 3 5 5 10 -- 65 14… 20 21-4BA10 3RA22 20-4B @26-0AK6 1.434
1 1/2 3 5 7 1/2 15 -- 50 17… 22 21-4CA10 27-1AK60 3RA22 20-4C @27-0AK6 1.434
2 3 5 7 1/2 15 -- 50 20… 25 21-4DA10 3RA22 20-4D @27-0AK6 1.434
2 5 7 1/2 10 20 -- 50 27… 32 21-4EA10 3RA22 20-4E @27-0AK6 1.434
Add. weight
Order No. supplement for mounting onto standard mounting rail or screw fixing
• Without standard mounting rail adapter for size S004) 1 A
• With 2 standard mounting rail adapters for size S0 2 B
Screw fixing with 2 push-in lugs each per motor starter is possible
Order No. supplement for mounting onto Fastbus 60mm busbar system for size S00 1 D 0.486
With 8US Fast Bus busbar adapter for size S0 2 D 0.293
1) For push-in lugs and auxiliary switches, see Accessories on pages 4/44 and 4/52.
2) Selection depends on the motor full load amps. HP ratings for reference only.
3) According to ordering option:
RH = assembly kit for reversing duty with standard rail mounting adapter in size S0.
RS = assembly kit for reversing duty with 8US Fast Bus busbar mounting.
4) With standard rail mounting or screw fixing, the 3RA29 13-2AA1
wiring kit is required for size S00.

Reversing, AC Coil
10/15/15 up to 100 A

3RA12 40 Reversing duty For 35 mm standard mounting rail or screw mounting
All starters are suitable for use in Group Installation applications
per NEC 430-53 (c)
Motor starter protector and contactor are linked electrically and
mechanically by means of a link module and adapter plate
Starter includes both electrical and mechanical interlocks
Auxiliary switches 1) can be added easily to the MSP and the con-
tactor
SCCR: 65kA at 480V
FLA set- Starter Size Consisting of the following individual devices

ting range Order No.
Inverse-
time Motor starter + 2 Contactors + Link module
delayed protector +
overload assembly kit RH3)
HP Ratings HP ratings
115V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V A
110VAC 50Hz / 120VAC 60Hz
3 5 10 10 25 30 22... 32 S2 3RV20 31-4EA10
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 28... 36 3RV20 31-4PA10 3RT2035-1AK60
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 32... 40 3RV20 31-4UA10 3RA2931-1AA00
For customer
3 10 15 15 40 50 35... 45 assembly 3RV20 31-4VA10 3RT2036-1AK60 +
3RV20 31-4WA10 3RT2036-1AK60 3RA2933-1BB1
5 10 15 20 40 50 42... 52
5 15 20 25 50 50 49... 59 3RV20 31-4XA10 3RT2037-1AK60
5 15 20 25 50 50 54... 65 3RV20 31-4JA10 3RT2037-1AK60
3 7 1/2 15 15 30 40 28 ... 40 3RA12 4@-4FB44-@AK6 S3 3RV10 41-4FA10
5 10 15 20 40 50 36 ... 50 3RA12 4@-4HB44-@AK6 3RV10 41-4HA10 3RT1044-1AK60
3RA1941-1AA00
5 15 20 25 50 60 45 ... 63 3RA12 4@-4JB44-@AK6 3RV10 41-4JA10 +
7 1/2 15 25 25 60 75 57 ... 75 3RA12 4@-4KB45-@AK6 3RV10 41-4KA10 3RT1045-1AK60 3RA1943-1B4)
10 20 30 30 75 – 70 ... 90 3RA12 4@-4LB46-@AK6 3RV10 41-4LA10 3RT1046-1AK60
10 20 30 30 75 – 80 ... 100 3RA12 4@-4MB46-@AK6 3RV10 41-4MA10 3RT1046-1AK60
24VDC
3 5 10 10 25 30 22... 32 S2 3RV20 31-4EA10
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 28... 36 3RV20 31-4PA10 3RT2035-1NB30
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 32... 40 3RV20 31-4UA10 3RA2931-1AA00
For customer
3 10 15 15 40 50 35... 45 3RV20 31-4VA10 3RT2036-1NB30 +
assembly 3RA2933-1BB1
5 10 15 20 40 50 42... 52 3RV20 31-4WA10 3RT2036-1NB30
5 15 20 25 50 50 49... 59 3RV20 31-4XA10 3RT2037-1NB30
5 15 20 25 50 50 54... 65 3RV20 31-4JA10 3RT2037-1NB30
3 7 1/2 15 15 30 40 28 ... 40 3RA12 4@-4FB44-@BB4 S3 3RV10 41-4FA10
5 10 15 20 40 50 36 ... 50 3RA12 4@-4HB44-@BB4 3RV10 41-4HA10 3RT1044-1BB40
3RA1941-1BA00
5 15 20 25 50 60 45 ... 63 3RA12 4@-4JB44-@BB4 3RV10 41-4JA10 +
7 1/2 15 25 25 60 75 57 ... 75 3RA12 4@-4KB45-@BB4 3RV10 41-4KA10 3RT1045-1BB40 3RA1943-1B4)
10 20 30 30 75 – 70 ... 90 3RA12 4@-4LB46-@BB4 3RV10 41-4LA10 3RT1046-1BB40
10 20 30 30 75 – 80 ... 100 3RA12 4@-4MB46-@BB4 3RV10 41-4MA10 3RT1046-1BB40
Order No. suffix

Standard unit without auxiliary contacts. . . . . . . . . . . 0 0
1 SPDT NO/NC MSP auxiliary and 1 NO
front mount contactor auxiliary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1
RH = Reversing duty for rail mounting.

2) Selection depends on motor full load amps. Horse power ratings for reference only.
3)
1) Adapters forswitches,
For auxiliary standardsee
mounting rail are
accessories pagealso suitable
4/44. for screw
3) Adapters mounting.
for standard mounting rail are also suitable for
4)
2) Mechanical interlock
Selection depends mustfull
on motor beload
ordered
amps.separately;
Horse screw mounting. page 4/50
see Accessories
power ratings for reference only. 4) Mechanical interlock must be ordered separately; see
accessories page 4/50.

Combination Starters for Group
& Starters for Installation
Group Installation
3RA1 / 3RA2 SIRIUS SIRIUS
• Revised
Reversing, DC Coil 3RA22 reversing starters
up to 22 A 10/15/15
24 V DC
Reversing duty Rated control supply voltage 24 V DC

With screw connections
• The motor starter protector and contactor are mechan-
ically and electrically connected by means of the link
module.
• Auxiliary switches1) on the motor starter protector and
the contactor can be easily fitted due to the modular
system.
• With the contactor S0, an integrated NO contact is
available for free use.
3RA22 10 3RA22 20 3RA22 10 3RA22 20 All size S00 and S0 devices can be applied as Combina-
tion Starters with the addition of either of these line side
connectors: 3RV29 28-1H, 3RV29 25-5EB or
3RV29 28-1K.
Size UL Data FLA setting Consisting of the following single devices Assembled starter Weight
range inverse- approx.
Single-phase Three-phase 2)
SCCR time delayed Motor starter + 2 contac- + Link module Screw terminals
HP ratings HP ratings at overload protector tors + Assembly kit
480 V release RH/RS3)
115 V 230 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V Order No.
kA A kg
3RV20 3RT20 3RA
S00 -- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.11…0.16 11-0AA10 15-1BB42 1921-1DA00 '+ 3RA22 10-0A@15-2BB4 0.934
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.14…0.2 11-0BA10 2913-2AA14) '+ 3RA22 10-0B@15-2BB4 0.934
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.18…0.25 11-0CA10 2913-1DB1 (RS) 3RA22 10-0C@15-2BB4 0.934
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.22…0.32 11-0DA10 3RA22 10-0D@15-1BB4 0.934
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.28…0.4 11-0EA10 3RA22 10-0E@15-2BB4 0.934
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.35…0.5 11-0FA10 3RA22 10-0F@15-1BB4 0.934
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.45…0.63 11-0GA10 3RA22 10-0G@15-2BB4 0.934
-- -- -- -- -- -- 65 0.55…0.8 11-0HA10 3RA22 10-0H@15-2BB4 0.934
-- -- -- -- -- 1/2 65 0.7… 1 11-0JA10 3RA22 10-0J@15-2BB4 0.934
-- -- -- -- 1/2 1/2 65 0.9… 1.25 11-0KA10 3RA22 10-0K@15-2BB4 0.934
-- 1/10 -- -- 3/4 3/4 65 1.1… 1.6 11-1AA10 3RA22 10-1A@15-2BB4 0.934
-- 1/8 -- -- 3/4 1 65 1.4… 2 11-1BA10 3RA22 10-1B@15-2BB4 0.934
-- 1/6 1/2 1/2 1 1 1/2 65 1.8… 2.5 11-1CA10 3RA22 10-1C@15-2BB4 0.934
1/10 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1/2 2 65 2.2… 3.2 11-1DA10 3RA22 10-1D@15-2BB4 0.934
1/8 1/3 3/4 3/4 2 3 65 2.8… 4 11-1EA10 3RA22 10-1E@15-2BB4 0.934
1/6 1/2 1 1 3 3 65 3.5… 5 11-1FA10 3RA22 10-1F@15-2BB4 0.934
6
1/4 1/2 1 1 1/2 3 5 65 4.5… 6.3 11-1GA10 3RA22 10-1G@15-2BB4 0.934
1/3 1 2 2 5 5 65 5.5… 8 11-1HA10 16-1BB42 3RA22 10-1H@16-2BB4 0.934
1/2 1 1/2 2 3 5 7 1/2 65 7… 10 11-1JA10 3RA22 10-1J@16-2BB4 0.934
1/2 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 65 9… 12 11-1KA10 17-1BB42 3RA22 10-1K@17-2BB4 0.934
1 2 3 5 10 -- 65 11…16 11-4AA10 18-1BB42 3RA22 10-4A@18-2BB4 0.934
S0 1/6 1/2 1 1 3 3 65 3.5… 5 11-1FA10 24-1BB40 2921-1BA00 '+ 3RA22 20-1F@24-0BB4 1.811
1/4 1/2 1 1 1/2 3 5 65 4.5… 6.3 11-1GA10 2923-1BB1 (RH) '+ 3RA22 20-1G@24-0BB4 1.811
1/3 1 2 2 5 5 65 5.5… 8 11-1HA10 2923-1DB1 (RS) 3RA22 20-1H@24-0BB4 1.811
1/2 1 1/2 2 3 5 7 1/2 65 7… 10 11-1JA10 3RA22 20-1J@24-0BB4 1.811
1/2 2 3 3 7 1/2 10 65 9… 12.5 11-1KA10 3RA22 20-1K@24-0BB4 1.811
1 2 3 5 10 -- 65 11… 16 21-4AA10 26-1BB40 3RA22 20-4A@26-0BB4 1.811
1 1/2 3 5 5 10 -- 65 14… 20 21-4BA10 3RA22 20-4B@26-0BB4 1.811
1 1/2 3 5 7 1/2 15 -- 50 17… 22 21-4CA10 27-1BB40 3RA22 20-4C@27-0BB4 1.811
2 3 5 7 1/2 15 -- 50 20… 25 21-4DA10 3RA22 20-4D@27-0BB4 1.811
2 5 7 1/2 10 20 -- 50 27… 32 21-4EA10 3RA22 20-4E@27-0BB4 1.811
Add. weight
Order No. supplement for mounting onto standard mounting rail or screw fixing
• Without standard mounting rail adapter for size S004) 1 A
• With 2 standard mounting rail adapters for size S0 2 B
Screw fixing with 2 push-in lugs each per motor starter is possible
Order No. supplement for mounting onto Fastbus 60mm busbar system for size S00 1 D 0.486
With 8US Fast Bus busbar adapter for size S0 2 D 0.306
1) For push-in lugs and auxiliary switches, see Accessories on pages 4/44 and 4/52.
2) Selection depends on the motor full load amps. HP ratings for reference only.
3) Code for abbreviations:
RH = assembly kit for reversing duty with standard rail mounting adapter in size S0.
RS = assembly kit for reversing duty with 8US Fast Bus busbar mounting.
4) With standard rail mounting or screw fixing, the 3RA29 13-2AA1 wiring kit and link
module are required for size S00.

Reversing Fast Bus®, AC and DC Coil
10/15/15 up to 100 A

Reversing duty For 60 mm Fast Bus busbar systems
Representative image
of assembled starter
All starters are suitable for use in Group Installation applications
per NEC 430-53 (c)
Motor starter protector and contactor are linked electrically and
mechanically by means of a link module and mounted on a Fast-
bus Shoe
Starter includes both electrical and mechanical interlocks
Auxiliary switches 1) can be added easily to the MSP and the
contactor
Size S3 is kit form only - assembly required
Size S2 devices can be applied as Combination Starters
SCCR: 65kA at 480V
FLA setting Starter Size Consisting of the following individual devices

range Order No.
Inverse-time Motor starter + Contactor + Link module
delayed protector +
overload Adapter shoe for
release Fastbus
HP Ratings HP ratings
115V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V A
110VAC 50Hz / 120VAC 60Hz
3 5 10 10 25 30 22... 32 S2 3RV20 31-4EA10
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 28... 36 3RV20 31-4PA10 3RT2035-1AK60
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 32... 40 3RV20 31-4UA10 3RA2931-1AA00
For customer
3 10 15 15 40 50 35... 45 3RV20 31-4VA10 3RT2036-1AK60 +
assembly
5 3RV20 31-4WA10 3RT2036-1AK60 3RA2933-1DB1
10 15 20 40 50 42... 52
5 15 20 25 50 50 49... 59 3RV20 31-4XA10 3RT2037-1AK60
5 15 20 25 50 50 54... 65 3RV20 31-4JA10 3RT2037-1AK60
3 7 1/2 15 15 30 40 28 ... 40 3RA12 4@-4FD44-@AK6 S3 3RV10 41-4FA10
5 10 15 20 40 50 36 ... 50 3RA12 4@-4HD44-@AK6 3RV10 41-4HA10 3RT1044-1AK60
5 15 20 25 50 60 45 ... 63 3RA12 4@-4JD44-@AK6 3RV10 41-4JA10 3RA1941-1AA00
7 1/2 15 25 25 60 75 57 ... 75 3RA12 4@-4KD45-@AK6 3RV10 41-4KA10 3RT1045-1AK60 +
10 20 30 30 75 – 70 ... 90 3RA12 4@-4LD46-@AK6 3RV10 41-4LA10 3RT1046-1AK60 3RA1943-2A3)
10 20 30 30 75 – 80 ... 100 3RA12 4@-4MD46-@AK6 3RV10 41-4MA10 3RT1046-1AK60
24VDC
3 5 10 10 25 30 22... 32 S2 3RV10 31-4AA10
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 28... 36 3RV10 31-4BA10 3RT1033-1BB40
3 7.5 15 15 30 40 32... 40 For customer 3RV10 31-4DA10 3RA2931-1AA00
3 10 15 15 40 50 35... 45 assembly 3RV10 31-4EA10 3RT1034-1BB40 +
3RV10 31-4FA10 3RT1035-1BB40 3RA2933-1DB1
5 10 15 20 40 50 42... 52
5 15 20 25 50 50 49... 59 3RV10 31-4GA10 3RT1036-1BB40
5 15 20 25 50 50 54... 65 3RV10 31-4HA10 3RT1036-1BB40
3 7 1/2 15 15 30 40 28 ... 40 3RA12 4@-4FD44-@BB4 S3 3RV10 41-4FA10
5 10 15 20 40 50 36 ... 50 3RA12 4@-4HD44-@BB4 3RV10 41-4HA10 3RT1044-1BB40
5 15 20 25 50 60 45 ... 63 3RA12 4@-4JD44-@BB4 3RV10 41-4JA10 3RA1941-1BA00
7 1/2 15 25 25 60 75 57 ... 75 3RA12 4@-4KD45-@BB4 3RV10 41-4KA10 3RT1045-1BB40 +
10 20 30 30 75 – 70 ... 90 3RA12 4@-4LD46-@BB4 3RV10 41-4LA10 3RT1046-1BB40 3RA 1943-2A3)
10 20 30 30 75 – 80 ... 100 3RA12 4@-4MD46-@BB4 3RV10 41-4MA10 3RT1046-1BB40
Order No. suffix

Standard unit without auxiliary contacts. . . . . . . . 0 0
1 SPDT NO/NC MSP auxiliary and 1 NO
front mount contactor auxiliary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1

2) Selection depends on motor full load amps. Horsepower ratings for reference only.
3)1)Mechanical
For auxiliaryinterlock
switches,must be orderedpage
see accessories separately;
4/44. 3)see Accessories
Mechanical pagemust
interlock 4/50.
be ordered separately; see
2) Selection depends on motor full load amps. Horse- accessories page 4/50.
power ratings for reference only.

3RA1 / 3RA2 Accessories • Revised • SIRIUS
Auxiliary switches 10/15/15
Overview
The accessories listed here are parts and add-ons for the 3RA1/3RA2 direct-on-line and reversing
starters as well as components for the customer assembly of motor starters
3RV29 01-1E 3RV29 01-2E 3RV29 01-1A 3RV29 01-2A 3RV29 02-1A 3RV29 02-2D
For MSPs Screw Weight Spring-type Weight

Terminals approx. Terminals approx.
Size Order No. kg Order No. kg
Auxillary switches for motor starter protectors 1

Transverse auxillary switches
For front mounting
1 CO S00, S0, S2 3RV29 01-1D 0.014 —
S3 3RV19 01-1D 0.020 —
1 NO + 1 NC S00, S0, S2 3RV29 01-1E 0.016 3RV29 01-2E 0.016
S3 3RV19 01-1E 0.020 —
Lateral auxillary switches
Mountable on the left
1 NO + 1 NC S00, S0, S2 3RV29 01-1A 0.036 3RV29 01-2A 0.035
S3 3RV19 01-1A 0.030 —
1 One transverse auxillary switch and one lateral auxillary switch can be attached per motor starter protector.
When the lateral auxillary switch with 2 NO + 2 NC is used, a transverse auxillary switch is not allowed.
Rated control supply voltage Us For Screw Weight Spring-type Weight

MSPs Terminals approx. Terminals approx.
AC AC AC 50/60 Hz AC/DC 50/60 Hz,
50 Hz 60 Hz 100% ON period 1 DC 5s ON period 2
V V V V Size Order No. kg Order No. kg
Auxillary releases for motor starter protectors 3

Undervoltage releases
415 480 — — S00, S0, S2 3RV29 02-1AV1 0.117 —

415 480 — — S3 3RV19 02-1AV1 0.129 —
Shunt releases
— — 20…24 20...70 S00, S0, S2 3RV29 02-1DB0 0.119 3RV29 02-2DB0 0.115
— — 90…110 70...190 3RV29 02-1DF0 0.119 3RV29 02-2DF0 0.115
— — 24 — S3 3RV19 02-1DB0 0.113 —
— — 120 — 3RV19 02-1DF0 0.135 —
1 The voltage range is valid for 100% (infinite) ON period. The response voltage lies at 0.9 of the lower limit of the voltage range.
2 The voltage range is valid for 5s ON period at AC 50 Hz/60 Hz and DC. The response voltage lies at 0.85 of the lower limit of the voltage range.
3 One auxiliary release can be mounted on the right per motor starter protector
(does not apply to 3RV21 motor starter protectors with overload reset function).

SIRIUS • Revised • 3RA1 / 3RA2 Accessories
10/15/15 Auxiliary switches, terminals

For Version Screw Weight Spring-type Weight
Conductors Terminals approx. Terminals approx.
Size Order No. kg Order No. kg
Auxillary switch blocks for snapping on the front for contactors
Cable entry from below S00, S0, S2 1-pole 1 NC 3RH29 11-1BA10 0.020 —
S00, S0, S2 1-pole 1 NO 3RH29 11-1BA01 0.020 —
S00, S0, S2 2-pole 1 NO + 1 NC 3RH29 11-1MA11 0.050 —
S00, S0, S2 2-pole 2 NO 3RH29 11-1MA20 0.050 —
3RH29 11-1BA10
S3 2-pole 1 NO + 1 NC 3RH19 11-1MA11 0.075 —
S3 2-pole 2 NO 3RH19 11-1MA20 0.075 —
S3 2-pole 2 NC 3RH19 11-1MA02 0.075 —
3RH29 11-1MA20
Cable entry from two sides S00, S0, S2 4-pole 2 NO + 2 NC 3RH29 11-1FA22 0.060 3RH29 11-2FA22 0.049
S3 4-pole 2 NO + 2 NC 3RH19 21-1FA22 0.075 —
S3 1-pole 1 NO 3RH19 21-1CA10 0.020 —
S3 1-pole 1 NC 3RH19 21-1CA01 0.020 —
3RH29 11-1FA22 S00 2-pole 1 NO + 1 NC 3RH29 11-1DA11 0.039 3RH29 11-2DA11 0.050
S00 2-pole 2 NC 3RH29 11-1DA02 0.039 3RH29 11-2DA02 0.050
S0, S2 2-pole 1 NO + 1 NC 3RH29 21-1DA11 0.039 3RH29 21-2DA11 0.050
S0, S2 2-pole 2 NC 3RH29 21-1DA02 0.041 3RH29 21-2DA02 0.050
S0, S2 2-pole 2 NO 3RH29 21-1DA20 0.041 3RH29 21-2DA20 0.050
Laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks for contactors
S00 2 NC 3RH29 11-1DA02 0.020 3RH29 11-2DA02 0.050

S00 1 NO + 1 NC 3RH29 11-1DA11 0.040 3RH29 11-2DA11 0.050
S00 1 NO 3RH29 11-1DA20 0.040 3RH29 11-2DA20 0.050
S0, S2 2 NC 3RH29 21-1DA02 0.050 3RH29 21-2DA02 0.050
3RH29 11-1DA11 S0, S2 1 NO + 1 NC 3RH29 21-1DA11 0.050 3RH29 21-2DA11 0.050
S0, S2 2 NO 3RH29 21-1DA20 0.050 3RH29 21-2DA20 0.050
Connection modules for contactors with screw terminals

Adaptors for contactors Ambient temperature Tu max = 60 °C
S00 Rated operational current 3RT19 16-4RD01 0.020 —
Ie at AC-3/400 V: 20A
S0 Rated operational current 3RT19 26-4RD01 0.020 —
3RT19 26-4RD01 Ie at AC-3/400 V: 25A
Plugs for contactors S00, S0 3RT19 00-4RE01 0.025 —
3RT19 00-4RE01

Terminals 10/15/15

For Version Screw Weight
Conductors Terminals approx.
Size Order No. kg
Note: UL 508 demands for “Combination Motor Controller Type E” 1” air gaps and 2” creepage distances
at lineside. The following terminal blocks must be used in S3 MSP’s 3RV10. The S2 MSP 3RV10 conforms
with stipulated air gaps and creepage distances without terminal block.
Terminal blocks are not required for use according to CSA. With size S0 these terminal blocks cannot
be used in combination with 3-phase busbars 3RV19.5. This also applies to size S3 in combination with
3RV29 28-1H transverse auxiliary switches.
Terminal block type E S00, S0 3RV29 28-1H 0.120

for extended air/creepage distance (1” and 2”) S00, S0 3RV29 28-1K 0.120
S2 3RV29381K 0.120
3RV29 28-1K S3 3RT19 46-4GA07 0.120
3RT19 46-4GA07

11/02/15 Surge suppressors

For Version Surge Weight
Conductors Rated control supply voltage Us Suppressors approx.
Size AC V DC V Order No. kg
Size S00 — For plugging onto the front side of the contactors with and without auxiliary switch blocks
3RT2.1 Varistors 24 … 48 AC 24 … 70 DC 3RT29 16-1BB00 0.010

48 … 127 AC 70 … 150 DC 3RT29 16-1BC00 0.010
3RT2.1 RC elements 24 … 48 AC 24 … 70 DC 3RT29 16-1CB00 0.010
48 … 127 AC 70 … 150 DC 3RT29 16-1CC00 0.010
3RT2.1 Noise suppression 12 … 250 DC 3RT29 16-1DG00 0.010
3RT2.1 Diode assemblies 12 … 250 DC 3RT29 16-1EH00 0.010
3RT29 16-1EH00 (diode and Zener diode) for DC
operation and short break times
Size S0 — For plugging onto the front side of the contacctors (prior to mounting of the auxiliary switch block)
3RT2.2 Varistors 24 … 48 AC 24 … 70 DC 3RT29 26-1BB00 0.010

48 … 127 AC 70 … 150 DC 3RT29 26-1BC00 0.010
3RT2.2 RC elements 24 … 48 AC 24 … 70 DC 3RT29 26-1CB00 0.010
48 … 127 AC 70 … 150 DC 3RT29 26-1CC00 0.010
3RT2.2 Diode assemblies 24 DC 3RT29 26-1ER00 0.010
3RT29 26-1BB00 for DC operation and short break times 30 … 250 DC 3RT29 26-1ES00 0.010
Sizes S2
3RT2.3 Varistors 24 ... 48 AC 24 ... 70 DC 3RT29 36-1BB00 0.010
127 ... 240 AC 150 ... 250 DC 3RT29 36-1BD00 0.010
3RT2.3 RC elements 24 ... 48 AC 24 ... 70 DC 3RT29 36-1CB00 0.010

3RT2936-1B.00
127 ... 240 AC 150 ... 250 DC 3RT29 36-1CD00 0.010
3RT2.3 Diode assemblies -- 24 DC 3RT29 36-1ER00 0.010

-- 30 ... 250 DC 3RT29 36-1ES00 0.010
3RT2936-1E.00
Sizes S3
3RT10 4. Varistors 24 … 48 AC 24 … 70 DC 3RT19 36-1BB00 0.025
48 … 127 AC 70 … 150 DC 3RT19 36-1BC00 0.025
3RT10 4. RC elements 24 … 48 AC 24 … 70 DC 3RT19 36-1CB00 0.040
48 … 127 AC 70 … 150 DC 3RT19 36-1CC00 0.040
3RT10 4. Diode assemblies 24 DC 3RT19 36-1TR00 0.025
for DC operation and short break times, 30 … 250 DC 3RT19 36-1TS00 0.025
3RT19 36-1CC00
can be plugged in at bottom

Surge suppressors, link modules
10/15/15

For For Actuating voltage Screw Pack Weight
MSP contactors of contactor Terminals Qty. approx.
Size Order No. kg
Electrical and mechanical link between motor starter protector and contactor
Single-unit S00, S0 S00 AC and DC 3RA19 21-1DA00

packaging S00, S0 S0 AC 3RA29 21-1AA00 1 unit 0.055
S00, S0 S0 DC 3RA29 21-1BA00 1 unit 0.068
3RA29 11-2AA00
S2 S2 AC and DC 3RA29 31-1AA00 1 unit 0.104
S3 S3 AC 3RA19 41-1AA00 1 unit 0.090
S3 S3 DC 3RA19 41-1BA00 1 unit 0.088
Multi-unit S00, S0 S00 AC and DC 3RA19 21-1D 10 unit 0.021
packaging S00, S0 S0 AC 3RA29 21-1A 10 unit 0.001
S00, S0 S0 DC 3RA29 21-1B 10 unit 0.001
S2 S2 AC and DC 3RA29 31-1A 5 unit 0.104
Spring-type
Terminals
Electrical and mechanical link between motor starter protector and contactor Order No.
Single-unit S00 S00 AC and DC 3RA29 11-2AA00
packaging S0 S0 AC 1) and DC 3RA29 21-2AA00 1 unit 0.040
3RA29 11-2AA00 Multi-unit S00 S00 AC and DC 3RA29 11-2A 10 unit 0.400
packaging S0 S0 AC 1) and DC 3RA29 21-2A 10 unit 0.770
Hybrid link modules from motor starter protector to contactor
For mechanical and electrical connection between motor starter protector with screw terminals and contactor with
spring-type terminals
Single-unit S00 S00 AC and DC 3RA29 11-2FA00 1 unit 0.029
packaging S0 S0 AC 1) and DC 3RA29 21-2FA00 1 unit 0.056
3RA29 11-2FA00 Multi-unit S00 S00 AC and DC 3RA29 11-2F 10 unit 0.290
packaging S0 S0 AC 1) and DC 3RA29 21-2F 10 unit 0.560
For For Screw Pack Weight

MSPs soft starters Terminals Qty. approx.
Size Size Order No. kg
Link modules from motor starter protector to soft starters
Electrical and mechanical link between motor starter protector and soft starter
Single-unit S00/S0 S00/S0 3RA29 21-1BA00 1 unit 0.001
packaging
Multi-unit S00/S0 S00/S0 3RA29 21-1B 10 unit 0.001

packaging
Spring-type
Terminals
Electrical and mechanical link between motor starter protector and soft starter Order No.
Single-unit S00 S00 3RA29 11-2GA00 1 unit 0.038
packaging
S0 S0 3RA29 21-2GA00 1 unit 0.072
3RA29 11-2GA00 Multi-unit S00 S00 3RA29 11-2G 10 unit 0.380
packaging
S0 S0 3RA29 21-2G 10 unit 0.720
1) A spacer for height compensation on AC contactors with spring-type terminals,

size S0 is optionally available, see page 4/52.

10/15/15 Mounting kits for Fast Bus
Accessories
For Version Screw Pack Weight
Conductors Terminals Qty. approx.
Size Order No. kg
Wiring kits for contactors
Reversing
S00 Electrical and mechanical connection for reversing 3RA29 13-2AA1 1 unit 0.001
contactors, optionally with integrated electrical
S0 and mechanical interlock 3RA29 23-2AA1 1 unit 0.001
S2 The kit contains: 3RA29 33-2AA1 1 unit 0.120
3RA29 23-2AA1 2 connecting pins for 2 contactors,
• for main and auxiliary circuits
Wye-delta starting
S00 Electrical and mechanical link for three contactors 3RA29 13-2BB1 1 unit 0.001
of same size
S0 3RA29 23-2BB1 1 unit 0.001
S2-S2-S0 3RA29 33-2C 1 unit 0.070
3RA29 23-2BB1
S2-S2-S2 29RA2933-2BB1 1 unit 0.160
Spring-type
Terminals
Reversing Duty
S00 Electrical and mechanical connection for reversing 3RA29 13-2AA2 1 unit 0.001
contactors, optionally with integrated electrical
S0 3RA29 23-2AA2 1 unit 0.001
and mechanical interlock
S2 The kit contains: 3RA29 33-2AA2 1 unit 0.001
2 connecting pins for 2 contactors, wiring
3RA29 23-2AA2 modules on the top and bottom
• for main circuits only
Wye-delta starting
S00 Electrical and mechanical link for three 3RA29 13-2BB2 1 unit 0.001
S0 contactors of same size 3RA29 23-2BB2 1 unit 0.001
S2-S2-S0 3RA29 33-2C 1 unit 0.001
S2-S2-S2 3RA29 33-2BB2 1 unit 0.001
Screw
Terminals
Wiring kits for contactors
Reversing
S00 Switches 2 contactors in series 3RA29 16-1A 1 unit 0.001
S0 3RA29 26-1A 1 unit 0.001
S2 3RA29 36-1A 1 unit 0.001
3RA29 16-1A

Mounting kits for Fast Bus 10/15/15
Accessories
For For Version Screw Pack Weight
Conductors MSPs Terminals Qty. approx.
Mechanical interlocks
S2 -- For reversing contactors, laterally mounted, 3RA29 34-2B 0.010
no electrical connections
(each contactor has 1NO/1NC auxiliaries)
S3 -- For reversing contactors, laterally mounted with 1 3RA19 24-2B 0.040
auxiliary contact (1 NC) each per contactor.
3RA29 34-2B
Terminals for contactor coil

S3 -- For A1 and A2 of reversing contactors 3RA19 23-3B 0.020
(includes 2 x A1 and 1 x A2)
3RA19 23-3B
Standard mounting rail adapters

For mechanical fixing of motor start protector and contactor; for snapping
onto standard mounting rail or for screw fixing.
S00, S0 S00, S0 Single-unit packaging 3RA29 22-1AA00 1 unit 0.001
S2 S2 3RA19 31-1AA00 1 unit 0.020
S3 S3 3RA19 41-1AA00 1 unit 0.250
S00, S0 S00, S0 Multi-unit packaging 3RA29 22-1A 5 units 0.001
3RA29 22-1AA00
Side modules for standard mounting rail adaptors

S00 ...S3 S00 ...S3 For standard mountin rail adaptors 10 mm wide, 3RA19 02-1B 10 units 0.009
96 mm long, for widening standard mounting rail
adaptors when using lateral auxiliary switches,
For size S00 to S2: 2 units required.
For size S3: 3 units required
3RA19 02-1B
RH assembly kits for reversing duty and standard rail mounting

RH assembly kits for screw terminals
S0 S0 Comprising: • Wiring kits 3RA29 23-1BB1 1 unit 0.001
• 2 standard mounting rail adaptors
S2 S2 • 2 connecting wedges 3RA19 33-1B 1 unit 0.560
S3 S3 Link modules may be ordered seperately. 3RA19 43-1B 1 unit 0.810
Spring-type
RH assembly kits for spring-type terminals Terminals
S0 S0 Comprising: • Wiring kits 3RA29 23-1BB2 1 unit 0.001
• 2 standard mounting rail adaptors
3RA29 23-1BB1 • 2 connecting wedges
• Spacers
Link modules may be ordered seperately.

Combination Starters
Combination & Starters
Starters forfor
& Starters Group
GroupInstallation
Installation
SIRIUS • Revised • 3RA13RA2
SIRIUS / 3RA2 Accessories
Motor Starters
10/15/15 Busbar adapters
Accessories
For For Version Order No. Std. Weight

motor contactors pack approx.
starter pro- qty.
tector
Size Size kg
Busbar adapters for 60 mm systems
For flat copper profiles according to DIN 46433
Width: 12 mm and 30 mm Thickness: 5 mm and 10 mm
also for T and double-T special profiles
For motor starter protectors and contactors with Screw
screw terminals terminals
S00 S00 Rated current 16 A, 8US12 51-5DS10 1 unit 0.183
45 mm wide, 200 mm long
S0 S0 Rated current 32 A, 8US12 51-5NT10 1 unit 0.183
S2 S2 Up to 65A, 8US12 61-6MT10 1 unit 0.572
8US12 51- 8US12 51-
5DS10 5DT11 55mm wide, 260mm long
For motor starter protectors and contactors with Spring-type
spring-type terminals terminals
S00 S00 Rated current 16 A, 8US12 51-5DT11 1 unit 0.183
S0 S0 Rated current 32 A, 8US12 51-5NT11 1 unit 0.183
Device holders for lateral mounting onto busbar adapters
for 60 mm system
S00, S0 S00, S0 Up to 25 A, 8US12 50-5AS10 1 unit 0.183
S0 S0 Up to 40 A, 8US12 50-5AT10 1 unit 0.183
S2 S2 Up to 65A, 8US12 11-6MT10 1 unit 0.873
118mm wide, 260mm long
(includes 8US1261-6MT10 adapter)
8US12 50- 8US12 50-

5AS10 5AT10
Side modules for widening busbar adapters
8US19 98-2BJ10
6
-- -- Including connecting wedges, for 1 unit 0.023
widening busbar adapters or device
holders, 9 mm wide, 200 mm long
Spacers for fixing the motor starter onto the busbar adapter
-- S00, S0 (1 pack = 100 units) 8US19 98-1BA10 1 pack 0.183
Vibration and shock kits for high vibration and shock loads
-- S00, S0 8US19 98-1CA10 1 unit 0.183
RS assembly kits for reversing duty for 60 mm busbar systems
RS assembly kits for screw terminals Screw
terminals
S00, S0 S00 Comprising: 3RA29 13-1DB1 1 unit 0.001
S0 S0 • Wiring kits 3RA29 23-1DB1 1 unit 0.001
S00 S0 • Busbar adapters 3RA29 23-1EB1 1 unit 0.001
S2 S2 • Device holders 3RA29 33-1DB1 1 unit 1.235
• 2 connecting wedges
• Side modules
Link modules must be ordered
separately.
3RA29 23-1DB1
only Busbar adapter
pictured
RS assembly kits for spring-type terminals Spring-type
terminals
S00 S00 Comprising: 3RA29 13-1DB2 1 unit 0.001
S0 S0 • Wiring kits 3RA29 23-1DB2 1 unit 0.001
• Busbar adapters
• Device holders
• 2 connecting wedges
• Spacers
• Side modules
Link modules must be ordered
3RA29 23-1DB2 separately.
only Busbar adapter
pictured

* YouCatalog
Combination Starters& &
Combination Starters Starters
Starters for for Group
Group Installation
Installation
3RA1 / 3RA2
SIRIUS 3RA2Accessories
Motor Starters • Revised • SIRIUS
Connecting 10/15/15
Accessorieswedges, spaces, and tools
For For Version Order No. Std. Weight

motor contactors pack approx.
starter pro- qty.
tector
Size Size kg
Connecting wedges
For mechanical linking of busbar adapters and device 8US19 98-1AA00 100 units 0.100
holders or of standard mounting rail adapters (2 units
per combination required)
8US19 98-1AA00
Spacers
For height compensation on AC contactors size S0 Spring-type terminals
with spring-type terminals
S0 S0 Single-unit packaging 3RA29 11-1CA00 1 unit 0.001
S0 S0 Multi-unit packaging 3RA29 11-1C 5 units 0.001
3RA29 11-1CA00

pack approx.
qty.
kg
Screwdrivers Spring-type terminals
for all SIRIUS devices with spring-type terminals
Length approx. 200 mm, 3RA29 08-1A 1 unit 0.045
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
partially insulated
3RA29 08-1A
Blank labels
Unit labeling plates1) 3RT29 00-1SB20 340 units 0.200
for SIRIUS devices
20 mm x 7 mm,
pastel turquoise
6
NSB0_01429b
3RT19 00-1SB20
1) PC labeling system for individual inscription of
unit labeling plates available from:
murrplastik Systems, Inc.
www.murrplastik.com .

For For Version Std. Weight
MSPs Conductors Pack approx.
Qty.
Push-in lugs for screw fixing

S00 -- For screwing the motor starter protector onto 3RV29 28-0B 10 units 0.100
mounting plates; for each motor starter protector,
2 units are required.
3RV29 28-0B

SIRIUS
Components for IEC types of
coordination 1 and 2 at AC 500 V
■ Technical data
Three-phase standard motor1) Setting range Motor starter Contactor2) Size
4-pole at AC 500 V Inverse-time delayed protector
overload release
Standard Motor current
output (guide value) Type Type
P I
kW A A
IEC Type of coordination 1 at Iq = 50 kA/AC 400 V
Normal starting Class 10
1.5 3.6 3.5 ... 5 3RV20 11-1FA10 3RT20 15-1AP00 S00
2.2 4.9 4.5 ... 6.3 3RV20 11-1GA10
3 6.5 5.5 ... 8 3RV20 11-1HA10
4 8.5 7 ... 10 3RV20 11-1JA10 3RT20 16-1AP01

5.5 11.5 9 ... 12.5 3RV20 11-1KA10 3RT20 17-1AP01
7.5 15.5 11 ... 16 3RV20 11-4AA10 3RT20 18-1AP01

0.06 0.2 0.14 ... 0.2 3RV20 11-0BA10 3RT20 15-1AP01 S00
0.06 0.2 0.18 ... 0.25 3RV20 11-0CA10
0.09 0.3 0.22 ... 0.32 3RV20 11-0DA10
0.09 0.3 0.28 ... 0.4 3RV20 11-0EA10
0.12 0.4 0.35 ... 0.5 3RV20 11-0FA10
0.18 0.6 0.45 ... 0.63 3RV20 11-0GA10
0.18 0.6 0.55 ... 0.8 3RV20 11-0HA10
0.25 0.85 0.7 ... 1 3RV20 11-0JA10
0.37 1.1 0.9 ... 1.25 3RV20 11-0KA10
0.55 1.5 1.1 ... 1.6 3RV20 11-0AA10
0.75 1.9 1.4 ... 2 3RV20 11-1BA10
0.75 1.9 1.8 ... 2.5 3RV20 11-1CA10
1.1 2.7 2.2 ... 3.2 3RV20 11-1DA10
1.5 3.6 2.8 ... 4 3RV20 11-1EA10
1.5 3.6 3.5 ... 5 3RV20 11-1FA10 3RT20 24-1AP01 S0

2.2 4.9 4.5 ... 6.3 3RV20 11-1GA10
3 6.5 5.5 ... 8 3RV20 11-1HA10
4 8.5 7 ... 10 3RV20 11-1JA10
5.5 11.5 9 ... 12.5 3RV20 11-1KA10
7.5 15.5 11 ... 16 3RV20 21-4AA10 3RT20 26-1AP01

7.5 15.5 14 ... 20 3RV20 21-4BA10
11 22 17 ... 22 3RV20 21-4CA10 3RT20 27-1AP01

11 22 20 ... 35 3RV20 21-4DA10
15 29 27 ... 32 3RV20 21-4EA10
1) Selection depends on the actual startup 2) Rated control supply voltage 120 V AC. Other
and rated data of the protected motor. voltages are possible.

coordination 1 and 2 at AC 500 V 10/15/15
■ Technical data
Three-phase standard motor1) Setting range Motor starter Contactor2) Size
4-pole at AC 500 V Inverse-time delayed protector
overload release
output (guide value) Type Type
P I
kW A A
On request 3RV2031-4DA10 3RT20 35-1AK60 S2
On request 3RV2031-4EA10 3RT20 35-1AK60
On request 3RV2031-4FA10 3RT20 35-1AK60
On request 3RV2031-4GA10 3RT20 36-1AK60
On request 3RV2031-4HA10 3RT20 36-1AK60
37 53 45 ... 63 3RV1041-4JA10 3RT10 44-1AK60 S3

45 64 57 ... 75 3RV1041-4KA10 3RT10 44-1AK60
55 78 70 ... 90 3RV1041...4LA10 3RT10 45-1AK60

On request 3RV20 31-4AA10 3RT20 35-1AK60 S2

On request 3RV20 31-4BA10 3RT20 35-1AK60
On request 3RV20 31-4DA10 3RT20 35-1AK60
On request 3RV20 31-4EA10 3RT20 35-1AK60
On request 3RV20 31-4FA10 3RT20 35-1AK60
On request 3RV20 31-4GA10 3RT20 36-1AK60
On request 3RV20 31-4HA10 3RT20 36-1AK60
37 53 45 ... 63 3RV20 31-4JA10 3RT10 44-1AK60 S3

45 64 57 ... 75 3RV20 31-4KA10 3RT10 44-1AK60
55 78 70 ... 90 3RV20 31-4LA10 3RT10 45-1AK60
1) Selection depends on the actual startup 2) Rated control supply voltage 120 V AC. Other
and rated data of the protected motor. voltages are possible.

10/15/15 coordination 1 and 2 at AC 690 V
■ Technical data
Three-phase standard motor Setting range Standard Subsequent Contactor1) Size Short-circuit
4-pole at AC 690 V3) MSP IEC circuit-breaker MSP switching capacity Iq
with at 690 V
limiting function
output (guide value)
Type Type Type
P I
kW A A kA
IEC Types of coordination 1 and 2 at AC 690 V

On request 11 ... 16 3RV13 31-4HC10 3RV20 31-4AA10 3RT20 35-1AK60 S2 50

On request 14 ... 20 Size S2 3RV20 31-4BA10 3RT20 35-1AK60
On request 18 ... 25 In= 50 A 3RV20 31-4DA10 3RT20 35-1AK60
On request 22 ... 32 3RV20 31-4EA10 3RT20 35-1AK60
On request 28 ... 40 3RV20 31-4FA10 3RT10 44-1AK602) S2/S3 50

On request 36 ... 45 3RV20 31-4GA10 3RT10 44-1AK602)
On request 40 ... 50 3RV20 31-4HA10 3RT10 45-1AK602)
Installation guidelines for AC 400/500 V

The following distances from earthed components must be observed when installing combinations:
Motor starter protectors Distances from earthed or Z Z

in combination with contactors live parts
Y
MSP Rated operational Y X24) Z 1L1 3L2 5L3
Contactor voltage mm mm mm
3RV2. 1 with 3RT20 1 400/500 V 20 10 9 3RV2... 3RV2...
3RV2. 2 with 3RT20 1 400/500 V 30 10 9

3RT2 . 2 400/500 V 30 10 9
3RT2 . 3 400/500 V 30 10 9
2T1 4T2 6T3
3RV2. 3 with 3RT20 2 400/500 V 50 10 10
3RT2 . 3 400/500 V 50 10 10
1L1 3L2 5L3
3RT10 4 400/500 V 50 10 10 X2
3RV1. 4 with 3RT10 4 400 V 90 10 12

3RT10 4 500 V 220 10 20 3RT2... 3RT2...
2T1 4T2 6T3
No upstream circuit-breaker 1) Rated control supply voltage 120 V AC. Other 3) Selection depends on the specific startup
required; short-circuit proof up to 100 kA. voltages are possible. and rated data of the protected motor.
2) With these combinations, the distance between 4) Minimum distance to contactor at front.
the subsequent MSP and the contactor must be at For the MSP, no minimum distance
least 10 cm. at the front must be maintained.

3RA1 / 3RA2
up to 100 A 10/15/15
■ Technical data
Installation guidelines for AC 690 V
Size Mounting method Standard surface mounting for sizes S0 Surface mounting for sizes S0
up to 5.5 kW, S2 and S3 from 7.5 to 11 kW
S0 Mounting on an insulated
base plate. If screws are used 3-phase busbar
for fixing, the screws must not Size S0:
be earthed. 3RV29 15-1A
Alternatively, the standard rail
adapter can be used for all Size S2:
units. 3RV19 35-1A
S2/S3 Mounting on an insulated

base plate. Alternatively, the
standard rail adapter
can also be used without
restriction.
Connection module
See accessories
The following distances from earthed components must be observed when installing combinations:
Two MSPs in combination with contactors Distances from earthed or live components
MSP Contactor Rated operational Y1 Y2 Y3 X1 X2 Z

voltage mm mm mm mm mm mm
3RV2. 2 with 3RT20 2 690 V 80 10 95 20 14 20
3RV2. 3 with 3RT20 3 690 V 50 10 120 10 32 10

3RT10 4 690 V 50 10 120 10 40 10
a 3-phase busbar: b In combination with size S2

MSPs and size S3 contactors,
a spacing of 100 mm must be
maintained.

3RA1 / 3RA2
10/15/15 up to 100 A
■ Technical data
General data
Specifications IEC 60 947-1, EN 60 947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100)
IEC 60 947-2, EN 60 947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Type 3RA2. 1 3RA2. 2 3RA2. 3 3RA1.4
Size S00 S0 S2 S3
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Max. rated current Inmax A 16 32 65 100

(= max. rated operational current Ie)
Permissible ambient temperature °C for storage/transport –55 ... +80 –50 ... +80
°C for operation –20 ... +60 (restrictions apply –20 ... +60
at more than +60 °C)
Release class (CLASS) acc. to IEC 60 947-4-1, 10

EN 60 947-4-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Rated fused short-circuit current Iq at 50/60 Hz AC 400 V kA 150 100 50
acc. to IEC 60 947-4-1, DIN EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Types of coordination to IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 1)
(VDE 0660 Part 102)

Power losses Pv max of all • Up to 1.25 A W 2
main conducting paths • 1.6 - 6.3 A W 2.3
depending on the rated current In • 8 - 12 A W 3.5
(upper current setting range) • 16 A W 4.3
• 5- 6.3 A W 2.3
• 8 - 12 A W 3.5
• 16 - 32 A W 4.3
25 - 32 A W 16.2
40 A W 17.2
45 - 50 A W 21
63 A W 29
75 - 90 A W 45
100 A W 60
Power consumption of solenoid coils (with cold coil and Us, 50 Hz)
p.f. 0.8 0.82 0.72 0.68
closed VA 4.2 8.5 16 22
p.f. 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.27
DC operation closing = closed W 4 5.9 – 15
Coil voltage tolerance for contactors 0.8 - 1.1 x Us

low limit at 55 °C 0.8 x Us –
at 60 °C 0.85 x Us –
Endurance of MSP
Mechanical endurance operating cycles 100 000 Up to 52A: 50 000 50 000
Electrical endurance operating cycles 100 000 from 65A: On request 50 000
Max. switching frequency per hour (motor starts) 1/h 15 15 15
Endurance of contactor
Mechanical endurance operating cycles 30 million 10 million
Electrical endurance operating cycles See endurance curves of contactors in Part 3.
Shock resistance (sine-wave acc. to IEC 60 068 Part 2-27 g up to 6 up to 6 up to 6 up to 6
pulse)
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60 947-1 IP 20 IP 20
Shock-hazard protection acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 Finger-safe

Phase failure sensitivity acc. to IEC 60 947-4-1, Yes
of MSP EN 60 947-4-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Isolating characteristics acc. to IEC 60 947-2, Yes
of MSP EN 60 947-2
Main and EMERGENCY-STOP (VDE 0660 Part 101)
switch characteristics of MSP acc. to IEC 60 204-1, Yes (with overvoltage releases of
and accessories EN 60 204-1 category 1 under conditions of proper use)
(VDE 0113 Part 1)
Safe isolation between main and acc. to DIN VDE 0160 Part 101 up to 400 V
auxiliary circuits
Positively driven operation at contactors Yes Yes, from main contact to auxiliary NC contact
1) See selection and ordering data on pages 4/36 to 4/43.

3RA1 / 3RA2
up to 100 A 10/15/15
Technical data
Conductor cross-sections of main circuit

Specifications IEC 60 947-1, EN 60 947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100)
IEC 60 947-2, EN 60 947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Type 3RA2. 1 3RA2. 2 3RA2.3 3RA11 4
Size S00 S0 S2 S3
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Connection type Screw terminal Screw terminal Screw Terminals Box terminals
M3 Posidrive size 2 M3 Posidrive size 2 M6 Pozidriv size 2 Allen screw
Terminal screw
Conductor cross-sections (min./max)

• Solid and stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 … 1.5) 2) only for contactors 2 x (1 ... 25)2)
mm2 2 x (0.75 … 2.5 ) 2) 1 x (1 ... 35)2)
mm2 max. 2 x 4 2 x (1 ... 35)2)
1 x (1 ... 50)2)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 –
• Finely stranded with end sleeves (DIN 46 228 T1) mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2) 2 x (1 ... 16)2)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2) 1 x (1 ... 25)2)
2 x (1 ... 25)2)
1 x (1 ... 35)2)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2) 2 x (18 ... 3)2)
AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 1 x (18 ... 2)2)
AWG 2 x 12 2 x (18 ... 2)2)
1 x (18 ... 1)2)

flexible with ferrule
- 1 conductor mm2 0.75/25 2.5/501)
- 2 conductors mm2 0.75/16 2.5/351)
solid or stranded
- 1 conductor mm2 0.75/35 2.5/701)
- 2 conductors mm2 0.75/25 2.5/501)
Ribbon cable yes yes
Bus connection – yes
solid or stranded AWG 2 x (30 ... 2) –
stranded AWG – 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
Connection type Spring Loaded connection
• Solid and stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) – 2 x (0.5 … 2.5)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 … 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeves mm2 2 x (0.5 … 2.5)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 12) 2 x (20 … 14)
Attention:
acc. to DIN 43 602
Start command “I”
right-hand or above
1) Cable-lug and busbar connection possible after 2) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected
removing the box terminals. to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the
range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this
restriction does not apply.

SIRIUS
3RA1 / 3RA2
up to 100 A
Operating conditions Classification types Special equipment for customer

■ Overview 3RA combination starters are DIN VDE 0660 Part 102 and assembly can be ordered if
The 3RA combination starters climate-proof. They are intended IEC 60 947-4-1 make a distinc- other rated control supply volt-
consist of the 3RV MSP and for use in enclosed rooms in tion between two different types ages are required. The link mod-
the 3RT contactor. MSP and which no severe conditions of coordination (types 1 and 2). ules simplify customer assembly
contactor are prewired and (such as dust, caustic vapors, Any short-circuits that occur are of the load feeders.
mechanically connected with hazardous gases) prevail. Suita- cleared safely by both types of The corresponding distances
preassembled kits (link mod- ble enclosures must be pro- coordination. The only differ- from earthed or live parts, as
ules, connection assembly kits vided for installation in dusty ences concern the extent of the detailed in the technical data,
and mounting rail or busbar and damp locations. damage caused to the equip- must be observed.
adapters). ment by a short-circuit.
As the 3RA combination start- Customer assembly
ers are constructed from 3RV IEC Type of coordination 1
MSPs and 3RT contactors, the ■ Accessories The combination starter may be
The standard devices can be
same accessories can be used The accessories for the special combined optimally in terms of
for the combination starter as non-operational after a short-cir- both technical data and dimen-
equipment, such as auxiliary cuit has been cleared. Damage
for these MSPs and contactors. contacts and undervoltage trips, sions, thanks to the modular sys-
to the contactor or to the overtem of the SIRIUS series.
Pre-assembled link modules can also be used for the 3RA load relay is permissible. In 3RA
are available as accessories for combination starters. load feeders, the MSP itself The combination starters can
the power spectrum up to 75 In addition, certain accessories always achieves type of coordi- thus be assembled easily by the
HP. The desired combination have been optimized for the nation 2. customer. It is simply necessary
starter can thus be assembled combination starters. They to assemble the standard 3RV
quickly and economically by include the top-connected, MSP and 3RT contactor and
the customer. A time saving is transverse auxiliary contact on IEC Type of coordination 2 the appropriate link module
also achieved with the link the MSP with one changeover together.
There must be no damage to the
modules as – unlike with con- contact or one NO contact + overload trip or to any other For the order numbers for spe-
ventional wiring systems – there one NC contact. Special auxil- components after a short-circuit cial equipment and link mod-
is no need to rectify possible iary contact blocks that can be has been cleared. The 3RA ules, see the selection and
wiring errors. snapped on from below are combination starter can resume ordering data.
As a combination starter rated available for the contactor. operation without needing to be For the link modules for direct
for tap conductor protection for These two accessories enable be renewed. At most, it is per- starting or reversing mode and
group installation the 3RV the combination starters to be missible to weld the contactor assembly on a standard mount-
MSP is responsible for overload wired easily without having to contacts if they can be dis- ing rail or busbar, see accesso-
and short-circuit protection in route cables via the equipment. connected easily without any ries.
the motor circuit. Back-up pro- The special accessories for significant deformation.
If a MSP with a rotary operating
tective devices, such as fuses 3RA combination starters take mechanism is required for the
or SIEMENS Sentron circuit the form of link modules for lower setting ranges up to 12 A,
breakers are required as per 3RV MSPs and 3RT contactors.
NEC 430-53 guidelines for
■ Mounting the S0 MSP can also be assem-
bled with an S00 contactor. A
group installations for multiple Complete equipment special connecting module is
motor applications available for this purpose.
■ Technical data The 3RA combination starters
The 3RT contactor is ideal for can be ordered as complete For the installation of feeders, it
extremely complex switching For technical data, see pages equipment for direct starting or is imperative to use standard rail
tasks requiring durable compo- 4/56-4/58. Additional details for reversing mode. Control sup- adapters, as from size S2 for
nents. are contained in the respective ply voltages of 50 Hz AC 230 V direct starting and as from size
The permissible ambient tem- tables for the 3RV MSPs and or DC 24 V and assembly on a S0 for reversing, to ensure the
perature is 60 °C with butt- 3RT contactors. 35 mm standard mounting rail or necessary mechanical strength.
mounting and without derating in a 40 or 60 mm busbar system A standard rail adapter is not
(70 °C possible subject to cer- are possible. necessary if a busbar adapter is
tain restrictions). ■ Configuration used.
3RA combination starters are
available for motors up to 75 Hp Overload tripping times Assembly
at 460 V AC and setting ranges All the 3RA combination start- 3RA combination starters are
from 0.14 A to 100 A. ers described here are available for assembly on stand-
3RA combination starters are designed for normal starting, in ard mounting rails in accord-
supplied in four different other words for overload tripping ance with EN 50 022-35 x 15 or
sizes: times of less than 10 s on busbar adapters with a bus-
(CLASS 10). At rated-load oper- bar centre-line spacing of 40 or
Size Overall Max. For
ating temperature the tripping 60 mm and a busbar thickness
width rated three- times are shorter, depending on of 5 or 10 mm.
current phase the particular equipment and the The combination starters are
In max motors setting range. The exact values also suitable for screw fixing.
up to can be derived from the tripping
mm A HP characteristics of the MSPs. Size S00
S00 and
and S0
S0 can
can be
be
screwed on with
with the
the aid
aid of plug-
S00 45 8 5 in
in clips (see accessories
clips (see accessorieson on
S0 45 22 15 page 4/47).
page 4/47).
S2 55 50 40
S3 70 100 75

3RA1 / 3RA2
up to 100 A 10/15/15
Mounting
Direct-on-line starting • For standard rail mounting or screw fixing • Sizes S00 and S0
2 push-in lugs 2 push-in lugs 2 push-in lugs

3RV29 28-0B 3RV29 28-0B 3RV29 28-0B
(only for screw (only for screw (only for screw
mounting) mounting) mounting)
Motor starter protector Motor starter protector Motor starter protector

Size S00/S0 Size S00/S0 Size S00/S0
Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Screw terminals
Link module Link module Link module

3RA19 21-1DA00 3RA29 11-2AA00 for S00 3RA29 11-2FA00 for S00
(for S00) 3RA29 21-2AA00 for S0 3RA29 21-2FA00 for S0
3RA29 21-1AA00
(for S0, AC contactor)
3RA29 21-1BA00
(for S0, DC contactor)
Contactor Contactor Contactor

Size S00/S0 Size S00/S0 Size S00/S0
Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Spring-type terminals
NSB0_02089
Left: 3RA21 motor starter with screw connection

Center: 3RA21 motor starter with spring-type connection
Right: Motor starter protector combination with screw connection, with contactor with spring-type connection
Direct-on-line starting · for standard rail mounting · size S2 and S3

3RA29 32-1AA00 3RA19 42-1AA00
MSP mounting rail MSP mounting rail
Size S2 adapter Size S3 adapter
Link Link
module module
for AC: for AC:
3RA29 31-1AA00 3RA19 41-1AA00
for DC: for DC:
3RA29 31-1BA00 3RA19 41-1BA00
Contactor
Size S3
Contactor
Size S2
These graphical overviews are shown without small mounting hardware (screws etc.).

3RA1 / 3RA2
10/15/15 up to 100 A
■ Mounting
DOL starting · for 60 mm busbar systems · size S00 and S0
60 mm busbar adapter
for spring-type terminals
60 mm busbar adapter 8US12 51-5DT11 for S00
for screw terminals 8US12 51-5NT11 for S0
8US12 51-5DS10 for S00
8US12 51-5NT10 for S0
Motor starter protector

Size S00/S0
Screw terminals Motor starter protector
Size S00/S0
Link module
3RA19 21-1DA00 for S00
NSB0_02091a
3RA29 21-1AA00 for S0, AC contactor
3RA29 21-1BA00 for S0, DC contactor
Link module
3RA29 11-2AA00 for S00
3RA29 21-2AA00 for S0
Contactor Contactor
Size S00/S0 Size S00/S0
Screw terminals Spring-type terminals
1) Additional 3RA29 11-1CA00 spacer for height compensation on AC contactors

size S0 with spring-type terminals.
DOL starting · for 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems · size S2

Busbar adapter
60 mm: 8US12 61-5FP08
MSP
Size S2
IC01_00418
Link
module
for AC: 3RA29 31-1AA00
for DC: 3RA29 31-1BA00
Contactor
Size S2
These graphical overviews are shown without small mounting hardware (screws etc.).

SIRIUS
3RA1 / 3RA2
up to 100 A
■ Mounting
Reversing duty • For standard rail mounting or screw fixing • Size S00
2 push-in lugs 2 push-in lugs

3RV29 28-0B 3RV29 28-0B
(only for screw mounting) (only for screw mounting)
Motor starter protector Motor starter protector

Size S00 Size S00
Screw terminals Spring-type terminals
Link module Link module

3RA19 21-1DA00 for S00 3RA29 11-2AA00 for S00
2 contactors
Size S00 3
Screw terminals
4
2 contactors
Size S00
NSB0_02092a
4
2
Wiring kit
3RA29 13-2AA1 2
1 Upper wiring module
2 Lower wiring module
Wiring kit
3RA29 13-2AA2
4 Mechanical interlock 1 Upper wiring module
(can be removed if necessary)
Left: 3RA22 motor starter with screw connection, push-in lugs, 2 contactors for reversing duty and 3RA29 13-2AA1 wiring kit for
connecting the contactors (incl. mechanical interlocking and connecting clips)
Right: 3RA22 motor starter with spring-type connection, push-in lugs, 2 contactors for reversing duty and 3RA29 13-2AA2 wiring kit
(incl. mechanical interlocking and connecting clips)

SIRIUS
3RA1 / 3RA2
up to 100 A
■ Mounting
Reversing duty • For standard rail mounting • Size S0
RH assembly kit for reversing duty and

standard rail mounting in size S0
For screw terminals:
3RA29 23-1BB1
For spring-type terminals:
3RA29 23-1BB2 1)
Comprising:
1 wiring kit
2 standard mounting rail adapters
2 connecting wedges
1)
Also includes 3RA29 11-1CA00 spacer for
height compensation on AC contactors size S0
with spring-type terminals.

Size S0 2 standard mounting
Screw terminals/ rail adapters
spring-type terminals 3RA29 22-1AA00
with 2 connecting wedges
8US19 98-1AA00
Link module
3RA29 21-1AA00 (AC)
3RA29 21-1BA00 (DC)
3RA29 21-2AA00 2)
3
2 contactors
Size S0
Screw terminals/
NSB0_02093b
Wiring kit
2
3RA29 23-2AA1
3RA29 23-2AA2
2)
Additional 3RA29 11-1CA00 spacer 2 Lower wiring module
for height compensation on AC contactors 3 2 connecting clips
size S0 with spring-type terminals
3RA22 motor starter for reversing duty and standard rail mounting in size S0
(the version with screw connection is shown in the picture)

w Í·»³»² ßÙ îðïë
Ô±¿¼ Ú»»¼»® ¿²¼ Ó±¬±® Í¬¿®¬»® º±® Ë» ·² ¬¸» Ý±²¬®±´ Ý¿¾·²»¬ • Revised • SIRIUS
3RA1
Í×Î×ËÍ/ 3RA2
íÎßî Ô±¿¼ Ú»»¼»®
up to 100 A 10/15/15
Ù»²»®¿´ ¼¿¬¿
Î»ª»®·²¹ ¼«¬§ Ú±® ¬¿²¼¿®¼ ®¿·´ ³±«²¬·²¹ Í·¦» Íî
î ÎØ ¿»³¾´§ µ·¬ º±® ®»ª»®·²¹ ¼«¬§ ¿²¼

¬¿²¼¿®¼ ®¿·´ ³±«²¬·²¹ ·² ·¦» Íî
íÎßîçííóïÞÞï
Ý±³°®··²¹æ
ï î ï É·®·²¹ µ·¬ º±® ³¿·² ¿²¼
¿«¨·´·¿®§ ½·®½«·¬
î Î¿·´ ¿¼¿°¬»®
î Í·¼» ³±¼«´»
ì Ý±²²»½¬·²¹ ©»¼¹»
ï Ó»½¸¿²·½¿´ ´±½µ·²¹ ¼»ª·½»
î Ý±²²»½¬·²¹ °·² º±® î ½±²¬¿½¬±®
Ú·¨·²¹ ½®»©
ï Ó±¬±® ¬¿®¬»® °®±¬»½¬±®

Í·¦» Íî
í Í½®»© ¬»®³·²¿´
î Í¬¿²¼¿®¼ ³±«²¬·²¹ ®¿·´ ¿¼¿°¬»®
íÎßîçíîóïßßðð
©·¬¸ ì ½±²²»½¬·²¹ ©»¼¹»
èËÍïççèóïßßðð
¿²¼ î ·¼» ³±¼«´»
íÎßïçðîóïÞ
í Ô·²µ ³±¼«´»
ì íÎßîçíïóïßßðð
Í½®»© ¬»®³·²¿´
ë Ý±²¬¿½¬±® ·¦» Íî
Í½®»© ¬»®³·²¿´
É·®·²¹ µ·¬
Ú±® ½®»© ¬»®³·²¿´
8
íÎßîçííóîßßï
ì Ë°°»® ©·®·²¹ ³±¼«´»
ê Ô±©»® ©·®·²¹ ³±¼«´»
é Ó»½¸¿²·½¿´ ·²¬»®´±½µ
íÎßîçíìóîÞ
ë
è î Ý±²²»½¬·²¹ °·²
é
ë
è
×ÝðïÁððìïç
Ô±¿¼ º»»¼»® º±® ®»ª»®·²¹ ¼«¬§ ¿²¼ ¬¿²¼¿®¼ ®¿·´ ³±«²¬·²¹ ·² ·¦» Íî
ø¬¸» ª»®·±² ©·¬¸ ½®»© ¬»®³·²¿´ · ¸±©² ·² ¬¸» °·½¬«®»÷

èñïî Í·»³»² ×Ý ïð Ò i ðìñîðïë
for adapter for rail mounting
Link wedges
8US19 98-1AA00
Wiring kit
SIRIUS • Revised • 3RA19 33-2A
upper wiring module
3RA1 / 3RA2
10/15/15 lower wiring module
up to 100 A
Reversing duty · for standard rail mounting · size S3
Assembly kit (RH)

for reversing duty
for rail mounting
3RA19 43-1B
consisting of:
1 wiring kit
2 adapters for rail
mounting
3 side modules
6 link wedges
MSP size S3
2 contactors size S3
Mechanical interlock
3RA19 24-2B
Link module
for AC: 3RA19 41-1AA00
for DC: 3RA19 41-1BA00
Adapters for rail mounting
3RA19 42-1AA00
3RA19 02-1B side modules
for adapter for rail mounting
Link wedges
8US19 98-1AA00
These graphical overviews are Wiring kit

shown without small mounting 3RA19 43-2A
hardware (screws etc.). upper wiring module
lower wiring module

3RA1 / 3RA2
up to 100 A 10/15/15
■ Mounting
Reversing duty • For 60 mm busbar systems • Sizes S00 and S0
RS assembly kit for reversing duty and

busbar mounting
Screw connection: 60 mm busbar adapter
3RA29 13-1DB1 for S00
3RA29 23-1DB1 for S0 For screw terminals:
For spring-type connection: 8US12 51-5DS10 for S00
3RA29 13-1DB2 for S00 8US12 51-5NT10 for S0
3RA29 23-1DB2 for S0 1) For spring-type terminals:
Comprising: 8US12 51-5DT11 for S00
1 wiring kit 8US12 51-5NT11 for S0
1 busbar adapter
1 device holder
2 connecting wedges
1)
Also includes 3RA29 11-1CA00 spacer
for height compensation on AC contactors
2 connecting wedges
Motor starter protector 8US19 98-1AA00
Size S00/S0
Screw terminals/
Link module
For screw terminals: 60 mm device holder
3RA19 21-1DA00 for S00 8US12 50-5AS10
3RA29 21-1BA00 for S0, DC contactor
For spring-type terminals: 2)
3RA29 11-2AA00 for S00
3RA29 21-2AA00 for S0 1
3
2 contactors
Size S00/S0
Screw terminals/
NSB0_02094b
2 Wiring kit
Screw connection:
3RA29 13-2AA1 for S00
3RA29 23-2AA1 for S0
Spring-type connection:
3RA29 13-2AA2 for S00
2) Additional 3RA29 11-1CA00 spacer 1 Upper wiring module
for height compensation on AC contactors 2 Lower wiring module
3RA22 motor starter for reversing duty and 60 mm standard mounting rail 4 Mechanical interlock
in size S00/S0 (the version with screw connection is shown in the picture) (can be removed if necessary)

IC10N_08_03.fm Page 14 Saturday, September 5, 2015 9:07 PM

Load Feeders and Motor Starters for Use in the Control Cabinet 3RA1 / 3RA2
10/15/15 up to 100 A
■ Mounting
Reversing duty • For 60 mm busbar systems • Size S2
RS assembly kit for reversing duty for

busbar mounting
3 3RA2933-1DB1
Comprising:
1 Wiring kit for main and auxiliary circuits
1 busbar adapter and device holder
1 mechanical locking device
1 2 connecting pins for 2 contactors
Fixing screws
1 Motor starter protector

Size S2
Screw terminals
2 Link module
4 3RA2931-1AA00
Screw terminals
8
3 Busbar adapter 60 mm
8US1211-6MT10
5 Contactor
Size S2
Screw terminals
6
5
7
Wiring kit
For screw terminals
8 3RA2933-2AA1
7 2 connecting pins
IC01_00420
3RA2934-2B
Load feeder for reversing duty and 60 mm busbar in size S2

(the version with screw terminals is shown in the picture)

8/14 Siemens IC 10 N · 04/2015

SIRIUS
3RA1 / 3RA2
up to 100 A
Components for Fast Bus mounting

Adapter shoe
Link module 3RV104 with Reversing 3RT104
for AC: 3RA19 41-1A 8US1211-4TR00
for DC: 3RA19 41-1B
Mechanical
interlock
3RA19 24-2B
MSP
3RV104
3RA1943-2A Wiring kit

Upper wiring module
Lower wiring module
2 Brackets
2 Contactors FBS0070B
3RT104
Circuit diagrams
Direct-on-line starting
Size S00: 3RA21.1 Sizes S0, S2 and S3: 3RA11/21 2, 3RA11/21 3
Reversing duty
Size S00: 3RA22 Size S0: 3RA22

SIRIUS
3RA1 / 3RA2
up to 100 A
■ Dimension drawings
Size S00 · for standard rail mounting
S0 direct-on-line starter, S0/S0 and S00/S0 reversing starters,

AC, screw-type connection system AC, screw-type connection system
3RA2120-..A 3RA2220-..B..-0AP0
Size S00 · for 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems
S0/S0 and S00/S0 direct-on-line starters, S0/S0 and S00/S0 reversing starters,
AC, screw-type connection system AC, screw-type connection system
3RA2120-..D..-0AP0 3RA2220-..D..-0AP0
When mounting
When mountingthe
thecombinations,
combinations,observe
observe the
the installation
installation guidelines
guidelines (page
(page 4/60-4/61).
4/60-4/61).

SIRIUS
3RA1 / 3RA2
up to 50 A
S0 direct-on-line starter, AC, screw-type S0/S0 and S00/S0 reversing starters,

connection system AC, screw-type connection system
3RA2120-..A 3RA2220-..B..-0AP0
S0/S0 and S00/S0 direct-on-line starters, AC, S0/S0 and S00/S0 reversing starters,
screw-type connection system AC, screw-type connection system
3RA2120-..D..-0AP0 3RA2220-..D..-0AP0
When mounting the combinations, observe the installation guidelines (page 4/60-4/61).
When mounting the combinations, observe the installation guidelines (page 4/60-4/61).

SIRIUS
3RA1 / 3RA2
up to 50 A
Direct-on-line starting Reversing duty
1) Alternative fixing methods

a) 2 35 mm mounting rails
acc. to DIN EN 50 022
Spacing: 125 mm
Depth: 7.5 or 15 mm.
b) 1 75 mm mounting rail
acc. to DIN EN 50 023.

Direct-on-line starting Reversing duty
1) Busbar adapter
suitable for rail thicknesses
of 5 and 10 mm
with chamfered edges.
When
When mounting thecombinations,
mounting the combinations,observe
observethe
the installation
installation guidelines
guidelines (page
(page 4/60-4/61).
4/58).

SIRIUS
3RA1 / 3RA2
up to 100 A
Direct-on-line starting
Reversing duty
1) Alternative fixing methods

a) 2 35 mm mounting rails
acc. to DIN EN 50 022
Spacing: 125 mm
Depth: 7.5 or 15 mm.
b) 1 75 mm mounting rail
acc. to DIN EN 50 023.
When
When mounting
mountingthe
thecombinations,
combinations,observe thethe
observe installation guidelines
installation (page
guidelines 4/60guidelines
(page and 4/64).4/60-4/64).

Fast Bus
Fast Bus Busbar System
Contents
Fast Bus busbar adapter system
60 mm system Page

• Busbar holders 5/9
• Fast Bus adapter shoes 5/11
• Incoming supply terminals 5/6
• Copper busbar 5/6
• Busbar covers 5/6
• Other accessories 5/6
Overview 5/2
Introduction 5/3
Technical Data 5/3
Dimension drawings 5/10-5/15
FBCB Fast Bus circuit breakers Fast Bus combination starters
3RA1 Fast Bus combination starters

FBCB Fast Bus main and feeder 3RA2 Fast Bus combinations starters
circuit breakers Page 3RA6 Fast Bus compact starters

• Fast Bus circuit breakers assemblies and kits 5/7 • See Section 4
• Fast Bus adapter shoes for VL breakers 5/8

Fast Bus
Fast Bus Busbar Adapter System
Overview
Busbar adapter systems
Busbar adapter systems

with busbar centerline spacing of 60 mm
60 mm busbar system Page Page Page
for sharp-edged copper busbars Busbar holder Fast Bus circuit breakers 5/7 Incoming supply terminals 5/6
to DIN 46 433, End and intermediate holders 5/6 from 15 to 600A
for flat copper profiles
width 20 mm to 30 mm, 3RA1 Combination Starters see
thickness 5 mm and 10 mm Fast Bus main circuit breakers 5/7 section 4
from 50 to 500A

Fast Bus
Introduction
General Features Benefits

The Fast Bus Multi-Motor Control system • Simple economical installation • Saves installation time
is a 3-phase insulated busbar system • Compact design • Reduces space requirements
and is ideal for space saving in panel
designs. The system saves considerable • Requires fewer mounting holes • Minimizes layout time
line side wiring and space for multi-motor • Domestic and International approvals • Allows flexibility for domestic and
panels. It is also ideal for panels where export business
several feeder breakers are used and will • Touch safe
save significant wiring space and wiring • Protection for maintenance personnel
• Modular design
labor. The system is also ideal for future • Improves equipment mounting density
• Provision for system expansion
expansion planning. when building
• Reduces time and costs associated
control panels. SIRIUS 3RV/3RT starter • Clip-on shoes provide mechanical
with system expansion
combinations and Siemens circuit and electrical connections to panel
breakers are all adaptable to Fast Bus for mounted busbars • Reduces mounting and wiring time
convenient mounting and faster replace- and provides trouble free connec-
• Main and Feeder breakers mount to
ment times. tions
busbars
• Allows for quick retrofitting of breakers
Fast Bus is ideal for industrial applica-
tions where system availability is
important.
How to Select Fast Bus

1) Determine the required load.
2) Select method to power Fastbus.
—Main lug up to 800A
—Circuit breakers, 15A to 500A
If load exceeds 500A, the CB must be
separately panel mounted and fed to
a main lug infeed module.
3) Select 3RV MSP & 3RT contactor
components and appropriate adapter
shoe or select preassembled 3RA
starters. See section 4.
4) Select appropriate length busbar,
busbar holders, insulation covers
and any other required components.
General Ratings of Fastbus System

IEC Domestic
Rated operating voltage 690V 600V
Rated insulation voltage, IEC VDE AC 1000V N/A
Temperature stability Up to 105 degrees C N/A
Busbar support and adapter shoe material Glass-reinforced polyamide Same
Color RAL 7035, light gray Same
For technical information

Ampacity
on E and F frame circuit
Busbar thickness and width breakers used as main
Thermal busbar currents, E-Cu, bare, at 35 °C ambient temperature in
5 x 20 mm 3/16” x 3/4” 362A and feeder breakers, see
accordance with DIN 43 6711
5 x 25 mm 3/16” x 1” 432A section 17
Busbar System Thermal current at
5 x 30 mm 3/16” x 1 1/8” 500A dimensions 65 °C 85 °C 105 °C
Busbar temperature
10 x 20 mm 3/8” x 3/4” 564A mm mm A A A
10 x 25 mm 3/8” x 1” 660A 20 x 5 60 274 362 430
25 x 5 60 327 432 513
10 x 30 mm 3/8” x 1 1/8” 756A 30 x 5 60 379 500 595
720mm2 --- 1400A
20 x 10 60 427 564 670
30 x 10 60 573 756 900

Fast Bus
Introduction
Fast Bus set-up Feeder/branch circuit Short-circuit strength

The permissible busbar temper- according to UL 508A
The Fast Bus system is designed ature is a decisive factor when The short-circuit strength of the
to be easy to use and to save dimensioning the busbars. The The feeder circuit is that part of busbar system is dependent on
set up time. busbar temperature is depen- a circuit which comes in front of the spacing of the busbar hold-
dent on the current, the current the last short circuit protection ers and on the busbar cross-
8US Busbar holders device (SCPD). The branch cir-
distribution, the busbar cross- section.
The 8US busbar holders are section, the busbar surface, the cuit is that part of the circuit
which follows after the last short The short-circuit strength of the
designed to accommodate position of the busbar, the con-
circuit protection device. When whole system is dependent on
ampacities up to 1400A. In some vection and the ambient temper-
the 8US1 busbar system is used the short-circuit strength of the
cases, the busbar holder will ature. The values stated in the
in a switchgear which must busbar system and the
accept busbars in either 5mm or table on page 5/3 can only be
considered as reference values comply with UL directives, it is components that are mounted
10mm widths. Refer to page 5/6 important to establish whether it to the system.
for selection details. because the conditions vary
with each location. The values is to be used in the feeder circuit
are based on constant current or the branch circuit. Compo-
High quality material nents used in the feeder circuit
over the whole busbar length.
Busbar supports and fuse bases require larger clearance in air
The trend toward busbars and creepage distances than in
are manufactured from glass- Applications
fiber reinforced, thermoplastic proves most advantageous the branch circuit.
polyester with the when the incoming supply is The 8US Fast Bus distribution
centrally located and the load is Simple Fast Bus system system is ideal for control panel
color RAL 7035, light gray. The
material ensures excellent distributed symmetrically on The two illustrations above show builders with multiple motor
mechanical, chemical and elec- both sides. the very basic items needed applications. These applica-
trical properties. Furthermore, when setting up a Fastbus sys- tions are most common in the
For the assemblies of a busbar
the material has an extremely tem. material handling, automotive,
system in the feeder circuit the
low flammability and meets the food processing, pharmaceuti-
UL directives specify compo- 8US1 Busbar holder (5/6)
requirements of UL 94 V0. cal and paper processing
nents with large clearance in air
and creepage distances (see 8US1 Ground busbar support industries.
the table below). Components of (shown attached however can be
8WC Busbar and mounted separately 5/6)
busbar systems the 8US1 busbar system which
meet this requirement can be Ground busbar available in
The most common size busbar found in this chapter. 5 x 20 mm to 10 x 30 mm
for applications in the US is the
Note: 8WC Busbar (8WC5053
8WC5053 (20 mm x 5 mm), how-
ever there are other styles avail- The design of an 8US1 busbar shown) FBB36 Busbar (5/6)
able depending on your appli- system for use in the feeder cir-
cation. cuit always presumes the use of
the UL base plate (8US19 22-
Busbar systems with 60 mm bus- 2UA01) so that the clearance in
bar center-to-center clearance air and creepage distance
have now become firmly estab- requirements are met.
lished in the US market.
Clearance in air Creepage distance

Between live parts 25.4 mm (1 inch) 50.8 mm (2 inch)
Between live parts and grounded, 25.4 mm (1 inch) 25.4 mm (1 inch)
non-insulated metal parts

Fast Bus
Introduction
Fast Bus combination starters and group installation assemblies

Ratings for Group Installations per Standard Installation, NEC 430-52 Group Installation, NEC 430-53
NEC 430-53
Group Installation is an approach to build-
ing multiple motor control systems in
accordance with Section 430-53 of the
National Electrical Code. In Group installa-
tion, multiple motor starters can be
grouped under one short circuit protective
device. The 3RV MSP’s have been UL
listed for use in Group Installations both
with and without 3RT contactors when
mounted on the Fast Bus system. A 3RT
contactor is added when remote opera-
tion of the motor is required.
Maximum rating of Group Branch Short Circuit

FLA FLA Circuit Protective Device
MSP Amp Amp Current Ratings 1) 2)
Type Range Range Fuse Circuit Breaker 240V 480V 600V
3RV201 S00 0.11-12.5 The main fuse should The main CB should be 65kA — 30kA
3RV201 S00 0.11-16 be selected based on selected based on the 65kA 65kA —
3RV202 S0 3.5-12.5 the FUSE selection CIRCUIT BREAKER 65kA — 30kA
3RV202 S0 3.5-25 procedure listed below. selection procedure 65kA 65kA —
3RV202 S0 28-32 listed below. 65kA 50kA —
3RV202 S0 36-40 65kA 12kA —
3RV103 S2 11-50 65kA 65kA 25kA
3RV104 S3 28-100 65kA 65kA 30kA
The selection of components for Circuit Breaker Selection Fuse Selection

Group Installation is a simple pro- Select a circuit breaker (CB) between: Calculate the maximum fuse size per
cess of the following three steps: Minimum CB size (per NEC430-110): NEC430-53c.
1. Selection of the Branch Circuit Pro- Sum of all motor FLC (per NEC table Max Fuse Size =175% x FLC of larg-
tective Device, fuse or circuit 430-150) x115%. est motor + FLC of all other motors
breaker. Maximum CB size (per NEC430-53c): (FLC’s from NEC table 430-150).
2. Selection of the 3RA Motor Starter 250% x FLC of the largest motor +
based on the motor Full Load Amps. FLC of all other motors.
Assembled Starter FLA Short Circuit

Starter Frame Amp Current Ratings (Type E) 1 )
Type Size Range 240V 480Y/277V 600Y/347V
3RA201 S00 0.11-12.5 — — 30kA

3RA201 S00 0.11-16 65kA 65kA —
3RA202 S0 0.45-12.5 — — 30kA
3RA202 S0 0.45-25 65kA 65kA —
3RA202 S0 28-32 50kA 50kA —
3RA103 S2 11-50 65kA 65kA 25kA
3RA104 S3 28-75 — — 30kA
3RA104 S3 28-100 65kA 65kA —
1) Branch Circuit Protective Device for 480V-Ratings: The appropriate BCPD need to be determined in accordance with the National Electrical Code, Article 430-53 and the
application. The following devices are permitted:
Fuses: Classes RK1, RK5, J, G, T, CC or Circuit breakers: Listed Siemens type, with a marked short-circuit rating equal or larger than the available short-circuit
current rating. These devices were tested for group installation use at the above levels without any upstream branch circuit device.
2) 3RA2 used as Manual Motor Controller; Branch Circuit Protective Device for 600V-Ratings: Max. Class J 50A
3) Starter sizes S00,S0 and S3 require additional type E line side terminal adaptors on the MSP for type F applications. See section 1 accessories

Fast Bus • Revised •
Fast Bus Busbar Adapter System 09/30/14
60 mm system
Busbar holder Insulating Base Plate Busbar 3-phase
End cover
Busbar holder
Insulating Base Plate
End cover
Ground
Busbar 3-phase
Busbar Neuteral or PE Busbar Neuteral or PE Terminals for Round busbar
Ground busbar holder Conductors holder
Terminals for Round
Conductors
Description UL Current UL508A Order No. Pack

rating Compliance1) Units
Base plate
8US1922-2UA01 3-pole system flat 230 mm x 1100 mm — required 8US19 22-2UA01
Copper Busbar with tin plating

8WC5 20 mm x 5 mm x 914 mm (36”) for 60 mm systems 362A yes FBB36 3 pcs
20 mm x 5 mm x 1524 mm (60”) for 60 mm systems 362A yes FBB60 3 pcs
20 mm x 5 mm x 2000 mm (78.74”) for 60 mm systems 362A yes 8WC5053
25 mm x 5 mm x 2000 mm (78.74”) for 60 mm systems 4) 432A yes 8WC5054
8US1948-2AA00
30 mm x 5 mm x 2000 mm (78.74”) for 60 mm systems 500A yes 8WC5055
20 mm x 10 mm x 2000 mm (78.74") for 60 mm systems 564A yes 8WC5063
30 mm x 10 mm x 2000 mm (78.74") for 60 mm systems 756A yes 8WC5065
720 mm2 x 2400 mm (94.49”) Twin T (TT) Busbar 1400A yes 8US19 48-2AA00
Busbar holder (end and intermediate)
3-pole with inside mounting for 20 mm and 30 mm x 5 mm or 10 mm — yes 8US19 23-3UA01
8US1922-1AC00
3-pole with inside mounting for 25mm x 5mm or x 10mm — — 8US19 23-3AA00
8US1923-3UA01 3-pole with inside mounting for Twin T (TT) w/ end cover — yes 8US19 43-3AA01
Busbar holder end cover
3-pole end cover fits 8US19 23-3UA01 and 8US1923-3AA01 required 8US19 22-1AC00
Ground Busbar holder
1-pole with inside mounting for 20 mm - 30 mm x 5 mm or 10 mm2) n/a 8US19 23-1AA01
8US1923-1AA01 Cover profiles for Busbars
for 5 mm busbars up to 30 mm wide 1000 mm length — required 8US19 22-2AA00
for 10 mm busbas up to 30 mm 1000 mm length — required 8US19 22-2BA00
for Twin T (TT) busbar 1000 mm length — required 8US19 22-2DA00
8US1922-2AA00
Reserve Space Cover (for covering round terminals placed on 3-phase busbar)
Holder for reserve space cover 32mm height — required 8US1922-2EA00 4 pcs
Holder for reserve space cover 107 mm length — required 8US1922-2EA01 8 pcs
Reserve space cover 195mm height / 700mm length — required 8US1922-2EB00
8US1922-2EB00 Feeder Lugs (mounts to all busbar sizes on this page)
3-pole terminal plate with cover 20 mm x 200 mm 16-4 AWG 80A yes 5SH3538
3-pole terminal plate with cover 54 mm x 200 mm 10-2/0 AWG 300A yes 8US19 21-1BA00
3-pole terminal plate with cover 81 mm x 200 mm 2 AWG-250 MCM 440A yes 8US19 21-1AA00
3-pole terminal plate with cover 180 mm x 200 mm 250-600 MCM 560A yes FBT600F
5SH3538 3-pole terminal plate 154 mm x 184 mm 300-600 MCM 560A yes 8US19 41-2AA03
8US1921-1BA00 3-pole terminal plate 160 mm x 184 mm for flat bars up to 800A yes 8US19 41-2AA04
32 mm x 20 mm
Cover for 8US19 41-2AA03 and 04 180 mm x 200 mm x 90 mm — yes 8US19 22-1GC00
1) UL 508A labeled panels require the use of components that meet the creepage and air distances of 1” air clearance and 2” creepage
distance. N/A = not applicable for given item.
FBT600F w/cover 2) Current rating dependent on size of busbar used. Refer to busbar selection data.

Fast Bus
60 mm system
Circuit breaker assemblies and kits

Description
FBCB Fast Bus circuit breakers

Offer a full range of feeder circuit break- 150A and higher are pre-packaged kits (both main and feeder orientation).
ers from 15A to 250A. All kits 125A and for fast user assembly and must be See page 5/8.
under are pre-assembled on 60 mm torqued down to the busbar prior to
Fast Bus adaptor shoes and ready to assembly. For VL breakers, adaptors
place on the busbar. Circuit breakers are available for up to 500A breakers
Available in 2014 2)
Design UL Current Rating Breaker Frame (SCCR Rating 1))
Feeders Circuit Breakers ED (25kA) HHED (65kA) FXD (65kA) NGG (25kA) HGG (35kA) LGG (65kA)
3 pole/600V fully assembled breakers and 15A FBCB015 — — FBCB015NGG FBCB015HGG FBCB015LGG
adaptors that quickly snap onto the Busbar. 20A FBCB020 FBCB020H — FBCB020NGG FBCB020HGG FBCB020LGG
25A FBCB025 FBCB025H — FBCB025NGG FBCB025HGG FBCB025LGG
60A FBCB060 — — FBCB060NGG FBCB060HGG FBCB060LGG
FBCB100 125A FBCB125 — — FBCB125NGG FBCB125HGG FBCB125LGG
3 pole/600V kitted components for customer 150A — — FBCB150 — — —

assembly that require the adaptor to be torqued 175A — — FBCB175 — — —
down to the Busbars prior to assembly. 200A — — FBCB200 — — —
225A — — FBCB225 — — —
250A — — FBCB250 — — —
Design UL Current Rating Breaker Frame (SCCR Rating)
Main Circuit Breakers FXD (65kA) HFXD (65kA)
3 pole/600V kitted components for customer 100A FBCB100M FBCB100M-HB — — — —

assembly that require the adaptor to be torqued 125A FBCB125M FBCB125M-HB — — — —
down to the Busbars prior to assembly. 150A FBCB150M FBCB150M-HB — — — —
175A FBCB175M FBCB175M-HB — — — —
200A FBCB200M FBCB200M-HB — — — —
225A FBCB225M FBCB225M-HB — — — —
250A FBCB250M FBCB250M-HB — — — —
FBCB250M
1) UL Short Circuit Current ratings are based on 480V. Contact Siemens for 600 V ratings.
2) Check Industry Mall for availability.

Fast Bus
60 mm system
Busbar adapters and device holders

Busbar Number Rated Con- Adapter Adapter Rated UL508A1) Order No. Pack Weight
device of mount- current necting length width voltage compliance units per PU
adapters ing rails cables UL approx
(35 mm) .
A AWG mm mm V kg
For SIRIUS
Size S00/S0
MSP’s 1 25 12 182 45 600 yes 8US12 51-5DM07 0.183
Contactors 1 25 12 182 45 600 yes 8US12 51-5DM07 0.183
+ Overload relays
Direct start load 1 25 12 182 45 600 yes 8US12 51-5DM07 0.183
feeders
Reversing feeders
Busbar adapters 1 25 12 182 45 600 yes 8US12 51-5DM07 0.183
8US21 51-5DM07 + Device holders 1 -- -- 182 45 600 yes 8US12 50-5AM00 0.158
+ Connecting -- -- -- -- -- -- yes 8US19 98-1AA00 100 units 0.100
plates
Size S00/S0
Cage Clamp
Direct start load 1 12 14 182 45 600 yes 8US12 51-5CM47 0.190
feeders
Size S2
MSP’s 1 50 8 182 55 600 vyes 8US12 61-5FM08 0.263
Contactors 1 50 8 182 55 600 yes 8US12 61-5FM08 0.263
+ Overload relays
8US21 60-5AM00 Direct start load 1 50 8 245 55 600 yes 8US12 61-5FP08 0.292
feeders
Reversing feeders
Busbar adapters 1 50 8 242 55 600 yes 8US12 61-5FP08 0.292
Busbar adapters 1 -- -- 242 55 600 yes 8US12 60-5AM00 0.202
+ Device holders -- -- -- 242 55 600 yes 8US12 60-5AP00 0.243
+ Connecting -- -- -- -- -- -- yes 8US19 98-1AA00 100 units 0.100
plates
Size S3 80 4 215 72 600 yes 8US12 11-4TR00 0.659
1 100 -- 200 72 600 yes FBS100723R 0.590
-- 100 -- 200 72 600 yes FBS100722 0.610
8US12 11-4TR00
For VL UL circuit breakers 2)

VL150 UL, -- 150 Tubular 190 105 600 yes 8US12 13-4AQ03 1.020
DG frame con-
tacts
VL250 UL, -- 250 Tubular 190 105 600 yes 8US12 13-4AQ03 1.020
FG frame con-
tacts
VL400 UL, -- 400 Tubular 296 140 600 yes 8US12 13-4AH00 1.900
8US12 13-4AQ03 JG frame con-
VL400X UL, tacts
LG frame -- 540 3) 296 140 600 yes 8US12 13-4AH00 1.900
con-
Tubular tacts
8US12 13-4AH00
1)
UL 508A labeled panels require the use of components that meet the creepage and air distances of 1” air clearance and 2” creepage distance.
N/A = not applicable for given item.
2)
For use with 10mm x 30mm and twin T (TT) busbars only. Adaptors can be configured for main or feeder breakers applications.
3)
For use with maximum 500A circuit breaker. Circuit breakers greater than 500A must be panel mounted off the busbar system and fed to the busbars
via an infeed module. See page 5/6.

• Revised • Fast Bus
09/30/14 Fast Bus Busbar Adapter System
60 mm system
Terminals and accessories

Description Max Width UL508A Order No. List Pack
Amps Compliance1) Price $ Units
Terminals for round conductors
5 mm busbar thickness 3)
12 mm x 5 mm 180 16 - 6 AWG 8US19 21-2AA00 100
15 mm x 5 mm 270 12 - 2 AWG 8US19 21-2AB00 50
20 mm x 5 mm 400 6 - 2/0 AWG 8US19 21-2AD00 50
25 mm x 5 mm 440 6 - 250 MCM 8US19 21-2AC00 50
Terminals 30 mm x 5 mm 180 16 - 6 AWG 8US19 21-2AA01 15
270 12 - 2 AWG 8US19 21-2AB01 15
400 6 - 2/0 AWG 8US19 21-2AD01 15
440 6 - 250 MCM 8US19 21-2AC01 15
20 mm x 5 mm, 25 mm x 5 mm 500 3/0 - 350 MCM 8US19 41-2AA01 6
30 mm x 5 mm 600 300 - 600 MCM 8US19 41-2AA02 3
10 mm bar thickness
12 mm x 10 mm3) 180 16 - 6 AWG 8US19 21-2BA00 100
15 mm x 10 mm3), 20 mm x 10 mm 270 12 - 2 AWG 8US19 21-2BB00 50
25 mm x 10 mm, 30 mm x 10 mm 400 6 - 2/0 AWG 8US19 21-2BD00 50
440 6 - 250 MCM 8US19 21-2BC00 50
Terminals 180 16 - 6 AWG 8US19 21-2BA01 15
270 12 - 2 AWG 8US19 21-2BB01 15
400 6 - 2/0 AWG 8US19 21-2BD01 15
440 6 - 250 MCM 8US19 21-2BC01 15
20 mm x 10 mm, 25 mm x 10 mm 500 3/0 - 600 MCM 8US19 41-2AA01 6
30 mm x 10 mm 600 300 - 600 MCM 8US19 41-2AA02 3
Terminal covers for circular conductors (mounts to busbars)
For terminals up to 250 MCM 8US19 22-1GA00 10
200 mm long, 84 mm wide
For terminals up to 600 MCM 8US19 22-1GA02 1
8US19 22-1GA00
For terminals up to 600 MCM FBC135
Accessories for busbar adapters and device holders

Mounting rail (35 mm) - plastic 45 mm n/a 8US1998-7CA15 10
complete with mounting screws 55 mm n/a 8US1998-7CA16 10
70 mm n/a 8US1998-4AA00 10
90 mm n/a 8US1998-7CA08 10
110 mm n/a 8US1998-7CA10 10
Mounting Rail
Connection holder - n/a 8US1998-1DA00 20
(for vertical bubar assembly)
fixes the MSP to the mounting rail 3) (for SIRIUS sizes S00/S0)
Screw holder - n/a 8US1998-1CA00 20
for supplementary screw fixing of the feeder
8US1998-1BA00 (for SIRIUS sizes S00/S0)
Spacer - n/a 8US1998-1BA00 100

fixes the busbar adapter to the device holder - n/a 8US1998-1BA01 1
(for SIRIUS sizes S00/S0)
FBC20
Connection wedges - n/a FBC20 20
for mechanical linking of adapters and switching device holders
(2 units required per combination)
Outgoing terminal rail for busbar adapters

Plug-type terminal
(complete with supporting element for attaching to busbar adapter
Load Side and switching device holder. Spring loaded terminals.)
Terminal
3 x 14 AWG (400 V) and 4 x 16AWG (250 V) 91 mm 45 mm n/a 8US1998-8AM07
7 x 14 AWG (400 V) 91 mm 54 mm n/a 8US1998-8AA10
Accessories for busbar adapters and device holders

Side module for busbar adapter expansion For adapters w/182 mm 182 mm 10 mm n/a 8US1998-2BM00
Side module for busbar adapter expansion For adapters w/200 mm 200 mm 9 mm n/a 8US1998-2BJ10
8US1998-2BM00
1) UL508A labeled panels require the use of components that meet the creepage and air distances of 1” air clearance and 2” creepage distance.
N/A = not applicable for given item.
2) Terminals must be manually spaced on the busbar to comply with UL508A distances of 1” air clearance and 2” creepage distance.
3) Cannot be used on Twin T (TT) profile up to 1400 A.

Fast Bus
60 mm system
Dimension drawings
FBB36/FBB60 Copper Busbar 8US19 23-3UA01 8US19 43-3AA00

112
5 31 25 6 40 40
A 0.187
L1
(5) L1
75
0.75 L 2
185
166
(20)
120
209
L2
50
Dimension A
NSE0_02058
40
NSE0_02071
31
FBB36 36 (914) L3 L3
FBB60 60 (1524)
01573 123
25 51
Copper Busbar/TT profile, 8US19 48-2AA00 8US19 22-1AC00 with 8US19 23-3UA01 Support for blanking covers,
8US19 22-1AC00 with 8US19 23-3AA01 8US1922-2EA00
30 32
10
40
60
6
200
10
NSE0_02070
NSE0_02073
9 49,4
62,5
8US19 22-2AA00 8US19 22-2BA00
5,2 10,2
8US19 23-1AA01 Blanking cover, 8US1922-2EB00
NSE0_00721
30,5
NSE0_00720
30,5
Length 1000 mm Length 1000 mm
8US19 22-2DA00
34
200
31
60
NSE0_01607
1,5
71
78
NSE0_02072
40 62,5

Fast Bus
60 mm system
Dimension drawings
Infeed, 8US19 21-1BA00 Infeed, 8US19 41-2AA03
50 2 28
94
60
200
194
184
156
60
96
NSE0_02074
NSE0_02060
36
54 32 154 21 72
88 100
Infeed, 8US19 21-1AA00 Infeed, 8US19 41-2AA04
50 5 28,7
94
60
200
194
184
148
60
88
NSE0_02053
NSE0_02059
28
160 8,8 72
81 32 100,2
88
Infeed 5SH3538 FBT600F (supplied with cover) FBT600F Cover
166
34
146
60
200
194
60
I2_13999a
20 28 32
180

Fast Bus
60 mm system
Dimension drawings
Busbar device adapter, 8US12 50-5AM00 Busbar device adapter, 8US12 60-5AP00
20
5
6
60
3,4
182
60
242
10
NSE0_02051
47,4 23,7
53,8 51,7
Busbar device adapter, 8US12 61-5FM08 Busbar device adapter, 8US12 11-4TR00
5
12
148
40
20
NSE0_02062
60
68
6
60
214
200
164
5
182
60
60
NSE0_02068
Ø
2,
5
41 26,5
,4 60 54,5
Ø3 47,4 23,7 8,5 72
2,9
54 60,2
Busbar device adapter, 8US12 51-5DM07 Busbar device adapter, 8US12 61-5FP08
10
12
148
5
20
170
5
20
53
NSE0_02063
6
48
60
6
5
60
5
182
60
242
182
,4
Ø3
60
10
,5
Ø3
NSE0_02061
29,5 23,7 8,5

2,5
36 60,2 47,4 23,7 8,5

45 54 60,2

Fast Bus
60 mm system
Dimension drawings
Busbar device adapter, 8US12 51-5CM47 Busbar device adapter, 8US12 13-4AQ01
31,5
23
38,8
60
114,5
114,5
190
35 NSE0_02066
105
Busbar device adapter, 8US12 13-4AQ03

8US19 98-2BM00
35,5
26,8
23
60
131,5
182
64
190
131,5
NSE0_02069
14 14 35 NSE0_02065
32 105
42
Busbar device adapter, 8US12 13-4AH00

24
56
60
247,5
296
270
NSE0_02067
45
140 55

Fast Bus
60 mm system
Dimension drawings
8US1941-2AA01
51
Type a b c d e f Max tighening torque
5mm 8US1921-2AA0. 7.5 11.5 22.5 25 5 10 4 Nm
8US1921-2AB0. 10.5 15.5 29 35 5 10 6 Nm
max. 98
8US1921-2AC0. 17 23.5 36 55 5 12 15 Nm
8US1921-2AD0. 14.5 20.5 32 42 5 12 10 Nm
85,5
10mm 8US1921-2BA0. 7.5 11.5 22.5 25 10 10 4 Nm
8US1921-2BB0. 10.5 15.5 29 35 10 10 6 Nm
8US1921-2BC0. 17 23.5 36 55 10 12 15 Nm
8US1921-2BD0. 14.5 20.5 32 42 10 12 10 Nm
43 40
8US1921-2A / -2B 8US1941-2AA02
51
42
max. 86
max. 84
43 31
38
FBC135 8US1922-1GA00
60
194
189
200
60
10 32
84 35
55
8US19 22-1GA02

Fast Bus
60 mm system
Dimension drawings
8US19 98-1CA00 8US19 98-1DA00 8US19 98-4AA00 8US19 98-7CA08
27
35
29 29 9
NSE0_01599
7 14
74
90
8US19 98-7CA10 8US19 98-7CA15 8US19 98-7CA16 8US19 98-1BA00
8US19 98-8AM07 8US19 98-8AA10
8US19 98-1CA00 8US19 98-1DA00

Fast Bus
SIRIUS 3RA Fast BusStarters
Combination & Starters
Combination Startersfor
andGroup
GroupInstallation
Installation Assemblies
SIRIUS 3RA2 Motor Starters
General data
General data
Order No. scheme
Digit of the Order No. 1st - 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th 15th 16th
3rd
@@@ @ @ @ 0 – @ @ @ @ @ – @ @ @ @
SIRIUS starters 3RA
SIRIUS 2nd generation 2
Type of starter (direct-on-line starter = 1, @
reversing starter = 2)
Size (S00 = 1, S0 = 2) @
Setting range for overload release @ @
Design type and connection method @
Rated power at 460 V AC @ @
Integrated auxiliary switches of the contactor @
Operating range / solenoid coil circuit (contactor) @
Rated control supply voltage (contactor) @ @
Example 3RA 2 1 1 0 – 0 B A 1 5 – 1 A K 6
Note:
The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order
numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data.
Direct-on-line starters/ Size Connection methods Mounting Control voltage Width W Height H Depth D
reversing starters
mm mm mm
Mounting dimensions
Direct-on-line starters S00 Screw terminals Standard mounting rails AC/DC 45 167 97
3RA21. 3RA21 1. Busbar adapters AC/DC 45 200 155
Spring-type terminals Standard mounting rails AC/DC 45 198 97
Busbar adapters AC/DC 45 260 155
S0 Screw terminals Standard mounting rails AC 45 193 97
3RA21 2. DC 45 193 107
H
Busbar adapters AC 45 260 155

D
W
DC 45 260 165
6

Reversing starters S00 Screw terminals Standard mounting rails AC/DC 90 170 97
3RA22. 3RA22 1. Busbar adapters AC/DC 90 200 155
S0 Screw terminals Standard mounting rail AC 90 265 120.3
3RA22 2. adapters DC 90 265 130
Busbar adapters AC 90 260 155
DC 90 260 165
Spring-type terminals Standard mounting rail AC/DC 90 270 131
adapters
Type 3RA2. 1 3RA2. 2

Size S00 S0
Number of poles 3 3
Mechanics and environment
• Storage and transport °C -55 ... +80
Weight kg 0.6 ... 1.5 0.8 ... 2.3
Permissible mounting 22
22
positions
9 9
3 9
Important: Acc. to DIN 43602 start command "I" at the right or top
Shock resistance Acc. to IEC 60086 Part 2-27 g Up to 6 Up to 6
(sine-wave pulse)
Degree of protection Acc. to IEC 60947-1 IP20

SIRIUS 3RA Motor Starters
General data
Direct-on-line starting • For 60 mm busbar systems • Sizes S00 and S0
60 mm busbar adapter 60 mm busbar adapter

for screw terminals for spring-type terminals
8US12 51-5DS10 for S00 8US12 51-5DT11 for S00
8US12 51-5NT10 for S0 8US12 51-5NT11 for S0

Size S00/S0 Motor starter protector
Screw terminals Size S00/S0
Link module
3RA19 21-1DA00 for S00 Link module
3RA29 21-1AA00 for S0, AC contactor 3RA29 11-2AA00 for S00
3RA29 21-1BA00 for S0, DC contactor 3RA29 21-2AA00 for S0 1)
Contactor
Size S00/S0
Contactor Spring-type terminals
Size S00/S0
Screw terminals
1) Additional3RA29 11-1CA00
spacer for height compensation
on AC contactors size S0 with
NSB0_02091a
spring-type terminals.
Left: 3RA21 motor starter for direct-on-line starting with busbar Right: 3RA21 motor starter for direct-on-line starting with busbar
adapters with screw connection adapters with spring-type connection
3RV103 with 3RT103 3RV104 with 3RT104

Adapter Shoe Adapter Shoe
8US1261-5FP08 8US1211-4TR00
MSP
3RV103 MSP
3RV104
Link Module
Link Module
for AC: 3RA1931-1A
for AC: 3RA1941-1A
for DC: 3RA1931-1B
for DC: 3RA1941-1B
Contactor Contactor
3RT103 3RT104
Bracket
FBS0 070B

Fast Bus
SIRIUS 3RA Fast Bus Combination Starters and Group Installation Assemblies
Selection
Reversing duty • For 60 mm busbar systems • Sizes S00 and S0
RS assembly kit for reversing duty and

busbar mounting
Screw connection: 60 mm busbar adapter
3RA29 13-1DB1 for S00
3RA29 23-1DB1 for S0 For screw terminals:
For spring-type connection: 8US12 51-5DS10 for S00
3RA29 13-1DB2 for S00 8US12 51-5NT10 for S0
3RA29 23-1DB2 for S0 1) For spring-type terminals:
Comprising: 8US12 51-5DT11 for S00
1 wiring kit 8US12 51-5NT11 for S0
1 busbar adapter
1 device holder
2 connecting wedges
1)
Also includes 3RA29 11-1CA00 spacer

Size S00/S0
2 connecting wedges
Screw terminals/
8US19 98-1AA00
Link module
3RA19 21-1DA00 for S00
3RA29 21-1BA00 for S0, DC contactor 60 mm device holder
For spring-type terminals: 8US12 51-5AS10
3RA29 11-2AA00 for S00
2)
3RA29 21-2AA00 for S0
3
2 contactors
Size S00/S0
NSB0_02094b
Screw terminals/
Wiring kit
Screw connection:
2 3RA29 13-2AA1 for S00
Spring-type connection:
3RA29 13-2AA2 for S00
2)
Additional 3RA29 11-1CA00 spacer (can be removed if necessary)
3RA22 motor starter for reversing duty and 60 mm standard mounting rail in size S00/S0
(the version with screw connection is shown in the picture)

Fast Bus
Selection
Required Components for Fast Bus Mounting

3RV103 with Reversing 3RT103
a Link Module MSP Contactor Support Adapter Shoe

for AC: 3RA1931-1A 3RV103 8US1260-5AP00 8US1261-5FP08
for DC: 3RA1931-1B (without DIN rail) and
b Mechanical Interlock with 8US1998-2BM00
3RA1924-2B
c Fast Clips
FBC20
2 Contactors
3RT103
3RA1933-2A
Wiring Kit
a Upper Wiring Module
u
b Lower Wiring module
u
3RV104 with Reversing 3RT104
a Link Module
for AC: 3RA1941-1A
for DC: 3RA1941-1B Adapter Shoe
8US1211-4TR00
b Mechanical Interlock
3RA1924-2B
MSP
3RV104
3RA1943-2A a
u
Wiring Kit
a Upper Wiring Module
u
b Lower Wiring Module
u
b
2 Contactors
3RT104 2 Brackets
FBS0070B
b
u

Fast Bus
Dimensions
Dimensions, 3RV101 with 3RT101
3RA2110 3RA2210
Fast Bus Non-reversing Fast Bus Reversing
96.9
45 154.9 45 5
49
169.9
200
1) Lockable in OFF position. Padlock diameter 5 mm.

2) When a front auxiliary is installed on the contactor,
add 44 mm to the depth of the contactor.
Dimensions, 3RV102 with 3RT101

Alle Bemassungswerte sind in Millimeter (mm) angegeben.
All dimensions are in millimeters (mm)
3RA2210-0.A1.-2AP0
3RA2120 3RA2220
3RA2110-0.D1.-1AP0
Fast Bus Non-reversing Fast Bus Reversing
Format/Size: DIN A4 Massstab/Scale: 1:2
97
96.9
45 5
49
193.4
1) Lockable in OFF position. Padlock diameter 5 mm.

2) When a front mount auxiliary is installed on the
contactor, add 44 mm to the depth of the contactor.
All dimensions shown in millimeters. For reference

purposes only. Not to be used for design or construc-
tion purposes.
3RA2120-1.A24-0AP0
Fast Bus
Dimensions
3RV103 with 3RT103
3RA1230
3RA1130 Fast Bus Reversing
Fast Bus Non-reversing
1)
1)
34
14
53
2)
SIEMENS
2)
SIEMENS
259
309
259
309
SIEMENS
3)
SIEMENS SIEMENS
NSK-8174
NSK-8175
7 18 18 68
17 28 95 10
10 55 142 10 17.5
DC 157 120
176
Lateral clearance to grounded

components minimum 6 mm.
1) Arcing space
2) Lockable in OFF position with padlock diameter 5 mm.

tion purposes.

Fast Bus
Dimensions
3RV104 with 3RT104
Lateral clearance to grounded

components minimum 6 mm.
1) Arcing space
2) Lockable in OFF position with padlock diameter 5 mm.

tion purposes.

Solid State Control
SIRIUS 3RM1 Hybrid Starters
Contents Pages
3RM1 Compact - Hybrid Starters

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/2
General Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/3
Selection and ordering data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/4
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/5 - 6/9
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/9 - 6/10

Compact – Hybrid Starters For Use in the Control Cabinet
SIRIUS 3RM1 Motor Starters SIRIUS
SIRIUS 3RM1 Motor Starters
Overview General data
Overview
Functional density/space savings
The 3RM1 motor starters combine the functions direct/reversing
starting and overload protection and safety-related shutdown in
a single device, without changing the 22.5mm width.
For simple applications (such as starting and reversing three-
phase loads with overload protection), motor starter combina-
tions of power contactors and a solid-state overload relay, for
example, can be replaced by a single 3RM1 starter. The more
functions are required, the more devices can be replaced. The
footprint area required for each motor starter in the control cabi-
net is reduced by values of 64 to 82%.
In the case of assemblies and grouped starter units there are
further advantages.
Wiring overhead
By combining various functions in a single device, wiring over-
3RM12 motor starter with reversing functionality and electronic overload head is reduced. The greater the number of starters, the greater
protection the saving in wiring. Savings can be made in:
SIRIUS 3RM1 motor starters are compact devices with a width of • mains wiring and space reduction with the use of the 3RM19
22.5 mm, combining a large number of functions in a single en- three phase infeed system
closure. They consist of combinations of relay contacts, power • wiring of the reversing contactor assembly thanks to the
semiconductors (hybrid technology), and a solid-state overload integrated design
relay for operational switching of three-phase motors up to 3 HP • reduction of control cables for the coils in group applications
(at 480 V). with the 3ZY12 device connectors
Feature Value These savings reduce the time required for the wiring itself, while
Rated current 0.1 ... 0.5 A at the same time reducing both the risk of wiring errors and the
(wide setting range of 0.4 ... 2.0 A amount of testing required after control cabinets have been
the electronic overload release) 1.6 ... 7.0 A (UL=6.1A) completed.
8
Rated operational voltage 48 ... 500 V
Configuration and inventory
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
The wide setting range of the electronic overload release (up to
Rated control supply voltage 24 V DC, 110 V DC, 1:5) reduces the cost of inventory and the considerations in-
110 ... 230 V AC volved in configuration where the actual motor current to be ex-
Trip class CLASS 10A pected is concerned. Compared with protection equipment with
thermal overload protection, only 3 versions are now required to
The 3RM1 motor starters with overload protection with wide set- cover a current range of 0.1 to 7 A with 3RM1, instead of 17 ver-
ting range are offered as 3RM10 direct-on-line starters and 3RM12 sions.
reversing starters and as versions with safety-related shutdown.
Connection methods
Characteristic 3RM10 3RM11 3RM12 3RM13 The 3RM1 is available with screw terminal, push-in terminals or
Direct-on-line starters   -- -- a combination of both..
Reversing starters -- --   Push-in terminals are a form of spring-type connection allowing
Overload protection with wide setting     fast wiring without tools for rigid conductors or conductors
range equipped with end sleeves.
ATEX certification overload protection --  --  Fine-stranded or stranded conductors with no end finishing are
Safety-related shutdown up to SIL 3 / PLe --  -- 
wired using a screwdriver (with a 3.0 x 0.5 mm blade).
As with other spring-type terminals, a screwdriver is also re-
Hybrid technology quired to release the conductor. The same tool as above can be
used for this purpose.
The 3RM1 motor starters combine the benefits of semiconductor
technology and relay technology. This combination is also The advantages of the push-in terminals are found, as with all
known as hybrid technology. The hybrid technology in the motor spring-type terminals, in speed of assembly and disassembly
starter is characterized by the following features: and vibration-proof connection. There is no need for the
checking and tightening required with screw terminals.
• The inrush current is is conducted briefly via the semiconduc-
tors.
Advantage: protection of relay contacts, long service life due Screw terminals
to low wear
• The continuous current is conducted via relay contacts. Spring-type terminals
Advantage: lower heat losses compared with the semicon-
ductor. The terminals are indicated in the corresponding
• Shutdown is implemented again via the semiconductor. tables by the symbols shown on blue backgrounds.
Advantage: the contacts are only slightly exposed to arcs, and
this results in a longer service life.

Siemens IC 10 N · 12/2012 8/13
Compact – Hybrid Starters
SIRIUS SIRIUS 3RM1 Motor Starters
General Data
Safety-related shutdown/safety integration Feedback to the control system

Thanks to the redundant design of the main circuit and internal The electronic output in the 24 V DC control voltage version of
monitoring, safety-related shutdown in accordance with SIL 3 / PLe the 3RM10 and 3RM12 motor starters allows the status of the
is possible by shutting down the control supply voltage with connected motor to be reported to the higher-level control
3RM11 Failsafe and 3RM13 Failsafe motor starters. Additional system. If the motor starter is controlled via inputs IN1 to 2, once
safety relays are not required in the main circuit. the motor has been switched on and has started up correctly the
output "OUT" is set.
3SK1 safety relay 3RM1 motor starter
Infeed system for the main circuit
The 3RM19 infeed system available as an accessory for the
IC01_00178
main circuit with three-phase busbars allows fast, virtually error-
free wiring of motor starters on the mains connection side and
may reduce the number of short-circuit protective devices.
Motor
Combination of four SIRIUS 3RM1 Failsafe motor starters with SIRIUS

3SK1 safety relay to allow safety-related collective disconnection of
connected motors
3RM1 motor starters are ideal for combining with the 3SK1 safety
relay (see Chapter 13 "Safety Technology" "SIRIUS 3SK1 Safety
Relays"). They can be combined by means of:
• conventional wiring
• a special device connector
This makes it very simple to shut down connected motors collec-
tively. The wiring, and ultimately the shutting down of the control
supply voltage in Emergency Stop situations, is performed via
the device connector. There is no further need for complex loop-
ing of the connecting cables.
8
Benefits
Advantages through energy efficiency Product advantages
The SIRIUS 3RM1 motor starters offer a number of benefits:
n
ti o • Greater endurance and reduced heat losses thanks to hybrid
ca n cy c
f ic i e on technology
ef
Ev
ifi
nt
alu
su
y
Ide
• Less space required in the control cabinet (64 to 82%) as a

rg
ation
l t in
Ene
result of higher functional density

g
according to
EN 16001
• Less wiring and testing required as a result of integrating
several functions into a single device
• Lower costs for stock keeping and configuration as a result of
Realization the wide setting range of the electronic overload release
IC01_00135
(up to 1:5)
• Fast wiring without tools for rigid conductors or conductors
equipped with end sleeves thanks to push-in spring-type
We offer you a unique portfolio for efficient industrial energy connections
management, using an energy management system that helps • Motor status feedback to the higher-level control system in the
to optimally define your energy needs. We split up our industrial case of 3RM10 and 3RM12 motor starters in the 24 V DC version
energy management into three phases – identify, evaluate, and
realize – and we support you with the appropriate hardware and • Virtually error-free wiring on the mains connection side and
software solutions in every process phase. reduction in short-circuit protective devices by means of
3RM19 comb busbar and infeed system
The innovative products of the SIRIUS Industrial Controls portfo-
lio can also make a substantial contribution to a plant's energy
efficiency (see www.siemens.com/sirius/energysaving).
With 3RM1 motor starters, control cabinets warm up less be-
cause power losses have been reduced by operation:
• Lower intrinsic power loss (than comparable motor starters
with thermal overload trips) thanks to electronic current
analysis
• Lower control circuit power losses (compared with conven-
tional switching devices) as a result of electronic control of
switching points
• Thanks to the above advantages, additional energy savings
are possible because less cooling is required and a more
compact design is possible

8/14 Siemens IC 10 N · 12/2012
Compact – Hybrid Starters • Revised •
Hybrid Starters 09/30/14 SIRIUS
3RM1 up to 3HP
n Direct and reversing starters in 22.5mm width

n Electronic overload protection — class 10
n Coil voltages 24VDC, 110-230VAC and 110VDC
n Screw Terminals or Spring Loaded Terminals
n Group Installation possible with fuse or UL489 breaker
n SCCR up to 100kA with J fuses
n Comb busbar accessories for easy group assembly
n Removeable terminals 3RM1007-1AA04 3RM1207-2AA04 3RM110.-1AA.4 3RM130.-1AA.4
3RM10 motor starter for direct-on-line starting with electronic overload protection with
Mixed 
All Spring Spring Loaded
UL ratings Amp Single-phase Three-phase Signaling All Screw Loaded & Screw
at 480VAC ratings HP ratings  HP ratings  contacts Terminals Terminals Terminals
FLA LRA AC53 AC51 115V 200V 230V 200V 230V 460V NO NC Order No. Order No. Order No.
Rated control supply voltage Us= 24 VDC
0.5 3.5 0.5 — — — — — — — 1 1 3RM1 01-1AA04 3RM1 01-2AA04 3RM1 01-3AA04
2 14 2 — — — 1⁄8 1⁄3 1⁄3 3⁄4 1 1 3RM1 02-1AA04 3RM1 02-2AA04 3RM1 02-3AA04
6.1 43 7 10 1⁄4 1⁄2 1⁄2 1 1 1⁄2 3 1 1 3RM1 07-1AA04 3RM1 07-2AA04 3RM1 07-3AA04
Rated control supply voltage Us= 110-230 VAC 50/60 Hz and 110 VDC
0.5 3.5 0.5 — — — — — — — 1 1 3RM1 01-1AA14 3RM1 01-2AA14 3RM1 01-3AA14
2 14 2 — — — 1⁄8 1⁄3 1⁄3 3⁄4 1 1 3RM1 02-1AA14 3RM1 02-2AA14 3RM1 02-3AA14
6.1 43 7 10 1⁄4 1⁄2 1⁄2 1 1 1⁄2 3 1 1 3RM1 07-1AA14 3RM1 07-2AA14 3RM1 07-3AA14
Standard DOL Starter 0 0 0

Safety DOL Starter 1 1 1
3RM12 motor starter for reversing with electronic overload protection with
Mixed 
All Spring Spring Loaded
UL ratings Amp Single-phase Three-phase Signaling All Screw Loaded & Screw
at 480VAC ratings HP ratings  HP ratings  contacts Terminals Terminals Terminals
FLA LRA AC53 AC51 115V 200V 230V 200V 230V 460V NO NC Order No. Order No. Order No.
Rated control supply voltage Us= 24 VDC
0.5 3.5 0.5 — — — — — — — 1 1 3RM1 01-1AA04 3RM1 01-2AA04 3RM1 01-3AA04
2 14 2 — — — 1⁄8 1⁄3 1⁄3 3⁄4 1 1 3RM1 02-1AA04 3RM1 02-2AA04 3RM1 02-3AA04
6.1 43 7 10 1⁄4 1⁄2 1⁄2 1 1 1⁄2 3 1 1 3RM1 07-1AA04 3RM1 07-2AA04 3RM1 07-3AA04
Rated control supply voltage Us= 110-230 VAC 50/60 Hz and 110 VDC
0.5 3.5 0.5 — — — — — — — 1 1 3RM1 01-1AA14 3RM1 01-2AA14 3RM1 01-3AA14
2 14 2 — — — 1⁄8 1⁄3 1⁄3 3⁄4 1 1 3RM1 02-1AA14 3RM1 02-2AA14 3RM1 02-3AA14
6.1 43 7 10 1⁄4 1⁄2 1⁄2 1 1 1⁄2 3 1 1 3RM1 07-1AA14 3RM1 07-2AA14 3RM1 07-3AA14
Standard Reversing Starter 2 2 2

Safety Reversing Starter 3 3 3
For detail product manuals, schematics and CAD files:  Mixed terminal versions have spring loaded terminals For accessories, see page 6/6 and 6/8
http://www.usa.siemens.com/3RM1 for the control wiring and screw terminals on the mains.
For technical data, see page 6/9 and 6/10
 Selection depends on motor full load amps. This offers faster control wiring while still being able to
Horsepower ratings are for reference only. use the 3RM19 comb busbar system on the mains. For additional Compact Starters up to 25HP at 480V,
see the 3RA6 series located in section 4

Compact - Hybrid Starters
SIRIUS SIRIUS 3RM1 Motor Starters
Accessories
Overview
Accessories for 3RM1 motor starters These busbars are available in three lengths, thus allowing
2, 3 or 5 motor starters (arranged side-by-side) to be connected
The following accessories are available for the 3RM1 motor at the same time. More than 5 devices can be connected by
starter: clamping the connection tags of an additional busbar rotated by
• 3-phase infeed system for the main circuit 180° (e.g. 6 devices using one 5-pole busbar and one 2-pole
• Device connectors for the control circuit busbar).
• Spare terminals for main and control circuits A single motor starter can be removed from the assembly with-
- With screw terminals out loosening the terminal screws of neighboring motor starters.
- With push-in spring-type terminals
The maximum summation current must not exceed 25 A. Primary
• Push-in lugs for wall mounting the motor starters infeed is connected via a three-phase infeed terminal.
• Sealable cover as protection against unauthorized access The three-phase busbars are finger-safe but empty connection
Three-phase infeed system tags must be fitted with covers.
(3RM19 three-phase busbar system)
Special three-phase busbar systems can be used to provide an
easy, time-saving and safe means of feeding two or more 3RM1
motor starters with screw terminals.
IC01_00169a
3
180 °
1 4 3RM1 motor starters on standard mounting rail with one

free slot
2 3RM1920-1AA three-phase feeder terminal
2 3 2 3RM1910-1DA three-phase busbars rotated through 180°
for the connection of up to 9 motor starters
4 5 covers for 3 3RM1910-6AA connection tags respectively
for unused slots
3RM19 infeed system with three-phase infeed terminal: In the above example, two three-phase busbars (5-pole busbars) rotated through 180° allow
up to 9 3RM1 motor starters to be connected. Contact with the unused connection tags in unoccupied positions is prevented safely by the covers.

Compact - Hybrid Starters
SIRIUS 3RM1 Motor Starters SIRIUS
Accessories
Device connectors for the control circuit

The outlay for cabling between the devices is reduced using
device connectors snapped onto a mounting rail, or screwed
onto a level mounting panel (one device connector per motor
starter).
Using the device connectors only for feeding in the control
supply voltage
By using device connectors, several motor starters can be jointly
supplied with a control supply voltage of 24 V DC. This requires
the control supply voltage to be applied to the A1 and A2 termi-
nals of only one motor starter.
IC01_00218
Up to ten motor starters can be connected with device connec-
tors. The 24 V DC control supply voltage must be within the
operating range of 0.9 to 1.1 for this purpose. If the full operating
range of 0.8 to 1.25 is to be used, no more than five motor start-
ers can be used.
If the motor starters are not to be interconnected side-by-side,
device daisy chain connectors must be used for the gaps.
When removing a motor starter, the corresponding device con-
nector must be replaced by a device daisy chain connector if the
control voltage is not to be interrupted for motor starters on the
right.
The last motor starter in a row can be placed on a device termi- Device connectors snapped onto a standard mounting rail to allow the
nation connector. Flush termination of the configuration is thus joint connection of the control supply voltage for 3RM1 motor starters or
possible. connection to the 3SK1 safety relays
Using device connectors in conjunction with 3SK1 safety relays Usage restrictions for accessories
Interconnection of several Standard or Failsafe version motor • The 3RM19 3-phase infeed system for the main circuit can
starters into a group can also be used for joint disconnection by only be used with 3RM1 motor starters with screw terminals.
a 3SK1 safety relay. • The device connectors are only suitable for 3RM1 motor
starters with a control supply voltage of 24 V DC.
To provide for the simultaneous and safe shutdown of several
motor starters via a SIRIUS 3SK1 Safety Relay, you can simply
interconnect the devices without additional wiring using a device
connector.
The motors can then also be shut down safely according to
SIL 3 / PLe with the motor starters.
Up to five motor starters can be operated on one safety relay
with device connectors. If the motor starters are not to be inter-
connected side-by-side, device loop through connectors must be
used for the gaps.
The last motor starter in a row must be placed on a device termi-
nation connector. This closes the circuits that were built up with
the connectors.
For 3SK1 safety relays and associated device connectors see
Chapter 13 "Safety Technology" "SIRIUS 3SK1 Safety Relays"

• Revised • Compact – Hybrid Starters
SIRIUS 09/30/14 3RM1 Hybrid Starters
3RM1 Accessories
Order No. Pack Units
Device connectors for busing the control supply connection to 3RM1 Starters
Device connector type 2, 7-pole, 22.5mm 3ZY1212-2EA00 1

Use for:
• Beginning left hand connector
• Subsequent positions where a starter is present
• Maximum of five starters per system
Device loop through connector type 2, 7-pole, 22.5mm 3ZY1212-2AB00 1

Use for:
• When 22.5mm spacing is required and no starter is present
Device termination connector type 2, 7-pole, 22.5mm 3ZY1212-2FA00 1

Use for:
• Terminating connector for the right hand position
• Terminating cover is assembled to 3ZY1212-2EA00
Screw Spring
Terminals Terminals
Order No. Order No. Pack Units
Removable terminals for 3RM1 Starters
Power Terminals (Line and Load) 3ZY1122-1BA00 3ZY1122-2BA00 6

2-pole, 12-20 AWG
Control Terminals
3-pole, 14-20 AWG (Screw) 3ZY1131-1BA00 3ZY1131-2BA00 6
3-pole, 14-16 AWG (Spring)
Further accessories
Push-in lugs for wall mounting 3ZY1311-0AA00 10

2 lugs per starter are required. Standard pack quantity is sufficient for 5 starters
Seal covers for 3RM1 starters 3ZY1321-2AA00 5

Protection of current setting dial. - lockable
Cooling pins for removable terminals 3ZY1440-1AA00

For mechanical coding of removable terminals
For detail product manuals, schematics and CAD files:

http://www.usa.siemens.com/3RM1

Industrial Controls Catalog Product Category: IEC
Compact – Hybrid Starters
3RM1 Hybrid Starters SIRIUS
3RM1 Accessories
Type Version Order No. Pack
3RM19 three-phase infeed system for 3RM1 starters

with screw terminals on the mains
Three-phase feeder terminal 3RM1920-1AA 1
Three-phase busbar system For 2 motor starters 3RM1910-1AA 1
For 3 motor starters 3RM1910-1BA 1
For 5 motor starters 3RM1910-1DA 1
Protective covers For unused slots 3RM1910-6AA 1

For finger safety / yellow

Product Category: IEC
Compact
For – Hybrid
Use in the ControlStarters
Cabinet
SIRIUS SIRIUS3RM1
SIRIUS 3RM1Motor
MotorStarters
Starters
Technical Data
General data
Application
3RM1 motor starters are designed for applications in which Standards and approvals
small motors have to be connected in the most confined spaces.
The motor starter complies with the following standards:
Main areas of use • IEC/EN 60947-4-2
• Conveyor systems • UL 508
• Logistics systems • ATEX (available soon)
• Production machines • IEC 61508-1: SIL 3 (available soon)
• Machine tools • ISO 13849: PLe (available soon)
• Small elevators
Type 3RM1
Mechanical components and environment
• Width mm 22.5
• Height mm 100
H
• Depth mm 136.5 (from the standard mounting rail)

141.6 (entire enclosure depth)
D
Ambient temperature
• During operation °C -25 … +60
• During storage °C -40 … +70
• During transport °C -40 … +70
Installation altitude at height above sea level maximum m 4 000
Shock resistance 6g/11 ms
Vibration resistance 1 ... 6 Hz, 15 mm; 20 m/s², 500 Hz
IP degree of protection
8
IP20
Mounting position ±10° ±10°
NSB0_01703

• Conducted RF interference emission according to CISPR11 Class A for Industrial applications. Class B for residential,
business and commercial applications.
• Non-conducted RF interference emission according to CISPR11 Class A for industrial applications. Class B for residential,
business and commercial applications.
Interference immunity
• Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2 4 kV contact discharge / 8 kV air discharge
• Conducted interference injection as high frequency interference according to 10 V
IEC 61000-4-6
• Conducted interference BURST according to IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV / 5 kHz
• Conducted interference - phase-to-ground SURGE according to IEC 61000-4-5 2 kV
• Conducted interference - phase-to-phase SURGE according to IEC 61000-4-5 1 kV
Type 3RM1 .01 3RM1 .02 3RM1 .07

Main circuit
Rated operational voltage maximum V 500
Operating frequency
• 1 rated value Hz 50
• 2 rated value Hz 60
Rated insulation voltage V 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV 6
Rated operational current at 400 V at AC A 0.5 2 71)
Active power loss, typical W 0.02 0.3 3.3
Minimum load in % of I_M % 20
Adjustable current response value
• of the inverse-time delayed overload release A 0.1 … 0.5 0.4 … 2 1.6 … 71)
1) UL rating is 6.1A at 480V

Siemens IC 10 N · 12/2012 8/15
Compact
For Use in –theHybrid Starters
Control Cabinet
SIRIUS
SIRIUS 3RM1
3RM1Motor
MotorStarters
Starters SIRIUS
Technical data
General data
Type 3RM1 ...-AA04 3RM1 ...-AA14

Control circuits
Type of voltage of the control supply voltage DC AC/DC
Control supply voltage 1
• At DC V 24 110
• At 50 Hz
- At AC V — 110 … 230
Frequency of the control supply voltage
• 1 rated value Hz — 50
• 2 rated value Hz — 60
Operating range factor of the control supply voltage rated value
• At DC 0.8 … 1.25 0.85 … 1.1
• At 50 Hz
- At AC — 0.85 … 1.1
Control current A 0.08 0.05
Input voltage at the digital input
• At DC V 24 110
• At AC V — 110 … 230
- Rated value
Input voltage at the digital input with signal <1>
• At DC V 19.2 … 30 93 ... 121
• At AC V — 93 … 253
Input current at the digital input with signal <1> typical A 0.01 0.002
Type 3RM1...-14 3RM1...-24

Connection methods
Connectable conductor cross-section for main contacts
• Solid mm² 0.5 … 4
• Finely stranded
- With end sleeves mm² 0.5 … 2.5
- Without end sleeves mm² — 0.5 … 4
Connectable conductor cross-section for auxiliary contacts
• Solid mm² 0.5 … 2.5 0.5 … 1.5
8
• Finely stranded
- With end sleeves mm² 0.5 … 2.5 0.5 … 1
- Without end sleeves mm² — 0.5 … 1.5
AWG number as coded connectable conductor cross-section
• For main contacts 20 … 12
• For auxiliary contacts 20 … 14 20 … 16
Note:
All the above technical specifications are relevant for selecting
the motor starters. Details about installation conditions and the
use of the motor starters, and particularly about the derating of
the rated current, can be found in the manual and the data
sheets located at www.usa.siemens.com/3RM1.

8/16 Siemens IC 10 N · 12/2012
Motor Starters, Soft Starters and Load Feeders
Contents Pages
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/2

3RW Soft Starters
General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/3 3RW30
3RW30 for standard applications
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/4
Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/4
Selection and ordering data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/5
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/6
Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/7
Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/44
Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/45 - 7/54
Dimensional drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/91
Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/96
3RW40 for standard applications 3RW40
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/8
Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/8
Selection and ordering data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/9 - 7/11
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/12 - 7/13
Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/14
Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/55
Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/97 - 7/98
3RW44 for high-feature applications
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/15 3RW44
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/16
Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/16
Selection and ordering data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/17 - 7/19
Sirius ES engineering software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/20 - 7/24
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/25 - 7/26
Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/27 - 7/29
Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/70
Dimensional drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/93 - 7/94
Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/99 - 7/102
Class 73/74 Enclosed Softstarter applications Class 73/74
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/30
Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/30
Selection and ordering data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/31 - 7/42
Factory Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/43
Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/103

Motor Starters, Soft Starters and Load Feeders
Introduction
Overview
3RW30 3RW40 3RW44 Class 73/74 Enclosed

Order No. Page
For operation in the control cabinet
3RW soft starters for standard applications
• Application areas
- Fans - Pumps
- Building/construction machines - Presses
- Escalators - Transport systems
- Air conditioning systems - Fans
- Assembly lines - Compressors and coolers
- Operating mechanisms
3RW30 soft starters • SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters for soft starting and smooth ramp-down of three- 3RW30 7/4
phase asynchronous motors
• Performance range of up to 75 Hp (at 460 V)
3RW40 soft starters • SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters with the integral functions 3RW40 7/8
- Solid-state motor overload and intrinsic device protection and
- Adjustable current limiting
for the soft starting and stopping of three-phase asynchronous motors
• Performance range of up to 300 Hp (at 460 V)
3RW soft starters for high-feature applications
• Application areas
- Pumps - Fans
- Compressors - Cooling systems
- Industrial refrigerating systems - Water transport
- Conveying systems - Hydraulics
- Machine tools - Mills
3RW44 soft starters • In addition to soft starting and soft ramp-down, the solid-state SIRIUS 3RW44 3RW44 7/16
soft starters provide numerous functions for higher-level requirements
• Performance range
- Up to 900 Hp (at 460 V) in inline circuit and
- Up to 1600 Hp (at 460 V) in inside-delta circuit
For enclosed applications
Enclosures in NEMA 1, 3, 4, & 12 types • Complete starter includes 3RW40 or 3RW44 and CPT Class 73/74 7/83
UL/CSA listed • Performance Range of up to 600 Hp (at 460 V)
• Combination options include circuit breaker or fusible disconnect
• Application areas:
- Compressors - Lumber processing
- Pumps - Pulp & paper processing
- Stamping presses - Conveyors
- Cooling towers - Textiles
- Molding and extruding - HVAC
- Chippers and debarkers

3RW Soft Starters
General Data
Overview
The advantages of the SIRIUS soft starters at a glance: • Reduction of the mechanical load in the operating mechanism
• Soft starting and smooth ramp-down1) • Considerable space savings and reduced wiring compared
• Stepless starting with conventional starters
• Reduction of current peaks • Maintenance-free switching
• Avoidance of mains voltage fluctuations during starting • Very easy handling
• Reduced load on the power supply network • Fits perfectly in the SIRIUS modular system
SIRIUS 3RW30 SIRIUS 3RW40 SIRIUS 3RW44

Standard applications Standard applications High-Feature applications
Rated current up to 50 °C A 3 ... 98 11 ... 385 26 ... 1076
Rated operational voltage V 200 ... 480 200 ... 600 200 ... 690
Motor rating at 460 V
• Inline circuit Hp 1.5 ... 75 7.5 ... 300 15 ... 900
• Inside-delta circuit Hp -- -- 22 ... 1600
Ambient temperature °C -25 ... +60 -25 ... +60 0 ... +60
1)
Soft starting/ramp-down
Voltage ramp
Starting/stopping voltage % 40 ... 100 40 ... 100 20 ... 100
Starting and ramp-down time7) s 0 ... 20 0 ... 20 1 ... 360
Torque control -- --
Starting/stopping torque % -- -- 20 ... 100
Torque limit % -- -- 20 ... 200
Ramp time s -- -- 1 ... 360
Integral bypass contact system
Intrinsic device protection --
Motor overload protection --
Thermistor motor protection -- 2)
Integrated remote RESET -- 3)
Adjustable current limiting --

Inside-delta circuit -- --
Breakaway pulse -- --
Creep speed in both directions of rotation -- --
4)
Pump ramp-down -- --
4) 5)
DC braking -- --
4) 5)
Combined braking -- --
Motor heating -- --
Communication -- -- With PROFIBUS DP (optional)
External display and operator module -- -- (optional)
Operating measured value display -- --
Error logbook -- --
Event list -- --
Slave pointer function -- --
Trace function -- -- 6)
Programmable control inputs and outputs -- --

Number of parameter sets 1 1 3
Parameterization software (Soft Starter ES) -- --
Power semiconductors (thyristors) 2 controlled phases 2 controlled phases 3 controlled phases
Screw terminals
UL/CSA
CE marking
4)
Soft starting under heavy starting conditions -- --
Configuring support Win-Soft Starter, Electronic Application Selector, Technical Assistance Tel.: 1-800-333-7421
6)
Function is available; -- Function is not available. Trace function with Soft Starter ES software.
7)
1)
Only soft starting available for 3RW30. Actual motor start times are load dependent.
2) Optional up to size S3 (device variant).
3) Available for 3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4.; optional for 3RW40 5. and 3RW40 7..
You can find further information on the Internet at:
4)
Calculate soft starter and motor with size allowance where required. www.usa.siemens.com/softstarters
5) Not possible in inside-delta circuit.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
The SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters reduce the motor voltage The 3RW30 soft starters are suitable for soft starting of three-
through variable phase control and increase it in ramp-like mode phase asynchronous motors.
from a selectable starting voltage up to mains voltage. During
starting, these devices limit the torque as well as the current and Due to two-phase control, the current is kept at minimum values
prevent the shocks which arise during direct starts or wye-delta in all three phases throughout the entire starting time. Due
starts. In this way, mechanical loads and mains voltage dips can to continuous voltage influencing, current and torque peaks,
be reliably reduced. which are unavoidable in the case of wye-delta starters, for
instance, do not occur.
Soft starting reduces the stress on the connected equipment
and results in lower wear and therefore longer periods of trouble- Application areas
free production. The selectable start value means that the soft • Pumps
starters can be adjusted individually to the requirements of the • Heat pumps
application in question and unlike wye-delta starters are not • Hydraulic pumps
restricted to two-stage starting with fixed voltage ratios.1) • Presses
• Conveyors
The SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters are characterized above all by • Roller conveyor
their small space requirements. Integrated bypass contacts • Screw conveyors
mean that minimal power loss is used at the power semiconduc-
tors (thyristors) after the motor has started up. This cuts down on
heat losses, enabling a more compact design and making exter-
nal bypass circuits superfluous.
Various versions of the SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters are available:
• Standard version for fixed-speed three-phase motors, sizes
S00, S0, S2 and S3, with integrated bypass contact system
• Version for fixed-speed three-phase motors in a 22.5 mm
enclosure without bypass
Soft starters rated up to 75 Hp (at 460 V) for standard applica-
tions in three-phase networks are available. Extremely small
sizes, low power losses and simple start-up are just three of the
many advantages of this soft starter.
1)
Actual motor start times are load dependent.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
3RW30 18-1BB14 3RW30 28-1BB14 3RW30 38-1BB14 3RW30 47-1BB14 3RW30 03-2CB54
Ambient temperature 40 °C Ambient temperature 50 °C Size Order No. List PS* Weight
Rated Rated power of induc- Rated Rated power of induction Price $ per PU
operation motors for rated opera- motors for rated operational per PU approx.
tional cur- operational voltage Ue tional cur- voltage Ue
rent Ie1) rent Ie1)
230 V 400 V 500 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
A kW kW kW A hp hp hp hp
Rated operational voltage Ue 200 ... 480 V
• With screw terminals
3.6 0.75 1.5 -- 3 0.5 0.5 1.5 -- S00 3RW30 13-1BB@4 1 unit 0.580
6.5 1.5 3 -- 4.8 1 1 3 -- S00 3RW30 14-1BB@4 1 unit 0.580
9 2.2 4 -- 7.8 2 2 5 -- S00 3RW30 16-1BB@4 1 unit 0.580
12.5 3 5.5 -- 11 3 3 7.5 -- S00 3RW30 17-1BB@4 1 unit 0.580
17.6 4 7.5 -- 17 3 3 10 -- S00 3RW30 18-1BB@4 1 unit 0.580
• With spring-type terminals
3.6 0.75 1.5 -- 3 0.5 0.5 1.5 -- S00 3RW30 13-2BB@4 1 unit 0.580
6.5 1.5 3 -- 4.8 1 1 3 -- S00 3RW30 14-2BB@4 1 unit 0.580
9 2.2 4 -- 7.8 2 2 5 -- S00 3RW30 16-2BB@4 1 unit 0.580
12.5 3 5.5 -- 11 3 3 7.5 -- S00 3RW30 17-2BB@4 1 unit 0.580
17.6 4 7.5 -- 17 3 3 10 -- S00 3RW30 18-2BB@4 1 unit 0.580
25 5.5 11 -- 23 5 5 15 -- S0 3RW30 26-1BB@4 1 unit 0.690
32 7.5 15 -- 29 7.5 7.5 20 -- S0 3RW30 27-1BB@4 1 unit 0.690
38 11 18.5 -- 34 10 10 25 -- S0 3RW30 28-1BB@4 1 unit 0.690
25 5.5 11 -- 23 5 5 15 -- S0 3RW30 26-2BB@4 1 unit 0.690
32 7.5 15 -- 29 7.5 7.5 20 -- S0 3RW30 27-2BB@4 1 unit 0.690
38 11 18.5 -- 34 10 10 25 -- S0 3RW30 28-2BB@4 1 unit 0.690
• With screw-type or spring-type terminals
45 11 22 -- 42 10 15 30 -- S2 3RW30 36-@BB@4 1 unit 1.200
63 18.5 30 -- 58 15 20 40 -- S2 3RW30 37-@BB@4 1 unit 1.200
72 22 37 -- 62 20 20 40 -- S2 3RW30 38-@BB@4 1 unit 1.200
• With screw-type or spring-type terminals
80 22 45 -- 73 20 25 50 -- S3 3RW30 46-@BB@4 1 unit 1.710
106 30 55 -- 98 30 30 75 -- S3 3RW30 47-@BB@4 1 unit 1.710
Order No. supplement for connection types
• With screw terminals 1
• With spring-type terminals2) 2
Order No. supplement for rated control supply voltage Us
• 24 V AC/DC 0
• 110 ... 230 V 1
Soft starters for easy starting conditions and high switching frequency,
rated operational voltage Ue 200 ... 400 V,
rated control supply voltage Us 24 ... 230 V AC/DC
3 0.55 1.1 -- 2.6 0.5 0.5 -- -- 22.5 mm
• With screw terminals 3RW30 03-1CB54 1 unit 0.207
• With spring-type terminals 3RW30 03-2CB54 1 unit 0.188
1)
2)
Stand-alone installation. Note:
Power connection: screw terminals. Selection of the soft starter depends on the rated motor current.
The SIRIUS 3RW30 solid-state soft starters are designed for
easy starting conditions. JLoad < 10 x JMotor . In the event of
deviating conditions or increased switching frequency, it may be
necessary to choose a larger device.
Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation
program Win-Soft Starter. For information about rated currents
for ambient temperatures > 40 °C, see technical specifications
(see technical information on page 7/44).

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
Accessories
For soft starters Motor starter protectors Order No. List PS* Weight
Type Size Size Price $ per PU
per PU approx
.
kg
Auxiliary terminals
Auxiliary terminals, 3-pole
3RW30 4. S3 3RT19 46-4F 1 unit 0.035
Covers for soft starters
Terminal covers for box terminals
Additional touch protection to be fitted at the box termi-
nals (2 units required per device)
3RW30 3. S2 3RT19 36-4EA2 1 unit 0.020
3RW30 4. S3 3RT19 46-4EA2 1 unit 0.025
Terminal covers for cable lugs and busbar connections

For complying with the phase clearances and as touch
protection if box terminal is removed
3RW30 4. S3 3RT19 46-4EA1 1 unit 0.040
Link modules to motor starter protectors

3RW30 13, S00 S0 3RA19 21-1A 10 units 0.028
3RW30 14,
3RW30 16,
3RW30 17,
3RW30 18
3RW30 26 S0 S0 3RA19 21-1A 10 units 0.028
3RW30 36 S2 S2 3RA19 31-1A 5 units 0.033
3RW30 46, S3 S3 3RA19 41-1A 5 units 0.072
3RW30 47
Operating instructions1)
For soft starters
3RW30 1. S00 3ZX10 12-0RW30-2DA1
3RW30 2. S0
3RW30 3. S2
3RW30 4. S3
1)
The operating instructions are included in the scope of supply.
Version Functionality Order No. List Weight

Functions Price $ per PU
per PU approx.
kg
Covers and push-in lugs (only for 3RW30 03)
Sealable covers For securing against 3RP1 902 5 units 0.004
unauthorized adjust-
ment of setting knobs
Push-in lugs 3RP1 903 10 units 0.002
3RP1 902 For screw fixing
3RP1 903

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
More information
Application examples for normal starting (Class 10)
Normal starting Class 10 (up to 20 s with 300 % In motor),
The soft starter rating can be selected to be as high as the rating of the motor used.
Application Conveyor belt Roller conveyor Compressor Small fan Pump Hydraulic pump
Starting parameters
• Voltage ramp and current
limiting
- Starting voltage % 70 60 50 40 40 40
- Starting time s 10 10 20 20 10 10
Note: Status graphs

These tables present sample set values and device sizes. They
are intended only for the purposes of information and are not
binding. The set values depend on the application in question U
and must be optimized during start-up. Actual start times are
UN
load dependent.
The soft starter dimensions should be checked where necessary
with the Win-Soft Starter software or with the help of Technical US
Assistance.
Configuration t R on t
The 3RW solid-state motor controllers are designed for easy

starting conditions. In the event of deviating conditions or in-
creased switching frequency, it may be necessary to choose a
larger device. For accurate dimensioning, use the Win-Soft
Starter selection and simulation program. ON 13/14
NSB0_01941
If necessary, an overload relay for heavy starting must be se-
lected where long starting times are involved. PTC sensors are
recommended. t R on t
In the motor feeder between the SIRIUS 3RW soft starter and the
motor, no capacitive elements are permitted (e. g. no reactive- Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program
power compensation equipment). In addition, neither static sys- With this software, you can simulate and select all Siemens soft
tems for reactive-power compensation nor dynamic PFC (Power starters, taking into account various parameters such as mains
Factor Correction) must be operated in parallel during starting properties, motor and load data, and special application
and ramp-down of the soft starter. This is important to prevent requirements.
faults arising on the compensation equipment and/or the soft
starter. The software is a valuable tool, which makes complicated,
lengthy manual calculations for determining the required soft
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses, controls and over- starters superfluous.
load relays) should be dimensioned for direct starting, following
the local short-circuit conditions. Fuses, controls and overload The Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program can be
relays must be ordered separately. Please observe the maxi- downloaded from:
mum switching frequencies specified in the technical http://www.siemens.de/sanftstarter > Software
specifications.
More information can be found on the Internet at:
Note: http://www.sea.siemens.com/softstarters
When induction motors are switched on, voltage drops normally
appear on starters of all types (direct starters, wye-delta starters,
soft starters). The infeed transformer must always be dimen-
sioned such that the voltage dip when starting the motor remains
within the permissible tolerance. If the infeed transformer is di-
mensioned with only a small margin, it is best for the control volt-
age to be supplied from a separate circuit (independently of the
main voltage) in order to avoid the potential switching off of the
soft starter.
Power electronics schematic circuit diagram
L1 L2 L3
NSB0_01940
T1 T2 T3
A bypass contact system is already integrated in the 3RW30 soft

starter and therefore does not have to be ordered separately.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters have all the same advantages as the The SIRIUS 3RW40 solid-state soft starters are suitable for soft
3RW30 soft starters. starting and stopping of three-phase asynchronous motors.
The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters are characterized above all by Due to two-phase control, the current is kept at minimum values
their small space requirements. Integrated bypass contacts in all three phases throughout the entire starting time and dis-
mean that minimal power is used at the power semiconductors turbing direct current components are eliminated in addition.
(thyristors) after the motor has started up. This cuts down on This not only enables the two-phase starting of motors up to
heat losses, enabling a more compact design and making exter- 300 Hp (at 460 V) but also avoids the current and torque peaks
nal bypass circuits superfluous. which occur e. g. with wye-delta starters.
At the same time this soft starter comes with additional inte- Application areas
grated functions such as adjustable current limiting, motor over-
load and intrinsic device protection, and optional thermistor mo- • Pumps
tor protection on some models. • Heat pumps
• Hydraulic pumps
Internal intrinsic device protection prevents the thermal over- • Presses
loading of the thyristors and the power section defects this can • Conveyors
cause. As an option the thyristors can also be protected by • Roller conveyor
semiconductor fuses from short-circuiting. • Screw conveyors
Thanks to integrated status monitoring and fault monitoring, this • Escalators
compact soft starter offers many different diagnostics options. • Small fans
Up to four LEDs and relay outputs permit differentiated monitor- • Centrifugal blowers
ing and diagnostics of the operating mechanism by indicating • Bow thrusters
the operating state as well as for example mains or phase failure, • Stirrers
missing load, non-permissible tripping time/class setting, ther- • Extruders
mal overloading or device faults. • Lathes
Soft starters rated up to 300 Hp (at 460 V) for standard applica- • Milling machines
tions in three-phase systems are available. Extremely small
sizes, low power losses and simple start-up are just three of the
many advantages of the SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters.
"Increased safety" type of protection EEx e according to
ATEX directive 94/9/EC
The 3RW40 soft starter sizes S0 to S12 are suitable for the start-
ing of explosion-proof motors with "increased safety" type of pro-
tection EEx e.
See "Appendix" –> "Standards and approvals" –> "Type over-
view of approved devices for potentially explosive areas (ATEX
explosion protection)".

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
3RW40 28-1BB14 3RW40 38-1BB14 3RW40 47-1BB14
Ambient temperature 50 °C Size Order No. List PS* Weight per

Rated Rated power of induction motors Price $ PU approx.
operational for rated operational voltage Ue per PU
current Ie1)
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
A hp hp hp hp kg
11 3 3 7.5 -- S0 3RW40 24-1BB@4 1 unit 0.770
23 5 5 15 -- S0 3RW40 26-1BB@4 1 unit 0.770
29 7.5 7.5 20 -- S0 3RW40 27-1BB@4 1 unit 0.770
34 10 10 25 -- S0 3RW40 28-1BB@4 1 unit 0.770
11 3 3 7.5 -- S0 3RW40 24-2BB@4 1 unit 0.770
23 5 5 15 -- S0 3RW40 26-2BB@4 1 unit 0.770
29 7.5 7.5 20 -- S0 3RW40 27-2BB@4 1 unit 0.770
34 10 10 25 -- S0 3RW40 28-2BB@4 1 unit 0.770
• With screw or spring-type terminals
42 10 15 30 -- S2 3RW40 36-@BB@4 1 unit 1.350
58 15 20 40 -- S2 3RW40 37-@BB@4 1 unit 1.350
62 20 20 40 -- S2 3RW40 38-@BB@4 1 unit 1.350
73 20 25 50 -- S3 3RW40 46-@BB@4 1 unit 1.900
98 30 30 75 -- S3 3RW40 47-@BB@4 1 unit 1.900
11 -- -- 7.5 10 S0 3RW40 24-1BB@5 1 unit 0.770
23 -- -- 15 20 S0 3RW40 26-1BB@5 1 unit 0.770
29 -- -- 20 25 S0 3RW40 27-1BB@5 1 unit 0.770
34 -- -- 25 30 S0 3RW40 28-1BB@5 1 unit 0.770
11 -- -- 7.5 10 S0 3RW40 24-2BB@5 1 unit 0.770
23 -- -- 15 20 S0 3RW40 26-2BB@5 1 unit 0.770
29 -- -- 20 25 S0 3RW40 27-2BB@5 1 unit 0.770
34 -- -- 25 30 S0 3RW40 28-2BB@5 1 unit 0.770
42 -- -- 30 40 S2 3RW40 36-@BB@5 1 unit 1.350
58 -- -- 40 50 S2 3RW40 37-@BB@5 1 unit 1.350
62 -- -- 40 60 S2 3RW40 38-@BB@5 1 unit 1.350
73 -- -- 50 60 S3 3RW40 46-@BB@5 1 unit 1.900
98 -- -- 75 75 S3 3RW40 47-@BB@5 1 unit 1.900
Order No. supplement for rated control supply voltage Us
• 24 V AC/DC 0
• 110 ... 230 V AC/DC 1
1) Stand-alone installation without auxiliary fan. Note:
2) Power connection: screw terminals. Selection of the soft starter depends on the rated motor current.
easy starting conditions. JLoad < 10 x JMotor . In the event of de-
viating conditions or increased switching frequency, it may be
necessary to choose a larger device. Siemens recommends the
use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter. For
information about rated currents for ambient temperatures other
than 50°C, see technical information on page 7/56

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
3RW40 28-1TB04 3RW40 38-1TB04 3RW40 47-1TB04

current Ie1)
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
A hp hp hp hp kg
Rated operational voltage Ue 200 ... 480 V,
with thermistor motor protection,
rated control supply voltage Us 24 V AC/DC
11 3 3 7.5 -- S0 3RW40 24-1TB04 1 unit 0.770
23 5 5 15 -- S0 3RW40 26-1TB04 1 unit 0.770
29 7.5 7.5 20 -- S0 3RW40 27-1TB04 1 unit 0.770
34 10 10 25 -- S0 3RW40 28-1TB04 1 unit 0.770
11 3 3 7.5 -- S0 3RW40 24-2TB04 1 unit 0.770
23 5 5 15 -- S0 3RW40 26-2TB04 1 unit 0.770
29 7.5 7.5 20 -- S0 3RW40 27-2TB04 1 unit 0.770
34 10 10 25 -- S0 3RW40 28-2TB04 1 unit 0.770
42 10 15 30 -- S2 3RW40 36-@TB04 1 unit 1.350
58 15 20 40 -- S2 3RW40 37-@TB04 1 unit 1.350
62 20 20 40 -- S2 3RW40 38-@TB04 1 unit 1.350
73 20 25 50 -- S3 3RW40 46-@TB04 1 unit 1.900
98 30 30 75 -- S3 3RW40 47-@TB04 1 unit 1.900
Rated operational voltage Ue 400 ... 600 V,
with thermistor motor protection,
rated control supply voltage Us 24 V AC/DC
11 -- -- 7.5 10 S0 3RW40 24-1TB05 1 unit 0.770
23 -- -- 15 20 S0 3RW40 26-1TB05 1 unit 0.770
29 -- -- 20 25 S0 3RW40 27-1TB05 1 unit 0.770
34 -- -- 25 30 S0 3RW40 28-1TB05 1 unit 0.770
11 -- -- 7.5 10 S0 3RW40 24-2TB05 1 unit 0.770
23 -- -- 15 20 S0 3RW40 26-2TB05 1 unit 0.770
29 -- -- 20 25 S0 3RW40 27-2TB05 1 unit 0.770
34 -- -- 25 30 S0 3RW40 28-2TB05 1 unit 0.770
42 -- -- 30 40 S2 3RW40 36-@TB05 1 unit 1.350
58 -- -- 40 50 S2 3RW40 37-@TB05 1 unit 1.350
62 -- -- 40 60 S2 3RW40 38-@TB05 1 unit 1.350
73 -- -- 50 60 S3 3RW40 46-@TB05 1 unit 1.900
98 -- -- 75 75 S3 3RW40 47-@TB05 1 unit 1.900
1)
Stand-alone installation without auxiliary fan. Note:
2)
Power connection: screw terminals. Selection of the soft starter depends on the rated motor current.
information about rated currents for ambient temperatures
> 40° C, see technical information on page 7/56

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
3RW40 56-6BB44 3RW40 76-6BB44

current Ie1)
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
A hp hp hp hp kg
117 30 40 75 -- S6 3RW40 55-@BB@4 1 unit 4.900
145 40 50 100 -- 3RW40 56-@BB@4 1 unit 6.900
205 60 75 150 -- S12 3RW40 73-@BB@4 1 unit 8.900
248 75 100 200 -- 3RW40 74-@BB@4 1 unit 8.900
315 100 125 250 -- 3RW40 75-@BB@4 1 unit 8.900
385 125 150 300 -- 3RW40 76-@BB@4 1 unit 8.900
117 -- -- 75 100 S6 3RW40 55-@BB@5 1 unit 4.900
145 -- -- 100 150 3RW40 56-@BB@5 1 unit 6.900
205 -- -- 150 200 S12 3RW40 73-@BB@5 1 unit 8.900
248 -- -- 200 250 3RW40 74-@BB@5 1 unit 8.900
315 -- -- 250 300 3RW40 75-@BB@5 1 unit 8.900
385 -- -- 300 400 3RW40 76-@BB@5 1 unit 8.900
Order No. supplement for connection types2)
• With spring-type terminals 2
Order No. supplement for the rated control supply voltage Us3)
• 115 V AC 3
• 230 V AC 4
1) Stand-alone installation.
2) Power connection: busbar connection.
3) Control by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct control by means
of PLC possible.
Note:
Selection of the soft starter depends on the rated motor current.
information about rated currents for ambient temperatures
> 40° C, see technical information on page 7/56

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Accessories
For soft starters Version Order No. List PS* Weight
Type Size Price $ per PU
per PU approx.
kg
Box terminal blocks for soft starters
For round and flat wires
3RW40 5. S6 • Up to 70 mm2 3RT19 55-4G 1 unit 0.230
• Up to 120 mm2 3RT19 56-4G 1 unit 0.260
3RW40 7. S12 • Up to 240 mm2 3RT19 66-4G 1 unit 0.676
Auxiliary terminals
Auxiliary terminals, 3-pole
3RW40 4. S3 3RT19 46-4F 1 unit 0.035
Additional touch protection to be fitted at the box terminals
(2 units required per device)
3RW40 3. S2 3RT19 36-4EA2 1 unit 0.020
3RW40 4. S3 3RT19 46-4EA2 1 unit 0.025
3RW40 5. S6 3RT19 56-4EA2 1 unit 0.030
3RW40 7. S12 3RT19 66-4EA2 1 unit 0.040
Terminal covers for cable lugs and busbar connections
3RW40 4. S3 For complying with the phase clear- 3RT19 46-4EA1 1 unit 0.040
3RW40 5. S6 ances and as touch protection if box 3RT19 56-4EA1 1 unit 0.070
3RW40 7. S12 terminal is removed 3RT19 66-4EA1 1 unit 0.130
Sealing covers
3RW40 2. to S0, 3RW49 00-0PB10 1 unit 0.005
3RW40 4. S2,
S3
3RW40 5. and S6, 3RW49 00-0PB00 1 unit 0.010
3RW40 7. S12
Modules for RESET1)

Modules for remote RESET, electrical
Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us,
power consumption 80 VA AC, 70 W DC,
ON period 0.2 s ... 4 s,
switching frequency 60/h
3RW40 5. and S6, • 24 ... 30 V AC/DC 3RU19 00-2AB71 1 unit 0.066
3RW40 7. S12 • 110 ... 127 V AC/DC 3RU19 00-2AF71 1 unit 0.067
• 220 ... 250 V AC/DC 3RU19 00-2AM71 1 unit 0.066
Mechanical RESET comprising

3RW40 5. and S6, • Resetting plungers, holders and 3RU19 00-1A 1 unit 0.038
3RW40 7. S12 formers
• Suitable pushbutton IP65, Ø 22 mm, 3SB30 00-0EA11 1 unit 0.020
12 mm stroke
• Extension plunger 3SX13 35 1 unit 0.004
Cable releases with holder for RESET

For Ø 6.5 mm holes in the control panel;
max. control panel thickness 8 mm
3RW40 5. and S6, • Length 400 mm 3RU19 00-1B 1 unit 0.063
3RW40 7. S12 • Length 600 mm 3RU19 00-1C 1 unit 0.073
1)
Remote RESET already integrated in the
3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4. soft starters.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
For soft starters Motor starter protectors Order No. List PS* Weight
Type Size Size Price $ per PU
per PU approx.
kg
Link modules to motor starter protectors
3RW40 24, S0 S0 3RA19 21-1A 10 units 0.028
3RW40 26
3RW40 36 S2 S2 3RA19 31-1A 5 units 0.033
3RW40 46, S3 S3 3RA19 41-1A 5 units 0.072
3RW40 47
Fans (to increase switching frequency and for device mounting in

positions different from the normal position)
3RW40 2. S0 3RW49 28-8VB00 1 unit 0.010
3RW40 3., S2, 3RW49 47-8VB00 1 unit 0.020
3RW40 4. S3
For soft starters
3RW40 2. S0 3ZX10 12-0RW40-1AA1
3RW40 3. S2
3RW40 4. S3
3RW40 5. S6 3ZX10 12-0RW40-2DA1
3RW40 7. S12
1)
The operating instructions are included in the scope of supply.
They are also available on the Internet at:
www.usa.siemens.com/softstarters
Spare parts
For soft starters Version Order No. List PS* Weight
Type Size Rated control supply Price $ per PU
voltage Us per PU approx.
kg
Fans
Fans
3RW40 5.-.BB3. S6 115 V AC 3RW49 36-8VX30 1 unit 0.300

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
More information
Application Conveyor belt Roller conveyor Small fan Pump Hydraulic pump
Starting parameters
limiting
- Starting voltage % 70 60 40 40 40
- Starting time s 10 10 10 10 10
- Current limit value 5 x IM 5 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM
Ramp-down time s 5 5 0 10 0
Application examples for heavy starting (Class 20)

Heavy starting Class 20 (up to 40 s with 350 % In motor),
The soft starter has to be selected at least one rating class higher than the motor used.
Application Stirrer Centrifuge
Starting parameters
limiting
- Starting voltage % 40 40
- Starting time s 20 20
- Current limit value 4 x IM 4 x IM
Ramp-down time 0 0
Note:
binding. The set values depend on the application in question
and must be optimized during start-up. Actual start times are
load dependent.
with the Win-Soft Starter software or with the help of Technical
Assistance.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Configuration Status graphs1)

The 3RW solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting
conditions. In the event of severe conditions or increased
switching frequency, it may be necessary to choose a larger de-
vice. For accurate dimensioning, use the Win-Soft Starter selec-
tion and simulation program.
Where long starting times are involved, the integrated solid-state
overload relay for heavy starting should not be disconnected.
PTC sensors are recommended. This also applies for the smooth
ramp-down because during the ramp-down time an additional
current loading applies in contrast to free ramp-down.
In the case of high switching frequencies in S4 mode, Siemens
recommends the use of PTC sensors. For corresponding device
versions with integrated thermistor motor protection or separate
thermistor evaluation devices see Industrial Controls catalog
Chapter 11 “Function Relays, Interfaces and Converters“.
motor, no capacitive elements are permitted (e. g. no reactive-
power compensation equipment, PFC capacitors). In addition,
neither static systems for reactive-power compensation nor dy- Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program
namic PFC (Power Factor Correction) must be operated in par-
allel during starting and ramp-down of the soft starter. This is im- With this software, you can simulate and select all Siemens soft
portant to prevent faults arising on the compensation equipment starters, taking into account various parameters such as mains
and/or the soft starter. properties, motor and load data, and special application
requirements.
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses and controls)
should be dimensioned for direct starting, following the local The software is a valuable tool, which makes complicated,
short-circuit conditions. Fuses, controls and overload relays lengthy manual calculations for determining the required soft
must be ordered separately. Please observe the maximum starters superfluous.
switching frequencies specified in the technical specifications.
The Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program can be
Note: downloaded from:
When induction motors are switched on, voltage drops normally www.usa.siemens.com/softstarters > Software
appear on starters of all types (direct starters, wye-delta starters,
soft starters). The infeed transformer must always be dimen- More information can be found on the Internet at:
sioned such that the voltage dip when starting the motor remains www.usa.siemens.com/softstarters
soft starter.
Power electronics schematic circuit diagram
L1 L2 L3
NSB0_001485a
T1 T2 T3
A bypass contact system and solid-state overload relay are al-

ready integrated in the 3RW40 soft starter and therefore do not
have to be ordered separately.
1) Un = Full Voltage
2) Us = Starting (Initial) Voltage
3) tR = Time Running
4) Ie = Rated operational current

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for high-feature applications
In addition to soft starting and soft ramp-down, the solid-state The SIRIUS 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are suitable for the
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters provide numerous functions for torque-controlled soft starting and smooth ramp-down as well as
higher-level requirements. They cover a performance range up braking of three-phase asynchronous motors.
to 900 Hp (at 460 V) in the inline circuit and up to 1600Hp (at
460 V) in the inside-delta circuit. Application areas, e. g.
• Pumps
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are characterized by a compact
design for space-saving and clearly arranged control cabinet • Fans
layouts. For optimized motor starting and stopping the innova- • Compressors
tive SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are an attractive alternative with • Water transport
considerable savings potential compared to applications with a
frequency converter. The new torque control and adjustable cur- • Conveying systems and lifts
rent limiting enable the High-Feature soft starters to be used in • Hydraulics
nearly every conceivable task. They guarantee the reliable • Machine tools
avoidance of sudden torque applications and current peaks dur-
ing motor starting and stopping. This creates savings potential • Mills
when calculating the size of the switchgear and when servicing • Saws
the machinery installed. Whether it’s for inline circuits or inside- • Crushers
delta circuits – the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter offers savings es-
pecially in terms of size and equipment costs. • Mixers
The bypass contacts already integrated in the soft starter by- • Centrifuges
pass the thyristors after a motor ramp-up is detected. This re- • Industrial cooling and refrigerating systems
sults in a further reduction in the heat loss occuring during oper-
ation of the soft starter.
Combinations of various starting, operating and ramp-down
possibilities ensure an optimum adaptation to the application-
specific requirements. Operation and commissioning can be
performed with the menu-controlled keypad and a menu-
prompted, multi-line graphical display with background lighting.
The optimized motor ramp-up and ramp-down can be effected
quickly, easily and reliably by means of just a few settings with a
previously selected language. Four-key operation and plain-text
displays for each menu point guarantee full clarity at every mo-
ment of the parameterization and operation.
Applicable standards
• IEC 60947-4-2
• UL/CSA
Soft Starter ES parameterization software
Soft Starter ES software is used for the parameterization, moni-
toring and service diagnostics of SIRIUS 3RW44 High Feature
soft starters.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
3RW44 27-1BC44 3RW44 36-6BC44 3RW44 47-6BC44 3RW44 58-6BC44 3RW44 66-6BC44
Ambient temperature 50 °C Order No. List PS* Weight per
current Ie
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
A hp hp hp hp kg
Inline circuits2), rated operational voltage 200 ... 460 V
26 7.5 7.5 15 -- 3RW44 22-@BC@4 1 unit 6.500
32 10 10 20 -- 3RW44 23-@BC@4 1 unit 6.500
42 10 15 25 -- 3RW44 24-@BC@4 1 unit 6.500
51 15 15 30 -- 3RW44 25-@BC@4 1 unit 6.500
68 20 20 50 -- 3RW44 26-@BC@4 1 unit 6.500
82 25 25 60 -- 3RW44 27-@BC@4 1 unit 6.500
100 30 30 75 -- 3RW44 34-@BC@4 1 unit 7.900
117 30 40 75 -- 3RW44 35-@BC@4 1 unit 7.900
145 40 50 100 -- 3RW44 36-@BC@4 1 unit 7.900
180 50 60 125 -- 3RW44 43-@BC@4 1 unit 11.500
215 60 75 150 -- 3RW44 44-@BC@4 1 unit 11.500
280 75 100 200 -- 3RW44 45-@BC@4 1 unit 11.500
315 100 125 250 -- 3RW44 46-@BC@4 1 unit 11.500
385 125 150 300 -- 3RW44 47-@BC@4 1 unit 11.500
494 150 200 400 -- 3RW44 53-@BC@4 1 unit 50.000
551 150 200 450 -- 3RW44 54-@BC@4 1 unit 50.000
615 200 250 500 -- 3RW44 55-@BC@4 1 unit 50.000
693 200 250 550 -- 3RW44 56-@BC@4 1 unit 50.000
780 250 300 600 -- 3RW44 57-@BC@4 1 unit 50.000
850 300 350 700 -- 3RW44 58-@BC@4 1 unit 50.000
970 350 400 800 -- 3RW44 65-@BC@4 1 unit 78.000
1076 350 400 900 -- 3RW44 66-@BC@4 1 unit 78.000
• 115 V AC 3
• 230 V AC 4
1)
Control by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct control by means
of PLC possible.
2)
For inside delta selection, see page 7/76.
Note:
Soft starter selection depends on the rated motor current.
The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal
starting (Class 10). (Inertia load of the overall operating mecha-
nism JLoad <10 x JMotor ; starting current 350 % x Ie for 20 s sim-
ilar load). For any other conditions of use, the devices should be
selected using the Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation pro-
gram. See Technical specifications for information about rated
currents for ambient temperatures > 40 °C and switching
frequency.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44

current Ie
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
A hp hp hp hp kg
Inline circuits2), rated operational voltage 400 ... 600 V
26 -- -- 15 20 3RW44 22-@BC@5 1 unit 6.500
32 -- -- 20 25 3RW44 23-@BC@5 1 unit 6.500
42 -- -- 25 30 3RW44 24-@BC@5 1 unit 6.500
51 -- -- 30 40 3RW44 25-@BC@5 1 unit 6.500
68 -- -- 50 50 3RW44 26-@BC@5 1 unit 6.500
82 -- -- 60 75 3RW44 27-@BC@5 1 unit 6.500
100 -- -- 75 75 3RW44 34-@BC@5 1 unit 7.900
117 -- -- 75 100 3RW44 35-@BC@5 1 unit 7.900
145 -- -- 100 125 3RW44 36-@BC@5 1 unit 7.900
180 -- -- 125 150 3RW44 43-@BC@5 1 unit 11.500
215 -- -- 150 200 3RW44 44-@BC@5 1 unit 11.500
280 -- -- 200 250 3RW44 45-@BC@5 1 unit 11.500
315 -- -- 250 300 3RW44 46-@BC@5 1 unit 11.500
385 -- -- 300 400 3RW44 47-@BC@5 1 unit 11.500
494 -- -- 400 500 3RW44 53-@BC@5 1 unit 50.000
551 -- -- 450 550 3RW44 54-@BC@5 1 unit 50.000
615 -- -- 500 600 3RW44 55-@BC@5 1 unit 50.000
693 -- -- 550 700 3RW44 56-@BC@5 1 unit 50.000
780 -- -- 600 800 3RW44 57-@BC@5 1 unit 50.000
850 -- -- 700 850 3RW44 58-@BC@5 1 unit 50.000
970 -- -- 800 1000 3RW44 65-@BC@5 1 unit 78.000
1076 -- -- 900 1100 3RW44 66-@BC@5 1 unit 78.000
• 115 V AC 3
• 230 V AC 4
1)
of PLC possible.
2)
For inside delta selection, see page 7/76.
Note:
frequency.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44

current Ie
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
A hp hp hp hp kg
Inline circuits, rated operational voltage 400 ... 690 V
26 -- -- 15 20 3RW44 22-@BC@6 1 unit 6.500
32 -- -- 20 25 3RW44 23-@BC@6 1 unit 6.500
42 -- -- 25 30 3RW44 24-@BC@6 1 unit 6.500
51 -- -- 30 40 3RW44 25-@BC@6 1 unit 6.500
68 -- -- 50 50 3RW44 26-@BC@6 1 unit 6.500
82 -- -- 60 75 3RW44 27-@BC@6 1 unit 6.500
100 -- -- 75 75 3RW44 34-@BC@6 1 unit 7.900
117 -- -- 75 100 3RW44 35-@BC@6 1 unit 7.900
145 -- -- 100 125 3RW44 36-@BC@6 1 unit 7.900
180 -- -- 125 150 3RW44 43-@BC@6 1 unit 11.500
215 -- -- 150 200 3RW44 44-@BC@6 1 unit 11.500
280 -- -- 200 250 3RW44 45-@BC@6 1 unit 11.500
315 -- -- 250 300 3RW44 46-@BC@6 1 unit 11.500
385 -- -- 300 400 3RW44 47-@BC@6 1 unit 11.500
494 -- -- 400 500 3RW44 53-@BC@6 1 unit 50.000
551 -- -- 450 550 3RW44 54-@BC@6 1 unit 50.000
615 -- -- 500 600 3RW44 55-@BC@6 1 unit 50.000
693 -- -- 550 700 3RW44 56-@BC@6 1 unit 50.000
780 -- -- 600 800 3RW44 57-@BC@6 1 unit 50.000
850 -- -- 700 850 3RW44 58-@BC@6 1 unit 50.000
970 -- -- 800 1000 3RW44 65-@BC@6 1 unit 78.000
1076 -- -- 900 1100 3RW44 66-@BC@6 1 unit 78.000
• 115 V AC 3
• 230 V AC 4
1)
of PLC possible.
Note:
frequency.

Planning and Configuration with SIRIUS
Introduction
In addition to device-specific parameterization, the programs of
the SIRIUS ES software family also provide the following func-
tionality in a uniform look and feel. These functions are available
in many SIRIUS ES programs.
• Standards-conform printouts
The programs of the SIRIUS ES software family greatly simplify
machine documentation. Parameterization printouts accord-
ing to EN ISO 7200 are possible. The elements to be printed
are easy to select and compile as required.
• Easy creation of parameter templates
Parameter templates can be created for devices and applica-
tions with only minimum differences in their parameters. These
templates contain all the parameters which are needed for the
parameterization. In addition it is possible to specify which of
these parameters are fixed and which can be customized,
e. g. by the startup engineer.
• Group function
SIRIUS ES engineering software (E-SW) For the user-friendly parameterization of numerous devices or
applications of the same type, the programs of the SIRIUS ES
The programs of the SIRIUS ES software family enable: software family offer a group function which enables the pa-
• Clearly arranged configuring of device functions and their parameterization of several devices to be read out or written
rameters – online and offline through PROFIBUS. In conjunction with templates it is even
• Efficient diagnostics functions and display of the most impor- possible to selectively adapt the same parameters in any
tant measured values number of parameterizations.
• Time savings through shorter startup times. • Teleservice through MPI
The premium versions of the SIRIUS ES software families sup-
The SIRIUS ES programs such as Motor Starter ES, port the use of MPI Teleservice (comprising the Teleservice
Soft Starter ES and SIMOCODE ES are available in three ver- software and various Teleservice adapters) for remote diag-
sions which differ in user-friendliness, scope of functions and nostics of the devices. This facilitates diagnostics and mainte-
price (for details see the descriptions of the individual products). nance and it shortens response times for service purposes.
SIRIUS ES Basic Standard Premium
Local interface on the device
(system interface)
Basic functions for parameteriz-
ing the devices
• Parameter assignment
• Operating
• Diagnostics
• Test
Standard functionality
• Parameterizing with the --
integrated graphics editor1)
• Creating typicals --
• Exporting parameters --
Complete functionality
• Group functions -- --
• S7 Routing -- --
• Teleservice through MPI -- --
• STEP7 Object Manager -- --
PROFIBUS interface -- --
1) Depending on SIRIUS ES program.

Introduction
Types of delivery and license

The programs of the SIRIUS ES software family are available as
follows:
• Floating license – the license for any one user at any one time
- Authorizes any one user
- Independent of the number of installations (unlike the single
license which is allowed to be installed once only)
- Only the actual use of the program has to be licensed
- Trial license (free use of all program functions for 14 days for
test and evaluation purposes, included on every product
CD, available in the download file of the SIRIUS ES program
in the Service&Support portal).
Following delivery versions are available in addition for the pro-

grams of the SIRIUS ES software family:
• Upgrade
Upgrade from an old to a new version with expanded func-
tions, e. g. upgrade from Motor Starter ES 2006 to
Motor Starter ES 2007
• Powerpack
Special pack for switching within the same software version to
a more powerful version with more functionality,
e. g. Powerpack Motor Starter ES 2007 for switching from
Standard to Premium
• Software Update Service
To keep you up to date at all times we offer a special service
which supplies you automatically with all service packs and
upgrades
Efficient engineering and startup with graphic interfaces and diagnostics

options

Soft Starter ES
Overview
Efficient engineering with new program versions
The Soft Starter ES software program is available in three ver-
sions which differ in their user-friendliness, scope of functions
and price.
Soft starters ES Basic Standard Premium
Access through the local
interface on the device
Parameter assignment
Operating
Diagnostics
Creating templates -- 1)
Exporting parameters --
Comparison functions --
Standards-conform printout --
Easy and clearly arranged parameter setting of the 3RW44 soft starter according to EN ISO 7200
with Soft Starter ES 2007 --
Service data (slave pointer,
statistics data)
Access through PROFIBUS -- --
Group functions -- --
Teleservice through MPI -- --
S7 Routing -- --
STEP7 Object Manager -- --
1)
Templates with Service Pack 1 and higher.
More functions
• Standards-conform printouts
The software tool greatly simplifies machine documentation.
Parameterization printouts according to EN ISO 7200 are pos-
sible. The elements to be printed are easy to select and com-
pile as required.
• Easy creation of parameter templates
Parameter templates can be created for devices and applica-
tions with only minimum differences in their parameters. These
templates contain all the parameters which are needed for the
parameterization. In addition it is possible to specify which of
Graphic presentation of measured values with the trace function (oscillo- these parameters are fixed and which can be adapted, e. g.
scope function) of Soft Starter ES 2007 Standard and Premium by the startup engineer.
• Group function
Soft Starter ES 2007 For the user-friendly parameterization of numerous devices or
The Soft Starter ES software permits the quick and easy param- applications of the same type, the programs of the SIRIUS ES
eterization, monitoring and diagnostics of SIRIUS 3RW44 High software family offer a group function which enables the pa-
Feature soft starters for service purposes. The device parame- rameterization of several devices to be read out or written
ters can be configured directly on the PC and transferred to the through PROFIBUS. In conjunction with typicals it is even pos-
soft starter through a serial cable or an optional PROFIBUS inter- sible to selectively adapt the same parameters in any number
face. of parameterizations.
The advantages of Soft Starter ES: • Teleservice through MPI
The Soft Starter ES Premium version supports the use of MPI
• Clearly arranged configuring of device functions and their pa- Teleservice (comprising the Teleservice software and various
rameters – online and offline Teleservice adapters) for remote diagnostics of the devices.
• Effective diagnostics functions on the soft starter and display This facilitates diagnostics and maintenance, and it shortens
of the most important measured values response times for service purposes.
• Trace function (oscilloscope function) for recording measured
values and events (in the Soft Starter ES Standard and Pre-
mium software versions).

Soft Starter ES
Types of delivery and license • Powerpack

Special pack for switching within the same software version to
Soft Starter ES is available as follows: a more powerful version with more functionality, e. g.
• Floating license – the license for any one user at any one time Powerpack Soft Starter ES 2007 for switching from Standard
- Authorizes any one user to Premium
- Independent of the number of installations (unlike the single • Software Update Service
license which is allowed to be installed once only) To keep you up to date at all times we offer a special service
- Only the actual use of the program has to be licensed which supplies you automatically with all service packs and
- Trial license (free use of all program functions for 14 days for upgrades
test and evaluation purposes, included on every product
CD, available in the download file of the SIRIUS ES program
in the Service&Support portal). New licensing procedure
Following delivery versions are available in addition for To make licensing easier, the three versions of Soft Starter ES are
Soft Starter ES 2007: available with immediate effect with the following license:
• Upgrade 14 day trial license for Premium functions:
Upgrade from an old to a new version with expanded func- for test and evaluation purposes, included on every product CD,
tions, e. g. upgrade from Soft Starter ES 2006 to available also in the download file of the SIRIUS Soft Starter
Soft Starter ES 2007 ES 2007 program at www.sea.siemens.com/softstarters.
System requirements
Soft Starter ES 2007 parameterization, start-up and diagnostics Basic/Standard Premium
software for the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter
Firmware version ≥ *E04* 1) Firmware version ≥ *E06* 2)
Operating system Windows 2000 (Service Pack 3 or 4), Windows XP Professional (Service
Pack 2), Windows Vista Ultimate 32/ Business 323)
Processor ≥ Pentium 800 MHz/≥ 1 GHz (Windows Vista)
RAM ≥ 512 MB/≥ 1 GB (Windows Vista)
Free space on hard disk ≥ 150 MB
CD-ROM/DVD drive Yes (only when installing from CD)
Serial interface (COM) Yes
PC cable/parameterization cable/connection cable Yes
PROFIBUS communication module (optional) -- Yes
1) SIRIUS 3RW44 with firmware version ≥ *E04*. Installed in starters
delivered after December 2005.
2) SIRIUS 3RW44 with firmware version ≥ *E06*. Installed in starters delivered
after May 2006.
3) Windows Vista Ultimate 32/ Business 32 from Soft Starter ES 2007+SP1.

Parameterization and service software for SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters
• Can be run under WIN 2000/WIN XP PROF/Windows Vista Ultimate 32/Business 32
• Without PC cable
Version Order No. List PS* Weight

Price $ per PU
per PU approx.
kg
Soft Starter ES 2007 Basic
E-SW, software and documentation on CD,
• License key on USB stick, Class A, including CD 3ZS1 313-4CC10-0YA5 1 unit 0.230
Soft Starter ES 2007 Standard


Soft Starter ES
Version Order No. List PS* Weight

Price $ per PU
per PU approx.
kg
Upgrade for Soft Starter ES 2006 3ZS1 313-5CC10-0YE5 1 unit 0.230
Floating license for one user,
communication through the system interface
Powerpack for Soft Starter ES 2007 Basic 3ZS1 313-5CC10-0YD5 1 unit 0.230
Software Update Service 3ZS1 313-5CC10-0YL5 1 unit 0.230
For 1 year with automatic extension,
assuming the current software version is in use,
Soft Starter ES 2007 Premium

communication through system interface or PROFIBUS
Upgrade for Soft Starter ES 2006 3ZS1 313-6CC10-0YE5 1 unit 0.230
communication through the system interface or
PROFIBUS
Powerpack for Soft Starter ES 2007 Standard 3ZS1 313-6CC10-0YD5 1 unit 0.230
PROFIBUS
Software Update Service 3ZS1 313-6CC10-0YL5 1 unit 0.230
For 1 year with automatic extension,
assuming the current software version is in use,
PROFIBUS
PC cables
1 unit 0.150
For PC/PG communication with SIRIUS 3RW44 soft 3UF7 940-0AA00-0
starters
ace, for connecting to
Through the system interf
the serial interface of the PC/PG
3UF7 940-0AA00-0
Serial/USB
1 unit 0.150
For PC/PG communication 3UF7 946-0AA00-0
with SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters
Through the system interface, for connecting to
the USB interface of the PC/PG

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Accessories
For Version Order No. List PS* Weight
soft starters Price $ per PU
per PU approx.
Type kg
PROFIBUS communication modules
3RW49 00-0KC00 1 unit 0.320
Modules can be plugged into the soft starters for
integrating the starters in the PROFIBUS network
with DPV1 slave functionality.
On Y-link the soft starter has only DPV0 slave
functionality.
3RW49 00-0KC00
PROFINET communication modules

For 3RW44 soft starter integration in the 3RW49 00-0NC00 1 unit 0.320
PROFINET network, suitable for devices
with firmware version E12 or higher
3RW49 00-0NC00
External display and operator modules
For indicating and operating the functions provided by 3RW49 00-0AC00 1 unit 0.320
the soft starter using an externally mounted display and
operator module in degree of protection IP54, N1, N12
(e. g. in the control cabinet door)
Connection cables
From the device interface (serial) of the 3RW44 soft
3RW49 00-0AC00 starter to the external display and operator module
• Length 0.5 m, flat 3UF7 932-0AA00-0 1 unit 0.020
• Length 0.5 m, round 3UF7 932-0BA00-0 1 unit 0.050
Box terminal blocks for soft starters
Box terminal blocks
3RW44 2. Included in the scope of supply
3RW44 3. • Up to 70 mm2 3RT19 55-4G 1 unit 0.230
• Up to 120 mm2 3RT19 56-4G 1 unit 0.260
2
3RW44 4. • Up to 240 mm 3RT19 66-4G 1 unit 0.676
3RT19

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Spare parts
For Version Order No. List PS* Weight
soft starters Price $ per PU
per PU approx.
Type kg
Additional touch protection to be fitted at the box termi-
nals (2 units required per device)
3RW44 2. and 3RT19 56-4EA2 1 unit 0.030
3RW44 3.
3RW44 4. 3RT19 66-4EA2 1 unit 0.040
Terminal covers for cable lugs and busbar
connections
3RW44 2. and 3RT19 56-4EA1 1 unit 0.070
3RW44 3.
3RW44 4. 3RT19 66-4EA1 1 unit 0.130
3RT19 .6-4EA1
For 3RW44 soft starters 3ZX10 12-0RW44-1AA1
Fans
Fans
3RW44 2. and 115 V AC 3RW49 36-8VX30 1 unit 0.300
3RW44 3. 230 V AC 3RW49 36-8VX40 1 unit 0.300
3RW44 4. 115 V AC 3RW49 47-8VX30 1 unit 0.500
230 V AC 3RW49 47-8VX40 1 unit 0.500
3RW49 3RW44 115 V AC 3RW49 57-8VX30 1 unit 0.800
5. and 230 V AC 3RW49 57-8VX40 1 unit 0.800
3RW44 6. 2)
3RW44 6. 3) 115 V AC 3RW49 66-8VX30 1 unit 0.300
230 V AC 3RW49 66-8VX40 1 unit 0.300
1) The operating instructions are included in the scope of supply.

2)
3RW44 6. mounting on output side.
3)
For mounting on front side.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
More information
Starting parameters1)
limiting
- Starting time s 10 10 10 10 10 10
- Current limit value Deactivated Deactivated 4 x IM 4 x IM Deactivated Deactivated
• Torque ramp
- Starting torque 60 50 40 20 10 10
- End torque 150 150 150 150 150 150
- Starting time 10 10 10 10 10 10
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode Smooth ramp- Smooth ramp- Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Pump ramp-down Free ramp-down
down down

The soft starter has to be selected one rating class higher than the motor used.
Application Mixer Centrifuge Milling machine
limiting
- Starting voltage % 30 30 30
- Starting time s 30 30 30
- Current limit value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM
• Torque ramp
- Starting torque 30 30 30
- End torque 150 150 150
- Starting time 30 30 30
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down or DC braking
Application examples for very heavy starting (Class 30)

Very heavy starting Class 30 (up to 60 s with 350 % In motor),
The soft starter has to be selected two rating classes higher than the motor used.
Application Large fan Mill Crushers Circular saw/bandsaw
limiting
- Starting voltage % 30 50 50 30
- Starting time s 60 60 60 60
- Current limit value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM
• Torque ramp
- Starting torque 20 50 50 20
- End torque 150 150 150 150
- Starting time 60 60 60 60
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) 80 %, 300 ms 80 %, 300 ms Deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down
Note:
and must be optimized during start-up.
Assistance.
1)
Actual motor starting times are load dependent.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Circuit concept Configuration

The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be operated in two different The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal
types of circuit. starting. In case of heavy starting or increased starting fre-
• Inline circuit quency, a larger device must be selected.
The controls for isolating and protecting the motor are simply For long starting times it is recommended to have a PTC sensor
connected in series with the soft starter. The motor is con- in the motor. This also applies for the ramp-down modes smooth
nected to the soft starter with three cables. ramp-down, pump ramp-down and DC braking, because during
• Inside-delta circuit the ramp-down time in these modes, an additional current load-
The wiring is similar to that of wye-delta starters. The phases of ing applies in contrast to free ramp-down.
the soft starter are connected in series with the individual motor In the motor feeder between the SIRIUS 3RW soft starter and the
windings. The soft starter then only has to carry the phase cur- motor, no capacitive elements are permitted (e. g. no reactive-
rent, amounting to about 58 % of the rated motor current (con- power compensation equipment). In addition, neither static sys-
ductor current). tems for reactive-power compensation nor dynamic PFC (Power
Comparison of the types of circuit Factor Correction) must be operated in parallel during starting
and ramp-down of the soft starter. This is important to prevent
starter.
should be dimensioned for direct starting, following the local
short-circuit conditions. Fuses, controls and overload relays
must be ordered separately.
The harmonic component load for starting currents must be
taken into consideration for the selection of motor starter protec-
tors (selection of release).
Note:
When induction motors are switched on, voltage drops normally
Inline circuit: appear on starters of all types (direct starters, wye-delta starters,
Rated current Ie corresponds to the rated motor current In, soft starters). The infeed transformer must always be dimen-
3 cables to the motor sioned such that the voltage dip when starting the motor remains
soft starter.
Device interface, PROFIBUS DP communication module,
Soft Starter ES parameterizing and operating software
The 3RW44 electronic soft starters have a PC interface for com-
municating with the Soft Starter ES software or for connecting
the external display and operator module. If the optional
PROFIBUS communication module is used, the 3RW44 soft
starter can be integrated in the PROFIBUS network and commu-
nicate using the GSD file or Soft Starter ES Premium software.
Inside-delta circuit:
Rated current Ie corresponds to approx. 58 % of the rated motor
current In, 6 cables to the motor (as with wye-delta starters)
Which circuit?
Using the inline circuit involves the lowest wiring outlay. If the soft
starter to motor connections are long, this circuit is preferable.
With the inside-delta circuit there is double the wiring complexity
but a smaller size of device can be used at the same rating. It is
also recommended to use an isolating contactor in series with
each motor winding.
Thanks to the choice of operating mode between the inline cir-
cuit and inside-delta circuit, it is always possible to select the
most favorable solution.
The braking function is possible only in the inline circuit.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
System Manual for SIRIUS 3RW44

Besides containing all important information on configuring,
commissioning and servicing, the manual also contains exam-
ple circuits and the technical specifications for all devices. This
manual can be downloaded off the internet.
Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program
With this software, you can simulate and select all Siemens soft
starters, taking into account various parameters such as mains
properties, motor and load data, and special application
requirements.
The software is a valuable tool, which makes complicated,
lengthy manual calculations for determining the required soft
starters superfluous.
The Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program can be
downloaded free of charge from:
www.usa.siemens.com/softstarters > Software
More information can be found on the Internet at:

3RW Soft Starters
Soft starters for enclosed applications
The family of 3RW40 and 3RW44 softstarters are available in The Class 73/74 product is a fully enclosed solid state reduced
stand alone enclosed control designs for smooth starting and voltage starter designed for a wide variety of industrial applica-
stopping of standard NEMA design B three phase inductive mo- tions. The enclosed softstarter offerings are ideal for new as well
tors, thus eliminating physical stresses to the system and load as existing applications where total motor controls is required.
while minimizing starting current. These pre-engineered en-
closed designs offer convenience and flexibility in and UL/CSA Proper selection based on application data is made simple fol-
certified offering. Enclosed styles are available in combination lowing these easy steps:
and non-combination configurations through 600HP and system - Select proper RVSS by application
voltages of 200V, 230V, 480V, and 600V. • Select the 3RW40 versus the 3RW44 using the application
The Class 73 offers either the 3RW40 or 3RW44 in a non-combi- info provided in the open section of the catalog
nation style offering. These non-combination styles come stan- - Select the rating chart for normal starting or sever duty starting
dard with a choice of Type 1, 3R, 12, 4 NEMA rated enclosure, a
control transformer, Sirius softstarter with built-in overload and • Normal starting is rated at 350% of rated motor current
bypass, line side power terminal block, and a reset pushbutton. IM for 10 seconds and based on starts per hour – repre-
The enclosed offering can be powerfully matched with a wide sentative of a class 20 application.
variety of factory modified options such as pushbutton control, • Severe starting is rated at 350% of rated motor current
pilot lights, metering and other control options such as isolation Im for 20 seconds and based on starts per hour – repre-
contactors and emergency start bypass starters. 3RW44 en- sentative of a Class 20 application
closed styles are also available with optional through the door
keypad and Profibus communication. - Select model using Motor nameplate data
• Identify correct motor voltage column
The Class 74 offering includes all of the features of the Class 73
in a combination style design. Standard options are either a cir- • Select rate current or HP row
cuit breaker or fusible disconnect providing short circuit protec- • Find ordering number under desired enclosure type
tion and soft starting in one package. column (e.g. NEMA 1)
• Select appropriate system voltage
- Select factory modification on page 6/401)
Example:
3RW44, N12, CB disconnect, 460V, 200HP with a start/stop and
red run light
Order No.
74MT34BFAP A1 FC
Product Nomenclature
74 Q T 3 4 B F A T
Class Type
73 = Non-combination
74 = Combination Enclosure Type
Size Rating
Blank = None
3RW40new 3RW40 3RW44 P = MCP
A = 11 A = 117 A = 26 T = Thermal Magnetic
Model Type F = Fusible
B = 23 B = 145 B = 32 R = 3RW40new
C = 29 C = 205 C = 42 S = 3RW40 Phases Control Voltage
D = 34 D = 248 D = 51 T = 3RW44 3 = 3 phase A = None
E = 42 E = 315 E = 68 Mod Box Type
F = 58 F = 385 F = 82 F = Standard
G = 62 G = 100 G = Modified
H = 73 H = 117 Supply Voltage Enclosure Type
J = 98 J = 145 6= 200 B = NEMA 1
K = 180 2= 230 0 = NEMA 12
L = 215 3= 380/415 D = NEMA 3R
M = 280 4= 460 E = NEMA 4
N = 315 5= 575 W = NEMA 4X SS
P = 385
Q = 494
R = 551
S = 615
T = 693
W = 780
X = 960
Y = 1040
1)
Some modifications will require a larger ‘Modified’ box than the standard box
e.g. Isolation contactor, space heater, etc. See page 7/43 for instructions.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Size S0-S3 Non-Combo
Ordering Information
� Enclosed devices should be ordered by Ideal applications for 3RW40 enclosed .
the FLA of the motor. softstarters
b Fans
� The 3RW40 is designed for normal b Pumps
starting applications. b Easy starting loads starting in less than
� For factory modifications see page 7/43. 10 seconds
� For complete derating and application info
see page 7/59 Class 73 starters are built to UL and CSA
� For dimensional drawings see page 7/95. standards
3RW40 Enclosed features:

b Available in NEMA 1,12,3R,4, and Class 73 non-combination starters include:
4 stainless steel b NEMA rated enclosure
b Compact size b 3RW40 Sirius softstarter with built-in OL
b Built-in Bypass contactor
b Voltage ramp up and ramp down and bypass
b Current limit adjustment of 125 - 550% b Control Circuit Transformer
b Internal overload class 10,15,or 20 b Line side power terminal block
b Internal self protection b Reset button
b Fault monitoring b Isolation Contactor
b Isolation Contactor
3RW40 for Standard Applications

Enclosed Non-Combination (Starter Only)
Rated MAX HP
a KW Class 10 Light Duty (350% * Ie for 10s)b
Operating OPEN Style List List List List NEMA 4/4X List
Current 200V 230V 460V 575V 380V (Starter Only) NEMA 1 Price $ NEMA 3R Price $ NEMA 12 Price $ NEMA 4 Price $ Stainless Steel Price $
11 3 3 7.5 — 6 3RW4024-1BB14 73AR3_BFA 73AR3_DFA 73AR3_0FA 73AR3_EFA 73AR3_WFA
23 5 7.5 15 — 13 3RW4026-1BB14 73BR3_BFA 73BR3_DFA 73BR3_0FA 73BR3_EFA 73BR3_WFA
29 7.5 10 20 — 16 3RW4027-1BB14 73CR3_BFA 73CR3_DFA 73CR3_0FA 73CR3_EFA 73CR3_WFA
34 10 10 25 — 18 3RW4028-1BB14 73DR3_BFA 73DR3_DFA 73DR3_0FA 73DR3_EFA 73DR3_WFA
42 10 15 30 — 23 3RW4036-1BB14 73ER3_BFA 73ER3_DFA 73ER3_0FA 73ER3_EFA 73ER3_WFA
58 15 20 40 — 31 3RW4037-1BB14 73FR3_BFA 73FR3_DFA 73FR3_0FA 73FR3_EFA 73FR3_WFA
62 20 20 40 — 33 3RW4038-1BB14 73GR3_BFA 73GR3_DFA 73GR3_0FA 73GR3_EFA 73GR3_WFA
73 20 25 50 — 39 3RW4046-1BB14 73HR3_BFA 73HR3_DFA 73HR3_0FA 73HR3_EFA 73HR3_WFA
98 30 30 75 — 52 3RW4047-1BB14 73JR3_BFA 73JR3_DFA 73JR3_0FA 73JR3_EFA 73JR3_WFA
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
a Starter size is dependent on the nameplate Full Load Amps (FLA) rating of the motor.  Starter selection is dependent on type of application. Ie = FLA rating of motor
HPs are for reference only. Enclosed ratings are at 40°C

For Operation in the Control Cabinet • Revised •
3RW Soft Starters 07/20/15
Enclosed 3RW40
Ideal applications for 3RW40 enclosed .
� Enclosed devices should be ordered by
softstarters:
the FLA of the motor.
b Fans
starting applications (Class 10 . b Building/construction machines
applications). b Presses
� For factory modifications see page 7/43. b Escalators
b Transport systems
� For complete derating and application info b Air conditioning systems
see page 7/59. b Ventilators
� For dimensional drawings see page 7/95. b Assembly lines
3RW40 Enclosed features: Class 73 non-combination starters include: Class 73 starters are built to UL and .
b Available in NEMA 1, 12, 3R, 4, and 4
stainless steel b NEMA rated enclosure CSA standards.
b Compact size b 3RW40 Sirius softstarter with built-in OL
b Built-in bypass contactor and bypass
b Voltage ramp up and ramp down
b Current limit adjustment of 125 - 550% b Control circuit transformer
b Internal overload class 10, 15, or 20 b Line side power terminal block
b Internal self protection
b Fault monitoring b Reset button
For all technical information, please consult the 2006 Industrial Controls Catalog or contact your local sales support center.

Rated MAX HP
a KW Class 10 Light Duty (350% * Im for 10s)b
117 30 40 75 — 56 3RW4055-6BB34 73AS3_BFA 73AS3_DFA 73AS3_0FA 73AS3_EFA 73AS3_WFA
145 40 50 100 — 75 3RW4056-6BB34 73BS3_BFA 73BS3_DFA 73BS3_0FA 73BS3_EFA 73BS3_WFA
205 60 75 150 — 112 3RW4073-6BB34 73CS3_BFA 73CS3_DFA 73CS3_0FA 73CS3_EFA 73CS3_WFA
248 75 100 200 — 149 3RW4074-6BB34 73DS3_BFA 73DS3_DFA 73DS3_0FA 73DS3_EFA 73DS3_WFA
315 100 125 250 — 186 3RW4075-6BB34 73ES3_BFA 73ES3_DFA 73ES3_0FA 73ES3_EFA 73ES3_WFA
385 125 150 300 — 224 3RW4076-6BB34 73FS3_BFA 73FS3_DFA 73FS3_0FA 73FS3_EFA 73FS3_WFA
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
117 — — 75 100 — 3RW4055-6BB35 73AS35BFA 73AS35DFA 73AS350FA 73AS35EFA 73AS35WFA
145 — — 100 150 — 3RW4056-6BB35 73BS35BFA 73BS35DFA 73BS350FA 73BS35EFA 73BS35WFA
205 — — 150 200 — 3RW4073-6BB35 73CS35BFA 73CS35DFA 73CS350FA 73CS35EFA 73CS35WFA
248 — — 200 250 — 3RW4074-6BB35 73DS35BFA 73DS35DFA 73DS350FA 73DS35EFA 73DS35WFA
315 — — 250 300 — 3RW4075-6BB35 73ES35BFA 73ES35DFA 73ES350FA 73ES35EFA 73ES35WFA
385 — — 300 400 — 3RW4076-6BB35 73FS35BFA 73FS35DFA 73FS350FA 73FS35EFA 73FS35WFA

Rated MAX HP
a KW Class 20 Severe Duty (350% * Ie for 20s)b
112 30 40 75 — 56 3RW4055-6BB34 73AS3_BFA 73AS3_DFA 73AS3_0FA 73AS3_EFA 73AS3_WFA
132 40 50 100 — 75 3RW4056-6BB34 73BS3_BFA 73BS3_DFA 73BS3_0FA 73BS3_EFA 73BS3_WFA
185 60 60 125 — 93 3RW4073-6BB34 73CS3_BFA 73CS3_DFA 73CS3_0FA 73CS3_EFA 73CS3_WFA
205 60 75 150 — 112 3RW4074-6BB34 73DS3_BFA 73DS3_DFA 73DS3_0FA 73DS3_EFA 73DS3_WFA
280 75 100 200 — 149 3RW4075-6BB34 73ES3_BFA 73ES3_DFA 73ES3_0FA 73ES3_EFA 73ES3_WFA
340 100 125 250 — 186 3RW4076-6BB34 73FS3_BFA 73FS3_DFA 73FS3_0FA 73FS3_EFA 73FS3_WFA
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
112 — — 75 75 — 3RW4055-6BB35 73AS35BFA 73AS35DFA 73AS350FA 73AS35EFA 73AS35WFA
132 — — 100 125 — 3RW4056-6BB35 73BS35BFA 73BS35DFA 73BS350FA 73BS35EFA 73BS35WFA
185 — — 125 150 — 3RW4073-6BB35 73CS35BFA 73CS35DFA 73CS350FA 73CS35EFA 73CS35WFA
205 — — 150 200 — 3RW4074-6BB35 73DS35BFA 73DS35DFA 73DS350FA 73DS35EFA 73DS35WFA
280 — — 200 250 — 3RW4075-6BB35 73ES35BFA 73ES35DFA 73ES350FA 73ES35EFA 73ES35WFA
340 — — 250 300 — 3RW4076-6BB35 73FS35BFA 73FS35DFA 73FS350FA 73FS35EFA 73FS35WFA
a Starter size is dependent on the nameplate Full Load Amps (FLA) rating of the motor.
HPs are for reference only. Enclosed ratings are at 40°C.
b Starter selection is dependent on type of application. Im = FLA rating of motor.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Size S0-S3 Circuit Breaker
b Fans

b Available in NEMA 1, 12, 3R, 4, and Class 74 non-combination starters include:
b Compact size b Circuit Breaker disconnect with shunt trip
b Built-in Bypass contactor
b Voltage ramp up and ramp down b 3RW40 Sirius softstarter with built-in OL
b Current limit adjustment of 125 - 550% and bypass
b Internal overload class 10, 15, or 20 b Control Circuit Transformer
b Internal self protection b Isolation Contactor
b Fault monitoring

Enclosed Circuit Breaker Combination (Starter With Circuit Breaker Disconnect)
Rated MAX HP
11 3 3 7.5 — 6 3RW4024-1BB14 74AR3_BFAP 74AR3_DFAP 74AR3_0FAP 74AR3_EFAP 74AR3_WFAP
23 5 7.5 15 — 13 3RW4026-1BB14 74BR3_BFAP 74BR3_DFAP 74BR3_0FAP 74BR3_EFAP 74BR3_WFAP
29 7.5 10 20 — 16 3RW4027-1BB14 74CR3_BFAP 74CR3_DFAP 74CR3_0FAP 74CR3_EFAP 74CR3_WFAP
34 10 10 25 — 18 3RW4028-1BB14 74DR3_BFAP 74DR3_DFAP 74DR3_0FAP 74DR3_EFAP 74DR3_WFAP
42 10 15 30 — 23 3RW4036-1BB14 74ER3_BFAP 74ER3_DFAP 74ER3_0FAP 74ER3_EFAP 74ER3_WFAP
58 15 20 40 — 31 3RW4037-1BB14 74FR3_BFAP 74FR3_DFAP 74FR3_0FAP 74FR3_EFAP 74FR3_WFAP
62 20 20 40 — 33 3RW4038-1BB14 74GR3_BFAP 74GR3_DFAP 74GR3_0FAP 74GR3_EFAP 74GR3_WFAP
73 20 25 50 — 39 3RW4046-1BB14 74HR3_BFAP 74HR3_DFAP 74HR3_0FAP 74HR3_EFAP 74HR3_WFAP
98 30 30 75 — 52 3RW4047-1BB14 74JR3_BFAP 74JR3_DFAP 74JR3_0FAP 74JR3_EFAP 74JR3_WFAP
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
a Starter size is dependent on the nameplate Full Load Amps (FLA) rating of the motor.  Starter selection is dependent on type of application. Ie = FLA rating of motor

Control Products
Enclosed 3RW44
the FLA of the motor. softstarters:
b Fans
b Transport systems
3RW40 Enclosed features: Class 74 starters are built to UL and CSA
b Available in NEMA 1, 12, 3R, 4, and 4 Class 74 non-combination starters include:
stainless steel standards.
b NEMA rated enclosure
b Compact size
b Built-in bypass contactor b Circuit breaker disconnect with shunt trip
b Internal overload class 10, 15, or 20 b Control circuit transformer
b Internal self protection
b Fault monitoring

Enclosed Circuit Breaker Combination (Starter with Circuit Breaker Disconnect)
Rated MAX HP
117 30 40 75 — 56 3RW4055-6BB34 74AS3_BFAP 74AS3_DFAP 74AS3_0FAP 74AS3_EFAP 74AS3_WFAP
145 40 50 100 — 75 3RW4056-6BB34 74BS3_BFAP 74BS3_DFAP 74BS3_0FAP 74BS3_EFAP 74BS3_WFAP
205 60 75 150 — 112 3RW4073-6BB34 74CS3_BFAP 74CS3_DFAP 74CS3_0FAP 74CS3_EFAP
248 75 100 200 — 149 3RW4074-6BB34 74DS3_BFAP 74DS3_DFAP 74DS3_0FAP 74DS3_EFAP
315 100 125 250 — 186 3RW4075-6BB34 74ES3_BFAP 74ES3_DFAP 74ES3_0FAP 74ES3_EFAP
385 125 150 300 — 224 3RW4076-6BB34 74FS3_BFAP 74FS3_DFAP 74FS3_0FAP 74FS3_EFAP
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
117 — — 75 100 — 3RW4055-6BB35 74AS35BFAP 74AS35DFAP 74AS350FAP 74AS35EFAP 74AS35WFAP
145 — — 100 150 — 3RW4056-6BB35 74BS35BFAP 74BS35DFAP 74BS350FAP 74BS35EFAP 74BS35WFAP
205 — — 150 200 — 3RW4073-6BB35 74CS35BFAP 74CS35DFAP 74CS350FAP 74CS35EFAP
248 — — 200 250 — 3RW4074-6BB35 74DS35BFAP 74DS35DFAP 74DS350FAP 74DS35EFAP
315 — — 250 300 — 3RW4075-6BB35 74ES35BFAP 74ES35DFAP 74ES350FAP 74ES35EFAP
385 — — 300 400 — 3RW4076-6BB35 74FS35BFAP 74FS35DFAP 74FS350FAP 74FS35EFAP
Enclosed Circuit Breaker Combination (Starter with Circuit Breaker Disconnect)

Rated MAX HP
112 30 40 75 — 56 3RW4055-6BB34 74AS3_BFAP 74AS3_DFAP 74AS3_0FAP 74AS3_EFAP 74AS3_WFAP
132 40 50 100 — 75 3RW4056-6BB34 74BS3_BFAP 74BS3_DFAP 74BS3_0FAP 74BS3_EFAP 74BS3_WFAP
185 60 60 125 — 93 3RW4073-6BB34 74CS3_BFAP 74CS3_DFAP 74CS3_0FAP 74CS3_EFAP
205 60 75 150 — 112 3RW4074-6BB34 74DS3_BFAP 74DS3_DFAP 74DS3_0FAP 74DS3_EFAP
280 75 100 200 — 149 3RW4075-6BB34 74ES3_BFAP 74ES3_DFAP 74ES3_0FAP 74ES3_EFAP
340 100 125 250 — 186 3RW4076-6BB34 74FS3_BFAP 74FS3_DFAP 74FS3_0FAP 74FS3_EFAP
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
112 — — 75 75 — 3RW4055-6BB35 74AS35BFAP 74AS35DFAP 74AS350FAP 74AS35EFAP 74AS35WFAP
132 — — 100 125 — 3RW4056-6BB35 74BS35BFAP 74BS35DFAP 74BS350FAP 74BS35EFAP 74BS35WFAP
185 — — 125 150 — 3RW4073-6BB35 74CS35BFAP 74CS35DFAP 74CS350FAP 74CS35EFAP
205 — — 150 200 — 3RW4074-6BB35 74DS35BFAP 74DS35DFAP 74DS350FAP 74DS35EFAP
280 — — 200 250 — 3RW4075-6BB35 74ES35BFAP 74ES35DFAP 74ES350FAP 74ES35EFAP
340 — — 250 300 — 3RW4076-6BB35 74FS35BFAP 74FS35DFAP 74FS350FAP 74FS35EFAP
a Starter size is dependent on the nameplate Full Load Amps (FLA) rating of the motor. b Starter selection is dependent on type of application. Im = FLA rating of motor.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Size S0-S3 Fusible
b Fans

b Available in NEMA 1, 12, 3R, 4, and Class 73 non-combination starters include:
b Compact size b Fusible Disconnect
b Built-in Bypass contactor b 3RW40 Sirius softstarter with built-in
b Voltage ramp up and ramp down OL and bypass
b Current limit adjustment of 125 - 550%
b Internal overload class 10,15,or 20 b Control Circuit Transformer
b Internal self protection b Isolation Contactor
b Fault monitoring

Enclosed Fusible Combination (Starter With Fusible Disconnect)
Rated MAX HP
11 3 3 7.5 — 6 3RW4024-1BB14 74AR3_BFAF 74AR3_DFAF 74AR3_0FAF 74AR3_EFAF 74AR3_WFAF
23 5 7.5 15 — 13 3RW4026-1BB14 74BR3_BFAF 74BR3_DFAF 74BR3_0FAF 74BR3_EFAF 74BR3_WFAF
29 7.5 10 20 — 16 3RW4027-1BB14 74CR3_BFAF 74CR3_DFAF 74CR3_0FAF 74CR3_EFAF 74CR3_WFAF
34 10 10 25 — 18 3RW4028-1BB14 74DR3_BFAF 74DR3_DFAF 74DR3_0FAF 74DR3_EFAF 74DR3_WFAF
42 10 15 30 — 23 3RW4036-1BB14 74ER3_BFAF 74ER3_DFAF 74ER3_0FAF 74ER3_EFAF 74ER3_WFAF
58 15 20 40 — 31 3RW4037-1BB14 74FR3_BFAF 74FR3_DFAF 74FR3_0FAF 74FR3_EFAF 74FR3_WFAF
62 20 20 40 — 33 3RW4038-1BB14 74GR3_BFAF 74GR3_DFAF 74GR3_0FAF 74GR3_EFAF 74GR3_WFAF
73 20 25 50 — 39 3RW4046-1BB14 74HR3_BFAF 74HR3_DFAF 74HR3_0FAF 74HR3_EFAF 74HR3_WFAF
98 30 30 75 — 52 3RW4047-1BB14 74JR3_BFAF 74JR3_DFAF 74JR3_0FAF 74JR3_EFAF 74JR3_WFAF
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
a Starter
size is dependent on the nameplate Full Load Amps (FLA) rating of the motor.  Starter selection is dependent on type of application. Ie = FLA rating of motor

Control Products
Enclosed 3RW44
b Fans
b Transport systems
b Available in NEMA 1, 12, 3R, 4, and 4 Class 74 combination starters include: Class 74 starters are built to UL and CSA
stainless steel standards.
b Compact size b NEMA rated enclosure
b Built-in bypass contactor b Fusible disconnect
b Internal overload class 10, 15, or 20
b Internal self protection b Control circuit transformer
b Fault monitoring

Enclosed Fusible Combination (Starter with Fusible Disconnect)
Rated MAX HP
117 30 40 75 — 56 3RW4055-6BB34 74AS3_BFAF 74AS3_DFAF 74AS3_0FAF 74AS3_EFAF 74AS3_WFAF
145 40 50 100 — 75 3RW4056-6BB34 74BS3_BFAF 74BS3_DFAF 74BS3_0FAF 74BS3_EFAF 74BS3_WFAF
205 60 75 150 — 112 3RW4073-6BB34 74CS3_BFAF 74CS3_DFAF 74CS3_0FAF 74CS3_EFAF
248 75 100 200 — 149 3RW4074-6BB34 74DS3_BFAF 74DS3_DFAF 74DS3_0FAF 74DS3_EFAF
315 100 125 250 — 186 3RW4075-6BB34 74ES3_BFAF 74ES3_DFAF 74ES3_0FAF 74ES3_EFAF
385 125 150 300 — 224 3RW4076-6BB34 74FS3_BFAF 74FS3_DFAF 74FS3_0FAF 74FS3_EFAF
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
117 — — 75 100 — 3RW4055-6BB35 74AS35BFAF 74AS35DFAF 74AS350FAF 74AS35EFAF 74AS35WFAF
145 — — 100 150 — 3RW4056-6BB35 74BS35BFAF 74BS35DFAF 74BS350FAF 74BS35EFAF 74BS35WFAF
205 — — 150 200 — 3RW4073-6BB35 74CS35BFAF 74CS35DFAF 74CS350FAF 74CS35EFAF
248 — — 200 250 — 3RW4074-6BB35 74DS35BFAF 74DS35DFAF 74DS350FAF 74DS35EFAF
315 — — 250 300 — 3RW4075-6BB35 74ES35BFAF 74ES35DFAF 74ES350FAF 74ES35EFAF
385 — — 300 400 — 3RW4076-6BB35 74FS35BFAF 74FS35DFAF 74FS350FAF 74FS35EFAF
Enclosed Fusible Combination (Starter with Fusible Disconnect)

Rated MAX HP
112 30 40 75 — 56 3RW4055-6BB34 74AS3_BFAF 74AS3_DFAF 74AS3_0FAF 74AS3_EFAF 74AS3_WFAF
132 40 50 100 — 75 3RW4056-6BB34 74BS3_BFAF 74BS3_DFAF 74BS3_0FAF 74BS3_EFAF 74BS3_WFAF
185 60 60 125 — 93 3RW4073-6BB34 74CS3_BFAF 74CS3_DFAF 74CS3_0FAF 74CS3_EFAF
205 60 75 150 — 112 3RW4074-6BB34 74DS3_BFAF 74DS3_DFAF 74DS3_0FAF 74DS3_EFAF
280 75 100 200 — 149 3RW4075-6BB34 74ES3_BFAF 74ES3_DFAF 74ES3_0FAF 74ES3_EFAF
340 100 125 250 — 186 3RW4076-6BB34 74FS3_BFAF 74FS3_DFAF 74FS3_0FAF 74FS3_EFAF
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
112 — — 75 75 — 3RW4055-6BB35 74AS35BFAF 74AS35DFAF 74AS350FAF 74AS35EFAF 74AS35WFAF
132 — — 100 125 — 3RW4056-6BB35 74BS35BFAF 74BS35DFAF 74BS350FAF 74BS35EFAF 74BS35WFAF
185 — — 125 150 — 3RW4073-6BB35 74CS35BFAF 74CS35DFAF 74CS350FAF 74CS35EFAF
205 — — 150 200 — 3RW4074-6BB35 74DS35BFAF 74DS35DFAF 74DS350FAF 74DS35EFAF
280 — — 200 250 — 3RW4075-6BB35 74ES35BFAF 74ES35DFAF 74ES350FAF 74ES35EFAF
340 — — 250 300 — 3RW4076-6BB35 74FS35BFAF 74FS35DFAF 74FS350FAF 74FS35EFAF

Control Products
Enclosed 3RW44
b Fans
starting applications. b Conveying systems and lifts
� For factory modifications see page 7/43. b Hydraulics
stainless steel b Machine tools
� For complete derating and application info b Mills saws
b Compact size see page 7/70.
b Built-in bypass contactor b Crushers and grinders
b Multiple starting/stopping techniques � For dimensional drawings see page 7/95. b Mixers
including torque control b HVAC systems
b Internal overload class 5, 10, 15, 20, or 30 Class 73 non-combination starters include:
The 3RW44 severe duty rating table should
b Built-in graphical LCD keypad b NEMA rated enclosure
b Internal self protection be applied for high inertia applications .
b Fault monitoring b 3RW44 Sirius softstarter with built-in OL such rock crushers, chippers, screw .
b 3 parameter sets and bypass compressors, ect.
b Communication capable via opt. Profibus b Control circuit transformer Class 73 starters are built to UL and CSA
module
b Programmable inputs and outputs b Reset button standards.
b External keypad available
3RW44 For High Feature Applications

Rated MAX HP
26 7.5 7.5 15 — 12 3RW4422-1BC34 73AT3_BFA 73AT3_DFA 73AT3_0FA 73AT3_EFA 73AT3_WFA
32 10 10 20 — 15 3RW4423-1BC34 73BT3_BFA 73BT3_DFA 73BT3_0FA 73BT3_EFA 73BT3_WFA
42 10 15 25 — 19 3RW4424-1BC34 73CT3_BFA 73CT3_DFA 73CT3_0FA 73CT3_EFA 73CT3_WFA
51 15 15 30 — 22 3RW4425-1BC34 73DT3_BFA 73DT3_DFA 73DT3_0FA 73DT3_EFA 73DT3_WFA
68 20 25 50 — 37 3RW4426-1BC34 73ET3_BFA 73ET3_DFA 73ET3_0FA 73ET3_EFA 73ET3_WFA
82 25 30 60 — 45 3RW4427-1BC34 73FT3_BFA 73FT3_DFA 73FT3_0FA 73FT3_EFA 73FT3_WFA
100 30 30 75 — 56 3RW4434-6BC34 73GT3_BFA 73GT3_DFA 73GT3_0FA 73GT3_EFA 73GT3_WFA
117 30 40 75 — 56 3RW4435-6BC34 73HT3_BFA 73HT3_DFA 73HT3_0FA 73HT3_EFA 73HT3_WFA
145 40 50 100 — 75 3RW4436-6BC34 73JT3_BFA 73JT3_DFA 73JT3_0FA 73JT3_EFA 73JT3_WFA
180 60 60 125 — 93 3RW4443-6BC34 73KT3_BFA 73KT3_DFA 73KT3_0FA 73KT3_EFA 73KT3_WFA
215 60 75 150 — 112 3RW4444-6BC34 73LT3_BFA 73LT3_DFA 73LT3_0FA 73LT3_EFA 73LT3_WFA
280 75 100 200 — 149 3RW4445-6BC34 73MT3_BFA 73MT3_DFA 73MT3_0FA 73MT3_EFA 73MT3_WFA
315 100 125 250 — 186 3RW4446-6BC34 73NT3_BFA 73NT3_DFA 73NT3_0FA 73NT3_EFA 73NT3_WFA
385 125 150 300 — 224 3RW4447-6BC34 73PT3_BFA 73PT3_DFA 73PT3_0FA 73PT3_EFA 73PT3_WFA
494 150 200 400 — 298 3RW4453-6BC34 73QT3_BFA 73QT3_DFA 73QT3_0FA 73QT3_EFA
551 150 200 450 — 336 3RW4454-6BC34 73RT3_BFA 73RT3_DFA 73RT3_0FA 73RT3_EFA
615 200 250 500 — 373 3RW4455-6BC34 73ST3_BFA 73ST3_DFA 73ST3_0FA 73ST3_EFA
693 200 250 550 — 410 3RW4456-6BC34 73TT3_BFA 73TT3_DFA 73TT3_0FA 73TT3_EFA
780 200 250 600 — 447 3RW4457-6BC34 73WT3_BFA 73WT3_DFA 73WT3_0FA
970 350 350 800 — 597 3RW4465-6BC34 73YT3_BFA 73YT3_0FA
1076 350 400 900 — 972 3RW4466-6BC34 73ZT3_BFA 73ZT3_0FA
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
26 — — 15 20 — 3RW4422-1BC35 73AT35BFA 73AT35DFA 73AT350FA 73AT35EFA 73AT35WFA
32 — — 20 25 — 3RW4423-1BC35 73BT35BFA 73BT35DFA 73BT350FA 73BT35EFA 73BT35WFA
42 — — 25 30 — 3RW4424-1BC35 73CT35BFA 73CT35DFA 73CT350FA 73CT35EFA 73CT35WFA
51 — — 30 40 — 3RW4425-1BC35 73DT35BFA 73DT35DFA 73DT350FA 73DT35EFA 73DT35WFA
68 — — 50 50 — 3RW4426-1BC35 73ET35BFA 73ET35DFA 73ET350FA 73ET35EFA 73ET35WFA
82 — — 60 75 — 3RW4427-1BC35 73FT35BFA 73FT35DFA 73FT350FA 73FT35EFA 73FT35WFA
100 — — 75 75 — 3RW4434-6BC35 73GT35BFA 73GT35DFA 73GT350FA 73GT35EFA 73GT35WFA
117 — — 75 100 — 3RW4435-6BC35 73HT35BFA 73HT35DFA 73HT350FA 73HT35EFA 73HT35WFA
145 — — 100 125 — 3RW4436-6BC35 73JT35BFA 73JT35DFA 73JT350FA 73JT35EFA 73JT35WFA
180 — — 125 150 — 3RW4443-6BC35 73KT35BFA 73KT35DFA 73KT350FA 73KT35EFA 73KT35WFA
215 — — 150 200 — 3RW4444-6BC35 73LT35BFA 73LT35DFA 73LT350FA 73LT35EFA 73LT35WFA
280 — — 200 250 — 3RW4445-6BC35 73MT35BFA 73MT35DFA 73MT350FA 73MT35EFA 73MT35WFA
315 — — 250 300 — 3RW4446-6BC35 73NT35BFA 73NT35DFA 73NT350FA 73NT35EFA 73NT35WFA
385 — — 300 400 — 3RW4447-6BC35 73PT35BFA 73PT35DFA 73PT350FA 73PT35EFA 73PT35WFA
494 — — 400 500 — 3RW4453-6BC35 73QT35BFA 73QT35DFA 73QT350FA 73QT35EFA
551 — — 450 600 — 3RW4454-6BC35 73RT35BFA 73RT35DFA 73RT350FA 73RT35EFA
615 — — 500 700 — 3RW4455-6BC35 73ST35BFA 73ST35DFA 73ST350FA 73ST35EFA
693 — — 550 750 — 3RW4456-6BC35 73TT35BFA 73TT35DFA 73TT350FA 73TT35EFA
780 — — 600 850 — 3RW4457-6BC35 73WT35BFA 73WT35DFA 73WT350FA 73WT35EFA
970 — — 800 1000 — 3RW4465-6BC35 73YT35BFA 73YT350FA
1076 — — 900 1100 — 3RW4466-6BC35 73ZT35BFA 73ZT350FA
a Starter
size is dependent on the nameplate Full Load Amps (FLA) rating of the motor. b Starter selection is dependent on type of application. Im = FLA rating of motor.

Control Products
Enclosed 3RW44
b Fans
starting applications.
3RW44 Enclosed features: b Conveying systems and lifts
stainless steel � For complete derating and application info b Machine tools
b Compact size see page 7/70. b Mills saws
b Multiple starting/stopping techniques � For dimensional drawings see page 7/95. b Mixers
including torque control
b Internal overload class 10, 15, or 20 Class 73 non-combination starters include: b HVAC systems
b Built-in graphical LCD keypad b NEMA rated enclosure The 3RW44 severe duty rating table should
b Internal self protection b 3RW44 Sirius softstarter with built-in OL be applied for high inertia applications .
b Fault monitoring and bypass such rock crushers, chippers, screw .
b 3 parameter sets compressors, ect.
b Communication capable via opt. Profibus b Control circuit transformer
module b Line side power terminal block Class 73 starters are built to UL and CSA

Rated MAX HP
a KW Class 20 Severe Duty (350% * Im for 20s)b
26 7.5 7.5 15 — 12 3RW4422-1BC34 73AT3_BFA 73AT3_DFA 73AT3_0FA 73AT3_EFA 73AT3_WFA
32 10 10 20 — 15 3RW4423-1BC34 73BT3_BFA 73BT3_DFA 73BT3_0FA 73BT3_EFA 73BT3_WFA
42 10 15 25 — 19 3RW4424-1BC34 73CT3_BFA 73CT3_DFA 73CT3_0FA 73CT3_EFA 73CT3_WFA
51 15 15 30 — 22 3RW4425-1BC34 73DT3_BFA 73DT3_DFA 73DT3_0FA 73DT3_EFA 73DT3_WFA
68 20 25 50 — 37 3RW4426-1BC34 73ET3_BFA 73ET3_DFA 73ET3_0FA 73ET3_EFA 73ET3_WFA
82 25 30 60 — 45 3RW4427-1BC34 73FT3_BFA 73FT3_DFA 73FT3_0FA 73FT3_EFA 73FT3_WFA
97 30 30 60 — 45 3RW4434-6BC34 73GT3_BFA 73GT3_DFA 73GT3_0FA 73GT3_EFA 73GT3_WFA
113 30 40 75 — 56 3RW4435-6BC34 73HT3_BFA 73HT3_DFA 73HT3_0FA 73HT3_EFA 73HT3_WFA
134 40 50 75 — 56 3RW4436-6BC34 73JT3_BFA 73JT3_DFA 73JT3_0FA 73JT3_EFA 73JT3_WFA
175 50 60 100 — 75 3RW4443-6BC34 73KT3_BFA 73KT3_DFA 73KT3_0FA 73KT3_EFA 73KT3_WFA
195 60 75 125 — 93 3RW4444-6BC34 73LT3_BFA 73LT3_DFA 73LT3_0FA 73LT3_EFA 73LT3_WFA
243 75 75 150 — 112 3RW4445-6BC34 73MT3_BFA 73MT3_DFA 73MT3_0FA 73MT3_EFA 73MT3_WFA
263 75 100 200 — 149 3RW4446-6BC34 73NT3_BFA 73NT3_DFA 73NT3_0FA 73NT3_EFA 73NT3_WFA
326 100 125 250 — 186 3RW4447-6BC34 73PT3_BFA 73PT3_DFA 73PT3_0FA 73PT3_EFA 73PT3_WFA
494 150 150 400 — 224 3RW4453-6BC34 73QT3_BFA 73QT3_DFA 73QT3_0FA 73QT3_EFA
551 150 200 450 — 298 3RW4454-6BC34 73RT3_BFA 73RT3_DFA 73RT3_0FA 73RT3_EFA
615 200 200 500 — 336 3RW4455-6BC34 73ST3_BFA 73ST3_DFA 73ST3_0FA 73ST3_EFA
634 200 250 500 — 373 3RW4456-6BC34 73TT3_BFA 73TT3_DFA 73TT3_0FA 73TT3_EFA
650 200 250 550 — 410 3RW4457-6BC34 73WT3_BFA 73WT3_DFA 73WT3_0FA 73WT3_EFA
880 300 350 700 — 522 3RW4465-6BC34 73YT3_BFA 73YT3_0FA
940 300 350 750 — 559 3RW4466-6BC34 73ZT3_BFA 73ZT3_0FA
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
26 — — 15 20 — 3RW4422-1BC35 73AT35BFA 73AT35DFA 73AT350FA 73AT35EFA 73AT35WFA
32 — — 20 25 — 3RW4423-1BC35 73BT35BFA 73BT35DFA 73BT350FA 73BT35EFA 73BT35WFA
42 — — 25 30 — 3RW4424-1BC35 73CT35BFA 73CT35DFA 73CT350FA 73CT35EFA 73CT35WFA
51 — — 30 40 — 3RW4425-1BC35 73DT35BFA 73DT35DFA 73DT350FA 73DT35EFA 73DT35WFA
68 — — 50 50 — 3RW4426-1BC35 73ET35BFA 73ET35DFA 73ET350FA 73ET35EFA 73ET35WFA
82 — — 60 75 — 3RW4427-1BC35 73FT35BFA 73FT35DFA 73FT350FA 73FT35EFA 73FT35WFA
97 — — 60 75 — 3RW4434-6BC35 73GT35BFA 73GT35DFA 73GT350FA 73GT35EFA 73GT35WFA
113 — — 75 100 — 3RW4435-6BC35 73HT35BFA 73HT35DFA 73HT350FA 73HT35EFA 73HT35WFA
134 — — 75 125 — 3RW4436-6BC35 73JT35BFA 73JT35DFA 73JT350FA 73JT35EFA 73JT35WFA
175 — — 100 150 — 3RW4443-6BC35 73KT35BFA 73KT35DFA 73KT350FA 73KT35EFA 73KT35WFA
195 — — 125 200 — 3RW4444-6BC35 73LT35BFA 73LT35DFA 73LT350FA 73LT35EFA 73LT35WFA
243 — — 150 200 — 3RW4445-6BC35 73MT35BFA 73MT35DFA 73MT350FA 73MT35EFA 73MT35WFA
263 — — 200 250 — 3RW4446-6BC35 73NT35BFA 73NT35DFA 73NT350FA 73NT35EFA 73NT35WFA
326 — — 250 300 — 3RW4447-6BC35 73PT35BFA 73PT35DFA 73PT350FA 73PT35EFA 73PT35WFA
494 — — 400 500 — 3RW4453-6BC35 73QT35BFA 73QT35DFA 73QT350FA 73QT35EFA
551 — — 450 550 — 3RW4454-6BC35 73RT35BFA 73RT35DFA 73RT350FA 73RT35EFA
615 — — 500 600 — 3RW4455-6BC35 73ST35BFA 73ST35DFA 73ST350FA 73ST35EFA
693 — — 500 650 — 3RW4456-6BC35 73TT35BFA 73TT35DFA 73TT350FA 73TT35EFA
780 — — 550 700 — 3RW4457-6BC35 73WT35BFA 73WT35DFA 73WT350FA 73WT35EFA
880 — — 700 850 — 3RW4465-6BC35 73YT35BFA 73YT350FA
940 — — 750 900 — 3RW4466-6BC35 73ZT35BFA 73ZT350FA

Control Products
Enclosed 3RW44
�
b Fans
The 3RW44 is designed for normal
starting applications. b Pumps
b Conveying systems and lifts
3RW44 Enclosed features: � For factory modifications see page 7/43. b Hydraulics
b Available in NEMA 1, 12, 3R, 4, and 4 � For complete derating and application info b Machine tools
stainless steel see page 7/70.
b Compact size b Mills saws
� For dimensional drawings see page 7/95. b Crushers and grinders
b Built-in bypass contactor
b Multiple starting/stopping techniques � For stocked versions see page 7/89. b Mixers
including torque control b HVAC systems
b Fault monitoring and bypass such rock crushers, chippers, screw .
b 3 parameter sets compressors, ect.
b Communication capable via opt. Profibus b Circuit breaker with disconnect
module b Control circuit transformer Class 74 starters are built to UL and CSA

Enclosed Combination with Circuit Breaker Disconnect
Rated MAX HP
26 7.5 7.5 15 — 12 3RW4422-1BC34 74AT3_BFAP 74AT3_DFAP 74AT3_0FAP 74AT3_EFAP 74AT3_WFAP
32 10 10 20 — 15 3RW4423-1BC34 74BT3_BFAP 74BT3_DFAP 74BT3_0FAP 74BT3_EFAP 74BT3_WFAP
42 10 15 25 — 19 3RW4424-1BC34 74CT3_BFAP 74CT3_DFAP 74CT3_0FAP 74CT3_EFAP 74CT3_WFAP
51 15 15 30 — 22 3RW4425-1BC34 74DT3_BFAP 74DT3_DFAP 74DT3_0FAP 74DT3_EFAP 74DT3_WFAP
68 20 25 50 — 37 3RW4426-1BC34 74ET3_BFAP 74ET3_DFAP 74ET3_0FAP 74ET3_EFAP 74ET3_WFAP
82 25 30 60 — 45 3RW4427-1BC34 74FT3_BFAP 74FT3_DFAP 74FT3_0FAP 74FT3_EFAP 74FT3_WFAP
100 30 30 75 — 56 3RW4434-6BC34 74GT3_BFAP 74GT3_DFAP 74GT3_0FAP 74GT3_EFAP 74GT3_WFAP
117 30 40 75 — 56 3RW4435-6BC34 74HT3_BFAP 74HT3_DFAP 74HT3_0FAP 74HT3_EFAP 74HT3_WFAP
145 40 50 100 — 75 3RW4436-6BC34 74JT3_BFAP 74JT3_DFAP 74JT3_0FAP 74JT3_EFAP 74JT3_WFAP
180 60 60 125 — 93 3RW4443-6BC34 74KT3_BFAP 74KT3_DFAP 74KT3_0FAP 74KT3_EFAP
215 60 75 150 — 112 3RW4444-6BC34 74LT3_BFAP 74LT3_DFAP 74LT3_0FAP 74LT3_EFAP
280 75 100 200 — 149 3RW4445-6BC34 74MT3_BFAP 74MT3_DFAP 74MT3_0FAP 74MT3_EFAP
315 100 125 250 — 186 3RW4446-6BC34 74NT3_BFAP 74NT3_DFAP 74NT3_0FAP 74NT3_EFAP
385 125 150 300 — 224 3RW4447-6BC34 74PT3_BFAP 74PT3_DFAP 74PT3_0FAP 74PT3_EFAP
494 150 200 400 — 298 3RW4453-6BC34 74QT3_BFAT 74QT3_DFAT 74QT3_0FAT 74QT3_EFAT
551 150 200 450 — 336 3RW4454-6BC34 74RT3_BFAT 74RT3_DFAT 74RT3_0FAT 74RT3_EFAT
615 200 250 500 — 373 3RW4455-6BC34 74ST3_BFAT 74ST3_DFAT 74ST3_0FAT 74ST3_EFAT
693 200 250 550 — 410 3RW4456-6BC34 74TT3_BFAT 74TT3_DFAT 74TT3_0FAT 74TT3_EFAT
780 200 250 600 — 447 3RW4457-6BC34 74WT3_BFAT 74WT3_DFAT 74WT3_0FAT 74WT3_EFAT
970 350 350 800 — 597 3RW4465-6BC34 74YT3_BFAT 74YT3_0FAT
1076 350 400 900 — 672 3RW4466-6BC34 74ZT3_BFAT 74ZT3_0FAT
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
26 — — 15 20 — 3RW4422-1BC35 74AT35BFAP 74AT35DFAP 74AT350FAP 74AT35EFAP 74AT35WFAP
32 — — 20 25 — 3RW4423-1BC35 74BT35BFAP 74BT35DFAP 74BT350FAP 74BT35EFAP 74BT35WFAP
42 — — 25 30 — 3RW4424-1BC35 74CT35BFAP 74CT35DFAP 74CT350FAP 74CT35EFAP 74CT35WFAP
51 — — 30 40 — 3RW4425-1BC35 74DT35BFAP 74DT35DFAP 74DT350FAP 74DT35EFAP 74DT35WFAP
68 — — 50 50 — 3RW4426-1BC35 74ET35BFAP 74ET35DFAP 74ET350FAP 74ET35EFAP 74ET35WFAP
82 — — 60 75 — 3RW4427-1BC35 74FT35BFAP 74FT35DFAP 74FT350FAP 74FT35EFAP 74FT35WFAP
100 — — 75 75 — 3RW4434-6BC35 74GT35BFAP 74GT35DFAP 74GT350FAP 74GT35EFAP 74GT35WFAP
117 — — 75 100 — 3RW4435-6BC35 74HT35BFAP 74HT35DFAP 74HT350FAP 74HT35EFAP 74HT35WFAP
145 — — 100 125 — 3RW4436-6BC35 74JT35BFAP 74JT35DFAP 74JT350FAP 74JT35EFAP 74JT35WFAP
180 — — 125 150 — 3RW4443-6BC35 74KT35BFAP 74KT35DFAP 74KT350FAP 74KT35EFAP
215 — — 150 200 — 3RW4444-6BC35 74LT35BFAP 74LT35DFAP 74LT350FAP 74LT35EFAP
280 — — 200 250 — 3RW4445-6BC35 74MT35BFAP 74MT35DFAP 74MT350FAP 74MT35EFAP
315 — — 250 300 — 3RW4446-6BC35 74NT35BFAP 74NT35DFAP 74NT350FAP 74NT35EFAP
385 — — 300 400 — 3RW4447-6BC35 74PT35BFAP 74PT35DFAP 74PT350FAP 74PT35EFAP
494 — — 400 500 — 3RW4453-6BC35 74QT35BFAT 74QT35DFAT 74QT350FAT 74QT35EFAT
551 — — 450 600 — 3RW4454-6BC35 74RT35BFAT 74RT35DFAT 74RT350FAT 74RT35EFAT
615 — — 500 700 — 3RW4455-6BC35 74ST35BFAT 74ST35DFAT 74ST350FAT 74ST35EFAT
693 — — 550 750 — 3RW4456-6BC35 74TT35BFAT 74TT35DFAT 74TT350FAT 74TT35EFAT
780 — — 600 850 — 3RW4457-6BC35 74WT35BFAT 74WT35DFAT 74WT350FAT 74WT35EFAT
970 — — 800 1000 — 3RW4465-6BC35 74YT35BFAT 74YT350FAT
1076 — — 900 1100 — 3RW4466-6BC35 74ZT35BFAT 74ZT350FAT

Control Products
Enclosed 3RW44
� The 3RW44 is designed for normal b Fans
b Available in NEMA 1, 12, 3R, 4, and 4 � For complete derating and application info
stainless steel b Machine tools
b Built-in bypass contactor � For dimensional drawings see page 7/95. b Crushers and grinders
b Multiple starting/stopping techniques � b Mixers
including torque control For stocked versions see page 7/89.
b HVAC systems
b Built-in graphical LCD keypad The 3RW44 severe duty rating table should
b Internal self protection b NEMA rated enclosure
be applied for high inertia applications .
b Fault monitoring b 3RW44 Sirius softstarter with built-in OL
such rock crushers, chippers, screw .
b 3 parameter sets and bypass
compressors, ect.
b Communication capable via opt. Profibus b Circuit breaker with disconnect
module Class 74 starters are built to UL and CSA
b Control circuit transformer
b Programmable inputs and outputs standards.
b External keypad available b Reset button

Enclosed Combination with Circuit Breaker Disconnect
Rated MAX HP
26 7.5 7.5 15 — 12 3RW4422-1BC34 74AT3_BFAP 74AT3_DFAP 74AT3_0FAP 74AT3_EFAP 74AT3_WFAP
32 10 10 20 — 15 3RW4423-1BC34 74BT3_BFAP 74BT3_DFAP 74BT3_0FAP 74BT3_EFAP 74BT3_WFAP
42 10 15 25 — 19 3RW4424-1BC34 74CT3_BFAP 74CT3_DFAP 74CT3_0FAP 74CT3_EFAP 74CT3_WFAP
51 15 15 30 — 22 3RW4425-1BC34 74DT3_BFAP 74DT3_DFAP 74DT3_0FAP 74DT3_EFAP 74DT3_WFAP
68 20 25 50 — 37 3RW4426-1BC34 74ET3_BFAP 74ET3_DFAP 74ET3_0FAP 74ET3_EFAP 74ET3_WFAP
82 25 30 60 — 45 3RW4427-1BC34 74FT3_BFAP 74FT3_DFAP 74FT3_0FAP 74FT3_EFAP 74FT3_WFAP
97 30 30 60 — 45 3RW4434-6BC34 74GT3_BFAP 74GT3_DFAP 74GT3_0FAP 74GT3_EFAP 74GT3_WFAP
113 30 40 75 — 56 3RW4435-6BC34 74HT3_BFAP 74HT3_DFAP 74HT3_0FAP 74HT3_EFAP 74HT3_WFAP
134 40 50 75 — 56 3RW4436-6BC34 74JT3_BFAP 74JT3_DFAP 74JT3_0FAP 74JT3_EFAP 74JT3_WFAP
175 50 60 100 — 75 3RW4443-6BC34 74KT3_BFAP 74KT3_DFAP 74KT3_0FAP 74KT3_EFAP
195 60 75 125 — 93 3RW4444-6BC34 74LT3_BFAP 74LT3_DFAP 74LT3_0FAP 74LT3_EFAP
243 75 75 150 — 112 3RW4445-6BC34 74MT3_BFAP 74MT3_DFAP 74MT3_0FAP 74MT3_EFAP
263 75 100 200 — 149 3RW4446-6BC34 74NT3_BFAP 74NT3_DFAP 74NT3_0FAP 74NT3_EFAP
326 100 125 250 — 186 3RW4447-6BC34 74PT3_BFAP 74PT3_DFAP 74PT3_0FAP 74PT3_EFAP
494 150 150 400 — 224 3RW4453-6BC34 74QT3_BFAT 74QT3_DFAT 74QT3_0FAT 74QT3_EFAT
551 150 200 450 — 298 3RW4454-6BC34 74RT3_BFAT 74RT3_DFAT 74RT3_0FAT 74RT3_EFAT
615 200 200 500 — 336 3RW4455-6BC34 74ST3_BFAT 74ST3_DFAT 74ST3_0FAT 74ST3_EFAT
634 200 250 500 — 373 3RW4456-6BC34 74TT3_BFAT 74TT3_DFAT 74TT3_0FAT 74TT3_EFAT
650 200 250 550 — 410 3RW4457-6BC34 74WT3_BFAT 74WT3_DFAT 74WT3_0FAT 74WT3_EFAT
880 300 350 700 — 522 3RW4465-6BC34 74YT3_BFAT 74YT3_0FAT
940 300 350 750 — 559 3RW4466-6BC34 74ZT3_BFAT 74ZT3_0FAT
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
26 — — 15 20 — 3RW4422-1BC35 74AT35BFAP 74AT35DFAP 74AT350FAP 74AT35EFAP 74AT35WFAP
32 — — 20 25 — 3RW4423-1BC35 74BT35BFAP 74BT35DFAP 74BT350FAP 74BT35EFAP 74BT35WFAP
42 — — 25 30 — 3RW4424-1BC35 74CT35BFAP 74CT35DFAP 74CT350FAP 74CT35EFAP 74CT35WFAP
51 — — 30 40 — 3RW4425-1BC35 74DT35BFAP 74DT35DFAP 74DT350FAP 74DT35EFAP 74DT35WFAP
68 — — 50 50 — 3RW4426-1BC35 74ET35BFAP 74ET35DFAP 74ET350FAP 74ET35EFAP 74ET35WFAP
82 — — 60 75 — 3RW4427-1BC35 74FT35BFAP 74FT35DFAP 74FT350FAP 74FT35EFAP 74FT35WFAP
97 — — 60 75 — 3RW4434-6BC35 74GT35BFAP 74GT35DFAP 74GT350FAP 74GT35EFAP 74GT35WFAP
113 — — 75 100 — 3RW4435-6BC35 74HT35BFAP 74HT35DFAP 74HT350FAP 74HT35EFAP 74HT35WFAP
134 — — 75 125 — 3RW4436-6BC35 74JT35BFAP 74JT35DFAP 74JT350FAP 74JT35EFAP 74JT35WFAP
175 — — 100 150 — 3RW4443-6BC35 74KT35BFAP 74KT35DFAP 74KT350FAP 74KT35EFAP
195 — — 125 200 — 3RW4444-6BC35 74LT35BFAP 74LT35DFAP 74LT350FAP 74LT35EFAP
243 — — 150 200 — 3RW4445-6BC35 74MT35BFAP 74MT35DFAP 74MT350FAP 74MT35EFAP
263 — — 200 250 — 3RW4446-6BC35 74NT35BFAP 74NT35DFAP 74NT350FAP 74NT35EFAP
326 — — 250 300 — 3RW4447-6BC35 74PT35BFAP 74PT35DFAP 74PT350FAP 74PT35EFAP
494 — — 400 500 — 3RW4453-6BC35 74QT35BFAT 74QT35DFAT 74QT350FAT 74QT35EFAT
551 — — 450 550 — 3RW4454-6BC35 74RT35BFAT 74RT35DFAT 74RT350FAT 74RT35EFAT
615 — — 500 600 — 3RW4455-6BC35 74ST35BFAT 74ST35DFAT 74ST350FAT 74ST35EFAT
693 — — 500 650 — 3RW4456-6BC35 74TT35BFAT 74TT35DFAT 74TT350FAT 74TT35EFAT
780 — — 550 700 — 3RW4457-6BC35 74WT35BFAT 74WT35DFAT 74WT350FAT 74WT35EFAT
880 — — 700 850 — 3RW4465-6BC35 74YT35BFAT 74YT350FAT
940 — — 750 900 — 3RW4466-6BC35 74ZT35BFAT 74ZT350FAT
a Starter size is dependent on the nameplate Full Load Amps (FLA) rating of the motor.
b Starter selection is dependent on type of application. Im = FLA rating of motor.

Control Products
Enclosed 3RW44
b Built-in bypass contactor � For dimensional drawings see page 7/95. b Crushers and grinders
b Multiple starting/stopping techniques b Mixers
including torque control Class 74 non-combination starters include:
b Internal overload class 5, 10, 15, 20, or 30 b HVAC systems
b Fault monitoring and bypass
b 3 parameter sets b Fusible disconnect compressors, ect.

Enclosed Combination with Fusible Disconnect
Rated MAX HP
a KW Class 10 Light Duty b (350% * Im for 10s)
26 7.5 7.5 15 — 12 3RW4422-1BC34 74AT3_BFAF 74AT3_DFAF 74AT3_0FAF 74AT3_EFAF 74AT3_WFAF
32 10 10 20 — 15 3RW4423-1BC34 74BT3_BFAF 74BT3_DFAF 74BT3_0FAF 74BT3_EFAF 74BT3_WFAF
42 10 15 25 — 19 3RW4424-1BC34 74CT3_BFAF 74CT3_DFAF 74CT3_0FAF 74CT3_EFAF 74CT3_WFAF
51 15 15 30 — 22 3RW4425-1BC34 74DT3_BFAF 74DT3_DFAF 74DT3_0FAF 74DT3_EFAF 74DT3_WFAF
68 20 25 50 — 37 3RW4426-1BC34 74ET3_BFAF 74ET3_DFAF 74ET3_0FAF 74ET3_EFAF 74ET3_WFAF
82 25 30 60 — 45 3RW4427-1BC34 74FT3_BFAF 74FT3_DFAF 74FT3_0FAF 74FT3_EFAF 74FT3_WFAF
100 30 30 75 — 56 3RW4434-6BC34 74GT3_BFAF 74GT3_DFAF 74GT3_0FAF 74GT3_EFAF 74GT3_WFAF
117 30 40 75 — 56 3RW4435-6BC34 74HT3_BFAF 74HT3_DFAF 74HT3_0FAF 74HT3_EFAF 74HT3_WFAF
145 40 50 100 — 75 3RW4436-6BC34 74JT3_BFAF 74JT3_DFAF 74JT3_0FAF 74JT3_EFAF 74JT3_WFAF
180 60 60 125 — 93 3RW4443-6BC34 74KT3_BFAF 74KT3_DFAF 74KT3_0FAF 74KT3_EFAF
215 60 75 150 — 112 3RW4444-6BC34 74LT3_BFAF 74LT3_DFAF 74LT3_0FAF 74LT3_EFAF
280 75 100 200 — 149 3RW4445-6BC34 74MT3_BFAF 74MT3_DFAF 74MT3_0FAF 74MT3_EFAF
315 100 125 250 — 186 3RW4446-6BC34 74NT3_BFAF 74NT3_DFAF 74NT3_0FAF 74NT3_EFAF
385 125 150 300 — 224 3RW4447-6BC34 74PT3_BFAF 74PT3_DFAF 74PT3_0FAF 74PT3_EFAF
494 150 200 400 — 298 3RW4453-6BC34 74QT3_BFAF 74QT3_0FAF
551 150 200 450 — 336 3RW4454-6BC34 74RT3_BFAF 74RT3_0FAF
615 200 250 500 — 373 3RW4455-6BC34 74ST3_BFAF 74ST3_0FAF
693 200 250 550 — 3RW4456-6BC34 74TT3_BFAF 74TT3_0FAF
780 200 250 600 — 447 3RW4457-6BC34 74WT3_BFAF 74WT3_0FAF
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
26 — — 15 20 — 3RW4422-1BC35 74AT35BFAF 74AT35DFAF 74AT350FAF 74AT35EFAF 74AT35WFAF
32 — — 20 25 — 3RW4423-1BC35 74BT35BFAF 74BT35DFAF 74BT350FAF 74BT35EFAF 74BT35WFAF
42 — — 25 30 — 3RW4424-1BC35 74CT35BFAF 74CT35DFAF 74CT350FAF 74CT35EFAF 74CT35WFAF
51 — — 30 40 — 3RW4425-1BC35 74DT35BFAF 74DT35DFAF 74DT350FAF 74DT35EFAF 74DT35WFAF
68 — — 50 50 — 3RW4426-1BC35 74ET35BFAF 74ET35DFAF 74ET350FAF 74ET35EFAF 74ET35WFAF
82 — — 60 75 — 3RW4427-1BC35 74FT35BFAF 74FT35DFAF 74FT350FAF 74FT35EFAF 74FT35WFAF
100 — — 75 75 — 3RW4434-6BC35 74GT35BFAF 74GT35DFAF 74GT350FAF 74GT35EFAF 74GT35WFAF
117 — — 75 100 — 3RW4435-6BC35 74HT35BFAF 74HT35DFAF 74HT350FAF 74HT35EFAF 74HT35WFAF
145 — — 100 125 — 3RW4436-6BC35 74JT35BFAF 74JT35DFAF 74JT350FAF 74JT35EFAF 74JT35WFAF
180 — — 125 150 — 3RW4443-6BC35 74KT35BFAF 74KT35DFAF 74KT350FAF 74KT35EFAF
215 — — 150 200 — 3RW4444-6BC35 74LT35BFAF 74LT35DFAF 74LT350FAF 74LT35EFAF
280 — — 200 250 — 3RW4445-6BC35 74MT35BFAF 74MT35DFAF 74MT350FAF 74MT35EFAF
315 — — 250 300 — 3RW4446-6BC35 74NT35BFAF 74NT35DFAF 74NT350FAF 74NT35EFAF
385 — — 300 400 — 3RW4447-6BC35 74PT35BFAF 74PT35DFAF 74PT350FAF 74PT35EFAF
494 — — 400 500 — 3RW4453-6BC35 74QT35BFAF 74QT350FAF
551 — — 450 600 — 3RW4454-6BC35 74RT35BFAF 74RT350FAF
615 — — 500 700 — 3RW4455-6BC35 74ST35BFAF 74ST350FAF
693 — — 550 750 — 3RW4456-6BC35 74TT35BFAF 74TT350FAF
780 — — 600 850 — 3RW4457-6BC35 74WT35BFAF 74WT350FAF

Control Products
Enclosed 3RW44
b Multiple starting/stopping techniques
� For dimensional drawings see page 7/95.
including torque control b Mixers
Class 74 non-combination starters include:
b Internal overload class 5, 10, 15, 20, or 30 b HVAC systems
b Fault monitoring and bypass
b 3 parameter sets b Fusible disconnect compressors, ect.

Enclosed Combination with Fusible Disconnect
Rated MAX HP
26 7.5 7.5 15 — 12 3RW4422-1BC34 74AT3_BFAF 74AT3_DFAF 74AT3_0FAF 74AT3_EFAF 74AT3_WFAF
32 10 10 20 — 15 3RW4423-1BC34 74BT3_BFAF 74BT3_DFAF 74BT3_0FAF 74BT3_EFAF 74BT3_WFAF
42 10 15 25 — 19 3RW4424-1BC34 74CT3_BFAF 74CT3_DFAF 74CT3_0FAF 74CT3_EFAF 74CT3_WFAF
51 15 15 30 — 22 3RW4425-1BC34 74DT3_BFAF 74DT3_DFAF 74DT3_0FAF 74DT3_EFAF 74DT3_WFAF
68 20 25 50 — 37 3RW4426-1BC34 74ET3_BFAF 74ET3_DFAF 74ET3_0FAF 74ET3_EFAF 74ET3_WFAF
82 25 30 60 — 45 3RW4427-1BC34 74FT3_BFAF 74FT3_DFAF 74FT3_0FAF 74FT3_EFAF 74FT3_WFAF
97 30 30 60 — 45 3RW4434-6BC34 74GT3_BFAF 74GT3_DFAF 74GT3_0FAF 74GT3_EFAF 74GT3_WFAF
113 30 40 75 — 56 3RW4435-6BC34 74HT3_BFAF 74HT3_DFAF 74HT3_0FAF 74HT3_EFAF 74HT3_WFAF
134 40 50 75 — 56 3RW4436-6BC34 74JT3_BFAF 74JT3_DFAF 74JT3_0FAF 74JT3_EFAF 74JT3_WFAF
175 50 60 100 — 75 3RW4443-6BC34 74KT3_BFAF 74KT3_DFAF 74KT3_0FAF 74KT3_EFAF
195 60 75 125 — 93 3RW4444-6BC34 74LT3_BFAF 74LT3_DFAF 74LT3_0FAF 74LT3_EFAF
243 75 75 150 — 112 3RW4445-6BC34 74MT3_BFAF 74MT3_DFAF 74MT3_0FAF 74MT3_EFAF
263 75 100 200 — 149 3RW4446-6BC34 74NT3_BFAF 74NT3_DFAF 74NT3_0FAF 74NT3_EFAF
326 100 125 250 — 186 3RW4447-6BC34 74PT3_BFAF 74PT3_DFAF 74PT3_0FAF 74PT3_EFAF
494 150 150 400 — 298 3RW4453-6BC34 74QT3_BFAF 74QT3_0FAF
551 150 200 450 — 336 3RW4454-6BC34 74RT3_BFAF 74RT3_0FAF
615 200 200 500 — 373 3RW4455-6BC34 74ST3_BFAF 74ST3_0FAF
634 200 250 500 — 373 3RW4456-6BC34 74TT3_BFAF 74TT3_0FAF
650 200 250 550 — 373 3RW4457-6BC34 74WT3_BFAF 74WT3_0FAF
200V 6 6 6 6 6
230V 2 2 2 2 2
380V 3 3 3 3 3
460V 4 4 4 4 4
26 — — 15 20 — 3RW4422-1BC35 74AT35BFAF 74AT35DFAF 74AT350FAF 74AT35EFAF 74AT35WFAF
32 — — 20 25 — 3RW4423-1BC35 74BT35BFAF 74BT35DFAF 74BT350FAF 74BT35EFAF 74BT35WFAF
42 — — 25 30 — 3RW4424-1BC35 74CT35BFAF 74CT35DFAF 74CT350FAF 74CT35EFAF 74CT35WFAF
51 — — 30 40 — 3RW4425-1BC35 74DT35BFAF 74DT35DFAF 74DT350FAF 74DT35EFAF 74DT35WFAF
68 — — 50 50 — 3RW4426-1BC35 74ET35BFAF 74ET35DFAF 74ET350FAF 74ET35EFAF 74ET35WFAF
82 — — 60 75 — 3RW4427-1BC35 74FT35BFAF 74FT35DFAF 74FT350FAF 74FT35EFAF 74FT35WFAF
97 — — 60 75 — 3RW4434-6BC35 74GT35BFAF 74GT35DFAF 74GT350FAF 74GT35EFAF 74GT35WFAF
113 — — 75 100 — 3RW4435-6BC35 74HT35BFAF 74HT35DFAF 74HT350FAF 74HT35EFAF 74HT35WFAF
134 — — 75 125 — 3RW4436-6BC35 74JT35BFAF 74JT35DFAF 74JT350FAF 74JT35EFAF 74JT35WFAF
175 — — 100 150 — 3RW4443-6BC35 74KT35BFAF 74KT35DFAF 74KT350FAF 74KT35EFAF
195 — — 125 200 — 3RW4444-6BC35 74LT35BFAF 74LT35DFAF 74LT350FAF 74LT35EFAF
243 — — 150 200 — 3RW4445-6BC35 74MT35BFAF 74MT35DFAF 74MT350FAF 74MT35EFAF
263 — — 200 250 — 3RW4446-6BC35 74NT35BFAF 74NT35DFAF 74NT350FAF 74NT35EFAF
326 — — 250 300 — 3RW4447-6BC35 74PT35BFAF 74PT35DFAF 74PT350FAF 74PT35EFAF
494 — — 400 500 — 3RW4453-6BC35 74QT35BFAF 74QT350FAF
551 — — 450 550 — 3RW4454-6BC35 74RT35BFAF 74RT350FAF
615 — — 500 600 — 3RW4455-6BC35 74ST35BFAF 74ST350FAF
693 — — 550 650 — 3RW4456-6BC35 74TT35BFAF 74TT350FAF
780 — — 600 700 — 3RW4457-6BC35 74WT35BFAF 74WT350FAF

• Revised • Control Products
07/20/15
Factory Modifications
Modification 3RW Version Enclosed Style Enclosure Mod Suffix List Price
Available modifications in STANDARD enclosure NEMA Type Adder $
Push Buttons
Start/Stop 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL A1
Emergency Stop 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL ES
Selector Switches
Hand-Off-Auto 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL A3
Hand-Off-Auto w/ start pushbutton 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL S3
Off-On 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL A4
Pilot Light
Red 'On' 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL FA
Green 'On’ 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL FB
Red 'Run’ 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL FC
Green 'Run’ 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL FD
Red 'Off’ 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL FJ
Green 'Off’ 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL FK
Amber 'Fault' 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL FL
White 'Control Power On' 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL FW
Red, 'On’ Push-to-Test 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL FS
Green 'On’ Push-to-Test 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL FT
Green 'Off’ Push-to-Test 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL FU
Custom pilot light (state color and nameplate text) 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL FZ
Through the Door Metering
External keypad for 3RW44 3RW44 73/74 1,12 K1
Elapse time meter 3RW40/44 73/74 1,12 (120V) M5
Control Options
Profibus Communication Module (installed-connection cable not supplied) 3RW44 73/74 ALL P1
Profinet Communication Module (installed-connection cable not supplied) 3RW44 73/74 ALL P2
Ground Lug - 1 Conductor 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL L10
Alarm Package (horn, light, relay & push button) 3RW40/44 73/74 1,3R,12 M7
Electronic 8 function timing relay (.05s - 100h)
3RW40/44 73/74 ALL TR
24V/100-127V supplied mounted and unwired
R04
Control Relay supplied mounted
3RW40/44 73/74 ALL R22
and unwired (4 pole max)
R40
Circuit Breaker Shunt Trip (included std in 3RW40 versions) 3RW44 74 ALL L6
Function identification plate w/ marking as specified 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL N1
Service Entrance Labeled 3RW40/44 74 ALL N3
Terminal Block 3 point 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL TC3
Amp Rating (3rd character of catalog number)

3RW Enclosure Mod
Emergency HP Rated Bypass Starter Version Class NEMA Type Suffix List price Adder $
3RW40 A,B C,D,E FGH J — — — — —
73/74 1/12/3R/4 A12
new — — — — —
— — A B,C D E,F — — —
3RW40  73/74 1/12/3R/4 A12
— — — — —
A,B,C  D,E  F,G,H J,K,L M N,P Q R,S,T,W Y,Z a)
3RW44 73 1/12/3R/4 A12
A,B,C D,E F,G,H J,K,L M N,P Q R,S,T,W Y,Z a

3RW44 74 1/12/3R/4 A12
Amp Rating (3rd character of catalog number)

3RW Enclosure Mod
Version Class NEMA Type Suffix List price Adder $
Available Modifications
Requiring the MODIFIED OPTIONS Box Size 3RW40 — — A B,C D E,F — — —
(to be used with the selections ending in GA*) 3RW44 A,B,C D,E F,G,H J,K,L M N,P Q R,S,T,W Y,Z a
Isolation Contactor  3RW40/44 73/74 1/12/3R/4 IC
100 VA Extra CPT Capacity 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL CA
Space Heater (120V separate control) 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL SH
Space Heater w/ T-stat (120V separate control) 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL ST
Lightning Arrestor 3RW40/44 73/74 ALL L
a (A) For sizes 73YT & 73ZT, mods IC & A12 are available and can have both either individually or both  An isolation contactor is included for 3RW40 version with bypass.
at the same time; (B) For sizes 74YT & 74ZT (combination w\CB), mods IC & A12 are only available  An isolation contactor is standard on all 3RW40 new styles
individually (NOT both at the same time); (C) For sizes 74YT & 74ZT (combination w\ fusible disc),  Includes mod box price, change 8th character to G.
mods IC & A12 are NOT available individually or both.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
Overview Function
The SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters reduce the motor voltage The space required by the compact SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starter
through variable phase control and increase it in ramp-like mode is often only about one third of that required by a contactor as-
from a selectable starting voltage up to mains voltage. During sembly for wye-delta starting of comparable rating. This not only
starting, these devices limit the torque as well as the current and saves space in the control cabinet and on the standard mount-
prevent the shocks which arise during direct starts or wye-delta ing rail but also does away completely with the wiring work
starts. In this way, mechanical loads and mains voltage dips can needed for wye-delta starters. This is notable in particular for
be reliably reduced. higher motor ratings which are only rarely available as fully wired
solutions.
Soft starting reduces the stress on the connected equipment
and results in lower wear and therefore longer periods of trouble- At the same time the number of cables from the starter to the
free production. The selectable start value means that the soft motor is reduced from six to three. Compact dimensions, short
starters can be adjusted individually to the requirements of the start-up times, easy wiring and fast commissioning make them-
application in question and unlike wye-delta starters are not selves felt as clear-cut cost advantages.
restricted to two-stage starting with fixed voltage ratios.
The bypass contacts of these soft starters are protected during
The SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters are characterized above all by operation by an integrated solid-state arc quenching system.
their small space requirements. Integrated bypass contacts This prevents damage to the bypass contacts in the event of a
mean that no power loss has to be taken into the bargain at the fault, e. g. brief disconnection of the control voltage, mechanical
power semiconductors (thyristors) after the motor has started shocks or life-related component defects on the coil operating
up. This cuts down on heat losses, enabling a more compact mechanism or main contact spring.
design and making external bypass circuits superfluous.
The new series of devices comes with the "polarity balancing"
Various versions of the SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters are available: control method, which is designed to prevent direct current
• Standard version for fixed-speed three-phase motors, sizes components in two-phase controlled soft starters. On two-phase
S00, S0, S2 and S3, with integrated bypass contact system controlled soft starters the current resulting from superimposi-
tion of the two controlled phases flows in the uncontrolled phase.
• Version for fixed-speed three-phase motors in a 22.5 mm This results for physical reasons in an asymmetric distribution of
enclosure without bypass the three phase currents during the motor ramp-up. This phe-
Soft starters rated up to 75Hp (at 460 V) for standard applica- nomenon cannot be influenced, but in most applications it is
tions in three-phase networks are available. Extremely small non-critical.
sizes, low power losses and simple commissioning are just three Controlling the power semiconductors results not only in this un-
of the many advantages of this soft starter. balance, however, but also in the previously mentioned direct
current components which can cause severe noise generation
on the motor at starting voltages of less than 50 %. The control
method used for these soft starters eliminates these direct cur-
rent components during the ramp-up phase and prevents the
braking torque which they can cause.
It creates a motor ramp-up that is uniform in speed, torque and
current rise, thus permitting a particularly gentle, two-phase
starting of the motors. At the same time the acoustic quality of
the starting operation comes close to the quality of a three-
phase controlled soft starter. This is made possible by the on-
going dynamic harmonizing and balancing of current half-waves
of different polarity during the motor ramp-up. Hence the name
"polarity balancing".
• Soft starting with voltage ramp; the starting voltage setting
range Us is 40 % to 100 % and the ramp time tR can be set
from 0 s to 20 s
• Integrated bypass contact system to minimize power loss
• Setting with two potentiometers
• Simple mounting and commissioning
• Mains voltages at 50/60 Hz, 200 to 480 V
• Two control voltage versions 24 V AC/DC and 110 to
230 V AC/DC
• Wide temperature range from -25 °C to +60 °C
• The built-in auxiliary contact ensures user-friendly control and
possible further processing within the system (for status
graphs see page 7/54)

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
Type 3RW30 1. , 3RW30 2. 3RW30 3., 3RW30 4.

Control electronics
Rated values Terminal
Rated control supply voltage A1/A2 V 24 110 ... 230 24 110 ... 230
• Tolerance % ±20 -15/+10 ±20 -15/+10
Rated control supply current
• STANDBY mA < 50 6 20 < 50
• During pick-up mA < 100 15 < 4000 < 500
• ON mA < 100 15 20 < 50
• Tolerance % ±10
Control input
IN ON/OFF
Power consumption with version
• 24 V DC mA Approx. 12
• 110/230 V AC mA AC: 3/6; DC: 1.5/3
Relay outputs
Output 1 ON 13/14 Operating indication (NO)
Rated operational current A 3 AC-15/AC-14 at 230 V,
A 1 DC-13 at 24 V
Protection against overvoltages Protection by means of varistor through contact
Short-circuit protection 4 A gL/gG operational class;
6 A quick (fuse is not included in scope of supply)
Operating indications LEDs DEVICE STATE/BYPASSED/ DEVICE STATE/BYPASSED/
FAILURE FAILURE
Off Green Off Green Off
Start Green Green flashing Green Green flashing
Bypass Green Green Green Green
Error signals
• 24 V DC: U < 0.75 x Us or U > 1.25 x Us Off Red Off Red
• 110 ... 230 V AC: U < 0.75 x Us or U > 1.15 x Us Off Red Off Red
Electrical overloading of bypass Yellow Red -- --
(reset by removing IN command)
Missing mains voltage, phase failure, missing load Green Red Green Red
Device fault Red Red Red Red
Type 3RW30 1. ... 3RW30 4.

Factory default
Control times and parameters
Control times
Closing time (with connected control voltage) ms < 50
Closing time (automatic/mains contactor mode) ms < 300
Mains failure bridging time
Control supply voltage ms 50
Mains failure response time1)
Load circuit ms 500
Starting parameters
• Starting time s 0 ... 20 7.5
• Starting voltage % 40 ... 100 40
Start-up detection No
Operating mode output 13/14
Rising edge at Start command ON
Falling edge at Off command
1)
Mains failure detection only in standby state, not during operation.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
Type 3RW30 1.-.BB.4 ... 3RW30 4.-.BB.4

Power electronics
Rated operational voltage V AC 200 ... 480
Tolerance % -15/+10
Tolerance % ±10
Uninterrupted duty at 40 °C (% of Ie) % 115
Minimum load (% of Ie) % 10 (at least 2 A)
Maximum cable length between soft starter and motor m 300
Permissible installation height m 5000
(derating from 1000, see characteristic curves); higher on request
Permissible mounting position 10° 10°
(auxiliary fan not available) 10° 10°
NSB0_01897
Operation °C -25 ... +60; (derating from +40)
Storage °C -40 ... +80
Degree of protection IP20 for 3RW30 1. and 3RW30 2.;
IP00 for 3RW30 3. and 3RW30 4.
Type 3RW30 13 3RW30 14 3RW30 16 3RW30 17 3RW30 18

Power electronics 40 °C/50 °C/60 °C
Load rating with rated operational current Ie
• Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA1), for individual mounting at 40/50/60 °C, A 3.6/3.3/3 6.5/6/5.5 9/8/7 12.5/12/11 17.6/17/14
AC-53a
Power loss
• In operation after completed starting with uninterrupted rated opera- W 0.25 0.5 1 2 4
tional current (40 °C) approx.
• During starting with 300 % IM (40 °C) W 6 13 20 20 29
Permissible rated motor current and starts per hour
for normal starting (Class 10)
- Rated motor current IM2), starting time 10 s A 3.6/3.3/3 6.5/6/5.5 9/8/7 12.5/12/11 17.6/17/14
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 200/150/70 87/60/50 50 85/70/60 62/46/60
- Rated motor current IM2), starting time 20 s A 3.6/3.3/3 6.5/6/5.5 9/8/7 12.5/12/11 17.6/17/14
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 150/100/50 64/46/28 35 62/47/37 45/32/43
1) 3)
Measurement at 60 °C according to UL/CSA not required. For intermittent duty S4 with ON period = 30 %, Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone
2)
With 300 % IM. installation vertical. The quoted switching frequencies do not apply for
automatic mode.
Type 3RW30 26 3RW30 27 3RW30 28

• Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA1), for individual mounting at 40/50/60 °C, A 25.3/23/21 32.2/29/26 38/34/31
AC-53a
Power loss
• In operation after completed starting with uninterrupted rated opera- W 8 13 19
• During starting with 300 % IM (40 °C) W 47 55 64
- Rated motor current IM2), starting time 10 s A 25/23/21 32/29/26 38/34/31
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 23 23 19
1)
Measurement at 60 °C according to UL/CSA not required.
2)
With 300 % IM.
3)
For intermittent duty S4 with ON period = 30 %, Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone
installation vertical. The quoted switching frequencies do not apply for
automatic mode.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
Type 3RW30 36 3RW30 37 3RW30 38 3RW30 46 3RW30 47

• Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA1), for individual mounting at 40/50/60 °C, A 45/42/39 63/58/53 72/63/60 80/73/66 106/98/90
AC-53a
Power loss
• In operation after completed starting with uninterrupted rated opera- W 6 12 15 12 21
- Rated motor current IM2), starting time 10 s A 45/42/39 63/58/53 72/63/60 80/73/66 106/98/90
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 38 23 22 22 15
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 26 15 15 15 10
1)
2)
With 300 % IM.
3)
automatic mode.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
Soft starters Type 3RW30 1. 3RW30 2. 3RW30 3. 3RW30 4.

Screw terminals Main conductors
Front clamping point • Solid mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5); 2 x (1.5 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
connected 2 x (2.5 ... 6) acc. 2 x (2.5 ... 6) acc.
to IEC 60947 to IEC 60947;
max. 1 x 10
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5); 1 x (0.75 ... 25) 1 x (2.5 ... 35)
2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
• Stranded mm2 -- -- 1 x (0.75 ... 35) 1 x (4 ... 70)
• AWG cables
- Solid AWG 2 x (16 ... 12) 2 x (16 ... 12)
- Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (14 ... 10) 1 x (18 ... 2) 1 x (10 ... 2/0)
- Stranded AWG 1x8 1x8 -- --
Rear clamping point • Solid mm2 -- -- 2 x (1.5 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
connected • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 -- -- 1 x (1.5 ... 25) 1 x (2.5 ... 50)
• Stranded mm2 -- -- 1 x (1.5 ... 35) 1 x (10 ... 70)
• AWG cables
- Solid or stranded AWG -- -- 1 x (16 ... 2) 1 x (10 ... 2/0)
Both clamping points • Solid mm2 -- -- 2 x (1.5 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
connected • Stranded mm2 -- -- 2 x (1.5 ... 25) 2 x (10 ... 50)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 -- -- 2 x (1.5 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 35)
• AWG cables
- Solid or stranded AWG -- -- 2 x (16 ... 2) 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
• Tightening torque NM 2 ... 2.5 2 ... 2.5 4.5 6.5

lb.in 18 ... 22 18 ... 22 40 58
Tools PZ 2 PZ 2 PZ 2 Allen screw 4 mm
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
(IP00 terminal (IP00 terminal
compartment) compartment)
Spring-type terminals Main conductors
• Solid mm2 1 ... 4 1 ... 10 -- --
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 ... 2.5 1 ... 6, end -- --
sleeves without
plastic collar
• AWG cables
- Solid or stranded (finely stranded) AWG 16 ... 14 16 ... 10 -- --
- Stranded AWG 16 ... 12 1x8 -- --
Tools DIN ISO 2380- DIN ISO 2380- -- --
1A0; 5 x 3 1A0; 5 x 3
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 -- --
Busbar connections Main conductors
• With cable lug acc. to DIN 46234 or max.
20 mm wide
- Stranded mm2 -- -- -- 2 x (10 ... 70)
- Finely stranded mm2 -- -- -- 2 x (10 ... 50)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG -- -- -- 2 x (7 ... 1/0)
Soft starters Type 3RW30 1. ... 3RW30 4.

Auxiliary conductors (1 or 2 conductors can be connected):
Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables
- Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 14)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)
• Terminal screws
- Tightening torque NM 0.8 ... 1.2
lb.in 7 ... 10.3
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
Type 3RW30 03
Control electronics
Rated values
Rated control supply voltage V 24 ... 230 AC/DC
• Tolerance % ± 10
Rated control supply current mA 25 ... 4
Rated frequency at AC Hz 50/60
• Tolerance % ± 10
Starting time s 0.1 ... 20 (adjustable)
Starting voltage % 40 ... 100 (adjustable)
Ramp-down time s 0 ... 20 (adjustable)
Power electronics
Rated operational voltage V AC 200 ... 400
Tolerance % ± 10
Tolerance % ±10
Uninterrupted duty (% of Ie) % 100
Minimum load1) (% of Ie); at 40 °C % 9
Maximum conductor length between soft starter and motor m 1002)
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP20 (IP00 terminal compartment)
Permissible mounting position 10° 10°
10° 10°
NSB0_01897
Storage °C -40 ... +80
• Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA1), for individual mounting, AC-53a
- At 40 °C A 3
- At 50 °C A 2.6
- At 60 °C A 2.2
• Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA1), for butt-mounting, AC-53a
- At 40 °C A 2.6
- At 50 °C A 2.2
- At 60 °C A 1.8
Power loss
• In operation after completed starting with uninterrupted rated opera- W 6.5
• At utilization of max. switching frequency W 3
Permissible starts per hour
• For intermittent duty S4, Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone installation vertical 1/h 1500
• ON period = 70 % % Ie/s 300/0.2
Screw terminals • Main conductors
(1 or 2 conductors connectable) - Solid mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 4);
For standard screwdriver 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
size 2 and Pozidriv 2 - Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5);
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
- Stranded mm² --
- AWG cables, AWG 2 x (20 ... 14)
solid or stranded
- Terminal screws M3, PZ2
lb.in 7.1 ... 8.9
• Auxiliary conductors
- Solid mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 4);
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
- AWG cables, AWG 2 x (20 ... 14)
solid or stranded
- Terminal screws M3, PZ2
lb.in 7 ... 8.9
Spring-type terminals Main and auxiliary conductors
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1)
• AWG cables, mm2 2 x (24 ... 16)
solid or stranded
1) The rated motor current (specified on the motor's name plate) should at 2) If this value is exceeded, problems with line capacities may arise, which
least amount to the specified percentage of the SIRIUS soft starter unit's can result in false firing.
rated operational current Ie.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
Standard Parameters
Electromagnetic compatibility Acc. to EN 60947-4-2
EMC interference immunity
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 ±4 kV contact discharge, ±8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields EN 61000-4-3 Frequency range: 80 ... 2000 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz
Degree of severity 3: 10 V/m
Conducted RF interference EN 61000-4-6 Frequency range: 150 kHz ... 80 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz
Interference 10 V
RF voltages and RF currents on cables
• Burst EN 61000-4-4 ±2 kV/5 kHz
• Surge EN 61000-4-5 ±1 kV line to line
±2 kV line to earth
EMC interference emission
EMC interference field strength EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 30 ... 1000 MHz,
limit value of Class B for 3RW30 2.; 24 V AC/DC
Radio interference voltage EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 0.15 ... 30 MHz,
limit value of Class B for 3RW30 2.; 24 V AC/DC
Radio interference suppression filters
Degree of noise suppression A (industrial applications) Not required
Degree of noise suppression B (applications for residential areas)
Control voltage
• 230 V AC/DC Not available1)
• 24 V AC/DC Not required for 3RW30 1. and 3RW30 2.;
required for 3RW30 3. and 3RW30 4. (see Table)
1) Degree of noise suppression B cannot be obtained through the use of
filters as the strength of the electromagnetic field is not attenuated by the
filter.
Soft starter type Rated current Recommended filters1)

Soft starters Voltage range 200 ... 480 V
Filter type Rated current filters Terminals
A A mm2
3RW30 36 45 4EF1512-1AA10 50 16
3RW30 37 63 4EF1512-2AA10 66 25
3RW30 38 72 4EF1512-3AA10 90 25
3RW30 46 80 4EF1512-3AA10 90 25
3RW30 47 106 4EF1512-4AA10 120 50
1) The radio interference suppression filter is used to remove the conducted degree of noise suppression B. Filter selection applies under standard
interference from the main circuit. The field-related emissions comply with conditions: 10 starts per hour, start time 4 s at 300 % Ie.
Type Number Max. Fuse Class K5, RK5, RK1 Max. Fuse Class J Short Voltage Circuit Voltage
Standard short circuit ratings 3RW30
3RW30 13 -- 15 A 5 kA 480 V
3RW30 14 -- 25 A 5 kA 480 V
3RW30 16 -- 36 A 5 kA 480 V
3RW30 17 -- 50 A 5 kA 480 V
3RW30 18 -- 60 A 5 kA 480 V
3RW30 26 100 A 100 A 5 kA 480 V
3RW30 27 125 A 125 A 5 kA 480 V
3RW30 28 125 A 125 A 5 kA 480 V
3RW30 36 175 A 175 A 10 kA 480 V
3RW30 37 250 A 250 A 10 kA 480 V
3RW30 38 250 A 250 A 10 kA 480 V
3RW30 46 -- 300 A 10 kA 480 V
3RW30 47 -- 350 A 10 kA 480 V
High capacity short circuit ratings 3RW30
3RW30 13 -- 15 A 42 kA 480 V
3RW30 14 -- 25 A 42 kA 480 V
3RW30 16 -- 25 A 42 kA 480 V
3RW30 17 -- 25 A 42 kA 480 V
3RW30 18 -- 25 A 42 kA 480 V
3RW30 26 60 A 100 A 42 kA 480 V
3RW30 27 60 A 125 A 42 kA 480 V
3RW30 28 60 A 125 A 42 kA 480 V
3RW30 36 100 A 175 A 30 kA 480 V
3RW30 37 100 A 200 A 30 kA 480 V
3RW30 38 100 A 200 A 30 kA 480 V
3RW30 46 110 A 200 A 42 kA 480 V
3RW30 47 110 A 200 A 42 kA 480 V
For solid-state motor controller, Type 3RW301: Applicable in an enclosure with minimum overall dimensions of 200 by 120 by 200 mm.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
Fuse assignment
The type of coordination to which the motor feeder with soft If type of coordination "2" is to be fulfilled, semiconductor fuses
starter is mounted depends on the application-specific require- must be fitted in the motor feeder.
ments. Normally, fuseless mounting (combination of motor
starter protector/circuit breaker and soft starter) is sufficient.
Fused version (line protection only)

F1
Q21
Q11
NSB0_01936
M
3~
Soft starters Line protection, maximum Line contactors

ToC
1 Rated Rated current Size (optional)
current
Q11 F1 Q21
Type A Type A
1)
Type of coordination "1" : Iq = 65 kA at 480 V 10 %
3RW30 032) 3 3NA3 8053) 20 000 3RT10 15
3RW30 13 3.6 3NA3 803-6 10 000 3RT10 15
3RW30 14 6.5 3NA3 805-6 16 000 3RT10 15
3RW30 16 9 3NA3 807-6 20 000 3RT10 16
3RW30 17 12.5 3NA3 810-6 25 000 3RT10 24
3RW30 18 17.6 3NA3 814-6 35 000 3RT10 26
3RW30 26 25 3NA3 822-6 63 00 3RT10 26
3RW30 27 32 3NA3 824-6 80 00 3RT10 34
3RW30 28 38 3NA3 824-6 80 00 3RT10 35
3RW30 36 45 3NA3 130-6 100 1 3RT10 36
3RW30 37 63 3NA3 132-6 125 1 3RT10 44
3RW30 38 72 3NA3 132-6 125 1 3RT10 45
3RW30 46 80 3NA3 136-6 160 1 3RT10 45
3RW30 47 106 3NA3 136-6 160 1 3RT10 46
1) 2)
The types of coordination are explained in more detail under "3RA1 Fuse- Iq = 50 kA at 400 V.
less Load Feeders". 3)
3NA3 805-1 (LV HRC00), 5SB2 61 (DIAZED), 5SE2 201-6 (NEOZED)
The type of coordination "1" refers only to soft starters in combination with
the stipulated protective device (motor starter protector/circuit
breaker/fuse), not to any additional components in the feeder.
Fused version with 3NE1 SITOR fuses (semiconductor and line protection)
For matching fuse bases see Catalog LV 1 under "SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices for
F’1
Power Distribution" ––> "Switch Disconnectors", and Catalog ET B1 under "BETA Protecting" ––>
Q21
Q11
"SITOR Semiconductor Fuses" or go to
www.siemens.com/sitor ––>"Products" ––>"BETA Protecting"––>"SITOR"
NSB0_01937
M
3~
Soft starters All-range fuses Line contactors

ToC
current
Q11 F'1 Q21
Type A Type A
Type of coordination "2"1): Iq = 65 kA at 480 V 10 %
3RW30 032) 3 3NE1 813-03) 16 000 3RT10 15
3RW30 13 3.6 3NE1 813-0 16 000 3RT10 15
3RW30 14 6.5 3NE1 813-0 16 000 3RT10 15
3RW30 16 9 3NE1 813-0 16 000 3RT10 16
3RW30 17 12.5 3NE1 813-0 16 000 3RT10 24
3RW30 18 17.6 3NE1 814-0 20 000 3RT10 26
3RW30 26 25 3NE1 803-0 35 000 3RT10 26
3RW30 27 32 3NE1 020-2 80 00 3RT10 34
3RW30 28 38 3NE1 020-2 80 00 3RT10 35
3RW30 36 45 3NE1 020-2 80 00 3RT10 36
3RW30 37 63 3NE1 820-0 80 000 3RT10 44
3RW30 38 72 3NE1 820-0 80 000 3RT10 45
3RW30 46 80 3NE1 021-0 100 00 3RT10 45
3RW30 47 106 3NE1 022-0 125 00 3RT10 46
1) The types of coordination are explained in more detail under "3RA1 Fuse-
less Load Feeders".
The type of coordination "2" refers only to soft starters in combination with ToC
1
Type of coordination "1"
breaker/fuse), not to any additional components in the feeder. ToC Type of coordination "2"
2) 2
Iq = 50 kA at 400 V.
3)
No SITOR fuse required! The types of coordination are explained in more detail
Alternatively: 3NA3 803 (LV HRC00), 5SB2 21 (DIAZED), under "3RA1 Fuseless Load Feeders".
5SE2 206 (NEOZED).
These types of coordination are indicated in the
Technical specifications by gray backgrounds.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
Fused version with 3NE3 SITOR fuses (semiconductor protection by fuse, line and overload protection by motor starter protector;
alternatively, installation with contactor and overload relay possible)
For matching fuse bases see Catalog LV 1 under "SENTRON
Switching and Protection Devices for Power Distribution" ––>
F3 F1 "Switch Disconnectors", and Catalog ET B1 under "BETA
Protecting" ––> "SITOR Semiconductor Fuses" or go to
Q21
Q1 www.siemens.com/sitor ––>"Products" ––>"BETA Protecting"
F3 ––>"SITOR"
Q11
Q11
NSB0_01938
NSB0_01939
M M
3~ 3~
Soft starters Semiconductor fuses, minimum Semiconductor fuses, maximum Semiconductor fuses, minimum
ToC
2 Rated current Rated current Size Rated current Size Rated current Size
Q11 F3 F3 F3
Type A Type A Type A Type A
3RW30 032) 3 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RW30 13 3.6 -- -- -- -- -- -- 3NE4 101 32 0
3RW30 14 6.5 -- -- -- -- -- -- 3NE4 101 32 0
3RW30 16 9 -- -- -- -- -- -- 3NE4 101 32 0
3RW30 17 12.5 -- -- -- -- -- -- 3NE4 101 32 0
3RW30 18 17.6 -- -- -- 3NE3 221 100 1 3NE4 101 32 0
3RW30 26 25 -- -- -- 3NE3 221 100 1 3NE4 102 40 0
3RW30 27 32 -- -- -- 3NE3 222 125 1 3NE4 118 63 0
3RW30 28 38 -- -- -- 3NE3 222 125 1 3NE4 118 63 0
3RW30 36 45 -- -- -- 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE4 120 80 0
3RW30 37 63 -- -- -- 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE4 121 100 0
3RW30 38 72 3NE3 221 100 1 3NE3 227 250 1 -- -- --
3RW30 46 80 3NE3 222 125 1 3NE3 225 200 1 -- -- --
3RW30 47 106 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE3 231 350 1 -- -- --
Soft starters Semiconductor fuses max. Semiconductor fuses min. Semiconductor fuses max. Cylindrical fuses
ToC
2 Rated current Rated current Size Rated current Size Rated current Size Rated current
Q11 F3 F3 F3 F3
Type A Type A Type A Type A Type A
3RW30 032) 3 -- -- -- 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NC1 010 10
3RW30 13 3.6 -- -- -- 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NC2 220 20
3RW30 14 6.5 -- -- -- 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NC2 220 20
3RW30 16 9 -- -- -- 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NC2 220 20
3RW30 17 12.5 -- -- -- 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NE8 018-1 63 00 3NC2 250 50
3RW30 18 17.6 -- -- -- 3NE8 003-1 35 00 3NE8 021-1 100 00 3NC2 263 63
3RW30 26 25 3NE4 117 50 0 3NE8 017-1 50 00 3NE8 021-1 100 00 3NC2 263 63
3RW30 27 32 3NE4 118 63 0 3NE8 018-1 63 00 3NE8 022-1 125 00 3NC2 280 80
3RW30 28 38 3NE4 118 63 0 3NE8 020-1 80 00 3NE8 022-1 125 00 3NC2 280 80
3RW30 36 45 3NE4 120 80 0 3NE8 020-1 80 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 3NC2 280 80
3RW30 37 63 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE8 021-1 100 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 -- --
3RW30 38 72 -- -- -- 3NE8 022-1 125 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 -- --
3RW30 46 80 -- -- -- 3NE8 022-1 125 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 -- --
3RW30 47 106 -- -- -- 3NE8 024-1 160 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 -- --
Soft starters Line contactors Motor starter protectors Line protection, maximum
ToC
2 Rated current (optional) 400 V +10 % Rated current Rated current Size
Q11 Q21 Q1 F1
Type A Type A Type A
3RW30 032) 3 3RT10 15 3RV10 11-1EA10 4 3NA3 8053) 20 000
3RW30 13 3.6 3RT10 15 3RV10 21-1FA10 5 3NA3 803-6 10 000
3RW30 14 6.5 3RT10 15 3RV10 21-1HA10 8 3NA3 805-6 16 000
3RW30 16 9 3RT10 16 3RV10 21-1JA10 10 3NA3 807-6 20 000
3RW30 17 12.5 3RT10 24 3RV10 21-1KA10 12.5 3NA3 810-6 25 000
3RW30 18 17.6 3RT10 26 3RV10 21-1BA10 20 3NA3 814-6 35 000
3RW30 26 25 3RT10 26 3RV10 31-4DA10 25 3NA3 822-6 63 00
3RW30 27 32 3RT10 34 3RV10 31-4EA10 32 3NA3 824-6 80 00
3RW30 28 38 3RT10 35 3RV10 31-4FA10 40 3NA3 824-6 80 00
3RW30 36 45 3RT10 36 3RV10 31-4GA10 45 3NA3 130-6 100 1
3RW30 37 63 3RT10 44 3RV10 41-4JA10 63 3NA3 132-6 125 1
3RW30 38 72 3RT10 45 3RV10 41-4KA10 75 3NA3 132-6 125 1
3RW30 46 80 3RT10 45 3RV10 41-4LA10 90 3NA3 136-6 160 1
3RW30 47 106 3RT10 46 3RV10 41-4MA10 100 3NA3 136-6 160 1
1)
The types of coordination are explained under "3RA1 Fuseless Load breaker/fuse), not to any additional components in the feeder.
Feeders". The type of coordination "2" refers only to soft starters in combi- 2) Iq = 50 kA at 400 V.
nation with the stipulated protective device (motor starter protector/circuit 3)
3NA3 805-1 (LV HRC00), 5SB2 61 (DIAZED).

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
Permissible installation height
105
NSB0_01704
100
Operational rated current I e in %
95
90
85
80
75
70
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
Mounting height in m
At an installation height above 2000 m, the max. permissible operational

voltage is reduced to 460 V.
More information
The soft starter rating can be selected to be as high as the rating of the motor used
Starting parameters
limiting
- Starting time s 10 10 20 20 10 10
Note:
and must be optimized during commissioning.
Assistance.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW30
Configuration Status graphs

The 3RW solid-state motor controllers are designed for easy
starting conditions. In the event of deviating conditions or in-
creased switching frequency, it may be necessary to choose a U
larger device. For accurate dimensioning, use the Win-Soft UN
Starter selection and simulation program.
If necessary, an overload relay for heavy starting must be se- US
lected where long starting times are involved. PTC sensors are
recommended. t R on t
power compensation equipment). In addition, neither static sys-
tems for reactive-power compensation nor dynamic PFC (Power
Factor Correction) must be operated in parallel during starting ON 13/14
NSB0_01941
starter.
t R on t
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses, controls and
overload relays) should be dimensioned for direct starting, fol-
lowing the local short-circuit conditions. Fuses, controls and Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program
overload relays must be ordered separately. Please observe the
With this software, you can simulate and select all Siemens soft
maximum switching frequencies specified in the technical
starters, taking into account various parameters such as mains
specifications.
Note: requirements.
When induction motors are switched on, voltage drops occur as
a rule on starters of all types (direct starters, wye-delta starters, The software is a valuable tool, which makes complicated,
soft starters). The infeed transformer must always be dimen- lengthy manual calculations for determining the required soft
sioned such that the voltage dip when starting the motor remains starters superfluous.
within the permissible tolerance. If the infeed transformer is di- The Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program can be
mensioned with only a small margin, it is best for the control volt- downloaded from:
age to be supplied from a separate circuit (independently of the www.usa.siemens.com/softstarters > Software
soft starter. More information can be found on the Internet at:
Schematic circuit diagram
L1 L2 L3
NSB0_01940
T1 T2 T3
A bypass contact system is already integrated in the 3RW30 soft

starter and therefore does not have to be ordered separately.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
The starting current of particularly powerful operating mecha-

Overview nisms can place an unjustifiable load on the local supply system.
SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters have all the same advantages as the Soft starters reduce this starting current by means of their volt-
3RW30 soft starters. age ramp. Thanks to the adjustable current limiting, the
The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters are characterized above all by SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter takes even more pressure off the sup-
their small space requirements. Integrated bypass contacts ply system. It leaves the set start ramp during the ramp-up – the
mean that no power loss has to be taken into the bargain at the ramp gradient is fixed by the starting voltage and the ramp time
power semiconductors (thyristors) after the motor has started – as soon as the selected current limit is reached. From this mo-
up. This cuts down on heat losses, enabling a more compact de- ment the voltage of the soft starter is controlled so that the cur-
sign and making external bypass circuits superfluous. rent supplied to the motor remains constant. This process is
ended either by completion of the motor ramp-up or by tripping
At the same time this soft starter comes with additional inte- by the intrinsic device protection or the motor overload protec-
grated functions such as adjustable current limiting, motor over- tion. As the result of this function the actual motor ramp-up can
load and intrinsic device protection, and optional thermistor mo- well take longer than the ramp time selected on the soft starter.
tor protection. The higher the motor rating, the more important
these functions because they make it unnecessary to purchase Thanks to the integrated motor overload protection
and install protection equipment such as overload relays. according to IEC 60947-4-2 there is no need of an additional
overload relay on the new soft starters. The rated motor current,
Internal intrinsic device protection prevents the thermal over-
the setting of the overload tripping time (Class times) and the re-
loading of the thyristors and the power section defects this can
set of the motor overload protection function can be adjusted
cause. As an option the thyristors can also be protected by
easily and quickly. Using a 4-step rotary potentiometer it is pos-
semiconductor fuses from short-circuiting.
sible to set different overload tripping times on the soft starter. In
Thanks to integrated status monitoring and fault monitoring, this addition to Class 10, 15 and 20 it is also possible to switch off the
compact soft starter offers many different diagnostics options. motor overload protection if a different motor management con-
Up to four LEDs and relay outputs permit differentiated monitor- trol device is to be used for this function, e. g. with connection to
ing and diagnostics of the operating mechanism by indicating PROFIBUS.
the operating state as well as for example mains or phase failure,
missing load, non-permissible tripping time/class setting, ther- Device versions with thermistor motor protection evaluation are
mal overloading or device faults. available up to a rating of 55 kW (at 400 V). A "Thermoclick" mea-
suring probe can be connected directly, as can a PTC of type A.
Soft starters rated up to 300 Hp (at 460 V) for standard applica- Thermal overloading of the motor, open circuits and short-cir-
tions in three-phase networks are available. Extremely small cuits in the sensor circuit all result in the direct disconnection of
sizes, low power losses and simple start-up are just three of the the soft starter. And if ever the soft starter trips, various reset op-
many advantages of the SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters. tions are available the same as with intrinsic device protection
"Increased safety" type of protection EEx e according to and motor load protection: manually with the reset button, auto-
ATEXdirective 94/9/EC matically or remotely through brief disconnection of the control
voltage.
The 3RW40 soft starter sizes S0 to S12 are suitable for the start-
ing of explosion-proof motors with "increased safety" type of pro- The new series of devices comes with the "polarity balancing"
tection EEx e. control method, which is designed to prevent direct current
See "Appendix" –> "Standards and approvals" –> "Type over- components in two-phase controlled soft starters. On two-phase
view of approved devices for potentially explosive areas (ATEX controlled soft starters the current resulting from superimposi-
explosion protection)". tion of the two controlled phases flows in the uncontrolled phase.
This results for physical reasons in an asymmetric distribution of
the three phase currents during the motor ramp-up. This phe-
Function nomenon cannot be influenced, but in most applications it is
The space required by the compact SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter non-critical.
is often only about one third of that required by a contactor as- Controlling the power semiconductors results not only in this un-
sembly for wye-delta starting of comparable rating. This not only balance, however, but also in the previously mentioned direct
saves space in the control cabinet and on the standard mount- current components which can cause severe noise generation
ing rail but also does away completely with the wiring work on the motor at starting voltages of less than 50 %.
needed for wye-delta starters. This is notable in particular for
higher motor ratings which are only rarely available as fully wired The control method used for these soft starters eliminates these
solutions. direct current components during the ramp-up phase and pre-
vents the braking torque which they can cause. It creates a mo-
At the same time the number of cables from the starter to the motor ramp-up that is uniform in speed, torque and current rise,
tor is reduced from six to three. Compact dimensions, short thus permitting a particularly gentle, two-phase starting of the
start-up times, easy wiring and fast commissioning make them- motors. At the same time the acoustic quality of the starting op-
selves felt as clear-cut cost advantages. eration comes close to the quality of a three-phase controlled
The bypass contacts of these soft starters are protected during soft starter. This is made possible by the on-going dynamic har-
operation by an integrated solid-state arc quenching system. monizing and balancing of current half-waves of different polar-
This prevents damage to the bypass contacts in the event of a ity during the motor ramp-up. Hence the name "polarity
fault, e. g. brief disconnection of the control voltage, mechanical balancing".
shocks or life-related component defects on the coil operating
mechanism or main contact spring.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
As an option the thyristors can also be protected by SITOR semi- • Integrated bypass contact system to minimize power loss
conductor fuses from short-circuiting so that the soft starter is • Setting with potentiometers
still functional after a short-circuit (type of coordination 2). Three
LEDs are used to indicate the operating state as well as possible • Simple mounting and commissioning
errors, e. g. non-permissible tripping time (CLASS setting), • Integrated status monitoring and fault monitoring
mains or phase failure, missing load, thermal overloading or de- • Mains voltages 50/60 Hz, 200 to 600 V
vice faults.
• Various control voltage versions
• Soft starting with voltage ramp; the starting voltage setting - Sizes S0 to S3:
range Us is 40 to 100 % and the ramp time tR can be set from 24 V AC/DC and
0 to 20 s.3) 110 to 230 V AC/DC
• Smooth ramp-down with voltage ramp; the running down time - Sizes S6 to S12:
toff can be set between 0 s to 20 s.3) 115 V AC and 230 V AC.
• Solid-state motor overload and intrinsic device protection Control by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct con-
trol by means of PLC are possible.
• Optional thermistor motor protection (up to size S3)
• Wide temperature range from -25 to +60 °C
• Remote reset (integrated up to size S3, optional for size S6 and
larger) • Built-in auxiliary contacts ensure user-friendly control and pos-
sible further processing within the system (for status graphs
• Adjustable current limiting see page 7/69)
Type 3RW40 2. 3RW40 3., 3RW40 4.
Control electronics
Rated control supply voltage A1/A2 V 24 110 ... 230 24 110 ... 230
• Tolerance % ±20 -15/+10 ±20 -15/+10
Rated control supply current
• STANDBY mA < 150 < 50 < 200 < 50
• During pick-up mA < 200 < 100 < 5000 < 1500
• ON without fan mA < 250 < 50 < 200 < 50
• ON with fan mA < 300 < 70 < 250 < 70
• Tolerance % ±10
Control inputs
IN ON/OFF
Rated operational current
• AC mA Approx. 12 3/6 Approx. 12 3/6
• DC mA Approx. 12 1.5/3 Approx. 12 1.5/3
Relay outputs
Output 1 ON/RUN mode1) 13/14 Operating indication (NO)
Output 2 BYPASSED 23/24 Bypass indication (NO)
Output 3 OVERLOAD/FAILURE 95/96/98 Overload/error indication (NC/NO)
A 1 DC-13 at 24 V
1)
Factory default: ON mode.
Type 3RW40 5. 3RW40 7 .

Control electronics
Rated control supply voltage A1/A2 V AC 115 230 115 230
• Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10
Rated control supply current STANDBY mA 15 15
Rated control supply current ON1) mA 440 200 660 360
Rated frequency Hz 50/60 50/60
• Tolerance % ±10 ±10
Control inputs
IN ON/OFF
Rated operational current mA Approx. 10 acc. to DIN 19240
Rated operational voltage V DC 24 from internal supply dc+ or
external DC supply (acc. to DIN 19240) through terminals and IN
Relay outputs
Output 1 ON/RUN mode2) 13/14 Operating indication (NO)
Output 2 BYPASSED 23/24 Bypass indication (NO)
Output 3 OVERLOAD/FAILURE 95/96/98 Overload/error indication (NC/NO)
A 1 DC-13 at 24 V
1) Values for the coil power consumption at +10 % Un, 50 Hz. 3) Actual motor start times are load dependent.
2) Factory default: ON mode.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Type 3RW40 2., 3RW40 3., 3RW40 4.

Control electronics
Operating indications LEDs DEVICE STATE/BYPASSED/FAILURE OVERLOAD
Off Green Off Off
Start Green Green flashing Off
Bypass Green Green Off
Ramp-down Green Green flashing Off
Alarm signals
Ie/Class setting not permissible Green Not relevant Red flashing
Start inhibited/thyristors too hot Yellow flashing Not relevant Off
Error signals
• 24 V: U < 0.75 x Us or U > 1.25 x Us Off Red Off
• 110 ... 230 V: U < 0.75 x Us or U > 1.15 x Us Off Red Off
Non-permissible Ie/Class setting
for edge 0 –> 1 on input IN Green Red Red flashing
Motor protection shut-down (overload thermistor) Green Off Red
Thermistor defective (open circuit, short-circuit) Green Off Red flickering
Thermal overloading of the thyristors Yellow Red Off
Missing mains voltage, phase failure, missing load Green Red Off
Device fault Red Red Off
Type 3RW40 5. and 3RW40 7.

Control electronics
Operating indications LEDs DEVICE STATE/BYPASSED FAILURE OVERLOAD
Off Green Off Off Off
Start Green Green flashing Off Off
Bypass Green Green Off Off
Ramp-down Green Green flashing Off Off
Alarm signals
Ie/Class setting not permissible Green Not relevant Not relevant Red flashing
Start inhibited/thyristors too hot Yellow flashing Not relevant Not relevant Off
Error signals
U < 0.75 x Us or U > 1.15 x Us Off Off Red Off
Non-permissible Ie/Class setting
for edge 0 –> 1 on input IN Green Off Red Red flashing
Motor protection shut-down Green Off Off Red
Thermal overloading of the thyristors Yellow Off Red Off
Missing mains voltage, phase failure, missing load Green Off Red Off
Device fault Red Off Red Off

3RW Soft Starters
Type 3RW40 . .
Factory default
Motor protection functions
Trips in the event of Thermal overloading of the motor
Trip class to IEC 60947-4-1 Class 10/15/20 10
Phase failure sensitivity % > 40
Overload warning No
Thermistor protection acc. to IEC 60947-8, type A/IEC 60947-5-1 Yes1)
Reset option after tripping Manual/automatic/remote reset2)
(MAN/AUTO/REMOTE2))
Recovery time min 5
Device protection functions
Trips in the event of Thermal overloading of the thyristors or
bypass3)
Reset option after tripping Manual/automatic/remote reset2)
(MAN/AUTO/REMOTE2))
Recovery time
• During overloading of the thyristors s 30
• During overloading of the bypass s 60
Control times
Closing time (with connected control voltage) ms < 50
Closing time (automatic/mains contactor mode) ms <300
Recovery time (closing command in active ramp-down) ms 100
Mains failure response time
Load circuit ms 500
Reclosing lockout after overload trip
Motor protection trip min 5
Device protection trip
• During overloading of the thyristors s 30
• During overloading of the bypass s 60
Starting parameters
Starting time s 0 ... 20 7.5
Starting voltage % 40 ... 100 40
Starting current limit 1.3 ... 5 x Ie 5 x Ie
Ramp-down parameters
Ramp-down time s 0 ... 20 0
Reset mode parameters (for motor/device protection shut-down)
Manual reset LEDs Off Off
Automatic reset LEDs Yellow
Remote reset (REMOTE) 2) LEDs Green
Start-up detection Yes
Operating mode output 13/14
Rising edge at Start command
Falling edge at Off command ON ON
Ramp-down end RUN
1) Optional up to size S3 (device variant).
2)
Integrated remote reset (REMOTE) available only for 3RW40 2. to
3RW40 4.; remote reset with 3RU19 accessory module available
for 3RW40 5. and 3RW40 7..
3)
Bypass protection up to size S3.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Type 3RW40 2.-. .B.4, 3RW40 2.-. .B.5, 3RW40 5.-.BB.4, 3RW40 5.-.BB.5,
3RW40 3.-. .B.4, 3RW40 3.-. .B.5, 3RW40 7.-.BB.4 3RW40 7.-.BB.5
3RW40 4.-. .B.4 3RW40 4.-. .B.5
Power electronics
Rated operational voltage V AC 200 ... 480 400 ... 600 200 ... 460 400 ... 600
Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10 -15/+10 -15/+10
Maximum blocking voltage (thyristor) V AC 1600 1400 1800
Tolerance % ±10
Minimum load (% of minimum selectable rated motor current IM) % 20 (at least 2 A)
Maximum cable length between soft starter and motor m 300
• With auxiliary fan (for 3RW40 2. ... 3RW40 4.)
• Without auxiliary fan (for 3RW40 2. ... 3RW40 4.) 10° 10° -- (fan integrated in the soft starter)
10° 10°
NSB0_01897
Storage °C -40 ... +80
Degree of protection IP20 for 3RW40 2.; IP00
IP00 for 3RW40 3. and 3RW40 4.
Type 3RW40 24 3RW40 26 3RW40 27 3RW40 28

• Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA1), for individual mounting at 40/50/60 °C, A 12.5/11/10 25.3/23/21 32.2/29/26 38/34/31
AC-53a
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM
For the motor overload protection A 5 10 17 23
Power loss
• In operation after completed starting with uninterrupted rated W 2 8 13 19
operational current (40 °C) approx.
• During starting with 300 % IM (40°C) W 17 47 55 64
• Normal starting (Class 10)
- Rated motor current IM2), starting time 3 s A 12.5/11/10 25.3/23/21 32.2/29/26 38/34/31
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 50 23 23 19
- Rated motor current IM2)4), starting time 4 s A 12.5/11/10 25.3/23/21 32.2/29/26 38/34/31
- Rated motor current IM2), starting time 4.5 s A 11/10/9 25.3/23/21 32.2/29/26 38/34/31
- Rated motor current IM2)4), starting time 6 s A 11/10/9 25.3/23/21 32.2/29/26 38/34/31
- Rated motor current IM2), starting time 6 s A 10/9/8 21/19/17 27/24/21 31/28/25
- Rated motor current IM 2)4), starting time 8 s A 10/9/8 21/19/17 27/24/21 31/28/25
1)
2)
With 300 % IM.
3)
automatic mode.
4)
Maximum adjustable rated motor current IM, dependent on CLASS setting.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Type 3RW40 36 3RW40 37 3RW40 38 3RW40 46 3RW40 47

AC-53a
For the motor overload protection A 23 26 35 43 46
Power loss
• In operation after completed starting with uninterrupted rated W 6 12 15 12 21
• During starting with 300 % IM (40°C) W 79 111 125 144 192
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 38 23 22 22 15
2)4)
- Rated motor current IM , starting time 4 s A 45/42/39 63/58/53 72/63/60 80/73/66 106/98/90
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 26 15 15 15 10
- Rated motor current IM2), starting time 4.5 s A 42/38/34 50/46/42 56/52/46 70/64/58 84/77/70
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 30 34 34 24 23
- Rated motor current IM2)4), starting time 6 s A 42/38/34 50/46/42 56/52/46 70/64/58 84/77/70
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 21 24 24 16 17
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 30 31 34 23 23
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 21 22 24 16 16
1) Measurement at 60 °C according to UL/CSA not required.
2) With 300 % IM.
3) For intermittent duty S4 with ON period = 30 %, Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone
automatic mode.
4) Maximum adjustable rated motor current IM, dependent on CLASS setting.
Type 3RW40 55 3RW40 56 3RW40 73 3RW40 74 3RW40 75 3RW40 76

• Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA1), for individual mounting at 40/50/60 °C, A 134/117/100 162/145/125 230/205/180 280/248/215 356/315/280 432/385/335
AC-53a
For the motor overload protection A 59 87 80 130 131 207
Power loss
• In operation after completed starting with uninterrupted rated W 60 75 75 90 125 165
• During starting with 300 %2) IM (40°C) W 1043 1355 2448 3257 3277 3600
- Rated motor current IM2), starting time 10 s A 134/117/100 162/145/125 230/205/180 280/248/215 356/315/280 432/385/335
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 20 8 20 20 16 17
2)4)
- Rated motor current IM , starting time 20 s A 134/117/100 162/145/125 230/205/180 280/248/215 356/315/280 432/385/335
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 7 1.4 9 8 5 5
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 11 8 11 13 11 12
- Rated motor current IM2)4), starting time 30 s A 134/117/100 152/140/125 210/200/180 250/220/190 341/315/280 402/385/335
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 1.2 1.7 1 6 2 2
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 12 9 10 10 10 10
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 3 3 1 5 1 1
2) With 300 % IM.
automatic mode.
4)

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Soft starters Type 3RW40 2. 3RW40 3. 3RW40 4.

Front clamping point • Solid mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5); 2 x (1.5 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
connected 2 x (2.5 ... 6) acc. to
IEC 60947;
max. 1 x 10
• With end sleeve mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5); 1 x (0.75 ... 25) 1 x (2.5 ... 35)
2 x (2.5 ... 6)
• Stranded mm2 -- 1 x (0.75 ... 35) 1 x (4 ... 70)
• AWG cables
- Solid AWG 2 x (16 ... 12)
- Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (14 ... 10) 1 x (18 ... 2) 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
- Stranded AWG 1x8 -- --
Rear clamping point • Solid mm2 -- 2 x (1.5 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
connected • With end sleeve mm2 -- 1 x (1.5 ... 25) 1 x (2.5 ... 50)
• Stranded mm2 -- 1 x (1.5 ... 35) 1 x (10 ... 70)
• AWG cables
- Solid or stranded AWG -- 1 x (16 ... 2) 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
Both clamping points • Solid mm2 -- 2 x (1.5 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
connected • With end sleeve mm2 -- 2 x (1.5 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 35)
• Stranded mm2 -- 2 x (1.5 ... 25) 2 x (10 ... 50)
• AWG cables
- Solid or stranded AWG -- 2 x (16 ... 2) 1 x (10 ... 2/0)
• Tightening torque NM 2 ... 2.5 4.5 6.5

lb.in 18 ... 22 40 58
Tools PZ 2 PZ 2 Allen screw 4 mm
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20
(IP00 terminal (IP00 terminal
compartment) compartment)
Spring-type terminals Main conductors
• Solid mm2 1 ... 10 --
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 ... 6 end sleeves with- --
out plastic collar
• AWG cables
- Solid or stranded (finely stranded) AWG 16 ... 10 --
- Stranded AWG 1x8 --
Tools DIN ISO 2380-1A0; 5 x 3 --
Degree of protection IP20 --
Busbar connections Main conductors
• With cable lug acc. to DIN 46234 or max.
20 mm wide
- Stranded mm2 -- 2 x (10 ... 70)
- Finely stranded mm2 -- 2 x (10 ... 50)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG -- 2 x (7 ... 1/0)

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Soft starters Type 3RW40 5. 3RW40 7.

With box terminal 3RT19 55-4G (55 kW) 3RT19 66-4G
Front clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 70 ... 240
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 70 ... 240
• Stranded mm2 16 ... 70 95 ... 300
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8 Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8
(number x width x thickness) Max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8 Max. 20 x 24 x 0.5
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 2/0 3/0 ... 600 kcmil
Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 120 ... 185
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 120 ... 185
• Stranded mm2 16 ... 70 120 ... 240
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8 Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 2/0 250 ... 500 kcmil
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 Min. 2 x 50; max. 2 x 185
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 Min. 2 x 50; max. 2 x 185
• Stranded mm2 Max. 2 x 70 Max. 2 x 70; max. 2 x 240
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Max. 2 x (6 x 15.5 x 0.8) Max. 2 x (20 x 24 x 0.5)
(number x width x thickness)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG Max. 2 x 1/0 Min. 2 x 2/0 Max. 2 x 500 kcmil
• Terminal screws M10 (hexagon socket, A/F4) M12 (hexagon socket, A/F5)
- Tightening torque NM 10 ... 12 20 ... 22
lb.in 90 ... 110 180 ... 195
With box terminal 3RT19 56-4G
Front or rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120
• Stranded mm2 16 ... 120
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8
(number x width x thickness) Max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 250 kcmil
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
• Stranded mm2 Max. 2 x 120
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Max. 2 x (10 x 15.5 x 0.8)
(number x width x thickness)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG Max. 2 x 3/0

• Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 16 ... 951) 50 ... 2402)
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 25 ... 1201) 70 ... 2402)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
• Connecting bar (max. width) mm 17 25
• Terminal screws M8 x 25 (A/F13) M10 x 30 (A/F17)
- Tightening torque NM 10 ... 14 14 ... 24
lb.in 89 ... 124 124 ... 210
1) 2)
When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46235, use 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover for When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46234, the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal cover
conductor cross-sections from 95 mm² to ensure phase spacing. must be used for cond. cross-sections of 240 mm² and more as well as DIN 46235
for cond. cross-sections of 185 mm² and more to keep the phase clearance.
Soft starters Type 3RW40 . .

Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables
• Terminal screws
lb.in 7 ... 10.3
• Solid
- 3RW40 2. ... 3RW40 4. mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
- 3RW40 5., 3RW40 7. mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 14) for 3RW40 2. ... 3RW40 4.;
2 x (24 ... 16) for 3RW40 5. and 3RW40 7.

3RW Soft Starters
Standard Parameters
Electromagnetic compatibility
acc. to EN 60947-4-2
Degree of severity 3: 10 V/m
Interference 10 V
• Burst EN 61000-4-4 ±2 kV/5 kHz
±2 kV line to earth
EMC interference field strength EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 30 ... 1000 MHz,
limit value of Class B with 3RW40 2. 24 V AC/DC
Radio interference voltage EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 0.15 ... 30 MHz,
limit value of Class B with 3RW40 2. 24 V AC/DC
Radio interference suppression filters
Degree of noise suppression A (industrial applications) Not required
Degree of noise suppression B (applications for residential
areas)
Control voltage
• 110 ... 230 V AC/DC Not available1)
• 115/230 V AC Not available1)
• 24 V AC/DC Not required for 3RW40 2.;
required for 3RW40 3. and 3RW40 4. (see table)
1) Degree of noise suppression B cannot be obtained through the use of fil-
ters as the strength of the electromagnetic field is not attenuated by the
filter.
Soft starter type Rated current Recommended filters1)

Soft starters Voltage range 200 ... 480 V
Filter type Rated current filters Terminals
A A mm2
3RW40 36 45 4EF1512-1AA10 50 16
3RW40 37 63 4EF1512-2AA10 66 25
3RW40 38 72 4EF1512-3AA10 90 25
3RW40 46 80 4EF1512-3AA10 90 25
3RW40 47 106 4EF1512-4AA10 120 50
1)
The radio interference suppression filter is used to remove the conducted
interference from the main circuit. The field-related emissions comply with
degree of noise suppression B. Filter selection applies under standard
conditions: 10 starts per hour, start time 4 s at 300 % Ie.
Type Number Max. Fuse Class K5, RK5, RK1 Max. Fuse Class J Short Voltage Circuit Voltage
Standard short circuit ratings 3RW40
3RW40 24 50 A 60 A 5 kA 600 V
3RW40 26 100 A 100 A 5 kA 600 V
3RW40 27 125 A 125 A 5 kA 600 V
3RW40 28 125 A 125 A 5 kA 600 V
3RW40 36 175 A 175 A 10 kA 600 V
3RW40 37 250 A 250 A 10 kA 600 V
3RW40 38 250 A 250 A 10 kA 600 V
3RW40 46 450 A1) 300 A 10 kA 600 V
3RW40 47 450 A1) 350 A 10 kA 600 V
1)
Special purpose fuse Type 3N81333-2 manufactured by Siemens covered in File E167357.
High capacity short circuit ratings 3RW40
3RW40 24 50 A 50 A 42 kA 600 V
3RW40 26 60 A 100 A 42 kA 600 V
3RW40 27 60 A 125 A 42 kA 600 V
3RW40 28 60 A 125 A 42 kA 600 V
3RW40 36 100 A 175 A 30 kA 600 V
3RW40 37 100 A 200 A 30 kA 600 V
3RW40 38 100 A 200 A 30 kA 600 V
3RW40 46 110 A 200 A 42 kA 600 V
3RW40 47 110 A 200 A 42 kA 600 V

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Circuit Breaker SCCR
Soft starters Circuit Brakers

ToC
1 Thermal Magnetic Instantaneous Trip Fuse
Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max.
Q11 Rated 480 V SCCR size 600 V SCCR size 480 V SCCR size 600 V SCCR size 600 V SCCR size 600 V SCCR size
Type current Type kA A Type kA A Type kA A Type kA A Type kA A Type kA A
3RW40 24 11
3RW40 26 23
3RW40 27 29
3RW40 28 34
3RW40 36 42
3RW40 37 58
3RW40 38 62
3RW40 46 73
3RW40 47 98
3RW40 55 117 FD63B 100 150 FD63B 50 150 FXD63A 100 150 FXD63A 50 150 RK5 100 200 J 100 400
3RW40 56 145 JD63B 100 200 JD63B 50 250 FXD63A 100 250 FXD63A 50 250 RK5 100 250 J 100 500
3RW40 73 205 JD63B 100 300 JD63B 50 300 JXD63A 100 300 JXD63A 50 300 RK5 100 250
3RW40 75 315 LD63B 100 500 LD63B 50 450 JXD63A 100 400 JXD63A 50 400 RK5 100 600
3RW40 76 385 LD63B 100 600 LD63B 50 600 LXD63H 100 600 LXD63H 50 600 L 100 700
Fused version (line protection only)
F1
Q21
Q11
NSB0_01904
M
3~
Soft starters Line protection, maximum Line contactors

ToC
1 Rated current Rated current Size (optional)
Q11 F1 Q21
Type A Type A
Type of coordination "1"1): Iq = 65 kA at 600 V +5 %
3RW40 24 12.5 3NA3 820-6 50 00 3RT10 24
3RW40 26 25 3NA3 822-6 63 00 3RT10 26
3RW40 27 32 3NA3 824-6 80 00 3RT10 34
3RW40 28 38 3NA3 824-6 80 00 3RT10 35
3RW40 36 45 3NA3 130-6 100 1 3RT10 36
3RW40 37 63 3NA3 132-6 125 1 3RT10 44
3RW40 38 72 3NA3 132-6 125 1 3RT10 45
3RW40 46 80 3NA3 136-6 160 1 3RT10 45
3RW40 47 106 3NA3 136-6 160 1 3RT10 46
3RW40 55 134 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RT10 55-6A.36
3RW40 56 162 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RT10 56-6A.36
3RW40 73 230 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3 3RT10 65-6A.36
3RW40 74 280 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3 3RT10 66-6A.36
3RW40 75 356 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 75-6A.36
3RW40 76 432 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 76-6A.36
1)
The types of coordination are explained under "3RA1 Fuseless Load Feed-
ers". The type of coordination "1" refers only to soft starters in combination
with the stipulated protective device (motor starter protector/circuit

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Fused version with 3NE1 SITOR fuses (semiconductor and line protection)
For matching fuse bases see Catalog LV 1 under "SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices for Power
Distribution" ––> "Switch Disconnectors", and Catalog ET B1 under "BETA Protecting" ––> "SITOR
F’1 Semiconductor Fuses" or go to www.siemens.com/sitor ––>"Products" ––>"BETA Protecting"––>"SITOR"
Q21
Q11
NSB0_01905
M
3~
Soft All-range fuses Line contactors

starters
ToC
current
Q11 F'1 Q21
Type A Type A
3RW40 24 12.5 3NE1 814-0 20 000 3RT10 24
3RW40 26 25 3NE1 803-0 35 000 3RT10 26
3RW40 27 32 3NE1 020-2 80 00 3RT10 34
3RW40 28 38 3NE1 020-2 80 00 3RT10 35
3RW40 36 45 3NE1 020-2 80 00 3RT10 36
3RW40 37 63 3NE1 820-0 80 000 3RT10 44
3RW40 38 72 3NE1 820-0 80 000 3RT10 45
3RW40 46 80 3NE1 021-0 100 00 3RT10 45
3RW40 47 106 3NE1 022-0 125 00 3RT10 46
3RW40 55 134 3NE1 227-2 250 1 3RT10 55-6A.36
3RW40 56 162 3NE1 227-2 250 1 3RT10 56-6A.36
3RW40 73 230 3NE1 331-2 350 2 3RT10 65-6A.36
3RW40 74 280 3NE1 333-2 450 2 3RT10 66-6A.36
3RW40 75 356 3NE1 334-2 500 2 3RT10 75-6A.36
3RW40 76 432 3NE1 435-2 560 3 3RT10 76-6A.36
1)
The types of coordination are explained in more detail under "3RA1 Fuse-
less Load Feeders".
the stipulated protective device (circuit breaker/fuse), not to any additional
components in the feeder.
ToC
1
ToC
2
The types of coordination are explained in more detail

under "3RA1 Fuseless Load Feeders".
These types of coordination are indicated in the

Technical specifications by gray backgrounds.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Fused version with 3NE3 SITOR fuses (semiconductor protection by fuse, line and overload protection by motor starter protector;
alternatively, installation with contactor and overload relay possible)
F3 F1 Switching and Protection Devices for Power Distribution" ––>
"Switch Disconnectors", and Catalog ET B1 under "BETA
Q21 Protecting" ––> "SITOR Semiconductor Fuses" or go to
Q1
F3 rwww.siemens.com/sitor ––>"Products" ––>"BETA Protecting"
Q11 ––>"SITOR"
Q11
NSB0_01903
NSB0_01906
M M
3~ 3~
Soft starters Semiconductor fuses, minimum Semiconductor fuses, maximum Semiconductor fuses, minimum
ToC
2 Rated current Rated current Size Rated current Size Rated current Size
Q11 F3 F3 F3
3RW40 24 12.5 -- -- -- -- -- -- 3NE4 101 32 0
3RW40 26 25 -- -- -- 3NE3 221 100 1 3NE4 102 40 0
3RW40 27 32 -- -- -- 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE4 118 63 0
3RW40 28 38 -- -- -- 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE4 118 63 0
3RW40 36 45 -- -- -- 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE4 120 80 0
3RW40 37 63 -- -- -- 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE4 121 100 0
3RW40 38 72 3NE3 221 100 1 3NE3 227 250 1 -- -- --
3RW40 46 80 3NE3 222 125 1 3NE3 225 200 1 -- -- --
3RW40 47 106 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE3 231 350 1 -- -- --
3RW40 55 134 3NE3 227 250 1 3NE3 335 560 2 -- -- --
3RW40 56 162 3NE3 227 250 1 3NE3 335 560 2 -- -- --
3RW40 73 230 3NE3 232-0B 400 1 3NE3 333 450 2 -- -- --
3RW40 74 280 3NE3 233 450 1 3NE3 336 630 2 -- -- --
3RW40 75 356 3NE3 335 560 2 3NE3 336 630 2 -- -- --
3RW40 76 432 3NE3 337-8 710 2 3NE3 340-8 900 2 -- -- --
Soft starters Semiconductor fuses max. Semiconductor fuses min. Semiconductor fuses max. Cylindrical fuses
ToC
2 Rated current Rated current Size Rated current Size Rated current Size Rated
current
Q11 F3 F3 F3 F3
Type A Type A Type A Type A Type A
3RW40 24 12.5 3NE4 117 50 0 3NE8 015-1 25 00 3NE8 017-1 50 00 3NC2 240 40
3RW40 26 25 3NE4 117 50 0 3NE8 017-1 50 00 3NE8 021-1 100 00 3NC2 263 63
3RW40 27 32 3NE4 118 63 0 3NE8 018-1 63 00 3NE8 022-1 125 00 3NC2 280 80
3RW40 28 38 3NE4 118 63 0 3NE8 020-1 80 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 3NC2 280 80
3RW40 36 45 3NE4 120 80 0 3NE8 020-1 80 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 3NC2 280 80
3RW40 37 63 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE8 021-1 100 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 -- --
3RW40 38 72 -- -- -- 3NE8 022-1 125 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 -- --
3RW40 46 80 -- -- -- 3NE8 022-1 125 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 -- --
3RW40 47 106 -- -- -- 3NE8 024-1 160 00 3NE8 024-1 160 00 -- --
3RW40 55 134 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
3RW40 56 162 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
3RW40 73 230 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
3RW40 74 280 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
3RW40 75 356 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
3RW40 76 432 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Soft starters Line contactors Motor starter protectors/circuit breakers Line protection, maximum
ToC
2 Rated current (optional) 400 V +10 % Rated current 575 V +10 % Rated current Rated current Size
Q11 Q21 Q1 Q1 F1
3RW40 24 12.5 3RT10 24 3RV1 021-4KA10 55 -- -- 3NA3 820-6 50 00
3RW40 26 25 3RT10 26 3RV1 021-4DA10 55 -- -- 3NA3 822-6 63 00
3RW40 27 32 3RT10 34 3RV1 031-4EA10 55 -- -- 3NA3 824-6 80 00
3RW40 28 38 3RT10 35 3RV1 031-4FA10 55 -- -- 3NA3 824-6 80 00
3RW40 36 45 3RT10 36 3RV1 031-4GA10 20 -- -- 3NA3 130-6 100 1
3RW40 37 63 3RT10 44 3RV1 041-4JA10 20 -- -- 3NA3 132-6 125 1
3RW40 38 72 3RT10 45 3RV1 041-4KA10 20 -- -- 3NA3 132-6 125 1
3RW40 46 80 3RT10 45 3RV1 041-4LA10 11 -- -- 3NA3 136-6 160 1
3RW40 47 106 3RT10 46 3RV1 041-4MA10 11 -- -- 3NA3 136-6 160 1
3RW40 55 134 3RT10 55-6A.36 3VL3 720 200 3VL3 720 200 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW40 56 162 3RT10 56-6A.36 3VL3 720 200 3VL3 720 200 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW40 73 230 3RT10 65-6A.36 3VL4 731 315 3VL5 731 315 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3
3RW40 74 280 3RT10 66-6A.36 3VL4 731 315 3VL5 731 315 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3
3RW40 75 356 3RT10 75-6A.36 3VL4 740 400 3VL5 740 400 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW40 76 432 3RT10 76-6A.36 3VL5 750 500 3VL5 750 500 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
1) The types of coordination are explained under "3RA1 Fuseless Load Feed- with the stipulated protective device (motor starter protector/circuit
ers". The type of coordination "2" refers only to soft starters in combination breaker/fuse), not to any additional components in the feeder.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Motor protection tripping characteristics Motor protection tripping characteristics
for 3RW40 (with symmetry) for 3RW40 (with asymmetry)
10 3 103
NSB0_01488a
NSB0_01705
6 6
[s]
[s]
4 4
Tripping time
Tripping Time
2 2
10 2 10 2
6 6
4 4
2 2
101 10 1
1 2 4 6 10
x e 0,1 1,0 10
Class 10 Class 15 Class 20 x e
Class 10 Class 15 Class 20

105
NSB0_01704
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000


3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
More information
Application Conveyor belt Roller conveyor Small fan Pump Hydraulic pump
Starting parameters
limiting
- Starting voltage % 70 60 40 40 40
- Starting time s 10 10 10 10 10
- Current limit value 5 x IM 5 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM
Ramp-down time s 5 5 0 10 0

The soft starter has to be selected at least one performance class higher than the motor used.
Application Stirrer Compressor Centrifuge
Starting parameters
limiting
Ramp-down time 0 0 0
Note:
Assistance.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40
Configuration Status graphs

The 3RW solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting
conditions. In the event of deviating conditions or increased
switching frequency, it may be necessary to choose a larger de-
vice. For accurate dimensioning, use the Win-Soft Starter selec-
tion and simulation program.
Where long starting times are involved, the integrated solid-state
overload relay for heavy starting should not be disconnected.
PTC sensors are recommended. This also applies for the smooth
ramp-down because during the ramp-down time an additional
current loading applies in contrast to free ramp-down.
In the case of high switching frequencies in S4 mode, Siemens
recommends the use of PTC sensors. For corresponding device
versions with integrated thermistor motor protection or separate
thermistor evaluation devices see Catalog LV 1.
power compensation equipment). In addition, neither static sys-
tems for reactive-power compensation nor dynamic PFC (Power
Factor Correction) must be operated in parallel during starting Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program
faults arising on the compensation equipment and/or the soft With this software, you can simulate and select all Siemens soft
starter. starters, taking into account various parameters such as mains
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses and controls) requirements.
short-circuit conditions. Fuses, controls and overload relays The software is a valuable tool, which makes complicated,
must be ordered separately. Please observe the maximum lengthy manual calculations for determining the required soft
switching frequencies specified in the technical specifications. starters superfluous.
Note: The Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program can be
When induction motors are switched on, voltage drops occur as downloaded from:
a rule on starters of all types (direct starters, wye-delta starters, www.usa.siemens.com > Software
soft starters). The infeed transformer must always be dimen-
sioned such that the voltage dip when starting the motor remains More information can be found on the Internet at:
within the permissible tolerance. If the infeed transformer is di- www.usa.siemens.com.
soft starter.
Schematic circuit diagram
L1 L2 L3
NSB0_001485a
T1 T2 T3


3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are equipped with optimum

Overview functionality. An integral bypass contact system reduces the
In addition to soft starting and soft ramp-down, the solid-state power loss of the soft starter during operation.
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters provide numerous functions for This reliably prevents heating of the switchgear environment.
higher-level requirements. They cover a performance range up The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters have internal intrinsic device
to 900 Hp (at 460 V) in the inline circuit and up to 1600 Hp (at protection. This prevents thermal overloading of the power sec-
460 V) in the inside-delta circuit. tion's thyristors, e. g. due to unacceptably high closing
operations.
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are characterized by a compact
design for space-saving and clearly arranged control cabinet Wiring outlay for installing an additional motor overload relay is
layouts. For optimized motor starting and stopping the innova- no longer needed as the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters perform
tive SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are an attractive alternative with this function too. In addition they offer adjustable trip classes
considerable savings potential compared to applications with a and a thermistor motor protection function. As an option the thy-
frequency converter. The new torque control and adjustable cur- ristors can also be protected by SITOR semiconductor fuses
rent limiting enable the High-Feature soft starters to be used in from short-circuiting so that the soft starter is still functional after
nearly every conceivable task. They reliably mitagate the sud- a short-circuit (type of coordination 2). And even inrush current
den torque applications and current peaks during motor starting peaks are reliably avoided thanks to adjustable current limiting.
and stopping. This creates savings potential when calculating As a further option the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be up-
the size of the controlgear and when servicing the machinery in- graded with a PROFIBUS DP module. Thanks to their communi-
stalled. Be it for inline circuits or inside-delta circuits – the cation capability and their programmable control inputs and re-
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter offers savings especially in terms of lay outputs the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be very easily
size and equipment costs. and quickly integrated in higher-level controllers.
The bypass contacts already integrated in the soft starter by- In addition a creep speed function is available for positioning
pass the thyristors after a motor ramp-up is detected. This re- and setting jobs. With this function the motor can be controlled
sults in a further great reduction in the heat loss occuring during in both directions of rotation with reduced torque and an adjust-
operation of the soft starter at rated value. able, low speed.
Combinations of various starting, operating and ramp-down On the other hand the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters offer a new,
possibilities ensure an optimum adaptation to the application- combined DC braking function for the fast stopping of driving
specific requirements. Operation and commissioning can be loads.
performed with the menu-controlled keypad and a menu-
prompted, multi-line graphic display with background lighting. Highlights
The optimized motor ramp-up and ramp-down can be effected • Soft starting with breakaway pulse, torque control or voltage
quickly, easily and reliably by means of just a few settings with a ramp, adjustable torque or current limiting as well as any com-
previously selected language. Four-key operation and plain-text bination of these, depending on load type
displays for each menu point guarantee full clarity at every mo- • Integrated bypass contact system to minimize power loss
ment of the parameterization and operation. • Various setting options for the starting parameters such as
starting torque, starting voltage, ramp-up and ramp-down
Applicable standards time, and much more in three separate parameter sets
• IEC 60947-4-2 • Start-up detection
• UL/CSA • Inside-delta circuit for savings in terms of size and equipment
costs
Soft Starter ES parameterization software • Various ramp-down modes selectable: free ramp-down,
torque-controlled pump ramp-down, combined DC braking
Soft Starter ES software is used for the parameterization, moni- • Solid-state motor overload and intrinsic device protection
toring and service diagnostics of SIRIUS 3RW44 High Feature • Thermistor motor protection
soft starters. • Keypad with a menu-prompted, multi-line graphic display with
See Catalog LV 1, Chapter 12 "Planning and Configuration with background lighting
SIRIUS". • Interface for communication with the PC for more accurate set-
ting of the parameters as well as for control and monitoring
Function • Simple adaptation to the motor feeder
• Simple mounting and commissioning
Equipped with modern, ergonomic user prompting the • Display of operating states and fault messages
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be commissioned quickly and • Connection to PROFIBUS with optional PROFIBUS DP module
easily using a keypad and a menu-prompted, multi-line graphic • External display and operator module
display with background lighting. The optimized motor ramp-up • Mains voltages from 200 to 690 V, 50 to 60 Hz
and ramp-down can be effected quickly, easily and reliably by • Applicable up to 60 °C (derating from 40 °C)
means of just a few settings with a selectable language. Four-
key operation and plain-text displays for each menu point guar-
antee full clarity at every moment of the parameterization and
operation. During operation and when control voltage is applied,
the display field continuously presents measured values and op-
erating values as well as warnings and fault messages. An ex-
ternal display and operator module can be connected by means
of a connection cable to the soft starter, thus enabling active in-
dications and the like to be read directly from the control cabinet
door.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44 . .-.BC.4 3RW44 . .-.BC.5 3RW44 . .-.BC.6

Power electronics
Rated operational voltage for inline circuit V AC 200 ... 460 400 ... 600 400 ... 690
Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10 -15/+10
Maximum blocking voltage (thyristor) V AC 1400 1800 1800
Rated operational voltage for inside-delta circuit V AC 200 ... 460 400 ... 600 400 ... 600
Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10 -15/+10
Rated frequency Hz 50 ... 60
Tolerance % ±10
Minimum load (% of set motor current IM) % 8
Maximum cable length between soft starter and motor m 5001)
Permissible installation height m 5000 (derating from 1000, see characteristic curves); higher on request
Installation type Stand-alone installation

Operation °C 0 ... +60; (derating from +40)
Storage °C -25 ... +80
Degree of protection IP00
1)
At the project configuration stage, it is important to make allowance for the higher values for the rated operational voltage or current must be calcu-
voltage drop on the motor cable up to the motor connection. If necessary, lated accordingly for the soft starter.

AC-53a
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM A 5 7 9 11 15 18
For the motor overload protection
Power loss
• In operation after completed starting with uninterrupted rated
operational current (40 °C) approx. W 8 10 32 36 45 55
• During starting with 300 % IM (40 °C) W 400 470 600 725 940 1160
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 41 34 41 42 43 44
- Rated motor current IM 2)4), starting time 10 s A 29/26/23 36/33/29 47/42/37 57/51/45 77/68/59 93/82/72
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 20 15 20 20 20 20
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 20 15 20 20 20 20
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 10 6 10 10 8 8
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 13 9 13 13 13 13
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 10 6 10 10 10 10
2)4)
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 4 2 4 5 1.8 0.8
• For very heavy starting (Class 30)
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 1.8 0.8 3.3 1.5 2 1
1)
2)
With 300 % IM.
3)
automatic mode.
4)

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44 34 3RW44 35 3RW44 36

• Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA1), for individual mounting at 40/50/60 °C, A 113/100/88 134/117/100 162/145/125
AC-53a
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM A 22 26 32
Power loss
operational current (40 °C) approx. W 64 76 95
• During starting with 300 % IM (40 °C) W 1350 1700 2460
- Rated motor current IM2)4), starting time 10 s A 113/100/88 134/117/100 162/145/125
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 1.5 2 1
2) With 300 % IM.
automatic mode.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44 43 3RW44 44 3RW44 45 3RW44 46 3RW44 47

AC-53a
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM A 40 50 62 71 86
Power loss
operational current (40 °C) approx. W 89 110 145 174 232
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 41 41 41 41 39
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 20 20 19 17 16
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 20 20 19 17 16
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 9 10 6 4 5
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 13 13 10 13 11
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 10 10 10 10 10
- Rtarts per hour3) 1/h 1 5 1 3 1
2) With 300 % IM.
automatic mode.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44

AC-53a
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM A 110 123 138 156 176 194
Power loss
operational current (40 °C) approx. W 159 186 220 214 250 270
• During starting with 300 % IM (40 °C) W 7020 8100 9500 11100 13100 15000
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 41 41 37 33 22 17
2)4)
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 20 20 16 13 8 5
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 20 20 16 13 8 5
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 10 9 6 4 0.3 0.3
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 13 13 11 9 8 8
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 6 4 3 1 0.4 0.5
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 10 10 7 8 8 9
2)4)
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 4 2 1 1 0.4 1
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 2 1 1 1 1.5 1
2) With 300 % IM.
automatic mode.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44 65 3RW44 66

• Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA1), for individual mounting at 40/50/60 °C, A 1076/970/880 1214/1076/970
AC-53a
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM A 215 242
Power loss
operational current (40 °C) approx. W 510 630
• During starting with 300 % IM (40 °C) W 15000 17500
- Rated motor current IM2), starting time 5 s A 1076/970/880 1214/1076/970
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 30 20
2)4)
- Rated motor current IM , starting time 10 s A 1076/970/880 1214/1076/970
- Rated motor current IM2)4), starting time 20 s A 1076/970/880 1214/1076/970
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 3 0.5
2)4)
- Rated motor current IM , starting time 30 s A 970/880/810 1030/940/860
1)
2) With 300 % IM.
automatic mode.
4)

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
3RW44 27-1BC44 3RW44 36-6BC44 3RW44 47-6BC44 3RW44 58-6BC44 3RW44 66-6BC44
Ambient temperature 40 °C Ambient temperature 50 °C DT Order No. List PU PS* PG Weight
Rated Rated power of induction motors for Rated Rated power of induction Price $ (UNIT, per PU
opera- rated operational voltage Ue opera- motors for rated operational per PU SET, approx.
tional tional voltage Ue M)
current current
Ie1) Ie
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
A kW kW kW kW kW A hp hp hp hp kg
Inside-delta circuits, rated operational voltage 200 ... 460 V 2)
50 15 22 -- -- -- 45 10 15 30 -- } 3RW44 22-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 6.500
62 18.5 30 -- -- -- 55 15 20 40 -- } 3RW44 23-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 6.500
81 22 45 -- -- -- 73 20 25 50 -- } 3RW44 24-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 6.500
99 30 55 -- -- -- 88 25 30 60 -- } 3RW44 25-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 6.500
133 37 75 -- -- -- 118 30 40 75 -- } 3RW44 26-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 6.500
161 45 90 -- -- -- 142 40 50 100 -- } 3RW44 27-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 6.500
196 55 110 -- -- -- 173 50 60 125 -- B 3RW44 34-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900
232 75 132 -- -- -- 203 60 75 150 -- B 3RW44 35-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900
281 90 160 -- -- -- 251 75 100 200 -- B 3RW44 36-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900
352 110 200 -- -- -- 312 100 125 250 -- B 3RW44 43-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 11.500
433 132 250 -- -- -- 372 125 150 300 -- B 3RW44 44-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 11.500
542 160 315 -- -- -- 485 150 200 400 -- B 3RW44 45-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 11.500
617 200 355 -- -- -- 546 150 200 450 -- B 3RW44 46-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 11.500
748 250 400 -- -- -- 667 200 250 600 -- B 3RW44 47-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 11.500
954 315 560 -- -- -- 856 300 350 750 -- C 3RW44 53-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1065 355 630 -- -- -- 954 350 400 850 -- C 3RW44 54-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1200 400 710 -- -- -- 1065 350 450 950 -- C 3RW44 55-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1351 450 800 -- -- -- 1200 450 500 1050 -- C 3RW44 56-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1524 500 900 -- -- -- 1351 450 600 1200 -- C 3RW44 57-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1680 560 1000 -- -- -- 1472 550 650 1300 -- C 3RW44 58-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1864 630 1100 -- -- -- 1680 650 750 1500 -- C 3RW44 65-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 78.000
2103 710 1200 -- -- -- 1864 700 850 1700 -- C 3RW44 66-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 78.000
• 115 V AC 3
• 230 V AC 4
1)
In the selection table, the unit rated current Ie refers to the induction
motor's rated operational current in the inside-delta circuit.
The actual current of the device is approx. 58 % of this value.
2)
3RW44 2. ... 3RW44 4. soft starters with screw terminals:
delivery times } (preferred type),
3)
of PLC possible.
Note:
frequency.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Ambient temperature 40 °C Ambient temperature 50 °C DT Order No. List PU PS* PG Weight

Rated Rated power of induction motors for Rated Rated power of induction Price $ (UNIT, per PU
opera- rated operational voltage Ue opera- motors for rated operational per PU SET, approx.
tional tional voltage Ue M)
current current
Ie1) Ie
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
A kW kW kW kW kW A hp hp hp hp kg
Inside-delta circuits, rated operational voltage 400 ... 600 V 2)
50 -- 22 30 -- -- 45 -- -- 30 40 A 3RW44 22-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 6.500
62 -- 30 37 -- -- 55 -- -- 40 50 A 3RW44 23-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 6.500
81 -- 45 45 -- -- 73 -- -- 50 60 A 3RW44 24-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 6.500
99 -- 55 55 -- -- 88 -- -- 60 75 A 3RW44 25-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 6.500
133 -- 75 90 -- -- 118 -- -- 75 100 A 3RW44 26-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 6.500
161 -- 90 110 -- -- 142 -- -- 100 125 A 3RW44 27-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 6.500
196 -- 110 132 -- -- 173 -- -- 125 150 B 3RW44 34-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900
232 -- 132 160 -- -- 203 -- -- 150 200 B 3RW44 35-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900
281 -- 160 200 -- -- 251 -- -- 200 250 B 3RW44 36-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900
352 -- 200 250 -- -- 312 -- -- 250 300 B 3RW44 43-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 11.500
433 -- 250 315 -- -- 372 -- -- 300 350 B 3RW44 44-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 11.500
542 -- 315 355 -- -- 485 -- -- 400 500 B 3RW44 45-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 11.500
617 -- 355 450 -- -- 546 -- -- 450 600 B 3RW44 46-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 11.500
748 -- 400 500 -- -- 667 -- -- 600 750 B 3RW44 47-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 11.500
954 -- 560 630 -- -- 856 -- -- 750 950 C 3RW44 53-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1065 -- 630 710 -- -- 954 -- -- 850 1050 C 3RW44 54-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1200 -- 710 800 -- -- 1065 -- -- 950 1200 C 3RW44 55-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1351 -- 800 900 -- -- 1200 -- -- 1050 1350 C 3RW44 56-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1524 -- 900 1000 -- -- 1351 -- -- 1200 1500 C 3RW44 57-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1680 -- 1000 1200 -- -- 1472 -- -- 1300 1650 C 3RW44 58-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1864 -- 1100 1350 -- -- 1680 -- -- 1500 1900 C 3RW44 65-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 78.000
2103 -- 1200 1500 -- -- 1864 -- -- 1700 2100 C 3RW44 66-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 78.000
• 115 V AC 3
• 230 V AC 4
1)
In the selection table, the unit rated current Ie refers to the induction
motor's rated operational current in the inside-delta circuit.
The actual current of the device is approx. 58 % of this value.
2)
Soft starter with screw terminals:
3RW44 2. ... 3RW44 4. Delivery time A
3RW44 5. ... 3RW44 6. Delivery time B.
3)
of PLC possible.
Note:
frequency.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44 . .-.BC3. 3RW44 . .-.BC4.
Terminal
Control electronics
Rated values
Rated control supply voltage A1/A2/PE V 115 AC 230 AC
• Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10
Rated control supply current STANDBY mA 30 20
Rated control supply current ON
• 3RW44 2 . mA 300 170
• 3RW44 3 . mA 500 250
• 3RW44 4 . mA 750 400
• 3RW44 5 . mA 450 200
• 3RW44 6 . mA 650 300
Maximum current (pickup bypass)
• 3RW44 2 . mA 1000 500
• 3RW44 3 . mA 2500 1250
• 3RW44 4 . mA 6000 3000
• 3RW44 5 . mA 4500 2500
• 3RW44 6 . mA 4500 2500
Rated frequency Hz 50 ... 60 50 ... 60
• Tolerance % ±10 ±10
Type 3RW44. .
Terminal Factory default
Control electronics
Control inputs
Input 1 IN1 Start motor right parameter set 1
Input 2 IN2 No action
Input 3 IN3 No action
Input 4 IN4 Trip reset
Supply L+/L-
• Rated operational current mA Approx. 10 per input to DIN 19240
• Rated operational voltage L+ Internal voltage: 24 V DC from inter-
nal supply through terminal L+ to
IN1 ... IN4. Maximum load at L+
approx. 55 mA
L- External voltage: DC external voltage
(acc. to DIN 19240) through terminals
L- and IN1 ... IN4
(min. 12 V DC, max. 30 V DC)
Thermistor motor protection input
Input T1/T2 PTC type A or Thermoclick Deactivated
Relay outputs (floating auxiliary contacts)
Output 1 13/14 ON period
Output 2 23/24 No action
Output 3 33/34 No action
Output 4 95/96/98 Group fault
Switching capacity of the relay outputs (auxiliary contacts)
230 V/AC-15 A 3 at 240 V
24 V/DC-13 A 1 at 24 V
Protection against overvoltages Protection by means of varistor through relay contact
Motor protection functions
Trips in the event of Thermal overloading of the motor
Trip class acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 Class 5/10/15/20/30 10
Phase failure sensitivity % >40
Overload warning Yes
Reset and recovery Manual/Automatic Manual
Reset option after tripping Manual/Automatic Manual
Recovery time min. 1 ... 30 1
Device protection functions
Trips in the event of Thermal overloading of the thyristors
Reset option after tripping Manual/Automatic Manual
Recovery time min. 0.5
Bypass protection functions
Trips in the event of Thermal overloading of the bypass
contacts
Reset option after tripping Manual
Recovery time min. 1

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44. .
Factory default
Control times
Closing time (with connected control voltage) ms <50
Closing time (automatic mode) ms <4000
Recovery time (closing command in active ramp-down) ms <100
Mains failure response time
Load circuit ms 100
Reclosing lockout after overload trip
Motor protection trip min. 1 ... 30 1
Device protection trip s 30
Setting options for starting
Voltage ramp for starting voltage % 20 ... 100 30
Torque control for starting torque % 10 ... 100 10
Torque control for limit torque % 20 ... 200 150
Starting time s 0 ... 3603) 20
Maximum starting time s 1 ... 1000 Deactivated
Current limit value % 125 ... 5501) 450
Breakaway voltage % 40 ... 100 80
Breakaway time s 0 ... 2 Deactivated
Motor heat output % 1 ... 100 20
Creep mode Left/Right running
Speed factor as function of rated speed (n = nrated/factor) 3 ... 21 7
Creep torque2) % 20 ... 100 50
Setting options for ramp-down
Torque control for stopping torque % 10 ... 100 10
Ramp-down time s 0 ... 3603) 10
Dynamic braking torque % 20 ... 100 50
DC braking torque % 20 ... 100 50
Operating indications
Test voltage
Test mains phases
Ready to start
Start active
Motor running
Ramp-down active
Emergency start active
Warnings/error signals
Mains voltage missing
Leading-edge phase error
Phase failure
• L1
• L2
• L3
Missing load phase
• T1
• T2
• T3
Failure
• Contact element 1 (thyristor)
Flash memory faulty
Supply voltage
• Below 75 %
• Below 85 %
• Over 110 %
Current unbalance exceeded
Thermal motor model overload
Prewarning limit exceeded
• Motor heating
• Time-related trip reserve
Bypass element defective
Mains voltage too high
Device not named
Wrong naming version
Current measuring range exceeded
Bypass element protection disconnection
Power section
• Overheated
• Overheating
1) 3)
Max. current limit value for 3RW44 53 ... 3RW44 57: 500 % and for Actual motor start times are load dependent.
3RW44 58 ... 3RW44 66: 450 %.
2)
Reference variable depends on the motor used but is always smaller than
the rated torque of the motor.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44 . .
Factory default
Warnings/error signals (continued)
Temperature sensor
• Overload
• Open circuit
• Short-circuit
Ground fault
• Detected
Connection abort in manual operating mode
Max. number of starts exceeded
Ie limit value overshoot/undershoot
Heat sink sensor
• Open circuit
• Short-circuit
Quick-stop active
Switching block defective
Ie/class setting not permissible
No external start-up parameters received
PAA fault
Control inputs
Input 1 Motor right parameter set 1
Input 2 No action
Input 3 No action
Input 4 Trip reset
Parameterizing options for control inputs 1 ... 4 No action
Local manual mode
Emergency start
Creep speed
Quick-stop
Trip reset
Motor right parameter set 1
Motor left parameter set 11)
Relay outputs
Output 1 ON period
Output 2 No action
Output 3 No action
Output 4 Group fault
Parameterizing options for relay outputs 1 ... 3 No action
PAA output 1
PAA output 2
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Starting
Operation/Bypass
Ramp-down
ON period
Command motor on
DC braking contactor
Group warning
Group fault
Bus fault
Device fault
Power on
Ready to start
Motor temperature sensor Deactivated
Thermoclick
PTC type A
1)
Parameter motor left possible only in conjunction with creep mode.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Type 3RW44 2. 3RW44 3. 3RW44 4. 3RW44 5.

3RW44 6.
With box terminal 3RT19 55-4G 3RT19 66-4G --
(55 kW)
Front clamping • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2.5 ... 35 16 ... 70 70 ... 240 --
point connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 4 ... 50 16 ... 70 70 ... 240 --
• Solid mm2 2.5 ... 16 -- -- --
• Stranded mm2 4 ... 70 16 ... 70 95 ... 300 --
• Ribbon cable conductors mm 6 x 9 x 0.8 Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8 Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8 --
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 10 ... 2/0 6 ... 2/0 3/0 ... 600 kcmil --
Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2.5 ... 50 16 ... 70 120 ... 185 --
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 10 ... 50 16 ... 70 120 ... 185 --
• Solid mm2 2.5 ... 16 -- -- --
• Stranded mm2 10 ... 70 16 ... 70 120 ... 240 --
• Ribbon cable conductors mm 6 x 9 x 0.8 Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8 Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8 --
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 10 ... 2/0 6 ... 2/0 250 ... 500 kcmil --
Both clamping • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (2.5 ... 35) Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 Min. 2 x 50 --
points connected Max. 2 x 185
2
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm 2 x (4 ... 35) Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 Min. 2 x 50 --
Max. 2 x 185
• Solid mm2 2 x (2.5 ... 16) -- -- --
• Stranded mm2 2 x (4 ... 50) Max. 2 x 70 Max. 2 x 70 --
Max. 2 x 240
• Ribbon cable conductors mm 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) Max. 2 x Max. 2 x --
(number x width x thickness) (6 x 15.5 x 0.8) (20 x 24 x 0.5)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (10 ... 1/0) Max. 2 x 1/0 Min. 2 x 2/0 --
Max. 2 x 500 kcmil
• Terminal screws M6 (hexagon M10 (hexagon M12 (hexagon --
socket, A/F4) socket, A/F4) socket, A/F5)
- Tightening torque NM 4 ... 6 10 ... 12 20 ... 22 --
lb.in 36 ... 53 90 ... 110 180 ... 195 --
With box terminal -- 3RT19 56-4G -- --
Front or rear clamp- • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 -- 16 ... 120 -- --
ing point connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 -- 16 ... 120 -- --
• Stranded mm2 -- 16 ... 120 -- --
• Ribbon cable conductors mm -- Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8 -- --
(number x width x thickness) Max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG -- 6 ... 250 kcmil -- --
Both clamping • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 -- Max. 1 x 95, -- --
points connected 1 x 120
2
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm -- Max. 1 x 95, -- --
1 x 120
2
• Stranded mm -- Max. 2 x 120 -- --
• Ribbon cable conductors mm -- Max. 2 x -- --
(number x width x thickness) (10 x 15.5 x 0.8)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG -- Max. 2 x 3/0 -- --

• Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 16 ... 951) 50 ... 2402) 50 ... 2402)
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 25 ... 1201) 70 ... 2402) 70 ... 2402)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG -- 4 ... 250 kcmil 2/0 ... 500 kcmil 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
• Connecting bar (max. width) mm -- 17 25 60
• Terminal screws -- M8 x 25 (A/F13) M10 x 30 (A/F17) M12 x 40
- Tightening torque NM -- 10 ... 14 14 ... 24 20 ... 35
lb.in -- 89 ... 124 124 ... 210 177 ... 310
1)
When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46235, use 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal
cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm² to ensure phase spacing.
2) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46234, the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal
cover must be used for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more as
well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more to
keep the phase clearance.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Soft starters Type 3RW44. .

Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables
• Terminal screws
lb.in 7 ... 10.3
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
Standard Parameters
Electromagnetic compatibility acc. to EN 60947-4-2
Degree of severity 3, 10 V/m
Interference 10 V
• Burst EN 61000-4-4 ±2 kV/5 kHz
±2 kV line to ground
EMC interference field strength EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 30 ... 1000 MHz
Radio interference voltage EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 0.15 ... 30 MHz
Is an RI suppression filter necessary?
Degree of noise suppression A (industrial applications) No

3RW Soft Starters
Circuit Breaker SCCR
Soft starters Circuit Brakers

ToC
1 Thermal Magnetic Instantaneous Trip Fuse
Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max.
Q11 Rated 480 V SCCR size 600 V SCCR size 480 V SCCR size 600 V SCCR size 600 V SCCR size 600 V SCCR size
Type current Type kA A Type kA A Type kA A Type kA A Type kA A Type kA A
3RW44 22 11 ED63B, 100 40 ED63A, 100 40 ED63A, 50 40 RK5 100 50 J 100 100
HEG3G HEM3M HEM3M
3RW44 23 23 ED63B, 100 50 ED63A, 100 50 ED63A, 50 50 RK5 100 60 J 100 120
HEG3G HEM3M HEM3M
3RW44 24 29 ED63B, 100 70 ED63A, 100 100 ED63A, 50 50 RK5 100 80 J 100 160
HEG3G HEM3M HEM3M
3RW44 25 29 ED63B, 100 70 ED63A, 100 50 ED63A, 50 50 RK5 100 80
HEG3G HEM3M HEM3M
3RW44 26 29 ED63B, 100 100 ED63A, 100 100 ED63A, 50 100 RK5 100 125 J 100 250
HEG3G HEM3M HEM3M
3RW44 27 34 FD63B 100 150 ED63A, 100 100 ED63A, 50 125 RK5 100 150 J 100 300
HEM3M HEM3M
3RW44 34 42 FD63B 100 150 FD63B 50 150 ED63A, 100 125 FXD63A 50 150 RK5 100 200 J 100 400
HEM3M
3RW44 35 58 FD63B 100 150 FD63B 50 150 FXD63A 100 150 FXD63A 50 150 RK5 100 200 J 100 400
3RW44 36 62 JD63B 100 200 JD63B 50 250 FXD63A 100 250 FXD63A 50 250 RK5 100 250 J 100 500
3RW44 43 73 JD63B 100 300 JD63B 50 250 FXD63A 100 250 JXD63A 50 300 RK5 100 300 J 100 600
3RW44 46 98 LD63B 100 500 LD63B 50 450 LXD63H 100 400 JXD63A 50 400 RK5 100 600
3RW44 47 98 LD63B 100 600 LD63B 50 600 LXD63H 100 600 LXD63H 50 600 L 100 700
3RW44 53 117 HMD6 65 800/ HMD6 50 800/ L 100 1000
800 800
3RW44 54 145 HND6 100 1200/ HND6 50 1200/ L 100 1000
900 900
3RW44 55 145 HND6 100 1200/ HND6 50 1200/ L 100 1000
900 900
3RW44 56 145 HND6 100 1200/ HND6 50 1200/ L 100 1000
1000 1000
3RW44 57 145 HND6 100 1200/ HND6 50 1200/ L 100 1000
1000 1000
3RW44 58 145 CND6 65 1200 CND6 65 1200
3RW44 65 205 CND6 42 1600 CND6 42 1600
3RW44 66 248 CND6 42 1600 CND6 42 1600
Specified Type Others permitted

ED63A HED63A, HHED63A or CED63A
FXD63A HFXD63A or CFD63A
JXD63A HJXD63A or CJD63A
ED63B HED63B, HHED63B or CED63B
FD63B HFD63B, HHFD63B or CFD63B
JD63B HJ63B, HHJD63B or CJD63B
HND6 HNXD6 or CND6

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Inline circuit fused version with 3NE1 SITOR all-range fuse (semiconductor and line protection)
For matching fuse bases see Catalog LV 1 under "SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices for Power
Distribution" ––> "Switch Disconnectors", and Catalog ET B1 under "BETA Protecting" ––> "SITOR
Semiconductor Fuses" or go to www.siemens.com/sitor ––>"Products" ––>"BETA Protecting"––>"SITOR"
Soft starters All-range fuses Line contactors Braking contactors1)2)

up to 400 V
(for example circuit see page 7/70)
ToC
2 Rated Rated current Voltage Size (optional)
current
Q11 F'1 Q21 Q91 Q92
Type A Type A V Type Type Type
Type of coordination "2"3): Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22 29 3NE1 020-2 80 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 34 3RT15 26 --
3RW44 23 36 3NE1 020-2 80 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 35 3RT15 26 --
3RW44 24 47 3NE1 021-2 100 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 36 3RT15 35 --
3RW44 25 57 3NE1 022-2 125 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 44 3RT15 35 --
3RW44 26 77 3NE1 022-2 125 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 45 3RT10 24 3RT10 35
3RW44 27 93 3NE1 024-2 160 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 46 3RT10 25 3RT10 36
3RW44 34 113 3NE1 225-2 200 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 54 3RT10 34 3RT10 44
3RW44 35 134 3NE1 227-2 250 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 55 3RT10 36 3RT10 45
3RW44 36 162 3NE1 227-2 250 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 56 3RT10 44 3RT10 45
3RW44 43 203 3NE1 230-2 315 600 +10 % 1 3RT10 64 3RT10 44 3RT10 54
3RW44 44 250 3NE1 331-2 350 460 +10 % 2 3RT10 65 3RT10 44 3RT10 55
3RW44 45 313 3NE1 333-2 450 690 +5 % 2 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56
3RW44 46 356 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +5 % 2 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56
3RW44 47 432 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +5 % 3 3RT10 76 3RT10 55 3RT10 64
3RW44 53 551 2 x 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +10 % 2 3TF68 3RT10 64 3RT10 66
3RW44 54 615 2 x 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +10 % 2 3TF68 3RT10 64 3RT10 75
3RW44 55 693 2 x 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +10 % 2 3TF69 3RT10 65 3RT10 75
3RW44 56 780 2 x 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +10 % 3 3TF69 3RT10 65 3RT10 75
3RW44 57 880 2 x 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +10 % 3 3RT10 75 3RT10 76
3RW44 58 970 2 x 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +10 % 3 3RT10 75 3RT10 76
3RW44 65 1076 3 x 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +10 % 2 3RT10 75 3TF68
3RW44 66 1214 3 x 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +10 % 3 3RT10 76 3TF68
1) 2)
If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking con- Additional auxiliary relay K4:
tactor is required. LZX:RT4A4T30
If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor (3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 230 V AC),
must be used in addition (see table for type). LZX:RT4A4S15
For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor) we recom- (3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 115 V AC).
mend the function "DC braking". 3)
The types of coordination are explained under "3RA1 Fuseless Load
Feeders".

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Inline circuit fused version with 3NE or 3NC SITOR semiconductor fuse
(semiconductor protection by fuse, line and overload protection by motor starter protector/circuit breaker)
"Switch Disconnectors", and Catalog ET B1 under "BETA
Protecting" ––> "SITOR Semiconductor Fuses" or go to
rwww.siemens.com/sitor ––>"Products" ––>"BETA Protecting"
––>"SITOR"
Soft starters Semiconductor fuses, minimum Semiconductor fuses, maximum Semiconductor fuses (cylinder)
ToC
2 Rated current 690 V +10 % Rated current Size 690 V +10 % Rated current Size Rated current Size
Q11 F3 F3 F3
3RW44 22 29 3NE4 120 80 0 3NE4 121 100 0 3NC2 280 80 22 x 58
3RW44 23 36 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 121 100 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 24 47 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 25 57 3NE4 122 125 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 26 77 3NE4 124 160 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 27 93 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE3 332-0B 400 2
3RW44 34 113 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 35 134 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 36 162 3NE3 227 250 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 43 203 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 44 250 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 45 313 3NE3 233 450 1 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 46 356 3NE3 333 450 2 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 47 432 3NE3 335 560 2 3NE3 338-8 800 2
3RW44 53 551 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 54 615 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 55 693 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 56 780 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
3RW44 57 880 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
3RW44 58 970 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
3RW44 65 1076 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2 3 x 3NE3 338-8 800 2
3RW44 66 1214 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2 3 x 3NE3 338-8 800 2
Soft starters Line contactors Braking contactors1)2) Motor starter protectors/ Line protection, maximum
up to 400 V circuit breakers
ToC
2 Rated current (optional) (for example circuit see page 7/64) 440 V +10 % Rated current 690 V +5 % Rated current Size
Q11 Q21 Q91 Q92 Q1 F1
Type A Type Type Type Type A Type A
3RW44 22 29 3RT10 34 3RT15 26 -- 3RV10 41-4HA10 50 3NA3 820-6 50 00
3RW44 23 36 3RT10 35 3RT15 26 -- 3RV10 41-4JA10 63 3NA3 822-6 63 00
3RW44 24 47 3RT10 36 3RT15 35 -- 3RV10 41-4KA10 75 3NA3 824-6 80 00
3RW44 25 57 3RT10 44 3RT15 35 -- 3RV10 41-4LA10 90 3NA3 830-6 100 00
3RW44 26 77 3RT10 45 3RT10 24 3RT10 35 3RV10 41-4MA10 100 3NA3 132-6 125 1
3RW44 27 93 3RT10 46 3RT10 25 3RT10 36 3RV10 41-4MA10 100 3NA3 136-6 160 1
3RW44 34 113 3RT10 54 3RT10 34 3RT10 44 3VL17 16 160 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW44 35 134 3RT10 55 3RT10 36 3RT10 45 3VL17 16 160 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW44 36 162 3RT10 56 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3VL37 25 250 3NA3 365-6 500 3
3RW44 43 203 3RT10 64 3RT10 44 3RT10 54 3VL47 31 315 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3
3RW44 44 250 3RT10 65 3RT10 44 3RT10 55 3VL47 31 315 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3
3RW44 45 313 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56 3VL47 40 400 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 46 356 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56 3VL47 40 400 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 47 432 3RT10 76 3RT10 55 3RT10 64 3VL57 50 500 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 53 551 3TF68 3RT10 64 3RT10 66 3VL67 80 800 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 54 615 3TF68 3RT10 64 3RT10 75 3VL67 80 800 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 55 693 3TF69 3RT10 65 3RT10 75 3VL67 80 800 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 56 780 3TF69 3RT10 65 3RT10 75 3VL77 10 1000 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 57 880 3RT10 75 3RT10 76 3VL77 10 1000 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 58 970 3RT10 75 3RT10 76 3VL77 12 1250 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 65 1076 3RT10 75 3TF68 3VL77 12 1250 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 66 1214 3RT10 76 3TF68 3VL77 12 1250 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
1) 2)
If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking con- Additional auxiliary relay K4:
tactor is required. If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a LZX:RT4A4T30
braking contactor must be used in addition (see table for type). (3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 230 V AC),
For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor) we recom- LZX:RT4A4S15
mend the function "DC braking". (3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 115 V AC).
3)
breaker/fuse), not to any additional components in the feeder. The types of
coordination are explained under "3RA1 Fuseless Load Feeders".

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Inside-delta circuit fused version with 3NE or 3NC SITOR fuses

(semiconductor protection by fuse, lead and overload protection by motor starter protector/circuit breaker)
"Switch Disconnectors", and Catalog ET B1 under "BETA Protect-
ing" ––> "SITOR Semiconductor Fuses" or go to
www.siemens.com/sitor ––>"Products" ––>"BETA Protecting"
––>"SITOR"
Soft Semiconductor fuses, minimum Semiconductor fuses, maximum Semiconductor fuses (cylinder)
starters
ToC
2 Rated 690 V +10 % Rated current Size 690 V +10 % Rated current Size Rated current Size
current
Q11 F3 F3 F3
Type of coordination "2"1)
3RW44 22 50 3NE4 120 80 0 3NE4 121 100 0 3NC2 280 80 22 x 58
3RW44 23 62 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 121 100 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 24 81 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 25 99 3NE4 122 125 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 26 133 3NE4 124 160 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 27 161 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE3 332-0B 400 2
3RW44 34 196 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 35 232 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 36 281 3NE3 227 250 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 43 352 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 44 433 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 45 542 3NE3 233 450 1 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 46 617 3NE3 333 450 2 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 47 748 3NE3 335 560 2 3NE3 338-8 800 2
3RW44 53 954 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 54 1065 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 55 1200 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 56 1351 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
3RW44 57 1524 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 3 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
3RW44 58 1680 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 3 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
3RW44 65 1864 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2 3 x 3NE3 338-8 800 2
3RW44 66 2103 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2 3 x 3NE3 338-8 800 2
Soft Line contactors Motor starter protectors/ Line protection, maximum

starters up to 400 V circuit breakers
ToC
2 Rated (optional) 440 V +10 % Rated current 690 V +5 % Rated current Size
current
Q11 Q21 Q1 F1
Type A Type Type A Type A
Type of coordination "2"1)
3RW44 22 50 3RT10 36-1AP04 3RV10 42-4KA10 75 3NA3 824-6 80 00
3RW44 23 62 3RT10 44-1AP04 3RV10 42-4LA10 90 3NA3 830-6 100 00
3RW44 24 81 3RT10 46-1AP04 3RV10 42-4MA10 100 3NA3 132-6 125 1
3RW44 25 99 3RT10 54-1AP36 3VL27 16 160 3NA3 136-6 160 1
3RW44 26 133 3RT10 55-6AP36 3VL27 16 160 3NA3 240-6 200 2
3RW44 27 161 3RT10 56-6AP36 3VL37 20 200 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW44 34 196 3RT10 64-6AP36 3VL37 25 250 3NA3 360-6 400 3
3RW44 35 232 3RT10 65-6AP36 3VL47 31 315 3NA3 360-6 400 3
3RW44 36 281 3RT10 66-6AP36 3VL47 40 400 2 x 3NA3 360-6 2 x 400 3
3RW44 43 352 3RT10 75-6AP36 3VL47 40 400 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 44 433 3RT10 76-6AP36 3VL57 50 500 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 45 542 3TF68 44-0CM7 3VL57 63 800 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 46 617 3TF68 44-0CM7 3VL67 80 800 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 47 748 3TF69 3VL67 80 800 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 53 954 3VL77 10 1000 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 54 1065 3VL77 12 1250 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 55 1200 3VL87 16 1600 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 56 1351 3VL87 16 1600 3 x 3NA3 372 3 x 630 3
3RW44 57 1524 3VL87 16 1600 3 x 3NA3 372 3 x 630 3
3RW44 58 1680 3WL12 20 2000 2 x 3NA3 480 2 x 1000 4
3RW44 65 1864 3WL12 25 2500 2 x 3NA3 482 2 x 1250 4
3RW44 66 2103 3WL12 25 2500 2 x 3NA3 482 2 x 1250 4
1)
The type of coordination "2" refers only to soft starters in combination with The types of coordination are explained under "3RA1 Fuseless Load
the stipulated protective device (motor starter protector/circuit Feeders".

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
Motor protection tripping characteristics Motor protection tripping characteristics
for 3RW44 (with symmetry) for 3RW44 (with asymmetry)
10 3 10 3
NSB0_01500a
NSB0_01706
6 6
[s]
[s]
4 4
Tripping time
Tripping time
2 2
10 2 10 2
6 6
4 4
2 2
10 1 10 1
6 6
4 4
2 2
10 0 10 0
1 2 4 6 10 0,1 1,0 10
x e x e
Class 5 Class 10 Class 15 Class 20 Class 30 Class 5 Class 10 Class 15 Class 20 Class 30

105
NSB0_01704
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000


3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
More information
The soft starter rating can be selected to be as high as the rating of the motor used
Starting parameters
limiting
- Starting time s 10 10 10 10 10 10
- Current limit value Deactivated Deactivated 4 x IM 4 x IM Deactivated Deactivated
• Torque ramp
- Starting torque 60 50 40 20 10 10
- End torque 150 150 150 150 150 150
- Starting time 10 10 10 10 10 10
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode Smooth Smooth Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Pump ramp-down Free ramp-down
ramp-down ramp-down

The soft starter has to be selected one performance class higher than the motor used
Application Stirrer Centrifuge Milling machine
Starting parameters
limiting
• Torque ramp
- Starting torque 30 30 30
- End torque 150 150 150
- Starting time 30 30 30
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down or DC braking
Application examples for very heavy starting (Class 30)

Very heavy starting Class 30 (up to 60 s with 350 % In motor),
The soft starter has to be selected two performance classes higher than the motor used
Application Large fan Mill Crusher Circular saw/bandsaw
Starting parameters
limiting
- Starting voltage % 30 50 50 30
- Starting time s 60 60 60 60
- Current limit value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM
• Torque ramp
- Starting torque 20 50 50 20
- End torque 150 150 150 150
- Starting time 60 60 60 60
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) 80 %, 300 ms 80 %, 300 ms Deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down
Note:
Assistance.

3RW Soft Starters
Circuit concept Configuration

The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be operated in two different The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal
types of circuit. starting. In case of heavy starting or increased starting fre-
• Inline circuit quency, a larger device must be selected.
The controls for isolating and protecting the motor are simply For long starting times it is recommended to have a PTC sensor
connected in series with the soft starter. The motor is con- in the motor. This also applies for the ramp-down modes smooth
nected to the soft starter with three cables. ramp-down, pump ramp-down and DC braking, because during
• Inside-delta circuit the ramp-down time in these modes, an additional current load-
The wiring is similar to that of wye-delta starters. The phases of ing applies in contrast to free ramp-down.
the soft starter are connected in series with the individual motor In the motor feeder between the SIRIUS 3RW soft starter and the
windings. The soft starter then only has to carry the phase cur- motor, no capacitive elements are permitted (e. g. no reactive-
rent, amounting to about 58 % of the rated motor current (con- power compensation equipment). In addition, neither static sys-
ductor current). tems for reactive-power compensation nor dynamic PFC (Power
Comparison of the types of circuit Factor Correction) must be operated in parallel during starting
starter.
short-circuit conditions. Fuses, controls and overload relays
must be ordered separately.
The harmonic component load for starting currents must be
taken into consideration for the selection of motor starter protec-
tors (selection of release).
Note:
When induction motors are switched on, voltage drops occur as
Inline circuit: a rule on starters of all types (direct starters, wye-delta starters,
Rated current Ie corresponds to the rated motor current In, soft starters). The infeed transformer must always be dimen-
3 cables to the motor sioned such that the voltage dip when starting the motor remains
soft starter.
Device interface, PROFIBUS DP communication module,
Soft Starter ES parameterizing and operating software
The 3RW44 electronic soft starters have a PC interface for com-
municating with the Soft Starter ES software or for connecting
the external display and operator module. If the optional
PROFIBUS communication module is used, the 3RW44 soft
starter can be integrated in the PROFIBUS network and commu-
nicate using the GSD file or Soft Starter ES Premium software.
The Soft Starter ES parameterizing and operating software can
be downloaded from
Inside-delta circuit: www.usa.siemens.com > Software with a 14-day trial license.
Rated current Ie corresponds to approx. 58 % of the rated motor
current In, 6 cables to the motor (as with wye-delta starters) More information about Soft Starter ES can be found in
Which circuit? Chapter 12 of Catalog LV 1.
Using the inline circuit involves the lowest wiring outlay. If the
soft starter to motor connections are long, this circuit is prefera-
ble.
With the inside-delta circuit there is double the wiring complexity
but a smaller size of device can be used at the same rating.
Thanks to the choice of operating mode between the inline cir-
cuit and inside-delta circuit, it is always possible to select the
most favorable solution.
The braking function is possible only in the inline circuit.

For Operation in the Control Cabinet • Revised •
3RW Soft Starters 07/20/15
3RW44
Manual for SIRIUS 3RW44

Besides containing all important information on configuring, The software is a valuable tool, which makes complicated,
commissioning and servicing, the manual also contains ex- lengthy manual calculations for determining the required soft
ample circuits and the technical specifications for all devices. starters superfluous.
Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program The Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program can be
downloaded from: www.usa.siemens.com > Software
With this software, you can simulate and select all Siemens
soft starters, taking into account various parameters such as More information can be found on the Internet at:
mains properties, motor and load data, and special application www.usa.siemens.com
requirements.

3RW Soft Starters
Project Planning aids
3RW30 1. ... 3RW30 4.
b h d
f e
g
l
m
35
a
c
NSB0_01945
Type/Dimension a b c d e f g h i k l m
(mm)
3RW30 1.-1. 95 45 62 146 126 14.4 63 5 6.5 35 85 95
3RW30 1.-2. 95 45 62 146 126 14.4 63 5 6.5 35 85 117.2
3RW30 2.-1. 125 45 92 146 126 14.4 63 5 6.5 35 115 125
3RW30 2.-2. 125 45 92 146 126 14.4 63 5 6.5 35 115 150
3RW30 3. 160 55 110 163 140 18 63 5 6.5 30 150 144
3RW30 4. 170 70 110 181 158 22.5 85 5 10 60 160 160
Clearances to grounded parts (mm) Lateral Top Bottom Fixing screws Tightening torques (Nm)
3RW30 1. 5 60 40 M4 1
3RW30 2. 5 60 40 M4 1
3RW30 3. 30 60 40 M4 1
3RW30 4. 30 60 40 M4 2
3RW30 03-1 . (screw terminals) 3RW30 03-2 . (spring-type terminals)
3,1
NSC00482
ca. 71
ca. 91
101,6
81,6
1)
7,2 5
22,5 120
1) For mounting onto standard mounting rail TH 35 according to EN 60715.

2) Dimension for screw fixing.
Screw fixing with two 3RP1 903 push-in lugs per 3RW30 03 device.

3RW Soft Starters
b h d
f e
g
l
35
m
a
c
NSB0_01891a
k
Type/Dimension (mm) a b c d e f g h i k l m
3RW40 2.-1. 125 45 92 149 126 14.4 63 5 6.5 35 115 125
3RW40 2.-2. 125 45 92 149 126 14.4 63 5 6.5 35 115 150
3RW40 3. 170 55 110 165 140 18 63 5 6.5 30 150 144
3RW40 4. 170 70 110 183 158 22.5 85 5 10 60 160 160
Clearances to grounded parts (mm) Lateral Top Bottom Fixing screws Tightening torques (Nm)
3RW40 2. 5 60 40 M4 1
3RW40 3. 30 60 40 M4 1
3RW40 4. 30 60 40 M4 2
Type/Dimension (mm) a b c d e f g h i k l m n o p q
3RW40 5. 180 120 37 17 167 100 223 250 180 148 6.5 153 7 198 9 M6, 10 Nm
3RW40 7. 210 160 48 25 190 140 240 278 205 166 10 166 9 230 11 M8, 15 Nm

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44 2., 3RW44 3. and 3RW44 4. for High-Feature applications
b h
q f g
r c d n
l
k
a
e
o
NSB0_01493a
p m
Type/Dimension a b c d e f g h i k l m n o p q r
(mm)
3RW44 2. 180 170 37 11 167 100 240 270 174 148 7.5 153 7 184 6.6 M6, 10 Nm 10
3RW44 3. 180 170 37 17 167 100 240 270 174 148 7.5 153 7 198 9 M6, 10 Nm 10
3RW44 4. 210 210 48 25 190 140 269 298 205 166 16 166 9 230 11 M8, 15 Nm 10

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44 5. and 3RW44 6. for High-Feature applications
t
a u
c b v
s
1)
r
e
1L1 3L2 5L3

g
f
p
w
2T1 4T2 6T3

h
n
m
NSB0_01831
q
i
k ad
l
1) For M12 screw, tightening torque max. 35 Nm (310 lb.in).
Type/Dimension a b c d e f g h i k l m
(mm)
3RW44 5. 76 40 14 20 15.5 638.5 590 -- 44 470 510 16.5
3RW44 6. 85 50 14 -- -- 667 660 160 37.5 535 576 16.5
Type/Dimension n o p q r s t u v W ad
(mm)
3RW44 5. 105 253 623 -- -- -- 249 162 152 -- 290
3RW44 6. 103 251 693 43.5 40 20 249 162 151.4 123 290
3RW49 00-0AC00 external display and operator module Installation cutout for 3RW49 00-0AC00 external display and
operator module
SIRIUS 3RW44
DEVICE
60
SF
55
NSB0_01829
96 28
NSB0_01830
29,1
35,6 92

• Revised • For Operation in the Control Cabinet
07/20/15
Class 73, 74
Dimensions are in inches and are for reference only (not for construction). Certain styles may deviate from values indicated.
Non-Combination Class 73 Combination Type Class 74

N1, N12, N4 Standard Enclosure N1, N12, N4 Standard Enclosure
Amps A B C Amps A B C
11 - 73 25 18 13 11 - 73 36 20 11
3RW40new 3RW40new
98 36 23 10 98 46 20 10
117-145 36 18 15 117 50 25 20
3RW40 205-315 36 22 20 145 - 205 66 25 20
3RW40
385 54 36 20 248 - 315 90 30 20
26 - 68 26 12.5 15 385 90 40 20
82 - 117 36 18 15 26 - 68 36 23 15
145 - 215 36 22 20 82 - 117 50 25 20
3RW44
280 - 385 54 36 20 145 - 215 66 25 20
494 - 780 90 40 20 280 90 30 20
3RW44
970 - 1076 90 50 20 315 - 384 90 40 20
494 90 40 20
551 - 780 90 40a 20
N4 Stainless Steel Standard Enclosure 970 - 1076 90 50 20
Amps A B C
3RW40new 11- 98 55 29 11 N1, N12 Fusible
117 36 18 15
Amps A B C
3RW40 145 - 205A 36 22 20
248 - 385 54 36 20 3RW44 494-780 90 50 20
26 - 51 26 12.5 15
68 - 82 36 18 15
3RW44 N4 Stainless Steel Standard Enclosure
100 - 117 36 22 20
145 - 385 54 36 20 Amps A B C
3RW40new 11- 98 55 29 11
117 - 145 54 36 20
N1, N12, N4 Modified Enclosure 3RW40
205 - 300 90 40 20
Amps A B C 26 - 42 36 23 15
3RW40 117-385 56 36 20 51 - 100 50 25 20
26-51 36 22 20 3RW44
3RW44 117 - 145 54 36 20
68-385 54 36 20 180 - 385 90 40 20
N4 Stainless Steel Modified Enclosure N1, N12, N4 Modified Enclosure

Amps A B C
Amps A B C
117 - 248 76 30 20
3RW40 117-385 54 36 20
3RW40 315 90 30 20
26-51 36 22 20
3RW44 385 90 40 20
68-385 54 36 20
26 - 215 76 30 20
3RW44 280 90 30 20
315 - 385 90 40 20
N4 Stainless Steel Modified Enclosure

Amps A B C
3RW40 117-145 76 30 20
3RW44 26-145 76 30 20
a Add 4” for N4.

3RW Soft Starters
Schematics
3RW30 . . connection examples for control circuit
Control using switches Automatic mode
N(L-) L1 (L +) N(L-) L1(L+)
1)
ON/OFF
1)
ON/OFF
A2 A1 1 A2 A1 1
NSB0_01895
NSB0_01914
Q11 Q11
Us
NSB0_01916a
ON
>5 min
OFF t
Control by pushbutton Control of a main contactor

N(L-) L(L+)
Q21
OFF
N(L-) L1(L+)
ON
ON/ 1)
OFF
A2 A1 1 13 NO 14 A2 A1 1 13 NO 14
ON ON
Q11 Q11
NSB0_01942
NSB0_01997
3RW30 connection examples for main circuit2)

3RW30 – 3-phase motor with
3NA/3NE fuse 3RV motor starter protector
F1 3NA/3NE
Q21 3RT 3RV
Q11 3RW30 Q11 3RW30

NSB0_01943
NSB0_01944
M M
3~ 3~
1)
Caution: Risk of restarting!
When operating with a switch (ON/OFF) a new, automatic restart will take
place automatically if the start command is still active at terminal 1.
2)
As an alternative, the motor feeder can also be installed as a fuseless or as
a fused version. For fuse and switching device coordination, see
"Technical specifications".
The wiring diagrams are provided only as examples.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW40 2. ... 3RW40 4. connection examples for control circuit

Control using switches Automatic mode Control with remote reset
N(L-) L1 (L +) N(L-) L1(L+) N(L-) L1 (L +)
1)
ON/OFF RESET
1) 1)
ON/OFF ON/OFF
A2 A1 1 A2 A1 1 A2 A1 1
NSB0_01892
NSB0_01895
NSB0_01914
Q11 Q11 Q11
Us Us
NSB0_01915
NSB0_01916a
ON 100 %
>5 min >1,5 s
OFF t t
Control of 3RW40 2. ... 3RW40 4. Control of a main contactor

by pushbutton
N(L-) L(L+)
Q21
OFF
N(L-) L1(L+)
ON
1)
ON/
OFF
A2 A1 1 13 NO 14 24 NO 23 95 96 NC NO 98 A2 A1 1 13 NO 14 24 NO 23 95 96 NC NO 98
ON RUN
OVERLOAD OVERLOAD
Q11 FAILURE Q11 FAILURE
NSB0 02007
NSB0_02008
Connection example of 3RW40 2. ... 3RW40 4.
for PTC sensors (thermistor motor protection)
Thermoclick PTC type A
Q11 Q11
NSB0_01893
NSB0_01894
T11/T21 T12 T22 T11/T21 T12 T22
ϑ ϑ
1) Caution: Risk of restarting!


3RW Soft Starters
3RW40 5. and 3RW40 7. connection examples 3RW40 connection examples for main circuit3)
for control circuit
Control by switch using 3RW40 – 3-phase motor with
internal 24 V DC supply external power supply 3NA/3NE fuse 3RV motor starter protector/
3VL circuit breaker
F1 3NA/3NE
Q21 3RT 3RV/3VL
Q11 3RW40
Q11 3RW40
NSB0_01489b
NSB0_01487c
M
M
3~
3~
Control by pushbutton
ON
L1 N
OFF
A1 A2 1 2 3 13 NO 14 24 NO 23 95 96 NC NO 98
ON
OVERLOAD
FAILURE
Q11
NSB0_01483b
2)
Control of a main contactor
Q21
L1 N ON/OFF 1)
A1 A2 1 2 3 13 NO 14 24 NO 23 95 96 NC NO 98
RUN
OVERLOAD
FAILURE
Q11
NSB0_01484b
2)
1)
2)
Grounding necessary for fan connection to 3RW40 5...
3)
As an alternative, the motor feeder can also be installed as a fuseless or as
a fused version. For fuse and switching device coordination, see
The wiring diagrams are provided only as examples.

3RW Soft Starters
3RW44 connection examples for main and control circuits

Main circuit Control circuit
Possibility 1a: Possibility 1:
Inline circuit with motor starter protector and SITOR fuse Control by pushbutton
(semiconductor protection only)
L1 3/N/PE 400 V AC, 50 Hz L1 1/N/PE 230 V AC 1), 50 Hz

L2
L3
Q1 F2
Stop PTC type A

S1 or
(optional Thermoclick
F3 semiconductor
2)
protection fuse)
Motor on right
Start S2
No action
No action
Reset S3
L1 L2 L3
PS 1
Q11
Q11 A1 L+ L- IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 T1 T2
T1 T2 T3 PE
96 +
A2 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 98
NSB0_01494c
No No Group
NSB0_01490b
U1 V1 W1 PE On period action action error

M1 N
M
PE 3~
Main circuit
Possibility 1b: Possibility 1c:
Inline circuit with all-range Inline circuit with line and
protection SITOR fuse
(line and semiconductor protection) (semiconductor protection only)
1) Permissible values for main and control voltage, see "Technical

specifications".
2)
Because the output is parameterized to "Motor ON", the start command is
automatically active after the reset command and a new, automatic restart
will take place. This applies especially in case of motor protection tripping.
For safety reasons we recommend connecting the group error output (ter-
minals 95/96) in series with the output parameterized to "Motor ON".

3RW Soft Starters

Possibility 2: Possibility 2:
Inline circuit with main contactor Control of a main contactor and control by means of PLC
L1 3/N/PE 400 V AC 1), 50 Hz L1 1/N/PE 230 V AC 1), 50 Hz
L2
L3
Q1 F2 +24 V DC
PLC outputs PLC inputs
M Start 2) Reset
(optional
F3 semiconductor PTC type A or
protection fuse) Thermoclick
(optional line
Q21 contactor if floating
switching of the
Motor right
Trip Reset
No action
No action
L1 L2 L3 motor is planned)
PS 1
Q11
PE Switch-on duration Group error
T1 T2 T3
+
A2 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 96 98
No action No action NSB0_01496b
NSB0_01495b
U1 V1 W1 PE Q21
N (optional line contactor
M1 M if floating switching
PE 3~ of the motor is planned)
1)
Permissible values for main and control voltage, see "Technical
specifications".
2)
The start command (e. g. from the PLC) must be reset prior to a reset com-
mand because a new, automatic restart will take place automatically if a
start command is active after the reset command. This applies especially
in case of motor protection tripping.
For safety reasons we recommend incorporating the group error output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.

3RW Soft Starters

Possibility 3a: Possibility 3a:
Inline circuit with ramp-down function DC braking3) Control of the DC braking contactor3)
(for device types 3RW44 22 to 3RW44 25)
L2
L3
Q1 F2 +24 V DC
PLC output
M Start 2) Reset
(optional
F3 semi- PTC type A or
conductor Thermoclick
protection)
L1 L2 L3
Q91
Q11
No action
No action
Reset
T1 T2 T3

Q91 Q91 Q91
PE DC braking contactor 3)
2
96 +
A2 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 98
Switch-on duration Q91 No action Group error NSB0_01502a
NSB0_01501b
U1 V1 W1 PE
M1 N
M
PE 3~

Possibility 3b: Possibility 3b:
Inline circuit with ramp-down function DC braking3) Control of the DC braking contactor3)
(for device types 3RW44 26 to 3RW44 47)

L2
L3
+24 V DC
Q1 F2
PLC output
M Start 2) Reset
(optional
F3 semi- PTC type A or
conductor Thermoclick
protection)
L1 L2 L3
Motor right
Q11
No action
No action
Reset
PS 1
T1 T2 T3
K4 K4
Q91 Q92 PE DC braking contactor 3)
3 3
96 +
Q92 Q91 A2 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 98
Q91 Q92 Switch-on duration 4) No action Group error NSB0_01504a
K4
NSB0_01503b
U1 V1 W1 PE
M1 N
M
PE 3~
1)
Permissible values for main and control voltage, see 3) If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking con-
"Technical specifications". tactor is required.
2)
Caution: Risk of restarting! If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor
The start command (e. g. from the PLC) must be reset prior to a reset com- must be used in addition. For type see "Fuse Assignment (Inline Circuit)"
mand because a new, automatic restart will take place automatically if a on pages 7/47 to 7/49.
start command is active after the reset command. This applies especially For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor) we recom-
in case of motor protection tripping. mend the function "DC braking".
For safety reasons we recommend incorporating the group error output The output 2 must be switched over to "DC braking contactor".
4)
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller. Auxiliary relay K4, e. g.:
LZX:RT4A4T30 (230 V AC rated control supply voltage),
LZX:RT4A4S15 (115 V AC rated control supply voltage).

3RW Soft Starters

Possibility 4a: Possibility 4b: Possibility 4:
Inside-delta circuit Change of direction of rotation for Control by means of PLC
inside-delta circuit
L1 1/N/PE 230 V AC 1), 50 Hz
F2 +24 V DC
PLC outputs PLC inputs
M Start 2) Reset
PTC type A or
Thermoclick
Motor right
Trip Reset
No action
No action
PE Group error
+
A2 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 96 98
Switch-on duration No action No action NSB0_01498b
PE
N
1) Permissible values for main and control voltage, see

2) Caution: Risk of restarting!
The start command (e. g. from the PLC) must be reset prior to a reset com-
mand because a new, automatic restart will take place automatically if a
start command is active after the reset command. This applies especially
in case of motor protection tripping.
For safety reasons we recommend incorporating the group error output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.

Control Products
Class 73, 74

3RW Soft Starters
Notes

Solid-State Switching Devices
SIRIUS
Contents Pages
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/2
Solid-state switching devices
General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/3
Solid-state switching devices for resistive loads
Solid-state relays
3RF21 solid-state relays, single-phase, 22.5 mm. . . . . . 8/8
3RF20 solid-state relays, single-phase, 45 mm . . . . . . . 8/9
3RF22 solid-state relays, three-phase, 45 mm. . . . . . . 8/10
Solid-state contactors
General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/11
3RF23 solid-state contactors, single-phase. . . . . . . . . . 8/12
3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/14
Solid-state switching devices for switching motors
General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/15
3RF34 solid-state contactors, 3-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/16
3RF34 solid-state reversing contactors, 3-phase . . . . . 8/17
3RF29 Function modules
Assignment of modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/18
Converters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/23
Load monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/24
Heating current monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/25
Power controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/26
Power control regulators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/27
Technical data
Solid-state relays
3RF21 solid-state relays, single-phase, 22.5 mm. . . . . 8/29
3RF20 solid-state relays, single-phase, 45 mm . . . . . . 8/32
3RF22 solid-state relays, three-phase, 45 mm. . . . . . . 8/34
3RF23 solid-state contactors, single-phase. . . . . . . . . . 8/36
3RF24 solid-state contactors, three-phase. . . . . . . . . . 8/39
3RF34 solid-state contactors, three-phase. . . . . . . . . . 8/41
3RF29 Function modules
Converters, load monitors, power controller, .
heating current monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/46
Power control regulators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/48
Thermal data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/49
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/63
Wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/72

Introduction
Overview
3RF21 3RF20 3RF22 3RF23 3RF24 3RF34 (Motor) 3RF29

Order No. Page
SIRIUS solid-state switching devices for switching resistive loads
Solid-state relays
22.5 mm solid-state relays, • Widths of 22.5 mm and 45 mm 3RF21, 8/9
45 mm solid-state relays • Compact and space-saving design 3RF20 8/10
• "Zero-point switching" version 3RF22 8/43
• Mounting onto existing heat sinks
Solid-state contactors • Complete units comprising a solid-state relay and an optimized heat sink, 3RF23 8/24
"ready to use" 3RF24 8/46
• Compact and space-saving design
• Versions for resistive loads "zero-point switching"
and inductive loads "instantaneous switching"
• Special versions "Low Noise" and "Short-Circuit Resistant" 8/8, 8/12
Function modules For extending the functionality of the 3RF21 solid-state relays and the 3RF23
solid-state contactors for many different applications:
Converters • For converting an analog input signal into an on/off ratio; 3RF29 00-0EA18 8/13
can also be used on 3RF22 and 3RF24 3-phase switching devices
Load monitoring • For load monitoring of one or more loads (partial loads) 3RF29 20-0FA08, 8/14
3RF29 .0-0GA..
Heating current monitoring • For load monitoring of one or more loads (partial loads); 3RF29 ..-0JA.. 8/14
remote teach
Power control regulators • For supplying the current by means of a solid-state switching device de- 3RF29 ..-0KA. 8/14
pending on a setpoint value.
There is a choice of full-wave control and generalized phase control.
Power controllers • For supplying the current by means of a solid-state switching device 3RF29 .0-0HA.. 8/15
depending on a setpoint value.
Closed-loop control: Full-wave control or generalized phase control
SIRIUS Innovations solid-state switching devices for switching motors
Solid-state contactors • Complete "ready to use" units with an integrated insulated heatsink 3RF34 8/16
Solid-state reversing contactors • Compact and space-saving design 8/17
• Version for motors, "instantaneous switching"
Nomenclature Guide
3RF2 0 20 - 1 A A 0 2
SIRIUS SC Type Rating Terminal Type Switching Control Phases Coil Type Power Voltage
0 = 45 mm Relay 1 = Screw A = Zero Point A = 1-phase 0 = 24 VDC 2 = 24 - 230 VAC

1 = 22.5 mm Relay 2 = Spring B = Instantaneous B = 2-phase 2 = 110 - 230 VAC 4 = 230 - 460 VAC
2 = 3-phase 45 mm Relay 3 = Ring Tounge C = Low Noise C = 3-phase 4 = 4 - 30 VDC 5 = 48 - 600 VAC
3 = Contactor D = Short Circuit 5 = 230 VAC 6 = 400 - 600 VAC
4 = 3-phase Contactor
9 = Function Module
Note: This is only a guide to decode the model number. All possible combinations of these are not produced.
Character of "3" in position four indicates Sirius Innovations

General data
Overview
3RF21 3RF20 3RF22 3RF23 3RF24 3RF34 (Motor) 3RF29
SIRIUS 3RF2 solid-state switching devices devices are constructed with complete insulation and can be
mounted directly to 3RV1 MSPs and SIRIUS overload relays,
Solid-state switching devices for resistive loads resulting in a very simple integration into motor feeders.
• Solid-state relays
• Solid-state contactors These three-phase solid-state contactors are equipped with a
two-phase control which is particularly suitable for typical motor
• Function modules current circuits without connecting to the neutral conductor.
Solid-state switching devices for switching motors Important features:
• Solid-state contactors • Insulated enclosure with integrated heat sink
• Solid state reversing contactors • Degree of protection IP20
The most reliable solution for any application • Integrated mounting foot to snap on a standard mounting rail
or for assembly onto a support plate
Compared to electro mechanical contactors, our SIRIUS 3RF2
solid-state switching devices stand out due to their considerably • Variety of connection methods
longer service life. Thanks to the high product quality, their • Plug-in control connection
switching is extremely precise, reliable and, above all, insuscep- • Display via LEDs
tible to faults. With its variable connection methods and a wide
spread of control voltages, the SIRIUS 3RF2 family is universally Selecting solid-state contactors
applicable. Depending on the individual requirements of the ap- The solid-state contactors are selected on the basis of details of
plication, our modular switchgear can also be quite easily ex- the network, the load and the ambient conditions. As the
panded by the addition of standardized function modules. solid-state contactors are already equipped with an optimally
Semiconductor relays matched heat sink, the selection process is considerably
simpler than that for solid-state relays.
SIRIUS SC semiconductor relays are suitable for surface mount-
ing on existing cooling surfaces. Installation is quick and easy, The following procedure is recommended:
involving just two screws. Depending on the nature of the heat • Determine the rated current of the load and the mains voltage
sink, the capacity reaches up to 88 A on resistive loads. The • Select a solid-state contactor with the same or higher rated
3RF21 semiconductor relays can be expanded with various current than the load
function modules to adapt them to individual applications.
• Testing the maximum permissible switching frequency based
The semiconductor relays are available in 2 different widths: on the characteristic curves. To do this, the starting current,
• 3RF21 semiconductor relay with a width of 22.5 mm the starting time and the motor load in the operating phase
must be known.
• 3RF20 and 3RF22 semiconductor relay with a width of 45 mm
• If the permissible switching frequency is below the desired
Both variants are only available in the "zero-point switching" ver- frequency, it is possible to achieve an increase by overdimen-
sion. This standard version is ideally suited for operation with re- sioning the motor.
sistive loads.
Selecting semiconductor relays Benefits
When selecting semiconductor relays, in addition to information • Devices with integrated heat sink, "ready to use"
about the power system, the load and the ambient conditions it • Compact and space-saving design
is also necessary to know details of the planned design. The • Reversing contactors with integrated interlocking
semiconductor relays can only conform to their specific techni-
cal specifications if they are mounted with appropriate care on
Application
an adequately dimensioned heat sink. The following procedure
is recommended: Standards and approvals
• Determine the rated current of the load and the mains voltage • IEC 60947-4-3
• Select the relay design and choose a semiconductor relay with • UL 508, CSA for North America1)
higher rated current than the load requires • CE marking for Europe
• Determine the thermal resistance of the proposed heat sink • C-Tick approval for Australia
1)
• Check the correct relay size with the aid of the diagram Please note: For reversing motor applications use overvoltage protection
device Type 3TX7462-3L; max. cut-off-voltage 6000 V; min. energy han-
Solid-state contactors for switching motors dling capability 100 J.
The solid-state contactors for switching motors are intended for

frequently switching on and off three-phase current operating
mechanisms up to 5 HP and reversing up to 3 HP. The

General data
Type Solid-state relays Solid-state contactors Function modules

1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase Converter Load monitoring Heating Power Power
22.5 mm 45 mm 45 mm Basic Extended current control- regula-
monitoring lers tors
Usage
Simple use of existing solid-state -- -- -- -- -- --
relays
Complete device "Ready to use" -- -- -- -- -- --
Space-saving -- -- -- -- --
Can be extended with modular -- -- -- -- -- -- --
function modules
Frequent switching and monitor- -- -- -- -- -- --
ing of loads and solid-state
relays/solid-state contactors
Monitoring of up to 6 partial -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
loads
Monitoring of more than 6 partial -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
loads
Control of the heating power -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
through an analog input
Power control -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Startup
Easy setting of setpoints with -- -- -- -- -- -- --
"Teach" button
"Remote Teach" input for setting -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
setpoints
Mounting
Mounting onto mounting rails or -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
mounting plates
Can be snapped directly onto a -- -- -- -- --
solid-state relay or contactor
For use with "Coolplate" heat sink -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Cable routing
Connection of load circuit as for -- --
controls
Connection of load circuit from -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
above
Function is available
Function is possible
Note: Permissible for use at altitudes of more than 2500 m above sea level with
the following derating for 3RF2 Devices:
Site altitude 2500 m above sea level:
•Reduction of rated insulation voltage to 0,93 x Ui
•Reduction of load current to 0,93 x Ie
These ratings apply to a maximum ambient temperature
of 40 °C (140 °F).

General data
3RF24 three-phase solid-state contactors

Benefits
The compact design enables small compact units with currents
• Considerable space savings thanks to a width of only 22.5 mm
up to 50 A. All special features of the solid-state relays for saving
• Variety of connection techniques: screw connection, spring- time and space are effective here too.
type connection or ring terminal end, makes for easy
terminations Example plastic machine industry:
• Flexible for a wide range of applications with function modules Thanks to their high switching endurance, SIRIUS SC semicon-
for retrofitting ductor switching devices are ideally suited for use in the control
• Possibility of fuseless short-circuit resistant design of electroheat. This is because the more precise the temperature
regulation process has to be, the higher the switching frequency
Advantages: needs to be. The accurate regulation of electroheat is used for
• Saves time and costs with easy wiring, simple installation and example in many processes in the plastic machine industry:
fast commissioning • Band heaters heat the extrudate to the correct temperature in
• Extremely long life, low maintenance, rugged and reliable plastic extruders
• Space-saving and safe thanks to side-by-side mounting up to • Heat emitters heat plastic blanks to the correct temperature
an ambient temperature of +60 °C • Heat drums dry plastic granules
• Modular design: standardized function modules and heat sinks • Heating channels keep molds at the correct temperature in
can be used in conjunction with 22.5 mm style semiconductor order to manufacture different plastic parts without defects.
relays to satisfy unique application requirements
The powerful SIRIUS SC semiconductor relays and contactors
• Vibration-resistant and shock-resistant spring-loaded terminal can be used to control several heating loads at the same time.
connection system provides a superior connection even under By using a load monitoring module the individual partial loads
tough conditions can easily be monitored, and in the event of a failure a signal is
generated which can be sent to the controller.
Area of application Protecting the semiconductor relays and semiconductor contac-
tors with 5 SY supplemental protectors.
Applications
Short-circuit protection and line protection with 5 SY supplemen-
Solid-state relays tal protectors is easy to achieve with SIRIUS SC semiconductor
SIRIUS solid-state relays are suitable for surface mounting on relays and semiconductor contactors in comparison with
existing cooling surfaces. Installation is quick and easy, designing load feeders with fuses. A special version of the
involving just two screws. The special technology of the power semiconductor contactors can be protected against damage in
semiconductor ensures there is excellent thermal contact with the case of a short-circuit with 5 SY supplementary protector
the heat sink. Depending on the nature of the heat sink, the with type B tripping characteristic. This allows the low-cost and
capacity reaches up to 88 A on resistive loads. simple design of fuseless load feeders with full protection of
the switching device.
The solid-state relays are available in three different versions:
• 3RF21 single-phase solid-state relay with a width of 22.5 mm Design
• 3RF20 single-phase solid-state relay with a width of 45 mm
There is no typical design of a load feeder with semiconductor
• 3RF22 three-phase solid-state relay with a width of 45 mm relays or semiconductor contactors; instead, the great variety of
The 3RF21 and 3RF22 solid-state relays can be expanded with connection systems and control voltages offers universal
various function modules to adapt them to individual applica- application opportunities. SIRIUS SC semiconductor relays and
tions. semiconductor contactors can be installed in fuseless or fused
feeders, as required.
There are special versions with which it is even possible to
The complete units consist of a solid-state relay plus optimized
achieve short-circuit strength in a fuseless design.
heat sink, and are therefore ready to use. They offer defined
rated currents to make selection as easy as possible. Depend- Mounting regulations
ing on the version, current intensities of up to 88 A are achieved.
Like all of our solid-state switching devices, one of their parti-
cular advantages is their compact and space-saving design.
With their insulated mounting foot they can easily be snapped >70 (2,75)
onto a standard mounting rail, or they can be mounted on carrier
plates with fixing screws. This insulation enables them to be
>20 (0,8)
>20 (0,8)
>20 (0,8)
used in circuits with protective extra-low voltage (PELV) or safety

extra-low voltage (SELV) in building engineering. For other appli-
3RF24..
3RF24..
cations, such as for extended personal safety, the heat sink can
be grounded through a screw terminal.
The solid-state contactors are available in two different versions:
NSB0_01814
• 3RF23 single-phase solid-state contactors

>50 (2)
• 3RF24 three-phase solid-state contactors
3RF22 three-phase solid-state relay with a width of 45 mm
With its compact design, which stays the same even at currents Distances for stand-alone installation
of up to 55 A, the 3RF22 solid-state relay is the ultimate in space-
saving construction, at a width of 45 mm. Installation on cooling
surfaces is quick and easy, involving just two screws. The logical
connection arrangement, with the power infeed from above and
connection of the load from below, ensures tidy installation in the
control cabinet.

General data
Performance characteristics
Functions
The performance of the semiconductor switching devices are
Connection substantially determined by the type of power semiconductors
All SIRIUS SC semiconductor switching devices are character- used and the internal design. In the case of the SIRIUS SC semi-
ized by the great variety of connection methods. You can conductor contactors and semiconductor relays, only thyristors
choose between the following connection techniques: are used instead of less powerful Triacs.
SIGUT connection system (screw) Two of the most important features of thyristors are the blocking
voltage and the maximum load integral:
The SIGUT connection system is the standard among industrial
switching devices. Open terminals and a plus-minus screw are Blocking voltage
just two features of this technology. Two conductors of up to Thyristors with a high blocking voltage can also be operated
6 mm² 1) can be connected in just one terminal. As a result, without difficulty in power systems with high interference volt-
loads of up to 50 A can be connected. ages. Separate protective measures, such as a protective circuit
Spring-loaded connection system with a varistor, are not necessary in most cases.
This innovative technology holds the conductor without screw With SIRIUS SC, for example, thyristors with 800 V blocking volt-
connection. This means that very high vibration resistance is age are fitted for operation in power systems up to 230 V. Thyris-
achieved. Two conductors of up to 2.5 mm² 1) can be connected tors with up to 1600 V are used for power systems with higher
to each terminal. As a result, loads of up to 20 A can be dealt voltages.
with. Maximum load integral
Ring terminal end connection One of the purposes of specifying the maximum load integral
The ring terminal end connection is equipped with an M5 screw. (I²t) is to determine the rating of the short-circuit protection. Only
Ring terminal ends of up to 25 mm² can be connected. In this a large power semiconductor with a correspondingly high I²t
way it is possible to connect conductors with up to 88 A safely. value can be given appropriate protection against destruction
Additional finger safety can be provided with a special cover. from a short-circuit by means of a protective device matched to
the application. However, SIRIUS SC is also characterized by the
Switching types optimum matching of the thyristors (I²t value) with the rated cur-
rents. The rated currents specified on the devices in conform-
In order to guarantee an optimized control method for different ance with EN 60947-4-3 were confirmed by extensive testing.
loads, the functionality of our semiconductor switching devices
can be adapted accordingly.
The "zero-point switching" method is ideal for resistive loads,
i.e. where the power semiconductor is activated at zero voltage.
For inductive loads, on the other hand, for example in the case
of valves, it is better to go with "instantaneous switching". By
distributing the ON point over the entire sine curve of the mains
voltage, disturbances are reduced to a minimum.
A special “low noise” version is available due to a special con-
trol, this special version can be used in public networks up to
16A without any additional measures such as interference sup-
pressor filters. As a result, it conforms to limit value curve class
B according to EN 60947-4-3 in terms of emitted interference.
Function
Two-phase controlled version
In many three-phase applications there is no need of a three-
phase controller. Loads in a delta circuit or wye circuit, which
have no connection to the neutral conductor, can be safely
switched on and off using only two phases.
Nevertheless, the 3RF22 and 3RF24 three-phase solid-state
switching devices provide the possibility of connecting all three
phases to the switching device, with the middle phase looped
directly through the device. Thanks to the lower power loss
compared to a three-phase controlled device it is possible for
the mounted accessories to be more compact.
Three-phase controlled version
This version is used in three-phase applications which have to
switch all phases on and off for system reasons or in the case of
loads in a wye circuit with connection to the neutral conductor.
1) For mm2 to AWG conversion see page 19/21 of Industrial Controls catalog.

General data

Designation Labeling area Color Order No. Std. Weight
(W x H ) Pack per pack
Qty approx.
mm x mm kg
Blank labels
Unit labeling plates 10 x 7 Pastel 3RT19 00-1SB10 816 units 0.110
for "SIRIUS" 1) turquoise
20 x 7 Pastel 3RT19 00-1SB20 340 units 0.220
turquoise
Labels for sticking 19 x 6 Pastel 3RT19 00-1SB60 3060 unit 0.150
for "SIRIUS" turquoise
19 x 6 Zinc 3RT19 00-1SD60 3060 units 0.150
Unit labeling plates yellow
(1 frame = 20 units)
1) Computer labeling system for individual inscription of unit labeling plates
available from:
murrplastik Systemtechnik GmbH (http://www.murrplastik.de).
Integration
Notes on integration in the load feeders Alternatively, if there is lower loading, protection can also be pro-
vided by standard fuses or miniature circuit breakers. This pro-
The SIRIUS solid-state switching devices are very easy to inte- tection is achieved by overdimensioning the solid-state switch-
grate into the load feeders thanks to their industrial connection ing devices accordingly. The technical specifications and the
method and design. product data sheets contain details both about the solid-state
Particular attention must however be paid to the circumstances fuse protection itself and about use of the devices with conven-
of the installation and ambient conditions, as the performance of tional protection equipment.
the solid-state switching devices is largely dependent on these. Semiconductor motor and reversing contactors can be easily
Depending on the version, certain restrictions must be ob- combined with the 3RV motor starter protectors and 3RB2 over-
served. Detailed information, for example in relation to solid- load relay from the SIRIUS modular system. Thus, fuseless and
state contactors about the minimum spacing and to solid-state fuse motor feeders can be designed easily and in a space-
relays about the choice of heat sink, is given in the technical saving manner.
specifications (see Technical Information LV 1 T or our Mall) and
the product data sheets. The solid-state switching devices for resistive loads are suitable
for interference-free operation in industrial networks without fur-
Despite the rugged power semiconductors that are used, solid- ther measures. If they are used in public networks, it may be
state switching devices respond more sensitively to short- necessary for conducted interference to be reduced by means
circuits in the load feeder. Consequently, special precautions of filters. This does not include the special solid-state contactors
have to be taken against destruction, depending on the type of of type 3RF23..-.CA.. "Low Noise". These comply with the class
design. B limit values up to a rated current of 16 A. If other versions are
Siemens generally recommends using SITOR semiconductor used, and at currents of over 16 A, standard filters can be used
protection fuses. These fuses also provide protection against in order to comply with the limit values. The decisive factors
destruction in the event of a short-circuit even when the solid- when it comes to selecting the filters are essentially the current
state contactors and solid-state relays are fully utilized. loading and the other parameters (operational voltage, design
type, etc.) in the load feeder.
Suitable filters can be ordered from EPCOS AG.
You can find more information on the Internet at:
http://www.epcos.com

Solid-State Relays
22.5 mm semiconductor relays
single phase selection
3RF21 20-1AA02 3RF21 20-2AA02 3RF21 20-3AA02

2)
Type Maximum achiev- Screw connection Spring-loaded connec- Ring cable connection Std. Weight
current able power for type tion 3) Pack per pack
1) current and Ue = Qty approx.
115 V 230 V 400 V
A kW kW kW Order No. Order No. Order No. kg

Zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 24 V to 230 V
20 2.3 4.6 - 3RF21 20-1AA@2 3RF21 20-2AA@2 3RF21 20-3AA@2 1 unit 0.075
30 3.5 6.9 - 3RF21 30-1AA@2 - - 1 unit 0.075
70 8.1 16.1 - 3RF21 70-1AA@2 - - 1 unit 0.075
Zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 24 V to 230 V, control DC 4 ... 30 V
20 2.3 4.6 - 3RF21 20-1AA42 3RF21 20-2AA42 - 1 unit 0.075
30 3.5 6.9 - 3RF21 30-1AA42 - - 1 unit 0.075
20 - 4.6 8 3RF21 20-1AA@4 3RF21 20-2AA@4 3RF21 20-3AA@4 1 unit 0.075
30 - 6.9 12 3RF21 30-1AA@4 - - 1 unit 0.075
50 - 11.5 20 3RF21 50-1AA@4 3RF21 50-2AA@4 4) 3RF21 50-3AA@4 1 unit 0.075
70 - 16.1 28 3RF21 70-1AA@4 - - 1 unit 0.075
20 - 4.6 8 3RF21 20-1AA45 3RF21 20-2AA45 - 1 unit 0.075
30 - 6.9 12 3RF21 30-1AA45 - - 1 unit 0.075
50 - 11.5 20 3RF21 50-1AA45 - - 1 unit 0.075
70 - 16.1 28 3RF21 70-1AA45 - - 1 unit 0.075
90 - 20.7 36 3RF21 90-1AA45 - 3RF21 90-3AA44 1 unit 0.075
Zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 600 V, blocking voltage 1600 V
30 - - 12 3RF21 30-1AA@6 - - 1 unit 0.075
50 - - 20 3RF21 50-1AA@6 3RF21 50-2AA@6 3RF21 50-3AA@6 1 unit 0.075
70 - - 28 3RF21 70-1AA@6 - - 1 unit 0.075
Zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 600 V, control 24 V DC low power
70 - - 28 3RF21 70-1AA05-0KN0 - - 1 unit 0.075
Zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 24 V to 230 V, control 110 V to 230 V
50 - - - 3RF21 50-1BA22 - - 1 unit 0.075
instantaneous switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 460 V, control 24 V DC
acc. to EN 61131-2
20 - - - 3RF21 20-1BA04 - - 1 unit 0.075
30 - - - 3RF21 30-1BA04 - - 1 unit 0.075
50 - - - 3RF21 50-1BA04 - - 1 unit 0.075
70 - - - 3RF21 70-1BA04 - - 1 unit 0.075
90 - - - 3RF21 90-1BA04 - - 1 unit 0.075
Zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 600 V, control 24 V DC
acc. to EN 61131-2, blocking voltage 1600 V
50 - - - 3RF21 50-1BA06 - - 1 unit 0.075
Low noise3) - zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 460 V, control 24 V DC
acc. to EN 61131-2
70 - - - 3RF21 70-1CA04 - - 1 unit 0.075
Order No. extension for
rated control supply voltage Us
DC 24 V acc. to EN 61131-2 0 0 0
AC 110 V... 230 V 2 2 2
Other rated control supply voltages on request.
1) The type current provides information about the performance of the semi- 3) Please note that this version can only be used for a rated current of up to
conductor relay. The actual permitted operational current Ie can be smaller 20 A and a conductor cross section of 2.5 mm2. See page 19/21 of Indus-
depending on the connection method and cooling conditions. trial controls catalog for mm2 to AWG conversion chart.
2) Please note that this version can only be used for a rated current of up to 4) 50 A version with 24 AC/DC control - 3RF21 50-2AA14.
50 A and a conductor cross section of 10 mm2.
Note: See page 19/21 of Industrial Controls catalog for mm2 to AWG
conversion chart.
8/8 Product Category: SIRIUS SC Siemens Industry, Inc.

Solid-State Relays
45 mm semiconductor relays
Fused design with semiconductor protection

(similar to type of coordination "2")1)
The semiconductor protection for the SIRIUS SC control gear If a fuse is used with a higher rated current than specified, semi-
can be used with different protective devices. This allows conductor protection is no longer guaranteed. However, smaller
protection by means of LV HRC fuses of operational class gL/gG fuses with a lower rated current for the load can be used without
or supplementary protectors. The table on page 7/21 lists the problems.
maximum permissible fuses for each SIRIUS SC controlgear. For protective devices with operational class gL/gG and for
SITOR full range fuses 3NE1, the minimum cross-sections for the
conductor to be connected must be taken into account.
3RF20 20-1AA02
Type Maximum achiev- Screw connection 2) Spring-loaded Ring cable connection Std. Weight
current able power for type connection 3) Pack per pack
1) current and Ue = Qty approx.
115 V 230 V 400 V

20 2.3 4.6 - 3RF20 20-1AA@2 - - 1 unit 0.085
30 3.5 6.9 - 3RF20 30-1AA@2 - - 1 unit 0.085
50 5.8 11.5 - 3RF20 50-1AA@2 - - 1 unit 0.085
70 8.1 16.1 - 3RF20 70-1AA@2 - - 1 unit 0.085
88 10.4 20.7 - 3RF20 90-1AA@2 - - 1 unit 0.085
20 - - - - 3RF21 20-2AA42 - 1 unit 0.075
20 - 4.6 8 3RF20 20-1AA@4 - - 1 unit 0.085
30 - 6.9 12 3RF20 30-1AA@4 - - 1 unit 0.085
50 - 11.5 20 3RF20 50-1AA@4 - - 1 unit 0.085
70 - 16.1 28 3RF20 70-1AA@4 - - 1 unit 0.085
88 - 20.7 36 3RF20 90-1AA@4 - - 1 unit 0.085
20 - - - 3RF20 20-1AA42 3RF21 20-2AA42 - 1 unit 0.085
30 - - - 3RF20 30-1AA42 - - 1 unit 0.085
20 - 4.6 8 3RF20 20-1AA45 - - 1 unit 0.085
50 - 11.5 20 3RF20 50-1AA45 - - 1 unit 0.085
70 - 16.1 28 3RF20 70-1AA45 - - 1 unit 0.085
90 - 20.7 36 3RF20 90-1AA45 - - 1 unit 0.085
30 - - 12 3RF20 30-1AA@6 - - 1 unit 0.085
50 - - 20 3RF20 50-1AA@6 - - 1 unit 0.085
70 - - 28 3RF20 70-1AA@6 - - 1 unit 0.085
88 - - 36 3RF20 90-1AA@6 - - 1 unit 0.085
Zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 460 V, control DC 4 ... 30 V switching
50 - - - 3RF20 50-1BA44 - - 1 unit 0.085
Instantaneous switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 460 V, control 24 V DC
acc. to EN 61131-2
30 - - - 3RF20 30-1BA04 - - 1 unit 0.085
DC 24 V acc. to EN 61131-2 0 0 0
AC 110 V... 230 V 2 2 2
1) The type current provides information about the performance of the semi-
conductor relay. The actual permitted operational current Ie can be smaller
depending on the connection method and cooling conditions.
2) Please note that this version can only be used for a rated current of up to
50 A and a conductor cross section of 10mm2.
3) Screw terminals and spring terminals (control current side).
Note: For mm2 to AWG conversion chart see Industrial Controls catalog page
19/21.
Siemens Industry, Inc. Product Category: SIRIUS SC 8/9

Solid-State Relays
3RF22 solid-state relays, 3-phase, 45 mm

Selecting solid-state relays • Determine the rated current of the load and the mains voltage
When selecting solid-state relays, in addition to information • Select the relay design and choose a solid-state relay with
about the power system, the load and the ambient conditions it higher rated current than the load
is also necessary to know details of the planned design. The • Determine the thermal resistance of the proposed heat sink
solid-state relays can only conform to their specific technical • Check the correct relay size with the aid of the diagrams.
specifications if they are mounted with appropriate care on an
adequately dimensioned heat sink. The following procedure is
recommended:
Type current1) Rated control supply volt- Screw terminal2) Weight
age per pack
approx.
Order No.
A V kg
Zero-point switching
Rated operational voltage Ue 48 V ... 600 V
Two-phase controlled
30 4 ... 30 V DC 3RF22 30-1AB@5 0.150
55 3RF22 55-1AB@5 0.150
Three-phase controlled
30 4 ... 30 V DC 3RF22 30-1AC@5 0.150
55 3RF22 55-1AC@5 0.150
3RF22 30-1AB45 110 V AC 3

4 ... 30 V DC 4
Type current1) Rated control supply volt- Spring-loaded terminals3) Weight

age per pack
approx.
Order No.
A V kg
30 4 ... 30 V DC 3RF22 30-2AB45 0.150
55 3RF22 55-2AB45 0.150
30 4 ... 30 V DC 3RF22 30-2AC45 0.150
55 3RF22 55-2AC45 0.150
3RF22 30-2AB45
Type current1) Rated control supply volt- Ring terminal end connection Weight
age per pack
approx.
Order No.
A V kg
30 4 ... 30 V DC 3RF22 30-3AB45 0.150
55 3RF22 55-3AB45 0.150
30 4 ... 30 V DC 3RF22 30-3AC45 0.150
55 3RF22 55-3AC45 0.150
3RF22 30-3AB45
1) The type current provides information about the performance of the 2) Please note that the version with an M4 screw terminal can only be used
solid-state relay. for a rated current of up to approx. 50 A and a conductor cross-section of
The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller 10 mm2.
depending on the connection method and cooling conditions. 3) Please note that this version can only be used for a rated current of up to
approx. 20 A and a conductor cross-section of 2.5 mm2.

Solid-State Contactors
General data
Overview
Rated current of the Example Max. conductor Minimum cable
The complete units consist of a solid-state relay plus optimized miniature circuit Type1) cross-section length from
heat sink, and are therefore ready to use. They offer defined breaker contactor to
rated currents to make selection as easy as possible. Depend- load
ing on the version, current strengths of up to 88 A are achieved. 6A 5SY4 106-6, 1 mm2 5m
Like all of our solid-state switching devices, one of their particu- 5SX2 106-6
lar advantages is their compact and space-saving design. 10 A 5SY4 110-6, 1.5 mm2 8m
5SX2 110-6
With their insulated mounting foot they can easily be snapped 16 A 5SY4 116-6, 1.5 mm2 12 m
onto a standard mounting rail, or they can be mounted on sup- 5SX2 116-6
port plates with fixing screws. This insulation enables them to be 16 A 5SY4 116-6, 2.5 mm2 20 m
used in circuits with protective extra-low voltage (PELV) or safety 5SX2 116-6
extra-low voltage (SELV) in building management systems. For 20 A 5SY4 120-6, 2.5 mm2 20 m
other applications, such as for extended personal safety, the 5SX2 120-6
heat sink can be grounded through a screw terminal. 25 A 5SY4 125-6, 2.5 mm2 26 m
The solid-state contactors are available in 2 different versions: 5SX2 125-6
• 3RF23 single-phase solid-state contactors, 1) The miniature circuit breakers can be used up to a maximum rated voltage
of 480 V!
• 3RF24 three -phase solid-state contactors
Single-phase versions
The 3RF23 solid-state contactors can be expanded with various
function modules to adapt them to individual applications.
Version for resistive loads, "zero-point switching"
This standard version is often used for switching space heaters
on and off.
Version for inductive loads, "instantaneous switching"
In this version the solid-state contactor is specifically matched to
inductive loads. Whether it is a matter of frequent actuation of the
valves in a filling plant or starting and stopping small operating
mechanisms in packet distribution systems, operation is carried
out safely and noiselessly.
Special "Low noise" version
Thanks to a special control circuit, this special version can be
used in public networks up to 16 A without any additional mea-
sures such as interference suppressor filters. As a result it con-
forms to limit value curve class B according to EN 60947-4-3 in
terms of emitted interference.
Special "Short-circuit-proof" version The setup and installation above can also be used for the solid-
Skillful matching of the power semiconductor with the perfor- state relays with a I2t value of at least 6600 A2s.
mance capacity of the solid-state contactor means that "short- Three-phase versions
circuit strength" can be achieved with a standard miniature cir-
cuit breaker. In combination with a B-type MCB or a conven- The three-phase solid-state contactors for resistive loads up to
tional line protection fuse, the result is a short-circuit resistant 50 A are available with
feeder. • two-phase control (suitable in particular for circuits without
In order to achieve problem-free short-circuit protection by connection to the neutral conductor) and
means of miniature circuit breakers, however, certain boundary • three-phase control (suitable for star circuits with connection to
conditions must be observed. As the magnitude and duration of the neutral conductor or for applications in which the system
the short-circuit current are determined not only by the short-cir- requires all phases to be switched).
cuit breaking response of the miniature circuit breaker but also
the properties of the wiring system, such as the internal resis- The converter function module can be snapped onto both ver-
tance of the input to the network and damping by controls and sions for the simple power control of AC loads by means of ana-
cables, particular attention must also be paid to these parame- log signals.
ters. The necessary cable lengths are therefore shown for the • Check the correct contactor size with the aid of the rated cur-
main factor, the line resistance, in the table above right. rent diagram, taking account of the design conditions.
The following miniature circuit breakers with a type B tripping
characteristic and 10 kA or 6 kA breaking capacity protect the
3RF23..-.DA.. solid-state contactors in the event of short-circuits
on the load and the specified conductor cross-sections and
lengths:

Solid-State Relays
SIRIUS SC semiconductor contactors

Selecting solid-state contactors The following procedure is recommended:
The semiconductor contactors are selected on the basis of de- • Determine the rated current of the load and the mains voltage
tails of the power system, the load and the ambient conditions. • Select a semiconductor contactor with the same or higher
As the semiconductor contactors are already equipped with an rated current than the load
optimally matched heat sink, the selection process is consider- • Check the correct contactor size with the aid of the rated cur-
ably simpler than that for semiconductor relays. rent diagram, taking account of the design conditions
3RF23 10-1AA02 3RF23 30-1AA02 3RF23 40-1AA02 3RF23 50-3AA02 3RF23 70-3AA02 3RF23 90-3AA02
Type Maximum achiev- Screw connection Spring-loaded connec- Ring cable connection Std. Weight
current able power for tion Pack per pack
1)
Imax and Ue = Qty approx.
Imax. 115 V 230 V 400 V
10.5 1.2 2.4 - 3RF23 10-1AA@2 3RF23 10-2AA@2 3RF23 10-3AA@2 1 unit 0.136
30 3.5 6.9 - 3RF23 30-1AA@2 - 3RF23 30-3AA@2 1 unit 0.354
40 4.6 9.2 - 3RF23 40-1AA@2 - 3RF23 40-3AA@2 1 unit 0.496
50 6 12 - 3RF23 50-1AA@2 - 3RF23 50-3AA@2 1 unit 0.496
70 8 16 - - - 3RF23 70-3AA@2 1 unit 0.944
88 10 20 - - - 3RF23 90-3AA@2 1 unit 2.600
Zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 24 V to 230 V, control 24 V DC acc. to EN 61131-2 3)
50 - - - 3RF20 50-4AA02 - - 1 unit 0.085
20 - - - 3RF23 20-1AA02-0KN0 - - 1 unit 0.240
10.5 - 2.4 4.2 3RF23 10-1AA@4 3RF23 10-2AA@4 3RF23 10-3AA@4 1 unit 0.136
30 - 6.9 12 3RF23 30-1AA@4 - 3RF23 30-3AA@4 1 unit 0.354
40 - 9.2 16 3RF23 40-1AA@4 - 3RF23 40-3AA@4 1 unit 0.496
50 - 12 20 3RF23 50-1AA@4 - 3RF23 50-3AA@4 1 unit 0.496
70 - 16 28 - - 3RF23 70-3AA@4 1 unit 0.944
88 - 20 35 - - 3RF23 90-3AA@4 1 unit 2.600
Zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 24 V to 230 V, control 24 V AC/DC
10.5 - - - 3RF23 10-1AA12 - - 1 unit 0.165
50 - - - 3RF23 10-1AA04-0KN0 - - 1 unit 0.165
Zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 460 V, control 24 V AC/DC
10.5 - - - 3RF23 10-1AA14 - - 1 unit 0.165
20 - - - 3RF23 20-1AA14 - - 1 unit 0.240
30 - - - 3RF23 30-1AA14 - - 1 unit 0.400
40 - - - 3RF23 40-1AA14 - - 1 unit 0.550
50 - - - 3RF23 50-1AA14 - - 1 unit 0.550
10.5 - 2.4 4.2 3RF23 10-1AA45 - - 1 unit 0.135
20 - 4.6 8 3RF23 20-1AA45 - - 1 unit 0.204
30 - 6.9 12 3RF23 30-1AA45 - - 1 unit 0.354
40 - 9.2 16 3RF23 40-1AA45 - 3RF23 40-3AA45 1 unit 0.496
50 - 12 20 3RF23 50-1AA45 - - 1 unit 0.496
70 - 16 26 - - 3RF23 70-3AA45 1 unit 0.944
90 - 20 35 - - 3RF23 90-3AA45 1 unit 2.600
Zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 460 V, control 4 V ... 30 V DC
10.5 - - - 3RF23 10-1AA44 - - 1 unit 0.165
20 - - - 3RF23 20-1AA44 - 3RF23 20-3AA44 1 unit 0.240
30 - - - 3RF23 30-1AA44 - 3RF23 30-3AA44 1 unit 0.400
50 - - - 3RF23 50-1AA44 - 3RF23 50-3AA44 1 unit 0.400
10.5 - - 4.2 3RF23 10-1AA@6 3RF23 10-2AA@6 3RF23 10-3AA@6 1 unit 0.136
30 - - 12 3RF23 30-1AA@6 - 3RF23 30-3AA@6 1 unit 0.354
40 - - 16 3RF23 40-1AA@6 - 3RF23 40-3AA@6 1 unit 0.496
50 - - 20 3RF23 50-1AA@6 - 3RF23 50-3AA@6 1 unit 0.496
70 - - 28 - - 3RF23 70-3AA@6 1 unit 0.944
88 - - 35 - - 3RF23 90-3AA@6 1 unit 2.600
rated control supply voltage Us 0 0 0
DC 24 V acc. to EN 61131-2 2 2 2
AC 110 V ... 230 V
Other rated control supply voltages on request. conductor contactor. The actual permitted operational current Ie can be
smaller depending on the connection method and start-up conditions.
Derating acc. to curves from page 7/45, 7/46, 7/47.

Type Maximum achiev- Screw connection Spring-loaded connec- Ring cable connection Std. Weight per
current able power for tion Pack pack approx.
1)
Imax and Ue = Qty
Imax. 115 V 230 V 400 V
Instantaneous switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 24 V to 230 V
10.5 1.2 2.4 - 3RF23 10-1BA@2 - - 1 unit 0.136
20 2.3 4.6 - 3RF23 20-1BA@2 - - 1 unit 0.204
30 3.5 6.9 - 3RF23 30-1BA@2 - - 1 unit 0.354
40 4.6 9.2 - 3RF23 40-1BA@2 - - 1 unit 0.496
50 6 12 - 3RF23 50-1BA@2 - - 1 unit 0.496
70 8 16 - 3RF23 70-1BA@2 - 3RF23 70-3BA@2 1 unit 0.944
88 10 20 - 3RF23 90-1BA@2 - 3RF23 90-3BA@2 1 unit 2.600
Instantaneous switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 460 V
10.5 - 2.4 4.2 3RF23 10-1BA@4 - - 1 unit 0.136
20 - 4.6 8 3RF23 20-1BA@4 - - 1 unit 0.204
30 - 6.9 12 3RF23 30-1BA@4 - - 1 unit 0.354
40 - 9.2 16 3RF23 40-1BA@4 - - 1 unit 0.496
50 - 12 20 3RF23 50-1BA@4 - - 1 unit 0.496
70 - 16 28 3RF23 70-1BA@4 - 3RF23 70-3BA@4 1 unit 0.944
88 - 20 35 3RF23 90-1BA@4 - 3RF23 90-3BA@4 1 unit 2.600
Zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 600 V, control 110 V to 230 V
30 - - - 3RF23 30-1AA25 - - 1 unit 0.400
Instantaneous switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 600 V, blocking voltage 1600 V
10.5 - - 4.2 3RF23 10-1BA@6 - - 1 unit 0.136
20 - - 8 3RF23 20-1BA@6 - - 1 unit 0.204
30 - - 12 3RF23 30-1BA@6 - - 1 unit 0.354
40 - - 16 3RF23 40-1BA@6 - - 1 unit 0.496
50 - - 20 3RF23 50-1BA@6 - - 1 unit 0.496
70 - - 28 3RF23 70-1BA@6 - 3RF23 70-3BA@6 1 unit 0.944
88 - - 35 3RF23 90-1BA@6 - 3RF23 90-3BA@6 1 unit 2.600
Low noise, zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 24 V to 230 V
20 2.3 4.6 - 3RF23 20-1CA@2 3RF23 20-2CA@2 - 1 unit 0.204
30 - - - 3RF23 30-1CA@2 - - 1 unit 0.204
Low noise, zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 460 V
20 - 4.6 8 3RF23 20-1CA@4 3RF23 20-2CA@4 - 1 unit 0.204
Instantaneous switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 460 V,
control DC 4 ... 30 V switching
20 - - - 3RF23 20-1BA44 - - 1 unit 0.240
30 - - - 3RF23 30-1BA44 - - 1 unit 0.400
50 - - - 3RF23 50-1BA44 - - 1 unit 0.550
Short-circuit resistant with B-automatic device, zero-point switching,
rated operational voltage Ue = 24 V to 230 V
20 2.3 4.6 - 3RF23 20-1DA@2 3RF23 20-2DA22 3RF23 20-3DA@2 1 unit 0.204
Short-circuit resistant with B-automatic device, zero-point switching,
rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 460 V
20 - 4.6 8 3RF23 20-1DA@4 3RF23 20-2DA24 3RF23 20-3DA@4 1 unit 0.204
Low noise, zero-point switching, rated operational voltage Ue = 48 V to 460 V,
control 4 V to 30 V DC
70 - - 28 3RF21 70-1CA04 - - 1 unit 0.240
DC 24 V acc. to EN 61131-2 0 0 0
AC 110 V ... 230 V 2 2 2

conductor contactor. The actual permitted operational current Ie can be
Version Order No. Std. Weight per

Pack pack approx.
Qty
kg
Accessories
Terminal cover for 3RF21 semiconductor relays and 3RF23 semiconductor contactors 3RF29 00-3PA88 10 units 0.010
with ring terminal end (after simple adaptation, this terminal cover can also be used for
screw connection).
3RF29 00-3PA88

3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase

Type current1) Rated control DT Screw terminals Std. Weight
Imax supply voltage Us Pack per pack
Qty approx.
Order No. List
A V Price $ kg
per PU
10.5 4 ... 30 DC A 3RF24 10-1AB45 1 unit 0.320
20 B 3RF24 20-1AB45 1 unit 0.400
30 B 3RF24 30-1AB45 1 unit 0.540
40 B 3RF24 40-1AB45 1 unit 0.800
50 B 3RF24 50-1AB45 1 unit 1.100
10.5 110 AC A 3RF24 10-1AB35 1 unit 0.320
20 B 3RF24 20-1AB35 1 unit 0.400
30 B 3RF24 30-1AB35 1 unit 0.540
40 B 3RF24 40-1AB35 1 unit 0.800
50 B 3RF24 50-1AB35 1 unit 1.100
3RF24 20-1AB45
10.5 230 AC B 3RF24 10-1AB55 1 unit 0.320
20 B 3RF24 20-1AB55 1 unit 0.400
30 B 3RF24 30-1AB55 1 unit 0.540
40 B 3RF24 40-1AB55 1 unit 0.800
50 B 3RF24 50-1AB55 1 unit 1.100
10.5 4 ... 30 DC B 3RF24 10-1AC45 1 unit 0.320
20 B 3RF24 20-1AC45 1 unit 0.540
30 A 3RF24 30-1AC45 1 unit 0.800
40 B 3RF24 40-1AC45 1 unit 1.100
50 B 3RF24 50-1AC45 1 unit 1.850
10.5 110 AC B 3RF24 10-1AC35 1 unit 0.320
20 B 3RF24 20-1AC35 1 unit 0.540
30 A 3RF24 30-1AC35 1 unit 0.800
40 B 3RF24 40-1AC35 1 unit 1.100
50 B 3RF24 50-1AC35 1 unit 1.850
3RF24 10-1AC45
10.5 230 AC B 3RF24 10-1AC55 1 unit 0.320
20 B 3RF24 20-1AC55 1 unit 0.540
30 B 3RF24 30-1AC55 1 unit 0.800
40 B 3RF24 40-1AC55 1 unit 1.100
50 B 3RF24 50-1AC55 1 unit 1.850
1) The type current provides information about the performance capacity of
the solid-state contactor. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie
can be smaller depending on the connection method and start-up
conditions. For derating, see Technical Information on page 7/55, Charac-
teristic Curves.

Solid-State Contactors for Switching Motors
General data
Overview
Selecting solid-state contactors
The solid-state contactors are selected on the basis of details of
the network, the load and the ambient conditions.
The following procedure is recommended:
• Determine the rated current of the load and the mains volt-
age
• Select a solid-state contactor with the same or higher rated
current than the load
• Testing the maximum permissible switching frequency
based on the characteristic curves (see “Technical Informa-
tion”). To do this, the starting current, the starting time and
the motor loaded in the operating phase must be known.
• If the permissible switching frequency is under the desired
frequency, it is possible to achieve an increase only by
overdimensioning the motor and the solid-state contactor!
Solid-state contactor for direct-on-line starting
The solid-state contactors for switching motors are intended for Benefits
frequently switching on and off three-phase current operating
mechanisms up to 7.5 kW and reversing up to 3.0 kW. The • Units with integrated heat sink, “ready to use”
devices are constructed with complete insulation and can be • Compact and space-saving design
mounted directly on SIRIUS motor starter protectors, overload • Reversing contactors with integrated interlocking
relays and current monitoring relays, resulting in a very simple
integration into motor feeders.
Application
These three-phase solid-state contactors are equipped with a
two-phase control which is particularly suitable for typical motor Use in load feeders
current circuits without connecting to the neutral conductor. There is no typical design of a load feeder with solid-state relays
Important features: or solid-state contactors; instead, the great variety of connec-
• Insulated enclosure with integrated heat sink tion methods and control voltages offers universal application
opportunities. SIRIUS solid-state relays and solid-state contac-
• Degree of protection IP20
tors can be installed in fuseless or fused feeders, as required.
• Integrated mounting foot to snap on a standard mounting
rail or for assembly onto a support plate Standards and approvals
• Variety of connection methods • IEC 60947-4-2
• Plug-in control connection • UL 508, CSA for North America1)
• Display via LEDs • CE marking for Europe
• Wide voltage range for AC control supply voltage • C-Tick approval for Australia
Switching functions • CCC approval for China
The solid-state contactors for switching motors are “”instan- 1) Please note: Use overvoltage protection device; max. cut-off-voltage 6000 V; min. energy
taneous switching” because this method is particularly suited handling capability 100 J.
for inductive loads. By distributing the ON point over the entire
sine curve of the mains voltage, disturbances are reduced to a
minimum

Solid-StateSwitching
Devices for Switching Motors
Solid-State
Solid-StateContactors
Contactorsfor Switching Motors
3RF34 solid-state contactors, three-phase

Motor contactors · Instantaneous switching · Two-phase controlled
Rated opera- Rated power at Ie Rated control supply DT Screw terminals Std.
tional current Ie and Ue voltage Us Pack
Configurator Qty
400 V Order No. Price

A kW V per PU
48 ... 480 V AC
5.2 2.2 24 DC acc. to A 3RF34 05-1BB04 1 unit
9.2 4.0 IEC 61131-2 B 3RF34 10-1BB04 1 unit
12.5 5.5 B 3RF34 12-1BB04 1 unit
16 7.5 B 3RF34 16-1BB04 1 unit
5.2 2.2 110 ... 230 AC B 3RF34 05-1BB24 1 unit
9.2 4.0 B 3RF34 10-1BB24 1 unit
12.5 5.5 B 3RF34 12-1BB24 1 unit
16 7.5 B 3RF34 16-1BB24 1 unit
3RF34 05-1BB
48 ... 600 V AC, blocking voltage 1600 V
5.2 2.2 24 DC acc. to B 3RF34 05-1BB06 1 unit
9.2 4.0 IEC 61131-2 B 3RF34 10-1BB06 1 unit
6
12.5 5.5 B 3RF34 12-1BB06 1 unit

16 7.5 B 3RF34 16-1BB06 1 unit
5.2 2.2 110 ... 230 AC B 3RF34 05-1BB26 1 unit
9.2 4.0 B 3RF34 10-1BB26 1 unit
12.5 5.5 B 3RF34 12-1BB26 1 unit
16 7.5 B 3RF34 16-1BB26 1 unit
3RF34 10-1BB
Rated opera- Rated power at Ie Rated control DT Spring-type terminals Std.

*
tional current Ie and Ue supply voltage Us , Pack
Configurator Qty

A kW V per PU
48 ... 480 V AC
9.2 4.0 IEC 61131-2 B 3RF34 10-2BB04 1 unit
12.5 5.5 B 3RF34 12-2BB04 1 unit
16 7.5 B 3RF34 16-2BB04 1 unit
5.2 2.2 110 ... 230 AC B 3RF34 05-2BB24 1 unit
9.2 4.0 B 3RF34 10-2BB24 1 unit
12.5 5.5 B 3RF34 12-2BB24 1 unit
16 7.5 B 3RF34 16-2BB24 1 unit
3RF34 05-2BB
48 ... 600 V AC, blocking voltage 1600 V
9.2 4.0 IEC 61131-2 B 3RF34 10-2BB06 1 unit
12.5 5.5 B 3RF34 12-2BB06 1 unit
16 7.5 B 3RF34 16-2BB06 1 unit
5.2 2.2 110 ... 230 AC B 3RF34 05-2BB26 1 unit
9.2 4.0 B 3RF34 10-2BB26 1 unit
12.5 5.5 B 3RF34 12-2BB26 1 unit
16 7.5 B 3RF34 16-2BB26 1 unit
3RF34 10-2BB
For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators.

Solid-State Switching Devices forSolid-State Switching Devices
Switching Motors
Solid-State Contactors Solid-State Contactors for Switching Motors
3RF34 solid-state
3RF34 solid-state reversing contactors,
reversing contactors, 3-phase
three-phase

Reversing contactors · Instantaneous switching · Two-phase controlled
Rated opera- Rated power Rated control DT Screw terminals Std.
tional current Ie at Ie and Ue supply voltage Us Pack
Configurator Qty

A kW V per PU
Rated operational voltage Ue 48 ... 480 V AC
3.8 1.5 24 DC acc. to B 3RF34 03-1BD04 1 unit
5.4 2.2 IEC 61131-2 B 3RF34 05-1BD04 1 unit
7.4 3.0 B 3RF34 10-1BD04 1 unit
3RF34 03-1BD
3.8 1.5 110 ... 230 AC B 3RF34 03-1BD24 1 unit
5.4 2.2 B 3RF34 05-1BD24 1 unit
7.4 3.0 B 3RF34 10-1BD24 1 unit
6
3RF34 10-1BD
For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators.
Accessories
Version DT Order No. Price Std.
per PU Pack
Qty
Link modules for solid-state contactor to motor starter protector

Link module Screw terminals
between solid-state reversing contactor and motor starter
protector with screw terminals
For 3RV2 motor starter protectors size S00/S0 A 3RA29 21-1BA00 1 unit
3RA29 21-1BA00
Link adapters for solid-state contactor to overload relay
Link adapters
for direct mounting of 3RB3 overload relays or 3RR2 current
monitoring relays to the solid-state contactor with screw termi-
nals
3RF39 00-0QA88
The adapter is snapped onto the enclosure of the 3RF34 con- A 3RF39 00-0QA88 1 unit
tactor and receives the fixing hooks of the 3RB3 overload
relays or the 3RR2 current monitoring relays for direct
mounting.
Blank labels
Unit labeling plates1)
for SIRIUS devices
20 mm × 7 mm, pastel turquoise D 3RT19 00-1SB20 340 units
NSB0_01429b
3SB19 00-1SB20
1) PC labeling system for individual inscription
murrplastik Systemtechnik GmbH

3RF29 Function Modules
Selection Tables
Overview
Function modules for SIRIUS 3RF2 solid-state switching devices
A great variety of applications demand an expanded range of The following function modules are available:
functionality. With our function modules, these requirements can • Converters
be met really easily. The modules are mounted simply by click- • Load monitoring
ing them into place; straight away the necessary connections • Heating current monitoring
are made with the solid-state relay or contactor. The plug-in con- • Power controllers
nection to control the solid-state switching devices can simply • Power regulators
remain in use.
With the exception of the converter, the function modules can be
used only with single-phase solid-state switching devices.
Recommended assignment of the function modules to the 3RF21 single-phase solid-state relays
Order No. Accessories
Converters Load monitoring Heating current Power controllers1) Power regulators1)
Basic Extended monitoring
Type current = 20 A
3RF21 20-1A.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 20-0FA08 3RF29 20-0GA13 -- 3RF29 20-0KA13 3RF29 20-0HA13
3RF21 20-1A.04 3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 20-0FA08 3RF29 20-0GA16 3RF29 32-0JA16 3RF29 20-0KA16 3RF29 20-0HA16
3RF21 20-1A.22 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA33 -- -- --
3RF21 20-1A.24 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- --
3RF21 20-1B.04 3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 20-0FA08 3RF29 20-0GA16 3RF29 32-0JA16 3RF29 20-0KA16 3RF29 20-0HA16
3RF21 20-2A.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 20-2A.04 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 20-2A.22 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 20-2A.24 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 20-2A.42 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 20-2A.45 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 20-3A.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- 3RF29 20-0GA13 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA13
3RF21 20-3A.04 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- 3RF29 20-0GA16 3RF29 32-0JA16 3RF29 20-0KA16 3RF29 20-0HA16
3RF21 20-3A.22 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA33 -- 3RF29 20-0KA13 3RF29 20-0HA13
3RF21 20-3A.24 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- 3RF29 20-0KA16 3RF29 20-0HA16
Type current = 30 A
3RF21 30-1A.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 20-0FA08 3RF29 50-0GA13 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA13
3RF21 30-1A.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF21 30-1A.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF21 30-1A.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
Type current = 50 A
3RF21 50-1A.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF21 50-1A.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF21 50-1A.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF21 50-1B.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF21 50-2A.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 50-2A.04 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 50-2A.06 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 50-2A.14 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 50-2A.22 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 50-2A.24 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 50-2A.26 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 50-3A.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF21 50-3A.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF21 50-3A.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
1) The use of power controllers/regulators is also possible on zero-point
switching versions for full-wave control mode. The generalized phase con-
trol mode is recommended only for the combination with instantaneous
switching versions.

Selection Tables

Type current = 70 A
3RF21 70-1A.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF21 70-1A.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF21 70-1A.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF21 70-1C.04 3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 20-0FA08 3RF29 50-0GA16 3RF29 32-0JA16 3RF29 50-0KA16 3RF29 50-0HA16
Type current = 90 A
3RF21 90-1A.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF21 90-1A.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF21 90-1A.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF21 90-2A.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 90-2A.04 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 90-2A.06 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 90-2A.22 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 90-2A.24 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 90-2A.26 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF21 90-3A.22 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA33
3RF21 90-3A.24 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA36
3RF21 90-3A.26 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA36
switching versions.
Recommended assignment of the function modules to the 3RF22 three-phase solid-state relays
Converters Load monitoring Heating current Power controllers Power regulators
Type current up to 55 A
3RF22 ..-1A... 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF22 ..-2A... 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF22 ..-3A... 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
Recommended assignment of the function modules to the 3RF23 single-phase solid-state contactors
Type current Ie = 10.5 A
3RF23 10-1A.22 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA33
3RF23 10-1A.24 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36
3RF23 10-1A.26 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36

Selection Tables

Type current Ie = 10.5 A
3RF23 10-1B.22 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA33
3RF23 10-1B.24 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36
3RF23 10-1B.26 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36
3RF23 10-2A.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 10-2A.04 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 10-2A.06 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 10-2A.22 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 10-2A.24 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 10-2A.26 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 10-3A.22 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA33
3RF23 10-3A.24 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36
3RF23 10-3A.26 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36
Type current Ie = 20 A
3RF23 20-1A.14 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- 3RF29 20-0GA16 -- 3RF29 20-0KA16 3RF29 20-0HA16
3RF23 20-1A.22 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA33
3RF23 20-1A.24 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36
3RF23 20-1A.26 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36
3RF23 20-1B.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 20-0FA08 3RF29 20-0GA13 -- 3RF29 20-0KA13 3RF29 20-0HA13
3RF23 20-1B.22 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA33
3RF23 20-1B.24 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36
3RF23 20-1B.26 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36
3RF23 20-1C.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 20-0FA08 3RF29 20-0GA13 -- 3RF29 20-0KA13 3RF29 20-0HA13
3RF23 20-1C.22 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA33
3RF23 20-1C.24 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36
3RF23 20-1D.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 20-0FA08 3RF29 20-0GA13 -- 3RF29 20-0KA13 3RF29 20-0HA13
3RF23 20-1D.04 3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 20-0FA08 3RF29 20-0GA16 3RF29 32-0JA16 3RF29 20-0KA16 3RF29 20-0HA16
3RF23 20-1D.22 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA33
3RF23 20-1D.24 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36
3RF23 20-1D.44 3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 20-0FA08 3RF29 20-0GA16 3RF29 32-0JA16 3RF29 20-0KA16 3RF29 20-0HA16
3RF23 20-2A.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 20-2A.04 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 20-2A.06 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 20-2A.22 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 20-2A.24 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 20-2A.26 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 20-2C.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 20-2C.04 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 20-2C.22 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 20-2C.24 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 20-2D.22 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 20-2D.24 -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF23 20-3A.22 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA33
3RF23 20-3A.24 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36
3RF23 20-3A.26 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36
switching versions.

Selection Tables

3RF23 20-3D.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- 3RF29 20-0GA13 -- 3RF29 20-0KA13 3RF29 20-0HA13
3RF23 20-3D.04 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- 3RF29 20-0GA16 3RF29 32-0JA16 3RF29 20-0KA16 3RF29 20-0HA16
3RF23 20-3D.22 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA33
3RF23 20-3D.24 -- -- 3RF29 20-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 20-0HA36
3RF23 30-1A.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF23 30-1A.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 30-1A.25 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 30-1A.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 30-1B.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 20-0FA08 3RF29 50-0GA13 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA13
3RF23 30-1B.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF23 30-1B.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 30-1B.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 30-1B.44 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- 3RF29 50-0GA16 3RF29 32-0JA16 3RF29 50-0KA16 3RF29 50-0HA16
3RF23 30-1C.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 20-0FA08 3RF29 50-0GA13 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA13
3RF23 30-1D.44 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- 3RF29 50-0GA16 3RF29 32-0JA16 3RF29 50-0KA16 3RF29 50-0HA16
3RF23 30-3A.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF23 30-3A.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 30-3A.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 40-1A.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF23 40-1A.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 40-1A.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 40-1B.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- 3RF29 50-0GA13 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA13
3RF23 40-1B.04 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- 3RF29 50-0GA13 -- 3RF29 50-0KA16 3RF29 50-0HA16
3RF23 40-1B.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF23 40-1B.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 40-1B.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 40-3A.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF23 40-3A.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 40-3A.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 50-1A.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF23 50-1A.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 50-1A.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
switching versions.

Selection Tables

3RF23 50-1B.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF23 50-1B.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 50-1B.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 50-3A.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF23 50-3A.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 50-3A.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 70-1B.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF23 70-1B.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 70-1B.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 70-3A.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- 3RF29 90-0GA13 -- 3RF29 90-0HA13
3RF23 70-3A.22 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA33
3RF23 70-3A.24 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA36
3RF23 70-3A.26 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA36
3RF23 70-3B.02 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- 3RF29 90-0GA13 -- 3RF29 90-0HA13
3RF23 70-3B.22 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA33
3RF23 70-3B.24 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA36
3RF23 70-3B.26 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA36
3RF23 90-1B.22 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA33
3RF23 90-1B.24 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 90-1B.26 -- -- 3RF29 50-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 50-0HA36
3RF23 90-3A.22 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA33
3RF23 90-3A.24 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA36
3RF23 90-3A.26 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA36
3RF23 90-3B.22 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA33 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA33
3RF23 90-3B.24 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA36
3RF23 90-3B.26 -- -- 3RF29 90-0GA36 -- -- 3RF29 90-0HA36
switching versions.
Recommended assignment of the function modules to the 3RF24 three-phase solid-state contactors
Converters Load monitoring Heating current Power controllers Power regulators
Type current up to 50 A
3RF24 ..-1..4. 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF24 ..-2..4. -- -- -- -- -- --
3RF24 ..-3..4. 3RF29 00-0EA18 -- -- -- -- --
3RF24 ..-...5. -- -- -- -- -- --

Function Modules
Converters
Overview Design
Converter for SIRIUS SC semiconductor switching devices Mounting
This module is used to convert analog drive signals, such as Simply snapping onto the 3RF21 semiconductor relays or 3RF23
those output from many temperature controllers, for example, semiconductor contactors establishes the connections to the
into a pulse-width-modulated digital signal. The connected semiconductor switching devices. The connector on the semi-
semiconductor contactors and relays can therefore regulate the conductor switching devices from the control circuit can be used
output of a load as a percentage. on the converter without rewiring.
Area of application Functions

The device is used for conversion from an analog input signal to The analog value from a temperature controller is present at the
an on/off ratio. The function module can only be used in conjunc- 0–10 V terminals. This controls the on-to-off period, as a function
tion with a 3RF21 semiconductor relay or a 3RF23 semiconduc- of voltage. The period duration is predefined at one second.
tor contactor. Conversion of the analog voltage is linear in the voltage range
from 0.1 to 9.9 V. At voltages below 0.1 V the connected switch-
ing device is not activated, while at voltages above 9.9 V the
connected switching device is always activated.
Control input for converter and load monitoring
Type 3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 ..-0HA.
Analog input V 0 ... 10 0 ... 10

P er m i s s ible ra ng e V -1 ... 11 -1 ... 11
Input resistance kΩ 100 8
Period duration s 1 1

Rated operational current Ie Rated operational voltage Ue Rated control supply Std. Weight
voltage Us Pack per pack
AC/DC 24 V Qty. approx.
A V Order No. kg
— — 3RF29 00-0EA18 1 unit 0.025
3RF29 00-0EA18

Function Modules
Load monitoring
The "Teach" button can also be used to switch on the connected
Overview semiconductor switching device briefly for test purposes. In this
Load monitoring for SIRIUS SC semiconductor switching case the "ON" LED is switched on.
devices Partial load faults, "basic" load monitoring
With the addition of the load monitoring module many faults can If a decrease of at least 1/6 of the stored setpoint value is de-
be quickly detected by monitoring a load circuit connected to tected, a fault is signaled. The fault is indicated via a "Fault" LED
the semiconductor switching device. Examples include the fail- and by activation of the fault signaling output.
ure of load elements (up to 6 in the basic version or up to 12 in
the extended version), alloyed power semiconductors, a lack of OK Fault
voltage or a break in a load circuit. A fault is indicated by one or
Partial load failure/ Thyristor Mains failure/
more LEDs and reported to the controller via a PLC-compatible LEDs
load short-circuit defect fuse rupture
output.
ON/OFF -
The operating principle is based on monitoring of the current. Current
This figure is continuously compared with the reference value flowing
-
stored once during commissioning by the simple press of a but-
Group fault -
ton. In order to detect the failure of one of several loads, the cur-
rent decrease must be 1/6 (in the basic version) or 1/12 (in the Function is available
extended version) of the reference value. In the event of a fault, - Function not available
a contact (NC) is actuated and one or more LEDs indicate the
fault. Partial load faults, "extended" load monitoring
Depending on the setting of the "response time" potentiometer,
Area of application a decrease of at least 1/12 of the stored setpoint value after a re-
sponse time of between 100 ms and 3 s is signaled as a fault.
The device is used for monitoring one or more loads (partial The fault is indicated via a "Load" LED and by activation of the
loads). The function module can only be used in conjunction with fault signaling output.
a 3RF21 semiconductor relay or a 3RF23 semiconductor contac-
tor. The devices with spring-loaded connections in the load cir- The potentiometer can also be used to determine the response
cuit are not suitable for use with load monitoring modules. behavior of the fault signaling output. When delay values are set
in the left-hand half, the fault signal is stored. This can only be
reset by switching on and off by means of the control supply volt-
Design age.
Mounting When settings are made on the right-hand side, the fault output
Simply snapping the load monitoring module onto the 3RF21 is automatically reset after the deviation has been corrected.
semiconductor relays or 3RF23 semiconductor contactors es- Voltage compensation, "extended" load monitoring
tablishes the control connections to the semiconductor switch-
ing devices. Because of the special design, the straight-through In addition to the current, the load voltage is also monitored. This
transformer of the load monitoring module covers the lower main makes it possible to compensate for influences on the current
power connection. The cable to the load is simply pushed strength resulting from voltage fluctuations.
through and secured with the terminal screw. Thyristor fault
Functions If a current greater than the residual current of the switching de-
vice is measured in the deenergized state, the device triggers a
The function module is activated when an "ON" signal is applied thyristor fault after the set time delay. This means that the fault
(IN terminal). The module constantly monitors the current level output is activated and the "Fault" ("Thyristor" 1)) LED lights up.
and compares this with the setpoint value.
Supply fault
Start-up If no current is measured in the energized state, the device trig-
Pressing the "Teach" button switches the device on; the current gers a supply fault after the set time delay. This means that the
through the semiconductor switching device is measured and is fault output is activated and the "Fault" ("Supply"1)) LED lights up.
stored as the setpoint. During this process the two lower (red1)) 1) "Extended" load monitoring
LEDs flash alternately; simultaneous maintained light from the 3
(red1)) LEDs indicates the conclusion of the teaching process.

Rated Rated opera- Rated control supply Rated control supply Std. Weight Rated control Std. Weight
operational voltage Ue voltage Us voltage Us Pack per pack supply Pack per pack
tional cur- AC 110 V AC/DC 24 V Qty approx. voltage Us Qty approx.
rent Ie DC 24 V
A V Order No. Order No. kg Order No. kg
Basic load monitoring
6 - - - 3RF29 06-0FA081) 1 unit 0.050
20 - - - 3RF29 20-0FA08
Extended load monitoring
20 110 ... 230 3RF29 20-0GA33 3RF29 20-0GA13 1 unit 0.120 -
20 400 ... 600 3RF29 20-0GA36 3RF29 20-0GA16 1 unit 0.120 -
50 110 ... 230 3RF29 50-0GA33 3RF29 50-0GA13 1 unit 0.120 -
50 400 ... 600 3RF29 50-0GA36 3RF29 50-0GA16 1 unit 0.120 -
90 110 ... 230 3RF29 90-0GA33 3RF29 90-0GA13 1 unit 0.120 -
90 400 ... 600 3RF29 90-0GA36 3RF29 90-0GA16 1 unit 0.120 -
1) To order with mounted 3RF29 00-0RA88 cover, add -0KH0 to part number.

Heating current monitoring
Special versions:
Overview deviations from the standard version
Heating current monitoring for 3RF2 single-phase solid- 3RF29 ..-0JA1.-1KK0
state switching devices
If the current is below 50 % of the lower teach current during the
Many faults can be quickly detected by monitoring a load circuit teach routine, the device will go into "Standby" mode; the LOAD
connected to the solid-state switching device, as made possible LED will flicker. The device thus detects a non-connected load,
with this module. Examples include the failure of up to 6 load el- e. g. channels not required for tool heaters, and does not signal
ements, alloyed power semiconductors, a lack of voltage or a a fault. This mode can be reset by re-teaching.
break in a load circuit. A fault is indicated by LEDs and reported
to the controller by way of a relay output (NC contact).
Application
The principle of operation is based on permanent monitoring of
the current strength. This figure is continuously compared with The device is used for monitoring one or more loads (partial
the reference value stored once during start-up. In order to de- loads). The function module can only be used in conjunction with
tect the failure of one of several loads, the current difference a 3RF21 solid-state relay or a 3RF23 solid-state contactor. The
must be 1/6 of the reference value. In the event of a fault, an out- devices with spring-loaded connections in the load circuit are
put is actuated and the LEDs indicate the fault. not suitable.
The heating current monitoring has a teach input and therefore
differs from the load monitoring. This remote teaching function
enables simple adjustment to changing loads without manual
intervention.

Rated operational Rated operational Order No. Std. Weight
current Ie voltage Ue Pack per pack
Qty approx.
A V kg
Heating current monitoring1)
Rated control supply voltage 24 V AC/DC
16 110 … 230 3RF29 16-0JA13 1 unit 0.175
16 110 … 230 3RF29 16-0JA13-1KK0 1 unit 0.175
16 400 … 600 3RF29 16-0JA16-1KK0 1 unit 0.175
32 110 … 230 3RF29 32-0JA13-1KK0 1 unit 0.175
32 400 … 600 3RF29 32-0JA16 1 unit 0.175
32 400 … 600 3RF29 32-0JA16-1KK0 1 unit 0.175
1) Supplied without control connector. The control connector can be pur-

chased from Phoenix Contact by quoting Order No. 1982 790
(2.5 HC/6-ST-5.08).

Pack per pack
Qty approx.
kg
Optional accessories
Sealable covers 3RF29 00-0RA88 10 units 0.001
for function modules (not for converters)
3RF29 00-0RA88

Power controllers
Power controllers for 3RF2 single-phase solid-state switch- The power controller can be used for:
ing devices • Complex heating systems
The power controller is a function module for the autonomous • Inductive loads
power control of complex heating systems and inductive loads. • Loads with temperature-dependent resistor
The following functions have been integrated: • Loads with ageing after long-time service
• Power controller for adjusting the power of the connected load. • Simple indirect control of temperature
Here, the setpoint value is set with a rotary knob on the module
as a percentage with reference to the 100 % power stored as The power controller can be used on the instantaneously switch-
a setpoint value. ing 3RF21 and 3RF23 solid-state switching devices (single-
phase). If only the full-wave operating mode is used, the power
• Inrush current limitation: With the aid of an adjustable voltage controller can also be used on the "zero-point switching" solid-
ramp, the inrush current is limited by means of phase control. state relays and contactors.
This is useful above all with loads such as lamps or infrared
lamps which have an inrush transient current. Power control
• Load circuit monitoring for detecting load failure, partial load The power controller adjusts the power in the connected load by
faults, alloyed power semiconductors, lack of voltage or a means of a solid-state switching device depending on the set-
break in the load circuit. point selection. It does not compensate for changes in the mains
Special versions: voltage or load resistance. The setpoint value can be predefined
deviations from the standard version externally as a 0 to 10 V signal or internally by means of a poten-
tiometer. Depending on the setting of the potentiometer (tR), the
3RF29 04-0KA13-0KC0 control is carried out according to the principle of full-wave con-
trol or generalized phase control.
During the teaching process the connected solid-state relay or
contactor is not activated; i. e. no current flow takes place. No Full-wave control
current reference value is stored. No part-load monitoring!
In this operating mode the output is adjusted to the required set-
3RF29 ..-0KA1.-0KT0 point value changing the on-to-off period. The period duration is
No part-load monitoring! predefined at one second.
Generalized phase control
In this operating mode the output is adjusted to the required set-
point value by changing the current flow angle. In order to ob-
serve the limit values of the conducted interference voltage for
industrial networks, the load circuit must include a reactor with a
rating of at least 200 µH.

Rated operational Rated operational Order No. Std. Weight
current Ie voltage Ue Pack per pack
Qty approx.
A V kg
Power controllers
Rated control supply voltage 24 V AC/DC
4 110 … 230 3RF29 04-0KA13-0KC0 1 unit 0.175
4 3RF29 04-0KA13-0KT0 1 unit 0.175
20 3RF29 20-0KA13 1 unit 0.175
50 3RF29 50-0KA13 1 unit 0.175
90 3RF29 90-0KA13 1 unit 0.175
20 400 … 600 3RF29 20-0KA16 1 unit 0.175
50 3RF29 50-0KA16 1 unit 0.175
50 3RF29 50-0KA16-0KT0 1 unit 0.175
90 3RF29 90-0KA16 1 unit 0.175

Pack per pack
Qty approx.
kg
Optional accessories
Sealable covers 3RF29 00-0RA88 10 units 0.001
for function modules (not for converters)
3RF29 00-0RA88

Function Modules
Power control regulators
Overview Functions
Power controllers for SIRIUS SC semiconductor switching Start-up
devices
Pressing the "Teach" button switches the device on; the current
This module provides similar functionality to a power control reg- through the semiconductor switching device and the mains volt-
ulator. age are detected and stored. The resultant output is taken as the
100% output for the setpoint selection. During this process the
The following functions are integrated: two lower red LEDs flash alternately. Simultaneous maintained
Power control regulator with proportional-action control for ad- light from the three red LEDs indicates the completion of the
justing the power of the connected load. Here, the setpoint is set "Teach" process.
with a rotary knob on the module as a percentage with reference The "Teach" button can also be used to switch on the connected
to the 100% power stored as a setpoint. In this way the power is semiconductor switching device briefly for test purposes. In this
kept constant even in the event of voltage fluctuations or a case the "ON" LED is switched on.
change in load resistance.
Inrush current limitation: With the aid of an adjustable voltage Setpoint selection
ramp, the inrush current is limited by means of phase control. The setting on the setpoint potentiometer (P) determines how the
This is useful above all with loads such as lamps which have an setpoint selection is to be made:
inrush transient current.
External setpoint selection
Load circuit monitoring for detecting load failure, alloyed power
semiconductors, lack of voltage or a break in the load circuit. At 0 % the setpoint selection is set via an external 0 – 10 V analog
signal (terminals IN / 0 – 10 V). The device is switched on and off
via the power supply (terminals A1 / A2).
Area of application
Internal setpoint selection
The power controller adjusts the current in the connected load
by means of a semiconductor switching device depending on a Above 0 % the setpoint is set using the potentiometer. To allow
setpoint. This compensates for changes in the mains voltage or this, the potential at terminal A1 must additionally be applied at
in the load resistance. The setpoint can be predefined externally the IN terminal. After removal of the "ON" signal, the switching
as a 0 to 10 V signal or internally by means of a potentiometer. module is switched off.
Depending on the setting of the potentiometer (tR), the adjust- Inrush current limitation
ment is carried out according to the principle of full-wave control
or generalized phase control. The ramp time (tR) for a voltage ramp on switching on is set with
the potentiometer for the purpose of inrush current limitation. If a
Full-wave control time longer than 0 s is set, the device operates according to the
In this operating mode the output is adjusted to the required set- phase-angle principle. If 0 s is set, there is no voltage ramp and
point by changing the on-to-off period. The period duration is the device operates according to the principle of full-wave con-
predefined at one second. trol.
Generalized phase control Load fault
In this operating mode the output is adjusted to the required set- If upon switching on with voltage applied the current flowing is
point by changing the current flow angle. In order to observe the not greater than the residual current of the switching device, the
limit values of the conducted interference voltage for industrial device triggers a load fault. The fault relay is activated and the
power systems, a choke rated at at least 200 µH must be in- "Load" LED lights up.
cluded in the load circuit. Thyristor fault
If a current greater than the residual current of the switching de-
Design vice is measured in the deenergized state, the device triggers a
Mounting thyristor fault. The fault relay is activated and the "Thyristor" LED
lights up.
Easy snapping onto the 3RF21 semiconductor relays or 3RF23
semiconductor contactors establishes the connections to the Supply fault
semiconductor switching devices. Because of the special de- If no current is measured in the energized state, the device trig-
sign, the straight-through transformer of the power controller gers a supply fault. The fault relay is activated and the "Supply"
module covers the lower main power connection. The cable to LED lights up.
the load is simply pushed through and secured with the terminal
screw.

Rated operational current Rated operational voltage Ue Rated control sup- Rated control sup- Std. Weight
Ie ply voltage Us ply voltage Us Pack per pack
AC 110 V AC/DC 24 V Qty approx.
A V Order No. Order No. kg
Power controllers1)
20 110 ... 230 3RF29 20-0HA33 3RF29 20-0HA13 1 unit 0.120
20 400 ... 600 3RF29 20-0HA36 3RF29 20-0HA16 1 unit 0.120
50 110 ... 230 3RF29 50-0HA33 3RF29 50-0HA13 1 unit 0.120
50 400 ... 600 3RF29 50-0HA36 3RF29 50-0HA16 1 unit 0.120
90 110 ... 230 3RF29 90-0HA33 3RF29 90-0HA13 1 unit 0.120
90 400 ... 600 3RF29 90-0HA36 3RF29 90-0HA16 1 unit 0.120
1) Optional sealable cover - 3RF29 00-0RA88 can be used.

Overview Function
Power control regulators for SIRIUS solid-state switching Setpoint selection
devices
The setpoint is selected either internally using the right-hand
The power control regulator is a function module for the autono- potentiometer P with 0 ... 100 % on the module or externally
mous power control regulation of complex heating systems and through the analog input 0 ... 10 V.
inductive loads, for the operation of loads with temperature-
dependent resistors or long-term aging, and for simple indirect 100 % corresponds in full-wave control to permanently On and
temperature control. in generalized phase control to a conduction angle of 180° and
hence maximum power.
The power control regulator can be used on the 3RF21 and
3RF23 instantaneous switching solid-state switching devices When the setpoint is selected internally the module is controlled
(single-phase). If only the full-wave control mode is used, the through the IN terminal. The terminal 10 then has no function.
power control regulator can also be used on the zero-point-
switching solid-state relays and contactors.
180° 100
Application
Modulation
Conduction angle
%
The power control regulator sets the load current of the solid-
state switching device depending on a setpoint value as a
90° 50
percentage. Changes in the mains voltage or in the load resis-
tance are not compensated in this case. The modulation, the
On/off ratio or the phase angle, remains unchanged in accor-
dance with the setpoint. The autonomous power control regula-
NSB0_01693
tion is performed between 0 and 100 % of the setpoint value
0° 0
Full-wave control
< 0,1 5,0 V > 9,9
If the left potentiometer tR is set to 0 s (= far left), the power External setpoint of analog voltage 0 ... 10 V
control regulator works according to the principle of full-wave
control. The power set, be it internal or external, is converted into 0 50 % 100
a pulse-width-modulated digital signal. The power control regu- Internal setpoint of potentiometer P
lator controls the On and Off time of the solid-state switching
device within a fixed period duration of 1 s so that the specified Input characteristic curve
power is applied to the load. The "ON" LED flashes in the same
rhythm as the solid-state switching device switches on and off. When the setpoint is selected externally (potentiometer P set far
left = 0 %) the module is controlled by applying the analog
Generalized phase control voltage 0 ... 10 V. 0 ... 10 V corresponds to 0 ... 100 % power.
Conversion of the voltage is linear between 0.1 and 9.9 V. Below
If the left potentiometer tR is set to higher than 0 s, the power
0.1 V the switching device remains off; at voltages above 9.9 V
control regulator works according to the principle of generalized
the power is always set to 100 %.
phase control. With generalized phase control, a choke rated at
at least 200 µH must be included in the load circuit in order to Inrush current limitation
observe the limit values of the conducted interference voltage
for industrial networks. The ramp time (tR) for a voltage ramp on switching on is set with
the left potentiometer for the purpose of inrush current limitation.
The set time refers to a power of 100 %. If, for example, a ramp
Design time of 10 s is set and the selected power is 60 %, then a power
of 60 % is reached after approx. 6 s.
Mounting
Easy snapping onto the 3RF21 solid-state relays or 3RF23 solid- Line and thyristor monitoring
state contactors establishes the connections to the solid-state The power control regulator recognizes supply failures and
switching devices. Because of the special design, the straight- thyristor faults. The faults are indicated by the LEDs on the mod-
through transformer of the function module covers the lower ule and the fault output is activated.
main power connection. The cable to the load is simply pushed
through and secured with the terminal screw.

Solid-State Relays
3RF21 Solid-state relays
technical data
Overview
With its compact design, which stays the same even at currents
of up to 88 A, the 3RF21 semiconductor relay is the ultimate in
space-saving construction, at a width of 22.5 mm. The logical
connection arrangement, with the power infeed from above and
connection of the load from below, ensures clean installation in
the control cabinet.
Type 3RF21 ..-1.... 3RF21 ..-2.... 3RF21 ..-3....
General data
Ambient temperature
during operation, derating from 40 °C °C -25 ... +60
when stored °C -55 ... +80
Site altitude m 0 ... 1000; derating from 1000
acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance g 2
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
• Conducted interference voltage Class A for industrial applications
acc. to IEC 60947-4-3
• Emitted, high-frequency interference Class A for industrial applications
voltage acc. to IEC 60947-4-3
Noise immunity
• Electrostatic discharge kV Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2
acc. to IEC 61000-4-2
• Induced RF fields acc. to IEC 61000-4-6 MHz 0.15 ... 80; 140 dBµV; behavior criterion 1
• Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1
• Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 kV Conductor - ground 2; conductor - conductor 1; behavior criterion 2
Connection technique Screw-type connection Spring-loaded connection Ring cable connection
Main contact connection
Solid mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2 x (0,5 ... 2.5) -
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) -
1 x 10
Finely stranded without end sleeves mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) -
Solid or stranded AWG conductors AWG 2 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (18 ... 14) -
Insulation stripping length mm 10 10 -
Terminal screw M4 - M5
• Tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5 - 2 ... 2.5
lb.in 18 ... 22 - 18 ... 22
Cable lug
• DIN - - DIN 46234
-5-2.5, -5-6, -5-10, -5-16, -5-25
• JIS - - JIS C 2805 R 2-5, 5.5-5, 8-5, 14-5
Auxiliary/control contact connections
Conductor cross-section mm2 1x (0.5 ... 2.5); 2x (0.5 ... 1) 0.5 ... 1.5 1x (0.5 ... 2.5); 2x (0.5 ... 1)
AWG 20 ... 12 20 ... 12 20 ... 12
Insulation stripping length mm 7 10 7
• Tightening torque Nm 0.5 ... 0.6 - 0.5 ... 0.6
lb.in 4.5 ... 5.3 - 4.5 ... 5.3
Type 3RF21 ..-....2 3RF21 ..-....4 3RF21 ..-....5 3RF21 ..-....6

Main circuit
Rated operational voltage Ue V 24 ... 230 230 ... 460 48 ... 600 400 ... 600
• Tolerance % -15 / +10
• Rated frequency Hz 50/60
Blocking voltage V 800 1200 1200 1600
Rate of voltage rise V/µs 1000

Solid-State Relays
3RF21 Solid-state
technical data
Order No. Imax 1) Ie acc. to IEC 60947-4-3 Ie acc. to UL/CSA Power loss Minimum load Leakage current
at Rthha/Tu = 40 °C at Rthha/Tu = 40 °C at Rthha/Tu = 50 °C at Imax current
A K/W A K/W A K/W W A mA
Main circuit
3RF21 20-..... 20 2.0 20 1.7 20 1.3 28.6 0.1 10
3RF21 30-1.... 30 1.1 30 0.79 30 0.56 44.2 0.5 10
3RF21 50-1.... 50 0.68 50 0.48 50 0.33 66 0.5 10
3RF21 50-2.... 50 0.68 20 2.6 20 2.9 66 0.5 10
3RF21 50-3.... 50 0.68 50 0.48 50 0.33 66 0.5 10
3RF21 70-1.... 70 0.40 50 0.77 50 0.6 94 0.5 10
3RF21 90-1.... 88 0.33 50 0.94 50 0.85 118 0.5 10
3RF21 90-2.... 88 0.33 20 2.8 20 3.5 118 0.5 10
3RF21 90-3.... 88 0.33 88 0.22 83 0.19 118 0.5 10
1) Imax provides information about the performance of the solid-state relay. Note: The required heat sinks for the corresponding load cur-
The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller depend- rents can be determined from the characteristic curves,
ing on the connection method and cooling conditions.
page 4/10. The minimum thickness values for the mounting sur-
face must be observed.
Order No. Rated impulse withstand capacity Itsm I2t value

A A2s
Main circuit
3RF21 20-..... 200 200
3RF21 30-..A.2 300 450
3RF21 30-..A.4 300 450
3RF21 30-..A.5 300 450
3RF21 30-..A.6 400 800
3RF21 50-..... 600 1800
3RF21 70-..A.2 1200 7200
3RF21 70-..A.4 1200 7200
3RF21 70-..A.5 1200 7200
3RF21 70-..A.6 1150 6600
3RF21 90-..... 1150 6600
Type 3RF21 ..-....2 3RF21 ..-....4 3RF21 ..-....5 3RF21 ..-....6

Main circuit
• Operating range V 20 ... 253 40 ... 506 40 ... 660 40 ... 660
• Rated frequency Hz 50/60 ± 10 %
Blocking voltage V 800 1200 1600
Rage of voltage rise V/µs 1000
Type 3RF21 ..-...0. 3RF21 ..-...1. 3RF21 ..-...2. 3RF21 ..-...4.

Control circuit
Method of operation DC operation AC/DC operation AC operation DC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 acc. to 24 AC 24 DC 110 ... 230 4 ... 30
EN 61131-2
Rated frequency Hz -- 50/60 -- 50/60 ± 10 % --
of the control supply voltage ± 10 %
Control supply voltage, max. V 30 26.5 AC 30 DC 253 30
Typical actuating current mA 20 / Low Power: 6.51) 20 20 15 20
Response voltage V 15 14 AC 15 DC 90 4
Drop-out voltage V 5 5 AC 5 DC 40 1
Operating times
• ON-delay ms 1 + max. one 10 + max. one 40 + max. one 1 + max. one
half-wave2) half-wave2) half-wave2) half-wave2)
• OFF-delay ms 1 + max. one 15 + max. one 40 + max. one 1 + max. one
half-wave half-wave half-wave half-wave
1)
Applies to the version "Low Power" 3RF21 ..-.AA..-0KN0.
2)
Only for zero-point-switching devices.

Solid-State Relays
3RF21 solid-state relays,
technical data
Fused version with semiconductor protection (similar to type of coordination "2")1)

The semiconductor protection for the SIRIUS controls can be If a fuse is used with a higher rated current than specified, semi-
used with different protective devices. This allows protection by conductor protection is no longer guaranteed. However, smaller
means of LV HRC fuses of gG operational class or miniature cir- fuses with a lower rated current for the load can be used without
cuit breakers. Siemens recommends the use of special SITOR problems.
semiconductor fuses. The table below lists the maximum per-
missible fuses for each SIRIUS control. For protective devices with gG operational class and for SITOR
3NE1 all-range fuses, the minimum cross-sections for the con-
ductor to be connected must be taken into account.
Order No. All-range fuses Semiconductor fuses/partial-range fuses
LV HRC design Cylindrical design LV HRC design Cylindrical design
gR/SITOR gR/NEOZED2) aR/SITOR aR/SITOR aR/SITOR aR/SITOR
SILIZED 10 mm x 38 mm 14 mm x 51 mm 22 mm x 58 mm
3NE1 5SE1 3NE8 3NC1 0 3NC1 4 3NC2 2
3RF21 20-...2 3NE1 814-0 5SE1 325 3NE8 015-1 3NC1 020 3NC1 420 3NC2 220
3RF21 20-...4 3NE1 813-04) 5SE1 320 3NE8 015-1 3NC1 0164) 3NC1 420 3NC2 220
3RF21 20-....53) 3NE1 813-04) 5SE1 320 3NE8 015-1 3NC1 0164) 3NC1 420 3NC2 220
3RF21 30-...2 3NE1 815-04) 5SE1 335 3NE8 003-1 3NC1 032 3NC1 432 3NC2 232
3RF21 30-...4 3NE1 815-04) 5SE1 3254) 3NE8 003-1 3NC1 0254) 3NC1 430 3NC2 232
3RF21 30-....53) 3NE1 815-04) 5SE1 3254) 3NE8 003-1 3NC1 0254) 3NC1 430 3NC2 232
3RF21 30-...6 3NE1 815-04) -- 3NE8 003-1 3NC1 032 3NC1 432 3NC2 232
3RF21 50-...2 3NE1 817-0 5SE1 350 3NE8 017-1 -- 3NC1 450 3NC2 250
3RF21 50-...4 3NE1 802-04) 5SE1 3354) 3NE8 017-1 -- 3NC1 450 3NC2 250
3RF21 50-....53) 3NE1 802-04) 5SE1 3354) 3NE8 017-1 -- 3NC1 450 3NC2 250
3RF21 50-...6 3NE1 803-04) -- 3NE8 017-1 -- 3NC1 450 3NC2 250
3RF21 70-...25) 3NE1 820-0 5SE1 3634) 3NE8 020-1 -- -- 3NC2 280
3RF21 70-...45) 3NE1 020-2 5SE1 3634) 3NE8 020-1 -- -- 3NC2 280
3RF21 70-....53)5) 3NE1 020-2 -- 3NE8 020-1 -- -- 3NC2 280
3RF21 70-...65) 3NE1 020-2 -- 3NE8 020-1 -- -- 3NC2 280
3RF21 90-...25) 3NE1 021-2 -- 3NE8 021-1 -- -- 3NC2 200
3RF21 90-...45) 3NE1 021-2 -- 3NE8 021-1 -- -- 3NC2 2804)
3RF21 90-....53)5) 3NE1 021-2 -- 3NE8 021-1 -- -- 3NC2 2804)
3RF21 90-...65) 3NE1 817-04) -- 3NE8 021-1 -- -- 3NC2 2804)
Order No. Cable and line protection fuses

LV HRC design4) Cylindrical design4) DIAZED4)
gG gG gG gG quick
10 mm x 38 mm 14 mm x 51 mm 22 mm x 58 mm
3NA2 3NW6 0 3NW6 1 3NW6 2 5SB
3RF21 20-...2 3NA2 803 3NW6 000-1 3NW6 101-1 -- 5SB1 41
3RF21 20-...4 3NA2 801 -- 3NW6 101-1 -- 5SB1 41
3RF21 20-....53) 3NA2 801 -- 3NW6 101-1 -- 5SB1 41
3RF21 30-...2 3NA2 803 -- 3NW6 103-1 -- 5SB1 71
3RF21 30-...4 3NA2 803 -- 3NW6 101-1 -- 5SB1 71
3RF21 30-....53) 3NA2 803 -- 3NW6 101-1 -- 5SB1 71
3RF21 30-...6 3NA2 803-6 -- -- -- --
3RF21 50-...2 3NA2 810 -- 3NW6 107-1 3NW6 207-1 5SB3 11
3RF21 50-...4 3NA2 807 -- -- 3NW6 205-1 5SB3 11
3RF21 50-....53) 3NA2 807 -- -- 3NW6 205-1 5SB3 11
3RF21 50-...6 3NA2 807-6 -- -- -- --
3RF21 70-...25) 3NA2 817 -- -- 3NW6 217-1 5SB3 31
3RF21 70-...45) 3NA2 812 -- -- 3NW6 212-1 5SB3 31
3RF21 70-....53)5) 3NA2 812 -- -- 3NW6 212-1 --
3RF21 70-...65) 3NA2 812-6 -- -- -- --
3RF21 90-...25) 3NA2 817 -- -- 3NW6 217-1 --
3RF21 90-...45) 3NA2 812 -- -- 3NW6 212-1 --
3RF21 90-....53)5) 3NA2 812 -- -- 3NW6 212-1 --
3RF21 90-...65) 3NA2 812-6 -- -- -- --
Suitable fuse holders, fuse bases and controls can be found in

Catalog LV 1, Chapter 19.
1) Type of coordination "2" according to EN 60947-4-1:
In the event of a short-circuit, the controls in the load feeder must not
endanger persons or the installation. They must be suitable for further
operation. For fused configurations, the protective device must be
replaced.
2)
For use only with operational voltage Ue up to 400 V.
3) For use only with operational voltage Ue up to 506 V.
4)
These fuses have a smaller rated current than the solid-state relays.
5) These versions can also be protected against short-circuits with miniature
circuit breakers as described in the notes on "SIRIUS Solid-State
Contactors → Special Version Short-Circuit Resistant".

Solid-State Relays
technical data
■ Overview
The semiconductor relays with a width of 45 mm provide for
connection of the power supply lead and the load from above.
This makes it easy to retrofit existing semiconductor relays. The
connection of the control cable also saves space in much the
same way as the 22.5 mm design, as it is simply plugged on.
Type 3RF20
General data
Ambient temperature
during operation, derating at 40 °C °C -25 ... +60
acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance g 2
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
• Conducted interference voltage IEC Class A for industrial applications
acc. to 60947-4-3
• Emitted, high-frequency interference Class A for industrial applications
Noise immunity
• Electrostatic discharge kV Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2
acc. to IEC 61000-4-2
Connection, main contacts, screw con-
nection
Solid mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5); 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5); 2 x (2.5 ... 6); 1 x 10
Solid or stranded AWG conductors AWG 2 x (14 ... 10)
Insulation stripping length mm 10
Terminal screw M4
• Tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5
lb.in 18 ... 22
Connection, auxiliary/control contacts,
screw connection
Conductor cross-section mm2 1x (0.5 ... 2.5); 2x (0.5 ... 1.0); AWG 20 ... 12
Insulation stripping length mm 7
Terminal screw M3
lb.in 4.5 ... 5.3
Type 3RF20 .0-1AA.2 3RF20 .0-1AA.4 3RF20..-....5 3RF20 .0-1AA.6

Main circuit
• Tolerance % -15/+10
Rage of voltage rise V/µs 1000

Solid-State Relays
technical data
Order No. Imax1) Ie to IEC 60947-4-3 Ie to UL/CSA Power loss Minimum load Leakage current
at Rthha/Tu = 40 °C at Rthha/Tu = 40 °C at Rthha/Tu = 50 °C for Imax current
Main circuit
3RF20 20-1AA.. 20 2.0 20 2.0 20 1.7 28.6 0.5 10
3RF20 30-1AA.. 30 1.1 30 1.1 30 0.88 44.2 0.5 10
3RF20 50-1AA.. 50 0.68 50 0.68 50 0.53 66 0.5 10
3RF20 70-1AA.. 70 0.4 50 0.95 50 0.8 94 0.5 10
3RF20 90-1AA.. 88 0.33 50 1.25 50 1.02 118 0.5 10
1) Imax provides information about the performance of the semiconductor
relay. The actual permitted operational current Ie can be smaller depend-
Order No. Rated impulse withstand I2t value

capacity Itsm
A A2s
Main circuit
3RF20 20-1AA.. 200 200
3RF20 30-1AA.2 300 450
3RF20 30-1AA.4 300 450
3RF20 30-1AA.6 400 800
3RF20 50-1AA.. 600 1800
3RF20 70-1AA.2 1200 7200
3RF20 70-1AA.4 1200 7200
3RF20 70-1AA.6 1150 6600
3RF20 90-1AA.. 1150 6600
Type 3RF20 .0-1AA0. 3RF20 .0-1AA4. 3RF20 .0-1AA2.

Control circuit
Method of operation DC operation DC operation AC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 acc. to EN 61131-2 4 ... 30V DC 110 ... 230
Max. rated control voltage V 30 30 253
Rated control current at Us mA 15 15 6
Rated frequency of the control supply voltage Hz - - 50/60
Response voltage V 15 4 90
current mA >2 >2 2
Drop-out voltage V 5 1 40
Operating times
closing time ms 1 + max. one half wave 1 + max. one half wave 40 + max. one half wave
opening time ms 1 + max. one half wave 1 + max. one half wave 40 + max. one half wave
Order No. All-range fuse Semiconductor protection fuse Cable and line protection fuse
LV design Cylindrical design LV design Cylindrical design DIAZED quick
gR/SITOR gL/gG/3NA 5SB
3NE1 10 × 38 mm 14 × 51 mm 22 × 58 mm 10 × 38 mm 14 × 51 mm 22 × 58 mm
aR/SITOR aR/SITOR aR/SITOR gL/gG 3NW gL/gG 3NW gL/gG 3NW
3NC1 0 3NC1 4 3NC2 2
3RF20 20-1AA.2 3NE1 814-0 3NC1 020 3NC1 420 3NC2 220 3NA2 803 3NW6 001-1 3NW6 101-1 - 5SB1 71
3RF20 20-1AA.4 3NE1 813-0 3NC1 016 3NC1 420 3NC2 220 3NA2 801 - 3NW6 101-1 - 5SB1 41
3RF20 30-1AA.6 3NE1 815-0 3NC1 032 3NC1 432 3NC2 232 3NA2 803-6 - - - -
3RF20 50-1AA.2 3NE1 817-0 - 3NC1 450 3NC2 250 3NA2 810 - 3NW6 107-1 3NW6 207-1 5SB3 21
3RF20 50-1AA.4 3NE1 802-0 - 3NC1 450 3NC2 250 3NA2 807 - - 3NW6 205-1 5SB3 11
3RF20 50-1AA.6 3NE1 803-0 - 3NC1 450 3NC2 250 3NA2 807-6 - - - -
3RF20 70-1AA.22) 3NE1 820-0 - - 3NC2 280 3NA2 817 - - 3NW6 217-1 5SB3 31
3RF20 70-1AA.42) 3NE1 020-2 - - 3NC2 280 3NA2 812 - - 3NW6 212-1 5SB3 21
3RF20 70-1AA.62) 3NE1 020-2 - - 3NC2 280 3NA2 812-6 - - - -
3RF20 90-1AA.22) 3NE1 021-2 - - 3NC2 200 3NA2 817 - - 3NW6 217-1 5SB3 31
3RF20 90-1AA.42) 3NE1 021-2 - - 3NC2 280 3NA2 812 - - 3NW6 212-1 5SB3 21
3RF20 90-1AA.62) 3NE1 020-2 - - 3NC2 280 3NA2 812-6 - - - -
1) Type of coordination "2" acc. to EN 60947-4-1: 2) These versions can also be protected against short-circuit with
In the event of a short-circuit, the control gear in the load feeder must not miniature circuit-breakers as described on page 7/11.
replaced.

Solid-State Relays
technical data
Overview
45 mm solid-state relays Important features:
• LED indicators
The 3RF22 solid-state relays with a width of 45 mm provide • Variety of connection techniques
space advantages over solutions with single-phase versions. • Plug-in control connection
The logical connection arrangement, with the power infeed from • Degree of protection IP20
above and connection of the load from below, ensures tidy • Zero-point switching,
installation in the control cabinet. • Two or three-phase controlled
Type 3RF22 ..-1.... 3RF22 ..-2.... 3RF22 ..-3....

General data
Ambient temperature
• During operation, derating from 40 °C °C -25 ... +60
Site altitude m 0 ... 1000; > 1000 ask Technical Assistance
Shock resistance acc. to g/ms 15/11
IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 g 2
Insulation strength at 50/60 Hz V rms 4000
(main/control circuit to ground)
• Emitted interference
- Conducted interference voltage Class A for industrial applications1)
acc. to IEC 60947-4-3
- Emitted, high-frequency interference Class A for industrial applications
• Interference immunity
- Electrostatic discharge kV Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2
acc. to IEC 61000-4-2
- Induced RF fields MHz 0.15 ... 80; 140 dBµV; behavior criterion 1
acc. to IEC 61000-4-6
- Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1
- Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 kV Conductor – ground 2; conductor – conductor 1; behavior criterion 2
Connection technique Screw terminal Spring-loaded connection Ring terminal end connection
• Conductor cross-section
- So l i d mm 2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) --
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6), 1 x 10 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) --
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 -- 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) --
- Solid or stranded, AWG conductors 2 x (AWG 14 ... 10) 2 x (AWG 18 ... 14) --
• S tripped length mm 10 10
• Terminal screw M4 -- M5
- Tightening torque, Nm 2 ... 2.5 2.5 ... 2
∅ 5 ... 6 mm, PZ 2 lb.in 18 ... 22 18 ... 22
• Cable lug -- --
- acc. to DIN 46234 5-2.5 ... 5-25
- acc. to JIS C 2805 R 2-5 ... 14-5
Connection, auxiliary/control contacts
• Conductor cross-section, mm 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0) 0.5 ... 2.5 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)
with or without end sleeve AWG 20 ... 12 20 ... 12 20 ... 12
• S tripped length mm 7 10 7
- Tightening torque, Nm 0.5 ... 0.6 0.5 ... 0.6
∅ 3.5 , PZ 1 lb.in 4.5 ... 5.3 4.5 ... 5.3
1) These products were built as Class A devices. The use of these devices in
residential areas could result in radio interference. In this case the may be
required to introduce additional damping measures.

Solid-State Relays
technical data
Type 3RF22 ..-.AB.5 3RF22 ..-.AC.5

Main circuit
Controlled phases Two-phase Three-phase
Rated operational voltage Ue V 48 ... 600 48 ... 600
• Operating range V 40 ... 660 40 ... 660
• Rated frequency Hz 50/60 ± 10 % 50/60 ± 10 %
Blocking voltage V 1200 1200
Rage of voltage rise V/µs 1.000 1.000
Order No. Imax1) Ie acc. to IEC 60947-4-3 Ie acc. to UL/CSA Power loss Minimum load Max. leakage
at Rthha/Tu = 40 °C at Rthha/Tu = 40 °C at Rthha/Tu = 50 °C at Imax current current
Main circuit
3RF22 30-. AB.. 30 0.57 30 0.57 30 0.44 81 0.5 10
3RF22 55-1AB.. 55 0.18 50 0.27 50 0.19 151 0.5 10
3RF22 55-2AB.. 20 1.83 20 1.58
3RF22 55-3AB.. 50 0.27 50 0.19
3RF22 30-. AC.. 30 0.33 30 0.33 30 0.25 122 0.5 10
3RF22 55-1AC.. 55 0.09 50 0.15 50 0.1 226 0.5 10
3RF22 55-2AC.. 20 1.19 20 1.02
3RF22 55-3AC.. 88 0.15 83 0.1
1) Imax provides information about the performance of the solid-state relay.
The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller depend-
Order No. Rated impulse withstand capacity Itsm I2t value

A A2s
Main circuit
3RF22 30-....5 300 450
3RF22 55-....5 600 1800
Type 3RF22 ..-.AB4. / 3RF22 ..-.AC4.

Control circuit
Method of operation DC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us V 4 ... 30
Response voltage V 15
• For tripping current mA 2
Drop-out voltage V 1
Operating times
• ON-delay ms 1 + max. one half-wave
• OFF delay ms 1 + max. one half-wave

3RF23 Solid-state contactors
technical data
Order No. 3RF23 ..-.A... 3RF23 ..-.B... 3RF23 ..-.C... 3RF23 ..-.D...
General data
Ambient temperature
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 15/11
Emitted interference acc. to IEC 60947-4-3 Class A for industrial applications Class A for Class A for
• Conducted interference voltage industrial industrial
• Emitted high-frequency interference voltage applications; applications
Class B for resi-
dential/business/
commercial
areas up to 16 A,
AC51 Low Noise
Noise immunity
• Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 61000-4-2 kV Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2
Order No. 3RF23 ..-1.... 3RF23 ..-2.... 3RF23 ..-3....

General data
Connection technique Screw connection Spring-loaded connection Ring cable connection
Solid mm 2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) -
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6), 1 x 10 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) -
Finely stranded without end sleeves mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) -
Solid or stranded AWG conductors AWG 2 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (18 ... 14) -
Insulation stripping length mm 10 10 -
• Tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5 - 2 ... 2.5
• Tightening torque lb.in 18 ... 22 - 18 ... 22
Cable lug
• DIN - - DIN 46234
-5-2.5, -5-6, -5-10, -5-16, -5-25
• JIS - - JIS C 2805 R 2-5, 5.5-5, 8-5, 14-5
Auxiliary/control contact
connections
Conductor cross-section mm2 1x (0.5 ... 2.5); 2x (0.5 ... 1.0) 0.5 ... 1.5 1x (0.5 ... 2.5); 2x (0.5 ... 1.0)
AWG 20 ... 12 20 ... 12 20 ... 12
Insulation stripping length mm 7 10 7
• Tightening torque Nm 0.5 ... 0.6 - 0.5 ... 0.6
lb.in 4.5 ... 5.3 - 4.5 ... 5.3
Type 3RF23 ..-....2 3RF23 ..-....4 3RF21 ..-....5 3RF23 ..-....6

Main circuit
• Rated frequency Hz 50/60 Hz
Rate of voltage rise V/µs 1000
Type 3RF23 ..-...0. 3RF23 ..-...2.

Control circuit
Method of operation DC operation AC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 to EN 61131-2 110 ... 230
Max. rated control voltage V 30 253
Rated control current at Us mA 15 6
Rated frequency of the control supply voltage Hz 50/60
Response voltage V 15 90
for tripping current mA 2 2
Drop-out voltage V 5 40
Operating times
closing time ms 1 + max. one half-wave 40 + max. one half-wave
opening time ms 1 + max. one half-wave 40 + max. one half-wave

technical data
Order No. Type current AC-511) Power loss at Minimum load Leakage Rated impulse I2t value
Imax acc. to UL/CSA Imax current current withstand
IEC 60947-4-3 capacity Itsm
at 40 °C at 40 °C at 50 °C
A A A W A mA A A 2s
Main circuit
3RF23 1.-.A..2 10.5 7.5 9.6 11 0.5 10 200 200
3RF23 1.-.A..4 200 200
3RF23 1.-.A.45
3RF23 1.-.A..6 400 800
3RF23 2.-.A..2 20 13.2 17.6 20 0.5 10 600 1800
3RF23 2.-.C..2 25 600 1800
3RF23 2.-.D..2 10 1150 6600
3RF23 2.-.A..4 10 600 1800
3RF23 2.-.C..4 25 600 1800
3RF23 2.-.D..4 10 1150 6600
3RF23 2.-.A.45
3RF23 2.-.A..6 10 600 1800
3RF23 3.-.A..2 30 22 27 33 0.5 10 600 1800
3RF23 3.-.A..4
3RF23 3.-.A.45
3RF23 3.-.A..6
3RF23 4.-.A..2 40 33 36 44 0.5 10 1200 7200
3RF23 4.-.A..4 1200 7200
3RF23 4.-.A.45
3RF23 4.-.A..6 1150 6600
3RF23 5.-.A..2 50 36 45 54 0.5 10 1150 6600
3RF23 5.-.A..4
3RF23 5.-.A.45
3RF23 5.-.A..6
3RF23 7.-.A..2 70 70 62 83 0.5 10 1150 6600
3RF23 7.-.A..4
3RF23 7.-.A.45
3RF23 7.-.A..6
3RF23 9.-.A..2 88 88 80 117 0.5 10 1150 6600
3RF23 9.-.A..4
3RF23 9.-.A.45
3RF23 9.-.A..6
Order No. Type current AC-511) Power loss Minimum Leakage Rated impulse I2t value
Imax acc. to UL/CSA AC-15 at Imax load current current withstand
IEC 60947- capacity Itsm
Parameters
at 40 °C 4-3 at 50 °C
at 40 °C
A A A A W A mA A A2s
Main circuit
3RF23 1.-.B..2 10.5 7.5 9.6 6 1200 1/h 11 0.5 10 200 200
3RF23 1.-.B..4 50 % ED 200 200
3RF23 1.-.B..6 400 800
3RF23 2.-.B..2 20 13.2 17.6 12 1200 1/h 20 0.5 10 600 1800
3RF23 2.-.B..4 50 % ED
3RF23 2.-.B..6
3RF23 3.-.B..2 30 22 27 15 1200 1/h 33 0.5 10 600 1800
3RF23 3.-.B..4 50 % ED
3RF23 3.-.B..6
3RF23 4.-.B..2 40 33 36 20 1200 1/h 44 0.5 10 1200 7200
3RF23 4.-.B..4 50 % ED 1200 7200
3RF23 4.-.B..6 1150 6600
3RF23 5.-.B..2 50 36 45 25 1200 1/h 54 0.5 10 1150 6600
3RF23 5.-.B..4 50 % ED
3RF23 5.-.B..6
3RF23 7.-.B..2 70 70 62 27.5 1200 1/h 83 0.5 10 1150 6600
3RF23 7.-.B..4 50 % ED
3RF23 7.-.B..6
3RF23 9.-.B..2 88 88 80 30 1200 1/h 117 0.5 10 1150 6600
3RF23 9.-.B..4 50 % ED
3RF23 9.-.B..6
conductor contactor. The actual permitted operational current Ie can be

technical data

(similar to type of coordination "2")1)
The semiconductor protection for the SIRIUS SC controlgear can If a fuse is used with a higher rated current than specified, semi-
be used with different protective devices. This allows protection conductor protection is no longer guaranteed. However, smaller
by means of LV HRC fuses of operational class gL/gG or supple- fuses with a lower rated current for the load can be used without
mentary protectors. Siemens recommends the use of special problems.
SITOR semiconductor fuses. The table below lists the maximum For protective devices with operational class gL/gG and for
permissible fuses for each SIRIUS SC control gear. SITOR full range fuses 3NE1, the minimum cross-sections for the
conductor to be connected must be taken into account.
Order No. All-range fuse Semiconductor protection fuse Cable and line protection fuse
LV HRC Cylindrical design LV HRC Cylindrical design DIAZED quick
design design gL/gG 10 x 38 mm 5SB
gR/SITOR 10 x 38 mm 14 x 51 mm 22 x 58 mm 14 x 51 mm 22 x 58 mm
aR/SITOR aR/SITOR aR/SITOR 3NA gL/gG 3NW gL/gG 3NW gL/gG 3NW
3NE1
3NC1 0 3NC1 4 3NC2 2
3RF23 1.-....2 3NE1 813-0 3NC1 010 3NC1 410 3NC2 220 3NA2 803 3NW6 001-1 3NW6 101-1 - 5SB1 41
3RF23 1.-....4 3NE1 813-0 3NC1 010 3NC1 410 3NC2 220 3NA2 801 3NW6 001-1 3NW6 101-1 - 5SB1 41
3RF23 1.-....6 3NE1 813-0 3NC1 010 3NC1 410 3NC2 220 3NA2 803-6 - - - -
3RF23 2.-....2 3NE1 814-0 3NC1 020 3NC1 420 3NC2 220 3NA2 807 3NW6 007-1 3NW6 107-1 3NW6 207-1 5SB1 71
3RF23 2.-....4 3NE1 814-0 3NC1 020 3NC1 420 3NC2 220 3NA2 807 3NW6 005-1 3NW6 105-1 3NW6 205-1 5SB1 71
3RF23 2.-....6 3NE1 814-0 3NC1 020 3NC1 420 3NC2 220 3NA2 807-6 - - - -
3RF23 3.-....2 3NE1 803-0 3NC1 032 3NC1 432 3NC2 232 3NA2 810 - 3NW6 107-1 3NW6 207-1 5SB3 11
3RF23 3.-....4 3NE1 803-0 3NC1 032 3NC1 432 3NC2 232 3NA2 807 - 3NW6 105-1 3NW6 205-1 5SB3 11
3RF23 3.-....6 3NE1 803-0 3NC1 032 3NC1 432 3NC2 232 3NA2 807-6 - - - -
3RF23 4.-....2 3NE1 802-0 - 3NC1 440 3NC2 240 3NA2 817 - 3NW6 117-1 3NW6 217-1 5SB3 21
3RF23 4.-....6 3NE1 802-0 - 3NC1 440 3NC2 240 3NA2 812-6 - - - -
3RF23 5.-....4 3NE1 817-0 - 3NC1 450 3NC2 250 3NA2 812 - - 3NW6 210-1 5SB3 21
3RF23 5.-....6 3NE1 817-0 - 3NC1 450 3NC2 250 3NA2 812-6 - - - -
3RF23 7.-....2 3NE1 820-0 - - 3NC2 280 3NA2 817 - - 3NW6 217-1 5SB3 31
3RF23 7.-....4 3NE1 020-2 - - 3NC2 280 3NA2 812 - - 3NW6 210-1 5SB3 21
3RF23 7.-....6 3NE1 020-2 - - 3NC2 280 3NA2 812-6 - - - -
3RF23 9.-....2 3NE1 021-2 - - 3NC2 200 3NA2 817 - - 3NW6 217-1 5SB3 31
3RF23 9.-....4 3NE1 021-2 - - 3NC2 280 3NA2 812 - - 3NW6 210-1 5SB3 21
3RF23 9.-....6 3NE1 020-2 - - 3NC2 280 3NA2 812-6 - - - -
1) Type of coordination "2" acc. to EN 60947-4-1:
In the event of a short-circuit, the controlgear in the load feeder must not
replaced.

technical data
Overview
The complete units consist of a solid-state relay plus optimized circuits with protective extra-low voltage (PELV) or safety
heat sink, and are therefore ready to use. They offer defined extra-low voltage (SELV) in building engineering. For other appli-
rated currents to make selection as easy as possible. Depend- cations, such as for extended personal safety, the heat sink can
ing on the version, current intensities of up to 50 A are achieved. be grounded through a screw terminal.
Like all of our solid-state switching devices, one of their particu-
lar advantages is their compact and space-saving design. With Version for resistive loads, "zero-point switching"
their insulated mounting foot they can easily be snapped onto a This standard version is often used for switching space heaters
standard mounting rail, or they can be mounted on carrier plates on and off.
with fixing screws. This insulation enables them to be used in
Order No. 3RF24 ..-1.... 3RF24 ..-2.... 3RF24 ..-3....

General data
Ambient temperature
Insulation strength at 50/60 Hz V rms 4000
(main/control circuit to ground)
• Emitted interference acc. to IEC 60947-4-3
- Emitted, high-frequency interference voltage Class A for industrial applications
- Electrostatic discharge kV Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2
acc. to IEC 61000-4-2
- Induced RF fields MHz 0.15 ... 80; 140 dBµV; behavior criterion 1
acc. to IEC 61000-4-6
- Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1
Connection technique Screw terminal Spring-loaded connection Ring terminal end connection
• Conductor cross-section
- So l i d mm 2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2x (0.5 ... 2.5) --
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6), 1 x 10 2x (0.5 ... 1.5) --
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 -- 2x (0.5 ... 2.5) --
- Solid or stranded, AWG conductors 2 x (AWG 14 ... 10) 2 x (AWG 18 ... 14) --
• S tripped length mm 10 10 --
- Tightening torque NM 2 ... 2.5 2 ... 2.5
lb.in 18 ... 22 18 ... 22
• Cable lug -- --
- acc. to DIN 46234 5-2.5 ... 5-25
- acc. to JIS C 2805 R 2-5 ,,, 14-5
Connection, auxiliary/control contacts
• Conductor cross-section mm 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0) 0.5 ... 2.5 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)
AWG AWG 20 ... 12 AWG 20 ... 12 AWG 20 ... 12
• S tripped length mm 7 10 7
- Tightening torque, NM 0.5 ... 0.6 0.5 ... 0.6
∅ 3.5 , PZ 1 lb.in 4.5 ... 5.3 4.5 ... 5.3
residential areas could result in radio interference. In this case the may be
required to introduce additional damping measures.

technical data
Type 3RF24 ..-.AB.5 3RF24 ..-.AC.5

Main circuit
Controlled phases Two-phase Three-phase
• Operating range V 40 ... 660 40 ... 660
Rage of voltage rise V/µs 1000 1000
Order No. Type current Rated operational current Ie Power loss at Minimum load Max. leakage Rated impulse I2t value
IAC-51 current current withstand
IAC-51 acc. to acc. to current Itsm
IEC 60947-4-3 UL/CSA
at 40 °C for 40°C for 50 °C
A A A w A mA A A²s
Main circuit
3RF24 10-.AB.5 10.5 7.5 9.5 21 0.1 10 200 200
3RF24 20-.AB.5 20 15 18 39 0.5 10 500 1800
3RF24 30-.AB.5 30 22 26 61 0.5 10 1200 7200
3RF24 40-.AB.5 40 32 35 81 0.5 10 1150 6600
3RF24 50-.AB.5 50 38 45 105 0.5 10 1150 6600
3RF24 10-.AC.5 10.5 7 9 32 0.1 10 300 450
3RF24 20-.AC.5 20 15 18 67 0.5 10 600 1800
3RF24 30-.AC.5 30 22 26 93 0.5 10 1200 7200
3RF24 40-.AC.5 40 29 35 121 0.5 10 1150 6600
3RF24 50-.AC.5 50 38 45 160 0.5 10 1150 6600
1) The type current provides information about the performance of the solid-
state contactor. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be
For derating see the characteristic curves on page 4/18.
Type 3RF24 ..-...4. 3RF24 ..-...5.

Control circuit
Rated control supply voltage Us V 4 ... 30 190 ... 230
Rated frequency Hz -- 50/60 ± 10%
of the control supply voltage
Actuating voltage, max. V 30 253
• For actuating current mA 15 6
• For tripping current mA >3 >2
Drop-out voltage V <1 < 40
Operating times
• ON-delay ms 1 + max. one half-wave 40 + max. one half-wave
• OFF delay ms 1 + max. one half-wave 40 + max. one half-wave

Solid-State
Solid-State Switching Switching
Devices for Devices
Switching Motors
technical data
General data
Type 3RF34 05-1BB.. 3RF34 10-1BB.., 3RF34 05-2BB.. 3RF34 10-2BB..,
3RF34 03-1BD.., 3RF34 12-1BB.., 3RF34 12-2BB..,
3RF34 05-1BD.. 3RF34 16-1BB.. 3RF34 16-2BB..
H
3RF34 10-1BD..
D
Dimensions (W x H x D) W mm 45 x 95 x 96.5 90 x 95 x 96.5 45 x 95 x 96.5 90 x 95 x 96.5
Ambient temperature
Installation altitude m 0 ... 1 000; derating from 1 000 on request
Insulation strength at 50/60 Hz V rms 4 000
(main/control circuit to floor)
• Emitted interference according to IEC 60947-4-2
6
- Electrostatic discharge kV Contact discharge: 4; Air discharge: 8;
according to IEC 61000-4-2 Behavior criterion 2
- Induced RF fields MHz 0.15 ... 80;
according to IEC 61000-4-6 140 dBµV; behavior criterion 1
- Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2; at 5 kHz; behavior criterion 2
- Surge according to IEC 61000-4-52) kV Conductor - Ground: 2; Conductor - Conductor: 1; Behavior criterion 2
Connection type Screw terminals Spring-type terminals
Operating devices Standard screwdriver size 2 and Pozidriv 2 3.0 x 0.5 and 3.5 x 0.5
Conductor cross-sections, main contacts
• Solid mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5)3), 2 x (2.5 ... 6)3) 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5)3); 2 x (2.5 ... 6)3); 1 x 10 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 -- 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded 2 x (AWG 14 ... 10) 2 x (AWG 18 ... 14)
Conductor cross-sections, auxiliary/control contacts
• With/without end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0) 0.5 ... 2.5
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 20 ... 12 AWG 20 ... 12
Permissible mounting positions ±10° ±10°
NSB0_01703
1)
These products were built as Class A devices. The use of these devices in
residential areas could result in radio interference. In this case these may
be required to introduce additional interference suppression measures.
2)
The following applies for reversing contactors: To maintain the values, a
3TX7 462-3L surge suppressor (see "3TB Contactors", Chapter 3) should
be used between the phases L1 and L3 as close as possible to the revers-
ing contactor.
3)

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 6/113
Solid-State
Contactors
technical data
Overview
These two-phase controlled, instantaneous switching solid-state
contactors in the insulting enclosure are offered in 45 mm width
to 5.2 A – and in 90 mm width to 16 A. This means that it is pos-
sible to operate motors up to 7.5 kW.
Type 3RF34 05-.BB.. 3RF34 10-.BB.. 3RF34 12-.BB.. 3RF34 16-.BB..
Fuseless design
with 3RV2 motor starter protector, CLASS 10
Rated operational current IAC-531)
according to IEC 60947-4-2
• At 40 °C A 5.2 (4.5) 9.2 12.5 16
• UL/CSA, at 50 °C A 4.6 (4.0) 8.4 11.5 14
• At 60 °C A 4.2 (3.5) 7.6 10.5 12.5
Power loss at IAC-53
• At 40 °C W 10 (8) 16 22 28
Short-circuit protection with type of coordination "1"
at an operational voltage of Ue to 440 V
• Motor starter protector, type 3RV20 11-1GA10 3RV20 11-1JA10 3RV20 11-1KA10 3RV20 11-4AA10
• Current Iq kA 50 5 5 3
6
1)
The reduced values in brackets apply to a directly mounted circuit breaker
and simultaneous butt-mounting.
Type 3RF34 05-.BB.4 3RF34 05-.BB.6 3RF34 10-.BB.. 3RF34 12-.BB.4 3RF34 12-.BB.6 3RF34 16-.BB..
Fused design
with directly connected 3RB3 overload relay
Rated operational current IAC-53
• At 40 °C A 4 7.8 9.5 11
• UL/CSA, at 50 °C A 3.6 7 8.5 10
• At 60 °C A 3.2 6.2 7.6 9
• At 40 °C W 7 13 16 18
Minimum load current A 0.5
Max. off-state current mA 10
Rated peak withstand current Itsm A 200 600 600 1 200 1 150 1 150
I2t value A2s 200 1 800 1 800 7 200 6 600 6 600
Type 3RF34 ..-.BB.4 3RF34 ..-.BB.6

Main circuit
Controlled phases 2-phase 2-phase
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC 48 ... 480 48 ... 600
• Operating range V AC 40 ... 506 40 ... 660
Rage of voltage rise V/µs 1 000 1 000

6/114 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
Solid-State
Solid-State Switching DevicesSwitching Devices
technical data
Type 3RF34 ..-.BB0. 3RF34 ..-.BB2.

Control circuits
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 acc. to IEC 61131-2 110 ... 230
Rated frequency Hz -- 50/60 ± 10 %
Control supply voltage, max. V 30 253
Typical actuating current mA 20 15
Drop-out voltage V 5 < 40
Operating times
• ON-delay ms 1 5
• OFF-delay ms 1 + max. one half-wave 30 + max. one half-wave
Circuit diagrams
DC control supply voltage AC control supply voltage
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
A1 + A1 ~
A2 - A2 ~
6
NSB0_01794
NSB0_01795
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
3/N/PE 50 Hz 230/400 V
L1 DC 24 V
L2 L+
L3
L-
N
PE
F4
F1 F2 F3
U
S1
K1 R1
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
A1+
A2-
NSB0_01778
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
F1 ... F4 Fuses
K1 Solid-state motor
M1 contactor
M M1 Motor
~ R1 3TX7 462-3L varistor
S1 "ON" switch

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 6/115
Solid-State
Contactors
3RF34 Solid-state reversing contactors
technical data
three-phase
Overview
The integration of four conducting paths to a reverse switch, width with the three-phase reversing contactors. Devices with
combined in one enclosure makes this device a particularly 45 mm width cover motors up to 2.2 kW – and those with 90 mm
compact solution. Compared to conventional systems, for which width up to 3 kW.
two contactors are required, it is possible to save up to 50 %
Type 3RF34 03-.BD.4 3RF34 05-.BD.4 3RF34 10-.BD.4
Fuseless design
with 3RV2 motor starter protector, CLASS 10
Rated operational current IAC-531)
• At 40 °C A 3.8 (3.4) 5.4 (4.8) 7.4
• UL/CSA, at 50 °C A 3.5 (3.1) 5 (4.3) 6.8
• At 60 °C A 3.2 (2.8) 4.6 (3.8) 6.2
• At 40 °C W 7 (6) 9 (8) 13
Short-circuit protection with type of coordination "1"
at an operational voltage of Ue to 440 V
• Motor starter protector, type 3RV20 11-1FA10 3RV20 11-1GA10 3RV20 11-1JA10
• Current Iq kA 50 50 10
6
1)
The reduced values in brackets apply to a directly mounted circuit breaker
and simultaneous butt-mounting.
Type 3RF34 03-.BD.4 3RF34 05-.BD.4 3RF34 10-.BD.4

Fused design
with directly connected 3RB3 overload relay
Rated operational current IAC-53
• At 40 °C A 3.8 5.4 7.4
• UL/CSA, at 50 °C A 3.5 5 6.8
• At 60 °C A 3.2 4.6 6.2
• At 40 °C W 6 8 16
Minimum load current A 0.5
Max. off-state current mA 10
Rated peak withstand current Itsm A 200 600
I2t value A2s 200 1 800
Type 3RF34 ..-.BD.4

Main circuit
Controlled phases 2-phase
Rated operational voltage Ue1) V AC 48 ... 480
• Operating range V AC 40 ... 506
• Rated frequency Hz 50/60 ± 10 %
Rage of voltage rise V/µs 1 000
1) To reduce the risk of a phase short circuit due to overvoltage, we recom-
mend using a varistor type 3TX7 462-3L between the phases L1 and L3
and as close as possible to the switchgear.
We recommend a design with semiconductor protection as short-circuit
protection.

6/118 Siemens IC 10 · 2012
Solid-State
Solid-State Switching DevicesSwitching Devices
3RF34 Solid-state reversing contactors
technical data
three-phase
Type 3RF34 ..-.BD0. 3RF34 ..-.BD2.

Control circuits
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 acc. to IEC 61131-2 110 ... 230
Rated frequency Hz -- 50/60 ± 10 %
Control supply voltage, maximum V 30 253
Typical actuating current mA 15 10
Drop-out voltage V 5 < 40
Operating times1)
• ON-delay ms 5 20
• OFF-delay ms 5 + max. one half-wave 10 + max. one half-wave
• Interlocking time ms 60 ... 100 50 ... 100
1) Caution! Risk of phase short circuit in automatic mode.
The control inputs must not be actuated until after a delay time of 40 ms
after the main voltage is applied
Circuit diagrams
DC control supply voltage AC control supply voltage
6
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
A1+ A1~
A2- A2~
A3+ A3~
NSB0_01776
NSB0_01777
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
3/N/PE 50 Hz 230/400 V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 F2 F3 F4
U
S1
K1 R1
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 S2
A1~
A2~
A3~
NSB0_01779
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
F1 ... F4 Fuses
K1 Solid-state reversing
M1 contactor
M
~ M1 Motor
R1 3TX7 462-3L varistor
S1 "Counterclockwise" switch
S2 "Clockwise" switch

Siemens IC 10 · 2012 6/119
Function Modules
General and technical data
Overview
Function modules for SIRIUS SC semiconductor switching The plug-in connection to control the semiconductor switching
devices devices can simply remain in use.
A great variety of applications demand an expanded range of The following function modules are available:
functionality. These applications can easily be met with Sirius SC • Converter
function modules. The modules are mounted simply by clicking
them into place; straight away the necessary connections are • Load monitors (basic and enhanced)
made with the semiconductor relay or contactor. • Power controller
Type 3RF29 ..-.E... 3RF29 ..-.F... 3RF29 ..-.G... 3RF29 ..-.H...
General data
Ambient temperature
• Conducted interference voltage Class A for industrial applications1)
acc. to IEC 60947-4-3
• Emitted, high-frequency interference voltage Class A for industrial applications
acc. to IEC 60947-4-3
Noise immunity
• Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 61000-4-2 kV Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2
• Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1
Connection, auxiliary/control contacts,
screw connection
Conductor cross-section mm2 1x (0.5 ... 2.5); 2x (0.5 ... 1) AWG 20 ... 12
• Insulation stripping length mm 7
Terminal screw M3
Converter diameter of hole mm - 7 17
1) Note limitations for power controller function module on page 2/31.
Type 3RF29 ..-.E..8 3RF29 ..-.F..8 3RF29 ..-.G..3 3RF29 ..-.G..6 3RF29 ..-.H..3 3RF29 ..-.H..6
Main circuit
Rated operational voltage Ue V -1) 110 ... 230 400 ... 600 110 ... 230 400 ... 600
• Tolerance % - -15 / +10
• Rated frequency Hz - 50/60
Rated insulation voltage Ui V - 600
Voltage detection
Measuring range V - 93.5 ... 253 340 ... 660 93.5 ... 253 340 ... 660
Mains voltage fluctuation compensation % - 20
1) Versions do not depend on main circuit.
Type 3RF29 ..-...0. 3RF29 ..-...1. 3RF29 ..-...3.

Control circuit
Method of operation DC operation AC/DC operation AC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 24 110
Rated operating current mA 15 15 15
Max. rated control voltage V 30 30 121
Rated control current at maximum voltage mA 15 15 15
Rated frequency Hz - 50/60 50/60
Response voltage V 15 15 90
for tripping current mA 2 2 2
Drop-out voltage V 5 5 -
Type 3RF29 2.- 3RF29 2.- 3RF29 2.- 3RF29 5.- 3RF29 5.- 3RF29 9.- 3RF29 9.-
.F... .G... .H... .G... .H... .G... .H...
Current detection
Rated operational current Ie A 20 50 90
Measuring range A 4 ... 22 4 ... 55 4 ... 99
Number of partial loads 6 12 - 12 - 12 -

General and technical data
Overview
Function modules for SIRIUS SC solid-state switching The following function modules are available:
devices • Converter
A great variety of applications demand an expanded range of • Load monitoring
functionality. With our function modules, these requirements can • Heating current monitoring
be met really easily. The modules are mounted simply by click-
ing them into place; straight away the necessary connections • Power control regulators
are made with the solid-state relay or contactor. The plug-in • Power controller
connection to control the solid-state switching devices can
simply remain in use.
Type 3RF29 ..-.K...

General data
Ambient temperature
Insulation resistance between load and MΩ 1.5
control circuit
• Emitted interference
- Conducted interference voltage acc. to Class A for industrial applications1)
IEC 60947-4-3
acc. to IEC 60947-4-3
- Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 61000-4-2 kV Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2
- Induced RF fields acc. to IEC 61000-4-6 MHz 0.15 ... 80; 140 dBµV; behavior criterion 1
- Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1
Connection, auxiliary/control contacts, screw
terminal
• Conductor cross-section mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0), 1 x (AWG 20 ... 12)
• S tripped length mm 7
• Terminal screw M3
- Tightening torque Nm 0.5 ... 0.6
lb.in 4.5 ... 5.3
Converter, diameter of hole mm 17
residential areas could result in radio interference. In this case the user
may require to introduce additional damping measures.

Type 3RF29 ..-0KA.3 3RF29 ..-0KA.6

Main circuit
Voltage detection
• Measuring/teach range V 93.5 ... 253 340 ... 660
Compensation of mains voltage fluctuation % 20 (only within the measuring range)
Type 3RF29 04-0KA.. 3RF29 20-0KA.. 3RF29 50-0KA.. 3RF29 90-0KA..

Current measurement
Rated operational current Ie A 4 20 50 90
Current measurement
• Teach range A 0.15 ... 4 0.65 ... 20 1.6 ... 50 2.9 ... 90
• Measuring range A 0 ... 4 0 ... 22 0 ... 55 0 ... 99
• Minimum partial load current A -- 0.65 1.6 2.9
Number of partial loads 1 ... 6
Type 3RF29 ..-0KA1. 3RF29 ..-0KA3.

Control circuit A1–A2
General data
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 AC/DC AC 110
• Operating range V 20.5 ... 26.5 DC 18 ... 30 90 ... 121
Rated frequency of the control supply voltage Hz 50/60 ± 10% -- 50/60 ± 10%
Current consumption mA < 40 < 20
Control input IN
Rated control voltage Uc V 24 AC/DC AC 110
• For actuating current mA < 15 < 15
• Actuating voltage, max. mA AC 26.5 DC 30 121
Control supply voltage, min./max. V AC 20.5 ... 26.5 DC 18 ... 30 90 ... 121
Response voltage V AC 14 DC 15 79
• For tripping current mA >2 >2 >2
Drop-out voltage V 5 5 15
Control input 0 ... 10 V
Input analog V 0 ... 10
• Permissible range V -1 ... 11
Input resistance kΩ 8
Period duration s 1
Auxiliary circuit 11–12
Switching voltage V 24 AC/DC AC 110
• Actuating current (utilization category) A 0.5 (DC-12) 0.5 (AC-12)
• Switching voltage, min./max. V 15 ... 30 90 ... 121
Continuous thermal current, max. Ith A 1 1

Semiconductor Relays and Contactors, Function Modules
Project planning aids
Characteristics
SIRIUS SC semiconductor relays
Dependence of the device current Ie on the ambient temperature Ta (Chart data for SIRIUS SC relays based on I max)
SIRIUS SC semiconductor relay with 20 A type current (3RF21 20/3RF20 20)1)
Min. thickness of the heat sink the relay is mounted to
4 mm
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
0
2 6 10 14 18 22 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
SIRIUS SC semiconductor relay with 30 A type current (3RF21 30/3RF20 30)

4 mm 5 mm
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
6 10 14 18 22 26 30 34 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

4 mm 5 mm 8 mm
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
1) Arrangement example for Ie = 20 A and Ta = 40 C:

The task is to find the thermal resistance Rthha and the heat-sink overtem- This results in: dTha = Rthha x PM = 1.7 K/W x 28 W = 47.6 K. At
perature dTha. From the diagram on the left -> PM = 28 W, from the dia- dTha = 47.6 K the heat sink must therefore have an Rthha = 1.7 K/W.
gram on the right -> Rthha = 1.7 K/W. (Chart data for SIRIUS SC relays based on I max)

Dependence of the device current Ie on the ambient temperature Ta (Chart data for SIRIUS SC relays based on I max)
4 mm 5 mm 8 mm 10 mm
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

4 mm 5 mm 8 mm 10 mm
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Derating curves
SIRIUS SC semiconductor contactor with 10 A type current (3RF23 10)

Derating curves
SIRIUS SC semiconductor contactor with 40 A type current (3RF23 40)1)
1) Identical current/temperature curves for individual and side-by-side

mounting.

Derating curves
1) Identical current/temperature curves for individual and side-by-side

mounting.

Solid-State Relays
Dependence of the device current Ie on the ambient temperature Ta (two-phase controlled)
s
3 mm 5 mm
100
M in W
e in A
Rthha
Module power loss
80 0,35 K/W
0,45 K/W
0,56 K/W
60 0,75 K/W
1 K/W
1,3 K/W
1,7 K/W
40
2,2 K/W
3 K/W
4 K/W
20
5 K/W
7 K/W
10 K/W
0
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Device current e in A Ambient temperature a in °C
Type current 30 A (3RF22 30-.AB..)
s
3 mm 5 mm
160
M in W
e in A
140
Rthha
Module power loss
0,13 K/W
120
0,18 K/W
0,25 K/W
100
0,37 K/W
0,55 K/W
80
0,8 K/W
1,2 K/W
60
2 K/W
3 K/W
40
4 K/W
5 K/W
20
7 K/W
10 K/W
0
5 15 25 35 45 55 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Solid-State Relays
Dependence of the device current Ie on the ambient temperature Ta (three-phase controlled)
s
3 mm 5 mm 160
M in W
e in A
140
Rthha
Module power loss
120
0,26 K/W
0,33 K/W
100
0,44 K/W
0,62 K/W
80 0,9 K/W
1,3 K/W
60 1,7 K/W
2,2 K/W
40 3 K/W
4 K/W
20 5 K/W
7 K/W
10 K/W
0
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Type current 30 A (3RF22 30-.AC..)
s
3 mm 5 mm
2 50
M in W
e in A
Rthha
Module power loss
2 00
0,06 K/W
0,09 K/W
0,15 K/W
1 50
0,25 K/W
0,4 K/W
0,6 K/W
1 00 0,8 K/W
1,1 K/W
1,5 K/W
50 2 K/W
3 K/W
4 K/W
6 K/W
0
5 15 25 35 45 55 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Type current 55 A (3RF22 55-.AC..) This results in:

Arrangement example dTha = Rthha × PM = 0.09 K/W × 227 W = 20.4 K.
Given conditions: Ie = 55 A and Ta = 40 C. At dTha = 20.4 K the heat sink must therefore have an
The task is to find the thermal resistance Rthha and the heat sink Rthha = 0.09 K/W.
overtemperature dTha.
From the diagram on the left → PM = 227 W,
from the diagram on the right → Rthha = 0.09 K/W.

Derating curves, two-phase controlled
14 26
24
12
in A
22
Module power loss PM in W

20
e
10 18
16
8
14
12
6
10
8
4
6
2 4
NSB0_01675
2
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Ambient temperature Ta in °C Device current e in A
Type current 10.5 A (3RF24 10-.AB..)
25 50
45
in A

20 40
e
35
15 30
25
10 20
15
5 10
NSB0_01676
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 4 8 12 16 20 24
Ambient temperature Ta in °C Device current ein A
40 78
72
35
in A
66
30 60
e
54
25 48
42
20
36
15 30
24
10 18
12
NSB0_01677
5
6
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 6 12 18 24 30 36

50 110
45 100
in A

40 90
e
80
35
70
30
60
25
50
20
40
15
30
10 20
NSB0_01678
5 10
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 8 16 24 32 40 48
Type current 40 A (3RF24 40-.AB..)1)
60 120
55
in A

50 100
45
e
40 80
35
30 60
25
20 40
15
10 20
NSB0_01679
5
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 10 20 30 40 50
Type current 50 A (3RF24 50-.AB..)1)
1) Identical current/temperature curves for stand-alone and side-by-side

installation.

Derating curves, three-phase controlled
14
36
12 33
in A

30
e
10 27
24
8
21
18
6
15
12
4
9
2 6
NSB0_01680
3
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Type current 10.5 A (3RF24 10-.AC..)
25 75
70
65
in A

20 60
e
55
50
15 45
40
35
10 30
25
20
5 15
NSB0_01681
10
5
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24
Type current 20 A (3RF24 20-.AC..) 1) Identical current/temperature curves for stand-alone and side-by-side
installation.
40
110
35 100
in A
90
30
e
80
25 70
60
20
50
15
40
10 30
20
NSB0_01682
5
10
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
Type current 30 A (3RF24 30-.AC..)1)

installation.

50 160
45
140
in A

40
e
120
35
100
30
25 80
20
60
15
40
10
NSB0_01683
5 20
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 8 16 24 32 40 48
60 200
180
in A

50
160
e
140
40
120
30 100
80
20
60
40
10
NSB0_01684
20
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 10 20 30 40 50

installation.

Maximum permissible switching frequency depending on the starting time ta and the ON period tED
Ia Ie = 7,2 Ib Ie = 1
10000
Operating frequency 1/h
1000
Starting time
ta = 0,05 s
100
ta = 0,1 s
ta = 0,2 s
ta = 0,4 s
ta = 0,8 s
NSB0_01780
ta = 1,6 s
ta = 3,2 s
10
0,01 0,1 1 10 100 1000
t OP in s
For motors with a starting current of 4- to 7.2 times the rated current and with a full load
Ia Ie = 7,2 Ib Ie = 0,6
10000
1000
Starting time
ta = 0,05 s
100
ta = 0,1 s
ta = 0,2 s
ta = 0,4 s
ta = 0,8 s
NSB0_01781
ta = 1,6 s
ta = 3,2 s
10
0,01 0,1 1 10 100 1000
t ON in s
For motors with a starting current of 4- to 7.2 times the rated current and with a 60 % load

Ia Ie = 4 Ib Ie = 1
10000
1000
Starting time
ta = 0,05 s
100
ta = 0,1 s
ta = 0,2 s
ta = 0,4 s
ta = 0,8 s
NSB0_01782
ta = 1,6 s
ta = 3,2 s
10
0,01 0,1 1 10 100 1000
t OP in s
For motors with a starting current of up to 4 times the rated current and with a full load
Ia Ie = 4 Ib Ie = 0,6
10000
1000
Starting time
ta = 0,05 s
100
ta = 0,1 s
ta = 0,2 s
ta = 0,4 s
ta = 0,8 s
NSB0_01783
ta = 1,6 s
ta = 3,2 s
10
0,01 0,1 1 10 100 1000
t OP in s
For motors with a starting current of up to 4 times the rated current and with a 60 % load

3-phase
Maximum permissible switching frequency depending on the starting time ta and the ON period tED
Ia Ie = 7,2 Ib Ie = 1
10000
1000
Starting time
ta = 0,05 s
100
ta = 0,1 s
ta = 0,2 s
ta = 0,4 s
ta = 0,8 s
NSB0_01784
ta = 1,6 s
ta = 3,2 s
10
0,01 0,1 1 10 100 1000
t OP in s
For motors with a starting current of 4- to 7.2 times the rated current and with a full load
Ia Ie = 7,2 Ib Ie = 0,6
10000
1000
Starting time
ta = 0,05 s
100
ta = 0,1 s
ta = 0,2 s
ta = 0,4 s
ta = 0,8 s
NSB0_01785
ta = 1,6 s
ta = 3,2 s
10
0,01 0,1 1 10 100 1000
t OP in s
For motors with a starting current of 4- to 7.2 times the rated current and with a 60 % load

3-phase
Ia Ie = 4 Ib Ie = 1
10000
1000
Starting time
ta = 0,05 s
100
ta = 0,1 s
ta = 0,2 s
ta = 0,4 s
ta = 0,8 s
NSB0_01786
ta = 1,6 s
ta = 3,2 s
10
0,01 0,1 1 10 100 1000
t OP in s
For motors with a starting current of up to 4 times the rated current and with a full load
Ia Ie = 4 Ib Ie = 0,6
10000
1000
Starting time
ta = 0,05 s
100
ta = 0,1 s
ta = 0,2 s
ta = 0,4 s
ta = 0,8 s
NSB0_01787
ta = 1,6 s
ta = 3,2 s
10
0,01 0,1 1 10 100 1000
t OP in s
For motors with a starting current of up to 4 times the rated current and with a 60 % load

Dimensions
Dimension drawings
Screw connection Spring-loaded Ring connection
3RF21 .0-1AA.. connection 3RF21 .0-2AA.. 3RF21 .0-3AA..
3RF20 .0-1AA.

Solid-State Relays
Solid-state relays
Spring-loaded Screw terminal Spring-loaded terminals Ring terminal end connection

terminals 3RF22 ..-1.... 3RF22 ..-2.... 3RF22 ..-3....
47,5
69
77
69
95
NSB0_01689a
13 31 29 33 29
26 47 45
30
47
Schematics
Two-phase controlled Three-phase controlled
DC control supply voltage DC control supply voltage
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
A1 + A1 +
A2 - A2 -
NSB0_01696
NSB0_01694
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3

Dimensions
Function modules for SIRIUS SC semiconductor switching devices
Converters Basic load monitoring
3RF29 00-0EA18 3RF29 00-0FA08
Extended load monitoring Power controllers

3RF29 .0-0GA.. 3RF29 .0-0HA..
Accessories for SIRIUS SC semiconductor switching devices

Terminal cover for SIRIUS semiconductor switching devices
3RF29 00-3PA88

Dimensions
Semiconductor contactors with 10 A and 20 A type current
3RF23 10-..... 3RF23 20-..... Screw connection Spring-loaded connection Ring connection
3RF23 10-1.... 3RF23 10-2.... 3RF23 10-3....
3RF23 20-1.... 3RF2320-2.... 3RF23 20-3....
Semiconductor contactors with 30 A type current

Screw connection Ring connection
3RF23 30-1.... 3RF23 30-3....
Semiconductor contactors with 40 A and 50 A type current

3RF23 40-1.... 3RF23 40-3....
3RF23 50-1.... 3RF23 50-3....

Dimensions
Screw connection Rin g connection
3RF23 70-1.... 3RF23 70-3....

3RF23 90-1.... 3RF23 90-3....

Dimensions
Type current 10.5 A
Spring-loaded Screw terminal Spring-loaded terminals

terminals 3RF24 10-1.... 3RF24 10-2....
47,5
100
69
90
77
95
14,5
NSB0_01690a
25 5 14,4 14,4
104,5 Ø 4,5
73
88 30
5 45
105
Type current 20 A; 30 A (2-phase controlled)
Screw terminal Spring-loaded terminals

3RF24 .0-1.... 3RF24 20-2....
b
30
5
25
77
47,5
100
77
69
90
99,5
112,5
14,5
NSB0_01691
14,4 14,4
Ø 4,5 33
45
View A View A
A
b
3RF2420-.AB.. 67
3RF2420-.AC.. 89,5
3RF2430-.AB..

Dimensions
Type current 30 A (3-phase controlled); 40 A, 50 A
Screw terminal Ring terminal end connection

3RF24 .0-1.... 3RF24 50-3....
b
d
31,5
86
104,5
108
47,5
69
69
e
a
121
14,5
NSB0_01692
14,4 14,4 Ø 4,5
View A
45
A View A
a b d e
3RF2430-.AC.. 100 113,5 100 85
3RF2440-.AB..
3RF2440-.AC.. 100 157,5 146 80
3RF2450-.AB..
3RF2450-.AC.. 180 157,5 146 160
Schematics
DC control supply voltage DC control supply voltage
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
PE A1 + PE A1 +
A2 - A2 -
NSB0_01687
NSB0_01685
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3

AC control supply voltage AC control supply voltage
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
A1 A1
PE PE
A2 A2
NSB0_01688
NSB0_01686
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3

Dimensions
Screw terminals
3RF24 05-1.... 3RF24 1.-1....
Spring-loaded terminals
3RF24 05-2.... 3RF24 1.-2....

40 45
Ø4,8
85x35
47,5
77
95
14,5
NSB0_01773
62 4,3 33 45
80 45 90
95,5

Dimensions
Screw terminals
3RF24 0.-1.... 3RF24 1.-1....

Wiring diagrams
Circuit diagrams
SIRIUS SC semiconductor relays SIRIUS SC semiconductor contactors
DC control version AC control version DC control version AC control version

Converters Basic load monitoring Extended load monitoring Power controllers
1) Internal connection.
2) Straight-through transformer.

Typical circuit diagram

Wiring diagrams

Converters Typical circuit diagram Basic load monitoring Typical circuit diagram
Extended load monitoring Typical circuit diagram Power controllers Typical circuit diagram
1) Internal connection. 1) Internal connection to the solid state relay/contactor.

2) Straight-through transformer. 2) Straight-through.
3) PE/ground connection for semiconductor contactors according to installa- 3) Make PE/ground connection according to installation regulations.
tion regulations. 4) Connection of L/N contact with
4) Connection of contact L/N to N conductor or a second phase according to - 3RF29 ..-0GA.3 load monitoring on neutral conductor N (e.g. 230 V),
the rated operational voltage of the function module. - 3RF29 ..-0GA.6 load monitoring on a second phase (e.g. 400V).
5) In order to observe the limit values of the conducted interference voltage 5) Voltage detection not electically isolated (3MΩ per path).
for generalized phase control, a choke rated at at least 200 µH must be 6) Grounding of connection L- is recommended.
included in the load circuit.
7) A200 µH choke must be used when operating with leading-edge
phase in order to observe the limit values of the conducted interference
voltage according to Class A.

Solid-State Switching Devices for Switching Motors
Schematics
Two-phase controlled, Sample schematic
DC control supply voltage
Two-phase controlled,
AC control supply voltage

Control Products
NEMA & General Purpose Controls
Contents Pages Contents Pages

Product Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/3 Duplex Controllers
Manual Control Features and Benefits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/72
Fractional HP Starters, Class SMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/4 - 9/5 Non Combination, Class 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/73
Combination, Class 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/74 - 9/75
Switches, Class MMS and MRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/6 - 9/7
Starters and Switches, Class 11 - 3RV. . . . . . . . . . 9/8 - 9/9 Pump Control Panels
NEMA Control Slim Line NEMA Pump Controller for the
Agricultural industry, Class 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/68 - 9/71
Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/10
Class 87 and 88 Features and Benefits . . . . . . . 9/76 - 9/77
Non-Combination Starters
Features and Benefits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/11 - Full-Voltage Type, Class 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/78 - 9/79
9/12
Vacuum Starter Type, Class 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/80
Non-Reversing Starters, Class 14. . . . . . . . . . . . 9/13 - 9/15
Reduced-Voltage Type, Class 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/81 - 9/82
Combination Starters Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . 9/16
Combination Starters, Class 17 and 18. . . . . . . . 9/17 - 9/25 Lighting Control
Reversing Starters, Class 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/26 - 9/27 Electrically Held Contactors, Class LE. . . . . . . . . 9/83 - 9/88
Combination Reversing Starters, Electrically Held Contactors, Class LC . . . . . . . . 9/89 - 9/93
Class 25 and 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/28 - 9/29 Mechanically Held Contactors, Class CLM. . . . . 9/94 - 9/96
Two Speed Starters Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . 9/30
Control Power Transformers
Two Speed Starters, Class 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/31 - 9/34
Combination Two Speed Starters, Class 32. . . . 9/35 - 9/42 Domestic and International (UL, CSA and CE),
Class MT and MTG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/97 - 9/101
Reduced Voltage Control
Modifications and Drawings
Reduced Voltage Features and Benefits. . . . . . . . . . . . 9/43
Field Modification Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/102 - 9/112
Auto Transformer Starters, Class 36 and 37. . . . 9/44 - 9/47
Enclosure Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/113 - 9/118
Part Winding Starters, Class 36 and 37 . . . . . . . 9/48 - 9/51
Wye Delta Open Transition, Factory Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/119 - 9/123
Class 36 and 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/52 - 9/55 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/137 - 9/171
Wye Delta Closed Transition, Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/172 - 9/193
Class 36 and 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/56 - 9/59 Heater Tables and Replacement Parts
Heavy Duty Contactors Overload Relay Heater Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/124 - 9/130
Non-Reversing Contactors, Class 40. . . . . . . . . . 9/60 - 9/61 NEMA Coils and Contact Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/131 - 9/132
Vacuum Contactors, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/60 Coil VA Ratings and Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/133
Reversing Contactors, Class 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/62 Lighting Contactor Parts and Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/134
Overload Relays, Class 48,
958 and 3RB20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/64 - 9/67

Control Products
NEMA & General Purpose Controls
Controls Express
Starters at the speed you need

Siemens NEMA starters, pump panels and lighting
contactors are known for their dependability and rugged-
ness, and now they are delivered faster than ever before
through Controls Express.
Controls Express puts our most popular products in your

hands faster, because we stock more products across our
entire product line. Our Class 14 NEMA starters, Class 87
pump panels, and LC & LE lighting contactors are now
available in stock for immediate or next day shipping.
In addition, thousands of our open and enclosed starters
can now be built-to-order and shipped in 1-3 days through
Controls Express.
Siemens is committed to making your job easier by stock-

ing more products, offering more configurations, expedit-
ing factory modifications, and delivering industry leading
turnaround times on our most requested control products. Controls Express lead times apply to orders of up to
6 units of the Class 14, Class 87, LC, or LE. Please
To quickly identify products that are part of Controls contact customer service at 1-866-663-7324 for lead
Express and therefore available in 3 days or less, appli- times of larger order volumes.
cable catalog numbers have a light blue background.
For more information on Controls Express and a
See the appropriate selection pages listed below. complete list of available products, please visit our
website at www.usa.siemens.com/controls-express
Class 14 NEMA Starters see pages 9/13 & 9/15
Class 17 NEMA Combination Starters see pages 9/17

to 9/22. For quick ship versions with factory
modifications see on-line at
www.usa.siemens.com/controls-express
Class 18 NEMA Combination Starters see pages

9/23 & 9/25.
Class 40 NEMA Contactors see page 9/60
Class 87 Pump Panels see pages 9/78 & 9/79
LE Lighting Contactors see page 9/85
LC Lighting Contactors see page 9/91 & 9/92

• Revised • Control Products
09/18/15 NEMA & General Purpose Controls
Product Overview
Class SMF Class MMS & MRS Class 11 Class 14 Class 17, 18
Fractional Horsepower Fractional Horsepower Manual Starters and NEMA Starters NEMA Combination
Manual Starters Manual Switches Switches Page 9/13 Starters
Page 9/4 Page 9/6 Page 9/8 Page 9/17
Class 22 Class 25, 26 Class 30 Class 32 Class 36, 37

NEMA Reversing NEMA Combination NEMA Multi-Speed NEMA Combination Reduced Voltage
Starters Reversing Starters Starters Multi-Speed Starters Electromechanical
Page 9/26 Page 9/28 Page 9/31 Page 9/35 Starters
Page 9/43
Class 40 Class 43 Class 48, 958, 3RB20 Class 82, 83, 84, Class LE, LC, CLM
NEMA Contactors NEMA Reversing Overload Relays 87, 88 Lighting Contactors
and Vacuum Contactors Contactors Page 9/63 Pump Controls Page 9/83
Page 9/60 Page 9/62 Page 9/68
Class MT, MTG Modifications and Heater Tables and

Control Power Drawings Replacement Parts
Transformers Page 9/102 Page 9/124
Page 9/97

Manual Control
Fractional HP Starters, Class SMF
General
Class SMF Enclosures

Class SMF, NEMA Type 1 surface
Class SMF fractional horsepower start-
mounting enclosures are sheet steel
ers provide overload protection as
with a thermo-plastic wrap-around cover
well as manual on-off control for small
for convenience in wiring. The NEMA
horsepower motors in a variety of
Type 1 enclosure is also available in an
industrial and commercial applications.
oversized version which allows more
Available in one or two pole versions,
wiring space. A zinc alloy die casting is
these devices are suitable for use with
used for NEMA Type 4 enclosures.
AC single phase motors up to 1 HP.
Two pole starters can also be used Pilot Lights
with DC motors up to 3⁄4 HP. Typical Red or green neon pilot light units
Class SMF Starter in a NEMA Type 1
applications include fans, conveyors, are available for flush mounting plates,
Enclosure with Pilot Light
pumps, and small machine tools. NEMA Type 1 enclosures, and NEMA
Continuous Current Rating Type 4 enclosures. Pilot lights may Emergency Off Actuator
be either factory or field installed. (For A toggle operator extender is available
16 amperes. starters that contain a pilot light, a Red
Overload Trip Assembly for Class SMF, NEMA Type 1 surface
light is standard. For a Green pilot light mounted units. The extender has a red
Motor protection is provided by a Class add ”G” to the end of the catalog vinyl button that provides a fast and
SMFH heater element which must be number.) easy method for locating and switch-
installed before the starter will operate. Terminals ing the device‘s toggle operator into
Two Speed Starters Binding head screw type terminals are the OFF position. The Emergency Off
Two speed manual starters are suitable for #10 or smaller copper wire, Actuator is available in kit form only
designed for control of small single and are accessible from the front. All for field installation.
phase AC motors having separate terminals are clearly marked. Handle Guard/Lock-Off
windings for high and low speed Mounting An optional handle guard on Class
operation. Two toggle operated start- SMF, NEMA Type 1 enclosed starters
ers are used, with overload protec- Open types without a pilot light fit
standard single gang switch boxes, and prevents accidental operation of the
tion included for each motor winding. toggle operator and also allows the
Surface mounting devices, and those can be used with any cover plate hav-
ing a standard toggle cutout. Single-unit toggle operator to be padlocked in
with a gray flush plate, utilize a either the “ON” or “OFF” position.
mechanical interlock which allows flush mounting types, including those
with pilot lights, are suitable for wall This handle guard can be factory
direct control of the motor by means installed on NEMA Type 1 enclosed
of the toggle operators. mounting in a standard switch box or
for machine cavity mounting without starters and is also available in kit form
a box. for field installation on NEMA Type 1
surface and flush mounting enclosures.
Operation Standard NEMA Type 4 metallic
Available with toggle handle or with enclosures include provisions for
removable key type operator to padlocking the device in the
discourage unauthorized operation. OFF position.

• Revised • Manual Control
06/06/14 Fractional HP Starters with Melting Alloy Overload, Class SMF
Selection
Ordering Information Horsepower Ratings

Maximum Horsepower
 Heater Elements see page 9/124.
 Field Modification Kits see page 9/102. AC Single Phase DC
 Dimensions see page 9/137. Volts 1-Pole 2-Pole 2-Pole

 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/172. 115–230 1 1 ⁄
34
Class SMF Starter in a NEMA Type 1 277 1 1 —

Enclosure with Pilot Light
Starter—Class SMF, Single Phasea
General Purpose Flush Mounting NEMA Type 1 General Purpose NEMA Type NEMA NEMA Type
Open Starter with Flush Plate Enclosure, Surface Mounting 3R, 4 & 12 Type 4 3R, 7 & 9
(No Enclosure Provided) Watertight, Watertight, Div 1 and Div 2
Dust-tight Dust-tight Class I Groups
Metallic Metallic B, C, D &
Standard Jumbo Enclosure Enclosure Class II Groups
Gray Stainless Stainless

with Clear Cover E, F, G
Flush Steel Steel Enclosures
Type Open Type Plate Flush Plate Flush Plate Standard Oversized
of No. of Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Operator Poles Starter Featurese Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
Standard SMFF01 SMFFF1 SMFFS1 — — SMFFG1 SMFFGJ1 SMFFWN1 — — — —
1
Red Pilot Light SMFF01P SMFFF1P SMFFS1P SMFFSJ1P SMFFG1P SMFFGJ1P — — — —
Toggle
2
1
Key
2
Starter With Handle Guard/Lock-Off—Class SMF, Single Phasea

Standard — — d — d — d — SMFFG5 SMFFGJ5 — — SMFFW1b SMFFR1b
Red Pilot Light — — d — d — d — SMFFG5P SMFFGJ5P — — SMFFW1Pb — —
1 (2) 3⁄4" NPT Outlets — — d — d — d — — — — — — — SMFFW1H SMFFR1H
(2) 3⁄4" NPT Outlets
— — d — d — d — — — — — — — SMFFW1PH — —
and Red Pilot Light
Toggle
Standard — — d — d — d — SMFFG6 SMFFGJ6 — — SMFFW2b SMFFR2b
Red Pilot Light — — d — d — d — SMFFG6P SMFFGJ6P — — SMFFW2Pb — —
2 (2) 3⁄4" NPT Outlets — — d — d — d — — — — — — — SMFFW2H SMFFR2H
(2) 3⁄4" NPT Outlets
— — d — d — d — — — — — — — SMFFW2PH — —
and Red Pilot Light
One Starter in Duplex Enclosure—Class SMF, Single Phasea

General Purpose Flush Mounting
Open Starter with Flush Plate - (No Enclosure Provided)
Gray Flush Plate Stainless Steel Flush NEMA Type 1 General
For Wall or Cavity Plate for Wall or Cavity Purpose Enclosure Replacement
Type of Number Mounting Mounting Surface Mounting Starters
Operator of Poles Starter Featurese Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
Toggle 2 Standard — — — — SMFFG02 — —
Red Pilot Light — — — — SMFFG02P — —
Key 2 Red Pilot Light — — — — SMFFG04P — —
Two Starters In Duplex Enclosure—Class SMF, Single Phasec

Standard SMFFF222 — — SMFFG222 — —
Toggle 2 Per Starter
Red Pilot Light on Each Starter SMFFF222P SMFFS22P SMFFG222P — —
Key 2 Per Starter Red Pilot Light on Each Starter SMFFF44P SMFFS44P SMFFG44P — —
Starter And “Auto-Off-Hand” SPDT Selector Switch (AC Only)—Class SMF, Single Phasea
1
Red Pilot Light SMFFF71P SMFFS71P SMFFG71P — —
Toggle
2
Red Pilot Light SMFFF72P SMFFS72P SMFFG72P — —
Key 2 Red Pilot Light SMFFF74P SMFFS74P SMFFG74P — —
Two Speed Starters (AC Only)—Class SMF, Single Phasec
Mechanical Interlock SMFFF11 — — SMFFG11 SMFF01T
1 Mechanical Interlock and (2) Red Pilot Lights SMFFF11P — — SMFFG11P SMFF01PT
Mechanical Interlock, HIGH-OFF-LOW
— — SMFFS101P — — SMFF01PT
Selector Switch and (2) Red Pilot Lights
Toggle
Mechanical Interlock SMFFF22 — — SMFFG22 SMFF02T
2 Mechanical Interlock and (2) Red Pilot Lights SMFFF22P — — SMFFG22P SMFF02PT
Mechanical Interlock, HIGH-OFF-LOW
— — SMFFS202P — — SMFF02PT
Selector Switch and (2) Red Pilot Lights
a One heater element required. c Two heater elements required. e For starters that contain a pilot light, a Red light is
b Furnished with (1) 3⁄4" NPT Outlet in bottom (revers- d Order Open Type starter plus separate handle guard kit. standard. For a Green pilot light add ”G” to the end of
ible for top feed). the catalog number.

Manual Control
Fractional HP Switches, Class MMS, MRS
General
Class MMS, MRS Enclosures

Class MMS and MRS motor starting Class MMS, MRS, NEMA Type 1
switches provide manual “ON-OFF” surface mounting enclosures are sheet
control of single or three phase AC steel with a thermo-plastic wrap-around
motors where overload protection is cover for convenience in wiring.
not required or is provided separately. The NEMA Type 1 enclosure is also
Compact construction and a 600 volt available in an oversized version which
rating make these switches suitable allows more wiring space. A zinc alloy
for a wide range of industrial and die casting is used for NEMA Type 4
commercial uses. Typical applications enclosures.
include small machine tools, pumps, Pilot Lights
fans, conveyors and many other types
Red or green neon pilot light units Class MMS Switch in a
of electrical machinery. They can also NEMA Type 1 Enclosure
are available for flush mounting plates,
be used on non-motor loads such as
NEMA Type 1 enclosures, and NEMA
resistance heating applications. Emergency Off Actuator
Type 4 enclosures. Pilot lights may
Continuous Current Rating be either factory or field installed. (For A toggle operator extender is available
MMS & MRS: 30 amperes at 250 switches that contain a pilot light, a Red for Class MMS, MRS, NEMA Type 1
volts max, 26.4 amperes at 277 volts, light is standard. For a Green pilot light surface mounted units. The extender
20 amperes at 600 volts max, 30 add ”G” to the end of the catalog has a red vinyl button that provides a
amperes resistive at 600 volts max. number.) fast and easy method for locating and
Two Speed—Class MRS Terminals switching the device‘s toggle operator
into the OFF position. The Emergency
Two speed manual switches may be Binding head screw type terminals are
Off Actuator is available in kit form
used with separate winding three phase suitable for #10 or smaller copper wire,
only for field installation.
or single phase AC motors where and are accessible from the front. All
overload protection is not required or is terminals are clearly marked. Handle Guard/Lock-Off
provided separately. Two switches are Mounting An optional handle guard on Class
employed to give “ON-OFF” control in MMS, MRS, NEMA Type 1 enclosed
Open types without a pilot light fit
each speed. switches prevents accidental operation
standard single gang switch boxes, and
Reversing—Class MRS of the toggle operator and also allows
can be used with any cover plate having
the toggle operator to be padlocked in
Reversing manual switches provide a standard toggle cutout. Single-unit
either the “ON” or “OFF” position. This
a compact means of starting, stopping flush mounting types, including those
handle guard is available in kit form for
and reversing AC motors where with pilot lights, are suitable for wall
field installation on NEMA Type 1
overload protection is not required or mounting in a standard switch box or
surface and flush mounting enclosures.
is provided separately. They are suitable for machine cavity mounting without
Standard NEMA Type 4 metallic
for use with three phase squirrel cage a box.
enclosures include provisions for
motors and for single phase motors Operation padlocking the device in the
which can be reversed by reconnecting OFF position.
Available with toggle handle or with
motor leads. Two switches are used,
removable key type operator to
one to connect the motor forward
discourage unauthorized operation.
rotation and one for reverse.

Manual Control
Switchesa, Class MMS, MRS
Selection
Ordering Information Horsepower Ratings

No of Motor Type Maximum HP DC Ratings
 Heater Elements not Required.
Device Poles AC 115V 230V 450–575V 90V 115V 230V
 Field Modification Kits see
2 Single Phase 2 2 3 1 2 11/2
page 9/102. Class MMS
3 3-Phase 2 71/2 10 1 2 11/2
 Dimensions see page 9/137. Class MRS 2 Single Phase 2 2 3 1 2 11/2
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/172. Reversing 3 3-Phase 2 71/2 10 1 2 11/2
2 Single Phase 2 2 3 1 2 11/2
Class MMS
Class MMS Switch in a 3 3-Phase, Constant or Variable Torque 2 71/2 10 1 2 11/2
Two Speed
NEMA Type 1 Enclosure 3 3-Phase, Constant Horsepower 2 71/2 10 1 2 11/2
Switch—Class MMS, Single Phase and 3-Phase

General Purpose Flush Mounting NEMA Type 1 General Purpose NEMA Type NEMA b NEMA
Open Switch with Flush Plate Enclosure Surface Mounting 3R, 4 & 12 Type 4 Type 7 & 9
b
(No Enclosure Provided) Watertight, Watertight, Class I Groups

Standard Jumbo Dust-tight Dust-tight B, C & D &
Gray Stainless Stainless Metallic Enclosurer Metallic Class II Groups
with Clear Cover Enclosure E, F, G
Flush Steel Steel Enclosures
Type No Open Type Plate Flush Plate Flush Plate Standard Oversized
of of Switch Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Operator Poles Featuresd Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
Standard MMSK01 MMSKF1 MMSKS1 — — MMSKG1 MMSKGJ1 MMSKWN1 MMSKW1 MMSKR1
2
Red Pilot Light
115V AC MMSK01Ac MMSKF1A MMSKS1A MMSKSJ1A MMSKG1A MMSKGJ1A MMSKW1A — —

Red Pilot Light
Toggle MMSK01Bc MMSKF1B MMSKS1B MMSKSJ1B MMSKG1B MMSKGJ1B MMSKW1B — —
230V AC
3 Standard MMSK02 MMSKF2 MMSKS2 — — MMSKG2 MMSKGJ2 MMSKWN2 MMSKW2 MMSKR2
Red Pilot Light
208-240V AC MMSK02B MMSKF2B MMSKS2B MMSKSJ2B MMSKG2B MMSKGJ2B MMSKW2B — —
c

Red Pilot Light
MMSK02Cc MMSKF2C MMSKS2C MMSKSJ2C MMSKG2C MMSKGJ2C MMSKW2C — —
440-600V AC
Standard MMSK03 MMSKF3 MMSKS3 — — MMSKG3 MMSKGJ3 MMSKWN3 — — — —
2
Red Pilot Light
115V AC MMSK03A MMSKF3A MMSKS3A MMSKSJ3A MMSKG3A MMSKGJ3A — — — —

Red Pilot Light
Key MMSK03B MMSKF3B MMSKS3B MMSKSJ3B MMSKG3B MMSKGJ3B — — — —
230V AC
Standard MMSK04 MMSKF4 MMSKS4 — — MMSKG4 MMSKGJ4 MMSKWN4 — — — —
3
Red Pilot Light
208–240V AC MMSK04B MMSKF4B MMSKS4B MMSKSJ4B MMSKG4B MMSKGJ4B — — — —

Red Pilot Light MMSK04C — MMSKF4C — MMSKS4C — MMSKSJ4C — MMSKG4C — MMSKGJ4C — — — — — —
440–600V AC
Reversing Switch—Class MRS, Single Phase and 3-Phase

General Purpose
Flush Mounting NEMA Type 1
Open Switch with Flush Plate General Purpose Replacement Switch
Type of Number of Suitable Switch Featuresd (Including (No Enclosure Provided) Enclosure Surface Mounting Class MRS
Operator Poles Motor Types Mechanical Interlock) Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
Single Phase Standard MRSKF11 MRSKG11 MRSK01T
2 3-Lead Red Pilot Device—115V AC MRSKF11A MRSKG11A MRSK01AT
Repulsion-Induction Red Pilot Device— 230V AC MRSKF11B MRSKG11B MRSK01BT
Toggle
3-Phase; Also Standard MRSKF22 MRSKG22 MRSK02T
Single Phase Capacitor, Red Pilot Light—110–120V AC MRSKF22A MRSKG22A MRSK02AT
3 Split Phase, or 4-Lead
Red Pilot Light—208–220V AC MRSKF22B MRSKG22B MRSK02BT
Repulsion-Induction Red Pilot Light—440–600V AC MRSKF22C MRSKG22C MRSK02CT
Two Speed Switch—Class MMS, Single Phase and 3-Phase

General Purpose
Flush Mounting NEMA Type 1
Open Switch with Flush Plate General Purpose Replacement Switch
Type of Number of Suitable Switch Featuresd (Including (No Enclosure Provided) Enclosure Surface Mounting Class MRS
Operator Poles Motor Types Mechanical Interlock) Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
Single Phase Standard MMSKF11 MMSKG11 MRSK01T
2 Two Winding (2) Red Pilot Devices—115V AC MMSKF11A MMSKG11A MRSK01AT
(3-Lead) (2) Red Pilot Devices—230V AC MMSKF11B MMSKG11B MRSK01BT
Toggle
3-Phase Standard MMSKF22 MMSKG22 MRSK02T
3 Separate Winding (2) Red Pilot Lights—208–240V AC MMSKF22B MMSKG22B MRSK02BT
(Wye-Connected) (2) Red Pilot Lights—440–600V AC MMSKF22C MMSKG22C MRSK02CT
a Manual switches do not include overloads. c Donot use as replacement interiors for NEMA Type 4 d For switches that contain a pilot light, a Red light is
b Furnished with (1) 3/4" NPT outlet in bottom (reversible metallic enclosures. For replacement unit, order standard. For a Green pilot light add ”G” to the end
for top feed). In order to obtain a 3⁄4" NPT outlet in top Type MMSK01 or MMSK02 and separate pilot light kit. of the catalog number.
and bottom, add suffix letter “H” to type number with
List Price adder.

Manual Control • Revised •
Starters and Switches, Class 11 - 3RV 09/10/15
General
Now Available with the New 3RV2 Innovations MSP

Class 11 - 3RV Class 11 - 3RV switches provide Class 11 - 3RV is available as Open
control for inherently protected motors. style, or in NEMA 1, NEMA 7 & 9 or
Class 11 across the line manual
Typical applications include metal and NEMA 7 & 9 / 3 & 4 enclosures.
starters and switches provide control
woodworking machinery, grinders, Standard Features include:
for machinery where remote start stop
power saws, conveyors, fans, pumps,
control is not required. b ON/OFF rotary handle with lockout
blowers, textile and packaging
Class 11 - 3RV manual starters are machinery, and paper cutters. and visible trip indication
used for single and poly-phase motors b Adjustment dial for setting to motor
Each switch is provided with magnetic
up to 20HP @ 575V. Starters have bime- FLA (Starters only)
trip elements which take the device off
tallic heater elements to provide class
10 overcurrent protection. Each starter
line when it senses current of 13 times b Low Voltage Protection (LVP) Option
the maximum switch rating. b Short Circuit trip at 13 times the
has a fourth bimetallic strip that reacts
only to the ambient temperature Class 11 - 3RV manual starters can be maximum setting of the FLA dial
inside the control panel. This ambient used as Type E self-protected manual or rated current
compensation helps prevent the starter combination starters (up to 22 amps)
b Ambient compensated up to 140°F
from nuisance tripping when the panel per UL508 or as components in
Group Installation per NEC 430.53. b Phase loss sensitivity
temperature is higher than the ambient
temperature of the motor. When using the Class 11 - 3RV as a b Test trip function
manual combination starter upstream b LVP Option Meets OSHA
A built-in differential trip bar causes the
protection is not required. Requirements
starter to trip faster on a phase loss
condition to help reduce motor damage. Class 11 - 3RV controllers are available b UL Listed
with low voltage protection which will
Magnetic trip elements in each starter
automatically open the power poles b CSA Certified
take the device off line when it senses
when the voltage drops or the power
current of 13 times the maximum FLA
is interrupted.
dial setting.
Controllers with the LVP option provide
the OSHA requirements for protecting
personnel from potential injury caused
by the automatic start-up of machinery
following a voltage drop or power
interruption when low voltage
protection is specified.
NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 3 & 4, NEMA 7 & 9

Div 1 & Div 2 Div 1 & Div 2
OPEN TYPE NEMA 1 Class I Group C & D Class I Group C & D
Starter General Purpose Class II Group E, F & G Class II Group E, F & G

• Revised • Manual Control
09/10/15 Starters and Switches, Class 11 - 3RV
Selection
Ordering Information Low Voltage Protection Coil Table
 No heaters required. 60 Hz Voltage Letter

 Field Modification Kits see page 9/102. 120V *F

208V *D
Dimensions see page 9/139.
240V *G
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/172. 460V *H
 For applications requiring a low voltage protection coil *Add corresponding letter to end of base Class 11
see table at right. catalog number for low voltage protection coil with
List Price adder.
Note: The LVP option for Open type 3RV is available
from the factory, please order separately from the
field modification kits on page 9/103.
The coil voltage should correspond with the
line voltage.
Class 11 Manual Motor Starter
Manual Starter—Class 11 - 3RV

FLA Max HP Enclosure
Adjustment
Single Phase 3-Phase Open Type NEMA 1 NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 3 & 4, NEMA 7 & 9
Rangea Watertight
HP Ratings HP Ratings General Purpose Class I Groups C & D
Class II Groups E, F & G Class I Groups C & D
Class II Groups E, F & G
115V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V Catalog No. List Price $. Catalog No. List Price $ Catalog No. List Price $. Catalog No. List Price $
0.11-0.16 — — — — — — 3RV2011-0AA10 b 11AD3B 11AD3H 11AD3W
0.14-0.2 — — — — — — 3RV2011-0BA10 b 11BD3B 11BD3H 11BD3W
0.18-0.25 — — — — — — 3RV2011-0CA10 b 11CD3B 11CD3H 11CD3W
0.22-0.32 — — — — — — 3RV2011-0DA10 b 11DD3B 11DD3H 11DD3W
0.28-0.4 — — — — — — 3RV2011-0EA10 b 11ED3B 11ED3H 11ED3W
0.35-0.5 — — — — — — 3RV2011-0FA10 b 11FD3B 11FD3H 11FD3W
0.45-0.63 — — — — — — 3RV2021-0GA10 b 11GD3B 11GD3H 11GD3W
0.55-0.8 — — — — — 1
⁄2 3RV2021-0HA10 b 11HD3B 11HD3H 11HD3W
0.7-1 — — — — 1
⁄2 1
⁄2 3RV2021-0JA10 b 11JD3B 11JD3H 11JD3W
0.9-1.25 — — — — 3
⁄4 3
⁄4 3RV2021-0KA10 b 11KD3B 11KD3H 11KD3W
1.1-1.6 — 1
⁄10 — — 3
⁄4 1 3RV2021-1AA10 b 11LD3B 11LD3H 11LD3W
1.4-2 — 1
⁄8 — — 1 1 1⁄2 3RV2021-1BA10 b 11MD3B 11MD3H 11MD3W
1.8-2.5 — 1
⁄6 1
⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1⁄2 1 1⁄2 3RV2021-1CA10 b 11ND3B 11ND3H 11ND3W
2.2-3.2 1
⁄10 1
⁄4 3
⁄4 3
⁄4 1 1⁄2 2 3RV2021-1DA10 b 11PD3B 11PD3H 11PD3W
2.8-4 1
⁄8 1
⁄3 3
⁄4 1 2 3 3RV2021-1EA10 b 11QD3B 11QD3H 11QD3W
3.5-5 1
⁄6 1
⁄2 1 1 3 3 3RV2021-1FA10 b 11RD3B 11RD3H 11RD3W
4.5-6.3 1
⁄4 3
⁄4 1 1⁄2 1 1⁄2 5 5 3RV2021-1GA10 b 11SD3B 11SD3H 11SD3W
5.5-8 1
⁄3 1 2 2 5 5 3RV2021-1HA10 b 11TD3B 11TD3H 11TD3W
7-10 1
⁄2 1 1⁄2 3 3 7 1⁄2 10 3RV2021-1JA10 b 11UD3B 11UD3H 11UD3W
9-12.5 1
⁄2 2 3 3 7 1⁄2 10 3RV2021-1KA10 b 11VD3B 11VD3H 11VD3W
11-16 1 3 5 5 10 15c 3RV2021-4AA10 b 11WD3B 11WD3H 11WD3W
14-20 1 1⁄2 3 5 7 1⁄2 15 20c 3RV2021-4BA10 b 11XD3B 11XD3H 11XD3W
17-22 2 3 7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 15 20c 3RV2021-4CA10 b 11YD3B 11YD3H 11YD3W
20-25 2c 5c 7 1⁄2c 7 1⁄2c 15c 20c 3RV2021-4DA10 b 11ZD3B 11ZD3H 11ZD3W
Manual Switch—Class 11 - 3RV

Rated Max HP Enclosure
Currenta Single Phase 3-Phase Open Type NEMA 1 NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 3 & 4, NEMA 7 & 9
HP Ratings HP Ratings General Purpose Class I Groups C & D Watertight
Class II Groups E, F & G Class I Groups C & D
115V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V Catalog No. List Price $. Catalog No. List Price $ Catalog No. List Price $. Catalog No. List Price $
1 c 1 c
1 — — — — 2⁄ 2⁄ 3RV2321-0JC10 b 111D3B 111D3H 111D3W
1 c 1 c
5 ⁄
6 ⁄
2 1c 1c 3c 3c 3RV2321-1FC10 b 112D3B 112D3H 112D3W
1 c
10 ⁄2 1 1⁄2c 3c 3c 7 1⁄2c 10c 3RV2321-1JC10 b 113D3B 113D3H 113D3W
20 1 1⁄2c 3c 5c 7 1⁄2c 15c 20c 3RV2321-4BC10 b 114D3B 114D3H 114D3W
25 2c 5c 7 1⁄2c 7 1⁄2 c 15c 20c 3RV2321-4DC10 b 115D3B 115D3H 115D3W
a InstantaneousMagnetic Trip will occur at 13 times c Shaded Ratings apply for Manual Motor Controllers d Add 1 to the end of the catalog number for 1/2 inch drain
the maximum FLA dial setting or rated switch current. Only! These Ratings do not apply as UL Listed Manual hole with plug and list price adder. Drain fitting not sup-
b Product
Category: IEC Combination Starters. plied, order separately XDB-2.

Heavy Duty Control
Catalog Numbering System
General
Solid-state OLR
Current Rangee
Three Phase
A — 0.25–1
B — 0.75–3.4
Class C — 3–12 Breaker HP Codeb
D — 5.5–22 Horsepower Rating
17 — Combination Starter Size
E — 10–40 200, 230, 460, 575
(Non Fusible, Fusible)
18 — Combination Starter B — 00 Model F — 13–52 A — 1
⁄2, 1⁄2,1, 1
(Circuit Breaker) C — 0 G — 25–100 B — 1, 1, 3, 3
U — Solid-state OLR size
25 — Reversing D — 1 H — 50–200 C — 3, 3, 5, 5
0–4 & size 7 & 8
Combination Starter E — 13⁄4 J — 100–300 w/ CT’s D — 3, 3, 71⁄2, 71⁄2
P — Thermal size 0–31⁄2,
(Non Fusible, Fusible) F — 2 K — 133–400 w/ CT’s E — 71⁄2, 71⁄2, 10, 10
Solid state size 5 & 6
26 — Reversing G — 21⁄2 L — 200–600 w/ CT’s F — —, —, 15, 15
Combination Starter H — 3 M — 250–750 w/ CT’s G — 10, 10, —, —
(Circuit Breaker) I — 31⁄2 N — 400–1200 w/ CT’s H — 71⁄2, 10, 20, 20
J — 4 Jf — 10, 15, 25, 25
L — 5 Enclosure Size K — —, —, 30, 30
M — 6 L — 15, 20, —, —
N — 7 92 — Standard Width
M — —, —, 30, 30
P — 8 82 — Extra Wide
N — 25, 30, 50, 50
P — 30, 40, 75, 75
Enclosure Type R — 40, 50, 100, 100
B — NEMA 1
F — NEMA 4X Fiberglass
H — NEMA 7/9/3/4, Bolted (Class 18 & 26 only)
N — NEMA 12 (Field convertible to 3/3R/4)
W — NEMA 4/4X 304 Stainless Steel
Class
Coil
Pilot Control Circuit
14 — Across the Line NEMA
Ac — 110–120V/220–240V@60Hz
Motor Starter 2 — suitable for
110V/190–220V@50Hz
22 — Reversing NEMA Motor 3-wire control
Solid-state OLR Cc — 220–240V/440–480V@60Hz
Starter (NO aux.
Current Rangee 190–220V/380–440V@50Hz
40 — Across the Line NEMA contact incl.)
D — 200–208V@60Hz
Magnetic Contactor Three Phase E — 550–600V@60Hz
43 — Reversing NEMA Magnetic A — 0.25–1 550V@50Hz
Contactor
B — 0.75–3.4 Enclosure Size F — 120V@60Hz
C — 3–12 110V@50Hz
Size D — 5.5–22 1 — 2 power poles,1-phase G — 220–240V@60Hz
E — 10–40 3 — 3 power poles, 3-phase 190–220V@50Hz
B — 00 Model 8 — 3 power poles, 3-phase,
F — 13–52 H — 440–480V@60Hz
C — 0 extra wide enclosure
U — Solid-state OLR size G — 25–100 380–440V@50Hz
D — 1
00–4, Size 7 & 8 H — 50–200 Jf — 24V@60Hz
E — 13⁄4
P — Thermal size 00–4, J — 100–300 w/ CT’s 24V@50Hz
F — 2
Solid state sizes 5 & 6 K — 133–400 w/ CT’s L — 277V@60Hz
G — 21⁄2
L — 200–600 w/ CT’s 240V@50Hz
H — 3
M — 250–750 w/ CT’s Enclosure Type
I — 31⁄2
N — 400–1200 w/ CT’s
J — 4 A — Open
L — 5 Single Phasea B — NEMA 1
M — 6 A — 0.25–1 F — NEMA 4X Fiberglass
N — 7 B — 0.75–3.4 H — NEMA 7/9/3/4, Bolted
P — 8 C — 3–12 (Class 18 & 26 only)
D — 5.5–22 0 — NEMA 12 (Field convertible to 3/3R/4)
W — NEMA 4/4X 304 Stainless Steel
Solid-state OLR
Class Size Model Current Rangee Type Line Volts Enclosure Type Coil Disconnect Typed
36 — Non C — 0 U — Solid-state T — Auto XFMR 2 — 230 A —
Open D D — Non Fused Disc.
Combination D — 1 OLR size 0–4 P — Part Wind. 3 — 380 NEMA 1
B — E F — Fusible Disc.
Reduced E — 13⁄4 & size 7 & 8 0 — Wye Delta 4 — 460 NEMA 4/4X
W — F P — MCP
Voltage F — 2 P — Thermal Open Trans. 5 — 575 Stainless Steel G
Starter G — 21⁄2 size 0–31⁄2 C — Wye Delta 6 — 200/208 NEMA 12
0 — H
37 — Combination H — 3 Solid state Closed Trans. L
Reduced I — 31⁄2 size 5 & 6
Voltage J — 4
Starter L — 5
M — 6
N — 7
P — 8
a Single phase solid-state OLR available on Class 14 Starters b Not used on Class 17, 25 or with solid-state OLR versions. e Position used for solid-state OLR only.
only. c Not available on sizes 5–8. f Not available on sizes 7 and 8.
d For Class 37 only.

• Revised • Heavy Duty Starters
06/15/15 Features and Benefit
General
All starters are supplied with a NO Auxiliary Equipment
holding interlock that in conjunction b NEMA starters are available with
with an appropriate pilot device will built-in START-STOP push buttons
provide low voltage protection or for 3-wire control or a
release. HAND-OFF-AUTO selector
NEMA starters are ideal for switch for 2-wire control
applications requiring dependability
b Field modifications such as auxiliary
and durability. Typical applications contacts, pilot lights, push buttons,
include use with machine tools, air selector switches, and fuse blocks
conditioning equipment, material are available to meet particular
handling equipment, compressors, application requirements
hoists and various production and
industrial equipment as well as in b Normally opened or normally closed
auxiliary power pole kits are available
demanding automotive applications. for Sizes 00 through 13⁄4
Starters are available as an open type
Solid State Starter Class 14 b Transformers can be ordered as
or in NEMA 1, 12/3/3R, 4 (painted), 4/4X either factory or field modifications.
(stainless), 4X (fiberglass), and 7 & 9 In some cases these may require a
Standard Features enclosures. larger enclosure
Size 00–4 magnetic starters include the Gravity Dropout
b A full line of replacement parts are
following standard features: For added reliability, the gravity dropout available including contact kits, coils,
of the armature and contacts is assisted and overload relays
b Rugged Industrial Design
by stainless steel springs which help
b Half Sizes for Cost and Space Savings provide quick, precise opening of the Size 5 & 6 Starters
b Dual Voltage, Dual Frequency Coils contacts. Additional Features
b Solid State or Ambient Compensated 45 Degree, Wedge Action Contacts b Solid State Overload (3RB type)
Bimetal Overload Protection The 45 degree, wedge action contacts Standard
b Wide Range of Accessories reduce tracking and provide faster arc
b Latest technology in arc quenching to
quenching. The resulting self-cleaning extend contactor life
b Easy Coil Access
and reduced contact bounce mean
b Overload Test Feature cooler operation and longer life for the
b Wide variety of enclosures in all
starter configurations
b Straight Thru Wiring large silver cadmium oxide contacts.
b Gravity Dropout Terminal Design Size 7 & 8 Starters
b Large Silver Cadmium Contacts Control terminals are self-rising Additional Features
pressure type. b New Compact Design
b UL listed file #E14900 (class 14, 22,
30, 40 & 43) Molded Coil b Can be mounted in any position
b CSA certified file #LR 6535 (class 14, Magnetic coils are carefully wound and b Same coil voltage is AC or DC
22, 30, 40 & 43) then sealed in epoxy. Encapsulation
helps seal out moisture, promotes
Application heat transfer and resists electrical,
Heavy Duty starters are designed for mechanical and thermal stresses.
across the line starting of single phase
and polyphase motors.
Dual Voltage/Frequency Coil
Starters are available with dual voltage,
These controls are available in NEMA
dual frequency coils. They are designed
Sizes 00 through 8. In addition to the
to operate on either 50 or 60 Hertz.
usual NEMA Starter Sizes, Siemens
offers three exclusive Half Sizes; 13⁄4, Molded Stationary Contact Block
21⁄2 and 31⁄2. These integral sizes offer Thermoset materials resist arc tracking
the same rugged, industrial and the stresses of heat and severe
construction as our NEMA Sizes and impact.
ensure efficient operating performance.
Half Sizes provide a real cost savings
Field Modification Kits
by cutting down on over capacity when All starters can be modified in the field
NEMA Sizes exceed the motor rat- with a complete range of accessories.
ings. All Siemens Heavy Duty controls, These include pushbuttons, selector
including our popular Half Sizes comply switches, pilot lights, auxiliary contacts
with applicable NEMA and UL tests. and surge suppressors.

Heavy Duty Starters
Features and Benefits
Selection
Half Size Starters
Half-Size starters feature all the
rugged performance characteristics of
our NEMA rated starter sizes, but are
fractionally sized to more closely match
your exact motor rating. As a result,
significant economic savings are made
possible without sacrificing the reliability
you expect from a heavy duty starter.
These additional starter sizes have the
reserve capacity to handle occasional
plugging and jogging applications
without derating. Superior operating
ESP200™ Solid State Starter DIP Switch Settings
performance in heavy duty applications
is assured by the large current carrying Adjust DIP switch settings to the Trip
ESP200™ starters combine the rugged parts, not by derating the device. Class desired 5, 10, 20, or 30.
NEMA contactors with a state of the
art solid state overload that provides Exclusive “half-sizes” save potentially b Set Phase Unbalance ON or OFF
phase loss, phase unbalance ground hundreds, even thousands of dollars
per project. b Set Phase Loss ON or OFF
fault protection. It offers the user
greater motor protection and extended b Set Reset to Manual or Automatic
Using the table below, simply match
life in heavy duty applications. The the specific size starter to the b Set Ground Fault ON or OFF
ESP200™ ultimately results in a cost horsepower rating of your motor.
savings to the user. Every half-size starter saves you
money—up to 31%.
ESP200™ Solid State Overload Relays
All “half-sizes” comply to applicable
Standard features provide Improved NEMA and UL standards.
Starter Performance:
b True phase loss protection; trips ESP200® FLA Adjustment Dial—Set the
within 3 seconds adjustment dial on the overload to the
FLA of the motor.
b Phase unbalanced prevents motor
running inefficiently Figure 1

b Ground fault trip when selected
b Selectable trip class 5, 10, 20 or 30
b Reset trip can be selected Auto/
Manual restart
b Easy to select and use, Dip Switch
selectable

b Overload is self powered, no need for
external power source
Typical Solid-State Overload
Adjustment Dial Markings
Each overload is precisely calibrated

and labels are laser printed.
Savings for Siemens “Half-Size” Starters in NEMA 1 Enclosures, FVNR

“Half-Size”
Motor Size Starter Half Savings Over
230V 460V Size Size List Price $ Next Full Size
7 1⁄2 10 1 — — Standard Auxiliary Contacts
10 15 — 13⁄4 31% Type Size (3rd Character) Configuration Internal / External
15 25 2 — — B Thru E 1N.O. Internal

20 30 — 21⁄2 20% All FVNR F Thru J 1N.O. External
Starters &
30 50 3 — — Contactors L Thru M 2N.O., 2N.C. External
40 75 — 31⁄2 13% N Thru P 1N.O., 1N.C. External
50 100 4 — —
9/12 Product Category: NEMA Siemens Industry, Inc.

Heavy Duty Motor Starters
Solid State Overload with Auto/Manual Reset, Class 14
Selection
Ordering Information Coil Table

60Hz Voltage Letter
 R eplace the (*) with a letter from the coil table. Dual voltage coils are
wired on high voltage unless specified on order. 24 J
120 F
 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104. 110–120/220–240a A
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119.
200–208 D
220–240 G
 Dimensions see pages 9/140 open and 9/157 enclosed. 277 L
220–240/440–480a C
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/173.
440–480 H
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131. 575–600 E
For other voltages and frequencies,
see Factory Modifications page 9/119.
Open Type & Standard Width Enclosure, 3-Phase, 3-Pole

Max Hp Overload Enclosure
Open Type NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessb NEMA 4X NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12
Standard Auxiliary General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, Fiberglass NEMA 3 & 4 NEMA 3/3Rb
Contactsg Corrosion Resistant Watertight, Dust-tight Div. 1 and Div. 2 Industrial Use
@ = W for 304 Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Class I Groups C & D Weatherproof
@ = X for 316 Stainless Steel Class II Groups E, F & G (Field Convertible to 3/3R)
Class III
Bolted Enclosures
Indoor/Outdoor Use
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Amp Frame Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 00 — 0.25–1 A 14BUA32A* 14BUA32B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 00 — 0.75–3.4 A 14BUB32A* 14BUB32B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
11⁄2 11⁄2 2 — 00 — 3–12 A1 14BUC32A* 14BUC32B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 0 — 0.25–1 A 14CUA32A* 14CUA32B* 14CUA32@* 14CUA32F* 14CUA32H* 14CUA320*
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 14CUB32A* 14CUB32B* 14CUB32@* 14CUB32F* 14CUB32H* 14CUB320*
2 2 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 14CUC32A* 14CUC32B* 14CUC32@* 14CUC32F* 14CUC32H* 14CUC320*
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 14CUD32A* 14CUD32B* 14CUD32@* 14CUD32F* 14CUD32H* 14CUD320*
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 1 — 0.25–1 A 14DUA32A* 14DUA32B* 14DUA32@* 14DUA32F* 14DUA32H* 14DUA320*
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 14DUB32A* 14DUB32B* 14DUB32@* 14DUB32F* 14DUB32H* 14DUB320*
2 2 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 14DUC32A* 14DUC32B* 14DUC32@* 14DUC32F* 14DUC32H* 14DUC320*
3 3 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 14DUD32A* 14DUD32B* 14DUD32@* 14DUD32F* 14DUD32H* 14DUD320*
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 14DUE32A* 14DUE32B* 14DUE32@* 14DUE32F* 14DUE32H* 14DUE320*
10 10 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 14EUE32A* 14EUE32B* 14EUE32@* 14EUE32F* 14EUE32H* 14EUE320*
10 15 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 14FUF32A* 14FUF32B* 14FUF32@* 14FUF32F* 14FUF32H* 14FUF320*
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 14GUG32A* 14GUG32B* 14GUG32@* 14GUG32F* 14GUG32H* 14GUG320*
25 30 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 14HUG32A* 14HUG32B* 14HUG32@* 14HUG32F* 14HUG32H* 14HUG320*
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 14IUH32A* 14IUH32B* 14IUH32@* 14IUH32F* 14IUH32H* 14IUH320*
40 50 100 100 4 — 50–200 B 14JUH32A* 14JUH32B* 14JUH32@* 14JUH32F* 14JUH32H* 14JUH320*
75 100 200 200 5 — 55–250 — 14LPU32A* 14LPU32B* 14LPU32E*d — — 14LPU32H* 14LPU320*
150 200 400 400 6 — 160–630 — 14MPX32A* 14MPX32B* 14MPX32E*d — — — — 14MPX320*
— 300 600 600 7*e — 400–1220 A1+CT 14NUN32A* 14NUN32B* 14NUN32E*d — — — — 14NUN320*
— 450 900 900 8f — 400–1220 A1+CT 14PUN32A* 14PUN32B* 14PUN32E*d — — — — 14PUN320*
Open Type & Standard Width Enclosure, Single Phase, 2-Polec

Open Type NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessb NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12
Standard Auxiliary General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 3 & 4 NEMA 3/3Rb
Contacts Corrosion Resistant Corrosion Resistant Div. 1 and Div. 2 Class I Industrial Use
@ = W for 304 Stainless Steel Groups C & D Weatherproof
@ = X for 316 Stainless Steel Class II Groups E, F & G (Field Convertible to 3/3R)
Class III
Bolted Enclosures
Indoor/Outdoor Use
208/
115 230 NEMA Amp Frame Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Size Range Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄8 1
⁄4 0 0.75–3.4 A 14CUB12A* 14CUB12B* 14CUB12@* 14CUB12F* 14CUB12H* 14CUB120*
1
⁄4 1
⁄2 0 3–12 A1 14CUC12A* 14CUC12B* 14CUC12@* 14CUC12F* 14CUC12H* 14CUC120*
1 2 0 5.5–22 A1 14CUD12A* 14CUD12B* 14CUD12@* 14CUD12F* 14CUD12H* 14CUD120*
1
⁄8 1
⁄4 1 0.75–3.4 A 14DUB12A* 14DUB12B* 14DUB12@* 14DUB12F* 14DUB12H* 14DUB120*
1
⁄4 1
⁄2 1 3–12 A1 14DUC12A* 14DUC12B* 14DUC12@* 14DUC12F* 14DUC12H* 14DUC120*
1 2 1 5.5–22 A1 14DUD12A* 14DUD12B* 14DUD12@* 14DUD12F* 14DUD12H* 14DUD120*
3 71⁄2 2 25-100 B 14FUG12A* 14FUG12B* 14FUG12@* 14FUG12F* 14FUG12H* 14FUG120*
71⁄2 15 3 25-100 B 14HUG12A* 14HUG12B* 14HUG12@* 14HUG12F* 14HUG12H* 14HUG120*
Note: A ll starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per the c Coils D, F, or G will be wired for incoming voltage. J coil e Fcoil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC,
National Electric Code). will be wired for separate source. Coils E, H, and L do H coil 150-500V AC 50/60Hz, or DC
a Dual voltage coils not available in size 5–8 starters. not apply to single phase starters. f Only available F coil100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC
d Enclosure is NEMA Type 4 (painted steel).
b For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see
page 9/110.

Solid State Overload with Auto/Manual Reset, Class 14
Selection
 R eplace the (*) with a letter from the coil table. Dual voltage coils are 60Hz Voltage Letter
 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104. 120 F
110–120/220–240 A
200–208 D
 Dimensions see page 9/157. 220–240 G
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/173. 277 L
220–240/440–480 C
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131.
440–480 H
575–600 E
NEMA 1 For other voltages and frequencies,
Extra Wide Enclosure, 3-Phase, 3-Pole

NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessa NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, NEMA 3 & 4 NEMA 3/3Ra
Corrosion Resistant Div. 1 and Div. 2 Industrial Use
@ = W for 304 Stainless Steel
Class I Groups C & D Weatherproof
@ = X for 316 Stainless Steel
Class II Groups E, F & G (Field Convertible to 3/3R)
Class III
Bolted Enclosures
Indoor/Outdoor Use
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Amp Frame Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 00 — 0.25–1 A 14BUA82B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
⁄2
1 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 00 — 0.75–3.4 A 14BUB82B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
11⁄2 11⁄2 2 — 00 — 3–12 A1 14BUC82B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
⁄6
1 1
⁄6 ⁄3
1
⁄2
1
0 — 0.25–1 A 14CUA82B* 14CUA82@* 14CUA82H* 14CUA820*
⁄2
1 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 14CUB82B* 14CUB82@* 14CUB82H* 14CUB820*
2 2 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 14CUC82B* 14CUC82@* 14CUC82H* 14CUC820*
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 14CUD82B* 14CUD82@* 14CUD82H* 14CUD820*
⁄6
1 1
⁄6 ⁄3
1
⁄2
1
1 — 0.25–1 A 14DUA82B* 14DUA82@* 14DUA82H* 14DUA820*
⁄2
1 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 14DUB82B* 14DUB82@* 14DUB82H* 14DUB820*
2 2 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 14DUC82B* 14DUC82@* 14DUC82H* 14DUC820*
3 3 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 14DUD82B* 14DUD82@* 14DUD82H* 14DUD820*
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 14DUE82B* 14DUE82@* 14DUE82H* 14DUE820*
10 10 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 14EUE82B* 14EUE82@* 14EUE82H* 14EUE820*
10 15 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 14FUF82B* 14FUF82@* 14FUF82H* 14FUF820*
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 14GUG82B* 14GUG82@* 14GUG82H* 14GUG820*
25 30 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 14HUG82B* 14HUG82@* 14HUG82H* 14HUG820*
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 14IUH82B* 14IUH82@* 14IUH82H* 14IUH820*
Note: A
ll starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per the a For
conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see
National Electric Code). page 9/110.

Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload with Manual and Auto Reset, Class 14
Selection
 R eplace the (*) with a letter from the coil table. Dual voltage coils are wired 60Hz Voltage Letter
on high voltage unless specified on order. 24 J
 Heater elements see page 9/124. Single phase starters require 1 heater 120 F
element. 3-phase starters require 3 heater elements. 110–120/220–240 A
 Field Modification Kits page 9/104. 200–208 D
 Factory Modifications page 9/119. 220–240 G
277 L
 Dimensions see page 9/140 open and 9/157 enclosed.
220–240/440–480 C
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/173. 440–480 H
 For NO/NC SPDT contact on overload relay, replace "81" with "91". For other voltages and frequencies,
"81" indicates one NC contact. see Factory Modifications page 9/119.

Max Hp Enclosure
NEMA 7 & 9
NEMA 4/4X NEMA 3 & 4
Stainlessb Class I Groups C & D
Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 4X Class II Groups E, F & G NEMA 12
Cont- Open Type Corrosion Resistant Fiberglass Class III NEMA 3/3Rb
actor Standard Auxiliary NEMA 1 @ = W for 304 Stainless Watertight, Dust-tight Bolted Enclosures Industrial Use
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half Contacts General Purpose @ = X for 316 Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Indoor/Outdoor Use Weatherproof
Volts Volts Volts Volts Rating Size Size Catalog No $ Catalog No $ Catalog No $ Catalog No $ Catalog No $ Catalog No $
1½ 1½ 2 2 9 00 — 14BP32A*81 14BP32B*81 Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
3 3 5 5 18 0 — 14CP32A*81 14CP32B*81 14CP32@*81 14CP32F*81 14CP32H*81 14CP320*81
7½ 7½ 10 10 27 1 — 14DP32A*81 14DP32B*81 14DP32@*81 14DP32F*81 14DP32H*81 14DP320*81
10 10 15 15 40 — 1¾ 14EP32A*81 14EP32B*81 14EP32@*81 14EP32F*81 14EP32H*81 14EP320*81
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 14FP32A*81 14FP32B*81 14FP32@*81 14FP32F*81 14FP32H*81 14FP320*81
15 20 30 30 60 — 2½ 14GP32A*81 14GP32B*81 14GP32@*81 14GP32F*81 14GP32H*81 14GP320*81
25 30 50 50 90 3 — 14HP32A*81 14HP32B*81 14HP32@*81 14HP32F*81 14HP32H*81 14HP320*81
30 40 75 75 115 — 3½ 14IP32A*81 14IP32B*81 14IP32@*81 14IP32F*81 14IP32H*81 14IP320*81
40 50 100 100 135 4 — 14JG32A*81 14JG32B*81 14JG32@*81 14JG32F*81 14JG32H*81 14JG320*81
Open Type & Standard Width Enclosure, Single Phase, 2-Polec

Max Hp Enclosure
NEMA 4X
NEMA 4/4X Stainlessb Fiberglass NEMA 7 & 9
Watertight, Dust-tight Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 3 & 4 NEMA 12
Corrosion Resistant Corrosion Resistant Div 1 and Div 2 NEMA 3/3Rb
208/ Contactor NEMA 1 @ = W for 304 Stainless Steel Class II Groups E, F & G Class I Groups C & D Industrial Use
115 230 Amp NEMA Half Open Type General Purpose @ = X for 316 Stainless Steel Class III Bolted Enclosures Weatherproof
Volts Volts Rating Size Size Catalog No $ Catalog No $ Catalog No $ Catalog No $ Catalog No $ Catalog No $
⁄3
1
1 9 00 — 14BP12A*81 14BP12B*81 Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
1 2 18 0 — 14CP12A*81 14CP12B*81 14CP12@*81 14CP12F*81 14CP12H*81 14CP120*81
2 3 27 1 — 14DP12A*81 14DP12B*81 14DP12@*81 14DP12F*81 14DP12H*81 14DP120*81
3 5 35 1P — 14EP12A*81 14EP12B*81 14EP12@*81 14EP12F*81 14EP12H*81 14EP120*81
3 7½ 45 2 — 14FP12A*81 14FP12B*81 14FP12@*81 14FP12F*81 14FP12H*81 14FP120*81
5 10 60 — 21⁄2 14GP12A*81 14GP12B*81 14GP12@*81 14GP12F*81 14GP12H*81 14GP120*81
Extra Wide Enclosure, 3-Phase, 3-Polea

Max Hp Enclosure
NEMA 4/4X Stainlessb
Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 7 & 9. NEMA 3 & 4 NEMA 12. NEMA 3/3Rb
Cont- Corrosion Resistant Div 1 and Div 2 Industrial Use
actor NEMA 1 @ = W for 304 Stainless Steel Class II Groups E, F & G Weatherproof
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half General Purpose @ = X for 316 Stainless Steel Bolted Enclosures Class III
Volts Volts Volts Volts Rating Size Size Catalog No Price $ Catalog No Price $ Catalog No Price $ Catalog No Price $
1½ 1½ 2 2 9 00 — 14BP82B*81 Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
3 3 5 5 18 0 — 14CP82B*81 14CP82@*81 14CP82H*81 14CP820*81
7½ 7½ 10 10 27 1 — 14DP82B*81 14DP82@*81 14DP82H*81 14DP820*81
10 10 15 15 40 — 1 3⁄4 14EP82B*81 14EP82@*81 14EP82H*81 14EP820*81
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 14FP82B*81 14FP82@*81 14FP82H*81 14FP820*81
15 20 30 30 60 — 2 1⁄2 14GP82B*81 14GP82@*81 14GP82H*81 14GP820*81
25 30 50 50 90 3 — 14HP82B*81 14HP82@*81 14HP82H*81 14HP820*81
30 40 75 75 115 — 3 1⁄2 14IP82B*81 14IP82@*81 14IP82H*81 14IP820*81
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload amp a To receive a single phase starter in an extra wide enclo- c Coils
D, F, or G will be wired for incoming voltage.
range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric Code) sure, order the enclosure kit from pg 16-91 and the open J coil will be wired for separate source. Coils E, H,
of typical industrial motors. All Starter Sizes carry style starter from pg 16-14 or 16-16 as separate items. and L do not apply to single phase starters.
one maximum Hp rating. For higher Hp single phase b For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see page 9/110. d Standard Auxiliary Contacts, Same as Contactors, refer to
motors, use 3-phase starters, wire and set per diagram page 9/60.
on page 9/173.

Combination Heavy Duty Starters
General
(stainless), 4X fiberglass and 7 & 9 Simply start with the enclosure kit
enclosures. Enclosures protect which has the handle preinstalled. You
personnel from contact with live parts install the required starter and fusible
and depending upon the construction, disconnect, connect the power wire
protect the control in varying degrees and you are finished. Within minutes,
from physical damage and harmful you have the required combination
atmospheres. All enclosures are starter in your hands. No more waiting
supplied with corrosion resistant on the factory. You need it, you got it!
finishes. What Is In It For You!
Heavy Duty Disconnect Switches
b Reduce Lead-time - What used to
The disconnect switch that goes the take days to get now takes minutes
distance in durability, performance and
reliability has the following advantages: b Reduced Inventory - Instead of
Combination Starter stocking scores of various combina-
Features b Visible blades for the highest level tion starters, simply stock a few
of safety enclosure kits, disconnect kits, circuit
Combination starters include breaker kits and open starters. With

b Double break switching action to
the following features: these basic “building blocks” you
reduce arcing, increase lifetime and
b Manufactured with Cold Forming eliminate the “electric hinge” virtually have hundreds of products
“TOX” Process on-hand
b More rugged positive action switch

b Solid State Overloads Standard on b Quality - The same high level of
b Oversized lugs are standard quality you have been accustomed
Sizes 5–8
b Line side shield to help guard to with our products will also be
b Easy to Install personnel from contact with live parts found in these new enclosure kits
b Wide Range of Enclosure Types b Higher horsepower rating for
Available b UL Listed - By correctly following
design E high efficiency motors the instructions included with the kits,
b Heavy Duty Quarter Turns b UL listed for IIsco, Burndy and T&B the product you build is
b 100kA Short Circuit Current Rating crimp type lugs UL/CSA Listed
when Protected with Class R Fuses Refer to page 9/115 for more details.
b The 200A switch accepts up to 300
to 600V or MCP to 480V MCM versus 250 MCM wire size Siemens Type ETI Circuit Breaker

b Visible Blade Disconnect Its rugged construction - with a high The ETI circuit breaker is a device
b Industrial Type Disconnect Handle fault withstand rating of 100kA at 600 designed specifically for application
VAC when fused with class R rated in motor circuits. The ETI is a magnetic
b UL listed file #E185287 (class 17, 18,
25, 26 & 32) fuses - meets the most stringent only protective device designed to
industry standards set forth by the provide protection against short
b CSA certified file #LR 6535 (class 17, automotive, petro-chemical, and pulp circuit current.
18, 25, 26 & 32)
and paper industries. UL recognized and The instantaneous-only type ETI circuit
Application CSA certified, our disconnect switches breaker employs adjustable magnetic
are available either non-fusible or fusible trip settings to allow broader application
A combination starter meets National
with class R and class J fuse clips. ranges and a higher degree of motor
Electrical Code requirements for:
short circuit protection.
1. A means of providing short circuit
motor protection with fused or breaker
disconnection of line voltage.
2. A means of safeguarding personnel
from contact with live parts and from
accidental starting of machinery by
disconnecting the motor and the
controller.
3. A motor controller with overload
protection.
Prewired combination starters eliminate
the cost of wiring between separate
disconnect and starter. Factory testing
assures field performance. Combination Enclosure Kits for NEMA
starters also provide a more compact Combination Starters Description
and attractive installation than separate Heavy Duty Starters
You can assemble a non-stocked com- These combination starters use the
units.
bination starter per your unanticipated same starters described in the heavy
Enclosure Types needs in minutes. Say, for example, duty starter section of this catalog.
Combination starters are available in your customer needs a fusible combina-
NEMA 1, 12/3/3R/4 (painted), 4/4X tion starter that you don’t have in stock.
You need in now, but don’t sweat it.

Non-Fusible with Solid State Overload, Class 17
Selection
 For Fusible Styles see page 9/20. 120 F
110–120/220–240a A
 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104.
200–208 D
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. 220–240 G
 Dimensions see page 9/159. 277 L
220–240/440–480a C
440–480 H
Standard Width Enclosure, 3 Phase, 3-Pole

NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessb NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 12, NEMA 3/3Rb ,
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 4 Painted (thru size 4)
Corrosion Resistant Corrosion Resistant Industrial Use
@ = W for 304 Stainless Steel Weatherproof
@ = X for 316 Stainless Steel Watertight, Dust-tight
Disc.
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Amp Frame Amp Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Size Range Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 0 — 0.25–1 A 30 17CUA92B* 17CUA92@* 17CUA92F* 17CUA92N*
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 17CUB92B* 17CUB92@* 17CUB92F* 17CUB92N*
2 2 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 30 17CUC92B* 17CUC92@* 17CUC92F* 17CUC92N*
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 30 17CUD92B* 17CUD92@* 17CUD92F* 17CUD92N*
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 1 — 0.25–1 A 30 17DUA92B* 17DUA92@* 17DUA92F* 17DUA92N*
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 17DUB92B* 17DUB92@* 17DUB92F* 17DUB92N*
2 2 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 30 17DUC92B* 17DUC92@* 17DUC92F* 17DUC92N*
3 3 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 30 17DUD92B* 17DUD92@* 17DUD92F* 17DUD92N*
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 60 17DUE92B* 17DUE92@* 17DUE92F* 17DUE92N*
10 10 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 60 17EUE92B* 17EUE92@* 17EUE92F* 17EUE92N*
10 15 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 60 17FUF92B* 17FUF92@* 17FUF92F* 17FUF92N*
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 100c 17GUG92B* 17GUG92@* 17GUG92F* 17GUG92N*
20d 25e 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 100 17HUG92B* 17HUG92@* 17HUG92F* 17HUG92N*
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 200 17IUH92B* 17IUH92@* 17IUH92F* 17IUH92N*
40 50 100 100 4 — 50–200 B 200 17JUH92B* 17JUH92@* 17JUH92F* 17JUH92N*
75 100 200 200 5 — 55–250 — 400f 17LPU92B* 17LPU92E*g — — 17LPU92N*
150 200 400 400 6 — 160–630 — 800 17MPX92B* 17MPX92E*g — — 17MPX92N*
— 300 600 600 7i — 400–1220 A1+CT 1200 17NUN92B* — — — — 17NUN92N*
— 450 900 900 8j — 400–1220 A1+CT 1600 17PUN92B* — — — — 17PUN92N*
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per the d For 25 HP and 200A disconnect, order fusible cat. no. h F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC,
National Electric Code). page 9/20. H coil 150-500V AC 50/60Hz, or DC
a Dual voltage coils not available in starter sizes 5–8. e For 30HP and 200A disconnect, order fusible cat. no. j Only available
b For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see page 9/20. F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC
f For 600A disconnect, order fusible cat. no. page 9/20.
page 9/110.
c For g Enclosure is NEMA Type 4 (painted steel).
60A disconnect, order fusible cat. no. page 9/20.

Non-Fusible with Solid State Overload, Class 17
Selection
 For Fusible Styles see page 9/21. 120 F
110–120/220–240 A
200–208 D
220–240/440–480 C
440–480 H

Hp Overload Enclosure
NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainless NEMA 12, NEMA 3/3R ,
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, Corrosion NEMA 4 Painted
Resistant Industrial Use
Disc.
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Amp Frame Amp Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Size Range Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 0 — 0.25–1 A 30 17CUA82B* 17CUA82@* 17CUA82N*
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 17CUB82B* 17CUB82@* 17CUB82N*
2 2 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 30 17CUC82B* 17CUC82@* 17CUC82N*
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 30 17CUD82B* 17CUD82@* 17CUD82N*
1
⁄6 ⁄6
1
⁄3
1
⁄2
1
1 — 0.25–1 A 30 17DUA82B* 17DUA82@* 17DUA82N*
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 17DUB82B* 17DUB82@* 17DUB82N*
2 2 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 30 17DUC82B* 17DUC82@* 17DUC82N*
3 3 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 30 17DUD82B* 17DUD82@* 17DUD82N*
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 60 17DUE82B* 17DUE82@* 17DUE82N*
10 10 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 60 17EUE82B* 17EUE82@* 17EUE82N*
10 15 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 60 17FUF82B* 17FUF82@* 17FUF82N*
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 100c 17GUG82B* 17GUG82@* 17GUG82N*
20d 25e 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 100 17HUG82B* 17HUG82@* 17HUG82N*
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per the b For
60A disconnect, order fusible cat. no. page 9/21. d For30HP and 200A disconnect, order fusible cat. no.
National Electric Code). c For
25 HP and 200A disconnect, order fusible cat. no. page 9/21.
a For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see page 9/21.
page 9/110.

Non-Fusible with Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload, Class 17
Selection
 Heater elements see page 9/124. (3 required) 120 F
110–120/220–240a A
200–208 D
220–240/440–480a C
440–480 H
"81" indicates one NC contact.
Standard Width Enclosure, 3-Phase, 3-Pole

Max Hp Enclosure
NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainless NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 12, NEMA 3/3R,
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 4 Painted
Contactor Disc @ = W for 304 Stainless Steel Weatherproof
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half Amp @ = X for 316 Stainless Steel Watertight, Dust-tight
Volts Volts Volts Volts Rating Size Size Rating Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
3 3 5 5 18 0 — 30 17CP92B*81 17CP92@*81 17CP92F*81 17CP92N*81
71⁄2c 71⁄2c 10 10 27 1 — 30 17DP92B*81 17DP92@*81 17DP92F*81 17DP92N*81
10 10 15 15 40 — 1 ⁄4
3
60 17EP92B*81 17EP92@*81 17EP92F*81 17EP92N*81
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 60 17FP92B*81 17FP92@*81 17FP92F*81 17FP92N*81
15 20 30 30 60 — 2 ⁄2
1
100 17GP92B*81 17GP92@*81 17GP92F*81 17GP92N*81
25 30
d d 50 50 90 3 — 100 17HP92B*81 17HP92@*81 17HP92F*81 17HP92N*81
30 40 75 75 115 — 31⁄2 200 17IP92B*81 17IP92@*81 17IP92F*81 17IP92N*81
40 50 100 100 135 4 — 200 17JP92B*81 17JP92@*81 17JP92F*81 17JP92N*81

Max Hp Enclosure
NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainless NEMA 12, NEMA 3/3R,
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 4 Painted
Corrosion Resistant I ndustrial Use
Contactor Disc @ = W for 304 Stainless Steel Weatherproof
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half Amp @ = X for 316 Stainless Steel Watertight, Dust-tight
Volts Volts Volts Volts Rating Size Size Rating Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
3 3 5 5 18 0 — 30 17CP82B*81 17CP82@*81 17CP82N*81
71⁄2c 71⁄2c 10 10 27 1 — 30 17DP82B*81 17DP82@*81 17DP82N*81
10 10 15 15 40 — 1 ⁄4
3
60 17EP82B*81 17EP82@*81 17EP82N*81
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 60 17FP82B*81 17FP82@*81 17FP82N*81
15 20 30 30 60 — 2 ⁄2 100
1
17GP82B*81 17GP82@*81 17GP82N*81
25 30d
d 50 50 90 3 — 100 17HP82B*81 17HP82@*81 17HP82N*81
Standard Width Enclosure, Single Phase, (Catalog Numbers are three phase, wire for single phase in the field)
Max Hp Enclosure
NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainless NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 12, NEMA 3/3R,
208/ Contactor Disc @ = X for 316 Stainless Steel Watertight, Dust-tight
115 230 Amp NEMA Half Amp
Volts Volts Rating Size Size Rating Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
1 2 18 0 — 30 17CP92B*81 17CP92@*81 17CP92F*81 17CP92N*81
2 3 27 1 — 30 17DP92B*81 17DP92@*81 17DP92F*81 17DP92N*81
3 5 35 1P — 60 17EP92B*81 17EP92@*81 17EP92F*81 17EP92N*81
3 71⁄2 45 2 — 60 17FP92B*81 17FP92@*81 17FP92F*81 17FP92N*81
5 10 60 — 2 ⁄2 100
1
17GP92B*81 17GP92@*81 17GP92F*81 17GP92N*81
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload amp a For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see For
b 60A disc, order fusible cat. no. page 9/22.
range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric Code) page 9/110.  For 200A disc, order fusible cat. no. page 9/22.
of typical industrial motors. All starter sizes carry
one maximum Hp rating.

Combination Heavy Duty Starters • Revised •
Fusible with Solid State Overload, Class 17 07/20/15
Selection
110–120/220–240a A
200–208 D
277 L
220–240/440–480a C
440–480 H
575–600 E
Standard Width Enclosure, 3-Phase, 3-Polee
Disc.
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Amp Frame Amp Fuse Clip Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Size Range Amp/Volts Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 — — 0 — 0.25–1 A 30 30A/250V 17CUA92B*10 17CUA92@*10 17CUA92F*10 17CUA92N*10
— — 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 0 — 0.25–1 A 30 30A/600V 17CUA92B*11 17CUA92@*11 17CUA92F*11 17CUA92N*11
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 — — 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 30A/250V 17CUB92B*10 17CUB92@*10 17CUB92F*10 17CUB92N*10
— — 11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 30A/600V 17CUB92B*11 17CUB92@*11 17CUB92F*11 17CUB92N*11
2 2 — — 0 — 3–12 A1 30 30A/250V 17CUC92B*10 17CUC92@*10 17CUC92F*10 17CUC92N*10
— — 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 30 30A/600V 17CUC92B*11 17CUC92@*11 17CUC92F*11 17CUC92N*11
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 30 30A/250V 17CUD92B*10 17CUD92@*10 17CUD92F*10 17CUD92N*10
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 — — 1 — 0.25–1 A 30 30A/250V 17DUA92B*10 17DUA92@*10 17DUA92F*10 17DUA92N*10
— — 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 1 — 0.25–1 A 30 30A/600V 17DUA92B*11 17DUA92@*11 17DUA92F*11 17DUA92N*11
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 — — 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 30A/250V 17DUB92B*10 17DUB92@*10 17DUB92F*10 17DUB92N*10
— — 11⁄2 2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 30A/600V 17DUB92B*11 17DUB92@*11 17DUB92F*11 17DUB92N*11
2 2 — — 1 — 3–12 A1 30 30A/250V 17DUC92B*10 17DUC92@*10 17DUC92F*10 17DUC92N*10
— — 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 30 30A/600V 17DUC92B*11 17DUC92@*11 17DUC92F*11 17DUC92N*11
3 3 — — 1 — 5.5–22 A1 30 30A/250V 17DUD92B*10 17DUD92@*10 17DUD92F*10 17DUD92N*10
— — 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 30 30A/600V 17DUD92B*11 17DUD92@*11 17DUD92F*11 17DUD92N*11
5 5 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 30 30A/250V 17DUE92B*10 17DUE92@*10 17DUE92F*10 17DUE92N*10
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 60 60A/250V 17DUE92B*12 17DUE92@*12 17DUE92F*12 17DUE92N*12
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 60 60A/600V 17EUE92B*13 17EUE92@*13 17EUE92F*13 17EUE92N*13
10 10 — — — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 60 60A/250V 17EUE92B*12 17EUE92@*12 17EUE92F*12 17EUE92N*12
10 15 — — 2 — 13–52 B 60 60A/250V 17FUF92B*12 17FUF92@*12 17FUF92F*12 17FUF92N*12
— — 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 60 60A/600V 17FUF92B*13 17FUF92@*13 17FUF92F*13 17FUF92N*13
— — — 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 60 60A/600V 17GUG92B*13 17GUG92@*13 17GUG92F*13 17GUG92N*13
— — 30 — — 21⁄2 25–100 B 100 100A/600V 17GUG92B*15 17GUG92@*15 17GUG92F*15 17GUG92N*15
15 20 — — — 21⁄2 25–100 B 100 100A/250V 17GUG92B*14 17GUG92@*14 17GUG92F*14 17GUG92N*14
20 25 — — 3 — 25–100 B 100 100A/250V 17HUG92B*14 17HUG92@*14 17HUG92F*14 17HUG92N*14
— — 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 100 100A/600V 17HUG92B*15 17HUG92@*15 17HUG92F*15 17HUG92N*15
25 30 — — 3 — 25–100 B 200 200A/250V 17HUG92B*16 17HUG92@*16 17HUG92F*16 17HUG92N*16
30 40 — — — 31⁄2 50–200 B 200 200A/250V 17IUH92B*16 17IUH92@*16 17IUH92F*16 17IUH92N*16
— — 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 200 200A/600V 17IUH92B*17 17IUH92@*17 17IUH92F*17 17IUH92N*17
40 50 — — 4 — 50–200 B 200 200A/250V 17JUH92B*16 17JUH92@*16 17JUH92F*16 17JUH92N*16
— — 100 100 4 — 50–200 B 200 200A/600V 17JUH92B*17 17JUH92@*17 17JUH92F*17 17JUH92N*17
75 100 — — 5 — 55–250 — 400 400A/250V 17LPU92B*18 17LPU92E*18d — — 17LPU92N*18
— 100 — — 5 — 55–250 — 600 600A/250Vc 17LPU92B*20 17LPU92E*20d — — 17LPU92N*20
— — — 125 5 — 55–250 — 200 200A/600V 17LPU92B*17 17LPU92E*17d — — 17LPU92N*17
— — 200 200 5 — 55–250 — 400 400A/600V 17LPU92B*19 17LPU92E*19d — — 17LPU92N*19
— — 200 — 5 — 55–250 — 600 600A/600Vc 17LPU92B*21 17LPU92E*21d — — 17LPU92N*21
150 200 — — 6 — 160–630 — 600 600A/250V 17MPX92B*20 17MPX92E*20d — — 17MPX92N*20
— — 400 400 6 — 160–630 — 600 600A/600V 17MPX92B*21 17MPX92E*21d — — 17MPX92N*21
— — 400 400 6 — 160–630 — 800 800A/600V 17MPX92B*23 17MPX92E*23d — — 17MPX92N*23
— — 600 600 7f — 400–1220 A1+CT 1200 1200A/600V 17NUN92B*24 — — — — 17NUN92N*24
— — 900 900 8g — 400–1220 A1+CT 1600 1600A/600V 17PUN92B*25 — — — — 17PUN92N*25
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per the c Use Class J fuses only. g Only available
National Electric Code). d Enclosure is NEMA Type 4 (painted steel). F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC
a Dual voltage coils not available in starter sizes 5–8. e Single
phase wiring page 9/173.
b For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see f F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC,
page 9/110. H coil 150-500V AC 50/60Hz, or DC

Fusible with Solid State Overload, Class 17
Selection
110–120/220–240 A
200–208 D
220–240/440–480 C
440–480 H
575–600 E

NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainless NEMA 12, NEMA 3/3R ,
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, NEMA 4 Painted
@ = W for 304 Stainless Steel Industrial Use
@ = X for 316 Stainless Steel Weatherproof
Watertight, Dust-tight
Disc.
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Amp Frame Amp Fuse Clip Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Size Range Amp/Volts Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 — — 0 — 0.25–1 A 30 30A/250V 17CUA82B*10 17CUA82@*10 17CUA82N*10
— —
1
⁄3 ⁄2
1
0 — 0.25–1 A 30 30A/600V 17CUA82B*11 17CUA82@*11 17CUA82N*11
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 — — 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 30A/250V 17CUB82B*10 17CUB82@*10 17CUB82N*10
— — 11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 30A/600V 17CUB82B*11 17CUB82@*11 17CUB82N*11
2 2 — — 0 — 3–12 A1 30 30A/250V 17CUC82B*10 17CUC82@*10 17CUC82N*10
— — 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 30 30A/600V 17CUC82B*11 17CUC82@*11 17CUC82N*11
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 30 30A/250V 17CUD82B*10 17CUD82@*10 17CUD82N*10
⁄6
1
⁄6
1
— — 1 — 0.25–1 A 30 30A/250V 17DUA82B*10 17DUA82@*10 17DUA82N*10
— —
1
⁄3 ⁄2
1
1 — 0.25–1 A 30 30A/600V 17DUA82B*11 17DUA82@*11 17DUA82N*11
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 — — 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 30A/250V 17DUB82B*10 17DUB82@*10 17DUB82N*10
— — 11⁄2 2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 30A/600V 17DUB82B*11 17DUB82@*11 17DUB82N*11
2 2 — — 1 — 3–12 A1 30 30A/250V 17DUC82B*10 17DUC82@*10 17DUC82N*10
— — 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 30 30A/600V 17DUC82B*11 17DUC82@*11 17DUC82N*11
3 3 — — 1 — 5.5–22 A1 30 30A/250V 17DUD82B*10 17DUD82@*10 17DUD82N*10
— — 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 30 30A/600V 17DUD82B*11 17DUD82@*11 17DUD82N*11
5 5 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 30 30A/250V 17DUE82B*10 17DUE82@*10 17DUE82N*10
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 60 60A/250V 17DUE82B*12 17DUE82@*12 17DUE82N*12
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 60 60A/600V 17EUE82B*13 17EUE82@*13 17EUE82N*13
10 10 — — — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 60 60A/250V 17EUE82B*12 17EUE82@*12 17EUE82N*12
10 15 — — 2 — 13–52 B 60 60A/250V 17FUF82B*12 17FUF82@*12 17FUF82N*12
— — 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 60 60A/600V 17FUF82B*13 17FUF82@*13 17FUF82N*13
— — — 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 60 60A/600V 17GUG82B*13 17GUG82@*13 17GUG82N*13
— — 30 — — 21⁄2 25–100 B 100 100A/600V 17GUG82B*15 17GUG82@*15 17GUG82N*15
15 20 — — — 21⁄2 25–100 B 100 100A/250V 17GUG82B*14 17GUG82@*14 17GUG82N*14
20 25 — — 3 — 25–100 B 100 100A/250V 17HUG82B*14 17HUG82@*14 17HUG82N*14
— — 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 100 100A/600V 17HUG82B*15 17HUG82@*15 17HUG82N*15
25 30 — — 3 — 25–100 B 200 200A/250V 17HUG82B*16 17HUG82@*16 17HUG82N*16
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per a For
the National Electric Code). page 9/110.

Fusible with Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload, Class 17
Selection
110–120/220–240 A
200–208 D
220–240/440–480 C
440–480 H
Standard Width Enclosure, 3-Phase, 3-Pole

Max Hp Enclosure
NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainless NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 12, NEMA 3/3R,
Cont- @ = W for 304 Stainless Steel Weatherproof
actor Disc Fuse Clip @ = X for 316 Stainless Steel Watertight, Dust-tight
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half Amp Size Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Rating Size Size Rating Amps/Volts Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
3 3 — — 18 0 — 30 30A/250V 17CP92B*1081 17CP92@*1081 17CP92F*1081 17CP92N*1081
— — 5 5 18 0 — 30 30A/600V 17CP92B*1181 17CP92@*1181 17CP92F*1181 17CP92N*1181
5 5 — — 27 1 — 30 30A/250V 17DP92B*1081 17DP92@*1081 17DP92F*1081 17DP92N*1081
— — 10 10 27 1 — 30 30A/600V 17DP92B*1181 17DP92@*1181 17DP92F*1181 17DP92N*1181
7 ⁄2
1
7 ⁄2
1
— — 27 1 — 60 60A/250V 17DP92B*1281 17DP92@*1281 17DP92F*1281 17DP92N*1281
10 10 — — 40 — 13⁄4 60 60A/250V 17EP92B*1281 17EP92@*1281 17EP92F*1281 17EP92N*1281
— — 15 15 40 — 13⁄4 60 60A/600V 17EP92B*1381 17EP92@*1381 17EP92F*1381 17EP92N*1381
10 15 — — 45 2 — 60 60A/250V 17FP92B*1281 17FP92@*1281 17FP92F*1281 17FP92N*1281
— — 25 25 45 2 — 60 60A/600V 17FP92B*1381 17FP92@*1381 17FP92F*1381 17FP92N*1381
— — — 30 60 — 21⁄2 60 60A/600V 17GP92B*1381 17GP92@*1381 17GP92F*1381 17GP92N*1381
— — 30 — 60 — 21⁄2 100 100A/600V 17GP92B*1581 17GP92@*1581 17GP92F*1581 17GP92N*1581
15 20 — — 60 — 21⁄2 100 100A/250V 17GP92B*1481 17GP92@*1481 17GP92F*1481 17GP92N*1481
20 25 — — 90 3 — 100 100A/250V 17HP92B*1481 17HP92@*1481 17HP92F*1481 17HP92N*1481
— — 50 50 90 3 — 100 100A/600V 17HP92B*1581 17HP92@*1581 17HP92F*1581 17HP92N*1581
25 30 — — 90 3 — 200 200A/250V 17HP92B*1681 17HP92@*1681 17HP92F*1681 17HP92N*1681
30 40 — — 115 — 31⁄2 200 200A/250V 17IP92B*1681 17IP92@*1681 17IP92F*1681 17IP92N*1681
— — 75 75 115 — 31⁄2 200 200A/600V 17IP92B*1781 17IP92@*1781 17IP92F*1781 17IP92N*1781
40 50 — — 135 4 — 200 200A/250V 17JP92B*1681 17JP92@*1681 17JP92F*1681 17JP92N*1681
— — 100 100 135 4 — 200 200A/600V 17JP92B*1781 17JP92@*1781 17JP92F*1781 17JP92N*1781
Max Hp Enclosure
NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainless NEMA 12, NEMA 3/3R,
Cont- Industrial Use Weatherproof Industrial Use
actor Disc Fuse Clip @ = W for 304 Stainless Steel Weatherproof
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half Amp Size
Volts Volts Volts Volts Rating Size Size Rating Amps/Volts Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
3 3 — — 18 0 — 30 30A/250V 17CP82B*1081 17CP82@*1081 17CP82N*1081 1405.00
— — 5 5 18 0 — 30 30A/600V 17CP82B*1181 17CP82@*1181 17CP82N*1181 1423.00
5 5 — — 27 1 — 30 30A/250V 17DP82B*1081 17DP82@*1081 17DP82N*1081 1447.00
— — 10 10 27 1 — 30 30A/600V 17DP82B*1181 17DP82@*1181 17DP82N*1181 1465.00
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 — — 27 1 — 60 60A/250V 17DP82B*1281 17DP82@*1281 17DP82N*1281 1465.00
10 10 — — 40 — 13⁄4 60 60A/250V 17EP82B*1281 17EP82@*1281 17EP82N*1281 1595.00
— — 15 15 40 — 13⁄4 60 60A/600V 17EP82B*1381 17EP82@*1381 17EP82N*1381 1612.00
10 15 — — 45 2 — 60 60A/250V 17FP82B*1281 17FP82@*1281 17FP82N*1281 2034.00
— — 25 25 45 2 — 60 60A/600V 17FP82B*1381 17FP82@*1381 17FP82N*1381 2051.00
— — — 30 60 — 21⁄2 60 60A/600V 17GP82B*1381 17GP82@*1381 17GP82N*1381 2998.00
— — 30 — 60 — 21⁄2 100 100A/600V 17GP82B*1581 17GP82@*1581 17GP82N*1581 3075.00
15 20 — — 60 — 21⁄2 100 100A/250V 17GP82B*1481 17GP82@*1481 17GP82N*1481 3075.00
20 25 — — 90 3 — 100 100A/250V 17HP82B*1481 17HP82@*1481 17HP82N*1481 3471.00
— — 50 50 90 3 — 100 100A/600V 17HP82B*1581 17HP82@*1581 17HP82N*1581 3471.00
25 30 — — 90 3 — 200 200A/250V 17HP82B*1681 17HP82@*1681 17HP82N*1681 3987.00
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload amp a For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see  Single phase wiring page 9/173.
range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric Code) page 9/110.

MCP Type with Solid State Overload, Class 18
Selection
110–120/220–240a A
200–208 D
220–240/440–480a C
440–480 H
575–600 E

NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessb NEMA 4X NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12, NEMA
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, Fiberglass NEMA 3 & 4 3/3Rb , NEMA 4
Corrosion Resistant Watertight, Dust-tight Div. 1 and Div. 2 Painted (thru size 4)
@ = W for 304 Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Class I Groups C & D Industrial Use
@ = X for 316 Stainless Steel Class II Groups E, F & G Weatherproof
Class III Watertight, Dust-tight
Bolted Enclosures
Indoor/Outdoor Use
Motor Circuit
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Interruter ETI Amp Frame Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Amps Range Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 0 — 3 0.75–3.4 A 18CUB92B* 18CUB92@* 18CUB92F* 18CUB92H* 18CUB92N*
2 2 5 5 0 — 10 3–12 A1 18CUC92B* 18CUC92@* 18CUC92F* 18CUC92H* 18CUC92N*
3 3 — — 0 — 25 5.5–22 A1 18CUD92B* 18CUD92@* 18CUD92F* 18CUD92H* 18CUD92N*
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
1 1 1 — 3 0.75–3.4 A 18DUB92B* 18DUB92@* 18DUB92F* 18DUB92H* 18DUB92N*
2 2 5 5 1 — 10 3–12 A1 18DUC92B* 18DUC92@* 18DUC92F* 18DUC92H* 18DUC92N*
3 3 7 1⁄2 10 1 — 25 5.5–22 A1 18DUD92B* 18DUD92@* 18DUD92F* 18DUD92H* 18DUD92N*
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 — 1 — 30 10–40 A1 18DUE92B* 18DUE92@* 18DUE92F* 18DUE92H* 18DUE92N*
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 40 10–40 A1 18EUE92B* 18EUE92@* 18EUE92F* 18EUE92H* 18EUE92N*
10 15 25 25 2 — 50 13–52 B 18FUF92B* 18FUF92@* 18FUF92F* 18FUF92H* 18FUF92N*
15 20 30 30 — 2 1⁄2 100 25–100 B 18GUG92B* 18GUG92@* 18GUG92F* 18GUG92H* 18GUG92N*
25 30 50 50 3 — 125 25–100 B 18HUG92B* 18HUG92@* 18HUG92F* 18HUG92H* 18HUG92N*
30 40 75 75 — 3 1⁄2 125 50–200 B 18IUH92B* 18IUH92@* 18IUH92F* 18IUH92H* 18IUH92N*
40 50 100 100 4 — 150 50–200 B 18JUH92B* 18JUH92@* 18JUH92F* 18JUH92H* 18JUH92N*
50 75 150 200 5 — 250 55–250 — 18LPT92B* 18LPT92E*c — — 18LPT92H* 18LPT92N*
75 100 200 — 5 — 400 55–250 — 18LPU92B* 18LPU92E*c — — — — 18LPU92N*
100 125 250 300 6 — 400 160–630 — 18MPW92B* 18MPW92E*c — — — — 18MPW92N*
150 200 400 400 6 — 600 160–630 — 18MPX92B* 18MPX92E*c — — — — 18MPX92N*
— 250 500 500 7d — 800 400–1220 A1+CT 18NUV92B* — — — — — — 18NUV92N*
— 300 600 600 7d — 1000 400–1220 A1+CT 18NUY92B* — — — — — — 18NUY92N*
— 400 800 800 8e — 1200 400–1220 A1+CT 18PUW92B* — — — — — — 18PUW92N*
— 450 900 900 8e — 1600 400–1220 A1+CT 18PUZ92B* — — — — — — 18PUZ92N*
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per b Forconduit hubs and conversion instructions, see e Only available
the National Electric Code). page 9/110. F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC
a Dual c Enclosure is NEMA Type 4 (painted steel).
voltage coils not available in starter sizes 5–8.
d F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC,
H coil 150-500V AC 50/60Hz, or DC

MCP Type with Solid State Overload, Class 18
Selection
110–120/220–240 A
200–208 D
220–240/440–480 C
440–480 H
575–600 E

NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainless NEMA 12, NEMA 3/3R ,
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, NEMA 4 Painted
Corrosion Resistant Industrial Use
Motor @ = X for 316 Stainless Steel Watertight, Dust-tight
Circuit
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Interruter Amp Frame Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size ETI Amps Range Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 0 — 3 0.75–3.4 A 18CUB82B* 18CUB82@* 18CUB82N*
2 2 5 5 0 — 10 3–12 A1 18CUC82B* 18CUC82@* 18CUC82N*
3 3 — — 0 — 25 5.5–22 A1 18CUD82B* 18CUD82@* 18CUD82N*
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
1 1 1 — 3 0.75–3.4 A 18DUB82B* 18DUB82@* 18DUB82N*
2 2 5 5 1 — 10 3–12 A1 18DUC82B* 18DUC82@* 18DUC82N*
3 3 71⁄2 10 1 — 25 5.5–22 A1 18DUD82B* 18DUD82@* 18DUD82N*
71⁄2 71⁄2 10 — 1 — 30 10–40 A1 18DUE82B* 18DUE82@* 18DUE82N*
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 40 10–40 A1 18EUE82B* 18EUE82@* 18EUE82N*
10 15 25 25 2 — 50 13–52 B 18FUF82B* 18FUF82@* 18FUF82N*
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 100 25–100 B 18GUG82B* 18GUG82@* 18GUG82N*
25 30 50 50 3 — 125 25–100 B 18HUG82B* 18HUG82@* 18HUG82N*
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per a For

MCP Type with Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload, Class 18
Selection
110–120/220–240 A
200–208 D
220–240/440–480 C
440–480 H

Max Hp Enclosure
NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessa NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12,NEMA 3/3R,a
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 3 & 4 NEMA 4 Painted
Corrosion Resistant Corrosion Resistant Div 1 and Div 2 Industrial Use
@ = W for 304 Class I Groups C & D Weatherproof
Stainless Steel Class II Groups E, F & G Watertight, Dust-tight
@ = X for 316 Stainless Class III
Motor
Cont- Steel Bolted Enclosures
actor Circuit
Indoor/Outdoor Use
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half Interrupter Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Rating Size Size ETI Amps Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 18 0 — 3 18CP92BA*81 18CP92@A*81 18CP92FA*81 18CP92HA*81 18CP92NA*81
1 1 3 3 18 0 — 10 18CP92BB*81 18CP92@B*81 18CP92FB*81 18CP92HB*81 18CP92NB*81
3 3 5 5 18 0 — 25 18CP92BC*81 18CP92@C*81 18CP92FC*81 18CP92HC*81 18CP92NC*81
1⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 27 1 — 3 18DP92BA*81 18DP92@A*81 18DP92FA*81 18DP92HA*81 18DP92NA*81
1 1 3 3 27 1 — 10 18DP92BB*81 18DP92@B*81 18DP92FB*81 18DP92HB*81 18DP92NB*81
3 3 7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 27 1 — 25 18DP92BD*81 18DP92@D*81 18DP92FD*81 18DP92HD*81 18DP92ND*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 27 1 — 30 18DP92BE*81 18DP92@E*81 18DP92FE*81 18DP92HE*81 18DP92NE*81
— — 15 15 40 — 13⁄4 40 18EP92BF*81 18EP92@F*81 18EP92FF*81 18EP92HF*81 18EP92NF*81
10 10 — — 40 — 13⁄4 50 18EP92BG*81 18EP92@G*81 18EP92FG*81 18EP92HG*81 18EP92NG*81
— — 20 20 45 2 — 40 18FP92BH*81 18FP92@H*81 18FP92FH*81 18FP92HH*81 18FP92NH*81
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 50 18FP92BJ*81 18FP92@J*81 18FP92FJ*81 18FP92HJ*81 18FP92NJ*81
10 15 30 30 60 — 21⁄2 50 18GP92BK*81 18GP92@K*81 18GP92FK*81 18GP92HK*81 18GP92NK*81
15 20 — — 60 — 21⁄2 100 18GP92BL*81 18GP92@L*81 18GP92FL*81 18GP92HL*81 18GP92NL*81
— — 30 30 90 3 — 50 18HP92BM*81 18HP92@M*81 18HP92FM*81 18HP92HM*81 18HP92NM*81
25 30 50 50 90 3 — 125 18HP92BN*81 18HP92@N*81 18HP92FN*81 18HP92HN*81 18HP92NN*81
30 40 75 75 115 — 31⁄2 125 18IP92BP*81 18IP92@P*81 18IP92FP*81 18IP92HP*81 18IP92NP*81
40 50 100 100 135 4 — 150 18JP92BR*81 18JP92@R*81 18JP92FR*81 18JP92HR*81 18JP92NR*81

Max Hp Enclosure
NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessa NEMA 12, NEMA 3/3R,a
@=W for 304 Stainless Steel Weatherproof
Contactor @=X for 316 Stainless Steel Watertight, Dust-tight
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half
Motor Circuit Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Rating Size Size Interrupter ETI
Amps Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 18 0 — 3 18CP82BA*81 18CP82@A*81 18CP82NA*81
1 1 3 3 18 0 — 10 18CP82BB*81 18CP82@B*81 18CP82NB*81
3 3 5 5 18 0 — 25 18CP82BC*81 18CP82@C*81 18CP82NC*81
1
⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 27 1 — 3 18DP82BA*81 18DP82@A*81 18DP82NA*81
1 1 3 3 27 1 — 10 18DP82BB*81 18DP82@B*81 18DP82NB*81
3 3 7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 27 1 — 25 18DP82BD*81 18DP82@D*81 18DP82ND*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 27 1 — 30 18DP82BE*81 18DP82@E*81 18DP82NE*81
— — 15 15 40 — 13⁄4 40 18EP82BF*81 18EP82@F*81 18EP82NF*81
10 10 — — 40 — 13⁄4 50 18EP82BG*81 18EP82@G*81 18EP82NG*81
— — 20 20 45 2 — 40 18FP82BH*81 18FP82@H*81 18FP82NH*81
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 50 18FP82BJ*81 18FP82@J*81 18FP82NJ*81
10 15 30 30 60 — 21⁄2 50 18GP82BK*81 18GP82@K*81 18GP82NK*81
15 20 — — 60 — 21⁄2 100 18GP82BL*81 18GP82@L*81 18GP82NL*81
— — 30 30 90 3 — 50 18HP82BM*81 18HP82@M*81 18HP82NM*81
25 30 50 50 90 3 — 125 18HP82BN*81 18HP82@N*81 18HP82NN*81
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload a For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see
amp range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric page 9/110.
Code) of typical industrial motors. All starter sizes
carry one maximum Hp rating.

Reversing Heavy Duty Starters
Solid State Overload, Class 22
Selection
110–120/220–240a A
200–208 D
 Dimensions see page 9/142 open and 9/162 enclosed. 220–240 G
220–240/440–480a C
440–480 H
575–600 E

Open Type NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessb NEMA 4X NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12
Standard Auxiliary General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, Fiberglass NEMA 3 & 4 NEMA 3/3Rb
Contactsf Corrosion Resistant Watertight, Dust-tight Div. 1 and Div. 2 Industrial Use
304 Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Class I Groups C & D Weatherproof
Class II Groups E, F & G (Field Convertible to 3/3R)
Class III
Bolted Enclosures Indoor/
Outdoor Use
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Amp Frame Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 00 — 0.25–1 A 22BUA32A* 22BUA32B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
⁄2
1 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 00 — 0.75–3.4 A 22BUB32A* 22BUB32B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
11⁄2 11⁄2 2 — 00 — 3–12 A1 22BUC32A* 22BUC32B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
⁄6
1 1
⁄6 ⁄3
1
1⁄2 0 — 0.25–1 A 22CUA32A* 22CUA32B* 22CUA32W* 22CUA32F* 22CUA32H* 22CUA320*
⁄2
1 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 22CUB32A* 22CUB32B* 22CUB32W* 22CUB32F* 22CUB32H* 22CUB320*
2 2 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 22CUC32A* 22CUC32B* 22CUC32W* 22CUC32F* 22CUC32H* 22CUC320*
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 22CUD32A* 22CUD32B* 22CUD32W* 22CUD32F* 22CUD32H* 22CUD320*
⁄6
1 1
⁄6 ⁄3
1
⁄2
1
1 — 0.25–1 A 22DUA32A* 22DUA32B* 22DUA32W* 22DUA32F* 22DUA32H* 22DUA320*
⁄2
1 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 22DUB32A* 22DUB32B* 22DUB32W* 22DUB32F* 22DUB32H* 22DUB320*
2 2 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 22DUC32A* 22DUC32B* 22DUC32W* 22DUC32F* 22DUC32H* 22DUC320*
3 3 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 22DUD32A* 22DUD32B* 22DUD32W* 22DUD32F* 22DUD32H* 22DUD320*
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 22DUE32A* 22DUE32B* 22DUE32W* 22DUE32F* 22DUE32H* 22DUE320*
10 10 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 22EUE32A* 22EUE32B* 22EUE32W* 22EUE32F* 22EUE32H* 22EUE320*
10 15 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 22FUF32A* 22FUF32B* 22FUF32W* 22FUF32F* 22FUF32H* 22FUF320*
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 22GUG32A* 22GUG32B* 22GUG32W* 22GUG32F* 22GUG32H* 22GUG320*
25 30 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 22HUG32A* 22HUG32B* 22HUG32W* 22HUG32F* 22HUG32H* 22HUG320*
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 22IUH32A* 22IUH32B* 22IUH32W* 22IUH32F* 22IUH32H* 22IUH320*
40 50 100 100 4 — 50–200 B 22JUH32A* 22JUH32B* 22JUH32W* 22JUH32F* 22JUH32H* 22JUH320*
75 100 200 200 5 — 55–250 — 22LPU32A* 22LPU32B* 22LPU32E*c — — — — 22LPU320*
150 200 400 400 6 — 160–630 — 22MPX32A* 22MPX32B* 22MPX32E*c — — — — 22MPX320*
— 300 600 600 7d — 400–1220 A1+CT 22NUN32A* 22NUN32B* — — — — — — 22NUN320*
— 450 900 900 8e — 400–1220 A1+CT 22PUN32A* 22PUN32B* — — — — — — 22PUN320*
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per c Enclosure is rated only NEMA 4 (painted steel). f Auxiliarycontacts
the National Electric Code). d Only available 22B-22E 4th pole built-in
a Dual voltage coils not available in size 5–8 starters. F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC 22F-22J 2 NO & 2 NC
b For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see H coil 150-500V AC 50/60Hz, or DC
e Only available
page 9/110.
F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC

Reversing Heavy Duty Starters
Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload with Manual and Auto Reset, Class 22
Selection
 Heater elements see page 9/124. Single phase starters require 1 heater ele- 120 F
ment. 3-phase starters require 3 heater elements. 110–120/220–240 A
200–208 D
220–240 G
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. 277 L
 Dimensions see pages 9/142 open and 9/162 enclosed. 220–240/440–480 C
440–480 H
575–600 E
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131. For other voltages and frequencies,
 For NO/NC SPDT contact on overload relay, replace "81" with "91".

Max Hp Enclosure
Open Typec NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessa NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12a

Watertight, Dust-tight General Purpose NEMA 3 & 4 NEMA 3/3R

Corrosion Resistant
Corrosion Resistant Div 1 and Div 2 Industrial Use
304 Stainless Steel Indoor/Outdoor Use Class I Groups C & D Weatherproof
Cont- Class III
actor Bolted Enclosures
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Rating Size Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1 1⁄2 1 1⁄2 2 2 9 00 — 22BP32A*81 22BP32B*81 Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
3 3 5 5 18 0 — 22CP32A*81 22CP32B*81 22CP32W*81 22CP32F*81 22CP32H*81 22CP320*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 27 1 — 22DP32A*81 22DP32B*81 22DP32W*81 22DP32F*81 22DP32H*81 22DP320*81
10 10 15 15 40 — 1 3⁄4 22EP32A*81 22EP32B*81 22EP32W*81 22EP32F*81 22EP32H*81 22EP320*81
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 22FP32A*81 22FP32B*81 22FP32W*81 22FP32F*81 22FP32H*81 22FP320*81
15 20 30 30 60 — 2 1⁄2 22GP32A*81 22GP32B*81 22GP32W*81 22GP32F*81 22GP32H*81 22GP320*81
25 30 50 50 90 3 — 22HP32A*81 22HP32B*81 22HP32W*81 22HP32F*81 22HP32H*81 22HP320*81
30 40 75 75 115 — 3 1⁄2 22IP32A*81 22IP32B*81 22IP32W*81 22IP32F*81 22IP32H*81 22IP320*81
40 50 100 100 135 4 — 22JG32A*81 22JG32B*81 22JG32W*81 22JG32F*81 22JG32H*81 22JG320*81
Open Type & Standard Width Enclosure, Single Phase, 3-Wire, 2-Poleb
Max Hp Enclosure
Open Type NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessa NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12a
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 3 & 4 NEMA 3/3R
Corrosion Resistant
304 Stainless Steel Class I Groups C & D Weatherproof
Class III
Bolted Enclosures
208/ Contactor Indoor/Outdoor Use
115 230 Amp NEMA Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Rating Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1⁄3 1 9 00 22BP12A*81 22BP12B*81 Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
1 2 18 0 22CP12A*81 22CP12B*81 22CP12W*81 22CP12F*81 22CP12H*81 22CP120*81
2 3 27 1 22DP12A*81 22DP12B*81 22DP12W*81 22DP12F*81 22DP12H*81 22DP120*81
3 5 35 1P 22EP12A*81 22EP12B*81 22EP12W*81 22EP12F*81 22EP12H*81 22EP120*81
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload a For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see c Auxiliary
contacts
amp range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric page 9/110. 22B-22E 4th pole built-in
Code) of typical industrial motors. All Starter Sizes b Coil D, F, or G will be wired for Incoming Voltage. 22F-22J 2 NO & 2 NC
carry one maximum Hp rating. J coil will be wired for 24V separate source. Coils E,
H, and L do not apply to single phase starters.

Combination Reversing Heavy Duty Starters
Non-Fusible, Class 25
Selection
 Heater elements see page 9/124. 120 F
110–120/220–240a A
 Fuse clips see page 9/120.
200–208 D
 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104. 220–240 G
220–240/440–480a C
 Dimensions see page 9/164.
440–480 H
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/177. 575–600 E
 For NO/NC SPDT contact on overload, replace "81" with "91".
Standard Width Enclosure with Solid State Overload, 3-Phase, 3-Pole

304 Stainless Steel Weatherproof
Disc.
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Size Rating Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 0 — 0.25–1 A 30 25CUA92B* 25CUA92W* 25CUA92F* 25CUA92N*
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 25CUB92B* 25CUB92W* 25CUB92F* 25CUB92N*
2 2 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 30 25CUC92B* 25CUC92W* 25CUC92F* 25CUC92N*
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 30 25CUD92B* 25CUD92W* 25CUD92F* 25CUD92N*
⁄6
1
⁄6
1
⁄3
1 1
⁄2 1 — 0.25–1 A 30 25DUA92B* 25DUA92W* 25DUA92F* 25DUA92N*
⁄2
1
⁄4
3
11⁄2 2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 25DUB92B* 25DUB92W* 25DUB92F* 25DUB92N*
2 2 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 30 25DUC92B* 25DUC92W* 25DUC92F* 25DUC92N*
3 3 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 30 25DUD92B* 25DUD92W* 25DUD92F* 25DUD92N*
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 60 25DUE92B* 25DUE92W* 25DUE92F* 25DUE92N*
10 10 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 60 25EUE92B* 25EUE92W* 25EUE92F* 25EUE92N*
10 15 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 60 25FUF92B* 25FUF92W* 25FUF92F* 25FUF92N*
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 100 25GUG92B* 25GUG92W* 25GUG92F* 25GUG92N*
20 25 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 100 25HUG92B* 25HUG92W* 25HUG92F* 25HUG92N*
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 200 25IUH92B* 25IUH92W* 25IUH92F* 25IUH92N*
40 50 100 100 4 — 50–200 B 200 25JUH92B* 25JUH92W* 25JUH92F* 25JUH92N*
75 100 200 200 5 — 55–250 — 400 25LPU92B* 25LPU92E*c — — 25LPU92N*
150 200 400 400 6 — 160–630 — 800 25MPX92B* 25MPX92E*c — — 25MPX92N*
— 300 600 600 7d — 400–1220 A1+CT 1200 25NUN92B* — — — — 25NUN92N*
— 450 900 900 8e — 400–1220 A1+CT 1600 25PUN92B* — — — — 25PUN92N*
Standard Width Enclosure with Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload, 3-Phase, 3-Pole
Max Hp Enclosure
NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessb NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 12b
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 3/3R
Corrosion Resistant Corrosion Resistant NEMA 4 Painted
304 Stainless Steel Industrial Use
Cont- Weatherproof

actor Disc Watertight, Dust-tight
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half Amp Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Rating Size Size Rating Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
3 3 5 5 18 0 — 30 25CP92B*81 25CP92W*81 25CP92F*81 25CP92N*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 27 1 — 30 25DP92B*81 25DP92W*81 25DP92F*81 25DP92N*81
10 10 15 15 40 — 13⁄4 60 25EP92B*81 25EP92W*81 25EP92F*81 25EP92N*81
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 60 25FP92B*81 25FP92W*81 25FP92F*81 25FP92N*81
15 20 30 30 60 — 21⁄2 100 25GP92B*81 25GP92W*81 25GP92F*81 25GP92N*81
25 30 50 50 90 3 — 100 25HP92B*81 25HP92W*81 25HP92F*81 25HP92N*81
30 40 75 75 115 — 31⁄2 200 25IP92B*81 25IP92W*81 25IP92F*81 25IP92N*81
40 50 100 100 135 4 — 200 25JP92B*81 25JP92W*81 25JP92F*81 25JP92N*81
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per b For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see d F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC,
the National Electric Code). page 9/110. H coil 150-500V AC 50/60Hz, or DC
a Dual voltage coils not available in starter sizes 5–8. c Enclosure is NEMA Type 4 (painted steel). e Only available
F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC

Combination Reversing Heavy Duty Starters
MCP Type, Class 26
Selection
110–120/220–240a A
200–208 D
220–240/440–480a C
440–480 H
 For NO/NC SPDT contact on overload relay, replace "81" with "91". 575–600 E
"81" indicates one NC contact. For other voltages and frequencies,
Standard Width Enclosure with Solid State Overload, 3-Phase, 3-Pole

NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessb NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12,
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 3 & 4 NEMA 3/3Rb , NEMA 4
Corrosion Resistant Corrosion Resistant Div. 1 and Div. 2 Painted (thru size 4)
304 Stainless Steel Class I Groups C & D Industrial Use
Class II Groups E, F & G Weatherproof
Class III Watertight, Dust-tight
Motor Bolted Enclosures
Indoor/Outdoor Use
Circuit
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Interruter Amp Frame Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size ETI Amps Range Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 0 — 3 0.75–3.4 A 26CUB92B* 26CUB92W* 26CUB92F* 26CUB92H* 26CUB92N*
2 2 5 5 0 — 10 3–12 A1 26CUC92B* 26CUC92W* 26CUC92F* 26CUC92H* 26CUC92N*
3 3 — — 0 — 25 5.5–22 A1 26CUD92B* 26CUD92W* 26CUD92F* 26CUD92H* 26CUD92N*
1
⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 1 — 3 0.75–3.4 A 26DUB92B* 26DUB92W* 26DUB92F* 26DUB92H* 26DUB92N*
2 2 5 5 1 — 10 3–12 A1 26DUC92B* 26DUC92W* 26DUC92F* 26DUC92H* 26DUC92N*
3 3 71⁄2 10 1 — 25 5.5–22 A1 26DUD92B* 26DUD92W* 26DUD92F* 26DUD92H* 26DUD92N*
71⁄2 71⁄2 10 — 1 — 30 10–40 A1 26DUE92B* 26DUE92W* 26DUE92F* 26DUE92H* 26DUE92N*
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 40 10–40 A1 26EUE92B* 26EUE92W* 26EUE92F* 26EUE92H* 26EUE92N*
10 15 25 25 2 — 50 13–52 B 26FUF92B* 26FUF92W* 26FUF92F* 26FUF92H* 26FUF92N*
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 100 25–100 B 26GUG92B* 26GUG92W* 26GUG92F* 26GUG92H* 26GUG92N*
25 30 50 50 3 — 125 25–100 B 26HUG92B* 26HUG92W* 26HUG92F* 26HUG92H* 26HUG92N*
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 125 50–200 B 26IUH92B* 26IUH92W* 26IUH92F* 26IUH92H* 26IUH92N*
40 50 100 100 4 — 150 50–200 B 26JUH92B* 26JUH92W* 26JUH92F* 26JUH92H* 26JUH92N*
50 75 150 200 5 — 250 55–250 — 26LPT92B* 26LPT92E*c — — — — 26LPT92N*
75 100 200 — 5 — 400 55–250 — 26LPU92B* 26LPU92E*c — — — — 26LPU92N*
100 125 250 300 6 — 400 160–630 — 26MPW92B* 26MPW92E*c — — — — 26MPW92N*
150 200 400 400 6 — 600 160–630 — 26MPX92B* 26MPX92E*c — — — — 26MPX92N*
— 250 500 500 7*d — 800 400–1220 A1+CT 26NUV92B* — — — — — — 26NUV92N*
— 300 600 600 7*d — 1000 400–1220 A1+CT 26NUY92B* — — — — — — 26NUY92N*
— 400 800 800 8e — 1200 400–1220 A1+CT 26PUW92B* — — — — — — 26PUW92N*
— 450 900 900 8e — 1600 400–1220 A1+CT 26PUZ92B* — — — — — — 26PUZ92N*
Standard Width Enclosure with Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload, 3-Phase, 3-Pole
1⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 0 — 3 18 26CP92BA*81 26CP92WA*81 26CP92FA*81 26CP92HA*81 26CP92NA*81
1 1 3 3 0 — 10 18 26CP92BB*81 26CP92WB*81 26CP92FB*81 26CP92HB*81 26CP92NB*81
3 3 5 5 0 — 25 18 26CP92BC*81 26CP92WC*81 26CP92FC*81 26CP92HC*81 26CP92NC*81
1⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 1 — 3 27 26DP92BA*81 26DP92WA*81 26DP92FA*81 26DP92HA*81 26DP92NA*81
1 1 3 3 1 — 10 27 26DP92BB*81 26DP92WB*81 26DP92FB*81 26DP92HB*81 26DP92NB*81
3 3 7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 1 — 25 27 26DP92BD*81 26DP92WD*81 26DP92FD*81 26DP92HD*81 26DP92ND*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 1 — 30 27 26DP92BE*81 26DP92WE*81 26DP92FE*81 26DP92HE*81 26DP92NE*81
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 40 40 26EP92BF*81 26EP92WF*81 26EP92FF*81 26EP92HF*81 26EP92NF*81
10 10 — — — 13⁄4 50 40 26EP92BG*81 26EP92WG*81 26EP92FG*81 26EP92HG*81 26EP92NG*81
— — 20 20 2 — 40 45 26FP92BH*81 26FP92WH*81 26FP92FH*81 26FP92HH*81 26FP92NH*81
10 15 25 25 2 — 50 45 26FP92BJ*81 26FP92WJ*81 26FP92FJ*81 26FP92HJ*81 26FP92NJ*81
10 15 30 30 — 21⁄2 50 60 26GP92BK*81 26GP92WK*81 26GP92FK*81 26GP92HK*81 26GP92NK*81
15 20 — — — 21⁄2 100 60 26GP92BL*81 26GP92WL*81 26GP92FL*81 26GP92HL*81 26GP92NL*81
— — 30 30 3 — 50 90 26HP92BM*81 26HP92WM*81 26HP92FM*81 26HP92HM*81 26HP92NM*81
25 30 50 50 3 — 125 90 26HP92BN*81 26HP92WN*81 26HP92FN*81 26HP92HN*81 26HP92NN*81
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 125 115 26IP92BP*81 26IP92WP*81 26IP92FP*81 26IP92HP*81 26IP92NP*81
40 50 100 100 4 — 150 135 26JP92BR*81 26JP92WR*81 26JP92FR*81 26JP92HR*81 26JP92NR*81
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per b For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see e Only available
the National Electric Code). page 9/110. F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC
a Dual c Enclosure is NEMA Type 4 (painted steel).
voltage coils not available in starter sizes 5–8.
d F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC,
H coil 150-500V AC 50/60Hz, or DC

Two Speed Heavy Duty Starters
General
Features motor is applicable to fans, blowers Compelling Control requires that the
and centrifugal pumps. motor always be started at the lower
b Rugged Industrial Design speed and that the push buttons be
Constant Horsepower motors
b Dual Voltage, Dual Frequency Coils
maintain constant horsepower at all operated in speed sequence to go to
the next higher speed. To change to a
b Compact Design speeds and therefore torque varies
inversely with speed. This type of lower speed, the stop button must be
b Snap-On Front Removable Auxiliary
depressed and then the push buttons
Contacts motor is applicable where the same
horsepower is required at all speeds. operated in speed sequence until the
b Electrical and Mechanical Interlocks The higher current required at desired speed is reached. Compelling
b Half Sizes — Space and Cost Savings low speed requires derating on control can be added from the factory
starters for constant horsepower modification section page 9/122.
b Industrial Type Disconnect
Operating Handle applications. This type of motor is Acceleration Control provides that
applicable to metal working machines the motor be accelerated automatically
b Visible Blade Disconnect Thru Size 4
such as drills, lathes, mills, bending with timers by progressively energizing
b Adjustable Motor Circuit Protector machines, punch presses, and power the controls from the push button
b 100,000 Amp Fault Protection with wrenches. station from the lowest to highest
MCP or Class R Fuses speed. To change to a lower speed the
Operation
stop button is depressed and then it is
b Pilot Device Locations identified Magnetic starters for multi-speed
on All Enclosures necessary to proceed as if starting from
applications select the desired speed rest. Acceleration control can be added
b UL Listed File #E14900 in accordance with the pilot control. from the factory modification section
b CSA Certified File #LR6535 The shock to machinery upon the page 9/122.
reduction of speed is greater than when Deceleration Control provides that
the speed is increased. Therefore, the
Applications pilot control should be wired so that the
the motor be decelerated automatically
Multi-speed magnetic starters with a timer when going from high
stop button must be depressed before speed to low speed. The timer allows
automatically reconnect multi-speed dropping to a lower speed or time
motor windings for the desired speed in the motor to decelerate from high
delays should be used for applications speed to a lower speed before
response to a signal received from push requiring full automatic operations. The
button stations or other pilot devices. automatically restarting the motor in
multi-speed controls are available with low speed. Deceleration control can
These starters are available for two the necessary interlocks or relays to be added from the factory modification
speed motors. provide this type of operation. section page 9/122.
Consequent Pole multi-speed motors These controls may be modified for
having two speeds on a single wind- compelling or acceleration pilot control.
ing (consequent pole) require a starter Selective Control permits the
which reconnects the motor leads to operator to start the motor at any speed
half the number of effective motor and to change to a higher speed by
poles at the high speed point. In this merely pushing a button. To change to
type of motor, the low speed is one a lower speed it is necessary to
half the high speed. first depress the stop button and to
Separate Windings motors having then press the proper speed button.
eparate windings for each speed
s Selective control is a function of the
Open Style Two Speed Starter
provide more varied speed pilot control selected and requires no (ESP100 Overload)
combinations in that the low speed starter modifications.
need not be one half the high speed.
Starters for separate winding
motors consist of a starter unit
for each speed.
Multi-speed motor starters are available
for constant torque, variable torque and
constant horsepower motors.
Constant Torque motors maintain
constant torque at all speeds.
Horsepower varies directly with speed.
This type of motor is applicable to
Open Style Two Speed Starter
conveyors, mills and similar (Ambient Compensated Overload)
applications.
Variable Torque motors produce a
torque characteristic which varies as
the square of the speed. This type of

Constant or Variable Torque with Solid Overload, Class 30
Selection
Ordering Information Coil Table Low Speed FLA Table

 R eplace the (*) with a letter from OLR
the coil table. Dual voltage coils 60Hz Voltage Letter Size FLA Frame Size †
are wired on high voltage unless 24 J 0,1 0.25–1 A A
specified on order. 120 F 0,1 0.75–3.4 A B
 Replace the (†) with the letter that 110–120/220–240 A 0,1 3–12 A1 C
corresponds to the correct low 200–208 D 0,1 5.5–22 A1 D
speed FLA in the FLA table.b 220–240 G 0-13/4 10–40 A1 E
 Field Modification Kits see page 277 L 2-3 13–52 B F
9/104. 220–240/440–480 C 2-3 25–100 B G
440–480 H 31/2-4 50–200 B H
575–600 E

2S2W Starter
(ESP200 Overload)
One Winding Consequent Pole, 3-Phase (Constant or Variable Torque)

Open Type NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessa NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 12
Standard Auxiliary Contactsc General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 3/3Ra
(Field Convertible to 3/3R)
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Amp Frame Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 30CUB†32A2V* 30CUB†32B2V* 30CUB†32W2V* 30CUB†32F2V* 30CUB†3202V*
2 2 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 30CUC†32A2V* 30CUC†32B2V* 30CUC†32W2V* 30CUC†32F2V* 30CUC†3202V*
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 30CUD†32A2V* 30CUD†32B2V* 30CUD†32W2V* 30CUD†32F2V* 30CUD†3202V*
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 30DUB†32A2V* 30DUB†32B2V* 30DUB†32W2V* 30DUB†32F2V* 30DUB†3202V*
2 2 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 30DUC†32A2V* 30DUC†32B2V* 30DUC†32W2V* 30DUC†32F2V* 30DUC†3202V*
3 3 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 30DUD†32A2V* 30DUD†32B2V* 30DUD†32W2V* 30DUD†32F2V* 30DUD†3202V*
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 30DUE†32A2V* 30DUE†32B2V* 30DUE†32W2V* 30DUE†32F2V* 30DUE†3202V*
10 10 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 30EUE†32A2V* 30EUE†32B2V* 30EUE†32W2V* 30EUE†32F2V* 30EUE†3202V*
10 15 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 30FUF†32A2V* 30FUF†32B2V* 30FUF†32W2V* 30FUF†32F2V* 30FUF†3202V*
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 30GUG†32A2V* 30GUG†32B2V* 30GUG†32W2V* 30GUG†32F2V* 30GUG†3202V*
25 30 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 30HUG†32A2V* 30HUG†32B2V* 30HUG†32W2V* 30HUG†32F2V* 30HUG†3202V*
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 30IUH†32A2V* 30IUH†32B2V* 30IUH†32W2V* 30IUH†32F2V* 30IUH†3202V*
40 50 100 100 4 — 50–200 B 30JUH†32A2V* 30JUH†32B2V* 30JUH†32W2V* 30JUH†32F2V* 30JUH†3202V*
Two Separate Windings, 3-Phase (Constant or Variable Torque)

Open Typec NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessa NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 12
Standard Auxiliary Contacts General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 3/3Ra
316 Stainless Steel (Optional) (Field Convertible to 3/3R)
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Amp Frame Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 30CUB†32A1V* 30CUB†32B1V* 30CUB†32W1V* 30CUB†32F1V* 30CUB†3201V*
2 2 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 30CUC†32A1V* 30CUC†32B1V* 30CUC†32W1V* 30CUC†32F1V* 30CUC†3201V*
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 30CUD†32A1V* 30CUD†32B1V* 30CUD†32W1V* 30CUD†32F1V* 30CUD†3201V*
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 30DUB†32A1V* 30DUB†32B1V* 30DUB†32W1V* 30DUB†32F1V* 30DUB†3201V*
2 2 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 30DUC†32A1V* 30DUC†32B1V* 30DUC†32W1V* 30DUC†32F1V* 30DUC†3201V*
3 3 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 30DUD†32A1V* 30DUD†32B1V* 30DUD†32W1V* 30DUD†32F1V* 30DUD†3201V*
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 30DUE†32A1V* 30DUE†32B1V* 30DUE†32W1V* 30DUE†32F1V* 30DUE†3201V*
10 10 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 30EUE†32A1V* 30EUE†32B1V* 30EUE†32W1V* 30EUE†32F1V* 30EUE†3201V*
10 15 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 30FUF†32A1V* 30FUF†32B1V* 30FUF†32W1V* 30FUF†32F1V* 30FUF†3201V*
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 30GUG†32A1V* 30GUG†32B1V* 30GUG†32W1V* 30GUG†32F1V* 30GUG†3201V*
25 30 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 30HUG†32A1V* 30HUG†32B1V* 30HUG†32W1V* 30HUG†32F1V* 30HUG†3201V*
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 30IUH†32A1V* 30IUH†32B1V* 30IUH†32W1V* 30IUH†32F1V* 30IUH†3201V*
40 50 100 100 4 — 50–200 B 30JUH†32A1V* 30JUH†32B1V* 30JUH†32W1V* 30JUH†32F1V* 30JUH†3201V*
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per b If motor FLA are unknown, select overload on the
the National Electric Code). basis that low speed FLA will be no greater than 50%
a For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see of high speed FLA.
c Auxiliarycontacts 30C-30E 4th pole built-in
page 9/110.
30F-30J 2 NO & 2 NC

Constant HP with Solid Overload, Class 30
Selection
Ordering Information Coil Table High/Low Speed FLA Tableb

 R eplace the (*) with a letter from OLR
are wired on high voltage unless 24 J 0,1 0.25–1 A A
specified on order. 120 F 0,1 0.75–3.4 A B
 Replace the (†) with the letter that 110–120/220–240 A 0,1 3–12 A1 C
corresponds to the correct FLA in 200–208 D 0,1 5.5–22 A1 D
High/Low Speed FLA Table.b 220–240 G 0-13/4 10–40 A1 E
 Field Modification Kits see page 277 L 2-3 13–52 B F
220–240/440–480 C 2-3 25–100 B G
9/104.
440–480 H 31/2-4 50–200 B H
 Factory Modifications see page
575–600 E
9/119.
* First (†) for high speed, second
(†) for low speed. Use motor name-
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/178. For other voltages and frequencies, plate to select FLA. If motor FLA
see Factory Modifications page 9/119. are unknown, select overload on
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131. the bases that the low speed FLA
2S2W Starter will be no greater than 50 % of high
(ESP200 Overload) speed FLA.
One Winding Consequent Pole, 3-Phase (Constant Horsepower)

Max Hp Enclosure
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
2 2 3 3 0 — 30CU††32A2H* 30CU††32B2H* 30CU††32W2H* 30CU††32F2H* 30CU††3202H*
5 5 71⁄2 71⁄2 1 — 30DU††32A2H* 30DU††32B2H* 30DU††32W2H* 30DU††32F2H* 30DU††3202H*
71⁄2 71⁄2 10 10 — 13⁄4 30EU††32A2H* 30EU††32B2H* 30EU††32W2H* 30EU††32F2H* 30EU††3202H*
71⁄2 10 20 20 2 — 30FU††32A2H* 30FU††32B2H* 30FU††32W2H* 30FU††32F2H* 30FU††3202H*
10 15 25 25 — 21⁄2 30GU††32A2H* 30GU††32B2H* 30GU††32W2H* 30GU††32F2H* 30GU††3202H*
20 25 40 40 3 — 30HU††32A2H* 30HU††32B2H* 30HU††32W2H* 30HU††32F2H* 30HU††3202H*
25 30 50 50 — 31⁄2 30IU††32A2H* 30IU††32B2H* 30IU††32W2H* 30IU††32F2H* 30IU††3202H*
30 40 75 75 4 — 30JU††32A2H* 30JU††32B2H* 30JU††32W2H* 30JU††32F2H* 30JU††3202H*
Two Separate Windings, 3-Phase (Constant Horsepower)

Max Hp Enclosure
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
2 2 3 3 0 — 30CU††32A1H* 30CU††32B1H* 30CU††32W1H* 30CU††32F1H* 30CU††3201H*
5 5 71⁄2 71⁄2 1 — 30DU††32A1H* 30DU††32B1H* 30DU††32W1H* 30DU††32F1H* 30DU††3201H*
71⁄2 71⁄2 10 10 — 13⁄4 30EU††32A1H* 30EU††32B1H* 30EU††32W1H* 30EU††32F1H* 30EU††3201H*
71⁄2 10 20 20 2 — 30FU††32A1H* 30FU††32B1H* 30FU††32W1H* 30FU††32F1H* 30FU††3201H*
10 15 25 25 — 21⁄2 30GU††32A1H* 30GU††32B1H* 30GU††32W1H* 30GU††32F1H* 30GU††3201H*
20 25 40 40 3 — 30HU††32A1H* 30HU††32B1H* 30HU††32W1H* 30HU††32F1H* 30HU††3201H*
25 30 50 50 — 31⁄2 30IU††32A1H* 30IU††32B1H* 30IU††32W1H* 30IU††32F1H* 30IU††3201H*
30 40 75 75 4 — 30JU††32A1H* 30JU††32B1H* 30JU††32W1H* 30JU††32F1H* 30JU††3201H*
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per b First (†) for high speed, second (†) for low speed. Use c Auxiliary contacts
the National Electric Code). motor nameplate information to select FLA. If motor 30C-30E 4th pole built-in
a For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see FLA are unknown, select overload on the basis that 30F-30J 2 NO & 2 NC
page 9/110. low speed FLA will be no greater than 50% of high
speed FLA.

Constant or Variable Torque with Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload, Class 30
Selection

60Hz Voltage
 R eplace the (*) with a letter from the coil table. Dual voltage coils are Letter
wired on high voltage unless specified on order.
 Heater elements see page 9/124 (6 required)2
24 J
120 F
110–120/220–240 A
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. 200–208 D
220–240 G
 Dimensions see pages 9/143 open and 9/150 enclosed.
277 L
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/178. 220–240/440–480 C
440–480 H
575–600 E
2S2W starter For other voltages and frequencies,
(Amb. Comp. Bimetal OL) "81" indicates one NC contact. see Factory Modifications page 9/119.
One Winding Consequent Pole, 3 Phase (Constant or Variable Torque)

Max Hp Enclosure
Open Typec NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessa NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 12a
Cont- General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 3/3R
actor Corrosion Resistant Corrosion Resistant Industrial Use
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half
Volts Volts Volts Volts Rating Size Size Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
3 3 5 5 18 0 — 30CP32A2V*81 30CP32B2V*81 30CP32W2V*81 30CP32F2V*81 30CP3202V*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 27 1 — 30DP32A2V*81 30DP32B2V*81 30DP32W2V*81 30DP32F2V*81 30DP3202V*81
10 10 15 15 40 — 13⁄4 30EP32A2V*81 30EP32B2V*81 30EP32W2V*81 30EP32F2V*81 30EP3202V*81
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 30FP32A2V*81 30FP32B2V*81 30FP32W2V*81 30FP32F2V*81 30FP3202V*81
15 20 30 30 60 — 21⁄2 30GP32A2V*81 30GP32B2V*81 30GP32W2V*81 30GP32F2V*81 30GP3202V*81
25 30 50 50 90 3 — 30HP32A2V*81 30HP32B2V*81 30HP32W2V*81 30HP32F2V*81 30HP3202V*81
30 40 75 75 115 — 31⁄2 30IP32A2V*81 30IP32B2V*81 30IP32W2V*81 30IP32F2V*81 30IP3202V*81
40 50 100 100 135 4 — 30JG32A2V*81 30JG32B2V*81 30JG32W2V*81 30JG32F2V*81 30JG3202V*81

Max Hp Enclosure

200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half 304 Stainless Steel Weatherproof

3 3 5 5 18 0 — 30CP32A1V*81 30CP32B1V*81 30CP32W1V*81 30CP32F1V*81 30CP3201V*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 27 1 — 30DP32A1V*81 30DP32B1V*81 30DP32W1V*81 30DP32F1V*81 30DP3201V*81
10 10 15 15 40 — 13⁄4 30EP32A1V*81 30EP32B1V*81 30EP32W1V*81 30EP32F1V*81 30EP3201V*81
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 30FP32A1V*81 30FP32B1V*81 30FP32W1V*81 30FP32F1V*81 30FP3201V*81
15 20 30 30 60 — 21⁄2 30GP32A1V*81 30GP32B1V*81 30GP32W1V*81 30GP32F1V*81 30GP3201V*81
25 30 50 50 90 3 — 30HP32A1V*81 30HP32B1V*81 30HP32W1V*81 30HP32F1V*81 30HP3201V*81
30 40 75 75 115 — 31⁄2 30IP32A1V*81 30IP32B1V*81 30IP32W1V*81 30IP32F1V*81 30IP3201V*81
40 50 100 100 135 4 — 30JG32A1V*81 30JG32B1V*81 30JG32W1V*81 30JG32F1V*81 30JG3201V*81
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload a For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, c Auxiliarycontacts
amp range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric see page 9/110. 30C-30E 4th pole built-in
Code) of typical industrial motors. All starter sizes b If motor FLA are unknown, select heater elements on 30F-30J 2 NO & 2 NC
carry one maximum Hp rating. the basis that low speed FLA will be no greater than
50% of high speed FLA.

Constant HP with Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload, Class 30
Selection
 Heater elements see page 9/124 (6 required)2. 120 F
110–120/220–240 A
200–208 D
 Dimensions see pages 9/143 open and 9/150 enclosed. 277 L
220–240/440–480 C
440–480 H
2S2W starter see Factory Modifications page 9/119.
(Amb. Comp. Bimetal OL) "81" indicates one NC contact.

Max Hp Enclosure
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half
2 2 3 3 18 0 — 30CP32A2H*81 30CP32B2H*81 30CP32W2H*81 30CP32F2H*81 30CP3202H*81
5 5 7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 27 1 — 30DP32A2H*81 30DP32B2H*81 30DP32W2H*81 30DP32F2H*81 30DP3202H*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 40 — 13⁄4 30EP32A2H*81 30EP32B2H*81 30EP32W2H*81 30EP32F2H*81 30EP3202H*81
7 1⁄2 10 20 20 45 2 — 30FP32A2H*81 30FP32B2H*81 30FP32W2H*81 30FP32F2H*81 30FP3202H*81
10 15 25 25 60 — 21⁄2 30GP32A2H*81 30GP32B2H*81 30GP32W2H*81 30GP32F2H*81 30GP3202H*81
20 25 40 40 90 3 — 30HP32A2H*81 30HP32B2H*81 30HP32W2H*81 30HP32F2H*81 30HP3202H*81
25 30 50 50 115 — 31⁄2 30IP32A2H*81 30IP32B2H*81 30IP32W2H*81 30IP32F2H*81 30IP3202H*81
30 40 75 75 135 4 — 30JG32A2H*81 30JG32B2H*81 30JG32W2H*81 30JG32F2H*81 30JG3202H*81

Max Hp Enclosure
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half
2 2 3 3 18 0 — 30CP32A1H*81 30CP32B1H*81 30CP32W1H*81 30CP32F1H*81 30CP3201H*81
5 5 7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 27 1 — 30DP32A1H*81 30DP32B1H*81 30DP32W1H*81 30DP32F1H*81 30DP3201H*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 40 — 13⁄4 30EP32A1H*81 30EP32B1H*81 30EP32W1H*81 30EP32F1H*81 30EP3201H*81
7 1⁄2 10 20 20 45 2 — 30FP32A1H*81 30FP32B1H*81 30FP32W1H*81 30FP32F1H*81 30FP3201H*81
10 15 25 25 60 — 21⁄2 30GP32A1H*81 30GP32B1H*81 30GP32W1H*81 30GP32F1H*81 30GP3201H*81
20 25 40 40 90 3 — 30HP32A1H*81 30HP32B1H*81 30HP32W1H*81 30HP32F1H*81 30HP3201H*81
25 30 50 50 115 — 31⁄2 30IP32A1H*81 30IP32B1H*81 30IP32W1H*81 30IP32F1H*81 30IP3201H*81
30 40 75 75 135 4 — 30JG32A1H*81 30JG32B1H*81 30JG32W1H*81 30JG32F1H*81 30JG3201H*81
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload a For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, c Auxiliary contacts
amp range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric see page 9/110. 30C-30E 4th pole built-in
Code) of typical industrial motors. All starter sizes b If motor FLA are unknown, select heater element on 30F-30J 2 NO & 2 NC
carry one maximum Hp rating. the basis that low speed FLA will be no greater than
50% of high speed FLA.

Combination Two Speed Heavy Duty Starters
Non-Fusible, Constant or Variable Torque with Solid Overload, Class 32
Selection

 Replace the (*) with a letter from OLR
are wired on high voltage unless
24 J 0,1 0.25–1 A A
specified on order.
120 F 0,1 0.75–3.4 A B
 Replace the (†) with the letter that
110–120/220–2401 A 0,1 3–12 A1 C
corresponds to the correct low 200–208 D 0,1 5.5–22 A1 D
speed FLA in the FLA table.3 220–240 G 0-13/4 10–40 A1 E
 Fuse clips see page 9/120. 277 L 2-3 13–52 B F
 Field Modification Kits see page 220–240/440–4801 C 2-3 25–100 B G
9/104. 440–480 H 31/2-4 50–200 B H
 Factory Modifications see page 575–600 E
9/119.


General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 4 Painted
Disc.
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 32CUB†92B2V2* 32CUB†92W2V2* 32CUB†92F2V2* 32CUB†92N2V2*
2 2 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 30 32CUC†92B2V2* 32CUC†92W2V2* 32CUC†92F2V2* 32CUC†92N2V2*
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 30 32CUD†92B2V2* 32CUD†92W2V2* 32CUD†92F2V2* 32CUD†92N2V2*
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 32DUB†92B2V2* 32DUB†92W2V2* 32DUB†92F2V2* 32DUB†92N2V2*
2 2 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 30 32DUC†92B2V2* 32DUC†92W2V2* 32DUC†92F2V2* 32DUC†92N2V2*
3 3 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 30 32DUD†92B2V2* 32DUD†92W2V2* 32DUD†92F2V2* 32DUD†92N2V2*
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 60 32DUE†92B2V2* 32DUE†92W2V2* 32DUE†92F2V2* 32DUE†92N2V2*
10 10 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 60 32EUE†92B2V2* 32EUE†92W2V2* 32EUE†92F2V2* 32EUE†92N2V2*
10 15 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 60 32FUF†92B2V2* 32FUF†92W2V2* 32FUF†92F2V2* 32FUF†92N2V2*
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 100 32GUG†92B2V2* 32GUG†92W2V2* 32GUG†92F2V2* 32GUG†92N2V2*
20 25 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 100 32HUG†92B2V2* 32HUG†92W2V2* 32HUG†92F2V2* 32HUG†92N2V2*
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 200 32IUH†92B2V2* 32IUH†92W2V2* 32IUH†92F2V2* 32IUH†92N2V2*
40 50 100 100 4 — 50–200 B 200 32JUH†92B2V2* 32JUH†92W2V2* 32JUH†92F2V2* 32JUH†92N2V2*

Disc.
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 32CUB†92B1V2* 32CUB†92W1V2* 32CUB†92F1V2* 32CUB†92N1V2*
2 2 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 30 32CUC†92B1V2* 32CUC†92W1V2* 32CUC†92F1V2* 32CUC†92N1V2*
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 30 32CUD†92B1V2* 32CUD†92W1V2* 32CUD†92F1V2* 32CUD†92N1V2*
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 32DUB†92B1V2* 32DUB†92W1V2* 32DUB†92F1V2* 32DUB†92N1V2*
2 2 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 30 32DUC†92B1V2* 32DUC†92W1V2* 32DUC†92F1V2* 32DUC†92N1V2*
3 3 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 30 32DUD†92B1V2* 32DUD†92W1V2* 32DUD†92F1V2* 32DUD†92N1V2*
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 60 32DUE†92B1V2* 32DUE†92W1V2* 32DUE†92F1V2* 32DUE†92N1V2*
10 10 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 60 32EUE†92B1V2* 32EUE†92W1V2* 32EUE†92F1V2* 32EUE†92N1V2*
10 15 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 60 32FUF†92B1V2* 32FUF†92W1V2* 32FUF†92F1V2* 32FUF†92N1V2*
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 100 32GUG†92B1V2* 32GUG†92W1V2* 32GUG†92F1V2* 32GUG†92N1V2*
20 25 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 100 32HUG†92B1V2* 32HUG†92W1V2* 32HUG†92F1V2* 32HUG†92N1V2*
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 200 32IUH†92B1V2* 32IUH†92W1V2* 32IUH†92F1V2* 32IUH†92N1V2*
40 50 100 100 4 — 50–200 B 200 32JUH†92B1V2* 32JUH†92W1V2* 32JUH†92F1V2* 32JUH†92N1V2*
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per b For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see
a Dual voltage coils not available in modified starters. c If motor FLA are unknown, select overload on the
basis that low speed FLA will be no greater than 50%
of high speed FLA.

Non-Fusible, Constant Horsepower with Solid State Overload, Class 32
Selection
Ordering Information Coil Table High/Low Speed FLA Tablec

OLR
 Replace the (*) with a letter from 60Hz Voltage Letter Size FLA Frame Size †
the coil table. Dual voltage coils are 24 J 0,1 0.25–1 A A
wired on high voltage unless 120 F 0,1 0.75–3.4 A B
specified on order. 110–120/220–240a A 0,1 3–12 A1 C
 Replace the (†) with the letter that 200–208 D 0,1 5.5–22 A1 D
corresponds to the correct FLA in the 220–240 G 0-13/4 10–40 A1 E
High/Low Speed FLA Table.c 277 L 2-3 13–52 B F
220–240/440–480a C 2-3 25–100 B G
440–480 H 31/2-4 50–200 B H
 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104. 575–600 E
 Dimensions see page 9/166. * First (†) for high speed, second
F or other voltages and (†) for low speed. Use motor name-
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/178. plate to select FLA. If motor FLA
frequencies see Factory
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131. Modifications page 9/119. are unknown, select overload on
the bases that the low speed FLA
will be no greater than 50 % of high
speed FLA.

Disc.
2 2 3 3 0 — — — 30 32CU††92B2H2* 32CU††92W2H2* 4054.00 32CU††92F2H2* 32CU††92N2H2*
5 5 71⁄2 71⁄2 1 — — — 30 32DU††92B2H2* 32DU††92W2H2* 4173.00 32DU††92F2H2* 32DU††92N2H2*
71⁄2 71⁄2 10 10 — 13⁄4 — — 60 32EU††92B2H2* 32EU††92W2H2* 4873.00 32EU††92F2H2* 32EU††92N2H2*
71⁄2 10 20 20 2 — — — 60 32FU††92B2H2* 32FU††92W2H2* 6146.00 32FU††92F2H2* 32FU††92N2H2*
10 15 25 25 — 21⁄2 — — 100 32GU††92B2H2* 32GU††92W2H2* 7219.00 32GU††92F2H2* 32GU††92N2H2*
20 25 40 40 3 — — — 100 32HU††92B2H2* 32HU††92W2H2* 9321.00 32HU††92F2H2* 32HU††92N2H2*
25 30 50 50 — 31⁄2 — — 200 32IU††92B2H2* 32IU††92W2H2* 18079.00 32IU††92F2H2* 32IU††92N2H2*
30 40 75 75 4 — — — 200 32JU††92B2H2* 32JU††92W2H2* 19263.00 32JU††92F2H2* 32JU††92N2H2*

Disc.
2 2 3 3 0 — — — 30 32CU††92B1H2* 32CU††92W1H2* 32CU††92F1H2* 32CU††92N1H2*
5 5 71⁄2 71⁄2 1 — — — 30 32DU††92B1H2* 32DU††92W1H2* 32DU††92F1H2* 32DU††92N1H2*
7 ⁄21
7 ⁄2
1
10 10 — 13⁄4 — — 60 32EU††92B1H2* 32EU††92W1H2* 32EU††92F1H2* 32EU††92N1H2*
71⁄2 10 20 20 2 — — — 60 32FU††92B1H2* 32FU††92W1H2* 32FU††92F1H2* 32FU††92N1H2*
10 15 25 25 — 21⁄2 — — 100 32GU††92B1H2* 32GU††92W1H2* 32GU††92F1H2* 32GU††92N1H2*
20 25 40 40 3 — — — 100 32HU††92B1H2* 32HU††92W1H2* 32HU††92F1H2* 32HU††92N1H2*
25 30 50 50 — 31⁄2 — — 200 32IU††92B1H2* 32IU††92W1H2* 32IU††92F1H2* 32IU††92N1H2*
30 40 75 75 4 — — — 200 32JU††92B1H2* 32JU††92W1H2* 32JU††92F1H2* 32JU††92N1H2*
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per c First
† for high speed, second † for low speed. Use mo-
the National Electric Code). tor nameplate information to select FLA. If motor FLA
a Dual voltage coils not available in modified starters. are unknown, select overload on the basis that
low speed FLA will be no greater than 50% of high
speed FLA.
page 9/110.

Non-Fusible, Constant or Variable Torque with Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload, Class 32
Selection

 Replace the (*) with a letter from the coil 60Hz Voltage Letter
table. Dual voltage coils are wired on high 24 J
voltage unless specified on order. 120 F
110–120/220–2401 A
 Heater elements see page 9/124. (6 required)
200–208 D
 Fuse clips see page 9/120. 220–240 G
 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104. 277 L
220–240/440–4801 C
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. 440–480 H
 Dimensions see page 9/166. 575–600 E
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/178. For other voltages and frequencies, see Factory
Modifications page 9/119.
 For NO/NC SPDT contact on overload relay,
replace "81" with "91"."81" indicates one NC
contact.

Max Hp Enclosure
NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainless2 NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 12, NEMA 3/3R2
Cont- Corrosion Resistant Corrosion Resistant Industrial Use

actor Disc 304 Stainless Steel Weatherproof
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half Amp Watertight, Dust-tight
3 3 5 5 18 0 — 30 32CP92B2V2*81 32CP92W2V2*81 32CP92F2V2*81 32CP92N2V2*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 27 1 — 30 32DP92B2V2*81 32DP92W2V2*81 32DP92F2V2*81 32DP92N2V2*81
10 10 15 15 40 — 13⁄4 60 32EP92B2V2*81 32EP92W2V2*81 32EP92F2V2*81 32EP92N2V2*81
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 60 32FP92B2V2*81 32FP92W2V2*81 32FP92F2V2*81 32FP92N2V2*81
15 20 30 30 60 — 21⁄2 100 32GP92B2V2*81 32GP92W2V2*81 32GP92F2V2*81 32GP92N2V2*81
20 25 50 50 90 3 — 100 32HP92B2V2*81 32HP92W2V2*81 32HP92F2V2*81 32HP92N2V2*81
30 40 75 75 115 — 31⁄2 200 32IP92B2V2*81 32IP92W2V2*81 32IP92F2V2*81 32IP92N2V2*81
40 50 100 100 135 4 — 200 32JP92B2V2*81 32JP92W2V2*81 32JP92F2V2*81 32JP92N2V2*81

Max Hp Enclosure
Cont- Corrosion Resistant Corrosion Resistant Industrial Use

actor
Disc
3 3 5 5 18 0 — 30 32CP92B1V2*81 32CP92W1V2*81 32CP92F1V2*81 32CP92N1V2*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 27 1 — 30 32DP92B1V2*81 32DP92W1V2*81 32DP92F1V2*81 32DP92N1V2*81
10 10 15 15 40 — 13⁄4 60 32EP92B1V2*81 32EP92W1V2*81 32EP92F1V2*81 32EP92N1V2*81
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 60 32FP92B1V2*81 32FP92W1V2*81 32FP92F1V2*81 32FP92N1V2*81
15 20 30 30 60 — 21⁄2 100 32GP92B1V2*81 32GP92W1V2*81 32GP92F1V2*81 32GP92N1V2*81
20 25 50 50 90 3 — 100 32HP92B1V2*81 32HP92W1V2*81 32HP92F1V2*81 32HP92N1V2*81
30 40 75 75 115 — 31⁄2 200 32IP92B1V2*81 32IP92W1V2*81 32IP92F1V2*81 32IP92N1V2*81
40 50 100 100 135 4 — 200 32JP92B1V2*81 32JP92W1V2*81 32JP92F1V2*81 32JP92N1V2*81
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload amp a Dual voltage coils not available in modified starters.
range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric Code) b For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see
of typical industrial motors. All starter sizes carry page 9/110.

Non-Fusible, Constant Horsepower with Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload, Class 32
Selection
 Heater elements see page 9/124. (6 Required) 120 F
110–120/220–240a A
200–208 D
 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104. 220–240 G
220–240/440–480a C
440–480 H
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/178. 575–600 E
"81" indicates one NC contact..

Max Hp Enclosure


Contactor
Disc
2 2 3 3 18 0 — 30 32CP92B2H2*81 32CP92W2H2*81 32CP92F2H2*81 32CP92N2H2*81
5 5 7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 27 1 — 30 32DP92B2H2*81 32DP92W2H2*81 32DP92F2H2*81 32DP92N2H2*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 40 — 13⁄4 60 32EP92B2H2*81 32EP92W2H2*81 32EP92F2H2*81 32EP92N2H2*81
7 1⁄2 10 20 20 45 2 — 60 32FP92B2H2*81 32FP92W2H2*81 32FP92F2H2*81 32FP92N2H2*81
10 15 25 25 60 — 21⁄2 100 32GP92B2H2*81 32GP92W2H2*81 32GP92F2H2*81 32GP92N2H2*81
20 25 40 40 90 3 — 100 32HP92B2H2*81 32HP92W2H2*81 32HP92F2H2*81 32HP92N2H2*81
25 30 50 50 115 — 31⁄2 200 32IP92B2H2*81 32IP92W2H2*81 32IP92F2H2*81 32IP92N2H2*81
30 40 75 75 135 4 — 200 32JP92B2H2*81 32JP92W2H2*81 32JP92F2H2*81 32JP92N2H2*81

Max Hp Enclosure


Contactor
Disc
2 2 3 3 18 0 — 30 32CP92B1H2*81 32CP92W1H2*81 32CP92F1H2*81 32CP92N1H2*81
5 5 7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 27 1 — 30 32DP92B1H2*81 32DP92W1H2*81 32DP92F1H2*81 32DP92N1H2*81
7 ⁄2
1
7 ⁄2
1
10 10 40 — 13⁄4 60 32EP92B1H2*81 32EP92W1H2*81 32EP92F1H2*81 32EP92N1H2*81
7 1⁄2 10 20 20 45 2 — 60 32FP92B1H2*81 32FP92W1H2*81 32FP92F1H2*81 32FP92N1H2*81
10 15 25 25 60 — 21⁄2 100 32GP92B1H2*81 32GP92W1H2*81 32GP92F1H2*81 32GP92N1H2*81
20 25 40 40 90 3 — 100 32HP92B1H2*81 32HP92W1H2*81 32HP92F1H2*81 32HP92N1H2*81
25 30 50 50 115 — 31⁄2 200 32IP92B1H2*81 32IP92W1H2*81 32IP92F1H2*81 32IP92N1H2*81
30 40 75 75 135 4 — 200 32JP92B1H2*81 32JP92W1H2*81 32JP92F1H2*81 32JP92N1H2*81
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload amp Dual voltage coils not available in modified starters.
a
range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric Code) b For

MCP Type, Constant or Variable Torque with Solid State Overload, Class 32
Selection

 Replace the (*) with a letter from OLR
the coil table. Dual voltage coils are 60Hz Voltage Letter Size FLA Frame Size †
wired on high voltage unless speci- 24 J 0,1 0.25–1 A A
fied on order. 120 F 0,1 0.75–3.4 A B
 Replace the (†) with the letter that
110–120/220–240a A 0,1 3–12 A1 C
corresponds to the correct low speed 200–208 D 0,1 5.5–22 A1 D
FLA in the FLA table.3 220–240 G 0-13/4 10–40 A1 E
 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104. 277 L 2-3 13–52 B F
220–240/440–480a C 2-3 25–100 B G
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. 440–480 H 31/2-4 50–200 B H
 Dimensions see page 9/166. 575–600 E
For other voltages and frequencies, see
Factory Modifications page 9/119.

Motor Watertight, Dust-tight
Circuit
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Interruter Amp Frame Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size ETI Amps Range Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 3 0.75–3.4 A 32CUB†92B2V* 32CUB†92W2V* 32CUB†92F2V* 32CUB†92N2V*
2 2 5 5 0 — 10 3–12 A1 32CUC†92B2V* 32CUC†92W2V* 32CUC†92F2V* 32CUC†92N2V*
3 3 — — 0 — 25 5.5–22 A1 32CUD†92B2V* 32CUD†92W2V* 32CUD†92F2V* 32CUD†92N2V*
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄2 1 — 3 0.75–3.4 A 32DUB†92B2V* 32DUB†92W2V* 32DUB†92F2V* 32DUB†92N2V*
2 2 5 5 1 — 10 3–12 A1 32DUC†92B2V* 32DUC†92W2V* 32DUC†92F2V* 32DUC†92N2V*
3 3 10 10 1 — 25 5.5–22 A1 32DUD†92B2V* 32DUD†92W2V* 32DUD†92F2V* 32DUD†92N2V*
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 30 10–40 A1 32DUE†92B2V* 32DUE†92W2V* 32DUE†92F2V* 32DUE†92N2V*
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 40 10–40 A1 32EUE†92B2V* 32EUE†92W2V* 32EUE†92F2V* 32EUE†92N2V*
10 15 25 25 2 — 50 13–52 B 32FUF†92B2V* 32FUF†92W2V* 32FUF†92F2V* 32FUF†92N2V*
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 100 25–100 B 32GUG†92B2V* 32GUG†92W2V* 32GUG†92F2V* 32GUG†92N2V*
25 30 50 50 3 — 125 25–100 B 32HUG†92B2V* 32HUG†92W2V* 32HUG†92F2V* 32HUG†92N2V*
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 125 50–200 B 32IUH†92B2V* 32IUH†92W2V* 32IUH†92F2V* 32IUH†92N2V*
40 50 100 100 4 — 150 50–200 B 32JUH†92B2V* 32JUH†92W2V* 32JUH†92F2V* 32JUH†92N2V*

Circuit
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 3 0.75–3.4 A 32CUB†92B1V* 32CUB†92W1V* 32CUB†92F1V* 32CUB†92N1V*
2 2 5 5 0 — 10 3–12 A1 32CUC†92B1V* 32CUC†92W1V* 32CUC†92F1V* 32CUC†92N1V*
3 3 — — 0 — 25 5.5–22 A1 32CUD†92B1V* 32CUD†92W1V* 32CUD†92F1V* 32CUD†92N1V*
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄2 1 — 3 0.75–3.4 A 32DUB†92B1V* 32DUB†92W1V* 32DUB†92F1V* 32DUB†92N1V*
2 2 5 5 1 — 10 3–12 A1 32DUC†92B1V* 32DUC†92W1V* 32DUC†92F1V* 32DUC†92N1V*
3 3 10 10 1 — 25 5.5–22 A1 32DUD†92B1V* 32DUD†92W1V* 32DUD†92F1V* 32DUD†92N1V*
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 30 10–40 A1 32DUE†92B1V* 32DUE†92W1V* 32DUE†92F1V* 32DUE†92N1V*
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 40 10–40 A1 32EUE†92B1V* 32EUE†92W1V* 32EUE†92F1V* 32EUE†92N1V*
10 15 25 25 2 — 50 13–52 B 32FUF†92B1V* 32FUF†92W1V* 32FUF†92F1V* 32FUF†92N1V*
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 100 25–100 B 32GUG†92B1V* 32GUG†92W1V* 32GUG†92F1V* 32GUG†92N1V*
25 30 50 50 3 — 125 25–100 B 32HUG†92B1V* 32HUG†92W1V* 32HUG†92F1V* 32HUG†92N1V*
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 125 50–200 B 32IUH†92B1V* 32IUH†92W1V* 32IUH†92F1V* 32IUH†92N1V*
40 50 100 100 4 — 150 50–200 B 32JUH†92B1V* 32JUH†92W1V* 32JUH†92F1V* 32JUH†92N1V*
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per b For
a Dual voltage coils not available in modified starters. c Ifmotor FLA are unknown, select overload on the
basis that low speed FLA will be no greater than 50%
of high speed FLA.

MCP Type, Constant Horsepower with Solid State Overload, Class 32
Selection
Ordering Information Coil Table High/Low Speed FLA Tablec

OLR
 Replace the (*) with a letter from 60Hz Voltage Letter Size FLA Frame Size †
the coil table. Dual voltage coils are 24 J 0,1 0.25–1 A A
wired on high voltage unless specified 120 F 0,1 0.75–3.4 A B
on order. 110–120/220–240a A 0,1 3–12 A1 C
 Replace the (†) with the letter that 200–208 D 0,1 5.5–22 A1 D
corresponds to the correct FLA in the 220–240 G 0-13/4 10–40 A1 E
High/Low Speed FLA table.c 277 L 2-3 13–52 B F
220–240/440–480a C 2-3 25–100 B G
440–480 H 31/2-4 50–200 B H
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. 575–600 E
 Dimensions see page 9/166. * First (†) for high speed, second
(†) for low speed. Use motor name-
For other voltages and
plate to select FLA. If motor FLA
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131. frequencies see Factory
are unknown, select overload on
Modifications page 9/119.
the bases that the low speed FLA
will be no greater than 50 % of high
speed FLA.

Circuit
2 2 3 3 0 — 10 — A or A1 32CU††92B2H* 32CU††92W2H* 32CU††92F2H* 32CU††92N2H*
5 5 71⁄2 71⁄2 1 — 25 — A or A1 32DU††92B2H* 32DU††92W2H* 32DU††92F2H* 32DU††92N2H*
71⁄2 71⁄2 10 10 — 13⁄4 40 — A1 32EU††92B2H* 32EU††92W2H* 32EU††92F2H* 32EU††92N2H*
71⁄2 10 20 20 2 — 50 — B 32FU††92B2H* 32FU††92W2H* 32FU††92F2H* 32FU††92N2H*
10 15 25 25 — 21⁄2 100 — B 32GU††92B2H* 32GU††92W2H* 32GU††92F2H* 32GU††92N2H*
20 25 40 40 3 — 100 — B 32HU††92B2H* 32HU††92W2H* 32HU††92F2H* 32HU††92N2H*
25 30 50 50 — 31⁄2 125 — B 32IU††92B2H* 32IU††92W2H* 32IU††92F2H* 32IU††92N2H*
30 40 75 75 4 — 150 — B 32JU††92B2H* 32JU††92W2H* 32JU††92F2H* 32JU††92N2H*

Circuit
2 2 3 3 0 — 10 — A or A1 32CU††92B1H* 32CU††92W1H* 32CU††92F1H* 32CU††92N1H*
5 5 71⁄2 71⁄2 1 — 25 — A or A1 32DU††92B1H* 32DU††92W1H* 32DU††92F1H* 32DU††92N1H*
7 ⁄21
7 ⁄21
10 10 — 13⁄4 40 — A1 32EU††92B1H* 32EU††92W1H* 32EU††92F1H* 32EU††92N1H*
71⁄2 10 20 20 2 — 50 — B 32FU††92B1H* 32FU††92W1H* 32FU††92F1H* 32FU††92N1H*
10 15 25 25 — 21⁄2 100 — B 32GU††92B1H* 32GU††92W1H* 32GU††92F1H* 32GU††92N1H*
20 25 40 40 3 — 100 — B 32HU††92B1H* 32HU††92W1H* 32HU††92F1H* 32HU††92N1H*
25 30 50 50 — 31⁄2 125 — B 32IU††92B1H* 32IU††92W1H* 32IU††92F1H* 32IU††92N1H*
30 40 75 75 4 — 150 — B 32JU††92B1H* 32JU††92W1H* 32JU††92F1H* 32JU††92N1H*
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per c First † for high speed, second † for low speed. Use mo-
the National Electric Code). tor nameplate information to select FLA. If motor FLA
a Dual voltage coils not available in modified starters. are unknown, select overload on the basis that
low speed FLA will be no greater than 50% of high
speed FLA.
page 9/110.

MCP Type, Constant or Variable Torque w/Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload, Class 32
Selection

24 J
 Heater elements see page 9/124. (6 Required)
120 F
200–208 D
220–240 G
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/178. 220–240/440–480a C
440–480 H
575–600 E
"81" indicates one NC contact.. see Factory Modifications page 9/119.

Max Hp Enclosure

200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Motor Circuit Watertight, Dust-tight
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Interrupter ETI Amps Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
1⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 0 — 3 32CP92B2VA*81 32CP92W2VA*81 32CP92F2VA*81 32CP92N2VA*81
1 1 3 3 0 — 10 32CP92B2VB*81 32CP92W2VB*81 32CP92F2VB*81 32CP92N2VB*81
3 3 5 5 0 — 25 32CP92B2VC*81 32CP92W2VC*81 32CP92F2VC*81 32CP92N2VC*81
1 1⁄2 1 1⁄2 1 1 1 — 3 32DP92B2VA*81 32DP92W2VA*81 32DP92F2VA*81 32DP92N2VA*81
1 1 3 3 1 — 10 32DP92B2VB*81 32DP92W2VB*81 32DP92F2VB*81 32DP92N2VB*81
3 3 7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 1 — 25 32DP92B2VD*81 32DP92W2VD*81 32DP92F2VD*81 32DP92N2VD*81
7 1⁄2 7 ⁄2
1
10 10 1 — 30 32DP92B2VE*81 32DP92W2VE*81 32DP92F2VE*81 32DP92N2VE*81
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 40 32EP92B2VF*81 32EP92W2VF*81 32EP92F2VF*81 32EP92N2VF*81
10 10 — — — 13⁄4 50 32EP92B2VG*81 32EP92W2VG*81 32EP92F2VG*81 32EP92N2VG*81
— — 20 20 2 — 40 32FP92B2VH*81 32FP92W2VH*81 32FP92F2VH*81 32FP92N2VH*81
10 15 25 25 2 — 50 32FP92B2VJ*81 32FP92W2VJ*81 32FP92F2VJ*81 32FP92N2VJ*81
10 15 30 30 — 21⁄2 50 32GP92B2VK*81 32GP92W2VK*81 32GP92F2VK*81 32GP92N2VK*81
15 20 — — — 21⁄2 100 32GP92B2VL*81 32GP92W2VL*81 32GP92F2VL*81 32GP92N2VL*81
— — 30 30 3 — 50 32HP92B2VM*81 32HP92W2VM*81 32HP92F2VM*81 32HP92N2VM*81
25 30 50 50 3 — 125 32HP92B2VN*81 32HP92W2VN*81 32HP92F2VN*81 32HP92N2VN*81
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 125 32IP92B2VP*81 32IP92W2VP*81 32IP92F2VP*81 32IP92N2VP*81
40 50 100 100 4 — 150 32JP92B2VR*81 32JP92W2VR*81 32JP92F2VR*81 32JP92N2VR*81

Max Hp Enclosure

200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Motor Circuit Watertight, Dust-tight
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Interrupter ETI Amps Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ CatalogNumber List Price $
1⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 0 — 3 32CP92B1VA*81 32CP92W1VA*81 32CP92F1VA*81 32CP92N1VA*81
1 1 3 3 0 — 10 32CP92B1VB*81 32CP92W1VB*81 32CP92F1VB*81 32CP92N1VB*81
3 3 5 5 0 — 25 32CP92B1VC*81 32CP92W1VC*81 32CP92F1VC*81 32CP92N1VC*81
1⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 1 — 3 32DP92B1VA*81 32DP92W1VA*81 32DP92F1VA*81 32DP92N1VA*81
1 1 3 3 1 — 10 32DP92B1VB*81 32DP92W1VB*81 32DP92F1VB*81 32DP92N1VB*81
3 3 7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 1 — 25 32DP92B1VD*81 32DP92W1VD*81 32DP92F1VD*81 32DP92N1VD*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 1 — 30 32DP92B1VE*81 32DP92W1VE*81 32DP92F1VE*81 32DP92N1VE*81
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 40 32EP92B1VF*81 32EP92W1VF*81 32EP92F1VF*81 32EP92N1VF*81
10 10 — — — 13⁄4 50 32EP92B1VG*81 32EP92W1VG*81 32EP92F1VG*81 32EP92N1VG*81
— — 20 20 2 — 40 32FP92B1VH*81 32FP92W1VH*81 32FP92F1VH*81 32FP92N1VH*81
10 15 25 25 2 — 50 32FP92B1VJ*81 32FP92W1VJ*81 32FP92F1VJ*81 32FP92N1VJ*81
10 15 30 30 — 21⁄2 50 32GP92B1VK*81 32GP92W1VK*81 32GP92F1VK*81 32GP92N1VK*81
15 20 — — — 21⁄2 100 32GP92B1VL*81 32GP92W1VL*81 32GP92F1VL*81 32GP92N1VL*81
— — 30 30 3 — 50 32HP92B1VM*81 32HP92W1VM*81 32HP92F1VM*81 32HP92N1VM*81
25 30 50 50 3 — 125 32HP92B1VN*81 32HP92W1VN*81 32HP92F1VN*81 32HP92N1VN*81
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 125 32IP92B1VP*81 32IP92W1VP*81 32IP92F1VP*81 32IP92N1VP*81
40 50 100 100 4 — 150 32JP92B1VR*81 32JP92W1VR*81 32JP92F1VR*81 32JP92N1VR*81

MCP, Constant Horsepower w/ Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload, Class 32
Selection
 Heater elements see page 9/124. (6 Required) 120 F
110–120/220–240a A
200–208 D
220–240/440–480a C
440–480 H
"81" indicates one NC contact..

Max Hp Enclosure

200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Motor Circuit
1⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 0 — 3 32CP92B2HA*81 32CP92W2HA*81 32CP92F2HA*81 32CP92N2HA*81
1 1⁄2 1 1⁄2 3 3 0 — 10 32CP92B2HB*81 32CP92W2HB*81 32CP92F2HB*81 32CP92N2HB*81
2 2 — — 0 — 25 32CP92B2HC*81 32CP92W2HC*81 32CP92F2HC*81 32CP92N2HC*81
1⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 1 — 3 32DP92B2HA*81 32DP92W2HA*81 32DP92F2HA*81 32DP92N2HA*81
1 1⁄2 1 ⁄2
1
3 3 1 — 10 32DP92B2HB*81 32DP92W2HB*81 32DP92F2HB*81 32DP92N2HB*81
3 3 7 ⁄2
1
7 ⁄2
1
1 — 25 32DP92B2HD*81 32DP92W2HD*81 32DP92F2HD*81 32DP92N2HD*81
5 5 — — 1 — 30 32DP92B2HE*81 32DP92W2HE*81 32DP92F2HE*81 32DP92N2HE*81
— — 10 10 — 13⁄4 40 32EP92B2HF*81 32EP92W2HF*81 32EP92F2HF*81 32EP92N2HF*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 — — — 13⁄4 50 32EP92B2HG*81 32EP92W2HG*81 32EP92F2HG*81 32EP92N2HG*81
— 7 1⁄2 15 20 2 — 40 32FP92B2HH*81 32FP92W2HH*81 32FP92F2HH*81 32FP92N2HH*81
7 1⁄2 10 20 — 2 — 50 32FP92B2HJ*81 32FP92W2HJ*81 32FP92F2HJ*81 32FP92N2HJ*81
— — 30 30 — 21⁄2 50 32GP92B2HK*81 32GP92W2HK*81 32GP92F2HK*81 32GP92N2HK*81
10 15 30 40 3 — 50 32HP92B2HM*81 32HP92W2HM*81 32HP92F2HM*81 32HP92N2HM*81
20 25 40 — 3 — 100 32HP92B2HN*81 32HP92W2HN*81 32HP92F2HN*81 32HP92N2HN*81
25 30 50 50 — 31⁄2 125 32IP92B2HP*81 32IP92W2HP*81 32IP92F2HP*81 32IP92N2HP*81
30 40 75 75 4 — 150 32JP92B2HR*81 32JP92W2HR*81 32JP92F2HR*81 32JP92N2HR*81

Max Hp Enclosure

200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Watertight, Dust-tight
Motor Circuit
1
⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 0 — 3 32CP92B1HA*81 32CP92W1HA*81 32CP92F1HA*81 32CP92N1HA*81
1 1⁄2 1 1⁄2 3 3 0 — 10 32CP92B1HB*81 32CP92W1HB*81 32CP92F1HB*81 32CP92N1HB*81
2 2 — — 0 — 25 32CP92B1HC*81 32CP92W1HC*81 32CP92F1HC*81 32CP92N1HC*81
1
⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 1 — 3 32DP92B1HA*81 32DP92W1HA*81 32DP92F1HA*81 32DP92N1HA*81
1 1⁄2 1 1⁄2 3 3 1 — 10 32DP92B1HB*81 32DP92W1HB*81 32DP92F1HB*81 32DP92N1HB*81
3 3 7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 1 — 25 32DP92B1HD*81 32DP92W1HD*81 32DP92F1HD*81 32DP92N1HD*81
5 5 — — 1 — 30 32DP92B1HE*81 32DP92W1HE*81 32DP92F1HE*81 32DP92N1HE*81
— — 10 10 — 13⁄4 40 32EP92B1HF*81 32EP92W1HF*81 32EP92F1HF*81 32EP92N1HF*81
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 — — — 13⁄4 50 32EP92B1HG*81 32EP92W1HG*81 32EP92F1HG*81 32EP92N1HG*81
— 7 1⁄2 15 20 2 — 40 32FP92B1HH*81 32FP92W1HH*81 32FP92F1HH*81 32FP92N1HH*81
7 1⁄2 10 20 — 2 — 50 32FP92B1HJ*81 32FP92W1HJ*81 32FP92F1HJ*81 32FP92N1HJ*81
— — 30 30 — 21⁄2 50 32GP92B1HK*81 32GP92W1HK*81 32GP92F1HK*81 32GP92N1HK*81
10 15 30 40 3 — 50 32HP92B1HM*81 32HP92W1HM*81 32HP92F1HM*81 32HP92N1HM*81
20 25 40 — 3 — 100 32HP92B1HN*81 32HP92W1HN*81 32HP92F1HN*81 32HP92N1HN*81
25 30 50 50 — 31⁄2 125 32IP92B1HP*81 32IP92W1HP*81 32IP92F1HP*81 32IP92N1HP*81
30 40 75 75 4 — 150 32JP92B1HR*81 32JP92W1HR*81 32JP92F1HR*81 32JP92N1HR*81

Reduced Voltage Heavy Duty Starters
General
Siemens manufactures the three com- The reduced voltage starter: Combination and non-combination
monly used electromechanical reduced reduced voltage starter sizes range
b Reduces inrush current
voltage starters. Each one is designed from 0 to 6 including Siemens exclusive
for specific application requirements b Provides smoother acceleration of the motormatched half-sizes. Enclosure
and consists of auto transformer, load types include 1, 3R/12, 4 painted and
wye-delta and partwinding starters. b Reduces starting torque
4/4X stainless steel. UL listed file
b Reduces stresses on mechanical #E14900 (class 36); file #E185287
linkages (class 37). CSA certified file #LR 6535
(class 36 & 37).
Auto Transformer Starter Wye-Delta Starter Part-Winding Starter

b Maximum torque per amp b Lowest starting torque b Simplest design – most economical
b Three coil auto transformer for bal- b Closed or open circuit transition b Adjustable starting time
anced starting currents
b Adjustable starting time b Solid-state OLR overload as standard
b 50, 65 and 80% voltage taps b Solid-state OLR overload as standard b CPT supplied as standard
b Closed circuit transition b CPT supplied as standard b Wide range of factory modifications
b Adjustable starting time b Wide range of factory modifications
b Solid-state OLR overload as standard
b CPT supplied as standard
b Wide range of factory modifications
Various Methods of Electro-Mechanical Reduced Voltage Motor Starting

— A General Comparison
Autotransformer Part-Winding Wye-Delta

50% 65% 80%
Characteristic Tap Tap Tap 2 step
Starting current drawn from
line as % of that which would 25% 42% 64% 65% 33%
be drawn upon full voltage
starting
Starting current drawn by the
50% 65% 80% 65% 58%
motor
Starting torque developed as
25% 42% 64% 40% 33%
% of that which would be
Increases slightly
developed on full voltage
with speed
starting
Smoothness of acceleration First in order of Third in order of Second in order of
Smoothness Smoothness Smoothness
Allowable accelerating times 15 seconds at 200HP
(typical) max. or 30 seconds on 5 seconds max. 5-60 seconds
200HP based on Limited by motor Limited by motor
NEMA medium duty design design
transformers
Starting current and torque Adjustable within limits
Fixed Fixed
and adjustments of various taps

Auto Transformer with Solid State Overload, Class 36 & 37
Selection
Ordering Information Coil and Control Voltage
 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104. The coil voltage will always match the
motor voltage. As standard, a CPT is
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. supplied and 120V control voltage is
 Dimensions see page 9/167. utilized. To change to 120V voltage
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/181. (CPT not supplied), change the 9th
character to “F”. To change to 24VAC
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131. voltage (CPT not supplied), change the
9th character to “J”.
NEMA 1 General Purpose Enclosures

Combination Non-Fusible
Overload Relay Non-Combination Disconnect Combination Fusible Disconnect Combination Circit Breaker
NEMA Disc. Fuse Clip Circuit
Motor Max Size Amp Frame Catalog List Amp Catalog List Amp/Volt Catalog List Breaker Catalog List
Voltage Hp (1/2 Size) Range Size Number Price $ Rating Number Price $ Rating Number Price $ Amps Number Price $
10 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET6BD 60 37EUET6BDD 60A/250V 37EUET6BDF 50 37EUET6BDP
10 2 13–52 B 36FUFT6BD 60 37FUFT6BDD 60A/250V 37FUFT6BDF 50 37FUFT6BDP
15 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGT6BD 100 37GUGT6BDD 100A/250V 37GUGT6BDF 100 37GUGT6BDP
25 3 25–100 B 36HUGT6BD 100 37HUGT6BDD 100A/250V 37HUGT6BDF 100 37HUGT6BDP
200 30 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT6BD 200 37IUHT6BDD 200A/250V 37IUHT6BDF 125 37IUHT6BDP
40 4 50–200 B 36JUHT6BD 200 37JUHT6BDD 200A/250V 37JUHT6BDF 150 37JUHT6BDP
50 5 55–250 — — — — — — 250 37LPST6BDP
75 5 55–250 — 36LPUT6BD 400 37LPUT6BDD 400A/250V 37LPUT6BDF 400 37LPUT6BDP
150 6 160–630 — 36MPXT6BD 600 37MPXT6BDD 600A/250V 37MPXT6BDF 600 37MPXT6BDP
10 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET2BG 60 37EUET2BGD 60A/250V 37EUET2BGF 50 37EUET2BGP
15 2 13–52 B 36FUFT2BG 60 37FUFT2BGD 60A/250V 37FUFT2BGF 50 37FUFT2BGP
20 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGT2BG 100 37GUGT2BGD 100A/250V 37GUGT2BGF 100 37GUGT2BGP
30 3 25–100 B 36HUGT2BG 100 37HUGT2BGD 100A/250V 37HUGT2BGF 100 37HUGT2BGP
230 40 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT2BG 200 37IUHT2BGD 200A/250V 37IUHT2BGF 125 37IUHT2BGP
50 4 50–200 B 36JUHT2BG 200 37JUHT2BGD 200A/250V 37JUHT2BGF 150 37JUHT2BGP
75 5 55–250 — — — — — — 250 37LPST2BGP
100 5 55–250 — 36LPUT2BG 400 37LPUT2BGD 400A/250V 37LPUT2BGF 400 37LPUT2BGP
200 6 160–630 — 36MPXT2BG 600 37MPXT2BGD 600A/250V 37MPXT2BGF 600 37MPXT2BGP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET4BH 60 37EUET4BHD 60A/600V 37EUET4BHF 50 37EUET4BHP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFT4BH 60 37FUFT4BHD 60A/600V 37FUFT4BHF 50 37FUFT4BHP
30 (2½) 13–52 B 36GUGT4BH 100 37GUGT4BHD 100A/600V 37GUGT4BHF 100 37GUGT4BHP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUGT4BH 100 37HUGT4BHD 100A/600V 37HUGT4BHF 100 37HUGT4BHP
460 75 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT4BH 200 37IUHT4BHD 200A/600V 37IUHT4BHF 125 37IUHT4BHP
100 4 50–200 B 36JUHT4BH 200 37JUHT4BHD 200A/600V 37JUHT4BHF 150 37JUHT4BHP
150 5 55–250 — — — — — — 250 37LPST4BHP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPUT4BH 400 37LPUT4BHD 400A/600V 37LPUT4BHF 400 37LPUT4BHP
400 6 160–630 — 36MPXT4BH 600 37MPXT4BHD 600A/600V 37MPXT4BHF 600 37MPXT4BHP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET5BE 60 37EUET5BED 60A/600V 37EUET5BEF 50 37EUET5BEP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFT5BE 60 37FUFT5BED 60A/600V 37FUFT5BEF 50 37FUFT5BEP
30 (2½) 13–52 B 36GUGT5BE 100 37GUGT5BED 100A/600V 37GUGT5BEF 100 37GUGT5BEP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUGT5BE 100 37HUGT5BED 100A/600V 37HUGT5BEF 100 37HUGT5BEP
575 75 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT5BE 200 37IUHT5BED 200A/600V 37IUHT5BEF 125 37IUHT5BEP
100 4 50–200 B 36JUHT5BE 200 37JUHT5BED 200A/600V 37JUHT5BEF 150 37JUHT5BEP
150 5 55–250 — — — — — — 250 37LPST5BEP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPUT5BE 400 37LPUT5BED 400A/600V 37LPUT5BEF 400 37LPUT5BEP
400 6 160–630 — 36MPXT5BE 600 37MPXT5BED 600A/600V 37MPXT5BEF 600 37MPXT5BEP
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per

the National Electric Code).

Selection
 Dimensions see page 9/167. utilized. To change to 120V voltage (CPT
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/181. not supplied), change the 9th character
to “F”. To change to 24VAC voltage
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131. (CPT not supplied), change the 9th
character to “J”.
NEMA 4 Painted Enclosures

10 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET6ED 60 37EUET6EDD 60A/250V 37EUET6EDF 50 37EUET6EDP
10 2 13–52 B 36FUFT6ED 60 37FUFT6EDD 60A/250V 37FUFT6EDF 50 37FUFT6EDP
15 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGT6ED 100 37GUGT6EDD 100A/250V 37GUGT6EDF 100 37GUGT6EDP
25 3 25–100 B 36HUGT6ED 100 37HUGT6EDD 100A/250V 37HUGT6EDF 100 37HUGT6EDP
200 30 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT6ED 200 37IUHT6EDD 200A/250V 37IUHT6EDF 125 37IUHT6EDP
40 4 50–200 B 36JUHT6ED 200 37JUHT6EDD 200A/250V 37JUHT6EDF 150 37JUHT6EDP
50 5 55–250 — — — — — — 250 37LPST6EDP
75 5 55–250 — 36LPUT6ED 400 37LPUT6EDD 400A/250V 37LPUT6EDF 400 37LPUT6EDP
150 6 160–630 — 36MPXT6ED 600 37MPXT6EDD 600A/250V 37MPXT6EDF 600 37MPXT6EDP
10 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET2EG 60 37EUET2EGD 60A/250V 37EUET2EGF 50 37EUET2EGP
15 2 13–52 B 36FUFT2EG 60 37FUFT2EGD 60A/250V 37FUFT2EGF 50 37FUFT2EGP
20 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGT2EG 100 37GUGT2EGD 100A/250V 37GUGT2EGF 100 37GUGT2EGP
30 3 25–100 B 36HUGT2EG 100 37HUGT2EGD 100A/250V 37HUGT2EGF 100 37HUGT2EGP
230 40 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT2EG 200 37IUHT2EGD 200A/250V 37IUHT2EGF 125 37IUHT2EGP
50 4 50–200 B 36JUHT2EG 200 37JUHT2EGD 200A/250V 37JUHT2EGF 150 37JUHT2EGP
75 5 55–250 — — — — — — 250 37LPST2EGP
100 5 55–250 — 36LPUT2EG 400 37LPUT2EGD 400A/250V 37LPUT2EGF 400 37LPUT2EGP
200 6 160–630 — 36MPXT2EG 600 37MPXT2EGD 600A/250V 37MPXT2EGF 600 37MPXT2EGP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET4EH 60 37EUET4EHD 60A/600V 37EUET4EHF 50 37EUET4EHP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFT4EH 60 37FUFT4EHD 60A/600V 37FUFT4EHF 50 37FUFT4EHP
30 (2½) 13–52 B 36GUGT4EH 100 37GUGT4EHD 100A/600V 37GUGT4EHF 100 37GUGT4EHP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUGT4EH 100 37HUGT4EHD 100A/600V 37HUGT4EHF 100 37HUGT4EHP
460 75 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT4EH 200 37IUHT4EHD 200A/600V 37IUHT4EHF 125 37IUHT4EHP
100 4 50–200 B 36JUHT4EH 200 37JUHT4EHD 200A/600V 37JUHT4EHF 150 37JUHT4EHP
150 5 55–250 — — — — — — 250 37LPST4EHP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPUT4EH 400 37LPUT4EHD 400A/600V 37LPUT4EHF 400 37LPUT4EHP
400 6 160–630 — 36MPXT4EH 600 37MPXT4EHD 600A/600V 37MPXT4EHF 600 37MPXT4EHP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET5EE 60 37EUET5EED 60A/600V 37EUET5EEF 50 37EUET5EEP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFT5EE 60 37FUFT5EED 60A/600V 37FUFT5EEF 50 37FUFT5EEP
30 (2½) 13–52 B 36GUGT5EE 100 37GUGT5EED 100A/600V 37GUGT5EEF 100 37GUGT5EEP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUGT5EE 100 37HUGT5EED 100A/600V 37HUGT5EEF 100 37HUGT5EEP
575 75 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT5EE 200 37IUHT5EED 200A/600V 37IUHT5EEF 125 37IUHT5EEP
100 4 50–200 B 36JUHT5EE 200 37JUHT5EED 200A/600V 37JUHT5EEF 150 37JUHT5EEP
150 5 55–250 — — — — — — 250 37LPST5EEP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPUT5EE 400 37LPUT5EED 400A/600V 37LPUT5EEF 400 37LPUT5EEP
400 6 160–630 — 36MPXT5EE 600 37MPXT5EED 600A/600V 37MPXT5EEF 600 37MPXT5EEP


Selection
NEMA 4/4X Stainless Steel Enclosures

10 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET6WD 60 37EUET6WDD 60A/250V 37EUET6WDF 50 37EUET6WDP
10 2 13–52 B 36FUFT6WD 60 37FUFT6WDD 60A/250V 37FUFT6WDF 50 37FUFT6WDP
15 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGT6WD 100 37GUGT6WDD 100A/250V 37GUGT6WDF 100 37GUGT6WDP
200
25 3 25–100 B 36HUGT6WD 100 37HUGT6WDD 100A/250V 37HUGT6WDF 100 37HUGT6WDP
30 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT6WD 200 37IUHT6WDD 200A/250V 37IUHT6WDF 125 37IUHT6WDP
40 4 50–200 B 36JUHT6WD 200 37JUHT6WDD 200A/250V 37JUHT6WDF 150 37JUHT6WDP
10 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET2WG 60 37EUET2WGD 60A/250V 37EUET2WGF 50 37EUET2WGP
15 2 13–52 B 36FUFT2WG 60 37FUFT2WGD 60A/250V 37FUFT2WGF 50 37FUFT2WGP
20 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGT2WG 100 37GUGT2WGD 100A/250V 37GUGT2WGF 100 37GUGT2WGP
230
30 3 25–100 B 36HUGT2WG 100 37HUGT2WGD 100A/250V 37HUGT2WGF 100 37HUGT2WGP
40 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT2WG 200 37IUHT2WGD 200A/250V 37IUHT2WGF 125 37IUHT2WGP
50 4 50–200 B 36JUHT2WG 200 37JUHT2WGD 200A/250V 37JUHT2WGF 150 37JUHT2WGP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET4WH 60 37EUET4WHD 60A/600V 37EUET4WHF 50 37EUET4WHP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFT4WH 60 37FUFT4WHD 60A/600V 37FUFT4WHF 50 37FUFT4WHP
30 (2½) 13–52 B 36GUGT4WH 100 37GUGT4WHD 100A/600V 37GUGT4WHF 100 37GUGT4WHP
460
50 3 25–100 B 36HUGT4WH 100 37HUGT4WHD 100A/600V 37HUGT4WHF 100 37HUGT4WHP
75 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT4WH 200 37IUHT4WHD 200A/600V 37IUHT4WHF 125 37IUHT4WHP
100 4 50–200 B 36JUHT4WH 200 37JUHT4WHD 200A/600V 37JUHT4WHF 150 37JUHT4WHP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET5WE 60 37EUET5WED 60A/600V 37EUET5WEF 50 37EUET5WEP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFT5WE 60 37FUFT5WED 60A/600V 37FUFT5WEF 50 37FUFT5WEP
30 (2½) 13–52 B 36GUGT5WE 100 37GUGT5WED 100A/600V 37GUGT5WEF 100 37GUGT5WEP
575
50 3 25–100 B 36HUGT5WE 100 37HUGT5WED 100A/600V 37HUGT5WEF 100 37HUGT5WEP
75 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT5WE 200 37IUHT5WED 200A/600V 37IUHT5WEF 125 37IUHT5WEP
100 4 50–200 B 36JUHT5WE 200 37JUHT5WED 200A/600V 37JUHT5WEF 150 37JUHT5WEP


Selection
NEMA 12 Enclosures (Supplied as NEMA 12, field convertible to 3/3R)

10 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET6ND 60 37EUET6NDD 60A/250V 37EUET6NDF 50 37EUET6NDP
10 2 13–52 B 36FUFT6ND 60 37FUFT6NDD 60A/250V 37FUFT6NDF 50 37FUFT6NDP
15 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGT6ND 100 37GUGT6NDD 100A/250V 37GUGT6NDF 100 37GUGT6NDP
25 3 25–100 B 36HUGT6ND 100 37HUGT6NDD 100A/250V 37HUGT6NDF 100 37HUGT6NDP
200 30 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT6ND 200 37IUHT6NDD 200A/250V 37IUHT6NDF 125 37IUHT6NDP
40 4 50–200 B 36JUHT6ND 200 37JUHT6NDD 200A/250V 37JUHT6NDF 150 37JUHT6NDP
50 5 55–250 — — — — — — 250 37LPST6NDP
75 5 55–250 — 36LPUT6ND 400 37LPUT6NDD 400A/250V 37LPUT6NDF 400 37LPUT6NDP
150 6 160–630 — 36MPXT6ND 600 37MPXT6NDD 600A/250V 37MPXT6NDF 600 37MPXT6NDP
10 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET2NG 60 37EUET2NGD 60A/250V 37EUET2NGF 50 37EUET2NGP
15 2 13–52 B 36FUFT2NG 60 37FUFT2NGD 60A/250V 37FUFT2NGF 50 37FUFT2NGP
20 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGT2NG 100 37GUGT2NGD 100A/250V 37GUGT2NGF 100 37GUGT2NGP
30 3 25–100 B 36HUGT2NG 100 37HUGT2NGD 100A/250V 37HUGT2NGF 100 37HUGT2NGP
230 40 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT2NG 200 37IUHT2NGD 200A/250V 37IUHT2NGF 125 37IUHT2NGP
50 4 50–200 B 36JUHT2NG 200 37JUHT2NGD 200A/250V 37JUHT2NGF 150 37JUHT2NGP
75 5 55–250 — — — — — — 250 37LPST2NGP
100 5 55–250 — 36LPUT2NG 400 37LPUT2NGD 400A/250V 37LPUT2NGF 400 37LPUT2NGP
200 6 160–630 — 36MPXT2NG 600 37MPXT2NGD 600A/250V 37MPXT2NGF 600 37MPXT2NGP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET4NH 60 37EUET4NHD 60A/600V 37EUET4NHF 50 37EUET4NHP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFT4NH 60 37FUFT4NHD 60A/600V 37FUFT4NHF 50 37FUFT4NHP
30 (2½) 13–52 B 36GUGT4NH 100 37GUGT4NHD 100A/600V 37GUGT4NHF 100 37GUGT4NHP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUGT4NH 100 37HUGT4NHD 100A/600V 37HUGT4NHF 100 37HUGT4NHP
460 75 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT4NH 200 37IUHT4NHD 200A/600V 37IUHT4NHF 125 37IUHT4NHP
100 4 50–200 B 36JUHT4NH 200 37JUHT4NHD 200A/600V 37JUHT4NHF 150 37JUHT4NHP
150 5 55–250 — — — — — — 250 37LPST4NHP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPUT4NH 400 37LPUT4NHD 400A/600V 37LPUT4NHF 400 37LPUT4NHP
400 6 160–630 — 36MPXT4NH 600 37MPXT4NHD 600A/600V 37MPXT4NHF 600 37MPXT4NHP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUET5NE 60 37EUET5NED 60A/600V 37EUET5NEF 50 37EUET5NEP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFT5NE 60 37FUFT5NED 60A/600V 37FUFT5NEF 50 37FUFT5NEP
30 (2½) 13–52 B 36GUGT5NE 100 37GUGT5NED 100A/600V 37GUGT5NEF 100 37GUGT5NEP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUGT5NE 100 37HUGT5NED 100A/600V 37HUGT5NEF 100 37HUGT5NEP
575 75 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHT5NE 200 37IUHT5NED 200A/600V 37IUHT5NEF 125 37IUHT5NEP
100 4 50–200 B 36JUHT5NE 200 37JUHT5NED 200A/600V 37JUHT5NEF 150 37JUHT5NEP
150 5 55–250 — — — — — — 250 37LPST5NEP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPUT5NE 400 37LPUT5NED 400A/600V 37LPUT5NEF 400 37LPUT5NEP
400 6 160–630 — 36MPXT5NE 600 37MPXT5NED 600A/600V 37MPXT5NEF 600 37MPXT5NEP
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per  See page 9/110 for conduit hubs and conversion
the National Electric Code). instructions.

2 Step Part Winding with Solid State Overload, Class 36 & 37
Selection
 Dimensions see page page 9/167. utilized. To change to 120V voltage (CPT

71⁄2 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP6BD 60 37CUDP6BDD 60A/250V 37CUDP6BDF 30 37CUDP6BDP
10 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP6BD 60 37DUDP6BDD 60A/250V 37DUDP6BDF 50 37DUDP6BDP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEP6BD 100 37EUEP6BDD 100A/250V 37EUEP6BDF 100 37EUEP6BDP
20 2 13–52 B 36FUFP6BD 100 37FUFP6BDD 100A/250V 37FUFP6BDF 100 37FUFP6BDP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP6BD 200 37GUGP6BDD 200A/250V 37GUGP6BDF 125 37GUGP6BDP
200
40 3 25–100 B 36HUGP6BD 200 37HUGP6BDD 200A/250V 37HUGP6BDF 150 37HUGP6BDP
50 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP6BD 200 37IUHP6BDD 200A/250V 37IUHP6BDF 250 37IUHP6BDP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUHP6BD 400 37JUHP6BDD 400A/250V 37JUHP6BDF 400 37JUHP6BDP
100 5 55–250 — — — — — — 600 37LPSP6BDP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPUP6BD 600 37LPUP6BDD 600A/250V 37LPUP6BDF 600 37LPUP6BDP
71⁄2 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP2BG 60 37CUDP2BGD 60A/250V 37CUDP2BGF 30 37CUDP2BGP
10 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP2BG 60 37DUDP2BGD 60A/250V 37DUDP2BGF 50 37DUDP2BGP
20 (1½) 10–40 A1 36EUEP2BG 100 37EUEP2BGD 100A/250V 37EUEP2BGF 100 37EUEP2BGP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFP2BG 100 37FUFP2BGD 100A/250V 37FUFP2BGF 100 37FUFP2BGP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP2BG 200 37GUGP2BGD 200A/250V 37GUGP2BGF 100 37GUGP2BGP
230 50 3 25–100 B 36HUGP2BG 200 37HUGP2BGD 200A/250V 37HUGP2BGF 150 37HUGP2BGP
60 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP2BG 200 37IUHP2BGD 200A/250V 37IUHP2BGF 250 37IUHP2BGP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUHP2BG 400 37JUHP2BGD 400A/250V 37JUHP2BGF 250 37JUHP2BGP
125 5 55–250 — — — — — — 400 37LPSP2BGP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPUP2BG 600 37LPUP2BGD 600A/250V 37LPUP2BGF 600 37LPUP2BGP
300 6 160–630 — 36MPXP2BG 1200 37MPXP2BGD 1200A/250V 37MPXP2BGF 1200 37MPXP2BGP
10 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP4BH 30 37CUDP4BHD 30A/600V 37CUDP4BHF 30 37CUDP4BHP
15 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP4BH 60 37DUDP4BHD 60A/600V 37DUDP4BHF 30 37DUDP4BHP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEP4BH 60 37EUEP4BHD 60A/600V 37EUEP4BHF 50 37EUEP4BHP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFP4BH 100 37FUFP4BHD 100A/600V 37FUFP4BHF 100 37FUFP4BHP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP4BH 200 37GUGP4BHD 200A/600V 37GUGP4BHF 100 37GUGP4BHP
460 75 3 25–100 B 36HUGP4BH 200 37HUGP4BHD 200A/600V 37HUGP4BHF 125 37HUGP4BHP
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP4BH 200 37IUHP4BHD 200A/600V 37IUHP4BHF 150 37IUHP4BHP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHP4BH 400 37JUHP4BHD 400A/600V 37JUHP4BHF 250 37JUHP4BHP
250 5 55–250 — — — — — — 400 37LPSP4BHP
350 5 55–250 — 36LPUP4BH 600 37LPUP4BHD 600A/600V 37LPUP4BHF 600 37LPUP4BHP
600 6 160–630 — 36MPXP4BH 1200 37MPXP4BHD 1200A/600V 37MPXP4BHF 1200 37MPXP4BHP
10 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP5BE 30 37CUDP5BED 30A/600V 37CUDP5BEF 30 37CUDP5BEP
15 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP5BE 60 37DUDP5BED 60A/600V 37DUDP5BEF 30 37DUDP5BEP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEP5BE 60 37EUEP5BED 60A/600V 37EUEP5BEF 50 37EUEP5BEP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFP5BE 60 37FUFP5BED 60A/600V 37FUFP5BEF 50 37FUFP5BEP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP5BE 100 37GUGP5BED 100A/600V 37GUGP5BEF 100 37GUGP5BEP
575 75 3 25–100 B 36HUGP5BE 200 37HUGP5BED 200A/600V 37HUGP5BEF 125 37HUGP5BEP
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP5BE 400 37IUHP5BED 400A/600V 37IUHP5BEF 150 37IUHP5BEP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHP5BE 400 37JUHP5BED 400A/600V 37JUHP5BEF 250 37JUHP5BEP
250 5 55–250 — — — — 400A/600V 37LPSP5BEF — —
350 5 55–250 — 36LPUP5BE 600 37LPUP5BED 600A/600V 37LPUP5BEF 400 37LPUP5BEP
600 6 160–630 — 36MPXP5BE 1200 37MPXP5BED 1200A/600V 37MPXP5BEF 1200 37MPXP5BEP


Selection

7½ 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP6ED 60 37CUDP6EDD 60A/250V 37CUDP6EDF 30 37CUDP6EDP
10 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP6ED 60 37DUDP6EDD 60A/250V 37DUDP6EDF 50 37DUDP6EDP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEP6ED 100 37EUEP6EDD 100A/250V 37EUEP6EDF 100 37EUEP6EDP
20 2 13–52 B 36FUFP6ED 100 37FUFP6EDD 100A/250V 37FUFP6EDF 100 37FUFP6EDP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP6ED 200 37GUGP6EDD 200A/250V 37GUGP6EDF 125 37GUGP6EDP
200
40 3 25–100 B 36HUGP6ED 200 37HUGP6EDD 200A/250V 37HUGP6EDF 150 37HUGP6EDP
50 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP6ED 200 37IUHP6EDD 200A/250V 37IUHP6EDF 250 37IUHP6EDP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUHP6ED 400 37JUHP6EDD 400A/250V 37JUHP6EDF 400 37JUHP6EDP
100 5 55–250 — — — — — — 600 37LPSP6EDP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPUP6ED 600 37LPUP6EDD 600A/250V 37LPUP6EDF 600 37LPUP6EDP
7½ 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP2EG 60 37CUDP2EGD 60A/250V 37CUDP2EGF 30 37CUDP2EGP
10 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP2EG 60 37DUDP2EGD 60A/250V 37DUDP2EGF 50 37DUDP2EGP
20 (1½) 10–40 A1 36EUEP2EG 100 37EUEP2EGD 100A/250V 37EUEP2EGF 100 37EUEP2EGP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFP2EG 100 37FUFP2EGD 100A/250V 37FUFP2EGF 100 37FUFP2EGP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP2EG 200 37GUGP2EGD 200A/250V 37GUGP2EGF 100 37GUGP2EGP
230 50 3 25–100 B 36HUGP2EG 200 37HUGP2EGD 200A/250V 37HUGP2EGF 150 37HUGP2EGP
60 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP2EG 200 37IUHP2EGD 200A/250V 37IUHP2EGF 250 37IUHP2EGP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUHP2EG 400 37JUHP2EGD 400A/250V 37JUHP2EGF 250 37JUHP2EGP
125 5 55–250 — — — — — — 400 37LPSP2EGP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPUP2EG 600 37LPUP2EGD 600A/250V 37LPUP2EGF 600 37LPUP2EGP
300 6 160–630 — 36MPXP2EG 1200 37MPXP2EGD 1200A/250V 37MPXP2EGF 1200 37MPXP2EGP
10 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP4EH 30 37CUDP4EHD 30A/600V 37CUDP4EHF 30 37CUDP4EHP
15 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP4EH 60 37DUDP4EHD 60A/600V 37DUDP4EHF 30 37DUDP4EHP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEP4EH 60 37EUEP4EHD 60A/600V 37EUEP4EHF 50 37EUEP4EHP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFP4EH 100 37FUFP4EHD 100A/600V 37FUFP4EHF 100 37FUFP4EHP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP4EH 200 37GUGP4EHD 200A/600V 37GUGP4EHF 100 37GUGP4EHP
460 75 3 25–100 B 36HUGP4EH 200 37HUGP4EHD 200A/600V 37HUGP4EHF 125 37HUGP4EHP
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP4EH 200 37IUHP4EHD 200A/600V 37IUHP4EHF 150 37IUHP4EHP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHP4EH 400 37JUHP4EHD 400A/600V 37JUHP4EHF 250 37JUHP4EHP
250 5 55–250 — — — — — — 400 37LPSP4EHP
350 5 55–250 — 36LPUP4EH 600 37LPUP4EHD 600A/600V 37LPUP4EHF 600 37LPUP4EHP
600 6 160–630 — 36MPXP4EH 1200 37MPXP4EHD 1200A/600V 37MPXP4EHF 1200 37MPXP4EHP
10 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP5EE 30 37CUDP5EED 30A/600V 37CUDP5EEF 30 37CUDP5EEP
15 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP5EE 60 37DUDP5EED 60A/600V 37DUDP5EEF 30 37DUDP5EEP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEP5EE 60 37EUEP5EED 60A/600V 37EUEP5EEF 50 37EUEP5EEP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFP5EE 60 37FUFP5EED 60A/600V 37FUFP5EEF 50 37FUFP5EEP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP5EE 100 37GUGP5EED 100A/600V 37GUGP5EEF 100 37GUGP5EEP
575 75 3 25–100 B 36HUGP5EE 200 37HUGP5EED 200A/600V 37HUGP5EEF 125 37HUGP5EEP
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP5EE 400 37IUHP5EED 400A/600V 37IUHP5EEF 150 37IUHP5EEP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHP5EE 400 37JUHP5EED 400A/600V 37JUHP5EEF 250 37JUHP5EEP
250 5 55–250 — — — — 400A/600V 37LPSP5EEF — —
350 5 55–250 — 36LPUP5EE 600 37LPUP5EED 600A/600V 37LPUP5EEF 400 37LPUP5EEP
600 6 160–630 — 36MPXP5EE 1200 37MPXP5EED 1200A/600V 37MPXP5EEF 1200 37MPXP5EEP


Selection

Combination Non-Fusible Combination Fusible
Overload Relay Non-Combination Disconnect Disconnect Combination Circit Breaker
Motor Max Size Amp Frame Catalog List Amp Catalog List Amp/Volt Catalog Breaker Catalog List
Voltage Hp (1/2 Size) Range Size Number Price $ Rating Number Price $ Rating Number Amps Number Price $
7½ 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP6WD 60 37CUDP6WDD 60A/250V 37CUDP6WDF 30 37CUDP6WDP
10 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP6WD 60 37DUDP6WDD 60A/250V 37DUDP6WDF 50 37DUDP6WDP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEP6WD 100 37EUEP6WDD 100A/250V 37EUEP6WDF 100 37EUEP6WDP
20 2 13–52 B 36FUFP6WD 100 37FUFP6WDD 100A/250V 37FUFP6WDF 100 37FUFP6WDP
200
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP6WD 200 37GUGP6WDD 200A/250V 37GUGP6WDF 125 37GUGP6WDP
40 3 25–100 B 36HUGP6WD 200 37HUGP6WDD 200A/250V 37HUGP6WDF 150 37HUGP6WDP
50 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP6WD 200 37IUHP6WDD 200A/250V 37IUHP6WDF 250 37IUHP6WDP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUHP6WD 400 37JUHP6WDD 400A/250V 37JUHP6WDF 400 37JUHP6WDP
7½ 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP2WG 60 37CUDP2WGD 60A/250V 37CUDP2WGF 30 37CUDP2WGP
10 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP2WG 60 37DUDP2WGD 60A/250V 37DUDP2WGF 50 37DUDP2WGP
20 (1½) 10–40 A1 36EUEP2WG 100 37EUEP2WGD 100A/250V 37EUEP2WGF 100 37EUEP2WGP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFP2WG 100 37FUFP2WGD 100A/250V 37FUFP2WGF 100 37FUFP2WGP
230
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP2WG 200 37GUGP2WGD 200A/250V 37GUGP2WGF 100 37GUGP2WGP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUGP2WG 200 37HUGP2WGD 200A/250V 37HUGP2WGF 150 37HUGP2WGP
60 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP2WG 200 37IUHP2WGD 200A/250V 37IUHP2WGF 250 37IUHP2WGP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUHP2WG 400 37JUHP2WGD 400A/250V 37JUHP2WGF 250 37JUHP2WGP
10 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP4WH 30 37CUDP4WHD 30A/600V 37CUDP4WHF 30 37CUDP4WHP
15 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP4WH 60 37DUDP4WHD 60A/600V 37DUDP4WHF 30 37DUDP4WHP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEP4WH 60 37EUEP4WHD 60A/600V 37EUEP4WHF 50 37EUEP4WHP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFP4WH 100 37FUFP4WHD 100A/600V 37FUFP4WHF 100 37FUFP4WHP
460
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP4WH 200 37GUGP4WHD 200A/600V 37GUGP4WHF 100 37GUGP4WHP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUGP4WH 200 37HUGP4WHD 200A/600V 37HUGP4WHF 125 37HUGP4WHP
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP4WH 200 37IUHP4WHD 200A/600V 37IUHP4WHF 150 37IUHP4WHP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHP4WH 400 37JUHP4WHD 400A/600V 37JUHP4WHF 250 37JUHP4WHP
10 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP5WE 30 37CUDP5WED 30A/600V 37CUDP5WEF 30 37CUDP5WEP
15 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP5WE 60 37DUDP5WED 60A/600V 37DUDP5WEF 30 37DUDP5WEP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEP5WE 60 37EUEP5WED 60A/600V 37EUEP5WEF 50 37EUEP5WEP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFP5WE 60 37FUFP5WED 60A/600V 37FUFP5WEF 50 37FUFP5WEP
575
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP5WE 100 37GUGP5WED 100A/600V 37GUGP5WEF 100 37GUGP5WEP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUGP5WE 200 37HUGP5WED 200A/600V 37HUGP5WEF 125 37HUGP5WEP
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP5WE 400 37IUHP5WED 400A/600V 37IUHP5WEF 150 37IUHP5WEP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHP5WE 400 37JUHP5WED 400A/600V 37JUHP5WEF 250 37JUHP5WEP


Selection

NEMA 12 Enclosures (Supplied as NEMA 12, field convertible to 3/3R)
Combination Non-Fusible Call Combination Fusible Disconnect
Overload Relay Non-Combination Disconnect Call Combination Circit Breaker
7½ 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP6ND 60 37CUDP6NDD 60A/250V 37CUDP6NDF 30 37CUDP6NDP
10 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP6ND 60 37DUDP6NDD 60A/250V 37DUDP6NDF 50 37DUDP6NDP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEP6ND 100 37EUEP6NDD 100A/250V 37EUEP6NDF 100 37EUEP6NDP
20 2 13–52 B 36FUFP6ND 100 37FUFP6NDD 100A/250V 37FUFP6NDF 100 37FUFP6NDP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP6ND 200 37GUGP6NDD 200A/250V 37GUGP6NDF 125 37GUGP6NDP
200
40 3 25–100 B 36HUGP6ND 200 37HUGP6NDD 200A/250V 37HUGP6NDF 150 37HUGP6NDP
50 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP6ND 200 37IUHP6NDD 200A/250V 37IUHP6NDF 250 37IUHP6NDP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUHP6ND 400 37JUHP6NDD 400A/250V 37JUHP6NDF 400 37JUHP6NDP
100 5 55–250 — — — — — — 600 37LPSP6NDP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPUP6ND 600 37LPUP6NDD 600A/250V 37LPUP6NDF 600 37LPUP6NDP
7½ 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP2NG 60 37CUDP2NGD 60A/250V 37CUDP2NGF 30 37CUDP2NGP
10 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP2NG 60 37DUDP2NGD 60A/250V 37DUDP2NGF 50 37DUDP2NGP
20 (1½) 10–40 A1 36EUEP2NG 100 37EUEP2NGD 100A/250V 37EUEP2NGF 100 37EUEP2NGP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFP2NG 100 37FUFP2NGD 100A/250V 37FUFP2NGF 100 37FUFP2NGP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP2NG 200 37GUGP2NGD 200A/250V 37GUGP2NGF 100 37GUGP2NGP
230 50 3 25–100 B 36HUGP2NG 200 37HUGP2NGD 200A/250V 37HUGP2NGF 150 37HUGP2NGP
60 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP2NG 200 37IUHP2NGD 200A/250V 37IUHP2NGF 250 37IUHP2NGP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUHP2NG 400 37JUHP2NGD 400A/250V 37JUHP2NGF 250 37JUHP2NGP
125 5 55–250 — — — — — — 400 37LPSP2NGP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPUP2NG 600 37LPUP2NGD 600A/250V 37LPUP2NGF 600 37LPUP2NGP
300 6 160–630 — 36MPXP2NG 1200 37MPXP2NGD 1200A/250V 37MPXP2NGF 1200 37MPXP2NGP
10 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP4NH 30 37CUDP4NHD 30A/600V 37CUDP4NHF 30 37CUDP4NHP
15 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP4NH 60 37DUDP4NHD 60A/600V 37DUDP4NHF 30 37DUDP4NHP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEP4NH 60 37EUEP4NHD 60A/600V 37EUEP4NHF 50 37EUEP4NHP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFP4NH 100 37FUFP4NHD 100A/600V 37FUFP4NHF 100 37FUFP4NHP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP4NH 200 37GUGP4NHD 200A/600V 37GUGP4NHF 100 37GUGP4NHP
460 75 3 25–100 B 36HUGP4NH 200 37HUGP4NHD 200A/600V 37HUGP4NHF 125 37HUGP4NHP
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP4NH 200 37IUHP4NHD 200A/600V 37IUHP4NHF 150 37IUHP4NHP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHP4NH 400 37JUHP4NHD 400A/600V 37JUHP4NHF 250 37JUHP4NHP
250 5 55–250 — — — — — — 400 37LPSP4NHP
350 5 55–250 — 36LPUP4NH 600 37LPUP4NHD 600A/600V 37LPUP4NHF 600 37LPUP4NHP
600 6 160–630 — 36MPXP4NH 1200 37MPXP4NHD 1200A/600V 37MPXP4NHF 1200 37MPXP4NHP
10 0 5.5–22 A1 36CUDP5NE 30 37CUDP5NED 30A/600V 37CUDP5NEF 30 37CUDP5NEP
15 1 5.5–22 A1 36DUDP5NE 60 37DUDP5NED 60A/600V 37DUDP5NEF 30 37DUDP5NEP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEP5NE 60 37EUEP5NED 60A/600V 37EUEP5NEF 50 37EUEP5NEP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFP5NE 60 37FUFP5NED 60A/600V 37FUFP5NEF 50 37FUFP5NEP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGP5NE 100 37GUGP5NED 100A/600V 37GUGP5NEF 100 37GUGP5NEP
575 75 3 25–100 B 36HUGP5NE 200 37HUGP5NED 200A/600V 37HUGP5NEF 125 37HUGP5NEP
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHP5NE 400 37IUHP5NED 400A/600V 37IUHP5NEF 150 37IUHP5NEP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHP5NE 400 37JUHP5NED 400A/600V 37JUHP5NEF 250 37JUHP5NEP
250 5 55–250 — — — — 400A/600V 37LPSP5NEF — —
350 5 55–250 — 36LPUP5NE 600 37LPUP5NED 600A/600V 37LPUP5NEF 400 37LPUP5NEP
600 6 160–630 — 36MPXP5NE 1200 37MPXP5NED 1200A/600V 37MPXP5NEF 1200 37MPXP5NEP

Wye Delta, Open Transition with Solid State Overload, Class 36 & 37
Selection
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/182 . not supplied), change the 9th character

10 1 10–40 A1 36DUE06BD 60 37DUE06BDD 60A/250V 37DUE06BDF 50 37DUE06BDP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE06BD 100 37EUE06BDD 100A/250V 37EUE06BDF 100 37EUE06BDP
20 2 13–52 B 36FUF06BD 100 37FUF06BDD 100A/250V 37FUF06BDF 100 37FUF06BDP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG06BD 200 37GUG06BDD 200A/250V 37GUG06BDF 125 37GUG06BDP
40 3 25–100 B 36HUG06BD 200 37HUG06BDD 200A/250V 37HUG06BDF 150 37HUG06BDP
200
50 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH06BD 200 37IUH06BDD 200A/250V 37IUH06BDF 250 37IUH06BDP
60 4 50–200 B 36JUH06BD 400 37JUH06BDD 400A/250V 37JUH06BDF 250 37JUH06BDP
75 5 55–250 — 36LPS06BD 400 37LPS06BDD 400A/250V 37LPS06BDF 400 37LPS06BDP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPU06BD 600 37LPU06BDD 600A/250V 37LPU06BDF 600 37LPU06BDP
300 6 160–630 — 36MPX06BD 1200 37MPX06BDD 1200A/250V 37MPX06BDF 1200 37MPX06BDP
10 1 10–40 A1 36DUE02BG 60 37DUE02BGD 60A/250V 37DUE02BGF 50 37DUE02BGP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE02BG 60 37EUE02BGD 60A/250V 37EUE02BGF 50 37EUE02BGP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUF02BG 100 37FUF02BGD 100A/250V 37FUF02BGF 100 37FUF02BGP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG02BG 200 37GUG02BGD 200A/250V 37GUG02BGF 100 37GUG02BGP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUG02BG 200 37HUG02BGD 200A/250V 37HUG02BGF 150 37HUG02BGP
230
60 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH02BG 200 37IUH02BGD 200A/250V 37IUH02BGF 250 37IUH02BGP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUH02BG 400 37JUH02BGD 400A/250V 37JUH02BGF 250 37JUH02BGP
100 5 55–250 — 36LPS02BG 400 37LPS02BGD 400A/250V 37LPS02BGF 400 37LPS02BGP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPU02BG 600 37LPU02BGD 600A/250V 37LPU02BGF 600 37LPU02BGP
350 6 160–630 — 36MPX02BG 1200 37MPX02BGD 1200A/250V 37MPX02BGF 1200 37MPX02BGP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUD04BH 30 37DUD04BHD 30A/600V 37DUD04BHF 30 37DUD04BHP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE04BH 60 37EUE04BHD 60A/600V 37EUE04BHF 50 37EUE04BHP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUF04BH 100 37FUF04BHD 100A/600V 37FUF04BHF 100 37FUF04BHP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG04BH 200 37GUG04BHD 200A/600V 37GUG04BHF 100 37GUG04BHP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUG04BH 200 37HUG04BHD 200A/600V 37HUG04BHF 125 37HUG04BHP
460
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH04BH 200 37IUH04BHD 200A/600V 37IUH04BHF 150 37IUH04BHP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUH04BH 400 37JUH04BHD 400A/600V 37JUH04BHF 250 37JUH04BHP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPS04BH 400 37LPS04BHD 400A/600V 37LPS04BHF 400 37LPS04BHP
300 5 55–250 — 36LPU04BH 600 37LPU04BHD 600A/600V 37LPU04BHF 600 37LPU04BHP
700 6 160–630 — 36MPX04BH 1600 37MPX04BHD 1600A/600V 37MPX04BHF 1200 37MPX04BHP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUD05BE 30 37DUD05BED 30A/600V 37DUD05BEF 30 37DUD05BEP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE05BE 60 37EUE05BED 60A/600V 37EUE05BEF 50 37EUE05BEP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUF05BE 100 37FUF05BED 100A/600V 37FUF05BEF 50 37FUF05BEP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG05BE 100 37GUG05BED 100A/600V 37GUG05BEF 100 37GUG05BEP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUG05BE 200 37HUG05BED 200A/600V 37HUG05BEF 125 37HUG05BEP
575
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH05BE 200 37IUH05BED 200A/600V 37IUH05BEF 150 37IUH05BEP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUH05BE 400 37JUH05BED 400A/600V 37JUH05BEF 250 37JUH05BEP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPS05BE 400 37LPS05BED 400A/600V 37LPS05BEF 250 37LPS05BEP
300 5 55–250 — 36LPU05BE 600 37LPU05BED 600A/600V 37LPU05BEF 400 37LPU05BEP
700 6 160–630 — 36MPX05BE 1600 37MPX05BED 1600A/600V 37MPX05BEF 1600 37MPX05BEP


Selection

10 1 10–40 A1 36DUE06ED 60 37DUE06EDD 60A/250V 37DUE06EDF 50 37DUE06EDP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE06ED 100 37EUE06EDD 100A/250V 37EUE06EDF 100 37EUE06EDP
20 2 13–52 B 36FUF06ED 100 37FUF06EDD 100A/250V 37FUF06EDF 100 37FUF06EDP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG06ED 200 37GUG06EDD 200A/250V 37GUG06EDF 125 37GUG06EDP
40 3 25–100 B 36HUG06ED 200 37HUG06EDD 200A/250V 37HUG06EDF 150 37HUG06EDP
200
50 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH06ED 200 37IUH06EDD 200A/250V 37IUH06EDF 250 37IUH06EDP
60 4 50–200 B 36JUH06ED 400 37JUH06EDD 400A/250V 37JUH06EDF 250 37JUH06EDP
75 5 55–250 — 36LPS06ED 400 37LPS06EDD 400A/250V 37LPS06EDF 400 37LPS06EDP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPU06ED 600 37LPU06EDD 600A/250V 37LPU06EDF 600 37LPU06EDP
300 6 160–630 — 36MPX06ED 1200 37MPX06EDD 1200A/250V 37MPX06EDF 1200 37MPX06EDP
10 1 10–40 A1 36DUE02EG 60 37DUE02EGD 60A/250V 37DUE02EGF 50 37DUE02EGP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE02EG 60 37EUE02EGD 60A/250V 37EUE02EGF 50 37EUE02EGP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUF02EG 100 37FUF02EGD 100A/250V 37FUF02EGF 100 37FUF02EGP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG02EG 200 37GUG02EGD 200A/250V 37GUG02EGF 100 37GUG02EGP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUG02EG 200 37HUG02EGD 200A/250V 37HUG02EGF 150 37HUG02EGP
230
60 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH02EG 200 37IUH02EGD 200A/250V 37IUH02EGF 250 37IUH02EGP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUH02EG 400 37JUH02EGD 400A/250V 37JUH02EGF 250 37JUH02EGP
100 5 55–250 — 36LPS02EG 400 37LPS02EGD 400A/250V 37LPS02EGF 400 37LPS02EGP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPU02EG 600 37LPU02EGD 600A/250V 37LPU02EGF 600 37LPU02EGP
350 6 160–630 — 36MPX02EG 1200 37MPX02EGD 1200A/250V 37MPX02EGF 1200 37MPX02EGP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUD04EH 30 37DUD04EHD 30A/600V 37DUD04EHF 30 37DUD04EHP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE04EH 60 37EUE04EHD 60A/600V 37EUE04EHF 50 37EUE04EHP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUF04EH 100 37FUF04EHD 100A/600V 37FUF04EHF 100 37FUF04EHP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG04EH 200 37GUG04EHD 200A/600V 37GUG04EHF 100 37GUG04EHP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUG04EH 200 37HUG04EHD 200A/600V 37HUG04EHF 125 37HUG04EHP
460
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH04EH 200 37IUH04EHD 200A/600V 37IUH04EHF 150 37IUH04EHP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUH04EH 400 37JUH04EHD 400A/600V 37JUH04EHF 250 37JUH04EHP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPS04EH 400 37LPS04EHD 400A/600V 37LPS04EHF 400 37LPS04EHP
300 5 55–250 — 36LPU04EH 600 37LPU04EHD 600A/600V 37LPU04EHF 600 37LPU04EHP
700 6 160–630 — 36MPX04EH 1600 37MPX04EHD 1600A/600V 37MPX04EHF 1200 37MPX04EHP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUD05EE 30 37DUD05EED 30A/600V 37DUD05EEF 30 37DUD05EEP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE05EE 60 37EUE05EED 60A/600V 37EUE05EEF 50 37EUE05EEP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUF05EE 100 37FUF05EED 100A/600V 37FUF05EEF 50 37FUF05EEP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG05EE 100 37GUG05EED 100A/600V 37GUG05EEF 100 37GUG05EEP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUG05EE 200 37HUG05EED 200A/600V 37HUG05EEF 125 37HUG05EEP
575
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH05EE 200 37IUH05EED 200A/600V 37IUH05EEF 150 37IUH05EEP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUH05EE 400 37JUH05EED 400A/600V 37JUH05EEF 250 37JUH05EEP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPS05EE 400 37LPS05EED 400A/600V 37LPS05EEF 250 37LPS05EEP
300 5 55–250 — 36LPU05EE 600 37LPU05EED 600A/600V 37LPU05EEF 400 37LPU05EEP
700 6 160–630 — 37MPX05EF 1600 37MPX05EED 1600A/600V 37MPX05EEF 1600 37MPX05EEP


Selection

10 1 10–40 A1 36DUE06WD 60 37DUE06WDD 60A/250V 37DUE06WDF 50 37DUE06WDP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE06WD 100 37EUE06WDD 100A/250V 37EUE06WDF 100 37EUE06WDP
20 2 13–52 B 36FUF06WD 100 37FUF06WDD 100A/250V 37FUF06WDF 100 37FUF06WDP
200 30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG06WD 200 37GUG06WDD 200A/250V 37GUG06WDF 125 37GUG06WDP
40 3 25–100 B 36HUG06WD 200 37HUG06WDD 200A/250V 37HUG06WDF 150 37HUG06WDP
50 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH06WD 200 37IUH06WDD 200A/250V 37IUH06WDF 250 37IUH06WDP
60 4 50–200 B 36JUH06WD 400 37JUH06WDD 400A/250V 37JUH06WDF 250 37JUH06WDP
10 1 10–40 A1 36DUE02WG 60 37DUE02WGD 60A/250V 37DUE02WGF 50 37DUE02WGP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE02WG 60 37EUE02WGD 60A/250V 37EUE02WGF 50 37EUE02WGP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUF02WG 100 37FUF02WGD 100A/250V 37FUF02WGF 100 37FUF02WGP
230 30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG02WG 200 37GUG02WGD 200A/250V 37GUG02WGF 100 37GUG02WGP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUG02WG 200 37HUG02WGD 200A/250V 37HUG02WGF 150 37HUG02WGP
60 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH02WG 200 37IUH02WGD 200A/250V 37IUH02WGF 250 37IUH02WGP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUH02WG 400 37JUH02WGD 400A/250V 37JUH02WGF 250 37JUH02WGP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUD04WH 30 37DUD04WHD 30A/600V 37DUD04WHF 30 37DUD04WHP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE04WH 60 37EUE04WHD 60A/600V 37EUE04WHF 50 37EUE04WHP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUF04WH 100 37FUF04WHD 100A/600V 37FUF04WHF 100 37FUF04WHP
460 60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG04WH 200 37GUG04WHD 200A/600V 37GUG04WHF 100 37GUG04WHP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUG04WH 200 37HUG04WHD 200A/600V 37HUG04WHF 125 37HUG04WHP
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH04WH 200 37IUH04WHD 200A/600V 37IUH04WHF 150 37IUH04WHP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUH04WH 400 37JUH04WHD 400A/600V 37JUH04WHF 250 37JUH04WHP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUD05WE 30 37DUD05WED 30A/600V 37DUD05WEF 30 37DUD05WEP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE05WE 60 37EUE05WED 60A/600V 37EUE05WEF 50 37EUE05WEP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUF05WE 100 37FUF05WED 100A/600V 37FUF05WEF 50 37FUF05WEP
575 60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG05WE 100 37GUG05WED 100A/600V 37GUG05WEF 100 37GUG05WEP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUG05WE 200 37HUG05WED 200A/600V 37HUG05WEF 125 37HUG05WEP
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH05WE 200 37IUH05WED 200A/600V 37IUH05WEF 150 37IUH05WEP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUH05WE 400 37JUH05WED 400A/600V 37JUH05WEF 250 37JUH05WEP


Selection

10 1 10–40 A1 36DUE06ND 60 37DUE06NDD 60A/250V 37DUE06NDF 50 37DUE06NDP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE06ND 100 37EUE06NDD 100A/250V 37EUE06NDF 100 37EUE06NDP
20 2 13–52 B 36FUF06ND 100 37FUF06NDD 100A/250V 37FUF06NDF 100 37FUF06NDP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG06ND 200 37GUG06NDD 200A/250V 37GUG06NDF 125 37GUG06NDP
40 3 25–100 B 36HUG06ND 200 37HUG06NDD 200A/250V 37HUG06NDF 150 37HUG06NDP
200
50 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH06ND 200 37IUH06NDD 200A/250V 37IUH06NDF 250 37IUH06NDP
60 4 50–200 B 36JUH06ND 400 37JUH06NDD 400A/250V 37JUH06NDF 250 37JUH06NDP
75 5 55–250 — 36LPS06ND 400 37LPS06NDD 400A/250V 37LPS06NDF 400 37LPS06NDP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPU06ND 600 37LPU06NDD 600A/250V 37LPU06NDF 600 37LPU06NDP
300 6 160–630 — 36MPX06ND 1200 37MPX06NDD 1200A/250V 37MPX06NDF 1200 37MPX06NDP
10 1 10–40 A1 36DUE02NG 60 37DUE02NGD 60A/250V 37DUE02NGF 50 37DUE02NGP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE02NG 60 37EUE02NGD 60A/250V 37EUE02NGF 50 37EUE02NGP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUF02NG 100 37FUF02NGD 100A/250V 37FUF02NGF 100 37FUF02NGP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG02NG 200 37GUG02NGD 200A/250V 37GUG02NGF 100 37GUG02NGP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUG02NG 200 37HUG02NGD 200A/250V 37HUG02NGF 150 37HUG02NGP
230
60 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH02NG 200 37IUH02NGD 200A/250V 37IUH02NGF 250 37IUH02NGP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUH02NG 400 37JUH02NGD 400A/250V 37JUH02NGF 250 37JUH02NGP
100 5 55–250 — 36LPS02NG 400 37LPS02NGD 400A/250V 37LPS02NGF 400 37LPS02NGP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPU02NG 600 37LPU02NGD 600A/250V 37LPU02NGF 600 37LPU02NGP
350 6 160–630 — 36MPX02NG 1200 37MPX02NGD 1200A/250V 37MPX02NGF 1200 37MPX02NGP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUD04NH 30 37DUD04NHD 30A/600V 37DUD04NHF 30 37DUD04NHP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE04NH 60 37EUE04NHD 60A/600V 37EUE04NHF 50 37EUE04NHP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUF04NH 100 37FUF04NHD 100A/600V 37FUF04NHF 100 37FUF04NHP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG04NH 200 37GUG04NHD 200A/600V 37GUG04NHF 100 37GUG04NHP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUG04NH 200 37HUG04NHD 200A/600V 37HUG04NHF 125 37HUG04NHP
460
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH04NH 200 37IUH04NHD 200A/600V 37IUH04NHF 150 37IUH04NHP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUH04NH 400 37JUH04NHD 400A/600V 37JUH04NHF 250 37JUH04NHP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPS04NH 400 37LPS04NHD 400A/600V 37LPS04NHF 400 37LPS04NHP
300 5 55–250 — 36LPU04NH 600 37LPU04NHD 600A/600V 37LPU04NHF 600 37LPU04NHP
700 6 160–630 — 36MPX04NH 1600 37MPX04NHD 1600A/600V 37MPX04NHF 1200 37MPX04NHP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUD05NE 30 37DUD05NED 30A/600V 37DUD05NEF 30 37DUD05NEP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUE05NE 60 37EUE05NED 60A/600V 37EUE05NEF 50 37EUE05NEP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUF05NE 100 37FUF05NED 100A/600V 37FUF05NEF 50 37FUF05NEP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUG05NE 100 37GUG05NED 100A/600V 37GUG05NEF 100 37GUG05NEP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUG05NE 200 37HUG05NED 200A/600V 37HUG05NEF 125 37HUG05NEP
575
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUH05NE 200 37IUH05NED 200A/600V 37IUH05NEF 150 37IUH05NEP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUH05NE 400 37JUH05NED 400A/600V 37JUH05NEF 250 37JUH05NEP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPS05NE 400 37LPS05NED 400A/600V 37LPS05NEF 250 37LPS05NEP
300 5 55–250 — 36LPU05NE 600 37LPU05NED 600A/600V 37LPU05NEF 400 37LPU05NEP
700 6 160–630 — 37MPX05NF 1600 37MPX05NED 1600A/600V 37MPX05NEF 1600 37MPX05NEP

Wye Delta, Closed Transition with Solid State Overload, Class 36 & 37
Selection
(CPT not supplied), change the 9th

10 1 10–40 A1 36DUEC6BD 60 37DUEC6BDD 60A/250V 37DUEC6BDF 50 37DUEC6BDP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC6BD 100 37EUEC6BDD 100A/250V 37EUEC6BDF 100 37EUEC6BDP
20 2 13–52 B 36FUFC6BD 100 37FUFC6BDD 100A/250V 37FUFC6BDF 100 37FUFC6BDP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC6BD 200 37GUGC6BDD 200A/250V 37GUGC6BDF 125 37GUGC6BDP
40 3 25–100 B 36HUGC6BD 200 37HUGC6BDD 200A/250V 37HUGC6BDF 150 37HUGC6BDP
200
50 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC6BD 200 37IUHC6BDD 200A/250V 37IUHC6BDF 250 37IUHC6BDP
60 4 50–200 B 36JUHC6BD 400 37JUHC6BDD 400A/250V 37JUHC6BDF 250 37JUHC6BDP
75 5 55–250 — 36LPSC6BD 400 37LPSC6BDD 400A/250V 37LPSC6BDF 400 37LPSC6BDP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPUC6BD 600 37LPUC6BDD 600A/250V 37LPUC6BDF 600 37LPUC6BDP
300 6 160–630 — 36MPXC6BD 1200 37MPXC6BDD 1200A/250V 37MPXC6BDF 1200 37MPXC6BDP
10 1 10–40 A1 36DUEC2BG 60 37DUEC2BGD 60A/250V 37DUEC2BGF 50 37DUEC2BGP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC2BG 60 37EUEC2BGD 60A/250V 37EUEC2BGF 50 37EUEC2BGP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFC2BG 100 37FUFC2BGD 100A/250V 37FUFC2BGF 100 37FUFC2BGP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC2BG 200 37GUGC2BGD 200A/250V 37GUGC2BGF 100 37GUGC2BGP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUGC2BG 200 37HUGC2BGD 200A/250V 37HUGC2BGF 150 37HUGC2BGP
230
60 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC2BG 200 37IUHC2BGD 200A/250V 37IUHC2BGF 250 37IUHC2BGP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUHC2BG 400 37JUHC2BGD 400A/250V 37JUHC2BGF 250 37JUHC2BGP
100 5 55–250 — 36LPSC2BG 400 37LPSC2BGD 400A/250V 37LPSC2BGF 400 37LPSC2BGP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPUC2BG 600 37LPUC2BGD 600A/250V 37LPUC2BGF 600 37LPUC2BGP
350 6 160–630 — 36MPXC2BG 1200 37MPXC2BGD 1200A/250V 37MPXC2BGF 1200 37MPXC2BGP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUDC4BH 30 37DUDC4BHD 30A/600V 37DUDC4BHF 30 37DUDC4BHP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC4BH 60 37EUEC4BHD 60A/600V 37EUEC4BHF 50 37EUEC4BHP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFC4BH 100 37FUFC4BHD 100A/600V 37FUFC4BHF 100 37FUFC4BHP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC4BH 200 37GUGC4BHD 200A/600V 37GUGC4BHF 100 37GUGC4BHP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUGC4BH 200 37HUGC4BHD 200A/600V 37HUGC4BHF 125 37HUGC4BHP
460
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC4BH 200 37IUHC4BHD 200A/600V 37IUHC4BHF 150 37IUHC4BHP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHC4BH 400 37JUHC4BHD 400A/600V 37JUHC4BHF 250 37JUHC4BHP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPSC4BH 400 37LPSC4BHD 400A/600V 37LPSC4BHF 400 37LPSC4BHP
300 5 55–250 — 36LPUC4BH 600 37LPUC4BHD 600A/600V 37LPUC4BHF 600 37LPUC4BHP
700 6 160–630 — 36MPXC4BH 1600 37MPXC4BHD 1600A/600V 37MPXC4BHF 1200 37MPXC4BHP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUDC5BE 30 37DUDC5BED 30A/600V 37DUDC5BEF 30 37DUDC5BEP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC5BE 60 37EUEC5BED 60A/600V 37EUEC5BEF 50 37EUEC5BEP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFC5BE 100 37FUFC5BED 100A/600V 37FUFC5BEF 50 37FUFC5BEP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC5BE 100 37GUGC5BED 100A/600V 37GUGC5BEF 100 37GUGC5BEP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUGC5BE 200 37HUGC5BED 200A/600V 37HUGC5BEF 125 37HUGC5BEP
575
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC5BE 200 37IUHC5BED 200A/600V 37IUHC5BEF 150 37IUHC5BEP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHC5BE 400 37JUHC5BED 400A/600V 37JUHC5BEF 250 37JUHC5BEP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPSC5BE 400 37LPSC5BED 400A/600V 37LPSC5BEF 250 37LPSC5BEP
300 5 55–250 — 36LPUC5BE 600 37LPUC5BED 600A/600V 37LPUC5BEF 400 37LPUC5BEP
700 6 160–630 — 37MPXC5BF 1600 37MPXC5BED 1600A/600V 37MPXC5BEF 1600 37MPXC5BEP


Selection

10 1 10–40 A1 36DUEC6ED 60 37DUEC6EDD 60A/250V 37DUEC6EDF 50 37DUEC6EDP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC6ED 100 37EUEC6EDD 100A/250V 37EUEC6EDF 100 37EUEC6EDP
20 2 13–52 B 36FUFC6ED 100 37FUFC6EDD 100A/250V 37FUFC6EDF 100 37FUFC6EDP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC6ED 200 37GUGC6EDD 200A/250V 37GUGC6EDF 125 37GUGC6EDP
40 3 25–100 B 36HUGC6ED 200 37HUGC6EDD 200A/250V 37HUGC6EDF 150 37HUGC6EDP
200
50 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC6ED 200 37IUHC6EDD 200A/250V 37IUHC6EDF 250 37IUHC6EDP
60 4 50–200 B 36JUHC6ED 400 37JUHC6EDD 400A/250V 37JUHC6EDF 250 37JUHC6EDP
75 5 55–250 — 36LPSC6ED 400 37LPSC6EDD 400A/250V 37LPSC6EDF 400 37LPSC6EDP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPUC6ED 600 37LPUC6EDD 600A/250V 37LPUC6EDF 600 37LPUC6EDP
300 6 160–630 — 36MPXC6ED 1200 37MPXC6EDD 1200A/250V 37MPXC6EDF 1200 37MPXC6EDP
10 1 10–40 A1 36DUEC2EG 60 37DUEC2EGD 60A/250V 37DUEC2EGF 50 37DUEC2EGP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC2EG 60 37EUEC2EGD 60A/250V 37EUEC2EGF 50 37EUEC2EGP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFC2EG 100 37FUFC2EGD 100A/250V 37FUFC2EGF 100 37FUFC2EGP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC2EG 200 37GUGC2EGD 200A/250V 37GUGC2EGF 100 37GUGC2EGP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUGC2EG 200 37HUGC2EGD 200A/250V 37HUGC2EGF 150 37HUGC2EGP
230
60 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC2EG 200 37IUHC2EGD 200A/250V 37IUHC2EGF 250 37IUHC2EGP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUHC2EG 400 37JUHC2EGD 400A/250V 37JUHC2EGF 250 37JUHC2EGP
100 5 55–250 — 36LPSC2EG 400 37LPSC2EGD 400A/250V 37LPSC2EGF 400 37LPSC2EGP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPUC2EG 600 37LPUC2EGD 600A/250V 37LPUC2EGF 600 37LPUC2EGP
350 6 160–630 — 36MPXC2EG 1200 37MPXC2EGD 1200A/250V 37MPXC2EGF 1200 37MPXC2EGP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUDC4EH 30 37DUDC4EHD 30A/600V 37DUDC4EHF 30 37DUDC4EHP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC4EH 60 37EUEC4EHD 60A/600V 37EUEC4EHF 50 37EUEC4EHP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFC4EH 100 37FUFC4EHD 100A/600V 37FUFC4EHF 100 37FUFC4EHP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC4EH 200 37GUGC4EHD 200A/600V 37GUGC4EHF 100 37GUGC4EHP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUGC4EH 200 37HUGC4EHD 200A/600V 37HUGC4EHF 125 37HUGC4EHP
460
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC4EH 200 37IUHC4EHD 200A/600V 37IUHC4EHF 150 37IUHC4EHP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHC4EH 400 37JUHC4EHD 400A/600V 37JUHC4EHF 250 37JUHC4EHP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPSC4EH 400 37LPSC4EHD 400A/600V 37LPSC4EHF 400 37LPSC4EHP
300 5 55–250 — 36LPUC4EH 600 37LPUC4EHD 600A/600V 37LPUC4EHF 600 37LPUC4EHP
700 6 160–630 — 36MPXC4EH 1600 37MPXC4EHD 1600A/600V 37MPXC4EHF 1200 37MPXC4EHP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUDC5EE 30 37DUDC5EED 30A/600V 37DUDC5EEF 30 37DUDC5EEP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC5EE 60 37EUEC5EED 60A/600V 37EUEC5EEF 50 37EUEC5EEP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFC5EE 100 37FUFC5EED 100A/600V 37FUFC5EEF 50 37FUFC5EEP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC5EE 100 37GUGC5EED 100A/600V 37GUGC5EEF 100 37GUGC5EEP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUGC5EE 200 37HUGC5EED 200A/600V 37HUGC5EEF 125 37HUGC5EEP
575
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC5EE 200 37IUHC5EED 200A/600V 37IUHC5EEF 150 37IUHC5EEP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHC5EE 400 37JUHC5EED 400A/600V 37JUHC5EEF 250 37JUHC5EEP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPSC5EE 400 37LPSC5EED 400A/600V 37LPSC5EEF 250 37LPSC5EEP
300 5 55–250 — 36LPUC5EE 600 37LPUC5EED 600A/600V 37LPUC5EEF 400 37LPUC5EEP
700 6 160–630 — 37MPXC5EF 1600 37MPXC5EED 1600A/600V 37MPXC5EEF 1600 37MPXC5EEP


Selection

10 1 10–40 A1 36DUEC6WD 60 37DUEC6WDD 60A/250V 37DUEC6WDF 50 37DUEC6WDP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC6WD 100 37EUEC6WDD 100A/250V 37EUEC6WDF 100 37EUEC6WDP
20 2 13–52 B 36FUFC6WD 100 37FUFC6WDD 100A/250V 37FUFC6WDF 100 37FUFC6WDP
200 30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC6WD 200 37GUGC6WDD 200A/250V 37GUGC6WDF 125 37GUGC6WDP
40 3 25–100 B 36HUGC6WD 200 37HUGC6WDD 200A/250V 37HUGC6WDF 150 37HUGC6WDP
50 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC6WD 200 37IUHC6WDD 200A/250V 37IUHC6WDF 250 37IUHC6WDP
60 4 50–200 B 36JUHC6WD 400 37JUHC6WDD 400A/250V 37JUHC6WDF 250 37JUHC6WDP
10 1 10–40 A1 36DUEC2WG 60 37DUEC2WGD 60A/250V 37DUEC2WGF 50 37DUEC2WGP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC2WG 60 37EUEC2WGD 60A/250V 37EUEC2WGF 50 37EUEC2WGP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFC2WG 100 37FUFC2WGD 100A/250V 37FUFC2WGF 100 37FUFC2WGP
230 30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC2WG 200 37GUGC2WGD 200A/250V 37GUGC2WGF 100 37GUGC2WGP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUGC2WG 200 37HUGC2WGD 200A/250V 37HUGC2WGF 150 37HUGC2WGP
60 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC2WG 200 37IUHC2WGD 200A/250V 37IUHC2WGF 250 37IUHC2WGP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUHC2WG 400 37JUHC2WGD 400A/250V 37JUHC2WGF 250 37JUHC2WGP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUDC4WH 30 37DUDC4WHD 30A/600V 37DUDC4WHF 30 37DUDC4WHP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC4WH 60 37EUEC4WHD 60A/600V 37EUEC4WHF 50 37EUEC4WHP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFC4WH 100 37FUFC4WHD 100A/600V 37FUFC4WHF 100 37FUFC4WHP
460 60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC4WH 200 37GUGC4WHD 200A/600V 37GUGC4WHF 100 37GUGC4WHP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUGC4WH 200 37HUGC4WHD 200A/600V 37HUGC4WHF 125 37HUGC4WHP
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC4WH 200 37IUHC4WHD 200A/600V 37IUHC4WHF 150 37IUHC4WHP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHC4WH 400 37JUHC4WHD 400A/600V 37JUHC4WHF 250 37JUHC4WHP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUDC5WE 30 37DUDC5WED 30A/600V 37DUDC5WEF 30 37DUDC5WEP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC5WE 60 37EUEC5WED 60A/600V 37EUEC5WEF 50 37EUEC5WEP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFC5WE 100 37FUFC5WED 100A/600V 37FUFC5WEF 50 37FUFC5WEP
575 60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC5WE 100 37GUGC5WED 100A/600V 37GUGC5WEF 100 37GUGC5WEP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUGC5WE 200 37HUGC5WED 200A/600V 37HUGC5WEF 125 37HUGC5WEP
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC5WE 200 37IUHC5WED 200A/600V 37IUHC5WEF 150 37IUHC5WEP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHC5WE 400 37JUHC5WED 400A/600V 37JUHC5WEF 250 37JUHC5WEP


Selection

10 1 10–40 A1 36DUEC6ND 60 37DUEC6NDD 60A/250V 37DUEC6NDF 50 37DUEC6NDP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC6ND 100 37EUEC6NDD 100A/250V 37EUEC6NDF 100 37EUEC6NDP
20 2 13–52 B 36FUFC6ND 100 37FUFC6NDD 100A/250V 37FUFC6NDF 100 37FUFC6NDP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC6ND 200 37GUGC6NDD 200A/250V 37GUGC6NDF 125 37GUGC6NDP
40 3 25–100 B 36HUGC6ND 200 37HUGC6NDD 200A/250V 37HUGC6NDF 150 37HUGC6NDP
200
50 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC6ND 200 37IUHC6NDD 200A/250V 37IUHC6NDF 250 37IUHC6NDP
60 4 50–200 B 36JUHC6ND 400 37JUHC6NDD 400A/250V 37JUHC6NDF 250 37JUHC6NDP
75 5 55–250 — 36LPSC6ND 400 37LPSC6NDD 400A/250V 37LPSC6NDF 400 37LPSC6NDP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPUC6ND 600 37LPUC6NDD 600A/250V 37LPUC6NDF 600 37LPUC6NDP
300 6 160–630 — 36MPXC6ND 1200 37MPXC6NDD 1200A/250V 37MPXC6NDF 1200 37MPXC6NDP
10 1 10–40 A1 36DUEC2NG 60 37DUEC2NGD 60A/250V 37DUEC2NGF 50 37DUEC2NGP
15 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC2NG 60 37EUEC2NGD 60A/250V 37EUEC2NGF 50 37EUEC2NGP
25 2 13–52 B 36FUFC2NG 100 37FUFC2NGD 100A/250V 37FUFC2NGF 100 37FUFC2NGP
30 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC2NG 200 37GUGC2NGD 200A/250V 37GUGC2NGF 100 37GUGC2NGP
50 3 25–100 B 36HUGC2NG 200 37HUGC2NGD 200A/250V 37HUGC2NGF 150 37HUGC2NGP
230
60 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC2NG 200 37IUHC2NGD 200A/250V 37IUHC2NGF 250 37IUHC2NGP
75 4 50–200 B 36JUHC2NG 400 37JUHC2NGD 400A/250V 37JUHC2NGF 250 37JUHC2NGP
100 5 55–250 — 36LPSC2NG 400 37LPSC2NGD 400A/250V 37LPSC2NGF 400 37LPSC2NGP
150 5 55–250 — 36LPUC2NG 600 37LPUC2NGD 600A/250V 37LPUC2NGF 600 37LPUC2NGP
350 6 160–630 — 36MPXC2NG 1200 37MPXC2NGD 1200A/250V 37MPXC2NGF 1200 37MPXC2NGP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUDC4NH 30 37DUDC4NHD 30A/600V 37DUDC4NHF 30 37DUDC4NHP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC4NH 60 37EUEC4NHD 60A/600V 37EUEC4NHF 50 37EUEC4NHP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFC4NH 100 37FUFC4NHD 100A/600V 37FUFC4NHF 100 37FUFC4NHP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC4NH 200 37GUGC4NHD 200A/600V 37GUGC4NHF 100 37GUGC4NHP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUGC4NH 200 37HUGC4NHD 200A/600V 37HUGC4NHF 125 37HUGC4NHP
460
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC4NH 200 37IUHC4NHD 200A/600V 37IUHC4NHF 150 37IUHC4NHP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHC4NH 400 37JUHC4NHD 400A/600V 37JUHC4NHF 250 37JUHC4NHP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPSC4NH 400 37LPSC4NHD 400A/600V 37LPSC4NHF 400 37LPSC4NHP
300 5 55–250 — 36LPUC4NH 600 37LPUC4NHD 600A/600V 37LPUC4NHF 600 37LPUC4NHP
700 6 160–630 — 36MPXC4NH 1600 37MPXC4NHD 1600A/600V 37MPXC4NHF 1200 37MPXC4NHP
15 1 5.5-22 A1 36DUDC5NE 30 37DUDC5NED 30A/600V 37DUDC5NEF 30 37DUDC5NEP
30 (1¾) 10–40 A1 36EUEC5NE 60 37EUEC5NED 60A/600V 37EUEC5NEF 50 37EUEC5NEP
40 2 13–52 B 36FUFC5NE 100 37FUFC5NED 100A/600V 37FUFC5NEF 50 37FUFC5NEP
60 (2½) 25–100 B 36GUGC5NE 100 37GUGC5NED 100A/600V 37GUGC5NEF 100 37GUGC5NEP
75 3 25–100 B 36HUGC5NE 200 37HUGC5NED 200A/600V 37HUGC5NEF 125 37HUGC5NEP
575
100 (3½) 50–200 B 36IUHC5NE 200 37IUHC5NED 200A/600V 37IUHC5NEF 150 37IUHC5NEP
150 4 50–200 B 36JUHC5NE 400 37JUHC5NED 400A/600V 37JUHC5NEF 250 37JUHC5NEP
200 5 55–250 — 36LPSC5NE 400 37LPSC5NED 400A/600V 37LPSC5NEF 250 37LPSC5NEP
300 5 55–250 — 36LPUC5NE 600 37LPUC5NED 600A/600V 37LPUC5NEF 400 37LPUC5NEP
700 6 160–630 — 37MPXC5NF 1600 37MPXC5NED 1600A/600V 37MPXC5NEF 1600 37MPXC5NEP

Heavy Duty Contactors
3-Phase, Class 40
Selection

24 J
120 F
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. 110–120/220–240a A
200–208 D
220–240 G
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131. 220–240/440–480a C
440–480 H
575–600 E

Max Hp Enclosure
Open Typef NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X NEMA 4X NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12b

General Purpose
Stainlessb Fiberglass NEMA 3 & 4 NEMA 3/3R

Watertight, Dust-tight Watertight, Dust-tight Div1 and Div 2 Industrial Use
Corrosion Resistant Corrosion Resistant Class I Groups C & D Weatherproof
304 Stainless Steel Class II Groups E, F & G
Class III
Cont- Bolted Enclosures
Indoor/Outdoor Use
actor
1 1⁄2 1 1⁄2 2 2 9 00 — 40BP32A* 40BP32B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
3 3 5 5 18 0 — 40CP32A* 40CP32B* 40CP32W* 40CP32F* 40CP32H* 40CP320*
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 27 1 — 40DP32A* 40DP32B* 40DP32W* 40DP32F* 40DP32H* 40DP320*
10 10 15 15 40 — 13⁄4 40EP32A* 40EP32B* 40EP32W* 40EP32F* 40EP32H* 40EP320*
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 40FP32A* 40FP32B* 40FP32W* 40FP32F* 40FP32H* 40FP320*
15 20 30 30 60 — 21⁄2 40GP32A* 40GP32B* 40GP32W* 40GP32F* 40GP32H* 40GP320*
25 30 50 50 90 3 — 40HP32A* 40HP32B* 40HP32W* 40HP32F* 40HP32H* 40HP320*
30 40 75 75 115 — 31⁄2 40IP32A* 40IP32B* 40IP32W* 40IP32F* 40IP32H* 40IP320*
40 50 100 100 135 4 — 40JG32A* 40JG32B* 40JG32W* 40JG32F* 40JG32H* 40JG320*
75 100 200 200 270 5 — 40LP32A* 40LP32B* 40LP32E*c — — 40LP32H* 40LP320*
150 200 400 400 540 6 — 40MP32A* 40MP32B* 40MP32E*c — — — — 40MP320*
— 300 600 600 810 7dg — 40NH32A* 40NH32B* 40NH32E*c — — — — 40NH320*
— 450 900 900 1215 8eg — 40PH32A* 40PH32B* 40PH32E*c — — — — 40PH320*

Max Hp Enclosure
NEMA 1f NEMA 4/4X Stainlessb NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12b
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 3 & 4 NEMA 3/3R
Class III
Contactor Bolted Enclosures
Indoor/Outdoor Use
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half
Volts Volts Volts Volts Range Size Size Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
1 1⁄2 1 1⁄2 2 2 9 00 — 40BP82B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
3 3 5 5 18 0 — 40CP82B* 40CP82W* 40CP82H* 40CP820*

7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 27 1 — 40DP82B* 40DP82W* 40DP82H* 40DP820*
10 10 15 15 40 — 13/4 40EP82B* 40EP82W* 40EP82H* 40EP820*
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 40FP82B* 40FP82W* 40FP82H* 40FP820*
15 20 30 30 60 — 21/2 40GP82B* 40GP82W* 40GP82H* 40GP820*
25 30 50 50 90 3 — 40HP82B* 40HP82W* 40HP82H* 40HP820*
30 40 75 75 115 — 31/2 40IP82B* 40IP82W* 40IP82H* 40IP820*
40 50 100 100 135 4 — 40JG82B* 40JG82W* 40JG82H* 40JG820*
f
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload Enclosure is NEMA Type 4 (painted steel).
c
d Only Standard Auxiliary Contacts

amp range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric available
Code) of typical industrial motors. All starter sizes F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC Type Size (3rd Character) Configuration Internal / External
carry one maximum Hp rating. H coil 150-500V AC 50/60Hz, or DC
e Only available B Thru E 1N.O. Internal
a Dual voltage coils not available in size 5-8 starters.
b For
conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see F coil100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC All FVNR F Thru J 1N.O. External
Starters &
page 9/110. Contactors L Thru M 2N.O., 2N.C. External
N Thru P 1N.O., 1N.C. External
g Lugs are not included, refer to page 9/108.

• Revised • Heavy Duty Contactors
07/20/15 Single Phase, 4-Pole & Vacuum, Class 40
Selection
 R eplace the (*) with a letter from the coil table. 60Hz Voltage Letter
Dual voltage coils are wired on high voltage unless 24 J
specified on order. 120 F
200–208 D
220–240 G
 Dimensions see pages 9/144 open and 277 L
9/157 enclosed. 220–240/440–480a C
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/184. 440–480 H
575–600 E
Open Type & Standard Width Enclosure, Single Phase, 2-Pole cd

Max Hp Enclosure
Open Typee NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X NEMA 4X NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12
General Purposes Stainlessb Fiberglass NEMA 3 & 4 NEMA 3/3R b
Watertight, Dust-tight Watertight, Dust-tight Div 1 and Div 2 Industrial Use
Cont- Class III
208/ actor Bolted Enclosure
Indoor/Outdoor Use
115 230 Amp NEMA Half
Volts Volts Rating Size Size Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $
1⁄3 1 9 00 — 40BP12A* 40BP12B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
1 2 18 0 — 40CP12A* 40CP12B* 40CP12W* 40CP12F* 40CP12H* 40CP120*
2 3 27 1 — 40DP12A* 40DP12B* 40DP12W* 40DP12F* 40DP12H* 40DP120*
3 5 35 1P — 40EP12A* 40EP12B* 40EP12W* 40EP12F* 40EP12H* 40EP120*
3 7 1⁄2 45 2 — 40FP12A* 40FP12B* 40FP12W* 40FP12F* 40FP12H* 40FP120*
5 10 60 — 21⁄2 40GP12A* 40GP12B* 40GP12W* 40GP12F* 40GP12H* 40GP120*
7 1⁄2 15 90 3 — 40HP12A* 40HP12B* 40HP12W* 40HP12F* 40HP12H* 40HP120*
Open Type & Standard Width Enclosure, 4-Pole

Max Hp Enclosure
Open Type NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X NEMA 4X NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12
Fiberglass General Purpose Stainless b NEMA 3 & 4 NEMA 3/3R b
Watertight, Dust-tight Watertight, Dust-tight Div 1 and Div 2 Industrial Use
Cont- Class III
actor Bolted Enclosure
Indoor/Outdoor Use
200 230 460 575 Amp NEMA Half
Volts Volts Volts Volts Rating Size Size Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $
⁄3
1
1 1⁄2 2 2 9 00 — 40BP22A* 40BP22B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
3 7 1⁄2 10 10 27 1 — 40DP22A* 40DP22B* 40DP22W* 40DP22F* 40DP22H* 40DP220*
Vacuum Contactors, 3-Phase, 3-Pole a

Max Hp Contactor Open Type
Amp NEMA
200V 230V 460V 575V Rating Size Catalog Number List Price $
40 50 100 100 135 4 40JV32A*
75 100 200 200 270 5 40LV32A*
150 200 400 400 540 6 40MV32A*
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload amp b Forconduit hubs and conversion instructions, see d Coils D, F, or G will be wired for incoming voltage.
range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric Code) page 9/110. J coil will be wired for separate source. Coils E, H,
of typical industrial motors. All starter sizes carry c To order single phase contactor in an extra wide enclo- and L do not apply to single phase starters.
one maximum Hp rating. sure, order the enclosure kit from Page 9/113 and the open e 1 NO Auxiliary.
a Dual voltage coils not available for vacuum contactors. style contactor as separate items.
Refer to Page 9/119 for a complete list of available coil volt-
ages.

Reversing Heavy Duty Contactors • Revised •
Class 43 07/20/15
Selection

24 J
120 F
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. 110–120/220–240a A
200–208 D
220–240 G
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131. 220–240/440–480a C
440–480 H
575–600 E

Max Hp Enclosure
Open Typeg NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainlessb NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12 b
Class III
Cont- Bolted Enclosures
actor Indoor/Outdoor Use
1⁄2 1
⁄2 2 2 9 00 — 43BP32A* 43BP32B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
7 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 10 10 27 1 — 43DP32A* 43DP32B* 43DP32W* 43DP32F* 43DP32H* 43DP320*
10 15 25 25 45 2 — 43FP32A* 43FP32B* 43FP32W* 43FP32F* 43FP32H* 43FP320*
15 20 30 30 60 — 21⁄2 43GP32A* 43GP32B* 43GP32W* 43GP32F* 43GP32H* 43GP320*
25 30 50 50 90 3 — 43HP32A* 43HP32B* 43HP32W* 43HP32F* 43HP32H* 43HP320*
30 40 75 75 115 — 31⁄2 43IP32A* 43IP32B* 43IP32W* 43IP32F* 43IP32H* 43IP320*
40 50 100 100 135 4 — 43JG32A* 43JG32B* 43JG32W* 43JG32F* 43JG32H* 43JG320*
75 100 200 200 270 5 — 43LP32A* 43LP32B* 43LP32E*c — — — — 43LP320*
100 200 400 400 540 6 — 43MP32A* 43MP32B* 43MP32E* c — — — — 43MP320*
— 300 600 600 810 7e — 43NH32A* 43NH32B* 43NH32E* c — — — — 43NH320*
— 450 900 900 1215 8f — 43PH32A* — — — — — — — — — —
Open Type & Standard Width Enclosure, Single Phase, 3-Wire, 2-Poled
Max Hp Enclosure
Open Type NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainless b NEMA 4X Fiberglass NEMA 7 & 9 NEMA 12 b
Cont- Class III
208/ actor Bolted Enclosures
115 230 Amp NEMA Indoor/Outdoor Use
Volts Volts Rating Size Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $ Catalog No List Price $
1⁄3 1 9 00 43BP12A* 43BP12B* Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 — Use Size 0 —
1 2 18 0 43CP12A* 43CP12B* 43CP12W* 43CP12F* 43CP12H* 43CP120*
2 3 27 1 43DP12A* 43DP12B* 43DP12W* 43DP12F* 43DP12H* 43DP120*
3 5 35 1P 43EP12A* 43EP12B* 43EP12W* 43EP12F* 43EP12H* 43EP120*
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload c Enclosure is NEMA Type 4 (painted steel). f Only available
amp range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric d Coils D, F, or G will be wired for incoming voltage. J F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC
Code) of typical industrial motors. All starter sizes coil will be wired for separate source. Coils E, H, and L g Auxiliarycontacts
carry one maximum Hp rating. do not apply to single phase starters. 43B-43E 4th pole built-in
e Only available 43F-43J 2 NO & 2 NC
a Dual voltage coils not available in size 5–8 starters.
b For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see F coil 100-250V AC 50/60Hz, or DC
page 9/110. H coil 150-500V AC 50/60Hz, or DC

Heavy Duty Control
General
Class
48 — Overload Size No. of Poles
Trip Curve
A — Frame A Model 3 — 3 Phase
00 — Class 5, 10, 20 or 30 Selectable
B — Frame B T — ESP200 1 — Single Phase
Current Range
A — 0.25–1a
Reset
B — 0.75–3.4a
C — 3–12a S — Selectable (Man/Auto)
D — 5.5–22a
E — 10–40
F — 13–52
G — 25–100
H — 50–200
J — 100–300 (3.33-10 current range with 300:5 CT and 1 loop with frame A1 (3-12A)-device)
K — 133–400 (3.33-10 current range with 400:5 CT and 1 loop with frame A1 (3-12A)-device)
L — 200–600 (3.33-10 current range with 600:5 CT and 1 loop with frame A1 (3-12A)-device)
M — 250–750 (3.33-10 current range with 750:5 CT and 1 loop with frame A1 (3-12A)-device)
N — 400–1200 (3.33-10.17 currant range with 1200:5 CT and 1 loop with frame A1 (3-12A)-device)
Class Trip Curve

Model
958 — Overload A — 958
B — ESP200
Amp Range Type
E — 10–40 S — Selectable (Man/Auto)
G — 25–100
H — 50–200 No. of Poles
3 — 3 phase
Class Trip Curve

Model
958L — Overload A — 958L
B — ESP200
Amp Range Type
D — 5.5–22 S — Selectable (Man/Auto)
E — 10–40
F — 13–52 No. of Poles
G — 25–100 3 — 3 phase
H — 50–200
a Ranges available in Single or 3-phase.

Overload Relays
Solid State ESP200, Class 48, 958 and 958L
General
Features Benefits
b Trip Classes - 5, 10, 20, or 30 Selectable by DIP-switches b Field changeable reduces time and inventory. Suitable for
light, normal and heavy starting conditions
b Phase Loss Protection - Trips in less than 3 Seconds b Protects motor burn out and minimizes motor heating up
b Phase Unbalance - Trips based on Trip Class selected b Minimizes temperature rise of the motor on a asymmetrical
three-phase-system
b Ground Fault - Trips 60% of Motor Current b Provides optimum system protection of motors against
high-resistance short-circuits or ground faults due to moisture,
condensation, damage of insulation or any other reason
b Trip Indicator - Visible b Save time, faster to identify overload Trip

b Ambient Insensitive b Prevents nuisance tripping
b No Heaters Required b Saves cost and eliminates time for installation of heaters
b Self-Powered - No outside source required b Reduce cost for external power supply
b FLA dial with wide Adjustment - 4:1 ratio b Provides wide range, reduces inventory
b Self Protected in short circuit condition (when used with b Unlike bimetal overloads, this eliminates replacement of the
proper fuses or motor starter protector) overload heaters after short circuit
b Test Button - Tests Electronics b Tests the complete electronic functions including the trip
mechanism. Increases up time
b Thermal Memory b Prevents re-starting motor when it is still hot

b Conformally coated circuit board b Resists against environmental conditions
b 1 NO and 1NC Contacts Standard. B600, R300 b Makes it easier for user to wire local contacts
b Operating Temperature: -25 °C - 65 °C b Wide operating temperature range prevents nuisance tripping
with temperature changes
b Repeat Accuracy <1%. b For more precise settings and reduced nuisance tripping
b Removable Terminal Block b Terminal Block can be removed without removing wires.
Saves time for replacements
b Automatic reset b Auto. Reset is 3 minutes after tripping, allowing motor to

cool down before re-start. If Manual Reset is selected,
overload can be reset immediately
b Remote reset b As an alternative to the mechanical RESET options, an

electrical remote RESET can be used by applying 24 V DC
to terminals A3 and A4
b DIN Rail Mounted b Reduces installation time

b Touch - Safe Terminals b Protects against accidental touching of live circuits
b UL listed CSA certified b Third party approval standard

Overload Relays
Solid State ESP200, Class 48, 958, 958L and Bimetal
General
Ambient Compensated Bimetal

ESP200 Solid State Overload 958 or 958L Solid State Overload Single Phase and Three Phase
Applications 958 ESP200 Special Use Solid State b Ambient Compensated Bimetal
Overloads Overloads
ESP200 Solid State Overloads
—Automatic or manual reset adjustment
Designed for a wide variety of applica- This overload is specifically designed for
—A manual test button is provided
tions. The field selectable Trip Class 5, special applications, to provide excellent to test the operation of the 3-pole
10, 20 or 30 can easily be set by 2 DIP protection of hermetically sealed and overload relay control contacts
switches. This eliminates the guess artificially cooled motors that require —w15% nominal trip current adjustment
factor of an application requirements ambient insensitive and quick trip
—Accept either standard Class 20 or
and provides reduced inventory for response times. Combined with a series Quick Trip (NEMA Class 10) heater
multiple applications. The inherent lockout relay, it provides unsurpassed elements without any other chang-
benefits of the ESP200 ultimately protection for hermetically sealed es or adjustments
results in cost savings for the user. compressor motors in air conditioning —Available with a normally open contact
applications. The combination of high trip for an alarm circuit (SPDT) up to 60A
ESP200 has a 4:1 current adjustment speed, current adjustment, and ease of —Compensated bimetal overload
range with a fine adjustment dial installation makes it suitable for these relays provide a constant trip time in
labeled in full load amps. The heaterless applications. The trip curves are ambient temperatures from –20°F to
overload minimizes the heat trapped in customized to provide proper overload r170°F for a given heater rating
the enclosures, reduces cost for ventila- protection for these loads without b UL Listed File #E22655 or Component
tion or cooling. Easily accessible Reset causing nuisance tripping. Recognized
button, provides visible and b CSA Certified File #LR6535
audible indications to ensure the tripped It has selectable manual or automatic
overload is ready to re-start. reset mode, and provides ground fault Ambient Compensated Bimetal
selection to protect equipment from Overloads
Designed to replace thermal, or ESP100 damage in case of a fault.
overload relays for any application. It These thermal type overload relays are
has the same dimensions and footprint 958L ESP200 Oil Field Solid State used to protect motors from excessive
of the ESP100 overload relays. It can Overloads heat resulting from sustained motor
be directly coupled to the contactors overloads, rapid motor cycling and
Specifically designed for the oil market stalled rotor conditions. Although these
or remotely mounted. In addition to and the cycling loads experienced with
the NEMA contactor applications, it devices function based on thermal
these types of pumping applications. principles they are designed to
also can be used with other types of These overload relays provide protec-
controllers for applications requiring DP compensate for the ambient air
tion for standard motors, oil well pump temperature surrounding the overload.
or IEC contactors. As a retrofit for other motors, multi-torque connections, and
brands, it is used with a plate available This helps prevent the occurrence of
ultra-high slip motors. nuisance tripping when there are high
for retrofitting competitive products.
Rotors can be damaged in less than 15 surrounding ambient temperatures.
seconds during motor stall conditions The percentage of overload determines
if electrical power is not removed. To the length of time required to open the
prevent damage during motor stall, the circuit.
958L solid state overload removes the
power in 7 seconds at 250% lock rotor
current. Therefore, the motor casing
and the rotor will be protected from
being damage saving the user money
and time.

Overload Relays
Solid State Class 48, ESP200 and 3RB20
Selection
 For CT’s see Accessories page 9/67.
 To retrofit or direct mount to a contactor, order 49ASMP1, 2, or 3 separately. See
Retrofit Plates below.

 For remote mounting of frame size A order 49ASMS1 terminals separately, see page 9/108.
3-Phase, 48ATC3S00
Solid State—Class 48

Current Adjustment Range Phase Frame Size Catalog Number MRPD/MLFB List Price $
0.25–1 3 “A” 48ATA3S00 3UB81134AB2
0.75–3.4 3 “A” 48ATB3S00 3UB81134BB2
3–12 3 “A1” 48ATC3S00 3UB81234CW2
5.5–22 3 “A1” 48ATD3S00 3UB81234DW2
10–40 3 “A1” 48ATE3S00 3UB81234EW2
13–52 3 “B” 48BTF3S00 3UB81334FW2
25–100 3 “B” 48BTG3S00 3UB81334GW2
50–200 3 “B” 48BTH3S00 3UB81334HW2
100–300 3 “A1” b 48ATJ3S00 3UB81234JW2
133–400 3 “A1” h 48ATK3S00 3UB81234KW2
200–600 3 “A1” d 48ATL3S00 3UB81234LW2
250–750 3 “A1” g 48ATM3S00 3UB81234MW2
400–1220 3 “A1” e 48ATN3S00 3UB81234NW2
0.25–1 1 “A” 48ATA1S00 3UB88134AB2
0.75–3.4 1 “A” 48ATB1S00 3UB88134BB2
3–12 1 “A1” 48ATC1S00 3UB88234CW2
5.5–22 1 “A1” 48ATD1S00 3UB88234DW2
25-100 1 “B” 48BTG1S00 3UB88334GW2
Solid State—3RB206cf, 3-Phase, Manual/Auto Reset

Class 10 Class 20
For Contactor Size Setting Range Amps List Price $ List Price $
Catalog Number Catalog Number
5 55 - 250 3RB2066-1GC2 3RB2066-2GC2
6 160 - 630 3RB2066-1MC2 3RB2066-2MC2
Retrofit Plates for Contactors, Class 48

Replacement for Starter Sizes ESP200 Overload Frame Sizea Retrofit Plate Suffix Plate Kit Separate Price Adder $
Size 00–13⁄4 A or A1 1P 49ASMP1
Size 2, 21⁄2 B 2P 49ASMP2
Size 3, 31⁄2 B 3P 49ASMP3
Size 4 B 4P 49ASMP3
Ambient Compensated Bimetal—Open Type Class 48 Single Phase, 3-Phase (Panel Mount Only)
Amp Contact List
Poles Rating Auxiliary Contacts Rating Catalog Number Price $
25 1 NC 48DA18AA4
5A (B600)
60 1 NC 48GA18AA4
1 &
100 1 NC 48HA18AA4
5A (P300)
180 1 NC 48JA18AA4
30 1 NC 48DC38AA4
10A (A600)
30 1 NO/NC 48DC39AA4
&
60 1 NC 48GC38AA4
3 5A (P300)
60 1 NO/NC 48GC39AA4
100 3 NC 48HA38AA4
5A (B600) & 5A (P300)
180 3 NC 48JA38AA4
a To determine frame size of replacement solid state d Requires use of 600:5 Current Transformers–3 of g Requires use of 750:5 Current Transformers–3 of
overload, refer to retrofit plates table above. 97CT008. 97CT009.
b Requires use of 300:5 Current Transformers–3 of e Requires use of 1200:5 Current Transformers–3 of h Requires use of 400:5 Current Transformers–3 of
97CT005. 97CT012. 97CT006.
c Product Category: IEC. f Overload has busbar connections.

Overload Relays
Special Use Solid State Overloads, Class 958 and 958L
Selection
Current Transformers
Rating Catalog No. List Price $
150:5 97CT002
200:5 97CT003
250:5 97CT004
300:5 97CT005
400:5 97CT006
600:5 97CT008
750:5 97CT009
Class 958, 958L 1200:5 97CT012
Solid State—Class 958 and 958L

Current Adjustment Range Phase Frame Size Catalog Number MRPD/MLFB List Price $
10–40 3 “A1” 958EB3SA 3UB85235EW2
25–100 3 “B” 958GB3SA 3UB85335GW2
50–200 3 “B” 958HB3SA 3UB85335HW2
5.5–22 3 “A1” 958LDB3SA 3UB85236DW2
10–40 3 “A1” 958LEB3SA 3UB85236EW2
13–52 3 “B” 958LFB3SA 3UB85336FW2
25–100 3 “B” 958LGB3SA 3UB85336GW2
50–200 3 “B” 958LHB3SA 3UB85336HW2
Time - Current - Characteristics Time - Current - Characteristics Trip - curve depending on unbalance
CLASS 48
Time - Current - Characteristics
CLASS 48
CLASS 958, 958L
Time - Current - Characteristics
CLASS 958, 958L CLASS 20
Trip - curve depending on unbalance - CLASS 20
1000
1000
1000
phase unbalance = 0%, CLASS 20

500 phase unbalance = 50%, CLASS 20
500
500 phase unbalance = 80%, CLASS 20
Trip time in seconds
100 100 100
50 50 50
CLASS 30 - cold start
10 10
10
CLASS 958L
5 5
5
CLASS 5 - warm start

CLASS 958
1 1
0.6 1 1.5 2 5 10 0.6 1 1.5 2 5 10 1

multiple of full load amp (FLA) multiple of full load amp (FLA)
multiple of full load amp (FLA) multiple of full load amp (FLA) 0.6 1 1.5 2
multiple of full load amp (FLA)
5 10
multiple of full load amp (FLA)
a Temperature rating S25° to R60°C.

Pump Control Panels • Revised •
Slim Line NEMA Pump Controller for the Agricultural industry, Class 82 09/18/15
General
Features
The Class 82 Slim Line NEMA Pump was designed
specifically for the agricultural market. It is well suited for
irrigation and similar pumping applications and is built to
withstand the harsh elements of the outdoors
Typical applications include:

• Crop irrigation
• Sprinklers, misters and soakers
• Watering for livestock and other dairy applications
• Ground dewatering for excavation and construction sites
Why you should use the Class 82 Pump Panel

• Simplicity and its compact lightweight design makes
this an attractive solution to your budgeting challenges.
• The contactor is NEMA rated to provide reliable motor
control and protection expected in the most demanding
applications.
• The ESP200 solid-state overload relay has a protective
coating on the circuit board which gives it superior pro-
tection against high humidity, condensation and corro-
sive environments.
• Its size and weight is about half that of the Class 87
which increases the ease of installation.

82 A D C 4 F B H
Series
Starter Size
D = 1
OLR Current Range

B = 0.75-3.4A
C = 3-12A
D = 5.5-22A
Cover Control
E = 10-40A
4 = HOA selector switch only
6 = HOA selector switch with start push button
Disconnect Type
F = Fusible disconnect
Disconnect & Fuse Clip Rating

A = 30A/250V
B = 30A/600V
Coil Voltage
F = 110VAC 50HZ / 120VAC 60HZ
G = 220VAC 50HZ / 240VAC 60HZ
H = 480VAC 60HZ

• Revised • Pump Control Panels
09/18/15 Slim Line NEMA Pump Controller for the Agricultural industry, Class 82
General

 Field Modification Kits 50/60Hz Voltage Letter
(see accessories on this page)
110/120 F
 Factory Modifications (NA) 220/240 G
 Dimensions see page 9/167 480 H
 Wiring Diagram see page 9/187
 Replacement Parts
(refer to instruction sheet A5E35327591A)
Product Selection
Max Hp Rating HOA Only HOA & Start Push Button
Motor Voltage NEMA Overload Relay Disc. Amp Fuse Clip Catalog Catalog
230 460 Size Amp Range Rating Amp/Volts Number List Price $ Number List Price $
— 1 1 0.75–3.4 30 30A/600V 82ADB4FB* 82ADB6FB*
— 5 1 3–12 30 30A/600V 82ADC4FB* 82ADC6FB*
— 10 1 5.5–22 30 30A/600V 82ADD4FB* 82ADD6FB*
2 — 1 3–12 30 30A/250V 82ADC4FA* 82ADC6FA*
3 — 1 5.5–22 30 30A/250V 82ADD4FA* 82ADD6FA*
7 1/2 — 1 10–40 30 30A/250V 82ADE4FA* 82ADE6FA*
Replace the (*) with a letter from the coil table.
Accessories
Catalog List Catalog List
Image Description Number Price Image Description Number Price
3/4" type 3R conduit hub ECHS075
Contactor auxiliary
1" type 3R conduit hub ECHS100
contacts, side mounted
3RH29111DA11
1 NO/NC (NEMA A300/
1 1/4" type 3R conduit hub ECHS125 Q300)
1 1/2" type 3R conduit hub ECHS150
Disconnect switch ESP200 tamper resis-

49ASTC1
auxiliary contacts tance cover
HA261234
2 NO/2 NC DPDT
(NEMA A600)
Start push button with

52PA8A1K
contact block
Fuse puller kit
for 30A switch (1 kit HP61
required per switch)
Start legend plate 52NL03
30A, 240V Class R

HR21
Fuse Clip Kits
30A, 600V Class R

HR612
Fuse Clip Kits

Pump Control Panels • Revised •
Slim Line NEMA Pump Controller for the Agricultural industry, Class 82 09/18/15
Selection
Class 82 Technical information
General technical data:

Weight 23 lb
Height x Width x Depth 26 x 12 x 5 in.
Maximum altitude 6560 ft
Ambient (outside enclosure) storage temperature (-30 to 65)°C / (-22 to 149)°F
Ambient (outside enclosure) operating temperature (-20 to 40)°C / (-4 to 104)°F
Country of origin USA
Horsepower rating:
82ADB*FBH 1Hp@460VAC (NEMA size 1) 82ADC*FAG 2Hp@230VAC (NEMA size 1)
82ADC*FBH 5Hp@460VAC (NEMA size 1) 82ADD*FAG 3Hp@230VAC (NEMA size 1)
82ADD*FBH 10Hp@460VAC (NEMA size 1) 82ADE*FAG 7 1/2Hp@230VAC (NEMA size 1)
Contactor:
Number of NO main contacts 3
Amp rating 32 A
Mechanical operating cycles 10,000,000
Internal / standard auxiliary contact:

Number of NC / NO auxiliary contacts 1NC / 1NO
NEMA contact rating designation A600 AC / Q600 DC
Optional auxiliary contacts available: Yes
Coil:
Voltage 110/120 V 50/60 Hz, 220/230 V 50/60 Hz or 460 V 60Hz
Apparent pull-in / holding power 81 VA / 10.5 VA
Normal coil operating limits (% of rated voltage) 80% - 110% at 60 Hz
Pick-up time / Drop-out time 8-40 / 4-16 msec
Overload Relay:
Current range 0.75 - 3.4 or 3 - 12 or 5.5–22 or 10 - 40 Amps
Trip Class Class 5 / 10 / 20 (factory set) / 10
Trip detection Overload, phase failure, phase unbalance, ground fault
Phase failure sensitivity Trip time after phase-loss: < 3 sec
Repeat accuracy within 1%
Reset options Manual, automatic and remote
External reset Yes
Test function Electronics & manual actuation
Conformal coating on printed circuit board Yes
Number of NC / NO auxiliary contacts 1NC / 1NO
Rating of auxiliary contacts B600 AC / R300 DC
Single contact isolation 600 V
Dual contact isolation 300 V differing polarity / 600 V common polarity

• Revised • Pump Control Panels
09/18/15 Slim Line NEMA Pump Controller for the Agricultural industry, Class 82
Technical Data
Class 82 Technical information
Disconnect Switch:
Rating 30 A with 30A/600 or 30A/250 V Class H fuse clips
Fuse type accepted Class H, J or R
Enclosure:
Type NEMA Type 3/3R enclosure
Rating Weather proof for outdoor use
Standard Control Devices:

Hand-Off-Auto selector switch (both 4 & 6 cover control) 30mm metal housing with chrome finish
Start push button (6 cover control only) 30mm metal housing with chrome finish
Mounting/wiring:
Mounting orientation Vertical
Mounting type Pole and surface
Disconnect line side connection type / torque Box lug / 35 lb-in (14 - 10); 40 lb-in (8); 45 lb-in (6 - 4) AWG
Disconnect line side solid & stranded conductors 1x(14 - 2 AWG) 60/75°C AL or CU
Power terminal block connection type / torque Screw / 24 - 32 lb-in.
Power terminal block solid & stranded conductors 1x(18 - 2 AWG) 75°C CU
Control terminal block connection type / torque Screw / 12 - 18 lb-in.
Control terminal block solid & stranded conductors 1x(22 - 8 AWG) 75°C CU
Coil connection type / torque Screw / 7 - 10 lb-in
Coil solid & stranded conductors 2 x (16 - 12 AWG) CU 60/75°C
Main auxiliary contact connection type / torque Screw / 7- 10 lb-in
Main auxiliary contact solid & stranded conductors 2 x (20 - 16 AWG), 2 x (18 - 14 AWG) 75°C CU
OLR auxiliary contact connection type / torque Screw / 7 - 10 lb-in
OLR auxiliary contact solid & stranded conductors 2 x (20 - 14 AWG) CU 60/75°C
Short circuit current rating:

Fuses 10kA@600V (Class H or K); 100kA@600V (Class R or J)
Certificates/approvals:
cULus UL (file no. E185287)
UL rated Service Entrance Equipment

Duplex Heavy Duty Controllers
General
Two field devices such as pressure Features
switches or float switches provide
Two control transformers may be
electrical signals to the duplex controller.
provided for low voltage control to
One remote device is set to initiate the
safeguard personnel from high voltage.
starting of the lead motor. This motor is
One transformer is required for each
rated to handle normal system demand.
starter to provide independent control
The second motor is usually the same
circuits.
rating and is referred to as the lag motor.
It is only energized when the system A Hand-Off-Auto selector switch for each
Class 83 demand is greater than the capacity of starter may be mounted in the enclosure
the lead motor. The lag motor is started door or furnished separately for remote
when the second remote device is control. Test push buttons or pilot lights
signalling for more output than the may also be installed on the enclosure.
lead motor can produce. Solid-state or Ambient Compensated
The alternation function reverses the Bimetal Overload Relays are supplied as
lead and lag mode for the two motors in standard.
Class 84 a duplex system. Upon alternation the Heavy Duty Disconnect Switches
first motor as described above becomes
The disconnect switch that goes the
the lag motor and the second motor
distance in durability, performance and
Features assumes the lead function. The
reliability has the following advantages:
alternation is usually programmed to
b Heavy Duty NEMA Starters occur at any time both pumps come to b Visible blades for the highest level
b Solid State or Thermal Overload rest. The alternation function equalizes of safety
Relays wear on the two machines and extends
b Double break switching action to
b Fusible or MCP the life of seals and bearings. reduce arcing, increase lifetime and
Enclosure Types eliminate the “electric hinge”
b Heavy Duty Disconnect Handle
b Flexibility with Field Modifications Duplex controllers are available in b More rugged positive action switch
NEMA 1, 12/3/3R, 4 (painted) and b Oversized lugs are standard
b Alternator Transfer on De-energization 4/4X (stainless) enclosures.
b UL Listed for Outdoor Use and Enclosures protect personnel from
b Line side shield to help guard
Service Equipment personnel from contact with live parts
contact with live parts and depending
b UL Listed file #E14900 (class 83); file upon the construction, protect the b Higher horsepower rating for
#E185287 (class 84) control in varying degrees from physical design E high efficiency motors

b CSA certified file #LR 6535 (class 83
damage and harmful atmospheres. All b UL listed for IIsco, Burndy and T&B
& 84) enclosures are supplied with corrosion crimp type lugs
resistant finishes.
b The 200A switch accepts up to 300
Heavy Duty Starters MCM versus 250 MCM wire size
Application
These Duplex controllers use the same Its rugged construction - with a high
Duplex pump controls are designed to starters described in the heavy duty fault withstand rating of 100kA at 600
perform one or both of two distinct starter section of this catalog. VAC when fused with class R rated
functions: duplexing and alternation. The fuses - meets the most stringent
duplexing function provides capacity for Siemens Type ETI Circuit Breaker
industry standards set forth by the
system peaking or above normal demand The ETI circuit breaker is a device automotive, petro-chemical, and pulp
without having the full motor capacity designed specifically for application and paper industries. UL recognized and
spinning at all times. It also provides in motor circuits. The ETI is a magnetic CSA certified, our disconnect switches
standby capacity for use when one of the only protective device designed to are available either non-fusible or fusible
motors or pumps is disabled. The duplex- provide protection against short with class R and class J fuse clips.
ing function is also referred to as lead/lag circuit current.
or main/standby. When two pumps or The instantaneous-only type ETI circuit
compressors are controlled by a duplex breaker employs adjustable magnetic
controller, they are started in sequence trip settings to allow broader application
as necessary to attain preset values of ranges and a higher degree of motor
pressure, flow or liquid level. short circuit protection.

Non-Combination, Class 83
Selection

 Standard duplex controllers include an alternator indicated by characters "92" within the cata-
60Hz Voltage Letter
log number. The standard coil voltage supplied with the alternator is 120V separate control.
This is the only control voltage available with the alternator. 24 b
J
 To omit the alternator, change the character string within the catalog number from "92" to
120 F
200–208b D
"95". All coil voltages listed in the coil table are valid with non-alternator controllers. 220–240b G
 To change the coil voltage for non-alternator controllers with a solid-state OLR, change the 277b L
9th character in the catalog number with a letter shown in the coil table. To change the coil 440–480b H
550–600b E
voltage for non-alternator controllers with a bimetal OLR, change the 8th character in the cata-
log number with a letter shown in the coil table.
 Heater elements for bimetal overloads see page 9/124 (6-Required).
 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104.  Wiring Diagrams see page 9/185.
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119.  Replacement Parts see page 9/131.
Non-Combination (with Solid-State Overload)

NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainless NEMA 4 Painted NEMA 12
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 3/3Ra
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Amp Frame Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Size Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 0 — 0.25–1 A 83CUA92BF 83CUA92WF 83CUA92EF 83CUA920F
1
⁄2 ⁄4
3
11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 83CUB92BF 83CUB92WF 83CUB92EF 83CUB920F
2 2 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 83CUC92BF 83CUC92WF 83CUC92EF 83CUC920F
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 83CUD92BF 83CUD92WF 83CUD92EF 83CUD920F
1
⁄6 ⁄6
1
⁄3
1
⁄2
1
1 — 0.25–1 A 83DUA92BF 83DUA92WF 83DUA92EF 83DUA920F
1
⁄2 ⁄4
3
11⁄2 2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 83DUB92BF 83DUB92WF 83DUB92EF 83DUB920F
2 2 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 83DUC92BF 83DUC92WF 83DUC92EF 83DUC920F
3 3 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 83DUD92BF 83DUD92WF 83DUD92EF 83DUD920F
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 83DUE92BF 83DUE92WF 83DUE92EF 83DUE920F
10 10 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 83EUE92BF 83EUE92WF 83EUE92EF 83EUE920F
10 15 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 83FUF92BF 83FUF92WF 83FUF92EF 83FUF920F
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 83GUG92BF 83GUG92WF 83GUG92EF 83GUG920F
25 30 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 83HUG92BF 83HUG92WF 83HUG92EF 83HUG920F
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 83IUH92BF 83IUH92WF 83IUH92EF 83IUH920F
40 50 100 100 4 — 50–200 B 83JUH92BF 83JUH92WF 83JUH92EF 83JUH920F
Non-Combination (with Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload)

Max Hp Enclosure
NEMA 1 NEMA 4/4X Stainless NEMA 4 Painted NEMA 12/3Ra
General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight Watertight Industrial Use
Corrosion Resistant Dust-tight Weatherproof
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half 304 Stainless Steel
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
3 3 5 5 0 — 83CP92BF81 83CP92WF81 83CP92EF81 83CP920F81
71⁄2 71⁄2 10 10 1 — 83DP92BF81 83DP92WF81 83DP92EF81 83DP920F81
10 10 15 15 — 13⁄4 83EP92BF81 83EP92WF81 83EP92EF81 83EP920F81
10 15 25 25 2 — 83FP92BF81 83FP92WF81 83FP92EF81 83FP920F81
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 83GP92BF81 83GP92WF81 83GP92EF81 83GP920F81
25 30 50 50 3 — 83HP92BF81 83HP92WF81 83HP92EF81 83HP920F81
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 83IP92BF81 83IP92WF81 83IP92EF81 83IP920F81
40 50 100 100 4 — 83JP92BF81 83JP92WF81 83JP92EF81 83JP920F81
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload a NEMA 12 is field convertible to NEMA 3/3R. For conduit  ForNO/NC SPDT contact on overload, replace "81"
amp range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric hubs and conversion instructions, see page 9/110. with "91". "81" will give a NC contact.
Code) of typical industrial motors. All starter sizes b Not available on standard alternator style (‘92’ in the
carry one maximum Hp rating. catalog number).

Combination Disconnect (Fusible & Non-Fusible), Class 84
Selection

 Standard duplex controllers include an alternator indicated by characters "92" within the cata-
60Hz Voltage Letter
log number. The standard coil voltage supplied with the alternator is 120V separate control.
This is the only control voltage available with the alternator. 24b J
120 F
 To omit the alternator, change the character string within the catalog number from "92" to 200–208b D
"95". All coil voltages listed in the coil table are valid with non-alternator controllers. 220–240b G
277b L
 To change the coil voltage for non-alternator controllers with a solid-state OLR, change the 440–480b H
10th character in the catalog number with a letter shown in the coil table. To change the coil 550–600b E
voltage for non-alternator controllers with a bimetal OLR, change the 9th character in the cata-
 Heater elements for bimetal overloads see page 9/124 (6-Required).
 For factory installed fusible disconnect, see page 9/120.  Dimensions see page 9/168.
Two Disconnect Switches with Solid-State Overload

General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 3/3Ra
Disc.
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 0 — 0.25–1 A 30 84CUA92BDF 84CUA92WDF 84CUA92EDF 84CUA920DF
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 84CUB92BDF 84CUB92WDF 84CUB92EDF 84CUB920DF
2 2 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 30 84CUC92BDF 84CUC92WDF 84CUC92EDF 84CUC920DF
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 30 84CUD92BDF 84CUD92WDF 84CUD92EDF 84CUD920DF
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 ⁄3
1
⁄2
1
1 — 0.25–1 A 30 84DUA92BDF 84DUA92WDF 84DUA92EDF 84DUA920DF
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 30 84DUB92BDF 84DUB92WDF 84DUB92EDF 84DUB920DF
2 2 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 30 84DUC92BDF 84DUC92WDF 84DUC92EDF 84DUC920DF
3 3 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 30 84DUD92BDF 84DUD92WDF 84DUD92EDF 84DUD920DF
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 30 84DUE92BDF 84DUE92WDF 84DUE92EDF 84DUE920DF
10 10 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 60 84EUE92BDF 84EUE92WDF 84EUE92EDF 84EUE920DF
10 15 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 60 84FUF92BDF 84FUF92WDF 84FUF92EDF 84FUF920DF
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 100 84GUG92BDF 84GUG92WDF 84GUG92EDF 84GUG920DF
20 25 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 100 84HUG92BDF 84HUG92WDF 84HUG92EDF 84HUG920DF
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 200 84IUH92BDF 84IUH92WDF 84IUH92EDF 84IUH920DF
40 50 100 100 4 — 50–200 B 200 84JUH92BDF 84JUH92WDF 84JUH92EDF 84JUH920DF
Two Disconnect Switches with Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload

Max Hp Enclosure
Disc Corrosion Resistant Dust-tight Weatherproof
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Amp 304 Stainless Steel
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
3 3 5 5 0 — 30 84CP92BDF81 84CP92WDF81 84CP92EDF81 84CP920DF81
71⁄2 71⁄2 10 10 1 — 30 84DP92BDF81 84DP92WDF81 84DP92EDF81 84DP920DF81
10 10 15 15 — 13⁄4 60 84EP92BDF81 84EP92WDF81 84EP92EDF81 84EP920DF81
10 15 25 25 2 — 60 84FP92BDF81 84FP92WDF81 84FP92EDF81 84FP920DF81
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 100 84GP92BDF81 84GP92WDF81 84GP92EDF81 84GP920DF81
20 25 50 50 3 — 100 84HP92BDF81 84HP92WDF81 84HP92EDF81 84HP920DF81
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 200 84IP92BDF81 84IP92WDF81 84IP92EDF81 84IP920DF81
40 50 100 100 4 — 200 84JP92BDF81 84JP92WDF81 84JP92EDF81 84JP920DF81
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload a NEMA 12 is field convertible to NEMA 3/3R. For conduit  ForNO/NC SPDT contact on overload, replace "81"
Code) of typical industrial motors. All starter sizes b Not available on standard alternator style
carry one maximum Hp rating. (‘92’ in the catalog number).

Combination Circuit Breaker, Class 84
Selection

 Standard duplex controllers include an alternator indicated by characters "92" within the cata- 60Hz Voltage Letter
log number. The standard coil voltage supplied with the alternator is 120V separate control. 24b J
This is the only control voltage available with the alternator. 120 F
200–208b D
 To omit the alternator, change the character string within the catalog number from "92" to
220–240b G
"95". All coil voltages listed in the coil table are valid with non-alternator controllers. 277b L
 To change the coil voltage for non-alternator controllers, change the 10th character in the cata- 440–480b H
550–600b E
 Heater elements for bimetal overloads see page 9/124 (6-Required).  Dimensions see page 9/168.
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (with Solid-State Overload)

General Purpose Watertight, Dust-tight, Corrosion Watertight, Dust-tight NEMA 3/3Ra
Resistant , 304 Stainless Steel, Industrial Use, Weatherproof
Motor
Circuit
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Amp Frame Interrupter Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Size ETI Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1
⁄6 1
⁄6 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 0 — 0.25–1 A 3 84CUA92BMF 84CUA92WMF 84CUA92EMF 84CUA920MF
1
⁄2 3
⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 0.75–3.4 A 3 84CUB92BMF 84CUB92WMF 84CUB92EMF 84CUB920MF
2 2 5 5 0 — 3–12 A1 10 84CUC92BMF 84CUC92WMF 84CUC92EMF 84CUC920MF
3 3 — — 0 — 5.5–22 A1 25 84CUD92BMF 84CUD92WMF 84CUD92EMF 84CUD920MF
⁄6
1
⁄6
1 1
⁄3 1
⁄2 1 — 0.25–1 A 3 84DUA92BMF 84DUA92WMF 84DUA92EMF 84DUA920MF
⁄2
1
⁄4
3
11⁄2 2 1 — 0.75–3.4 A 3 84DUB92BMF 84DUB92WMF 84DUB92EMF 84DUB920MF
2 2 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 10 84DUC92BMF 84DUC92WMF 84DUC92EMF 84DUC920MF
3 3 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 25 84DUD92BMF 84DUD92WMF 84DUD92EMF 84DUD920MF
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 30 84DUE92BMF 84DUE92WMF 84DUE92EMF 84DUE920MF
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 40 84EUE92BMF 84EUE92WMF 84EUE92EMF 84EUE920MF
10 15 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 50 84FUF92BMF 84FUF92WMF 84FUF92EMF 84FUF920MF
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 100 84GUG92BMF 84GUG92WMF 84GUG92EMF 84GUG920MF
20 25 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 100 84HUG92BMF 84HUG92WMF 84HUG92EMF 84HUG920MF
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 125 84IUH92BMF 84IUH92WMF 84IUH92EMF 84IUH920MF
40 50 100 100 4 — 50–200 B 150 84JUH92BMF 84JUH92WMF 84JUH92EMF 84JUH920MF
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (with Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload)

Max Hp Enclosure

Motor Corrosion Resistant Dust-tight Weatherproof
304 Stainless Steel
Circuit
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Interrupter
Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size ETI
Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
1⁄2 3⁄4 11⁄2 2 0 — 3 84CPB92BMF81 84CPB92WMF81 84CPB92EMF81 84CPB920MF81
2 2 5 5 0 — 10 84CPD92BMF81 84CPD92WMF81 84CPD92EMF81 84CPD920MF81
3 3 — — 0 — 25 84CPE92BMF81 84CPE92WMF81 84CPE92EMF81 84CPE920MF81
1⁄2 3⁄4 11⁄2 2 1 — 3 84DPB92BMF81 84DPB92WMF81 84DPB92EMF81 84DPB920MF81
2 2 5 5 1 — 10 84DPD92BMF81 84DPD92WMF81 84DPD92EMF81 84DPD920MF81
3 3 10 10 1 — 25 84DPE92BMF81 84DPE92WMF81 84DPE92EMF81 84DPE920MF81
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 30 84DPF92BMF81 84DPF92WMF81 84DPF92EMF81 84DPF920MF81
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 40 84EPF92BMF81 84EPF92WMF81 84EPF92EMF81 84EPF920MF81
10 10 — — — 13⁄4 50 84EPG92BMF81 84EPG92WMF81 84EPG92EMF81 84EPG920MF81
— — 15 20 2 — 40 84FPF92BMF81 84FPF92WMF81 84FPF92EMF81 84FPF920MF81
10 15 25 25 2 — 50 84FPH92BMF81 84FPH92WMF81 84FPH92EMF81 84FPH920MF81
— — 30 30 — 21⁄2 50 84GPH92BMF81 84GPH92WMF81 84GPH92EMF81 84GPH920MF81
15 20 — — — 21⁄2 100 84GPJ92BMF81 84GPJ92WMF81 84GPJ92EMF81 84GPJ920MF81
— — 30 40 3 — 50 84HPJ92BMF81 84HPJ92WMF81 84HPJ92EMF81 84HPJ920MF81
20 25 50 50 3 — 100 84HPK92BMF81 84HPK92WMF81 84HPK92EMF81 84HPK920MF81
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 125 84IPL92BMF81 84IPL92WMF81 84IPL92EMF81 84IPL920MF81
40 50 100 100 4 — 150 84JPM92BMF81 84JPM92WMF81 84JPM92EMF81 84JPM920MF81
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload a NEMA 12 is field convertible to NEMA 3/3R. For conduit  For NO/NC SPDT contact on overload, replace "81"
Code) of typical industrial motors. All starter sizes b Not available on standard alternator style
carry one maximum Hp rating. (‘92’ in the catalog number).

Pump Control Panels
Class 87, 88
General
Features Application Features

b Fully Gasketed NEMA 3R Rainproof Heavy duty pump control panels are Specified by Fortune 500 companies,
Enclosures designed to withstand the most Siemens NEMA starters offer
demanding environments. Typical prolonged service under severe duty
b 100,000 Amp Interrupting Capacity conditions. NEMA rated, these starters
with Class R Fuses applications include irrigation, agriculture,
petrochemical, wastewater treatment utilize large silver cadmium oxide

b Heavy Duty NEMA Starters and wherever motor control is contacts and wide copper heat sinks
b Solid State or Ambient Compensated challenged by harsh elements. to ensure rapid heat dissipation and
Bimetal Overload Relays Rugged pump control panels utilized maximum electrical life.

b Heavy Duty Disconnect Handle cold forming “tox” process. They are ESP200 solid state overload relay
b Available in Reduced Voltage Versions more rainproof, sleet and ice Refer to the section on Class 48 over-
resistant than in the past. load relays for features and benefits.
b Bold Pilot Legend on Front Pump panels are factory set at trip Class
Installation is easy. Panels are factory
b Generous Accessory Space wired to provide flexible control and 10.
b Copper Grounding Lug For Three protect against short circuits and The ambient compensated bimetal
#6 Wires overloads. Ample space is provided overload relays are designed to

b UL Listed for Outdoor Use and for field modifications and installation parallel thermal characteristics of typical
Service Equipment File #E185287 of accessories. pump motors. They prevent nuisance
The pump control panels feature a full trips that may result from operation of
sized removable auxiliary panel for the the control in a higher ambient tempera-
mounting of accessories. The fusible ture than that at the pump. These relays
version features fuse clips for full sized are trip-free, tamperproof and can be set
RK5 or compact class J fuses and to reset automatically or manually.
accessory mounting space for the HOA and Start Pushbutton
most commonly used accessories. Every pump panel comes with an HOA
Class 87 pump panels become jockey and a start pushbutton.
pump panels with the addition of a Half Size Starters
pressure switch. The jockey pump’s
Siemens motor matched starters feature
primary function is to maintain water
all the rugged performance characteristics
pressure at a preset level and thus
of our NEMA rated starter sizes, but are
compensate for possible shortage of
fractionally sized to more closely match
water in the pumping system. When the
your exact motor rating. As a result,
water pressure drops below the preset
significant economic savings are made
level, the pressure switch energizes
possible without sacrificing the reliability
the starter which in turn activates the
you expect from a heavy duty starter.
jockey pump. The water pressure is then
brought back up to the desired level. This These additional starter sizes have the
insures the maintenance of proper water reserve capacity to handle occasional
pressure at all times. plugging and jogging without de-rating
the device.
Siemens motor matched can save hun-
dreds, even thousands of dollars per
project.
Siemens motor matched starters comply
with NEMA, UL and CSA standards.

Pump Control Panels
Class 87, 88
General
Panels are predrilled for easy repositioning Safety Disconnect Handle Auxiliary Equipment
of the fuse trailer block to accommodate Up to three padlocks can be used to Pilot Lights are easily installed on the
250 and 600 volt fuses and full sized RK lock the disconnect in the OFF position. enclosure. Oil Tight and Heavy Duty,
or compact J fuses. Circuit breakers are Maintenance work can be performed they meet NEMA A600 requirements.
also available. without hazard to personnel. Lightning Arresters protect the con-
Heavy Duty Fusible External Reset trol panel from lightning induced surges.
Disconnect Switch
The overload relay may be quickly reset Undervoltage and Phase Sensing
The disconnect switch has the following by means of a button on the front of the Relays protect the pump against low
advantages: enclosure. voltage, voltage imbalance, loss of phase
b Visible blades for the highest Bold Pilot Legend and phase reversal.
level of safety Anti-Backspin Timers prevent the
Provides positive indication of the
b Double Break Switching Action selector switch position for use to motor from starting during motor/shaft
to reduce arcing, increase lifetime stop the pump motor. backspin.
and eliminate the “electric hinge” The TOX Box
Ground Lugs
b Oversized lugs are standard Siemens uses the TOX process to
Insures proper connecting of ground
b Line side shield to help guard wires and lightning arresters. manufacture the enclosures for the
personnel from contact with live parts pump panels.
UL Listed
Motor Circuit Protector Assures proper construction throughout Advantages of the TOX process:
The motor circuit protector provides fast, control panel. b Joints are 50-70% stronger
accurate fault clearing that will minimize
damage to the motor and control
Reduced Voltage b Since the TOX process compresses
Available in part winding, wye delta and the metal at the joint, it does not
apparatus and protect branch circuit leave the high stresses in the metal
conductors. Continuous current ratings auto transformer types, these controls
and adjustable trip ranges meet NEC may be necessary where the power b Increased corrosion resistance.
requirements for full load and locked company limits the amount of current The protective layer on the metal is
rotor currents. The adjustable drawn from its lines, or where starting not damaged in the process, but
instantaneous trip point can be set torque must be reduced. instead flows with the material
precisely to assure fault protection Fully gasketed NEMA 3/12 weather- Class 87 NEMA Vacuum Starter
and eliminate nuisance tripping. proof enclosures are supplied with Pump Control Panels
Removable Door Class 88 reduced voltage starters. The Siemens vacuum starter pump
Enclosure door may be lifted off to make Part Winding Starters apply start- controllers are designed for the harsh-
wiring easier. ing current in timed steps to minimize est environments. Typical environ-
voltage fluctuations. ments include chemical, petrochemical,
Mounting Flanges
Auto Transformer Starters maintain waste water treatment and mining.
Convenient flanges at top and bottom Contaminations present in these
of the enclosure provide easy mounting. a closed circuit during transition and
eliminate voltage or current surges. severe environments are detrimental
They fit pole or flat surfaces using to conventional air-break contacts
keyhole slots. They draw less current than part winding
starters and are well suited for starting decreasing their life expectancy and
Quarter Turn Latches motors over 20 Hp. reliability. The Siemens vacuum starter
Quarter turns are utilized to secure the pump controllers are well suited for
Wye Delta starters and motors are these environments because the
door.
used in areas where the power supply is contacts are contained in hermetically
Wind Catches inadequate to supply full starting current sealed contact tubes. This prevents
A wind catch is provided to prevent the without objectionable voltage drop or for contaminates in the atmosphere from
door from slamming shut (or open) due applications where low starting torque is affecting the operation of the contacts.
to high wind conditions. required. Centrifugal pumps and similar Additionally, neither arcs nor arcing
apparatus requiring a low starting torque gases are produced which dramatically
are typical applications. Both ends of all increases the electrical endurance of
three windings of the wye delta motor the contacts.
are brought out so that they may be
accessible for reconnecting from wye
to delta.

Pump Control Panels
Standard Pump Panel with Solid State Overload, Class 87
Selection

 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104. 60Hz Voltage Letter
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. 24 J
 Dimensions see page 9/169. 120 F

110–120/220–240 Aa
Wiring Diagrams see page 9/187. 200–208 D
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131. 220–240 G
 Sizes 1-4 will be supplied standard with a 240/480 volt coil. To 220–240/440–480 Ca
277 L
change the coil voltage, change the 8th character in the catalog 440–480 H
number to the letter shown in the coil table. 550–600 E
 Sizes 5 & 6 will be supplied standard with a 480 volt coil. To change
the coil voltage, change the 8th character in the catalog number to
the letter shown in the coil table.
Fusible Disconnect
Max Hp Overload Disc. Fuse
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Amp Frame Amp Clip Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Size Range Amp / Volts Number Price $
— — 1 1 1 — 0.75–3.4b A 30 30A/600V 87DUB6FC
— — 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 30 30A/600V 87DUC6FC
— — 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 30 30A/600V 87DUD6FC
— — 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 60 60A/600V 87DUD60C
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 30 30A/600V 87EUE6FC
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 60 60A/600V 87EUE60C
— — 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 60 60A/600V 87FUF6FC
— — 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 100 100A/600V 87FUF60C
— — 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 60 60A/600V 87GUG6FC
— — 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 100 100A/600V 87GUG60C
— — 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 100 100A/600V 87HUG6FC
— — 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 200 200A/600V 87HUG60C
— — 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 200 200A/600V 87IUH6FC
— — 100 100 4 — 50–200 B 200 200A/600V 87JUH6FC
— — 200 200 5 — 55–250 — 400 400A/600V 87LPU6FH
— — 250 — 6 — 160–630 — 600 600A/600V 87MSW6FH
2 2 — — 1 — 3–12 A1 30 30A/250V 87DUC6LC
3 3 — — 1 — 5.5–22 A1 30 30A/250V 87DUD6LC
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 30 30A/250V 87DUE6LC
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 10–40 A1 60 60A/250V 87DUE6PC
10 10 — — — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 60 60A/250V 87EUE6LC
10 15 — — 2 — 13–52 B 60 60A/250V 87FUF6LC
10 15 — — 2 — 13–52 B 100 100A/250V 87FUF6PC
15 20 — — — 21⁄2 25–100 B 60 60A/250V 87GUG6LC
15 20 — — — 21⁄2 25–100 B 100 100A/250V 87GUG6PC
20 30 — — 3 — 25–100 B 100 100A/250V 87HUG6LC
25 30 — — 3 — 25–100 B 200 200A/250V 87HUG6PC
30 40 — — — 31⁄2 50–200 B 200 200A/250V 87IUH6LC
40 50 — — 4 — 50–200 B 200 200A/250V 87JUH6LC
75 100 — — 5 — 55–250 — 400 400A/250V 87LPU6LG
Circuit Breaker
Max Hp Overload Motor Circuit
200 230 460 575 NEMA Half Amp Frame Interrupter Catalog List
Volts Volts Volts Volts Size Size Range Size ETI Amps Number Price $
1
⁄2 1
⁄2 1 1 1 — 0.75–3.4b A 3 87DUB6MC
2 2 5 5 1 — 3–12 A1 10 87DUC6MC
3 3 10 10 1 — 5.5–22 A1 25 87DUD6MC
71⁄2 71⁄2 10 — 1 — 10–40 A1 30 87DUE6MC
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 10–40 A1 40 87EUE6MC
10 15 25 25 2 — 13–52 B 50 87FUF6MC
15 20 30 30 — 21⁄2 25–100 B 100 87GUG6MC
25 30 50 50 3 — 25–100 B 100 87HUG6MC
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 50–200 B 125 87IUH6MC
40 50 100 100 4 — 50–200 B 150 87JUH6MC
50 75 150 200 5 — 55–250 — 250 87LPT6MH
75 100 200 200 5 — 55–250 — 400 87LPU6MH
100 125 250 300 6 — 160–630 — 400 87MSW6MH
150 200 400 400 6 — 160–630 — 600 87MSX6MH
Note: All starter sizes carry one maximum Hp rating (per aNot available on Size 5 and larger.  A
version with coil code A is also stocked via
the National Electric Code). b For an overload amp range of 0.25-1A, change the Controls Express.
5th character from a ‘B’ to an ‘A’.

Pump Control Panels
Pump Panel with Ambient Compensated Bimetal Overload, Class 87
Selection

Heater elements for bimetal overloads see page 9/124 (3-Required).
 60Hz Voltage Letter
24 J
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. 120 F

110–120/220–240 Aa
Dimensions see page 9/169. 200–208 D
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/187. 220–240 G
220–240/440–480 Ca
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131. 277 L
 Sizes 1-4 will be supplied standard with a 230/480 volt coil. To change the coil 440–480 H
voltage, change the 8th character in the catalog number to the letter shown in 550–600 E
the coil table.

Sizes 5 & 6 will be supplied standard with a 480 volt coil. To change the coil
voltage, change the 8th character in the catalog number to the letter shown
in the coil table.
Fusible Disconnect
Max HP Disc Fuse Clip
200V 230V 460V 575V NEMA Size Half Size Amp Rating Amps/Volts Catalog Number List Price $
— — 10 10 1 — 30 30A/600V 87DAE6FC
— — 10 10 1 — 60 60A/600V 87DAE60C
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 30 30A/600V 87EAF6FC
— — 15 15 — 13⁄4 60 60A/600V 87EAF60C
— — 25 25 2 — 60 60A/600V 87FAJ6FC
— — 25 25 2 — 100 100A/600V 87FAJ60C
— — 30 30 — 21⁄2 60 60A/600V 87GAK6FC
— — 30 30 — 21⁄2 100 100A/600V 87GAK60C
— — 50 50 3 — 100 100A/600V 87HAN6FC
— — 50 50 3 — 200 200A/600V 87HAN60C
— — 75 75 — 31⁄2 200 200A/600V 87IAP6FC
— — 100 100 4 — 200 200A/600V 87JAR6FC
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 30 30A/250V 87DAE6LC
71⁄2 71⁄2 — — 1 — 60 60A/250V 87DAE6PC
10 10 — — — 13⁄4 60 60A/250V 87EAG6LC
10 15 — — 2 — 60 60A/250V 87FAJ6LC
10 15 — — 2 — 100 100A/250V 87FAJ6PC
15 20 — — — 21⁄2 100 100A/250V 87GAL6LC
25 30 — — 3 — 100 100A/250V 87HAN6LC
25 30 — — 3 — 200 200A/250V 87HAN6PC
30 40 — — — 31⁄2 200 200A/250V 87IAP6LC
40 50 — — 4 — 200 200A/250V 87JAR6LC
Circuit Breaker
Max HP Motor Circuit
Interrupter
200V 230V 460V 575V NEMA Size Half Size ETI Amps Catalog Number List Price $
⁄
12 ⁄
12 1 1 1 — 3 87DAA6MC
1 1 3 3 1 — 10 87DAB6MC
3 3 71⁄2 71⁄2 1 — 25 87DAD6MC
71⁄2 71⁄2 10 10 1 — 30 87DAE6MC
71⁄2 71⁄2 15 15 — 13⁄4 40 87EAF6MC
10 10 — — — 13⁄4 50 87EAG6MC
— — 15 20 2 — 40 87FAH6MC
10 15 25 25 2 — 50 87FAJ6MC
— — 30 30 — 21⁄2 50 87GAK6MC
15 20 — — — 21⁄2 100 87GAL6MC
25 30 50 50 3 — 100 87HAN6MC
30 40 75 75 — 31⁄2 125 87IAP6MC
40 50 100 100 4 — 150 87JAR6MC
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload a Not available on Size 5 or above.
amp range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric
Code) of typical industrial motors. All starter sizes
carry one maximum Hp rating.

Vacuum Break and Oil Well Pump Control Panels, Class 87
Selection

 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104. 60Hz Voltage Letter
24 J
 Dimensions see page 9/169. 120 F
 Wiring Diagrams see page 9/187. 200–208 D
220–240 G
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131. 277 L
 Replace the (*) in the catalog number with a letter from the coil table. 440–480 H
550–600 E
 Refer to page 17-49 for information on the 958L OLR
Vacuum Break Pump Control Panels (Vacuum Contactor with Trip Class 10 Solid-State Overload Relay)
Max Hp Fusible Disconnect Circuit Breaker
575 NEMA Overload Fuse Clip Catalog Catalog
480 Volts Volts Size Relay Range Amps/Volts Number List Price $ MCI Amps Number List Price $
100 100 4 55-250A 200A/600V 87JCM4F* 250A 87JCM4M*
200 200 5 55-250A 400A/600V 87LCU4F* 400A 87LCT4M*
250 300 6 160-630A — — 400A 87MCW4M*
400 400 6 160-630A — — 600A 87MCX4M*
Oil Well Pump Control Panels (Open Air Contactor with 958L Solid-State Overload Relay)
Max Hp Fusible Disconnect Circuit Breaker
575 NEMA Overload Fuse Clip Catalog Catalog
480 Volts Volts Size Relay Range Amps/Volts Number List Price $ MCI Amps Number List Price $
25 25 2 13-52 60A/600V 87FPI6F* 50 87FPI6M*
50 50 3 25-100 100A/600V 87HPK6F* 100 87HPK6M*
100 100 4 50-200 200A/600V 87JPM6F* 150 87JPM6M*
Note: Hp’s shown above are based on the overload amp

range for the FLA’s (per the National Electric Code)

Reduced Voltage Pump Panels
Auto Transformer & Part winding (2 Step) with Solid State Overload, Class 88
Selection

 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104. The coil voltage on the contactors will be
the motor voltage. A CPT will be supplied
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. to provide the control voltage. The control
 Dimensions see page 9/169. voltage will be 120V.
To change the control voltage to customer
 Wiring Diagrams see pages 9/180 and 9/181.
supplied (no CPT included), change the
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131. 9th character to the following:
for 24V , use ”J”
for 120V, use ”F”
Auto Transformer Type

Overload Fusible Disconnect Circuit Breaker
Motor Max Amp Frame NEMA Half Fuse Clip Size Catalog List Circuit Breaker Catalog List
Voltage Hp Range Size Size Size Amps/Volts Number Price $ Amps Number Price $
15 13–52 B 2 — 60A/250V 88FUFT2FG 50 88FUFT2MG
20 25–100 B — 21⁄2 100A/250V 88GUGT2FG 100 88GUGT2MG
30 25–100 B 3 — 100A/250V 88HUGT2FG 100 88HUGT2MG
40 50–200 B — 31⁄2 200A/250V 88IUHT2FG 125 88IUHT2MG
230
50 50–200 B 4 — 200A/250V 88JUHT2FG 150 88JUHT2MG
75 55–250 — 5 — — — 250 88LPST2MG
100 55–250 — 5 — 400A/250V 88LPUT2FG 400 88LPUT2MG
200 160–630 — 6 — — — 600 88MSXT2MG
25 13–52 B 2 — 60A/600V 88FUFT4FH 50 88FUFT4MH
30 25–100 B — 21⁄2 60A/600V 88GUGT4FH 50 88GUGT4MH
50 25–100 B 3 — 100A/600V 88HUGT4FH 100 88HUGT4MH
75 50–200 B — 31⁄2 200A/600V 88IUHT4FH 125 88IUHT4MH
460 100 50–200 B 4 — 200A/600V 88JUHT4FH 150 88JUHT4MH
150 55–250 — 5 — — — 250 88LPST4MH
200 55–250 — 5 — 400A/600V 88LPST4FH 400 88LPUT4MH
250 160–630 — 6 — — — 400 88MSVT4MH
400 160–630 — 6 — 600A/600V 88MSXT4FH 600 88MSXT4MH
Part Winding 2 Step

Overload Fusible Disconnect Circuit Breaker
Motor Max Amp Frame NEMA Half Fuse Clip Size Catalog List Circuit Breaker Catalog List
Voltage Hp Range Size Size Size Amps/Volts Number Price $ Amps Number Price $
20 10–40 A1 — 13⁄4 100A/250V 88EUEP2FG 100 88EUEP2MG
25 13–52 B 2 — 100A/250V 88FUFP2FG 100 88FUFP2MG
40 25–100 B — 21⁄2 200A/250V 88GUGP2FG 100 88GUGP2MG
50 25–100 B 3 — 200A/250V 88HUGP2FG 150 88HUGP2MG
230
60 50–200 B — 31⁄2 200A/250V 88IUHP2FG 250 88IUHP2MG
75 50–200 B 4 — 400A/250V 88JUHP2FG 250 88JUHP2MG
125 55–250 — 5 — — — 400 88LPSP2MG
150 55–250 — 5 — 600A/250V 88LPUP2FG 600 88LPUP2MG
30 10–40 A1 — 13⁄4 100A/600V 88EUEP4FH 100 88EUEP4MH
40 13–52 B 2 — 100A/600V 88FUFP4FH 100 88FUFP4MH
60 25–100 B — 21⁄2 200A/600V 88GUGP4FH 100 88GUGP4MH
75 25–100 B 3 — 200A/600V 88HUGP4FH 150 88HUGP4MH
460
100 50–200 B — 31⁄2 200A/600V 88IUHP4FH 250 88IUHP4MH
150 50–200 B 4 — 400A/600V 88JUHP4FH 250 88JUHP4MH
250 55–250 — 5 — — — 400 88LPSP4MH
350 55–250 — 5 — 600A/600V 88LPUP4FH 600 88LPUP4MH


Reduced Voltage Pump Panels
Wye Delta with Solid State Overload, Class 88
Selection

 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104. The coil voltage on the contactors will be
the motor voltage. A CPT will be supplied
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. to provide the control voltage. The control
 Dimensions see page 9/169. voltage will be 120V.
To change the control voltage to customer
 Wiring Diagrams see pages 9/182 and 9/183.
supplied (no CPT included), change the
 Replacement Parts see page 9/131. 9th character to the following:
for 24V , use ”J”
for 120V, use ”F”
Wye Delta
Overload Open Transition Closed Transition
Motor
Circuit Fusible Disconnect Circuit Breaker Fusible Disconnect Circuit Breaker
Motor Max Amp Frame NEMA Half Fuse Clip Size Interruter Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List Catalog List
Voltage Hp Range Size Size Size Amps/Volts ETI Amps Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $ Number Price $
10 10–40 A1 1 — 60A/250V 50 88DUE06FD 88DUE06MD 88DUEC6FD 88DUEC6MD
15 10–40 A1 — 13⁄4 100A/250V 100 88EUE06FD 88EUE06MD 88EUEC6FD 88EUEC6MD
20 13–52 B 2 — 100A/250V 100 88FUF06FD 88FUF06MD 88FUFC6FD 88FUFC6MD
30 25–100 B — 21⁄2 200A/250V 125 88GUG06FD 88GUG06MD 88GUGC6FD 88GUGC6MD
40 25–100 B 3 — 200A/250V 150 88HUG06FD 88HUG06MD 88HUGC6FD 88HUGC6MD
200
50 50–200 B — 31⁄2 200A/250V 250 88IUH06FD 88IUH06MD 88IUHC6FD 88IUHC6MD
60 50–200 B 4 — 400A/250V 250 88JUH06FD 88JUH06MD 88JUHC6FD 88JUHC6MD
75 55–250 — 5 — 400A/250V 400 88LPS06FD 88LPS06MD 88LPSC6FD 88LPSC6MD
150 55–250 — 5 — 600A/250V 600 88LPU06FD 88LPU06MD 88LPUC6FD 88LPUC6MD
300 160–630 — 6 — — 800 — 88MSX06MD — 88MSXC6MD
10 10–40 A1 1 — 60A/250V 50 88DUE02FG 88DUE02MG 88DUEC2FG 88DUEC2MG
15 10–40 A1 — 13⁄4 60A/250V 50 88EUE02FG 88EUE02MG 88EUEC2FG 88EUEC2MG
25 13–52 B 2 — 100A/250V 100 88FUF02FG 88FUF02MG 88FUFC2FG 88FUFC2MG
30 25–100 B — 21⁄2 200A/250V 100 88GUG02FG 88GUG02MG 88GUGC2FG 88GUGC2MG
50 25–100 B 3 — 200A/250V 150 88HUG02FG 88HUG02MG 88HUGC2FG 88HUGC2MG
230
60 50–200 B — 31⁄2 200A/250V 250 88IUH02FG 88IUH02MG 88IUHC2FG 88IUHC2MG
75 50–200 B 4 — 400A/250V 250 88JUH02FG 88JUH02MG 88JUHC2FG 88JUHC2MG
100 55–250 — 5 — 400A/250V 400 88LPS02FG 88LPS02MG 88LPSC2FG 88LPSC2MG
150 55–250 — 5 — 600A/250V 600 88LPU02FG 88LPU02MG 88LPUC2FG 88LPUC2MG
350 160–630 — 6 — — 1200 — 88MSX02MG — 88MSXC2MG
15 5.5-22 A1 1 — 30A/600V 30 88DUD04FH 88DUD04MH 88DUDC4FH 88DUDC4MH
30 10–40 A1 — 13⁄4 60A/600V 50 88EUE04FH 88EUE04MH 88EUEC4FH 88EUEC4MH
40 13–52 B 2 — 100A/600V 100 88FUF04FH 88FUF04MH 88FUFC4FH 88FUFC4MH
60 25–100 B — 21⁄2 200A/600V 100 88GUG04FH 88GUG04MH 88GUGC4FH 88GUGC4MH
75 25–100 B 3 — 200A/600V 125 88HUG04FH 88HUG04MH 88HUGC4FH 88HUGC4MH
460
100 50–200 B — 31⁄2 200A/600V 150 88IUH04FH 88IUH04MH 88IUHC4FH 88IUHC4MH
150 50–200 B 4 — 400A/600V 250 88JUH04FH 88JUH04MH 88JUHC4FH 88JUHC4MH
200 55–250 — 5 — 400A/600V 400 88LPS04FH 88LPS04MH 88LPSC4FH 88LPSC4MH
300 55–250 — 5 — 600A/600V 600 88LPU04FH 88LPU04MH 88LPUC4FH 88LPUC4MH
700 160–630 — 6 — — 1200 — 88MSX04MH — 88MSXC4MH
15 5.5-22 A1 1 — 30A/600V 30 88DUD05FE 88DUD05ME 88DUDC5FE 88DUDC5ME
30 10–40 A1 — 13⁄4 60A/600V 50 88EUE05FE 88EUE05ME 88EUEC5FE 88EUEC5ME
40 13–52 B 2 — 100A/600V 50 88FUF05FE 88FUF05ME 88FUFC5FE 88FUFC5ME
60 25–100 B — 21⁄2 200A/600V 100 88GUG05FE 88GUG05ME 88GUGC5FE 88GUGC5ME
75 25–100 B 3 — 200A/600V 125 88HUG05FE 88HUG05ME 88HUGC5FE 88HUGC5ME
575
100 50–200 B — 31⁄2 200A/600V 150 88IUH05FE 88IUH05ME 88IUHC5FE 88IUHC5ME
150 50–200 B 4 — 400A/600V 250 88JUH05FE 88JUH05ME 88JUHC5FE 88JUHC5ME
200 55–250 — 5 — 400A/600V 400 88LPS05FE 88LPU05ME 88LPSC5FE 88LPSC5ME
300 55–250 — 5 — 600A/600V 400 88LPU05FE 88LPU05ME 88LPUC5FE 88LPUC5ME
700 160–630 — 6 — — 1200 — 88MSX05ME — 88MSXC5ME


Lighting and Heating Control
Electrically Held Lighting Contactors, Class LE
Features
Simplicity and compact lightweight design makes Class LE

lighting contactors an attractive solution to your budgeting
challenges.
• Used in applications where it is not critical that contacts • Wide range of coil voltages from 24 to 600 VAC 50/60Hz
remain closed if control power is lost • Compact design allows for smaller panels and more
• Rated for tungsten lighting (incandescent filament), wiring room
ballast lighting (fluorescent, HID, metal halide, mercury • Finger and back-of-hand safe terminals
vapor, quartz halogen and sodium-lamp), resistive and
general use loads • Panel and DIN rail mounting
• Contacts are rated 20 - 400 amps at 600 volts • Full line of enclosures including NEMA 1, 3/3R, 4, 4/4X
stainless steel and 12
• 3 and 4 pole (up to 12 pole for 30 and 60 amp contactors)
• Available in combination form with choice of non-fusible
• Most contactors have built-in auxiliary contacts for disconnect, fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
convenient 3-wire control
• Full line of factory and field modifications

Features
LE 0
Disconnect Type
B = Combination Circuit Breaker
D = Combination Non-Fused Disconnect
F = Combination Fusible Disconnect
N = Non-Combination
Disconnect Rating
0 = N/A
A = 30A/250V Disconnect
B = 30A/600V Disconnect
C = 60A/250V Disconnect
D = 60A/600V Disconnect
E = 100A/250V Disconnect
F = 100A/600V Disconnect
G = 200A/250V Disconnect
H = 200A/600V Disconnect
J = 400A/250V Disconnect
K = 400A/600V Disconnect
T = 20A Circuit Breaker
V = 30A Circuit Breaker
Y = 60A Circuit Breaker
Z = 100A Circuit Breaker
Enclosure Type
0 = Open
1 = NEMA 1
2 = NEMA 12/3R
4 = NEMA 4/4X SS
Contactor Rating (Amp)
B = 20
C = 30
D = 60
E = 100
F = 200
G = 300
H = 400
N.C. Poles
0 = None
N.O. Poles
03 = Three
04 = Four
06 = Six
09 = Nine
12 = Twelve
Coil Voltage (AC 60Hz)
024 = 24
120 = 120
208 = 208
240 = 240
277 = 277
347 = 347
480 = 480
600 = 600
Series
A = 200 – 400A Contactors
B = 20 – 100A Contactors

• Revised • Lighting and Heating Control
09/18/15 Electrically Held Lighting Contactors, Class LE
Selection

 Replace *** with a number from the coil table. VAC 60Hz ***
 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104. 24 024
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. 120 120
 Dimensions see page 9/149 for open, 208 208
page 9/170 for enclosed. 240 240
 Wiring Diagram see page 9/188. 277 277
 Replacement Parts see page 9/134. 347 1) 347
480 480
600 600
Replace the (***) with a number from
the coil table.
Non-Combination Contactor
Enclosure Type
Normally Normally 2)
Max. Amp Number Closed Open Open 1 3/3R/12 4/4X 304 S.S.
Rating of Poles Contacts Contacts Catalog Number
3 0 3 LEN00B003***B LEN01B003***B LEN02B003***B LEN04B003***B
20
4 0 4 LEN00B004***B LEN01B004***B LEN02B004***B LEN04B004***B
3 0 3 LEN00C003***B LEN01C003***B LEN02C003***B LEN04C003***B
30 6 0 6 LEN00C006***B LEN01C006***B LEN02C006***B LEN04C006***B
3 0 3 LEN00D003***B LEN01D003***B LEN02D003***B LEN04D003***B
60
100 3 0 3 LEN00E003***B LEN01E003***B LEN02E003***B LEN04E003***B
200 3 0 3 LEN00F003***A LEN01F003***A LEN02F003***A LEN04F003***A
300 3 0 3 LEN00G003***A LEN01G003***A LEN02G003***A LEN04G003***A
400 3 0 3 LEN00H003***A LEN01H003***A LEN02H003***A LEN04H003***A
1) Not available on 200 - 400A contactors.

2) Type 12 field convertible to type 3/3R.

Technical Data
Contactor LEN00B003 LEN00B004 LEN00C003 LEN00C004

General technical data:
Finger-safe (main circuit / control circuit) yes / yes yes / yes yes / yes yes / yes
Degree of pollution 3 3 3 3
Altitude (m) 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000
Ambient storage temperature (°C) -55 to 80 -55 to 80 -55 to 80 -55 to 80
Ambient operating temperature (°C) 0 to 40 0 to 40 0 to 40 0 to 40
Humidity (% non-condensing) 10 to 95 10 to 95 10 to 95 10 to 95
Shock resistance at rectangular impulse (g/ms) 6.7 / 5, 4.2 / 10 6.7 / 5, 4.2 / 10 7.5 / 5, 4.7 / 10 7.5 / 5, 4.7 / 10
Shock resistance at sine pulse (g/ms) 10.5 / 5, 6.6 / 10 10.5 / 5, 6.6 / 10 11.8 / 5, 7.4 / 10 11.8 / 5, 7.4 / 10
Rated impulse voltage resistance (kV) no data no data no data no data
Rated insulation voltage (V) no data no data no data no data
Mechanical operating cycles as operating time:
of contactor 30,000,000 30,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000
of contactor with additional aux contacts 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000
Main circuit:
Number of NC / NO main contacts 0NC / 3NO 0NC / 4NO 0NC / 3NO 0NC / 4NO
Typical power loss per conductor (W) 0.7 0.7 0.9 0.9
Off-load operating frequency (cycles per hour) 10,000 10,000 5,000 5,000
Current ratings:
20A @277V 1p 1ph 20A @277V 1p 1ph 30A @277V 1p 1ph 30A @277V 1p 1ph
Tungsten (poles per phase) 20A @480V 2p 1ph 20A @480V 2p 1ph 30A @480V 2p 1ph 30A @480V 2p 1ph
Ballast (poles per phase) 20A @600V 2p 1ph 20A @600V 2p 1ph 30A @600V 2p 1ph 30A @600V 2p 1ph
General and resistive (poles per phase) 20A @600V 2p 1ph 20A @600V 2p 1ph 30A @600V 2p 1ph 30A @600V 2p 1ph
Coil ratings:
Nominal voltage 2) 2) 2) 2)
Inrush / sealed power (VA) 31.7 / 4.8 31.7 / 4.8 87 / 9.4 87 / 9.4
Coil voltage tolerance factor 0.8 - 1.1 0.8 - 1.1 0.8 - 1.1 0.8 - 1.1
Internal/standard auxiliary contact:
Number of NC / NO auxiliary contacts 0NC / 1NO NA 1NC / 1NO 1NC / 1NO
Rating A600 / Q600 NA A600 / Q600 A600 / Q600
Installation/mounting/dimensions:
Mounting orientation vertical vertical vertical vertical
Type of mounting: screw / DIN rail yes / yes yes / yes yes / yes yes / yes
Height x Width x Depth (mm) 57.5 x 45 x 73 57.5 x 45 x 73 85 x 45 x 97 85 x 60 x 97
Minimum clearance to sides (mm) 0 0 0 0
Minimum clearance to earthed parts (mm) 6 6 6 6
Connection type / torque for main circuit terminals screw / 7-10 lb in screw / 7-10 lb in screw / 18-22 lb in screw / 18-22 lb in
Connection type / torque for control circuit terminals screw / 7-10 lb in screw / 7-10 lb in screw / 7-10 lb in screw / 7-10 lb in
Solid and stranded conductors for 2x(20-16), 2x(20-16), 2x(6-12), 2x(6-12),
main contacts (AWG) 2x(18-14), 2x(12) 2x(18-14), 2x(12) 2x(14-8) 2x(14-8)
Solid and stranded conductors for 2x(20-16), 2x(20-16), 2x(20-16), 2x(20-16),
control circuit (AWG) 2x(18-14) 2x(18-14) 2x(18-14) 2x(18-14)
Conductor type for main and control circuits 75°C CU 75°C CU 75°C CU 75°C CU
Short circuit current rating of main circuit:
Short circuit current rating 5kA @ 600V 5kA @ 600V 5kA @ 600V 5kA @ 600V
Max fuse / circuit breaker (Amp) 30 / 25 30 / 25 60 / 40 60 / 40
Certificates: cULus cULus cULus cULus
 Must use an external (optional) auxiliary contact.

2) Refer to catalog selection tables for coil voltages.

Technical Data
LEN00D003 LEN00E003 LEN00F003 LEN00G003 LEN00H003
no / yes no / yes no / yes no / yes no / yes

3 3 3 3 3
2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000
-55 to 80 -55 to 80 -55 to 80 -55 to 80 -55 to 80
0 to 40 0 to 40 0 to 40 0 to 40 0 to 40
10 to 95 10 to 95 10 to 95 10 to 95 10 to 95
10 / 5, 5 / 10 6.8 / 5, 4 / 10 8.5 / 5, 4.2 / 10 8.5 / 5, 4.2 / 10 8.5 / 5, 4.2 / 10
15 / 5, 8 / 10 10.6 / 5, 6.2 / 10 13.4 / 5, 6.5 / 10 13.4 / 5, 6.5 / 10 13.4 / 5, 6.5 / 10
no data no data no data no data no data
no data no data no data no data no data
Mechanical operating cycles as operating time:
10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000
10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000
Main circuit:
0NC / 3NO 0NC / 3NO 0NC / 3NO 0NC / 3NO 0NC / 3NO
2.6 7.7 13 18 35
5,000 5,000 2,000 2,000 2,000
Current ratings:
60A @277V 1p 1ph 100A @277V 1p 1ph 200A @277V 1p 1ph 300A @277V 1p 1ph 400A @277V 1p 1ph
60A @600V 1p 1ph 100A @600V 1p 1ph 100A 200A @600V 1p 1ph 200A 300A @600V 1p 1ph 300A 400A@600V 1p 1ph 400A
60A @600V 2p 1ph @600V 2p 1ph @600V 2p 1ph @600V 2p 1ph @600V 2p 1ph
Coil ratings:
2) 2) 2) 2) 2)
166 / 12.6 300 / 21 300 / 5.8 590 / 6.7 830 / 9.2

0.8 - 1.1 0.8 - 1.1 0.8 - 1.1 0.8 - 1.1 0.8 - 1.1
Internal/standard auxiliary contact:
NA  NA  2NC / 2NO 2NC / 2NO 2NC / 2NO
NA NA A300 / Q300 A300 / Q300 A300 / Q300
Installation/mounting/dimensions:
vertical vertical vertical vertical vertical
yes / yes yes / yes yes / no yes / no yes / no
112 x 55 x 115 146 x 70 x 139 172 x 120 x 180 210 x 145 x 202 214 x 160 x 225
6 6 10 10 10
6 6 10 10 10
screw / 27-40 lb in screw / 36-53 lb in screw / 90-110 lb in screw / 180-195 lb in screw / 180-195 lb in
screw / 7-10 lb in screw / 7-10 lb in screw / 7-10 lb in screw / 7-10 lb in screw / 7-10 lb in
2x(18-3), 2x(10-1/0), 2x(6-3/0) 2x(2/0-500MCM) 2x(2/0-500MCM)
1x(18-2) 1x(10-2/0)
2x(18-14) 2x(18-14) 2x(18-14) 2x(18-14) 2x(18-14)
75°C CU 75°C CU 75°C CU 75°C CU 75°C CU

5kA @ 600V 10kA @ 600V 10kA @ 600V 18kA @ 600V 18kA @ 600V
100 / 80 200 / 125 400 / 250 600 / 400 800 / 500
cULus cULus cULus cULus cULus

Lighting and Heating Control • Revised •
Electrically Held Lighting Contactors, Class LE 09/18/15
Selection

 Replace *** with a number from the coil table. VAC 60Hz ***
 Field Modification Kits see page 9/104. 24 024
 Factory Modifications see page 9/119. 120 120
 Dimensions see page 9/170. 208 208
 Wiring Diagram see page 9/188. 240 240
 Replacement Parts see page 9/134. 277 277
347 347
480 480
600 600
Replace the (***) with a number from
the coil table.
Combination Contactor
Enclosure Type
Max. Number Disc. Disc Amp/ Circuit
Amp of NO Amp Fuse Clip Breaker 1 3/3R/12, 4 4/4X 304 S.S.
Disconnect Type Rating Poles Rating Rating Rating Catalog Number
20 3 30A — — LEDB1B003***B LEDB2B003***B LEDB4B003***B
30 3 30A — — LEDB1C003***B LEDB2C003***B LEDB4C003***B
60 3 60A — — LEDD1D003***B LEDD2D003***B LEDD4D003***B
Non-Fusible
100 3 100A — — LEDF1E003***B LEDF2E003***B LEDF4E003***B
200 3 200A — — LEDH1F003***A LEDH2F003***A LEDH4F003***A
300 3 400A — — LEDK1G003***A LEDK2G003***A LEDK4G003***A
3 — 30A/250V — LEFA1B003***B LEFA2B003***B LEFA4B003***B
20
3 — 30A/600V — LEFB1B003***B LEFB2B003***B LEFB4B003***B
3 — 30A/250V — LEFA1C003***B LEFA2C003***B LEFA4C003***B
30
3 — 30A/600V — LEFB1C003***B LEFB2C003***B LEFB4C003***B
3 — 60A/250V — LEFC1D003***B LEFC2D003***B LEFC4D003***B
60
3 — 60A/600V — LEFD1D003***B LEFD2D003***B LEFD4D003***B
Fusible
3 — 100A/250V — LEFE1E003***B LEFE2E003***B LEFE4E003***B
100
3 — 100A/600V — LEFF1E003***B LEFF2E003***B LEFF4E003***B
3 — 200A/250V — LEFG1F003***A LEFG2F003***A LEFG4F003***A
200
3 — 200A/600V — LEFH1F003***A LEFH2F003***A LEFH4F003***A
3 — 400A/250V — LEFJ1G003***A LEFJ2G003***A LEFJ4G003***A
300
3 — 400A/600V — LEFK1G003***A LEFK2G003***A LEFK4G003***A
20 3 — — 20A LEBT1B003***B LEBT2B003***B LEBT4B003***B
30 3 — — 30A LEBV1C003***B LEBV2C003***B LEBV4C003***B
Circuit Breaker
60 3 — — 60A LEBY1D003***B LEBY2D003***B LEBY4D003***B
100 3 — — 100A LEBZ1E003***B LEBZ2E003***B LEBZ4E003***B
 Not available on 200 - 400A contactors.

 Type 12 field convertible to type 3/3R.
 Type 4 painted enclosure through 100 Amp only.

Electrically Held Lighting Contactors, Class LC
Features
Class LC lighting contactors deliver unprecedented versatility of truly useful features make them uniquely appealing to all
in application, simplicity in configuration and performance in those who use them.
operation. Ingenious design, rugged construction and a host
Convenient side access Contact position indication – when

field power wiring. button protrudes, contact is closed
.
Power poles can easily be added at

any time based on changing needs.
Furthermore, they may be converted
from NO to NC (or vice versa) simply
by repositioning.
A simple kit easily

converts electrically held
units to mechanically
held and includes a 2- Plug-in auxiliary contacts
or 3-wire control module. are NO when installed on
the left side of the contactor,
NC on the right.
Standard base enables

contactor to be field Finger and back-of-hand
expandable for flexibility safe terminals.
and future needs.
• Used in all applications where either electrically or • Can be ordered as either electrically or mechanically held and
mechanically held contactors are specifically suited and can also be converted from electrically to mechanically held
also ideal for maximum flexibility and future expansion in the field with a simple conversion kit
• Rated for tungsten lighting (incandescent filament), ballast • Modular design enables you to stock the building block
lighting (fluorescent, HID, metal halide, mercury vapor, quartz components to assemble all configurations of both the
halogen and sodium-lamp), resistive and general use loads electrically and mechanically held contactors thus
• Contacts are rated up to 30 amps at 600 volts dramatically reducing inventory
• Up to 12 poles (maximum of 8 normally closed) • Full line of enclosures including NEMA 1, 3/3R, 4, 4/4X
stainless steel and 12
• Wide range of coil voltages from 24 to 600 VAC 50/60Hz
• Full line of factory and field modifications

Features
LC E0 C A
Controller Type
E0 = Electrically Held
(Convertible to MH)
Enclosure Type
0 = Open
1 = NEMA 1
2 = NEMA 12/3R
4 = NEMA 4/4X Stainless Steel
Contactor Rating (Amp)
C = 30
N.C. Poles
0 = None
1 = One
2 = Two
3 = Three
4 = Four
5 = Five
6 = Six
7 = Seven
8 = Eight
N.O. Poles
00 = None
01 = One
02 = Two
03 = Three
04 = Four
05 = Five
06 = Six
07 = Seven
08 = Eight
09 = Nine
10 = Ten
11 = Eleven
12 = Twelve
Coil Voltage
024 = 24V 60Hz / 20V 50Hz
120 = 115-120V 60Hz / 110V 50Hz
208 = 200-208V 60Hz
240 = 230-240V 60Hz / 220V 50Hz
277 = 277V 60Hz / 240V 50Hz
347 = 347V 60Hz
480 = 460-480V 60Hz / 440V 50Hz
600 = 575-600V 60Hz / 550V 50Hz

• Revised • Lighting and Heating Control
09/18/15 Electrically Held Lighting Contactors, Class LC
Selection

 To order standard electrically held contactor, VAC 60Hz ***
simply select catalog number from tables below. 24 024
 To order mechanically held contactor, select cata- 120 120
log number from tables below and specify con-
208 208
version module from factory modification section
from page 9/122. 240 240
 To convert standard electrically held contactor 277 277
to mechanically held in the field, select 347 347
catalog number from tables below and select
480 480
conversion module kit from field modification
section on page 9/106. 600 600
 Replace the (***) with a number
Replace *** with a number from the coil table. from the coil table.
 Dimensions see page 9/148 open,
page 9/170 enclosed.
Non-Combination Contactor (30 Amp max.)

Enclosure Type
No. of Poles
Open 1 3/3R/12 4/4X 304 S.S.
N.C. N.O. Catalog Number
2 LCE00C200***A LCE01C200***A LCE02C200***A LCE04C200***A
5 0 LCE00C500***A LCE01C500***A LCE02C500***A LCE04C500***A
1
 Type 12 field convertible to Type 3/3R.

Selection
Non-Combination Contactor (30 Amp max.)

Enclosure Type
No. of Poles
Open 1 3/3R/12  4/4X 304 S.S.
N.C. N.O. Catalog Number
 Type 12 field convertible to Type 3/3R.

Technical Data
General technical data: Coil voltages:

Finger-safe (main circuit / control circuit) yes / yes 24V 60Hz / 20V 50Hz
Degree of pollution 3 115-120V 60Hz / 110V 50Hz
Altitude (m) 2,000 200-208V 60Hz
Ambient storage temperature (°C) -30 to 65 230-240V 60Hz / 220V 50Hz
Ambient operating temperature (°C) -25 to 40 277V 60Hz / 240V 50Hz
Humidity (% non-condensing) no data
347V 60Hz
Shock resistance at rectangular impulse (g/ms) no data
460-480V 60Hz / 440V 50Hz
Shock resistance at sine pulse (g/ms) no data
575-600V 60Hz / 550V 50Hz
Rated impulse voltage resistance (kV) no data
Rated insulation voltage (V) 600
Mechanical operating cycles as operating time: Short circuit current ratings with fuses:
of contactor 100,000
Max.
of contactor with additional aux contacts 100,000
Device
Main circuit: Max. Rating SCCR
Number of main contacts 2 - 12 (maximum of 8 NC) Volt. Fuse (Amps) (kA)
Typical power loss per conductor (W) no data 600 RK fuse 60 5
Off-load operating frequency (cycles per hour) 60 for continued operation
Current ratings:
20A @277V 1p 1ph Short circuit current ratings with circuit breakers:
Tungsten (poles per phase) 20A @480V 2p 1ph Siemens Max.
20A @480V 3p 3ph Listed Device
30A @347V 1p 1ph Max. Circuit Rating SCCR
Ballast (poles per phase) 30A @600V 2p 1ph Volt. Breaker (Amps) (kA)
30A @600V 3p 3ph
600 NGG3B040L 40 5
30A @600V 1p 1ph
480 HEG3B040L 40 5
General and resistive (poles per phase) 30A @600V 2p 1ph
30A @600V 3p 3ph 480 ED63B040L 40 5
Coil ratings: 480 NGG3B040L 40 5
Nominal voltage (refer to coil voltage table)

Inrush / sealed power (VA) 248 / 28
Coil voltage tolerance factor 0.85 - 1.1 Conversion module:
External/optional auxiliary contact: Steady State

Input Volt. Current @ Rated Max.
Number of NC / NO auxiliary contacts 2NC / 2NO max (AC) Volts (mA) VA
Rating A600, 24VDC, 24VAC 24 80 5
Installation/mounting/dimensions: 115-120 83 12
Mounting orientation vertical
200-277 91 30
Type of mounting: screw / DIN rail yes / no
Height x Width x Depth (mm) 188 x 106 x 98
Minimum clearance to sides (mm) 12.7 Conversion module:
Minimum clearance to earthed parts (mm) 12.7 Min. pulse duration (3-wire module) 250ms
Connection type / torque: Max. allowable leakage current 1.8 mA
Main contact terminals screw / 35 lb in EMI 35 V/m
Coil terminals screw / 15 lb in
Surge transient peak 6 kV
Auxiliary contact terminals screw / 7-12 lb in
Frequency range 40-70 Hz
Control module terminals screw / 5 lb in
Solid and stranded conductors (AWG):
Main contact terminals 1x(14-8), #8 solid or stranded
2x(14-8), #8 stranded only
Coil terminals 2x(18-14)
Auxiliary contact terminals 2x(22-12)
Control module terminals 1x(22-12)
Conductor type for main / control circuits 75°C CU / 60-75°C CU
Short circuit current rating (see SCCR tables)
Certificates: cUL

Lighting and Heating Contactors • Revised •
Mechanically and Magnetically Held Lighting Contactors, Class CLM 07/20/15
Selection
the control station is to be located at Stop-Start Control Module
a distance greater than the allowable (Accessory 49)
contactor line run. Stop-start three wire maintained control
Another use for control modules occurs is an arrangement used mostly when
when the controlling device is only controlling motors, but can be used in
available as a single pole single-throw lighting applications.
contact necessitating a two wire Any number of momentary contact
CLM 20 Amp CLM 100 Amp control line. control stations consisting of normally
Still another application for control open start buttons and normally closed
Mechanically Latched Lighting
modules is when start-stop three stop buttons can be used. Start buttons
and Heating Contactor
wire control is needed. are connected in parallel and stop
The CLM Lighting Contactors can be buttons in series.
Control modules also can make it
used with metal halide, mercury vapor,
possible to operate the CLM coil from Operation (Magnetic Latch)
quartz halogen, tungsten and fluores-
its own incoming line at one voltage
cent lighting. They provide reliable and A permanent magnet is built into the
while providing the control at a
convenient lighting control in numerous contactor structure of the 30A, 60A,
second, perhaps lower voltage.
applications, such as industrial plants, 100A, and 200A contactors that will
schools, hospitals, office buildings, Two Wire Control Module maintain the contactor in its energized
shopping centers, airports, stadiums . . . (Accessory 47) state indefinitely without using control
literally everywhere lighting is required. The advantages of two wire controls are: power. When energized, a DC current is
The CLMs are listed under UL 508 1. Control station can have lower applied that produces a magnetic field
with no derating when used open or ampacity rating. that reinforces the polarity of the
enclosed. Combination lighting permanent magnet, and the contac-
2. Control station can be located an tor pulls in immediately. The current
contactors are listed for UL service extended distance from the CLM
entrance. to the coil is disconnected by the coil
contactor. clearing interlock. In order to drop out
UL listed File #E60310
CSA Certified File LR 6535 3. Control module can frequently be the contactor, it is necessary to apply a
controlled directly from field through the OFF coil in the reverse
Type CLM 20 Amp Lighting microprocessor. direction to the permanent magnet.
Contactor Solid State Control This momentarily cancels the magnetic
Modules 4. Control devices can be two wire
single pole, single-throw types. attraction and the contactor drops out.
The CLM 20 amp lighting contactor Coil and module failures are possible
is an electromagnetically operated, 5. Control voltage may be different than when used with solid state relays and
mechanically latched three wire control the CLM coil circuit and at a lower PLC outputs. 24-volt systems are ok to
contactor. The most commonly used voltage level. use, but 120 volts and above should be
method of control is a three position Note: If the control power to the solid discouraged. If higher values cannot
momentary contact switch with a state control module is lost while the be avoided, an interposing relay should
center-off position. The controlling module is energized the lighting be used.
device must be able to make the coil contactor will open. If the line power (Mechanically Latched)
inrush current but need not break it. to the lighting contactor is lost while the
The coil current is interrupted by the contactor is energized the contactor will The 300 & 400A lighting and heating
control contacts within the CLM not change state with return of line contactors operate using a latching
contactor. Power for the control line may voltage. Power will be restored to mechanism.
come from a separate source or directly the load if the control module is still Closing – When the “close” pushbutton
from the line side of the CLM contactor. energized. Control station should is operated, the closing coil is energized,
The CLM contactor can also be be the maintained type. closing the contactor. As the contactor
controlled by devices such as: Three Wire Control Module closes, the latch lever hooks over the
(Accessory 48) latch pin to mechanically latch the
b Break-glass control stations
contactor closed. The coil-clearing
b Timers having single pole, double 1. The accessory 48 consists of two auxiliary contact de-energizes the
throw contacts relays with contacts appropriately closing coil.
interconnected which provides for an
b Photo-electric cellsa Opening – When the “Trip” pushbutton
interlocking that prevents both relays
b Energy management systemsa from being energized simultaneously. is operated, the trip solenoid coil is
b Microprocessorsa energized, unhooking the latch lever
2. This module has similar characteristics from the latch pin, which allows the
b Occupancy sensorsa to the two wire module (Accessory 47) contactor to open. As the contactor
Control modules make it possible to except there is no change of switch opens, the coil-clearing auxiliary contact
use a controlling device that does not contact position upon loss of control line de-energizes the trip solenoid coil.
have enough current-carrying capacity power. Control stations should be the
to control the CLM contactor directly. momentary type.
Control modules are also used when
a Operation through control modules.

• Revised • Lighting Control
07/20/15 Mechanically and Magnetically Held Lighting Contactors, Class CLM
Selection
E Replace *** with a number from the coil table. 60Hz Voltage Number
E Field modification kits see page 9/104. 24 b 024
120 120
E Factory modifications see page 9/119. 208 208
E Dimensions see page 9/153 open page 9/170 enclosed. 240 240
E Wiring Diagrams see page 9/191. 277 277
480 480
E Replacement parts see page 9/134. 600e 600
Open and Non-combination Enclosed Contactors

Open Typed Enclosure

NEMA 1 NEMA 12 NEMA 4/4X Stainless Steelc
c

General Purpose NEMA 3/3R Watertight, Dust-tight,
Industrial Use Corrosion Resistant,
Max
Weatherproof 304 Stainless Steel
Amp Number
Rating of Poles Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
2 CLM1B02*** CLM2B02*** CLMSB02***
3 CLM1B03*** CLM2B03*** CLMSB03***
4 CLM1B04*** CLM2B04*** CLMSB04***
20 6 see table CLM1B06*** CLM2B06*** CLMSB06***
8 below CLM1B08*** CLM2B08*** CLMSB08***
10 CLM1B10*** CLM2B10*** CLMSB10***
12 CLM1B12*** CLM2B12*** CLMSB12***
2 CLM0C02*** CLM1C02*** CLM2C02*** CLMSC02***
30 6 CLM0C06*** CLM1C06*** CLM2C06*** — —
8 CLM0C08*** CLM1C08*** CLM2C08*** — —
9 CLM0C09*** CLM1C09*** CLM2C09*** — —
10 CLM0C10*** CLM1C10*** CLM2C10*** — —
12 CLM0C12*** CLM1C12*** CLM2C12*** — —
2 CLM0D02*** CLM1D02*** CLM2D02*** CLMSD02***
60 6 CLM0D06*** CLM1D06*** CLM2D06*** — —
8 CLM0D08*** CLM1D08*** CLM2D08*** — —
9 CLM0D09*** CLM1D09*** CLM2D09*** — —
10 CLM0D10*** CLM1D10*** CLM2D10*** — —
12 CLM0D12*** CLM1D12*** CLM2D12*** — —
2 CLM0E02*** CLM1E02*** CLM2E02*** CLMSE02***
100
2 CLM0F02*** CLM1F02*** CLM2F02*** CLMSF02***
200
2 CLM0G02*** CLM1G02*** CLM2G02*** — —
300
3 CLM0G03*** CLM1G03*** CLM2G03*** — —
2 CLM0H02*** CLM1H02*** CLM2H02*** — —
400
3 CLM0H03*** CLM1H03*** CLM2H03*** — —
Open 20 Amp Contactors

110–120V Coil 50/60Hz 208–240V Coil 50/60Hz 265–277V Coil 50/60Hz
Max
Amp Number
Rating of Polesa Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
2 CLM22031 CLM22061 CLM22071
3 CLM32031 CLM32061 CLM32071
4 CLM42031 CLM42061 CLM42071
20 6 CLM62031 CLM62061 CLM62071
8 CLM82031 CLM82061 CLM82071
10 CLM102031 CLM102061 CLM102071
12 CLM122031 CLM122061 CLM122071
a Contactors with 2–6-poles will be assembled with b 24 volt coils are not available on 20, 300 and 400 amp d CLM 30 & 60A 6-12-pole can be field assembled.
all poles located in the top portion of the contactor. contactor sizes. For 24 volt control of 20 amp contactor Order mounting kit 49MCMPMA and the appropriate
Contactors with 8–12-poles will be assembled with select solid state control module. number of 2-5 pole contactors.
6-poles in the top portion and the remaining poles in c For conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see e 24, 480 or 600 volt coils are not available on 20 amp
the bottom portion of the contactor. page 9/110. contactors.

Lighting Control • Revised •
Combination Mechanically and Magnetically Held Lighting Contactors, Class CM 07/20/15
Selection
E Replace *** with a number from the coil table. 60Hz Voltage Number
E Field modification kits see page 9/104. 24 a 024
120 120
E Factory modifications see page 9/119. 208 208
E Dimensions see page 9/170. 240 240
E Wiring Diagrams see page 9/191. 277 277
480 480
E Replacement parts see page 9/134. 600c 600
Combination Lighting Contactors

Enclosure

NEMA 1 NEMA 12, NEMA 3/3R b NEMA 4/4X Stainless Steel
General Purpose NEMA 4 Painted
(thru 100 amps) Watertight, Dust-tight,

Industrial Use Corrosion Resistant,

Contactor Number Disc Disc Amp/ Circuit Weatherproof, Watertight, Dust-tight 304 Stainless Steel
Disconnect Amp of NO Amp Fuse Clip Breaker
Type Rating Poles Rating Rating Rating Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $ Catalog Number List Price $
20 3 30A — — CMNB14*** CMNB24*** CMNBS4***

30 3 30A — — CMNC14*** CMNC24*** CMNCS4***
60 3 60A — — CMND15*** CMND25*** CMNDS5***
Non-Fusible
100 3 100A — — CMNE16*** CMNE26*** CMNES6***
200 3 200A — — CMNF17*** CMNF27*** CMNFS7***
300 3 400A — — CMNG18*** CMNG28*** CMNGS8***
3 — 30A/250V — CMFB10*** CMFB20*** CMFBS0***
20
3 — 30A/600V — CMFB11*** CMFB21*** CMFBS1***
3 — 30A/250V — CMFC10*** CMFC20*** CMFCS0***
30
3 — 30A/600V — CMFC11*** CMFC21*** CMFCS1***
3 — 60A/250V — CMFD12*** CMFD22*** CMFDS2***
60
3 — 60A/600V — CMFD13*** CMFD23*** CMFDS3***
Fusible
3 — 100A/250V — CMFE14*** CMFE24*** CMFES4***
100
3 — 100A/600V — CMFE15*** CMFE25*** CMFES5***
3 — 200A/250V — CMFF16*** CMFF26*** CMFFS6***
200
3 — 200A/600V — CMFF17*** CMFF27*** CMFFS7***
3 — 400A/250V — CMFG18*** CMFG28*** CMFGS8***
300
3 — 400A/600V — CMFG19*** CMFG29*** CMFGS9***
20 3 — — 20A CMBB14*** CMBB24*** CMBBS4***
Circuit 30 3 — — 30A CMBC15*** CMBC25*** CMBCS5***
Breaker 60 3 — — 60A CMBD18*** CMBD28*** CMBDS8***
100 3 — — 100A CMBE18*** CMBE28*** CMBES8***
200 3 — — 200A CMBF10*** CMBF20*** CMBFS0***
300 3 — — 300A CMBG11*** CMBG21*** CMBGS1***
Lighting & Heating Contactor Ratings CLM

Maximum AC/DC Voltage and Contactor Ratings AC Coil Data
Amp Ratings Load Amperes Max Volts Max Volts Contactor
Poles to Load Type Continuous Line to Line Line to Neutral Amperes No. Poles Inrush VA Dropout VA
Load Amperes 2 for 1-Phase Tungsten 30-400 480 277 20 2-12 625 6
Type Continuous 1 for 1-Phase 3 for 3-Phase Ballast 30-400 600 346 30 2-5 410 40
Tungsten 20 250V AC 250V AC Heating 30-400 600 346 60 2-3 410 40
Ballast 20 347V AC 600V AC 60 4-5 600 40
General 30 347V AC 600V AC 100/200 2-3 900 200
General 20 125V DC 250V DC 100/200 4-5 1300 130
300/400 2-3 1600 550
Inrush Current Over Fuse Size (amps RMS)
at AC Control Voltage 20A CLM
Amps 120V 240V 277V 347V 480V
Inrush 5.0 2.5 2.2 1.8 1.3
Fuse 2.0 1.0 1.0 0.75 0.5
a 24 volt coils are not available on 20 and 300 amp con- b For
conduit hubs and conversion instructions, see c 600 volt coils are not available on 20 amp
tactors. Use solid state control module on 20 amp size. page 9/110. contactors.

• Revised • Industrial Control Power Transformers
09/10/15 Class MT
General
Features
b Enclosed coils (50-5000VA);
Completely encloses the transformer
coils against moisture, dust, dirt and
industrial contaminants for maximum
protection in hostile and industrial envi-
ronments.
b Fuse clips (most models). Factory
mounted for integral fusing on the
secondary side to save panel space,
save wiring time and save the cost
of buying an add-on fuse block or kit
b Integrally finger safe terminals.
Between terminals and transformer,
protect against electrical creepage.
Up to 30% greater terminal contact
area permits low-loss connections.
Extra-deep barriers reduce the chance
of shorts from frayed leads or careless
wiring
b Terminals. Molded into the
transformer, are difficult to break
during wiring. A full quarter-inch of
thread on the 8-32 terminal screws
prevents stripping and pullout
b Jumpers supplied. Two jumper links
are standard with all transformers
which can be wired for dual primary
voltages Industrial Control Power Transformers b 50/60 Hz rated
Operation are specifically designed and built to
b Insulation materials are of the
Industrial control circuits and motor provide adequate voltage to the load highest rating available for the
control loads typically require more while accommodating the high current temperature class
current when they are initially energized levels present at inrush. These
than under normal operating conditions. transformers deliver excellent b Mounting plate is heavy gauge steel
secondary voltage regulation and meet to add strength to core construction
This period of high current demand,
or exceed the standards established and provide stable mounting. Slotted
referred to as inrush, may be as great
by NEMA, ANSI, UL and cUL. Their mounting feet permit easy installation
as ten times the current required under
steady state (normal) operating rugged construction and excellent
b Attractive black finish; easy-to-read
conditions, and can last up to 40 electrical characteristics ensure reliable nameplate with complete rating data
milliseconds. A transformer in a circuit operation of electromagnetic devices and wiring diagram
subject to inrush will typically attempt and trouble-free performance. b Class 130°C (226°F) insulation
to provide the load with the required Specifications system. 80°C (176°F) temperature
current during the inrush period. rise. (50-750VA typical)
However, it will be at b Laminations are built with silicon
the expense of the secondary voltage
steel to minimize core losses and b Class 180°C (356°F) insulation
to increase optimum performance and system. 120°C (248°F) temperature
stability by allowing the voltage to rise. (1000 – 5000VA typical)
efficiency
the load to decrease as the current
increases. This period of secondary
b Copper magnet wire of the highest
b Optional field mounted 2-pole
voltage instability, resulting from quality assures efficient operation primary Class CC fuse block is
increased current, can be of such available
b Factory mounted type “K” fuse
magnitude that the transformer is clips are standard on all secondary
unable to supply sufficient voltage to transformers where possible
energize the load. The transformer
must therefore be designed and
b Two jumper links are standard with
all transformers which can be wired
constructed to accommodate the high for dual primary voltages
inrush current, while maintaining
secondary voltage stability. According b cUL Listed and CSA certified
to NEMA standards, the secondary
voltage would typically be
at 85% of the rated voltage.

Industrial Control Power Transformers • Revised •
Class MTG 09/10/15
General
The international fuse block kits have inherent touch
safe terminals and fuse clips.
Siemens Meets International Standards
CSA (Canadian Standards Association) was utilized as a
Competent Body in reviewing, interpreting and properly
complying with the requirements of IEC-742 to place a CE
mark on its MTG Series product. As a National Certification
Body, CSA also has the proper documentation and reports

2016 Industrial Controls Catalog Nov 2015 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2016 Industrial Controls Catalog Nov 2015 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2016 Industrial Controls Catalog Nov 2015 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Index

Soft Starters – 3WR30, 3RW40 Soft Starters

3RM1 SIRIUS Hybrid Motor Starters from 0.5 to 3 HP

3RW44 Soft Starters with PROFINET Communication 7/25

3SE5 Compact Design Metal Limit Switches 13/45 to 13/46

LOGO! Logic Module 24C 15/3

HQJ2 65KAIC at 240V and 100KAIC at 208/120V Breakers

Type 3R Window Switches

Things you should know about the 2014 Industrial Catalog

Packaging sizes (PS) The packaging size defines the number of

Solder pin connections

Ring terminal lug connections

Types of coordination Type of coordination "1" ToC

Type of coordination "2" ToC

Distinguishing between units Complete units

Support function Configurator available in the Industry Mall

Siemens Industry, Inc. 0/1

3RV10 / 20 MSPs can be used in a variety of applications:

Section 2 IEC Contactors

3RT*0 – 3 Pole Standard

Section 3 IEC Overload Relays

 RU11 / 21 – Thermal OLR’s, up to 100 A, are ambient compensated bimetallic

0/2 Siemens Industry, Inc.

The SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starters provide the functionality of an MSP,

3RA11 / 21 – Non-Reversing Combination Starters

Fast Bus Power Distribution System Section 5

FB – Installation kits for quick ordering & installation

Hybrid Motor Starters Section 6

3RM10 – Non-reversing starters

Siemens Industry, Inc. 0/3

Section 8 Solid State Switching Devices

3RF20 – 1-Phase Relays in a 45mm wide “hockey-puck” design

Section 9 General Purpose Control

Manual Starters & Switches

0/4 Siemens Industry, Inc.

Function Relays Section 11

3RN – Thermistor Motor Protection

Terminal Blocks Section 12

8WA1 / 8WH1 – Terminals with Screw Connection

Siemens Industry, Inc. 0/5

3SB38 – Two-Hand Control Stations

Section 14 AS-Interface & IO-Link Systems

IO-Link is an open communication standard based on point-to-point connection between

Section 15 Programmable Relays & Power Supplies

SCALENCE Managed and Unmanaged Industrial Ethernet Switches with up to eight

6ED1 – LOGO! Programmable Relays

0/6 Siemens Industry, Inc.

Siemens UL 1077 Supplementary Protectors are designed to provide additional protection

5SJ4 – Miniature Circuit Breakers up to 480Y / 277 VAC, 63A

Circuit Breakers Section 17

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Insulated Case and Power Circuit Breakers

Siemens Industry, Inc. 0/7

A Combinations, safety . . . . . see Safety combinations hazardous location - Ø 30 mm. . . . . . . . . 10/139

0/8 Siemens Industry, Inc.

Siemens Industry, Inc. 0/9

0/10 Siemens Industry, Inc.

Siemens Industry, Inc. 0/11

Class/Type Page Class/Type Page Class/Type Page Class/Type Page

RU11 / 21 – Thermal OLR’s, up to 100 A, are ambient compensated bimetallic